lilBM^AB^ 


Ol'    THi: 


tntiucrsily   of   4aHfaititi(f. 


^^o 

Division 

Range 

Shelf 
Received 


yjAi/ 


V' 


.i.Md 

f~ 


/ 


' 


t 


Jubrtliis'  Series  of  Jdiit  Srjjool  ^ooks. 

PUBLISHED  BY  CROCKER  AND  BREWSTER, 

51  WASUINGTON  STREET,  BOSTON. 

_  THE  LATIN  SCHOOL  BOOKS  prepared  by  Prof.  E.  A.  Andrews,  exclu. 
sive  of  his  Latin-English  Lexicon,  founded  on  the  Latin-Gennau  Lexicon  of 
Dr.  Freund,  constitute  two  distinct  series,  adapted  to  diflereut  and  distmct  pur- 
poses. The  basis  of  tlie  First  Series  is  Andrews'  First  Latin  Book;  of  th« 
Second,  Andrews  and  Stoddard's  l^atiu  Grammar. 

FIRST   SERIES. 

This  Series  is  designed  expressly  for  those  who  commence  the  study  of  Latin 
tt  a  very  early  age,  and  for  such  as  intend  to  pursue  it  to  a  limited  ex'tent  only, 
or  raoreiy  as  subsiiiiary  to  the  acquisition  of  a  good  English  education.  It  con- 
sists of  the  following  works,  viz. : — 

1.  Andrews'  First  Latin  Book:  or  Progressive  Les- 
ions in  Reading  and  Writing  Latin.  This  small  volume  contains  most  of  the 
leading  princi[)les  and  grammatical  forms  of  the  Latin  language,  and,  by  the 
logicitl  precision  of  its  rules  and  definitions,  is  admirably  fitted  to  serve  iis  an 
iidroductibn  to  the  studv  of  general  grammar.  The  work  is  divided  into  les- 
sons of  convenient  lengtli,  which  are  so  an-auged  that  the  student  will,  in  all 
cases,  be  prepared  to  enter  upon  the  study  of  each  successive  lesson,  by  pos- 
sessing a  thorough  knowledge  of  those  which  preceded  it.  The  lessons  gen- 
erally consist  of  three  parts: — 1st.  The  statement  of  important  principles  in 
tlie  form  of  rules  or  definitions,  or  tlie  exhibition  of  orthograuhical  or  etymo- 
logical Ibrms;  2d.  Exorcises,  designed  to  illustrate  such  principles  or  forms; 
and  3d.  Questions,  intended  to  assist  the  student  in  preparing  his  lesson.  In 
addition  to  the  grammatical  lessons  contained  in  this  volume,  a  few  pages 

.jf  Reading  Lessons  are  annexed,  and  these  are  followed  by  a  Dictionarj'  co'in- 
prising  all  the  Latin  words  contained  in  the  work.  This  book  is  adapted  to 
tlie  use  of  all  schools  above  the  grade  of  primary  schools,  including  also  Acad- 
emies and  Female  Seminaries.  It  is  prepared  in  such  a  manner  that  it  can  be 
used  with  little  difficulty  by  any  mtelUgent  parent  or  teacher,  with  no  previous 
knowledge  of  the  language. 

2.  The  Latin  Reader,  with  a  Dlctlonarj  and  Notes, 
containing  explanations  of  ditficult  idioms,  and  numerous  references  to  the 
i.essons  contained  in  the  First  Latin  Book. 

3.  The  Viri  Romge,  with  a  Dictionary  and  Notes,  re- 
ferring, like  those  of  the  Reader,  to  the  First  Latin  Book.  This  series  of  three 
small  volumes,  if  faithfully  studied  according  to  the  directions  contained  in  them, 
will  not  only  render  the  student  a  very  tolerable  proficient  in  the  principles  of 
the  Latin  language  and  in  the  knowledge  of  its  roots,  from  which  so  many  words 
of  his  English  language  are  derived,  but  will  constitute  the  best  preparation  for 
n  thorough  study  of  the  English  gi-ammar. 

SECOND   SERIES. 

Note.— The  "  liatin  Reader  "  and  the  "  Tiri  Romas,"  in  this  series,  art  the  same  as  In 
tlie  first  series. 

This  Series  is  designed  more  especially  for  those  who  are  intending  to  become 
th;iroughly  acquainted  with  the  Latin  lanraage,  and  with  the  principal  classical 
authors  ot  that  language.     It  consists  of  the  following  works: — 

1.     Latin  Lessons.    Tliis  small  volume  is  designed  for  the 

younger  classes  of  Latin  students,  who  intend  ultimately  to  take  up  the  larger 
Grammar,  but  to  whom  that  work  would,  at  first,  appear  too  formidable,  "it 
contains  the  prominent  principles  of  Latin  grammar,  expressed  in  the  same 
language  as  in  the  larger  Grannriar,  and  likewise  Reading  and  Writing  Lessons, 
wit*)  a  DioVonary  of  the  Latin  words  aoid  phrases  occurrb.g  in  the  Lesson*. 
1 


NEW  SERIES  OF  LATIN  SCHOOL  BOOKS. 

2.  Latin  Grammar.  Revised,  with  Corrections  and  Ad- 
ditions. A  (irammar  of  the  Latin  Language,  for  the  use  of  Schools  and  Col- 
leges. By  Professors  E.  A.  Andrews  ancfS.  Stoddard.  This  work,  which 
for  many  years  has  been  the  text-book  in  the  department  of  Latin  Grammar, 
claims  the  merit  of  having  first  inti-oduced  into  the  schools  of  this  country  the 
subject  of  grammatical  analysis,  which  now  occupies,  a  conspicuous  place  in 
so  many  grammars  of  the  English  language.  More  than  twenty  years  have 
elapsed  since  the  first  publication  of  this  Grammar,  and  it  is  hardly  necessary 
to  sav  that  its  merits — placing  it  in  a  practical  view,  preeminently  above  every 
other  Latin  Grammar— have  been  so  tully  appreciatetl  that  it  has  been  adopted 
RS  a  Toxt  Book  in  nearly  eveiy  College  and  Seminary  in  the  country.  The 
present  edition  has  not  only  been  thorougliUj  revised  and  corrtcied  {two  years  of 
conlinuuus  labor  havinfj  been  devoted  to  its  careful  revision  and  to  the  purjx'se  of 
rendering  it  eonformable  in  all  resjiects  to  the  advanced  -position  ickich  it  aims  to 
■KciJjiy,)'hut  it  contains  at  least  one  third  more  matter  than  the  previous  editions. 
To  unite  the  acknowledged  excellencies  of  the  older  English  manuals,  and  of 
the  more  recent  German  grammars,  was  the  special  aim  of  the  authors  of  this 
work;  and  to  this  end  particular  attention  was  directed: — 1st.  To  the  preparci- 
tion  of  more  extended  rules  for  the  pronunciation  of  the  language  ;  2d.  To  a  clear 
exposition  cf  its  inflectional  changes ;  3d.  To  a  proper  basts  of  its  syntax;  and 
4th.    To  greater  precision  in  rides  and  definitions. 

3.  Questions  on  the  Grammar.  This  little  volume  is 

intended  to  aid  the  student  in  preparmg  his  lessons,  and  the  teacher  in  con- 
ducting his  recitations. 

4.  A  Synopsis  of  Latin  Grammar,  comprising  the 

Latin  Paradigms,  and  the  Principal  Rules  of  Latui  Etymology  and  Syntax. 
The  few  pages  composing  this  work  contain  those  portions  of  the  Grammar  to 
which  the  student  has  occasion  to  refer  most  frequently  in  the  preparation  of 
his  daily  lessons. 

5.  Latin  Eeacler.  The  Reader,  by  means  of  two  separate 
and  distinct  sets  of  notes,  is  equally  adapted  for  use  in  connection  either  with 
the  First  Latin  Book  or  the  Latin  Grammar. 

6.  Viri  Romae.  'i'^is  volume,  like  the  Reader,  is  furnish- 
ed with  notes  and  references,  both  to  the  First  Latin  Book  and  to  the  Latin 
Grammar.  The  principal  difterence  in  the  two  sets  of  notes  found  m  each  of 
these  volumes  consists  in  the  somewhat  greater  fulness  of  those  which  belong 
to  the  smaller  series. 

7.  Latin  Exercises.  Tliis  work  contains  exercises  in 
e^ery  department  of  the  Latin  Grammar,  and  is  so  an-anged  that  it  may  be 
studied  in  connection  with  the  Grammar  through  every  stage  of  the  prepara- 
tory course.  It  is  designed  to  prepare  the  way  for  original  composition  in  the 
Latin  language,  both  in  prose  and  verse. 

8.  A  Key  to  Latin  Exercises.    This  Key,  in  which 

all  the  exercises  in  the  preceding  volume  are  fuUy  con-ected,  is  intended  f  jr 
the  use  of  teachers  only. 

9.  CsBsar's  Commentaries  on  the  Gallic  War,  with  a 

Dictionary  and  Notes.  The  text  of  this  edition  of  Ccesar  has  been  formed  hj 
reference  "to  the  best  German  editions.  The  Notes  are  principally  gi-ammatical. 
The  Dictionary,  which,  like  all  the  others  in  the  series,  was  prepared  with  great 
labor,  contains  the  usual  significations  of  the  words,  together  with  an  explana- 
rion  of  aU  such  phrases  as  might  otherwise  perplex  the  student. 

10.  Sallust.     Sallust's  Jugurthine   War  and   Conspiracy 

of  Cataline,  with  a  Dictionary  and  Notes.  The  text  of  this  work,  which  was 
based  upon  that  of  Cortius,  lias  been  modified  by  reference  to  the  best  modern 
«diti(>ns,  especially  by  those  of  Kritz  and  Geria«h;  and  its  orthography  is,  in 

2 


NEW  SERIES  OF  LATIN  SCHOOL  BOOKS. 


penernl,  conformetl  to  tliat  of  Pettier  and  Planche.  The  Dictionaries  of  Cjesar 
and  Sallust  connected  with  this  series  are  original  works,  and,  in  connection 
witli  tiie  Notes  in  each  volume,  fnrnish  a  verj- complete  and  satisfactory  appa- 
ratus for  the  stu  ly  of  these  two  authors. 

11.  Ovid.  Selections  Irom  the  Metamorphoses  and  Heroidea 
of  Ovid,  with  Notes,  Grammatical  References,  and  Exercises  in  Scanning. 
These  selections  from  Ovid  are  designed  as  an  introduction  to  Latin  poetry. 
They  are  accompanied  with  numerous  brief  notes  explanatory  of  difficult 
phrases,  of  obscure  historical  or  mythological  allusions,  and  especially  of  gi-am- 
matical  difficulties.  To  these  are  added'such  Exeicises  in  Scanning  as^seiTe 
fully  to  introduce  the  student  to  a  knowledge  of  Latin  prosody,  and  'especially 
ci'the  structure  and  laws  of  hexameter  and  pentameter  verse' 

12.  Virgil.     The  Eclogues  and  Geor.sics  of  Viriril,  with 

Nnres  and  a  Metrical  Key.  The  text  of  this  edition  is,  in  general,  that  of  Ifcyne  as  re- 
t^ised  by  Wagner.  Particular  attention  has  been  given  to  tiie  orthography  ;"uid  pune- 
liintion.  The  orthography  has  been  made  to  conform  to  the  (Standard  of  prevalent 
us;;>r«,  Ji.'icarding  the  forms  is  for  es,  in  the  terminations  of  some  accusatives  plural, 
r I.I.I  for  ijiiii!/t.  and  the  like,  as  they  tend  to  embarrass  the  learner,  while  they  give  but 
a  vcrv  imperfect  idea  of  the  peculiarities  of  the  author's  orthography,  as  will  be  set-ii  by 
examination  of  the  Ortkos:raj.liia  VtrifiUcaia,  at  the  end  of  this  edition.  The  notes  are 
very  numerous,  and  in  their  preparation  the  editor  has  drawn  freely  from  the  best  com- 
mentaries on  Virgil,  both  German  and  English,  including  tiio.^eofHeyne,  Wagner,  For- 
big'T,  Ladewig,  Marty n,  Keightley,  Bryee,  Coningtou  and  others.  The  notes  contain 
many  references  to  the  Grammar,  which  will  be  found  useful. 

In  announcing  the  Revised  Edition  of  Andrew.?  and  Stoddakd's  Latin 
Gkammak,  the  Publishers  believe  it  to  bo  quite  unnecess.iry  to  speak  of  the 
merits  of  the  work  The  fact  that  in  the  space  of  about  Twenty  Years,  Sixty- 
Five  Editions,  numbering  above   Two  Hundred  Thousand  Copies, 

have  been  required  for  the  pui-pose  of  meeting  the  steadily  increasing  demand 
for  the  work,  sufficiently  evinces  the  estimalion  in  which  it  has  been  held. 
In  preparing  this  Revised  and  Enlarged  Edition,  every  portion  of  the  origiir.il 
work  has  been  reconsidered  in  the  light  of  the  experience  of  twenty  years 
spent  by  the  present  editor  in  studies  connected  with  this  department  of"  edu- 
cation, and  with  the  aid  of  numerous  publications  in  the  same  department, 
■which,  during  this  period,  have  issued  from  the  European  press.  The  results 
of  this  labor  are  apparent  on  ahuost  every  page,  in  new  modifications  of  the" 
old  materials,  and  espeaially  in  such  additional  information  iu  regard  to  its 
▼arious  topics  as  the  present  advanced  state  of  classical  education  in  this 
country  seemed  obviously  to  demand.  The  publishers  commend  this  new 
edition  to  the  attention  of  Teachers  throughout  the  countiy,  and  express  the 
hope  that  iu  its  present  form  it  will  be  deemed  worthy  of  a  continuance  of  the 
favor  which  it  has  so  long  received. 

The  following  are  exti-acts  from  a  few  of  the  many  letters  the  Publishers 
nave  received  from  teachers  from  all  parts  of  the  countiy  in  commendation 
»f  this  work : — 

The  revised  edition  of  Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar  is  without  doubt  the 
best  published  iu  America.  I  have  no  doubt  that  the  time  is  near  at  hand  when  thi-. 
series  of  worlis  wiH,  by  all  lovers  of  the  classics,  be  con.sidered  as  the  -National  Series.' 
The  pronunciation  is  now  by  the  same  class  considered  the  American  .Standard.  I  will 
nail  with  joy  the  day  when  every  college  and  school  in  our  country  shall  have  adopted 
Prof.  Andrews'  series  as  the  foundation  of  true  classic  knowledge.  As  such  I  cousidf^r 
It,  and  for  that  reason  have  I  used  it  since  I  first  knew  its  existence. — Martin  Armstron.g, 
Potomac  Seminary,  Romney,  Va. 

Allow  me  to  say,  after  a  careful  examination,  that,  in  my  judgment,  it  is  the  beat 
manual  of  Latin  Grammar  to  be  found  in  the  English  language.  In  revising  it  the 
iuthor  has  pre.=erved  the  happy  medium  between  s.aying  too  much  and  too  little,  so  de- 
sirable for  ,a  Latin  text-book  for  this  country.  In  philo.^ophical  arrangement,  simplicity 
of  expression,  and  for  brevity  and  fulness,  it  must  entitle  the  author  to  the  first  rank 
m  American  classical  scholarship.  I  shall  use  it  in  my  classes,  and  recommend  it  to  all 
teachera  of  Latin  in  this  country  — iV.  E.  Cohleig/i,  Professor  of  Ancient  Languag-es  and 
Uteratttre,  in  Lawrence  Universiiy,  Appleton,  Wis. 

3 


NEW   SERIES   OF   LATIN   SCHOOL   BOOKS, 


I  have  reason  to  believe  that  the  iniprovemcnts,  mtroduced  into  the  last  edition  ot 
Andrews  and  Stoil'lard's  l^atin  Grammar  by  ray  respected  and  lamented  friend  Dr.  An- 
drews, a  little  before  his  lUuth,  add  very  decidedly  to  the  valne  of  a  work,  which  has 
done  more  to  give  the  kuo\vledge  of  that  language  to  the  youth  of  this  country  than  any, 
perhaps  thau  all  others.— Theodore  W.  Woolsey,  President  of  Yale  College^  New  Haven. 
No  bool;.  probably,  has  done  more  to  improve  classical  training  in  American  schooll 
than  Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar.  Its  use  Is  almost  universal ;  and  where  it 
has  not  itself  been  adopted  asamantial,  it  has  made  grammars  of  similar  excellence 
necesAirv.  The  last  edition,  the  sixty-fifth,  was  carefully  revised  by  the  lamented  Dr. 
Andrews,  not  long  before  his  death,  by  whom  it  was  greatly  enlarged  by  the  iucorpora- 
tioQ  of  much  valuable  information,  derived  mainly  from  the  last  edition  of  the  Latia 
Grammar  of  Profe.ssor  Zumpt.  It  will  therefore  be  found  to  be  much  improved  as  a  re- 
pository of  the  principles  and  facts  of  the  Latin  language.— rAomoi  A.  T/uicher,  Profes 
SOT  of  Latin  ill  Yale  ColUge,  New  Haven. 

It  is  unnecessary  to  commend  a  Latin  Grammar,  which  has  been  for  twenty  years  in 
common  use  in  o"ur  Colleges,  and  has  generally  superseded  all  others.  The  Revised 
Kditioa  contains  the  results  of  the  labors  of  Dr.  Andrews,  during  all  that  time,  on  var 
rious  Latin  Classics,  and  on  his  great  Latin  Lexicon;  and  cannot,  therefore,  but  be 
greatly  improved.— E'/iCarr/  Robinson,  D.  Z>.,  LL.  D.,  Prof,  of  Biblical  Literature  in 
Union   Tiuol.  Seimnary^  New  York  City. 

I  regard  Andrews'  and  Stoddard's  new  Latin  Grammar,  as  an  exceedingly  valuable 
work.  It  evidently  contains  the  results  of  the  Author's  cartful  and  long  continued  in- 
vestio-ation,  and  from  itz  fulness,  clearness,  and  accuracy,  will  undoubtedly  become  tlie 
Standard  Latin  Grammar  of  this  Continent.  In  ^W'stern  New  York,  we  have  for  a  long 
time  been  using  the  earlier  editions,  and  they  have  rapidly  won  upon  the  pubUc  regard. 
This  new  edition  will  give  it  a  stronger  claim  upon  our  favor.  It  must  rapidly  super- 
sede all  others.  I  can  "unhesitatingly  recommend  the  New  Grammar  as  the  best  in  use.— 
Lewis  H.  Clark,  Principal  if  Sodas' Academy,  Wayne  Co.,  N.  Y. 

I  have  looked  over  the  new  edition  of  the  Grammar  with  great  interest.  It  is  now 
eighteen  years  since  I  introduced  it  into  this  college,  and  I  have  never  felt  inclined  to 
chanc-e  it"for  any  other.  The  revision,  without  changing  its  general  character,  has  added 
greatly  to  its  fulness  and  completeness.  It  is  now  fully  equal  to  Zumpt's  in  these  re- 
spects, and  far  superior  to  it  in  adaptation  to  the  class  room.  There  is  no  other  school 
grammar  that  can  pretend  to  compare  with  it.  I  have  introduced  the  new  edition  here 
and  have  no  idea  I  shall  ever  wish  to  substitute  another.  The  services  of  Prof.  .Andrews 
iu  the  cause  of  classical  learning  in  the  United  States  cannot  be  over  estimated.— ill.  Stur- 
giis,  Professor  in  Hanover  College,  Indiana. 

I  am  willing  to  say  that  I  am  decidedly  in  favor  of  Andrews'  Latin  Series.— Geo.  Gao.. 
Galesville  University,  Wisconsin. 

Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar  I  consider  decidedly  the  best  Latin  GrammaT 
ever  published. — Ransom  Norton,  North  Livermore,  Maine, 

Such  a  work  as  Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Revised  Latin  Grammar  needs  no  recommend- 
ation, it  speaks  for  itself.—^.  A.  Keen,  Professor  of  Greek  and  Latin,  Tufts  College, 
Med  ford,  Ms. 

I  have  examined  the  revised  edition  of  Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar,  and 
think  it  a  complete  success.  I  see  it  has  all  of  Zumpt's  merits  and  none  of  his  defects, 
and  welcome  its  advent  with  great  pleasure.— Ja»j«5  M.  Whiton,  Hopkins  Grammar 
School,  New  Haven,  Conn. 

I  have  examined  Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar,  and  say.  without  hesita- 
tion that  the  principles  of  the  Latin  language  can  be  more  easily  and  systematically 
acquired  from  it  than  anv  work  I  have  ever  seen.  The  arrangement  and  simplicity  ot  its 
terms  are  such  as  to  make  it  easily  comprehended  by  the  beginner,  whUe,  at  the  same 
time,  its  copiousness  is  sufficient  for  the  most  advanced  student.  The  author  has  evi- 
dently noted  and  profited  by  the  defects  in  this  respect  of  most  of  the  Latin  Grammai-a 
now  in  use. —  C.  W.  Field,  Mauch  Chunk.  Pa. 

The  superior  merits  of  the  original  work  are  too  well  known  and  appreciated  to  need 
any  commendation  from  me.  I  have  had  some  means  of  knowing  how  great  pains  ami 
labor  Dr.  Andrews  has  bestowed  upon  this  final  revision  and  improvement  of  the  work, 
end  thenifore,  was  not  unprepared  to  find  its  acknowledged  excellence  materially  in- 
creased and  I  do  not  hesitate  to  say,  that  its  value  has  been  greatly  enhanced,  and  that 
it  has  beenbrought  as  near  as  practicable  to  the  present  state  of  phUological  science.— 
John  D.  Pliilbrick,  Superintendent  of  Public  Schools,  city  of  Boston. 

I  have  looked  the  Grammar  through  with  much  care  and  a  great  degree  of  satisfaction, 
»nd  I  unhesitatingly  pronounce  it  superior  to  any  Latin  Grammar  in  method  and  man- 
ner  :>f  discu.ssion,  and  happily  adapted  to  the  wants  of  both  teachers  and  pupils.— J.  W. 
SJmjtrfs,  Principal  of  New  England  Christian  Institute,  Andover,  N.  H. 

4 


NEW   SERIES    OF    LATIN    SCHOOL    BOCKS. 

We  have  lately  introduced  tlie  Revised  Edition,  and  regard  it  asa  srreat  improTenieiiJ 
npon  former  editions.  We  shall  use  it  exolusively  in  future. — E.  Flint,  Jr.,  Pitiici]iai 
oj" Lee  High  School. 

After  a  due  examination,  I  am  happy  to  state  that  the  Author  has  admirably  accom- 
pUshed  the  objects  which  he  aimed  at  in  making  this  last  revision.  He  has  added  much 
that  is  in  the  highest  dejjree  valuable  without  materially  changing  the  arrangement  of 
the  original  work.  The  work  appears  to  me  well  adapted  to  the  daily  use  of  our  CUissi- 
cal  Schools,  and  I  shall  b  sreafter  direct  my  classes  to  use  it. —  C.  L.  Cushman,  Principal 
of  Peabody  High  School,  South  Danvers,  Ms. 

The  Revised  Grammar  seems  to  me  greatly  improved  and  to  be  every  thing  a  scholar 
eould  wish. — Z.  B.  Stiirgi,<<,  Charlestoivn,  Indiana. 

I  have  subjected  the  Revised  Edition  to  the  test  of  actual  use  in  the  recitation  room, 
and  am  persuaded  that  in  its  present  form  it  decidedly  surpasses  every  other  Latin  Gram- 
mar in  point  of  adaptation  to  the  w.ants  of  students  in  our  Academies,  High  Schools 
»nd  Colleges. — William  S.  Palmer.^  Central  High  School,  Cleaveland,  Ohio. 

I  think  Andrews'  Series  of  Latin  Works  the  most  systematic  and  best  arranged  course  I 
flave  ever  seen, — and  believe  If  our  pupils  would  use  them  altogether,  we  should  find 
them  much  better  scholars.  I  shall  use  them  wholly  in  my  school. — A.  C.  Stotkin, 
Piincipal  of  Monynouth  Aeademij,  Maine. 

The  examination  of  the  Revised  Edition  has  afforded  me  very  great  pleasure,  and  leads 
me  to  express  the  deep  and  sincere  conviction  that  it  is  the  most  complete  Grammar  of 
the  Latin  language  with  which  I  am  acquainted,  and  best  adapted  for  ready  consultation 
upon  any  subject  connected  with  the  study  of  Latin  Authors.  The  paper,  the  typography, 
aud  the  binding. — the  whole  style  of  publication — are  such  as  to  commend  the  good  taste 
and  judgment  of  the  Publishers. — J.  R.  Boyd,  Principal  of  Mnpleivood  Young  ladies 
Institute,  Pittsjield,  Mass. 

I  find  the  Revised  Edition  to  be  just  what  is  needed  for  a  Latin  Grammar, — clear,  com- 
prehensive, yet  concise,  in  the  subject  matter.  I  shall  introduce  it  as  a  permauent  text- 
book.— B.  F.  Dakt.  Principal  of  Clyde  High  School,  Wayne  Co.,  N.  Y. 

I  have  carefully  examined  your  Revised  Edition  throughout,  particularly  the  Correc- 
tions and  Additions.  It  now  appears  to  me  all  that  can  be  desired.  It  seems  like  part- 
ing with  a  familiar  friend  to  lay  aside  the  old  edition,  with  its  many  excellencies,  and 
adopt  the  neiv.  but  I  shall  cheerfully  make  the  sacrifice  for  the  greater  benefit  that  will 
accrue  to  those  commencing  the  study  of  Latin  from  time  to  time. — J.  H.  Graham,  Prin- 
cipal of  North  field  Institution,  Vermont. 

I  thought  before  that  the  old  edition  was  entitled  to  the  appellation  of  "  The  Latin 
Grammar,"  but  I  perceive  its  value  has  been  much  inerea.sed  by  the  numerous  emenda- 
tions and  additions  of  Prof.  Andrews.  The  Grammar  is  now  fitted  to  be  a  complete 
hand-book  for  the  Latin  scholar  during  his  whole  course. — E.  W.  Johnson,  Canton  Acad- 
emy, Canton,  N.  Y. 

I  unhesitatingly  pronounce  the  Revised  Edition  of  Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Latin 
Grammar  the  best  Grammar  of  the  Latin  Language,  and  shall  certainly  use  my  influence 
in  its  behalf.— K.  E.  J.  Clute,  Edinboro\  Pa. 

After  a  thorough  examination,  I  have  no  hesitation  in  pronouncing  it  the  best  Latin 
Grammar  for  the  purpo.ses  of  the  recitation  room  that  I  have  ever  examined.  In  its 
present  form  it  ought  certainly  to  displace  a  large  majority  of  the  Grammars  in  common 
use.  Its  rules  of  Syntax  are  expressed  with  accuracy  and  precision,  and  are  in  fact, 
what  all  rules  ought  to  be,  reliable  guides  to  the  learner — Jam,es  W.  Andrews,  Principal 
of  Hopewell  Academy,  Penn- 

Andrews  and  Stoddard'.?  Latin  Grammar,  in  the  arrangement  and  adaptation  to  the 
learner,  has  excelled  all  others,  and  the  revised  edition  i.s  certainly  a  great  improvement, 
and  I  do  believe  is  better  adapted  to  the  wants  of  the  student  than  any  other.  TK^ 
whole  seems  to  be  critically  revised  and  corrected.  Prof.  Andrews  was  truly  the  stu- 
dent's benefactor. — M.  L.  Severance,  North  Troy,  Vermont. 

It  gives  me  great  pleasure  to  bear  my  testimony  to  the  superior  merits  of  the  Latin 
Grimmar  edited  by  Professor  Andrews  and  Mr.  Stoddard.  I  express  most  cliperfully, 
unhesitatingly,  and  decidedly,  my  preference  of  this  Grammar  to  that  of  Adam,  which 
has,  for  so  long  a  time,  kept  almost  undisputed  sway  in  our  schools. — Dr.  C.  Beck,  Cam- 
bridge. 

I  know  of  no  Grammar  published  in  this  country,  which  promises  to  answer  so  well 
the  purposes  of  elementary  classical  instruction,  and  .shall  he  glad  to  see  it  introduced 
Into  our  best  schools. —  Charles  K.  Dillaway,  Boston. 

Tour  new  Intin  Grammar  appears  to  me  much  better  suited  to  the  use  of  student! 
than  any  -ther  grammar  I  am  acquainted  with. — Prof.  Wm.  M  Hallani,  Hartford,  Ct. 

ft 


NEW   SERIES   OF   LATIN   SCHOOL   BOOKS. 


I  have  adopted  the  Latin  flrammar  of  Andrews  and  Stoddard  in  the  school  under  my 
charge,  believing  it  better  adapted,  upon  the  whole;  for  elementary  instruction  ttian  any 
similar  work  which  I  have  examined.  It  combines  the  improvements  of  the  recunt  Ger- 
man works  on  the  subject  with  the  best  features  of  that  old  favorite  of  the  schools.  Dr. 
Adam's  Latin  Grammar. — Henry  Drisler.  Professor  of  Latin  in  Columbia  College. 

A  careful  review  of  the  Revised  Edition  of  Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar, 
Bhows  that  tills  favorite  text-book  still  continues  to  deserve  the  affections  and  confidence 
of  Teachers  and  Pupils,  incorporating  as  it  does  the  results  of  Prof.  Andrews'  own  con- 
stant study  for  many  years  with  the  investigations  of  English  and  German  Philologists. 
No  other  Grammar  is  now  so  well  fitted  to  meet  the  wants  of  the  country  as  the  rapid 
demand  for  it  will  show  beyond  doubt. — A.  S.  Hartwell,  University  of  St.  Louis. 

This  Grammar  of  the  Latin  Language,  now  universally  pronounced  the  very  best,  is 
greatl;^  improved  by  the  corrections,  revisions  and  additions  of  this  revised  edition.  We 
do  not  believe  a  text-book  was  ever  written  which  introduced  so  great  an  improvement 
In  the  method  of  teaching  Latin,  as  this  has  done.  We  wish  the  revised  edition  the 
greatest  success,  which  we  are  sure  it  merits. — Rhode  Island  Sclioolmastcr. 

I  have  examined  your  revised  edition  with  considerable  care,  and  do  not  hesitate  to 
pronounce  it  a  great  improvement  upon  the  old  editions,  and  as  near  perfection  as  we 
are  likely  to  have.  I  have  no  doubt  it  will  come  into  general  use. — A.  Williams,  Professoi 
of  Latin,  Jefferson  College,  Canonsbv.rg,  Pa. 

I  have  been  much  interested  in  the  Revised  Edition.  The  improvement  is  very  striking, 
and  I  shall  no  longer  think  of  giving  it  up  and  putting  Zumpt  in  its  place.  I  am  much 
pleased  with  the  great  improvement  in  the  typography.  You  have  given  to  our  schools  a 
book  fifty  per  cent  better  in  every  I'espect,  and  I  trust  you  will  have  your  reward  in 
largely  increased  saXes.—  Williain  J.  Fiolfe,  Master  of  Oliver  Higli  School,  Lawrence,  Ms. 

I  can  with  much  pleasure  say  that  your  Grammar  seems  to  me  much  better  adapted 
to  the  present  condition  and  wants  of  our  schools  than  anyone  with  which  I  am  ac- 
quainted, and  to  supply  that  which  has  long  been  wanted — a  good  Latin  Grammar  for 
common  use. — F.  Gardner,  Principal  of  Boston  Latin  School. 

The  Latin  Grammar  of  Andrews  and  Stoddard  is  deserving,  in  my  opinion,  of  the  ap- 
probation wiiioh  so  many  of  our  ablest  teachers  have  bestowed  upon  it.  It  is  believed 
that,  of  all  the  grammars  before  the  public,  this  has  greatly  the  advantage,  in  regard 
both  to  the  excellence  of  its  arrangement,  and  the  accuracy  and  copiousness  of  its  infor- 
mation.— H.  B.  Hackett,  Prof,  of  Biblical  Literature  in  Newton  Theological  Seminary. 

The  universal  favor  with  which  this  Grammar  is  received  was  not  unexpected.  It  will 
bear  a  thorough  and  tliscriminating  examination.  In  the  use  of  well-defined  and  ex- 
pressive terms,  especially  in  the  syntax,  we  know  of  no  Latin  or  Greek  grammar  which 
is  to  be  compared  to  this. — American  Quarterly  Register. 

These  works  will  furnish  a  series  of  elementary  publications  for  the  study  of  Latin 
altogether  in  advance  of  any  thing  which  has  hitherto  appeared,  either  in  tliis  country 
or  in  England. — A?nerican  Biblical  Repository. 

I  cheerfully  and  decidedly  bear  testimony  to  the  superior  excellence  of  Andrews  and 
Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar  to  any  manual  of  the  kind  with  which  I  am  acquainted. 
Every  part  bears  the  impress  of  a  careful  compiler.  The  principles  of  syntax  ai-e  happily 
developed  in  the  rules,  whilst  those  relating  to  the  moods  and  tenses  supply  an  important 
deficiency  in  our  former  grammars.  The  rules  of  prosody  are  also  clearly  and  fully  ex- 
hibited.—  Rev.  Lyman  Coleman,  Manchester,  Vt. 

This  work  bears  evident  marks  of  great  care  and  skill,  and'  ripe  and  accurate  scholar- 
ship in  the  authors.  We  cordially  commend  it  to  the  student  and  teacher. — Bihlicat 
Repository. 

Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar  is  what  I  expected  it  would  be — an  excellenS 
book.  We  cannot  hesitate  a  moment  in  laying  aside  the  books  now  in  use,  and  intro- 
ducing thSs.—Rev.  J.  Penney,  D.  D.,  Netv  York. 

Andrew?  and  Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar  bears  throughout  evidence  of  original  and 
thorough  investigation  and  sound  criticism.  It  is,  in  my  apprehension,  so  far  as  sim- 
plicity is  concerned,  on  the  one  hand,  and  philosophical  views  and  sound  scholarship  on 
the  other,  far  preferable  to  other  grammars ;  a  work  at  the  same  time  highly  creditable  to 
its  authors  and  to  our  country. — Professor  A.  Packard,  Bowdoin  College,  Maine. 

I  do  not  hesitate  to  pronounce  Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar  superior  to 
any  other  with  which  I  am  acquainted.  I  have  never  seen,  any  where,  a  greater  amount 
of  Valuable  matter  compressed  within  limits  equally  narrow. — Hon.  John  Hall,  Principai 
of  Ellington  School,  Conn. 

We  have  no  hesitation  in  pronouncing  this  Grammar  decidedly  supsrior  fte  i/aj  noti 
Id  use. — Bat  on  Recorder. 


VALUABLE  CLASSICAL  WORKS. 


^escnius. 


Robinson's  Hebrew  Lexicon.    Sixth  Ediiion,  Revised 

and  Stereotyyjcd.  A  Hebrew  and  English  Lexicon  of  the  Old  Testament,  in- 
chiding  theBiblical  Chaldee.  Translated  from  the  Latin  of  William  Geseiiius, 
late  Professor  of  Theology  in  the  University  of  Halle-Wittemberg.  By  Edward 
RoBLXsoN,  D.  D.,  LL.  I).,  Professor  of  Biblical  Literature  in  the  Union  The- 
ological Seminary,  New  York.  A  new  edition,  with  corrections  and  large  ad- 
ditions, partly  furnished  by  the  author  in  manuscript,  and  partly  condensed 
from  his  larger  Thesaurus,  as  compiled  by  Roediger.  These  corrections  and 
additions  were  made  by  Dr.  Gesenius,  during  an  interval  of  several  vears, 
while  carrying  his  Thesaurus  through  the  press,  and  were  transcribed  ar^J  fur- 
nished by"  him  expressly  for  this  edition.  They  will  be  found  to  be  very 
riumerous.  every  page  having  been  materially  corrected  and  enlarged,  and  a 
large  number  of  articles  having  been  re-written.  It  is  printed  on  a  new  type, 
the  face  and  cut  of  which  is  very  beautiful,  and  has  been  highly  commended 
and  approved. 

Dr.  Robinson  had  already  been  trained  to  the  business  of  lexicographical  labor,  when 
he  began  the  translation  of  the  pi-usent  work.  He  is,  in  au  uncommon  degree,  master 
of  his  own  native  tongue.  Ue  has  diligence,  patience,  perseverance — yea,  the  iron  dili- 
gence of  Gesonius  himself.  For  aught  that  I  have  yet  been  able  to  discover,  all  that  can 
rca.sonalily  bo  expected  or  desired,  has  been  done  by  the  translator;  not  only  as  tn  rcu- 
dering  the  work  into  English,  but  as  to  the  manner  and  the  accuracy  of  printing.  The 
work  will  speak  for  itself,  on  the  first  opening.  It  does  honor,  in  its  appearance,  to  edi- 
tor, printers,  and  publishers.  I  have  only  to  add  my  hearty  wish,  that  its  beautiful 
white  pages  may  be  consulted  and  turned  over,  until  they  become  thoroughly  worn  with 
the  hands  of  the  purchasers. — Frof.  Sliiart,  in  the  Biblical  Repository. 

There  is  no  lexicon  in  English  that  can  be  put  on  a  level  with  Robinson's.  I  recommend 
the  present  as  the  best  Lexicon  of  the  Hebrew  and  Biblical  Chaldee  which  an  Kiiu'li-'^h 
scholar  can  have. — Rev.  Dr.  Satnuel  Davidson,  of  London. 

Gesenius'  Lexicon  is  known  wherever  Hebrew  is  studied.  On  the  merits  of  this  work 
criticism  has  long  ago  pronounced  its  verdict  of  approval. —  London  Jewish  Chronicle. 

This  is  a  very  beaiitiful  and  complete  edition  of  the  best  Hebrew  Lexicon  ever  j'et 
produced.     Gesenius,  as  a  Hebrew  philologist,  is  unequalled. — London  Clerical  Journal. 

This  is  decidedly  the  most  complete  edition  of  Gesenius'  Manual  Hebrew  Lexicon. — 
London  Journal  of  Sacred  Literature. 

Iiobinsoifs  Ifcirmomi  of  %  §mph,  m  feeeli 

A  Harmony  of  the  Four  Gospels,  in  Greek,  accord- 
ing to  the  text  of  Hahn.  Newly  aiTauged,  with  Explanatory  Notes,  by  Edwahd 
RonixsoN.  D.  D.,  LL.  D.,  Professor  of  Biblical  Literature  in  the  Union  The- 
ological Seminary,  New  York.     Revised  Edition. 

This  work  of  Dr.  Robinson  confines  itself  to  the  legitimate  sphere  of  a  Harmony  of  the 
Gospels:  and  we  do  not  hesitate  to  s.ay  that  in  this  sphere  it  will  be  found  to  be  all  that 
a  Harmony  need  or  can  be.  The  original  text  is  printed  with  accuracy  and  elegance. 
It  is  a  feast  to  the  eyes  to  look  upon  a  page  of  so  much  beauty.  Its  arrangement  is  dis- 
tinguished for  simplicity  and  convenience.  No  one  will  ever  be  able  to  comprehend  the 
relations  of  the  Gospels  to  each  other,  or  acquire  an  ex.act  knowledge  of  their  contents, 
unle.ss  he  studies  them  with  the  aid  of  a  Harmony.  The  present  work  furni.?hes  in  this 
respect  just  the  facility  which  is  n,»eded;  and  we  trust  that  among  its  other  effects,  it 
vill  serve  to  direct  attention  more  strongly  to  the  importance  of  this  mode  of  study. — 
Fro/.  Harkett,  0/  Newton  Theological  ISeminary. 


alnur's   §iritl]nutit» 


Arithmetic,  Oral  and  Written,  practi(;ally  applied  by  means 
cf  Suggestive  Questions.  By  Thoma.s  H.  Palmek,  .Author  of  the  Prize 
Essav  mi  Education  entitled  the  "Teacher's  Mamial,"  "The  Moral  Instruc- 
tor,"" «itc. 

7 


VALUAi^LE    CLASSICAL    WORKS. 


Robinson's  |)nrmonn  of  %  Gospels,  in  €nglisl]. 

A  Harmony  of  the  Four  Gospels,  in  English,  accord 

Ing  to  the  common  version ;  newly  arranged,  with  Explanatory  Notes.  Bv 
Edward  Robixson,  D.  D.,  LL.  D. 

The  object  of  this  work  is  to  obtain  a  full  and  consecutive  accoiint  of  all  the 
facts  of  our  Lord's  life  and  ministiy.  In  order  to  do  this,  the  four  gospel  nar- 
ratives have  been  so  brought  together,  as  to  present  as  nearly  as  possible  the 
true  chronological  order,  and  where  the  same  transaction  is  described  by  more 
than  one  writer,  the  different  accounts  are  placed  side  by  side,  so  as  to  fill  out 
and  sui)ply  each  other.  Such  an  an-angement  affords  the  only  full  and  perfect 
survey  of  "nil  the  testimony  relating  to  any  and  every  portion  of  our  Lonl's  lus- 
tiry. '  The  evangelists  are  thus  made  their  own  best  interpreters;  and  it  i.s 
Bhowii  how  wonderfully  they  are  supplementary  to  each  other  in  minute  as 
well  as  in  important  particulars,  and  in  this  way  is  brought  out  fully  and 
clearlv  the  fundamental  characteristics  of  their  testimony,  unity  in  diversity. 
To  Bible  classes.  Sabbath  schools,  and  all  who  love  and  seek  the  truth  in  their 
closets  and  in  their  families,  this  work  will  be  found  a  useful  assistant. 

I  have  used  "  Robinson's  English  Harmony"  in  teaching  a  Bible  Class.  The  result,  in 
my  own  mind,  is  a  conviction  of  the  great  merits  of  this  work,  and  its  adaptation  to  im- 
part the  highest  life  and  interest  to  Bible  Class  exercises,  and  generally  to  the  diligent 
study  ef  the  Gospel.  It  is  much  to  be  desired  that  every  one  accustomed  to  searching 
the  Scriptures  should  have  this  invaluable  aid.— Ref.  Dr.  Skinner,  Neiv  York. 

gobiHSOit's   iitU0nari|  of  tl]t   §ibh. 

Robinson's  Bible  Dictionary.    A  Dictionary  for  the 

use  of  Schools  and  Young  Person^.  By  Edward  Robinson,  D.  D.,  LL.  I). 
Illustrated  with  Engi-avings  on  wood,  and  Maps  of  Canaan,  Judea,  Asia  Minor, 
and  the  Peninsula  of  Mount  Sinai,  Idumea,  etc. 

^Umtiits   cf  gtstronom]!. 

The  Elements  of  Astronomy ;  or  The  World  as  it  is 

and  as  it  Appears.  By  the  author  of  "  Theory  of  Teaching,"  "  Edward's  First 
Lessons  in  Grammar,''  etc.  Revised  m  manuscript  by  GeorM  P.  Bond,  Esq., 
of  the  Cambridge  Obsei-^'atory,  to  whom  the  author  is  also  indebted  for  super- 
intending its  passage  through  the  press. 

St0tt's   lamilg  '§x\iU, 

Scott's    Family    Bible.       Boston     Stereotype    Edition. 

6  vols,  royal  8vo.,  contaiiiinij  all  the  Notes,  Practical  Observations,  Marginal 
References,  and  Critical  Remarks,  as  in  the  most  approved  London  edition, 
with  a  Hue  engraved  likeness  of  the  Author,  Family  Record,  etc. 

This  Edition  is  the  onlv  one  that  has,  or  can  have,  the  benefit  of  the  final 
Additions  and  Eipendations  of  the  Author.  The  extent  of  these  may  l;e 
ViAied  from  the  fiict  that  upwards  of  Four  Hundred  Pages  of  letter-i}ress  were 
added;  and  as  they  consist  chieflv  of  Critical  Remarks,  their  importance  tc 
the  Biblical  student  is  at  once  apparent.  The  Preface  to  the  entire  work  con- 
tains an  elaborate  and  compendious  view  of  the  evidences  that  the  Holy  Scrip- 
tures were  given  bv  inspiration  of  God.  Prefixed  to  each  Book,  bcth  m  the 
Old  and  New  Testament,  is  an  Introduction,  or  statement  of  its  purport  and 
mtont.  There  are  also  copious  Shirginal  References,  with  viirious  lables,  a 
Ohr<  i!i>i  )gici  I  Index,  and  a  copious  Topical  Index. 

'Orders  solicited. 


GRAMMAR 


LATIN  LANGUAGE; 


USE  OF  SCHOOLS  AND  COLLEGES. 


E.    A.    ANDREWS    AND    S.    STODDARD. 


ONE  HUNDREDTH  P:DITI0N. 
REVISED    WITH    CORRECTIONS    AND    ADDITIONS, 

BY  E.   A.   ANDREWS,   LL.  D. 


BOSTON: 

PUBLISHED  BY   CROCKER  AND  BREWSTER. 

New  York:   A.  S.  Barnes  &  Co. 

1  8  G  8. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1867, 

BY  CROCKER  AND  BREWSTER, 

In  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  Massachusetts. 


/Oi.y/ 


PREFACE. 


As  more  thau  twenty  years  have  elapsed,  since  the  first  publication  of  thii 
Grammar,  it  can  scarcely  be  necessary,  in  offering  to  the  public  a  revised 
edition  of  the  work,  to  make  more  than  a  passing  allusion  to  its  original  plan 
or  to  the  circumstances  tc  which  it  owed  its  origin. 

For  some  years  previous  to  the  date  of  its  publication,  the  progress  of  classi- 
cal learning  in  Europe,  and  particularly  In  Germany,  had  been  such,  as  pkiuly 
to  indicate  the  necessity  of  a  corresponding  advance  in  the  manuals  of  Latin 
grammar  employed  in  the  schools  of  this  country.  Their  deficiencies  had 
indeed  become  so  apparent,  that  various  attempts  had  already  been  made  to 
furnish  a  remedy  by  means  of  translations  of  German  grammars ;  but  none  of 
these,  however  excellent  in  many  respects,  had  seemed  to  be  fully  adapted  to 
the  purpose  for  which  they  were  intended. 

To  unite  the  acknowledged  excellencies  of  the  older  English  manuals  and  of 
the  more  recent  German  grammars  was  the  special  aim  of  the  authors  of  this 
work;  and  to  this  end  their  attention  was  directed,  first  to  the  preparation  of 
more  extended  rules  for  the  pronunciation  of  the  language,  secondly  to  a  clearer 
exposition  of  its  inflectional  changes,  thirdly  to  the  proper  basis  of  its  syntax, 
and  fourthly  to  greater  precision  in  its  rules  and  definitions. 

The  system  of  rules  for  the  division  and  accentuation  of  Latm  words,  pre- 
pared in  pursuance  of  the  plan  which  has  just  been  specified,  was  accordingly 
more  copious  than  any  previously  found  in  the  Latin  grammars  in  common 
use  in  this  country.  For  the  purpose  also  of  preventing  the  fonnation  of  erro- 
neous habits  of  pronunciation  in  the  early  part  of  the  student's  course,  the  pe- 
nultimate quantities  of  all  Latin  words  occurring  in  the  Grammar  were  care- 
fully marked,  unless  determinable  by  some  general  rule,  and  the  paradigms 
were  divided  and  accented  in  such  a  mamier  as  to  indicate  their  true  pro- 
nunciation. 

In  their  treatment  of  Latin  etymology,  the  authors  aimed  to  render  its  study 
less  a  mere  exercise  of  memory,  and  in  a  greater  degree  an  efficient  aid  in  the 
general  cultivation  of  the  mental  powers.  The  principal  means  adopted  for  this 
purpose  consisted  in  the  practical  distinction,  every  where  made  in  treating 
inflected  words,  between  the  root,  or  ground-form,  and  the  termination. 


4  PREFACE. 

The  third  promineni  ^lectiliarity  of  the  original  YTorlL  -was  its  direct  derivatloi: 
of  the  rules  of  Syntax  from  the  logical  analysis  of  sentences,  and  its  distinct 
Bpecificatiou  of  the  particular  use  of  each  of  the  several  words  of  which  a  sen- 
tence is  composed.  This  method  of  treating  syntax — a  method  previously  un- 
kno^v^l  in  the  schools  of  this  country — has,  since  that  period,  been  extensively 
adopted,  and  in  some  instances  greatly  extended,  particularly  in  a  portion  of 
the  English  grammars  recently  published  in  this  country,  and  has  probably 
contributed  more  to  the  advancement  of  grammatical  science,  than  any  other 
innovation  of  modern  times. 

The  errors  noticed  in  the  original  work  have  been  corrected,  as  successive 
editions  have  issued  from  the  press,  but  no  opportunity  has  occurred,  until  the 
present,  of  thoroughly  revising  it  in  every  part.  Two  years  of  continuous 
labor  have  now  been  devoted  to  its  revision,  and  to  the  purpose  of  rendering 
it  conformable  in  all  respects  to  the  advanced  position  which  it  originally 
aspired  to  occupy. 

In  aU  the  modifications  which  have  now  been  made,  I  have  aimed  to  accom- 
plish these  two  purposes — to  preserve,  as  far  as  possible,  the  identity  of  the 
work,  and  at  the  same  time  to  bring  it  as  near,  as  should  be  practicable,  to  the 
present  state  of  philological  science.  Hence,  while  I  have  made  no  changes 
either  in  language  or  arrangement,  but  such  as  appeared  to  me  quite  neces- 
sary, I  have  omitted  none  which  logical  accuracy  or  requisite  fulness  of  ex- 
j)lanation  seemed  to  demand.  In  doing  even  this  it  soon  became  evident,  that 
the  changes  and  additions  must  be  more  numerous,  than  would  well  consist 
with  the  convenient  use  of  the  old  and  the  new  editions  in  the  same  classes. 
Though  not  hisensible  of  the  trouble  occasioned  to  the  teacher  by  altera- 
tions in  a  familiar  text-book,  I  could  not  but  suppose,  that  such  modifications 
as  the  progress  of  the  iBst  twenty  years  had  rendered  necessaiy,  would  still  be 
welcomed  by  him,  notwithstanding  the  personal  inconvenience  arising  from 
the  disturbance  of  his  previous  associations.  To  his  pupils,  who  will  liave 
known  no  other  form  of  the  Grammar,  than  that  in  which  it  now  appears,  the 
work,  it  is  believed,  will  not  only  be  as  easy  of  comprehension  in  its  new,  as 
in  its  old  form,  but  in  its  practical  application  far  more  satisfactory. 

Of  the  minor  changes  and  8-'lditions  occurring  on  almost  every  page,  and 
even  of  the  occasional  reajrvigement  of  small  portions  of  the  materials,  it  is 
unnecessary  to  speak  parti  ,alarly.  The  student  familiar  with  former  editions 
will  at  once  detect  these  slight  modifications,  and  nota  them  in  his  memory 
for  future  use ;  and  though  he  may  fail  to  find  a  rule,  exception,  or  remark  on 
the  page  where  he  has  been  wont  to  see  it,  he  will  still  meet  with  it  in  the 
frame  relative  position, — in  the  same  section  and  subdivision  of  the  section  in 
which  it  formerly  appeared. 

In  the  department  of  Orthoepy  will  now  be  found  some  account  of  the  Con 
tinental  mode  of  pronouncing  Latin;  and,  by  means  of  the  joint  exhibition  of 


PREFACE.  a 

this  and  of  the  English  methods,  the  stndent  -mil  be  able  to  use  the  Gramnrir 
with  equal  facility,  whether  choosing  to  adhere  to  the  usual  pronunciation  of 
English  and  American  scholars,  or  preferring  that  of  the  continental  schools. 

In  the  Etymology  of  nouns,  no  other  alteration  need  be  specified,  except  the 
introduction,  in  the  third  declension,  of  "  Rules  for  forming  the  nominative 
singular  from  the  root."  These  are  copied,  in  a  modified  form,  from  the  edi- 
tor's First  Latin  Book.  In  themselves  they  are  of  considerable  utility  in 
showing  the  mutual  relations  between  the  sounds  of  certain  letters,  and  they 
are  also  closely  connected  with  corresponding  changes  in  some  of  the  verbal 
roots.  In  the  Etymology  of  adjectives,  besides  the  minor  modifications  aheady 
alluded  to,  a  few  chasnges  in  arrangement  have  been  made  in  those  sections 
which  lelate  to  Comparison.  To  pronouns  have  been  added  some  remarks  on 
Pronominal  Adjectives,  which  seemed  to  require  a  more  particular  notice, 
than  they  had  heretofore  received,  both  in  their  relation  to  each  other  and 
to  the  Adverbial  Correlatives.  The  Etymology  of  particles  has  been  treated 
somewhat  more  fully  than  in  former  editions — a  fulness  especially  observable 
in  relation  to  adverbs  and  conjunctions,  and  which  was  rendered  necessary 
by  the  more  extended  treatment  of  those  particles  in  the  revised  SjTitax. 

In  almost  every  section  of  the  Syntax  the  student  will  meet  with  modifica- 
tions and  especially  with  additions,  which,  as  in  other  parts  of  the  work,  are 
introduced  in  such  a  manner  as  seldom  to  interfere  with  the  references  made 
to  former  editions  in  the  series  based  upon  this  Grammar.  The  principal  ex- 
ception to  the  latter  remark  is  to  be  found  in  sections  247 — 251,  which  relate 
to  certain  uses  of  the  ablative. 

A  comparison  of  the  Prosody  in  the  present  and  former  editions  will  show, 
that  it  has  been  revised  with  mmute  care  in  every  part.  Similar  attention  has 
also  been  given  to  the  Appendix,  in  which  will  be  found  some  additions  relat- 
ing to  Roman  Money,  Weights  and  Measm-es.  For  the  greater  convenience  of 
he  student  the  Index  in  this  edition  has  been  much  enlarged. 

In  conclusion,  I  would  briefly  indicate  the  principal  sources  from  which 
have  been  derived  the  various  additions  and  corrections,  to  which  allusion  has 
been  made.  In  preparing  the  original  work,  the  earlier  editions  of  Zumpt't 
Grammar  were  consulted  at  almost  every  step,  and  while  frequent  use  was 
made  of  the  grammars  of  Scheller,  Grant,  Adam,  Ruddiman,  Hickie  and 
ethers,  the  treatises  of  Zumpt  were  even  then  regarded  as  the  most  valuable 
embodiment  of  the  principles  of  Latin  philology.  It  was  therefore  natural 
and  almost  unavoidable,  in  revising  a  work  which  had  in  so  many  points  re- 
ceived both  its  form  and  its  substance  from  the  earlier  labors  of  that  distin- 
guished grammarian,  to  look  to  his  maturer  works  for  many  of  the  materials 
b\  means  of  which  our  original  sketch  should  be  made  more  complete. 
Accordingly  I  have  constantly  consulted  the  last  edition  c  his  Grammar, 
translated  by  Dr.  S^hmitz,  and  have  freely  incorporated  in  this  edition  such 
1* 


O  PREFACE. 

of  its  materials,  as  were  suited  to  my  purpose.  In  most  cases  his  ideas  Lave 
been  either  expressed  in  my  o^vn  language,  or  in  language  so  modified  as  to 
suit  the  general  plan  of  my  work.  In  the  Etymology,  and  not  unfrequently  in 
the  Syntax  also,  the  copious  Grammar  of  Ramshom  has  furnished  valuable 
materials;  and  the  Grammars  of  Key  and  of  Kuhner,  the  latter  translated  by 
Prof.  Ghamplin,  have  been  consulted  with  profit  and  satisfaction.  In  the 
sections  comprising  conjunctions,  and  especially  in  those  relating  to  gram- 
matical analysis,  I  am  happy  to  acknowledge  my  indebtedness  to  Prof.  S.  S. 
Greene  pf  Brown  University.  To  the  sources  already  specified  I  must  add  the 
Latin  Lexicon  of  Dr.  Freund,  in  editing  a  translation  of  which  I  had  frequent 
occasion  to  note  such  matters  as  promised  to  be  of  utility  in  the  revision  of  this 
Grammar.  The  additions  in  the  Appendix  relating  to  Roman  money,  etc., 
are  taken  principally  from  Dr.  Riddle's  translation  of  Dr.  Freund's  School 
Dictionary.  To  these  references  I  will  only  add,  that  such  other  notes  re- 
lating to  Latin  philology,  as  I  have  made  during  the  past  twenty  years,  so 
far  as  they  were  adapted  to  my  purpose,  have  either  been  used  in  my  former 
occasional  corrections,  or  are  incorporated  in  the  present  edition. 

In  taking  a  final  leave  of  the  earliest  of  the  elementary  Latin  works  with 
which  my  name  has  been  associated,  and  with  which,  in  my  own  mind,  must 
ever  be  connected  the  pleasant  memory  of  my  early  iriend  and  associate, 
Prof.  Stoddard,  I  trust  I  shall  be  pardoned  in  commending  it  once  more  to 
the  kind  indulgence  of  the  teachers  of  this  country,  and  in  expressing  the 
hope  that,  m  its  present  form,  it  will  be  deemed  not  altogether  unworthy  of  a 
continuance  of  the  favor  which  it  has  so  long  received.  I  cannot  indeed  ven- 
ture to  indulge  the  hope,  that  all  the  imperfections  of  the  work  have  even  now 
been  removed,  or  that,  in  my  attempts  to  render  it  more  perf'3ct,  I  may  not 
sometimes  have  fallen  into  new  eiTors ;  but  this  I  can  truly  say  that  since  its 
first  publication  I  have  devoted  much  time  to  its  revision,  and  have  lought  to 
manifest  my  sense  of  the  kindness  with  which  it  has  been  received,  by  doing 
all  in  my  power  to  render  it  less  unworthy  cf  public  'avor. 

E.  A    ANDREWS. 
New  Britain,  Qmn.,  OcL,  1867. 


CONTENTS. 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 


Page. 


Letters  9 

Division  of  letters 10 

Diphthongs 10 

Punctuation 10 

ORTHOEPY. 

Continental  pronunciation 11 

English  pronunciation 11 

Sounds  of  the  letters 11 

of  the  vowels 11 

of  the  diphthongs 12 

of  the  consonants 13 

Quantity  of  syllables 14 

Accentuation 15 

Latin  accents 15 

English  accents 16 

Division  of  words  into  syllables. ...  16 

ETYMOLOGY. 

Nouns 19 

Gender 20 

Number 22 

Cases 23 

Declensions 23 

First  declension 25 

Greek  nouns 26 

Second  declension 26 

Greek  nouns 29 

Third  declension 29 

Formation  of  nom.  sing 30 

Rules  for  the  gender 33 

■ —  oblique  cases. ...  36 

Greek  nouns 45 

Fourth  declension 45 

Fifth  declension 47 

Declension  of  compound  nouns . .  47 

Lrregular  nouns 48 

Variable  nouns 48 

Defective  nouns 49 

Redundant  nouns 54 

Derivation  of  nouns 56 

Composition  of  nouns 60 

Adjectives 61 

Adjectives  of  the  first  and  second 
declensions 62 

Adjectives  of  the  third  declension  64 
Kules  for  the  oblique  cases. ...  67 


Page 

Irregular  adjectives 69 

Defective  adjectives 69 

Redundant  adjectives 69 

Numeral  adjectives 70 

Comparison  of  adjectives 74 

In-egular  comparison 75 

Defective  comparison 76 

Derivation  of  adjectives 78 

Composition  of  adjectives 81 

Pronouns *: 82 

Substantive  pronouns 82 

Adjective  pronouns 83 

Demonstrative  pronouns 83 

Litensive  pronouns 85 

Relative  pronouns 86 

Interrogative  pronouns 87 

Indefinite  pronouns 88 

Possessive  pronouns 89 

Patrial  pronouns 90 

Pronominal  adjectives 90 

Verbs 91 

Voices 91 

Moods 92 

Tenses 93 

Numbers 95 

Persons 95 

Participles,  gerunds,  and  supines  95 

Conjugation 96 

Table  of  terminationi 98 

Sum 100 

Prosum,  Possum,  etc    102 

First  conjugation 103 

Second  conjugation 108 

Third  conjugation HI 

Fourth  conjugation 116 

Deponent  verbs 120 

Remarks  on  the  conjugations.. .  121 

Periphrastic  conjugations 123 

General  rules  of  conjugation  . . .  124 
Formation  of  second  and  third 

roots 125 

First  conjugation 125 

Second  conjugation 129 

Third  conjugation 131 

Fourth  conjugation 139 

IiTCgular  verbs 140 

Defective  verbs 146 

Impersonal  verbs 147 


8 


CONTENTS. 


Page. 

Redundant  verbs 150 

Derivation  of  verbs 152 

Composition  of  verbs 154 

Particles 156 

Adverbs 155 

Derivation  of  adverbs 160 

Composition  of  adverbs 162 

Comparison  of  adverbs 163 

Pkepositions 163 

Prepositions  in  composition. . . .  167 

Conjunctions 170 

Interjections 176 

SYNTAX. 

Sentences  and  Propositions 177 

Subject 178 

Predicate 181 

Apposition 183 

4d)ectives 184 

Relatives...... 189 

Demonstratives,  etc 193 

Reflexives 198 

Nominative 200 

Subject-nominative  and  verb.. .  200 

Predicate-nominative 205 

Genitive 206 

Genitive  after  nouns 206 

after  partitives 211 

after  adjectives 214 

after  verbs 216 

of  place 221 

after  particles 222 

Dative 222 

Dative  after  adjectives 222 

after  verbs 225 

after  particles 230 

Accusative 231 

Accusative  after  verbs 231 

after  prepositions . . .  237 

of  time  and  space  . .  239 

—————  of  place 240 

after  adjectives,  ad- 
verbs and  interjections 241 

Subject-accusative 242 

Vocative 243 

Ablative 243 

Ablative  after  prepositions 243 

after    certain    nouns, 

adjectives  and  verbs 244 

of  cause,  etc 246 

of  price 252 

of  time 252 

of  place 254 

— after  comparatives 255 

absolute 258 

Connection  of  tenses 261 

Indicative  mood 263 

ftubmnot'  79  mood 2€a 


Page. 

Protasis  and  apodosis 268 

Subjunctive  after  particles.. . . .  269 

after  qui 275 

■   in  indirect  questions  278 

in  inserted  clauses..  279 

Imperative  mood 281 

Infinitive  mood 2^2 

Participles 292 

Gerunds  and  gerundives 296 

Supines 299 

Adverbs 300 

Prejiositions 303 

Conjunctions 304 

Interjections 306 

Arrangement 806 

Arrangement  of  words 306 

of  clauses 310 

Analysis 312 

Parsmg 313 

PROSODY. 

Quantity 319 

General  rules 319 

Special  rules 322 

First  and  middle  syllables .. . .  322 

Derivative  words 322 

Compound  words 324 

Increment  of  nouns 325 

Increment  of  verbs 329 

Penults  and  antepeuults... .  331 

Final  syllables 336 

Versification 341 

Feet • 341 

Metre 342 

Verses 342 

Figures  of  prosody 343 

Arsis  and  thesis 346 

Caesura 347 

Different  kinds  of  metre 347 

Dactylic  metre 347 

Anapaestic  metre 350 

Iambic  metre 351 

Trochaic  metre 353 

Choriambic  metre 354 

Ionic  metre 355 

Compound  metres 356 

Combination  of  verses 356 

Horatian  metres 357 

Key  to  the  odes  of  Horace 359 

APPENDIX. 

Grammatical  figures 361 

Tropes  and  figures  of  rhetoric 363 

Roman  mode  of  reckoning  time. . .  367 

money,  weight,  etc.  370 

Abbreviations 374 

Different  ages  of  Roman  literature  374 
Writers  of  the  different  ages 375 

INDEX 878 


LATIN    GRAMMAR. 


§  1,  The  Latin  language  is  the  language  spoken  by  the  an- 
cient Romans.  Latin  Grammar  teaches  the  principles  of  the 
Latin  language.     These  relate, 

1.  To  its  -written  characters ; 

2.  To  its  pronunciation  ; 

8.   To  the  classification  and  derivation  of  its  words ; 

4.   To  the  construction  of  its  sentences  ; 

6.   To  the  quantity  of  its  syllables,  and  its  versification. 

The  first  part  is  called  Orthography ;  the  second,  Orthoepy ;  the 
third,  Etymology ;  the  fourth,  Syntax ;  and  the  fifth,  Prosody. 


ORTHOGRAPHl. 

§  S5.  Orthography  treats  of  the  letters,  and  other  characters 
of  written  language,  and  the  proper  mode  of  speUing  words. 

1.  The  Latin  alphabet  consists  of  twenty-five  letters.  They  have 
the  same  names  as  the  corresponding  characters  in  English.  They 
areA,a;  B,b;  C,c;  D,  d ;  E,  e ;  F,  f ;  G,g;  H,h;I,i;J,j; 
K,k;  L,l;  M,m;  N,n;  O,  o ;  P,p;  Q,q;  R,r;  S,s;  T,t;  U,u; 
V,  v;  X,x;  Y,y;  Z,  z. 

2.  The  Romans  used  only  the  capital  letters. 

8.   /  and  j  were  anciently  but  one  character,  as  were  likewise  «  and  v. 

4.  W  is  not  found  in  Latin  words,  and  k  occurs  only  at  the  begiiming  of  a 
few  words  before  o,  and  even  in  these  c  is  commonly  used,  except  in  their  ab- 
breviated form ;  as,  ^  or  Kai.  for  Kalendce  or  GalendcB,  the  Calends. 

6.    F  and  z  are  found  only  in  words  derived  from  the  Greek. 

6.    ff,  thongh  called  a  letter,  only  denotes  a  breathing,  or  aspiration. 


The  consonants  are 
divided  into 


10  DIPHTHONGS. PUNCTUATION.  §  3 5 

DIVISION   OF  LETTERS. 

§  3«     Letters  are  divided  into  vowels  and  consonants. 

1.  The  vowels  are a,  e,  i,  o^  u,  y. 

'Liquids, I,  m,  n,  r. 

( Labials, p,  b,  f,  v. 

Mutes,  <  Palatals, c,  g,  k,  q,  j. 

(Linguals,   .  .  .  .  t^  d. 

Sibilant, s. 

Double  consonants, .  .  .  .  x,  z. 
Aspirate, h. 

2.  Xis  equivalent  to  cs  or  ^s;  z  to  to  or  ds;  and,  except  in  com- 

{)ound  words,  the  double  consonant  is  always  written,  instead  of  the 
etters  which  it  represents.    In  some  Greek  words  x  is  •equivalent 
to  chs. 

Diphthongs. 

§  4.  Two  vowels,  in  immediate  succession,  in  the  same  syl- 
lable, are  called  a  diphthong. 

The  diphthongs  are  ae,  at,  aw,  ei,  cm,  oe,  oi,  ua,  tie,  ui,  mo,  ««,  and  yu 
Ae  and  oe  are  frequently  written  together,  cb,  ce. 

PUNCTUATION. 

§  O.  The  only  mark  of  punctuation  used  by  the  ancients  was  a  point, 
which  denoted  pauses  of  different  length,  according  as  it  was  placed  at  the  top, 
the  middle,  or  the  bottom  of  the  line.  The  modems  use  the  same  marks  ol 
punctuation,  in  writing  and  printing  Latin,  as  in  their  own  languages,  and  as- 
Bim  to  them  the  same  power. 

Marks  of  quantity  and  of  accent  are  sometimes  found  in  Latin  authors,  espe- 
cially in  elementary  works : — 

1.  There  are  three  marks  of  quantity,  viz.  " ,  -,  >< ;  the  first  de- 
notes that  the  vowel  over  which  it  stands  is  short ;  the  second,  that  il 
is  long ;  the  third,  that  it  is  doubtful,  that  is,  sometimes  long  and 
sometimes  short. 

2.  There  are  also  three  written  accents — the  acute  ('),  the  grave 
(  ^),  and  the  circumflex  (').  These  were  used  by  the  old  gramma- 
rians to  denote  the  rising  and  sinking  of  the  voice  in  the  Roman  mode 
of  pronouncing  words.  (See  §§  14  and  15.)  In  modern  elementary 
Latin  works,  the  acute  marks  the  emphatic  syllable  of  a  word,  (§  16), 
the  grave  distinguishes  certain  particles  from  other  words  spelled  in 
the  same  manner ;  as,  quod,  because  ;  quod,  which  ;  and  the  circum- 
flex is  placed  over  certain  penultimate  and  final  syllables  that  aro 
formed  by  contraction. 

The  diaeresis  ( ")  denotes  that  the  vowel  over  which  it  stands  does 
uot  form  a  diphthong  with  the  preceding  vowel ;  as,  aer,  the  air.  It 
is  uaud  principally  with  ae,  ai,  and  oe. 


§6,7  ORTHCRVT. SOUNDS    OP    THE    VOWELS.  11 


ORTHOEPY. 

§  6.     Orthoepy  treats  of  the  right  pronunciation  of  words. 

The  ancient  pronunciation  of  the  Latin  language  being  in  a  great  measure 
lost,  the  learned,  in  modem  times,  have  applied  to  it  those  principles  which 
regulate  the  pronunciation  of  their  ovm  languages;  and  hence  has  arisen,  Lu 
diiVerent  countries,  a  great  diversity  of  practice. 

The  various  systems  now  prevalent  in  Europe,  may,  however,  be  reduced  to 
two— the  Continental  and  the  English— the  former  prevailing,  with  only  slight 
diversities,  in  most  of  the  countries  of  continental  Europe,  and  the  latter  in 
England.  Tlieir  principal  difference  is  found  in  the  pronunciation  of  the  vowels 
and^  diphthongs,  since,  in  both  methods,  the  consonants  are  pronounced  in 
nearly  the  same  manner. 

The  Continental  Method. 

[According  to  this  system,  each  of  the  vowels,  when  standing  at 
the  end  of  a  syllable,  is  considered  as  having  but  one  sound,  which, 
however,  may  be  either  short  or  long.     Thus, 

Short  a,  as  in  hat.  Long  5,  as  in  no. 

Long  a,  as  in  father.  Short  ii,  as  in  tub. 

Short  e,  as  in  met.  Long  u,  as  in  full. 

Long  e,  as  in  there.  ae  or  oe,  as  e  in  there. 

Short  i,  as  in  sit.  au,  as  ou  in  our. 

Long  I,  as  in  machine.  eu,  as  in  feudal. 

l*iort  6,  as  in  not.  ei,  as  i  in  ice. 

Remark.  These  sounds  are  sometimes  slightly  modified  when 
followed  by  a  consonant  in  the  same  syllable.] 

The  English  Method. 

In  the  following  rules  for  dividing  and  pronouncing  Latin  words,  regard  has 
been  had  both  to  English  analogy  and  to  the  laws  of  Latin  accentuation.  See 
4  14  and  15.  The  basis  of  this  system  is  that  which  is  exhibited  by  Walker  in 
his  "  Pronunciation  of  Greek  ancl  Latui  Proper  Names."  To  pronounce  cor- 
lectly,  accordmg  to  this  method,  a  knowledge  of  the  following  particulars  is 
requisite : — 

1.  Of  the  sounds  of  the  letters  in  all  their  combinations. 

2.  Of  the  quantities  of  the  penultimate  and  final  syllables. 
8.    Of  the  place  of  the  accent,  both  primary  and  secondary. 
4.    Of  the  mode  of  dividing  words  into  syllables. 

OF  THE  SOUNDS  OF  THE  LETTERS. 
I.  Of  the  Vowels. 

§  7.     A  vowel,  when  ending  an  acr.ented  syllable,  has  al- 
ways its  long  English  sound ;  as, 

pn'-ter,  d^'-cUt,  w'^wm,  t</-tm,  tu'-ba,  Ty'-^na ;  in  which  tue  accented  vowels 
"ire  p  roiiouncad  as  in  fatal,  mttre,  Mtal,  total,  tutor  tjfrarU. 


12  SOUNDS    OF   THE   DIPHTHONGS.  §  8,  9 

1.  A,  at  the  end  of  an  unaccented  syllable,  has  nearly  the  sound 
of  a  in  father  or  in  ah,  but  less  distinct  or  prolonged ;  as,  mu'-sa, 
fi.-pis'-to-la,  a-cer'-bus,  Pal-a-me-des  ;  pronounced  mu'-zah,  etc. 

2.  E,  0,  and  u,  at  the  end  of  an  unaccented  syllable,  have  nearly 
the  same  sound  as  when  accented,  but  shorter  and  less  distinct ;  as, 
re'-te,  vo'-lo,  u'-su-i. 

3.  (a.)   /  final  has  always  its  long  sound ;  as,  qui,  au'-di,  le-gd'-ti. 

Rem.  1.  The  final  i  of  tibi  and  sibi  has  its  short  sOund. 

(6.)  /,  at  the  end  of  an  unaccented  syllable  not  final,  has  an  indis- 
tinct sound  like  short  e;  as,  Fa'-bi-us  (fa'-be-us),  phi-los'-o-phus  (ph»- 
los'-o-phus). 

Exc.  /  has  its  long  sound  in  the  first  syllable  of  a  word  the  second  of  which 
is  accented,  when  it  either  stands  alone  before  a  consonant,  as  in  i-do'-ne^ut,  or 
ends  a  syllable  before  a  vowel,  as  in  Ji-e^-bam. 

Eek.  2.    y  is  always  prononnced  like  t  in  the  same  situation. 

§  8.  A  vowel  has  always  its  short  English  sound,  when  fol- 
lowed by  a  consonant  in  the  same  syllable  ;  as, 

mag' -WHS,  reg'^num,jin'-go,  hoc^fus'-tis,  cyff'nus,  in  which  the  vowels  are  pro- 
nounced as  in  magnet,  seldom,  Jimsh,  copy,  lustre,  symbol. 

Exception  1.  A,  when  it  foUows  qu  before  dr  and  rt,  has  the 
sounds  of  a  in  quadrant  and  in  quart ;  as,  qua'-dro,  quad-ra-gin' -ta, 
quar'-tus.  In  other  connections  a  before  r  has  the  sound  of  a  in 
part ;  as,  par-ti-ceps,  ar'-ma  ;  except  when  followed  by  another  r,  as 
in  par-ri-cl'-da. 

Exc.  2.  Es,  at  the  end  of  a  word,  is  pronounced  Hke  the  English 
word  ease ;  as,  ig'-nes,  au'-des. 

Exc.  8.  Os,  at  the  end  of  plural  cases,  is  pronounced  like  ose  in 
dose ;  as,  nos,  il'-los,  dom'-i-nos. 

Exc.  4.  Post  is  pronounced  like  the  same  word  in  English ;  so 
also  are  its  compounds  ;  as,  post-quam,  post'-e-a.;  but  not  its  deriva- 
tives ;  as,  pos-tre-mus. 

Exc.  5.  E,  i  and  y  before  final  r,  or  before  r  in  a  syllable  not  final,  when 
followed  in  the  next  syllable  by  any  other  consonant,  except  r,  have  the  sound 
of  e  and  i  in  the  English  words  her  and  fir  ;  as,  fer,  fert,  fer'ti-lis ;  hir,  hir'- 
cus,  myr'-tus. 

n.    Op  the  Diphthongs. 

§  9.  Ae  and  oe  are  always  diphthongs  unless  separated  by  diae- 
resis. They  are  pronounced  as  e  would  be  in  the  same  situation  ;  as, 
ce'-tas,  cEs'-tas,  poe'-na,  ms'ti'um. 

1.  Ai,  ei,  oi,  and  yi,  usually  have  the  vowels  pronounced  separately. 
When  they  are  accented,  and  followed  by  another  vowel,  the  i  is 
pronounced  like  initial  y,  and  the  vowel  before  it  has  its  long  sound ; 
as,  Maia,  Pompeius,  Troia,  Harpyia ;  pronounced  Ma'-ya,  Pom-pe'- 
yus,  Tro'-ya,  Har-py'-ya 


S  10,  11.  SOTINDS    OF   THE    CONSONANTS.  13 

Remark  1.  Ei,  when  a  diphthong  and  not  followed  by  anothor  vowel,  is 
pronounced  like  i ;  as  in  hei,  om'-neis. 

2.  Au,  when  a  diphthocg,  is  pronounced  like  aw ;  a8,  laus,  au'-rum, 
pronounced  laws,  etc. 

Rem.  2.  In  the  termination  of  Greek  proper  names,  the  letters  au  are  pro- 
nounced  separately ;  as,  Men^e-ld-us. 

3.  Eu,  when  a  diphthong,  ia  pronounced  like  long  u  ;  as,  Aeu,  Or- 
pheus (or'-phuse),  Eu-phra-tes. 

Rem.  3.  The  letters  eu  are  pronounced  separately  in  the  terminations  eut 
and  mm  of  Latin  nouns,  and  of  all  adjectives,  whether  Greek  or  Latin,  except 
neut'er ;  as,  ur'-ce-us,  me'-us,  me'-um,  e'-um.  In  other  situations  they  form  a 
diphthong;  as,  Eur^-o'-pa,  The'seus,  e'-heu. 

4.  Ua,  ue,  ui,  uo,  uu,  when  diphthongs,  are  pronounced  like  tva, 
we,  etc. ;  as,  lin'-gua,  que-ror,  sua'-de-o,  quo'-tus,  e'-quus.  They  are 
always  diphthongs  after  q,  usually  also  after  g,  and  often  after  ». 

5.  Ui  in  cui  and  huk,  when  monosyllables,  is  pronounced  like  wi,  and  by 
some  like  long  i. 

TTT.    Op  the  Consonants. 

§  10.     The  consonants  have,  in  general,  the  same  power  in 
Latin  as  in  English  words. 
The  following  cases,  however,  require  particular  attention. 

c. 

C  has  the  sound  of  s  before  e,  i,  and  y,  and  the  diphthongs  ce,  ce, 
and  eu ;  as,  ce'-do,  ci'-bus,  Cce'-sar,  cce'-lum,  ceu,  Cy'-rus.  In  other 
situations,  it  has  the  sound  of  k;  as,  Ca'-to,  cru-dus,  lac. 

1.    Ch  has  always  the  sound  of  A;;  aa,  charta  (kar'-tah),  niacMna 

(mak'-e-nah). 

Exc.  C,  following  or  ending  an  accented  syllable,  before  t  followed  by  a 
vowel,  and  also  before  eu  and  yo,  has  the  sound  of  sh;  as,  $ocia  (so'-ahe-ah), 
caduceus  (ca-du'she-us),  Sicyon  (sish'-e-on). 

Remark.  In  the  pronunciation  of  the  ancient  Romans,  the  hard  sound  of  e  and  g  seeoia 
(o  hare  been  retained  in  all  their  combinations. 

G  has  its  soft  sound,  like  j,  before  e,  i,  and  y,  and  the  diphthongs 
ee  and  ce ;  as  ge'-nus,  ag'-i-lis,  Gy'-ges,  Gm-tu-li.  In  other  situations, 
it  has  its  hard  sound,  as  in  hag,  go. 

Exc.  When  g  comes  before  g  soft,  it  coalesces  vrith  it  in  sound;  as,  aygvr 
(aj'-er),  exaggeratio  (ex-aj-e-ra'-she-o). 

§  11,     S  has  generally  its  hissing  sound,  as  in  so,  (hus. 

Exc.  1.  (a.)  When  si  followed  by  a  vowel  is  immediately  preceded  by  a 
consonant  in  an  accented  syllable,  the  «  h:i.s  the  sound  of  .i^  ;  as.  Pur'  -gi-a 
(per'-she-a). 


14       QUANTITIES    OF    PENULTIMATE    AND    FINAL    SYLLABLES. 

(6.)  But  when  si  or  zi  followed  by  a  vowel  is  immed'ately  p'"eceded  by  an 
accented  vowel,  the  s  or  2  has  the  sound  of  zh  ;  as,  .As-pa'-si^a  (as-pa'-zhe-ali), 
Ba-ba'-zi^a  (sa-ba'-zhe-ah). 

Note.  In  a  few  proper  names,  s  preceded  by  a  vowel  in  an  accented  syllable  and  follow- 
ed b_y  i  before  another  vowel,  bas  the  sound,  not  of  zh,  but  of  sh ;  as,  A'-si-a  (a'-she-a) :  bo 
Sosia,  Theociosia,  Lysias. 

Exc.  2.  S,  at  the  end  of  a  word,  after  e,  ce,  au,  b,  m,  n,  and  r,  has 
the  sound  of  z ;  as,  res,  ces,  laus,  trabs,  hi' -ems,  lens,  Mars. 

English  analogy  has  also  occasioned  the  s  in  Ooe'-sar,  ccB-siV-^a,  mi'-ser,  mu'- 
8a,  re-sid'-u^m,  cau^sa,  ro'-sa,  and  their  derivatives,  and  in  some  other  words, 
to  take  the  sound  of  z.  CcBS-a^e'-a,  and  the  obUque  cases  of  CcB$ar,  retain  the 
hissmg  sound;  so  likewise  the  compounds  of  trans ;  as,  trans'-CrO. 

T. 

§  12.  1.  T,  following  or  ending  an  accented  syllable  before  i 
followed  by  a  vowel,  has  t£e  sound  of  sh ;  as,  ratio  (ra'-she-o),  Sulpi- 
tius  (sul-pish'-e-us). 

Exc.  T,  in  such  case,  retains  its  hard  sound  (a^  after  «, «,  or  x ;  as,  SaUlus'- 
ti-us,  Brtif-ti-i,  Sex'-ti^us :  (b)  in  proper  names  in  tion  and  ti/on ;  as,  Eu-ryV-i-on, 
Am-phi&-ty-on ;  and  (c)  in  old  infinitives  in  er ;  as,  flec'-U-er,  forjlec'-tt. 

X. 

2.  X,  at  the  beginning  of  a  syllable,  has  the  sound  of  r;  at  the  end, 
that  of  ks ;  as,  Xenophon  (zen'-o-phon)  ;  axis  (ak'-sis). 

Exc.  1.  When  ea;  or  wa;  is  followed  by  a  vowel  in  an  accented  syllable,  x 
has  the  sound  oi  gz;  as,  exemphm  (eg-zem'-plum),  Ma>^'-ri-Ms  (ug-zo'-re-us), 
inexkaustus  (in-eg-zaus'-tus). 

Exc.  2.  X,  ending  an  accented  syllable  before  i  followed  by  a  vowel,  and 
before  m  ending  a  syllable,  has  the  power  of  hsh ;  as,  noxius  (nok'-she-us), 
pexui  (pek'-shu-i). 

Remark.  Ch  and  ph.  before  th,  In  the  beginning  of  a  word,  are  silent;  as,  Chthonia 
(tho'-ni-a).  Phihia  (thl  -a).  Also  in  the  following  combinations  of  consonants,  in  the  b«. 
ginning  of  words  of  Greek  origin,  the  first  letter  is  not  sounded: — mne-mon'-l-ca,  gna'- 
vus,  tme'sia,  Cte'si-as,  Ptol-e-ma'-us,  jisal'4o. 

OF    THE    QUANTITIES    OF    THE   PENULTIMATE    AND 
FINAL  SYLLABLES. 

§  13.  !•  The  quantity  of  a  syllable  is  the  relative  time  oc- 
cupied in  pronouncing  it. 

2.  A  short  syllable  requires,  in  pronunciation,  half  the  time  of  a 
long  one. 

Rem.  The  penultimate  syllable,  or  penvit,  is  the  last  syllable  but  one.  The  antepentdt 
Is  the  last  syllable  but  two. 

The  quantity  of  a  syllable  is  generally  to  be  learned  from  the  rules  of  prosody,  H  282 — 
801 ;  but  for  the  convenience  of  the  student,  the  following  general  rules  are  here  in- 
serted:— 

8.   A  vowel  before  another  vowel  or  A  is  short. 
4.   Diphthongs,  not  beginning  with  u,  are  long. 


§  14,  15.  ACCENTUATION.  15 

5.  A  vowel  before  x,  z,  j,  or  any  two  consonants,  except  a  mute 
followed  by  a  liquid,  is  long  by  position,  as  it  is  called. 

6.  A  vowel  naturally  sbort  before  a  mute  followed  by  a  liquid  is 
common,  i.  e.  either  long  or  short. 

In  this  Grammar,  when  the  quantity  of  a  penult  is  determined  by  one  of  the  preceding 
rules,  it  ia  not  marked ;  in  other  cusea,  except  in  dissyllables,  the  proper  mark  is  writteD 
over  its  vowel. 

To  pronounce  Latin  words  correctly,  it  is  necessary  to  ascertain  the  quantities  of  theii 
last  two  syllables  only ;  and  the  rules  for  the  quantities  of  final  syllables  would,  for  this 
purpose,  be  unnecessary,  but  for  the  occasional  addition  of  enclitics.  As  these  are  g*?ii- 
erally  monosyllables,  and,  for  the  purpose  of  accentuation,  are  considered  as  parts  of  the 
words  to  which  they  are  annexed,  they  cause  the  final  syllable  of  the  original  word  to 
become  the  penult  of  the  compound.  But  as  the  enclitics  begin  with  a  consonant,  the 
final  vowels  of  all  words  ending  with  a  consonant,  if  previously  short,  are,  by  the  addi- 
tion of  an  encUtic,  made  long  by  position.  It  is  necessary,  therefore,  to  learn  the  quan- 
tities of  those  final  syllables  only  which  end  with  a  vowel. 

OF   ACCENTUATION. 

I.   Of  Latin  Accents. 

§  l4:.  1.  Accent,  in  Latin,  signifies  the  rising  and  falling  of  the  voice  m 
pronouncing  the  syllables  of  a  Latin  word.  It  is  a  general  rule  of  the  Latin 
language,  that  every  word  has  its  accent.  The  enclitics,  however,  have  no  ac- 
cent of  their  own,  but  they  modify  the  accent  of  the  words  to  which  they  are 
annexed,  and  prepositions  lose  their  accent,  when  they  precede  the  cases  which 
thev  govern. 

2.  The  Latin  language  has  three  accents,  the  acute  ('),  or  rising  tone,  the 
grave  ( ^ ),  or  falling  tone,  and  the  circumflex  C),  composed  of  the  acute  and  the 
grave,  i.  e.  of  the  rising  and  the  falling  tone. 

3.  A  monosyllable,  when  short  by  nature,  takes  the  acute,  when  long  by  nature,  the 
circumflex  accent;  as,  pix,  it,  pars;  dus,  jus,  spes. 

4.  In  words  of  two  syllable.^,  the  penult  is  always  accented ; 
as,  pd'ter,  md'-ter,  pen'-na. 

Rem.  1.  Words  of  two  syllables  have  the  circumflex  accent,  when  the  vowel  of  the  pe- 
nult is  naturally  long  and  that  of  the  last  syllable  short ;  as,  KO-wa,  ind-sa,  lii-cS^  jfi-ris ; 
If  otherwise,  they  have  the  acute;  as,  liS'-mO,  dS'as,  RO'^ma  (abl.),  and  ar'-ti,  in  which 
a  is  long  only  by  position. 

5.  In  words  of.  more  tlian  two  syllables,  if  the  penult  is  long, 
it  is  accented  ;  but  if  it  is  short,  the  accent  is  on  the  antepenult ; 
as,  a-mi'-ciis,  dom'-i-nus. 

Kem.  2.  When  the  accent  of  a  word  of  more  than  two  syllables  falls  upon  the  penult. 
It  may  be  either  the  pircumflex  or  the  acute  according  as  the  last  syllable  is  short  or  long 
The  antepenult  can  take  no  accent  except  the  acute,  and  in  no  case  can  the  accent  bs 
drawn  farther  back  than  to  the  antepenult. 

Exc.  Vocatives  of  the  second  declension  in  i,  instead  of  ie,  from  nominatives 
in  ins,  and  genitives  in  i,  instead  of  ii,  are  accented  as  they  would  be,  if  the  re- 
jected letters  were  annexed,  i.  e.  with  the  acute  upon  the  penult,  even  when 
It  is  short;  as,  Vir-yil-i;  Va-le'-ri,  in-ge'^ii.  So,  also,  the  compounds  of  _/acto 
with  words  which  are  not  prepositions ;  as,  cal-e-fd'-cit,  tep-e-fd'-cit. 

§  15.  If  the  penult  is  common,  the  accent,  in  prose,  is  upon 
the  antepenult;  as,  vol'-u-cris,  phar'-e-tra,  ib'-i-que :  but  genitives 
in  ius,  in  which  i  is  common,  accent  their  penult  in  prose ;  as 
u-fit'  -us,  is-ti'-us. 


1(^  DIVISION    OF   WORDS.  §  16-18. 

•  Rem.  8.  All  the  syllables  of  a  Latin  word,  except  that  on  which  the  acute  or  circuin- 
Bex  accent  falls,  are  supposed  to  have  th»  grave  accent,  and  were  pronounced  with  tha 
lower  tone. 

1.  The  rules  for  the  accentuation  of  compound  and  simple  words 
are  the  same ;  as,  se'-cum,  sub'-e-o. 

2.  In  accentuation,  the  enclitics  que,  ne,  t?e,  and  also  those  which 
are  annexed  to  pronouns,*  are  accounted  constituent  parts  of  the  words 
to  which  they  are  subjoined  ;  as,  i-ta,  it'-d-que  ;  vi'-rum,  vi-rum'-que. 

n.   Of  English  Accknts. 

§  IG.  Accent,  in  English,  is  a  particular  stress  of  voice  upon 
certain  syllables  of  words.    Cf  §  5,  2. 

According  to  the  English  method  of  pronouncing  Latin,  a  word  may  have 
two,  tliree,  or  even  foxir  accents.  That  accent  which  is  nearest  to  the  termina- 
tion of  the  word,  and  which  always  corresponds  in  position  with  the  Latin  ac- 
cent, is  called  the  primary  or  principal  accent,  and  the  secondary  accent  is  that 
which  next  precedes  the  primary.  The  third  and  fourth  accents,  in  like  man- 
ner, precede  the  secondary,  and  are  subject  in  all  respects  to  the  same  rules ; 
as,  jM'-ter,  md'-ter,  ser-m&'-nes,  dom'-i-nis  ;  per^cf-u-lum,  con"-ivrTaf-ti-o,  op"'- 
por-tu"-ni-ta'-tes,  ex-er""-ci-ta'"-ti-on"-irim'-qv^. 

1.  If  only  two  syllables  precede  the  primary  accent,  the  secondary 
accent  is  on  the  first ;  as,  mod"~e-ra-tus,  tol"-e-rab'-i-lis. 

2.  If  three  or  four  syllables  stand  before  the  primary  accent,  the 
secondary  accent  is  placed,  sometimes  on  the  first,  and  sometimes  on 
the  second  syllable;  as,  de-mon"-stra-ban-tur,  ad"-o-les-cen'-ti-a. 

3.  Some  words  which  have  only  four  syllables  before  the  primary 
accent,  and  all  which  have  more  than  four,  have  three  accents ;  as, 
inod"'-e-ra"-tiro'-niSf  tol"'-e-ra-biL"-i-o-rem,  ex-er"'-ci-ta"-ti-d'-nis. 

DIVISION  OF  WORDS  INTO  SYLLABLES. 

VOWELS. 

§  17.  Every  Latin  word  is  to  be  divided  into  as  many  syllables, 
as  it  has  separate  vowels  and  diphthongs. 

Remark.  In  the  following  rules,  the  terra  vowel  includes  not  only  smgle 
vowels,  but  diphthongs ;  and  when  a  particular  vowel  is  mentioned,  a  diph- 
thong, also,  ending  with  that  vowel  is  intended. 

CONSONANTS. 

SPECIAL    RULES. 

§  18.  Remark.  The  following  special  rules,  relating  to  particular  letters 
or  to  particular  combinations  of  letters,  are  in  aU  cases  to  be  regarded  rather 
than  the  general  rules,  §§  19 — 23,  when  the  latter  are  inconsistent  with  the 
former. 

1.   H,  when  standing  alone  between  two  vowels,  is  always  joined 
to  the  vowel  that  follows  it. 
Thus,  rrd'-hi,  tra'-he-re.,  co'-hors,  co"-hor-ta^-ti-o. 

*Them  are  te,  met,  pte,  ee  cine,  and  dtm ;  as,  tute,  eg5met,  nuapte,  hicee,  Awrtne,  idtm 


§  lS-21.        DIVISION    OF    WORDS. SIMPLE    WORDS.  17 

2.  C//,  ph,  and  th,  in  the  division  of  words  into  syllables,  are  con- 
sidered, not  as  separate  letters,  but  as  single  aspirated  mutes,  and 
hence  are  never  separated. 

Thus,  A-chil'-les,  Ach'Wor^V-na,  Nepli'-e-le,  Tef-thys. 

8.  Gl,  tl,  and  ihl,  when  standing  alone  between  any  two  vowels, 
unless  the  first  be  u,  and  bt  after  u  are  always  separated. 

Thus,  ^g'-le,  Ag-lau'-nts,  Af-las,  ath-lef4-cus ; — Puff-U-us,  Pvb-li&-d-la,  rt^ 
ptil/-li-ca. 

4.  In  writing  syllables,  x,  when  standing  alone  between  two  vowels, 
is  united  to  the  vowel  before  it,  but,  in  pronouncing  such  syllablea, 
its  elementary  sounds  are  separated. 

Thus,  sax'-inn  (sak'-sum) ;  a»-iZ'-to  (ak-sil'-lah) ;  ex-tm'-plum  (eg-zem'-plum) ; 
ux-o'-^'ir^iis  (ug-zo'-re-iis). 

GENERAL   RULES. 

L    Simple  Words. 

?  1^*3,     A. — A  single  Consonant  between  two  Vowels. 

) .  A  single  consonant,  or  a  mute  with  I  or  r,  between  the  last  two 
r:-'>''els  of  a  word,  or  between  the  vowels  of  any  two  unaccented  syl- 
'.ubles,  must  be  joined  to  the  latter  vowel. 

Thus,  t  in  pa'-ter  and  au'-tem. ;  th  in  ce'-ther  ;  cl  in  Hi^er^-d-cles ;  q  in  a'-qua ; 
cr  in  a'-cris  and  vol'-u-cris  ;  chr  in  a'-chras ;  r  in  toV'-er^oAnl'-i-^s ;  m  in  et"-y- 
mo-la'-gi-a;  linamf'-bu-la-td'-ri-us;  and  gr  m  per'^-e-gi'i-^ia'-ti-o.  Respecting 
ch  and  th  cf.  §  18,  2. 

Exc.    Tib'-i  and  sib'-i  are  commonly  excepted. 

§  90.  2.  A  single  consonant,  or  a  mute  with  I  or  r,  before  the 
vowel  of  an  accented  syllable,  must  be  joined  to  the  accented  vowel. 

Thxis,  t  in  i-tin'-e^a ;  d  invi-dv'-to;  th  in  ce-ihe'-ri-us ;  cl  in  Eit-cll'-des  and 
Mer^'-a-cle'-a  ;  gr  in  a^gres'-tis  and  a-gri</-d-la  ;  pr  in  ca-pre'-d-lus  ;  qva  a-qua'- 
ri-tts ;  :\.n(\phr  in  Eitr-phra'tes. 

§  21.  8.  A  single  consonant  after  the  vowel  of  any  accented 
syllable,  except  a  penult,  must  be  joined  to  the  accented  vowel. 

JThus,  771  in  dom'-i-nus  and  doni"-i-na''-ti-o ;  t  in  pal'-e-ra ;  th  in  Scyth'-i-a  ; 
and  q  in  aq'-ui-la  (ak'-we-lah),  and  Aq"-ui-ta'-ni-a  (ak"-we-ta'-ne-ah). 

4.  When  a  mutie  with  I  or  r  follows  the  vowel  of  any  accented 
syllable,  except  the  penult,  the  mute  is  to  be  joined  to  the  accented 
vowel. 

Thus,  cr  in  ac'-rl-ter,  a&^^ri-nuf-ni-a  ;  ir  in  detf' -^rv-men' -turn  ;  pr  in  cap'-ri- 
pes,  cap"^-miJ,'-gus,  phi  in  Paph'  la-go' ^i-a;  and  phr  in  Aph"^o-dis'-i-a. 
Respecting  phi  and  phr  cf.  §  18,  2. 

Exceptions  to  thk  3tj  and  4Ta  Rules. 

Exc.  1.    A  single  consonant,  or  a  mute  with  I  or  r,  after  an  accent- 
ed a,  e,  or  o,  and  before  two  vowels  the  first  of  which  is  e,  i,  or  y, 
Bust  be  jansd  to  the  syllable  following  the  accent. 
2* 


18  COMPOUND    WORDS. ETYMOLOGY.  §  22-24 

Thus,  d  in  ra'-di-us,  tcB'-dirum,  me," -di-a' -tar ;  r  in  hce'^e-o,  C^"-ry-d'-tes , 
ck  in  bra'-cld-um  ;  q  in  re'-qui-es,  re"-quv-es'-co  ;  tr  in  pa'-tri-us,  G£-7io'-tri-a , 
and  r  and  I  in  ce"^e-a'-li^a. 

Exc.  2.  A  single  consonant  or  a  mute  with  I  or  r,  after  an  accent- 
ed u,  must  be  joined  to  the  vowel  following  it. 

Thus,  7*  in  lu'~ri-dus,  au'-rerus  ;  cr  in  £u'-cri'tus  ;  gl  in  ju'-glans  ;  and  pi  v.i 
Nau'-pU^-us,  du'-pU-co,  and  du/'-pli-ca'-tlo.     Cf.  §  18,  3. 

§  SS.     B. — Two  Consonants  between  two  Vowels. 

Any  two  consonants,  except  a  mute  followed  \>y  I  ot  r  in  the  cases 
before  mentioned,  when  standing  between  two  vowels,  must  be  sepa- 
rated. 

Thus,  rp  in  coi-'-pus,  rm  in  for' -ma  and  ger-ma'nus ;  rv  in  ca-ter'^a ;  sc  in 
ad-o-les'-cens ;  nn  in  an'-nus  ;  plith  in  aph'-tha  ;  cch  in  Bac'-chus  and  Ba&'-cha- 
na'-li-a  ;  and  thl  in  atMe'-ta. 

C. — Three  or  four  Consonants  between  two  Vowels. 

1.  When  three  consonants  stand  between  any  two  vowels,  the  last, 
-V-      or,  if  that  be  Z  or  r  after  a  mute,  the  two  last,  are  joined  to  the  latter 

vowel. 

Thus,  mpt  in  emp'-tor,  ad-emp'-tir^ ;  str  in  J'e-nes'-tra ;  mpl  in  ex-em'-plum ; 
rthr  in  ar-thri'-tis. 

2.  When  four  consonants  stand  between  two  vowels,  two  are  joined 
to  each  vowel ;  as,  nstr  in  trans-trum. 

n.   Compound  Words. 

§  23.  1.  In  dividing  a  compound  word  into  syllables  the  com- 
ponent parts  are  to  be  separated,  if  the  former  part  ends  with  a  con- 
sonant ;  as,  ab-es'-se,  in'-ers,  cir'-cum-er'-ro,  su'-per-est,  sub'-i-tus,  pra- 
ter'-e-a,  trans'-i-tur,  sub'-stru-o.  So,  also,  if  a  consonant  is  inserted  to 
prevent  hiatus,  it  is  joined  to  the  preceding  vowel ;  as,  prod'-e-o,  red'- 
e-o,  sed-it'-i-o. 

2.  But  if  the  former  part  either  ends  with  a  vowel,  or  has  dropped 
its  termination,  it  is  to  be  divided  like  a  simple  word ;  as,  def'-e-ro, 
dil'-l-gens,  be-nev'-o-lus,  prces'-to,  eg'-o-met ; — po'-tes,  po-tcs'-tis,  an'gi- 
mad-ver'-to,  ve'-ne-o  (from  venum,  eo),  7nag-nan'-i-n-  v,  am-bd'-geSy 
lon-gce'-vus. 


ETYMOLOGY. 

§  94:.     1.   Etymology  treats  of  the  different  classes  of  words, 
their  dei'ivation,  and  their  vario  is  inflections. 

2.  The  classes,  into  which  words  ar«  divided  in  reference  to  their  signifioa- 
tioB  are  called  Parts  of  Speech. 


§  25, 26.  NOONS.  19 

3.  The  parts  of  speech  in  Latin  are  tight — Substmiive  or 
Noun,  Adjective,  Pronoun,  Verb,  Adverb,  Preposition,  Conjunc- 
tion, and  Inteijection. 

4.  The  first  four  are  inflected ;  the  last  four,  which  are  sometimes 
called  Particles,  are  not  injiected,  except  that  some  adverbs  change 
their  termination  to  express  comparison. 

Rem.  -.SubstantiTes,  pronouns,  and  adjectives  are  often  included  by  grammarians  un- 
der the  general  term  nouns;  but,  in  this  Grammar,  the  word  noun  is  iised  as  synony- 
mous with  substantive  only. 

§  25.  1.  To  verbs  belong  Participles,  Gerunds,  and  Supines, 
which  partake  of  the  meaning  of  the  verb,  and  the  inflection  of  tie 
noun. 

2.  Inflection,  in  Latin  grammar,  signifies  a  change  in  the  ter- 
mination of  a  word.  It  is  of  three  kinds — declension,  conjugor 
tion,  and  comparison. 

3.  Nouns,  adjectives,  pronouns,  participles,  gerunds,  and  supines, 
are  declined ;  verbs  are  conjugated,  and  adjectives  and  adverbs  are 
comjjared. 

NOUNS. 

§  26.     1 .   A  substantive  or  noun  is  the  name  of  an  object. 

2.  A  proper  noun  is  the  name  of  an  individual  object ;  as, 
Goesar  ;  Roma,  Rome  ;   Tiberis,  the  Tiber. 

3.  A  common  or  appellative  noun  is  the  name  of  a  class  of 
objects,  to  each  of  which  it  is  alike  applicable  ;  as,  homo,  man  or 
a  man  ;  avis,  a  bird  ;  quercus,  an  oak  ;  leo,  a  Hon ;  mendacium, 
a  falsehood. 

4.  A  collective  noun  is  one  which,  in  the  singular  number,  de- 
notes a  collection  of  individuals  ;  as,  exercitus,  an  army. 

Rem.  1.  The  following  are  examples  of  nouns  used  as  collectiTes,  tIz.  exercitus,  gent 
juvenius,  multitudo,  nobilUas,  plebs,  popiilus,  turba,  vis,  and  indgus. 

5.  An  abstract  noun  is  the  name  of  a  quality,  action,  or  other 
attribute  ;  as,  bonitas,  goodness  ;  gaudium,  joy ;  festinatio,  haste 

Rem.  2.  A  concrete,  in  distinction  from  an  abstract  noun,  is  one  which  denotes  an  ob- 
ject that  kas  an  actual  and  independent  existence ;  as,  Roma,  hSmo,  populus,  fertum. 

f).  A  material  noun  is  the  name  of  a  substance  considered  in 
the  gross  ;  as,  lignum,  wood  ;  ferrum,  iron  ;  clbus,  food. 

Rem.  3.  Proper,  abstract,  and  material  nouns  become  common,  when  em- 
ployed to  denote  one  or  more  of  a  class  of  objects.  A  verb  in  the  infinitive 
mood  is  often  used  !vs  an  abstract  noun 

7.   To  nouns  belong  gender,  number,  and  case. 

REitf.  4.  Adjectives  and  participles  have  likewise  different  gejiders,  nnia- 
J>ers,  and  ca^es,  corresponding  'o  those  of  nouns. 


20  GS,NDER.  §  27-29 

GENDER. 

§  27.  1.  The  gindei'  of  a  noun  is  its  distinction  in  regard  to 
sex. 

2.  Nouns  have  three  genders — the  masculine,  the  feminine,  and 
the  neuter. 

3.  The  gender  of  Latin  nouns  is  either  natwal  or  grammatical. 

4.  Those  nouns  are  naturally  masculine  or  feminine,  which  are  used  to  de- 
signate the  sexes ;  as,  vir,  a  man ;  muUer,  a  woman. 

5.  Those  are  gi-ammatically  masculine  or  feminine,  which,  though  denoting 
objects  that  are  neither  male  nor  female,  take  adjectives  of  the  form  appropriat- 
ed to  nouns  denoting  the  sexes. 

Thus,  domtnuSy  a  lord,  is  naturally  masculine,  because  it  denotes  a  male ;  but  sermo, 
Bpeech,  is  grammatically  masculine,  because,  though  not  indicative  of  sex,  it  takes  an 
adjective  of  that  form  which  is  appropriated  to  nouns  denoting  males. 

6.  The  grammatical  gender  of  Latin  nouns  depends  either  on  their  significa- 
tion, or  on  their  declension  and  termination.  The  following  are  the  general  rales 
of  gender,  in  reference  to  signification.  Many  exceptions  to  them,  on  account 
of  termination,  occur:  these  will  be  specified  under  the, several  declensions. 

§  S8.  Masculines.  1.  Names,  proper  and  appellative,  ot 
all  male  beings  are  masculine  ;  as,  Homerus,  Homer ;  pater,  a 
father ;  consul,  a  consul ;  equus,  a  horse. 

As  proper  names  usually  follow  the  gender  of  the  general  name  under  which  they  are 
comprehended;  hence, 

2.  Names  of  rivers,  winds,  and  months,  are  masculine,  because 
Jiuvius,  ventus,  and  mensis,  are  masculine ;  as,  Tiberis,  the  Tiber ; 
Aquilo,  the  north  wind ;  Aprllis,  AprU. 

Exc.  Styx  and  some  names  of  rivers  in  a  and  eare  feminine.  ^§  62,  and  41, 1. 

3.  Names  of  mountains  are  sometimes  masculine,  because  mons  is  mascu- 
line; as,  Wirj/s,  a  mountain  of  Thessaly ;  but  they  usually  follow  the  gender 
of  their  termination ;  as,  /iic*  Atlas,  h<Bc  Ida,  hoc  Sm-acte. 

§  39.  Feminines.  1.  Names,  proper  and  appellative,  of 
all  female  beings  are  feminine ;  as,  Helena,  Helen ;  mater,  a 
mother ;  juvenca,  a  heifer. 

2.  Names  of  countries,  towns,  trees,  plants,  ships,  islands,  poems, 
and  gems,  are  feminine  ;  because  terra,  urbs,  arbor,  planta,  ndvis,  in- 
sula, fahula,  and  gemma,  are  feminine  ;  as, 

^(7j(p<«is,  Egj'pt;  Corinihits,  Covmih;  plrus,  a  pear-ti-ee;  nnrdus,  spikenard; 
Centaw-us,  the  "ship  Centaur;  Sdmos,  the  name  of  an  island;  Euhuchus,  the 
Eunuch,  a  comedy  of  Terence ;  amethystus,  an  amethyst. 

Exo.  Names  of  countries  and  islands  in  um,  i,  and  (plur.)  a,  drum,  are  neuter. — Names 
of  towns  in  t,  orum ;  four  in  o,  onis,  viz.  Truslno,  Hippo,  Narbo,  and  Sidmo,  with  Tunes, 
Taras,  and  Ckinopvs,  are  masculine.  Names  of  towns  iu  um  or  o»,  (',  and  (plur.)  a,  drum; 
those  in  e  and  ur  of  the  third  declension,  indeclinable  nouns  in  i  and  y,  and  some  barba- 
rous names,  as  Suthv.l,  Hispid  and  Gadir  are  neuter. — Names  of  trees  and  plants  in  er  of 
the  third  daclension,  (§  60),  with  baccar  and  riibur  are  neuter.  A  few  names  in  us,  i,  (§  50), 
with  oleaster,  pinaster,  Styrax  and  wiedo  are  masculine. — A  few  names  of  gems  in  us,  i, 
»re  also  masculine. 

*  To  distinguish  the  gender  of  Lath:  nouns,  grammarians  write  hie  before  th«  mascu- 
line, htsx  before  the  feminine,  and  hoc  before  the  neutsr. 


<:■■  ^ 


§  30-32. 


COMMON   AND    DOUBTFUL    GTENDKR. 


21 


§  '30.  Common  and  Doubtful  Gender.  SobS»  .words  an: 
either  masculine  or  feminine.  These,  if  they  denote  thinj^  animate, 
are  said  to  be  of  the  common  gender ;  if  things  inanimate,  of  the 
doubtful  gender. 

Of  the  former  are  parens,  a  parent ;  bos,  an  ox  or  cow :  of  the  latter,  Jinis,  an 
end 

The  following  nouns  are  of  the  common  gender: — 


^^ 


Adolescens,  a  youth. 
Afif  inis,  a  relative  by  mar- 
riage. 
Ales,  a  bird. 
Antistes,  a  chief  priest. 
Auctor,  an  autmr. 
Augur,  an  augur. 
Bos,  an  ox  or  cow. 
Cunis,  a  do(/. 
Civis,  a  citizen. 
Gomes,  a  companion. 
Coiijux,  a  spouse. 
Consors,  a  conswt. 
Conviva,  o  guest. 
Gustos,  a  keeper. 
Dux,  a  leader. 


Exsul,  an  exile. 
Grus,  a  crane. 
Hospes,  a  guest,  a  host. 
Hostis,  an  enemy. 
Index,  an  informer. 
Infans,  an  infant. 
Interpres,  an  interpreter. 
Judex,  a  judge. 
Juvenis,  a  youth. 
Martyr,  a  martyr. 
Miles,  a  soldier. 
Municeps,  a  burgess. 
Mus,  a  TKOuse. 
Nemo,  nobody. 
Obses,  a  hostage. 
PatrueUs,  a  cotisin. 


Palumbes,  a  wood-pigeon. 
Parens,  a  parent. 
Par,  a  mate. 
Prseses,  a  president. 
Prsesul,  a  chief  friest 
Princeps,   a  prtnce    or 

princess. 
Serpens,  a  serpent. 
Sacerdos,    a  priest    or 

priestess. 
Satelles,  a  Ufe-guard. 
Sus,  a  swine. 
Testis,  o  witness. 
Vates,  a  prophet. 
Vema,  a  slave. 
Vindex,  an  cmengei: 


The  following  hexameters  contain  nearly  all  the  above  nouns: — 

Conjux,  atque  parens,  princeps,  patrueUs,  et  infans, 
Affinis,  vindex,  jiidex,  dux,  miles,  et  hostis, 
Augur,  et  antistes,  juvenis,  conviva,  sacerdos, 
Munl-^we-ceps,  vates,  adolescens,  civis,  et  auctor. 
Gustos,  nemo,  comes,  testis,  sus,  bos-^ue,  canis-^we, 
Pro  consorte  tdri  par,  prsesul,  vema,  satelles, 
Mus-^e  obses,  consors,  interpres,  et  exsiil,  et  hospes. 

§  31«  1.  When  nouns  of  the  common  gender  denote  males, 
they  take  a  masculine  adjective ;  -when  they  denote  females,  a  fem- 
inine. 

2.  The  following  are  either  masculine  or  feminine  in  sense,  but 
masculine  only  in  grammatical  construction : — 

Artlfex,  an  artist.  Fur,  a  thief.  Latro,  a  robber. 

Auspex,  a  soothsayer.  Heres,  an  heir.  Liberi,  children. 

Eques,  a  horseman.  Homo,  a  man  or  woman.      Pedes,  a  footman. 

To  these  may  be  added  personal  appellatives  of  the  first  declen- 
Hion ;  as,  advena,  a  stranger ;  and  some  gentile  nouns ;  as,  Persa,  a 
Persian. 

§  32.  1.  The  following,  though  masculine  or  feminine  in  sense, 
are  feminine  only  ia  construction  : — 

Copise,  troops.  Operse,  laborers.  Vig'*  se,  watchmen. 

Custodise,  guards.  Proles,     )  offsirrina 

Exoubiee,  sentinels.         Subole<   \  ■"  ^     ^- 


22  EPICENE3, — NEUTERS. NUMBER.  §  33-35 

2.  Some  nouns,  signifying  persons,  are  neuter,  both  in  their  termi- 
nation and  construction ;  as, 

Acroama,  a  6«/o(m.         Mancipium,  |     ^  |<^°rtum  \  a  prostitute. 

AuxOia,  auxiliaries.        Servitium,    j  Prostibiilum, )    ^ 

3.  (a.)  In  some  personal  appellatives  masculines  and  feminineg 
are  distinguished  by  different  terminations  affixed  to  the  same  root 
The  masculines  end  in  ws,  er,  o,  tor,  etc. ;  the  feminines  in  a  or  trix , 
as,  coquus,  coqua  ;  magister,  magMra  ;  leno,  lena  ;  inventor,  inventrix  ; 
tibicen,  tihiclna ;  avus,  avia  ;  rex,  reglna ;  poeta,  poetna. 

(h.)  So  also  in  some  names  of  animals ;  as,  eqnus,  equa ;  gallus 
gallina  ;  leo,  lea  and  lecena.  Sometimes  the  words  are  wholly  diiFer- 
ent;  as,  taurus,  vacca. 

4.  Some  names  of  anknals  are  sometimes  masculine  and  sometimes 
feminine  without  regard  to  difference  of  sex  ;  as,  unguis,  serjiens,  dd.- 
nia,  ialpa,  tigris,  coluber  and  colUbra,  etc. 

§  33*  Epicexes.  Names  of  animals  which  include  both  sexes, 
but  admit  of  an  adjective  of  one  gender  only,  are  called  epicene. 
These  commonly  follow  the  gender  of  their  terminations. 

Thus,  passer,  a  sparrow,  corvus,  a  raven,  are  masculine ;  aqulln,  an  eagle,  vul- 
pps,  a  fox,  are  feminine ;  though  each  of  them  is  used  to  denote  both  sexes. 

Note.  This  class  includes  the  names  of  animals,  in  which  the  distinction  of  sex  is 
•elJom  attended  to.  When  it  is  necessary  to  mark  the  sex,  mas  or  femina  is  usually 
kdded. 

§  34.  Neuters.  Nouns  which  are  neither  masculine  nor 
feminine,  are  said  to  be  of  the  neuter  gender  ;  such  are, 

1.  All  indeclinable  nouns  ;  as,  fas,  nefas,  nihil,  giimmi,  pondo. 

2.  Names' of  letters;  as,  o  longum,  long  o.  But  these  are  some- 
times feminine,  litera  being  understood. 

3.  "Words  used  merely  as  such,  without  reference  to  their  meaning : 
as,  pater  est  dissyllabum ;  pater  is  dissyllabic. 

4.  All  infinitives,  imperatives,  clauses  of  sentences,  adverbs,  and 
other  particles,  used  substantively ;  as  scire  tuum,  your  knowledge  ; 
ultimum  vale,  the  last  farewell ;  hoc  diu,  this  (word)  diu. 

Remark.  1.  Words  derived  from  the  Greek  retain  the  gender  which  tlie/ 
have  in  that  language. 

Rem.  2.  Some  nouns  have  different  genders  in  the  smgular  and  plural,  ai..- 
are  called  heterogeneous  nouns.    See  §  92. 

NUMBER. 

§  3S.  1.  («•)  Number,  in  nouns,  is  the  form  by  which  they 
denote  whether  they  represent  one  object  or  more  than  one. 

(b.)  Latin  nouns  have  two  numbers, — the  singular  and  the  plural, 
—which  are  distinguished  by  their  terminations.  The  singular  num- 
ber dinotes  one  ol^'ect;  the  plui-al,  more  than  one. 


§  36-39.  PERSON. CASES. DECLENSIONS.  28 

PERSON. 

2.  Tlie  person  of  a  noun  or  pronoun  is  the  character  Bustained 
by  the  object  which  it  represents,  as  being  the  speaker,  the  per 
son  addressed,  or  the  person  or  thing  spoken  of. 

Hence  there  are  three  persons.  The  speaker  is  of  the  first  person, 
the  person  addressed  is  oi  the  second  person,  and  the  person  or  thing 
spoken  of  is  of  the  third  person. 

CASES. 

§  36.  Many  of  the  relations  of  objects,  which,  in  English,  are 
denoted  by  prepositions,  are,  in  Latin,  e'xpressed  by  a  change  of  ter- 
mination. 

Cases  are  those  terminations  of  nouns,  which  denote  their  re- 
lations to  other  words.  Latin  nouns  have  six  cases  ;  viz.  Nomi- 
native, Genitive,  Dative,  Accusative,  Vocative,  and  Ablative. 

Remark.  Though  there  are  six  cases  in  each  number,  no  noun  has  in  each 
number  so  many  different  termiuations. 

§  37.  1.  The  nominative  denotes  the  relation  of  a  subject  to  a 
finite  verb  ;  as,  ego  scribo,  I  write.     Caius  dicii,  Caius  says. 

2.  The  genitive  denotes  origin,  possessio7i,  and  many  other  rela- 
tions, which,  in  English,  are  expressed  by  the  preposition  of  or  by 
the  possessive  case ;  as,  Vita  Ccesdris,  the  life  of  Ccesar,  or  Casar's 
hfe. 

3.  The  dative  denotes  that  to  or  for  which  any  thing  is,  or  is  done ; 
as,  Jlle  mihi  librum  dedit,  He  gave  the  book  to  me. 

4.  The  accusative  is  either  the  object  of  an  active  verb,  or  of  cer 
tain  prepositions,  or  the  subject  of  an  infinitive. 

5.  The  vocative  is  the  form  appropriated  to  the  name  of  any  ob- 
ject which  is  addressed. 

6.  The  ablative  denotes  privation,  and  many  other  relations,  espe- 
cially those  expressed  in  English  by  the  prepositions  tvith,  from,  m., 
or  bi/. 

Remakk.  The  nominative  and  vocative  are  sometimes  called  casia  rwh, 
».  e.  the  uuinflected  cases;  and  the  others,  casus  ohliqui ;  i.  e.  the  oblique  or  in- 
flected cases. 

DECLENSIONS. 

§  38.  The  regular  forming  of  the  several  cases  in  both  numbers, 
by  annexing  the  appropriate  terminations  to  the  root,  is  called  de- 
clension. 

The  Latin  language  has  five  declensions  or  modes  of  declining 
nouns,  distinguished  by  the  termination  of  the  genitiTe  singular, 
which.  In  the  first  declension,  ends  in  ce,  in  the  second  in  t,  in  the 
third  in  is,  in  the  fourth  in  us,  and  in  the  fifth  in  ei 

§  30.  The  following  table  exhibits  a  comparative  view  of  the  termina 
lioQS  or  isse-^ndmgs  of  the  firs  declensions. 


24 

TERmSATIONS. 

§  4U. 

TEEMmATIONS. 

Singular. 

I. 

n. 

ILE. 

IV. 

V 

f 

-   -  ~ 

M. 

N. 

M           JV. 

M. 

N. 

Nom. 

a, 

US, 

er,  um, 

or,  etc.  e,  c<c. 

us, 

u, 

es, 

Gen. 

8B, 

h 

is. 

us, 

ei, 

Dat. 

SB, 

o, 

h 

ui. 

u, 

ei, 

Ace. 

am 

um, 

em,(im),  e,e<c. 

fim, 

u, 

em. 

Voc. 

a, 

e, 

er,  um, 

or,  etc.  e,  etc. 

us. 

ii, 

es. 

AM. 

a. 

0. 

e,  (i.) 

u. 

e. 

Plural. 

Norn- 

86, 

i, 

a. 

es,      a,  (ia), 

us, 

ua. 

es. 

Gen. 

arum. 

ornm, 

fim,     (iilm), 

1 

mun, 

eruiii, 

Dat. 

is, 

is. 

ibus, 

ibiis. 

(ubus). 

ebus. 

Ace- 

as. 

OS, 

a, 

es,      a,  (ia), 

us. 

ua. 

ea, 

Voc 

ae. 

i, 

a, 

es,      a,  (ia), 

iis, 

ua, 

es, 

AM. 

is. 

is. 

ibus. 

ibus. 

(ubus). 

ebus. 

Remarks. 

§  4:0»  1.  The  terminations  of  the  nominative,  in  the  third  declension, 
are  very  numerous.     See  ^  55,  58,  62,  66. 

2.  The  accusative  singular  of  masculines  and  feminines,  always 
ends  in  "n. 

3.  Th  i  vocative  singular  is  like  the  nominative  in  all  Latin  nouns, 
except  those  in  us  of  the  second  declension. 

4.  The  nominative  and  vocative  plural  always  end  alike. 

5.  The  genitive  plural  always  ends  in  um. 

6.  The  dative  and  ablative  plural  always  end  alike ; — in  the  1st 
and  2d  declensions,  in  is ;  in  the  8d,  4th,  and  5th,  in  bus. 

7.  The  accusative  plural  of  masculines  and  feminines,  always  ends 
in  s. 

8.  Nouns  of  the  neuter  gender  have  the  accusative  and  vocative 
like  the  nominative,  in  both  numbers ;  and  these  cases,  in  the  plural, 
always  end  in  a. 

9.  The  1st  and  5th  declensions  contain  no  nouns  of  the  neuter  gender,  and 
the  4th  and  5th  contain  no  proper  names. 

10.  Every  inflected  word  consists  of  two  parts — a  root,  and  a  ter- 
mination. The  root  or  crude  form,  is  the  part  which  is  not  changed 
by  inflection.  The  termination  is  the  part  annexed  to  the  root.  The 
root  of  a  declined  word  may  be  found  by  removing  the  termination  of 
any  of  its  oblique  cases.  The  case  commonly  selected  for  this  pur- 
pose is  the  genitive  singular. 

11.  The  preceding  tabi?  exhibits  tenninations  only.  In  the  fifth  declension, 
the  e  of  the  final  syllable,  hough  unchanged,  is  considered  a«  belonging  to  the 
termination. 


§  41-43. 


FIRST    DECLENSION. EXCEPTIONS. 


25 


FIEST  DECLENSION. 

§  4-1.     Nouns  of  the  first  declension  end  in  a,  e,  as,  es.  Those 
in  a  and  e  are  feminine ;  those  in  as  and  es  are  ma?culine. 
Latin  nouns  of  the  first  declension  end  only  in  a.     They  are  thus  declined  :— 


Singular. 


Plural. 


Norn. 

mfi'-sa, 

a  muse ; 

No7n. 

mu'-sae, 

muses ; 

Gen. 

mu'-SEe, 

of  a  muse ; 

Gen. 

mu-sa-rnm, 

of  muses , 

Dat. 

niu'-sae, 

to  a  muse : 

Dat. 

mu'-sis, 

to  7nuses 

Ace. 

mu'-siim, 

a  muse ; 

Aec. 

mu'-sas, 

muses  ' 

Voc. 

mu'-sa, 

0  muse  ; 

Voc. 

mu'-sae, 

0  muses , 

AM. 

mu'-sa, 

with  a  muse. 

All. 

mu'-sis, 

with  muses. 

Sa-git'-ta,  an  arrow. 
Stel'-la,  a  star. 
T6'-ga,  a  gown. 


In  like  manner  decline 
Au-la,  a  hall.  Lit'-e-ra,  a  letter. 

Cu-ra,  care.  Lus-t-in'-i-a,  a  nightingale. 

Ga'-le-a,  a  helmet.      Mach'-i-na,  a  machine. 
In'-sii-la,  an  island.    Pen'-na,  a  feather,  a  quill.    Vi'-a,  a  way. 

Note.  As  the  Latin  language  has  no  article,  appellative  nouns  may  be  ren- 
dered either  with  or  without  the  English  articles  a,  an,  or  the,  according  to  their 
.'ounection. 

Exceptions  in  Gender. 

§  43.  1.  Names  proper  and  appellative  of  men,  as,  SuUa,  Cinna;  poeta, 
a  poet;  nauta,  a  sailor;  and  names  of  rivers,  though  ending  in  a,  are  mascu- 
line: §  28,  1  and  2.  But  the  following  names  of  rivers  have  been  used  as  femi- 
nine :  viz.  Albuln,  AlUa,  Druentia,  Garumna,  Himera,  Matrdna,  Mosdla,  Trebia. 
Leihe  is  alwavs  feminine. 

Ossa  and  (Eta,  names  of  mountains,  are  masculine  or  feminine. 

2.  Hadria,  the  Adriatic  sea,  ddma  in  VirgD  and  Statius,  and  talpa  in  Virgil, 
are  masculine. 

Exceptions  in  Declension. 

§  43.  Genitive  singular.  1.  The  poets  sometimes  formed  the 
genitive  singular  in  ai ;  as,  aula,  gen.  aulai. 

2.  Famiiia,  after  pater,  mater,  flius,  or  flia,  usually  forms  its  gen- 
itive in  as  :  as,  mater-familias,  the  mistress  of  a  family ;  "en.  jnatris- 
familias ;  nom.  plur.  matres-familias  or  familidrum.  Some  other 
words  anciently  formed  their  genitive  in  the  same  manner. 

Genitive  plural.  The  genitive  plural  of  j)atronymics  in  es,  of  sev- 
cra.  compounds  in  cola  and  gtna,  and  of  some  names  of  nations,  is 
.sometimes,  especially  in  poetry,  formed  in  urn  instead  o^  drum;  as, 
/Eneafhnn,  Calicolum,  terrigenum,  Laplthum.  So  amphorum,  drach- 
mum,  for  amphorarum,  drachmarum. 

Dative  and  Ablative  plural.  The  following  nouns  have  sometimes 
Cihus  instead  of  is,  in  the  dative  and  ablative  plural,  especially  when 
it  is  necessary  to  distinguish  them  from  the  same  cases  of  masculinea 
in  »w  of  the  seiond  declension  having  the  same  root;  as,  filiis  et  flia- 
hins,  U)  Bons  and  darghters. 


26 


GREEK   NO  UNS. SECOND    DECLENSION.  §  44-46 


Dea,  a  goddess. 
Filia,  a  daughter. 


Equa,  a  mare. 
Mula,  a  she  mule. 


The  ase  of  a  similar  termLnation  ia  anima,  asina,  liberia,  ndta,  conserva,  ani 
some  other  words,  rests  ou  inferior  authority. 

Greek  Notnrs. 

§  44:.  Nouns  of  the  first  declension  in  e,  as,  and  es,  and  some 
also  in  a,  are  Greek.  Greek  nouns  in  a  are  declined  like  musa,  ex- 
cept that  they  sometimes  have  an  in  the  accusative  singular;  as, 
Ossa;  ace.  OssaJ7i,  or  Ossan. 

Greek  nouns  in  e,  aj,  and  es,  are  thus  declined  in  the  singular  number: — 

N.  An-chi'-ses, 
G.  An-chi'-sse, 
B.  An-chi'-sse, 
Ac.  An-chi'-sen, 
V.  An-chi'-se  or  a, 
Ab.  An-chi'-sa  or  e. 


N. 

Pe-nel'-6-pe, 

N. 

^-ne'-as, 

G. 

Pe-uel'-o-pes, 

G. 

M-nS'-ss, 

D. 

Pe-nel'-6-pse, 

D. 

iE-ne'-ae, 

Ac. 

Pe-nel'-6-pen, 

Ac. 

^-ne'-am  or  an, 

V. 

Pe-nel'-o-pe, 

V. 

jE-ne'-a, 

Ah. 

Pe-nel'-6-pe. 

Ab. 

iE-ne'-a. 

§  45.     In  like  manner  decline 

Al'-o-e,  aloes. 

E-pit'-6-me,  an  abridgment. 

This'-be. 

Bo'-re-as,  the  north  wind. 

Mi'-das. 


Ti-a'-ras,  a  turban. 
Co-me'-tes,  a  comet. 
Dy-uas'-tes,  a  ruler. 
Pri-am'-I-des,  a  son  of  Priam. 
Py-ri'-tes,  a  kind  o/ stone. 


1.  Most  proper  names  in  es,  except  patronymics,  follow  the  third  declension; 
but  in  the  accusative  they  often  have  both  em  and  en,  and  in  the  vocative  both 
es  and  e.     See  §§  80,  iv,  and  81. 

2.  Greek  nouns  of  the  first  declension,  which  admit  of  a  plural,  are  declined 
in  that  number  like  the  plural  of  mma. 

8.  The  Latins  frequently  change  the  terminations  of  Greek  nouns  in  es  and 
g  into  a  ;  as,  Atrldes,  Atrida,  a  son  of  Atreus;  Perses,  Persa,  a  Persian;  geo- 
metres,  geomelra,  a  geometrician ;  Circe,  Circa ;  epitome,  epiidma ;  gi-ammatice, 
grammatlca,  grammar;  rhetortce,  rhetorica,  oratory. — So  also  tiaras,  tiara. 


SECOND  DECLENSION. 

s  46.  Nouns  of  the  second  declension  end  in  er,  ir,  us,  um, 
cs  on.  Those  ending  in  um  and  on  are  neuter;  the  rest  are 
masculine. 

Nouns  in  er,  us,  and  um,  are  thus  declined : — 


A  kingdom. 

reg'-niim, 

reg'-ni, 

reg'-no, 

reg'-niim, 

reg'-niim, 

reg'-no.  • 


Singular. 

A  lord. 

A  son-in-law. 

A  field. 

A^. 

dom'-i-niis, 

ge'-ner, 

a-ger, 

O. 

dom'-i-ni, 

gen'-e-ri, 

a'-gri, 

D. 

dom'-i-no, 

gen'-e-ro, 

a'-gro, 

Ac. 

dom'-i-nfim, 

gen'-e-riim, 

a'-grfim, 

V. 

dom'-i-ne, 

ge'-ner. 

a'-ger, 

Ab. 

dom'-i-no. 

gen'-6ro. 

a'-gro. 

gen  -e-ri, 

a-gn, 

rcg-na, 

gen-e-ro'-rum, 

a-gro'-rum, 

reg'-no'-ruroi 

geu'-e-ris, 
gen'-e-ros. 

a'-gris, 
a'-gros, 

reg'-nis, 
reg'-na, 

gen'-e-ri, 

a'-gri, 

reg'-na, 

gen'-e-ris. 

a'-gris. 

reg'-ms. 

§  47-49.  second  declension. — ^exceptions.  27 

Plxtkal, 

N.    dom'-i-ni, 
G.    dom-i-no'-rum, 
D.    dom'-i-nis, 
Ac.  dom'-i-nos, 
V.    dom'-i-ni, 
Ab.  dom'-i-nis. 

Like  dominus  decline 

An'-i-mus,  the  mind.  Fo'-cus,  a  hearth.  Nu'-me-rus,  a  number. 
Clip'-e-us,  a  shield.  Gla'-di-us,  a  sword.  O-ce'-a-nus,  the  ocean. 
Cor'-vus,  a  raven.       Lu'-cus,  a  grove.         Tro'-chus,  a  trundling-hoop. 

Note.    Nouns  in  us  of  the  second  declension  are  the  only  Latin  nouns,  whose  nomina- 
tiye  and  vocative  singular  differ  in  form.     See  §  40,  R.  3. 

§  47.  A  few  nouns  in  er,  like  gcner,  add  the  terminations  to  the 
nominative  singular,  as  a  root.  They  are  the  compounds  of  gero  and 
fei-o;  as,  armlger, -eri,  an  armor-bearer ;,  Zuci/er, -m,  the  morning 
star ;  and  the  following : — 

A-dul'-ter,  an  adulterer.     Ll'-ber,  Bacchus.  Pu'-er,  a  bop. 

Cel'-tJ-ber,  a  CeUiberian.  Lib'-e-ri,  (plur.),  children.  So'-cer,  a  father-in-law. 
T-ber,  a  Spania/rd.  Pres'-b^-ter,  an  elder.  Ves'-per,  the  evening. 

MuV-ci-ber,  Vulcan,  sometimes  has  this  form. 

§  4:8.  1.  All  other  nouns  in  er  reject  the  e  in  adding  the  termi- 
nations, (§  322,  4),  and  are  declined  like  ager;  thus, 

A'-per,  a  wild  boar.  Ll'-ber,  a  booh.  Al-ex-an'-der. 

Aus'-ter,  Oie  south  wind.         Ma-gis'-ter,  a  master.  Is'-ter. 

Fa'-ber,  a  workman.  On'-a-ger,  a  wild  ass.  Teu'-cer. 

2.  Vir,  a  man,  with  its  compounds,  and  the  patrial  Trevir,  (the  only 
nouns  in  tV,)  are  declined  like  gener. 

Like  regnum  decline 

An'-tmm,  a  cave.        Ex-em'-plum,  an  example.  Prse-sid'-i-um,  a  defence 

A'-tri-um,  a  hall.         Ne-go'-ti-um,*  a  business.  Sax'-um,  a  rock. 

Bel'-lum,  war.  Ni'-trura,  natron.  Scep'-tnmi,  a  sceptre. 

Exceptions  in  Gender. 

§  49.      1.  The  following  nouns  in  us  and  os  are  feminine : — 

Abyssus,  a  bottomless  pit.  Dialectos,  a  dialect.  MOtos,  vermilion. 

Alvus,  the  belly.  Diphthongus,  a  diphthong.  Phams(os),  a  lighthouse. 

Antidotus,  an  antidote.  Domus,  a  house,  home.  Plinthus,   the  base  of  a 

Arctos(us),  the  Northern  Eremus,  a  desert.  column. 

Bear.  Humus,  the  ground.  Vannus,  a  corrirfan, 
Carbasus,  a  sail. 

2.  Greek  nouns  in  ddus  (>]  oSoq)^  and  metros,  are  likewise  feminine;  as, 
%yn4dus,  an  assembly;  dioTnetros,  a  diamster. 


•  Pronouncad  ne-g(/-ihe^um,.    8m  J  12. 


28  SECOND    DECLENSION. tXCEPTIONS.  §  50-53. 

§  d>0«  Names  of  countries,  towns,  trees,  plants,  etc.  are  feminine.  Sea 
k  29,  2 

I'et  tlie  following  names  of  plants  are  masculine : — 

Acanthus,  bear's-foot.  Ebulus,  an  elder.  Riibus,  a  blackberry-bush. 

Anuuaiitus,  nmnranih.  Helleboinis,  hellebore.  Tribulus,  a  caltriyps. 

Asjiarajius,  asparagus.  Intiibus,  endive. 

Calamus,  a  reed.  Juncus,  a  bulrush.  And  sometimes 

Carduivs,  a  thistle.  Raphanus,  o  radish.  Amaracus,  marjoram. 

Dumus,  a  bramble.  Rharanos,  buck-thorn.  Cytisus,  snait-clover. 

Oleaster  and  pinaster,  names  of  trees,  are  also  masculine. 

The  following  names  of  gems  are  also  masculine : — 

Brrvllus,  a  beryl.  Chrysoprasus,  chrysoprase.      So  also, 

Carbuuciilus,  a  carbuncle.     Opalus,  opal.  PjTopus,  gold-bronze. 

Chrysolithus,  chrysnlite,  and  smaragdus,  an  emerald,  are  doubtful. 

Names  of  females  in  um  are  feminine:  §  29,  1;  as,  men  Ghjcerium,  Ter. 

Names  of  trees  and  plants  in  mto  are  generally  neuter;  as,  o^n/ni,  parsley; 
acon'ttum,  wolf's  bane. 

Gmopus,  Pontus,  HeUespontus,  Isthmus,  and  aU  plural  names  ia  i  of  countries 
and  to^\^lS  are  masculine.     Ahydus{os)  is  doubtful. 

Names  of  countries  and  towns  ending  in  um,  or,  if  plural,  in  a,  are  neuter; 
as,  Ilium  or  Hum  ;  Ecbdtdna,  orum. 

§  51.      The  following  are  doubtful,  but  more  frequently  masculine: — 

Balanus,  a  date.        Grossus,  an  unripe  Jig.        Phaselus,  a  light  vessel. 
Barbltos,  a  lute.        Pampinus,  a  vine4eaf. 

Atdmus,  an  atom,  and  cdlus,  a  distaff,  are  doubtful,  but  more  frequently  feini- 
•ine. 

Pelagus  the  sea,  and  mriis,  poison,  are  neuter. 

Vulgits,  the  common  people,  is  neuter,  and  rarely  masculine. 

Exceptions  in  Declension. 

§  52.  Genitive  singular.  When  the  genitive  singular  ends  in  tt, 
j«e  poets  frequently  contract  it  into  I ;  as,  ingeni,  for  ingeiiii. 

Vocative  singular.  The  vocative  of  nouns  in  us  is  sometimes  _  like 
Ae  nominative,  especially  in  poetry ;  as,  fiuvius,  Latinus,  in  VirgiL 
So,  audi  tu,  populus  Albanus.    Liv. 

Proper  names  in  lus  omit  e  in  the  vocative ;  as,  Horatius,  Horati ; 
Virgilius,  Vij'giU. 

Filius,  a  son,  and  genius,  a  guardian  angel,  make  also  Jili  and  geni.  Other 
douns  in  ius,  includmg  patrials  and  possessives  derived  from  proper  names, 
form  their  vocative  regularly  Ln  e ;  as,  Belius,  Delie ;  Tirynihius,  Tirynthie  ; 
Ltiertiiis,  Laertie. 

§  53.  Genitive  plural.  The  genitive  plural  of  some  nouns  of 
the  second  declension,  especially  of  those  which  denote  money,  weight 
and  measure,  is  commonly  formed  in  um,  instead  of  Drum:  §  322,  4. 

Such  are  particularly  nummum,  sestertium,  denarium,  medimnum,  jugerum, 
mvdiiim,  ta/oiliim.  Thesame  form  occnrs  in  other  words,  especially  in  iioetry; 
as,  detim;  liberum,  Daiiaum ;  etc.,  and  sometimes  <w»  is  loimd  instead  of  um  • 
as,  A:hivxw.     Virg.     Cf  ^  322,  8. 


§  54,  55.  THIRD    DECLENSION.  2& 

Deiis,  a  god,  is  thus  declined  : — 
Singular.  Plural. 

N.  de'-us,  N.  di'-i,  di,  or  de'-i, 

G.  de'-i,  G.  de-5-rum, 

D.  de'-o,  D  di'-is,  dis,  or  de'-is, 

Ac.  de'-um,  Jic.  de-os, 

V.  de'-us,  V.  di-i,  di,  or  de'-i, 

Ab.  de'-o.  Ab.  di'-is,  dis,  or  de'-is. 

Jesus,  or  /psms,  the  name  of  the  Savior,  has  um  in  the  accusative,  and  u 
in  all  the  c  Jier  oblique  cases. 

Greek  Nouns. 

§  54.  1.  Os  and  on,  in  the  second  declension,  are  Greek  ter- 
minations, and  are  commonly  changed,  in  Latin,  into  us  and  tit/i  ;  but 
sometimes  both  forms  are  in  use  ;  as,  Alpheos,  and  Alpheus  ;  I  Hon  and 
Ilium.  Greek  names  in  ros  after  a  consonant  commonly  chanoe  ros 
into  er ;  as,  Alexandras,  Alexander ;  Teucros,  Teucer.  In  a  few  words 
ros  is  changed  to  rus  ;  as,  Codrus,  hydrus,  and  once  in  Virgil,  Teucrus. 

Greek  nouns  are  thus  declined  in  the  singjular  number : — 


SiTigulnr. 

N.   De'-los,  Andro'-ge-os, 

G.    De'-li,  An-dro'-ge-o,  or  i, 

D.    De'-lo,  An-dro'-ge-5, 

Ac.  De'-lon  or  Um,  An-di'o'-ge-d,  or-  on, 

V.    De'-le,  An-dro'-ge-os, 

Ab.  De'-lo.  An-di'o'-ge-6. 


Barbiton,  a  lyre. 
N.   bar'-bl-ton, 
G.   bar'-bi-ti, 
D.    bar'-bi-to, 
Ac.  bar'-bl-ton, 
V.    bar'-bl-ton, 
Ab.  bar'-bi-to. 


2.  The  plurals  of  Greek  nouns  in  os  and  on  are  declined  like  those  of  dominua 
and  regnum ;  but  the  nominative  plural  of  nomis  in  os  sometimes  ends  in  cb  , 
as,  cane2)hdr(B. 

8.  In  early  writers  some  nouns  in  os  have  a  genitive  in  u  (ot/);  as,  Menandru. 
Ter. 

4.  A  genitive  plural  in  on,  instead  of  orMwi^  occurs  in  the  titles  of  books  and 
in  some  names  ot  places ;  as,  Georgicm;  Phdinon  arce.     Sail. 

5.  Greek  proper  names  in  eits  (see  §  9,  R.  3),  are  declined  like  dommus,  exctpt 
that  the  vocative  ends  in  eu;  but  sometimes  in  the  genitive,  dative,  and  accu- 
sative also,  they  retain  the  Greek  fonn,  viz.  gen.  eds,  dat.  ei  (contracted  ei), 
ace.  ed  or  ed,  and  are  of  the  third  declension,  bee  ^§  86,  and  806,  (1.)  So  in 
Lucretius  the  neuter  peldgus  (Greek  ^ja^^cc,  esc)  has  an  accusative  plural 
pelage  for  pelngea  after  the  third  declension.  §  83, 1. — See  also  respecting  a  geni- 
tive in  i  of  some  proper  nouns  in  es,  ^  73,  Rem. — Panthu  occurs  in  Virgil,  A.  2, 
822,  as  the  vocative  of  Panthus.  Of.  \  81. 

THIRD   DECLENSION.  . 

§  55.  The  number  of  final  letters,  in  this  declension,  is 
twelve.  Five  are  vowels — a,  e,  ^,  o,  y ;  and  seven  are  conso- 
nants— c,  I,  P,  r,  s,  t,  X.  The  number  of  its  final  syllables  ex- 
ceeds fifty. 

Rkm.    Thj  following  terminatiors  belong  exclusively  to  Greek  nouns ;  vi». 
ma  i  y,  an,  In,  On,  yti,  er,  yr,  ys,  eu$,  yx,  Inx,  ynx,  and  plurals  in  e. 
8* 


30  THIRD    DECLENSION.  §  56. 

Mode  of  declining  Nouns  of  the  Third  Declension. 

To  decline  a  word  properly,  in  this  declension,  it  is  necessary  to  know  its  gender,  its 
nominative  singular,  and  opb  of  its  oblique  cases ;  since  the  root  of  the  casfcs  is  not  al- 
ways found  entire  and  UlJCh^ngoJ  in  the  nominative.  The  case  usually  selected  for  this 
purpose  is  the  genitive  singular.  The  formation  of  the  accusative  singular,  and  of  the 
nominative,  accusative,  and  vocative  plural,  depends  upon  the  gender:  if  it  is  masculine 
or  feminine,  these  cases  have  one  form ;  if  aeuter,  another. 

S  OW»      The  student  should  first  fix  well  in  his  3iemc-v  tbe  teiminations  of  one 
of  these  forms.    He  should  next  learn  the  nominatire  and  gecitiva  sicju^xr  of  the  wo.  ' 
which  is  to  be  declined.    If  is  be  removed  from  the  genitive,  the  remainder  will  tslways  i 
the  root  of  the  oblique  cases,  and  by  annexing  their  terminatioins  k>  this  root,  >he  vroi  J  \ 
declined;  thus,  rupes,  genitive  (found  in  the  dictionary)  ru^is,  root  rup,  daiive  rup\^>  v 
BO  ars,  gen.  arrts,  root  art,  dat.  arti,  etc. ;  opus,  gen.  opens,  root  oper,  dat.  opSti,  cte. 

Rules    for    Forming   the   Nominative   Singular   of    tsiV. 
Third  Declension  from  the  Root. 

I.  Roots  ending  in  c,  g ;  6,  m,  p ;  u,  t,  d,  and  some  in  r,  add  s  ti 
form  the  nominative ;  as,  trahis,  trabs ;  hiemis,  hiems ;  gruis,  grus. 

Remark  1.  T,  d  and  r  before  s  are  dropped;  as,  nep6t\&,  nepos;  laiuTis,  lavs; 
Jlo7-is,  fios.     So  bov'iB,  bos,  drops  v. 

Rem.  2.  Cand  g  before  s  forni  x ;  as,  wcis,  vox ;  regis,  rex.  So  vs  forms  a 
in  7Mris,  7iix.     Cf.  ^§  3,  2,  and  171,  1. 

Rem.  3.  Short  i  in  the  root  before  c,  b,  p,  t,  is  commonly  changed  to  e ;  as, 
poll'tds,  pollex ;  coelibis,  coelehs;  principis,  pn^inceps;  comitis,  comes.  So  jJ  ia 
changed  to  e  in  aucupis,  auceps. 

Rem.  4.  Short  e  or  c!  before  r  in  neuters  is  changed  to  u ;  as,  geiieris,  gcnUs ; 
temjjdria,  ttmpus. 

Rem.  5.  Short  e  before  r  is  changed  to  l  in  the  masculines  ciner'is,  clnis ; 
cucwnen^,  cucumis ;  2)ulveris,  jndvis  ;  vovieria,  vmnis. 

Rem.  6.  A  few  and  those  mostly  monosyllabic  roots  of  masculines  and  fem- 
inines,  not  increasing  in  the  genitive,  add  es  or  is,  instead  of  s  alone;  as,  gen. 
rujns,  nom.  rupes ;  gen.  awris,  nom.  auris. 

Rem.  7.  A  few  neuters  add  e  to  the  root  to  form  the  nominative;  as,  reHa, 
rete ;  maris,  mare. 

n.  To  roots  ending  in  I  and  n,  to  some  in  r  and  s,  and  to  those  af 
most  neuters  in  t,  no  addition  is  made  in  forming  the  nominative ;  as, 
animaVis,  animal ;  canonis,  canon  ;  kono7is,  honor ;  assis,  as. 

Remark  1.  Final  on  and  tn  in  the  roots  of  masculines  and  feminines,  become 
0  in  the  nominative;  as,  sentionis,  sermo;  arundlnis,  arundo. 

Rem.  2.  Final  In  in  the  roots  of  neuters  becomes  en  in  the  nominative;  as, 
jlwninis,  flumen.     So  also  in  the  masculines,  oscen,  pecten,  tiblcen  and  tubicen. 

Rem.  3.  Tr  and  br  at  the  end  of  a  root,  take  e  between  them  in  the  nominsr 
live;  as,  pntris,  pater;  imhris,  imber.     Cf.  §§  108,  48,  and  106. 

Rem.  4.  Short  6  is  changed  to  u  in  ebdris,  6b&r ;  femdris,  femur ;  jecdris,  je- 
c&r ;  and  robOrif,  robur. 

Rem.  5.  In  the  roots  of  neuters  at  drops  t,  and  it  becomes  ut  in  the  nomina- 
tive; as,  pii/'inaiis,  poema;  capitis,  caput. 

Rem.  6.  Roots  of  this  class  ending  in  repeated  consonants  drop  one  of  thenj 
la  thj  nominative;  as,  fellis,  fd ;  farris,  jar ;  assis,  as  ;  bessis,  oes. 


§  '7. 


THIRD    DECLENSION. 


31 


The  following  are  the  two  forms  of  termination  in  this  declension:— 


Singular 

.  Plural 

Masc.  and  Fern. 

Neut. 

Masc.  and  Fern. 

Neut. 

N.    * 

* 

N.    es, 

a,  (ia), 

G.    is, 

is, 

G.     um,  (ium), 

lim,  (ium), 

X>.    i. 

i, 

D.     ibus, 

ibus, 

Ac.  em,  (im), 

* 

Ac.  es. 

a,  (ia). 

V.    * 

* 

V.     es, 

a,  (la). 

Ab.  e,  (i). 

e, 

CO- 

Ab.   ibus. 

ibus. 

The  asterisk  stands  for  the  nominative,  and  for  those  cases  which  are  lifee  it. 
§  57.      The  following  are  examples  of  the  most  common  forms  ot 
nouns  of  this  declension,  declined  through  all  their  cases. 


Honor,  honor ;  masc. 


Singular. 
N.    ho'-nor, 
ho-no'-ris, 
ho-no'-ri, 
ho-no'-rem, 
ho'-nor, 
ho-n5'-re. 


G. 

D. 

Ac 

V. 

Ab 


Plural. 
ho-no'-r°s, 
ho-no'-rum, 
ho-nor'-i-bus, 
ho-no'-res, 
ho-no'-res, 
ho-nor'-i-bus. 


Rupes,  a  rock ;  fem. 


Singular. 
N.  ru'-pes, 
G.  ru'-pis, 
D. 
Ac 
V. 
Ab 


ru  ■ 


ru  -pem, 

ru'-pes, 

ru'-pe. 


Plural. 
ru'-pes, 
ru'-pi-um, 
ru'-pi-bus, 
ru'-pes, 
ru'-pes, 
ru'-pi-bus. 


Ars,  art;  fem. 


Singular. 
N.     ars, 
SH-'-tis, 
ar'-ti, 
ar'-tem, 
ars, 


G. 
D. 

Ac 
V. 


Ab.  ar'-te. 


Plural. 

tes, 

ti-um,* 
■ti-bus, 
-tes, 
tes, 
ar '-ti-bus. 


ar 
ar' 
ar 
ar 
ar 


Sermo,  speech ;  masc. 


Singular. 
N.    ser'-mo, 
G. 
D. 
Ac. 
V. 
Ab. 


-nis, 


ser-mo 

ser-mo'-ni, 

ser-mo'-nem, 

ser'-mo, 

ser-mo'-ue. 


Plural. 
ser-mo'-nes, 
ser-mo'-num, 
ser-nion'-i-bus, 
ser-mo'-nes, 
ser-mo'-nes, 
ser-iuon'-i-bus. 


Turris,  a  tower ;  fem. 


Singular. 
N.     tur'-ris, 
tur'-ris, 
tur'-ri, 

tur'-rim,  rem, 
tur'-ris. 


G. 

D. 

Ac. 

V. 

Ab. 


tur  -n,  or  re. 


Plural. 
tur'-res, 
tur'-ri-um, 
tur'-ri-bus, 
tur'-res, 
tur'-res, 
tur'-ri-bu8. 


Nox,  night ;  fem. 


Singular. 
N.     nox, 
noc'-tis, 
noc'-ti, 
noc'-tem, 
nox. 


G. 
D. 
Ac. 
V. 


Ab.  noc'-te. 


Plural. 
noc'-tes, 
noc'-ti-um,* 
noe'-ti-bus, 
noc'-tes, 
noc'-tes, 
noc'-ti-bus. 


Miles,  a  soldier ;  com.  gen. 


Singular. 

N.  mi'-les, 

G.  mil'-i-tis, 

D.  mil'-i-ti, 

Ac.  mil'-i-tem, 

V.  mi'-les, 

Ab.  mil'-i-te. 


Plural. 
mil'-i-tes, 
mil'-i-tum, 
mi-lit'-i-bus, 
mil'-i-tes, 
mil'-i-tes, 
mi-lit'  -i-bus. 


Pater,  a  father ;  masc. 


Singular. 
N.     pa'-ter, 
pa'-tris, 
pa'-tri, 
pa'-trem, 
pa'-ter, 
pa'-tre. 


G. 

D. 
Ac. 
V. 
Ab 


Plural. 
pa'-tres, 
pa'-trum, 
pat'ri-bus, 
pa'-tres, 
pa'-tres, 
pat'-ri-bu8. 


•Pronounced  ar'-sA«-am,  noi/-slie.v,ni.    S«e  §  12. 


32 


THIRD    DFTLENSION. 


S.*)? 


Sedile,  a  seat ;  neut. 


Singular. 
N.  sp.-di'-le, 
se-di'-lis, 
se-di'-!i, 
se-di'-le, 
se-di'-le, 
se-di'-li. 


G. 

D. 

Ac. 

V. 

Ah. 


Plural. 
se-dil'-i-a, 
se-dil'-i-um, 
se-dil'-i-bus, 
se-dil'-i-a, 
se-dil'-i-a, 
se-dil'-i-bus. 


Carmen,  a  verse;  neut. 

Plural. 
car'-mi-na, 
car'-mi-num, 
car-min'-i-bus, 
car'-mi-na, 
car'-mi-na, 
car-min'-i-bus. 


Singular. 

N.  car' -men, 

G.  car'-mi-nis, 

D.  car'-mi-ni, 

Ac.  car'-men, 

V-  car'-men, 

Ah.  car'-mi-ne. 


VirjTO,  a  virfjh,     fem. 


Iter,  a  journey :  neut. 


Singular. 

N.  i'-ter, 

G.  i-tin'-e-ris, 

D.  i-tin'-e-ri, 

Ac.  i'-ter, 

V.  i'-ter. 

Ah.  i-tin'-e-re. 


Plural. 
I-tin'-e-ra, 
i-tin'-e-rum, 
it-i-ner'-i-bus, 
i-tin'-e-ra, 
i-tin'-e-ra, 
it-i-ner'-i-bus. 


Lapis,  a  stone ;  masc. 


Singular. 

N.  la' -pis, 

G.  lap'-i-dis, 

D.  lap'-i-di, 

Ac.  lap'-i-dem, 

V.  la-pis, 

Ab  lap'-i-de. 


Plural. 
lap'-i-des, 
lap'-i-dum, 
la-pid'-i-bus, 
lap'-i-des, 
lap'-i-des, 
la-pid'i-bus. 


Singular. 
N.  vir'-go, 
G. 
D. 
Ac. 
V. 
Ah. 


vu"  -gi-ni, 
vir'-gi-nem, 
vir'-go, 
vir'-gi-ne. 


i  Hural. 

vir'-gi-nes, 

vii''-gi-niun, 

vir-gin'-i-bus, 

vir'-gi-nes, 

vir'-gi-nes, 

vir-o"in'-i-bus. 


neut. 


Animal,  an  animal , 

Plural. 
an-i-ma'-Ii-a, 
an-i-ma'-li-uni, 
an-i-mal'-i-bus. 


Singular. 
N.  an'-i-mal, 
G.  an-i-ma'-lis, 
D.  an-i-ma'-li, 
Ac.  an'-i-mal, 
V.  an'-i-mal. 
Ah.  an-i-ma'-li. 


an-i-ma'-li-a, 
an-i-ma'-li-a, 
an-i-mal'-i-bns. 


Opus,  work ;  neut. 


Singular. 
N.  o'-pus, 
op'-e-ris, 
op'-e-ri, 
o'-pus, 
o'-pus, 
op'-e-re. 


G. 

n. 

Ac. 

V. 

Ah. 


Plural. 
op'-e-ra, 
op'e-rum, 
o-per'-i-bus, 
op'-e-ra, 
op'-e-ra, 
o-per'-i-bus. 


Caput,  a  head;  neut. 


Singular. 
N.     ca'-put, 
cap'-i-tis, 
cap'-i-ti, 
ca'-put, 
ca'-put, 
cap'-i-te. 


G. 
D. 

Ac 
V. 
Ah 


Plural. 
cap'-i-ta, 
cap'-i-tum, 
ca-pit'-i-bus, 
cap'-i-ta^ 
cap'-i-ta, 
ca-pit'-i-bus. 


Singular. 

N.  po-e'-ma, 

G.  po-em'-a-tis, 

D.  po-em'-a-ti, 

Ac.  po-e'-ma, 

V.  po-e'-aa, 

Ab.  po-em'  i-te. 


Poema,  a  poein;  neut. 

Plural. 
po-em'-a-ta, 


po-em'-a-tum, 

po-e-mat'-i-bus,  or  po-em'-a-tis, 

po-em'-a-ta, 

po-em'-a-ta, 

po-e-mat'-i-bus,  or  po-em'-a-tia. 


Rem.  1.    But  numerals  in  io;  as,  binio,  trinio,  etc.,  except  M«io,  unity,  are 
masculine. 


^  ^.s-cl.  thttid  declension, o.knber.  8b 

Rdles  for  the  Gender  of  Noxtns  of  the  Third  Declension 

§  58.  Nouns  whose  gender  is  determined  by  their  si^iification,  accord- 
ing to  the  general  rules,  \  28 — 34,  are  not  mcluded  in  the  followuig  rules  and 
exceptions. 

MASCULINES. 
Nouns  ending  in  o,  er,  or,  es  increasing  in  the  genitive,  os,  and 
»,  are  masculine;  ri, 

fermo,  speech;  ddlor,  pain; /os,  a  flower;  career,  a  prison;  jaes,  a  foot; 
cdtum,  a  rule. 

Exceptions  in  0. 

§59.  1.  Abstract  and  collective  nouns  in  io  are  feminine ;  as, 
ratio,  reason ;  legio,  a  legion. 

Rem.  1.    But  numerals  in  io; 
asculme. 

2.  Nouns  in  do  and  go,  of  more  than  two  syllables,  are  feminine; 
as,  arundo,  a  reed;  imago,  an  image.  So  also  grando,  hail.  But 
comedo,  3,  glutton  ;  unedo,  the  arbute  tree  ;  and  harpdgo,  a  grappling- 
hook,  are  masculine. 

Rem.  2.  Margo,  the  brink  of  a  river,  is  doubtftd.  CuiMo,  desire,  is  often 
masculine  in  poetry,  but  in  prose  is  always  feminine. 

3.  Caro,  flesh,  and  Greek  nouns  in  o,  are  feminine ;  as,  echo,  an  echo.  BiAo, 
the  owl,  is  once  feminine,  Virg.  A.  4,  462. 

Exceptions  in  ER. 

§  GO.      1.    Luver,  a  water  plant,  and  tuber,  the  tuber  tree,  are  feminine, 
but  wlien  the  latter  denotes  the  fruit,  it  is  masculine.     Linter,  a  boat,  is  femi- 
nine, and  once,  in  Tibullus,  mascul'me.     Siser,  skirret,  is  neuter  in  the  singu- 
lar, but  muftculiuw  in  the  plural. 
2.   The  following,  in  er,  are  neuter: — 

Acer,  a  maple-tree.  Papfiver,  a  poppy.         Tuber,  a  sweUing. 

Cadaver,  a  dead  body.  Piper,  pepper.  Uber,  a  teat. 

Cicer,  a  vetch.  Slier,  an  osier.  Ver,  the  spring. 

Iter,  a  journti/.  Sj)inther,  a  clasp.         Verber,  a  scourge. 

Laser,  assafeUida.  Siiber,  a  cork-tree.       Zingiber,  ginger. 

Exceptions  in  OR. 

§  GS.  Arbor,  a  tree,  is  feminine:  ador,  spelt;  cequor,  the  sea;  marmor, 
viavLie;  and  cor,  the  heart,  are  nenter. 

Exceptions  in  ES  increasing  in  the  genitive. 

1.  The  following  are  feminine  : — 

Compes,  a  fetter.  Quies,  and  Requies,  rest.        1 6ges,  a  mat. 

Merces,  a  reward.  Inquies,  restlessness, 

lilerges,  a  sheaf  of  ccn-n.        Si:ges,  grouring  corn. 

2.  Ales,  a  bird;  comes,  a  companion;  liospes,  a  guest;  interpres,  an  inter- 
preter; 7?ii^«s,  a  soldier;  obses  a  nosUige;  prceses,  a  president;  and  satelles,  a 
ufe-guard,  are  common,  §  30.     .^s,  brass,  is  neuter. 


34  THIRD    DECLENSION. GENDER.  §  62,  63. 

Exceptions  in  OS. 

3.  Arbos,  a  tree;  cos,  a  whetstone;  dos,  a  dowry;  eos,  the  mommg;  and 
rarely  mpos,  a  grandchild,  are  feminine :  sacerdos,  custos,  and  bos  are  common, 

80:  OS,  the  mouth,  and  6s,  a  bone,  are  neuter;  as  are  also  the  Greek  words 
<s,  ci'-ic  poetry;  and  7nelos,  melody. 

Exceptions  in  N. 

4.  Nouns  in  men  with  four  in  n  are  neuter — gluten,  glue ;  inguen,  the  groin 
poUen,  fine  flour;  and  unguen,  ointment. 

5.  Four  nouns  in  ore  are  feminine — aedon,  a  nightingale;  halcyon,  a  kirg. 
fisher ;  icxm,  am  image ;  and  sindon,  muslin. 

FEMININES. 

§  O^.  Nouns  ending  in  as,  es  not  increasing  in  the  geni- 
tive, is,  ys,  aus,  s  preceded  by  a  consonant,  and  x,  are  feminine  j 
as, 

tBtii/s.  age;  nubes,  a  cloud;  avis,  a  bird;  chldmyt,  a  cloak;  lam,  praise;  trabs, 
aboara;  j^oa;,  peace. 

Exceptions  in  AS. 

1.  3fas,  a  male,  vas,  a  surety,  and  as,  a  piece  of  money,  or  any  unit  divisi- 
ble into  twelve  parts,  are  masculine.  Greek  nouns  in  as,  antis,  are  also  mascu- 
line; as,  adt'mias,  adamant.  So  also  Melas,  the  name  of  a  river,  §  28,  2.  Areas 
and  Ndnuis  are  common. — 2.  Vas,  a  vessel,  the  indeclinable  nouns,  Jas  and 
nefds,  and  Greek  nouns  in  as,  dtis,  are  neuter;  as,  artocreas,  a  meat-pie;  buce- 
ras,  a  species  of  herb. 

Exceptions  in  ES  not  increasing  in  the  genitive. 

8.  Acimces,  a  scimitar,  and  coles  or  colis,  a  stalk,  are  masculLae.  Antisles, 
palwnbes,  vales,  and  ve/jres,  are  masculine  or  feminine.  CacoHhes,  kippovulnes, 
nepenthes,  and  panaces,  Greek  words,  are  neuter. 

* 

Exceptions  in  IS. 

§  63.     1.   Latin  nouns  in  nis  are  masculine  or  doubtful. 

(1.)  Masc.  Ci'inis,  hair;  ignis.  Ore;  pdnis,  hre&d;  manes,  (plur.),  departed 
spmts. — (2.)  Masc.  or  fern,  ^wrais,  a  river ;  dm's,  ashes ;  yim's,  an  end;  clunis, 
the  liaunch;  cdnis,  a  dog;  funis,  a  rope.  The  plurals,  cineres,  the  ashes  of  the 
dead,  and  fines,  boundaries,  are  always  masculiae. 

2.  The  following  are  conunon  or  doubtful : — 

Anguis,  a  snake.  Corbis,  a  basket.  Tigris,  a  tiger. 

Cailis,  a  jjath.  PoUis,  fne  four.        Torquis,  a  chain. 

Canalis,  a  conduit  pipe.  Pulvis,  dust. 

Coutubernalis,  a  comrade.  Scrobis,  a  ditch. 

3.  The  following  are  mascuUue : — 

Axis,  an  axle.  Cenchris,  a  serpent.  Follis,  a  pair  ofbeUowa. 

Aqualis,  a  water-pet.  Collis,  a  hill.  Fustis,  o  chib. 

Cassis,  a  net.  Cuciimis,  a  cucumber.  Glis,  a  dormouse. 

Caulis,  or  ]       .  ,,  Ensis,  a  sivord.  Lapis,  a  stone. 

QoliSj  *      ■  Faacis,  a  bundle.  Lemures,  pL,  spectre*. 


§  64,  65.  THrec  declension. — gender.  3»> 


MiigUis,  a  mullet.  Semis,  or 

Orbis,  a  circle.  Semissis, 

Piscis,  a  Jish.  Bessis, 

Postis,  a  post.  Centussis, 

Quiris,  a  Roman.  Decussis, 

Samnis,  a  Samnite.  Tressis, 


Mensis,  a  month.  Sanguis,  blood.  Sentis,  a  brier. 

SoddVis,  a  companion. 
ToiTis,  a  firebrand. 
compounds  Unguis,  a  nail, 

of  as.  Vectis,  a  lever. 

VeiTuis,  a  worm. 
Vomis,  a  ploughshare. 

4.  Names  of  male  beings,  rivers,  and  months  in  is  are  masculine ; 
as,  Bis,  Pluto  ;  AnUbis,  an  Egyptian  deity  ;  Tigris,  the  river  Tigris ; 
Aprllis,  April.     See  §  28. 

Exceptions  in  YS. 

Names  of  rivers  and  mountains  in  ys  are  masculine ;  as,  Hdlys,  Othrys.  Sea 
§  28,  2  and  3 

Exceptions  in  S  preceded  by  a  consonant. 

§  04:«  1.  DeTis,  a  tooth;  fons,  a  fountain;  ototw,  a  mountain;  and  pons, 
a  bridge,  are  masculine.  So  also  are  auceps,  a  bird-catcher;  chdlybs.  steel; 
cliens,  a  client;  ellops,  a  kind  offish;  epcps,  a  hoopoe;  gryps,  a  grilEu;  hydrops, 
the  dropsy;  merops,  a  kind  of  bird.  Rudens,  a  rope,  is  masculine  and  very 
r.arely  feminine. 

2.  Tlie  f(jUowing  nomis  also  are  masculine,  viz.  {a.)  these  which  are  properly 
adjectives — conflnens  and  to^-rens,  soil,  amvis ;  occidens  and  oriens,  scil.  sol; 
(b.)  compounds' of  t^ens — tridens,  a  ti-ideut,  und  bidem,  a  two-pronged  mattock ; — 
but  bide)ts,  a  sheep,  is  feminine;  (c.)  the  parts  of  as  enduig  m  ns;  as,  sextant, 
quadrnns,  tHens,  dodrans,  and  dextans. 

3.  The  following  are  common  or  doubtful : — 

Ade])S,  grease.         Sepi,  a  kind  of  serpent.      Serpens,  a  serpent 
Forceps,  pincers.     Scrubs,  a  ditch.  Stu-ps,  the  trunk  of  a  tree. 

Animans  an  animal,  which  is  properly  an  adjective,  is  masculine,  feminine, 
or  neuter. 

Exceptions  in  X. 

§  G5,  1.  AX.  Anthrax,  cinnabar;  cdrax,  a  raven;  cordax,  a  kind  of 
dance ;  dropax,  an  ointment ;  styrax,  a  kind  of  tree ;  thorax,  a  breast-plate ;  and 
Atax,  the  river  Aude,  are  masculine ;  Umax,  a  snail,  is  common. 

2.  EX.  Nouns  in  ex  are  masculine,  except  fwx,  forfex,  lex,  nex,  prex, 
(obsolete  in  nom.  and  gen.  sing.),  and  supellex,  which  are  feminine;  to  which 
add  (§29)  car  ex,  tlex,  murex,  pellex,  and  vUex.  Atriplex  is  neuter  and  very 
rarely  masculine  or  femmine.  Alex,  a  fish-pickle ;  cortex,  bark ;  imbrex,  a  gut- 
ter-tile; obex,  a  bolt;  and  silex,  a  flint,  are  doubtful:  senex,  an  old  person; 
grex,  a  herd;  rumex,  sorrel;  and  pumex,  pumice-stone,  are  masculine  and 
verj''  rarely  feminine. 

3.  IX.  Gdix,  n  cnp;  fornix,  an  arch;  phcenix,  a  kind  of  bird;  &nd  spddix, 
a  palm-branch,  are  masculine :  Idrix,  the  larch-tree ;  perdix,  a  partridge ;  and 
tarix,  a  swollen  vein,  are  masculine  or  femmine. 

4.  OX.    Box  and  esox,  names  of  fishes,  are  masculine. 

5.  UX.    Trddiix,  a  vine-branch,  is  masculine. 

6.  YX.  Bombyx,  a  sdk-worm;  calyx,  the  bud  of  a  flower;  coccyx^  a  cuckoo; 
6i-yx,  a  wild  goat,  and  names  of  mountains  in  yx,  as  Hryx,  are  masculine. 
Onyx,  a  box  made  of  the  onyx-stone,  and  sarddnyx,  a  precious  stone ;  also, 
calx,  the  heel,  anil  calx,  lime";  lynx,  a  lynx,  and  sandyx,  a  kind  of  color,  ar« 
ma.iculine  or  feminine. 

Note.     Bombyx,  when  it  signifies  silk,  is  doubtful. 

7.  Quinctmx,  stptunf,  decunx,  deunx,  parts  of  as,  are  masculine. 


36  THIRD    DECLENSION. GENITIYE.  §  66-69. 

NEUTERS. 

§  GG.     Nouns  ending  in  a,  e,  i,  y,  c,  I,  t,  ar,  ur,  us,  and  men^ 

are  neuter ;  as, 

diad?ma,  a  crown ;  rete,  a  net ;  hydromeli,  mead ;  lac,  milk ;  vecUgal,  revenue 
caput,  the  head;  calcar,  a  spur;  guUur,  the  throat;  pectus,  the  breast;  and  flu 
men,  a  river. 

Exceptions  in  L,  C,  and  E. 

JVfijgtZ,  a  mullet,  and  sol,  the  sun,  are  masculine.  Sai,  salt,  is  masculine  or  neuter 
In  the  singular ;  but,  in  the  plural,  it  is  always  masculine,  t/ac  is  neuter  and  rarely 
masculine.     Prceneste  is  neuter,  and  once  in  Virgil  feminine. 

Exceptions  in  AR  and  UR. 

§  GT.  Furfur,  bran;  $alar,  a  tront;  turtur,  a  turtle  dove;  and  miUur,  a 
vulture,  are  masculine. 

Exceptions  in  US. 

1.  Lepus,  a  hare ;  and  Greek  nouns  in  jms  (a-ouc),  are  masculine ;  as,  tripus, 
a  tripod ;  but  lar/opus,  a  kind  of  bird,  is  femiutae. 

2.  Nouns  in  us,  having  fitis,  or  udu^,  in  the  genitive,  are  feminine ; 
as,  juvenilis,  youth ;  incus,  an  anvil. 

3.  Pecus,  -udis,  a  brute  animal,  and  tellus,  the  earth,  are  feminine.  Pesslnus, 
and  Sel'inus.  names  of  towns,  are  also  feminine.     See  ^29. 

4.  Grus,  a  crane ;  mit./,,  a  mouse ;  and  sus,  a  swine,  are  masculine  or  feminine. 

5.  Rhus,  sumach,  is  mascuUiie,  and  rarely  feminine. 

Rules  for  the  Oblique  Cases  of  Nouns  of  the  Third 

Declension. 

GENITIVE    SINGULAR. 

§  68.  1.  The  genitive  singular  of  the  third  declension  of  Latin 
nouns  always  ends  in  is,  in  Greek  nouns  it  sometimes  ends  in  os 
and  us. 


2.   Nouns  in  a  form  their  genitive  in  Stis;  as,  di-a-de'-ma,  di-a- 
dem-d-tis,  a  crown ;  dog'-ma,  dog'-ma-tis,  an  opinion. 

E. 

8.  Nouns  in  e  change  e  into  is ;  as,  re'-/e,  re-tis,  a  net ;  se-di-le, 
se-dl'-lis,  a  seat. 


4.  Nouns  in  i  are  of  Greek  origta,  and  are  generally  indeclinable ;  but  ky> 
drom'-e-li,  mead,  has  hyd^o-meV-i-tis  in  the  genitive. 

o. 

§  60.     Nouns  in  o  form  their  genitive  in  onis  ;  as,  ser'-mo,  ser 
mo-nis,  speech ;  pd'-vo,  pa-vo-nis,  a  peacock. 


§  70,  71.  THIRD    DECLENSION. GENITIYK.  37 

Remark.  Patrials  in  o  liave  dnis ;  as,  MacMo,  -dnis ;  but  sojne  have  5wm  ; 
as.  Eburonea,  etc.     See  3d  exception  to  increments  in  0,  ^  287. 

Exc.  1.  Nouns  in  rlo  and  go  form  their  genitive  in  mis ;  as,  a-ron'- 
^0,  a-run'-di-nis,  a  reed ;  i-ma-go,  i-mag'-i-nvi,  an  image. 

But  four  dissyllables— cu(fo,  udo,  Ugo  and  mango;  and  three  trisyllables— 
comedo,  unedo,  and  harpago,  have  5»is. 

Exc.  2.  The  following  nouns,  also,  have  inis -.—Apolh ;  hdmo,  a  man;  nemo, 
nobodv ;  and  turbo,  a  whirlwind.  a   •    • 

Cciro,  flesh,  has,  by  syncope,  carnis.  Anio,  the  name  of  a  river,  has  Aniem$; 
Nerio,  the  wife  of  Mars,  Nerienis ;  from  the  old  nominatives,  Anien,  and  N»- 
riines. 

Exc.  3.  Some  Greek  nouns  in  o  form  their  genitive  in  us,  and  their  other 
cases  singular,  in  o  ;  as,  Bldo,  gen.  Didus,  dat.  Dido,  etc. ;  Argo,  -ws ;  but  they 
are  sometimes  declined  regularly ;  as.  Dido,  Didonis. 

Y. 

Greek  noims  in  y  have  their  genitive  in  yos ;  as,  mlsy,  misyos,  or,  by  contrac- 
tion, misys. 

c. 

§  70.  The  only  nouns  in  c  are  d'-lec,  OrW-cis,  fish-brine,  and  lac,  lac'- 
tis,  milk. 

L.  .N.   R. 

Nouns  in  I,  n,  and  r,  form  their  genitive  by  adding  is ;  as,  con'-sid, 
con'-su-lis,  a  consul ;  ca-non,  can'-o-nis,  a  rule ;  ho -nor,  ho-no^ris, 
honor. 

So,  An'-l-mal,  an-i-ma'-lis,  an  animal.'  Cal'-car,  cal-ca'-ris,  a  spur. 

Vi'-gil,  vig'-I-lis,  a  watchman.  Car'-cer,  car^-ce-ris,  a  prison. 

Ti'-tan,  Ti-ta'-nis,  Titan.  A'-mor,  a-mo'-ris,  love. 

Si'-ren,  Si-re'-nis,  a  Siren.  Gut'-tur,  gut'-tu-ris,  the  throat. 

Del'-phin,  del-phi'-nis,  a  dolphin.  Mar'-tyr,  mar'-ty-ris,  a  martyr. 

Exceptions  tn  L. 
Fd,  gall,  and  mel,  honey,  double  I  before  is,  making  feUis  and  mellis. 

Exceptions  in  N. 

§  T*!.  1.  Neuters  in  en  form  their  genitive  in  tnis;  as,  flu -men, 
flu'-mi-nit,  a  river ;  glu-ten,  glu'-ti-nis,  glue. 

The  following  masculines,  also,  form  their  genitive  in  tnij  .•—«««>»,  a  bird  which  for*- 
lx4e<l  by  its  notes;  pecten,  a  comb;  tiblcen,  a  piper;  and  tubicen,  a  trumpeter. 

2.  Some  Greek  nouns  in  m  form  their  genitive  in  ontis ;  as,  Laomi/Jon,  Imo- 
midnntis.  Some  in  in  and  yn  add  is  or  os;  as,  Trdchin,  or  Trachyn,  Trachlnit 
or  Trachynos. 

Exceptions  in  R. 

1.   Nouns  ia  ter  drop  e  in  the  genitive  ;  as,  pn-ier,  pa'-tiis,  a  father. 

So  also  imber,  a  shower,  and  names  of  mouths  in  ber ;  as,  Ocioder^ 

Octobris. 

4 


38  THIRD    DECLENSION. GENITIVE.  §  72-74 

But  crater,  a  cup;  soter,  a  savior;  and  ldter,a,  brick,  retain  e  in  the  gen- 
itive. 

2.  Far,  a  kind  of  com,  has  farris  ;  Mpar,  the  liver,  hepatis ;  Lar  or  Lan, 
Lartis;  iter,  a  journey,  has  itinei-is  from  the  old  nominative  iiiwer ;  Jupiter 
Jdvis ;  and  cor,  the  heart,  cordis. 

_  3.   These  four  in  ur  have  dris  in  the  genitive : — efmr,  ivory;  femur,  the  thigh; 
jecur,  the  liver ;  robur,  strength. 

Femur  has  also  Jeminis,  and  jlcur^  jecindris,  and  jocindri$. 

AS. 

§  T2.  Nouns  in  as  form  their  genitive  in  atis  ;  as,  ce'-tas,  a-tS.'' 
tis,  age ;  pi'-e-tas,  pi-e-ta-tis,  piety. 

Exc.  1.  As  has  asds;  mas,  a  maJe,  mans;  vas,  a  surety,  vddis;  and  vd^,  a 
vessel,  vdsis.    Anas,  a  duck,  has  andtis. 

Exc.  2.  Greek  nouns  in  as  form  their  genitive  according  to  their  gender; 
the  masculines  in  antis,  the  feminines  in  adis  or  ados,  and  the  neuters  in  dtis  ; 
as,  adamas,  -antis,  adamant;  lavipas,  -adis,  a  lamp;  Pallas,  -adis  or  -ados ;  buce- 
ras,  -atis,  a  species  of  herb.  Areas,  an  Arcadian,  and  Ndmas,  a  Numidian, 
which  are  of  the  common  gender,  form  their  genitive  in  adis.  Melas,  the  name 
*■  «•  river,  has  Meldnis. 

ES. 

§  73.  1.  Nouns  in  es  form  their  genitive  by  changing  es  into  is, 
'itis,  etis,  or  etis ;  as,  ru'-pes,  ru-pis,  a  rock;  mi'-les,  mil'-i-tis,  a  soldier; 
le'-ges,  seg'-e-tis,  growing  corn  ;  qui'-es,  qni-e-tis,  rest. 

Remark.  _A  few  Greek  proper  names  in  es  (gen.  is)  sometimes  form  their 
genitive  in  ei,  or,  by  contraction,  i,  after  the  second  declension ;  as,  Achilles,  is, 
eioT  4:  and  a  few  in  ob  after  the  first  declension ;  as,  Orestes,  is  or  (b. 

2.  Those  which  make  Uis  are, 

"^Ales,  a  Mrd.  Gurges,  a  whirlpool.  Poples,  the  ham. 

Ames,  a  fowler^s  staff.  Hospes,  a  guest.  Satelles,  a  lifeguard. 

Antistes,  a  priest.  lAm^s,  a  limit.  Stipes,  the  stock  of  a  tree. 

Caespes,  o  tuif.  Merges,  a  sheaf  of  corn.  Termes,  an  olivebough. 

^omes,  a  companion.  Miles,  a  soldier.  Trames,  a  by-path. 

Eques,  a  horseman.  Palmes,  a  vine-branch.  Veles,  a  skirmisher. 

Fomes,  touchwood.  P6des,  a  foot-soldier. 

3.  The  following  have  etis : — abies,  a  fir-tree ;  aries,  a  ram ;  indiges,  a  man 
deified;  intetpi-es,  an  interpreter;  paries,  a  wall;  seges,  a  corn-field;  and  tegcs, 
a  mat. 

4.  The  following  have  etis; — Cibes;  Ores,  a  Cretan;  Ubes,  a  caJdron;  fnag- 
«es,  a  loadstone ;  jMtes  and  re^m'es,  rest ;  inquies,  restlessness;  and  taj}es  (used 
only  in  ace.  and  abl.),  tapestry. — Some- Greek  proper  names  have  either  etis  at 
is  in  the  genitive ;  as,  Chremes,  -etis,  or  -is.    Dares,  -etis,  or  -is. 

Exc.  1.    Obses,  a  hostage,  and  presses,  a  president,  have  idis.    Eeres,  an  heir, 
and  merces,  a  reward,  have  edis ;  pes,  a  foot,  and  its  compounds,  have  edis. 
Exc.  2.    Qres  has  Cerei-is  ;  bes,  bessis  ;  prms,  prcedis  ;  and  ces,  mris. 

IS. 

§  74.  Nouns  in  is  have  their  genitive  the  same  as  the  nomina< 
tive  ;  as,  au'-ris,  ai  -ris,  the  ear ;  d  -vis,  d'-vis,  a  bird. 


§  75,  76.  THIRD    DECLENSION. — GENITIVE.  39 

Exc.  1.  Tbc  following  have  the  genitive  in  iris :—c{nis,  ashes;  puivit,  dust; 
v6jnis  or  vomer,  a  ploughshare.     Cucumis,  a  cucumber,  has  (i-is  and  rarely  it. 

Exc.  2.  The  foUowiug  have  !c?w  .-—oa^yjs,  a  cup;  cassis,  a  hehnet;  cuspii,  a 
point;  fc^is,  a  stone;  and  pr&mulsis,  an  antepast. 

Exc.  3.   Two  have  tnis  :—polUs,  fine  flour,  and  sanguis  or  sanguen,  blood. 

Exc.  4.  Four  have  Uis:—Dis,  Pluto;  ?js,  strife;  Quiris,  a  Roman;  and 
8a7nnis,  a  Samnite. 

Exc.  5.   Glis,  a  dormouse,  has  ^rftris. 

GREEK  NOUNS. 

1.  Greek  nouns  in  is,  whose  genitlTe  ends  in  ios  or  eos,  {lOi  or  eaif),  form  their  genitive 
fan  Latin  im>;  as  (a.)  verbals  in  sis  ;  as,  basis,  matkesis,  etc.  (i.)  compounds  of  jwi;.' 
(5nx/f);  as,  metropSlis,  NeapSlis,  etc.;  and  (c.)  a  few  other  proper  names,  as  Charyhdn, 
Lachisis,  Syrtis,  etc.  In  some  nouns  of  this  class  the  Greek  genitive  is  sometimes  fouud; 
as,  Nemisis,  Nemesios. 

2.  Greek  nouns  in  is,  whose  Greek  genitive  Js  in  idos  (i/oc),  form  their  Latin  genitive 
in  idis ;  as,  a^s,  aspis,  epheniiris,  pyrajnis,  tyrannis,  JEneis,  Iris,  NerSis,  etc.  Tigris 
has  both  is  and  idis ;  and  in  some  other  words  of  this  class  later  writers  use  is  Instead 
of  idis. 

3.  Charts  b.a,s  Charltis ;   Salamis,  Salamtnis,  a,ni  SimSis,  Simoentis. 

OS. 

§  75.  Nouns  in  os  form  their  genitive  in  oris  or  otis ;  as,  flos, 
fo-ris,  a  flower ;  ne-pos,  ne-po-tis,  a  grandchild. 

The  following  have  oris : — 

Flo3,  a  flower.  Labos  or  labor,  labor.        Os,  the  numth. 

Glos,  a  hnsband's  sister.  Lepos  or  16por,  mt.  Ros,  dew. 

Honos  or  honor,  honor.  Mos,  a  custom. 

Arbos  or  arbor,  a  tree,  has  6ris. 

The  following  have  otis : — 

Cos,  a  whetsUme.         Monociros,  a  unicorn.  T^^poa,  a  grandchild. 

Dos,  a  doiory.  Rhinoceros,  a  rhinoceros.         Sacerdos,  a  priest. 

Exc.  1.    Custos,  a  keeper,  has  custodis  ;  bos,  an  ox,  bdvis ;  and  ds,  a  bone,  ossis. 

Exc.  2.  Some  Greek  nouns  in  os  have  dis  in  the  genitive;  as,  heros,  a  hero; 
Minos;  Tros,  a  Trojan;  and  some  Greek  neuters  in  os  are  used  in  the  third 
declension  in  tlie  nominative  and  accusative  only ;  as,  Argos,  cetos,  ipos,  melos. 

US. 

§  7G.     1.   Nouns  in  us  form  their  genitive  in  eris  or  oris;  as,  ge 
r  us,  gen'-e-ris,  a  kind ;  tern -pus,  tem'-^pS-ris,  time. 

2.  Those  which  make  eris  are,  dcus,  {ch&S),fcRdus,  fUnus,  genus,  gUmm,  la 
tfis,  munus,  dlus,  dnus,  6pus,  pondus,  rUdus,  septus,  s'ldus,  ulcus,  vellus,  viscus  and 
udnus.    In  early  writers  pignus  has  sometimes  pigneris. 

3.  Those  which  make  6ris  are,  corpus,  decus,  dedecus,  /acinus,  fenus,  frlgut, 
Upus,  lUus,  nemus,  pectus,  pecus,  penus,  pignus,  stercus,  iempus,  and  lergus. 

Exc.  1.  These  three  in  Os  have  iidis : — inciis,  an  anvil ;  p&lOs,  a  morass ;  and 
Bubscus,  a  dove-tail.     Pi'cus,  a  brute  animal,  has  pecudis. 

Exc.  2.  These  fiv  ^  have  Uis  :—juventus,  youth ;  i&liis,  safety ;  senect&$,  old 
age ;  servitOs,  slavery    virtOs,  virtue. 


^  THIRD    DECLENSION. GENITIVE.  §  77,  78. 

Exc.  3.  Monosyllables  in  fts  have  uris ;  as,  cms,  the  leg;  J7is,  right;  jm,  brothj 
nms,  a  mouse; /JMS,  mattor;  r?/s,  the  country;  tus,  frankincense;  except  «rr««^ 
and  SMS,  which  liave  </ruis,  and  stiis ;  and  rims,  which  has  rhois  or  rorls.  Tellut, 
the  earth,  has  tellaris ;  and  Liyus  or  Li(/ur,  a  Ligurian,  has  Liguris. 

Exc.  4.    Fraus,  fraud,  and  tows,  praise,  have  fraudis,  laudis. 

Exc.  5.  Greek  nouns  in  pus  (ttovq)  have  6dis  ;  as,  tripus,  tripddis,  a  tripod; 
CEdipus,  -ddis ;  but  this  is  sometimes  of  the  second  declension. 

Exc.  6.  Some  Greek  names  of  cities  in  us  have  untis ;  as,  Amdthus,  Amathwh' 
tis.     So  Trapezus,  Opus,  Pessimis,  and  Sellmis. 

Exc.  7.  Greek  nouns  ending  in  eus  are  all  proper  names,  and  have  theii 
genitive  in  eos ;  as,  Orpheus^  -eos.  But  these  nouns  are  found  also  in  the  second 
declension ;  as,  Orpheus,  -ei  or-i.    Cf.  ^  64,  5. 

YS. 

§  77.  1.  Nouns  in  ys  are  Greek,  and  make  their  genitive  in 
pis  (contracted  gs),  or,  as  in  Greek,  yos  (woe)  ;  as, 

(Xtys,  gen.  Cotyis  or  Cotys ;  Teihys,  -yis  or  yos.  So  Atys,  Capys,  Erinnys 
EAlys,  Omrys.    A  few  have  ydis ;  as,  chlamys,  chlampdis. 

S  preceded  by  a  consonant. 

2.  Nouns  in  s,  with  a  consonant  before  it,  form  their  genitive  by 
changing  s  into  is  or  tis ;  as,  trabs,  tra-bis,  a  beam  ;  hi' -ems,  hi'-e-mis, 
winter ;  pars,  par'-tis,  a  part ;  frons,  fron-tis,  the  forehead. 

(1.)  Those  in  Js,  ms,  and  ps  ;  as,  scrobs.  Menu,  siirps,  change  s  into  is;  except 
gryps,  a  griffin,  which  has  gryphis. 

Remakk.  Compounds  in  ceps  from  capio  have  Ipis ;  as,  princeps,  prindpis, 
a  prince.     But  auceps  has  aucupis. 

(2.)   Those  in  Is,  ns,  and  rs,  as,  jw&,  ^ren*,  ars,  change  s  into  tis. 
Exc.  1.   The  following  in  ns  change  s  into  dis :— frons,  foliage :  glans,  an 
acorn ;  juglans,  a  waliiut ;  hns,  a  nit ;  and  libripens,  a  weigher. 

Exc.  2.    Tlryns,  a  town  of  Argolis,  haa  Tirynthis  in  the  genitive. 

T. 

§  78.  1.  Nouns  in  t  form  their  genitive  in  itis.  They  are,  caput, 
the  head,  gen.  cap'-i-tis  ;  and  its  compounds,  occiput  and  sinciput. 

X. 

2.  Nouns  in  x  form  their  genitive  by  resolving  x  into  cs  or  gs,  and 
inserting  i  before  s ;  as,  vox (vocs)  vo-cis,  the  voice ;  lex  (legs)  le'-gis, 
a  law. 

(1.)  Latin  nouns  in  ax  have  dcis;  ns,  fornax,  fomdcis,  exceTpt  fax,  Jacis. 
Most  Greek  nouns  in  ax  have  dcis  ;  as,  thorax,  thoracis;  a  few  have  dcis  ;  as, 
:6rax,  cordcis ;  and  Greek  names  of  men  in  nax  have  nactis ;  as,  Astydnax, 
Asiyanactis. 

(2.)  Nouns  in  ea;  have  icis ;  as,  judex,  Jiulicis :  dbex  has  oJfczs  or  objicis ;  and 
vibex,  viblcis.  Nex,  prex,  (nom.  obs.),  resex  and  fenisex  have  ecis  ;  dlex,  nar- 
thex,  and  «;e?T;ea;  have  ecis,  and  yfex,  feeds.  Lex  and  j-ea;  have  e^is ;  aquilea 
and  jrrea;  hava  'igis ;  remex  has  remigis ;  senex,  slnis ;  and  supellex,  supellecdlis. 


§  79,  80.    THIKD  DECLENSION. — DATIVE  AND  ACCUSATIVE.      41 

(8.)  Nouns  in  ix  have  ids;  as,  cervix,  cervicis;  and  less  frequently  Ids;  as, 
calix,  ailkh.  But  nix  lias  nivis ;  strix,  foreign  names  of  men,  and  gentile  nouns 
in  rix  have  igis ;  as,  JBiturix,  Dumndi-ix,  etc. 

(4.)  Nouns  in  ox  have  ods;  as,  vox,  vods;  but  Cqppddox  has  Cajyoadddsf 
Alldbrox,  Allohrdgis ;  and  nox,  nociis. 

(5.)  Of  nouna  in  iix,  crux,  dux,  tradux,  and  ntix  have  ucis;  Itix  and  PoUux, 
ucis. —  Conjux  has  conjuffis,  frnx  (nom.  obs.)  frugis,  and  /aeta;,  fauda. 

(6.)  Fa;,  a  Greek  termination,  has  yds,  yds,  or  ygis,  ygis.  Onyx  and  »ar- 
dUnyx,  in  which  «  is  equivalent  to  chs  (§  U,  'i)  have  jfc/iis;  as,  ^nj/a;,  onychis. 

DATIVE    SINGULAR. 
§  79.     The  dative  singular  ends  in  i ;  as,  sermo,  dat.  sermoni. 

Anciently  it  also  ended  in  e ;  as,  morte  dutus.  Varro  m  Gellius.  So  wre  fat 
<Kri,  Cic.  and  Liv. ;  and  jure  for  juri.  Liv. 

ACCUSATIVE    SINGULAR. 

(a.)  The  accusative  singular  of  all  neuter  nouns  is  like  the  nomi- 
native. 

(&.)  The  accusative  singular  of  masculines  and  feminines,  ends  in 
em.  Yet  some  Latin  nouns  in  is,  which  do  not  increase  in  the  geni- 
tive, have  im,  and  some  Greek  nouns  have  im,  in,  or  a. 

1.  Many  proper  names  in  is,  denoting  places,  rivers,  or  gods,  have  the  accus- 
ative singular  in  im ;  as,  Eispalis,  Tibens,  Anubis ;  so  also  Alhis,  Athesis,  Bcetis, 
Arar  or  Ardris,  Bilbilis,  Apis,  Osiris,  Syrtis,  etc.  These  sometimes,  also,  make 
the  accusative  in  in ;  as,  Albin.  Scaldis  has  in  and  em,  and  Liris,  im,  in,  and  em. 
Liger  has  Ligerim. 

2.  The  following  also  have  the  accusative  in  im : — 

Amnssis,  a  masm's -rule.  Mephitis, /om?  air.  Sinapis,  »reMS«arrf. 

Buris,  a  plmigh-tail.  Pelvis,  a  basin.  Sitis,  thirst. 

Cannabis,  hemp.  Ravis,  hoarseness.  Tussis,  a  cough. 

Cuciimis,  (gen.  -is),  a  cucumber.  Seciiris,  an  axe.  Vis,  strength. 

8.  These  have  im,  and  sometimes  em : — 
Febris,  a  fever.     Pnppis,  the  stern.     Restis,  a  rope.     Turris,  a  tower. 

But  these  have  em,  and  rarely  im : — 
Bipennis,  a  battler-axe.         Navis,  a  ship.  Sementis,  a  sowing. 

CI  avis,  a  key.  Praesepis,  a  stall.       Strigilis,  a  Jlesh-brmh. 

Messis,  a  harvest. 

4.  Lens  and  pars  have  rarely  lentim  and  partim ;  and  cratim  from  crates,  .s 
found  in  Plautus. 

5.  Early  writers  formed  the  accusative-  of  some  other  nouns  in  im. 

Accusative  of  Greek  Nouns. 

§  80.  The  accusative  singular  of  masculine  and  feminine  Greek 
nouns  sometimes  retains  the  Greek  terminations  in  and  a,  but  often 
ends,  as  in  Latin,  in  em  or  im. 

I.   Masculine  amd  feminine  Greek  nouns,  whose  genitive  increases  in  is  or  oi, 
vd'.pure,  that  is,  with  a  consonant  eroing  before,  have  their  accusative  in  em  or  a; 
as,  lampas,  lampadis  (Greek  -S-cc)'  lampdda;  chldmys,  chlamydia,  cUm^dem,  at 
-yia;  Helicon,  Heliconis,  HfHcona. 
4* 


42     THIRD  DECLENSION. — VOCATIVE  A^D  ABLATIVE.     §  81,  82. 

Remark.  In  like  manner  these  three,  which  have  is  pure  in  the  genitive— 
Tros,  Trois,  Troem,  a,nd  r/'o«,  a  Trojan;  heros,  a  hero;  and  Minos,  a  king  oi 
Crete. — ^fr,  the  air;  tei/ter,  the  skj';  deljMn,  a  dolphin;  and  ^ceaw,  a  hymn, 
have  usually  a ;  as,  aera,  cetMra,  delphlna,  pcedna.    Pan,  a  god,  has  only  a. 

Exc.  1.  Masculines  in  ts,  whose  genitive  increases  in  is  or  os  impure,  Jiave 
their  accusative  in  im  or  m ;  sometimes  in  ide7n ;  Paris,  Paridls ;  Parim,  ol 
Parldem. 

Exc.  2.  Feminines  in  ts,  increasing  impurely  in  the  genitive,  though  they 
usually  follow  the  rule,  have  sometimes  im  or  in;  as,  Elis,  Elidis;  Elin  or  EW- 
dem.     So  tigris,  gen.  is  or  idis  ;  ace.  tigrim  or  tigrin. 

n.  Masculine  and  feminine  Greek  nouns  in  is  not  increasing,  and  in  ys,  gen. 
yos,  fonn  their  accusative  by  changing  the  s  of  the  nominative  into  m  or  n;  as, 
Charybdis,  (gen.  Lat.  -is,  Gr.  f<ac),  ace.  Charybdim  or  -in;  Hdlys, -yis  or -yos, 
Haiym  or  -yre.     So  rhus,  gen.  rhois,  has  rhun  or  rhum. 

in.     Proper  names  ending  in  the  diphthong  ens,  gen.  ei  and  eos,  have  the  ac-  ' 
cusative  in  ea;  as,  llieseus,  Thesea;   Tydeus,  Tydea.     See  ^  54,  6. 

IV.  Some  Greek  proper  names  in  es,  whose  genitive  is  in  is,  have  in  Latin, 
along  with  the  accusative  in  em,  the  termination  en,  as  if  of  the  first  declension ; 
as,  Achilles,  Achillen ;  Xerxes,  Xerxen ;  Sophocles,  Sophdclen.  Cf.  ^  45,  1.  Some 
al^;^),  which  have  either  etis  or  is  in  the  genitive,  have,  besides  eiem,  eta,  or  em, 
til'-,  termination  en;  as,  Chremes,  Tholes. 

VOCATIVE    SINGULAR. 

§  81.     The  vocative  is  like  the  nominative. 

<;ekabk.  Many  Greek  nouns,  however,  particularly  proper  names,  drop  s  of  the 
nominative  to  form  the  vocative;  as,  Daphnis,  Daphni;  Tet/ii/s,  Tethy ;  Melamput, 
Melampu;  Orpheus,  Orpheu.  Proper  names  in  es  (gen.  is)  sometimes  have  a  vocative 
In  e,  after  the  first  declension ;  as,  Socrates,  Socrate.  §  45, 1. 

ABLATIVE    SINGULAR. 

§  82.     The  ablative  singular  commonly  ends  in  e. 

Exc.  1.  (a.)  Neuters  in  e,  al,  and  ar,  have  the  ablative  in  i;  afs, 
sedite,  sedili ;  animal,  animdli ;  calcar,  calcdri. 

(&.)  But  names  of  towns  in  e,  and  the  following  neuters  in  ar,  have  e  in  the 
ablative;  viz.  baccar,  an  herb ;yar,  com;  hepar,  the  liver;  juiar,  a  sunbeam; 
nectar,  nectar;  par,  a  pair;  sal,  saJt.  Rete,  a  net,  has  either  e  or  i;  and  mare, 
the  sea,  has  sometimes  in  poetry  mare  m  the  ablative. 

Exc.  2.  (a.)  Nouns  which  have  im  alone,  or  both  im  and  in  in  the 
accusative,  and  names  of  months  in  er  or  is,  have  i  in  the  ablative  ; 
as,  "is,  vim,  vi;  Tiberis,  -im,  i;  December,  Decembri ;  Aprllis,  Aprili. 

(ft.)  But  BoBtis,  cannabis,  and  smapis,  have  e  or  i.  Tigris,  the  tiger,  has 
:igride ;  as  a  river  it  has  both  Tigride  and  Tigri. 

Exc.  3.  (a.')  Nouns  which  have  em  or  im  in  the  accusative,  have 
*^li6>T  ablative  in  e  or  i ;  as,  turris,  turre  or  turri. 

lb.)  So  Elis,  ace.  Elidem  and  Elin,  has  Elide  or  Eli.  But  restis,  and  most 
(j-r'-^^k  nouns  with  idis  in  the  genitive,  have  e  only ;  as,  Paris,  -idis,  -ide. 

Exc.  4.  (a.)  Adjectives  in  is^  used  as  nouns,  have  commonly  i  in  the  abla- 
tive, but  sometimes  e;  a%,  famdidris,  a  friend;  naidlis,  a  birthday;  soddlis,  a 
companion;  ti-iremis,  a  trii'eme. — Participles  in  ns,  used  as  nouns,  have  cora- 
•jiouly  e  in  the  ablativs,  bu   continens  has  »'. 


§  83.  THJED    DECLENSION. — PLURAL    CASES.  48  ^ 

(6.)  When  adjectives  mis  become  proper  names,  they  always  have  e ;  aa 
Juvenalis,  Juvendle.  AJf'mis  and  cedUis  have  generally  e;  as  have  always  jttvi^ 
nis,  a  youth ;  i-iklis,  a  rod ;  and  volucris,  a  bird. 

Exc.  5.  (a.)  The  following,  though  they  have  only  em  in  the  accusative, 
have  B  or  t  iu  the  ablative,  but  most  of  them  have  oftener  e  than  i : — 


Amnis, 

Collis, 

Ignis,- 

Pars, 

Supellex, 

Anguis, 

Convallis, 

Imber, 

Postis, 

Tridens, 

Avis, 

Corbis, 

Mugilis, 

Pflgil, 

Unguis, 

Bilis, 

Finis, 

Orbis, 

Sordes, 

Vectis, 

Civis,. 

Fustis, 

Ovis, 

Sors, 

Vesper. 

Classis, 

{b.)  Occiput  has  only  i,  and  rm  has  either  e  or  i ;  but  rure  commonly  signifies 
from  the  country,  and  ruri,  in  the  country.     Mel  has  rarely  i. 

(c.)  So  also  names  of  towns,  when  denoting  the  place  where  any  thing  Ls 
said  to  be,  or  to  be  done,  have  the  ablative  in  i ;  as,  CartJiagini,  at  Carthage ; 
so,  Anxim  and  Lacedavidni,  and,  in  the  most  ancient  writers,  many  other  nouns 
occur  with  this  termination  in  the  ablative.    Candlis  has  i,  and  very  rarely  e. 

Exc.  6.  Nouns  in  ys,  which  have  ym  or  yn  in  the  accusative,  have  their  ab- 
lative in  ye  or  J/ ;  as,  Alys,  Atye,  or  Aty. 

NOMINATIVE    PLURAL. 

§  83.  I.  Th'e  nominative  plural  of  masculines  and  feminines 
ends  in  es ;  as,  sermones,  rupes: — but  neuters  Lave  a,  and  those 
•whose  ablative  singular  ends  in  i  only,  or  in  e  and  i,  have  ia  ;  as, 
caput,  cajnta  ;  sedile,  sedilia ;  rete,  retia.     Aplustre  has  both  a  and  ia. 

1.  Some  Greek  neuters  in  os  have  e  in  the  nominative  plural;  as,  m«to«; 
Dom.  plural,  mele;  (in  Greek  /ui^at,  by  oontraction  //saji).     So  Temple. 

GENITIVE    PLURAL, 
n.     The  genitive  plural  commonly  ends  in  um ;  sometimes  in  ium. 

1.  Nouns  which,  in  the  ablative  singular,  have  i  only,  or  both  e 
and  i,  make  the  genitive  plural  in  ium ;  as,  sedile,  sedlli,  sedilium ; 
turris,  turre  or  turri,  turrium. 

2.  Nouns  in  es  and  is,  which  do  not  increase  in  the  genitive  singu- 
lar, have  ium ;  as,  nuhes,  nubium  ;  hostis,  hostium. 

Exc.  Cunis.  juvenis,  fdris,  mugilis,  proles,  sirues,  and  mtes,  have  um;  so  oftener 
have  apis,  stngilis,  and  volucris ;  less  frequently  mensis,  sides,  and,  in  the  poets 
only,  ambages,  cades,  eludes,  vepres,  and  ccdestis. 

3.  Monosyllables  ending  in  two  consonants  have  ium  in  the  geni- 
tive plural ;  as,  urhs,  urhium  ;  gens,  gentium  ;  arx,  arcium. 

Exc.  Lynx,  sphinx,  and  ops  (nom.  obsolete)  have  um. 

Most  monosyllables  in  s  and  x  pure  have  um,  but  the  following  have  ium; 
dos,mas,glis,'Us,os  (ossis),  faux,  (nom.  obs.)  nix,  nox,  strix,  vis,  generally 
J'raus  and  mus ;  so  also  fur  and  ren,  and  sometimes  lar. 

4.  Nouns  of  two  or  more  syllables,  in  ns  or  rs,  and  names  of  na< 
tions  in  as,  have  commonly  ium,  but  sometimes  um;  as,  cliens,  clieu' 
tiun  or  clientum ,  Arpinas,  Arpinaatium. 


44  THIRD    DECLENSION. PLURAL    CASES.  §  84,  85 

(1.)  Other  nonns  in  as  generally  have  urn,  but  sometimes  ium;  as,  cetai,  celSf 
turn  or  mtatium.    Penck  is  and  opiimdtes  have  usually  ium. 

5.  The  following  have  ium: — cdro,  compes,  linter  imber,  uter,  venter,  Sarmm, 
Quiris,  and  usually  Insuber.    Fwnax  and  palus  have  sometimes  ium. 

6.  Greek  nouns  have  generally  um;  as,  gigas,  gigantum ;  Arabs,  Arabum; 
Tlii'ox,  Thracum  ; — but  a  few,  used  as  titles  of  books,  have  sometimes  on ;  as, 
Epigravima,  epigrammaton ;  Metamoiphosis,  -eon.  The  patrial  Malem  also  is 
foimd  in  Curtius,  4,  13. 

Kemabk  1.   Bos  has  bourn  m.  the  genitive  plural. 

Rem.  2.  Nouns  which  want  the  singular,  form  the  genitive  plural  as  if  they 
were  complete;  as,  manes,  maniimi;  ccelites,  ccelitum;  ilia,  ilium;  as  if  from 
manis,  amies,  and  lie.  So  also  names  of  feasts  in  alia ;  as.  Saturnalia  Saturna- 
Uum ;  but  these  have  sometimes  oi'um  after  the  second  declension.  Ales  has 
Bometimes,  by  epenthesis,  alituum.     See  ^  322,  3. 

DATIVE    AND    ABLATIVE    PLURAL, 
§  84:.     The  dative  and  ablative  plural  end  in  ibus. 

Exo.  1.  Bos  has  b5bus  and  hfihus,  by  contraction,  for  bovV>us ;  sus  has  tubus  by 
syncope,  for  suibus.    §  322,  6,  and  4. 

Exc.  2.  Greek  nouns  in  ma  have  the  dative  and  ablative  plural  more  fre- 
quently in  is  than  in  ibus ;  as,  poema,  poemdtis,  or  poematihus. 

Exc.  3.  The  poets  sometimes  form  the  dative  plural  of  Greek  nouns,  that  in- 
crease in  the  genitive,  in  si.  and,  before  a  vowel,  in  sin;  as,  herois,  heroidit; 
heroisi,  or  heroisin.  Ovid.     So  in  Quintilian,  Metammphosesi. 

ACCUSATIVE    PLURAL. 

§  85.     The  accusative  plural  ends,  like  the  nominative,  in  es, 
a,  ia. 

Exc.  1.  The  accusative  plural  of  masculines  and  feminines,  whose  genitive 
Dlural  ends  in  ium,  anciently  ended  in  »s  or  eis,  instead  of  es ;  as,  partes,  gen. 
partium,  ace.  parieis  or  paries. 

Exc.  2.  Greek  masculines  and  feminines,  whose  genitive  increases  in  is  or  ot 
impure,  have  their  accusative  in  as ;  as,  lampas,  lampadis,  lampddas.  So  also 
heros,  herois,  Jieroas,  and  some  barbariau  names  of  nations  have  a  similar  form; 
as,  Brigantas,  Allobrdgas. 


Jupiter,  and  vts,  strength,  are  thus  declined  : 


Singular. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

N.  Ju'-pi-ter, 

N.   vis. 

vi'-res. 

G.  Jo'-vis, 

G.   vis. 

vir'-i-um, 

D.  J6'-vi, 

D.  — 

vir'-i-bus, 

Ac.  Jo'-vem, 

Ac.  vim, 

vl'-res, 

V.  Ju'-pi-ter, 

V.    vis, 

vi'-res, 

Ab.  Jo'-ve. 

Ab.  V. 

vir'-i-bus. 

5  86-88. 


FOURTH   DECLENSION. 


45 


§  8G.     The  follomng  table  exhibits  the  principal  forms  of  Gieek 
nouns  of  the  third  declension  : — 


IS,  -lOS, 


IS,  -ei,  -1, 


Orpheus, 

Aer, 

Dido, 


-eos, 
-eris, 
-us, 


Dat. 

■adi, 

•adibus, 

6i, 

•oibus, 
-fh 
-i, 
-i. 


61, 

-eri. 


Ace. 

-adem, 

-ada, 

-ades, 

-adas, 

-oem, 

-6a, 

-oes, 

-oas,      ^ 

-}Tn,      ) 

it    } 

( -em,_     ) 
(  -ea,  en,  ) 


-ea, 

-era, 

-o. 


Voc: 
as, 
-ades, 

-OS, 

-oes, 

7. 
-i. 

es,  -e, 

eu, 
-er, 


AM. 
-ade. 
-adibus. 

•06. 

•oibus. 
■ye  or  j. 
i. 

-e  or  -i. 

See  §  54. 
ere. 
-o. 


FOURTH   DECLENSION. 


§  87.  Nouns  of  the  fourth  declension  end  in  tis  and  u. 
3^hose  in  us  are  masculine ;  those  in  u  are  neuter,  and,  except  in 
the  genitive,  are  indeclinable  in  the  singular. 

Nouns  of  this  declension  are  thus  declined : — 


Fructus,  fruit. 


Singular. 
N.  fruc'-tus, 
G.  fruc'-tus, 
D.  fruc'-tu-i, 
Ac.  fruc'-tum, 
V.  fruc'-tus, 
Al .  fruc'-tu. 


Plural. 
fruc'-tus, 
fruc'-tu-iim, 
fruc'-ti-bus, 
fruc'-tiis, 
fruc'-tus, 
fruc'-ti-bus. 


Cornu,  a  horn. 


Singular. 
N.  cor'-nu, 
G.  cor'-nus, 
D.  cor'-nu, 
Ac.  cor'-nu, 
V.  cor'-nu, 
Ab.  cor'-nu. 


Plural. 
cor'-nu-a, 
cor'-nu-um, 
cor'-ni-bus, 
cor'-nu-a, 
cor'-nu-a, 
cor'-ni-bus. 


In  like  manner  decline 


Can'-tus,  a  song. 
Cur'-rus,  a  chariot. 
Ex-er'-ci-tus,  an  army. 


Fluc'-tus,  a  wave. 
Luc'-tus,  grief. 
Mo'-tus,  motion. 


Se-na'-tus,  ike  senate. 
Ge'-lu,  ice.  (in  sing.) 
Ve'-ru,  a  spit. 


§88. 


Exceptions  in  Gender. 
The  following  are  feminine : — 


Acus,  a  medle. 
D631U),  a  tM$e. 


P'icuB,  a  fig. 
Manus,  a  hand. 


Porticus,  a  gaUerij. 
Tribus,  a  trtbe. 


46  FOURTH   DECLENSION. EXCEPTIONS.  §  89 

OSlus,  a  distaff,  and  the  plurals  Quinqmtrus,  a  feast  of  Minerva,  and  Idus,  the 
Ides,  are  also  feminine.    So  noctu,  by  night,  found  only  in  the  ablative  singular 

Penus,  a  store  of  provisions,  when  of  the  fourth  declension,  is  masculLue  or 
femlnuie.  Secus,  sex,  is  neuter;  see  §  94.  Specus,  a  den,  is  masciiline  and 
rarely  femmine  or  neuter. 

2.  Some  personal  appellatives,  and  names  of  trees,  are  feminine  by 
signification ;  as, 

Anus,  nurus,  socrus ; — cornus,  laurus,  and  quercus.  Myrtus  also  is  teminine 
and  rarely  masculine.  See  §  29,  1  and  2. 

Exceptions  in  Declension. 

§  SO.  Damus,  a  house,  is  partly  of  the  fourth  declension,  and 
partly  of  the  second.    It  is  thus  declined : — 

Singular.  Plural. 

N.  do'-miis,  do'-miis, 

G.   do'-miis,  or  do'-mi,  dom'-u-iim,  or  do-mo'-riim, 

D.  dom'-u-i,  or  do'-mo,  dom'-I-bus, 

Ac.  do'-miim,  do'-mus,  or  do'-mos, 

V.   do'-miis,  do'-miis, 

Ab.  do'-mo.  dom'-i-bGs. 

(a.)  Domus,  in  the  genitive,  signifies,  of  a  house;  doml  commonly  signifies, 
at  noma.  The  ablative  domu  is  foimd  in  Plautus,  and  in  ancient  inscriptions. 
In  the  genitive  and  accusative  plural  the  forms  of  the  second  declension  are 
more  used  than  those  of  the  fourth. 

(6.)  Cornus,  a  cornel- tree ;  y"2C«s,  a  fig,  or  a  fig-tree;  laurus,  a,  laurel;  and 
myrtus,  a  myrtle,  are  sometimes  of  the  second  declension.  Penus  is  of  the 
second,  third  or  fourth  declension. 

(c.)  Some  nouns  m  u  have  also  forms  in  us  and  um;  as,  cornu,  cornus,  or  cor- 
tuim.     Adjectives,  compounds  of  manus,  are  of  the  first  and  second  declensions. 

Remark  1.  Nouns  of  this  declension  anciently  belonged  to  the  third,  and 
were  formed  by  contraction,  thus : — 

Singular.  Plural. 

N.  fructus,  fiaitues,  us, 

G.  fmctuis,  -lis,  fructuiim,  -um, 

D.  fructui,  -ii,  fructuibiis,  -iibus,  or  -ibiis, 

Ac.  tructuem,  -iim,  fructues,  lis, 

V.  fructus,  fructues,  -Us, 

Ab.  fructue,  -u.  Iructulbus,  -ubiis,  or  -ibus. 

2.  The  genitive  singular  in  is  is  sometimes  found  in  ancient  authors ;  as, 
anuis,  Ter.  A  genitive  in  i,  after  the  second  declension,  also  occurs ;  as,  send- 
tus,  sendti;  tumultus,  tumulti.  Sail. 

3.  The  contracted  form  of  the  dative  in  u  is  not  often  used;  yet  it  sometimes 
■jcoors,  especially  in  Casar,  and  in  the  poets. 

4.  The  contracted  foi-m  of  the  genitive  plural  in  um  rarely  occurs. 

5.  The  following  nouns  have  ubus  in  the  dative  and  ablative 
plural : — 

Acus,  a  needle.         Artus,  a  joint.         Partus,  a  birth.         Specus,  a  den. 
Ai'cus,  a  bow.  Lacus,  a  lake.  Pecu,  a  jlocTc.  Tribus,  a  tribe. 

Genu,  a  knee;  portus,  a  lar^or;  loniirus,  thunder;  uid  viru,  a  spit,  have  ibm 
or  i^ms. 


§  90,  91. 


FIFTH   DECLEXSION. 


47 


FIFTH  DECLENSION. 

§  00.     Nouns  of  the  fifth  declension  end  in  es,  i.nd  are  of 

0  feminine  gender. 


They  are  thus  dedined :  — 

Res, 

a  thing. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

N.  res, 

res. 

G.   rc'-i, 

re'-rum, 

D.  re'-i, 

re'-bus, 

Ac.  rem, 

res, 

V.  res, 

res. 

Ab.  re. 

re'-bus. 

Dies, 

a  day. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

N.   di'-es, 

di'-es, 

G.   di-e'-i, 

di-e'-rum, 

D.   di-e'-i, 

di-e'-biia, 

Ac.  di'-em, 

di'-es, 

V.   di'-es, 

di'-es, 

^6.di'-e. 

di-e'-bus. 

Remark.   Nouus  of  this  declension,  like  those  of  the  fourth,  seem  to  have 
belonged  originally  to  the  third  declension. 


1.   Dies, 
masculine 


Exceptions  est  Gendek. 

,  a  day,  is  inascuUne  or  feminine  in  the  siQo;ular,  and  always 
in  the  plural ;  meridies,  mid-day,  is  masculine  only. 

Note.  Dies  is  seldom  feminine,  in  good  prose  writers,  except  when  it  de- 
notes duration  of  time,  or  a  day  fixed  and  determined. 

Exceptions  in  Declension. 

2.  The  genitive  and  dative  singular  sometimes  end  in  e  or  in  i,  instead  of  ei; 
as,  gen.  die  for  diei,  Virg. ;  fide  for  fdei',  Hor. ;  acie  for  aciei,  Cses.— gen.  jalebi 
for  plebei,  Liv. — dat.  fide  (or  fdei,  Hor.,  pernicie,  Liv.,  and  pei-nicii,  Nep.,  for 
perniciei.  The  genitive  rabies  contracted  for  rabieis,  after  the  third  declension, 
is  found  in  Lucretius. 

Eemakk  1.  There  are  only  about  eighty  nouns  of  this  declension,  andof 
these  only  two,  res  and  dies,  are  complete  in  the  plural.  Acies,  effigies,  eluvies, 
fades,  glades,  progenies,  series,  sjjecies,  spes,  want  the  genitive,  dative,  and  ab- 
lative plural,  and  the  rest  want  the  plural  altogether. 

Rem.  2.   All  nouns  of  this  declension  end  in  ies,  except  fovn— fides,  faith 
res,  a  thing;  spes,  hope;  and  plebes,  the  common  people;— and  all  nouns  in  ie» 
are  of  this  declension,  except  abies,  aries,  paries,  quies,  and  requies,  which  are 
of  the  third  declension. 

Declension  of  Compound  Nouns. 

§  01.  When  a  compound  noun  consists  of  two  nominatives,  both 
-parts  are  declined ;  but  when  one  part  is  a  nominative,  and  the  other 
at.  oblique  case,  the  nominative  only  is  declined.  Of  the  former  kind 
jire  respuhlica,  a  commonwealth,  and  jusjurandum,  an  oath ;  of  the 
latter,  mater-familias,  a  mistress  of  a  family.  Cf  §  43,  2. 
Singular.  Plural. 

res-pub '-li-ca,  N.  V.  res-pub '-li-cse,  _ 

re-i-pub'-li-ciB,  G.        re-ruin-pub-li-ca'-ruiu, 


N.  V. 
G.D. 
Ac. 
Ab. 


rem-pub'-ll-ca:ii, 
re-pub'-li-ca. 


G. 

D.  Ab.  re-bus-pub'-li-cis, 
Ac.      res-pub'-li-caa. 


48  IRREGULAR    NOUNS.  ^      §  92 


Singula?  Plural. 

iV.   jus-ju-ran -dum,  ju-ra-ju-ran -da, 

G.    ju-ris-jn-ran'-di,  

D.   ju-ri-ju-ran'-do,  

Ac.  jus-ju-ran'-dum,  ju-ra-ju-rau'-da, 

V.   jus-ju-ran'-dum,  ju-ra-ju-ran'-da. 

Ab.  ju-re-ju-ran'-do.  


Singular. 

N.  ma-ter-fa-mil'-i-as, 
G.   ma-ti'is-fa-mil'-i-as, 
D.  ma-tri-fa^mil'-i-as, 
Ac.  ma-trem-fa-mil'-i-as, 
V.   ma-ter-fa-mil'-i-as, 
Ab.  ma-tre-fa-mil'-i-as,  etc. 


Note.  The  preceding  compounds  are  diyided  and  pronounced  like  the  simple  words  of 
(rhkh  they  are  compounded. 

IRREGULAR    NOUNS. 

§  92.     Irregular   nouns   are   divided   into   three     classes — 
Variable,  Defective,  and  Redundant. 

I.    VARIABLE    NOUNS. 

A  noun  is  variable,  which,  in  some  of  its  parts,  changes  either 
its  gender  or  declension  or  both. 

Nouns  which  vary  in  gender  are  called  heterogeneous  ;  those 
which  vary  in  declension  are  called  heterocUtes. 

Heterogeneous  Nouns. 

1.  Masculine  in  the  singular,  and  neuter  in  tlie  plural ;  as, 
Avernus,  Dinclymus,  Ismarus,  Massicus,  Mcendlus,  Pangaus,  Tartarus,  TaygS- 

tus ;  plur.  Averna,  etc. 

2.  Masculine  in  the  singular,  and  masculine  or  neuter  in  the  plu- 
ral ;  as, 

j6cus,  a  jest ;  plirr.  jdci,  or  jdca ; — Idcus,  a  place ;  plur.  I6ci,  passages  in  books, 
topics,  places;  I6ca^  places; — s&'fos,  a  hissing ;  plur.  siiito,  rarely  sjMi ; — intubus, 
endive ;  plur.  intubi  or  intuba. 

3.  Feminine  in  the  singular,  and  neuter  in  the  plural ;  as, 

carbdsus,  a  species  of  flax ;  plur.  carbdsa,  very  rarely  carbasi,  sails,  etc.,  mad«) 
»f  it ; — Hierosolyma,  -te,  Jerusalem ;  plur.  Hierosolyma,  -drum. 

4.  Neuter  in  the  singular,  and  masculine  in  the  plural ;  as, 
caUm,  heaven;  plur.   codi; — Elysium;   plur.   Elysii ;—Argos ;   plur.   Argi. 

So  siser,  neut.,  plur.  siseres,  masc. 

5.  Neuter  in  the  singular,  and  masculine  or  neuter  in  the  plural ; 

as, 

frenum,  a  bridle;  plur.  ft'eni  ox  frena; — rastrum,  a  rake;  plur.  rastri,  or, 
more  rarely,  rostra  ;—pugillar,  a  writing  tablet ;  plur.  pugilldres  or  pugiUaria. 

6.  Neuter  in  the  singular,  and  feminine  in  the  plural ;  as, 
epulum,  a  feast;  plur.  epukB ; — balneum,  a  bath;  plur.  balnea  or  balnea; — 

nundinutn,  a  market-day ;  plur.  nundiruje,  a  fair. 

7.  Feminine  or  neuter  in  the  singular,  and  feminine  in  the  plural 
as, 

delicia  w  deUcivm,  delight ;  phur.  ddicia. 


§  y3,  94.  OEKKCTIVE    NOUNS.  4& 

Heteroclites. 

§  03.  1.  Second  or  tiu-d  declension  jn  the  singular,  and  third 
in  the  plural ;  as, 

nom.  and  ace.  jur/emm,  an  acre ;  gen.  jugeri  or  jugiris ;  abl.  jugiro  and 
jugere;  plur.,  nom.,  and  ace,  jugera;  gen.  jugh-um;  abl.  jugerisa.na  jugeribu$. 

2.    Third  declension  in  the  singular,  and  second  in  the  plural;  as, 

vds,  a  vessel ;  plur.  vdsa,  drum.  Anc'ile,  a  shield,  has  sometimes  ariciliorum, 
In  the  genitive  plunil. 

Note.  Variable  nouns  pwm  anciently  t/>  have  been  redundant,  and  to  have  retained 
»  part  of  each  of  their  nrigin;il  f>rnis.  Thus.  ra.<a. -orww,  properly  conies  from  vdsu9n, 
■t,  but  the  latter,  together  with  the  plural  of  vas,  vasis,  became  obsolete. 

II.     DEFECTIVE    NOUNS. 

§  04.     Nouns  are  defective  either  in  case  or  in  number. 

1.  Nouns  defective  in  case  may  want  either  one  or  more  cases. 
Some  are  altogether  indeclinable,  and  are  called  aptotes. 

Such  are  pcmdo^  a  pound;  most  nouns  in  i;  as,  gunimi,  gum:  foreign  words; 
as,  Aarcm,  Jcuob:  semis,  a  half;  git,  a  kind  of  plant;  tke  singular  of  mille,  a 
thousand ;  words  put  for  nouns ;  as,  vdle  smiin,  for  sua  voluntas,  his  own  iueUna- 
tion ;  and  names  of  the  letters  of  the  alphabet. 

A  noun  which  is  found  in  one  case  only,  is  called  a  Monoptote; 
if  found  in  two  cases,  a  Diptote  ;  if  in  three,  a  Triptote  ;  if  in  four,  a 
Tetraptote ;  and  if  in  five,  a  Pentaptote. 

The  following  list  contains  most  nouns  defective  in  case.  Those 
which  occur  but  once  in  Latin  authors  are  distinguished  by  an  as- 
terisk : — 

* Abachis,  rtcc. /J?. ;  a  driving  away.  Cetos,ncc.;  a  ichale  ;—ceite,  nom.  and 

AccTtu,  abl. ;  a  calling  for.  ace.  pi. ;  cetis,  dat. 

Admissu,  «i?. ;  admissimi.  Ghxioa,  nam.  cicc;  chao,  «6?.;  chaos. 

Admomtu,  abl.;  admonition.  Cassem,  ace;  easse,  abl.;  a  net;^)l. 

iEs,  not  used  in  gen.  pi.  entire. 

AflTitu,  abl. ;  an  addressing ;— pi.  affa-  Circumspectua,  nom. ;  -um;  -u;  a  look- 

tns,  -ibus.  ing  around. 

Algus,  nom. ;   algum,  ace.  ;   algu,  abl. ;  Coactu,  abl. ;  constraint. 

cold.  Ccelite,  abl.;  pi.  entire;  inhabitants  of 
Ambage,   abl. ;    a  going  around;— pi.        heaven. 

entire.  *Commutatum,  ace. ;  an  alteration. 

♦  Amissura.  ace. ;  a  loss.  Compedis,  gen. ;  eompf'de,  abl. ;  afet- 
Aplustre,  nwH.  and  acc;  the  flag  of  a        ter; — ■/»/.  compedes, -ium, -ibus. 

ship  ; — pi.  aplustria,  or  aplustra.  Concessu,  abl. ;  permission. 

Arbitratus,  nom.;  -um,  acc;  -u,  abl.;  Condiscipulatu,  abl.;  companionship  at 

judgvient.  school. 

Arcessitu,  abl. ;  a  sending  for.  Cratim,  or  -em,  acc. ;  -e,  abl. ;  a  hur- 
Astu,  nom.,  acc;  a  city.  die  ; — jA.  crfites,  -ium,  -Ibus. 

Astus,  nom. ;  astu,  abl. ;  craft; — astus,  Cupressu,  abl. ;  a  cypress. 

acc.  pi.  Daps,  nam.,  scarcely  used;  diipis,  gen. 
Cacoethes,  nom.,  acc. ;    an    evil  cus-        etc.  pi.  dapes,  -ibus ;  a  feast. 

torn; — cacoetae,   ncm.  pi.;    -e,   ami  *Di\t\i,  abl. ;  a  giving. 

-es,  acc.  pi.  Derisua,  -ui,  dai. ;  -um,  acc. ;  -n,  abl. ; 
Canities,  «<,>n.     -em,  ice. ;  -e,  abl.  ridicule. 

6 


50 


DEFECTIVE   NOUNS. 


§94. 


Despicatui,  c?a^ ;  contempt. 
Pica,  7W7II. ;  dicam,  ace. ;  a  legal  pro- 
cess;— dicas,  ncc.  pi. 
Dicis,  ffen. ;  as,  dicis  gratia,  for  Jbrm's 

sake. 
Ditionis,  gen. ;  -i,  dai. ;  -em,  ace. ;  -e, 

abl. ;  power. 
Diu,  abl. ;  in  the  day  time. 
Divisui,  dat. ;  a  dividing. 
Ebiir,  ivory; — nDt  used  in  t.e  plural. 
*Effl[agitatu,  abi. ;  importunity. 
*Ejectus,  nom. ;  a  ihroioing  out. 
Epos,  nam.  and  ace. ;  an  epic  ^wem. 
Ergo,  abl.  (or  adv.) ;  for  the  sake. 
Essedas,  ace.  pi. ;  war  chariots. 
Erectus,  worn. ;  a  carrying  out. 
Fsex,  dregs,  wants  gen.  p)l- 
FamS,  abl. ;  hunger. 
Far,  corn,  not  used  in  the  gen.,  dat., 

and  abl.  pi. 
Fas,  nom. ;  ace. ;  right. 
Fauce,  abl. ;  the  throat  ;^pl.  entire. 
Fax,  a  torch,  wants  gen.  pi. 
Fel,  gall,  wants  gen.  pi. 
Feminis,  gen. ;   -i,  dot. ;  -e,  abl. ;  the 

thigh ; — pi.  femina,  -Ibus. 
Flictu,  abl. ;  a  striking. 
Foris,  nom.  and  gen. ;  -em,  ace ;   -e, 

abl.;  a  door ;— 2)1.  entire. 
Fors,  nom. ;  -tis,  gen.  ;  -tem,  aee. ;  -te, 

abl. ;  chance. 
if  Frustratui,  abl. ;  a  deceiving. 
Frux,  fruit,   nom.     scarcely  used; — 

friigis,  ge7i.,  etc. 
Fulgetras,  ace.  pi.  ;  lightning. 
Gausape,  no7n.,  ace,  abl. ;  a  rough  gar- 
ment;— gausapa,  ace.  p>l- 
Glos,  7iom. ;  a  husband's  sister. 
Grates,  ace.  jjI.  ; — gratibus,  cd)l.;  thanks. 
Hebdomadam,  ace. ;  a  week. 
Hiems,  wi/Uer,  not  used  in  gen.,  dat., 

and  abl.  pi. 
Hippomanes,  nom.  and  aee. 
*Hir,  no77i. ;  the  palm  of  the  hand. 
Hortatu,  abl. ;  a7i  exhorti7ig  ;—pl.  hor- 

tatibus. 
Impetis,  gen.;  -e,  abl.;  a  shock ;^pl. 

impetibus. 
Incitas,  w  -a,  aee.  pi. ;  as,  ad  incitas 

redactus,  reduced  to  a  strait. 
*Tnconsultu,  abl. ;  imthout  advice. 
*Indultn,  abl.;  indulge7ice. 
luferise,  7iom.  pi.;  -as,  ac^  ;  -is,  abl.; 

sacrifices  to  the  dead. 
lufitias,  ace.pl.;  a  denial;  as,  ire  infit- 

ias,  to  deny. 
Ingratiis,  abl.  pi.,  (used  aelverbially); 

agai7ist  one''s  7vill. 
Injussu,  abl. ;  without  command. 
'nquies,  »jo?«.  ;  restless7iess. 
9star,  nom.,  ace. ;  a  likenets. 


Interdiu,  abl.  (or  adv.);  \n  the  day  time, 

*Invitatu,  abl. ;  an  invitation. 

Irrisui,  dat. ;  -vmi,  aee. ;  -u,  abl. ;  de* 

risicni. 
Jovis,  7iom.,  rarely  used; — pi.  Joves. 
Jugeris,  gen.;  -e,  abl.;  an  acr6;~~pL 

jiigera,  -um,  -ibus. 
Jtissu,  abl. ;  com7nand. 
Labes,  a  spot,  wants  gen.  pi. 
Lucu,  abl. ;  day-light. 
*Ludifieatui,  dat. ;  a  mockery. 
Lux,  light,  wants  the  gen.  pi. 
Mandatu,  abL  ;  a  command. 
Mane,  nom.,  ace. ;  mane,  or  rarely  -i, 

ahl. ;  the  morning. 
Mel,  honey,  not  used  in  gen.,  dat.,  and 

ail.  pi. 
Melos,  nom.,  aee.;  melo,  dat.;  melody; 

— mele,  nom.,  aee.  pi. 
Metus,  fear,  not  used  in  gen.,  dat.,  and 

abl.  pi. 
Missu,   abl. ;    a  sending  ;—pl.  missus, 

-ibus. 
Monitu,  abl.;    admonition; — pi.  mon- 

itus. 
Natu,  abl. ;  by  birth. 
Nauci,  gen.,  with  non;  as,  homo  non 

nauci,  a  man  of  no  account. 
Nefas,  nom.,  ace. ;  wickedness. 
Nemo,    nobody,    wants    the    vac.    and 

the  pi. 
Nepenthes,  nom.,  ace. ;  an  herb. 
Nex,   death,   wants   the   voc. ; — neces, 

nom.,  ace.  pi. 
Nihil,  or  nihilum,  nom.  and  aee. ;  -i, 

gen.;  -o,  abl.;  7iothing. 
Noctu,  abl. ;  by  night. 
Nuptui,    dai. ;    -um,    ace. ;    -u,    a^l. ; 

mari-iage. 
Obex,  nom. ;  -icem,  ace. ;  -ice,  or  -jice, 

abl. ;  a  bolt; — pi.  obices,  -jicibus. 
Objectum,  ace. ;  -u,  abl.  ;  an  interposi- 
tion ;^}l.  objectus. 
Obtentui,  dat. ;  -um,  ace. ;  -u,  abl. ;  a 

p7'etext. 
Opis,   gen. ;    opem,   aee. ;    ope,    abl, ; 

help  ;—pl.  entire. 
Oppositu,  abl.;  an  opposing ;— pi.  op- 

positus,  aee. 
Opus,  nrnn.,  ace. ;  need. 
Os,  the  mouth,  wants  the  gen.  pL 
Panaces,  nom. ;  -is,  ge7i. ;  -e,  ahl. ;  an 

herb. 
Pax,  peace,  wants  gen.  pi.    ■ 
Peccatu,  abl. ;  a  fatdt. 
Peciidis,  gen. ;  -i,  dat. ;  -em,  ace. ;  -e, 

abl.  ;—pl.  entire. 
Pelage,  aee.  pi.  of  pelagus;  the  sea. 
Pennissu,  abl. ;  -um,  ace. ;  permistion, 
Piscatus,   nom. ;   -i,  gen. ;   -um,  ace 
-u,  abl.;  a  fshing. 


§95 


DEFECTIVE    NOUNS. 


51 


Suppetise,   nmn.  pi. ;    -as,    ace. ;    tup- 

plies. 
Tabum,  nom. ;  -i,  gen. ;  -o,  abl. ;  cor- 
rupt matter. 
Tempe,  iiom.  ace.  voc.  pi. ;  a  vale  in 

Thessaly. 
Tus  wants  gen.,  dat.,  and  abl.  pi. 
Venui  and  -o,  dat. ;  um,  ace. ;  -o,  obL  ; 

sale. 
Veprem,  ace. ;   -e,  abl. ;  a  hner ;—  vl. 

entire. 
VerberiS;  gen.;  -e,  abl.;  a  stripe; — pi. 

verb  era,  um,  ibus. 
Vesper,  nom. ;  -um,  ace- ;  -e,  -i,  or  -o, 

abl. ;  the  evening. 
Vespera,  nom. ;  -am,  ace. ;  -a,  abl. ;  the 

evening. 
y^icis,  gen. ;  -i,   dat. ;   -em,  ace. ;  -e, 

abl. ;  change  ; — pi.  entii'e,  except  gen. 
Tirus,  nom. ;  -i,  gen, ;  -us,  ace. ;  -o,  abl. ; 

poison. 
Vis,  gen.  and  dat.  rare  ;  strength;  pi. 

vires,  -ium,  etc.     See  ^  85. 
Viscus,  nom.  ;  -eris,  gen. ;  -6re,  abl. ; 

an  internal  organ,  pi.  viscera,  etc. 
Vocatu,  abl. ;  a  calling ; — vocatus,  ace. 

pi. 


Pix,  jntch ;  pices,  ace.  pi. 

Pondo,  abl. ;   in  weight.    Cf.  §  94, 1. 

Preci,  dat. ;  -em,  ace. ;  -e,  abl. ;  prayer  • 

—pi.   entire. 
Procer;  nom.;  -em,  ace. ;  a  peer;— pi. 

entire. 
Promptu,  abl.,  readiness. 
Pus  wants  gen,  dat.  and  abl.  pi. 
Relatum,  ace. ; — u,  abl. ;  a  recital. 
Repetundarum,   gen.   pi.  ;    -is,    a6?. ; 

money  taken  by  extortion, 
Rogatu,  abl. ;  a  request. 
Ros,  dew,  wants  gen.  pi. 
Bus,  the  country,  wants  gen.,  dat.,  and 

abl.  pi. 
Satias,  nom. ;  -atem,  ace. ;   ate,  abl. ; 

satiety. 
Secus,  nom.,  ace. ;  sex. 
Situs,  nom. ;  -um,  ace. ;  -u,  abl. ;  situor- 

tion  ; — situs,  nom.  and  ace.  pi. 
Situs,  nom. ;  -us,  gen. ;  -um,  ace. ;  -u, 

abl. ;  i-ust ; — situs,  ace.  pi. 
Sol,  the  sun,  wants  gen.  pi. 
Sordis,  gen. ;  -em,  ace. ;  -e  and  -i,  abl; 

filth  ;—pl.  sordes,-ium,  etc. 
Spontis,  gen. ;    -e,  abl. ;  of  one's  oum 

accord. 
Suboles,  offspring,  wants  gen.  pi. 

Remark  1.  To  these  may  be  added  nouns  of  the  fifth  declension,  which 
either  want  the  plural,  as  most  of  them  are  abstract  nouns,  or  have  in  that 
number  onlv  the  nominative,  accusative,  and  vocative.  Res  and  t^/es,  however, 
have  the  plural  entire.    Cf.  \  90,  R.  1. 

Rem.  2.  For  the  use  of  the  vocative,  also,  of  many  nouns,  no  classical  au- 
thority can  be  found. 

§  OiT.  2.  Nouns  defective  in  number,  want  either  the  plural  or 
the  singular. 

(fl)  ]\Iany  nouns  want  the  plural  from  the  nature  of  the  things 
which  they  express.  Such  are  generally  names  of  persons,  most  names 
of  places  (except  those  which  have  only  the  plural),  the  names  of 
herbs,  of  the  arts,  most  material  and  abstract  nouns ;  but  these  may 
have  a  plural  when  used  as  common  nouns,  (§  26,  R.  3.),  and  many 
others. 

RE>t.  In  Latin  the  plural  of  abstract  nouns  is  often  used  to  denote  the  exist- 
ence of  the  quality,  attribute,  etc.  in  different  objects,  or  the  repetition  of  an 
action  ;  and  in  poetry  such  plurals  are  used  for  the  sake  of  emphasis  or  metre. 
See  (j  98. 

The  following  list  contains  many  of  the  nouns  which  ivant  the  plural, 
and  also  some,  marked  p,  which  are  included  in  the  above  classes,  but 
»re  sometimes  used  in  the  plural. 

Aconitum,  wolfsbane,  p. 
Adorea,   a    military    re- 
ward 
Aer,  the  air,  p. 
/£%,  brass,  money,  p. 
fither,  the  sky. 


Mmm,  age,  lifetime,  p. 
Alburn,  an  album. 
Allium,  garlic,  p. 
Amicitia,  friendship,  p. 
Argilla,  it'll  i(e  clay. 
Avena,  oats,  p. 


Balaustium,  the  flower  of 

the  pomegranate. 
Balsfimum,  bnkcm,  p. 
Barathrum,  a  gulf. 
Galium,  hardened  skin,  p 
Calor,  heat,  p. 


52 


DEFECTIVE    NOUNS. 


§96 


Carduus,  a  thistle,  p. 
Ca.ro,  flush,  p. 
Cera,  wax,  p. 
Cestus.  a  (jirdle. 
Cicuta,  hemloch,  p. 
Coeiium,  7nud. 
Contagium,  contagion,  ^5, 
Crocum,  saffron. 
Crocus,  saffron,  p. 
Cruor,  blood,  p. 
Cutis,  the  skin,  p. 
Diluculum,  the  dawn. 
Ebur,  ivory. 
Electnim,  amber,  p. 
Far,  corn,  p. 
Fel,  gall,  p. 
Fervor,  heat,  p. 
Fides, /ffiYL 
Fihius,  dung. 
Fxign,  flight, -p. 
Fumus,  smoke,  p. 
Fnror,  madness,  p. 
Galla,  ow  oak-aj)/jle,  p. 
G  elu, y^'ost. 
Glarea,  gravel. 
Gloria,  glory,  p. 
Glastum,  wood. 
Gluten,  or 
Glutlnum,  glue. 
Gypsum,  mtite plaster. 
Hepar,  the  liver. 
Hespei-us,    the     evening 

star. 
Hilum,  a  little  thing. 
Hordeuni,  barley,  p. 
Humus,  the  ground. 
Indoles,  native  qtudity,  p. 
Ira,  anger,  p. 
Jubar,  radiance. 
Jws,  justice,  law,  p. 
Justitium,  a  law  vacation. 


Lac,  milk. 
Lcetitia,yoy,  p. 
Languor, /aireiwess,  p. 
Lardum,  bacon,  p. 
Latex,  liquor,  p. 
Letum,  death. 
Lignum,  wood,  p. 
Limus,  mud. 
Liquor,  liquor,  p. 
Lues,  a  plague. 
Lutum,  clay,  p. 
Lux,  light,  p. 
Macellum,  the  shambles. 
Mane,  the  morning. 
Marmor,  marble,  p. 
Mel,  honey,  p. 
Meridies,  mid-day. 
Mors,  death,  p. 
Munditia,  neatness,  p. 
Mundus,    female    orna^ 

ments. 
Muscus,  moss. 
Nectar,  nectar. 
Nemo,  no  man. 
Nequitia,  vnckedness,  p. 
Nilillum,  nihil,  or  nil,  7io- 

thing. 
Nitrum,  natron. 
OhViyio,  f or getfulness,  p. 
Omasum,  bullock's  tripe. 
Opium,  opium. 
Palea,  ehaff,  p. 
Pax,  jseace,  p. 
Fenum,  and 
"Pmus,  2}rovisions,  p. 
F'lper, pepjjer. 
Fix,  pilch,  p. 
Pontus,  the  sea. 
Prolubium,  desire. 
Pubes,  the  youth. 
Pulvis,  dust,  p. 


Purpiira,  purple,  p. 
Quies,  rest,  p. 
Ros,  dew,  p. 
Riibor,  redness,  p. 
Sabiilo  and 
Sabulum,  gravel. 
Sal,  salt. 
Salum,  the  s&i. 
Salus,  safety. 
Sanguis,  bhjod. 
Scrapulum,  a  scruple,  pu 
Senium,  old  age. 
Siler,  an  osier. 
Sinapi,  mustard. 
Siser,  skirret,  p 
Sitis,  thirst. 
Sol,  the  sun,  p. 
Sopor,  sleep,  p. 
Specimen,  an  example. 
Spuma,  ybam,  p. 
Sulfur,  sulphur,  p. 
Supellex,  furniture. 
Tabes,  a  consumption. 
Tabum,  corrupt  matter. 
Tellus,  the  earth. 
TeiTor,  terror,  p. 
Thymum,  thyme,  p. 
Tribulus,  a  ijiistle,  p. 
Tristitiaj  sadness. 
Ver,  spring. 
Vespera,  the  evening. 
Vetemus,  lethargy. 
Vigor,  strength,  p. 
Vinum,  wine,  p. 
Virus,  jjoison. 
Viscum,  and 
Viscus,  bird-lime. 
Vitnim,  wood. 
Vulgus,  the  common  peo 

pie. 
Zingiber,  ginger. 


Fundi, 

Locri, 

Sasa, 

Gabii, 

Parisii, 

SjTacusse, 

Gades, 

Philippi, 

Thennopylse, 

Gemonise, 

Puteoli, 

Veii. 

§  96.  (I).  The  names  of  festivals  and  games,  and  several  names 
of  plat-es  and  books,  want  the  singular ;  as,  Bacchanalia,  a  festival  of 
Bacchus ;  Olympia,  the  Olympic  games ;  Bucolica,  a  book  of  pastorals ; 
and  the  following  names  of  places : — 

Acrocerannia,  Baise, 

AmyelEe,  Ceraunia, 

Aitaxata,  Ecbatana, 

Athente,  Esquilise, 

Note.    Some  of  those  in  i  properly  signify  the  people. 

The  following  list  contains  most  other  nouns  lohich  want  the  singular, 
and  also  some,  marked  s,  which  are  rarely  used  in  that  number : — 
Acta,  recm-ds.  AJpes,  the  Alps,  s.  *    Apinte,  trifles. 

Adversaria,  a  memoran-     Aniiales,  annals,  s.  Arguti*,  witticisms,  9. 

duntrJ/ook.  Antse,  door-posts.  Arma,  arms. 

Estiva,  so.  castra,   sumr-     Antes,  rows.  '  Artus,  the  joints,  s. 

mer  qua\iers.  Antiaj,  a  forelock.  Bellaria,  sweetmeats. 


§97. 


de:ective  nouns. 


5b 


Bigse,  a  tiBO-horse  char- 
iot, s. 

Braccie,  breeches. 

Branchiae,  the  gills  of 
Jishes. 

Brevia,  shallow  places. 

Calendse,  the  Calends. 

Caiicelli,  balustrades. 

Caui,  gray  hairs. 

Casses,  a  hunter's  net,  s. 

Caulse,  sheep-folds. 

Celeres,  the  body-guard 
of  the  Roman  kings. 

Cibaria,  victuals,  s. 

Clitella;,  a  pack-saddle. 

Codicilli,  a  writing. 

Ccelites,  the  gods,  s. 

Crepundia,  a  rattle. 

Cunabula,  and 

CunJE,  a  cradle. 

Cyclades,  the  Cyclades,  s. 

Decimse,  tithes,  8. 

Dirag,  the  Furies,  s. 

Divitiae,  riches. 

Dniides,  the  Di-uids. 

])rj'ades,  the  Dryads,  3. 

Epulie,  a  banquet,  s. 

Eumenides,  the  Furies,  a. 

ExcubiaB,  watches. 

Exsequia;,  funeral  rites. 

Exta,  entrails. 

Exuvise,  spoils. 

Facetiae,  pleasantry,  s. 

Farias,  holidays,  s. 

Fides,  a  stringed  instru- 
ment, s. 

Flabra,  blasts. 

Fracas,  the  lees  of  oil. 

Fraga,  strawberries,  s. 

Gemini,  twins,  s. 

Gente,  cheeks,  s. 

GaiTffi,  trifles. 

Grates,  thanks. 

Habenae,  reins,  a. 

Hibema,  so.  castra,  vnn- 
ter  quarters. 

Hyades,  the  Hyades,  s. 

Idu3,  the  ides  of  ajnonth. 

Dia,  the  flank. 

Inouiiabiila,  a  cradle. 

Indutiae,  a  truce. 

§97. 

numbers. 

^des,  -is,  a  temple. 
^des,  -ium,  a  house. 
Aqua,  water. 
JLquae,  medicinal  springs. 
Auxilium,  aid. 
Aaxilia.  anxiliary  troops. 
6* 


Induviffi,  clothes. 

Ineptiai,  fooleries,  8. 

lufC-ri,  the  dead. 

Liferia;,soc;-i/jtes  in  honor 
of  the  dead. 

Insecta,  insects. 

Insidise,  an  ambuscade,  a. 

Justa,  funei-al  rites. 

Lactes,  small  entrails,  a. 

Lamanta,  lamentations. 

Lapicidinae,  a  stone  quar- 
ry. 

Latebrae,  a  hiding  place, 
s. 

Lauricas,  young  rabbits. 

Laiitia,  presents  to  for- 
eign ambassadors. 

Lemures,  hobgoblins. 

Lendes,  nits 

Libei'i,  children,  a. 

Luceres,  a  division  of  the 
Roman  cavalry. 

Magalia,  cottages. 

^lajOres,  ancestors. 

Manes,  the  shades,  a. 

Manubiae,  spoils  of  war. 

Mapalia,  nuts,  a. 

Minacise,  and 

Minae,  threats. 

MinSres,  posterity. 

McKnia,  the  walls  of  a 
city,  a. 

Multitia,  garments  finely 
wrought. 

Munia,  official  duties. 

Naiades,  water-rimnphs,  a. 

Nares,  the  7iostrils,  a. 

Natales,  parentaae. 

Nates,  the  haunches,  a. 

Nomae,  corroding  sores  or 
ulcers.,  a. 

NoucT.,  the  nones  of  a 
month.    §  326,  1. 

Niigae,  J  esis,  nonsense. 

Nundluoe,  the  weekly  mar- 
ket. 

Niiptite,  a  marriage. 

ObiimA,  forgetfulness,  a. 

OU'ucifE,  cheats,  a. 

Optimates,  the  aristo- 
cratic party,  a. 


Palearia,  the  aewlap,  s. 
PandectEB,  thepanrlects 
Parietinae,  old  walls. 
Partes,  a  party,  a. 
Va.acnn.,  pastures,  a. 
Penates,  household  gods, 

a. 
PhalSrae,  trappings. 
Philtra,  love  potions. 
Pleiades,   the  Pleiads  oi 

seven  stars,  a. 
Posteri,  posterity. 
Prsebia,  an  amulet. 
Praecordia,      the     dior 

phragm,  the  entrails. 
Vrmntvx,  first  fruits. 
Proceres,  nobles,  a. 
Pugillaria,    or    -ai'es, 

writing-tablets,  a. 
Quadrigae,  a  team  offowr 

horses,  s. 
Quirites,  Roman  citizem, 

a. 
Quisquiliae,  refuse. 
Reliquiaj,  the  remains,  a. 
Salebra?,  rugged  roads,  s. 
Saljuae,  salt  pits. 
Scalae,  a  ladder,  a. 
Scatebrae,  a  spring,  a. 
Sc6p£e,  a  broom. 
Scriita,  old  stuff. 
Sentes,  thorns,  a. 
Sponsalia,  esjjousals. 
Stativa,    sc.    castra,    a 

stationary  camp. 
Superi,  the  gods  above. 
Talaria,  winged  shoes. 
Tenebrte,  darkness,  s. 
Tesca,  rough  places. 
Tliennaj,  warm  baths. 
Tormina,  colic-pains. 
Transtra,  seats  for  rou>- 

ers,  a. 
Tricre,  trifles,  toys. 
Utansiliu,  utensils. 
Valvaj,  folding  doom's,  s. 
Vepres,  branwles,  a. 
VergiliEe,  the  seven  stars, 
Vindicife,  a  legal  claim,  s. 
Virgiilta,  bushes. 


The  following  usually  diflFer  in  meaning  in  the  different 


Bonum,  a  good  thing. 
Bona,  property. 
Career,  a  jyrison. 
Carceres,  the  barriers  of 

a  race-course 
Castrum,  a  castle. 


Castra,  a  camp. 
Comitimn,  apart  of  th« 

Roman  forum. 
Comitia,  Vi«  assembly  for 

election. 
Copia,  plenty. 


54 


REDUNDANT   NOUNS. 


§  98,  99 


Coplae,  troops, forces. 
Cupedia,  -£e,  aaintiness. 
Ciipediae,  -arum,  and 
Cupedia,  -orum,  dainties. 
Facultas,  ability. 
Facultates,  property. 
Fastus,  -us,  pride. 
Fastus,  -uum,  and 
Fasti,  -5rum,  a  calendar. 
Fortuiia,  Fortune. 
FortjinEe,  wealth. 
Fiu-fur,  bra7i. 
Furfiires,  dandruff. 
GraX'm,  favor. 
Gratiaj,  thanks. 


Impedimentum,  a  hinder- 
ance. 

Impedimenta,  baggage. 

Litera,  a  letter  of  the  al- 
phabet. 

Literse,  an  epistle. 

Ltidus,  pastime. 

Ludi,  public  games. 

Lustrum,  a  morass. 

Lustra,  a  haunt  or  den  of 
wild  beasts. 

Mos,  custom. 

Mores,  manners. 

Naris,  a  nostriL 

Nares,  the  nose. 


Natalia,  a  birthday. 
Natales,  birth,  lineage. 
Opera,  work,  labor. 
Operse,  workmen. 
Opis,  gen.  power. 
Opes,  -um,  means,  wealth, 
Plaga,  a  region,  tract. 
Plagse,  nets,  toils. 
Principium,  a  beginning, 
Principia,    the    generalPt 

-quarters. 
Eostrum,  a  beak,  pro/m. 
Rostra,  tJie  Rostra. 
Sal,  salt. 
Sales,  witticisms. 


§  08.  The  following  plurals,  with  a  few  others,  are  sometimes 
used  in  poetry,  especially  in  the  nominative  and  accusative,  instead 
of  the  singular,  for  the  sake  of  emphasis  or  metre. 


Jiquora,  the  sea. 
Alta,  the  sea. 
Animi,  (courage. 
Auroe,  the  air. 
CaiiuEe,  a  keel. 
Cei-vices ,  the  neck. 
Colla,  the  neck. 
C6m£B,  the  hair. 
Connubia,  riarriage. 
Corda,  the  heart. 
Coi-pora,  a  body. 
Crepuscula,  twilight, 
Cui'rus,  a  chariot. 
Exsilia,  banishment. 
Frigora,  cold. 
Gaudia,  joy. 
Gvamina,  grass. 


la,  gr 

1,  the 


Guttiira,  the  throat. 


Hymenai,  marriage. 

Igues,  love. 

Liguiua,  the  groin. 

tse,  anger. 

Jej  unia,  fasting. 

Jubee,  a  mane. 

Limina,  a  threshold. 

Litora,  a  shore. 

Mensce,  a  service  or  course 
of  dishes. 

Neniae,  a  funeral  dirge. 

Numiua,  tlie  divinity. 

Odia,  hatred. 

Ora,  the  mouth,  the  coun- 
tenance. 

Orse,  confines. 

Ortus,  a  rising,  the  east. 

Otia,  ease,  leisure. 


Pectora,  the  breast. 

Reditus,  a  return. 

Regna,  a  kingdom. 

Rictus,  the  jaws. 

Robora,  strength. 

Silentia,  silence. 

Sinus,  the  bosom  of  a  Bo- 
man  garment. 

Tcedas,  a  torch. 

Tempora,  time. 

Terga,  the  back. 

Thalami,   marriage  or 
marriage-bed. 

Tori,  a  bed,  a  couch. 

Tilra,  frankincense. 

Vits,  a  journey. 

Vultus,-  the  countenance. 


III.    REDUNDANT    NOUNS. 


§  OO.     Nouns  are  redundant  either  in  termination,  in  declensioUj 
in  gender,  or  in  two  or  more  of  these  respects. 

1.  In  tennination  :  {a.)  of  the  nominative  ;  as,  arbor,  and  arbos,  a  tree:  (b.) 
of  the  oblique  cases;  as,  tigris, ;  gen.  tigris,  or  -Idis;  a  tiger. 

2.  In  declension ;  as,  laurus ;  gen.  -i,  or  -Us ;  a  laurel. 

3.  In  gender;  as,  vulgus,  masc.  or  neut. ;  the  common  people. 

4.  In  tern:""nation  and  declension ;  as,  senecta,  -cb,  and  senectus,  -utis ;   old 
age. 

5.  In  termination  and  gender;  aspileus,  masc,  and pileurn,  neut.;  a  hat 

6.  In  d3clension  and  gender;  as  penus,  -i  or  us,  masc.  or  fem.,  and  penus, 
•dris,  neut. ;  a  store  of  provisions.     Specus,  -us  or  -i,  masc.  fem.  or  neut. ;  a  cavek 

7.  In  t3imination,  declension,  and  gender;  as,  mendn,  -ce,  fem.  and  mendum^ 
•4,  neut. ;  a  fault. 


§99. 


REDUNDANT   NOUNS. 


55 


The  follow'.ng  list  contains  most  Redundant  Nouns  of  the  above  classes : — 


Acinus,  -um,  and  -a,  a  berry. 

Kil-3.g\Vira,  and -\o,  a  proverb. 

Admouitio,  -um,  and  -us,  us,  a  remind- 
ing. 

^tlira,  and  tether,  the  clear  sky. 

Aftectio,  afuf -UB,  us,  affection. 

Apamemno,  and  -on,  Agamemnon. 

Alaliaster,  tri,  and  pi.  -tra,  oruin,  an 
alabaster  box. 

A'.iiDonia,  and  -urn,  aliment. 

A\\\i\'\o,  and -Q,?>,  ajiood. 

Alvearium,  «'«<:/ -are,  a  bee-hive. 

Amaracus,  and  -um,  marjoram. 

Amygdala,  and  -um,  aji  almond.^ 

Anfractum,  and  -us.  Us,  a  idnding. 

Angiportutn,  and  -us.  Us,  a  narrow  lane 
or  alky. 

Autidotiis,  and  -um,  an  antidote. 

Arauea,  and  -us,  j,  a  spider. 

Arar,  a7ul  Ai-aris.  the  river  Arar. 

Arbor,  and  -os,  a  tree. 

Aixliitectus,  and  -on,  an  architect. 

Arcus,  -us,  and  i,  a  bow. 

Attagena,  and  -gen,  a  moor-hen. 

Avaritia,  and  -ies,  avarice. 

Augmentum,  and  -men,  an  increase. 

Baccar,  and  -aris,  a  kind  of  herb. 

Baculus,  and  -um,  a  staff. 

Balteus,  and  -um,  a  belt. 

Barbaria,  and  -ies,  barbarism. 

Barbitus,  and  -on,  a  harp. 

BatQlus,  and  -um,  afire-shovel. 

Blanditia,  and -ies,  flattery. 

Bucciua,  «n(Z-um,  a  trumpet. 

Biira,  and  -is,  ft  plough-tail. 

Buxus,  and  -um,  the  box-tree. 

Cjepa,  and  ca2ne,  an  onion. 

Calamister,  tri,  and  -trum,  a  crisping- 
pin. 

Callus,  and  -um,  hardened  skin. 

Cancer,  cri,  or  eris,  a  crab. 

Canitia,  aiul  -ies,  hoariness. 

Capus,  and  capo,  a  capon. 

CaiTus,  and-Mxn,  a  kind  of  waggon 

Cassida,  and  -cassis,  a  helmet. 

Catinus,  and  -um,  a  bowl,  dish. 

Chirogi'aphus,  and  -um,  a  hand-writ  ng. 

Cingula,  -us,  and  -um,  a  girdle. 

Clipeus,  «na -um,  a  shield. 

Cochlearium,  -ar,  and  -are,  a  spoon 

Colluvio,  and -ies,  filth. 

Commentarius,  and -um,  a  journal 

Compages,  and  -go,  a  joining. 

Conatum,  and-ns,  u.<,  an  attempt. 

Concinnitas,  arui  -tudo,  neatness. 

Consortium,  and  -io,  partnership. 

Contagium,  -io,  and  -es,  contact. 

Comum,  -us,  »,  or  Us,  a  cornel  tree. 
Uo8t03,j,  and  -um-  a  kind  of  shrub. 


Cratera,  ctnd  crater,  a  bowl. 
Ci'ocus,  and  -um,  saffron. 
Crystallus,  and -\im,  crystal. 
Cubitus,  and  -um,  the  elbow. 
Cupiditas,  and  -pido,  desire. 
Cupressus,  i,  or  us,  a  cypress-tree. 
Delicia,  and  -um,  delight. 
Delphinus,  and  delphin,  a  dolphin. 
Dictamnus,  and  -um,  dittany. 
Diluvium,  -o,  and  -ies,  a  deluge. 
Domus,  i,  or  Qs,  a  Iwtise. 
Dorsus,  and  -um,  the  back. 
Duritia,  and  -ies,  hardness. 
Effigia,  and  -ies,  an  image. 
Elegla,  and  -on,  i,  an  elegy. 
Elephantus,  and  -phas,  aii  elephant. 
Epitoma,  and  -e,  an  abridgment. 
Esseda,  and  -um,  a  chariot. 
Evander,  dri,  and  -drus,  Evander. 
Eventum,  and  -us,  us,  an  event. 
Exemplar,  and  -are,  a  pattern. 
Ficus,  i,  or  us,  a  fig-tree. 
Fimus,  and  -um,  dung. 
Fretum,  and  -us,  Os,  a  strait. 
Fulgetra,  and  -um,  lightning. 
Galerus,  and  -um,  a  fiat^  cap. 
Ganea,  and  -um,  an  eating-house. 
Gausapa,  -es,  -e,  and  -um,  frieze. 
Gibba,  -us,  and  -er,  eri,  a  hump. 
Glutinum,  and  -ten,  glue. 
Gobius,  and  -io,  a  gudgeon. 
Gramiuatica,  a7id  -e,  grammar. 
Gras,  grwis,and  wrais,  is,  a  crane. 
Hebdomada,  ana  -ma.s,  a  week. 
Hellebonis,  and  -um,  hellebore. 
Honor,  and  honos,  honor. 
Hyssopus,  aiid  -um,  hyssop. 
Ilios,  -um,  and  -on,  Troy. 
Incestum,  and  -us.  Us,  incest. 
Intiibus,  and  -um,  endive. 
Jugulixs,  and  -um,  the  throat. 
Juventa,  -us,  Utis,  and -as,  youth. 
Labor,  ami  labos,  labor. 
Lacerta,  and  -us,  a  lizard. 
Laums,  i,  or  us,  a  laurel. 
Lepor,  and  lepos,  wit. 
Ligur,  and  -us,  uris,  a  Ligurian. 
Lupinus,  and  -um,  a  lupine. 
Luxuria,  and  -ies,  luxury. 
Maeander,  -dros,  and  -drus,  Mc^ander. 
Margarita,  and  -um,  a  pearl. 
Materia,  and  -ies,  materials. 
Medimnus,  and  -um,  a  measure. 
Menda,  and-\xm.,  afatdt. 
Modius,  and  -um,  a  measure. 
Mollitla,  and -ies,  softness. 
Momentum,  and  -men,  influence. 
Mugil,  and  -ilis,  a  mullet. 
Mulclber,  eri,  or  iris,  Vulcan. 


56 


DEKIVATTON    OK    NOUNS. 


§100 


Mulctra,  and  -um,  a  milkrpail. 

Muiiditia,  ajirf -ies,  neatnesi. 
I\Iuria,  and  -ies,  brine  or  pkkle 
il_yrtus,  i  or  us,  a  myrtle. 
Nardus,  a7ul  -um,  ware?. 
Nasus,  r(?i(i  -iim,  ^/(e  «ose. 
Necessitas,  o/i(/  -udo,  7iecessify. 
Nequitia,  «««?  -ies,  icortlikssitsss, 
Notitia,  arid  -ies,  knoidedye. 
Oblivimn,  and  -io^fovgcffulness. 
Obsidium,  and -\o,  a  sieye. 
(Edipus,  i,  or  6dis,  CEdipus. 
Ostrea,  and  -um,  an  oyster. 
Palatus,  and -um,  the  palate. 
Palumba,  -us,  and -es,  apiyeon. 
Papyrus,  and  -um,  papyrus. 
Paupertas,  and  -ies,  poverty. 
Pfivus,  and  pavo,  apieacoclc. 
Pemis,  i,  -6ris,  or  us,  and   penum,  2^' 

visions. 
Peplus,  and  -um,  a  veil. 
Perseus,  ei,  or  eos,  Persem. 
Piletis,  and  -um,  a  hat. 
Pinus,  i,  or  us,  apine-tree. 
Pistrlna,  and  -uir.   a  hake-houie. 
Planitia,  and  -ies,  a  plain. 
Plato,  and^Vlaton,  Plato. 
Plebs,   and  plebes,   ei,   the   common 

people. 
Porrus,  and  -um,  a  leek. 
Postulatum,  aiul  -io,  a  request. 
Prassepia,  -ium,  -es,    or  -is,  and  -e, 

stable. 
Prajtextum,  and  -uSj  us,  a  pretext. 
Prosapia,  and  -ies,  Imeaye. 
Eapa,  aiul  -um,  a  turnip. 
Eequies,  etis  or  ei,  rest. 
Rete,  and  retis,  a  net. 
Keticiilus,  and  -um,  a  small  net. 


Rictum,  and  -us,  Us,  the  open  nwuth. 
Sffivitia,  -Gdo  arid  -ies,  ferocity. 
Silgus,  aiid  -um,  a  military  chaJt. 
Sanguis,  and  sanguen,  Uood. 
Satrapes,  and  satraps,  a  satrap. 
Scabritia,  and  -ies,  'roughness. 
Scorpius,  -OS,  and  -io,  a  scorpion. 
Segmentum,  and -men,  apiece. 
Segnitia,  and  -ies,  sloth. 
Senecta,  and  -us,  old  age. 
Sequester,  tri,  or  tns,  a  trustee. 
Sesama,  aiul  -um,  sesame. 
Sibilus,  and  -a,  drum,  a  hissing. 
Siuapi,  and  -is,  mustard. 
Sinus,  and  -um,  a  goblet. 
Spiinis,  and  -a,  drum,  a  spear. 
Spurcitia,  and  -ies,  Jilihiness. 
Stramentum,  aiid  -men,  straw. 
Suftimentum,  and  -men,  fumigation. 
Suggestus,  and-um,  apnilpit,  singe. 
Suppainis,  and  -um,  a  linen  garment. 
Suppliciimi,  -icamentum,  and  -icatia 

a  public  svpplicaiion. 
TapC'tum,  -ete,  and  -es,  tapestry. 
Teueritas,  a/id-tlido,  softness. 
Tergum,  aiul  -us,  oris,  me  hack. 
Tiara,  and  -as,  a  turban. 
Tignus,  aiul  -um,  a  beam,  timber. 
Tigi'is,  is,  or  idis,  a  tiger. 
Titiinus,  arnd  Titan,  Titan. 
Tonitruum,  and  -trus,  us,  thunder. 
Torfile,  and  -al,  a  bed-covering. 
Trabes,  and  trabs,  a  beam. 
Tribula,  and-um.,  a  threshing  sledge. 
VespC-ra,  -per,  eri  and  eris,  the  evening. 
ViuacC-us,  aW -a,  drum,  a  grape-stone. 
Viscus,  aiul  -um,  the  mistletoe. 
Vulgus,  masc.  and  neut.,  the  common 

people. 


Remark  1.  To  these  may  be  added  some  other  verbals  in  ms  and  io,  and 
Greeli  nouns  in  o  and  on ;  as,  Dio  and  Dion ;  also  some  Greek  nouns  in  es  and 
6.,  which  have  Latui  forms  in  a ;  as,  Atrldes  and  Atrtda.     See  §  45. 

Rem.  2.  Some  proper  names  of  places  also  are  redundant  in  number ;  as, 
ArgosmvX  Argi;  Fidfna  and  Fidence ;   Tliijbe  and  Thebw. 

Note.  The  different  forms  of  most  words  in  the  above  list  are  not  equally  common,  and 
some  are  rarely  used,  or  only  in  particular  cases. 


DERIVATION   OF   NOUNS. 

§  too.     Nouns  are  derived  from  other  nouns,  from  adjectives, 
and  Irom  verbs. 

I.  From  Nouns. 

From  nouns  are  derived  the  following  classes  : — 
1.    A  patronymic  is  the  name  of  a  person,  derived  from  that  of  his 
father  or  other  ancestor,  or  of  the  founder  of  his  nation. 


§  100.  DIiyVATION    OF   NOUNS.  57 

Note  1.  Patronymics  are  properly  Greek  nouns,  and  have  been  borrowed  from  that  Ian 
guage  by  the  Latin  poets. 

(a.)  Masculine  patronymics  end  in  ides,  ides,  ades,  and  iiides. 

(1.)  Ntuns  in  its  3f  the  second  declension,  and  those  nouns  of  the  third  de* 
clensioi,  whose  ro.:t  ends  m  a  short  syllable,  form  their  patronpnics  hi  ides; 
fts,  Priamiis,  Priamides ;  Agamemnon,  gen.  dnis,  Agaiiiemnonldes. 

(2.)  Nouns  in  eus  and  cles  form  their^patronymics  in  kfes;  as,  A-treus,  Atrides ; 
Htracles  (i.  e.  Hercules,)  Heraclldes. 

Rem.  1.  Snides,  in  Virg.  A.  9,  653,  is  formed  in  like  manner,  as  if  from  JEneua, 
instead  of  ^iicas. 

(3.)  Nouns  in  as  and  es  of  the  first  declension  form  their  patronymics  in  ddes, 
as  jEnids,  jEneades ;   Eippdtes,  Hippdtddes. 

(4.)  Nouns  in  ius  of  the  second  declension,  and  those  nouns  of  the  third  de- 
clension, whose  root  ends  in  a  long  vowelj  form  their  patronymics  in  iddes;  as, 
iltestius,  niestiddes;  Amphitryo  {g<&n.  dms),  Amphitryoniddes. 

Kem  2.  A  few  nouns  also  of  the  first  declension  have  patronjnnics  in  lades ; 
as,  AnchUes,  Anchislddes. 

(b.)  Feminine  patronymics  end  in  is,  eis,  and  ias,  and  correspond 
in  termination  to  the  masculines,  viz.  is  to  ides,  eis  to  ides,  and  ias  to 
iades  ;  as,  Tyndarus,  masc.  Ti/ndarides,  fern.  Tynddris ;  Nereus,  masc. 
Nereides,  fem.  Nereis ;  Thestius,  masc.  Thestiddes,  fern.  Tkesiias. 

Rem.  3.  A  few  feminines  are  fotmd  in  ine,  or  imie ;  as,  Nerlne,  ■'AcrisioTie , 
from  Nereus  and  Acrisius. 

Note  2.  Patronj-mics  in  des  and  ne  are  of  the  first  declension  ;  those  in  is 
and  as,  of  the  third. 

2.  Apatrial  or  gentile  noun  is  derived  from  the  name  of  a  country; 
and  denotes  an  inhabitant  of  that  country ;  as, 

Tros,  a  Trojan  man  ;  Troas,  a  Trojan  woman  :  Macedo,  a  Macedonian  ; 
Saintns,  a  Samnite  ;  from  Troja,  Macedonia,  and  Samniwn. 

Note  3.  Most  patrials  are  properly  adjectives,  relating  to  a  noun  understood  ; 
as,  hdmo,  clvis,  etc.      See  §  128,  6. 

3.  A  diminutive  signifies  a  small  thing  of  the  kind  denoted  by  the 
primitive ;  as,  liber,  a  book ;  libellus,  a  little  book. 

Diminutives  generally  end  in  iilus,  iila,  Ulum,  or  cuius,  cula,  cUlum, 
according  as  the  primitive  is  masuline,  feminine,  or  neuter. 

A.  1.  If  the  primitive  is  of  the  first  or  second  declension,  or  its  root  ends 
in  c,  ^  d,  or  t  after  a  vowel,  the  diminutive  is  fonned  by  annexing  ulus,  a, 
um  to  the  root  ;  as,  arula,  servulus,  puerulus,  scutulum,  cornkula,  reyidus,  ca- 
pitulv.n,  mercedula  ;  from  dra,  ser-vus,  yjuer,  scutum,  comix,  {-Ids),  rex,  [regit), 
caput,  (-itis),  merces,  {-edis.) 

2.  Primitives  of  the  first  or  second  declension  whase  root  ends  in  e  or  t, 
instead  of  ulus,  a,  um,  add  dlus,  a,  um  ;  as,  JiUolus,  gloridla,  IwrreOlum  ;  from 
Jilius,  gloria,  horreum. 

3.  Prhnitives  of  the  first  or  second  declension  whose  root  ends  hi  I,  «,  or  r, 
fonn  diminutives  bv  contraction  in  eV'us,  a,  um,  and  some  in  illus,  a,  wn :  as, 
ocellus,  asvHus,  libeltus,  lucellum ;  from  ocultts,  asiiia,  liber,  luci'um  ;  and  dyillun\ 
tiyillum,  from  signum,  tiyniun. 

B.  1  If  the  primitive  is  of  the  third,  fourth,  or  fifth  declension,  the  dunina- 
tive  is  .'onned  in  cuius,  (or  icuIks),  a,  vjh^ 

2.  Primitives  of  the  thud  declension  whose  nominative  ends  in  r,  or  in  ob  est 
us  from  roots  ead:-^  in  r  annex  eilus  to  the  nominative  ;  s^,frater cuius,  soror- 


58  DERIVATION    OF    NOU^.  §  lUl. 

cula  osculum,  corpusc&lum;  frovaj  rater,  sdror,6s,  (dris),corptis,{-67'is).-—Soal90 
primitives  in  es  and  is,  but  thsse  drop  the  s  of  the  nominative  ;  as,  ignicultu, 
nubecula,  dkcula  ;  from  i(^nis,  nuhes,  dies. 

3.  Primitives  of  other  tenninations  of  the  third  declension,  and  those  of  tne 
fourth,  add  iculus  to  the  root  ;  as,  ponticMus,  coticula,  ossiculum,  versic&lus,  corni- 
culum;  frora pons,  cos,  es,  {ossii  j,  versus,  cornu. 

4.  Primitives  in  o,  {inis  or  onis),  in  adding  cuius,  a,  um,  change  the  final  vowel 
of  the  root  (i  or  o)  into  u  ;  as,  homunculus,  sermunculus  ;  from  Mmo  and  sermo  ; 
and  a  few  primitives  of  other  terminations  form  similar  diminutives  ;  as,  avun- 
cuius,  domuncula  ;  from  avus  and  ddmus, 

C.  1.  A  few  diminutives  end  in  uleus ,  as,  equuleus,  aculeus ;  from  equus  ant' 
Acv^ ;  and  a  few  also  mlo;  as,  homuncio,  senecio,  from  hdnio  and  senex. 

2.  Diminutives  are  sometimes  formed  from  other  diminutives  ;  as,  aselMin, 
from  dsellus ;  sometimes  two  or  more  diminutives  with  different  terminations 
are  formed  from  the  same  primitive  ,  as,  homunculus,  homullvs,  and  homuncio ; 
fi-om  hdmo ;  and  sometimes  the  primitive  undergoes  euphonic  changes  ;  as  ru- 
musculus,  from  rumor. 

Rem.  Some  diminutives  differ  in  gender  from  their  primitives  ;  as  ranun- 
cuius,  scamillus,  from  rdna  and  scamnum. 

4.  (rt.)  An  amplificative  is  a  personal  appellation  denoting  an  ex- 
cess of  that  which  is  expressed  by  its  primitive  ;  as, 

Captio,  one  who  has  a  large  head :  so  naso,  labeo,  bucco,  fronto,  mento,  one  who 
has  a  large  nose,  lips,  or  cheeks,  a  broad  forehead  or  long  chin ;  from  caput, 
nasus,  labia,  bucca,  frons,  and  mentum. 

(6.)  A  few  personal  appellatives  in  io  denote  the  trade  or  profession  to  which 
a  person  belongs  ;  as,  ludw,  an  actor  ;  pellio,  a  farrier  ;  from  liidus,  und pellis. 

5.  The  termination  ium  added  to  the  root  of  a  noun,  indicati  s  the  office  or 
condition,  and  often,  derivatively,  an  assemblage  of  the  individuals  denoted  by 
the  primitive  ;  as,  collegium,  colleagueship,  and  thence  an  assembly  of  col- 
leagues ;  servitium,  servitude,  and  collectively  the  servants  ;  so  sacerdoiium,  and 
tninisterium  ;  from  collega,  serous,  sacerdos,  and  minister. 

6.  The  tei-mination  imonium  is  added  to  the  root  of  a  few  nouns,  denoting 
something  derived  from  the  primitives,  or  imparting  to  it  its  peciiliar  character : 
as,  testimonium,  testimony  ;  so  vadimonium,  pati-imonium,  matrimonium ;  fr-om 
testis,  vds  {vadis),  pidter,  and  mater. 

7.  The  termination  eijim,^ added  to  the  root  of  names  of  plants,  denotes  a 
place  where  they  gi-ow  in  abundance  ;  as,  quercetum,  Icmretum,  olivetum,  fi-om 
quercus,  laurvs,  and  oliva. 

So,  also,  cBscidetum,  dumetum,  myrtetum,  and  by  analogy  saxetum.  But  some 
drop  e  ;  as,  carectum,  salictum,  virgultum,  and  arbustum. 

8.  The  termination  arium,  added  to  the  root  of  a  noun,  denotes  a  receptaclo 
of  the  things  signified  by  the  primitive ;  as,  avidrium,  an  aviary ;  plantdnum,  a 
nui'sery  ;   from  avis,  a  bird,  and^^tento,  a  plant. 

9.  The  termination  lie,  added  to  the  root  of  names  of  animals,  marks  the 
place  where  they  are  kept ;  as,  bovlle,  a  stall  for  oxen;  so  caprile,  ov'de;  from 
bds,  an  ox,  caper,  a  goat,  and  ovis,  a  sheep. 

Note  1.   This  class  and  the  preceding  are  properly  neuter  adjectives. 
Note  2.   Abstract  nouns  are  derived  either  from  adjectives  or  from  verbs. 
See  §  26,  5. 

II.  From  Adjectives. 

§  101.  1.  Abstract  nouns  are  formed  by  adding  the  terojination 
Uas,  itudo,  ia,  itia  or  ilies,  edo,  and  imonia  to  the  root  of  the  primitive 


$  102.  DERIVATl  )N    OF   NOUNS.  59 

2.  Abstracts  in  Has,  (equivalent  to  the  English  ty  or  ity),  are  formed  from 
adjectives  of  each  declension  ;  as,  cupiditas,  tenei-itas,  celeiitas,  crudelitas,  fe'ici- 
tas;  from  cuj^ldus,  tener,  celer,  crudelis,  and  J' elix. 

(1.)  When  the  root  ends  in  i,  the  abstract  is  formed  in  etas;  s.s,pietas,  from 
•pins;  and  when  it  ends  in  t,  as  only  is  added  ;  as,  honestas  from  Iio?iestus. 

(2.)  In  a  few  abstracts  i  before  tas  is  dropped  ;  as,  lihertas,  juvenlas,  from 
liber,  juvenis.  Infacultas  and  dijjicultas,  from /acilis,  difficilis,  there  is  a  change 
also  in  the  root-vowel  from  i  to  u. 

(3.)  A  few  abstracts  are  formed  in  itus  or  tus,  instead  of  ite ;  s.s,  seri^tus, 
iuventus,  from  servus  and  juvenis.     See  §  76,  Exc.  2. 

3.  Abstracts  in  itiido  are  formed  from  adjectives  in  us,  and  some  from  adjec- 
tives of  the  third  declension  of  two  or  three  terminations;  as>,ma(jniiudo,  alti- 
tudo,fortitudo,  acritudo,  from  viagnus,  altus,  foi-tis,  acer.  Polysyllabic  adjectives 
in  tus,  generally  form  their  abstracts  by  adding  udo  instead  of  i7r«/o  to  their  root; 
as,  consuetude,  from  consuetm. 

4.  Abstracts  in  ia  (equivalent  to  the  English  ce  or  cy,)  are  for  the  most  part 
formed  from  adjectives  of  one  tenuLnation  ;  as,  dementia,  constantia,  impuden- 
tia,  from  demens,  constans,  irnpudens.  But  some  adjectives  in  vs  and  er , including 
verbals  in  cundus,  likewise  form  their  verbals  in  ia;  as,  miseria,  angustia,  facun- 
dia,  irom.  miser,  angustus,facundits. 

5.  Absfracts  in  itia  and  ities  are  formed  from  adjectives  in  us  and  is ;  as, 
justitia,  trislitia,  duritia,  and  durities,  segnitia  and  segnities,  from  Justus,  tHsiis,  du- 
rus,  and  segnis. 

6.  A  few  abstracts  are  formed  in  edo,  and  a  few  in  imonia  ;  and  sometimes 
two  or  more  abstracts  of  diflerent  tenninations  are  formed  from  the  same  adjec- 
tive :  as,  ncrltas,  acritudo,  acrcdo,  and  acrimonia,  from  acer.  In  such  case  those 
in  ithdo  and  imonia  seem  to  be  more  intensive  in  signification  than  those  in 
itas. 

Remark.  Adjectives,  as  distinguished  from  the  abstracts  which 
dre  formed  from  them,  are  called  concretes. 

in.  From  Verbs. 
§  103-     Nouns  derived  from  verbs  are  called  verbal  nouns. 

The  following  are  the  principal  classes  : — 

1.  Abstract  nouns  expressing  the  action  or  condition  denoted  by  a  verb,  es- 
pecially by  a  neuter  verb,  are  fonned  by  aimexing  or  to  their  first  root ;  as, 
amor,  love  ;  favor,  favor  ;  viceror,  grief  ;  splendor,  brightness ;  from  OTno,  fdveo, 
nuzreo,  and  splendeo. 

2.  (a.)  Abstracts  are  also  formed  from  many  verbs  by  annexing  ium  to  the 
first  or  to  the  third  root  ;  as,  colloquium,  a  conference  ;  gaudium,  joy  ;  exor- 
dium, a  beginning  ;  exitium,  destruction  ;  solatium,  consolation  ;  from  colloquor, 
gaudeo,  exordior,  exeo  and  solor. 

3.  Some  verbal  abstracts  are  formed  by  annexing  ela,  imonia,  or  imonium,  to 
ttie  first  root  of  the  verb  ;  as,  querela  and  queritnonia,  a  complaint ;  suadela, 
persuasion  ;  from  queroi-  and  suadeo. 

4.  (a.)  The  terminations  men  and  mentum,  added  to  the  first  root  of  the 
verb,  generally  with  a  connecting  vowel,  denote  the  thing  to  which  the  action 
belongs,  both  actively  and  passively,  or  a  means  for  the  performance  of  the  ac- 
tion ^  a^,fidmen  from  fidgeo,  Jiumen  from  Jiuo,  aqmen  from  ago,  soldmen  from 
gofoj',  documentum  from  doceo,  hlaiulimentum  from  olandioi: 

(i.)  The  final  consonant  of  the  root  is  often  dropped,  and  the  preceding  and 
connecting  vowels  contracted  into  one  syllable  ;  as,  ago,  (dglmen,)  ajfmen;  jdveo^ 
[/bvimentum, )  fim^ntum. 


60  COMPOSITION    OF   NOUNS.  §  103. 

(c.)  Some  words  of  this  class  have  no  primitive  verb  in  use  ;  as,  atramentwn, 
ink;  but,  in  tliis  case,  tlie  connecting  vowel  seems  to  imply  its  reference  to  such 
a  verb  as  atrdre,  to  blacken. 

5.  (a.)  The  terminations  iilum,  bulum,  culum;  hrtm ,  crum,  trum,  annexed  to 
the  first  root  of  a  verb,  denote  an  instrument  for  performing  the  act  expressed 
by  the  verb,  or  a  place  for  its  performance  ;  as,  cingHlum,  operculum,  vencbUlum, 
ventildbrum,  fulcrum,  spectrum,  from  cinyo,  operio,  venor,  venillo,  fulcio,  specio. 

(b.)  Sometimes  culum  is  contracted  into  clum;  as,  vinclum  for  vinculum. 
Sometimes,  also,  s  is  inserted  before  trum;  as,  rostrum,  from  rodo,  and  a  con- 
necting vowel  is  placed  before  this  and  some  of  the  other  terminations;  an, 
ardtrum,  stabulum,  cubiculum,  from  dro,  sio,  and  cubo. 

(c.)  Some  words  of  this  kind  are  formed  from  nouns  ;  as,  acetabuluvi,  a  vin- 
egar cruet  ;  turibulum,  a  censer  ;  from  acetum  and  tus. 

6.  (a.)  Nouns  formed  by  adding  or  and  rix  to  the  third  root  of  the  verb,  de- 
note respectively  the  male  and  female  agent  of  the  action  expressed  by  the  v&rb  j 
as,  adjator,  adjutrix,  an  assistant  ;  fautor,  fautrix,  a  favorer ,-  victor,  victrix,  a 
conqueror  ;  from  (uljfivo  {culjutr),  jfaveo  (fautr-),  vinco  [victr-).  They  are  often  like- 
wise used  as  adjectives.  The  feminine  form  is  less  common  than  the  mascu- 
Ime,  and  when  the  third  root  of  the  verb  ends  in  s,  the  feminine  is  sometimss 
formed  in  trix ;  as,  tondeo  (tons-)  tonstrix. 

(b.)  Some  norms  in  im-  are  formed  immediateljr  from  other  nouns  ;  as,  viatoj; 
a  traveller  ;  janitor,  a  door-keeper;  from  via  and  janua.  In meretrix  from  mereo^ 
i  of  the  third  root  becomes  e. 

(c.)  The  agent  of  a  few  verbs  is  denoted  by  the  terminations  a  and  o  annexed 
to  the  first  root  ;  as,  conclva,  a  guest  ;  advena,  a  stranger  ;  scr'iba,  a  scribe  ; 
erro,  a  vagrant ;  bibo,  a  dinmkard ;  comedo,  a  glutton,  from  eonvlvo,  advenio,  etc. 

7.  Many  abstract  nouns  are  foi-med  by  annexmg  io  and  us  (gen.  us)  to  the 
third  root  of  a  verb;  as,  actio,  an  action  ;  lectio,  reading  ;  from  ago  (act-),  lego 
(lect-); — canius,  singing  ;  visus,  sight ;  usus,  use;  from  cdno  (cant-),  video  (vis-), 
uior  (us-). 

Remark  1.  Nouns  of  both  forms,  and  of  like  signification,  are  frequently  de- 
rived from  the  same  verb ;  as,  concursio  and  concursus,  a  nmning  together ;  motio 
and  motus,  etc. 

Eem.  2.  Nouns  formed  by  adding  the  tennination  ura  to  the  third  root  of 
a  verb,  sometimes  have  the  same  signification  as  those  in  io  and  us,  and  some- 
times denote  the  result  of  an  action;  as,positura,  position;  vinctUra,  a  binding 
together  ;  from  po7io,  and  vincio ;  and  the  termmation  ela  has  sometimes  the 
Baaae  meaning;  as,  querela,  complaint ;  loquela,  speech,  from  queror  and  Idquor. 

Note.  One  of  these  forms  is  generally  used  to  the  exclusion  of  the  others,  and  when 
two  or  more  are  found,  they  are  usually  employed  in  somewhat  different  senses. 

8.  The  temination  orium,  added  to  the  third  root  of  a  verb,  denotes  the  place 
where  the  action  of  the  verbis  performed;  as,  auditorium,  a  lecture-room;  corh 
ditonum,  a  repositoiy;  from  aucEo  and  condo. 

COMPOSITION   OF  NOUNS. 

§  lOcS.    Compound  nouns  are  formed  variously : — 

1.  Of  two  nouns ;  as,  rupicapra,  a  wild  goat,  of  rUpes  and  capra.  In  some 
words,  compounded  of  two  nouns,  the  fonner  is  a  genitive ;  as,  senatHsconsultum, 
a  decree  of  the  senate;  jurisconsultus,  a  lawyer;  in  others,  both  parts  are  de- 
clined;  as,  respublica,jmjurandum.     See  ^  91. 

2.  Of  a  noun  and  a  verb  ;  as,  artifex,  an  artist,  of  ars  and  fdcio;  jidi- 
cen,  a  harper  o^ fides  and  cdno ;  agricdla,  a  husbandman,  of  dger  and  cdlo. 


§  104  Al  JECTn  ES.  61 

3.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  noun;  as,  (equinoctium,  the  equinox,  of  aquus  and 
nox;  millepeda,  a  mUlepede,  oimille  audjjes. 

In  duumvir,  triumvir,  decemvir,  centumvir,  the  numeral  adjective  is  in  the 
genitive  plural. 

Remark  1.  When  the  former  part  of  a  compound  word  is  a  noun  or  an  adjeo- 
tive,  it  usuaUy  ends  'mi;  as,  artifex,  rupicaura,  agncdla,  etc.  If  the  second 
•word  begins  with  a  vowel,  an  elision  takes  place  ;  as,  quinquennium,  of  quinqut 
and  annus ;  magnanimus,  of  magnus  and  animus. 

4.  Of  an  adverb  and  a  noun  ;  as,  ne/as,  wickedness ;  «e»M),  nobody ;  of  ne,  fas, 
and  hOmo.     So  biduum,  of  bis  and  dies. 

5.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  noun:  as,  t«c«ria,  want  of  care,  of  in  and  ctira.  So 
intervallum,  an  interval ;  praccrrdia,  the  diaphragm ;  proverbium,  a  proverb ;  sub- 
sellium,  a  low  seat ;  superjicies,  a  surface. 

Rem.  2.  When  the  former  part  is  a  preposition,  its  final  consonant  is  sometimes 
changed,to  adapt  it  to  that  which  follows  it :  as,  ignobilis,  illepidv^,imprudentia, 
irrumpo,  of  in  and  nobilis,  lepidus,  etc.     See  §  196. 


ADJECTIVES. 

§  104.     An  adjective  is  a  word  which  qualifies  or  limits  the 
meaning  of  a  substantive. 

Adjectives  may  be  divided,  according  to  their  signification,  into 
various  classes ;  as  denoting, 

1.  Character  or  quality  ;   as,  bdnus,  good ;  albus,  white ;  amicus,  friendly. 

2.  State  or  condition;  as,  felix,  happy;  (floes,  rich. 

3.  Possession;  as,  lier'dis,  a  master's;  patrius,  a  father's. 

4.  Quantity ;  as,  magnus,  great ;  totus,  entire ;  parvus,  small. 

5.  Number ;  as,  Unus,  one ;  secundus,  second ;  tot,  so  many ;  qvot,  as  many. 
These  are  called  numerals. 

6.  Time;  as,  anwMMs,  yearly;  ^esierTiMs,  of  yesterday;  iiTwas,  of  two  years; 
trimestris,  of  three  months. 

7.  Place;  as,  alius,  high;  vicimis,  near;  aeritis,  aerial;  terrestris,  terrestrial. 

8.  Slaterial ;  as,  aureus,  golden ;  fagineus,  beechen ;  terrenus,  earthen. 

9.  Part ;  as,  nullus,  no  one ;  aliquis,  some  one.     These  are  called  partitives. 

10.  Country ;  as,  Bomdnus,  Roman ;  Arplnas  of  Arpinum.  These  are  called 
patrials. 

11.  Diminution;  as,  parvUlus^  from  parvus,  small;  misellus,  from  miser,  nrdser- 
iible.     These  are  called  diminutives. 

12.  Amplification;  as,  vinosus  and  vinolentus,  ranch,  given  to  wine;  anritiu, 
having  long  ears.     These  are  called  amplijicatives. 

13.  Relation ;  as,  diidus,  deshous  of ;  memoi;  mindful  of ;  insuetus.  These 
are  called  relatives. 

14.  Interrogation;  as,  quantusf  how  great;  quails?  of  what  kind;  quot?  how 
manyV  quotas?  of  what  nimiber?  These  are  called  iwierro^n^/ties ;  and,  when 
not  usei  inten-ogatively,  tliey  are  called  correlatives. 

15.  Specification;  as,  talis,  such;  tantus,  so  gi-eat;  tot,  so  many.  These  ar<> 
C&lled  demynstratives. 


62        ADJECTIVES FIRST    AND    SECOND    DECLENSIONS.      §  105. 

DECLENSION   OF  ADJECTIVES. 

§  105.     1.   Adjectives  are  declined  like  substantives,  and  ard 
B'ther  of  the  drst  and  second  declensions,  or  of  the  third  only. 


ADJECTIVES    OF    THE    FIBST    AND    SECOND    DE- 
CLENSIONS. 

2.  The  masculine  of  adjectives  belonging  to  the  first  and  second 
declensions,  ends  either  in  us  or  in  er.  The  feminine  and  neuter  are 
formed  respectively  by  annexing  a  and  um  to  the  root  of  the  mascu- 
line. The  masculine  in  us  is  declined  like  dominus;  that  in  er  hke 
gener  or  ager;  the  feminine  always  like  musa ;  and  the  neuter  like 
regnum. 

Remakk  1.  The  masculine  of  one  adjective,  satur,  -Ura,  -irwn,  fall  ends  in 
ur,  and  .6  declined  like  gerwr. 


Boniis,  good. 

• 

Singular. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

N. 

bo'-nus, 

bo'-na, 

bo'-niim, 

G. 

bo'-ni, 

bo'-nae, 

bo'-ni, 

D. 

bo'-no. 

bo'-nse. 

bo'-n5. 

Ac. 

bo'-num, 

bo'-nam, 

bo'-niim, 

V. 

bo'-ne. 

bo'-na, 

bo'-niim, 

Ah. 

bo'-no. 

bo'-na. 
Plural. 

bo'-no. 

N. 

bo'-ni. 

bo'-na3. 

bo'-na. 

G. 

bo-no'-riim, 

bo-na'-rfim, 

bo-no'-rilm, 

D. 

bo'-nis, 

bo'-nis, 

bo'-nis, 

Ac. 

bo'-nos, 

bo'-nas, 

bo'-na. 

V. 

bo'-ni, 

bo'-nae, 

bo'-na, 

Ah. 

bo'-nis. 

bo'-nis. 

bo'-nis. 

In  like  manner  decline 

Al'-tus,  Tiigh. 

Fi' 

-dus,  faithful. 

Lon'-gug,  long. 

A-va'-rus, 

covetous. 

Tm 

'-pro-bus,  wicked. 

Ple'-nus,  full. 

Be-nig'-nus,  kind. 

In- 

i'-quus,  unjust. 

Tac'-i-tus,  silent. 

Rem.  2.   Like  bonus  are  also  declined  all  participles  in  us  ;  as, 
A-ma'-tus.        Am-a-tu'-rus.        A-man'-dus. 

Rem.  3.  The  masculine  of  the  vocative  singular  of  adjectives  in  us  is  some- 
times like  the  nomiiiative ;  as,  0  vir  fortis  atque  amicus.  Hor.  Meus  has  both 
mi  and  meus. 

Rem.  4.  The  genitive  plural  of  distributive  munerals  ends  commonly  in  &m 
Instead  jf  Srwn ;  as,  crasdtwk  bin&m  digitorum.  Plin. 


§  106       ADJECTIVES — FIRST   AND    SECOKD    DECLENSIONa. 


63 


3. 

Tener,  tender. 
Singular. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

N. 

te'-ner, 

ten'-e-ra, 

G. 

ten'-e-ri, 

ten'-e-rae, 

D. 

ten'-e-ro, 

ten'-e-rae, 

Ac. 

ten'-e-riim, 

ten'-e-ram, 

V. 

te'-ner, 

ten'-e-ra, 

Ah. 

ten'-e-ro. 

ten'-g-ra. 
Plural 

N. 

ten'-e-ri, 

ten'-e-rae. 

G. 

ten-e-ro'-rfim,     ten-e-ra'-riim. 

D. 

ten'-e-ris. 

ten'-e-ris, 

Ac. 

ten'-e-ros, 

ten'-e-ras. 

V. 

ten'-e-ri, 

ten'-e-rae, 

Ah. 

ten'-e-ris. 

ten'-e-ris. 

Neut. 
ten'-e-rum, 
ten'-e-ri, 
ten'-e-ro, 
ten'-e-rum, 
ten'-e-rum, 
ten'-e-ro. 


ten'-e-ra, 

ten-e-ro'-rum, 

ten'-e-ris, 

ten'-e-ra, 

ten'-§-ra, 

ten'-e-ris. 


In  like  manner  are  declined 


As'-per,  rough,. 
Ex'-ter,  foreign. 
Gib'-ber,  crook-backed. 


La'-cer,  torn. 
Li'-ber,  free. 
Mi'-ser,  wretched. 


Pros'-per,  prosperous. 
Sa'-tur,  full. 


So  also  alter,  except  in  the  genitive  and  dative  singular  (see  §  107),  serrAfer 
and  the  compounds  of  gero  and  fero;  as,  laniyer,  opifer. 

Note.    Prosper  is  less  frequent  than  prosperm,  and  exter  is  scarcely  tise<J 
in  the  nominative  singular  masculine. 

§  106.     The  other  adjectives  in  er  drop  e  in  declension ;  as, 


Piger,  slothful. 

Singular. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

N. 

pi'-ger, 

pi'-gra. 

pi'-grum, 

G. 

Pi'-g". 

pi'-grae. 

pi'-gri, 

D. 

pi'-gro, 

pi'-grae, 

pi'-gro, 

Ac. 

pi'-griim, 

pi'-gram. 

pi'-grum, 

V. 

pi'-ger. 

pi'-gra, 

pi'-griim, 

Ah. 

pi'-gro. 

pi'-gra. 
Plural. 

pi'-gro. 

N. 

pi'-gri. 

pi'-grae, 

pi'-grS,  ^ 

G. 

pi-gro  -run.,       pi-gra  -riim, 

pi-gro'-rum. 

D. 

pi  -gris. 

pi  -gris. 

pi'-gris, 

Ac. 

pi'-gros. 

pi'-gras, 

pi'-gra, 

V. 

pi'-gri» 

pi'-grae. 

pi'-gra, 

Ah 

pi'-gris. 

pi'-gris. 

pi  -gris. 

64  ADJECTIVES THIRD    DECLE>SION.         §  107,  106 

In  like  manner  decline 

iE'-ger,  sf^Jc.  Ma'-cer,  lean.  Sca'-ber,  rmigh. 

A'-ter,  black.  Ni'-ger,  black.  Si-nis'-terj  left. 

Cre'-ber,  frequent.  Pul'-cher,  fair.  Te'-ter,  /out. 

Gla'-ber,  smooth.  Ru'-ber,  red.  Va'-fer,  crafty. 

Iii'-te-ger,  entire.  Sa'-cer,  sacred. 

Dexter,  right,  has  -tra,  -trum,  and  less  frequently  -tera,  -terum. 

§  I®f .    Six  adjectives  in  us,  and  three  in  er,  have  their  genitive 
singular  in  ius,  and  their  dative  in  I,  in  all  the  genders  : — 

AVms,  another.  Totiis,  tvhole.  Alter, -tera, -terum,  </ie o^Tier. 

Niillus,  no  one.  TJllus,  any.  Uter,  -tra,  -trum,  which  of  the  two. 

So'us,  alone.  ,  Unus,  one.  Neuter,  -tra,  -ti'um,  neither. 

To  these  may  be  added  the  other  compounds  of  iiter, — namely,  uterque,  each 
of  two ;  utercumque,  uterlibet,  and  utervis,  which  of  the  two  you  please ;  gen. 
utriusque,  etc. — also,  alleruter,  one  of  two ;  gen.  alterutrius,  and  somethnes  alte- 
rius  utrius;  dat.  alterutri.     So  alteruterque,  and  wmsquisque.     See  §  138,  4. 

Nullus,  solus,  lotus,  ullus,  and  unus  are  thus  declined  : — 

Shigular. 
Masc.  Fein.  Neut. 

u'-num, 
u-ni-us, 
u'-ni, 
u'-niim, 
u'-niim, 
u'-no. 
The  plural  is  regular,  like  that  of  bonus. 

Remark  1.  Alius  has  aliud  in  the  nominative  and  accusative  singular  neu- 
ter, and  in  the  genitive  alius,  contracted  for  aliius. 

Rem.  2.  Except  in  the  genitive  and  dative  singular,  alter  is  declined  like  tiner, 
and  uter  and  neuter  like  piger. 

Rem.  3.  Some  of  these  adjectives,  in  early  writers,  and  occasionally  even  in 
Cicero,  Csesar,  and  Nepos,  form  their  genitive  and  dative  regularly,  like  bdnus, 
tener,  at  plgefr. 

ADJECTIVES    OF    THE    THIRD    DECLENSION. 

'"  108.  Some  adjectives  of  the  third  declension  have  three  termi- 
nations in  the  nominative  singular;  some  two;  and  others  only  one. 

I.  Those  of  three  terminations  end  in  er,  masc. ;  is,  fern. ;  and  e, 
neut. :  and  are  thus  declined : — 


N. 

u'-niis, 

ft'-na. 

G. 

u-nl'-iis,* 

u-ni'-iis. 

D. 

u-ni, 

u'-ni. 

Ac. 

u-nimi, 

u  -nam, 

V. 

u'-ne, 

u'-na, 

Ab. 

u-no. 

u'-na. 

Acer,  sharp. 

Singular. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

N. 

a'-cer, 

a  -cris, 

a'-cre, 

G. 

a'-cris, 

a'-cris, 

a'-cris, 

D. 

a'-cri, 

a'-cri, 

a'-cri, 

Ac. 

a'-crem 

L,          a'-crem, 

a'-cre, 

V. 

a'-cer. 

a'-cris, 

a'-cre, 

Ab. 

a'-cri. 

a'-cri. 

a'-cri. 

•  See  §  15. 


$  109,  110. 

ADJECTIVES- 

—THIRD    DECLENSION. 

Plural. 

N. 

a'-cres, 

a'-cres, 

a'-cri-a, 

G. 

a'-cri-fim, 

a'-cri-um, 

a'-cri-um, 

D. 

ac'-ri-bus, 

ac'-ri-bus, 

ac'-ri-bus, 

Ac. 

a'-cres, 

a'-cres, 

a'-cri-a, 

V. 

a'-cres, 

a'-cres, 

a'-cri-a, 

Ah. 

ac'-ri-bus. 

ac'-ri-bus. 

ac'-ri-bus. 

$5 


In  like  manner  are  declined  the  following ; — 


A-'-acer,  cheerful. 
Cam-pes'-ter,  champaign. 
Cel'-e-ber,  famous. 
E-ques'-tor,  equestrian. 


Pa-his'-ter,  marshy. 
Pe-des'-ter,  on  fool. 
Pu'-ter,  rotitn. 
Sa-lU'-ber,  wholesome. 


Sil-ves'-ter,  woody. 
Ter-res'-ter,  terresiriaL 
Vol'-u-cer,  tdnged. 


To  these  add  names  of  months  in  -ber,  used  as  adjectives ;  as,  Octdber,  etc. 
(cf.  ^  71),  and  celer,  swift,  which  has  ceUris,  celere;  gen.  celeris,  etc. 

Remark  1.  The  termination  er  was  anciently  sometimes  feminine;  as,  yolicer 
fnma.  Petr.:  and,  on  the  other  hand,  the  mascuhne  often  ends  in  w;  as, 
collis  silvestris,  C^es. 

Rem.  2.    Volucer  has  um  in  the  genitive  plural. 

§  100.  n.  Adjectives  of  two  terminations  end  in  is  for  the  mas- 
culine and  feminine,  and  e  for  the  neuter,  except  comparatives,  which 
end  in  or  and  us. 

Those  in  is,  e,  are  thus  declined : — 


Mitis  mild. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

M.4-F. 

N. 

M.  ^  F. 

N. 

N. 

mi'-tis, 

mi'-te, 

N. 

mi'-tes. 

mit'-i-S,* 

G. 

mi'-tis, 

mi'-fis, 

G. 

mit'-i-fim,* 

mit'-i-fim, 

D. 

mi'-ti. 

mi'-ti, 

D. 

mit'-i-biis. 

mit'-i-bus, 

Ac. 

mi'-tem, 

mi'-te, 

Ac. 

mi'-tes, 

mit'-i-a. 

V. 

mi'-tas, 

mi'-te, 

V. 

mi'-tes. 

mit'-i-a, 

Ah. 

mi'-ti. 

mi'-ti. 

Ah. 

mit'-i-biis. 

mit'-i-biis 

In  like  manner  decline 


In-col'-ii-mis,  safe. 
Mi-rab'-i-lis,  wonderful. 
Om'-nis,  all. 


Ag  -I-lis,  active.  Dul'-cis,  sweet. 

Kre'-vis,  short.  For'-tis,  br-ave. 

Cru-de'-lis,  cruel.  Gra'-vis,  heavy. 

Tres,  three,  is  declined  like  the  plural  of  mitis. 
NoTK.    Several  aJjectiyes  of  this  class  have  forms  also  in  us,  a,  um.    See  §  116. 

§  110.    (a.)   All  comparatives,  except  plus,  more,  are  thus  dfr 
clined : — 


•  Pronouncec  rnish'-e-a,  etc.    See  §  12. 


6* 


66 


AD, 

JECTIVES THIRD 

DECLENSION. 

Mitior,* 

milder. 

Singular. 

M.  cf  F. 

.  ''^• 

N. 

mit'-i-6r, 

mit'-i-iis, 

G. 

mit-i-o'-ris, 

mit-i-o'-ris, 

D. 

mi1>i-o'-ri, 

mit-i-o'-ri, 

Ac. 

mit-i-o'-rem, 

mit'-i-iis, 

V. 

mit'-i-6r, 

mit'-i-iis, 

Ab. 

mit-i-o'-re,  or 

-ri. 

mit-i-o'-re,  or  -ri, 

Plural. 

M.  f  F. 

N.^ 

N. 

mit-i-o'-res, 

mitri-o'-ra, 

G. 

mit-i-6'-rum, 

mit-i-o'-riim, 

D. 

mit-i-or'-i-bus, 

mit-i-or'-i-bus, 

Ac. 

mit-i-o'-res, 

mit-i-6'-ra, 

V. 

mit-i-o'-res, 

mit-i-o'-ra, 

Ab. 

mit-i-or'-i-biis. 

mit-i-or'-i-biis. 

§111 


A.'-ti-or,  higher. 
A  i-da'-ci-or,  bolder. 
B-s'-vi-or,  snorter. 
Cru-de'-li-or,  more  cruel. 


Dul'-ci-or,  sweeter. 
Fe-lic'-i-or,  happier. 
Fe-ro'-ci-or,  Jiei'cer. 
For'-ti-or,  braver. 


N. 
G. 
D. 

Ac. 

V. 

Ah. 


Singular. 
N. 
plus, 
plu'-ris, 
1 


plus, 


In  like  manner  decline 

Gra'-vi-or,  heavier. 
Pru-den'-ti-or,  more  pru- 
dent. 
U-be'-ri-or,  more  fertile. 

Pliis,  morCy  is  thus  declined  : — 
Plural. 
M.  ^  F.  N. 

N.    plu'-res,  plu'-ra,  rarely  plu  -ri-&, 

G.     plu'-ri-ura,  plu'-ri-um, 

D.     plu'-ri-biis,  plu'-ri-bus, 

Ac.  plu'-res,  plu'-ra, 

y-  ,  , 

Ab.  plu'-ri-biis.  plu'ri-bus. 


(plu'-re,  ohs.) 
So,  but  in  the  plural  number  only,  complures,  a  great  many. 

§  111.  m.  Other  adjectives  of  the  third  declension  have  but 
one  termination  in  the  nominative  singular  for  all  genders.  They  all 
end  in  I,  r,  s,  or  x,  and  increase  in  the  genitive. 

They  are  thus  declined  : — 


Felix,  happy. 

Singular 

M.^F. 

iV. 

N.    fe'-lix, 

fe'-lix, 

G.    fe-li'-cis, 

fe-li'-cis, 

D.    fe-li'-ci, 

fe-li'-ci, 

Ac.   fe-li'-cem, 

fe'-lix, 

V.     fe'-Ux, 

fe'-lix. 

Ab.    fe-li'-ce,  or  -ci. 

fe-li'-ee,  or  -ci. 

•  Pronounced  mish'-e-or.,  etc.     See  §  12. 


§irj.  ADJECTIVES — OBLIQUE    CASES.  67 

Plural. 


M.^F. 

N. 

2V. 

fe-li'-ces, 

fe-Hc'-i-a,* 

G. 

fe-lic'-i-iim,* 

fe-lic'-i-iim, 

D. 

fe-lic'-i-bu3, 

fe-lic'-i-bu8, 

Ac. 

fe-li'-ces, 

fe-lic'-i-a, 

V. 

fe-li'-ces, 

fe-lic'-i-a, 

Ab. 

fe-lic'-i-bus. 

fe-lic'-i-bu9. 

Prsesens,  present. 

Singular 

■«r 

M.  Sf  F. 

N. 

N. 

prae'-sens, 

prae'-sens. 

G. 

prae-sen'-tis, 

prae-sen'-tis, 

D. 

prae-sen'-ta, 

prae-sen'-ti, 

Ac. 

praB-sen'-tem, 

prae'-sens. 

V. 

prae'-sens, 

prae'-sens. 

Ab. 

prae-sen'-te,  or  -ti. 

Plural. 

prae-sen'-te,  or  -G. 

N. 

praB-sen'-tes, 

praB-sen'-ti-a,f 

G. 

prae-sen'-ti-fim, 

prae-sen'-ti-um, 

B. 

prae-sen'-ti-bus. 

pras-sen'-ti-biis, 

Ac. 

prae-sen'-tes. 

pr£E-sen'-ti-a, 

V. 

prae-sen'-tes. 

pras-sen'-ti-a. 

Ab. 

prse-sen'-ti-bus. 

prae-sen'-ti-bus. 

In  like  manner  decline 

Au'-dax, -acis,  fr9?c7.  Par'-tl-ceps, -ipis,  i?ar-  SoV-lers, -tis,  shreiod. 

Com'-pos,  -ctis,  master  of.       ticipant.  Sos'-pes,  -itis,  safe. 

Fe'-rox,  -oaiz,, fierce.  Prse'-pes,  -etis,  swift.  Sup'-plex,   -Icis,   si^ 

In'-gens,  -tis,  huge.  Pru'-dens,  -tis,  prudent.  pliant. 

Remark.   All  present  participles  are  declined  like  proesens ;  as, 
A'-mans.    Mo'-nens.    Ee'-gens.    Ca'-pi-ens.    Au'-di-ens. 
Note.   A  few  adjectives  of  one  termination  liave  redundant  forms  in  ««,  a, 
um;  see  ^  116. 

Rules   for   the    Oblique    Cases   of   Ad.iective3    of    tub 

Third  Declension. 

GENITIVE    SINGULAR. 

§  112.    Most  adjectives  of  the  third  declension  form  their  geni- 
tive singular  like  nouns  of  the  same  termination. 

The  following  may  here  be  specified: — 

1.  Of  those  in  es  ( cf.  §  73 )  some  have  -etis ;  as,  hebes,  perpes,  preepes,  and  teres 
— inquies  and  locuples  have  -His  ; — some  have  -His;  as,  (fires,  sospes,  and  super- 
gteg ; — some  have  -idis ;  aSj  deses,  and  reses ; — bipes,  and  tripes  have  -pedis  ;—pube$ 
f&i  puheris,  and  impub€S,^mpubci-is  and  impubis. 

*  Ptononnced  fe-lish'-e-um  etc     See  i  10,  Kxc,  and  g  7.,  3,  (6.) 
t  Proa  )«nced  pre-zen'-s/ie-a,  et« 


68  ADJECTIVES OBLIQUE  CASKS.      §  113,  114 

2.  Compos  and  impos  have  -dtis,  and  exos,  exos$is. — Exlex  has  exlec/is,  pernoa 
h&spernoctis  {^  78),  prcBCOx,prcEcdcis,  and  rklux,  reducis. — Cceicbs  has  calibis 
(§  77) ;  intercus,  iniercutis,  andw^Ms,  veteris.  Those  in  ceps  which  are  compounds 
of  caput,  have  -cipUis;  as,  anceps,  prceceps  (^  78, 1);  but  tue  compounds  of  cept 
from  capio  have  -Ipis ;  as,  particeps,  participis. — Those  in  con^  compounds  oi 
c(n\  have  ^cwdis ;  as,  concors,  concordis  (§  71,  Exc.  2).—  Memor  and  immSmor 
have  -(3m. 

ABLATIVE    SINGULAR. 

§113.  1.  Adjectives  which  have  e  in  the  nominative  singular  neu- 
ter have  only  i  in  the  ablative. 

Exc.  1.   The  ablatives  bimestre,  cceleste,  and. perenne  axe  found  in  Ovid,  and 

eoy nomine  in  YirgU. 

2.  Comparatives  and  participles  in  ns,  when  used  as  parliciples, 
especially  in  the  ablative  absolute,  have  rather  c  than  i ;  but  parti- 
cipial adjectives  in  ns  have  rather  i  than  e. 

3.  Adjectives  of  one  termination  have  either  e  or  i  in  the  ablative. 

Exc.  2.  The  following  adjectives  of  one  termination  have  only  e  in  the  ablar 
tive : — 

Bicorpor,  bipes,  caslebs,  compos,  deses,  discolor,  hospes,  impos,  impubes,  ju- 
vfnis,  lociiples,  pauper,  princeps,  puber  or  pubes,  senex,  sospee,  superstes, 
tricorpor,  tricuspis,  and  tripes. 

Exc.  3  .  The  following  adjectives  of  one  termination  have  omji  i  in  the  abla- 
tive : — 

Anceps,  concors,  discors,  hebes,  immemor,  Iners,  ingens,  inops,  memor,  par, 
pr»ceps,  recens,  repens,  vigil,  and  most  adjectives  in  a;,  especially  those  in 
plex. 

Rem.  1.  Inerte  occurs  in  Ovid,  recenie  in  Ovid  and  Catullus,  an^  priedpe  in 
Ennius. 

Rem.  2.  Prcesens,  when  used  of  things,  makes  the  ablative  in  i;  when  used 
of  persons,  it  has  e. 


NOMINATIVE,  ACCUSATIVE,  AND  GENiTIVE  PLURAL 

§  114:.  1.  The  neuter  of  the  nominative  and  accusative  plural 
ends  in  ia,  and  the  genitive  plural  of  all  genders  in  turn  ;  but  compar- 
atives in  or,  with  velus,  old,  and  uher,  fertile,  have  a,  and  um. 

2.  The  accusative  plural  of  masculine  and  feminine  adjectives,  whose  geni- 
tive plural  ends  in  ium,  anciently  ended  in  Is  or  eis,  instead  of  es.    Cf.  §  85,  Exc.  1. 

Exc.  1.  Those  adjectives  that  have  only  e  in  the  ablative  singular,  have  miu 
in  the  genitive  plural. 

Exc.  2.  Compounds  off  ado,  capio,  and  of  such  nouns  as  make  um  in  their 
genitive  plural,  with  celer,  compar,  dciu;  dh^es,  memor,  immemor,  prwpes,  snp- 
plex,  and  vigil,  make  their  genitive  plural  in  U7n. 

Exc.  3.  Dis,  locuples,  sons,  and  insons  have  either  iim  or  mm.  The  poets  and 
the  later  prose  writers  sometimes  foi-m  the  genitive  plural  of  other  adjectivea 
and  of  participles  in  m,  by  syncope,  in  um,  instead* ftui/j;  as,  aek&lum,  Virg. 
Ovid,  etc. 


§  115,  116.  IRREGULAR    ADJECTIVES.  69 

IKREGULAR   ADJECTIVES. 

§  llo«     Some  adjectives  are  defective,  others  redundant. 
DEFECTIVE    ADJECTIVES.    - 

1.  (a.)  Many  adjectives  denoting  personal  qualities  or  attributes 
want  the  neuter  gender,  unless  when  occasionally  joined  to  a  neuter 
substantive  used  figuratively.     Such  are  the  following  : — 

Bicorpor,  bipes,  ceelebs,  compos,  consors,  degener,  dives,  impos,  impubes, 
industrius,  inops,  insons,  invitus,  juveuis,  locuples,  memor,  pauper,  partieeps 
princeps,  puber,  or  pubes,  redux,  senex,  sous,  sospes,  superstes,  supplex,  tri- 
corpor,  vigil. 

(h.)  Victrix&nA  ultrix  are  feminine  in  the  singular,  seldom  neuter;  in  the 
plural,  they  are  feminine  and  neuter.  Such  verbals  partake  of  the  nature  both 
of  substantives  and  adjectives,  and  correspond  to  masculines  in  tor.  See  ^ 
102,  6,  (a.) 

2.  The  following  want  the  genitive  plural,  and  are  rarely  used 

in  the  neuter  gender : — 

Concolor,  deses,  hebes,  perpes,  reses,  teres,  versicolor. 

3.  The  names  of  months,  which  are  properly  adjectives,  have  only 
the  masculine  and  feminine  genders. 

4.  Some  adjectives  are  wholly  indeclinable. 

Such  are  frugi,  temperate;  ncquam,  worthless;  sat  or  satis,  sufficient;  the 
plurals  allqiiot,  tdt,  qudt,  iotidem,  quotquot ;  and  the  cardinal  numbers  from  quatu- 
or  to  centum  inclusive,  and  also  milh.     Cf.  §  118, 1,  and  6,  (6.) 

5.  The  following  adjectives  are  used  only  in  certain  cases :  — 

Bilicem,  ace. ;  doubly-tissued.  Cetera,  ceterum,  the  rest,  wants  the  nom.  sing. 
muse.  Decempllcem,  ace. ;  tenfold.  Exspes,  nom. ;  hopeless.  Inquies,  nom. ; 
-etem,  ace. ;  -ete,  abl. ;  restless.  Mactus,  and  ms,cte,  nom. ;  macte,  ace. ;  honored; 
— m.ViQ,t\,n(ym.  plur.  Necesse,a7jJnecessum,7JOW. ,  aoc. ;  necessary.  Plus,  koto., 
ace. ;  pluris,  (jtn.  ;  more  ;—pl.  plures,  -a,  nom.  ace. ;  -ium  gen. ;  ibus,  dot.,  abl. 
Cf.  §  110.  Postera,  posterum,  coming  after,  wants  the  nom.  sing.  masc.  Potis, 
nom.  sing.  &ndpl.,  all  genders;  able.  Pote,  nom.  sing.,  for  potest;  jmssible.  Sep- 
templicis,  <7en.  ,•  -ce,abl.;  sevenfold.  Siremps,  aiic?  sirempse,  nom.  and  ace, 
alike.  Tantundem,  mmi.  ace. ;  tantidem,  geii.  ;  tantandem,  ace.  ;  so  much 
Trilicem,  ace. ;  trebly-tissued ;  trilices,  nom.  and  ace.  pi. 

REDUNDANT   ADJECTIVES. 

§  IIG.  The  following  adjectives  are  redundant  in  termination 
and  declension.     Those  marked  r  are  more  rarely  used. 

Aoclivis,  and  -us,  r,  ascending.  Inquies,  and  -etus,  restless. 

Auxiliaris,  and  -ius,  auxiliary.  Jocularis,  and  -ins,  r,  laughable. 

Bijugis,  rtw/-us,  yoked  two  together.  Multijugis,  r,  and  -us,  yoked  many  to 

Declivis,  and  -us,  r,  descending.  gether. 

Exaiiimis,  and-\x?,,  r,  lifeless.  Opiilens,  and -lentas,  rich. 

Hilaris,  and  -us,  cheerful.  Praicox,   -coquis,  and  -coquus,   earlf 

Imbccillis,  r,  and  -us,  tveak.  ripe. 

Impubes,  and  -is,   r,  -is  or  -iris,  not  Procllvis,  and  -us,  r,  sloping, 

groion  up.  Quadrijiigis,  and  -us,   yoked  four  to 

Inennis,  find? -us,  r,  unarmed.     ^ j  jifi(^^' 

lufrinis,  and  -us,  unbridled,  ^y^^"^  .^-TS^S^lttmi^  and  -us,  half  alive. 


70 


NUMERAL '  ADj"l;CTIVES. 


§11/ 


SemierSflis,  aiid -us,  half  armed.  Sublimis,  and -us,  ;•,  hti/h. 

Semisoirmis,  arid  -us,  r,  half  asleep.  Unanlmis,  r,  and  -us,  unanimous. 

Siugulai'is,  aTid  -ius,  single.  Violens,  r,  and  -leiitus,  violent. 

To  these  may  be  added  some  adjectives  in  er  and  is ;  as,  saluber  and  -bri»^ 
eeieber  and  -bris.     Cf.  ^  108,  R.  1. 

NUMERAL  ADJECTIVES. 

§  117;    Numeral  adjectives  are  divided  into  three  principal 
classes — Cardinal,  Ordinal,  and  Distributive. 

I.    Cardinal  numbers  are  those  which  simply  denote  the  number  of 
things,  in  answer  to  the  question  Quot  f  '  How  many  ? '     They  are, 


1. 

Unus, 

2. 

Duo, 

3. 

Tres, 

4. 

Quatuor, 

6. 

Quinque, 

6. 

Sex, 

7. 

Septem, 

8. 

Octo, 

9. 

Novem, 

10. 

Decern, 

11. 

Undecim, 

12. 

Duodecim, 

13. 

Tredecim, 

14. 

Quatuordecim, 

16. 

Quindecim, 

16. 

Sedecim,  or  sexdScim, 

17. 

Septendecim, 

18. 

Octodecim, 

19. 

Novendecim, 

20. 

Viginti, 

21 

Viginti  unus,  or 
unus  et  viginti, 

22. 

Viginti  duo,  or            ) 
duo  et  viginti,  etc.,     J 

30. 

Triginta, 

40. 

Quadraginta, 

60. 

Quinquaginta, 

60. 

Sexaginta, 

70. 

Septuaginta, 

80. 

Octogiuta,  or  octuaginta. 

90. 

Nonaginta, 

100. 

Centum, 

101. 

Centum  unus,  or  ) 

centum  et  unus,  etc.,  J 

200. 

Ducenti,  -se,  a, 

300. 

Trecenti,  etc.. 

400. 

Quadringenti, 

500. 

Quingenti, 

600. 

Sexcenti, 

700. 

Septingenti, 

800. 

Octingenti, 

900. 

Nongenti, 

1000. 

Mille, 

y.ooo. 

Duo  mUlia,  or  ) 
bis  mille,       j 

one. 

L 

two. 

n. 

tliree. 

m. 

four.    . 

nn.  or  IV. 

Jive. 

V. 

six. 

VI. 

seven. 

vn. 

ei(/ht 

vin. 

nine. 

vnn.  m-  IX. 

ten. 

X. 

eleven. 

XT. 

twelve. 

xn. 

thirteen. 

xin. 

fourteen. 

Xmi.  or  XIV. 

ffteen. 

XV. 

sixteen. 

XVI. 

seventeen. 

xvn. 

eighteen. 

XVUI. 

nineteen. 

XVim.  orXIX. 

twenty. 

XX. 

twenty-one. 

XXI. 

twenty-two. 

xxn. 

thirty. 

XXX. 

forty. 

XXXX.  or  XL. 

My- 

L. 

sixty. 

LX. 

seventy. 

LXX. 

eic/hty. 
ninety. 

LXXX. 

LXXXX.  ^  XC. 

a  hundred. 

C. 

a  hundred  and  ona- 

CL 

two  hundred. 

cc. 

three  hundred. 

ccc. 

four  hundred. 

CCCC,  or  CD. 

fve  hundred. 

10,  or  D. 

six  hundred. 

IOC,  or  DC. 

seven  hundred. 

lOCO,  orDCC. 

eicjht  huTulred. 
nine  hundred. 

lOCCC,  or  DCCC. 

LjCCCC,  or  DCCCO 

a  thousand. 

CiO,  or  M. 

two  thousand. 

CIOCIO,  or  MM. 

§  118 


NUMERAL    ADJECTIVES. 


71 


5000    Quinoue  millia,  or 

quiaqiiies  mille, 

10000    Decern    millia,  or 

decie'^  inille, 
50000.    Quinquagiuta  millia, 

or  quinquagies  mille, 
lOOOOO.    Centura  millia,  or  )u 
ceucies  mille, 


Jive  thousand, 
ten  thousatid. 
fifty  thousand. . 
a  hundred  thousand. 


100. 

CCIOO. 

1000. 

CCCIOOO. 


§  118.  1.  The  first  three  cardinal  numbers  are  declined;  from 
four  to  a  hundred  inclusive  they  are  indeclinable ;  those  denoting 
hundreds  are  declined  Uke  the  plural  of  bonus. 

For  the  declension  of  units  and  tres,  see  §§  107  and  109. 

Duo  is  thus  declined : — 


Plural. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

JV' 

du'-o, 

du'-ae, 

du'-o. 

G. 

du-o'-mm, 

du-a'-rum. 

du-a'-rum, 

D. 

dTi-5'-bus, 

du-a'-bus. 

du-6'-bus, 

Ac. 

du'-os,  or  du'-o, 

du'-as, 

.In'-o, 

V. 

du'-o. 

du'-ae, 

=  i'-0, 

Ab. 

du-o'-bus. 

du-a'-bus. 

uu-G'-bus. 

Remakk  1.   Duirrum^  duamm,  are  often  contracted  into  du&m,  especially  in 
<■• . mpoun Js ;  a.s,  duAmvir,  and  when  joined  with  viillium. — Arnbo,  both,  which 
rtakes  of  the  nature  of  a  numeral  and  of  a  pronoun,  is  declined  like  dvo. 

2.  The  cardinal  numbers,  except  unus  and  mille,  are  used  in  the 
•ural  only. 

Rem.  2.  The  plural  of  unus  is  used  with  nouns  which  have  no  singular,  or 
whose  singular  has  a  different  sense  from  the  plural ;  as,  unce  nuptwB,  one  mar- 
riage ;  una  castra,  one  camp.  It  is  used  also  with-  nouns  denoting  several  things 
considered  as  one  whole;  as,U7M  vesiimenia,  one  suit  of  clothes.  So.  also,  when 
it  takes  tlie  signification  of  "  alone"  or  "  the  same  ";  as,  uni  Ubii,  the  Ubiani 
alone ;  unis  moribus  vivere, — with  the  same  manners. 

3.  (a.)  Thirteen,  sixteen,  seventeen,  eighteen,  and  nineteen,  are  often  ex- 
pressed by  two  numbers,  the  greater  of  which  usually  precedes,  united  by  et ; 
thus,  decern  et  tres,  decern  et  ndvem,  or,  omitting  et,  decern  ndvem.  Octodicim  has 
no  good  authority.    See  infra,  4. 

(6.)  From  twenty  to  a  hundred,  the  smaller  number  with  et  is  put  first,  or 
the  greater  without  et ;  as,  unus  et  viginti,  or  viginti  untis.  Above  one  hundred, 
the  gi'eater  pr^icedes,  with  or  without  et ;  as,  centum  et  unus,  or  centum  unm , 
trecenti  sexaginta  sex,  or  trecenti  et  sexaginta  sex.  Et  is  never  twice  used,  but 
the  poets  sometimes  take  ac,  atque,  or  que,  instead  of  et. 

4.  For  eighteen,  twenty-eight,  etc.,  and  for  nineteen,  twenty-nine,  etc.  (ex- 
cepting sixty-eight,  sixty-nine,  and  ninety-eidit),  a  subtractive  expression  is 
more  frequent  than  the  additive  fonn;  as,  duodeviginti,  two  from  twenty;  unde- 
viginti,  one  fr^ra  tT^entj^;  duodetriginta,  undetviginla,  etc.  Neither  un  (unus) 
nor  dvx)  can  be  declined  in  these  combinations.  The  additive  forms  for  thirty- 
eight,  etc.  to  ninetv-eight,  and  for  forty-nine,  etc.  to  ninety-nine,  except  those 
for  sixty-nine,  seem  not  to  occur. 

5.  (rt.)  Thousands  are  generally  expressed  bj'  prefixing  the  smaller  cardinal 
mimbers  to  millia:  as,  decern  millia,  ten  thousand;  dticenta  millia,  two  hundred 
thousand.  As  there  is  in  Latin  no  unit  above  mille,  a  thousand,  the  higher  units 
of  modem  numeration  are  expressed  by  prefixing  the  numeral  adverbs  to  the 


72  NUMERAL    ADJECTIVES.  §  119. 

combination  centena  millia;  as,  decies  centena  millia,  a  million;  centies  centena 
millia,  ten  millions.  In  such  combinations  centena  millia  is  sometimes  omitted; 
as,  decies,  scil.  centena  jnillia. 

(6.)  The  poets  sometimes  make  use  of  numeral  adverbs  in  expressing  smaller 
numbers ;  as,  bis  sex  for  duodecini ;  bis  centum  for  duc'enti,  etc. 

6.  Mille  is  used  either  as  a  substantive  or  as  an  adjective. 

(a.)  When  taken  substantively,  it  is  indeclinable  in  the  singular  number, 
and,  in  the  pluralj  has  millia,  millium,  millibus,  etc.;  as,  m,ille  hominum,  a  thou- 
sand men;  duo  millia  hominum,  two  thousand  men,  etc.  When  mille  is  a  sub- 
stantive, the  things  numbered  are  put  in  the  genitive,  as  in  the  preceding 
examples,  unless  a,  declined  numeral  comes  between;  as,habuit  tria  millia  tre- 
centos  milites. 

(h.)  As  an  adjective,  mille  is  plural  only,  and  indeclinable:  as,  mille  homines, 
a  thousand  men ;  cum  bis  mille  hoininibus,  with  two  thousand  men. 

7.  Capitals  were  used  by  the  Eomans  to  mark  numbers.  The  letters  em- 
ployed for  this  purpose  were  C.  I.  L.  V.  X.,  which  are,  therefore,  called  Niir 
vieral  Letters.  I.  denotes  wee  ,•  Y.jice;  'K.ten;  h.  Jifiy ;  and  G.  a  hundred.  By 
the  various  combinations  of  these  five  letters,  aU  the  different  numbers  are  ex- 
pressed. 

(a.)  The  repetition  of  a  numeral  letter  repeats  its  value.  Thus,  II.  signifies 
two;  111.  three;  XX.  twenty ;  XXX.  thirty ;  GC.  two  hundred,  etc.  But  V.  and 
L.  are  never  repeated. 

(6.)  When  a  letter  of  a  less  value  is  placed  before  a  letter  of  a  greater  value, 
the  less  takes  away  its  value  from  the  gi'eater;  but  being  placed  after,  it  adds 
its  value  to  the  greater;  thus, 

IV.   Four.  V.  Five.  VI.    Six. 

IX.    Nine.  X.  Ten.  XI.    Eleven. 

XL.  Forty.  L.  Fifty.  LX.  Sixty. 

XC.  Ninety.  C.  A  hundred.  CX.  A  hundred  and  ten. 

(c.)  A  thousand WS.S  marked  thus,  CIO,  which,  in  later  times,  was  contracted 
into  M.     Five  hundred  is  marked  thus,  ID,  or,  by  contraction,  D. 

{d.)  The  annexing  of  the  apostrophus  or  inverted  C  (0)  to  lO  makes  its  vahie 
ten  times  greater;  thus,  100  marks  Jive  thousand;  and  10D0,Jifly  thousand. 

(e.)  The  prefixing  of  C,  together  with  the  annexing  of  0,  to  the  number  CIO 
makes  its  value  ten  times  gi-eater;  thus,  CCIOO  denotes  ten  thousand;  and 
CGGIDOO,  a  hundi-ed  thousand.  The  Romans,  according  to  Pliny,  proceeded 
no  further  in  this  method  of  notation.  If  they  had  occasion  to  express  a  largei 
number,  they  did  it  by  repetition;  thus,  CCCIOOO,  CCCIOOO,  signified  two 
hundred  thousand,  etc. 

(y.)  We  sometimes  find  thousaiuls  expressed  by  a  straight  line  drawn  over 
the  top  of  the  numeral  letters.  Thus,  III.  denotes  three  thousand;  X.,  ten 
thousand. 

§  119-  n.  Ordinal  numbers  are  such  as  denote  order  or  rank, 
and  answer  to  the  question,  Quotus  f  Which  of  the  numbers  ?  They 
all  end  in  us,  and  are  declined  like  bonus ;  as,prl7nus,&rst;  secunJus, 
second. 


v) 


m.  Distributive  numbers  are  those  which  indicate  an  equal  division 
amoug  several  persons  or  tilings,  and  answer  to  the  question,  Quoteni? 
How  many  apiece  ?  as,  singiili,  one  by  one,  or,  one  to  each ;  blni,  two 
by  two,  or  two  to  each,  etc.  They  are  always  used  in  the  plural,  and 
are  declined  like  the  plural  of  bonus,  except  that  they  usually  have 
dm  instead  oi  orum  in  the  genitive  plural.     Cf.  §  105,  R.  4. 


<  120 


NUMERAL    ADJECTIVES. 


73 


The  following  table  contains  the  ordinal  and  distributive  lumbers,  and  the 
(corresponding  numeral  adverbs,  which  answer  to  the  question,  Quoiies  ?  How 
lusiiy  times  ?  — 


400. 


600. 
600. 
700. 
800. 
900. 

1000. 


Ordinal. 
Pnmus,  Jirst. 
S^cundus,  second. 
Tertius,  third. 
Quartus,  fourth. 
Quiutus, /(/W«. 
Soxtus,  sixth. 
Septimus,  seventh. 
Octavus,  eifflith. 
N6nu.«,  ninth. 
Di'cimus,  tenth,  etc. 
Undecimus. 
Duodecimus. 
Tertius  decimus. 
Quartus  decimus. 
Quintus  docimus. 
Sextus  decimus. 
Septinnis  decimus. 
Octavus  decimus. 
Nuiuis  decimus. 
Vicesimus,  or 

vigesimus. 
Vicesimus  primus. 
Vicesimus  secundcts. 
Tricesimus,  or  ) 

trigesimus.     ) 
Quadragesimus. 
Quinquagesimus. 
Sexagesimus. 
Septuagesimus. 
Octogesiraus. 
Nonagesimus. 
Centesimiis. 
DCiceutesimus. 


1. 

2. 
3. 

4. 
6. 
6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 
10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 
Hi. 
17. 
18. 
19. 

20. 

21. 
22. 

30. 

40. 

50. 

60. 

70. 

80. 

90. 
100. 
200. 

300.     Trecentesimus. 


Quadringentesimus 

Quingentesimus. 

Sexcentesimus. 

Septingentesimus. 

Octingentesimus. 

Nougentesimus. 

Millesirous. 


Distributive. 
Singuli,  one  by  one. 
Bini,  two  by  two. 
Terni,  or  trini. 
Quaterni. 
Quiui. 
Seni. 
Septeni. 
Octoni. 
Noveui. 
Deni. 
Undeni. 
Duodeni. 
Terni  deni. 
Quatemi  deni. 
(Juini  deni. 
Seni  deni. 
Septeni  deni. 
Octoni  deui. 
Noveni  deni. 

Viceni. 

Viceui  singuli. 
Viceni  bini,  etc. 

Triceai. 

Quadrageni. 

Quinquageni. 

Sexageni. 

Septuageni. 

Octogeni. 

Nonageni. 

Centeni. 

Duceni. 

Treceni,  or  trecenteni. 

Quadrmgeui,  or      \ 


Numeral  Adverbs. 

Semel,  once. 

Bis,  twice. 

Ter,  thrice. 

Quater, /our  times. 

Quiuquies. 

Sexies. 

Septies. 

Octies. 

Novies. 

Decies. 

Undecies. 

Duodecies. 

Terdecies.* 

Quatuordecies. 

Quindecies. 

Sedecies. 

Decies  et  septios. 

Duodevicies. 

Undevicies. 

Vicies. 

Semel  et  vicies. 
Bis  et  vicies,  etc. 

Tricies. 

Quadragies. 
Quinquagies. 
Sexagies. 
Septuagies. 
Octogies. 
Nonagies. 
Centies. 
Ducenties. 
Trecenties,  or  ) 
tricenties.     J 

Quadringenties. 

Quingenties. 

Sexcenties. 

Septingenties. 

Octiugenties. 

NonLngenties. 


2000.     Bis  millesimus. 


Millies. 
Bis  millies. 


quadringenteni.  j 
Quingeni. 

SexcSni,  or  sexcenteni. 
Septingeni. 
Octingeni. 
Nongeni. 
MLUcni,  or 

singula  millia-. 
Bis  milleni,  or 

bina  millia. 

§  &S0.  1.  In  the  ordinals,  instead  of  jjrimus,  prior  is  used,  if  only  two 
are  spoken  of.     Alter  is  often  used  for  secundus. 

2.  (a. ,  From  thirteenth  to  nineteenth,  the  smaller  number  is  usually  put 
first,  without  et ;  as,  tertius  decimus.  but  sometimes  the  greater  with  or  without 
et ;  as,  decimus  et  tertius,  or  deci7)ius  tertius. 

(i.)  Twenty-first,  thirty-first,  etc.,  are  often  expressed  by  units  et  viee.iimus, 
unus  et  tricesimus,  etc.,  one  and  twentieth,  etc. ;  and  twenty-second,  etc.,  by 
dmi,  or  idter  et  vicesimus,  etc.,  in  which  duo  is  not  changed.  In  the  other  com- 
pound nural  ers.  the  larger  precedes  without  ei,  or  the  smaller  with  et ;  as,  viceth 
mu*  quarlus,  oi  quartus  et  vicesimus. 


74.  ADJECTIVES COMLPARISON.  §  121,  122. 

(c.)  For  eighteenth,  etc.,  to  fifty-eighth,  and  for  nineteenth,  etc.  to  fifty-ninth, 
.he  subb'active  forms,  duodemcesinius,  etc.,  and  undevicesimus,  etc.,  are  often  used. 

3.  In  the  distributives,  eighteen,  tliirtj'-eight,  forty-eight,  and  nineteen  and 
twenty-nine,  are  often  expressed  by  the  subtract! ves  duodevicmi,  etc.,  undevi- 
teni,  etc. 

4.  (a.)  Distributives  are  sometimes  used  by  the  poets  for  cardinal  numbers;. 
as,  h'ma  spicula,  t\vo  darts.  Virg.  So  likewise  in  prose,  with  nouns  that  want  tha 
smgular;  as,  buuc  mipiics,  two  weddings. 

(b.)  The  singular  of  some  distributives  is  used  in  the  sense  of  multiphcs- 
tives;  as,  binus,  twofold.     So  ternus,  quimis,  se2}tC'nus. 

5.  In  the  numeral  adverbs,  for  the  intermediate  numbers  21,  22,  etc.,  tha 
larger  number  also  may  be  put  first,  either  with  or  without  et;  and  for 
twenty-eight  times  and  thirtj--nine  times,  duodetricies  and  undequadrayies  are 
found. 

§  131.    To  the  preceding  classes  may  be  added  the  following : — 

1.  MuUiplicatives,  which  denote  how  many  fold,  in  answer  to  the  question, 
ouotuplex  ?     They  all  end  injiltx,  and  are  declined  like/t'^ix  ;  as, 

Simplex,  single.  Quincuplex,__^ue/bfcZ. 

Duplex,  twoj'uld,  or  double.  Septemplex,  serefi/li^d 

Triplex,  threefold.  Decemplex,  tenfold. 

Quadruplex,  yuM/y'tiW.  Centuplex,  a  hundred  fold. 

2.  Proportionals,  which  denote  how  many  times  one  thing  is  greater  than 
another;  as,  dttplus,  a,  uin,  twice  as  great;  so  triplus,  quadruplus,  ociuplus,  de- 
cupliis.     They  are  generally  found  only  m  the  neuter. 

3.  Temporals,  which  denote  time;  as,  bimus,  a,  um,  two  years  oId_;  bo  trimus, 
quadrhnus,  etc.  Also,  biennis,  lasting  two  years,  biennial;  so  quadriennis,  quin- 
quennit:,  etc.  .  So  also,  bimestris,  of  two  months'  continuance ;  trimestris,  etc., 
biduus,  etc.  To  these  may  be  added  certain  nouns,  compounds  of  annus  and 
dies  with  the  cardinal  numbers;  as,  biennium,  triennium,  etc.,  a  period  of  two, 
etc.  years;  biduum,  triduum,  etc.,  a  period  of  two,  etc.  days. 

4.  Atljectives  in  arius,  derived  from  the  distributives,  and  denoting  of  how 
many  equal  parts  or  units  a  thing  consists ;  as,  binanus,  of  two  parts ;  ternarius, 
etc. 

5.  Interrogatives ;  as,  quot,  how  many  V  qvMus,  of  what  number"?  qiioleni, 
how  many  each?  quoties,  how  many  times'?  Their  correlatives  are  tot,  ioiidem, 
Bomany;  aliquot,  some;  which,  with  quot,  are  indeclinable;  and  the  adverbs, 
tolies,  so  often;  aliquoties,  several  times. 

6.  Fractionrd  expressions,  which  denote  the  parts  of  a  thing.  These  are  ex- 
pressed in  Latin  by  pars  with  dimidia,  tertia,  quarta,  etc.  Thus,  ^,  dimidia 
pars;  \.  tertia  pars,  etc.  When  the  number  of  parts  into  which  ft  thing  is 
divided  exceeds  by  one  only  the  parts  mentioned,  as  in  f ,  J,  etc.  the  fraction  is 
expre^>'J  simply  by  dme,  ires,  etc.  /^rn-^es,  denoting  two  out  of  three,  three  oat 
of  four,  cto, 

CO^IPARISON   OF   ADJECTIVES. 

§  122-  1.  Adjective?  may  be  divided  into  two  classes — those  which 
deijcre  a  variable,  and  those  which  denote  an  invariable,  quality  or 
limitation. 

Thus,  bdnus,  good,  altus,  high,  and  opdcus,  dark,  denote  variable  .attributes; 
but  (Bueiis,  brazen,  triplex,  threefold,  and  diurnus,  daily,  do  not  admit  of  different 
degrees  in  their  signification. 

2.    The  comparison  of  an  adjective  is  the  expression  of  its  quality 

*«  did  e  rent  degrees. 


§123-125.      ADJECTIVES. — IRREGULAR  to jrPARI SON.  7A 

8.    There   are  throe  degrees  of  comparison — the  positive^  the  cjtn 
paralice,  and  the  superlafice. 

4.  The  positive  simply  denotes  a  quality,  without  reference  to  otbei 
degrees  of  the  same  quality ;  as,  alius,  high ;  inltis,  mild. 

5.  The  comparative  denotes  that  a  quality  belongs  to  one  of  two 
objects,  or  sets  of  objects,  in  a  greater  degree  than  to  the  other ;  as, 
altior,  higher ;    niitior,  milder. 

6.  The  superlative  denotes  that  a  quality  belongs  to  one  of  several 
objects,  or  sets  of  objects,  in  a  greater  degree  than  to  any  of  thereat; 
as,  aUisshnus,  highest ;  mithslmus-y  mildest. 

Reji  1.  Sometimes  also  the  comparative  denotes  that  a  quality,  at  differecl 
times  or  in  other  circumstances,  belongs  in  different  degrees  to  the  same  object 
as,  est  sapientior  quamfuit,  he  is  wiser  than  he  was. 

Rem.  2.  The  comparative  sometimes  expresses  the  proportion  between  twa 
qualities  of  the  same  object;  as,  est  doctior  quam  sapientior,  he  is  more  learned 
than  wise ;  that  is,  his  learning  is  gretiter  than  his  wisdom. 

Rem.  3.  The  comparative  is  also  used  elliptically  instead  of  our  *  too '  oi 
rather ' ;  as.  vivit  liberim,  he  lives  too  freely,  or,  rather  freely.     Cf.  §  256,  R.  9 

Rem.  4.  The  superlative,  like  the  positive  withper,  (cf.  §  127,  2),  often  indi- 
cates a  high  degree  of  a  quality  without  direct  comparison  with  the  same  Qual- 
ity in  other  objects;  as,  amicus  caa-issimus,  a  very  dear  friend. 

§  ISiS*  ■  1.  Degrees  of  a  quality  inferior  to  the  positive  may  be  denoted 
by  the  adverbs  minus',  less ;  miiiime,  ]ea.s,t,  prefixed  to  the  positive;  ixs,jucundus, 
pleasant;  minus  jucundus,  less  pleasant;  minime jucundus,  least  pleasant. 

2.  A  small  degi-ee  of  a  quality  is  indicated  bys«6  prefixed  to  the  positive;  as, 
amdrus,  bitter;  subamarus,  bitterish,  or,  somewhat  bitter. 

3.  An  equal  degree  of  a  quality  may  be  denoted  by  tam  followed  by  qunm 
nque  followed  by  ac,  sic  followed  by  ul,  etc. ;  as,  hibes,  ceque  ac  pecus,  as  stupid 
as  a  brute. 

§  124:.  1.  The  comparative  and  superlative  in  Latin,  as  in  Eng- 
lish, are  denoted  either  by  peculiar  terminations,  or  by  certain  ad- 
verbs prefixed  to  the  positive.     Cf.  §  127,  1. 

Masc.        Fern.        Neut 

2.   The  terminational  comparative  ends  in     io?;      tor,      ins ; 
the  terminational  superlative  in  isshnus,  issima,  isslmum. 
.  3.   These  terminations  are  added  to  the  root  of  the  positive ;  as, 
altn?,,     altioT,     aWssimus;       hicjh,     higher,     highest. 
7niti3,     midoT,    TniVissimus ;      mild,     milder,     mildest. 
/eliz,  (gen.  fellcis,)  felicior,  /eKcissimus ;  happy,  happier,  happiest 

In  like  manner  compare 
Arc'-tus,  strait.  Cru-de'-lis,  cruel.  Ca'-pax,  capacious. 

Ca'-rus,  «/ear.  Fer'-ti-lis,/e7-«j7e.  C\e'-mens,  {gen. -tis)  merciful 

Doc'-tus,  learned.  Le'-vis,  light.  In'-ers,  {gen.  -tis),  sluggish. 

IRREGULAR    COMPARISON. 

§  125.  1.  Adjectives  in  er  form  their  superlative  by  adding 
rimus  to  that  termination  ;  as,  cicer,  active ;  gen.  acris ;  comparative, 
acrior ;  superlative,  acerrimus. 


Facilis, 

facilior, 

facillimiis, 

Difficilis, 

diJEcOior, 

difEcLLUmus, 

Gracilis, 

p-acUior, 
lumilior, 

gracillimus, 
numillimus, 

Humilis, 

Similis, 

similior, 

simillimus, 

Dlssimilis, 

dissimilior, 

dissimilUnms, 

76  ADJECTIVES. DEFECTIVE    COMPARISON.  §  126» 

In  like  manner,  pauper^  pauperrimus.  Vetus  has  a  similar  suj  erlative,  vete/r^ 
rimus,  from  tlie  old  collateral  form  veter. 

2.  Six  adjectives  in  lis  form  their  superlative  by  adding  limus  t4 
the  root : — 

easy. 

difficult. 

slender. 

low. 

like. 

unlike. 

ImbeciUus  or  imbecillis,  weak,  has  two  forms,  imbecillissinius  and  imhecillimut, 

3.  (a.)  Five  adjectives  inficus  (from/acio)  derive  their  compar- 
atives and  superlatives  from  supposed  forms  in  ens: — 

Beneficus,         beneficentior,         beneficentissimus,         beneficent. 
Honorific-QS,      honorificentior,      honorificeiitissimus,      honorable. 
Magnificus,       magnificentior,       magnificentissimus,      splendid. 
Munificus,         munificeutior,        munificentissimus,        liberal. 

Maleficus,  ,        maleficentissimus,        hurtful. 

(6.)  Adjectives  in  dlcens  and  vdlens  form  their  comparatives  and  superlatives 
regularly;  but  instead  of  those  positives,  fonns  in  dlcus  and  vdlus  are  more 
common;  as, 

*   Maledicens  or  dicus,  maledicentior,  maledicentissimus,  slanderous. 
Benevolens,  or  -volus,  benevolentior,  benevolentissimus,  benevolent. 

4.  These  five  have    regular  comparatives,  but  irregular  super- 


latives : — 

Dexter, 

dexterior, 

dextimus. 

right. 

Extera,  {fern.) 

exterior. 

exti-emus,  or  extiraus. 

outward. 

Postera,  (fern.) 

posterior. 

postremus,  or  postumus, 

hind. 

Inferus, 

inferior, 

infimus,  or  Imus, 

below. 

Sup  eras, 

superior. 

supremus,  or  summus. 

above. 

Remark  1.   The  nominative  singular  of  postera  does  not  occur  in  the  mas- 
culine, and  that  of  extera  wants  good  authority. 

5.    The  following  are  very  irregular  in  comparison  : — 

Bonus,  melior,        optimus,  good,       better,         best. 

Mains,  pejor,  pessimus,  had,         worse,         worst. 

Magnus,        major,         maximus,         great,      greater,     greatest 

Parvus,         minor,         minimus,  little,        less,  least. 

Multus,         plurimus,  ^ 

Multa,  plm-ima,     >     much,       more,  most. 

Multum,       plus,*         plurimum, ) 

Nequam,       nequior,      nequissimus,     worthless,  etc. 

Frugi,  frugahor,    fragalissimus,  frugal,  etc. 

Rem.  2.  All  these,  except  magnus,  whose  regular  forms  are  conti'aoted,  eithei 
form  their  comparatives  and  superlatives  from  obsolete  adjectives,  or  take  thoiB 
from  other  words  of  similar  signification. 

DEFECTIVE    COMPARISON. 

§  1S6.    1.   Seven  adjectives  want  the  positive: — 

Citerior,  ciiimu?,, nearer.  Prior,  primus, /orjreer. 

Deierior,  detenlmus,  toorse.  Propior,  proximus,  nearer. 

Interior,  intlmns,  inner.  Ulterior,  ultimus,  farther: 

Ocior,  ooissimus,  swifter. 

*  See  i  110. 


§  127.  ADJECTIYES DEFE    TIVE   -COMPARISON.  77 

2.  Eight  want  the  terminational  ooraparative : — 

Consnltus,  consultissimus,  skilful.  Par,  parissimus,  (very  rare),  equal. 

Inclutus,  inclutissinius,  renowned.  Persuasus,  persuasisslmum   (neuter) 

Invictus,  iuvictissimus,  invincible.  persuaded. 

Invitus,  invitissimus,  unwilling.  Sacer,  sacerrimns,  sacred. 
Meritus,  meritissimus,  (very  rare,) 
deserving. 

3.  Eight  have  very  rarely  the  terminational  comparative : — 

Apncus,  apricissimus,  sunny.  Falsus,  falsissinras,  false. 

Bellus,  beUissimus,_^»e.  Fidus,  fidissimus,  faithfuL 

Comis,  comissimus,  courteous.  Novns,  novisslmus,  new. 

Diversus,  diversissimus,  different.  Vetus,  vetemmus,  old. 

4.  The  following  want  the  terminational  superlative  : — 

Adolescens,  adolescentior,  young.  Proclivis,  proclivior,  sloping. 

Agrestis,  agrestior,  rustic.  Pronus,  pronior,  bending  down. 

Alicer,  alacrior,  active.  Protervus,  protervior,  violent. 

Ater,  atrior,  black.  sequior,  worse. 

Cfficus,  c£ecior,  blind.  Propinquus,  pi-opinquior,  near. 

Deses,  desidior,  inactive.  Salutaris,  salutarior,  salutary. 

Diutumus,  diuturnior,  lasting.  Sktis,  sufficient ;  satbis,  pre/erabie. 

TnfinTtns,  infinitior,  unlimited.  Satur,  fiAturioT,  full. 

Ingens,  ingentior,  great.  Senex,  senior,  old. 

Jejunus,  ^ejunlor,  fasting.  SOvestris,  silvestrior,  woody. 

Juvenis,  junior,  young.  Sinister,  sinisterior,  left. 

Licens,  licentior,  unrestrained.  Suplnus,  supinior,  lying  on  the  back. 

Longinquus,  longinquior,  distant.  Surdus,  surdior,  deaf. 

Opimus,  opimior,  nch.  Teres,  teretior,  round. 

Remabk  1.  The  superlative  of  juvenis  and  adolescens  is  supplied  by  minimuM 
natu,  youngest ;  and  that  of  senex  by  maximus  natu,  oldegl.  The  comparatives 
minor  natu  and  major  natu  sometimes  also  occur. 

Rem.  2.  Most  adjectives  also  in  His,  ilis,  dlis,  and  bilis,  have  no  terminational 
superlative. 

5.  Many  variable  adjectives  have  no  terminational  comparative  or 

superlative.     Such  are, 

(a.)  Adjectives  in  bundus,  imus,  tnus  (except  divlnns),  orus,  most  in  ivus,  and 
in  us  pm'e  (except -quus.)   Yet  arduus,  assiduus,  egregius,  exiguus,  indnstrius, per- 

fetuus,  pitis,  strenuus,  and  vacuus,  have  sometimes  a  terminational  comparison, 
o,  dropping  i,  noxior,  innoxior,  sobrior. 

(6.)  The  following — alnius,  calvus,  cdnns,  cicur,  clavdug,  degener,  dellrus,  dispar, 
egenus^  impar,  impiger,  invidus,  Idcer,  mhnor,  mirus,  nudus,  prcecox,  pratut^ 
rudis,  scUvus,  sospes,  superstes,  vulgaris,  and  some  others. 

§  13T,  1.  The  comparative  and  superlative  may  also  be 
formed  by  prefixing  to  the  positive  the  adverbs  magis,  more,  and 
maxime,  most ;  as,  idoneiis,  fit ;  magis  idoneus,  maxime  idoneus. 

2.  Various  degrees  of  a  quality  above  the  positive  are  expressed 
by  admodum,  aliquanto,  apprime,  bene,  imprimis,  midtum,  ippido,  per- 
quam,  and  valde,  and  also  by  per  compounded  with  the  t  Bsitive  ;  as, 
difficilL<i,  difficult ;  perdifficilis,  very  difficult.  To  a  few  adjectives  pros 
is  in  like  manner  prefixed ;  as,  prcedurus,  very  hard. 

3.  The  force  of  the  comparative  is  increased  by  prefixing  efiam, 
even,  still,  or  yet;  and  that  of  botn  comparative  and  superlative,  by 


78  ADJECTIVES DERIVATION.  §  128. 

prefixing  longe  or  multa,  much,  far ;  as,  longe  nohilissimus ;  1  »nge  melior 
iter  multc  facUius;  multo  maxima  pars. 

4.  FeZ,  '  even ',  and  quam,  with  or  without  possum,  '  as  much  at 
possibU; ',  before  the  superlative,  render  it  more  emphatic  ;  as,  Cicero 
vel  opttmus  oratorum  Romanorum.  Quam  maximum  potest  milltum  nu' 
merum  coUigit ;  quam  doctissimus,  extremely  learned ;  quam  celerrtme^ 
as  speedily  as  possible. 

Note  1.  Instead  of  quam  with  possum,  quantus  is  sometimes  used,  in  the  same 
case  as  the  superlative ;  as,  Quantis  maximis  potuit  itinei-ibus  cordendit. 

Note  2.  Umis,  with  or  without  omnium,  is  sometimes  added  to  superlatives  to 
increase  their  force ;  as,  Hoc  ego  iino  omnium  plurimum  utor.  Cic.  Urbem  unam 
mihi  amicissimam  decUndvi,  Id.    It  is  used  in  like  manner  with  excello. 

5.  All  adjectives  whose  signification  admits  of  different  degrees,  if 
they  have  no  terminational  comparison,  may  be  compared  by  means 
of  adverbs. 

6.  Instead  of  the  comparative  and  superlative  degrees,  the  positive  with 
the  prepositions  prcs,  ante,  prceier,  or  supra,  is  sometimes  used ;  as,  ptrce  nobis 
bedius,  happier  than  we.  Cic.  Ante  alias  pulchriiudine  insignis,  most  beauti- 
ful. Liv.  Sometimes  the  preposition  is  used  in  connection  with  the  superla- 
tive ;  as.  Ante  alios  pulcherrimus  omnes.  Virg. 

7.  Among  adjectives  which  denote  an  invariable  quality  or  limitation,  and 
which,  therefore,  cannot  be 'compared,  are  those  deuotii:g  matter,  time,  num- 
ber, possession,  country,  part,  interrogation;  also  compounds  of  jugwn,  somnus, 
ffero,  and  Jero,  and  many  others. 

DERIVATION   OF   ADJECTIVES. 

§  198.  Derivative  adjectives  are  formed  chiefly  from  nouns, 
from  other  adjectives^  and  from  verbs. 

I.  Those  derived  from  nouns  and  adjectives  are  called  denomina- 
tives.    The  following  are  the  principal  classes : — 

1.  (a.)  The  termination  e/Vs,  added  to  the  root,  denotes  the  material  of  which 
a  thing  is  made,  and  sometimes  simOarity;  a.s,  aureus,  golden;  argenteus,  of 
silver;  %MeMs,  wooden;  vitreus,  of  glass;  m'^-meMS,  maidenly;  from  aurum,  ar- 
gentum,  etc.    See  §  9,  Rem.  3. 

(6.)  Some  adjectives  of  this  kind  have  a  double  fonii  in  neus  andnus;  as, 
eburneus  and  eburnus,  of  ivory. 

(c. )  The  termination  i7J?«  has  the  same  meaning;  as,  adamantinus,  of  ada- 
mant; cedrinus,  of  cedar ;  frova  addmas  and  cedrus.  So,  also,  enws ;  as,  ter7-emi8. 
of  earth,  from  te7-ra. 

(d.)  The  teiTnination  eiis  or  lus  (Greek  woe),  and  also  icus,  belong  to  adjec- 
tives formed  from  Greek  names  of  men,  and  denote  'of  or  '  pertaining  to'; 
as,  Achilleus,  Sophocl'tis,  Aristotellus,  Platonlcus  ;  Pythagorcus  and  Pyihagoi-icus; 
ffomertus  and  Bomericiis.  Names  in  ias  make  adjectives  in  idcus;  as,  Archias, 
Arckidcus.  Sometimes,  though  rarely  in  the  purest  Latin  authors,  adjectives  in 
etis  or  ius  are  formed  from  Latin  names;  as,  Marcellla  or  -ea,  a  festival  in 
honor  of  the  Marcelli. 

2.  (a.)  The  terminal 'ons  alis,  dris,  drius,  ilis,  atllis,  icins,  tcus,  ius,  eus,  and 
inus,  denote  '  belongin«  '  '  f  ^rtaining, '  or  '  relating  to  ' ;  as,  capitdlis,  relating 
to  the  life ;  from  capm 


§   128.  AD.TRCTIVKS BERIVATION.  7  J 

So  comitialis,  rerjalh  ;  ApoUimris,  consiilaris,  populdris ;  m'gentnrius ;  ctrJ^w, 
kost'ilis,  juvenilis;  ti(j_iintilis,  Jiuviatilis;  iribunicms,  patricius  ;  bellicus,  ciricus,  Ger- 
mimicKs;  acaisaturiits,  Impei-atorius,  regius;  Hectvreus  ;  can'ams,  equinus,  fertnut, 
viasculinus ;  from  coinUia,  rex,  Apollo,  'cwisul,  populus,  argentum,  clvis,  etc. 

(6.)  The  termination  ilis  sometimes  expresses  character;  as,  hostUis,  hostUe*, 
puerUis,  boyish ;  from  hostis  and  puer. 

(c.)  The'tennination  iiius  belongs  especially  to  derivatives  from  names  of 
animals,  and  other  living  beings. 

3.  The  tennination  arius,  as  fwsubstantive,  scil.  fdber,  etc.,  generally  denotae 
profession  or  occupation;  as,  argenlarim,  a  silversmith;  from  argentum; — 
coriarius,  staiuarius  ;  from  corium  and  siatua.  Wlien  added  to  numeral  adjec- 
tives, it  denotes  how  manj'  equal  parts  a  thing  contains.     See  ^  121,  4. 

4.  The  tenninations  onus  and  Untus  denote  abundance,  fuhiess;  as,  animosut, 
full  of  courage ;  fraudulentus,  given  to  fraud ;  from  animus  and  fraus.  So  lapi- 
dosus,  vlnosus,  poriuosus,  turbulentus,  sangidnohntus,  riolentus.  Before  lentus,  a 
connecting  vowel  is  inserted,  which  is  commonly  ii,  but  sometimes  6. 

Note. — Adjectives  of  this  class  are  called  cnnpUjicaiives.     See  ^  104,  12. 

5.  From  adjectives  are  fonned  diminutives  in  ulvs,  ciilus,  etc.,  in  the  same 
maimer  as  from  noims ;  a?,,  dukiculiis,  sweetish;  from  didcis.  So  lentulus,  mi- 
sellus,  parviihts,  etc.  Sec  §  100,  3,  and  §  104,  11.  Diminutives  are  sometimes 
formed  from  comparatives;  as,  mnjuscubis,  duriusculus,  somewhat  great,  some- 
what hard,  etc.  Double  diminutives  are  formed  from  paucu^,  viz  jmuxiUus  and 
pauxilMus ;  and  from  bonus,  (benus)  are  formed  belliis  and  bdlidus. 

6.  (a.)  Fi-om  the  names  of  places,  and  especially  of  towns,  are  derived  pa- 
trial  adjectives  in  ensis,  mus,  as,  and  anus,  denoting  of  or  belonging  to  such 
places. 

(8.)  Thus  from  Cannce  is  formed  Cannensis;  from  Sulmo,  Stdmonensis.  In 
like  manner,  from  castra  and  circus  come  castrensis,  circensis.  But  Athena 
makes  Atheniensis ;  and  some  Greek  towns  in  la  and  ea  drop  i  antl  e  in  their 
adjectives;  as,  Antiochensis,  Nicomedensis. 

(c.)  Those  in  HiMs  are  formed  from  names  of  places  ending  in  ia  andtujn; 
as,  Aricia,  Aincmus ;  Caudium,  Cnudlnus ;  Capifolium,  Cujntolitms ;  Lalium,  Lo- 
tlnus.  Some  names  of  towns,  of  Greek  origin,  with  other  terminations,  also 
form  adjectives  in  imis  ;  as,  Tarentum,  Tarentinus. 

{d.)  Most  of  those  in  rts  are  fonned  from  nouns  in  wre  ;  some  from  nouns  i:i 
a  ;  as,  Arplnum,  Arplnns  ;  Capena,  Capcnas. 

(e.)  Those  in  anus  are  formed  from  names  of  towns  of  the  first  declension, 
or  from  certain  conunon  nouns;  as.  Alba,  Albanus ;  Roma,  Romdmis  ;  QinuB, 
Cumdntis;  Thtbce,  Thebanus;  also  from  some  of  the  second  declension;  as, 
Tusculum,  Tusculdnus;  Fundi,  Funddtius  :—fons,  fontdnus;  mmis,  montdnus ; 
urbs,  urbdnvs ;  oppidum,  oppiddnus. 

{f.)  Adjectives  with  the  terminations  anus,  idnus,  and  inus  are  formed  from 
names  of  men;  us,  Sulla,  Sulldnus  ;   Tullius,  Tullidnus ;  Juguriha,  Jugurthlnus. 

(g.)  Greek  names  of  to^vlls  in  ^jti^/s  form  patrial  adjectives  m  politdnus ;  as, 
Neapdlis,  Nenpoliidnus. 

{h.)  Greek  names  of  towns  generally  form  patrials.'in  ?««  ,■  as,  Rlwdus,  Rho- 
dius ;  Lacedoemon,  Lacediemonius  ; — but  those  in  a  fonn  them  in  ceus  ;  as,  Zo- 
rissa,  Laiissceus  ;  Smyrna,  Smyrn/eus. 

(i.)  From  many  patrials;  as,  B'Htannus,  Gallus,  Afer,  Persa,  Arabs,  etc., 
adjectives  are  formed  in  icus  and  ius ;  as,  Britannlcus,  Galllcus,  Africus,  Persi- 
cus,  Arabicus ;  so  Syrus,  Syrltts ;   Thrax,  Thracius. 

7.  A  large  class  of  dorivatlve  adjectives,  though  formed  from 
nouns,  have  the  terminations  of  perfect  participles.  They  generally 
signify  ivearing  or  furnislied  loith;  as, 

aldtus,  winged  bnrbdius,  bearded;  gakdtus,  helmeted;  aurltus,  long-eared 
Utrritm,  turretea,  c^^nutus,  horned;  from  ala,  barba,  galea,  awis,  etc. 


80  ADJECTIVES DERIYATIOK  §  129 

8.  The  termination  aneus,  annexed  to  the  root  of  &n  adjective  ot 
participle  in  us,  expresses  a  resemblance  to  the  quality  denoted  by 
the  primitive ;  as,  siipervacdneus,  of  a  superfluous  nature. 

§_  1^9.  n.  Adjectives  derived  from  verbs  are  called  verbal  ad- 
jectives.    Such  are  the  following  classes : — 

1.  The  termination  hundus,  added  to  the  first  root  of  the  verb, 
with  a  connecting  vowel,  which  is  comifionly  that  of  the  verb,  (see 
§  150,  5,)  has  the  general  meaning  of  the  present  participle;  as, 

eiT&bundus,  mortbundus,  from  erro,  morior,  equivalent  to  errans,  moriens. 

(a.)  Ill  many  the  meauiiig  is  somewliat  strengtliened;  as,  gratuldbundus,  full 
of  congi-atulations ;  lacinmibundus,  weeping  profusely. 

(b.)  Most  verbals  in  bundus  are  from  verbs  of  the  -first  conjugation,  a  few  from 
those  of  the  third,  and  but  one  from  the  second  and  fourth  respectively,  viz. 
pudibundus  and  laseivlbundus. 

(c.)  Some  verbal  adjectives  in  cmw^^ms  have  a  similar  sense ;  as,  rubicundus^ 
verecundus,  from  rubeo  and  vereor. 

2.  Ihe  termination  ^dus,  added  to  the  root,  especially  of  neuter 
verbs,  denotes  the  quality  or  state  expressed  by  the  verb ;  as, 

algidus,  cold;  calidus,  wai-m;  madidus,  moist;  rapidus,  rapid;  from  algeo, 
caleo,  madeo,  rapio. 

3.  The  termination  wus,  also,  denotes  the  quality  expressed  by  the 
verb  ;  and  adjectives  in  uus  derived  from  active  verbs  take  a  passive 
meaning ;  as, 

congruus,  agreeing,  from  congi-uo ;  so,  assidims,  nocuiis,  innocuus  : — irrigmts, 
well  watered ;  consjncuus,  visible ;  from  irrigo,  conspicio. 

4.  (a.)  The  terminations  ilis  and  hilis,  added  to  the  root  of  a  verb, 
with  its  connecting  vowel,  denote  passively,  capability,  or  desert ;  as, 

amabilis,  worthy  to  be  loved ;  credUjilis,  deserving  credit ;  placabilis,  easy  to  be 
appeased ;  agilis,  active ;  ductilis,  ductile ;  from  dnw,  credo,  pldco ;  ago,  duco. 
They  are  rarely  active ;  as,  horribilis,  ternbilis,  ferlllis ;  aSr  per  cuncta  mea- 
bllis.     Plin. 

(6.)  In  adjectives  of  these  forms,  derived  from  verbs  of  the  third  conjuga- 
tion, the  connecting  vowel  is  I ;  sometimes,  also,  in  those  from  verbs  of  the 
second  conjugation,  in  these  and  other  fonns,  t  is  used  instead  of  e;  as,  horri- 
bilis, terrlhilis,  from  liorreo  and  ierreo. 

(c.)  These  terminations,  with  the  connecting  vowel,  are  sometimes  added  to 
the  tlurd  root;  as,  Jlexilis,  Jlexibilis ;  coctilis,  coctUnlis,  from  Jlecto  (flex-),  etc. 

5.  The  termination  icius  or  itius,  added  to  the  third  root  of  the 
verb,  has  a  passive  sense ;  as,  Jictitius,  feigned ;  eonductitius,  to  be 
hired;  from  Jingo  (fid-),  etc. 

6.  The  termination  ax,  added  to  the  root  of  a  verb,  denotes  an  in- 
clination, often  one  that  is  faulty ;  as, 

audax,  audacious;  Idquax,  talkative;  rdpax  rapacious;  from  audeo,  Idgturr 
rapio. 

7.  The  termination  ivus,  annexed  to  the  third  root  of  a  verb,  de- 
notes fitness  or  ability  to  produce  the  action    expressed   by  the  verb 
as,  disjunctivus,  disjunctive,  from  disjungo. 


§  130,  131.  ADJECTIVES — COMPOSITION.  81 

8.  Verbals  in  fc*  and  trix,  (see  §  102j  6,  {a.),  are  often  used  as  adjectives,  espe- 
cially in  poetry;  as,  victor  exercitus,  mctrlceslilcrce.  In  the  plural  they  become 
adjectives  of  three  terminations ;  as,  victwes,  vlctrices,  victrJcin.  So  also  hospes^ 
especially  by  the  later  poets,  is  used  as  an  adjective,  having  liospUa  in  the  femi- 
nine singular  and  also  in  the  neuter  plural. 

§  130.  in.  Adjectives  derived  from  participles,  and  retaining 
their  form,  are  called  participial  adjectives]  as,  amans,  fond  of;  doc- 
tus,  learned. 

IV.  Some  adjectives  are  derived  from  adverbs ;  as,  crastlnus,  of 
to-morrow ;  hodiernus,  of  this  day ;  from  eras  and  hodie. 

Y.  Some  adjectives  are  derived  from  prepositions ;  as,  contraries, 
contrary,  from  contra ;  posterus,  subsequent,  from  post. 


COMPOSITION   OF   ADJECTIVES. 

§  131.     Compound  adjectives  are  formed  variously : — 

1.  Of  two  nouns;  as,  capripes,  goat-footed — of  caper  and  pes;  ignicOmtu, 
laving  fiery  hair — of  ignis  and  cdma. 

Note. — See,  respecting  the  connecting  short  I,  in  csiee  the  first  part  of  the  compoancl 
s  a  noun  or  an  adjective,  §  103,  Rem.  1. 

2.  Of  a  noun,  and  an  adjective;  as,  rwctivdgus,  wandering  in  the  night — 
of  rwx  and  vagus.     So  lucifugax,  shunning  the  light — of  lux  and  fugax. 

3.  Of  a  noun  and  a  verb ;  as,  corniger,  bearing  horns — of  carnu  and  gero ; 
letifer,  bringing  death — of  Ictum  and  fero.  So  carnivdrus,  causidicus,  ignivd- 
mus,  lucifugus,  pai'iiceps. 

4.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  noun;  as,  cequcevus,  of  the  same  age — of  ceqtius  and 
cevum  ;  celeripes,  swift-footed— of  celer  and  pes.  So  ceniinuimis,  decennis,  mag- 
nanimus,  misertcors,  unanimis. 

5.  Of  two  adjectives;  as,  centumgeminus,  a  hundred-fold ;  multicdvtis,  h&vmg 
many  cavities ;  quintusdecimus,  the  fifteenth. 

6.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  verb;  as,  brevildquens,  speaking  briefly — of  hrevit 
and  loquor ;  magnificus,  magnificent — of  magnus  andfacio. 

7.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  termination;  as,  qualiscumqwe,  quotcumque,  uterque. 

8.  Of  an  adverb  and  a  noun ;  as,  bicorpor,  two-bodied — of  his  and  cwpus. 

9.  Of  an  adverb  and  an  adjective;  as,  maledicax,  slanderous — of  male  and 
tUcax.     So  antemerididnus,  before  mid-day. 

10.  Of  an  adverb  and  a  verb;  as,  beneficus,  beneficent — of  bene  and /dcio ; 
malevdlus,  malevolent — of  male  and  vdlo. 

11.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  noun;  as,  dviens,  mad — of  a  and  mens.  So  con- 
SOTS,  decdlor,  deformis,  implumis.,  inermis. 

12.  Of  a  preposition  and  an  adjective ;  as,  concaves,  concave ;  infldus,  un- 
faithful.    So  improvidus,  percdrus,  prcedives,  siibalhidus. 

13.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  verb ;  as,  coniinuus,  unintemipted — of  con  and 
teneo  ;  insciens,  ignorant — of  in  and  scio.  So  jn-cecijyuzts,  promiscuus,  substillus, 
superstes. 

Remark.  When  the  former  part  is  a  preposition,  its  final  consonant  is  sometime^ 
ehat;ged,  to  adapt  it  to  the  consonant  which  follows  it,  as,  imprudens — of  in  said  pni- 
iefu     See  §196;  and  cf.  i  103,  R.  2. 


82  PRONOUNS. — SUBSTANTIVE    PRONOUNS.         §  132,  IBS, 


PRONOUNS. 

0  i33.     1.   A  pronoun  is  a  word  which  supplies  the  place 
of  a  noun. 

2.   There  are  eighteen  simple  pronouns : — 

Ego,  I.  Hie,  this,  the  latter.  Suus,  his,  hers,  its,  etc. 

Tu,  thou.  Is,  that  or  he.  Cujus  ?  whose  f 

Sui,  of  himself,  etc.  Quis  ?  who  f  Noster,  our. 

Ille,  that,  the  former.  Qui,  who.  Vester,  your. 

Ipse,  himself  Meus,  my.  Nostras,  of  our  country. 

Iste,  that,  that  of  yours.  Tuus,  thy.  Cujas?  of  what  country 

3.  -fc'(/o,  >ii,  iui(J  sui,  and  commonly  also  quis  and  its  compounds,  are  substan- 
tives: the  otiier  pronouns,  both  simple  and  compound,  are  adjectives,  but  ara 
often  by  ellipsis  used  as  substantives. 

4.  Fgo,  tu,  and  stti  are  commonly  called  personal  j^ronoiins.  They  are  a 
species  of  appellatives  (§  26,  3,)  of  general  application.  Ego  is  used  by  a 
speaker  to  designate  himself;  tji,  to  designate  the  person  whom  he  addresses. 
Hence  ego  is  of  the  first  person,  tu  of  the  second.  (§  35,  2.)  Sui  is  of  the  third 
person,  and  has  always  a  reflexive  signification,  referring  to  the  subject  of  the 
sentence.  The  oblique  cases  of  ego  and  tu  are  also  used  reflexively,  when  the 
subject  of  the  proposition  is  of  the  first  or  second  person. 

5.  The  remaining  pronouns,  except  qids  and  its  compounds,  are  adjectives, 
as  they  serve  to  limit  the  meaning  of  substantives ;  and  they  are  pronouns,  be- 
cause, like  substantive  pronouns,  they  may  designate  any  object  ui  certain 
situations  or  circumstances. 

6.  Meus,  tmts,  suus,  noster,  vester,  and  cvjus,  have  the  same  extent  of  signifi- 
cation as  the  pronouns  from  which  they  are  derived,  and  are  equivalent  to  the 
genitive  cases  of  their  primitives. 

7.  Pronouns,  like  substantives  and  adjectives,  are  declined;  but  most  of 
them  want  the  vocative.  Sui,  from  the  natm-e  of  its  signification,  wants  also 
the  nominative  in  both  numbers. 

8.  The  substantive  pronouns  take  the  gender  of  the  objects  which  they  de- 
note.   The  adjective  pronouns,  like  adjectives,  have  three  genders. 


SUBSTANTIVE    PRONOUNS. 

§  133>     The  substantive  pronouns  are  thus  declined  :- 

Singular. 
jfV.   e'-go,  /.  tu,  thou. 


n         r .     J.  .   '  -     r  ^-L  ( su'-i,  of  himself,  her- 

G.  me -1,  of  me.  hi -i,  of  thee.  j     Ji/n^^if^    •" ' 

D.   mi'-hi,  to  me.  tib'-I,*  to  thee.  sib'-i,*  to  himself,  etc. 

Ac.  me,  me.  te,  thee.  se,  himself,  etc. 

F.    -; tii,  0  thou. 

Ah.  me,  with  me.  te,  with  thee.  se,  with  himself,  etc. 


•  See  }  19, 1)  Exc. 


§  134. 


ADJECTIVE    PRONOUNS. 


83 


Plural. 


N. 


nos,  we. 


^(nos'-trum  )   ^ 
(  ar  nos  -tri,  )   ■' 


us 


D. 

Ac. 

V. 

Ah. 


no' -bis,  to  US. 
nos,  us. 


J\Alm 


vos,  ye  or  you, 
ves'-trum  or " 

ves'-tri, 
vo'-bis,  to  you. 
vos,  you. 
vos,  0  ye  or  you. 
vo'-bis,  with  you. 


you.     su'-i,  of  themselves. 

sib'-i,  to  themselves. 
se,  themselves. 

se,  with  themselves. 


no'-bis,  with  us. 

1.    Me  and  mi  are  ancient  forms  for  mihi.    So  »nm'  for  mi&ine, 


Remark 
Pers.  1,  2. 

Rem.  2.  The  syllable  met  is  sometimes  annexed  to  the  substantive  prononns. 
n  an  intensive  sense,  either  with  or  without  ipse ;  as,  eg6met,  I  myself;  mihi- 
tnet  ipsi,  for  myself.  It  is  not  annexed,  however,  to  the  genitives  plural,  nor  to 
tu  in  the  nomiiiative  or  vocative.  In  these  cases  of  iu,  tute  or  iutemet  is  used. 
In  the  accusative  and  ablative  the  reduplicated  fonns  meme  and  tete  in  the  sin- 
gular, and  sese  in  both  numbers,  are  employed  intensively.  Mepte,  intensive, 
med  and  iecl,  for  7ne  and  ie,  and  mis  and  tis  for  mei  and  tui,  occur  in  the  comic 
writers. 

^  Nostrum  and  vestrum  are  contracted  from  nostrorum,  nostrarum,  and  »e*- 
troriny,  vestrorum.  Respectmg  the  difference  in  the  use  of  nostrum  and  no»tn, 
vestrum  and  vestri,  see  §  212,  R.  2,  N.  2. 

4.  The  preposition  cum  is  affixed  to  the  ablative  of  these  pronouns  in  both 
numbers;  as,  mecum,  nobiscum,  etc.    Cf.  §  136,  E.  1. 


ADJECTIVE  PRONOUNS. 

§  134.     Adjective  pronouns  may  be  divided  into  the  follow- 
ing classes  : — demonstrative,  intensive,  relative,  interrogative,  in- 
dejinite,  possessive,  and  patrial. 
Note.   Some  pronouns  belong  to  two  of  these  classes. 

DEMONSTRATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

Demonstrative  pronouns  are  such  as  specify  what  object  is 
meant. 

They  are  iUe,  tste,  hie,  and  is,  and  their  compounds,  and  are  thus 
declined : — 


Singular, 

Plural. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

M. 

R 

N. 

N.  il'-le, 

il'-la, 

ii'-md, 

il'-li. 

jl'-lse, 

il'-la, 

G.   il-li'-us,* 

il-U'-us, 

U-li'-us, 

il-lo'-rum 

U-la'-rum, 

il-lo'-nim, 

D.   il'-li. 

il'-li. 

il'-li, 

il'-Hs, 

il'-hs, 

U'-hs, 

Ac.  il'-lum, 

il'-lam, 

il'-lud. 

il'-los. 

U'-las, 

U'-la, 

V.   il'-le, 

il'-la, 

il'-md. 

il'-h, 

il'-lae, 

il'-la, 

Ah.il' -Id. 

U'-la. 

U'-lo. 

il'-hs. 

il'-hs. 

il'-hs. 

•See) 

15,1. 

84 


DEMONSTRATIVE    PRONOUNS. 


§134 


Iste  is  decliiLecl  like  ille. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

N.  Mc,_ 

haec, 

hoc. 

hi. 

hag, 

haec. 

G.   hu'-jiis 

hu'-jiis, 

hu'-jus, 

ho'-rum, 

ha'-rum. 

ho'-rum, 

D.   huic*, 

huic, 

huic. 

his, 

his, 

his. 

Ac.  hunc, 

hanc, 

hoc, 

hos, 

has, 

haec, 

F.   hio, 

haec. 

hoc. 

hi, 

hae. 

hsec, 

46.  hoc. 

hac. 

h5c. 

his. 

his. 

his. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

M. 

F 

N. 

N.  is,_ 

e'-a, 

id, 

i'-i, 

e'-ae. 

e'-a, 

G.   e'-jus. 

e-jus, 

e'-jus, 

e-o'-rum, 

e-a'rnm. 

e-o'-rnm, 

D.   e'-i, 

e'-i, 

e'-i. 

i'-is  or  e'-is. 

i'-is  or  e'-is. 

i'-is  or  e'-is, 

Ac.  e'-um, 

e'-am. 

id, 

e'-os, 

e'-as, 

e'-a, 

V. 

Ah.  e'-o. 

•:j^ 

e'-a. 

e'-5. 

i 

-is  or  e'-is. 

i'-is  or  e'-is. 

i'-is  or  e'-is. 

Remark  1.  Instead  of  ille,  alius  was  anciently  used ;  whence  olli  masc.  plur. 
in  Virgil.  like  fem.,  for  illius  and  illl,  is  found  in  Lucretius  and  Cato,  as  also 
in  Cato,  hce  for  hide  fem. ;  hice  for  Id,  and  hcec  for  hce  in  Plautus  and  Terence. 
Im  for  eum,  is  found  in  the  Twelve  Tables;  eii  for  ei,  and  ibus  and  iibus  fot 
Us,  in  Plautus;  ecB,  fem.,  for  ei,  and  edbus  for  its,  in  Cato. 

Rem.  2.  From  ecce,  lo !  with  ille,  iste,  and  is,  are  formed,  in  colloquial  language, 
nom.,  ecca;  eccilla,  eccilliid ;  ace.  sing.,  eccum,  eccam ;  eccillum  (by  syncope 
ellum),  eccillam  ;  eccistam  ;  ace.  plur.,  eccos,  ecca. 

Rem.  3.  Istic  and  illic  are  compounded  of  iste  hie,  and  ille  hie ;  or,  as  some 
say,  of  iste  ce,  and  ille  ce.  The  former  sometimes  retains  the  aspirate,  as  isthic. 
They  are  more  emphatic  than  ille  and  iste. 


N. 


Istic  is  thus  declined : 

— 

Singular. 

Plural. 

M.              F. 

N. 

M.         F. 

N.  is'-t!c,       is'-tsec, 

is'-t5c,  or  is'-tiic, 

N. 

js'-tsec. 

Ac.  is'-tunc,     is'-tanc, 

is'-toc,  or  is'-tuc, 

Ac. 

Ab.  is'-toc.       is'-tac. 

is'toc. 

is'-taec. 


Illic  is  declined  in  the  same  manner. 


Rem.  4.  Ce,  intensive,  is  sometimes  added  to  the  several  cases  of  hie,  stud 
rarely  to  some  cases  of  the  other  demonstrative  pronouns ;  as,  hujusce,  huncce, 
hancce,  hocce,  hice,  hcece  or  h(EC,  horunc,  harmnce,  harunce,  or  harunc,  hosce, 
hasce,  hisce;  ilUusce,  illdce,  illosce,  illasce,  illisce;  istace,  isiisce ;  ejusce,  Usee. 
When  ngj  interrogative,  is  also  annexed,  ce  becomes  ci ;  as,  hceccine,  hoscine, 
hiscine ;  istuccine,  isiacrine,  isioscine  ;  illiccine,  illancdne. 

Rem.  5.  31ddi,  the  genitive  of  mddus,  amiexed  to  the  genitive  singular  of  q*- 
monsti'ative  and  relative  pronouas,  imparts  to  them  the  signification  of  adjec- 
tives of  quality;  as,  hujusmodi  or  hujuscemddi,  like  talis,  of  this  sort,  such; 
iUimmddi  and  istiusmodi,  of  that  sort ;  cujusmddi,  of  what  sort,  like  qualis ;  ctt- 


*  See  5  9,  5. 


§  135.  IKTENSIVE    PRONOUNS.  8A 

jitscemddi,  cujtisquemddi,  cujusmodicumque,  of  what  kind  soever ;  cujusdammdcU, 
of  some  kind.  60  also  istimCdi,  cuimddi  mid  ctdcuiniddi,  instead  of  istutsn*6di, 
cujusinddi.,  etc. 

Rem.  6.    The  suffix  dem  is  annexed  to  is,  forming  idem,  "  the  same,"  wLklJ 
Is  thus  declined: — 

Singular. 

M.  F.  N. 

N.    i'-dem,  e'-a-dem,  I'-dem, 

G.    e-jus'-dem,  e-jus'-dem,  e-jus'-dem, 

D.    e-i'-dem,  e-i'-dem,  e-i'-dem, 

Ac.  e-un'-dem,  e-an'-dem,  I'-dem, 


V. 

Ah.  e-6'-dem.  e-a'-dem.  e-6'-dem. 

Plural. 
M.  F.  N.  . 

N.   i-i'-dem,  e-se'-dem,  e'-a-dem, 

C.  e-o-ran'-dem,  e-a-run'-dem,  e-o-run'-dem, 

D.  e-is'-dem,  or  i-is'-dem,  e-is'-dem,  or  i-is'-dem,  e-is'-dem,  or  i-is'-dem, 
^c.  e-os'-dem,  e-as'-dem,  e'-a-dem, 

V.    

Ab.  e-is'-dem,  or  i-is'-dem.  e-is'-dem,  or  i-is'-dem.  e-is'dem,  or  i-is'-dem. 

Note  1.  In  compoimd  pronouns,  m  before  d  is  changed  into  n;  as,  eundem^ 
eorundem,  etc. 

Note  2.  In  Sallust  isdem,  and  in  Palladius  hisdem  occur  for  iisdem ;  and  En- 
nius  in  Cicero  has  eademmet  for  eddem. 

INTENSIVE    PRONOUNS. 

§  13^.     Intensive  pronouns  are  such  as  serve  to  render  an 
object  emphatic. 

To  this  class  belong  ipse,  and  the  intensive  compounds  sdready 
mentioned.     See  §§  133,  R.  2,  and  134,  R.  4. 

Ipse  is  compounded  of  is  and  the  suffix  pse,  and  is  thus  decUned : — 

Singular.  Plural. 


M.  F.  N. 

N.   ip'-se,  ip'-sa,  ip'-sum, 

G.  ip-s!'-us,  ip-s!'-us,  ip-si'-us, 

D.   ip'-si,  ip -si,  ip'-si, 

Ac.  ip'-siun,  ip'-sam,  ip'-sum, 

V.   ip'-se,  ip'-sa,  ip'-smn, 

Ab.  ip  -so.  ip'-sa.  ip'-so. 


M.  F.  N. 

ip'-si,  ip'-sae,  ip'-sa, 
ip-so'-rum,  ip-sa'-rum,  ip-s5'-rum, 

ip'-sis,  ip'-sis,  ip'-sis, 

ip'-sos,  ip'-sas,  ip'-sa, 

ip'-si,  ip'-sse,  ip'-sa, 

ip'-sis.  ip'-sis.  ip'-sis. 

Remark  1.  Ipse  is  commonly  subjoined  to  nouns  or  pronouns;  a.s,,  Jvpittt 
ipst,  tu  ipse,  Jupiter  himself,  etc. ;  and  hence  is  sometimes  called  the  adjunctive 
pronoun. 

Rem.  2.  A  nominative  ipstis,  occurs  in  early  writers,  and  a  superlative  ipai*-, 
slmus,  his  veiy  self,  is  found  in  Phiutus. 

Rem.  3.   In  old  writers  the  is  of  ipse  is  declined,  while  pse  remains  unde- 
clined;  &s,  eapse,  (nom.  1  ud  abl.),  eampse,  and  eopse,   instead  of  ipsa,  ipsam 
&Dd  ipso.     So  also  reapse,   .  e.  re  eapse,  "  in  fact." 
8 


86 


RELATIVE    PRONOUNS. 


§  136. 


RELATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

§  136.     Relative  pronouns  are  such  as  relate  to  a  precfcling 
noun  or  pronoun. 

1.  They  are  qui,  who,  and  the  compounds  quicumque  and  quisquisy 
whoever.     The  latter  are  called  general  relatives. 

2.  In  a  general  sense,  the  demonstrative  pronouns  are  often  relatives ;  tat 
the  name  is  commonly  appropriated  to  those  above  specified.  They  serve  to 
mtroduce  a  proposition,  liniitmg  or  explaining  a  precedmg  noun  or  pronoun,  to 
«  hich  they  relate,  and  which  is  called  the  antecedent. 


Qui  is  thus  declined : — 
Singular. 


M. 


N. 
G. 


quae, 
cu'-jiis, 


qui, 

cu'-jus, 
D.   cui,* 
Ac.  quern, 

V.   

Ah.  quo.  qua. 


GUI, 

quam. 


N. 
quod, 
cu'-jus, 
cui, 
quod, 


quo. 


M. 

qui, 

quo'-rum, 
qui'-bus, 
quos. 


Plural. 
F. 

quae, 

qua'-rum, 
qui'-biis, 
quas, 


N. 
qusB, 

quo'-rum, 
qui'-bus, 
quae. 


qui'-bus.       qui'-bus.       qui'-bus. 


Remark  1.  Qui  is  sometimes  used  for  the  ablative  singular,  in  all  genders 
and  rarely  also  for  the  ablative  plural.  To  the  ablatives  qiw,  qua,  qui,  and  qm- 
his,  aim  is  commonly  annexed,  cf.  §  133,  4.  Cicero  uses  quicum  for  quocum, 
when  an  indefinite  person  is  meant. 

Rem.  2.  Quels  (monos3'lIabic,  ^  9,  R.  1),  and  qiiis  are  sometimes  used  in  the 
dative  and  ablative  plural  for  qulbus.  Cujus  and  cui  were  anciently  ^Titten 
quojus  and  quoi :  and,  instead  of  the  genitive  cujus,  a  relative  adjective  cujus, 
a,  um,  very  rarely  occurs. 

3.    Quicumque,  (or  quicunque),  is  declined  like  qui. 

Rem.  3.  Qui  is  sometimes  separated  from  cumque  by  the  interposition  of 
one  or  more  words ;  as,,  qitxB  me  cumque  vacant  terras.  Virg.  A  similar  separa- 
tion sometimes  occurs  in  the  other  compoimds  of  cumque. 


4.    Quisquis  is  thus  declined : — 
Singular. 

M.  F.  N. 

N.   quis'-quis,        quis'-quis,t  quid'-quid, 

Ac.  quem'-quem,   quid'-quid, 

Ah.  quo'-quo.  qua'-qua.      quo'-quo. 


N. 
D. 


Plural. 
M. 

qui'-qii, 
qui-biis'-qul-bus, 


Rem.  4.    Quicquid  is  sometinies  used  for  quidquid.    Quiqul  for  qitisquis  occufR 
In  Plautus ;  and  quidquid  is  used  adjectively  in  Cato  R.  R.  48. 


•See  §9,6;  and  cf .  §306,(1.) 


t  ef.  §  137,  E.  (1 ) 


§  137.  INTERROGATIVE    PRONOUNS.  87 


INTERROGATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

§  137.     Interrogative  pronouns  are  such  as  serve  to  inquire 
which  of  a  number  of  objects  is  intended. 

They  are 

Q"i^?   , }  who  ?  what ?  ?^q"i^ ^  ,  1  ^^j;;|  5x! 

Quisnam  ?  |  Ecquisnam  ?    U        „^, ,  Cujas  ?  of  what 

Quinam  /   ^  JNuinquisnam,J 

1.    Quis  is  commonly  used  substantively;  qui,  adjectively.     The 
interrogative  qui  is  declined  hke  qui  the  relat.ve. 

Quis  is  thus  decUned : — 


Singular 

Plural. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

M.             F. 

N. 

N. 

G. 

D. 

Ac. 

V. 

quis, 
cu'-jus, 
cui, 
quem. 

qu«, 
cu'-jus, 
cui, 
quam, 

quid, 
cu-jiis, 
cui, 
quid, 

qui,             quae, 
quo'-rum,   qua'-rum, 
qui'-bus,      qui'-bus, 
quos,            quas, 

quge, 
quo'-nim, 
qui'-bus, 
quae. 

Ah.  quo.  qua.  quo. 


qui'-bus.      qui'-bus.      qui'-bus. 


Remark  (1.)  Quis  is  sometimes  used  by  comic  writers  in  the  feminine,  and 
even  in  the  neuter.      Quisnam,  quisque  and  quisquam  also  occur  as  feminine. 

Rem.  (2.)  Qui  is  used  for  the  ablative  of  quis  in  all  genders,  as  it  is  for  that 
of  the  relative  qui.     Cf.  ^  136,  R.  1. 

Rem.  (3.)  Quis  and  ^wi  have  sometimes  the  signification  of  the  indefinite 
pronoun  aliqnis  (some  one,  any  one),  especially  after  the  conjimctions  ec  (for 
en),  si,  ne,  neu,  nisi,  niim ;  and  after  relatives,  as  quo,  quanta,  etc.  Sometimes 
f:its  and  qui  are  used  in  the  &Qn&Q oi qualisi  what  sort? 

2.  The  compounds  quisnam  and  quinam.  have  respectively  the  sig 
nification  and  declension  of  the   interrogatives  quis  and  qui.     In  the 
poets  nam  sometimes  stands  before  quis.  Virg.  G.  4,  445. 

3.  Ecquis  and  numquii  are  declined  and  used  like  quis ;  but  are 
Bometimes  adjectives.  Virg.  EcL  10,  28:  Cic.  Att.  13,  8. 

Rem.  (4.)  Ecqua  is  sometimes  found  in  the  nominative  singular  feminine ; 
and  the  neuter  plural  of  numquis  is  numqua. 

Rem.  (5.)  Ecqui  nnd  numqui  also  occm-,  declined  like  the  interrogative  jw, 
and,  like  that,  used  adjectively. 

4.  Ecquisnam  and  nnmquisnam  arf>,  <k'.tlined  like  ecquis;  but  are 
found  only  in  the  singular ; — the  former  in  the  nominative  in  all  gen- 
ders, and  in  the  ablative  masculine ;  the  latter  in  the  nominative 
masculine  and  arcusatlve  neuter.  In  the  nominative  feminine  and 
\n  thi  ablative,  the  former  is  used  adjectively. 


88  INDEFINITE   PRONOUNS.  §  138 


The  Interrogative  cujus  is  also  defective 

: — 

M. 

Singular. 
F.              N. 

Plural. 
F. 

N.   cu'-jus, 
Ac.  cu -jum, 
Ah. 

cu-ja,         cu-jum, 

N.   cu'-jaB, 
Ac.  cu -jas. 

cu  -ja. 

6.  Cujas  is  declined  like  an  adjective  of  one  termination  ;  ca/<w, 
cujatis.    See  §  139,  4. 

Note.  The  interrogative  pronouns  are  used  not  only  in  direct  questions  buf; 
in  such  dependent  clauses  also,  as  contain  only  an  indirect  question ;  as,  a.  g 
in  the  airect  question,  quis  est?  who  is  he"?  in  the  indirect,  nesclo  quissit,  I  know 
not  who  he  is.  Qui,  in  this  sense,  is  found  for  quis ;  as,  qui  sit  aperit,  he  dis- 
closes who  he  is.    Cf.  §  265,  N. 

INDEFINITE    PRONOUNS. 

§  138.     Indefinite  pronouns  are  such  as  denote  an  object 

in  a  general  manner,  without  indicating  a  particular  individual. 

They  are 

Aliquis,  some  one.  Quisquam,  any  one.  Quidam,  a  certain  one. 

Siquis,  if  any.  Quispiam,  some  one.  Quillbet,  )  any  one  you 

Nequis,  lest  any.  Unusquisque,  each.  Quivis,     )  please. 

Quisque,  every  one.  Aliquipiam,  any,  some.  Quis  and  qui,  §  137,  R.  (3.) 

Note.  Siquis  and  nequis  are  commonly  written  separately,  si  quis  and  ne 
fuis :  so  also  unus  quisque. 

1.   Aliquis  is  thus  declined : — 

Singular. 

M.  F.  N. 

N.  al'-i-quis,  al'-i-qua,  al'-i-quod,  or  -quid, 

G.  al-i-cU'-jus,  al-i-cu'-jus,  al-i-cu'-jus, 

D.  al'-i-cui,  al'-i-cui,  al'-i-cui, 

Ac.  al'-i-quem,  al'-i-quam,  al'-i-quod,  or  -qaid, 

V.  

Ab  al'-i-quo.  al'-i-quE.  al'-i-quo. 

Plural. 
M.  F.  K 

N.     al'-i-qui,  al'-i-quse,  al'-i-qua, 

G.     al-i-qu6'-rum,     al-i-qua'-rum,  al-i-quo'-rum, 

D.     a-liq'-ui-bus,*     a-Hq'-iii-bus,  a-liq'-ui-bus, 

Ac.    al'-i-quos,  al'-i-quas,  al'-i-qua. 


V. 

Ab.    a-liq'-ui-bus.       a-liq'-ui-bus.       a-liq'-ui-bua. 


*  Pronouneed  a-UJ</-wS-bus.     See  5§  9,  4,  and  21,  3 


^  139.  POSSESSIVE   PRONOUNS.  89 

2.  Siquis  and  neqiilt  are  declined  in  the  same  mar  ner  ;  out  they 
sometimes  have  quce  in  the  fern,  singular  and  neut.  plural. 

{a.)  Aliquis,  in  the  nominative  singular  masculine,  is  used  both  as  a  sub- 
stantive and  as  an  adjective; — aliqui,  as  an  adjective,  but  is  neaily  obsolete. 
AliqucB  in  the  fem.  sing,  occurs  as  au  adjective  in  Lucretius,  4,  2,  64.  Siqui, 
and  nequi,  which  are  properly  adjectives,  are  used  also  substantively  for  slqui^ 
and  nequis,  and  in  the  nom'inat'ive  singular  masculine  these  two  forms  are 
equivalent.    The  ablatives  aliqui  and  siqul  also  occur. 

(b.)  Aliqidd,  slqui(\  and  nequid,  like  quid,  are  used  substantively;  aliq-uod, 
etc.,  like  quod,  are  used  adjectively. 

3.  Quisque,  quisquam,  and  quispiam,  are  declined  like  quis. 

(a.)  In  the  neuter  singular,  however,  quisque  has  quodque,  qindque,^ or  quicque : 
quisquam  has  quidquam  or  quicquam  ;  and  quispia7n  has  quodpiam,  quidpiam,  or 
quippiam.  The  foims  quidque  or  quicque,  quidpiam  or  quippium  are  used  sub- 
stantively. 

(b.)  Quisquam  wants  the  feminine  (except  quamquam,  Plant.  Mil.  4,  2,  68), 
and  also  the  plural,  and,  with  a  few  exceptions  in  Plautus,  it  is  always  used 
substantively,  its  place  as  an  adjective  being  supplied  hj  ullus.  Quispiam  is 
scarcely  used  in  the  plui-al,  except  in  the  nominative  feraiume,  qmepinm. 

4.  Unusqiiisque  is  compounded  of  unus  and  quisque,  which  are 
often  written  separately,  and  both  words  are  declined. 

Thus  nnusquisque,  uniuscujusque,  unicuique,  unumquemque,  etc.  The  neuter 
is  unumquodque,  or  unumquidque.  It  has  no  plui-al.  Vhumqicidguid  for  unum^ 
quidque  occurs  in  Plautus  and  Lucretius. 

5.  Quldam,  quilibet,  and  quivis,  are  declined  like  qui,  except  that 
they  have  both  quod  and  quid  in  the  neuter,  the  former  used  adjec- 
tively, the  latter  substantively. 

Note.  Quldam  has  usually  n  before  d  in  the  accusative  singular  and  geni- 
tive pliu-al ;  as,  quendam,  quorundam,  etc.     Cf.  §  134,  Note  1 . 

POSSESSIVE    PRONOUNS. 

§  139.  1.  The  possessive  ai-e  derived  from  the  genitives  of 
the  substantive  pronouns,  and  of  quis,  and  designate  something 
belonging  to  their  primitives. 

They  are  mens,  tuus,  suus,  noxter,  vesier,  and  cujus.  Mem,  tuus, 
and  SUMS,  are  declined  like  bonus ;  but  meus  has  in  the  vocative  sin- 
gular masculine  mi,  and  very  rarely  meus.  Cf.  §  105,  R.  3.  In  late 
writers  mi  occurs  also  in  the  feminine  and  neuter. 

2.  Cujus  also  is  declined  like  bonus ;  but  is  defective.  See  §  137, 5. 
It  occurs  only  in  early  Latin  and  in  legal  phraseology. 

3.  Noster  and  vester  are  declined  Vik^  piger.    See  §  106. 
Eemark  1.   The  terminations  pte  and  met  intensive  are  sometimes  annexed 

to  possessive  pronouns,  especiallv  to  the  ablative  singular;  as,  suopte  ponder e 

•  bv  its  own  weight;  suapte  manu,  by  his  own  hand.     So  nostrapte  culpa;  su- 

umpte  amuuin;  meamet  culpa.     The  suffix  met  is  usually  followed  by  «>se  ;  as, 

nnnnihal  sudmet  ipse  fraiide  captus  abiit.  Liv. ;  but  Sallust  has  meamet  facia 

Rkm.  2.    Suus,  like  its  primitive  siii,  has  always  a  reflexive  signification,  re- 
fp'     Iff  to  the  subject  of  the  sentence.     Meus,  tuus,  noster,  und  vester,  are  also 
Used  reilexively,  when  the  subject  of  the  propcsition  is  of  the  first  or  second 
person.   See  §  132,  4. 
8* 


90        PATRIAL    PRONOUNS. PRONOMINAL    ADJECTIVES.      §  139 

PATRIAL    PRONOUNS. 

4.  (a.)  These  are  nostras  and  citjax.  See  §§  100,  2,  and  128,  6. 
They  are  declined  like  adjectives  of  one  termination ;  as,  nostras^ 
nostrdti<!,  but  both  are  defective. 

(b.)  Nostras  is  found  in  the  nominative  and  genitive  singular,  in 
the  nominative  plural,  (masc.  and  fem.,  nosirates,  neut.  nostratia), 
and  in  the  ablative,  (nostralibiis).  Cujas  or  quoj'as^  occurs  in  the 
nominative,  genitive  and  accusative  {cujCiiem  masc.)  singular,  and  in 
the  nominative  plural,  masc.  (cujCltes).  Cf.  §  137,  6. — Nostratis  and 
cujatLs  (or  r/uojatis)  also  occur  in  the  nominative. 

PRONOMINAL    ADJECTIVES. 

5.  To  the  adjective  pronouns  may  be  added  certain  adjectives 
of  so  general  a  meaning,  that  they  partake,  in  some  degree,  o\ 
the  character  of  pronouns.     Of  this  kind  are : — 

(1.)  (a.)  Alius,  ullus,  nullus,  and  nonnuUus,  which  answer  to  the 
question,  whoV 

(p.)  Alter,  neuter,  alteruter,  utervis,  and  uterlihet,  which  answer  to 
the  question,  uter  ?  which  of  two  ? 

(2.)  Adjectives  denoting  quality,  size,  or  number,  in  a  general 
way.  These  stand  in  relation  to  one  another,  and  are  hence  called 
con-elatives. 

Remark.  The  relatives  and  interrogatives  of  this  class  begin  with  qu,  and 
are  alike  in  form.  The  indefinites  are  formed  from  the  relatives  by  prefixing 
all.  The  demonstratives  begin  with  t,  and  are  sometimes  strengthened  by  dem. 
A  general  relative,  having  a  meaning  more  general  than  the  relative,  is  fonned 
by  doubling  the  simple  relative,  or  by  affi.\ing  to  it  the  termination  cumque. 
A  general  indefinite  is  formed  by  annexing  libet  or  vis  to  the  relative. 

(3.)  Their  mutual  relation  is  denoted  by  the  following  table,  with 
which  may  be  compared  the  adverbial  correlatives,  §  191,  R.  1. 

Interrog.  Demonstr.        Relat.          Relat.  general.          Lidefin.  Indef  genera.. 

quells?  t^lis,  qu.Us,      {^;^:|^^,        } qualisllbet, 

auantusT  j  ^^^u'den.,   1 1-°*-'  {  "^^^X^^:  I  ^^''1-"*-'  quantusHbot 

quot?  tot,  totldem,     quot,        j  ^uotcunie,           ( "^l^iuot,  quotllbet, 

qiiotus?  totus,                 quotus,      quotuscumque,         (aliquotus),  . 

Diminutives. 
qimnt'ilus?     tantulus.  .       quantuluscumque.  aliquantulum. . 

Note  1.  The  suffix  cumque,  which  is  used  in  forming  general  relatives,  is 
composed  of  the  relative  adverb  cum  (quum)  and  the  sufRx  que,  expressive  of 
nnivevsalitv,  as  in  quisque  and  in  adverbs,  (see  ^  191).  Cumque,  therefore,  ori- 
ginally signified  '  whenever.'  When  attached  to  a  relative,  whether  a  pro- 
noun," adjective,  or  adverb,  it  renders  the  relative  meaning  more  general;  as. 
qui,  who";  quicumque,  whoever;  or,  every  one  who. 

Note  2.  CujusmMi  is  sometimes  used  for  qualis,  and  hujusmddi,  istiumniidi 
ejiismUdi  and  ejusdei"-ii6di  for  talis.    Cf.  §  134,  R.  5. 


§  140,  141.  VERBS. — VOICES.  91 


VERBS. 

§  140-  A  verb  is  a  word  by  which  something  is  affirmed 
of  a  person  or  thing. 

1.  That  of  which  any  thing  is  affirmed  is  called  the  subject  of  the 
verb  (2.)  That  whica  is  affirmed  of  the  subject  is  called  the  precZi- 
cate.    Cf.  §  201. 

3.  A  verb  either  expresses  an  action  or  state ;  as,  puer  legit,  the 
boy  readi^ :  aqva  calet,  the  water  is  warm ; — or  it  connects  an  attri- 
bute with  a  subject ;  as,  terra  est  rotunda,  the  earth  is  round. 

4.  All  verbs  belong  to  the  former  of  these  classes,  except  sum,  I  am,  the 
most  common  use  of  v.-hich  is,  to  connect  an  attribute  with  a  subject.  When 
8o  used,  it  is  called  the  copula. 

§  14:1.     Verbs  are  either  active  or  neuter. 

Note.  Active  and  neuter  verbs  are  sometimes  called  transitive  and  intransir- 
tive ;  and  verbs  of  motion  are  by  some  grammarians  divided  into  active-transi- 
tive and  active-intransitive,  according  as  they  requue,  or  do  not  require,  an  ob- 
ject after  them. 

I.  An  active  or  transitive  verb  expresses  such  an  action  as 
requires  the  addition  of  an  object  to  complete  the  sense  ;  as, 
amo  te,  I  love  thee  ;  sequitur  consulem,  he  follows  the  consul. 

n.  A  neuter  or  intransitive  verb  expresses  such  an  action  or 
state,  as  does  not  require  the  addition  of  an  object  to  complete 
the  sense  ;  as,  equus  ciiirit,  the  horse  runs  ;  gradior,  I  walk. 

Remark  1.  Many  verbs,  in  Latm,  are  considered  as  neuter,  which  are 
usually  translated  into  English  by  active  verbs.  Thus  indidgeo,  I  indulge, 
twceo,  I  hurt,  pareo,  I  obey,  are  reckoned  among  neuter  verbs.  In  strictness, 
such  Latin  verbs  denote  rather  a  state  than  an  action,  and  their  sense  would 
be  more  exactlv  expressed  by  the  verb  to  be  with  an  adjective;  as,  '  I  am  in- 
dulgent, I  am  hurtful,'  etc.  Some  verbs  m  Latin,  which  do  not  usually  take 
an  object  after  them,  are  yet  active,  since  the  object  is  omitted  by  eUipsis. 
Thus  credo  properly  signifies  to  intrust,  and,  in  this  sense,  takes  an  object;  as, 
c7-edo  tibi  snlutem  meam,  I  intnist  my  safety  to  you;  but  by  ellipsis  it  usually 
means  to  believe ;  as,  crede  mihi,  believe  me. 

To  verbs  belong  voices,  moods,  tenses,  numbers,  and  persons. 

VOICES. 

(a.)  Voice,  in  verbs,  is  the  form  by  whi^h  they  denote  the  se 
lation  of  the  agent  to  the  action  of  the  verb. 

(h.)  Most  active  Latin  verbs  have,  for  this  purpose,  two  forms 
which  are  called  the  active  and  passive  voices. 

1.  A  verb  in  the  active  voice  represents  the  agent  as  acting 
■upon  some  person  or  thirg,  called  the  object ;  as,  puer  legit  /t- 
Imm,  the  toy  is  reading  a  book. 


92  VERBS.— MOODS.  §  142,  143. 

2.  A  verb  in  the  passive  voice  represents  the  object  as  actea 
upon  by  the  agent ;  as,  liher  legitur  a  puero,  a  book  is  read  by 
the  boy. 

Rrm.  2.  By  comparing  the  two  preceding  examples,  it  will  be  seen  that  they 
have  tho  same  meaning.  The  passive  voice  may  thus  be  substituted  at  plea- 
sure for  the  active,  by  making  the  object  of  the  active  the  subject  of  the  pas- 
sive, and  placing  the  subject  of  the  active  in  the  ablative  case,  with  or  without 
the  preposition  a  or  ab,  according  as  it  is  a  voluntary  or  involuntary  agent. 
The  active  fonn  is  used  to  direct  the  attention  especially  to  the  agent  as  act- 
ing; the  passive,  chiefly  to  exliibit  the  object  as  acted  upon.  In  the  one  case 
the  object,  in  the  other  the  agent,  is  frequen'^ly  omitted,  and  left  indefinite;  as, 
puer  legit,  the  boy  is  reading,  soil,  librum,  li'teras,  etc.,  a  book,  a  letter,  etc.; 
virtus  laudatur,  vu'tue  is  praised,  scil.  ah  hominibus,  by  men. 

The  two  voices  are  distinguished  from  each  other  by  peculiar  terminations. 
Cf.  §  162.  ^  ^ 

§  14:2.  1.  Neuter  verbs  have,  in  general,  only  the  form  of  tho 
active  voice.  They  are,  however,  sometimes  used  impersonally  in 
the  passive  voice.     See  §  184,  2. 

2.  The  neuter  verbs  audeo,  T  dare,  fidn,  I  trust,  gmideo,  I  rejoice,  and  soleo, 
I  am  wont,  have  the  passive  form  in  tho  perfect  and  its  cognate  tenses;  as 
avsus  sum,  I  dared.  Hence  these  verbs  are  called  neuter  passwes,  or  semi- 
dejjonents. 

3.  The  neuter  verbs  vapulo,  I  am  beaten,  and  veneo,  I  am  sold,  have  an  ac- 
tive form,  but  a  passive  meaning,  and  are  hence  called  neutral  passives. 

4.  (a.)  Deponent  verbs  have  a  transitive  or  intransitive  significa- 
tion with  only  the  passive  form.  They  are  called  deponent  verbs, 
from  depono,  to  lay  aside,  as  having  laid  aside  their  active  form,  and 
their  passive  signification ;  as,  sequor,  I  follow ;  morior,  I  die. 

{b.)  Some  deponent  verbs  have  both  an  active  and  a  passive  signification, 
especially  in  the  perfect  participle.  These  are  sometimes  called  common  verbs. 
Cf.  §  162,  17. 

MOODS. 

§  143.  (a.)  Moods  (or  modes)  are  forms  of  the  verb,  which 
denote  the  relation  of  the  action  or  state,  expressed  by  the  verb, 
to  the  mind  of  the  speaker  or  to  some  other  action. 

(6.)  Latin  verbs  have  four  moods — the  indicative,  XhQ  subjunctive, 
the  imperative,  and  the  infinitive. 

1.  The  indicative  mood  is  used  in  independent  and  absolute 
assertions  and  inquiries ;  as,  amo,  I  love  .j  audisne  ?  dost  thou 
hear? 

2.  The  subjunctive  mood  is  used  to  express  an  action  or  state 
simply  as  conceived  by  the  mind  ;  as,  si  me  obsecret,  redibo  ;  if 
he  entreat  me,  I  wiU  return. 

3.  The  imperative  m(y>d  is  used  in  commanding,  exhorting 
or  entreating ;  as,  ama,  1 ;  ee  thou  ;  amanto,  they  shall  love. 


§144,145.  VERBS.— TENSES.  93 

4.  The  infinitive  mood  is  used  to  denote  an  action  or  state  in 
definitely,  without  limiting  it  to  any  person  or  thing  as  its  sub< 
ject ;  as,  virtus  est  vitium  fugere,  to  shun  vice  is  a  virtue. 

TENSES. 

§  144.  Tenses  are  fonns  of  the  verb,  denoting  the  time  of 
tlie  action  or  state  expressed  by  the  verb. 

1.  Time  admits  of  a  tiireefold  division,  into  present,  past  and  future ;  and, 
hi  each  of  these  times,  an  action  may  be  represented  either  as  going  on,  or  aa 
completed.  From  these  two  divisions  arise  the  six  tenses  of  a  Latin  verb, 
each  of  which  is  distinguished  by  its  peculiar  terminations. 

2.  They  are  called  the  present,  imperfect,  future,  perfect,  pluper- 
fect, and  future  perfect  tenses. 

Present  (     action    )  amo,  I  love,  or  am  loving ;  Present  tense. 
Past       \  not  com-  >  nindbam,  I  was  loving;  Imperfect  tense. 
Future  (    pleted ;   )  amdbo,  I  shall  love,  or  be  loving ;  Future  tense. 
Present  (     action    )  amavi,  I  have  loved ;  Perfect  tense. 
Past       <      com-     [■  amaveram,  I  had  loved ;  Pluperfect  tense. 
Future  (,  pleted;    }  amavero,  I  shall  have  loved;  Future  perfect  teme. 

3.  There  is  the  same  number  of  tenses  in  the  passive  voice,  in 
which  actions  not  completed  are  represented  by  simple  forms  of  the 
verb,  and  those  which  are  completed  by  compound  forms. 

Present  (     action   )  amor,  I  am  loved ;  Present  tense. 

Past       <  not  com-  >  amdbar,  I  was  loved ;  Imperfect  tense. 

Future  (    pleted;   )  cnndbor,  I  shall  be  loved;  future  tense. 

Present  (     action   )  amatus  su7n,  or  fut,  I  have  been  loved;  Perfect  tense. 

Past       <      com-     >  audtus  eram,  or  fueram,  I  had  been  loved ;  Pluperfect. 

Future  (   pleted;  )  a7?id<«sero,  or /?ie>o,  I  shall  have  been  loved ;  FM<arePer/ec<. 

§  14S.  !•  The  present  tense  represents  an  action  as  now 
going  on,  and  not  completed ;  as,  dmo,  I  love,  or  am  loving. 

1.  Any  existing  custom,  or  general  truth,  may  be  expressed  by  this  tense 
e.»    apud'  Parlhos,  signum  datur  tympano ;  among  the   Parthiaus,  the  signal  ia 
git%n  by  a  drum.     A  general  truth  is  sometimes  also  expressed  by  the  perfect. 

2.  The  present  tense  may  also  denote  an  action  which  has  existed  for  somo 
time,  and  which  still  exists;  as,  ^t  annos  bella  yero ;  for  so  many  years  I  have 
waged,  and  am  still  waging  war. 

3.  The  present  tense  is  often  in  narration  used  for  the  perfect  indefinite.  It 
is  then  called  the  historical  present ;  as,  desiliunt  ex  equis,  provOlant  in  primum  ; 
they  dismout,  they  fly  forward  to  the  front. 

II.    The  imperfect  tense  represents  an   action  as  going  on  at 

some  p;\st  time,  but  not  then  completed;  as,  amdbam,  I  was 

loving. 

1.  The  imperfect  sometimes  denotes  repeated  or  customary  past  action;  as, 
kgebam,  I  was  wont  to  read. 

2.  It  may  also  denote  an  action  which  had  existed  for  some  t  ne,  and  ^vbich 
was  still  dx"istiug  at  a  certam  past  time;  as,  audiebat  jamdudum  verba;  he  bad 
long  heaid,  and  was  still  hearing  the  words. 


94  VERBS. TENSES.  §  145 

3.  In  letters,  and  with  reference  not  to  the  time  of  t.-ieir  bcina;  ^vT\tten.  but 
Jo  that  of  their  being  read,  the  imperfect  is  sometimes  used  for  the  present 
as,  expectdbam,  I  was  expecting,  (i.  e.  when  I  wrote). 

4.  The  imperfect  also  sometimes  denotes  the  intending,  j»-epjring,  or  atternpt- 
ing  to  act  at  a  definite  past  tune. 

m.  The  future  tense  denotes  that  an  action  wiE  be  going  on 
hereafter,  but  without  reference  to  its  completion ;  as,  amdbo, 
I  shall  love,  or  shall  be  loving. 

IV.  The  perfect  tense  represents  ^n  action  either  as  just  com- 
pleted, or  as  completed  in  some  indefinite  past  time ;  as,  amdvi^ 
I  have  loved,  or  I  loved. 

Remark.  In  the  former  sense,  it  is  called  the  perfect  definite ;  in 
the  latter,  the  perfect  indefinite,  historical  perfect,  or  aorist. 

V.  The  pluperfect  tense  represents  a  past  action  as  completed, 
at  or  before  the  time  of  some  other  past  action  or  event ;  as,  lit- 
teras  scripseram,  quum  nuncius  venit ;  I  had  written  the  letter, 
when  the  messenger  arrived. 

VI.  The  future  perfect  tense  denotes   that  an  action  will  be 

•»*Tipleted,  at  or  before  the  time  of  some  other  future  action  or 

evertt;  as,  quum  coenavero,  profciscar  ;  when  /  shall  have  supped, 

I  will  go. 

Note  1.  This  tense  is  often,  but  improperly,  called  the  future  subjunctive. 
It  has  the  signification  of  the  indicative  mood,  and  corresponds  to  the  secona 
fuiure  in.  English. 

Note  2.  The  imperfect,  historical  perfect,  and  pluperfect  tenses  are  some- 
times called  preterites  or  the  preterite  tenses. 

Note  3.  The  present,  imperfect,  and  future  tenses  passive,  in  English,  do 
not  express  the  exact  sense  of  those  tenses  in  Latin,  as  denoting  an  action 
which  is,  was,  or  will  be,  going  on  at  a  certain  time.  1'hus  lawlor  signifies,  not 
'  1  am  praised,'  but  '  I  am  in  the  act  of  being  praised,  or,  if  such  an  expression 
is  admissible,  '  I  am  being  praised.' 

Remark  1.  The  six  tenses  above  enumerated  are  found  only  in 
the  indicative  mood. 

Rem.  2.  The  subjunctive  mood,  in  the  regular  conjugation,  neis 
the  present  and  past,  but  no  future  tenses. 

Note  4.  The  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  mood  have  less  definiteness  of  meaning,  in  re- 
gard to  time,  than  those  of  the  indicative.  Thus  the  present  and  perfect,  besides  tbeir 
common  signs,  w;ai/ or  can,  may  have  or  can,  have,  must,  in  certain  connections,  be 
translated  by  7night,  conic/,  wviil/i,  or  should;  might  have,  could  have,  etc.  The  tenses 
of  this  mood  must  often,  also,  be  translated  by  the  oorresfonding  tenses  of  the  indica- 
tive. For  a  more  particular  account  :f  the  signification  of  each  of  the  tenses  of  the  sub- 
junctive mood,  see  §  260. 

,  Rem.  3.  The  imperative  mood  has  two  tenses — a  present  and  a 
future ;  the  former  tor  that  which  is  to  be  done  at  once,  aud  the  latter 
for  that  which  is  to  be  done  in  future. 

Rem.  4.  The  infinitive  mood  has  three  tenses — the  present,  the 
perfect,  and  the  future ;  the  first  of  which  denotes  an  inco:nplete,  the 
second  a  com]  leted  action,  and  the  la^t  an  action  to  be  performed. 


§  146-148.      VERBS. — NUMBERS— PERSON 

NUMBERS. 

§  I4G.     Number,  in  verbs,  is  the  form  by  which  il  e  unity  of 
plurality  of  their  subject  is  denoted.     Hence  verbs,  like  nouns, 
have  two  numbers — the  singular  and  the  plural.  Cf.  §  35,  1. 

PERSONS. 

§  14:7.     Person,  in  verbs,  is  the  form  by  which  they  deiiow 
he  person  of  their  subject.     Hence  in   each  number  there  are 
three  persons — the  first,  second,  and  third.  Cf.  §  35,  2. 

1.  The  imperative  present,  has  only  the  second  person  in  both 
numbers.  The  imperative  future  has  in  each  number  the  second 
and  third  persons,  but  in  the  singular  they  have  both  the  same  form, 
-to  in  the  active,  anl   tor  in  the  passive  voice. 

2.  As  the  sijfnificatJon  of  the  infinitive  mood  is  not  limited  to  any 
subject,  it  admits  no  ohana;e  to  express  either^ number  or  person. 

3.  The  following  are  the  terminations  of  the  different  persons  of 
each  number,  in  the  indicative  and  subjunctive  nioods,  in  both 
voices : — 

Passive. 
3.  1.  2.  3. 

t;  r,        ris,       tor; 

nt  mur,     mini,     ntur. 

These  may  be  called  personal  ten   'nations. 

Remark  1.  The  perfect  indicative  act;  e  is  irregular  in  the  second  person 
singular  and  plural,  whicli  end  in  sti  and  ids,  and  in  one  of  the  forms  of  the 
third  person  plural,  which  ends  in  re. 

Rem.  2.   The  passive  form  above  given  belongs  to  the  simple  tenses  only. 

Rem.  3.  The  pronouns  of  the  first  and  second  persons,  ego,  nos;  tu  and  m$, 
are  seldom  expressed  in  Latin  as  subjects  of  a  finite  verb,  the  several  persona 
being  sufficiently  distinguished  by  the  terminations  of  the  verb. 

PARTICIPLES,  GERUNDS,  AND  SUPINES. 

§  14.8.  1.  A  participle  is  a  word  derived  from  a  verb,  and 
partaking  of  its  meaning,  but  having  the  form  of  an  adjective. 

(1.)  Like  a  verb,  it  has  different  voices  and  tenses;  like  an  buI^ 
jective,  it  has  declension*  and  gender;  and  like  both,  it  has  two 
numbe7-s. 

(2.)  Active  verbs  have  usually  four  participles — two  in  the  active 
voice,  a  present  and  a  futui-t ;  as,  amans,  loving;;  amaturus,  about  to 
love; — and  two  in  the  passive  voice,  a  perfect  and  a  futurs  ;  as,  amo' 
tus,  loved,  or  having^  been  loved ;  amandus,  to  be  loved. 


Active. 

Person. 

1.            2- 

Singidar. 

0, 1,  or  m,     s, 

Plural. 

mus,         tis. 

'See§U05,  R.  2:  and  111,  R. 


96  VERBS^-7-CONJUGATION.  §  149,  150 

(3.)  Neuter  verbs  have  usually  only  the  participles  of  the  acti^w 
voice. 

(4.)  Deponent  verbs,  both  active  and  neuter,  may  have  the  par- 
ticiples of  both  voices. 

2.  (a.)  Gerunds  are  verbal  nouns,  used  only  in  the  oblique 
cases,  and  expressing  the  action  or  state  of  the  verb ;  as,  amandi, 
of  loving,  etc. 

(6.)  Like  other  abstract  nouns,  they  are  found  only  in  the  singular 
number,  and  by  their  cases  supply  the  place  of  a  decUnable  present 
infinitive  active. 

3.  Supines  also  are  verbal  nouns  of  the  fourth  declension 
in  the  accusative  and  ablative  singular ;  as,  amdtum,  to  love ; 
amdtu,  to  be  loved. 

Remark.  These  also  serve  in  certain  connections  to  supply  the 
place  of  the  infinitive  present  both  active  and  passive.  The  supine 
m  um  is  called  the  former  supine  ;  that  in  u,  the  latter.  The  former 
is  commonly  used  in  an  active,  the  latter  in  a  passive  sense. 

CONJUGATION. 

§  14:0.  1.  The  conjugation  of  a  verb  is  the  regular  for- 
mation and  arrangement  of  its  several  parts,  according  to  their 
voices,  moods,  tenses,  numbers,  and  persons. 

2.  There  are  four  conjugations,  w^hich  are  characterized  by 
the  vowel  before  re  in  the  present  of  the  infinitive  active. 

In  the  first  conjugation,  it  is  a  long ; 

In  the  second, e  long ; 

In  the  third, e  short ; 

In  the  fourth, I  long. 

Exception.  Do,  dare,  to  give,  and  such  of  its  compounds  as  are  of  the  flrst 
conjugation,  have  d  short  beiore  re. 

§  ISO.  A  verb,  like  a  noun,  consists  of  two  parts— the  root, 
and  the  termination.  Cf.  §  40,  R.  10. 

1.  The  first  or  general  root  of  a  verb  consists  of  those  letters  that 
are  found  in  every  part.  This  root  may  always  be  found  by  remov- 
ing the  termination  of  the  present  infinitive. 

2.  There  are  also  two  special  roots,  the  first  of  which  is  found  in 
the  perfect,  and  is  called  the  second  root ;  the  other,  found  in  the  su- 
pine or  perfect  participle,  is  called  the  third  root. 

3.  In  regular  verbs  of  the  fii-st,  second,  and  fourth  conjuga- 
tions, the  second  root  is  formed  by  adding,  respectively,  dv,  u, 
and  iv,  to  the  general  root ;  and  the  third  root  by  a  similai*  ad- 
dition of  at,  It,  and  it. 

Remark.  Many  verbs,  iu  each  of  the  conjugati«T!S,  form  their  second  and 
third  roots  in-egularly. 


§  151,   l,r>.  VERBS. CONJUGATION.  97 

4.  Ill  the  third  conjugation,  the  second  root  either  is  tke  sane 
as  the  first,  or  is  fomed  from  it  by  adding  s  ;  the  tliird  root  is 
formed  by  adding  t.     See  §  171. 

Note.  In  the  second  and  fourth  conjugiitlons,  e  and  i  before  o  are  considered 
as  belonging  not  to  the  root,  but  to  the  termination.  In  verbs  whose  second 
or  third  roots  are  formed  irregularly,  the  general  root  often  undergoes  some 
change  in  the  parts  derived  from  tUem. 

5.  The  vowel  which  unites  the  general  root  with  the  remaining 
letters  of  the  verb,  is  called  the  connecting  vowel.  Each  conjugation, 
except  the  third,  is,  in  a  great  degree,  distinguished  by  a  peculiar 
connecting  vowel,  which  is  the  same  as  characterizes  the  infinitives. 
See  §  149,  2. 

(a.)  In  the  third  conjugation,  the  comiecting  vowel  is  generally  e  or  t.  In 
the  second  and  fourth  conjugations,  and  in  verbs  in  io  of  the  third,  a  second 
connecting  vowel  is  sometimes  added  to  that  which  characterizes  the  conjiiga- 
tion ;  as,  a  ui  doceaiit,  u  in  tapiunt,  etc. 

(b.)  In  verbs  whose  second  and  third  roots  are  formed  irregularly,  the  con- 
necting vowel  often  disappears,  or  is  changed  in  the  parts  derived  from  those 
roots;  but  it  is  almost  alwaj's  ffliyid  in  the  parts  derived  from  the  first  root. 

§  1*j1.  1.  From  the  first  root  are  derived,  in  each  voice,  the 
present,  imperfect,  and  future  indicative;  the  present  and  imperfec 
subjunctive  ;  the  imperative,  and  the  present  infinitive.  From  this 
root  are  derived  also  the  present  partiriple,  the  gerund,  and  the  fu- 
tui-e  participle  passive. 

2.  From  the  second  root  are  derived,  in  the  active  voice,  the  per 
feet,  pluperfect,  and  future  perfect  indicative ;  the  perfect  and  plu 
perfect  subjunctive,  and  the  perfect  infinitive. 

3.  (a.)  From  tlie  third  root  are  derived,  in  the  active  voice,  the 
supine  in  um,  and  the  future  participle  ;  the  latter  of  which,  with  the 
verb  esse,  constitutes  the  future  Infinitive  active. 

(b.)  From  this  root  are  derived,  in  the  passive  voice,  the  supine  in 
w,  and  the  perfect  participle ;  from  the  latter  of  which,  with  the  verb 
sum,  are  formed  all  tlie  tenses  which  In  the  active  are  derived  from 
the  second  root.  The  future  infinitive  passive  is  formed  from  the 
supine  in  mn,  and  !/■/,  the  present  infinitive  passive  of  the  verb  eo, 
to  20. 

4.  The  y)resent  and  perfect  indicative,  the  supine  in  um,  and  the 
present  infinitive,  are  called  the  principal  parts  of  the  verb,  because 
from  the  first  three  the  several  roots  are  ascertained,  and  from  the 
last,  the  characteristic  vowel  of  the  conjugation.  In  the  passive  voice, 
the  principal  parts  are  the  present  Indicative  and  Infinitive,  and  the 
perfect  participle. 

Note.  As  the  supine  in  um  is  wanting  in  most  verbs,  the  third  root  must 
often  be  determined  from  the  perfect  partici[)le,  or  the  future  participle  active. 

§  159.     The  following  table  exhibits  a  connected   view  of  the 
verbal  tcrniiiiations,  in  all  the  conjugations.     By  annexinc  these  to 
the  st!\cral  roots,  all  the  jjarts  of  a  verb  may  be  formed. 
9 


98 


VERBS. TERMINATIV.NS. 


§152 


col«'.^2 


,3  1 
c  a  5  3 


3.S 


.? 


O 

O 


N    C  C  a  '3 


'3  '2  S  >3 


•p,s 


o 


0 

u 

>5 

M 

w 

H 

> 

f^ 

H 

H 

«ij 

« 

0 

^        ,-H        )-l         - 

ic3  ID  )<lf  ,h 
till 


to     tft    tft 

X  'C  'C  . 
ici  ID  »D  , 


rH  c4  CO  Tji 


■S  -"  -S  "3 

fl   G   ^  9 


t<   >-■   >-  , 
>3  >P  >S  '. 


.S5 


X-^    >i-(    >-^    '3 

S  03  cs_g 

eS  (u  <i>.2 
I    I    I    1 

>3  >;3  )3  '5 

2  S  S  § 

■C3  ,d  ll  ■§ 

OS  (U  a).S 
I      1     T     I 


)3  >3  >3  2 

-^  -«->-*-'  led 
lOS  IC3  lOS    o 

I     1    T    I 

105  103  1*  'g 

C3    O)    <D  .^ 
I       I       1,1 

t'^    »    ID  >E-i 

"S  "E  '•■'  s 

leS  103  icj   n 
H      I     I     I     I 

A<      I     I     I     I 

s     •    ■    .    . 

1— I  i-H  eq  CO  Tfi 


a  a  a  B 

03  03   03  s 

^  ^  ^  fQ 
io3  1®  la;  ;2 


3  sii-g 


T-T 


>S  )P  y- 1- 

03    u  IC^  'H 

I    T    1     1 


c3  a>  IS  •)= 
I     I     I    I 


w  to 


^^'C, 


H 

M 


,n*  ini  -.^  ''*^ 


103  133    <I>  ■. 


a  § 


Q 
O 

;z;   " 


1-5 

m 

CO 


C   03    S    g 


c  103  b  ,3 


lO  -t^  );3  s 

-M   IC3  ^  S 

1    1    I    I 


b  lo3 
Id)  a>  I 


•EiS'SS 


•"u  aj>o3.*2 


c  03  a  3 


O 

l-H 

o 
> 

I— I 

H 


^^  103  10)  i:;  s 


)3  .2   2"  "'" 

'g  >2  >3 .3 
I  S  S  a 

If  .0,  ^  ^ 


CO  )c3  >a) ; 


vj    c/j     en  >j^ 

03   0)   U.S 
I     I    T    I 

>3  >3  >s  '2 

2  a  s,| 

103  103  103  '5 
1^   to   0^  .7i 


ic3 10)  10)  ;s 


03  q>  io>  .3: 
I    T    I     I 


W    TO 

)3  >3    oT  <B 

2a.S>g 

03 


f ' 


IC3  10)  'V  S 


SS>2c 
*;  ic3  *^  S 
10)  0)  1^  IS 


-fJ  >o3  4J3  Is 
>i)  o))oJ.'2 

I     T     I     I 


5      £    (N    loi  10)  . 

i^        Ol  'I 


rt    o  0)  o  .X 


I—  e^  eo  -^ 


•uoipoB 


OT  en   a)  .3 
io3  103  ic3  '5 

103  10)  10)  J^ 


I 


I 


a"  2"  2"! 

o3    o3   e3_g 
l<a  10)  ID  )S 


rQ,0     TO,2 

i(g  10)  10)  1;^: 


o  o 

ISt  10)   c3 


ai 


rHCq  CO  -* 


CO  ICC 


iS'il 


§152. 


VERBS. TERMINATIONS. 


99 


'1    U    I-'    tl 

« >3  >d  S 

ej  <u  <u  .a 


■3  '2  'H  'H 
22£g 


a  sg  § 

tOJ  t®  la;  ,^ 

J-  tH  tH  .-; 


c  c  g  g 

53  ap  P.S 


S'5 


'3 


(n   en    en  ,H 

>3  o  )3  2 

M     ^     C     (V) 


^  >q     T-H  w  CO  •* 


■5  a 


4  >:i  >;3  ,a 

lO  1©  ic  s 


?"?• 


oJ  <D  c;  .:5 


Jh      J-l      1-     !_*■ 

'°  2  >o  .o 

ici  ia>  2^  M 
I     I     I     I 


>o  O  ,o  >o 
■y  •"  i;  'X 
loi  Id  ;S  i^ 


•9un}nj 


a 


a 

s 


'S'C 


,-:s  -a 


rl  IM  CO  •^ 


siN   *-*  »-  '^ 

's  '3  '3  'a 

,«   :2  ,£   ,,; 

S  o  <p  .3 

-ami 
-emi 
-iml 
-imi 

^  S  ^  5 

M    fK    en    r 

■E  t:  E  '2 

ID  ,SJ  .05  ,5 

O 

-ar6 
-ere 
-ere 
-ire, 

i-      S-      >-      ■_ 

at  ii  <a  ■- 

O 

a 

i-(  C<1  CO  ■<!< 

t-  i-  >-■  t. 

)D  -i  'li  ., 

u,  u  u  r 

> 

•judsauj 

1=3  -OJ '«  .i; 

»— » 

/^    00 


0) 

o 

3 

n 


rH  M  CO  ■^^ 


as 


*J    4J   *3    .t^ 

c  fl  a  c 

a:  a)  «  S 


en  <>o  00  A 

C  'r:  13  c 

IC    r  ID  I3J 

a  3  s)  il 

I     I  I  I 


n  n  u/  n 

fl  )S  '^  )d 

a  s  a  a 

la)  ID  la)  iS 
^  ^  ^  £• 


Ku  >a  >a  S 
•a  I-  ^  t. 
T  '?  '^  't 


10,  iz>  i»  ,S 
.05  ia>  xu  ,9 


a  a  a  g' 

-1  >i;  £! 


'?' 


O 
•Is 


3 

.a 
H 


tJO 

0 

o 
si 


o 

o 

Q 

M 

n 

H 
I 

o 


f>|         §      ►-! 


g 

s 
o 

-5^ 


8 
o 

c 
.s 


t3 

a 

eS 

•a 
a 
o 
a 

05 

en 
CD 

.a 
*-» 

a 

o 


o 

I 


a  a  3 

SJ    b    5- 

COO 


>^  lO)  >4> 
CO    GQ    en 


C3   O 


^'    %-.    Vh    'fM 


o 
> 


o 
o 

H 

o 


t:  03  o 

CJ    IH     ^ 
U.'     01     M 

>P  >S  '?J 
I     I     I 


H 

O 

o 
M 


o 
o 


I— ( 

o 
> 

> 

H 
O 
<5 


e        ..,2    en- 

fc   ,2  S  .a 


2  3  3 

a  ^'c 

I      I      I 


:'s% 


6S 


en  « 


a  0) 

m3.22 


a  a  -S    ►^ 

t,    :-    u.     pa 

<     I    I 


a'  - 

o!   O 


■}u»r3uj 


1/2 


<K 

ec  "r* 

en  ^ 

'M  a 

^ ! 

a)  -M 

en  ..ci 

en  £^ 

e»  -  • 

a  Cm 


.3  en 

^  ■ 

CO    CD 

en  en 

I-,  a. 

H 

C>3 

t^l 

<1 

Ph 

0,0, 

H 
O 


a  ® 


P 


1^ 


<? 


2  >3 

'3  a 


•t  03 


-tj  >a> 
>r>  en 
K   en 

CO  ID 


s'i 


o,a. 


o 
o 


100  VERBS. SUM.  §  153 

Remark  1.  In  analyzing  a  verb,  the  voice,  person,  and  number,  are  ascor- 
tamed  by  the  personal  terminations.  See  ^  147,  3.  The  conjugation,  mood, 
and  tense,  are,  in  general,  determined  by  tlw  letter  or  letters  winch  intervene 
between  the  root  of  the  verb  and  the  personal  terminations.  Thus  in  amaba- 
mus,  7nas  denotes  that  the  verb  is  of  the  act.ve  voice,  plural  number,  and  first 
person;  ba  denotes  that  it  is  of  the  indicative  mood,  imperfect  tense;  and  the 
connecting  vowel  a  determines  it  to  be  of  the  first  conjugation.  So  in  amarem- 
twi,  77U7ii  denotes  the  passive  voice,  plural  number,  and  second  person;  re,  the 
subjunctive  mood,  imperfect  tense;  and  a,  as  before,  the  first  conjugation. 

Rem.  2.  Sometimes,  the  part  between  the  root  of  the  verb  and  the  personal 
termination,  does  not  precisely  determine  the  conjugation,  mood,  and  tense, 
but  only  within  certain  limits.  In  such  cases,  the  conjugation  may  be  learned, 
by  finding  the  present  tense  in  the  dictionary,  and  if  two  forms  are  alike  in  the 
same  conjugation,  they  can  only  be  distinguished  by  the  sense.  Thus  amcmus 
and  dochnus  have  the  same  termination ;  but,  as  miio  is  of  the  first,  and  doceo 
of  the  second  conjugation,  the  former  is  determined  to  be  the  subjimctive,  the 
latter  the  indicative,  present.  Regar  may  be  either  the  future  indicative,  or 
the  present  subjunctive — blblmus  either  the  present  or  the  perfect  indicative. 

§  Ido>  Sum,  I  am,  is  called  an  auxiliary  verb,  because  it  is 
used,  in  conjunction  with  participles,  to  supply  the  want  of  simple 
forms  in  other  verbs.  From  its  denoting  existence,  it  is  sometimes 
called  the  substantive  verb. 

Remark.  Sum  is  very  irregular  in  those  parts  which,  in  other  verbs,  are  formed 
from  the  first  root.  Its  imperfect  and  future  tenses,  except  in  the  third  person 
plural  of  the  latter,  have  the  form  of  a  pluperfect  and  future  perfect.  It  is 
thus  conjugated: — 

PRINCIPAL  PARTS. 


Pres. 

.  Indie.       Pres.  Injin 

u       Perf.  Indie.       Put.  Part. 

Sum,                 es'-se. 

fii'-i,            fii'-tu'-rus. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present  Tense. 

SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

§ 

(1.  sum,  lam, 

sii'-miis,  we  are, 

e 

-|  2.  es,  tJiou  art* 

es'-tis,  ye]  are, 

a. 

1 3.  est,  he  is ; 

sunt,  they  are. 

Imperfect. 

1. 

e'-ram,  I  was, 

e-ra'-mus,  we  were. 

2. 

e'-ras,  thou  wast, 

e-ra'-tis,  ye  were. 

8. 

e'-rat,  he  was; 

e'-rant,  they  were. 

Future. 

shall,  or  will. 

1. 

e'-ro,  /  shall  be. 

er'-i-mus,  we  shall  be, 

2. 

e'-ris,  thou  wilt  be, 

er'-i-tis,  ye  will  be, 

3. 

e'-rit,  he  will  be  ; 

e'-runt,  they  will  be. 

•  In  the  second  person  singular  in  English,  the  plural  form  you  is  oommonLv  used 
except  in  solemn  discourse;  as,  tu  es,  you  are. 

t  The  plural  pronoun  of  the  second  person  is  either  ye  or  you. 


153. 


^ERBS. SUM. 


101 


PeTfs  ,t.     have  been,  or  wait. 


1.  fti'-i,  I  have  been, 

2.  fu-is'-ti,  thou  hast  heen, 

3.  fu'-it,  he  has  been ; 


1.  ,fu'-e-ram,  I  had  been, 

2.  fu'-e-ras,  thou  hadst  been, 

3.  fu'-e-rnt,  he  had  been  ; 


fu'-i-mus,  we  have  been, 
fu-is'-tis,  ye  have  been, 
fu-e'-runt  or  re,  they  have  hee.%. 


Pluperfect. 


fu-e-ra'-mus,  we  had  been, 
fu-e-ra'-tis,  ye  had  been, 
fu'-e-rant,  they  had  been. 


Future  Perfect     shall  or  will  have. 


fu'-e-ro,  /  shall  have  been, 
fu'-e-ris,  thou  wilt  have  been, 
fu'-e-rit,  he  will  have  been ; 


fu-er'-i-mus,  we  shall  have  been 
fu-er'-I-tis,  ye  will  have  been, 
fii'-e-rint,  they  icill  have  been. 


SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 
Present,     may,  or  can. 

1.  aim,  I  may  be,  si'-mus,  we  may  be, 

2.  sis,  thou  mayst  be,  si'-tis,  ye  may  be, 

3.  sit,  he  may  be  sint,  they  may  be. 

Imperfect,     might,  coidd,  tvould,  or  should. 

1.  es'-sem,  I  would  be,  es-se'-mus,  we  would  be, 

2.  es'-ses,  thou  wouldst  be,  es-se'-tis,  ye  would  be, 
S.  es'-set,  he  would  be  ;  es'-sent,  they  would  be. 


Perfect. 


1.  fii'-e-rim,  I  may  have  been, 

2.  fu'-e-ns,  thou  mayst  have  been, 

3.  fu'-e-rit,  he  may  have  been  ; 


fu-er'-l-mus,  we  may  have  been, 
fu-er'-i-tis,  ye  may  have  been, 
fu'-e-rint,  they  may  have  been. 


Pluperfect,     might,  could,  would,  or  should  have. 

1.  fii-is'-sem,  I  would  have  been,        fu-is-se'-mus,  xve  would  have  been^ 

2.  fii-is'-ses,  thou  wouldst  have  been,  fu-is-se'-tis,  ye  would  have  been, 

3.  fu-ia'-set,  he  would  have  been ;       fu-is'-sent,  they  would  have  been. 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 


Pres. 
Fut. 


1.  es,  be  thou, 

2.  es'-to,  thou  shalt  be 

3.  es'-to,  let  him  be ; 


es'-te,  be  ye. 
es-to'-te,  ye  shall  be, 
sun '-to,  let  them  be. 


INFINITIVE   MOOD. 

Present,   es'-se,  to  be. 

Perfect,   fu-is'-se,  to  have  been. 

Future,    fu-tu'-rus  (a,  um),  es'-se,  oi  fo'-re,  to  be  about  to  he. 

9* 


102  VKRBS. — POSSUM.  §  154. 

PARTICIPLE. 
Future,    fu-tu'-rus,  a,  uirii  about  to  he. 

§  154.      Remark  1.   A  present  participle  ens  seems  tc  have  been  an- 
ciently in  use,  and  is  still  found  in  the  compounds  absens,  prcesens,  and  pdtens. 
Rem.  2.   The  perfect  fui,  and  its  derivative  tenses,  are  formed  from  an  obso- 
lete Juo,  whence  come  also  the  participle  futurus,  an  old  subjunctive  present 

fuam,  juas,  fuat ;  , ,  fuant,  and  the  forms  J'uvimus,  perf.  ind.,  Juvi- 

rint,  perf.  subj.,  &nA  fuvisset,  plup.  subj. 

Rem.  3.   From  fuo  appear  also  to  be  derived  the  following : — 

&ubi.  imperf.  fo'-rem,  fo'-res,  fo'-ret;  ,  fo'-rent. 

Inf.  pres.        fo'-re. 

These  forms  seem  to  have  been  contracted  from  fu&rtm..  etc.,  and  fuire. 
Fdrem  is  equivalent  in  meaning  to  essem,  but  the  infinitive  jdre  has,  in  most 
cases,  acquired  a  future  signification,  equivalent  to  futurus  esse. 

Rem.  4.  Sie7n,  sies,  siet,  sient,  for  siVra,  sis,  sit,  sint,  are  found  in  ancient 
writers,  as  are  also  escii  for  emt,  escunt  for  erunt,  ese,  esetis,  and  esent,  for  ease, 
essetis,  and  essent. 

Rem.  5.  Like  sum  are  conjugated  its  compounds,  absum,  adsum^ 
desum,  insum,  inlersum,  obsum,  prcesum,  suhsum,  and  supersum. 

Rem.  6.  Prosum,  from  the  old  form  prod  for  pro,  and  sum,  has  d 
after  pro,  when  the  simple  verb  begins  with  e ;  as, 

Ind.  pres.        pro'-sum,  prod'-es,  prod'-est,  etc. 
wiperf.    prod'-e-ram,  prod'-e-ras,  etc. 

Rem.  7.  (a.)  Possum  is  compounded  of  poth,  able,  and  sum. 
They  are  sometimes  written  separately,  and  then  potis  is  the  same  in 
all  genders  and  numbers. 

(6.)  In  composition,  is  is  omitted  in  pdtis,  and  t,  as  in  other  cases,  coming  be- 
fore s,  is  changed  into  s.  In  the  infinitive,  and  imperfect  subjunctive,  es  of  the 
simple  verb  is  dropped,  as  is  also  f  at  the  beginning  of  the  second  root.  In 
every  other  respect  possum  is  conjugated  like  sum,  wherever  it  is  found;  but 
the  imperative,  and  the  parts  derived  from  the  third  root,  are  wanting. 

Pres.  Indie.     Pres.  Infin.  Perf.  Indie. 
Pos'-sum,        pos'-se,        p6t'-u-i,        I  can,  or  I  am  able. 

INDICATIVE.  SITBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 
pos'-sum,  p6'-t6s,  po'-test;  pos'-sim,  pos'-sis,  pos'-sit; 

pos'-su-mus,  p6-tes'-tis,  pos'-sunt.  pos-si'-mus,  pos-si'-tts,  pos'-sint. 

Imperfect. 
pot'-6-ram,  pof-e-ras,  pot'-6-rat;  pos'-sem,  pos'-ses,  pos'-sSt; 

p6t-e-ra'-mus,  -e-ra'-tis,  -e-rant.  pos-se'-miis,  -se'-tis,  pos'-sent. 

Future. 

p6f-6-ro,  p6t'-e-ris,  p6t'-e-rlt; 
po-tgr'-iTmus,  po-ter'-l-tis,  pot'-€-runt. 

Perfect. 

p6t'-u-i,  p6t-u-is'ti,  p6t'-u-It;  p6-tu'-e-rim,  -e-rts,  -e-rit; 

p6-tu'-l-mus,  -is'-tis,  -e'-runt  or  -e're.      pot-u-er'-i-mus,    i-tls,  -e-rint. 


§  155. 


VERBS. — FIKST    CONJUGATION.   ACTIVE. 


108 


p6-tu'-^ram,  -^-ras,  -6-rat; 


Pluperfect. 


pot-u-is'-sem,  -ifl'-ses,  -is'-egt; 
pot-u-is-se'-mfls,  -ia-se'-tis,  -is'-sent. 


p6t-u-6-ra'-mQs,  -e-ra'-tls,  -€-rant. 

Future  Perfect 
po-tu'-e-ro,  p6-tu'-e-rfs,  p6-tu'-6-rIt; 
potr-Q-er'-I-mus,  pot^u-er'-f-tis,  p6-tu'-6-rint. 

(No  Imperative.) 

INFINITIVE.  PARTICrPIAL  ADJKCTIVK. 

Pres.  pos'-s6.     Per/,  pot-u-is'-sfi.  po'-tens,  able. 

NoTB.  The  following;  forms  are  also  found ;  potissum  for  possum,  potessuni  fof 
possuni,  fotessim  and  vcssiem  for  possim,  'possies,  possiei  and  potessU  for  pogsu 
and  possit,  potessem  for  possem,  potesse  for  posse,  and  before  a  passive  infinitive 
the  passive  forms  potesinr  for  potest,  poterdtur  for  poterat,  and  possttur  foi 
potset. — PotLs  cind  pot-e  without  est  are  sometimes  used  for  potest. 

§  155.     FIRST  CONJUGATION. 


ACTIVE    VOICE. 
PRINCIPAL  PARTS. 

Pres.  Ind.        Pres.  Inf.  Perf.  Ind. 

A'-mo,  a-ma'-re,  a-ma'-vi,  - 


Supine. 
S-ma'-tunL. 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


Present 
Sing,  a'-mo, 


a -mas, 


a'-mat, 
Plur.  S-ma'-mu3, 
a-ma'-tis, 
a'-mant. 


love,  do  love,  am  loving. 

Hove, 
thou  lovest, 
he  loves; 
we  hve, 
ye  love, 
they  love. 


Imperfect 

Sing,  a-ma'-bam, 
a-ma'-bas, 
a-ma'-bat, 

Plur.  am-a-ba'-mus, 
am-a-ba'-tis, 
a-ma'-bant, 


w:,s  loving,  loved,  did  love. 
I  was  loving, 
thou  wast  loving, 
he  was  loving ; 
we  were  loving, 
ye  were  loving, 
they  were  loving. 


Future.     shcAl,  or  will. 


Sing. 


a-ma'-bo, 
a-ma'-bis, 
a-ma'-bit, 
Plur.  a-mab'-i-miis, 
&-mab'-i-tis, 
a-ma'-bunt, 


I  shall  love, 
thou  wilt  love, 
he  will  love ; 
we  shall  love, 
ye  icill  love, 
they  will  love. 


104  VERBS. FIRST    CONJUGATION,    ACTIVE.  §  156 

Perfect,     loved,  or  have  loved. 


Sing. 

a-ma'-vi, 

I  have  loved. 

am-a-vis'-ti, 

thou  hast  lovedf     . 

a-ma-vlt, 

he  has  loved; 

Plur. 

a-mav'-i-mus, 

we  have  loved, 

am-a-vis'-tis, 

ye  have  loved, 

am-a-ve -niut  or 

-re, 

they  have  loved. 

Pluperfect. 

had. 

Sing. 

a-mav'-e-ram, 

I  had  loved, 

a-mav'-e-raa, 

thou  hadst  loved. 

a-mav'-e-rat, 

he  had  loved  ; 

Plur. 

&-mav-e-ra'-mu8, 

we  had  loved. 

a-mav-e-ra'-tis, 

ye  had  loved, 

a-mav'-e-rant, 

they  had  loved. 

Future  Perfect. 

shall 

I,  or  toUl  have. 

^ng. 

a-mav'-e-ro, 

I  shall  have  loved, 

a-mav'-e-ri8, 

thou  wilt  have  loved, 

a-mav'-e-rit, 

he  will  have  loved; 

Plur. 

am-a-Ter'-i-mus, 

we  shall  have  loved, 

am-a-ver'-i-tis, 

ye  will  have  loved. 

a-mav'-e-rint, 

they,  will  have  loved 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

MOOD, 

Present. 

may, 

or  can. 

Sing. 

a'-mem, 

I  may  love. 

a'-mes, 

thou  mayst  love, 

a'-met, 

he  may  love ; 

Plur. 

a-me'-mus, 

we  may  love. 

a-me'-tis, 

ye  may  love. 

a'-ment, 

they  may  love. 

Tmperfect.    might,  could, 

would,  or  should. 

Sing. 

a-ma-rem, 

I  would  love, 

a-ma'-res, 

thou  wouldst  love, 

a-ma'-ret, 

he  would  love  ; 

Plur. 

am-a-re'-mus, 

we  would  love, 

am-a-re'-tis, 

ye  would  love. 

a-ma-rent, 

they  would  lc>ve. 

Perfect,     may,  oi 

•  can  have. 

Sing. 

a-mav'-e-rim, 

I  may  have  loved. 

a-mav'-e-ris, 

thou  mayst  have  loved, 

a-mav'-e-rit, 

he  may  have  loved; 

Plur. 

,  am-a-ver'-i-mus, 

we  may  have  loved, 

am-a-ver'-i-tis, 

ye  may  have  loved, 

a-mav'-e-rint, 

they  may  have  loved 

§  156.  VERBS. — FIRST    CONJUGATION,    PASSIVE.  105 

Pluperfect,    might,  could,  would,  or  should  have. 

Sing,   am-a-vis'-sem,  /  would  have  loved, 

am-a-vis'-ses,  thou  wouldst  have  loved, 

am-a-vis'-set,  he  would  have  loved ; 

Plur.  am-a-vis-se'-mus,  we  would  have  loved, 

am-a-vis-se'-tis,  ye  would  have  loved, 

fim-a-vis'-eent,  they  would  have  loved. 

IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 

Pres.  Sing,  a'-ma,  love  thou ; 

Plur.  a-ma'-te,  love  ye. 

Fut.  Sing,    a-ma'-to,  thou  shall  love, 

a-ma'-t6,  he  shall  love  ; 

Plur.    am-a-to'-te,  ye  shall  love, 

a-man'-to,  they  shall  love 

INFINITIVE   MOOD. 

Present,  a-ma'-re,  to  love. 

Perfect,  am-a-vis'-se,  to  have  loved. 

Future,    am-a-tii'-rus,  (a,  um,)  es'-se,    to  be  about  to  foe* 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present,  a'-mans,  loving.  - 

Future,    am-a-tu'-rus,  S,  um,  about  to  love, 

GERUND. 

G.  a-man'-di,  of  loving, 

D.  a-man'-d8,  for  loving, 

Ac.  a-man'-dum,  loving, 

Ab,  a-man'-do,  by  loving. 

SUPINE. 
Former.  S-ma'-tum,  to  love. 

§150.     PASSIVE    VOICE. 

PRINCIPAL    PARTS. 

Pres.  Indie.        Pres.  Inf.n.        Perf.  Part 
A'-mor,  &-ma'-ri.  a^ma'-tus. 


106  VERBS.— FIRST    CONJUGATION,    PASSIVE.  §  156 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

Sing. 

Plur.  a 


Sing. 
Plur. 

Sing. 
Plur. 


Perfect,     have  been,  or  was. 

Sing.   5-ma'-tus  sum  or  fu'-i,  /  have  been  loved, 

a-ma'-tus  ea  or  fu-is'-ti,  thou  hast  been  loved^ 

5-ma'-tus  est  or  fu'-it,  he  has  been  loved; 

Plur.  Srina'-ti  su'-miis  or  fii'-i-miis,  we  have  been  loved, 

a-ma'-ti  es'-tls  or  fu-is'-tis,  ye  have  been  loved, 

a-ma-ti  sunt,  fu'e'-runt  or  -re,         they  have  been  loved 

Pluperfect,    had  been. 

Sing,  a-ma'-tus  e'-ram  or  fu'-e-ram,  /  had  been  loved, 

S-ma'-tiis  e'-ras  or  fa'-e-ras,  thou  hadst  been  loved, 

Srma'-tus  e'-rat  or  fu'-e-rat,  he  had  been  loved; 

Plur.  a-ma-ti  e-ra'-mus  or  fu-e-ra -mus,  we  had  been  loved, 
a-ma'-ti  e-ra'-tis  or  fu-e-ra'-tis,  ye  had  bten  loved, 
a-ma'-ti  e'-rant  or  fu'-e-rant,  they  had  been  loved. 

Future  Perfect,     shall  have  been. 

Sing.   5-ma'-tus  e'-ro  or  fu'-e-ro,  /  shall  hone  been  loved, 

a-ma'-tus  e'-ris  or  fu'-e-ris,  thou  wilt  have  been  loved^ 

a-ma'-tus  e'-rit  or  fu'-e-rit,  he  will  have  been  loved ; 

Plur.  a-ma'-ti  er-i-mus  or  fu-er'-i-mus      we  shall  have  been  loved, 
a-ma'-ti  er'-i-tis  or  fu-er'-i-tis,  ye  will  have  been  loved, 

S-ma'-ti  e'-runt  or  fu'-e-rint,  they  will  have  been  loved. 


Pn 

3sent. 

am. 

a'-mor, 

a-ma'-rls  or  -re, 

a-ma'-tiir, 

a-ma'-mur, 

a-mam'-i-ni, 

a-man'-tiir. 

1 

lam  loved, 
thou  art  loved, 
he  is  loved; 
we  are  loved, 
ye  are  loved, 
they  are  loved. 

Imperfect. 

was. 

a-ma'-bar, 

am-a-ba'-ris  or 

am-a-ba'-tur, 

am-a-ba'-mur, 

am-a-bam'-l-ni, 

am-a-ban'-tiir, 

-re, 

I  was  loved, 
'    thou  wast  loved, 
he  was  loved ; 
we  were  loved:, 
ye  were  loved, 
they  were  loved. 

Future. 

shall. 

or  will  be. 

a-ma'-bor, 

a-mab'-e-ris  or 

armab'-i-tur, 

a-mab'-i-miir, 

am-a-blm'-i-ni, 

am-a-bim'-tiir. 

-re, 

I  shall  be  loved, 
thou  wilt  be  loved, 
he  will  be  loved; 
we  shall  be  loved, 
ye  will  be  loved, 
they  will  be  loved. 

^  156.  VFRB8. FIRST    CONJUGATION,    PASSIVE. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 

Present,    may,  or  can  he. 

Sing.   S'-mer,  /  may  he  loved, 

a-me'-rls  or  -re,  thou  mayst  he  loved, 

a-m§'-tur,  he  may  he  loved; 

Plur.  a-me'-mur,  we  may  he  loved, 

a-mem'-i-ni,  ye  may  he  loved, 

a-men'-tur,  they  may  he  loved. 

Imperfect,    might,  could,  would,  or  should  he. 

Sing,   a-ma'-rer,  /  would  be  loved, 

am-a-re'-ris  or  -re,  thou  wouldst  he  loved, 

am-a-re'-tur,  he  would  he  loved; 

Plur.  Sm-a-re'-mur,  we  would  he  loved, 

am-a-rem'-i-ni,  ye  would  he  loved, 

am-a-ren'-tur,  they  would  he  loved. 

Perfect,    may  have  been. 


107 


Sing 


Plur. 


Sing. 


Plur. 


a-ma'-tus  sim  or  fu'-e-rim, 
S-ma'-tus  sis  or  fii'-e-ris, 
a-ma'-tu3  sit  or  fu'-e-rit, 
a-ma'-ti  si'-mus  or  fu-er'-i-mus, 
S-ma'-ti  ai'-tis  or  fn-er'-I-tis, 
a-ma'-ti  sint  or  fu'-e-rint, 


I  may  have  been  loved, 
thou  mayst  have  been  loved, 
he  may  have  been  loved, 
we  may  have  been  loved, 
ye  may  have  been  loved, 
they  may  have  been  loved. 


Pluperfect,     might,  could,  would,  oi  should  have  been. 

a-ma -tiis  es'-sem  or  fu-is'-sem,         /  icould  hav,  been  loved, 
a-ma -tiis  es'-ses  or  fu-is'-ses,  thou  wouldst  nave  been  loved^ 

a-ma'-tiis  es'-set  or  fu-is'-set,  he  would  have  .••■"en  loved ; 

a-ma'-ti  es-se'-miis  or  fu-is-se'-mus,  we  would  have  bt  "n  loved, 
arma'-1a  es-se'-tis  or  fu-Is-se'-tis,  ye  would  have  beeu  loved, 
a-ma'-ti  es'-sent  or  fu-is'-sent,  they  would  have  beet,  loved 


IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 


Pres. 


Sing,   a-ma'-re, 
Plur.  a-mam'-i-ni, 
Fut.  Sing,    a-ma'-tor, 

a-ma'-tor, 
Plur.  (am-a-bim-i-ni, 

a-man'-tor, 


he  thou  loved ; 
be  ye  loved, 
thou  shalt  he  loved, 
he  shall  be  loved; 
ye  shall  he  loved), 
they  shall  he  loved. 


INFINITIVE    MOOD. 

Present,  a-ma'-ri,  to  he  loved. 

Perfect,    a-ma'-tus  es'-se  rr  fti-is'-se,    to  have  been  loved. 
Future,   a-ma'-tum  i'-ri,  to  be  about  to  be  loved. 


fdO 


108 


VERBS. SKCOND    CONJUGATION. 


§15? 


PARTICIPLES. 
Perfect,  a-ma'-tus,  loved,  or  having  been  loved. 

Future,  a-man'-dus,  to  be  loved. 

SUPINE. 
Latter,  a-ma'-tu,         to  be  loved. 


Formation  op  the  Tenses. 


From  the  f  rst  root,  am,  are  de- 

From the  second  root,    From  the  third  root 

rived 

a7nav,  are  derived          amat,  are  derived 

Active.     Passive. 

Active.               Passive. 

Jnd.  pret.        amo,        amor. 

Ind.  perf.         amavi,         amatws  sum,  etc. 

imperf.    sxaabam,  amdfiar. 

plup.         amav^ram,  z.msitus  eram,  etc. 

—  fut.          amdio,     &mahor. 

fut.  perf.  amavero,     a.matits  ero,  etc. 

Subj.  pres.      amem,      amer. 

Subj.  perf.       amaveriw,  amatws  sim,  etc. 

imperf.    amarem,  amdrer. 

plup.       amavissem,  amattw  essem,  eto 

Inf.  perf.         amavisss,    amatzw  esse,  etc. 

Imperat.  pres.  amd,        amdre. 

fut.  amdto,     amdtor. 

From  the  third  root. 

Inf.  pres.        am dre,     amdri. 

Inf.  fut.      am&turus  esse,  amatwrn  iri. 

Part.  pres.      amans, 

Part.  fut.    amatu?nts. 

fut.                      amandMs. 

perf.                           amatMS. 

Gerund.           amandi. 

Form.  sup.  amatwrn.      Lat.  tup.  amatu. 

§  157.     SEC< 

3ND    CONJUGATION. 

ACTIVE    VOICE. 

PASSIVE   VOICE.* 

PRINCIPAL    PARTS. 

Pres.  Ind.    mo'-ne-6. 

Pres.  Ind.     mo'-ne-or.. 

Pres.  Inf.     mo-ne'-re. 

Pres.  Inf.     mo-ne'-ri. 

Perf.  Ind.     mon'-u-i. 

Perf.  Part.  mon'-I-tus. 

Supine.        'non'-i-tum. 

INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

Present 

/  advise. 

I  am  advised. 

Sing,  mo'-ne-o, 

Sing,  mo'-ne-or, 

mo'-neg, 

mo-ne'-ris  or  -re, 

mo'-net ; 

mo-ne'-tur ; 

Plur.  mo-ne'-mus, 

Plur.  mo-ne'-mur, 

mo-ne'-tis, 

mo-nem'-i-ni, 

mb'-nent. 

mo-nen'-tur. 

[mperfect 

/  was  advising. 

I  was  advised. 

S.  mo-ne'-bam, 

S.  mo-ne'-bar, 

mo-ne'-bas, 

mon-e-ba -ris  or  -re, 

mo-ne'-bat ; 

mon-e-ba'-tur ; 

p.  mon-e-ba -mua, 

P.  mon-e-ba'-miir, 

mon-e-ba'-tis, 

mon-e-bam'-i-ni, 

mo-ne'-bant. 

m6n-e-ban'-tur. 

§157 


VERBS. SECOND  CONJUGATION. 


109 


ACTIVE. 

/  shall  or  will  advise. 

S.  mo-ne'-bo, 
mo-ne'-bis, 
mo-ne'-bit ; 

P.  mo-neb'-i-mus, 
mo-neb'-i-tis, 
mo-ne'-bunt. 


/  advised  or  have  advised. 
S.  mon'-u-i, 

mon-u-is'-ti, 

mon'-u-it ; 
P.  mo-nu'-i-miis, 

mon-u-is'-tis, 

mon-u-e'-runt  or  -re. 


Future. 


/  had  advised. 

S.  mo-nu'-e-ram, 
m5-nu'-e-ras, 
mo-nu'-e-rat ; 

P.  m6n-u-6-ra'-mus, 
m6n-u-6-ra'-tis, 
mo-nu  e-rant. 


/  shall  have  advised. 

S.  mo-nu'-e-ro, 

mo-nu'-e-rfs, 

mo-nu'-e-rit ; 
P.  mon-u-er'-i-mus, 

mon-u-er'-i-tis, 

mo-nu'-e-rint. 


PASSIVE. 

/  shall  or  vnll  he  advised. 

S.  mo-ne'-bor, 

mo-neb'-e-ris  or  -re, 
mo-neb'-i-tur ; 

P.  mo-neb'-i-mur, 
mon-e-bim'-i-ni, 
mon-e-bun'-tur. 


Perfect. 

I  was  or  have  been  advised. 

S.  mon'-i-tus  sum  or  fu'-i, 
mon'-i-tus  es  or  fu-is'-ti, 
mon'-i-tus  est  or  fii'-it ; 

P.  mon'-i-ti  su'-mus  or  fu'-i-mus, 
mon'-i-ti  es'-tis  or  fu-is'-tas, 
mon'-i-ti  sunt,  fu-e'-runt  or  -re- 
Pluperfect 

/  had  been  advised. 

S.  mon'-i-tus  e'-ram  or  fu'-e-ram, 
mon'-i-tus  e'-ras  or  fu'-e-ras, 
mon'-i-tus  e'-rat  or  fu'-e-rat ; 

P.  mon'i-ti  e-ra'-mus  or  fu-e-ra'-mus, 
mon'-i-ti  e-ra'-tis  or  fu-e-ra'-tis, 
mon'-i-ti  e'-rant  or  fu'-e-rant. 


Future  Perfect. 

I  shall  have  been  advised. 

S.  mon'-i-tiis  e'-ro  or  fu'-e-ro, 
mon'-i-tuS  e'-ris  or  fu'-e-ris, 
mon'-i-tus  e'-rit  or  fu'-e-rit ; 

P.  mon'-i-ti  er'-i-mus  or  fu-er'-I-mua, 
mon'-i-ti  er'-i-tis  or  fu-er'-I-tis, 
mon'-i-ti  e'-runt  or  fu'-e-rint. 


SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 


/  may  or  can  advise. 
S.  m5'-ne-am, 

mo'-ne-as, 

mo'-ne-at ; 
P.  mo-ne-a'-mus, 

mo-ne-a'-tis, 

mo'-ne-ant. 


Present. 

/  may  or  can  be  advised. 


mo  -ne-ar, 
mo-ne-a'-ris  or 
mo-ne-a'-tur ; 
mo-ne-a'-miir, 
mo-ne-am'-i-ni, 
mo-ne-an'-tur. 


•re, 


110 


VERBS. — SECOND    CONJUGATION. 


§157 


ACTxVE. 


PASSIVE 


Imperfect. 


/  might,  could,  would,  or  should 
advise. 


mo-ne  -rem, 

mo-ne'-res, 

mo-ne'-ret ; 

mon-e-re'-mus, 

mon-e-re'-tis, 

mo-ne'-rent. 


/  may  have  advised. 
S.  mo-nu'-e-rim, 
mo-nu'-e-ris, 
mo-nu'-e-rit ; 
P.  raon-u-er'-i-mus, 
mon-u-er'-i-tis, 
mo-nu'-e-rint. 


/"  might,  could,  would,  or 
should  have  advised. 
S.  mon-u-is'-sem, 
mon-u-is'-ses, 
mon-u-is'-set ; 
mon-u-is-se'-mus, 
mon-u-is-se'-tis, 
mon-u-is'-sent. 


P 


/  might,  could,  would,  or  should 
be  advised. 

S.  mo-ne'-rer, 

mon-e-re'-ris  or  -re, 

mon-e-re'-tur ; 
P.  mon-e-re'-miir, 

mon-e-rem'-i-ni, 

mon-e-ren'-tur. 


Perfect.  , 

I  may  have  been  advised. 
S.  mon'-i-tus  sim  or  fii'-e-rim, 

mon'-i-tus  sis  or  fu'-e-ris, 

mon'-i-tus  sit  or  fu'-e-rit ; 
P.  mon'-i-ti  si'-mus  or  fu-er'-I-mua, 

mon'-I-ti  si'-tis  or  fu-6r'-i-tis, 

mon'-i-ti  sint  or  fu'-e-rint. 

Pluperfect. 
I  might,  could,  would,  or  should  have 

been  advised. 
S.  mon'-i-tus  es'-sem  or  fii-is'-sem, 

mon'-i-tus  es'-ses  or  fu-is'-ses, 
*     mon'-i-tus  es'-set  or  fu-is'-set ; 
P.  mon'-i-ti  es-se'-mus  or  fu-is-se'-mus, 
mon'-i-ti  es-se'-tis  or  fu-is-se'-tis, 
mon'-i-ti  es'-sent  or  fu-is'-sent. 


IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 


Pres.  S.  mo'-ne,  advice  thou; 
P.  m6-ne'-t6,  advise  ye. 
Fut.  S.  mo-ne'-to,  thou  shalt  ad- 
vise, 
mo-ne'-to,  he  shall  advise; 
P.  mon-e-to'-te,  ye  shall  ad- 
vise, 
mo-nen'-to,  they  shall  ad- 
vise. 


Pres.  S.  mo-ne'-re,  be  thou  advised; 
P.  mo-nem'-i-ni,    be  ye   ad- 
vised. 
Fut.  S.  mo-ne'-tor,  thou  shall  be 
advised, 
mo-ne'-tor,   he  shall  be 
advised ; 
P.  (mon-e-bim'-I-ni,  ye  shall 
be  advised,^ 
mo-nen'-tor,  they  shall  be 
advised. 


INFINITIVE    MOOD. 


Pres.  mo-ne'-re,  to  advise. 
Perf.  mon-u-is'-se,  to  have  advised. 
Fut.    mon-i-tu'-rus  es'-se,  to    be 
about  to  advise. 


Pres.  mo-ne'-ri,  to  be  advisrd. 
Perf.  mon'-i-tus  es'-se  or  1  a-is'-se, 

to  have  been  advised. 
Fut.    mon'-i-tum  i'-ri,  to  he  about 

to  be  advised. 


§158. 


VERBS. THFRP    CONJUGATION. 


Ill 


ACTIVE. 


PASSIVE, 


PARTICIPLES. 


Pres.  mo'-nens,  advising.  I  Per/,  mon'-i-tus,  advised. 

Fut.  mon-I-tu'-rus,  about  to  advise.  \  Fut.   mo-nen'-dus,  to  be  advited. 

GERUND. 

G.    mo-nen'-di,  of  advising, 
D.    mo-nen'-do,  etc. 
Ac.  mo-nen'-dum, 
Ab.  mo-nen'-do. 

SUPINES. 
Former,  mon'-i-tum,  to  advise.    \    Latter,  mon'-i-tu,  to  be  advised. 


FOKMATION   OF   THE   TeNSES. 


From  the  first  root,  num,  are  de- 
rived, 
Active.      Pa»sive. 
moneo,     moneor. 
monebam^moncbar. 
monebo,    monebor. 
moneam,  monear. 

— —  imperf.  vaonerem,  monerer*. 

Imperat.  pres.  mone,       monere. 

fut.    moneto,     monitor. 

Jnf.  preg.         monere,    monm. 

Part  pre».      mone»w, 

fut.  monendus. 

Gerund.  moaendi. 


Ind.  |W€«. 

tmperf. 

fut. 

Subf.  ^res. 


From  the  second  root,    From  the  third  root, 
monu,  are  derived,         nwnit,  are  derived, 
Active.  Passive. 

Ind.  perf.       monui,         monIt«s  sum,  etc. 

-  plup.       monueram,  monltrw  eram,  etc. 
-Alt.  perf.  momi^ro,     monltiM  ero,  etc. 

Snhj.  perf.      monu^7'm,  monIt?«  sira,  etc. 

plup.      monuJssem,  monltMS  essem,etc, 

Inf.  perf.       monuisse,     monittw  esse,  etc. 

"From  the  third  root, 
Jnf.  fut.         momturus  esse,     monltum  in. 
Part.  fut.       monitwrtts, 

perf.  monltiw. 

Form.  Sup.  monitum.    Lat.  Sup.  monltti. 


§158.     THIIID    CONJUGATION. 

PRINCIPAL    PARTS. 


Pres.  Ind.  re'-go. 
Pres.  Inf.   reg'-e-rfi. 
Perf.  Ind.  rex'-i. 
Supine.       rec'-tum. 


Pres.  Ind. 
Pres.  Inf. 
Perf.  Part. 


re  -gor. 

re'-gi. 
rec'-tus. 


INDICATIVE    MOOD. 


Present. 


I  rule. 

Sing.  re'-gS, 
re'-gis, 
re'-git ; 

Plur.  reg-i-mus, 
reg'-i-tls, 
re'-gunt. 


Sing. 


Plur. 


I  am  ruled. 

re'-gor, 
reg'-e-ris  or  ■ 
reg'-i-tur ; 
reg'-i-mur, 
re-gim'-I-ni, 
re-gun'-tiir. 


■re, 


112 


VERBS. THIRD    CONJUGATION. 


§158 


ACTIVE. 

/  was  ruling. 
re-ge'-bam, 
re-ge'-bas, 
re-ge'-bat ; 
reg-e-ba'-mus, 
reg-e-ba'-tis, 
re-ge'-bant 


/  shall  or  will  rule. 

S.  re'-gam, 

re'-ges, 

re'-get ; 
P.  re-ge'-mus, 

re-ge'-tis, 

re'-gent. 


I  ruled  or  have  ruled. 

S.  rex'-i, 

rex-is'-ta, 

rex'-it ; 
P.  rex'-i-mus, 

rex-is'-tis, 

rex-e'-nuLt  or  -re. 


I  had  ruled. 

S.  rex'-e-ram, 
rex'-e-ras, 
rex'-e-rat ; 

P.  rex-e-ra'-mua 
rex-e-ra'-tis, 
rex'-e-rant. 


Imperfect. 


PASSIVE 


/  was  ruled. 

re-ge'-bar, 
reg-e-ba'-ris  or  -re, 
reg-e-ba'-tiir ; 
reg-e-ba'-mur, 
reg-e-bam'-i-ni, 
reg-e-ban'-tur. 


Future. 


/  shall  or  will  be  ruled. 
S.  re'-gar, 

re-ge'-ris  or  -re, 

re-ge'-tur ; 
P.  re-ge'-mur, 

re-gem'-i-ni, 

re-gen'-tur. 


Perfect 

/  was  or  have  been  ruled. 

S.  rec'-tus  sum  or  fu'-i, 

'  rec'-tus  es  or  fu-is'-fi, 

rec'-tus  est  or  fu'-it; 

P.  rec'-ti  sii'-mus  or  fu'-i-mus, 
rec'-ti  es'-tis  or  fu-is'-tis, 
rec'-ti  sunt,  fu-e'-runt  or  -re 

Pluperfect. 

/  had  been  ruled. 

S.  rec'-tus  e'-ram  or  fu'-e-ram, 
rec'-tus  e'-ras  or  fu'-e-ras, 
rec'-tus  e'-rat  or  fu'-e-rat; 

P.  rec'-ti  e-ra'-mus  or  fu-e-ra'-mua, 
rec'-ti  e-ra'-tis  or  fu-e-ra'-tis, 
rec'-ti  e'-rant  or  fu'-e-rant. 


J  shall  have  ruled 
S.  rex'-e-r8, 
rex'-e-ris, 
rex'-e-rit ; 
P.  rex-er'-i-mus, 
rex-er'-I-tis, 
rex'-e-rint. 


Future  Perfect 

I  /  shall  have  been  ruled. 

,     S.  rec'-tiis  e'-ro  or  fu'-e-r8, 
rec'-tus  e'-ris  or  fu'-e-ris, 
rec'-tiis  e'-rit  or  fu'  e-rit ; 
P.  rec'-ti  er'-i-mus  or  fu-er'-i-mus, 
rec'-ti   er'-i-tis  or  fu-er'-i-tis, 
■ec'-ti   e'-runt  or  fu'-e-rint. 


§  158. 


VERBS. THIRD    CONJUGATION. 


lis 


ACTIVE.  PASSIFE. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 

Present. 

/  may  or  can  be  ruled. 

S.  re'-gar, 

re-ga'-ris  or  -re, 
re-ga'-tur ; 

P.  re-ga -mur, 
re-gam'-i-ni, 


J  may  or  can  ride 

S.  re'-gam, 

re'-gaa, 

re'-gat; 

P.  re-ga'-mus. 


re-ga'-tis, 
re'-gant 


re-gan'-tur. 


Imperfect. 


/  mipht,  could,  would,  or  should 
rule. 


S.  reg'-e-rem, 
reg'-e-res, 
reg'-e-ret; 

P.  reg-e-re'-mus, 
reg-e-re'-tis, 
reg'-e-rent. 


[  may  have  ruled. 
S.  rex'-e-rim, 
rex'-e-rfs, 
rex'-e-rit; 
P.  rex-er'-i-miis, 
rex-er'-i-tis, 
rex'-e-rint. 


/  might,  could,  would,  or 
should  have  ruled. 

S.  rex-is'-sem, 

rex-is'-ses, 

rex-is'-set ; 
P.  rex-is-se'-mus, 

rex-is-se'-tis, 

rex-is'-sent. 


/  might,  could,  would,  or  should 
be  ruled.     . 
.S\  reg'-e-rer, 

reg-e-re'-ris  or  -re, 
reg-e-re'-tur ; 
P.  reg-e-re'-mur, 
reg-e-rem'-i-ni, 
reg-e-ren'-tur. 


Perfect. 

/  may  have  been  ruled. 

S.  rec'-tus  sim  or  fu'-e-rim, 
rec'-tus  sis  or  fu'-e-ris, 
rec'-tiis  sit  or  fu'-e-rit ; 

P.  rec'-ti  si'-mus  or  fu-er'-I-mus, 
rec'-ti  si'-tis  or  fu-er'-I-tis, 
rec'-ti  sint  or  fu'-e-rint. 

Pluperfect. 

/  might,  could,  ivould,  or  should  have 
been  ruled. 

S.  rec'-tus  es'-sem  or  fu-is'-sem, 
rec'-tus  es'-ses  or  fu-is'-ses, 
rec'-tus  es'-set  or  fu-is'-set; 

P.  rec'-ti  es-se'-mus  or  fu-is-se'-mus, 
rec'-ti  es-se'-tis  or  fu-is-se'-tis, 
rec'-ti  es'-sent  or  fu-is'-sent. 


IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 


Pres. 
Ful. 


S.  re'-ge,  rule  thou, 
P.  reg'-I-te,  rule  ye. 
S.  reg'-i-to,  thou  shalt  rule, 

reg'-i-t8,  he  shall  rule  ; 
p.  reg-i-to'-tc,  ye  shall  rule, 

rS-gun'  t8,  they  shall  rule. 
10* 


Pres.  S.  reg'-e-re,  be  thou  ruled; 
P.  re-gim'-i-ni,  be  ye  ruled. 
Ful.  S.  rUg'-i-tov,  thou  shall  be  ruled, 
reg'-i-tor,  he  shall  he  ruled, 
P.  (rc-gim'-i-ni,  ye  shall,  etc.) 
re-gun'-tor,  they  shall,  etc. 


114 


VERBS. THIRD    CONJUGATION. 


§159 


ACTIVE. 


PASSIVE. 


INFINITIVE    MOOD. 


Pres.  reg'-e-re,  to  rule. 
Per/,  rex-is'-se,  to  have  ruled. 
Fut.   rec-tu'-rus  es'-se,  to  he  about 
to  rule. 


Pres.  re'-gi,  to  be  ruled. 

Perf.  rec'-tus  es'-se  or  fu-  is'-se,  to 

have  been  ruled. 
Fut.   rec'-tum  i'-ri,  to  be  about  to 

be  ruled. 


PARTICIPLES. 


Pres.  re'-gens,  ruling. 

Fut.   rec-tu'-rus,  about  to  rule. 


Perf.  rec'-tus,  ruled. 

Fut.   r6-gen'-dus,  to  be  ruled. 


GERUND. 

G.    r6-gen'-dl,  of  ruling. 
D.    re-gen'-do,  etc. 
Ac.  re-gen'-dum, 
Ab.  re-gen'-do. 

SUPINES. 
Former,  rec'-tum,  to  rule.      \      Latter,  rec'-tu,  to  he  ruled. 

Formation  of  the  Tenses. 


From  the  first  root,  reg,  are  de- 
rived, 

Active.     Passive. 
rego,         regor. 
regebam,  regebar. 
regam,     regar. 
regain,     regar. 
regerem,  reglrer. 
resere. 


Ind.  pres. 

-  imperf. 

fut. 

8vbj.  pres. 

imperf. 

Imperat.  pres.  rege, 

fut.    regfto, 

Ivf  pres.  regere, 

Part.  pres.       regews, 


f^- 

Gerund. 


regendi. 


regitor 
regi. 

regendus. 


From  the  second  root, 
rex,  are  derived, 

Active. 
Ind.  perf.        •  rexi, 

plup.  rexeram, 

fut.  perf.  rexero, 

Subj.  perf.        res.erim, 

plup.         re's.issem. 

Inf.  perf.  renisse. 


From  the  third  roc  \ 
red.  are  derived, 

Passive. 
rect«s  sum,  etc. 
rectw  erara,  etc 
rectws  ero,  etc. 
rectMS  sim,  etc. 
rectus  essem,  etc. 
rectMs  esse,  etc. 


From  the  third  root. 
Inf.  fut.      rectiirus  esse,  rectwrn  iri. 
Part.  fut.   rectuT-us. 

perf.  rectws. 

Form.  Sup.  rectum.  Lat.  Sup.  rectw. 


§  1^9.     Verbs  in  10  of  tBe  Third  Conjugation. 

Verbs  in  io  of  the  third  conjugation,  in  tenses  formed  from  the 
first  root,  have,  as  connecting  vowels,  ia,  ie,  io,  or  hi,  wherever 
the  same  occur  in  the  fourth  conjugation ;  but  where  they  have 
only  a  single  connecting  vowel,  it  is  the  same  which  character- 
izes other  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation.  They  are  all  conju- 
gated like  cdpio. 


§159. 


VERBS. THIRD    CONJUGATION. 


115 


ACTIVE.  PASSIVE. 

PRINCIPAL    PARTS. 

Pres.  Ind.    ca'-pi-6r,  to  be  talcen. 
Pres.  Inf.     ca'-pi. 
Ptrf.  Part,  cap'-tts. 


/  'res.  Ind.  ca'-pi-o,  to  take 
Pres.  Inf.  cap -e-re. 
Perf  Ind.  ce'-pi. 
Supine,       cap'-tum. 


INDICATIVE    MOOD. 
Present. 


ca  -pi-o, 
ca'-pis,  • 
ca'-pit ; 
cap'-i-mus, 
cap'-I-tis, 
ca'-pi-unt. 


S.  ca-pi-e'-bam, 
ca-pi-e'-bas, 
ca-pi-e'-bat ; 

P.  ca-pi-e-ba'-mus, 
ca-pi-e-ba'-tis, 
ca-pi-e'-bant. 


S.  ca'-pi-am, 
ca'-pi-es, 
ca'-pi-et ; 

P.  ca-pi-e'-mus, 
ca-pi-e'-tis, 
ca-pi-ent. 


Imperfect. 


Future. 


ca  -pi-or, 
cap'-6-ria  or  -re, 
cap'-i-tur ; 
cap'-i-mur, 
ca-pim'-i-ni, 
cS-pi-un'-tur. 


S.  ca-pi-e'-bar, 

ca-pi-e-ba'-ris  or  -rfi, 
ca-pi-e-ba'-tur ; 

P.  ca-pi-e-ba'-m6r, 
ca-pi-e-bam'-I-ni, 
ca-pi-e-ban'-tur. 


5'.  ca'-pi-&r, 

ca-pi-e'-ris  or  -r€, 

ca-pi-e'-tur ; 
P.  ca-pi-e'-mur, 

ca-pi-em'-I-ni, 

ea-pi-en'-tur. 


The  parts  formed  from  the  second  and  third  roots  being  entirely 
regular,  only  a  synopsis  of  them  is  given. 


Peif.         ce'-pi. 
Plup.         cep'-e-ram. 
Fut.  pe^f.  cep'-e-ro. 


S. 


Perf.  cap'-tus  sum  or  fa'-l. 

Plup.  cap'-tus  6'-ram  or  fu'-e-ram. 

Fut.  perf.  cap'-tus  e'-ro  or  fu'-e-ro. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 
Present. 


ca  -pi-am, 
ca'-pi-as, 
ca'-pi-at ; 
P.  ca-pi-a'-mus, 
ca-pi-a'-tis, 
ca'-pi-ant. 


S.  ca'-pi-ar, 

ca-pi-a'-ris  or  -re, 

ca-pi-a'-tur ; 
P.  ca-pi-a'-mur, 

ca-pi-am'-I-ni, 

ca-pi-an'-tur. 


116 


VERBS. FOURTH  CONJUGATION 


§160. 


ACTIVE. 


S.  cap'-6-rem, 
cap'-6-res, 
cap'-e-ret ; 

P.  cap-e-re'-mus, 
cap-e-re'-tis, 
cap'-e-rent. 


Perf.  cep'-€-rim. 
Plup.  ce-pia'-sem. 


Imperfect. 


PASSWE, 


S.  cap'-e-rer, 

cap-e-re'-ris  or  -ri, 
cap-e-re'-tur ; 

P.  cap-e-re'-mur, 
cap-e-rem'-i-ni, 
cap-e-ren'-tur. 


Per/,  cap'-tus  sim  or  fu'-e-rim. 
Plup.  cap'-tus  es'-sem  or  fu-is'-sem. 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 


Pres.  2.  S.  c&'-pe ;     P.  2.  cSp'-l-te. 
FuL  2.      cap'-i-to,  cap-i-to-te, 

• 3.      cap'-I-tS;  ca-pi-un'-to. 


S.  cap'-e-re ;  P.  ca-pim'-I-ni. 
cap'-i-tor,       (ca-pi-em'-i-ni,) 
cap'-i-tor ;     ca-pi-un'-tor. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


Pres.  cap'-e-re. 
Perf.  ce-pis'-se. 
Fut.    cap-tu'-rus  es'-se. 


Pres.  ca'-pi. 

Perf.  cap'-tus  es'-se  or  fa-iB'-sa. 

Fut.    cap'-tum  i'-ri. 


PARTICIPLES. 


Pres.  ca'-pi-ens. 
Fut.    cap-tu'-rus. 


Perf.  cap'-tus. 
Fut.    ca-pi-en'-duB. 


GERUND. 
G.  ca-pi-en'-di,  etc. 

SUPINES. 
Former,  cap'-tum.        |  Latter,  cap'-tu. 


§  160.     FOURTH    CONJUGATION. 


Pres.  Ind. 
Pres.  Inf. 
Perf.  Ind. 
Supine. 


PRINCIPAL    PARTS. 


au'-di-o. 
au-di'-re. 
au-di'-vi. 
au-di'-tum. 


Pres.  Ind.  au'-di-6r. 
Pres.  Inf.  au-di'-ri. 
Perf.  Pari,  au-di'-tus. 


§160. 


VERBS. FOURTH  CONJUGATION. 


117 


ACTIVE. 


PASSIVE, 


INDICATIVE    MOOD. 


Preseat 


I  hear. 

S.  au'-di-8, 

au'-dis, 

au'dit ; 
P.  au-di'-mus, 

au'-di'-tis, 

au'-di-unt. 


/  was  hearing. 

S.  au-di-e'-bam, 
au-di-e'-bas, 
au-di-e'-bat ; 

P.  au-di-e-ba'-mus, 
au-di-e-ba'-tis, 
au-di-e  -bant. 


/  shall  or  will  hear. 
S.  au'-di-am, 

au'-di-es, 

au'-di-et ; 
P.  au-di-e'-mus, 

au-di-e'-tia, 

au'-di-ent. 


i  heard  or  have  heard. 
S.  au-di'-vi, 

au-di-via'-ti, 

au-di'-vit ; 
P.  au-div'-I-mus, 

au-di-vis'-tis, 

au-di-ve'-runt  or  -re. 


/  had  heard. 

au-div'-e-ram, 

au-div'-e-ras, 

au-dlv'-e-rat ; 

au-di  v-e-ra'-mus, 

au-div-e-ra'-tis, 

au-div'-e-rant. 


I  am  heard. 
S.  au'-di-6r, 

au-di'-ri3  or  -re, 

au-di'-tur ; 
P.  au-di'-mur, 

au-dim'-i-ni, 

au-di-un'-tur. 


Imperfect. 


/  was  heard. 
au-di-e'-bar, 
au-di-e-ba'-ris  or  -re, 
au-di-e-ba'-tur ; 
au-di-e-ba'-mur, 
ai^-di-e-bam'-I-ni, 
au-di-e-ban'-tur. 


Future. 


/  shall  or  will  be  heard. 
S.  au'-di-ar, 

au-di-e'-ris  or  -r6, 

au-di-e'-tur ; 
P.  au-di-e'-mur, 

au-di-em'-i-ni, 

au-di-en'-tur. 


Perfect. 

/  have  been  or  was  heard. 

S.  au-di'-tus  sum  or  fu'-i, 
au-di'-tus  es  or  fu-is'-ti, 
au-di'-tus  est  or  fu'-it; 

P.  au-di'-ti  su'-mus  or  fu'-i-mus, 
au-di'-ti  es'-tis  or  fu-is'-tis, 
au-di'-ti  sunt,  fu-e'-runt  or  -re 

Pluperfect. 

/  had  been  heard. 

S.  au-di'-tus  e'-ram  or  fu'-e-ram, 
au-di'-tus  e'-ras  or  fu'-e-ras, 
au-di'-tus  e'-rat  or  fu'-e-rat; 

P.  au-di'-ti  e-ra'-mus  or  fu-e-ra'-miifl, 
au-di'-ti   e-ra'-tls  or  fu-?.-ra'-tis, 
au-di'-ti  e'-rant  or  fu'-e-rant 


118 


VERBS. — FOURTH  CONJUGATION. 


§160. 


ACTIVE. 

7  shall  ha  'e  heard. 

S.  au-div'-e-ro, 
au-div'-e-ris, 
au-div'-e-rit ; 

P.  au-di-ver'-i-mus, 
au-di-ver'-i-tis, 
au-div'-e-rint 


PASSIVE 
Future  Perfect. 

/  shall  have  been  heard. 
S.  au-di'-tus  e'-ro  or  fu'-e-r5, 
au-di'-tus  e'-ris  or  fu'-e-ris, 
au-di'-tus  e'-rit  or  fu'-e-rit; 
P.  au-di'-ti  er'-i-mus  or  fu-er'-i-muB, 
au-di'-ti  er'-i-tis  or  fu-er'-I-tis, 
au-di'-ti  e'-runt  or  fu'-e-rint. 


SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 


Present. 


/  may  or  can  hear. 

S.  au'-di-am, 
au'-di-as, 
au'-di-at ; 

P.  au-di-a'-mus, 
au-di-a'-tis, 
au'-di-ant.   * 


/  may  or  can  he  heard. 

S.  au'-di-ar, 

au-di-a'-ris  or  -re, 

au-di-a'-tiir ; 
P.  au-di-a'-mur, 

au-di-am'-i-ni, 

au-di-an'-tur. 


Imperfect. 


I  might,  could,  would,  or  should 
hear. 

S.  au-di'-rem, 

au-di'-res, 

au-di'-ret ; 
P.  au-di-re'-mus, 

au-di-re'-tis, 

au-di'-rent. 


/  might,  could,  would,  or  sn^dd 
be  heard. 
S.  au-di'-rer, 

au-di-re'-ris  or  -re, 
au-di-re'-tiir ; 
P.  au-di-re'-mur, 
au-di-rem'-i-ni, 
au-di-ren'-tur. 


/  may  have  heard. 

S.  au-div'-e-rim, 
au-div'-e-rfs, 
au-div'-e-rit ; 

P.  au-di-ver'-i-mus, 
au-di-ver'-i-tis, 
au-div'-e-rint. 


[  might,  could,  would,  or 

should  have  heard. 
S.  au-di-vis'-sem, 

au-di-vis'-ses, 

au-di-vis'-set ; 
P.  au-di-vis-se'-mus, 

au-di-vis-se'-tis, 

ao-di-vis'-sent. 


Perfect. 

I  may  have  been  heard.        ^ 

S.  au-di'-tus  sim  or  fu'-e-rim, 

au-di'-tus  sis  or  fu'-e-rts, 

au-di'-tus  sit  or  fu'-e-rit; 
P.  au-di'-ti  si'-mus  or  fu-er'-i-mu^ 

au-di'-ti  si'-tis  or  fu-er'-i-lis, 

au-di'-ti  sint  or  fu'-e-rint. 

Pluperfect. 

/  might,  could,  toould,  or  should 
have  been  heard. 

S.  au-di'-tus  es'-sem  or  fu-is'-sem, 
au-di'-tiis  es'-ses  or  fu-is'-ses, 
au-di'-tus  es'-set  or  fu-is'-set; 

P.  au-di'-ti  es-se'-miis  or  fu-is-se'-mus^ 
au-di'-ti  es-se'-tis  or  fii-is-se'-tis, 
au-di'-ti  es'-sent  or  fu-is'-eent 


§160 


VERBS. FOURTH    CONJUGATION. 


119 


ACTIVE, 


PASSIVE. 


IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 


Pres.  S.  au'-di,  hear  thou; 
P.  au-di'-te,  hea?-  ye. 
Fut.   S.  au-di'-tS,  thou  shall  hear, 
au-di'-to,  he  shall  hear  ; 
P.  au-di-to'-te,  ye  shall  hear, 
au-di-un'-to,    they   shall 
hear. 


Pres.  S.  au-di'-re,  he  th.u  heard , 
P.  au-dim'-i-ni,  be  ye  heard, 
Fut.   S.  au-di'-tor,   thou  shall  be 
heard, 
au-di'-tor,    he  shall  be 
heard; 
P.  (au-di-em'-i-ni,  ye  shall 
be  heard,) 
au-di-un'-tor,   they  shall 
be  heard. 


mPmiTIVE    MOOD. 


Pres.  au-di'-re,  to  hear. 
Per/,  au-di-vis'-se,  to  have  heard. 
Fut.    au-di-tu'-rus    es-se,     to    be 
about  to  hear. 


Pres.  au-di'-ri,  to  be  heard. 
Perf.  au-di'-tus  es'-se   or   fu-is'- 

se,  to  have  been  heard. 
Fut.    au-di'-tum  i'-ri,  to  be  about 

to  be  heard. 


PARTICIPLES. 


Pres.  au'-di-ens,  hearing. 

Fut.    au-di-tu'-rus,  about  to  hear. 


Perf.  au-di'-tus,  heard. 

Fut.    au-di-en'-diis,  to  be  heard. 


G. 
D. 

Ac. 
Ab. 


GERUND. 

au-di-en'-di,  of  hearing. 
au-dl-en'-do,  etc. 
au-di-en'-dum,     ^ 
au-di-en'-do.         ) 


SUPINES. 
Former,  au-di'-tum,  to  hear.       \      Latter,  au-di'-tii,  to  he  heard. 


Formation  of  the  Tenses. 


V-1 


From  the  first  root,  aud,  are  de- 
rived 


Ind.  pres. 

imperf. 

' —  ./«'• 
Suhj.  jyres. 

imperf. 

Imperal.  pra 

fnt. 

Inf.  pres. 
Part.  pres. 

fd. 

Gerund. 


Active. 
audio, 
audteoajw, 
audiam, 
aud  jam, 
audirewi, 
:.  audi, 
audito, 
audire, 
audie/M, 

ayxAiendi. 


Passive. 

audior. 

axidiebar. 

auu/ar. 

audinr. 

audlrer. 

audire. 

auditor. 

audin. 

&ndie7idus. 


From  the  third  rodi 
atuiRt,  are  derived, 

Passive. 
auditws  sum,  etc 


From  the  second  root, 
atidlv,  are  derived. 

Active. 
Ind.  perf .       audivi,         ,  _., 

plup.       andiveram,  auditMs  eram,  etc 

fut.  perf  audivero,     auditus  ero,  etc. 

Sttbj.  perf.     audiverim,  auditits  sim,  etc. 

plup.     audivissem,  auditMsessem,eto 

Inf.  perf.       audivisse,    auditus  esse,  etc. 

From  the  third  root. 
Inf.  fut.     auditurws  esse,  audltum  iri. 
Part.  fut.  auditurus. 
perf.  audittM. 

Form.  sup.  auditw)*       Lat.  sup.  auditu. 


120  DKPONENT    VERBS.  §  161 

DEPONENT    VERBS. 

§  161.  Deponent  verbs  are  conjugated  like  the  passive 
voice,  and  have  also  all  the  participles  and  participial  f'ormationa 
of  the  active  voice.  Neuter  deponent  verbs,  however,  want  the 
future  passive  participle,  except  that  the  neuter  in  dum  is  some- 
times used  impersonally.    See  §  184,  3. 

The  following  is  an  example  of  an  active  deponent  verb  of  the  first 
conjugation : — 

PRINCIPAL    PARTS. 

Mi'-ror,  mi-ra'-rl,  mi-ra'-tus,  to  admire. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Pres.  mi'-ror,  mi-ra'-ris,  etc.  I  admire,  etc. 

Imperf.  mi-ra'-bar,  etc.  I  was  admiring. 

Fut.  mi-ra'-bor,  /  shall  admire. 

Perf.  mi-ra'-tus  sum  or  fu'-i,  /  have  admired. 

Plup.  mi-ra'-tus  e'-ram  or  fu'-e-ram,  /  had  admired. 

Fut.  Perf.  mi-ra'-tus  e'-ro  or  fu'-e-ro,  I  shall  have  admired. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 

Pres.  mi'-rer,  mi-re'-ris,  etc.  /  may  admire,  etc. 

Imperf.  mi-ra'-rer,  /  would  admire. 

Perf.  mi-ra'-tus  sim  or  fu'-e-rim,  /  may  have  admired. 

Plup.  mi-ra'-tus  es'-sem  or  fu-Is'-sem,  /  would  have  admired. 

IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 

Pres.  S.  mi-ra'-re,  admire  thou ; 
Fut.  S.  mi-ra'-tor,  thou  shall  admire, 
mi-ra'-tor,  he  shall  admire ; 


P.  mi-ram'-i-ni,  admire  ye. 
P.  (mir-a-bim'-i-ni,  ye  shall,  etc.^ 
mi-ran'-tor,  they  shall,  etc. 


INFINITIVE    MOOD. 
Pres.         mi-ra'-ri,  to  admire. 

Perf.  mi-ra'-tiis  es'-se  or  fu-is'-se,   to  have  admired. 

Fut.  Act.  mir-a-tii'-rus  es'-se,  to  be  about  to  admire. 

Fut.  Pass,  mi-ra'-tum  i'-ri,  to  be  about  to  be  admired, 

PARTICIPLES. 
Pres.  mi'-rans,  admiring. 

Perf.  mi-ra'-tus,        having  admired. 

Fut.  Act.        mir-a-tii'-rus,  about  to  admire. 
Fut.  Pass,      mi-ran'-diis,     to  be  admired. 

GERUND. 
G.  mi-ran'-di,  of  admiring,  etc. 

SUPINES. 
Former   ml-ra'-tum^  U.  admire.    \    Latter,  mi-ra'-tu,  to  be  admired. 


§  162.      verbs. — remarks  on  the  conjugations.  121 

Remarks  on  the  Conjugations. 

Of  the  Tenses  formed  from  the  First  Boot. 

§  103.  1.  A  few  words  in  the  present  subjunctive  of  the  first  and 
third  conjugations,  in  the  earlier  writers  and  in  the  poets,  end  in  m,  is,  *,  etc  ; 
as,  edim,  eats,  edit,  ed'imus ;  com&dim,  coniedis,  comldint;  for  edam,  etc.  comi- 
dam,  etc.;  dunn,  dais,  duii,  duint;  a-iid  perduini,  perduis,  perduit,  perduint  ;  for 
dew,  etc.  perdam,  etc.  from  old  forms  duo  and  ptrduo,  for  do  and  ptrdo :  so  q'e~ 
ditis,  creduii,  and  also  creduam,  creduas,  creduui,  for  credam,  etc.  from  the  old 
form  creduo,  for  credo.  The  form  in  iin,  etc.  was  retained  as  the  regular  form 
in  sitn  and  velim,  from  sum  and  volo,  and  ia  their  compounds. 

2.  The  imperfect  indicative  in  the  fourth  conjugation,  sometimes,  especially 
in  the  more  ancient  writers,  ends  tu  ibam  and  ibar,  for  iebam  and  iebar,  and 
the  future  in  ibo  and  tbor,  for  iam  and  iar ;  as,  vesiibat,  Virg.,  largibar,  I'ropert. 
for  vestiebat,  largiebar ;  scibo,  opperlbor,  for  sdam,  opperiar.  Ibam  and  ibo  were 
retained  as  the  regular  forms  of  eo,  queo,  and  nequco.    Cf.  §  182. 

3.  The  termuiation  re,  in  the  second  person  singular  of  the  passive  voice,  ia 
•are  in  the  present,  but  common  in  the  other  simple  tenses. 

4.  The  imperatives  of  dice,  duco,  facia,  and  f  era,  are  usually  written  die,  due, 
facj  and  fer ;  in  like  manner  their  compounds,  except  those  compounds  of 
/d«o  which  change  ointoi;  as,  efflce,  conflce;  but  calf  dee  also  is  found  in 
Cicero ;  and  in  old  writers  dice,  edice,  add'ice,  indice,  duce,  abduce,  reduce,  traduce. 
and  face.  Inger  for  ingere  is  rare.  Scio  has  not  sci,  but  its  place  is  suppUed 
by  scito,  and  scitote  is  preferred  to  sclte. 

5.  In  the  imperative  futiu-e  of  the  passive  voice,  but  especially  of  deponents, 
early  writers  and  their  imitators  sometimes  used  the  active  instead  of  the  pas- 
sive form ;  as,  arbiirdio,  amplexdto,  utito,  nittto ;  for  arbitrator,  etc. ;  and  cen- 
senlo,  utunto,  tuento,  etc.  for  censentor,  etc. — In  the  second  and  third  persons 
singular  occur,  also,  forms  in  -mino ;  as,  hortamirw,  veremino,  fruimiiw ;  for 
hortdior,  etc. 

6.  The  syllable  er  was  often  added  to  the  present  infinitive  passive  by  early 
writers  and  especially  by  the  poets ;  as,  amarier  for  amdri,  dicier  for  dia. 

Of  the  Tenses  formed  from  the  Second  Moot. 

7.  (a.)  When  the  second  root  ends  in  d,  a  syncopation  and  contraction  often 
occur  in  the  tenses  formed  from  it,  by  omitting  v,  and  sinking  the  first  vowel 
of  the  termination  in  the  final  vowel  of  the  root,  when  followed,  in  the  fourth 
conjugation,  by  s,  and  ia  the  other  conjugations,  by  s  or  r ;  as,  audissem  for 
audivissem,  amasti  for  amavisti,  imiMrunt  for  imptev^riuU,  mram  and  nosse  for 
noveram,  and  novisse. 

(b.)  When  the  second  root  ends  in  iv,  v  is  often  omitted  without  contraction; 
as,  audiero  for  atulivero  ;  audiisse  for  audixisse. 

(c.)  When  this  root  ends  in  s  or  a;,  especially  in  the  third  conjugation,  the 
Bj'llables  is,  its,  and  sis,  are  sometimes  omitted  in  the  teruiiuation  of  tenses  de- 
rived from  it;  as,  evasti  for  evaslsti,  extinxti  for  extinxisti,  divisse  tor  diviy$se ; 
extinxem  for  extinxxssem,  surrexe  for  surrexisse  ,•  accestis  for  accestiistis,  just*  for 
jtissisii  ;  dixti  for  dixisti.     So  faxem  for  (facsiiicm,  i.  e.  J  fecissem. 

{d.)  In  the  perfect  of  the  first,  second,  and  fourth  conjugations,  a  syncope 
sometimes  occurs  in  the  last  syllable  of  the  root  and  the  following  syllable  of 
the  termination,  especially  intlie  third  person  singular;  as,  ffa/idt,  audit,  cupit; 
for  fumdvit,  audlvit,  cup'ivil.  So,  also,  but  rarely,  in  the  first  person;  as,  tepiU, 
enarrdmus ;  for  sepel'tvi,  enarrdvimus. 

8.  In  the  third  person  plural  of  the  perfect  indicative  active,  the  form  in  in 
'jj  leps  common  thm  that  in  irunt,  especially  in  prose. 

11 


122  VERBS. — RE5IARKS    ON   THE    CONJUGATIONS.         §  162. 

9.  Ancient  forms  of  a  future  perfect  in  so,  a  perfect  and  pluperfect  subjunc- 
tive in  sim  and  sem,  and  a  perfect  infinitive  in  se  sometimes  occur.  They  may, 
in  general,  be  foiTaed  by  adding  these  terminations  to  the  second  root  of  the 
verb ;  as,  recepso,  emisdm,  ausiin  from  the  obsolete  perfect,  attsi,  from  audeo, 
confexim  and  promissem :  divisse  and  prmnisse.  But  when  the  root  ends  in  ar, 
and  frequently  when  it  ends  in  s,  only  o,  im,  em,  and  e,  etc.  are  added ;  as, 
jusso,  dixis ;  tntelhxes,  percepset ;  surrexe,  surr.se.  V,  at  the  end  of  the  root,  in 
the  first  conjugation,  is  changed  into  s;  as,  levasso,  locassim.  U,  at  the  end  of 
the  root,  in  the  second  conjugation,  is  changed  into  es;  as,habesso,  lices^. 
Sometimes  the  vowel  of  the  present  is  retained  in  these  forms,  though  changed 
in  the  other  parts  derived  from  the  second  root;  as,  capso,  faxo  (facso), 
faxim  (facsim). 

Note.  Faxo  expresses  detennination,  ■  I  will,'  or,  '  I  am  resolved,  to  make^ 
cause,'  etc.  The  subjunctive  faxit,  etc.,  expresses  a  solemn  wish;  as,  dii 
immoftdles  frixint.  Ausim,  etc.  express  doubt  or  hesitation,  '  I  might  ven- 
ture,' etc.  The  perfect  in  sim  is  used  also  in  connection  with  the  present  sub- 
junctive; as,  qucBso  uti  iu  calamitdtes  prohibessis,  defendas,  averruncesque.  Gate. 

10.  In  the  ancient  Latin  a  few  examples  occur  of  a  future  passive  of  simi- 
lar fbrm ;  as,  turbassUur,  jussitur,  instead  of  turbdtum  faerit,  and  jussus  fue- 
rit. — A  future  infinitive  active  in  sere  is  also  found,  in  the  first  conjugation, 
which  is  formed  by  adding  that  termination  to  the  second  root,  changing,  as 
before,  v  into  s ;  as,  ex2m(jnassere,  impetrassere,  for  expugnaturum  esse,  etc. 

Of  the  Tenses  formed  from  the  Third  Root. 

11.  The  supine  in  um,  though  called  one  of  the  principal  parts  of  the  verb, 
belongs  in  fact  to  very  few  verbs,  the  whole  number  which  have  this  supine 
not  amounting  to  three  hundred.  The  part  called  in  dictionaries  the  supine 
in  um  must  therefore,  in  most  cases,  be  considered  as  the  neuter  gender  of  the 
perfect  participle. 

12.  In  the  compound  tenses  of  the  indicative  and  snbjiinctive  moods,  the 
participle  is  always  in  the  nominative  case,  but  it  is  used  in  both  numbers,  and 
in  all  genders,  to  correspond  with  the  number  and  gender  of  the  subject  of  the 
verb ;  as,  amdtus,  -a,  -um,  est ;  amdti,  -<e,  -a,  sunt,  etc. 

(1.)  Fui,  fmram,  fwerim,  fuissem,  and  fuisse,  are  seldom  used  in  the  com- 
pound tenses  of  deponent  verbs,  and  not  so  often  as  sum,  etc.,  in  those  of  c*her 
verbs,  but  when  used  they  have  generally  the  same  sense.  It  is  to  be  remark- 
ed, hov.-ever,  that  fid  with  the  perfect  participle  usually  denotes  that  which 
has  been,  but  which  no  longer  exists.  In  the  pluperfect  subjunctive,  forem, 
etc.,  for  esse7n,  etc.,  are  sometimes  found. 

(2.)  But  as  the  perfect  participle  may  be  nsed  in  the  sense  of  an  adjective, 
expressmg  a  pei-manent  state,  (see  §  162,  22),  if  then  connected  with  the  tenses 
of  sum  its  meaning  is  diff'erent  from  that  of  the  participle  in  the  same  connec- 
tion ;  epistdla  scripta  est,  when  scripta  is  a  participle,  signifies,  the  letter  hat 
been  wi-itten,  but  if  scripta  is  an  adjective,  the  meaning  of  the  expression  is,  the 
letter  is  written,  and  epistdla  scripta  fuit,  in  this  case,  would  signify,  the  letter 
has  been  wiitten,  or,  has  existed  as  a  wi-itten  one,  implying  that  it  no  longer 
exists. 

13.  The  participles  in  the  perfect  and  future  infinitive,  are  used  only  in  the 
nominative  and  accusative,  but  in  all  genders  and  in  both  numbers;  as,  amdlm, 
-a,  -um,  esse  or  fuisse ;  amntum,  -am,  -um,  esse  or  fdsse  ;  amdti,  -ce,  -a,  esse  or 
fuisse  ;  amdtos, -as, -a,  esse- or  fuisse  ;  and  so  of  the  others.  With  the  infini- 
tive fuisse,  amdtus,  etc.  are  generally  to  be  considered  as  participial  adjectives 

(1.)  These  participles  in  combination  with  esse  are  sometimes  used  as  inde- 
clinable :  as,  cohartes  ad  me  missum  facias.  Cic.  Ad  me,  mea  Terentia,  acribis 
to  iTtcum  veuditurum.  Id. 


§162.  VERBS. — PERIPHRASTIC    CONJUGATIONS.  123 

Periphrastic  Conjugations. 

14.  The  participle  in  rus,  joined  to  the  tenses  of  the  verlj 
sum,  denotes  either  intention,  or  being  upon  the  point  of  doing 
something.  This  form  of  the  verb  is  called  the  active  periphras- 
tic conjugation. 

Remark  1.  As  the  performance  of  the  act  depends  either  on  the  will  of  the 
subject,  on  that  of  others,  or  upon  circumstances,  we  may  say,  in  English,  in 
the  first  case, '  I  intend,'  and  in  the  others, '  I  am  to,'  or  '  I  am  about  to '  (be  or 
do  any  thing). 

INDICATIVE. 
Pres.      amaturus  sum,        /  am  about  to  love. 
Imperf.   araatOrus  eram,      /  was  about  to  love. 
Fut.        amaturus  ero,         /  shall  he  about  to  love. 
Perf.       amaturus  fui,  /  roas  or  have  been  about  to  love. 

Plup.       amaturus  fueram,  /  had  been  about  to  love. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Pres.       amatiirus  sim,         I  may  be  about  to  love. 
Imperf.   amatiirus  essem,      I  would  be  about  to  love. 
Perf.       amaturus  fuerim,    /  may  have  been  about  to  love. 
Plup.      amaturus  fuissem,  /  would  have  been  about  to  love. 

INFINITIVE. 
Pres.      amatiirus  esse,        to  be  about  to  love. 
Perf.      amaturus  fuisse,      to  have  been  about  to  love. 

Kem.  2.   Fuiro  is  scarcely  used  in  connection  with  the  participle  in  rus. 

Eem.  3.  Amaturus  dm  and  amaturus  essem  serve  also  as  subjunctives  to  the 
future  amdbo.  The  infinitive  amaturus  fuisse  answers  to  the  English,  '  I  should 
have  loved,'  so  that  in  hypothetical  sentences  it  supplies  the  place  of  an  infini- 
tive of  the  pluperfect  subjunctive. 

Rem.  4.  In  the  passive,  the  fact  that  an  act  is  about  to  be  performed  is  ex- 
pressed by  a  longer  circxmilocution :  as,  »»  eo  est,  or  futurum  est,  ut  epistdla 
icribdtur,  a  letter  is  about  to  be  written.  So  in  eo  etat,  etc.,  through  all  the 
tenses. 

15.  The  participle  in  dus,  -with  the  verb  sum,  expresses  neces- 
sity or  propriety ;  as,  amandus  sum,  I  must  be  loved,  or  deserve 
to  be  loved.  With  the  various  moods  and  tenses  of  sum,  it  forma 
B,  passive  periplu-astic  conjugation  ; — thus  : 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 


INDICATIVE. 

Pres.  amandus  sum, 

Imperf,       amandus  eram, 
Fut.  amandus  ero, 

Perf.  amandus  fui, 

Plup.  amandus  fuorara, 

Fut.  Per/,  amandus  fuero. 


Pres.  amandus  sim, 

Imperf  amandus  essem, 

Perf.  amandus  fuerim, 

Plup.  amandus  fuissem. 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres.  amandus  'isse, 

Perf  amandus  fuisse. 


124  VERBS. — RULES  OF  CONJUGATION.        §  163. 

Rem.  5.  The  neuter  of  the  participle  in  dm  with  est  and  the  dative  of  a  per* 
Bon,  expresses  the  necessity  of  performing  the  action  on  the  part  of  that  person 
as,  miki  scribendum  est  I  must  write,  etc.,  and  so  through  all  the  tenses. 

Participles. 

16.  The  following  perfect  participles  of  neuter  verbs,  like  those  of  active 
deponents,  are  translated  by  active  participles: — ccendlus,  having  supped;  pdtus^ 
having  drunk ;  jpra«sus,  having  dined;  and  sometimes  jMmiMS,  having  swtrn. 
So  also  adulius,  coalitus,  conspirdlus,  interitus,  occdsus,  obsoletus,  and  cretus. 

For  the  active  meaning  of  osus  and  its  compounds,  see  §  183,  1. 

1 7.  (a.)  The  perfect  participles  of  some  deponent  verbs  have  both 
an  active  and  a  passive  sense  ;  as,  adepius  lihertatem,  having  obtain- 
ed liberty,  or  adeptd  libertdte,  liberty  having  been  obtained.  Cf. 
§  142,  4,  (6.) 

So  abomindtus,  comitdtus,  commentdtus,  complexus,  confessus,  contestdtus,  de- 
tesidtus,  digndtus,  dimensus,  effdtus,  emensus,  ementltus,  evieritus,  expertus,  exse- 
crdtus,  interpretdtus,  largitus,  machinattis,  meditdtus,  mercdtus,  metdius,  oblltus, 
opindtus,  orsus,  pactui,  partttus,  j^ei'Junctm,  periclitdtus,  pollicitus,  pqpuldlus, 
iepopuldtus,  stipuldtus,  testdtiis,  uUus,  venerdlus. 

(b.)  The  participle  in  dus,  of  deponent  verbs,  is  commonly  pas- 
sive. 

18.  The  perfect  participles  of  neuter  passive  verbs  have  the  signi- 
fication of  the  active  voice ;  as,  gavlsus,  having  rejoiced.  But  ausus 
is  used  both  in  an  active  and  a  passive  sense. 

19.  The  genitive  plural  of  participles  in  rus  is  seldom  used,  ex- 
cept that  of  futurus.  Venturorum  is  found  in  Ovid,  exiturdrum,  trans- 
iturdrum  and  periturorum  in  Seneca,  and  moriturorum  in  Augus- 
tine. 

20.  In  the  third  and  fourth  conjugations,  the  gerund  and  future 
passive  participle  (including  deponents)  sometimes  end  in  undum 
and  undiis,  instead  of  endum  and  endus,  especially  when  t  precedes ; 
as,  faciundum,  audiundum,  scribundus.    Potior  has  usually  potiundus. 

21.  Many  present  and  perfect  participles  are  compounded  with  in,  signifving 
not,  whose  verbs  do  not  admit  of  such  composition ;  they  thus  become  adjec- 
tives; as,  insciens,  ignorant;  impardlus,  unprepared. 

22.  Participles,  when  they  do  not  express  distinctions  of  time,  become  adjec- 
tives, and  as  such  are  compared;  as,  amans,  loving;  amantior,  amantisiimus. 
They  sometimes  also  become  substantives;  as,  p?\efectus,  a  commander;  au- 
tum,  an  attempt ;  commissum,  an  offence. 

Note.  Many  words  derived  from  substantives,  with  the  terminations  of  par- 
ticiples, dim,  Itus,  and  utus,  are  yet  adjectives;  as,  aldtus,  winged;  turritiu, 
torreted,  etc.   See  §  128, 1. 

General  Eules  of  Conjugation. 

?  163.      1.    Verbs  which  have  a  in  the  first  root  have  it  also  in 
the  third,  even  when  it  is  changed  in  the  second  ;  as,  fdcio^  factum 
kdbtOf  habiium. 


§  164.  VERBS. — SECOND    AND    TR-lRD   ROOTS.  125 

2.  The  connecting  vowel  is  often  omitted  in  the  second  root,  and 
in  such  cases,  if  v  follows,  it  is  changed  into  «.  This  happens  in  most 
verbs  of  the  second  conjugation. 

Kemark.  Some  verbs  of  the  first,  second,  and  third  conjugations 
prefix  to  the  second  root  their  initial  consonant  with  the  vowel  which 
follows  it,  or  with  e;  as,  curro,  cucurri;  fallo,  fefelli.  This  prefix  ifl 
called  a  reduplication. 

Note  1.  Spondeo  and  sto  lose  s  in  the  second  syllable,  making  spdpondi  and  tHH. 
For  the  verbs  that  take  a  reduplication,  see  ^  165,  R.  2 ;  168,  N.  2 ;  171,  Exc.  1,(6.) 

3.  Verbs  which  want  the  second  root  commonly  want  the  third 
root  also.  « 

4.  Compound  verbs  form  their  second  and  third  roots  like  the  sim- 
ple verbs  of  which  they  are  compoimded ;  as,  audio,  audlvi,  auditum; 
exaudio,  exaudlvi,  exaudltum. 

Note  2.  Some  compound  verbs,  however,  are  defective,  whose  simples  are 
complete,  and  some  are  complete,  whose  simples  are  defective. 

Exc.  1.  Compound  verbs  omit  the  reduplication;  but  the  com- 
pounds of  do,  sto,  disco,  posco,  and  some  of  those  of  curro,  retain  it. 

Exc.  2.  Verbs  which,  in  composition,  change  a  into  e  in  the  first 
root,  (see  §  189,  1,)  retain  e  in  the  second  and  third  roots  of  the  com- 
pound ;  as,  scando,  scandi,  scansum ;  descendo,  descendi,  descensum. 

Exc.  3.  (a.)  When  a,  or,  or  e,  in  the  first  root  of  the  simple  verb, 
is  changed  in  the  compound  into  i,  (see  §  189,  2,)  the  same  is  retained 
in  the  second  and  third  roots,  in  case  the  third  root  of  the  simple  verb  is 
a  dissyllable  ;  as,  liabeo,  kdbui,  hdbUum ;  prohibeo,  proMbui,  prohibitum. 

(&.)  But  if  the  third  root  is  a  monosyllable,  the  second  root  of  the 
compound  has  usually  the  same  vowel  as  that  of  the  simple,  but 
sometimes  changes  a  or  e  into  i,  and  the  third  root  has  e ;  as,  fdcio, 
feci,  factum;  conficio,  confeci,  confectum;  teneo,  tenui,  tentum;  red'* 
neo,  retinui,  retentum;  rdpio,  rdpui,  raptum;  abripio,  abripui,  abreptum. 

Note  3.  The  compounds  of  cdih,  ago,  frango,  pango,  and  tango,  retain  a 
in  the  third  root.     See  §  172. 

Exc.  4.  The  compounds  ofpdrio,  (ere),  and  some  of  the  compounds  of  do 
and  cube,  are  of  different  conjugations  from  their  simple  verbs.  See  do,  cube  and 
pdrio  in  §^  166  and  172. 

A  few  other  exceptions  will  be  noticed  in  the  following  lists. 

Formation  of  Second  and  Third  Eoots. 

FIRST    CONJUGATION. 

.  §  164.     In  regular  verbs  of  this  conjugation,  the  second  root 
ends  in  av,  and  the  third  in  at ;  as,  amo,  amavt,  amatMW. 

The  following  list  contains  such  regular  verbs  of  this  conjugation 
as  are  of  most  frequent  occurrence. 

11* 


126 


VERBS. SECOND    AND    THIRD    ROOTS. 


164 


Note.  In  this  and  subsequent  lists,  those  verbs  which  are  marked  *  are  said  to  have 
no  perfect  participle ;  those  marked  t  to  have  no  present  participle.  A  dash( — )  afte* 
the  present,  denotes  that  there  Is  no  second  root.  The  participles  in  rus  and  dus,  and 
the  supines  in  u?n  and  u  which  are  in  use,  are  indicated  respectively  by  the  letters  r.,  d., 
m.,  and  u.  Abundo,  for  example,  has  no  perfect  participle,  no  supine,  no  participle  in 
dus  ;  but  it  has  a  present  participle,  and  a  participle  in  rus.  ' 

In  the  lists  of  irregular  verbs,  those  compounds  only  are  given,  whoee  conjugation  dif- 
fers from  that  of  their  simples.  ' 

VThen  p.  is  subjoined  to  a  deponent  verb,  it  denotes  that  some  of  the  parts  which  hav« 
commonly  an  active  meaning,  are  used  either  actively  and  passively,  or  passively  alone. 
Such  verbs  are  by  some  grammarians  called  common.    Cf.  J  142,  4,  (6.) 


*Abundo,  r.  to  overflow. 
Acciiso,  m.  r.  d.  to  accuse. 
t  Adurabro,  to  delineate. 
^dif  Ico,  r.  d.  to  build. 
Jilquo,  r.  d.  to  level. 
.^stimo,  r.  d.  to  value. 
*Ambulo,  m.  d.  to  walk. 
Amo,  r.  d.  to  love. 
tAmplio,  d.  to  enlarge. 
Appello,  d.  to  call. 
Apto,  d.  to  Jit. 
Arc,  r.  d.  to  plough. 
*t  AiTSCulto,  to  listen. 
*t  Autumo,  to  assert. 
tBasio,  — ,  d.  to  kiss. 
HfBello,  m.  r.  d.  to  wage 

war. 
■Beo,  to  bless. 
"Boo,  to  bellow. 
tBrevio,  fo  shorten. 
tCajco,  to  blind. 
jClbIo,  to  carve. 
jCalceo,  d.  to  shoe. 
*tCalcitro,  to  kick. 
Canto,  m.  to  sing. 
Capto,  m.  r.  d.  to  seize. 
tCastigo,  m.  d.  to  chastise. 
Celebro,  d.  to  celebrate. 
Celo,  d.  to  conceal. 
Cesso,  d.  to  cease. 
Certo,  r.  d.  to  strive. 
Clamo,  to  shout. 
Cogito,  d.  to  think. 
Concilio,  r.  d.  to  conciliate. 
Cousidero,  r.  d.  to  conr- 

sider. 
Cremo,  d.  to  burn. — con- 

cremo,  r. 
1  Creo,  r.  d.  to  create. 
Crucio,  d.  to  torment. 
Culpn.  r.  d.  to  blame. 
\  Guneo,  d.  <c  loedge  m. 
Cure,  r.  d.  to  care  for. 
Damno,  m.  r.  d.   to  con- 

df.mn. 
Decoro,  d.  to  adorn. 
* '  Dellneo.  to  delineate. 
'l>$3id6ro,  r.  d.  to  desire. 


Destano,  d.  to  design. 

Dico,  irf.  r.  d.  to  dedicate. 

Dicto,  to  dictate. 

tDolo,  to  hew. 

Done,  r.  d.  to  bestow. 

Duplico,  r.  d.  to  double. 

Dure,  r.  to  harden. 

tEff  igio,  to  portray. 

tEnucleo,  to  explain. 

Eqiiito,  to  ride. 

Erro,  to  wander. 

Existimo,  u.  r.  d.  to  think. 

Expluro,  m.  d.  to  search. 

Essiilo,  m.  r.  to  be  ban- 
ished. 

Fabrico,  d.  to  frame. 

jFatlgo,  r.  d.  to  weary. 

Festlno,  r.  to  hasten. 

Firmo,  r.  d.  to  strengthen. 

Flagito,  in.  d.  to  demand. 

*Flagro,  r.  to  be  on  fire. — 
conflagi'o,  r. — deflagro. 

Flo,  d.  to  blow. 

Formo,  r.  d.  to  form. 

Foro,  d.  to  bore. 

tFraudo,  d.  to  defraud. 

JFreno,  to  bridle. 

fFrio,  — ,  to  crumble. 

Fugo,  r.  d.  to  put  to  flight. 

fFundo,  r.  toyijJMkZ. 

tFurio,  — ,  to  madden. 

\  Galeo,  — ,  to  put  on  a 
helmet. 

Gesto,  d.  to  bear. 

Glacio,  — ,  to  congeal. 

Gravo,  d.  to  weigh  down. 

Gusto,  d.  to  taste. 

Hablto,  m.  d.  to  dwell. 

*Halo,  — ,  to  breathe.     ' 

Hiemo,  m.  to  winter. 

*Hio,  d.  to  gape. 

\  hluLno,  1 .  (1.  to  bury. 

Ignore,  r.  d.  to  be  igno- 
rant of. 

Impero,  r.  d.  to  command. 

tlmpetro,  r.  d.  to  obtain. 

Inchio.  "  'r  begin 

Indago,  r.  d.  to  trace  cat. 


Indico,  m.  r.  d.  to  show. 
tluebrio, — ,  to  inebriate. 
Liitio,  to  initiate. 
Inqulno,  to  pollute. 
lustauro,  d.  to  renew. 
Intro,  r.  d.  to  enter. 
Invito,  d.  to  invite. 
Irrito,  r.  d.  to  irritate. 
Itero,  u.  d.  to  do  again. 
Jacto,  r.  d.  to  throw. 
Judico,  r.  d.  to  judge. 
Jugo,  d.  to  couple. 
Jugulo,  m.  d.  to  buicher 
Juro,  d.  to  swear. 
Laboro,  r.  d.  to  labor. 
Lacero,  d.  to  tear. 
*Lacto,  to  suckle. 
tLanio,  d.  toteariiipiectt, 
Liitro,  to  bark. 
Laudo,  r.  d.  to  praise. 
Laxo,  d.  to  loose. 
fLego,  to  depute. 
Levo,  r.  d.  to  lighten. 
Libiro,  r.  d.  to  free. 
Libo,  d.  to  2}our  out. 
Ligo,  to  bind. 
tLiquo,  d.  to  meU. 
Lito,  to  appease. 
Loco,  r.  d.  to  place. 
Lustro,  d.  to  survey. 
Luxurio,  to  be  luxuriant. 
Macto,  d.  to  sacnfice. 
Jlaciilo,  to  spot,  stain. 
^lando,  r.  d.  to  command, 
JIaiidtico,  to  chew. 
*Mano,  to  flow. 
Jlatiiro,  d.  to  ripen. 
Memoro,  u.  d.  to  tell. 
*]\Ieo,  to  go. 

*JIigro,  u.  r.  d.  to  dfpai  t 
*Milito,  m.  r.  U)  serve  us 

1  soldier 
tSIinio,  d.  to  paint  red. 
Ministro,  d.  to  «ere6. 
Mitigo,  d.  to  pacyy, 
Monstro,   r      to    skou^  < 

tdemonstvo.  d      _ 
>luto,  r.  a.  to  riuiHf)<a 


§165. 


VERRS. — SECOND    AND    THIRD    ROOTS. 


127 


Narro,  r.  d.  to  tell. 

Nato,  m.  r.  to  swim.  _ 

*Naiiseo,  to  be  sea-sick 

tNavlgo,  r.  d.  <«  sail. 

Navo,V.  d.  to  perform. 

Nego,  m.  r.  d.  to  deny. 

*No,  to  swim. 

Nomlno,  r.  d.  to  name. 

Noto,  d.  to  mark. 

Novo,  r.  d.  to  renew. 

Nudo,  d.  to  make  bare. 

Nuncupo,  r.  d.  to  name 

Nniitio,  m.  r.  to  tell. — 
renuntio,  d. 

*Nuto,  r.  to  nod. 

Obseero,  m.  r.  d.  to  be- 
seech. 

Obtrunco,  r.  to  kill. 

Onero,  r.  d.  to  load. 

Onto,  d.  to  wish. 

fOrbo,  r.  to  bereave. 

Oriio,  r.  d.  to  adorn. 

Oro,  m.  r.  d.  to  beg. 

Paco,  d.  to  subdue. 

Piivo,  r.  d.  to  prepare. 
comparo,  d.  to  compare. 

Patro,  r.  d.  to  perform. 

*Pecco,  r.  d.  to  sm. 

tPio,  d.  to  propitiate. 

Placo,  r.  d.  to  appease. 

Ploro,  ra.  d.  to  bewail. 

Porto,  u.  r.  d.  to  carry. 

Postiilo,  m.  r.  d.  to  de- 
mand. 

Pnvo,  d.  to  dejn-ive. 

Probo,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  ap- 
prove.— comprobo,  m. 

Profllgo,  d.  to  rout. 

Propero,  d.  to  hasten. 

*f  Propino,  to  drink  to. 

Propitio,  d.  to  appease. 

Pngiio,  r.  d.  to  Jiyht. 

Pulse,  d.  to  heat. 

Pui'go,  u.  r.  d.  to  cleanse. 


Puto,  d.  to  reckon. 
Quasso,  d.  to  shake. 
Radio,  to  emit  rays. 
Kapto,  d.  to  dray  away. 
Reciipero,  m.  r.  d.  to  re- 

cover. 
Recuso,  r.  d.  to  refuse. 
Redundo,  to  overjlow. 
Regno,  r.  d.  to  i-ule. 
jRepiidio,  r.  d.  to  reject. 
Resero,  d.  to  unlock. 
*tRetaJio, — ,  to  retaliate. 
Rigo,  to  water. 
ROgo,  m.  r.  d.  to  ask. 
Roto,  to  whirl  around. 
Sacrifico,  m.  to  sacrifice. 
Sacro,  d.  to  consecrate. 
tSagino,  d.  to  fatten. 
Salto,  r.  to  dance. 
Saluto,  m.  r.  d.  to  salute. 
Sane,  r.  d.  to  heal. 
Satio,  to  satiate. 
tSaturo,  to  fill. 
Saucio,  d.  to  wound. 
*Secundo,  to  j^rosper. 
Sedo,  m.  d.  to  allay. 
•Servo,  r.  d.  to  keep. 
*tSibilo,  to  hiss. 
Sicco,  d.  to  dry. 
Sigiio,  r.  d.  to  mark  out. — 

assigno,  ra. 
Simulo,  r.  d.  to  pretend. 
Socio,  d.  to  associate. 
*Somnio,  to  dream. 
Specto,  m.  r.  d.  to  behold. 
Spero,  r.  d.  to  hojje. 
*Splro,  to  breathe. — con- 

splro.  —  exspiro,  r.  — 

suspiro,  d. 
Spolio,  na.  d.  to  rob. 
Spiimo,  to  foam. 
Stillo,  to  drop. 
Stimulo,  to  goad. 
StJpo,  to  stuff. 


Sudo,  to  sweat. 

SufFoco,  to  strangle. 

Sugillo,  d.  to  taunt. 

Siqxl'ro,  r.  d.  to  irvercjme. 

Suppedito,  to  afford. 

*Suppllco,  in.  to  suppli- 
cate. 

*Susurro,  to  whisper. 

Tardo,  to  delay. 

Taxo,  d.  to  rate. 

Tern  fro,  d.  to  defde. 

Tempt-ro,  r.  d.  to  temper 
— obtcrapero,  r.  to  obey, 

Tento,  m.  r.  d.  to  try. 

Terebro,  to  bore. 

Termino,  r.  d.  to  limU. 

Titubo,  to  stagger. 

ToltTO,  u.  r.  d.  to  hear. 

Tracto,  u.  d.  to  handle. 

*tTripudio,  to  dance. 

Triumpho,  r.  to  triumpih. 

Trucido,  r.  d.  to  kill. 

Turbo,  d.  to  disturb. 

*Vaco,  to  be  at  leisure. 

*Vapulo,  m.  d.  to  be  beat 
en.  Of.  §  142,  3. 

Varlo,  to  diversify. 

Vasto,  d.  to  lay  waste. 

Vellico,  to  pluck. 

Verbero,  r.  d.  to  beat. 

*Vestigo,  to  search  for 

Vexo,  d.  to  tease. 

Vibro,  d.  to  brandish. 

Vigllo,  to  watch. 

Violo,  m.  r.  d.  to  violate. 

Vltio,  d.  to  vitiate. 

Vlto,  u.  d.  to  shu7i. 

L'lulo,  to  hmol. 

Umbro,  r.  to  shade. 

Voco,  r.  d.  to  call. 

*V61o,  to  Jlv. 

Voro,  r.  to  devcmr. 

Vulgo,  r.  d.  to  publish. 

Vuliiero,  d.  to  wouiul. 


§  16»>.     The  following  verbs  of  the  firet  conjugation  are  eithel 
IrreiTular  or  defective. 


*Crepo,  crepui,  to  make  a  noise.  *dis- 
crOpo,  -ui,  or  -avi.  incrCpo,  -ui  or 
-avi,  -itum  or -atum.  *tpercri  po,  — . 
*trecrcpo,  — . 

■^Cubo,  cubui,  {perf.  suhj.  cubaris ;  inf. 
cubasse),  cubitum  (sup.),  to  recline. 
incubo,  -ui  or  avi,  d.  Those  com- 
poimds  of  cubo  lohich  take  m  before 
b,  are  cf  the  third  conjugation. 

Do,  u?di,  datum,  in.  r.  d.  to  give. — 
So  cjrcumdA  pessumdc,  satfsdo,  and 


venumdo ;  {he  other  compimnds  of  do 

are    of  the    third  conjugation.     Set 

j  163,  Exc.  1. 
Domo,  domui,  domltiim,  r.  d.  to  tame. 
Frico,  fricui,  frictum  or  fricatum,  d. 

to  rub.     confrico, — , -atiim.  &  inlri- 

CO.  defrico_,  — ,  -atum  or  -ctum. 
Juvo,  juvi,  jutum,  r.  d.,  also  juvatu- 

rus,  to  help,    adjuvo,  -juvi,  -jutum, 

m.  r.  d.  also  sdjuvatuiiis. 
*Labo,  labasse,  to  to'  ler. 


128 


VERBS. SECOND    AND    THIRD    ROOTS. 


§166 


Lavo,  lavi,  rar.  lavavi,  lavatum,  lautura 

or  lutum;  (svp.)  lautum  or  lavatum, 

lavatunis,  d.   lo  wash.     Lavo  is  also 

somelimes  of  tlie  third  coiijuyatiun. 
*Mico,   micui,  d.    to  (/litter.     diin!co, 

-avi    or  -ui,   -atiirus.     *enuco,  -ui, 

-atunis.     *intermico,  — .      *proini- 

eo,  — ,  d. 
N<'co,  necavi  or  necui,  necatum,  r.  d. 

to  kill,     eneco,  -avi  or  -ui,  -atum,  or 

-chim,  d.     tintemeco,  — ,  -atum. 
*  [  Nexo,  — ,  to  tie. 
riico,  — ,  plicatum,  to  foil,     duplico, 

-avi,  -atum,  r.  d.     multipllco  and  re- 

plico  have,  -avi,  -atum.     *supplico, 

-avi,   m.    r.     applTco,    -.avi    or    -ui, 

-atum  or  -itiun,  -iturus.    So  implico. 

— compUco,     -ui,  -itum    or    atum. 

explico,  -avi  or  -ui,  -atum  or  -itum, 

-atunis  or  -iturus. 
I'dto,  potavi,  potatum  or  potum,  r.  r. 

m.  m.  d.  to  drink,     fepoto,  -avi,  -um. 

— *perpoto,  -avi. 
SCco,  secui,  sectum,  secaturus,  d.  to 

Remark  1.  The  principal  irrej^ilarity,  in  verbs  of  the  first  and  second  con- 
jugations, consists  in  the  omission  of  the  connecting  vowel  in  the  second  root, 
ami  the  change  of  the  long  vowels  a  and  e  in  the  third  root  into  i.  The  v  re- 
maining at  the  end  of  the  second  root,  when  it  follows  a  consonant,  is  pro- 
nounced as  u;  as,  cj/io,  (aibdvi,  by  syncope  cubvi),  i.  e.  cuhui;  {cubdtum,  by 
change  of  the  connecting  vowel,)  cubitum.  Sometimes  in  the  first  conjugation, 
anil  very  frequentlj'  in  the  second,  the  connecting  vowel  is  omitted  in  the  third 
root  also;  as,  juvo,  (are)  juvi,  jutum;  t-eneo,  (ere)  tcnui,  tentum.  In  the  second 
conjugation  several  verbs  whose  general  root  ends  in  d  and  g,  and  a  few  others 
of  liiliereiit  terminations,  form  either  their  second  or  third  root  or  both,  like 
verbs  of  the  third  conjugation,  by  adding  s  ;  as,  rideo,  risi,  risum. 

Rem.  2.  The  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation  whose  perfects  take  a  redu- 
plication arc  do,  sto,  and  their  compounds. 

Rkm.  3.  The  following  verbs  in  eoare  of  the  first  conjugation,  viz.  beo,  calceo, 
creo,  ciineo,  cnucko,  illOqiieo,  coUlneo,  delineo,  7neo,  natiseo,  screo  ;  eo  and  its  com- 
pounds are  of  the  fourth. 

§  166.     All  deponent  verbs,  of  the  first  conjugation,  are  regular, 
and  are  conjugated  like  miror,  §  161 ;  as, 


cut. — *circumseco,  — .  *interseco 
— ,  d.  *persOco, -ui.  prroseco,  -ui, 
-Xxvm.  or  -atum.     So  reseco,  d. 

*S6no,  soinii,  -aturus,  d.  to  sound. 
*cons6no,  -ui.  So  ex-,  in-,  per-, 
pra;-s6no.  *res6no,  -avi.  *ass6no, 
— .     /SV)  circumsono  «nd  dissono. 

*Sto,  stOti,  stiiturus,  to  stand.  *an- 
testo,  -stc-ti.  So  circumsto,  intersto, 
supersto. — Its  compounds  with  im>- 
nosyllabic  prepositions  have  stiti; 
as,  *consto,  -stiti,  -staturus.  So  ex- 
sto,  insto,  obsto,  persto.  *pra;sto, 
-stiti,  -statiirus,  d.  *adsto  or  asto, 
-stiti,  -stitiirus.  *prosto,  -stiti.  So 
resto,  restiti :  but  subj.  perf.  restiive- 
rit,  Propert,  2,  34,  53.  *disto,  — . 
So  substo  and  supersto. 

*T6no,  tonui,  to  thunder.  So  circum- 
tono.  attono,  -ui,  -itum.  iutono, 
-ui,  -atum.     *ret6no,  — . 

Veto,  vetui,  rarely  avi,  vetitum,  to 
forbid. 


Abominor,  d.  to  abhor. 
Adiilor,  d.  to  flatter. 
iEmulor,  d.  to  rival. 
Ancillor,  tobeahamlmaid. 
♦Apricor,  to  bask  in  the 

sun. 
Arbiti-or,  r.  d.  to  think. 
Aspemor,  d.  p.  to  despise. 
Auciipcr,   r.   p.    to    hunt 

after. 
Auxilior,  p.  to  help. 
Aversor,  d.  to  dislike. 
Bacchor,  p   to  revel. 
Calumnior,  to  censure  un^ 

fairly. 


Causor,  to  allege. 
*Coinissor,  m.  to  revel. 
Comitor,  p.  to  accompany. 
Concioiior,  to  harangue. 
*Confabulor,  m.  to  con- 

verse  together. 
Conor,  d.  to  endeavor. 
•^Conspicor,  to  see. 
Contemplor,  d.  p.  to  view 

attentively. 
Criminor,  m.  p.   to  com- 

plnin  of 
Cunctor,  d.  p.  to  delay. 
Deprecor,  m.  r.  d.  p.  to 

deprecate.  ' 


*tDigladior,  to  fence. 

Dignor,  d.  p.  to  deemwor- 
t)iy. 

Dominor,  p.  to  rule. 

Epiilor,  r.  d.  to  feast. 

*Famulor,  m.  to  wait  on. 

Fatur,  (defect.)  u.  d.  p 
to  speaJc.  See  §  183,  6. 

tFerior,  r.  to  keep  holiday. 

*Frmnentor,  m.  to  for- 
age. 

Furor,  m.  to  steal. 

Glurior,  r.  d.  to  boast. 

Gratulor,  m.  d.  to  eo* 
gratuliiie. 


§167. 


VFEBS. — SECOND    AND    THIRD    ROOTS. 


129 


Hariolor,  io  practise  sooth- 

saying. 
Hortor,  d.  to  encmirage. 
Imitor,  u.  r.  d.  to  imitate. 
Indigiior,  d.  to  disdain. 
Infitior,  d.  to  deny. 
Insector,  io  pursue. 
Insidior,   r.    d.   to  lie  in 

wait  for. 
Interpreter,  p.  to  explain. 
Jaciilor,  p.  to  hurl. 
Joe  or,  to  Jest. 
Laetor,  r.  d.  p.  to  rejoice. 
Lamentor,  d.  p.  to  oewail. 
*tLignor,   m.    to  gather 

icood. 
Luctor,  d.  to  wrestle. 
Medicor,  i  d.  p.  to  heal. 
Meditor,  p  io  meditate. 
Mercor,  m.  r.  d.  p.  to  buy. 
Minor,  to  threaten. 
Miror,  u.  r.  d.  to  admire. 
Miseror,  d.  to  pity. 
Moderor,  u.  d.  to  govern. 


Modulor,  d.  p.  tomodttt:;ie. 
Moror,  r.  d.  to  delay. 
tMutuor,  p.  to  borrow. 
Negotior,  r.  to  traffic. 
*tNugor,  to  trijle. 
Obsonor,  m.  to  cater. 
Obtestor,  p.  to  beseech. 
Operor,  to  work. 
Opinor,  u.  r.  d.  to  think. 
Opitulor,  m.  to  help. 
t  Otior,  to  be  at  leisure. 
Pabiilor,  m.  d.  to  graze. 
Palor,  to  wander  about. 
Percontor,  m.  to  inquire. 
Periclitor,  d.  p.  to  try. 
tPiscor,  m.  to  Jish. 
Populor,   r.  d.   p.    to  lay 

waste. 
Prasdor,  ra.  p.  to  plunder. 
Prc'cor,  m.  u.  r.  d.  topi-ay. 
Proellor,  to  Jight. 
Recordor,  d.  to  recollect. 
Rimor,  d.  to  search. 
Rixor,  to  quarrel. 


*Rusticor,   ,lo  live  in  tha 

ccnintry. 
Sciscitor,  m.  p.  to  inquire. 
*ScItor,  m.  to  ask. 
Scrutor,  p.  to  search. 
Solor,  d.  to  comfort. 
Spatior,  to  walk  about. 
Speculor,  m.  r.  d.  to  spy 

out. 
tStipulor,  p.  to  bargain, 

stipulate. 
tSuavior,  d.  to  kiss. 
Suspicor,  to  suspect. 
Testificor,  p.   to  testify. 
Tester,  d.  p.  to  testify,   da 

detestor. 
Tutor,  to  defend. 
Vagor,  to  wander. 
Veneror,  d.  p.  to  venerate, 

worship. 
Venor,  m.  p.  to  hunt. 
Versor,  to  be  employed. 
Vocif  eror,  to  bawl. 


Note.  Some  deponents  of  the  first  conjugation  are  derived  from  nouns, 
and  signify  being  or  practising  that  which  the  noun  denotes;  as,  ancillari,  to  be 
a  handmaid ;  hariolari,  to  practise  soothsaying ;  from  ancilla  and  hai'i/ius. 


SECOND    CONJUGATION. 

§  167.  Verbs  of  the  second  conjugation  end  in  eo,  and  form 
their  second  and  third  roots  in  u  and  U ;  as,  moneo,  monm, 
monitum. 

The  following  hst  contains  most  of  the  regular  verbs  of  this  conju- 
gation, and  many  also  which  want  the  second  and  third  roots : — 


*Aceo,  to  he  sour. 

*jEgi-eo,  — ,  to  be  sick. 

*A]beo,  — ,  to  be  while. 

*Arceo,  d.  to  drive  aicay; 
part.  ad),  arctus  or  ar- 
tu8.  The  compounds 
change  a  into  e;  as, 
coerceo,  d.  to  restrain. 
exeroso,  r.  d.  to  exer- 
ciie. 

=*  Ajeo,  to  be  dry. 

*Aveo,  — ,  to  covet. 

*Crileo,  r.  to  he  warm. 

*Calleo,  — ,  to  be  harden- 
ed. *percalleo,  to  know 
well. 

*Calveo,  — ,  to  be  &♦  M. 

*Candeo.  to  be  white, 

*Caneo  to  be  hoary. 

*Caveo,  r.  d.  to  want. 

*  Cuvjo  — ,  toftion. 


*Clareo,  — ,  to  be  bright. 
*Clueo,  — ,  to  be  famous. 
*Denseo,  — ,  to  ifiicken. 
*DLnbeo,  — ,  to  sort  the 

voting  tablets. 
*D61eo,  r.  d.  to  grieve. 
*Egeo,  r.  to  want. 
*Ernlneo,  to  rise  above. 
*Flacceo,  to  droop. 
*Flaveo,  — ,  to  be  yellow. 
*Fir)reo,  to  blossom. 
*F«teo,  — ,  to  be  fetid. 
*Fn2;oo,  — ,  to  be  cold. 
*Frondeo,    — ,     to   bear 

leaves. 
Habeo,  r.  d.  to  have.    The 

compounds,  except  post- 

hiibeo,  change  a  iiito  I ; 

as.  ad-,  ex-,  pro-hibeo. 

cohlbeo,  d.  to  restrain. 

inhlbeo,  d.   to  kinder. 


*tperhibeo,d.  to  report. 

tposthabeo,  to  postpone. 

prsebeo,  {for  prsehlb- 

eo),     r.    d.    to   afford. 

*pr3ehIbeo,  — .  debeo, 

{for  dehabeo),  r.  d.  (A 

owe. 
*Hebeo,  — ,  to  he  dull. 
*Horreo,  d.  to  be  rough. 
*Humeo.  — .  to  be  moist. 
*Jaceo,  r.  to  lie. 
*Lacteo,  — ,  to  suck. 
*Langueo,  — ,  to  befaini 
*L;"lteo,  to  lie  hid. 
*Lenteo,  — ,  to  be  slow. 
*Liceo,  to  be  valued. 
*Liveo,  — ,  to  be  livid. 
*Jiriceo,  — ,  to  be  lean. 
*JIadeo,  to  be  wet. 
*Ma2reo,  — ,  to  grieve. 
Mtreo,    r.      to  deserve. 


130 


VERBS. — SECOND    AND    THIRD    ROOTS. 


§168 


tcommSreo,  to  fully  de- 
serve, fdemereo,  d.  to 
earn,  temereo,  tosfr«e 
out  one'' s  time.  *tper- 
mereo,  — ,  to  go  through 
service,  promfireo,  to 
deserve. 

Moneo,  r.  d.  to  advise. 
admoneo,  m.  r.  d.  to  re- 
mind, commoueo,  to 
impress  upon,  prsemo- 
neo,  to  forewarn. 

*Muceo,  — ,  to  be  mmddy. 

*Nigreo,  — ,  to  he  black. 

*Nlteo,  to  shine. 

Noceo,  m  -  to  hurt. 

*01eo,  to  smell. 

*Palleo,  to  be  pale. 


*Pareo,  m.  r.  d.  to  obey. 
*Pateo,  to  be  open. 
Placeo,  io  pilease. 
*Polleo,  — ,  to  be  able. 
*Puteo,  to  stink. 
*Putreo,  to  be  jmtrid. 
*Ren!deo,  — ,  to  glitter. 
*RTgeo,  to  be  stiff. 
*Ru)3eo,  to  be  red. 
*Scateo,  — ,  to  qush  forth. 
*Seueo,  — ,  tooe  old. 
*S31eo,  d.  to  be  silent. 
*Sordeo,  — ,  to  be  filthy. 
*Splendeo,  — ,  to  shine. 
*Squaleo,  — ,  to  be  foul. 
*Strideo,  — ,  to  creak. 
*Studeo,  d.  to  study. 
*Stupeo,  to  be  amazed. 


*Sueo,  — ,  to  be  i>.'«<. 
Taceo,  r.  d.  to  be  s:,lent. 

*Tepeo,  to  be  warr^. 

Terreo,  d.  to  terrify.  So 
deterreo,  to  deter,  tab- 
sterreo,  to  deter,  fcon- 
terreo,  fexterreo,  tper-- 
teiTCO,  to  frighten. 

*Timeo,  d.  to  fear. 

*Torpeo,  — ,  to  be  stiff. 

*Tumeo,  to  swell. 

*Valeo,  r.  to  be  able. 

*Vegeo,  — ,  to  arouse. 

*Vieo,  — ,  to  plait.  Pa. 
vietus,  shriveled. 

*Vigeo,  to  founsh. 

*Vireo,  to  be  green. 

*Uveo,  — ,  to  be  moist. 


§  168.     The  following  verbs  of  the  second  conjugation  are  ir- 
regular in  their  second  or  third  roots  or  in  both. 

Note  1.  As  the  proper  foiTa  of  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation  is,  o,  dvi,  dtum, 
of  the  fourth  io,  Ivi,  Hum,  so  that  of  the  second  would  be  eo,  evi,  etum.  Very 
few  of  the  latter  conjugation,  however,  retain  this  form,  but  most  of  them,  aa 
noticed  in  §  165,  Eeni.  1,  drop  in  the  second  root  the  connecting  vowel,  e,  and 
those  in  veo  drop  i;e  ,■  as,  cdveo,  (cdvevi)  cdvi,  (cavitum  or  cavltum)  cautuni. 
Others,  imitating  the  form  of  those  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation  whose  gen- 
eral root  ends  in  a  consonant,  add  s  to  form  the  second  and  third  roots.  Cf. 
\  165,  Rem.  1,- and  §171. 

Note  2.  Four  verbs  of  the  second  conjugation  take  a  reduplication  in  the 
parts  formed  from  the  second  root,  viz.  mordeo,  pendeo,  spondeo,  and  tondeo. 
See  §  163,  Rem. 


Aboleo,  -evi,  -itum,  r.  d.  to  efface. 

*A]geo,  alsi,  to  be  cold. 

Ardeo,  arsi,  arsum,  r.  to  burn. 

Audeo,  ausus  sum,  {rarely  ansi,  whence 
ausim,  §  183,  R.  1,)  r.  d.  to  dare. 

Augeo,  auxi,  auctum,  r.  d.  to  increase. 

Caveo,  cavi,  cautum,  m.  d.  to  beware. 

Censeo,  censui,  censum,  d.  to  think. 
recenseo,  -ui,  -um  or  -itum.  *per- 
ceuseo,  -ui.     *succenseo,  -ui,  d. 

Cieo,  civi,  citum,  to  excite.  There  is 
a  cognate  fwjn,  cio,  cf  the  fourth 
conjicgation,  both  of  the  simjde  verb 
and  of  its  compounds.  The  penult  of 
the  participles  excitus  and  concitus 
is  coimnon,  and  that  of  accitus  is  al- 
ways long. 

*Conniveo,  -nivi,  to  wink  at. 

Deleo,  -evi,  -etam,  d.  to  blot  out. 

Poceo,  docui,  doctum,  d.  to  teach. 

*Faveo,  favi,  fautunis,  (o  favor. 

*Ferveo,  ferbui,  to  buil.  Sometimes 
fervo,  vi,  of  the  third  conjugation. 

Fleo,  flevi,  itetum,  r.  d.  to  weep. 

F6\so,fdvi,  fOtum,  d.  to  cherish. 


*Fulgeo,  fulsi,  to  sAiwe.    Fulgo,  ofth* 

third  conjugation,  is  also  in  use. 
Gaudeo,    gavisus   siun,   r.    to  rejoicts. 

§  142,  2. 
*Ha3reo,  hsesi,  hassurus,  to  stick.     8* 

ad-,  CO-,  in-,  ob-  hsereo;  but  *subha- 

reo,  — . 
Indulgeo,  indulsi,  indultum,  r.  d.  to  i» 

dulge. 
Jiibeo,  jussi,  jussum,  r.  d.  to  order. 
*Liiceo,  luxi,  to  shine,  polliiceo,  -luxi 

-luctum. 
*Lugeo,  luxi,  d.  to  mourn. 
*Maneo,  mansi,  mansum,  m.  r.  d.  4 

remain. 
Misceo,  miscui,  mistum  or  mixtum. 

misturus,  d.  to  mix. 
Mordeo,  momordi  morsum,  d.  to  bite. 

remordeo,  -di,  -morsum,  r. 
Moveo,  movi,  raotum,  r.  d.  to  Tnove. 
Mulceo,  raulsi,  mulsum,  d.   to  soo*he. 

permuiceo,  pennulsi,  permulsura  an<i 

permiilctum,  to  rid>  gently. 
*Mulgeo,   mulsi    m-    muJxi,    to  mtlk. 

euiulgeo,  — ,  emulsum,  to  mtlk  out. 


§  169-171.  VERBS. SECOND    AND    XniRD    ROOTS 


131 


Neo,  nevi,  netuin,  to  spin. 

*Paveo,  pavi,  d.  to  fear. 

♦Peiiileo,  pepeudi,  to  har.g.  *hiipen- 
deo,  — .     propendeo,  — ,  proijeiisum. 

Pleo,  (oSsoktt).  compleo,  -evi,  -eturn, 
to  till.    So  (he  other  compounds. 

Prandeo,  pr:iiidi,  pransuni,  r.  to  dine. 

Rideo,  risi,  nsum,  m.  r.  d.  to  laugh. 

*SC'deo,  sedi,  sessum,  m.  r.  to  sit. 
The  compounds  loilh  inonosyllabic  pre- 
positions change  e  into  i,  in  the  first 
root ;  as,  iusideo,  insedi,  insessum. 
*dissideo,  -sildi.  So  prsesideo,  and 
rarely  circumsideo. 

Soleo,  solitus  sum  atid  rarely  solui,  to 
be  accustomed.    §  142,  2. 

♦  Sorbeo,  sorbui,  to  suck  in.  So  *ex- 
sorbeo :  but  *resorbeo,  — .  *absor- 
beo,  -sorbui  or  -sorpsi. 


Spondeo,  spopondi,  sponsini    x>  pro 

mise.  See  ^  163,  Rem. 
*StrIdeo,  idi,  to  whiz. 
Suadeo,  suasi,  suasuin,  r.  d.  io  advise 
Teneo,  ttuui,  teutum,  r.  d.  to  hold.     Thf 

compouiuls  change  e  into  i  in  the  first 

and  secimd  roots ;  as,   detineo,   deti- 

nui,  detentum.     *attineo,  -tiiiui.    Sc 

pertineo. 
Tergco,  tersi,  tersum,  to  wipe.    Tergo, 

of  the  third  conjugation,  is  also  in  use. 
Tondeo,  totondi,  tonsum,  to  shear.   The 

ccnnpcmnds  have  the  perfect  tondi. 
Torqueo,  torsi,  tortum,  d.  io  twist. 
Ton-eo,  torrui,  tostum,  to  roast. 
*Turgeo,  tursi,  to  swell. 
*Uvgeo  or  urgueo,  ursi,  d.  to  urge. 
Video,  vidi,  visum,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  see, 
Voveo,  vovi,  votum,  d.  to  vow. 


§  iGO.     Impersonal  Verbs  of  the  Second  Conjugation. 


Decet,  decuit,  it  becomes. 

Libet,  libuit  or  libitum  est,  it  pleases, 

is  agreeable. 
Licet,  licuit  or  licitimi  est,  it  is  lawful, 

or  permitted. 
Liquet,  liquit,  it  is  clear,  evident. 
MisOret,    miseruit  or  miseritum   est, 

it  moves  to  pity ;  miseret  me,  I  pity. 
Oportet,  oportuit,  it  behooves. 

Note.   Lubet  is  sometimes  written  for 


Piget,  piguit  or  pigitum  est,  d.  it  trou- 
bles, grieves. 

Pcenitet,  pcenituit,  pcenitiirus,  d.  it  re- 
pents; pcenitet  me,  I  regret. 

Pudet,  puduit  or  puditum  est,  d. ;  t( 
shames  ;  pudet  me,  /  am  ashamed. 

Tsedet,  taeduit  or  tsesum  est,  it  disgusts 
or  wearies,   pertasdet,  pertaesum  est. 

libet,  especially  in  the  comic  writers. 


§  ITO.     Deponent  Verbs  of  the  Second  Conjugation. 


Fateor,  fassus,  r.  d.  p.  to  confess.  The 
compounds  change  a  into  i  in  the  first 
root,  and  into  e  tn  the  third ;  as,  con- 
flteor,  confcssus,  d.  p.  to  ac/cnowl- 
edge.  *tdift'iteor,  to  deny,  profi- 
teer, professus,  d.  p.  to  declare. 

Liceor,  licitus,  to  bid  a  price. 


*M6deor,  d.  to  cure. 
llOreor,  meritus,  to  deserve. 
Misereor,  miseritus  or  misertus,  to  pity. 
PoUiceor,  poUicitus,  p.  to  promise. 
Reor,  ratus,  to  think,  suppose. 
Tueor,  tuitus,  d.  p.  to  protect. 
Vereor,  veritus,  d.  p.  to  fear. 


THIRD    CONJUGATION. 

§  171.  Li  the  third  conjugation,  when  the  first  root  ends 
with  a  consonant,  the  second  root  is  regularly  formed  by  adduig 
s  ;  when  it  ends  with  a  vowel,  the  first  and  second  roots  are  the 
same :  the  thii-d  root  is  formed  by  adding  t ;  as,  cai-po,  carpst, 
^ai-ptMrn  ;  arguo,  argu?,  argut^^m. 

In  annexing  s  and  t,  certain  changes  occur  in  the  final  consonant 
of  the  root : — 

1.  The  palatals  c,  g,  qu,  and  also  h,  at  the  end  of  the  first  root,  form  with  i 
tho  double  letter  x  in  the  second  root;  in  the  third  root,  c  remains,  and  the 
others  are  changed  into  c  i  ilore  t;  iis,  dico,  {dicsi,  i.  e.),  dijci,  dictum;  regq 
(regsi,  i.  e.),  rexi,  rectum;  velio,  vexi,  rectum ;  c6quo,  coxi,  coctum. 


132  VERBS. — SECOND    AND    THIRD   ROOTS.  §171 

Note.  Fltio  and  st^ruo  form  their  second  and  third  roots  after  the  analogy  of 
verbs  whcse  first  root  ends  in  a  palatal  or  h. 

2.  B  is  changed  into  p  before  s  and  t ;  as,  scrlbo,  scrijjsi,  sciiptum. 

3.  D  and  t,  before  s,  are  either  dropped,  or  changed  iiito  s  ;  as,  claudo,  claud; 
cedo,  cessi;  inilto,  misi.  Cf.  §  56,  I,  Kera.  1.  After  m,  p  is  sometimes  inserted 
before  s  and  t ;  as,  sumo,  sutnpsi,  sumptum.  R  is  changed  to  s  before  s  and  t  in 
giro  and  uro. 

4.  Some  other  consonants  are  dropped,  or  changed  into  s,  in  certain  verbs. 

Exc.  1.  Many  verbs  whose  first  root  ends  in  a  consonant,  do  no! 
add  s  to  form  the  second  loot. 

(a.)  Of  these,  some  have  the  second  root  the  same  as  the  first,  but  the  vowel 
of  the  second  root,  if  a  monosyllable,  is  long ;  as, 

Bibo,        Exciido,        Ico,  Mando,  Scabo,  Solvo,       Verro, 

Edo,  Fodio,  Lambo,       Prehendo,       Scando,  Strido,      Verto, 

Emo,        Fiigio,  Lego,  PsaUo,  Sido,  ToUo,        Volvo; 

to  which  add  the  compounds  of  the  obsolete  cando,  fendo,  and  nviO. 

(h.)  Some  make  a  change  in  the  first  root.  Of  these,  some  change  a  vowel, 
some  drop  a  consonant,  some  prefix  a  redupKcation,  others  admit  two  or  more 
of  these  changes ;  as. 

Ago,  egi.  Capio,  cepi.  Facio,  feci. 

Findo,  fidi.  Frango,  fregi.  Fundo,  fudi. 

Jacio,  jeci.  Linquo,  liqui.  Eumpo,  rupi. 

Scindo,  scidi.  Sisto,  stiti.  Vmco,  vici. 

Those  which  have  a  reduplication  are 

Cado,  cecidi.  Csedo,  cecidi.  Cano,  cecini. 

Curro,  cucurri.  Disco,  didlci.  FaUo,  fefeUi. 

Pago,  (ohs.)  pepigi  Parco,  peperci.  Pario,  peperi. 

aiul  pegi.  Pedo,  pepedi.  Pello,  pepiili. 

Pendo,  pependi.  Posco,  poposci.  Pungo,  pupugi. 

Tango,  tetigi.  Tendo,  tetendi.  Tundo,  tiitudi. 

Exc.  2.  Some,  after  the  analogy  of  the  second  conjugation,  add  u 
to  the  first  root  of  the  verb  ;  as, 

Alo,  alui,  etc.      Consiilo,  Gemo,  Eapio,  Tremo, 

Colo,  Depso,  Geno,  (oSs.)        Strepo,         Volo, 

Compesco,  Fremo,  Molo,  Texo,  Vomo. 

Meto,  messui ;  and  pono,  posui ;  add  «m,  with  a  change  in  the  root. 

Exc.  3.  The  following,  after  the  analogy  of  the  fourth  conjugation, 
ftdd  w  to  the  first  root : — 

Arcesso,         Cupio,  Lacesso,        Riido,        Tero,  dropping  e. 

Capesso,        Incesso,        Peto,  Quajro,  vAili  a  change  ofx  into  s. 

Exc.  4.  The  following  add  v,  with  a  change  in  the  root;  those  in 
no  and  $co  dropping  n  end  sc,  and  those  having  er  before  n  changing 
it  to  ?'g  or  ra, : — 

Cresco,  Pasco,  Scisco,  Spemo,         Lino,  Sero, 

Nosco,  Quiesco,         Cemo,  Stemo,  Sino,         toscno. 

Exc.  5.  (a.)  The  third  root  of  verbs  whose  first  root  ends  in  d  or  t, 
and  some  in  g,  add  s,  instead  of  t,  to  the  root,  either  dropping  the  d,  t, 
Aivl  g,  or  changing  them  intos;  as,  claudo,  clausum;  defendo,  de 
fensmn;  cedo,  ce.'fsum  ;  Jlecto,  Jlexum, ;  figo,  fixum.     But  the  com- 
pounds of  lo  add  li;  as,  perdo,  perdilum. 


§172. 


VERBS. — SECOND   AND   THIRD    ROOTS. 


138 


(6.)  The  following,  also,  add  s,  with  a  change  of  the  root : — ■ 

Excello,  Fallo,  Pello,  Spargo,  Verro. 

Percello,  Mergo,  Premo,  Velio, 

Exc.  6.  The  following  add  t,  with  a  change  of  the  root ;  those 
having  n,  nc,  ng,  nqu,  or  tnp  at  the  end  of  the  first  root  dropping  n 
and  771  in  the  third  : — 

Cemo,      Fingo,         Gero,       Sero,        Spemo,        Stringo,        Uro, 
Colo,         Frango,       Kumpo,  Sisto,        Stemo,         Tero,  Vinco; 

to  which  add  the  compounds  of  linquo,  and  verbs  in  sco  with  the  second  roo< 
in  v;  the  latter  drop  sc  before  </  as,  nosco,  novi,  tiotum;  except  pasco,  which 
drops  c  only. 

Exc.  7.    (a.)   The  following  have  tt : — 

Bibo,  Elicio,  Molo,        Pono,  tviih  a  tJiange  of  on  into  6s. 

Geno,  (o6s.  ybrw  q/'gigno,)      Vomo,      Sino,  dropping  n. 

(b.)  The  following,  like  verbs  of  the  fourth  conjugation,  add  It  to 
the  first  root : — 


Arcesso, 
Facesso, 


Ciipio, 
Loj  -esso, 


Peto,  Tero,  dropping  e. 

Quaero,  mth  a  change  afr  into  s. 

For  other  irregularities  occurring  in  this  conjugation,  see  §  172-174. 

§  ITS.  The  following  list  contains  most  of  the  simple  verbs, 
both  regular  and  irregular,  in  the  third  conjugation,  with  such  of 
their  compounds  as  require  particular  notice : — 


Acuo,  acui,  acutum,  d.  to  sharpen. 

Ago,  egi,  actum,  r.  d.  to  drive.  So  cLr- 
cumago,  cdgo,  and  p6ra,go.  *ambi- 
go,  — ,  to  doubt.  So  satago.  The 
other  compounds  change  a  into  i,  in 
the  Jirst  root ;  as,  exlgo,  exegi,  ex- 
actum,  to  drive  out.  *prodigo,  -egi, 
to  squander.   See  ^  189,  2. 

Alo,  alui,  altum,  and  later  alltum,  d. 
to  nourish. 

*  Ango,  anxi,  to  strangle. 

Arguo,  argui,  argutum,  d.  to  convict. 

Arcesso,  -cessivi,  -cessitum,  r.  d.  to 
call  for.  Pass.  inf.  arcessiri  or  ar- 
cessi. 

*Batuo,  batui,  d.  to  heat. 

Bibo,  bibi,  bibitum,  d.  to  diink. 

*Cado,  cecidi,  casiirus,  to  fall.  The 
compounds  change  a  into  i,  in  the  first 
roct,  and  drop  the  reduplication  ;  as, 
occido,  -cidi,  -casum,  r.  to  set. 

Cwdo,  cecidi,  cassum,  r.  d.  to  cut.  The 
compounds  change  se  into  T,  and  drop 
tlie  reduplication;  as,  occido,  -cidi, 
-cisnm. 

Cando,  (obsolete,)  synonymous  teithcan- 
deo  of  the  second  conjugation.  Hence 
accendo,  -cendi,  -censum,  d.  to  kindle. 
So  incendo.  succeudo. 

*Ca,no,  cf'cini,  d.  to  sing.  The  contr- 
p'mnds  change  a  into  1 ;  as,  *concIno, 
12 


-cinui.  So  occino,  prseclno.  *accl- 
no,  — .  So  inciuo,  intercino,  succl- 
no,  recino. 

*Cape^o,  -ivi,  r.  d.  to  undertake. 

Capio,  cepi,  captum,  r.  d.  to  take.  So 
antecapio.  The  other  compound$ 
change  a  into  I,  in  the  first  root,  and 
into  e  in  the  third;  as,  declpio,  dece- 
pi,  deceptum. 

Carpo,  carpsi,  carptnm,  d.  to  pluck. 
The  compounds  change  a  intoe;  at, 
decerpo,  decerpsi,  decerptum. 

Cedo,  cessi,  cessum,  r.  to  yield. 

CeUo,  (obsolete.)  excello,  -ceUui,  -oel- 
sum,  to  excel.  *antecello,  — .  8o 
prsecello,  rfeceUo.  percello,  -ciili, 
-culsum,  to  strike. 

Cemo,  crevi,  cretum,  d.  to  decree. 

*Cemo,  — .  to  see. 

Cingo,  cinxi,  cinctum,  d.  to  gird. 

*Clango,  — ,  to  clang. 

Claudo,  clausi,  clausum,  r.  d.  to  thtU. 

The  compounds  change  au  tntoft;  cu, 
occlQdo,  occlusi,  occlusum,  to  Bhui 
up. 

*t Claudo,  — ,  to  limp. 

*tClepo,  clepsi,  rarely  clepi,  to  $te<iL 

Colo,  colui,  cuitum,  d.  to  till.  toccfiJo, 
-cului,  -cultum,  d.  to  hide. 

Como,  compsi,  comptum,  to  deck. 

*Compe3co,  -pescui,  to  rettrain. 


134 


VEEBS. — SECOND    AND    THIRD   ROOTS. 


§172 


Consulo,  -sului,  -sultum,  m.  r.  d.  to 

consult. 
Coquo,  coxi,  coctum,  m.  d.  to  cook. 
Credo,  credJdi,  creditum,  r.  d.  to  be- 

Ueve. 
*Cresco,   crevi,   to  grow,    concresco, 

-crevi,  -cretum. 

Ciibo  is  of  the  first   conjugation.     Cf. 

§165.    *accumbo,-cubuij  toZtecfottw. 

So  the  other  compounds  winch  insert  m. 

*Cudo,  — ,  to  forge,    excudo,  -cudi, 

-cusum,  d.  to  stamp. 
Cupio.  cupivi,  cupitum,  d.  to  desire. 

Subj.  imperf.  cupiret.  Lucr.  1,  72. 
*Curro,   cucurri,    cursurus,     to   run. 
conciirro,  succurroy  and  transcurro, 
drop  the  reduplication ;  the  other  corn- 
pounds  sometimes  drop,  and  sometimes 
retain  it ;  as,  decurro,  decurri,  and 
decucuiTi,  decursum.     *antecurro, 
— .     So  circumcurro. 
*Dego,  dftgi,  d.  to  live. 
Demo,  dempsi,  demptum,  r.  d.  to  take 

away. 
fDeps'o,  depsui,  depstum,  to  knead. 
Dice,  dixi,  dictum,  u.  r.  d.  to  say. 
*Disco,  didici,  discitunis,  d.  to  learn. 
*Dispesco,  — ,  to  separate. 
Pivido,  divisi,  di-sasum,  r.  d.  to  divide. 
Do  is  of  the  first  conjugation,    abdo, 
-didi,  -ditum,  d.  to  hide.     So  condo, 
indo.     addo,  -didi,    -dltum,  r.  d.  to 
add.     So  dedo,   edo,   prodo^reddo, 
ti-ado,  vendo.     fdido,  -didi,  -ditum, 
to  distribute.     So  abdo,  sub  do.  perdo, 
-didi,  -ditum,  m.  r.  d.    abscondo,  -di 
or  -didi,  -ditum  or  -sum. 
Duco,  duxi,  ductum,  m.  r.  d.  to  lead. 
Edo,  edi,  esura,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  eat. 
Exuo,  exui,  exutum,  d.  to  stri])  off. 
Emo,  emi,  emptum,  r.  d.  to  buy.     So 
coemo.    The  other  compounds  change 
e  to  i ;  as,  eximo,  -emi,  -emptum. 
Facesso,  -cessi,  -cessitum,  to  execute. 
Facio,  feci,  factum,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  do. 
Compounded  with    a   preposition,    it 
changes  a  into  i  in  the  first  root^  and 
into  6  in  the  third,  ma!ces  -fice  in  the 
imperative,  and  has  a  regular  passive. 
Compounded  with  other  words,  it  re- 
tains a  when  of  this  conjugation,  makes 
ta,c  in  the  imperative,  aim  has  the  pas- 
sive, fio,  factum.    See  §  ISO. 
F.allo,    fefelli,    falsum,   d.    to  deceive. 

*refello,  -felli,  d.  to  refute. 
Fendo,  {obsnkte. )  defendo,  -fenui,  -fen- 
sum,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  defend,  ofiendo, 
-fendi,  -f  risum,  d.  to  offend. 
Fero,  tiili,  latum,  r.  d.  to  bear.  See 
§  179.  A  perfect  tetuli  is  rare,  dis 
compounds  cweafiero  attuli,  allatum; 


aufero,    abstiili,    ablatum;    differo, 
distuli,   dilatum;    confero,    contuli, 
collfitum;    iuft-ro,_  iutuli,    illatum; 
offero,  obtiili,  oblatum;  effero,  ex- 
tiili,  elatum;  suffOro,  sustuli,  subla- 
tum;  and  circum-,  per-,  trans-,  de-, 
pro-,  ante-,  prsef  ero,  -tiili,  -latiim. 
*Fervo,  vi,  to  boil.    Cf.  fei-veo,  2rf  conj. 
Fido,  — ,  fisus,  to  trust.  See  §  162,18. 
confido,  confisus  sum  or  confidi,  to 
rely  on.    difl^ido,    diffi.us  sum,    to 
distrust. 
Figo,  fixi,  fixum,  r.  rarely  fictum,  to  fix. 
Findo,  fidi,  fissum,  d.  to  cleave. 
Fingo,  finxi,   fictum,  d.  to  feign. 
Flecto,  flexi,  flexum,  r.  d.  to  bend. 
*Fligo,    flixi,    to  dash.      So   confiigo. 
afBigo,  -flixi,  -flictum,  to  afflict.     So 
infligo.     profligo  is  cf  the  first  conju- 
gation. 
Fluo,  fluxi,  fluxum,  (fluctum,  obs.)  r. 

to  fiow. 
Fodio,   fodi,   fossum,  d.   to  dig.     Old 
pres.  inf.  pass,  fodiri:    so  also  ef- 
fodiri. 
Frango,  fregi,  fractum,  r.  d.  to  break 
The  compounds  change  a  into  \,  in  the 
first  root;  as,   Lnfringo,   infregi,   iu- 
fractum,  to  break  in  uj)on. 
*Fremo,  fremui,  d.  to  roar,  howl. 
Frendo,  — ,  fresum  or  fressum,  to  gnash. 
Frigo,  frixi,  Mctum,  rarely  frixum,  to 

roast. 
*Fugio,  f  Qgi,  f  ugitiirus,  d.  to  ^ee. 
*Fulgo,  — ,  to  flash. 
Fundo,  f  udi,  f  iisum,  r.  d.  to  pour. 
*Fiiro,  — ,  to  rage. 
*Gemo,  gemui,  d.  to  groan. 
Gero,  gessi,  gestiim,  r.  d.  to  bear. 
Gigno,  (o6soZe<e  geno,)  genui,  genitum, 

r.  d.  to  beget. 
*Glisco,  — ,  to  grow. 
*Gliibo,  — ,    to   peel,      deglubo,    — , 

-gluptum. 
Gruo,  (obsolete.')    *congruo,  -grui,    10 

agree.     So  Lngruo. 
Ico,  ici,  ictum,  r.  to  strike. 
Imbuo,  imbui,  imbutum,  d.  to  imbue. 
*Lncesso,  -cessivi  or  -cessi,  to  attack. 
tinduo,  indui,  indutum,  to  put  on. 
jacio,  jeci,  jactum,   d.   to  cast.     The 
compounds  change  a  into  I  in  lie  first 
root,  and  into  e  in  the  third.    (§-163, 
Exc.  3);  as,  rejicio,  rejeci,  rejectum. 
Jungo,  juiixi,  junctum,  r.  d.  to  Join. 
Lacesso,  -cessivi,  -cessitum,  r.  d.  to  pro- 
voke. 
Lacio,  {obsolete. )   The  compounds  change 
a  t'jitoi;  as,  allicio,  -lexi,  -lectum,  d. 
to  allw-e.     So  illlcio,  pellicio.    ellci0| 
-licui,  -iScitum,  to  draw  out. 


§i;2. 


VERBS. — SECOND    AND    THIRD    ROOTS. 


135 


Lsedo,  laesi,  Isesum,  m.  r.  to  hurt.  The 
compounds  chanye  as  into  i ;  as,  illido, 
illisi,  illisum,  to  dadi  against. 

♦Lambo,  Iambi,  to  lick. 

Lego,  legi,  lectuin,  r.  d.  to  read.  So 
allego,  perlego,  pra?16go,  relego,  sub- 
lego,  and  translego;  the  other  com- 
pounds change  e  into  i ;  as,  colligo, 
coUcgi,  coUectum,  to  collect.  But  tlie 
following  add  s  to  form  the  second 
root;  ^  171,  1;  diligo, -lexi, -lectum, 
to  ktve.  iutelllgo,  -lexi,  -lectum,  u. 
r.  d.  to  understand,  negligo,  -lexi, 
-lectum,  r.  d.  to  neglect. 

Lingo,  — ,  linctum,  d.  to  lick.  *delin- 
go,  — ,  to  lick  uj). 

Lino,  livi  or  le^'i,  litum,  d.  to  daub. 

*Linquo,  liqui,  d.  to  leave,  relinquo, 
-liqni,  -lictum,  r.  d.  deliuquo,  -liqui, 
-lictum.     So  derelinquo. 

Ludo,  liisi,  Ifisum,  m.  r.  to  play. 

*Luo,  iui,  luitiii-us,  d.  to  atone,  abluo, 
-lui,  -liitum,  r.  d.  diluo,  -Iui,  -IQ- 
tum,  d.     So  eliio. 

Miindo,  mandi,  mansum,  d.  to  chew. 

Mergo,  mersi,  mersum,  r.  d.  to  dip.  So 
imniergo;  but  pi-es.  inf.  pass,  im- 
mergeri,  Col.  5,  9,  3. 

Mt'to,  messui,  messum,  d.  to  reap. 

Metuo,  metui,  metiitum,  d.  to  fear. 

*f  Mingo,  minxi,  mictum,  {sup.)  to  make 
water. 

Mlnuo,  niinui,  minutum,  d.  to  lessen. 

Mitto,  misi,  missum,  r.  d.  to  send. 

Molo,  molui,  molitum,  to  gnnd. 

Mungo,  {obsolete.)  emungo,  -munxi, 
-munctunij  to  icipe  the  nuse. 

Necto,  nexi,  nexum,  d.  to  knit,  iimec- 
to,  -nexui,  -nexum.  So  annecto, 
connecto. 

*Ningo  or  -guo,  ninxi,  to  snow. 

Nosco,  novi,  notum,  d.  to  lea7-n.  ag- 
nosco,  -novi,  -nitum,  d.  to  recognize. 
cognosco,  -novi,  -nitum,  u.  r.  d.  to 
know.  So  recognosco.  *intemosco, 
novi,  to  distinguish  between,  prjecog- 
nosco, — ,  praecognitum,  tofore-hurw. 
*dignosco,  — .  So  prsenosco.  ignos- 
00,  -novi,  -notum,  d  to  j^o-rdon. 

Nubo,  nupsi,  or  nupta  sum,  nuptuan, 
m.  r.  to  marry. 

Nuo,  {obsole-te,)  to  nod.  *abntio,  -nui, 
-nuiturus,  d.  to  refuse.  *annuo,  -nui. 
So  innuo,  renuo. 

■*01o,  olui,  to  smell. 

Fando,  — ,  passuni  or  pansum,  to  open. 
So  expando.    dispando,  — ,  -pansum. 

Pago,  {obs.  tlie  same  as  paco  whence  pJl- 
eiscor,)  pepigi,  pactum,  to  bargain: 
hence 

Paugo,  panxi  if  pegi,pactuu:  paactu- 


rus,  d.  to  drive  in.  compingo,  -pSgi, 
-pactum.  So  impingo.  *oppango, 
-pegi.  *depango,  — .  So  repaugo, 
suppingo. 

*Farco,  ix'^perci  rarely  parsi,  parsums, 
to  spa*-e.  Some  of  Ote  compomidt 
change  a  to  e ;  as,  *comparco  or  com- 
perco.    *imperco,  — . 

Pario,  peperi,  partum,  pariturus,  d,  US 
bring  forth.  The  comjiounds  are  of 
the  fourth  conjugation. 

Pasco,  pavi,  pastum,  m.  r.  d.  to  feed. 

Pecto,  — ,  pexum,  and  pectitum,  d.  to 
comb.     So  depecto.     re  pecto. 

*Pedo,  pepedi.     *oppedo,  — . 

PeUo,  pepuli,  pulsum,  d.  to  di-ive.  Itt 
compounds  are  not  reduplicated. 

Pendo,  pCpendi,  pensum,  r.  to  weigh. 
The  compouwh  drop  the  reduplication. 
See  §  163,  £xc.  1. 

Peto,  petivi,  petitum,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  ask. 

Pingo,  pLuxi,  pictum,  to  paint. 

Pinso,  pinsi,  pinsltum,  pinsum  or  pis- 
turn,  to  pound. 

*Plango,  planxi,  plancturus,  to  lament. 

Plaudo,  plausi,  plausum,  d.  to  clap,  ap- 
plaud. So  applaudo.  *tcircum- 
plaudo,  — .  The  other  compon/ndt 
change  au  into  5. 

Plecto,  — ,  plexum,  d.  to  twine. 

*Pluo,  plui  or  pliivi,  to  rain. 

Pono,  posui,  {anciently  posJvi),  posl- 
tum,  r.  d.  to  jylace. 

*tPorricio,  — ,  to  offer  sacrifice, 

*Posco,  poposci,  d.  to  demand. 

Prehendo,  /    <•  j    ^       • 

Prendo,      j  -^''  -^"™'  ^-  ^-  ^  ^^'^• 

Premo,  pressi,  pressum,  r.  d.  to  press. 
The  compounds  change  e  into  I,  in  the 
first  root;  as,  imprimo,  impress!, 
impressum,  to  impress. 

Promo,  prompsi,  promptum,  r.  d.  to 
bring  out. 

*Psallo,  psaUi,  to  play  on  a  stringed  in- 
strument. 

Pungo,  piipiigi,  punctum,  to  prick. 
compmigo,  -punxi,  -punctum.  So 
dispungo,  expungo.  interpungo,  — , 
-punctimi.     *repungo,  — . 

Quajro,  qu.-esivi,  quaesitum,  m.  r.  d.  to 
seek.  The  cmnpounds  change  as  into 
i;  as,  requTro,  requisivi,  requisitum, 
to  seek  again. 

Quatio,  — ,  quassum,  to  shake.  The 
compounds  change  qua  into  en;  at, 
concutio,  -cussi,  -cussum,  d.  dis- 
cutio,  -cussi,  -ciissum,  r.  d. 

Quicsco,  quievi,  quietum,  r.  d.  to  rest 

Rado,  rasi,  rasuni,  d.  to  shave. 

Rapio,  rapui,  rr.ptum,  r.  d.  to  snatch. 
The  compoundi  change  &  into  I  in  On 


136 


TEEBS. — SECOND    AND    THIKD    ROOTS. 


§172 


Jirst  and  second  roofs,  and  into  e'in 
the  third;  as,  diripio,  -ripui,  -reptum, 
m.  r.  So  eripio  and  praailpio. 
Bego,  rexi,  rectum,  r.  d.  to  rule.     The 
comjxiunds  change  e  into  i,  in  the  Jirst 
root;    as,   dingo,   direxi,   directum. 
*per20,  {for  penlgo),  pen-exi,  r.  to 
go  forward,     surgo   {for    siirrigo), 
SHirexi,  surrectum,  r.  d.  to  rise.    So 
porrigo  {for  prorigo),  to  stretch  out. 
*Kepo,  repsi,  to  creep. 
Rodo,  rosi,  rosum,  r.  to  gnaw,   ab-,  ar-, 

e-,  ob-,  prje-rodo,  waiil  the  perfect. 
*Rudo,  nidlvi,  to  bray. 
Rumpo,  rupi,  ruptum,  r.  d.  to  break. 
Ruo,   mi,    rutum,    miturua,    to   fall. 
■    dlmo,   -rui,    -mtum,   d.     So  obruo. 

*coiTuo,  -mi.   So  uTuo. 
*Sapio,  sapivi,  to  be  vise.     The  com- 
poumls  change  a  into  i ;  as,  *resipio, 
-slpivi  or  -sipiii.     *desipio,  — ,  to  be 
silly. 
♦tScabo,  scabi,  to  scratch. 
Scalpo,  scalpsi,  scalptum,  to  engrave. 
Salo  or  sallo,  —  salsum,  to  salt. 
*Scando,  — ,  d.  to  climb.   The  compounds 
change  a  into  e ;  as,  ascendo,  ascendi, 
ascensum,  r.  d.   descendo,  descendi, 
(anciently  descendldi,)  de8censum._ 
Scuido,  scidi,  (anciently  sciscidi),  scis- 

sum,  d.  to  ctit. 
Scisco,  scivi,  scitum,  d.  to  ordain. 
Scribo,  scripsi,  scriptura,  r.  d.  to  wrnie. 
Sculpo,  sculpsi,  sculptura,  d.  to  cai-ve. 
Sero,  sevi,  satum,  r.  d.  to  sow.    conse- 
ro,  -sevi,  -situm.     So  insero,  r.,  and 
obscro. 
Sero,  — ,  sertum,  to  entwine.     Its  cmn- 
poundshave  -semi;  as,  assero,  -sera.i, 
-sertum,  r.  d. 
*Serpo,  seqjsi,  to  creep. 
*Sido,  sidi,  to  settle.   Its  compounds  have 

generally  sedi,  sessum,  from  sedeo. 
*Sino,  sivi,  situms,  to  jiermit.    desino, 
desivi,  desitum,  r.  §  284,  R.  3,  Exc.  2. 
Sisto,  stiti,  statum,  to  stop.    *absisto, 
-stlti.     So  the  other  compounds;  but 
circumsisto  wants  the  perfect. 
Solvo,  solvi,  soliitum,  r.  d.  to  loose. 
Spargo,  sparsi,  sparsum,  r.  d.  to  spread. 
The  compounds  change  a  into  e ;  as, 
respergo,  -spersi,  -spersimi ;  but  with 
circum  and  m,  a  sometimes  remains. 
Sp^cio,     (obsolete.)       The    compounds 
change  e  into  I,  in  the  first  root;  as, 
aspicio,  aspexi,  aspectum,  d.  to  look 
at.      inspicio,    inspexi,    inspectum. 
r.  d. 
Speruo,  sprrvi,  spretum,  d.  to  desjnse. 
*TSpuo,  «y»  i,  to  spit.     *respuo,  res- 
^ui,  d. 


Statue,  statui,  statutum,  d.  to  place- 
The  comjiounds  change  a  into  i;  a«i 
instituo,  institui,  institutum,  to  in- 
stitute. 

Steruo,  sti-avi,  sti-atum,  d.  to  strew. 

*Stemuo,  stemui,  to  sneeze. 

*Sterto,  — ,  to  snore.  *t<iesterto,  de- 
stertui. 

*Stinguo,  — ,  to  extinguish,  distingue, 
distinxi,  distinctum.  So  exstinguo, 
r.  d. 

*Strepo,  sti-epui,  to  malce  a  noise. 

*Strido,  stridi,  to  creak. 

Stringo,  strinxi,  strictum,  r.  d.  to  bind 
or  tie  tight. 

Stmo,  striixi,  structum,  d.  to  build. 

Sugo,  suxi,  suctum,  to  suck. 

Sumo,  sumpsi,  sumptum,  r.  d.  to  take. 

Suo,  — ,  siitum,  d.  to  seio.  So  consuo, 
dissuo.  insuo,  -sui,  sQtum.  *as- 
suo,  — . 

Tago,  (very  rare),  to  touch.    Hence 

Tango,  tetlgi,  tactiim,  r.  d.  to  touch. 
The  compounds  change  a  into  i  in  the 
first  root,  and  drop  the  redupUcaiicm ; 
as,  contingo,  contigi,  contactum,  r. 

Tego,  texi,  tectum,  r.  d.  to  cover. 

*Temuo,  — ,  d.  to  despise,     contemno, 

■  -tempsi,  -temptum,  d. 

Tendo,  tetendi,  tentum  or  tensum,  to 
stretch.  The  compcninds  drop  the  re- 
diqMcation ;  as,  extendo,  -teudi,  -ten- 
tum or  -tensum.  So  in-,  os-,  and  re- 
tendo.  detendo  has  teusum.  The 
other  compounds  have  tentura. 

*tTergo,  tersi,  tersum,_to  wipe.  Ter- 
geo,  of  the  second  conjugation  has  the 
same  second  and  third  roots. 

Tero,  trivi,  til  turn,  d.  to  rub. 

Texo,  texui,  textum,  d.  to  weave. 

Tingo  or  tinguo,  tiuxi,  tinctum,  r.  d. 
to  moisten,  tinge. 

*Tollo,  anciently  tetuli,  rarely  tolli,  d. 
to  raise.  The  perfect  and  supine  sus- 
txili  and  sublatum  froin  suffero  take 
the  place  of  the  perfect  ami  sttjnne  of 
tollo  and  "sustollo.  *sustoUo,  — ,  r. 
to  raise  zip,  to  take  away.  *attoilo, 
— .    So  extollo. 

Traho,  traxi,  tractum,  r.  d.  to  draw. 

*Trerao,  tremiii,  d.  to  tremble. 

Tribuo,  tribui,  tributum,  r.  d.  to  as- 
cribe. 

Tnido,  tiTisi,  tmsum,  to  thrust. 

Tundo,  tutudi,  txinsum  or  tusum,  to 
beat.  The  compoxinds  drop  the  redtt- 
plication,  and  have  tusum.  Yet  con- 
tuusum,  detunsum,  obtunsum,  and 
retunsum,  are  also  found. 
Ungo,  (or  -guo),  mixi,  uiictum,  d.  to 
anoint. 


§173. 


VERBS. — SECOND   AND   THIRD    BOOTS. 


137 


Uro,  ussi,  ustum,  d.  to  burn. 

*Vado,  — ,  to  go.  So  supervado.  The 
other  compounds  have  vasi;  ns,  *eva- 
do,  evasi,  r.  So  pervado ;  also  iuva- 
do,  r.  d. 

Veho,  vexi,  vectum,  r.  to  carry. 

Velio,  velli  or  vulsi,  vulsum,  d.  to  pluck. 
So  avello,  d.,  divello,  evellOj  d.,  re- 
vello,  revelli,  revulsum.  The  other 
compounds  have  velli  only,  except  in- 
tervello,  which  has  vulsi. 


*Vergo,  versi,  to  incline. 

Verro,  — ,  versura,  d.  to  bnish, 

Verto,  verti,  versum,  r.  d.  to  turn.   Set 

^  174,  Note. 
Vinco,  vici,  victiim,  r.  d.  to  conquer. 
*Vlso,  — ,  d.  to  visit. 
*Vivo,  vixi,  victurus,  d.  to  live. 
*V61oj  volui,  velle  {Jir  volere),  to  b* 

willing.    See  §  178. 
Volvo,  volvi,  voliitum,  d.  to  roU. 
Vomo,  vomui,  vonutum,  r.  d.  to  vomii 


Kemark.  Those  verbs  in  io  (and  deponents  in  ior),  of  the  third  conjugation, 
which  are  conjugated  like  capio  (page  115)  are,  capio,  cupio,  facio,  fddio^  fugio, 
jdcio,  pdrio,  q'uaUo,  rdpio,  siipio,  compounds  of  iacio  and  specio,  and  gradwr,  mo- 
Jior,  pdtior,  and  mdrior:  but  compare  mdrior  in  §  174,  and  driwr,  and  jidtior 
m  §  177. 

Inceptive  Verbs. 

§  173.  Inceptive  verbs  in  general  either  vfant  the  third  root, 
or  adopt  that  of  their  primitives:  (see  §  187,  11,  2).  Of  those  derived 
from  nouTs  and  adjectives,  some  want  the  second  root,  and  some  form 
it  by  adding  u  to  the  root  of  the  primitive. 

In  the  following  list,  those  verbs  to  which  s  is  added,  have  a  simple  verb  in 
use  from  which  they  are  formed : — 


*Acesco,  acui,  s.  to  grow  sour. 
*jEgresco,  to  grow  stch. 
*Albesco,  — ,  s.  to  grow  white. 
*Alesco,  — ,  s.  to  grmo.   coalesco,  -alui, 

-alitum,  to  grow  together. 
*Ardesco,  ar=i,  s.  to  take  jire. 
*Aresco,  — ,  s.  to  grow  dry.    *exares- 

co,  -anii.    So  inaresco,  peraresco. 
*Auge.?co,  anxi,  s.  to  increase. 
*Calesco,  calui,  s.  to  groio  warm. 
*Calvesco,  — ,  s.  to  become  bald. 
*Candesco,  candui,  s.  to  grow  white. 
*Canesco,  canni,  s.  to  become  hoary. 
*Ciriresco,  clarui,  s.  to  became  biiglit. 

*Condormisco,   -dormivi,   s.   to  go  to 
sleep. 

*ContTcesco,  -ticui,  to  become  silent. 

♦Crebresco,  crebui  and  crebrui,  to  in- 
crease. 

*Cmdesco,  cru(hii,  to  become  violent. 

*Ditesco,  — ,  to  grmo  rich. 

♦Dulcesco,  — ,  to  grow  sweet. 

*Duresco,  diinii,  to  grow  hard. 

•*E^■^lePco,  evilui,  to  become  worthless. 

^Kxtimesco,  -tlmui,  to  fear  greatly. 

*Fatiftco,  — ,  to  gape. 

*Flaccesco,  flaccui,  s.  to  wilt. 

*}'ervesco,  ferbui,  s.  to  grow  hot. 

♦  Florcsco,  florui,  s.  to  begin  to  flourish. 

*Fracesco,  fracui,  to  grow  rancid. 

♦Frigesco,  — .  s.  to  grow  cold.     *p^r- 
frigesco,  -frixi.    So  refrigesco. 
12* 


*Frondesco,  — ,  s.  to  piit  forth  leaves. 
*Fruiicesco,  — >  to  prit  forth  shoots. 
*Gelasco,  — ,  s.  to  freeze.    So  *cong6- 

lasco,  s.  to  congeal. 
*Gemisco,  — ,  s.  to  begin  tc  sigh. 
*Gemmasco,  — ,  to  begin  to  bud. 
*Generasco,  — ,  s.  to  be  produced, 
*Grandesco,  — ,  to  grow  large. 
*Gra,vesco,  — ,  to  grow  heavy. 
*H3eresco,  — ,  s.  to  adhere. 
*Hebesco,  — ,  s.  to  grow  duU. 
*Horresco,  horrui,  s.  to  grow  rough. 
*Hiimesco,  — ,  s.  to  grow  moist. 
*Ignesco,  — ,  to  become  inflamed. 
*Ind61esco,  -dolui,  d.  to  be  grieved. 
*Ins61esco,  — ,  to  become  haughty. 
*Integrasco,  — .  to  be  renewed. 
*Juvenesco,  — ,  to  grow  young. 
*Languesco,  langui,  s.  to  grow  languid. 
*Lripidesco,  — ,  to  become  stone. 
*Latesco,  — ,  to  grow  broad. 
*Latesco,  tobe  concealed,  s.  *delit<»co 

-lltui ;  *oblitesco,  -litui. 
*Lentesco,  — ,  to  become  soft. 
*Liquesco,  — ,    s.    to    become    liquid 

*deliquesco,  -licui. 
*Liicesco,  — ,  9.  to  arow  light,  to  daton 
*Liitesco,  — ,  s.  to  cecome  muddy. 
*Macesco,  -,  s.  K  ^^^ 

*Macresco,  —     )      ^ 

*remacresco,  -macrui. 
*Miidesco,  m^dui,  s.  to  grow  moist. 


138 


VERBS. — SECOND    AND    THIRD    ROOTS. 


§174. 


*Marcesco,  — ,  s.  to  pine  away. 
*Maturesco,  maturui,  to  ripen. 
*Miseresco,  miserui,  s.  to  pity. 
*Mitesco,  — ,  to  g7-ow  mild. 
*Mollesco,  — ,  to  grow  soft. 
♦Mutesco,  — ,  to  become  dumb.     *ob- 

mutesco,  obmiitui. 
*Nigresco,  nigrui,  s.  to  grow  black. 
*Nltesco,  nitui,  s.  to  grow  bright. 
*N6tesco,  notui,  to  become  hnaim. 
*Obbmtesco,  — ,  to  become  brutish. 
♦Obdormisco,  — ,  s.  to  fall  asleep. 
*Obsurdesco,  -surdui,  to  grow  deaf. 
*OccaUesco,  -callui,  to  become  callous. 
*01esco,   (scarcely   used.)     *rvb61esco, 
-olevi,  s.  to  cease,     adolesco,  -olevi, 
-ultum,   8.   to  gi-ow    up.     ex61esco, 
-olevi,  -oletum,  to  grow  out  of  date. 
So  obsolesco.    inolosco,  -olevi,  -611- 
tum,  d.  to  g7-ow  in  or  on. 
*Pallesco,  pallui,  s.  to  grow  pale. 
*Patesco,  patui,  s.  to  be  opened. 
*Pavesco,  pavi,  s.  to  grow  fearful. 
*Pertimesco,  -timui,  d.  to  fear  greatly. 
*Pinguesco,  — ,  to  grow  fat. 
*Pubesco,  — ,  to  come  to  maturity. 
*Puerasco,  — ,  to  become  a  boy. 
*Putesco,  — ,  8.    K   jg^^^g      j^^_ 
*Putresco,  — ,  s.  )  _    -^ 

*Raresco,  — ,  to  become  thin. 
*Eeslpisco,  -sipui,  8.   to  recover  one's 

senses. 
*P.igesco,  rTgui,  s.  to  grow  cold. 
*Rubesco,  rubui,  s.  to  grow  red.    *erii- 
besco,  -rubui,  d. 

§  174.     Deponent  Verbs  of  the  Third  Conjugation. 


*Sanesco,  — ,  to  become  sound.    *con 

sauesco,  -sanui. 
*Seiiesco,  senui,  s.  d.  to  grow  old.    8c 

consenesco. 
*Seutisco,  — ,  s.  to  perceive. 
*Siccesco,  — ,  to  become  dry. 
*Silesco,  sllui,  s.  to  groio  silent. 
*S61idesco,  — ,  to  become  solid. 
*Sordesco,  sordui,  s.  to  become  filthy. 
*Splendesco,   splendui,    s.    to  becomt 

bright. 
*Spiimesco,  — ,  to  begin  to  foam. 
*Sterilesco,  — ,  to  become  barren. 
*Stiipesco,  stupui,  s.  to  become  asUm 

ished. 
Suesco,  suevi,  suetum,  s.  to  become  ac- 
customed. 
*Tabesco,  tabui,  s.  to  waste  axoay. 
*Teiu'resco  and  -asco,  — ,   to  become 

tender. 
*Tepesco,  tepui,  s.  to  grow  warm. 
*Torpesco,  torpui,  s.  to  grow  tmpid. 
*Tremisco,  — ,  s.  to  begin  to  tremble. 
*Tumesco,  tumui,  s.  |  ^^  i,egin  to  sweU. 
*Turgesco,  — ,  s.        )       ^ 
*Uvesco,  — ,  to  become  moist. 
*Valesco,  ^,  s.  to  become  strong. 
*Vaxiesco,  — ,   S)  vanish.    *evanesco, 

evanui. 
*VettTasco,  veteravi,  to  grow  old. 
*Viresco,  virai,  s.  to  grow  green. 
*Vivesco,  vixi,  s.  to  come  to  life.    *r6- 

vivisco,  -vixi. 


Apiscor,  aptus,  to  get.  The  compounds 
change  a  into  i  in  the  first  root,  and 
into  e  in  the  third;  as,  adlpiscor, 
adeptus.    So  iudlpiscor. 

Expergiscor,  expen-ectus,  to  awake. 

*Fatiscor,  to  yo/je  or  crack  open.  The 
compouiuls  change  a  into  e;  as,  defe- 
tiscor,  -fessus. 

Fruor,  fruitus  or  fructus,  frultiirus,  d. 
to  enjoy. 

Fungor,  functus,  r.  d.  to  jjerform. 

Gradior,  grcssus,  to  walk.  The  com- 
pounds mange  a  into  e ;  as,  aggredior, 
aggressus,  r.  d.  Inf  jtres.  aggredi 
oMc/aggrediri ;  so,  progredi  ajici  progi-e- 
dSri ;  and  pres.  ind.  egreditur.  Plant. 

*Irascor,  to  be  angry. 

Labor,  lapsus,  r.  to  fall. 

*  Liquor,  to  melt,  fiow. 

Loquor,  locutus,  r.  d.  to  speak. 

Miiiiscor,  [obsolete.)  cominlniscor, com- 
meutus,  p.  to  invent.  *reniIniscor, 
to  remvnoer. 


Morior,  (mori,  rarely  raonr'i,)  mortuus, 
moriturus,  d.  to  die.  So  emoiiri,  Plavt. 
for  emori. 

Nauciscor,  nactus  or  nauctus  to  obtain. 

Nascor,  natus,  nascitui^us,  u.  to  be  boi-n. 

Nitor,  nixus  or  uisus,  nisurus,  to  lean 
upon. 

Obliviscor,  oblitus,  d.  p.  to  foi-get. 

Paciscor,  pactus,  d.  to  bargain.  So 
depaciscor. 

Patior,  passus,  r.  d.  to  suffer,  perpetior 
-pessus. 

From  plecto,  to  tvjine,  come,  ampleo« 
tor,  amplexus,  d.  p.  complector,  com- 
plexus,  p.     So  circumplector. 

Proficiscor,  profectus,  r.  to  depart.  _ 

Qucror,  questus,  m.  u.  d.  to  complain. 

*Riiigor,  to  snarl. 

Sequor,  secutiis,  r.  d.  to  follow. 

Tuor,  tutus,  to  protect. 

*Vescor,  d.  to  eat. 

Ulciscor,  ultus,  ra.  d.  p.  to  avenge. 

Utor,  usus,  r.  d.  to  use. 


§  175,  176.  VERBS. SECOND    AND    THIRD    ROOTS. 


139 


Note.  Drvertor,  prczvertor,  revertor,  compounds  of  verto,  are  used  as  depo- 
nents in  the  present  and  imperfect  tenses;  recenor  also,  sometimes,  in  the 
perfect. 

FOURTH    CONJUGATION. 

§  175.  Verbs  of  the  fourth  conjugation  regularlj  form  their 
second  root  in  iv,  and  their  thu'd  in  it ;  as,  audVo.  audiv^■J  au- 
(iMum. 

The  following  list  contains  most  regular  verbs  of  this  conjuga- 
tion : — 


Audio,  -ivi  or  -ii,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  hear. 
*Cio,  civi,  to  excite.  Ct.  cieo,  §  168. 
Condio,  -ivi  or  -ii,  to  season. 
Custodio,  -ivi  or  -ii,  d.  to  guard. 
*Dormio,  -ivi  or  -ii,  m.  r.  d.  to  skep. 
Eriidio,  -ivi  or  -ii,  d.  to  instruct. 
Expedio,  -ivi  oi-  -ii,  d.  to  disentangle. 
Finio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  r.  d.  to  jinish. 
*Gestio,  -ivi  w  -ii,  to  exult;  desire. 
Impedio,  -ivi  or  -ii,  r.  d.  to  entangle. 
Insanio,  -ivi  or  -ii,  to  be  mad. 
Irretio,  -ivi  or  ii,  to  ensnare. 
Lenio,  -ivi  or  ii,  d.  to  mitir/ate. 
Mollio,  -ivi  or  -ii,  d.  to  so/ten. 


*Mugio,  -ivi  or  -ii,  to  bellow. 

Miinio,  -ivi  or  -ii,  r.  d.  to  fm-tify. 

Miitio,  -ivi,  to  mutter. 

Niitrio,  -ivi  or  -ii,  d.  to  nourish. 

Partio,  -ivi  or  -ii,  r.  to  divide. 

Polio,  -i%-i,  d.  to  jwUsh. 

Piiuio,  -ivi  or  -ii,  d.  to  ^yunish. 

Eedimio,  -ivi,  to  crown. 

Scio,  -ivi,  u.  r.  to  know. 

Servio,  -ivi  or  -ii,  m.  r.  d.  to  serve. 

Sopio,  -ivi  or  -ii,  to  lidl  asleej). 

Stabilio,  -ivi  or  -ii,  to  establish. 

Tinnio,  -ivi  or  -ii,  r.  to  tinkle. 

Vestio,  -ivi  or  -ii,  to  clothe. 


§  170.  The  following  list  contains  those  verbs  of  the  fourth  con- 
jugation which  form  their  second  and  third  roots  irregularly,  and 
those  which  want  either  or  both  of  them. 

Remark.  The  prmcipal  irregularit^i-  in  verbs  of  the  fourth  conjugation 
arises  from  following  the  analogy  of  those  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation  whose 
first  root  ends  in  a  consonant ;  as,  'sepio,  sejysi,  septum.  A  few  become  irregular 
by  syncope ;  as,  venio,  veni,  ventum. 


Amicio,  -ui  or  -xi,  amictum,  d.  to  clothe. 

*Balbiitio,  — ,  to  stammer. 

Bullio,  ii,  itum,  to  bubble. 

*Gfficiitio,  — ,  to  be  dim-sighted. 

*Cambio,  — ,  to  exchange. 

*Dementio,  — ,  to  be  mad. 

Effutio,  — ,  to  babble. 

lilo,  ivi  or  ii,  itum,  r.  d.  to  go.  The 
compounds  have  only  ii  in  the  perfect, 
except  obeo,  praeo,  antf  siibeo,  which 
have  ivi  or  ii.  All  the  compouiuls  icant 
the  supine  and  perfect  participles, 
except  adeo,  ambio,  ineo,  obeo,  pras- 
tereo,  subeo,  circumeo  or  circuco 
redeo,  transeo,  and  *tveneo,  venii 
r.  {from  venum  eo),  to  be  sold. 

Farcio,  farsi,  fartum  or  farctum,  tt 
cram.  The  compounds  generallif 
change  a  to  e;  as,  refercio,  -fersi, 
-fertum,  but  con-  and  sf-,  -farcio  and 
-fercio. 

Fastidio,  -ii,  -itum,  d.  to  loathe. 

♦Feiio,  — ,  d.  to  st-ike. 


*Ferocio,  — ,  to  be  fierce. 

Fulcio,  fulsi,  fultum,  d.  to  prop  up. 

*Gannio,  — ,  to  yelp,  bark. 

*Gir)cio,  -;7,  to  cluck  as  a  hen. 

*Gliitio,  ivi,  or  gliitii,  to  swallow. 

Grandio,  — ,  to  make  great. 

*Grumiio,  grunnii,  to  grunt. 

Haurio,  hausi,  rar.  liaurii,  haustum, 
rar.  hausituni,  hausturus,  hansiirus, 
u.  d.  to  draw. 

*Hinnio,  — ,  to  neigh. 

*Ineptio,  — ,  to  trijle. 

*Lascivio,  lascivii,  to  be  wanton. 

*Ligurio,  Ugiirii,  to  feed  delicately. 

*Lippio,  — ,  r.  to  be  blear-eyed. 

*Obedio,  obedii  r.  to  obey. 

Pario  is  of  the  third  conjugation,  but  its 
compounds  are  oftkejourth,  changing 
&  to  e;  as,  apC-rio,  aperui,  apertum, 
r.  d.  to  open.  So  optrio,  d.  compCrio 
comperi,  compertum,  rarely  dep. 
coniperior,  to  Jind  out.  So  reperio 
r.  d. 


140 


IRREGULAR   VERBS. 


177,  178. 


PaTio,  — ,  pavitum,  to  beat. 

*Prurio,  — ,  to  itch. 

Queo,  quivi  or  quii,  quitum,  to  be  able. 

So  *nequeo. 
*Raucio,  — ,  r.  to  be  hoarse. 
*Rugio,  — ,  to  roar  as  a  lion. 
Ssevio,  ssevii,  itum,  r.  to  rage. 
*Sagio,  — ,  to  perceive  keenly. 
*Salio,   salui   or   siilii,    to   leap.     The 

compcyunds  changed  into  I;  as,  *absi- 

lio,  — .   So  circumsilio.   *assilio,  -ui. 

So  dissilio,  insilio.   *desilio,  -ni  or  -ii. 

Bo  exsilio,  resilio,  subsilio.  *transll- 

io,  -ni  or  -Ivi,  d.    So  prosilio. 
Saiio,  — ,  Itum,  r.  d.  to  salt. 
Sancio,  sanxi,  sancitum  or  sanctum,  d. 

to  ratify,  sanction. 

Note.  Deslderative  verbs  want  both  the  second  and  third  roots,  except 
these  three ; — ^esUrio,  — j  esuritus,  r.  to  desire  to  eat ;  ^nuptimo,  -im,  to  desire 
to  marry;  *pariurio,  -Im,  to  be  in  travail.    See  4  187,  II.  3. 


Sarcio,  sarsi,  sartuin,  d.  to  patch. 
Sarrio,  -ivi  or  -ui,  sarritum,  d.  to  weed, 

hoe. 
*iScatiirio,  — ,  to  gush  out. 
Sentio,  sensi.  sensum,  r.  to  yeel. 
Sepelio,  sept  livi  w  -ii,  rar.  scpeli,  sft 

pultum,  r.  (L  to  bury. 
SSpio,  sepsi,  septum,  d.  to  hedge  in, 
*Singultio,  — -,  to  sob,  hiccup. 
*Sitio,  sitii,  to  thirst. 
Suffio,  -ii,  -itiim,  d.  to  fumigate. 
*Tussio,  — ,  to  cough. 
*Vagio,  vagii,  fo  cry. 
Venio,  veni,  ventum,  r.  to  come. 
Viucio,  vinxi,  vinctum,  r.  d.  to  bind. 


iTT.     Deponent  Verbs  of  the  Fou7ih  Conjugation. 


Assentior,  assensus,  r.  d.  p.  to  assent. 

Blandior,  blanditus,  to  flatter. 

Largior,  largitus,  p.  to  give,  bestow. 

Mentior,  mentltus,  r.  p.  to  lie. 

Metior,  meusus  w  metitus,  d.  p.  to 
vieaswe. 

Molior,  molitus,  d.  to  strive,  toil. 

Ordior,  orsus,  d.  p.  to  begin. 

Orior,  ortus,  oriturus,  d.  to  spring  up. 
Except  in  the  jtresent  infinitive,  this 
verb  seems  to  be  of  the  third  conjuga- 
tion. 


Perior,    {obs.    whence    peritus.) 
perior,  expertus,  r.  d.  to  try. 
rior,    oppertus   or  opperttus, 
wait  for. 

Partior,  partitas,  d.  to  divide. 

Potior,  potitus,  r.   d.  to  obtain, 

In  the  poets  the  present  indicative~and 
imperfect  subjunctive  are  sometimes 
of  the  third  conjugation. 

Sortior,  sortitus,  r.  to  cast  lots. 


ex- 
oppe- 
d.   to 


enjoy. 


IRREGULAR    VERBS. 

§  178.     Irregular  verbs  are  such  as  deviate  from  the  com- 
mon forms  in  some  of  the  parts  derived  from  the  fii'st  root. 

They  are  sum,  volo,  fero,  edo,  fio,  eo,  queo,  and  their  compounds. 

Sum  and  its  compounds  have  akeady  been  conjugated.  See  §  153.  In  the 
conjugation  of  the  rest,  the  parts  which  are  in-eguhir  are  fully  exhibited,  but 
a  synopsis  only,  of  the  other  parts  is,  in  general,  given.  Some  parts  of  vob) 
and  of  its  compounds  are  wanting. 

1.  Volo  is  irregular  only  in  the  present  of  the  indicative  and  infin- 
itive, and  in  the  present  and  imperfect  of  the  subjunctive. 

Remark.  It  is  made  irregular  partly  by  syncope,  and  partly  by  a  change  in 
the  vowel  of  the  root.  In  the  present  uifinitive  silso  and  in  the  imperfect  sub- 
junctive, after  e  was  dropped,  r  following  I  was  changed  into  t;  as,  veiert 
(velre)  »eZfe ;  veUrem  (yeike^m.)  vdlem.         * 

Pres.  Indie.        Pres.  Infin.        Perf.  India. 
vo'-lo,  vel'-le,  v61'-u-i,      to  he  willing,  to  wish. 


§  178.  IRREGULAR    VERBS.  lil 

INDICATIVE. 

Pres.  S.  v6'-lo,  vis,  vult ;  Per/.  vol'-u-i. 

P.  vol'-u-mus,  vul-tis,  vo'-lunt.  Plup.  v6-lu'-e-ram 

Jmperf.    v6-le'-bam,  v6-le'-bas,  etc.  Put.  perf.  v6-lu'-e-r5. 
Fut.        vo'-lam,  vo'-les,  etc. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres.      S.  ve'-lim,  ve'-lis,  ve'-lit;  Per/.  v6-lu'-e-rim. 

P.  Tfe-fi'-mus,  ve-li'-tis,  ve  -lint.  Plup.  vol-u-is'-sem. 

Imperf.  S.  vel'-lem,  vel'-les,  vel'-let; 

P.  vel-le'-miis,  vel-le'-tis,  vel'-lent. 

INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

Pres.  vel'-le.  Pres.  vo'-lens. 

Perf.  v6l-u-is'-se. 

Note.  VoU  and  voltxs,  for  vuU  and  vuHis,  and  vm\  for  visne  are  found  in  Plau- 
tu8  and  other  ancient  authors. 

2.  Nolo  is  compounded  of  the  obsolete  ne  (for  non^  and  volo.  The 
V  of  volo  after  ne  is  dropped,  and  the  vowels  (e  o)  are  contracted 
into  0. 

Pres.  Indie.         Pres.  Infin.         Perf.  Indie. 

no'-lo,  nol'-le,  nol'-u-i,         to  he  unwilling. 

INDICATIVE. 

Pres.  S.  no'-lo,  non'-vis,  non'-vult;  Perf  nol'-u-i. 

P.  nol'-u-mus,  non-vul'-tis,  no'-lunt.  Plup.  no-lu'-e-ram. 

Imperf.  no-le'-bam,  -bas,  -bat,  etc.  Fut.  pjerf.  no-lu'-ero. 

Fut.  uo'-lam,  -les,  -let,  etc. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres.      S.  no'-lim,  no'-lis,  no'-lit;  Perf  no-lu'-e-rim. 

P.  no-li'-mus,  no-li'-tis,  no'-lint.  Plup.  nol-u-is'-sem. 

Imperf.  S.  nol'-lem,  nol'-les,  nol'-let ; 

P.  nol-le'-mus,  nol-le'-tis,  nol'-lent. 

IMPERATIVE. 
Present.  Future. 

Sing.  2.  no'-li ;    Plur.  no-li-te.      Sing.  2.  no-li-to,     Plur.  nol-i-to'-te, 

3.  no-li'-to;  no-lun'-to 

INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE.       ' 

Pres-.  nol'-le.  Pres.  no'-Iens. 

Perf.  nol-u-is'-se. 

NoTK.  In  norths,  no'i-vult,  etc.  of  the  present,  noii  takes  the  place  of  ne,  bal 
n«tn8  ard  nevolt  also  occur  in  Plautus. 


142  IRREGULAR    VERBS.  §179 

3.  Malo  is  compounded  of  magis  and  volo.  In  composition  mSflis 
drops  its  final  syllable,  and  volo  its  u.  The  -vowels  (do)  are  then 
contracted  into  a. 

Pres.  Indie.         Pres.  Infin.         Perf.  Indie. 
ma'-lo,  mal'-le,  mal'-u-i,     to  prefer. 

INDICATIVE. 

Pres.  S.  ma'-lo,  ma'-vis,  ma-vult;  Pcrf.  mal'-u-i. 

P.  mal'-u-mus,  ma-vul'-tis,  ma'-lunt.  Plup.  ma-lu'-e-rani 

Imperf.    ma-le'-bam,  -has,  etc.  Put.  perf.  ma-lu'-e-ro. 
Fut.         ma'-lam,  -les,  etc. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres.      S.  ma'-lim,  ma'-lis,  ma -lit;  Perf.  ma-lu'-e-rim. 

P.  ma-li'-mus,  ma-li'-tis,  ma'-lint.        Pluj:/.  mal-u-is'-sem. 

Imperf.  S.  mal'-lem,  mal'-les,  mal'-let ; 

P.  mal-le'-mus,  mal-le'-tis,  mal'-lert. 

INFINITIVE. 
Pres.  mal'-le.  P<^rf  mal-u-is'-se. 

NoTK.  Mav6lo,  mavdlunt ;  mSvdlet ;  mdvelim,  mdvelis,  mdvelit ;  and  mdveUem  ; 
for  mdlo,  ■mdlunt,  etc.,  occur  in  Plaatus. 

§  170.  Fero  is  irregular  in  two  respects:—!.  Its  second  and 
third  roots  are  not  derived  from  the  first,  but  from  otherwise  obsolete 
verbs,  viz.  tiilo  for  l(Mo,  and  tian,  sup.  tlalum,  by  aphaeresis,  Icitwii : — 
2.  In  the  present  infinitive  active,  in  the  imperfect  subjunctive,  and 
in  certain  parts  of  the  present  indicative  and  imperative,^  of  both 
voices,  tlie  connecting  vowel  is  omitted.  In  the  present  infinitive 
passive,  r  is  doubled. 

ACTIVE    VOICE.  PASSIVE    VOICE. 

Pres.  Indie,  f e'-ro,  (to  bear.)  Pres.  Indie,  fe'-ror,  (to  be  borne.) 

Pres.  Infin.  fer'-re,  Pres.  Infin.  fer'-ri, 

Perf.  Indie,  tu'-li,  Perf.  Part,  la'-tiis. 

Supine.  la'-tum. 

INDICATIVE. 
Present. 
S   f e'-ro,  fers,  fert ;  fe'-ror,  fer'-ris  or  -re,  fer'-tiir ; 

F  fer'-i-mus,  fer'-tis,  f e'-runt.         f er'-i-miir,  f e-rim'-i-ni,  f e-run'~tm 

Tmperf.       fe-re'-bam.  Imperf.       fe-re'-bar. 

Fut.  f e'-ram,  -res,  efe.   Fut.  f  e'-rar   -re'-ris  or  -re'-re,  e1a 

Perf.  tu'-li.  Pcrf  la'-tus  sum  or  fu'-i. 

Plup.  tu'le-ram.  Plup.  la'-tus  e'-rara  or  fu'-e-ram. 

Fut.  perf.  tu'-le-ro  Fut.  perf  la'-tus  e'-ro  or  fu'-e-rO. 


§180. 


IRREGULAR    VERBS. 


lis 


Pres.  fe'-ram,  -raa,  etc. 

hnperf.  fer'-rem,  -res,  etc. 

Perf.  tu'-Ie-rim. 

riup.  tu-lis'-sem. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres.  f e'-rar,  -pa'-ris  or  -tit  re,  etc. 

Imperf.  fer'-rer,  -re'-ris,  etc. 

Perf.  la'-tus  sim  or  fu'-e-rim. 

Plup. ,  la'-tus  es'-sem  or  fu-is'-sem. 


IMPERATIVE. 

Pres.  S.  fer,         P.  fer'-te.  Pres.  S.  fer'-re, 

Fut.   S.  fer'-to,   P.  fer-to'-te, 

fer'-to;        fe-run'-to.    Fut.    S.  fer'-tor, 

fer'-tor. 


P.  fe-rim'-i-ni. 

P.  (fe-rem'-i-ni,^ 
fe-run'-tor. 


Pres.  fer'-re. 

Per/,  tu-lis'-se. 

Fut.    la-^^'-^us  es'-se. 


INFINITIVE. 

Pres.  fer'-ri. 

Per/,  la'-tus  es'-se  or  fu-is' 

Fut.    la'-tum  i'-ri. 


PARTICIPLES. 
Pres.  fe'-rens.  Per/  la'-tus. 

Fut.    la-tu'-rus.  Fut.    fe-ren'-dus. 

GERUND, 
fe-ren'-di,  etc. 

SUPINES. 
Former,  la'-tum.  Latter,  la'-tu. 

Note.  In  the  comic  writers  the  following  rechiplicated  forms  are  found  in 
parts  derived  from  the  second  root,  viz.  tetiUi,  tetulisti,  teiulii,  tetulerunt ;  tetuh'ro, 
ttlulerit;  tetulissem,  aud  tetulisse. 

§  180.  Flo,  '  to  become,'  is  properly  a  neuter  verb  of  the  third 
conjuf;ation,  having  only  the  parts  derived  from  the  first  root;  but  it 
is  used  also  as  a  passive  of  /acio,  from  which  it  takes  those  parts  of 
the  passive  which  are  derived  from  the  third  root,  together  with  the 
participle  in  du3.  The  infinitive  present  has  been  changed  from  the 
regular  form  Jiere  to  /en. 

Pres.  Indie.     Pi-es.  In/n.     Per/  Part. 

fi'-S,  fi'-e-ri,  fac'-tiis,     to  he  made  or  to  become. 

INDICATIVE. 

Pres.  S.  fi'-o,  fis,  fit ;  Per/         fac'-tiis  sum  or  fii'-i. 

P.  fi-mus,  Ti'-tls,  fi'-unt.    Plup.        fac'-tiis  e'-ram  or  fu'-e-raaa. 

TJw/^er/.  fi-c'-bam,  fi-e'-ba3,-eto.  i^/.7;e»/.  fac'-tus  e'-r&  or  fu'-e-rS. 
Fut.       fi'-am,  fl'-es,  etc. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


Preit   fi'-am,  fi'-as,  etc. 
Imp.    fi'-e-rem,  -e'-res,  etc. 


Per/  fac'-tiis  sim  or  fu'-e-rim. 
Plup.  fac'-tiis  es'-sem  or  fu-is'-sem. 


144  IRREGULAR    VERBS.  §  181. 

IMPERATIVE.  INFINITIVE. 

Pres.  Sing,  fi  ;     Plur.  fi'-te.         Pres.  f  i'-e-ri. 

Perf.  fac'-tus  es'-se  or  fii-is'-sS. 
Fut.  fac'-tum  i'-ri. 

PARTICIPLES.         *  SUPINE. 

Perf.  fac'-tus.  Latter,  fac'-tu. 

Fut.    fa-ci-en'-dus. 

Note.  The  compounds  o^facio  which  retain  a,  have  alsoyjo  in  the  passive; 
as,  calefdcio,  to  warm ;  passive,  calefio ;  but  those  which  change  a  into  »  form 
the  passive  regular! v.  (Cf.  facio  in  the  list,  §  172.)  Yet  confii,  defit,  and  inJU, 
twcur.     See  §  183,  12,  13,  14. 

§  181.  Edo,  to  eat,  is  conjugated  regularly  as  a  verb  of  the 
third  conjugation ;  but  in  the  present  of  the  indicative,  imperative, 
and  infinriive  moods,  and  in  the  imperfect  of  the  subjunctive,  it  haa 
also  forms  similar  to  those  of  the  corresponding  tenses  of  sum: — 
Thus. 

INDICATIVE. 

Present. 

S.  e'-do,  e'-dis,  e'-dit, 

(or  es,  est) ; 

P.  ed'-i-mus,  ed'-i-tis,  e'-dunt. 

(or  es'-tis), 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Imperfect. 

S.  ed'-e-rem,  ed'-e-res,  ed'-e-ret, 

(or  es'-sem,  es'-ses,  es'-set) ; 

P.  ed-e-re'-mus,  ed-e-re'-tis,  ed'-e-rent, 

(or  es-se'-mus,  es-se'-tis,  es'-sent). 

IMPERATIVE. 

Pres,  S.  e'-de,  P.  ed'-i-te, 

(or  es ;  es'-te). 

Fut.    S.  ed'-i-to,  P.  ed-i-to'-te,  e-dun'-t^. 

(or  es-to,  es-to'-te). 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres    ed'-e-re,    (or  es'-se). 

PASSIVE. 

Pres.        ed'-i-tiir,  (or  es'-tiir). 

Imperf.     ed-e-re'-tur,      (or  es-se'-tiir). 

Note,  (a.)  In  the  present  subjunctive,  edim,  edi«,  etc.,  are  foimd,  for  gdam 
idds,  etc. 

{b.)  In  the  compounds  of  edo,  also,  fonns  resembling  those  of  sum  ocoxa 
Ambido  has  the  participles  amhens  and  ambisus ;  comedo  has  comesus,  comesurus 
and  rarely  comestus ;  and  adcdo  and  exedo  have  adesus  and  exesus. 


§  182,  183.  DKKKCTIVE    VERBS.  146 

.  §  182.  Eo  is  irregular  in  the  parts  which,  in  other  verbs  are 
formed  from  the  first  root,  except  the  imperfect  subjunctive  and  the 
present  infinitive.  In  these,  and  in  the  parts  formed  from  the  second 
and  third  roots,  it  is  a  regular  verb  of  the  fourth  conjugation 

Note.  Eo  has  no  first  root,  and  the  parts  usually  derived  from  that  root, 
consist,  in  this  verb,  of  terminations  only. 

Pres.  Indie.     Pres.  Injin.     Perf.  Indie.     Perf.  Part. 

e'-o,  i'-re,  i'-vi,  I'-tum,      to  go. 

INDICATIVE. 
Pres.      S  e'-6,  is,  it ;  Fut.  i'-bo,  i'-bis,  i'-bit,  etc. 

P.  i'-miis,  i'-tis,  e'-unt.        Per/.         i'-vi,  i-vis'-ti,  i'-vit,  etc. 
Imperf.  S.  i'-bam,  i'-bas,  i'-bat;       Plup.        iv'-e-rara,  iv'-e-ras,  etc. 

P.  i-ba'-mijs,  etc.  Fut.  perf.  W-e-ro,  iv'-e-rls,  etc. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Pres.       e'-am,  e'-as,  e'-at,  etc.         P'ii'f.  iv'-e-rim,  iv'-e-ris,  cto. 
Imperf.  i'-rem,  i'-res,  i'-ret,  etc.      Plup.  i-vis'-sem,  i-vis'-ses,  etc 

IMPERATIVE.  INFINITIVE. 

Pres.  S.  i,         P.  i'-te.  Pres.  i'-re. 

Fut,     2.  i'-tS,  i-to'-te,  Perf.  i-vis'-se. 

3.  i'-to;        e-un'-to.  Fut.    i-tii'-riia  es'-sS. 

PARTICIPLES.  GERUND. 

Pres.  i'-ens,  (jgen.  e-un'-tis.)  e-un'-di, 

Fut.    i-tii'-riis,  a,  um.  e-un'-do,  etc. 

Remark  1.  In  some  of  the  compounds  the  forms  earn,  ies,  iet  occur,  thouj^ 
rarely,  in  the  future;  as,  redeam,  redies,  abiet,  exiet,  proaienl.  Istis,  issetn,  and 
isae,  are  formed  by  contraction  for  ivistis,  ivissein,  and  ivisse.     See  ^  162,  7. 

Rem.  2.  In  the  passive  voice  are  found  the  infinitive  hi,  and  the  third  per- 
sons singular  Itur,  ibdlur,  ibitur,  itum  est,  etc. ;  eulur,  iretur,  eundum  ett,  etc., 
which  are  used  impersonally.     See  §  184,  2,  (a.) 

Rem.  3.  The  compounds  of  eOj  mcluding  tvneo,  are  conjugated  like  the  8im- 
ple  verb,  but  most  oi  them  have  li  in  the  perfect  rather  than  ivi.  See  under  eo 
m  fj  176.  Adeo,  anteeo,  Ineo,  prcetereo,  subeo,  and  transeo,  being  used  actively, 
are  found  in  the  passive  voice.  Inieiur  occurs  as  a  future  passive  of  ineo. 
Avibio  is  regular,  Uke  audio,  but  has  either  amb'ibat  or  ambiibal. 

Note.  Q,ueo,  I  can,  and  nequeo,  I  cannot,  are  conjugated  like  eo,  but  they 
wskDt  the  imperative  mood  and  the  gerund,  and  their  participles  rarely  occuj?. 
f  hey  are  sooietimes  found  in  the  passive  voice,  before  an  infinitive  passive. 

DEFECTIVE    VERBS. 

§  183.     (1.)    Defective  verbs  are  those  which  are  not  used 
in  certain  tenses,  numbers,  or  persons. 

Remark.  There  are  many  verbs  which  are  not  found  in  all  the  tenses,  numbers,  and 
persons,  exhibited  in  the  paradigms.  Some,  not  originally  defective,  are  accounted  so, 
because  they  do  not  ocxur  in  the  classics  now  extant.  Others  are  in  their  nature  defeo- 
tive.  Tbu.-<.  the  first  ami  xecond  pernnns  of  tbe  passiru  voice  must  be  wanting  in  mf  al 
i«rt>e,  froui  the  nature  of  their  Niguilicutiou. 
IS 


146  DEFECTIVE    VEKB8.  §  iSii 

(2.^  Ifae  followinw  list  contains  such  verbs  as  are  remarkaDle  foi 
wanting  many  of  their  par.s: — 

1.  Odi,  J  hate.  6.  Van,  to  speak.  11.  Cedo,  <eW,  or  ^tce  w»* 

2.  Ccepi,  J  have  befftin.  7.  Qiixso.  I  pray.  12.  Con&t,  it  is  done. 

8.  Memini,  J reme/mher.         8.  Ave,     )  hail,  or  13.  Defit,  it  is  wanting. 

4.  Aio,  I  r^a  ^'  S^l'^6,  )  farewell.  14.  Infit,  he  begins. 

6.  Inqiiam,  |        ^'  10.  Apage,  begone.  15.  Ovat,  he  rejoices. 

1.  Odi,  ccept,  and  memini  are  used  chiefly  in  the  perfect  and  in 
the  other  parts  formed  from  the  second  root,  and  are  thence  calltxl 
preteritive  vprbs.  Odi  has  also  a  deponent  form  in  the  perfect : — 
llius, 

Ind.  per/,  o'-di  or  o'-siis  sum;  plup.  od'-e-ram ;  yM<.  perf.  6d'-€-ro. 
SuBj.  perf.  od'-e-rira ;  7^?;//).  o-dis'-sem. 
•  Inf.  ^>er^  6-dis'-se;  fiit.  o-su'-rum  es'-se. 
Part.  jut.  o-su'-rus;  pei'J".  o'-sus. 

NoTBl.  Exosus  and  perosns,  like  6sus,  are  used  actively.  Odivit,  for  idii,  00 
curs,  M.  Anton,  in  Cic.  Phil.  13,  19:  and  odiendi  in  Appuleius. 

2.  Ind.  per/,  coe'-pi ;  php.  coep'-e-ram ;  /ut.  per/.  ccBp'-6-ro. 
SuBj.  perf.  ccep'-e-rim;  plup.  ca-pis'-sem. 

Inf.  perf.  cce-pis'-se ;  /ut.  coep-tu'-rum  es'-se. 
Pakt.  jut.  coep-tii'-nis ;  per/,  ccep'-tus. 

Note  2.  In  Plautns  are  found  a  present,  caejno,  present  subjunctive,  ca^Mam, 
and  infinitive,  capere.  Before  an  infinitive  passive,  cosptus  est,  etc.,  rather  than 
caept,  etc.,  are  commonly  used. 

3.  Ind.  per/  mem'-i-ni ;  pbip.  me-min'-e-ram ;  /ut.  per/,  me-min'-e-ro. 
SuBj.  per/,  me-inin'-e-rim ;  plup.  mem-i-nis'-sem. 

Inf.  perf.  mem-i-nis'-se. 

Impekat.  2  pers.  8.  me-men'-to ;  P.  mem-en-t5'-te. 

NoTB  3.  Odi  and  memini  have,  in  the  perfect,  the  sense  of  the  present,  and, 
in  the  pluperfect  and  future  perfect,  the  sense  of  the  imperfect  and  future ,  as, 
fugiet  at(jue  oderit.  Cic.  In  this  respect,  nod,  I  know,  the  perfect  of  nosco,  to 
learn,  and  consuvvi,  I  am  wont,  the  perfect  of  consuesco,  I  accustom  myself,  agree 
with  odi  and  memini. 

4.  Ind.  pres.  ai'-o,*  a'-is,  a'-it;  , ,  ai'-unt.* 

imp.  ai-e'-bam,  ai-e'-bas,  ai-e'-biit;  ai-e-ba'-miis,  ai-e-ba'-tls,  ai-e'-bant 

SuBj.  pres. ,  ai'-as,  ai'-at ;  , ,  ai'-ant. 

Imperat.  pres.  a'-i.        Part.  pres.  ai'-ens. 
Note  4.    Ais  with  ne  is  contracted  to  ain'  like  videri',  dbin'' ;  for  videsne, 
■lUsne.    The  comic  writers  use  the  imperfect  albas,  albat  and  aibant,  which  are 
dissyllabic. 

5.  Ind.  jTres.  in'-quam,  in'-quis,  in'-quit;  in'-qui-mus,  in'-qul-tis,  in'-qui-unt. 

imp- , ,  in-qui-e'-bat,  awt?  in-qui'-bat; , ,  in-qui-e'-bant 

/ut.  ,  in'-qui-es,  iii'-qui-et ;  , , . 

jjery. ,  in-quis'-ti,  in-quit;  , , . 

BvBj.pres. j^  in'-qui-as,  in'-qui-at ;  ,  in-qui-a'-tis,  in'-qui-ant. 

Imperat.  in'-que,  in'-qui-to. 

0.  Ihd.  pres. , ,  f  a'-tur;  /ui.  f  a'-bor, ,  f  ab'-i-tur. 

per/  fatus  est;  plup.  f  atus  eram. 

Imperat.  f  a'-re.     Part.  pres.  fans ;  per/  f  a'-tus ;  /ut.  fan'-diis. 
Infin.  pres.  f  a'-ri  or  fa'-ri-er.     Gerund,  gen.  fan'-di;  abl.  fan'-do. 
Supine,  fa'-tii. 

•Pronounced  a'-yo,  a'-!/i(»it,  etc.,  wherever  the  diphthoug  at  is  foUotrecl  by  a  v«wt 

9»  » ».  i 


^  184.  IMPERSONAL    VERBS.  147 

TtUerfari  has  the  forms  inter/ atur,  inter/ ata  est,  inter/ari,  inter/ans,  and 
inter/dtus.—Kffari  has  effCibor,  effabere,  eH'ulus  est,  effdli  aunt;  unperat 
effare;  effari,  effCttm,  effandus,  effamlo ;  eJIcitu.—Prce/ari  occurs  in 
the  following  fomis,  prce/dtur,  prctfumur;  pra/abaniur ;  pra/arer 
prcE/arentur ;  pvce/ati  sumus  ;  pra>/dius  /luro ;  impenit.  prtzfdio,  pra/a- 
mim;  prce/ans,  prce/dtus,  pra/ancliis;  prcffaiulo.—Prd/drihsispro/dtur, 
pro/dta  est,  pro/dta  sunt,  pro/dlus  and  prd/ans. 


7.  Ind.  prei.  quae'-so, ,  quas'-sit;  quses'-ii-miis, , . 

Ixv.  pres.  quaes'-e-re. 

8,  '  T.  a'-ve,  a-ve'-te ;  a-ve'-to.    Inf.  a-ve'-re. 

Avere  and  solvere  are  often  used  with  jiibeo. 

9    VsD.  pres.  sal'-ve-o ;  /ut.  8al-ve'-bis_.    Inf.  pres.  8al-ve'-r6. 
Imperat.  sal'-ve,  sal-ve'-te ;  sal-ve'-to. 

10.  Impekat.  ap'-a-ge.     So  age  with  a  subject  either  singular  or  pluraL    . 

11.  Imperat  sing.  c6'-do ;  pi.  cet'-te  /or  ced'-i-te.   Hence  cfidodum. 

12.  Ind.  pres.  con'-fit ;  /ut.  con-f i'-et. 

SuBJ.  pres.  con-fi'-at;  imj}e>/.  con-fi'-6-r6t.    Inf.  pres.  con-fl'-6-ri. 

13.  Ind.  pres.  de'-fit;  pi.  de-f i'-unt ;  /!t<.  de-f!'-et.     SuBJ.  pres.  dS-fi'-IILt. 
Inf.  pres.  de-f  i'-e-ri.     So  ef-f  i'-e-ri,  and  in-ter-f  I'-e-rt.  FlatU. ;  and  in-ter- 

fi'-at.  Lucr. 

14.  Ind.  pres.  in'-fit;  pi.  in-fi'-unt. 

15.  Ind.  pres.  o'-vat.     Subj.  pres.  o'-vet;  imper/.  6-va'-ret. 

Part.  pres.  6'- vans ;  per/  o-va'-tu-s ;  /ut.  ov-Sr-tii'-riis.     Gerund,  S-van'-dL 

Remark  1.  Among  defective  verbs  are  sometimes,  also,  included  the  follow- 
ing:— /'(Jrem, /(5res,  etc.,  y  re,  (see§154,  R.  3.)  Ausim.misls,  ausit;  attsint.  Faxo 
B.nd  /axim,  f  axis, /axit;  /aximus,  /axitis, /ixint.  Faxem.  The  form  in  o  is 
an  old  future  perfect;  that  in  m  a  perfect,  and  that  in  e??*  a  pluperfect  sub- 
junctive.   See  \  162,  7,  (c),  and  9. 

Rem.  2.  In  the  present  tense,  the  first  person  singular,  /uro,  to  be  mad,  and 
dvr  and  der,  from  do,  to  give,  are  not  used.  So  in  the  imperative  sci,  cupe  and 
polle,  from  scio,  cupio,  and  polleo,  do  not  occur. 

Rem.  3.  A  few  words,  sometimes  classed  with  defectives,  are  formed  by 
contraction  from  a  verb  and  the  conjunction  si;  as,  sis  for  si  vis,  suhis  for  st 
vuUis,  iodes  for  si  audes  (for  audits.) 

IMPERSONAL    VERBS. 

§  184,  (a.)  Impersonal  verbs  are  those  which  are  used 
only  in  the  third  person  singular,  and  do  not  admit  of  a  personal 
subject. 

(6.)  The  subject  of  an  impersonal  verb  in  the  active  voice  is,  for  the  most 
part,  either  an  infinitive,  or  an  infinitive  or  subjunctive  clause;  but  in  English 
the  neuter  pronoun,  it,  commonly  stands  before  the  verb,  and  represents  such 
clause;  as,  me  deleclat  scribere,  it  delights  me  to  write.  Sometimes  an  accusa- 
tive depending  on  an  impersonal  verb  takes,  in  English,  the  place  of  a  sub- 
ject; as,  me  iniseret  tui,  I -pity  thee.  • 

1.  Impersonal  verbs  in  the  active  voice  are  conjugate'l  in  the  sev- 
eral (loujugations  hke  delectat,  it  delij^hts;  decet,  itbecomea;  cuntingit^ 
•t  harpens ;  evenit,  it  happens ;  th  is : — 


148 

IMPERSONAL    VE: 

RBS. 

§  i»4 

l«i  Onij. 

2d  Conj. 

3d  Conj. 

ith  Cbiy. 

Ihd.  Pres. 

delectiit, 

•  decet, 

contingit. 

wenit, 

Imp. 

delectabat, 

decebat, 

contingebat, 

jveniebat, 

Fut. 

delectabit, 

decSbit, 

continget, 

3veniet, 

Perf. 
Php. 

delectavit, 

decuit, 

contigit. 

evenit, 

delectavorat, 

decuerat, 

contigerat, 

evenerat, 

Fut.  perf. 

delectaverit. 

decuerit. 

contigerit. 

evenerit 

Sdb.  Prei. 

delectet, 

deceat, 

contingat, 

eveniat, 

Imp. 

delectaret, 

deceret, 

contingeret, 

evemret, 

Perf. 

delectaverit, 

decuerit, 

contigerit, 

evenerit, 

Plup. 

delectavisset. 

decuisset. 

contigisset. 

evenisset. 

Ikj.  Prei. 

delectare, 

decere, 

contingere, 

evenire, 

Ptrf. 

delectavisse. 

decuisse. 

contigisse. 

evenisse. 

2.  (a.)  Most  neuter  and  many  active  verbs  may  be  used  imperson- 
ally in  the  passive  voice,  by  changing  the  personal  subject  of  the  ac- 
tive voice  into  an  ablative  witk  the  preposition  a  or  ab  ;  as, 

Illi  pugnant ;  or  pugnatur  ab  illis,  they  fight.  Illi  quarunl,  or  qucBrltur  ab 
illis,  they  ask.  Cf.  §  141,  Rem.  2. 

(6.)  In  the  passive  form,  the  subject  in  English  is,  commonly,  either 
the  agent,  expressed  or  understood,  or  an  abstract  noun  formed  from 
the  verb;  as, 

Pugnatum  est,  we,  they,  etc.  fought;  or,  the  battle  was  fought.  Concwrritvr, 
the  ptojde  run  together ;  or,  there  is  a  concourse. 

(c.)  Sometimes  the  Engh"sh  subject  in  the  passive  form  is,  in  Latm,  an  ob 
lique  case  dependent  on  the  verb ;  as,  favetur  tibi,  thou  art  favored. 

The  following  are  the  forms  of  impersonal  verbs  in  the  several  conjugations 
of  the  passive  voice : — 


Indicative  Mood. 


Pres.    pugnatur. 
Imp.      pugnabatur, 
Fut.      pugnabltur, 
Perf.    puo^atum  est  or 
(uit, 


favetur, 
favebatur, 
favebitur, 
fautum   est    or 
fuit, 


curritur, 
currebatur, 
curretur, 
cursum   est 
fuit. 


or 


venitur, 
veniebatur, 
venietur, 
ventiim    est    <ti 
fuit. 


lUlL,  i«»u,                                                          ,                                                        7 

Plup.    pugnatum  ei-at  or  fautum  erat  or  cursum  erat  or  ventum  erat  r-r 

fuerat,  fuerat,                     fuerat,  fuerat, 

Fttf.  p.  pugnatum  erit  or  fautum   erit  or  cursum   erit    or  ventum  erit  or 

ftierit.  fuerit.                     faerit.  fuerit. 


Subjunctive  Mood. 


Pre* 
Imp. 
Perf 

Plup. 


pugnetur,  faveatur, 

pugnaretur,  faveretur, 

pugnatum  sit  or  fautum  sit    or 

nierit,  fuerit, 

pugnatum  esset  or  fautum  esset  or 

fuisset.  fuisset. 


curratur, 
curreretur, 
cursum    sit 

fuerit, 
cursum  esset  or 

fuisset. 


or 


veniatur, 
veniretur, 
ventum    sit    t/f 

fuerit, 
ventum  esset  or 

fuisset. 


Free. 

pugnaW 

Perf 

•^..j^atiim  esse  oj- 

fuisse, 

Fut. 

pugnatum  iri. 

Infinitive  Mood. 


faveri, 
fautum  esse  or 

fuisss, 
fautunt  iri. 


cum, 
cursum  esi3 

fuisse, 
cursum  iri. 


venin, 

ventum  ssse  or 

fuisse, 
ventum  iri. 


§184. 


IMPKRSONAL    \  '.RBS. 


149 


3.   In  like  manner,  in  the  periphrastic  conjugation,  the  neuter  gen 
dcr  of  the  participle  in  dus,  both  of  active  and  neuter  verbs,  is  used 
impersonally  vrith  est,  etc.,  and  the  cfufive  of  the  person  ;  as,  7nihi 
scribendum  fuit,  1  have  been  obliged  to  write  ;  moriendum  est  omnibus, 
all  must  die.    See  §  162,  15,  R.  5.  ^ 

Remark  1.  Grammarians  usually  reckon  only  ten  real  impersonal  verbs,  all 
6f  which  are  of  the  second  conjugation,  viz.  dfictt,  libet,  licet,  liquet,  miseret, 
oportet,  pi(/et,  pcenitet,  pudet,  and  tcedet.  (See  §  169.)  Four  of  these,  decet,  libet, 
Ucet,  an;l  liquet  occur  also  in  the  third  person  plural,  but  without  personal  sub- 
j«cts.  There  seems,  however,  to  be  no  good  reason  for  distinguishing  the 
verbs  above  enumerated  from  other  impersonal  verbs.  The  following  are  such 
other  verbs  as  are  most  commonly  used  impersonally : — 


(a.)   In  the  first  conjugation  :- 


Constat,  it  is  evident. 
Juvat,  it  delights. 
Praestatj  it  is  better. 
Restat,  tt  remains. 
Stat,  it  is  resolved. 


Vacat,  there  is  leisure. 

Certatur,  there  is  a  con- 
tention. 

Peccatur,  a  fault  is  com- 
mitted. 


(6.)   In  the  second  conjugation : — 


Apparet,  it  appears. 
Attinet,  it  belongs  to. 
DispUcet,  it  diajileases. 
Dolet,  it  grieves. 
Miseretur,  it  distresses. 
Patet,  it  is  plain. 


Pertinet^  it  pertains. 
Placet,  it  pleases. 
Fletur,  we,  etc.  weep,  or, 

there  is  weeping. 
Nocetur,     injury    is    in- 
flicted. 


(c.)   In  the  third  conjugation  :- 


Accidit,  it  happens. 
Conducit,  it  is  useful. 
Contingit,  it  happens. 
Fallit,  or    )  it  escapes  me ; 
Fugit  me,  |  I  do  not  know. 


Miserescit,  it  distresses. 
Sufficit,  it  suffices. 
Credltur,  it  is  believed. 
Curritur,  people  run. 


(cZ.)   In  the  fourth  conjugation : — 


Oonvenitj    it   is    agreed 

upon ;  tt  is  ft. 
Evenit,  it  happens. 


Expedit,  it  is  expedient. 
Donnitur,  we,  they,  etc. 
sleep. 


(g.)   Among  irregular  verbs : — 


Fit,  it  hUppens. 
Interest,  it  concerns. 
Obest,  xt  is  hurtful. 


Prffiterit  me,    it  is 

known  to  me. 
Prodest,  it  avails. 


Pugnatur,     a    battle     is 

fought. 
Statur,  they  stand  frm. 


Persuadetur,  he,  they,  etc. 
are  persuaded. 

Pertasum  est,  he.  they, 
etc.  are  disgtistea  unth. 

Siletur,  silence  is  main- 
tained. 


Desinltur,  there  is  an  end. 
Scribltur,  it  is  -written. 
Vivitur,  we,  etc.  live. 


Scltur.  it  t«  hnmim. 
Itur,  they,  etc.  go. 
Veiiitur,  they,  etc.  com^ 


Refert,  it  concerru. 
Subit,  it  occurs. 
Superest,  it  rem^iint. 


(f)  To  these  may  be  added  verbs  signifying  the  state  of  the  weather,  or  the 
operations  of  nature.  The  subject  of  these  maybe  Jujnter,  deus,  or  cmlum, 
which  are  sometimes  expressed.     Of  this  kind  are  the  following: — 

Lapidat,  it  rains  stones.        Tonat,  it  thunders. 

{iii^sU''^"-^'^^'-  id^^s!cit.i"r' 

Ningit,  ti  s«owa.  Invesperascit,  )p)-oacheB. 

Pluit,  it  rains. 

Lapi  iat,  ningit,  and  pluit  are  also  used  impersonally  in  the  passive  v^ioe. 


Fulget, 
Fulgurat 
Pulminat 
Gelat,  it  freezet._ 
Grandlnai    it  hails. 


t,  litUi 

It,) 


tightens. 


150 


REDUNDANT    VERBS. 


§185 


Rem.  2.  Impensonal  verbs,  not  being  used  in  the  imperative,  take  the  sub- 
jtilctive  in  its  stead ;  as,  delectet,  let  it  delight.  In  the  passive  voice,  thei« 
perfect  participles  are  used  only  m  the  neuter. 

Rem.  3.  Most  of  the  impersonal  verbs  vrant  participles,  gerunds,  and  su- 
pines; but  puenUet  has  a  present  participle,  futures  in  rus  and  dus,  and  the  ge- 
rvmd.     Pudet  and  j^iget  have  also  the  gerund  and  future  passive  participle. 

Rem.  4.  Most  of  the  above  verbs  are  also  used  personally,  but  frequently  in 
a  somewhat  different  sense ;  as,  ut  Tiberis  inter  eos  ei  pons  interesset,  so  that 
the  Tiber  and  bridge  were  between  them. 

REDUNDANT     VERBS. 

§  185.  Redundant  verbs  are  those  which  have  different 
forms  to  express  the  same  meaning. 

Verbs  may  be  redundant  in  termination ;  as,  fahriM  and  fdbricor, 
to  frame  ; — in  conjugation ;  as,  Icivo,  -are,  and  lavo,  -ere,  to  wash  ; — 
or  in  certain  tenses  ;  as,  odi  and  osus  sum,  I  hate. 

1.  The  following  deponent  verbs,  besides  their  passive  form,  have 
an  active  form  in  o,  of  the  same  meaning,  but  which  is,  in  general, 
rarely  used.  A  few,  however,  which  are  marked  r.,  occur  more  rare- 
ly than  the  corresponding  forms  in  o. 

Fabricor,  to  frame. 
Feneror,    to  lend  on  in 

ierest. 
Fluctuor,  to  fluctuate. 
Friistror,  to  disappoint. 
Fruticor,  to  sprout. 
Impertior,  r.  ^<  impart. 
Jurgor,  to  quarrel. 
Lacrimor,  r.  to  weep. 
Ludificor,  to  ridiade. 
Luxiirior,  r,  to  be  rank. 
Medicor,  to  heal. 
Mereor,  to  deserve. 
liletor,  to  measure. 
Misereor,  to  commiserate 
Moderor,  to  moderate. 
Muneror,  r.  to  bestcno. 
Nictor,  r.  to  7nnk. 
Nutrior,  r.  to  nourish. 
Obsonor,  to  cater. 
Opinor,  to  suppose. 

The  following  verbs  are  redundant  in  conjugation  :• 


Abomlnor,  to  abhor. 

Adulor,  to  flatter. 

Altercor,  to  disjmte. 

Amplexor,  to  embi-ace. 

Arbitror,  to  suj)j)ose. 

Argutor,  to  prate. 

Assentior,  to  assetit. 

Aucupor,  to  hvnt  after. 

Auguror,  to  foretell. 

Aurigor,  to  drive  a  chariot. 

AusjMcor,  to  take  the  au- 
spices. 

Cachinnor,  r.  to  laugh 
aloud. 

Comitor,  to  accompany. 

Commentor,  to  deliberate. 

Convlvor,  to  feast  together. 

Cunctor,  (cont.),  to  delay. 

Dignor,  to  deem  ivorthy. 

Depascor,  to  feed  upon. 

Elucubror,  to  elaborate. 


Oscltor,  to  gape. 
Pacificor,   r.   to  make  a 

peace. 
Palpor,  to  caress. 
Partior,  to  divide. 
Populor,  to  lay  waste. 
Punior,  to  punish. 
Ruminor,  to  ruminate. 
Sciscitor,  to  inquire. 
Sortior,  to  cast  lots. 
Stabulor,  to  stable. 
Tueor,  to  defend. 
Tumultuor,  to  be  in  con~ 

fusion. 
Tutor,  to  defend. 

Utor,  to  Mse._ 
Urinor,  to  dive. 
Velificor,  to  set  sail. 
Vencror,  to  reverence. 
Vocif  eror,  to  bawl. 


Boo,  -are, 
Boo,  -ere,  r. 
Bullo,  -are, 
BuUio,  -ire, 
Cieo,  -ere, 
Cio,  -ire,  r. 
Denso,  -are, 
Denseo,  -ere, 
Ferveo,  -ere, 
Fervo,  -ere, 
F6dio,-ere,     ,^. 
Fodio,  -ire,  r.  )         ^ 


to  roar, 
to  boiL 
to  excite, 
to  thicken. 

to  boil. 
I 


Fulgeo,  -ere, 

Fulgo,  -ere,  r. 

L<"lvo,  -are, 

Lrivo,  -ere,  r. 

Lino,  -ere, 

Linio,  -ire,  r. 

Nicto,  -are, 

Nicto,  -ere, 

Salo,  -ere,  |  ^  ^„;^_ 

Salio,  -ire,  ) 

Scateo,-ere,    j^o^j^^^f. 

Scato,  -ere,  r. 


to  shine, 
to  wash, 
to  anoint, 
to  mnh. 


to  sound, 
to  creak. 


Sono,  -are, 
Sono,  -ere, 
Sti-ideo,  -ere, 
Stndo,  -ere, 
Tergeo,-ere,  K^^^_ 
Tergo,  -ere,    )         ^ 
Tueor, -5ri,  U        ,^^j 
Tuor,  -1,  r.    )      ^ 

Those  marked  r.are  rare 
ly  used. 


§1S6. 


RKDUNDANT    VERBS. 


151 


Mirior,  5ri(n ,  and  pdtior,  also,  are  redundant  in  conjugation  in  certain  parts 
See  iu  lista  ^^  174  and  177. 


§  18G.     1.    Some  verbs  are  spelled  alike 
dilFer  in  conjugation,  quantity,  pronunciation, 
two  or  more  of  these  respects. 

Such  are  the  following : — 

6do, 
F.do, 


Abdico,  -are,  to  abdicate. 

Abdico,  -ere,  to  refuse. 

Accldo,  -ere,  to  full  upm. 

Accldo,  -ere,  to  cut  down. 

Ad  do,  -ere,  to  add. 

Adeo,  -ire,  to  go  to. 

Aggero,  -are,  to  heap  vp. 

Aggero,  -ere,  toheap  upmi. ' 

A.llego,  -are,  to  depute. 

Allege,  -ere,  to  choose. 

Appello,  -are,  to  call. 

Appello,  -ere,  to  drive  to. 

Cado,  -ere,  to  fall. 

Caedo,  -ere,  to  act. 

Cedo,  -ere,  to  t^eld. 

Culeo,  -ere,  to  be  hot. 

Oalleo,  -ere,  to  be  hard. 

Cano,  -ere,  to  sing. 

Caneo,  -pre,  to  be  gray. 

Oareo,  -  ;re,  to  want. 

Caro,  -tre,  to  card  icool. 

Celo,  -are,  to  conceal. 

CebIo,  -are,  to  carve. 

Censeo,  -ere,  to  think. 

Sentio,  -ire,  to  feel. 

Claude,  -I're,  to  shut. 

Claude,  -ere,  to  be  lame. 

Celligo,  -are,  to  bind  io- 
gemer. 

Colligo,  -6re,  to  collect. 

Colo,  -are,  to  strain. 

Colo,  -ere,  to  cultivate. 

Cempello,  are,  to  accost. 

Compello,  -ere,  to  force. 

Concido,  -ere,  to  cut  to 
pieces. 

Concido,  -ere,  to  fall. 

Conncendo,  -ere,  to  em- 
bark. 

Conscfndo,  -ere,  to  tear 
to  pieces. 

Constemo,  -are,  to  terrify. 

Constemo,  -ere,  to  strew 
over. 

Decide,  -ere,  to  fall  down. 

Decide,  -ere,  to  cut  off. 

Decipio,  -ere,  to  deceive. 

Desipio,  -ere,  to  dote. 

Deligo,  -are,  to  tie  up. 

Dellgo,  -ere,  to  choose 

DUigo,  -ere,  to  love. 

Dice,  -ere,  to  say. 

Dfco,  -are,  to  dedicate. 


-ere,  to  eat. 

-ere,  to  publish. 
Ediico,  -are,  to  educate. 
Educe,  -ere,  to  draw  out. 
EfTero,  -are,  to  make  wild. 
Eff  ero,  -re,  to  carry  out. 
Excido,  -ere,  to  fall  out. 
Excido,  -ere,  to  cut  off. 
Ferio,  -ire,  to  strike. 
F<  re,  -re,  to  bear. 
Ferior,-ari,  to  keep  holiday. 
Fi'igeo,  -ere,  to  be  cold. 
Frigo,  -ere,  to  fry. 
Fiigo,  -are,  to  jmt  to  flight. 
Fiigio,-pre,  to  fly. 
Fundo,  -are,  to  found. 
Fundo,  -ere,  to  pour  out. 
Incido,  -ere,  to  fall  into. 
Incido,  ere,  to  cut  into. 
Indico,  -are,  to  show. 
Indlco,  ere,  to  proclaim. 
Inficio,  -ere,  to  stain. 
Inf  itior,  -ari,  to  deny. 
Intercido,  -ere,  tohapiien. 
Intercido,   -ere,     to    cut 

asunder. 
Jacee,  -ere,  to  lie. 
Jacio,  -ere,  to  throw. 
Labo,  -are,  to  totter. 
Labor,  -i,  to  glide. 
Lacte,  -are,  to  suckle. 
Lacto,  -are,  to  deceive. 
Lego,  -are,  to  depute. 
Lege,  -ere,  to  read. 
Liceo,  -ere,  to  be  lawful. 
Liceor,  -eri,  to  bid  Joi: 
Lique,  -are,  to  7nelt. 
Liqueo,  -ere,  to  be  mani- 
fest. 
Liquor,  -i,  to  melt. 
Mane,  -are,  to  flow. 
JIaneo,  -ere,  to  stay. 
Mando,  -are,  to  cofnmand 
Mande,  -ere,  to  eat. 
Meto,  -ere,  to  reap. 
Meter,  -ari,  to  measure. 
Metior,  -iri,  to  measure. 
Mf'tuo,  -ore,  to  fear. 
^liseror,  -ari,  to  pity. 
Misereor,  -eri,  to  jnty. 
Moror,  -ari,  to  delay. 
Morior,  -i,  to  die. 
Niteo,  -ere,  to  glitter. 


,  or  nearly  alike,   but 
or  signification,  or  in 


Niter,  -i,  to  strive. 

Obsero,  -are,  to  lock  vp. 

Obsero,  -ere,  to  scno. 

Occido,  -ere,  to  fall. 

Occldo,  -ere,  to  kill. 

Operie,  -ire,  to  cover. 

Operor,  -ari,  to  work. 

Opperior,  -ii'i,  to  wait  for 

Pando,  -are,  to  bend. 

Fando,  -ere,  to  extend. 

Faro,  -are,  to  prepare. 

Pareo,  -ere,  to  appear. 

Pario,-ere,  to  bring  forth. 

Parie,  -are,  to  balance. 

Peudeo,  -ere,  to  hang. 

Pendo,  -<'re,  to  weiah. 

Percdlo,  -are,  to  fliter. 

Percolo,  -ere,  to  adorn. 

Permanee,  -ere,  to  re- 
main. 

Permano,  -are,  to  flou 
through. 

Prsedlce,  -are,  to  publish. 

Prjedico,  -ere,  to  foretell. 

PrCido,  -ere,  to  betray. 

Prodeo,  -ire,  to  come  forth. 

Recede,  -ere,  to  ret^ire. 

Recido,  -ere,  to  fall  back 

Recido,  -ere,  to  ctU  off. 

Reddo,  -ere,  to  restore. 

Redeo,  -ire,  to  return. 

Refero,  -re,  to  bring  back 

Referie,  -ire,  to  strike  back 

Relego,  -are,  to  remove. 

Relego,  -ere,  to  read  over 

Sedo,  -are,  to  allay. 

Sedeo,  -ere,  to  sit. 

Side,  -ere,  to  sink. 

Sere,  -ere,  to  sow. 

Sere,  -ere,  to  entwine. 

Succido,  -ere,  to  fall  xtn,- 
der. 

Succido,  -ere,  to  cut  down. 

Vado,  -ere,  to  go.^ 

Vador,  -iiri,  to  bind  ove* 
by  bail. 

Veneo,  -ire,  to  be  sold. 

Venie,  -ire,  to  come. 

Ve.ner,  -ari,  to  hunt. 

Vincio,  -ire,  to  bind. 

Vinco,  -ere,  to  conquer. 

Vole,  -are,  to  fly. 

Volo,  velle,  to  be  willing. 


152  DERTTA.TION  OF  VERBS.  §  187 

2.   Different  verjs  have  sometimes  the  same  perfe*.*;  |s, 

Aceo,  acui,  to  be  sour.  Fulcio,  i'ulsi,  to  prop.  Paveo,  pavi,  to  fear. 

Acuo,  acui,  to  sharjjtn.         Luceo,  luxi,  to  shine.  Pasco,  pavi,  to  feed. 

Oresco,  crevi,  to  c/rcj).  Lugeo,  luxi,  to  mourn.  Pendeo,  pependi,  tohang. 
Cenio,  orevi,  to  deer  7 x  Mulceo,  mulsi,  to  soothe.  Pendo,  pependi,  to  weigk 
Fulgeo,  fulsi,  to  shim.  Mulgeo,  mulsi,  to  milk. 

To  these  add  some  of  tlie  compounds  of  sto  and  sisto. 

8.   Different  verbs  have  sometimes,  also,  the  same  supine  or  perf«cl 
participle ;  as, 

Frico,  frictum,  to  rub.  Pango,  pactum,  to  drive  Patior,  passus,  to  suffer, 

Fngo,  frictum,  to  roast.  in.  Teneo,  tentum,  to  hold. 

Maneo,  mansum,  to  re-  Paciscor,  pactus,  to  bar-  Tendo,  tentum,  tostretch. 

main.  gain.  Verro,  versum,  to  brush. 

Mando,  mansum,  to  chew.  Pando,  passum,  to  extend.  Verto,  versum,  to  turn. 


DERIVATION    OF    VERBS. 

§  187.  Verbs  are  derived  either  from  nouns,  from  adjec* 
tives,  or  from  other  verbs. 

I.  Verbs  derived  from  nouns  or  adjectives  are  called  denominch 
lives. 

1.  (a.)  Active  denominatives  are  generally  of  the  first  conjuga- 
tion ;  those  which  are  neuter,  of  the  second.  They  are  usually  formed 
by  adding  respectively  o  and  eo  to  the  root ;  as. 

From  Nouns. 
Actives.  Neuters. 

Armo,  to  arm,  (arma.)  Floreo,  to  bloom,  (flos.) 

Fraudo,  to  defraud,  (fraus.)  Frondeo,  to  produce  leaves,  (frons.) 

Nomine,  to  name,  (nomen.)  Luceo,  to  shine,  (lux.) 

Numero,  to  number,  (numerus.)         Vireo,  to  Jlourish,  (vis.) 

From  Adjectives. 

Albo,  to  whiten,  (albus.)  Albeo,  to  be  white,  (albus.) 

Celebro,  to  frequent,  (celeber.)  Culveo,  to  be  bald,  (calvus.) 

Libero,  to  Jree,  (liber.)  Flaveo,  to  be  yellow,  (flavus.) 

(?).)  Sometimes  a  preposition  is  prefixed  in  forming  the  deriva- 
tive ;  as, 

Coacervo,  to  heap  together,  (acervus.)      Exstirpo,  to  extirpate,  (stirps.) 
Excavo,  ic  excavate,  (cavus.)  Elaqueo,  to  insnare,  (laqueus.) 

2.  Many  deponents  of  the  first  conjugation,  derived  from  nouns,  express 
the  exercise  ot  the  character,  oiBce,  etc.,  denoted  by  the  primitive;  as,  archi- 
teclor,  to  build;  comitor,  to  accompany;  furor,  to  steaJ;  from  architectut, 
c&mes,  and  far. 

3.  Such  as  denote  resemblance  or  imitation  are  called  imitatives ;  as,  comi- 
ccn-,  to  imitate  a  crow,  from  comix ;  Grcecor,  to  imitate  the  Greeks.  Some  of 
Siese  end  in  isso ;  as,  pairisso,  to  imitste  a  father. 

n.  Verbs  derived  from  other  verbs  are  either  frequentatives,  in- 
ceplives,  divider -ftives,  diminulives,  or  intensives. 


§  1  87  PKKIVATION    OF    VF.RBS.  1  53 

1.  Frx'.qiier.tathies  express  a  repetition,  or  an  increase  of  the  action 
expressed  by  the  primitive. 

(a.)    They  are  all  of  the  first  conjugation,  and  are  formed  by  ailding 
to  the  third  root ;    as,   domo,    {domlt-)   domito.      So  adjiioo,  adjuto  , 

dlco,  dicto ;  gcw,  gesto.     In  verbs  of  th§  first  conjugation,  at  of  the 

root  is  often  changed  into  it ;  as,  cldmo,  to  cry,  (clamdt-)  clamito,  to 

crj'  frecpiently. 

(b.)    A  few  frequentatives  are  formed  by  adding  ito  to  the  first 

root  of  the  primitive ;  as,  ago  (dg-)   aglto.     So  Idteo,  Idtito ;  nosco, 

noscito ;  qucero,  qiicerito. 

(c.)  Frequentitives,  from  primitives  of  the  second,  third,  and  fourth  conju- 
gations, sometimes  serve  again  as  primitives,  from  which  new  frequentatives 
are  formed ;  as,  dlco,  dicto,  dictito ;  curro,  curso,  curslto ;  vcnio,  vento,  ventito. 
Sometimes  the  second  or  intermediate  form  is  not  in  use. 

{d.)  Some  frequentatives  are  deponent;  as,  minUor,  from  minor  {mtndt-); 
versor,  from  verto  (vers-).  So  amplexor,  sector,  Idquitor,  from  amphctor,  sequm; 
and  l6quor. 

(e.)  When  verbs  of  this  class  express  simply  an  increase  of  the  action  de- 
noted by  the  primitive,  they  are,  by  some  grammarians,  called  intensives. 

2.  Inceptives,  or  inchoatives  mark  the  beginning  of  the  action  or 
Btate  expressedby  the  primitive. 

(a.)  They  all  end  in  sco,  and  are  formed  by  adding  that  termina- 
tion to  the  root  of  the  primitive,  with  its  connecting  vowel,  which,  in 
the  third  conjugation,  is  i;  as,  cdleo,  to  be  hot;  cdlesco,  to  grow  hot. 

So  Icibo,  (are),  Idbasco;  int/emo,  (ere),  ingemisco;  obdcrrmio,  (ire),  obdormisco. 
Sisco  is  contracted  for  hiasco,  from  hiu,  (are). 

(6.)   Jlost  inceptives  are  formed  from  verbs  of  the  second  conjugation. 

(c.)  Some  inceptives  are  formed  from  nouns  and  adjectives  by  adding  asca 
or  esco  to  the  root;  as,  puirnsco,  from  puer  ;  juvenesco,  from  juvenis. 

Note.   Inceptives  are  all  neuter,  and  of  the  third  conjugation.    See  §  173. 

Some  verbs  in  sco,  which  are  not  inceptives,  are  active ;  as,  disco,  posco. 

3.  Desideratives  express  a  desire  of  doing  the  act  denoted  by  the 
primitive. 

(a.)  They  are  formed  from  the  third  root,  by  adding  Urio ;  as, 
cceno,  to  sup,  (ccendf,')  ccendlUrio,  to  desire  to  sup. 

(b.)   Desideratives  are  all  of  the  fourth  conjugation.    See  §  176,  Note. 

(c.)   Verbs  in  urio,  having  u  long,  are  not  desideratives;  as,  jjrurio,  ligurio. 

4.  Diminuiives  denote  a  feeble  or  trifling  action.  They  are  formed 
Dy  adding  illo  to  the  root  of  the  primitive  ;  as,  conscrlbillo,  to  scribble, 
from  conscrlho. 

They  are  few  in  number,  and  are  all  of  the  first  conjugation. 

5.  Intensive^  denote  eager  action.  They  are  usually  formed  by 
adding  so,  esse,  or  isso  to  the  root  of  the  primitive ;  as,  fdcesso,  'jo  act 
earnestly — from  fdcio. 

So  cdpcsso,  incesso,  from  cdpio  and  incedo.  Omcupisco,  to  desire  greatly,  though 
in  form  an  inceptive,  is,  in  its  signification,  an  intensive. 

Note.  Verjs  of  al]  'hese  classes  have  sometimes  simply  the  meaning  of  theij 
primitives. 


154  COMPOSITION    OF    VERBS.  §  188,  183 

COMPOSITION    OF    VERBS. 

§  188.      Verbs  are  compounded  variously  : — 

1.  Of  a  noun  and  a  verb ;  as,  cRdifico,  belligero,  lucrifdcio.   See  §  103,  R.  1. 

2.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  verb,-  as,  ampllftco,  muUipllco. 

3.  Of  two  verbs ;  as,  calefacio,  madefdcio,  patefdcio. 

Eem.  In  verbs  of  this  class,  the  first  part,  which  is  a  verb  of  the  second  con> 
yS^ation,  loses  its  final  o;  the  second  part  is  always  the  verb  fdcio. 

4.  Of  an  adverb  and  a  verb;  as,  benefdcio,  mdUdlco,  sdidffO,  nolo,  negll^o. 

5.  Of  a  preposition  and  &  verb ;  as,  ctdduco,  excvlo,  prddo,  siihrepo,  discemo, 
tejungo. 

6.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  noun,  as,  pemocto,  irretio. 

§  180.  In  composition  with  particles,  the  vowels  a  and  e  and 
the  diphthong  ce  in  the  radical  syllable  of  the  simple  verb  are  often 
changed  in  the  compound. 

1.  The  following  simple  verbs  in  composition  change  a  into  e: — 

Aroeo,  Carpo,  Farcio,  Jacto,         Pario,        Patro,  Sparge, 

Candeo,         Damno,  Fatiscor,       Lacto,         Partio,       Sacro,         Tracto. 

Capto,  Fallo,  Gradior,        Mando,       Patior,       Scando, 

Exc.  A  is  retained  in  amando,  prcemuTido,  desacro,  and  retracto ;  prcedamno, 
and  pertraclo  sometimes  also  occur.  A  is  also  changed  into  e  in  occento  from 
canto,  and  anhelo  from  halo ;  comperco  also  is  found. 

2.  The  following,  in  the  first  root,  change  a  and  e  into  % ;  viz. 

&go,  cado,  egeo,  (5mo,  frango,  pango,  premo,  rego,  sedeo,  specio,  tango. 

•  3.   These  change  a  and  e,  in  the  first  and  second  roots,  into  i;  viz. 
salio,  to  leap,  sapio,  taceo,  and  teneo. 

4.  These  change  a  into  i,  and  oe  into  t,  in  all  the  roots ;  viz. 

habeo,  lacio,  lateo,  placeo,  statuo;  caado,  laedo,  and  qusero. 

5.  The  following  change  a,  in  the  first  root,  into  t,  and  in  the  third 
root  into  e ;  viz. 

cano,  capio,  fateor,  jacio,  rapio,  and  apiscor. 

Exc.  (a.)  A  is  retained  in  circumago,  perdgo,  saldgo;  antekdbeo,  posthdbeo, 
depango,  repango,  compldceo,  and  perpldceo.  Occdno  and  recdno  also  sometime3 
occur.  E  is  retained  in  cohno,  cifcumscdeo,  and  snpershho.  Antecdpio  and  a»- 
Ucipo  are  both  used ;  so  also  are  superjdcio  and  superjicio. 

(b.)  Cogo  and  dego  are  foiTned,  by  contraction,  from  con,  de,  and  ago;  demo, 
promo  and  sumo,  from  de,  pro,  sub,  and  emo ;  prcebeo,  and  perhaps  dibeo,  from 
prce,  de,  and  hdbeo ;  pergo  and  surgo,  from  per,  sub,  and  rego. 

Note  1.  Fdcio,  compounded  with  a  preposition,  changes  d  into  i  in  the  first 
rootj  and  into  e  m  the  tlaird ;  as,  nfficio,  affeci,  affectum.  Some  compounds  of 
facto  with  nouns  and  adjectives,  change  «  into  i,  and  also  drop  i  before  o,  and 
are  of  the  first  conjugation ;  as,  signlflco,  Icetifico,  magrvlfico.  Specio  forms 
some  compounds  m  the  same  manner;  as,  conspicor  and  sufpicor. 

Note  2.  Lego,  compounded  with  con,  de,  di,  e,  inter,  nee,  and  se,  changes  i 
into  i,  in  the  first  I'oot ;  as,  colllgo,  negligo,  etc. ;  but  with  ad,  prce,  per,  re,  sub, 
and  trans,  it  retains  e;  as,  allego. 

Note  3.  Calco  and  salio,  m  composition,  change  a  into  u ;  as,  inculco,  insuUo. 
Plaudo  changes  au  into  o ;  as,  explodo ;  except  applaudo.  Audio  changes  an 
into  e  in  obcdio.  Camo,  clauda,  and  qudtio,  drop  a-  as,  accOso,  recludo,  perc&tio 
Am  changes  u  int.:)  e  in  di'ji  o  and  pejiro,  but  dejuro,  also,  is  in  use. 


§190,191.  ADVERBS.  155 

Note  4.   In  the  compoimds  of  caveo,  maneo,  and  trdh<   d  remaiijs  nw  hanged, 

and  80  also  does  te  in  the  compounds  of  hcereo. 

Note  5.   The  simple  verbs  with  which  the  following  are   com 
pounded  are  not  used : — 

Defendo,  Irnpedio,  Confilto,  Instigo,  Conniveo, 

Otfendo,  Imbuo,  Refuto,  Impleo,  Percello, 

Experior,  Compello,  (-are,)  Ingrao,  Compleo,  Indue,         and  soma 

Expedio,  Appello,  (-are,)  Congmo,  Renideo,  Exuo,  others. 

For  ths  changes  produced  in  prepositions  by  composition  with  verbs  see 
^  196. 

PARTICLES. 

§  190.  1.  Particles  are  those  parts,  of  speech  which  are 
neither  declined  nor  conjugated.  They  are  divided  into  four 
classes — adverbs,  prepositions,  conjunctions,  and  interjections. 

NoTB.  A  word  may  sometimes  belong  to  two  or  more  of  these  classes,  ac- 
cording to  its  connection. 

ADVERBS. 

2.  An  adverb  is  a  particle  used  to  modify  or  limit  the  mean- 
ing of  a  verb,  an  adjective,  or  another  adverb ;  as, 

B,6ue  et  sjupienter  dixit,  he  spoke  well  and  wisely ;  Cants  egregie  Jidelis,  a  r«- 
markabJy  faithful  dog;  Niniis  vakle  laudare,  to  praise  too  much.  Compare 
4  277,  R.  1. 

3.  Adverbs,  in  regard  to  their  signification,  are  divided  into  va- 
rious classes ;  as,  adverbs  of  place,  time,  manner,  etc:,  and  some  be- 
long to  either  class  according  to  their  connection. 

4.  In  regard  to  their  etymology,  adverbs  are  either  primitive  or 
derivative. 

Remark.  Among  primitive  adverbs  are  here  classed  not  only  such  as  can- 
not be  traced  to  any  more  renaote  root,  but  also  all  which  are  not  included  in 
the  regular  cla.sses  of  derivative  adverbs  hereafter  mentioned. 

PRIMTIVE    ADVERBS. 

§  191.  The  primitive  adverbs  are  few  in  number,  when  com- 
p.ire>l  with  the  derivatives,  and  most  of  them  are  contained  in  the 
following  lists  marked  I,  n,  and  III. 

I.     Adverbs  of  Place  and  Order. 

Meo,  so  far  J  as  far.  sXicvibi,  somewhere.  .  allqucversum,    toward 

adhuc,  to  l]ns  place.  aliounde,  fr&m     some      some  place. 

adversus,  \  opposite,  place.  aliunde,  from  another 

Bdversum,  >overagainst,X\\w,  to  another  place.         place. 

exadversus, — urn,  )  toward.  allqua,  in  some  way.  circa,      )  , 

alia,  by  another  way.  aliorsum,  towardanoth-  circum,  }  "^^^• 

alias,  in  another  place.  er  place.  chciti'-r,  on  every  side. 

alibi,  eUewheure.  ailquo,  to  some  place,  circumcirca  iUaround. 


156 


ADVERBS. 


§191. 


citra,  on  this  side, 
citro,  hither. 
contra,  over  acjainst. 
coram,  before. 
dehinc,  henceforth. 
deinceps,  successively. 
deinde,  tfter  that. 
denique,  finally. 
denuo,  again. 
deorsum,  downward. 
destrorsum,    imonrd    tht 

right. 
eS,  that  way. 
eadem,  the  same  way. 
eo,  to  that  place,  thither. 
eodem,  to  the  same  place. 
exinde,  after  that. 
extra,  mthout. 
extrinst'cus, /VoT?*  wii1}out. 
f  oras,  out  of  doors. 
f  oris,  mthout. 
liac,  this  way. 
hactenus,  tfius  far. 
hie,  here. 
hinc,  hence. 
hue,  hither. 
hucusque,  this  far. 
horsiim,  hitherward. 
Ibi,  there. 

ibidem,  in  the  same  place. 
iliac,  Hiat  way. 
illic,  there. 
illinc,  thence. 
illo,  thither. 
illorsum,  thitheiioard. 
illuc,  thitlier. 
inde,  thence. 
indidera,  from  the  tame 

place. 

Kemark  1.   (a.)   The 


quorsum?  whithenvard? 

3uSt,  l^— •^i'^«- 

'■'^^'"°'  \bachward, 

retrorsiim,^     j^^^_    ' 

rursum,      ) 

sicubi,  if  anil  where. 

sicimde,  if  from  any  place. 

sinistrorsum,    toward    tht 

left. 

subter,  beneath. 

super,  supra,  above,  cm  top. 

sursum,  vpward. 


infra,  below,  beneath. 

Inilii,  in  that  place. 

ultrinsecus,  from  mthin 

intra,  iiitro,  ji 

introrsum,    >  within. 

intils,  ) 

istac,  that  way. 

istic,  there. 

istinc,  thence. 

isto,  istuc,  thither. 

juxta,  near,  alike. 

neciibi,  lest  any  where. 

neutro,  to  neither  side. 

neutriM,  to  neither  place,  turn,   then,    i»  the  neeot 


side 

no  where. 


to  neither 
nullibi, 
nusquam 
penltiis,  within. 
pone,  post,  behind,  back. 
porro,  onward. 
procul,  far. 
prope,  propter,  near. 
prorsum,  forward. 
protinvis,  onward. 
qua  ?  in  which  way  ? 
quaqua,  )  what  way 

quacumque,  j    soever. 
quaqui',  wheresoever. 
qualibet,  |  ■„ 
quavis,     )  ii      J 

quo '?  whither  ? 
quoad, 
quousque 
quopiam, 
quoquam, 

quoquo,  )  whither- 

quocumque,  )  soever. 
quoquoversus,    toward 
every  side. 
interrogative  adverbs   of 


wherever, 
wheresoever. 


place 
iibi?  where? 
ubicumque, 
ubifibi, 
ubilibet,|  ,j,^^e 

^^J^l^"^'    (everywhere. 
ubivis,     J         '' 

ultra,  ultro,  beyond. 

undt^?  whence? 

undelibet, 

undevls, 

undique, 

undeunde,        )  whence- 

undecumque,  j  soever. 

usjiiam,   )  someivhere, 

usquam,  )  any  where. 

usque,  all  the  tvay. 

usquequaquC,  in  all  ways. 

utrimque,  on  both  sidea. 

,  wXro'i  ivhich  toay  ? 

to  someplace.  ^^.^^.^  •„  ^^,^J^  ^^^^^  , 


from  every 
where. 


how  far. 


utrobique,  in  both  places. 
utroque,  to  both  sides. 
utroqueversum,   toward 
both  sides. 
place,   iibi  ?  where  ?    unde  1 


•whence  ?  quo  1  whither  ?  and  qua  f  in  what  way  ?  have  relation  to  other  ad- 
verbs formed  in  a  similar  manner,  thus  constituting  a  system  of  adverbial  cor- 
relatives similar  to  that  of  the  pronominal  adjectives.    See  §  139,  6,  (3.)_ 

(b.)  As  in  the  case  of  the  pronominal  coiTclatives,  the  interrogative  and 
relative  forms  are  alike,  beginning  with  u  or  qh.  The  demonstratives  are  formed 
from  is,  which  is  strengtliened  by  dem,  and  tlie  indefinite  from  allquis.  The 
general  relatives  and  the  general  indefinites  or  universals,  like  those  of  the  pro- 
nominal adjectives,  are  made,  the  former  by  doubling  the  simple  relatives  ca 
by  appending  to  them  the  termination  cumqui,  '  soever,'  and  the  latter  by  ad- 
ding qui,  vis,  or  Ubei.     Thus  : 

Jnterrog.        Demonstr.        Relat.         Gen.  Relat.        Indefin. 
ubi?  ibi,  ubi,  ubiubi,  alicubi, 

Ibidem,  iibiciimque. 


und6? 

qao? 
qa&? 


inde, 
indldem, 

eo, 

eodem, 
ea, 
eadem. 


unde, 


quo, 
qua. 


undeunde, 
undi'cumque, 

quoquo, 
quocumqup, 
quaqua, 
quacunwue. 


alicunde, 

aliquo, 
aliqua. 


Gen.  Indefin 
ubique, 
ubivis, 
ubilibet. 
undique, 
undevis, 
undelibet, 
quovis, 
quoilbet, 
quavis. 
QualTbCt 


§191. 


ADVr.RBS. 


157 


(f.)  To  those  answering  to  fiMT  maybe  added  dlihi,  nulJihi,  and  inibi,  th« 
kttcr  being  a  sti-fii<;tliened  form  of  iV«'.  lu  like  iiuinner  aliiiiule,  utri/nqite,  in- 
Irimevus,  and  extrinsecus  may  be  added  to  those  answering  to  untUf  and  alio  to 
those  answerins:  to  quo?     So  also'  to  iitro?  answer  ulrOqite  and  nnutro. 

(d.)  The  (lemoiistratives  ibi,  imie,  and  to  are  used  only  in  reference  to  rela^ 
ti(7e  sentences  which  precede;  but  more  definite  demonstratives  are  formed 
from  the  pronouns  //7c,  isie,  and  tile,  jmswering  in  like  manner  to  ul/if  undS? 
and  quo  ?  These  together  with  the  preceding  correlatives  are,  in  the  following 
table,  arranged  respectively  under  their  several  interrogatives  ulnf  umief  quo? 
fud  t  &^d  quursum  f — Thus  : 

quo  ?  qua  V 

hue,  hac, 

istuc,  istac, 

illuc,  Dlac, 

eo,  ea, 

eodem,  eadem, 

alio,  alia, 

aliquo.  aliqua. 

(e.)  Etc,  hinc,  Mc,  refer  to  the  place  of  the  speaker;  iMlc,istinc,  istuc,  to  the 
place  of  the  second  person  or  person  addressed;  and  ilUc,  illinc,  illuc,  to  that  of 
the  third  person  or  the  person  or  thhig  spoken  of.  Cf.  ^  207,  R.  23,  (a.)  and  (c^) 

(/.)  The  interrogative  adverbs  lAi,  wide,  quo,  qua,  etc.  are  often  used  with- 
out a  question,  sunply  as  adverbs  of  place;  as,  hi  mm  partem  ituros,  atque  ibi 
futuros  ndvvtios,  ubi  eos  Ooesar  coiistifuisset. 

(^.)  In  consequence  of  a  transfer  of  their  meaning,  some  of  the  adverbs  of 
place,  as,  hlc,  ibi,-  Hit,  hinc,  inde,  hactenHs,  etc.,  become  also  adverbs  of  tune, 
and  some  of  them  are  used  also  as  conjunctions. 

n.     Adverbs  of  Time. 


ubiV 

unde  ? 

hie, 

hinc, 

istic, 

istinCr 

illic. 

illinc. 

ibi, 

inde. 

ibidem, 

indldem, 

alibi, 

aliunde. 

allcubi. 

aUcunde. 

quorsum  ? 
horsum, 
istorsum, 
illorsum. 


aliorsura, 
aliquoversum. 


actutum,  immediately. 
abhinc,  from  this  time. 
udeo,  so  loni/  (as). 
adhuc,  nntil  m>w,  still. 
alias,  at  another  time 
idiquamdiu,  for  awhile. 
allquaiido,  at  some  time. 
aliquoties,  several  times. 
ante,    )  before, 
antea,  )  previously. 
antehiic,  formerly. 
bis,  twice,  (see  ^  119). 
circiter,  about,  near. 
eras,  tom^trrow. 
cum  or  quum,  ivhen. 
deinceps,  in  succession. 
delude  wdein,  )  thereupon, 
exindi-arexin,  )  afterward. 
dt-hinc,  from  this  time. 
iemum,  at  hnylh. 
deulque,  lastly. 
diu,  lonij. 

duduni,  previously. 
eousque,  so  long. 
hf^Tf'  or  ht"vT,  yesterday. 
hic,  here,  hereupon. 
hinc, /row  thistijne, since. 
bodie,  to-(i'iy. 
ibi,  then,  thereupon. 
dentldem,  now  and  then, 
repeatedly. 

14 


illieo,  immediately. 
hide,  after  that,  men. 
interdum,  sometimes. 
interim,  meanwhile. 
itcrum,  again. 
jam,  now,  already. 

J='™^}'.^,'         I  long  ago. 
jamdudum,  )       ^    " 

janijam,  presently. 

jampridem,  hng  since. 

modo,  just  noio. 

mox,  soon  after. 

nondum,  not  yet. 

nonn^imquam,  sometimes. 

nudiiis  tertiiis,  three  days 

ago. 
nunc,  now. 
numquam,  never. 
nuper,  lately. 
olim,  formerly. 
parumper,  ijor  a  short 
paulispir,    j      time. 
pr.reudie,  two  days  hence. 
porro,  hereafter,   in  fur- 

ture. 
post,  postea,  afterwards. 
postliac,  hereafter. 
postridie,  the  day  after. 
pridem,  long  since. 
pridie,  the  (lay  bifore. 
protinus,  instuntlii. 


quamdiu  ?  hmu  Icmg  ? 

quandoV  when? 

quandocumque,    when- 
ever. 

quandoque,  at  some  time. 

quatcr,  four  times. 

quoad?        U^iong* 

quousque  r  J  ^ 

qiiondam,  formerly. 

quotidie,  daily. 

quoties  V  how  often  ? 

quum  or  cum,  when. 

rursils,  again. 

sffipe,  ofte7i. 

semel,  once. 

semper,  always. 

statim,  immediately. 

subinde,  immediately,  now 
and  then. 

tamdiii,  so  long. 

tandem,  at  length. 

tantisper,  for  so  long. 

ter,  tUrice. 

toties,  so  often. 

turn,  tunc,  then. 

ubi,  when,  as  soon  as. 

umquam,  ever. 
usque,  until,  ever. 
ut  (>r  uti.  as,  nt  aoon  as^ 
when. 


158 


A.D  VERBS. 


§191 


TTT      Adverbs   jf  Manner,  Quality,  Degr  e,  etc, 


adeo,  so,  to  that  degree. 
ac'niodum,  venj  much. 
&]KSr,  otheriuise. 
ceu,  as,  like  as. 
cur?  whyf 

duntaxat,  only,  at  least. 
etiam,  also,  trv,'y,  yes. 
etiamnuuc,*    ^    j^;^g^_ 
etuimtum,    )        ' 

1*^^**'-    [  almost,  nearly. 
ferme,  J  '  ' 

fortasse,  perhaps. 

frustra,  in  vain. 

gratis,  freely. 

baud,  not. 

haudquaquam,  by    no 
means. 

hucusque,  so  far. 

identidem,  constantly. 

immo,   nay,   on   the   con- 
trary. 

Ita,  so. 

Item,  just  so,  also. 

Itidem,  in  like  manner. 

juxta,  equally,  alike.  ■ 

magis,  nwre. 

modo,  only. 

DEB  or  no,  truly,  verily. 

ne,  not. 

nedum,  much  less. 

nempe,  truly,  forsooth. 

nequaquam,  )   by tw 

neutiquam,    )  means. 

nimirum,  certainly,    wbe 
sure. 


°i™^«'         too  much. 
mm  mm,  ) 

non,  not. 

omiiino,  altogether,  only. 

peene,  almost. 

palam,  opienly. 

pariter,  equally. 

parum,  too  Utile. 

paulatim,  by  degrees. 

pemtus,  wholly. 

pfrLnde,  /  just  as, 

proiiide,  |  as  though. 

perquam,  very  much. 

plerumque,  for  the  most 

piart,  commonly. 

potius,  rather. 

porro,  mo7-eover,  then. 

prseter,  beyond,  except. 

prsesertim,  particularly. 

profecto,  truly. 

prope,  almost,  near. 

propemodum,  almost. 

prorsus,  wholly. 

quam,  how  much,  as. 

quamobrem,  wherefore. 

quare  ?  why  f  wherefore  ? 

quasi,  as  if,  as  it  toere. 

qui'^madmodum,  as. 

eqmdem,  ) 

quomodo  i  how  f  in  what 

manner  f 
quoque,  also. 
rite,  duly. 
saltern,  at  least. 


'  '  ?  separately. 


so  as,  as. 


sane,  truly. 

■ '  ^!     /  enough. 
satis,  )  ^ 

satiiis,  rather. 

scXlicet,  truly,  to  tmt. 

spcus  otherwise. 

seorsum,  ) 

seorsus, 

sic,  so. 

sicut,    ) 

slcuti,  ) 

simul,  together. 

singillatim,  one  by  one. 

solum,  only,  alone. 

tam,  so,  so  much. 

tamquam,  like,  as  if. 

tantwpere,  so  greatly. 

tantum,  so  much,  only. 

tautummddo,  only. 

temere,  at  random. 

Qna,  together. 

usquequ  aque,  in  allpointt, 

■  in  all  ways. 

■fit, 

uti, 

utiqui",  at  any  rate,  cer- 

tainly. 

utpote,  as,  tnasmuch  at. 

valde,  very  much. 

vol,  even. 

velut,   )  as,   like  as,   for 

veluti,  J      example. 

vicissim,  in  turn,  again. 

videlicet,  clearly,  to  wit. 

vix,  scarcely. 


Rem.  2.  Adverbs  denoting  quality,  manner,  etc.,  are  sometimes  divided  into 
those  of,  1.  Quality;  as,  icvie,  m«fe'.  2.  Certainty;  as,  certe,  plane.  3.  Con- 
tingence;  a.s,  forte.  4.  Negation;  as,  hand,  7i6n,  ni',  immd.  5.  Affirmation;  as, 
ncB,  quidem,  utique,  nempe.  6.  Swearing;  as, /iertfe'.  7.  Explaining;  as,  w"c?('K- 
C(H  utpOte.  8.  Separation-  as,  seorsum.  9.  .Joining  together;  as,  simid,  una. 
10.'  Interrogation;  as,  curf  qudref  11.  Quantity  or  degree;  as,  satis,  adeo. 
12.  Excess;  as,  perquam,  niaxlme.  13.  Detect;  as,  pdrum,  pcene.  14.  Prefer- 
ence;  as,  j9(5fe'iis,  sfW^us.  15.  Likeness;  as,  iia,  sic.  16.  Unlikeness;  as,  a/«CT-. 
17.   Exclusion ;  as,  tantum,  solum. 

Eem.  3.  Non  is  the  ordinary  Latin  negation.  Baud  signifies  either  '  not  at 
all,'  or  '  not  exactly.'  It  is  used  by  the  comic  ana  later  writers  in  all  combina- 
tions, but  in  the  authors  of  the  best  age  its  use  is  more  especially  limited  to  its 
connection  with  adjectives  and  adverbs  denoting  a  measm-e;  as,  haud  mullum, 
hand  magnum,  haucl  parvus,  hand  mediocris,  hand  paulo,  haud  procul,  haudhng^.. 
especially  haud  sane  in  connection  with  other  words;  as,  haud  sane  facile,  res 
haud  seine  diffidlis,  haud  sane  intelligo  ;  also  haud  quisquam,  haud  umquum,  haud 
quaquam.  With  verbs  haud  is  scarcely  used  until  Livy  and  Tacitus,  es.cept  in 
the  common  phrase  haud  scio  an,  wliich  is  equivalent  to  nescio  an.—Ne ,  (or  « 5 ) 
is  the  primitive  Latin  negative  particle,  signifying  m  or  not.  It  is  used'  ui  this 
lense  and  as  an  adverb,  («)  with  qiddem  to  make  an  emphatic  negation  f  the 
word  standing  between  them :  as,  ne  in  oppidis  quidem.  not  even  in  the  towns; 
(6)  in  composition  as   in  ne»io,nefas,  neuter  ete.;  (e)  with  imperatives  and 


§  191.  APVKRBS.  159 

eubjnnctives  used  as  irnperatives;  as,  Ne  pueri,  ne  tanta  nnlmii  tsmesdte  heUa. 
V  rg.  So,  also,  in  wishes  and  asseverntioiis;  as,  Nc  klJujMer  unf  ret,  m».y  Aw- 
piier  forbid  it.  Liv.  Ne  rlvam,  $i  »ciu,  may  I  die,  if  I  know.  Cic;  and  in  con- 
cessive and  resti-ictive  clauses;  as,  Nt  /iieril,  suppose  there  was  not.  Cic. 
Si7it  mlftricurdes  in  J'urlbas  mrarii,  nt  ilUs  snnyulneiii,  iiostraiii  lart/iantur,  only 
let  ihein  not,  etc.  Oic.  So  iht/n  nt,  dummodo  ne,  modo  ne,  dum  qiiidtm  ne  ;  and  in 
intentional  clauses  with  tit. — fmmo,  as  a  negative,  substitutes  something 
stronger  in  the  place  of  the  preceding  statement,  which  is  denied;  as,  Cama 
iffitui-  non  bona  esif  Inimo  optima,  sed,  etc.  Cic.  It  may  often  be  translated  bj 
'  nay,'  or  '  nay  even.' 

Eem.  4.  Quid  em  gives  particular  emphasis  to  a  word  or  an  idea,  and  then 
answers  to  our  '  certainly '  or  '  indeed,'  but  frequently,  especially  with  a  pro- 
noun, it  merely  adds  emphasis.  Equidem,  which  is  considered  as  a  com- 
pound of  er/o  dndquldem,  is  used  exclusively  in  this  sense  by  Cicero,  Virgil,  and 
Horace,  but  by  other  and  particularly  by  later  ^Titers  it  is  used  like  quidem. — 
Nempe,  '  surely,' is  often  used  ironically,  when  we  refute  a  person  by  con- 
cessions which  he  is  obliged  to  make,  or  by  deductions.  In  other  connections 
it  may  be  translated  '  namely.' 

Rem.  5.  Sic ,  ltd,  tam,  as  also  tantdpere,  and*a£Zeo  signify  'so.' 
Sic  is  more  particularly  the  demonstrative  '  so,'  or  '  thus ' ;  as,  sic  se  res  hdbet. 
It  a  defines  or  limits  more  accurately,  and  is  equivalent  to  our  '  in  s\ich  a  man- 
ner,' or  '  only  in  so  far ' ;  as,  ita  defendito,  ut  neviinem  Uedns.  Frequently,  ho\v- 
ever,  ita  has  the  signification  of  sic,  but  sic  has  not  the  limiting  sense  of  ita. — 
Ta m,  'so  much,'  generally  stands  before  adjectives  and  adverbs,  and  in- 
creases the  degree ;  before  vowels  tantopere  is  generally  used  instead  of  tam. — 
.a.deo,  'to  that  degree'  or  'jxiint,'  increases  the  expression  to  a  certain  end  or 
result.  Hence  it  forms  the  transition  to  the  conclusion  of  an  argument  or  to 
the  essential  part  of  a  thing;  and  Cicero  employs  it  to  introdifce  the  proofs  of 
what  he  has  previously  alleged;  as,  Id  adeo  ex  ipso  sendtus  consulto  corjnoscite, 
Rnd  always  in  such  case  puts  adeo  after  a  pronoun. 

Rem.  6.  Umquam,  'ever,'  and  ^usquam,  'somewhere,'  like  qmsquam, 
require  a  negation  in  the  sentence,  and  thus  become  equivalent  to  numquam 
and  nusquam.  A  negative  question,  how^ever,  may  supply  the  place  of  a  nega- 
tive proposition ;  as,  num  tu  enm  umqnam  vidistif — Us  pi  am,  like  quispiam,  is 
not  negative,  but  is  the  same  as  dlicubi,  but  strengthened,  just  as  quispiam  is 
the  same  as  aliquis.  So,  also,  quopiam  is  used  affinnatively,  and  quoquam  nega- 
tively.— Jam,  with  a  negative,  answers  to  our  'longer';  as.  Nihil  jam  spero, 
I  no  longer  hope  for  any  thing.  When  used  to  connect  sentences  it  signifies 
'further,'  or  'now.' — tjsque  is  commonly  accompanied  by  the  prepositions 
ad,  in,  ab,  or  ex.  It  rarely  signifies  '  ever  and  anon ' ;  as,  NalHram  exptllns 
furcd,  tdmen  usque  recurret.  Hor. — Nuper,  mddo,  and  max  are  relativs 
and  indefinite. — Dudum,  '  previously,' or  '  before,'  in  relation  to  a  time  which 
has  just  passed  away,  may  often  be  translated  'just  before." — Jamdudum 
signifies  '  long  before,'  or  '  long  since.'  With  the  poets  jamdudum  contains  the 
idea  of  impatience,  and  signifies  '  without  delay,'  '  forthwith ' ;  as,  Jamdudum 
tumite  pcenas.  Virg. —  Tandem,  'at  length,'  also  expresses  the  impatience 
with  which  a  question  is  put. 

Resi.  7.  Tunc  is  'then,'  'at  that  time,'  in  opposition  io  nunc,  'now': 
Turn  is  'then,'  as  the  correlative  of  quum,  'when  ;'  as,  quum  omnes  adessent, 
turn  ille  exorstis  est  dicere,  when  all  were  present,  then  he  began  to  speak. 
Without  a  relative  sentence  turn  signifies  'hereupon,' or  'thereupon';  but  a 
relative  sentence  may  always  be  supplied.  The  same  difference  exists  between 
etiam  nunc  and  ■itiam  turn,  '  still,'  or  '  yet ' ;  and  between  mine  ipsiim  and  '.urn  ip- 
»um;  quummcxlme  and  tummaxime,  'just,'  or  'even  then';  for  edam  nunc,  nunt 
ipsum  and  quum  maxime  refer  to  the  present;  but  etiamtum,  tuinip$um,  and 
tummaxime,  to  the  past. 


16C  DERIVATION    OF    ADVERBS.  §192 

DERIVATION    OF    ADVERBS. 

§  103.     Adverbs  are  derived  from  nouns,  adjectives,  pro 
Douns,  and  participles. 

I.   From  Nouns. 

1.  Of  these  a  fewend  in  im  (generally  dtim),  and  denote  manner; 

as, 

'    gregatim,  in  herds ;  membratim,  limb  by  limb ;  vinssaiim,  or  more  frequentlj, 
vicissim,  by  turns ;  from  grex,  membrum,  and  rids. 

2.  Some  end  in  itus,  and  denote  origin  or  manner ;  as, 

caelitus,  from  heaven ;  funditus,  from  the  bottom ;  rddlcltus,  by  the  roots ;  from 
caelum,  fundus,  and  radix. 

3.  Some  are  merely  the  different  cases  of  nouns  used  adverbially ; 

as, 

(a.)  Some  adverbs  of  time ;  as,  mane,  noctu,  diu,  tempdri  or  tempSrt,  Initio, 
principio,  niiido. — (b.)  Adverbs  of  place;  as,  fdr'is,  fdrds. — (c.)  Adverbs  ol 
manner ;  as,  sponte,  forte,  gratis  or  grdtils,  ingratiis,  Xfulgo,  pavtim. 

n.   From  Adjectives  and  Participles. 

By  far  the  greater  number  of  derivative  adverbs  come  from  adjec 
tives  and  participles  (present  and  perfect),  and  end  in  e  and  ter. 

1.  Adverbs  derived  from  adjectives  and  participles  of  the  second 
declension,  are  formed  by  adding  e  to  the  root ;  as, 

agre,  scarcely ;  alie,  high ;  llbere,  freely ;  longe,  far ;  ml'sere,  miserably ;  pUne, 
fully;  docte,  learnedly;  orndt!',  elegantly;  from  ager,  alius,  liber,  longiis,  misery 
plenus,  doctus,  and  orndtus.     Beni,  well,  is  from  bonus,  or  an  older  form  bentis. 

Remark.  A  few  adverbs  in  e  differ  in  meaning  from  their  adjectives ;  as, 
sane,  certainly;  valde,  very;  from  sdnus,  sound,  well;  and  vdlldus,  strong. 

Exc.  1.  A  few  adverbs  derived  from  adjectives  and  participles  of 
the  second  declension,  add  iter,  itus,  im,  or  atiin  to  the  root;  as, 

ndvitlr,  activelj"^;  antlquitus,  anciently;  dlvinUiis,  divinely;  pinvdtim,  privately; 
tuaiim,  after  vour  manner;  singulatim,  singilldtim,  sigilldtim,  or  singnUvn,  sever- 
ally; ccEsim,  carptim,  sensim,  stdtim,  etc.  from  ndvils,  anilquus,  div'mus,  pricdtus, 
tuus,  singuli,  cxbsus,  carptus,  etc. 

Exc.  2.  Some  adverbs  are  formed  with  two  or  more  of  the  above  termina- 
tions with  the  same  meaning;  s.s,  dure,  duHter  ;  firme,  fii-miter ;  nave,  ndviter; 
large,  largiter  ;  luculente,  luculenicr  ;  turbulenie,  turbulenter :  so  caute  and  cauiim  ; 
humane,  humdniter,  and  humdnitus  ;  publice  and  pubUcitus. 

2.  Adverbs  derived  from  adjectives  and  participles  of  the  third  de- 
clension, are  formed  by  adding  iter  to  the  root,  except  when  it  ends 
in  t,  in  which  case  er  only  is  added;  as, 

dcritlr,  shivrply;  fellciter,  happily;  turpiter,  basely; — eleganfer,  elegantlv , 
prudentlr,  pnidently;  dnumter,  lovingly;  2)rdpi'ranter,\\.i\.it\\Y;  from  deer,  fclix, 
turpis,  elegans,  prcidens,  dmans,  and  prdperans.  So  also  from  the  obsolete  dlU 
for  dliUs,  and  prdjns,  (neuter  prdpe),  come  dliter  and  prqptSr  for  prdpiter. 

Exc.   From  «Mc?(w;  comes  by  svncope  rt?<f/if<er  ;  from  ffrrtts  comes  for tftir 
from  omm$,  omnlno ;  from  uber,  uhertim ;  and  from  nequam,  neqmter. 


§192.  derivat:on  of  adverbs.  161 

J.  From  the  cardinal  numerals  are  fonned  numeral  adverbs  ir 
tes :  as, 

quinquies,  iecies,  from  quinque  and  decern,.  So  tOtws  and  qudiies,  from  tdt  and 
qtidt.     See  §  119. 

4.  Some  adverbs  are  merely  certain  cases  of  adjectives.  Sac\ 
are, 

(a.)  Ablatives  in  o,  from  adjectives  and  participles  of  the  second  declension 
as,  citd,  quickly;  continuo,  immedintely;  falso^  fiilsely;  crcbro,  frequently; 
minto,  deservedly;  necdplndto,  unexpectedly ;  yb)-to/<5,  by  chance;  auspicalo, 
auspiciously;  coMsufto,  designedly;  and  a  few  in  a  from  adjectives  of  the  first 
declension;  as,  7'ec'frt,  straight  on;  una,  together.  In  like  manner,  rpp«?i<e,  sud- 
denly, from  ripens ;  and  jjcrer/re  or  pi'regri,  from  pereger. 

(h.)  Nominatives  or  accusatives  of  the  third  declension  in  the  neuter  singu- 
lar ;  as,  facile,  difficile,  recens,  sublime,  and  impHne  ;  and  some  also  of  the 
second  declension;  as,  ceterum,  plerumque,  mtdtum,  pluHmum,  potisslmum,  jiaiir- 
lum,  nimium,  pdritm,  and  the  numeral  adverbs,  prinium,  iierum,  tertium,  quar- 
titm,  etc.  which  have  also  the  termination  in  o,  and  so  also  postrcmum  (6),  and 
ultinmm  (o).  The_  neuter  plural  sometimes  occurs  also,  especially  in  poetry;  as, 
mulla  gemcre ;  Iristid  ululare ;  crehrd  f(^rlre. 

(c.)  Accusatives  of  the  first  declension;  as,  hifariam,  trtfariam,  muUifariam, 
omnifariam,  etc.  soil,  partem. 

Note  1.  The  forms  in  e  and  6  from  adjectives  of  the  second  declension  have 
generaUy  the  same  meaning,  but  vere  and  vero  have  a  somewhat  diflferent 
sense.  VSri},  tiiily,  is  the  regular  adverb  of  verus,  true;  but  viro  is  used  in 
answers,  in  the  sense  of '  in  truth,'  or  '  certainly.'  In  this  use  it  is  added  to  the 
verb  used  in  the  question ;  as,  adfuistine  Mrlin  convioiof  The  affirmative  an- 
swer is  ego  vero  adfui,  or  without  the  verb,  ego  vero,  and  negatively,  mlnime 
vero;  and  as  vero  thus  merely  indicates  a  reply,  it  is  often  untranslatable  into 
English. —  Certo,  on  the  other  hand,  usuaUy  takes  the  meaning  of  the  adjective 
certus,  whUe  certe  often  signifies  '  at  least ' ;  as,  vicU  sumus,  aui,  si  dignitns  vinci 
non  potest,  fracti  certe ;  but  certe  is  frequently  used  in  the  sense  of  '  certainly,' 
especially  in  the  phrase  certe  scio. 

Note  2.  Some  adjectives,  from  the  nature  of  their  signification,  have  no 
corresponding  adverbs.  Of  some  others,  also,  none  occur  in  the  classics.  Such 
are  aniens,  dlriis,  discors,  gniirHs,  rUdis,  trux,  imbellis,  inimobilis,  and  similar  com- 
pounds. In  place  of  the  adverbs  formed  from  vctds  and  fldus,  vetuste  and  an- 
tique are  used  for  the  fonner,  and  fideliter  for  the  latter,  from  vetustus,  antlquus, 
and  fidelis. 

in.  From  the  adjective  pronouns  are  derived  adverbs  of  place, 
etc.     (See  §  191,  Rem.  1.) 

Remark.  The  terminations  o  and  uc  denote  the  place  whither,  instead  of  the 
accusative  of  the  pronoun  with  a  preposition ;  as,  eo  for  ad  eum  Idcum ;  hue  for 
cul  hunc  Idcum ;  the  tenninations  de  and  inc  denote  the  place  from  7vhich ; 
I  and  Ic,  the  place  in  which;  and  d  and  dc,  the  place  by  or  through  which;  as, 
ea ;  via  or  parte  being  miderstood. 

IV.  (rt.)  A  few  adverbs  are  derived  from  prepositions ;  as,  subtHs,  beneath ;  from 
tub;  propter,  near;  from  prope.  (6.)  MordicHs  and  versUs  are  derived  fi-om  the 
verbs  moi-deo  and  verto. 

Remark.  Diminatives  are  formed  from  a  few  adverbs;  as,  clam,  clnnJUuw 
primum,  prlmUlum ,  celerius,  celeriusculc ;  sa/^ifo,  scepiuscHe ;  bene,  belie,  bcllis'- 
time, 

14* 


162  COMPOSITION    OF    ADVERBS.  §  193. 

COMPOSITION    OF    ADVERBS. 

§  ]®3.     Adverbs  are  compounded  variously: — 

!•  Of  an  adjective  and  a  noun;  as, postrldie,  qudtldie,  magndpirS,  maxlin&p^ri^ 
iummdperi,  qucmtdpe^l,  tantdpere,  tantummddo,  solumrnddo,  tmdtlmddls,  qiuHannia— 
of  postero  die,  maynd  djiere,  etc. 

2.    Of  a  pronoun  and  a  noun ;  as,  liddle,  quare,  qmmddo — of  hoc  die,  qua  re,  eto. 

8.    Of  an  adverb  and  a  noun;  as,  niuMs,  scepenmiiero — of  nunc  dies,  etc. 

4.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  noun;  as,  comminus,  eminus,  illico,  dbiter,  extempld, 
etmam,  posimodd,  admddum,  prdpediem — of  con,  e,  and  mdniis ;  in  and  Idem ;  etc. 

5.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  pronoun;  as,  alioqui  or  alioqum,  ceteroqui  or  ceiir6- 
quin — of  alius  and  qui,  i.  e.  alio  quo  {mddo),  etc. 

6.  Of  a  pronoun  and  an  adverb ;  as,  aliquavuliu,  dlicObi — of  aliquis,  diu,  and 
abi  ;  nequdquam  and  ncquicquam — of  ne  and  quisquam. 

7.  Of  two  verbs ;  as,  llicet,  scilicet  videlicet    of  ire,  scire,  videre,  and  licit. 

8.  Of  an  adverb  and  a  verb ;  as,  quolibet,  uMvis,  undelibet.  So  deinceps — from 
dein  and  capio  ;  dimtaxat — from  dum  and  taxo. 

9.  Of  a  participle  with  various  parts  of  speech;  as,  deorsum,  dextrorsum, 
hyi'tum,  retrorsum,  sursum — of  de,  dexter,  hlc,  retro,  super,  and  vors&s  or  versus. 

10.  Of  two  adverbs ;  as,  jamdudum,  quamdiu,  tamdiu,  cummasdme,  tummcucime 
quousque,  sicid. 

11.  Of  a  preposition  and  an  adjective ;  as,  dSnvo,  imprimis,  cumprlmis,  ap- 
prime,    incassum — of  de  ndvo,  in  primis,  etc. 

12.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  pronoun;  as,  quaprcpter,  posted,  intered, pratSred, 
hactenus,  qudtenus,  allqudtenus,  edtenus — of  propter  qme,  post  ea  or  earn,  etc. 

13.  Of  a  preposition  and  an  adverb ;  as,  dbhinc,  adkuc,  derepente,  interibi,  in- 
terdiu,  intermm,  persoepe. 

14.  Of  two  or  three  prepositions;  as,  insHper,  protinHs,  inde,  dein,  deitidS, 
pSrindS. 

15.  Of  a  conjunction  and  an  adverb ;  as,  necubi,  sicubi — of  ne,  si,  and  dliciibi. 

16.  Of  an  adverb  and  a  termination  scarcely  used  except  in  composition; 
as,  ibidem,  pdi-umper,  quandocumque,  vhique,  utcumque. 

17.  Of  three  different  parts  of  speech;  a.s,  for sitdn — of  foi's,  dt,  dn,  qtiemad- 
mddmn,  quamobrem,  etc. 

18.  Of  an  adverb  and  an  adjective;  as,  nimirum,  utpdtS. 

19.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  verb;  as,  quantumms,  quantumlibet. 

Signification  of  certain  Compound  and  Derivative  Adverbs. 

1.  The  adverbs  continuo,  protinus,  stdtim,  confestim,  sitbito,  repenie  and  dere- 
pente, aclidum,  illico,  ilicet,  extemplo,  signify  in  general  '  directly '  or  '  imme- 
diately ' ;  but,  strictly,  continuo  means,  '  immediately  after ' ;  stdtim,  '  without 
delay ' ;  confestim,  '  directly ' ;  siibito,  '  suddenly,  unexpectedly  ' ;  protinus,  '  far- 
ther j'  viz.  in  the  same  direction,  and  hence,  '  without  interruption ' ;  repente 
RrA  derepente,  '  at  once,'  opposed  to  sensi?)i,  '  gi-adually,'  (see  Cic.  Off.  1,  83); 
actUtwn,  '  instantaneously,'  i.  q.  eddem  acta ;  illico,  and  more  rarely  ilicet,  '  forth- 
with, the  instant,'  (Virg.  JEn.  2,  424,  Cic.  Mur.  10);  so  also  extemplo,  (Liv.  41, 1). 

2.  Prtesertim,  pi'esclpue,  imprimis,  cumprimis,  ajjprime,  are  generallv  trans- 
lated '  prhicipally,'  but,  properly,  jjrcesertim  is  '  particularly,'  and  sets  fortli  a 
parncnlnr  chxumstance  with  emphasis;  prcecijyiie,  from  prwcnpio,  has  referenca 
to  privilege,  and  signifies 'especially ';  imprimis  uiiil  cut/ipr'/mis,  sigiiify  '  prin- 
cipally, '  cr  '  in  preference  to  others  ' ;  and  iipprime,  '  before  all,'  '  very.'  is  used 


§194,19/1.      COMPARISON    OF   ADVERE^. — PREPOSITIONS.       163 


3.  Mddo  is  the  usual  equivalent  for  'only.'  Solum,  'alone,'  'merely,'  points 
to  something  higher  or  greater.  Tant^^'n,  '  only,'  'merely,'  intimates  that  some- 
thing else  was  expected.  The  significations  of  solum  and  tantum  are  strength- 
ened by  md(lo,  forming  sOlummddo  and  tmitummddo.  Duntaxnt,  '  only,  solely,'  is 
not  joined  with  verbs.  It  also  sisnifies  '  at  least,'  denoting  a  limitation  to  a 
particular  point.  Saltern  also  signifies  '  at  least,'  but  denotes  the  reduction  of  a 
demand  to  a  minimum;  as,  Eript  mild  hunc  dolor  em,  aut  minue  saltern. 

4.  Frustrd  implies  a  disappointed  expectation;  as  in  frustra  suscipere  labores. 
Neqvicqunm  denotes  the  absence  of  success,  as  in  Hor.  Carm.  1,  3,  21.  Incat- 
aum,  composed  of  in  and  cassum,  '  hollow  '  or  '  empty,'  signifies  '  to  no  purpose ' ; 
as,  tela  incassum  jacere. 

COIMPARISON    OF    ADVERBS. 

§  194.  *1.  Adverbs  derived  from  adjectives  with  the  termi- 
nations e  and  ter,  and  most  of  those  in  o,  are  compared  like  their 
primitives. 

2.  The  comparative,  like  the  neuter  comparative  of  the  adjective, 
ends  in  ius ;  the  superlative  is  formed  from  the  superlative  of  the  ad- 
jective by  changing  iis  into  e  ;  as, 

dure,  durius,  durissime  ;  facile,  f6cUius,  faciUlme ;  dcritir,  dcnus,  dcerrtmS  ; 
rdro,  rdrius,  rdrissime ;  mature,  matariiis,  mdtUrisstme  or  mdturrime. 

8.  Some  adverbs  have  superlatives  in  o  or  Mm ;  as,  mh'ltisslmo,  plurimum, 
prlmo  or  primum,  pdtissimum. 

i.  If  the  comparison  of  the  adjectve  is  irregular  or  defective,  (see 
§§  125,  12G),  that  of  the  adverb  is  so  likewise;  as, 

bene,  melius,  optlme;  male,  pejus,  pessime;  pdrum,  minus,  minima;  myitum, 
plus,  plurimum ;  — ,  jyrius,  prlmo  or  primum ;  — ,  ocHs,  odssiim  ;  — ,  deterius, 
deterrlme ;  — ,  pdtius,  p6iisstme  or  pdtissimum ;  merito,  — ,  vieritissimo  ;  sdlis,  sn- 
tius,  — .  Mdgis,  maxime,  (from  ma  gnus,)  has  no  posifive;  nuper,^  nuperrime,  has 
no  comparative.  Prcpe,  prdjnOs,  proxime :  the  adjective  jtrdpidr  has  no  posi- 
tive in  use.  The  regular  adverb  in  the  positive  degi-ee  from  vher  is  wanting, 
its  place  being  supplied  by  ubertim,  but  vberius  and  uberrivie  are  used.  So  in- 
stead of  trisliter,  tnste,  the  neuter  of  tristis,  is  used,  but  the  comparative  tnstius 
is  regular;  and  from  socois  only  socordius,  the  comparative,  is  in  use. 

5.  Dm  and  s(p;ji?,  though  not  derived  from  adjectives,  are  yet  compared;— 
dju,  diatius,  diulissime ;  scepe,  scepius,  soepissime.  A  comparative  temperius,  from 
temperi  or  iempuri,  also  sometimes  occurs.     So  secus,  sC'ciOs. 

6.  Adverbs,  like  adjectives,  are  sometimes  compared^  by  prefixing 
magis  and  maxime  ;  as,  magts  aperte,  maxime  accommodate. 

PREPOSITIONS. 

§  19^.  1.  A  preposition  is  a  particle  which  expresses  the 
relation  between  a  noun  or  pronoun  and  some  preceding  word. 

2.  Prepositions  express  the  relaf.ons  of  persons  or  things,  either  to  one 
Bnother,  or  to  actions  and  conditions;  b»,  amor  mtus  erca  te,  my  love  tow-urd 
thee ;  eo  ad  te,  1  go  to  thee. 


circa 

circum, 


164  PR  ^POSITIONS.  §  195. 

3.  Some  prepositions  have  tlie  noun  or  pronoun  which  follows 
them  in  the  accusative,  some,  in  the  ablative,  and  some,  in  either  the 
accusative  or  the  ablative. 

4.  Twenty-six  prepositions  have  an  accusative  after  them : — 

ad,  to,  towards,  at,  for.  extra,  without,  beyond.  post,  after,  since,  behind. 

adversus,    )  against,  iufra,  under,  beneath.  praeter,     past,    before, 

adversura,  |  towai-ds.  inter,     between,     among,  against,  beyond,  besides. 

ante,  before.  during.  prope,  near  by,  nigh. 

apiid,  at,  with,  near,  be-  intra,  within.  propter,  near,  on  acoouni 

fm-e,  in  presence  of.  jiixtaj  near  to,  next  to.  of. 

■°"'      \  around  about  '^^i  •^'^'   °^   account   of,  secundum,  after,  beJiind, 

cum,  \  «'^<^««'  ^°^^-  before.  along,  next  to,  acccyrd- 

circiter;  about,  near.  penes,   in  the  power  of,  ing  to. 

CIS,     )       ^i-     -J       -J,  ■  with.  supra,  cd>cfve,  over. 

citra,  I  '^  ^^''  '^^^'  '^''""-  per,  through,  throughmit,  trans,  over,  leyond. 

contra,  against,  opposite.  by,  during.  ultra,  beyond. 

erga,  towards,  opposite.  p5ne,  behind. 

5.  Eleven  prepositions  have  after  them  an  ablative : — 

a,      J  de,  from,  dmi>n  from,  of-  pras,  before,  for,   on  ac- 

ab,   \fr(ym,  after,  by.               ter,  of,  concerning.  count  if,  in  comparison 

abs, )  e,    I  out  of,  frvm,  if,  by,  with.  ^         ^       .         ^ 

absque,  without,  but  for.  ex,  }      after.  pro,  before,  for,  instead 

ccram,    before,  in  pi-es-  palam,   befoi-e,   in  pres-  of,  according  to. 

ence  of.                                 ence  of.  sine,  without. 

cum,  with,  tenus,  as  far  as,  up  to. 

6.  Five  prepositions  take  after  then\  sometimes  an  accusative, 

and  sometimes  an  ablative  : — 

clam,  without  the  hnowl-    siib,  under,  about,  near.        siipgr,  above,  over ;  upon 

edge  of.  subter,  under,  beneath.  concerning. 

In,  in,  on ;  to,  into,  against. 

Remaek  1.  Prepositions  are  so  called,  because  they  are  generally  placed  be- 
fore the  noun  or  pronoun  whose  relation  they  express.  They  sometimes,  how- 
ever, stand  after  it.    Cf.  §  279,  10. 

Eem.  2.  A  is  used  only  before  consonants;  ab  before  vowels,  and  frequently 
before  consonants,  though  rarely  before  labials:  ois  is  obsolete,  except  in  the 
piirase  abs  te. 

E  is  used  only  before  consonants,  ex  before  both  vowels  and  consonants. 

Rem.  3.  Versus,  which  foUows  its  noun,  (cf.  §  235,  R.  3),  usqui,  and  exitd- 
versUs  ( -urn),  sometimes  take  an  accusative,  slmiil  and  prdcul,  an  ablative,  aud 
are  then  by  some  called  prepositions.  Secus,  with  an  accusative,  occurs  in 
Pliny  and  Cato. 

Rem.  4.  Many  of  the  prepositions,  especially  those  which  den>te  place,  are 
also  used  as  adverbs.   Cf.  §  191. 

Signification  and  Use  of  certain  Prepositions. 

Rkm.  5.  (a.)  Ad  denotes  direction,  and  answers  to  the  questions  Whither? 
and  Till  when?  as,  Venio  ad  te.  Sophocles  dd  summam  senectutem  tragcediai 
ficit.  Cic.  It  also  denotes  a  fixed  time ;  us,  ad hoi-nm,  at  the  hour;  ad  tempus 
aliquid  facere, — at  the  right  time.  But  sometimes  ad  tempus  denotes  '  for  a 
time.'  Sometimes,  also,  (td  denotes  the  approach  of  time;  as.  ud  iTicem,  ad  »«»- 
peram,  ad  extremum,  towards  day-break,  etc. ;  and  also  the  actual  aiTival  of  a 
time;  as,  dd  prima  signa  veris  profectve   at  the  first  sign  of  Spring. 


§  195.  PREPOSITIONS.  165 

(6.)  In  answer  to  the  question  '\^here?  drf  signifies  'rrear'  a  plnci  as,  dd 
ttrbem  esse  ;  ad  portas  urbts ;  pugna  navdlis  ad  Tenedum.  It  is  used  like  fw,  '  at,' 
in  such  phrases  as  dd  cedem  BelUmce,  or,  without  cEt/ej/i,  dd  Opis;  neyulium  habere 
dd  pvrtum. — With  numerals  it  may  be  rendered  '  to  the  amount  of  or  '  nearly ' ; 
ns,  dd  ducentos.  It  is  also  used  "like  circiter  without  any  case ;  as,  Occlsis  dd 
homlnum  millibus  quatuoi: — The  phrase  omnes  dd  unum  signifies,  '  all  without 
exception,'  '  every  one.' 

(c.)  Ad  often  denotes  an  object  or  purpose,  and  hence  comes  its  signification 
of '  in  respect  to ' ;  as,  hdmo  da  labures  belli  impiger.  It  is  also  used  in  figura- 
tive relations  to  denote  a  model,  standard,  or  object  of  comparison,  where  we 
say  '  according  to  '  or  '  in  comparison  with ' ;  as,  dd  modum,  da  ejfigiem^  dd  slmU- 
itudinem,  dd  speciem  alicujusrei;  dd  norvmni,  etc.  dd  volunidtem  alicujus  facere 
abquid.  Ad  verbum  signifies,  '  word  for  word ' ;  nihil  dd  hanc  rem,  '  nothing  ua 
comparison  with  this  thing.' 

Rem.  6.  Apud  expresses  nearness  to,  and  was  primarily  used  of  persons  as 
dd  was  applied  to  things.  Apad  also  denotes  rest,  and  dd  direction,  motion,  etc. 
Hence  it  signifies  '  with,"  both  literally  and  figtiratively.  With  names  of  places 
it  signifies  'near,'  like  dd;  as,  Male  pugndtum  est  djma  Caudium.  But  in  early 
writers,  «y;u(ns  used  for  f 71 ;  as,  Augustus  dpiid  urbein  Nolam  extinctus  est, — at 
Nola. — With  me,  te,  se,  or  the  name  of  a  person,  it  signifies  '  at  the  house '  or 
'  dwelling  of ;  as,  Fuisli  dpud  Ixecam  ilia  node. — Before  appellatives  of  persons 
having  authority  in  regard  to  any  matter,  it  is  translated  '  before,'  '  in  the  pres- 
■enceof ;  ?is,  dpud  judues,  dpikl  pratorem,  dpud  piopulum. — It  is  also  used  with 
names  of  authors,  instead  of  in  with  the  name  of  their  works ;  as,  Apud  Xeno- 
phontem,  but  we  cannot  say  in  Xenophonte. 

Rem.  7.  Adversus,  contra,  and  ergd  signify  ' opposite  to.'  Cbre<ra  de- 
notes hostility,  like  our  'against';  erga,  a  triendly  disposition,  'towards';  and 
adversus  is  used  in  either  sense.     But  ergd  sometimes  occurs  in  a  hostile  sense. 

Rem.  8.  Intra  signifies  'within,'  in  regard  both  to  time  and  place.  Iji  re- 
gard to  place  it  is  used  in  answer  to  both  questions  Where?  and  Whither V  It 
denotes  time  either  as  an  entire  period,  when  it  is  equivalent  to  '  during,'  or  as 
'  unfinished,'  when  it  corresponds  with  '  under,'  or  '  before  the  expiration  of.' 

Rem.  9.  Per,  denoting  place,  signifies,  'through,'  and  also  'in,'  in  the  sense 
Df '  throughout.' — With  the  accusative  of  persons  it  signifies  '  tlu-ough,'  '  by  the 
insti-umentality  of.'  It  often  expresses  the  manner;  us,  per  lileras,  by  letter; 
per  injuriam,'per  scelus,  with  injustice,  criminally ;  7»'  tram,  ivom.  or  in  an- 
ger ;  per  simulatimem,  per  sjyeciem,  per  causam,  under  the  pretext ;  per  occor- 
sivnem,  on  the  occasion;  jaer  ric/JcMfem,  in  a  ridiculous  manner. — It  sometimes 
signifies 'on  account  of ';  as,  per  valelicdinem,  on  account  of  illness. — Per  me 
licet, — so  far  as  I  am  concerned. 

Rem.  xa.  a  or  db ,  denoting  time,  is  used  with  nouns,  both  abstract  and 
concrete,  with  the  same  general  meaning;  »&,  a  prima  mtdte,  db  ineunte  mtdte, 
db  initio  wtdtis,  db  infaniid,  a  pueritid,  ao  adolescentid  ;  and,  d  pu&ro,  d  pueris, 
db  adolescentulo,  db  infante,  all  of  which  signify  '  from  an  early  age.'  So  also, 
a  pai-vis,  a  parvulo.  a  tenSro,  a  teneris  ungulcidis,  which  expressions  are  of 
Greek  origin. — Ab  initio,  d  pi-incipio,  a  prtnw,  proi)f?rly  denote  the  space  of  time 
from  the  beginning  down  to  a  certain  point;  as,  urbein  Rdmam  d  principio  re- 
gcs  hobuere,  i.  e.  for  a  certain  period  after  its  foundation.  But  frequently  db 
imtio  is  equivalent  to  initio,  in  the  beginning. — The  adherents  or  followers  of  a 
school  are  often  named  from  its  head;  as,  a  Plalone,  db  Aristotele,  etc. — In  comic 
writers  nZ>  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  the  genitive;  as,  ancilla  db  Andrid. — 
In  a  figurative  sense  it  signifies  '  with  regard  to';  ds,  db  equitdtu  Jiniius. — With 
names  of  j)ersons  it  also  denotes  relationship,  and  signifies  'on  the  side  of; 
as,  Augustus  a  mntre  Magnum  Povijieium  nrtisshno  contingebat  grddu, — on  his 
mother's  side. — Sldtim,  confestim,  recens  db  aliqua  re,  '  immediately  after.' — 
Ab  itinere  aliquid  facere,  to  do  a  thing  while  on  a  journey. 

Rem.  11.  Cum  is  used  not  only  to  desimate  accompanying  persons  but  also 
Rccompunying  circumstances;  as,  cum  aliquo  ire;  hostes  cum  detrimento  autU 


166  PEEPOSITIONS.  §  195 

dmuld.  It  signifies  also  '  in,'  i.  e.  '  dressed  in ' ;  a,s,  cum  tunica  pulla  gedere. 
With  verbs  implying  hostility,  it  signifies  with,'  in  the  sense  of  '  against ' ;  as, 
cum  aliquo  bellum  gerere ;  cum  aliqtio  queri  to  complain  of  or  against. 

Rem.  12.  Z)c  commonly  signifies  'concerning,' '  about.'  Hence  traditur  de 
Homero  is  very  difl'erent  from  traditur  db  Hmmro  ;  in  the  former,  Homer  is  the 
object,  in  the  latter  the  agent. — In  the  epistolary  style,  when  a  new  subject 
is  touched  upon,  de  signifies  '  in  regard  to,'  '  as  respects  ' ;  as,  de  fratre,  corifido 
ita  esse,  ut  semper  volui. — It  often  signifies  'down  from';  and  also  'of,'  in  a 
partitive  sense;  as,  homo  de  piebe,  unus  de  popido. — From  its  partitive  significa- 
tion arises  ii  s  use  in  denoting  time ;  as,  in  comitium  de  node  venire,  i.  e.  even  by 
night,  or  spending  a  part  of  the  night  in  coming;  hence  multd  de  node,  med*& 
de  node,  '  in  the  depth  of  night,'  '  in  the  middle  of  the  night.' — In  other  cases, 
also,  it  is  used  for  ex  or  db;  as,  Audlvi  hoc  de  j^eirente  meopuer.  Cic. ;  espeeiallj- 
in  connection  with  enter e,  mercdri,  conducere.  Tiiumphum  agSre  de  Cillis  and 
ex  Gallis  are  used  indiscriminately — Sometimes,  like  secundum,  it  signifies  '  iii 
accordance  with,'  '  after ' ;  as,  de  cotisilio  meo : — sometimes  it  denotes"  the  man- 
ner of  an  action ;  as,  denuo,  de  integro,  afresh ;  de  improviso,  unexpectedly ;  di 
indiistrid,  purposely : — qtid  de  re,  qua  de  causa,  quibus  de  causis,  for  which  reason 
or  reasons. 

Rem.  13.  Ex^ ,  '  from,'  '  out  of.'  Ex  equo  pugndre,  to  fight  on  horseback ; 
80  ex  itinire  scrihfre:  ex  adverse,  e  regime,  opi)osite;  ex  omni  parte,  in  or  from 
all  parts. — Ex  vino  or  ex  aqua  coquere  or  bibere,  i.  e.  '  with  wine,'  etc.  are  medi-» 
cal^expressions. — It  sometimes  denotes  manner ;  as,  ex  anlmo  lauddre,  to  praise 
heaxtUy;  exsententid  and  ex  voluntdte,  according  to  one's  wish. — It  is  also,  like 
de,  used  in  a  partitive  sense ;  as,  unus  e  plebe,  Unus  e  multis. 

Rem.  14.  In,  with  the  accusative,  signifying  'to'  or  'into,'  denotes  the 
point  towards  which  motion  proceeds;  as,  in  cedem  Ire;  or  the  (Jirection  in 
which  a  thing  extends ;  as,  decern  pedes  in  aliiiudinem,  in  height;  so,  also,  it 
denotes  figuratively  the  object  towards  which  an  action  is  directed,  either 
with  a  friendly  or  a  hostile  design ;  as,  amor  in  patriam,  odium  in  malos  cives. 
In  milites  liberdlis';  oralio  in  idiquem,  a  speech  against  some  one. — It  also  de- 
notes a  purpose ;  as,  pecunin  data  est  in  rem  militdrem.  Pax  data  FMlippo  in 
has  leges  est,  on  these  conditions. — With  words  denoting  time,  it  expresses  a 
predetermination  of  that  time^  like  '  for ' ;  as,  invitdre  aliquem  in  posterum  diem, 
for  the  following  day.  In  diemvivere,  to  live  only  for  the  day;  in  futurum, 
in  postirum,  in  reb'quum,  for  the  future;  in  mternum,  in  perpetuum,  forever; 
in  prcBsens,  for  the  present:  with  all  these  adjectives  tempus  may  be  supplied. 
In  with  singuli,  expressed  or  understood,  denotes  a  distribution,  and  may  be 
translated  '  to,'  '  for,'  '  on,'  '  over.' — In  singUlos  dies,  or  simply  in  dies,  with 
comparatives  and  verbs  denoting  mcrease,  signifies  '  from  day  to  day.' — 
In  some  phrases  it  denotes  the  manner  of  an  action;  us,  servtlem  in  mOdum, 
mlrum  in  mOdtnn ;  so  in  universum,  in  general ;  in  commune,  in  common ; 
in  vlcem,  alternately,  or,  instead  of ;  in  alicujus  Idcum  aliquid  jietere,  in  tho 
place,  or,  instead  of. 


or  'notwithstanding';  as,  In  summd  copia  oratorum,  nemo  tdmen  Cicermit 
laudem  aquavit. — Vvitli  nouns  which  by  themselves  denote  time,  such  as 
tecilum,  annus,  mensis,  dies,  nox,  vesper,  etc.,  the  time,  in  answer  to  the  ques- 
tion When  ?  is  expressed  by  tho  simple  ablative ;  but  in  is  used  with  words 
which  acquire  the  .signification  of  time  onl}'  by  such  connection;  as,  in  cour- 
tiddtu  in  principio,  in  bello ;  bttt  even  with  these  in  is  sometunes  omitted,  but 
is  usually  retained  in  connection  with  the  gerund  or  gerundive;  as,  in  legendo, 
in  leyKnclis  libris.  In  picesenti,  or  in  prasentid,  signifies  '  at  the  present  mo- 
ment,' '  for  the  present.' — Esi  in  eo,  ut  aliquid  Jiat  signifies  that  seme  thing  is  oa 
the  polct  of  happening. 


§  196.  PREPOSITIONS    IN    COMPOSITION.  167 

PREPOSITIONS    IN    COMPOSITION. 

§  190-  Most  of  tlie  prepositions  are  used  also  in  forming  com- 
pound words.  In  composition,  they  may  be  considered  either  in 
reference  to  their  form,  or  their  force. 

'  I.  (a.)  Prepositions  in  composition  sometimes  retain  their  final 
consonants,  and  sometimes  change  them,  to  adapt  them  to  the  sounds 
of  the  initial  consonants  of  the  words  with  which  they  are  compound- 
ed. In  some  words,  both  forms  are  in  use ;  in  others,  the  final  con- 
•♦onant  or  consonants  are  omitted. 

1.  A,  in  composition,  is  used  before  m  and  v;  as,  am&oeo,  avello,  and  some« 
times  beforey  in  afui  and  afdi'e,  for  abfui  and  ahfure.  Ab  is  used  before 
vowels,  and  before  d,f,  h,  j,  f,  n,  r,  and  s;  as,  abjuro,  abrdgo,  etc.  Abs  occurs 
only  before  c,  q,  and  t ;  as,  abscondo,  absque,  cwstineo.  In  aspello.  ayjer-nor,  and 
asporto,  the  6  of  abs  is  dropped;  in  aufero  and  atifuyio,  it  is  changed  into  u. 

2.  Ad  remains  unchanged  before  vowels  and  before  6,  c/,  h,  m,  v.  It  often 
changes  d  into  c,f,  </,  I,  n,  2>,  r,  s,  t,  before  those  letters  respectively;  as,  ca> 
cedo,  affero,  a(/(jrcd'mr,  alb'c/o,  annilor,  appoyio,  arriyo,  asseguor,  attollo.  Its  d  is 
usually  omitted  before  s  followed  by  a  consonant,  and  before  gn;  m,  aspergo, 
aspicio,  agnosco,  agndtus.     Before  q,  the  d  is  changed  into  c ;  as,  acquiro. 

3.  Anie  remains  unchanged,  except  in  antldpo  and  antisto,  where  it  changes 
e  to  i ;  but  aniesto  also  occurs. 

4.  Grcum  in  composition  remains  unchanged,  only  in  drcHmeo  and  its  de- 
rivatives the  m  is  often  dropped;  as,  circueo,  circuUus,  etc. 

5.  Cu7H  (in  composition,  coTn),  retains  m  before  b,m,p;  as,  comMbo,  com- 
iniUo,  compono:  before  I,  n.  r,  its  m  is  changed  into  those  letters  respectively; 
as,  colligo,  connltor,  corrtpio :  before  other  consonants,  it  becomes  n ;  as,  con- 
diico,  conjungo.  Before  a  vowel,  gn  or  h,  m  is  commonly  omitted ;  as,  cofOf 
vnuplo,  cognosco,  cohabito;  but  it  is  sometimes  retained;  as,  cOTnedo,  cdmes,  cdmi- 
tor.  In  cogo  and  cogito  a  contraction  also  takes  place ;  as,  cddgo,  cogo,  ete.  In 
comburo,  b  is  inserted. 

6.  Ex  is  prefixed  to  vowels,  and  to  c,  h,  p,  q,  s,  t ;  as,  exeo,  exigo,  excurro,  ex- 
hibeo,  expedio.  Before  J",  x  is  assimilated,  and  also  rarely  becomes  ec ;  as,  effe- 
1-0,  or  ecfero.  S  after  x  is  often  omitted ;  as,  exequor,  for  exseqttor ;  in  exciamm 
(from  txscindo),  s  is  regularly  dropped.  E  is  prefixed  to  the  other  consonants; 
as,  eblbo,  ed'ico,  except  in  eclex.  Before  these  however,  with  the  exception  of  n 
and  r,  ex  is  sometunes  used ;  as,  ex7ndveo.  E  is  sometimes  used  before  p ;  as, 
epoto. 

7.  In  remains  unchanged  before  a  vowel.  Before  6,  to,  p,  it  changes  n  into 
m;  a.?,  imbuo,  immitto,  impono:  before  I  and  r,  n  is  assimilated;  as,  iUlgo,  irretio: 
before  gn,  n  is  omitted;  as,  ignarus.  Before  the  other  consonants  in  is  un- 
changed. In  some  compounds,  in  retains  d  btifore  a  vowel,  from  an  ancient 
form  indu;  a,s,indigena,indigeo,  iiidolesco.  So  anciently  induperdtor,  for  im- 
perator. 

8.  Inter  remains  unchanged,  except  in  intelligo  and  its  derivatives,  in  which 
r  before  I  is  assimilated. 

9.  Ob  remains  unchanged  before  vowels  and  generally  before  consonants. 
Its  b  is  assimilated  before  c,  /,  g,  p ;  as,  occurro,  officio,  oggannio,  oppeto.  In 
6mitto,  b  is  dropped.  An  ancient  form  obs,  analagous  to  abs  for  ab,  is  implied 
in  obsolesco,  from  the  ample  verb  oleo,  and  in  osiendo,  for  obstendo. 

10.  Per  is  unchanged  in  composition,  excoj)t  in  pdlicio  and  sometimes  in 
pellufKO,  in  which  r  is  assimilated  before  I.     In  pi'jiiro,  r  is  dropped. 

11.  Post  remains  unchanged,  except  in  pOmwrium  and  pomirididnui,  in 
which  St  is  dropped. 


168  PREPOSITIONS    IN    COMPOSITION.  §197 

12.  Prce  and  prceter  in  composition  remain  unchanged,  except  that  pra  is 
ehortened  before  a  vowel.     Cf.  §'  283,  II    Exc.  1. 

13.  Pro  has  sometimes  its  vowel  shoi-t^ned,  (cf.  §  285, 2,  Exc.  5)  and,  to  avoid 
hiatus,  it  sometimes  takes  d  before  a  vowel;  as,  2}i-6aeo,  prodesse,  prod iijo. 
Before  verbs  beginning  with  r  and  I,  2>ro  sometimes  becomes  i>or  and  poL;  as, 
pcM'rigo,  poUiceor. 

14.  Sub  in  composition  remains  unchanged  before  a  vowel  and  before  b,  d,  i, 
I,  n  g,  t,  V.  Before  c,  f,  y,  m,  p,  r,  its  b  is  regularly  assimilated ;_  as,  smaito, 
suffero,  suycfiro,  summoveo,  siipplico,  surrfpio.  Before  c,  j),  and  t,  it  sometimsa 
takes  the  form  siis  from  subs,  analogous  to  abs  and  obs ;  as,  siiscrpio,  smpendo, 
tuslollo:  b  is  omitted  before  s,  followed  by  a  consonant;  as,  suspicio. 

15.  Subter  and  si'iper  in  composition  remain  unchanged.  *■ 

16.  Trans  remains  unchanged  before  a  vowel.  It  omits  s  before  s;  as, 
ti-anscendo :  in  irctdo,  traduce,  trdjicio,  and  trdno,  7is  is  commonly  omitted. 

(b.)  The  following  words  are  called  inseparable  prepositions,  be- 
cause they  are  found  only  in  composition  : — 

AmbI  or  amb,  (Greek  ^M<f'),  around,  about.      Red  or  re,  again,  back.      Ve,  not. 
Dis  07-  di,  cu^mder.  Se,  apai-t,  aside. 

1.  Amb  is  always  used  before  a  vowel;  as,  ambages,  amtjarwUs,  arnbedo,  am- 
bigo,  ambio,  amburo:  except  amjndla,  amian,  and  ankelo.  Before  consonants  it 
has  the  forms  aTnhi ;  as,  ambidcns,  ambtfiiriam,  ambmum :  am ;  as,  amplwtor, 
amputo  :  or  an ;  as,  anceps,  anfractus,  anrpuro. 

2.  Dis  is  prefixed  to  words  beginning  with  c,  p,  q,  s  before  a  vowel,  t,  and  '( ; 
as,  discui'io,  dhpono,  disqulro,  distendo,  dishiasco:  but  dlsertiis  is  formed  from  dis- 
sero ;  before  _/,  s  is  changed  into  /;  as,  differo:  in  (/?;•( wo,  and  di ribeo  (trum 
dis  lidbeo),  s  becomes  r.  1)1  is  prefixed  to  the  other  consonants,  and  to  s  when 
followed  by  a  consonant;  as,  aldaco,  dlmitto,  distinyuo,  dispicio.  But  both  dis 
and  di  are  used  before  j ;  as,  disjungo,  dljiklico,  and  before  r  in  rumpo. 

3.  Red  is  used  before  a  vowel  or  h ;  r6  before  a  consonant ;  as,  reddmo,  rkku, 
redhibeo,  redigo,  reddleo,  redundo ; — rejicio,  repono,  revertor.  But  red  is  used  be- 
fore rfo;  a^,  reddo.  The  connecting  vowel  i  is  found  in  redivlmis;  and  m  tht 
poetical  forms  relligio,  relliqulcB,  and  sometimes  in  reccldo  the  d  is  assimilated. 
In  later  ^vriters  re  is  sometimes  found  before  a  vowel  or  h. 

4.  Se  and  ve  are  prefixed  without  change;  as,  secedo,  secUrus;  vcyrandis, 
vecors. 

§  107.  II.  Prepositions  in  composition  usually  add  their  own 
signification  to  that  of  the  word  with  which  they  are  united ;  but 
sometimes  they  give  to  the  compound  a  meaning  different  from  that 
of  its  simples.    The  following  are  their  most  common  significations  : — 

1.  ^i,  or  rt6,  away,  from,  down;  entirely;  un-.  With  verbs  it  denotes  re- 
moval, disappearance,  absence;  as,  auj'ero,  abator,  absum.  With  adjectives  it 
denotes  absence,  privation ;  as,  dmens,  absdnus. 

a.  Ad,  to,  toward;  at,  by.  In  composition  with  verbs  ad  denotes  {a)  motion 
A),  (not  into),  as,  accedo;  (6)  addition,  as,  ascribo;  (c)  nearness,  as,  assideo; 
(a)  asse7it,  favor,  as,  anniio,  arrideo;  (e)  rejietition  and  hence  intensity,  as,  accJ- 
do;  (f)  at,  in  consequence  of,  as,  amgo.  It  is  sometimes  augmentative,  rarely 
inchoative. 

3.  Amhl,  around,  about,  on  both  sides. 

4.  G,rcum,  around,  about,  on  all  sides. 

5.  Cd7n  or  cdn,  together,  entirely.  In  composition  with  verbs  it  denotes  (o) 
union,  as,  concurro,  consulo;  (b)  complele7iess,  as,  combiiro,  conficio;  (c)  with 
eff<yrt,  as,  conjicio,  conclaino;  {d)  in  hai-tiw/ir/,  as,  cousoiio,  consentio;  (e)  on  ot 
over,  like  the  English  be-,  as,  colli  no,  to  besmear. 


§107.  PKErOSITJOXS    IN    COMPOSITION.  168 

6.  Ointra,  against,  opposite. 

7.  Dc,  off,  away,  through,  over,  down;  entirely;  verj',  extremely.  With 
verbs  </'' denotes  (a)  (^t;)vj;  as, demitto;  (6)  removal;  as.detondco;  {c)  abu:nce\ 
as,  desum,  ciehabeo;  (d)  prevention;  as,  dehortor;  (e)  uiifrieiuUy  feehna  ;  as, 
despicio,  derideo. — With  adjectives  dc  denotes  (a)  down ;  as,  dechvis ;  (6)  untkout ; 
as,  demens. 

S.  Dis,  asunder,  apart,  in  pieces,  in  two;  dis-,  un-;  very  greatly.  With 
verbs  dis  denotes  (a)  division;  as,  dmdo,  dilabor  ;  (6)  difference;  as,  discrOpo, 
dissentio;  (c)  the  vtverse  of  the  simple  notion ;  as,  displiceo,  dLti'Ido;  {d)  intensity; 
as,  dilaudo. — With  adjectives  dis  denotes  difference ;  as,  discolor,  discors. 

9.  E,  or  ex,  out,  forth,  away,  upward,  without,  -less,  un-;  utterly,  com- 
i  pletely,  very.  With  verbs  it  denotes  («)  out;  as,  exeo,  eximo,  elaboro;'  (b)  re- 
moval of  something;  as,  edomiio;  (c)  publicittj  ;  as,  edico;  id)  ascent;  as,  exsisto; 
{e)  completeness;  as,  edisco,  exfiro;  (/")  with  denominative  verbs,  change  of 
character;  as,  expio,  effero  (iire);  {</)  removid  of  what  is  expressed  by  the  noun 
whence  the  verb  is  derived;  as  enodo;  (Ji)  the  reversal  of  the  fiaulamentul  idea ; 
as,  explico;  (t)  (/(sifiMce  ;  as,  exaudio. — With  adjectives  formed  from  substan- 
tives it  denotes  absence ;  as,  exsomnis. 

10.  /«,  M'ith  verbs,  signifies  in,  on,  at;  into,  against;  as,  inhdbito,  induo,  inge- 
mo^  ineo,  ill'tdo.     With  adjectives,  un-,  hi-,  im-,  il-,  ir-,  not;  as,  ignOtus,  inhosjn- 
talis,  immortdlis.     Some  of  its  compounds  have  contrary  significations,  accord- 
ing as  they  are  participles  or  adjectives;  as,  intectus,  part.,  covei'ed,  adj.,  un 
covered. 

11.  Inter,  between,  among,  at  Intervals. 

12.  Ob,  with  verbs,  signifies  to,  towards;  as,  6beo,  ostendo ;  against;  as,  obluc- 
t07;  obnuntio ;  at,  before;  as,  obambUlo,  obversor ;  upon;  as,  occulco ;  over;  as, 

obduco. 

13.  Per,  with  verbs,  denotes,  tlirough,  thoroughly,  perfectlj',  quite;  as,  ^^er- 
dtico,  perficio,  perdo :  with  adjectives,  tlu'ough,  very;  as,  i^ernox,  pierlevis. 

14.  Post,  after,  behind. 

15.  Prce  in  composition  with  verbs  denotes  (a)  before  in  place;  as,  pr£Emitto ; 
(b)  byoY  past;  as,  prsefluo;  (c)  in  command;  as,  prajsum,  prteficio;  {a) superior- 
ity;  as, -presto ;  (e)  6e/breLn  time;  as,  prffidico,  prsecerpo;  at  the  extremity ;  as, 
prseiiro. — With  adjectives,  (a)  before  m  phice  or  time;  as,  praeceps,  pra;scius; 
ib)  very;  as,  praealtus,  prteclarus. 

16.  Prceler,  pas^  by,  beyond,  besides. 

.17.   Pro,  before,  forward,  forth,  away,  down;  for;  openly;  as,  prolMo,  pw- 
rigo,  proierreo,  prolero,  py-ocUro,  pi'dfiteor. 

18.  _  Be,  again,  against,  back,  re-,  un-,  away ;  greatly ;  as,  rejloresco,  repent, 
refcrio,  reflgo,  recondo. 

19.  Se,  without,  aside,  apart ;  as,  secUro,  sepono,  secedo,  secHrus. 

20.  Sab  up,  from  below  upwards,  under.  With  verbs  sub  also  signifies  (a) 
uasistance;  as,  subvenio;  (b)  succession;  as,  succiuo;  (c)  injjlace  of;  as,  suilicio; 
id)  near;  as,  subsum;  (e)  secretly,  clandestinely ;  as,  surripio,  subdaco;  (f)s<ime- 
whut,  a  little ;  as,  subrideo,  siibaccuso. — With  adjectives  it  signifies,  slightly, 
ratlier ;  as,  subobsciirus,  stibabsurdus,  siibacidus. 

21.  Subler,  beneath,  imder,  from  under,  secretly,  privately. 

22.  Super,  above,  over,  left  over,  remaining,  super-;  as,  sipersedeo,  sUpersum, 
tiperstes,  sttpervdcdnetis. 

23.  Trans,  over,  across,  through;  beyond;  as,  trddo,  transeo,  transfigo, 
transalp'mus. 

24.  F(',  not,  without;  very;  as,  vegrandis,  vecors ;  vepalUdus. 

Remark.  In  composition  the  preposition  seems  often  U  add  pothing  to  the 
signification  of  the  word  with  which  k  is  compounded. 

15 


170 


CONJUNCTIONS. 

CONJUNCTIONS. 


§198 


§  108.     A  conjunction  is  a  particle  which  connvjts  words  of 

propositions. 

The  most  usual  conjunctions  are, 


ac,        ) 

ac  si,  at  if. 
adeo,  so  thai,  so. 

amion,  whether  or  not. 
antequam,  before. 
at,  ast,  but. 
at  eiiim,  but  indeed. 
atiiiii.  but. 
attain  en,  but  yet. 
aut,  either,  or. 
aijt...aut,  either.. .or. 
autem,  but. 
cetenim,  but,  however 
ceu,  as,  like  as,  as  if. 
cum  or  quum,  since. 
donf  e.  as  long  as,  imtil 
duni,  provided,  while,  as 

Lmg  as,  until. 
dunimodo,  if  but,  if  only. 
enimvero,  in  very  deed. 
enim,      )  ^ 
etenim,  j-'"'"' 
eo,  therefore. 
equidem,  indeed. 
ergo,  therefore. 
et,  and. 

et...et  j  both. ..find; 
et...que,  j  as  well.. .as. 
et...neque  or  nee,  on  the 

one  hand,  but  not  on  the 

other. 
etiara,  also. 
etiamsi,  )  although, 
etsi,        )  though. 
iccirco,  ~ 
Ideo, 
Igitur, 
Itaque, 

lict-t,  though,  although. 
modo,  provided. 
nam,  namque,  for. 


■  therefore. 


neither, 
..nor. 


ne,  lest,  that  not. 

-ne,  lohether. 

neque  or  nee,  neither,  nor. 

neque...neque, ' 

nec.nee, 

neque. ..nee, 

nee. ..neque, 

neene,  w  not. 

neque,  neither,  nor. 

neque  or  nee. .et,     )not 

neque  or  nee... que,  )  on 

the  one  hand,  but  on  the 

other. 
neve  or  neu,  nor,  and  not. 
neve. ..neve,  I  neither... 
neu. ..neu,      )      nor. 
ni,  nisi,  unless. 
num,  ich ether. 
prteiit,  in  comparison  with. 
prout,  according  as,  just 

as,  as. 
proinde,  hence,  therefore. 
proptereri,   therefore,  for 

that  reason. 
postquam,  after,  since. 
priusquam,  before. 
quam,  as,  than. 
quamvis,  althmigh. 
quando,    quandoquidem, 

whereas,  si7ice. 
quamquam,  although. 
quapropter, 
quare, 
quamobrem, 
quucirca. 


•  wherefore. 


quantumvis,  ) 


although, 
however. 


quamlibet, 

quasi,  as  if,  just  as. 

-que,  and. 

-que...et,       )  both. ..and ; 

-que.. .-que,  )  as  well.. .as. 

quia,  because. 

quin,  but  that,  that  not. 

quippe,  became. 


quo,  in  order  that. 
quoad,  as  long  as,  utitH, 
quod,  because,  but. 
quodsi,  but  if. 

quoininus,  mat  ncA,.  ^■ 

quouiam,  since,  ^eccsute, 
quoque,  also. 
quum  w  cum,  when,  sinc4 

because. 
quum. ..turn,  both. ..and, 
sed,  but. 
sicut    )  • 

sicuti,  r""^'-^*^ "*''"• 

si,  if. 

si  mode,  tf  only. 

simul,  )  as  soon 

simulac  (-atgue)  |    as. 

sin,  but  if,  ij  hmoever. 

sive  or  seu,  w  if. 

sive...sive,  /     i,  jt, 

„„„    ^„„     I  whether. ..or. 

seu. ..seu,    ) 

siquidem,  if  indeed,  since. 

tarn  en,  however,  still. 

tametsi,  although. 

tamquam,  as  if. 

turn. ..turn,  boih...and. 

unde,  whence. 

vt,    I  that,  as  that,  so  that, 

uti,  j      to  the  end  that. 

ut  si,  as  if. 

utrum,  whether. 

^gj|  I  either,  or. 

vel...vel,  either.. .or. 
veliit,    )  even  as,  just  as, 
veliiti,  )  like  as. 
vero,  tridy,  but  indeed. 
verum,  but. 
veruntamen,  yet,  notimih 

standing. 
veiTim-eiiim  vero,  hut  ia 

deed. 


Conjunctions,  according  to  their  different  uses,  are  divided  into 
two  general  classes, — coordinate  and  subordinate. 

I.    Coordinate  conjunctions,  are  such  as  join  coordinate  or  similar 


constructions ;  as. 


Jmwi-  ot  Stella  fulgebant.  The  moon  and  the  stars  were  shining,  (kmcldunt 
tenti,  fiyiuniquii  nubes.  The  winds  subside,  and  the  clouds  disperse.  Difficile 
'Ktu  est,  sed  condbor  tamen,  It  is  difficult  to  accomplish  but  still  I  wiU  Sry. 


§  198.  CONJUNCTIONS.  171 

Coordinate  conjunctions  include  the  following  subdivisions,  viz.  cqt^Mtive 
iisjunctive,  adversative,  illative,  and  most  of  the  causal  conjunctions. 

II.  Subordinate  conjunctions  are  such  as  join  dissimilar  tonstruo 
tions ;  as, 

Edo,  lit  iwam,  I  eat  that  I  may  live.  Pjirhus  rex  in  itinere  incidit  in  can  am, 
qui  inierfecii  hominis  corpus  ciistBdiebat.  Mergi  pullos  in  aquam  jussil,  ut  hihe- 
rent,  quoniam  esse  nolknt. 

Subordinate  conjunctions  include  all  those  connectives  which  unite  sub- 
ordinate or  dependent  clauses.  These  are  the  concessive,  illative,  final,  condi- 
ticnal,  interrogative,  and  temporal  conjunctions,  and  the  causals  c^uod,  quum,  qiio- 
itiam,  etc.  To  these  may  be  added  also  the  relatives  whether  pronouns,  adjec- 
tives, or  adverbs. 

The  following  paragraphs  contain  a  specification  of  the  several  conjunctions  comprised 
In  eitch  of  the  preceding  subdivisions,  and  remarks  respecting  their  particular  import 
and  use  as  connectives. 

1.  CopuljVtive  conjunctions  connect  things  that  are  to  be  considered  joint- 
ly; &^,  et,  dc,  atqui ,  the  enclitic  (y?fe,  which,  combined  with  the  negation 
belonging  to  the  verb,  becomes  neque  or  ne  c,  and,  the  negation  being  doubled, 
nec'non  or  neque  non,  it  becomes  again  affii'mative  and  equivalent ''.o  e  < . 
To  these  are  to  be  added  e<ia?»  and  quo  que,  with  the  adverbials  item  and 
Hid  em. 

Remark,  (a.)  Et  and  que  difl[er  in  this,  et  connects  things  which  are  con- 
ceived as  different,  and  que  adds  what  belongs  to,  or  naturally  flows  from  them. 
Et,  therefore,  is  copulative  and  que  adjunctive.  Hence,  hi  an  enmmeration  of 
words,  que  frequently  connects  the  last  of  the  series,  and  by  its  means  the  pre- 
ceding idea  is  extended  without  the  addition  of  any  thing  whicli  is  genericaliy 
diflerent.  In  connecting  propositions  que  denotes  a  consequence,  and  is  equiv- 
alent to  '  and  therefore.' 

(6.)  Ac  never  stands  before  vowels,  atque  chiefly  before  vowels,  but  also  be- 
fore consonants. — Atque,  being  foi-med  of  ad  and  que,  properly  signifies  '  and 
also,'  'and  in  addition,'  thus  putting  things  on  an  equality,  butgiving emphasis 
to  the  latter.  In  tlie  beginning  of  a  proposition,  which  is  explanatorv  of  that 
which  precedes,  atque  or  dc  introduces  a  thing  with  gi-eat  weight,  and  may  be 
rendered  'now';  and  in  answers;  as,  Cognost'me  hos  versus?  Ac  memoriter,  it 
is  rendered  '  yes,  and  that.'  Ac  being  an  abridged  form  of  atque  loses  some- 
what of  its  power  in  connecting  single  words,  and  its  use  alternates  with  that  . 
of  et ;  it  is  preferred  in  subdivisions,  whereas  the  main  propositions  are  con- 
nected by  et. 

(c.)  Neque,  compounded  of  the  ancient  ne  for  non  and  que,  is  used  for  et  non. 
Et  non  itself  is  used,  when  only  one  idea  or  one  word  of  a  proposition  is  to  be 
negatived ;  as,  patior  et  non  moleste  fero ;  and  also  when  our  '  and  not '  is 
used  for  '  and  not  rather '  to  correct  an  improper  supposition ;  as.  Si  quam  Rvr- 
brius  injuiiam  suo  nomine  ac  non  imjmlsu  tva  fecisset.  Cic.  Et  non  is  commonly 
found  also  in  the  second  clause  of  a  sentence  when  et  precedes,  but  neqv}, 
also,  is  often  used  in  this  case.  Nee  nm  or  neque  non,  in  classical  prose,  is  not 
used  like  et  to  connect  nouns,  but  only  to  join  propositions,  and  the  two  words 
are.  separated.  In  later  writers,  however,  they  are  not  separated  and  are 
equivalent  to  et. 

'id.)  7:7("a;«  has  a  wider  extent  than  qudquS,  for  it  contains  the  idea  of  our 
even,'  and  it  also  adds  a  new  circumstance,  whereas  quOque  denotes  the  ad- 
dition of  a  thing  of  a  similar  kind.  Hence  etiam  is  properly  used  to  connect 
sentences,  while  qudque  refers  to  a  single  word.  Etiam  signifies  '  and  further,' 
OT«5(/«tf,  '  and  so,'  'also.'  C^w^yue  always  follows  the  word  to  wliich  it  refers, 
Itiam  in  similar  cases  is  usually  placed  before  it,  but  when  it  connects  proposi- 
tions its  i)lace  is  arbitrary.  Et,  too,  in  classical  prose,  is  sometimes  used  in 
the  sense  of  '  als«  '  Sc  jftja  is  non  mddo — sed  et,  '  uot  only — but  also,'  or  '  bat 
»ven.' 


172  CONJUNCTiONS.  §198, 

(e.)  Copul-ative  conjunctions  are  often  repeated  in  tlie  sent  ;  of  both— and,' 
'  as  well— as,'  '  not  only— but  also  '  Et—et  is  of  common  occurrence ;  so.  ir 
later  writers,  but  rarely  in  Cicero,  et — qm  ;  que—et  connect  single  words,  buf 
not  in  Cicero;  que—quii,  occur  for  the  most  part  only  in  poetry,  or  in  connec- 
tion with  the  relative.— Negative  propositions  are  connected  in  English  by 
'  neither— nor,'  and  in  Latin  by  neque^neque,  iwc—nec,  neque—nec,  and  rarely 
\jy  nec — neque.  Propositions,  one  of  which  is  negative  and  the  other  affirma^ 
tive  ' on  the  one  hand— but  not  on  the  other,'  or,  'not  on  the  one  hand — but  on 
the  other,'  are  connected  by  et — neque  or  nec,  neque  or  nec—et,  and  occasionally 
by  nec  or  neque — que. 

2.  Disjunctive  conjunctions  connect  things  that  are  to  be  considered  sepa- 
rately; as,  aul,  vel,  the  enclitic  ve,  and  sive  or  seu. 

REMARit.  (a.)  Aut  And  vel  differ  in  this;  aut  indicates  a  difference  of  the 
.  object,  vel,  a  difference  of  expression,  i.  e.  aut  is  objective,  vel,  subjective. 
Vk  is  connected  with  the  verb  velle,  and  is  generally  repeated,  vel— vel,  '  choose 
this  or  choose  this,'  and  the  single  vel  is  used  by  Cicero  only  to  correct  a  pre- 
ceding expression,  and  commonly  combined  with  dicam,  pdtius,  or  etiani. — 
Hence  by  ellipsis  vel  has  acquired'the  signification  of  the  adverb,  '  even,'  and 
so  enhances  the  signification  of  the  word  modified  by  it;  as,  Quum  Sophdcles 
ve]  ODtinie  scr'  """     ^'--^ «   — i-^""  An.-.-  '^  i-n  Ur.  cmi-^Kori  Kofni-o  «/>/    nt,,\  fim 

latter  is  used 

By  means  of--.    ,         ,  „  ,       ir 

ample'  or  'to  take  a  case,'  for  which  velut  is  more  frequently  used. — (6.)  \  e, 
the  apocopated  vel,  leaves  the  choice  free  between  two  or  more  things,  and  in 
later  but  good  prose  vel  is  used  in  the  same  manner. 

(c.)  Slve  commonly  retains  the  meaning  of  si,  and  is  then  the  same  as  vel  si, 
but  sometimes  loses  it,  and  is  then  equivalent  to  vel,  denoting  a  difference  of 
name;  as,  VoccMlum  sive  apjiellatio.  Quint.  The  form  sew  is  rarely  used  by 
Cicero  except  in  the  combination  seu  pdtius.— (d.)  Aut  and  ve  serve  to  continue 
the  negation  in  negative  sentences,  where  we  use  '  nor ' ;  as,  iwn — aut,  where 
noil— neque  also  may  be  used.  They  are  used  also  m  negative  questions ;  as, 
Nam  Icfjes  nostras  moi-esve  novitf  Cic. ;  and  after  comparatives;  as,  Doctrma 
paidv  asperior,  quam  Veritas  aut  natura  jMtiatzir.  Cic.  It  is  omy  when  both 
ideas  are  to  be  united  into  one  that  a  copulative  is  used  instead  of  aut  and  ve. — 
(e.)  '  Either — or'  is  expressed  in  Latin  by  aut— aut,  denoting  an  opposition  be- 
tween two  things,  one  of  which  excludes  the  other,  or  by  vel— vel,  denoting 
that  the  opposition  is  immaterial  in  respect  to  the  result,  so  that  the  one  need 
not  exclude  the  other;  as,  Vei  imperafore  \e\  milite  me  utimini.  SaU. — Sive — 
sive  is  the  same  as  vel  si— vel  s'l,  and  retains  the  meaning  of  vel— vel.  If  nouns 
only  are  opposed  to  each  other,  an  uncertainty  is  expressed  as  tohow  a  thing 
is  to  be  called;  as,  Cretum  leges,  quas  sive  Jupiter  sive  Minos  sanxit;  i.  e.  I  do 
not  know  whether  I  am  to  say  Jupiter  or  Minos. 

3.  Comparative  conjunctions  express  a  comparison.  These  are,  ut  or  uti, 
sicut,  velut,  2}rout,  prceut,thGpoeticii\ceu,  quam,  tamquam,  {with 
and  without  si),  quasi,  ut  si,  dc  si,  with  dc  a,nd  atque,  when  they  sig- 

nifv  '  as.' 

Rehiark.  Ac  and  atque  signify  '  as '  or '  than '  after  adverbs  and  adjectives 
which  denote  similarity  or  dissimilarity;  as,  ceque,  juxtd,  par  and  pdriter, 
perinde  and  proinde,  pro  eo,  similis  and  similiter,  dissimilis,  talis,  tdtidem,  alius 
and  dliter,  contra,  secixs,  contrarius. —  Quain  is  rarely  used_  after  these  words, 
except  when  a  negative  particle  is  joined  with  aKws;  as,  Virtus  nihil  aliud  est, 
quam,  etc. ;  and  et  and  que  do  not  occur  in  this  connection. — Ac  is  used  for 
Yuam,  after  comparatives,  in  poetry  and  occasionally  by  late  prose  writers ;  as, 
Ariius  atque  hedera.  Hor.     Insdnius  ac  si.  Id. 

4.  Concessive  conjunctions  express  a  concession,  with  the  general  signifi 
cation  'although.'  These  are  ets'i,  etiamsi,  tdmetsi,  or  tame  net  si  ^ 
quamquam,  quamvls,  quantumvis,  quamlibet,  licet,  ut  in  the 
sense  of '  even  if  or  '  although,'  ana  quum  when  it  signifies  'although.' 

Remark.  Tdm^n  and  other  particles  signifying  '  yet,'  '  still,'  are  the  correl- 
ftives  of  the  concessive  conjunctions ;  as,  Ut  desmt  vires,  tamen  eH  laudanda 


§198. 


CONJUNCTIONS.  173 


voluntae.  Ovid.  The  adverb  qutdem  becomes  a  concessive  cor.  pnc  on,  when  it 
is  used  to  connect  propositions  and  is  followed  by  sod. —  Qumnquam  in  absolute 
sentences,  sometimes  refurs  to  something  preceding,  which  it  limits  and  partly 
nullLfies;  as,  Quamquam  quidluquwl  Yet  why  do  I  speak? 

5.  Conditional  conjunctions  express  a  condition,  their  fundamental  signi- 
fication being  'if.'  These  are  si,  sin,  nisi  or  nl,  si  modo,  dummddd^ 
'if  only,'  'if  but,' (for  which  du7n  and  mddo  are  also  used  alone),  dum- 
KiodO  ne,   or  simply  mddo  ne  or  dumne. 

Remark,  (a.)  In  order  to  indicate  the  connection  with  a  preceding  proposi- 
tion, tlie  relative  quM,  which  in  such  case  loses  its  signification  as  a  pronoun, 
and  may  be  rendered, ' nay,' ' now,' ' and,'  or  'then,'  is  frequently  put  before 
si  and  sometimes  before  nisi  and  etsl,  so  that  quodsl  may  be  regarded  as  one 
word,  signifying  '  now  if,'  '  but  if,'  or  '  if  then.'  It  sei-ves  espe'cially  to  mtro- 
duce  something  assumed  as  true,  from  which  further  inference*  may  be  drawn." 
It  sometimes  signifies  '  although.'  Quodnisl  signifies  '  if  then — not,'  and  quod- 
9til,  '  nay,  even  if.'  QuOd  is  found  also  before  quu7n,  vbi,  quia,  qicaiiiam,  ne,  uti. 
n(un,  and  3V3n  before  the  relative  pronoun. 

(6  )  Nl  and  nisi  limit  a  statement  by  introducing  an  exception,  and  thus  dif- 
fer from  sj  non,  which  introduces  a  negative  case.  It  is  often  immaterial 
whether  nisi  or  si  non  is  used,  but  the  difference  is  still  essential.  Si  non  is 
used  when  single  words  are  opposed  to  one  another,  and  in  this  case  si  minfn 
m.iy  be  used  instead  of  si  non. — If  after  an  affirmative  proposition  its  negative 
opposite  is  added  without  a  verb,  our  '  but  if  not '  is  commonly  expressed  in 
prose  by  si  miniis  or  sin  minHs  or  sin  aliier ;  as,  Educ  tecum  etidm  omnes  iuos ; 
si  minus,  quam  pluHmos.  Cic. ;  rarelj'  by  si  non. 


junctions,  quapropter,  qudre,  qtiamobrem,  quocirca,  unde,  ^wherG- 
fore.' 

Remark.  Ergo  and  igitiir  denote  a  logical  inference. — Ildqne,  '  and  thus,' 
expresses  the  relation  of  cause  in  facts. — Ideo,  iccirco,  and  proplcved,  '  on  this 
account,'  express  the  agi-eement  between  intention  and  action. — Ed,  '  on  this 

account,'  or  '  for  this   purpose,'    is   more   frequently   an   adverb   of  place. 

Proinde,  '  consequently,' imphes  an  exhortation. —  CWe,  '  whence,'  is  propeily 
an  adverb  of  place. — Adeo,  '  so  that,'  or  simply  '  so,'  is  also  properly  an  adverb. 
Hinc,  'hence,'  and  hide,  'thence,'  continue  to  be  adverbs. 

7.    Causal  conjunctions  express  a  cause  or  reason,  with  the  general  sifniifi- 
cation  of  '  for  '  and  'because.'     These  are  nam,  namque,  enim,  etenim 
quid,  qu6d,   qudniam,  quippe,   qunm,  quando,   quandoquidem 
slquidem;    and  the  adverbs  nlmlrum,  nempe,  scilicet,  and  videlicet. 
Remark,   (a.)   Nam  is  used  at  the  beginning  of  a  proposition,  enim,  after  the 
first  or  second  word.     Nam  introduces  an  objective  reason,  and  enim  merely  a 
subjective  one.     There   is   the  same  diflerence  between  namque  and  eihiim. 
Namqne,  however,  though  constantly  standing  at  the  beginning  of  a  proposi- 
tion in  Cicero,  Ca;sar,  and  Nepos,  is  in  later  wTiters  often  put  after  the  beo-in- 
ning.    Eni7n  in  the  sense  of  at  enim  or  sed  enim  is  sometimes,  by  comic  writers 
put  at  the  beginning  of  a  proposition. — Nam,  enim,  and  etenim  ar^  often  usei 
in  the  sense  of '  namely,'  or  '  to  wit,'  to  introduce  an  explanation  of  some- 
thing going  before.     Nlmlrum,  videlicet,   and  scilicet  likewise  answer  to  our 
'namely'  or  'viz.'     Nlmlmm,  compovLnded  of  nl  and  mlrum,  and  signifyinc 
a  wonder  if  not,'  is  used  as  a  connective  in  the  sense  of  'undoubtedlj''  or 
surely,'  and  implies  strong  confidence  in  the  truth  of  the  proposition  with 
which  it  is  connected. —  Videlicet  and  scilicet  inti-oduce  an  explanation,  with 
this  difference  that  videlicet  generally  indicates  the  trae,  and  scilicet  a  wrong 
explanation.     Sometimes,  however,  nam,  enim,  etenim,  nlmlrum,  and  videlicet 
are  used  in  an  ironical  sense,  and  scilicet  introduces  a  true  reason. — Nempi 
surely,'  often  assumes  a  sarcastic  meaning  when  another  person's  concession 
It  ^aken  for  the  purpose  of  refuting  Lim. — (6.)    Quid  and  qudd  indicate  a  defi> 
16* 


174  CONJUNCTIONS.  §  198 

nite  and  conclusive  reason,  qudniam,  (i.  e.  quum  jam),  a  motive.— /c/eo,  iccirco 
prqAevea  qtidd,  and  quid,  are  used  without  any  essential  difference,  except  that 
Buid  introduces  a  more  strict  and  logical  reason,  whereas  qv^niam,  sigiiifymg 
'now  as,'  introduces  important  circumstances.— Quawc^o,  qtianduquidem,  ana 
nquidem  approach  nearer  to  qiiAniam  than  to  quid,  as  they  introduce  only  sub- 
jective reasons.  Quanddquidem  denotes  a  reason  implied  in  a  circumstance 
previously  mentioned ;  siquidem,  a  reason  implied  in  a  concession.  In  siquidem 
the  meaning  of  si  is  generally  dropped,  but  it  sometimes  remains,  and  then  si 
and  quidem  should  be  -m-itten  as  separate  words ;  as,  0  fortmatam  rempubli- 
cam,  si  quidem  hcinc  sentinam  ejecerit.  Cic—  Quippe,  with  the  relative  pronoim 
or  with  qmim,  introduces  a  subjective  reason.  When  used  ellipticaUy  without 
a  verb  it  signifies  '  forsooth  '  or  '  indeed.'  Sometimes  it  is  followed  by  a  sen- 
tence with  enim,  and  in  this  way  gradually  acquires  the  signification  oinam. 

8.  Final  conjunctions  express  a  purpose,  object,  or  result,  with  the  signifi- 
cation of  in  order  that,'  or  '  in  order  that  not.'  These  are  ut  or  uti,-qud, 
ne  or  ut  ne,  neve  or  neu,  qurn  and  quo  minus. 

Kesiark.  Ut,  as  a  conjunction  indicates  either  a  result  or  a  purpose,  '  so 
that,'  and  '  in  order  that.'  When  indicating  a  result,  if  a  negative  is  added  to 
it,  it  becomes  «<  w«  ;  when  indicating  a  purpose,  if  the  negative_is_  added,  it, 
becomes  ne  or  ut  ne,  but  ut  non  also  is  very  rarely  used  for  ni: — Neve  (i.  e.  velne) 
Bignilies  either  '  or  in  order  that  not,'  or  '  and  in  order  that  not.'  Ut  ne  is  a 
pleonasm,  not  difi"ering  perceptibly  from  ne.  It  is  used  more  frequently  by 
Cicero  than  by  other  writers.     Quo  ne  for  ne  occurs  once  in  Horace. 

9.  Adversative  conjimctions,  express  opposition,  with  the  signification  of 
'but.'     These   are    sed,    autem,    verum,    vero,    at    (poetical   ast),    at 
inim,   atqu'i,  tdmen,  attdmen,  sedtamen,  veruntdmen,  dt  vero 
(enimvero ),  verumenim,   verum,  vero,   ceterum. 

Remark,  (a.)  Sed  denotes  a  direct  opposition,  and  inteiTupts  the  narrative  or 
argument;  autem  marks  a  transition,  and  denotes  at  once  a  coimection  and  an 
opposition.  Porro,  '  further,'  denotes  progression  and  transition  but  not  oppo- 
sition, except  m  later  authors. —  Vei-um  has  a  similar  relation  to  vero  as  sM  t: 
autem.  Verum,  while  it  denotes  opposition,  contanis  also  an  explanation.  Ver: 
connects  things  which  are  dillerent,  but  denotes  the  point  in  favor  of  ^v•hich  the 
decision  should  be.  It  thus  forms  the  transition  to  something  more  important 
as  in  the  plu-ase,  Jllud  vero  plane  mm  est  fereiulum,  i.  e.  that  which  I  am  about 
to  mention.  In  affirmative  answers  vero  is  often  added  to  the  verb ;  as,  Dasne  f 
Do  vero.  Hence,  when  the  protasis  supplies  the  place  of  a  question,  it  is  some- 
times introduced  into  the  apodosis  merely  to  show  that  it  contains  an  answer. 
Hence  als-  vera  alone  signifies  'yes,'  Vike  sane,  ltd,  and  etiam. — Enimvero,  'yes, 
traly,'  '  in  truth,'  does  not  denote  opposition.  It  sometimes,  like  vero,  forms 
the  transition  to  that  which  is  most  important.  The  compound  verum  enim- 
vero denotes  the  most  emphatic  opposition. 

(6.)  At  denotes  that  that  which  is  opposed  is  equivalent  to  that  which  pre- 
cedes. It  frequently  follows  si,  in  the  sense  of  '  yet,'  or  '  at  least ' ;  as,  etsi  non 
sapientissimus,  at  aniicissimus.  It  is  especially  used  to  denote  objections  whether 
of  tlie  speaker  himself  or  of  others.  At  enim  introduces  a  reason  for  the  objec- 
tion implied  m  ai.— By  atqui,  'but  still,'  'but  yet,'  or  'nevertheless,'  ^ye  admit 
what  precedes,  but  oppose  something  else  to  it ;  as.  Magnum  narras,  vix  credi- 
bile.  Atqui-sic  habet.  Hor.  So,  also,  when  that  which  is  admitted,  is  made 
use  of  to  prove  the  contrary.  Fmally,  atqu'i  is  used  in  syllogisms,  when  a  thing 
is  assumed  which  had  before  been  leYt  undecided;  m  this  case  it  does  not  de- 
note a  direct  opposition  of  facts,  and  may  be  translated  by  '  now,'  'but,'  'but 
now.' —  Ceterum,  properly  '  as  for  the  rest,'  is  often  used  by  later  ^Titers  for 
ted. —  Contra  ea,  in  the  sense  of  '  on  the  other  hand,'  is  used  as  a  conjunction. 
So  ddeo  with  a  pronoun,  when  it  may  be  translated  'just,'  '  precisely,'  '  even,' 
'indeed,'  or  an  mtensive  '  and.' 

10.  Temporal  conjunctions,  express  time.  These  are  quum,  quum  prl- 
num,  ut,  ut  pri'mum,  ubi,  postquam,  antequam,  and  print- 
r'^.am,    quando,    simuldc    or  simulatque,    or    si  mil    alone, 

*que  aum  ,   donee ,   quoad. 


%m 


ft  198.  CONJUNCTIONS  175 

Remark.  Ut  and  ubl,  as  particles  of  time,  signify  '  when.'  Dum,  dmt'c,  and 
qnond  signify  either  '  as  long  as,'  or  '  until.'  iKim  often  precedes  nUerca  or  ii>- 
'Jrim,  and  both  dum  and  donee  are  often  preceded  by  the  adverbs  us(^iie,  us<jiui 
eo  Of  usque  ddeo. 

11.  Interrogative  conjunctions  indicate  a  question.  These  are,  mint 
utru7n,  cut,  and  the  enclitic  ne.  This,  when  attached  to  the  three  preced- 
in.f  particles,  forming  numne,  utrumne,  and  anne,  does  not  aflect  their 
meaning.  With  non  it  forms  a  special  mterrogative  particle  noniie.  To 
these  add  ec  and  en,  as  the v  appear  in  eci? mis,  ecquando,  and  enum- 
quam,  and  num. quid  and'  ecquid,  when  used  simply  as  interrogutiv3 
particles. 

Remark,  (a.)  The  interrogative  particles  have  no  distinct  meaning  b> 
themselves  in  du-ect  questions,  but  only  sei-ve  to  give  to  a  proposition  the  form 
of  a  question.  In  direct  speech  the  interrogative  particles  are  sometiim-s 
onatted,  but  in  indircL  questions  they  are  indispensable,  except  in  the  case  oi 
a  double  question,  where  the  first  particle  is  sometimes  omitted.— -£'c5?«'/  and 
numquid,  !V^  inteiTOgative  particles,  have  the  meaning  of  num,  quid  in  this  case 


Other  inten-ogative  word. 

(6.)  In  direct  questions,  warn  and  its  compounds  numne,  numnnm,  numquid, 
numquidnam,  and  the  compounds  with  en  or  ec  suppose  that  the  answer  will  be 
'  no ' ;  as,  Num  putas  me  tain  demeniem  fuisse  f  But  ecquid  is  sometimes  used 
in  an  affirmative  sense.  In  general  the  negative  sense  of  these  particles  does 
not  appear  in  indirect  questions. 

(c.)  Ne  properly  denotes  simply  a  question,  but  it  is  used  sometimes  affii-ma- 
tively  and  sometimes  negativelv.  When  ne  is  attached,  not  to  the  principal 
verb  but  to  some  other  word,  a'negative  sense  is  produced ;  as,  mene  istud  potu- 
isse  facere  putas  f  Do  you  believe  that  I  would  have  done  thatV  The  answer 
expected  is  'no.'  When  attached  to  the  principal  verb  ne  often  gives  the  af- 
firmative meaning,  and  the  answer  expected  is  '  yes.'— iVowwe  is  the  sign  of  an 
affirmative  question ;  as,  Cn7iis  nonne  lupo  similis  estf—Uirum,  in  accordance 
with  its  derivation  from  uter,  which  of  two,  is  used  only  in  double  questions 
■whether  consisting  of  two  or  more.  It  is  sometimes  accompanied  by  ne,  which 
is  usu.ally  separated  from  it  bv  one  or  more  words;  as,  Ulrum,  taceamne  an 
pradicem  f  In  later  writers,  hoVever,  utrumne  is  united  mto  one  word.  Ne  is 
rarely  appended  to  interrogative  adjectives,  but  examples  of  such  use  are  some- 
times found  in  poetry ;  as,  uter7ie ;  quone  malo ;  quantane.  In  a  few  passages  it 
is  even  attached  to  the  relative  pronoun. 

(c7.)  ^M  is  not  used  as  a  sign  of  an  indirect  question  before  the  silver  ag(!; 
when  so  used  it  answers  to  '  whether.'  It  is  used  by  Cicero  exclusively  in  a 
second  or  opposite  question,  where  we  use  '  or ' ;  as,  (5>i  sitis,  niUl  interest  utrura 
aqua  sit,  an  vinwn ;  nee  refert,  utrum  sit  aureum  poc&lum,  an  vitreuin,  an  mnnm 
concava.  Sen.  In  direct  interrogations,  when  no  interrogative  clause  precedes, 
in,  anne,  an  vera  are  likewise  used  in  the  sense  of '  or,'  that  is  in  such  a  man- 
aer  that  a  preceding  interrogation  is  supplied  by  the  mind;  as,  Invltus  te  offendi, 
an  putas  me  delectari  kedendis  hominibus?      Here  we  may  supjjly  before  an 


doubtful ;  as,  4  re6«s  ^rcr .  -       •       tt 

Juventute  ac  viribus  f  Is  it  not  from  those  kinds  of  business,  which  V  etc.  Here 
■we  may  suppose  aliisne  f  to  be  supplied  before  an  his  ?  Is  it  from  other  kinds 
of  business,  or  from  those?  etc.  buch  questions  may  be  introduced  l)y  7umne, 
but  without  allusion  to  an  opposite  ques'tion,  which  is  implied  in  an. 

(e.)  To  the  rule  that  an,  in  indirect  questions,  is  used  exchisively  to  indicate 
a  second  or  opposite  question,  there  is  one  gi-eat  exception,  for  it  is  employed 
in  single  indirect  questions  after  such  expressions  as  duhUo,  dMumest,  inrertum 
est ;  delihero,  hcesOo,  and  especially  after  nescio  or  haud  scio,  all  of  which  denote 
uncertainty,  but  with  an  inclination  to  the  affirmative;  as,  Si  per  se  virtas  sine 


176  INTERJECTIONS.  §     9& 

fartuna  pondtranda  sit  duhito  hvnc  primum  omnium  ponam,  If  virhie  is  to 
be  estimated  without  lef'eveiice  to  its  success,  lam  not  certain  whether  I  should 
not  prefer  this  man  t;o  aU  otiiers.  Nep.  It  is  not  Latin  to  say  dubiio  annon  foi 
diibilo  an. — Nesciu  an,  or  hand  scio  an  are  used  quite  in  the  sense  of  '  perhaps,' 
so  that  they  are  followed  by  the  negatives  nuUus,  nerrM,^  nmnguam,  instead  of 
uUus,  qziisgu'am  a,iid  vmguam.  When  the  principal  verb  is  omitted,  a»  is  often 
used  in  the  sense  of  azii;  as,  Tliemistocles,  quum  ei  Simonides,  an  guis  alius, 
artem  memorice  2)olUceretur,  etc.  In  such  cases  incertum  est  is  understood,  and 
in  Tacitus  is  often  supplied.— The  conjunction  si  is  sometimes  used  in  indirect 
interrogations  instead  of  num,  like  the  Greek  ti,  and  it  is  so  used  by  Cicero 
after  the  verb  experior. 

Note  1.  The  conjunctions  -7ie,  -gue,  -ve,  are  not  used  alone,  but  are  always 
affixed  to  some  other  word,  and  are  hence  called  enclitics. 

Note  2.  Some  words  here  classed  with  conjunctions  are  also  used  as  ad- 
Tsrbs,  and  many  classed  as  adverbs  are  likewise  conjimctions ;  that  is,  they  at 
the  same  time  qualify  verbs,  etc.,  and  connect  propositions ;  as.  Ceteris  in  rebus, 
quum  venit  ccdamitas,  tum  detrimentum  accipitur,  In  other  concerns,  when  mis- 
fortune comes,  then  damage  is  received. 

Note  3.  Conjunctions,  like  adverbs,  are  variously  compounded  with  other 
parts  of  speech,  and  with  each  other;  as,  ntgue,  (i.  e.  adgue),  iccirco  or  idcirco, 
(i.  e.  id-circa),  idea,  namgue,  etc.  In  some,  compounded  of  an  adverb  and  a 
conjunction,  each  of  the  simple  words  retains  its  meaning,  and  properly  belongs 
to  its  own  class;  a",  eiiam  {et  jam)  and  now;  iMgue,  and  so;  neque  or  nee,  and 
not. 

INTERJECTIONS. 

§  199.     Ai\  interjection  is  a  particle  used  in  exclamation, 

and  expressing  some  emotion  of  the  mind. 

The  most  usual  interjections  are, 

ah!  ah!  alas!  hem!  oho!  indeed !  well !  hah !  alas !  alat^! 

aha !  aim  !  ah  !  haha  !  heu !  oh  !  ah !  alas  ! 

apage!  away!  hegcme !  hens!  ho!  ho  there!  hark!,  haUcal 

atati  o)-at;Ute!  oh!  ah!  alas  Ho!    hui!  hah!  ho!  oh! 

au!  01-  ban!  oh!  ah!  io!  ho!  hurrah!  huzzah! 

ecc'e!  lo!  see!  behold!  61  o  !  oh!  ah! 

ehem!  ha!  what!  oh!  oh!  o!  ah! 

eheu !  ah  !  alas  !  ohe !  ho  !  halloa  !  ho  there  ! 

eho!  ehodum!  ho!  soho!  oho!  oho!  aha! 

eia!  or  heia!  ah!  ah  ha!  indeed!    oi!  hop!  alas! 

en!  lo!  see!  behold!  ^iq>x\  strange!  wonderful' 

eu !  well  done !  bravo  !  phui !  foh  !  fugh  ! 

euge !  well  done  !  good!  phy !  pish  !_  tush  ! 

euax '  )  7         7  17  If  pro !  or  pruh !  oh  i  ah ! 

encBl   I  ^'''"'"^''  '*"*■''"'' •  St !  hist !  whist !  hnsh ! 

ha!  hold!  ho!  t&tsel  so!  strange! 

hai  ha!  he!  ha!  ha!  vse!  ah/  alas!  woe.' 

Lei!  ah!  wo!  alas!  vah!  vaha!  ah!  alas!  oh! 

Remark  1.    An  interjection  sometimes  denotes  several  different   smotions. 

Thus  vah  is  used  to  express  wonder,  gi-ief,  joy,  and  anger. 

Eem.  2.  Other  parts  of  speech  may  sometimes  be  regarded  as  interjections; 
as,  7Jrtx/  be  stiU!  So  indignum,  i7if and um,  malum,  miserum,  miserabile,  nefas, 
R-hen  used  as- expressions  of  astonishment,  gi'ief,  or  hoiTor;  and  macte  and 
mncti,  as  expressions  of  approbation.  In  like  manner  the  adverbs  na,  profecto, 
pito,  bSne,  belle ;  the  verbs  quceso,  precor,  dro,  obsecro,  amabo,  age,  agtte,  cedo, 
$odes,  (for  si  audes),  s'ls,  sultis,  (for  si  vismxAsi  vultis),  dgesis,  dgedum,  and  d^it 
dum,  and  the  interrogative  quid?  wbat?  used  as  exclamations. 


§200,201.  SYNTAX. — PROPOSITIONS.  177 

Rem.  3.  With  the  interjections  ^may  also  be  classed  the  following  invoca 
tions  of  the  gods  :  herculcs,  hercule,  kerde;  or  mthercules,  meheirule,  mehercle , 
medium  fidins,  mecastor,  ecastor,  ecere,  pol,  edepol,  equirine,  per  deum,  per 
deum  immortCdem,  per  decs,  per  Jovem,  jn-o  (or  prOh)  Jupiter,  pro  dii  imnuyr' 
tales,  jiro  deum  fidem,  pro  deum  atque  hominum  fidem,  pro  deum  immo^-talium 
(scil.  fidem),  etc. 


SYNTAX. 

§  SOO.     1.    Syntax  treats  of  the  coustiniction  of  sentences. 

2.  A  sentence  is  a  thought  expressed  in  words ;  as,  Canes 
latrant,  The  dogs  bark. 

3.  All  sentences  are  either 

(1.)    Declarative;  as,  Fen^i  spirant,  The  winds  blow : — 
(2.)   Interrogative;  ss,  Splrantne  ventif  Do  the  winds  blow  ? — 
(3.)    Exclamatory;  as,   Quam  veJiementer  spirant  vend  I   How 
fiercely  the  winds  blow ! — or 

(4.)   Imperative  ;  as.  Vend,  spirdte,  Blow,  winds. 

4.  The  mood  of  the  verb  in  the  first  three  classes  of  sentences  is  either  the 
indicative  or  the  subjunctive;  in  imperative  sentences  it  is  either  the  imperar- 
tive  or  the  subjunctive. 

5.  A  sentence  may  consist  either  of  one  proposition  or  of  two  or 
more  propositions  connected  together. 

PROPOSITIONS. 

§  301.  1.  A  proposition  consists  of  a  subject  and  a  pre- 
dicate. 

2.  The  subject  of  a  proposition  is  that  of  which  something  is 
aifirmed. 

3.  The  predicate  is  that  which  is  afiu'med  of  the  subject. 

Thus,  in  the  proposition,  Equxis  currit,  The  horse  runs,  equus  is  the 
subject  and  currit  is  the  predicate. 

NoTB.  The  word  affirm,  as  here  used,  includes  all  the  various  significations  of  th* 
verb,  as  expressed  in  the  several  moods. 

4.  Propositions  are  either  principal  or  subordinate. 

5.  A  principal  proposition  is  one  which  makes  complete  sense  b/ 
itself;  as, 

Phocion  fuit  perpetuo  pauper,  quum  ditissimm  ette  potaet,  Phocwn  was  always 
DOW,  though  he  might  have  been  very  rich. 


178  SYNTAX. SUBJECT.  §  202. 

6.  A  subordinate  proposition  is  one  which,  by  means  of  a  subordi- 
nate conjunction,  is  made  to  depend*  upon  or  limit  some  part  of 
another  proposition ;  as, 

Phocion  fuit  pei"fietuo  pmqKT^  quum  ditissimus  esse  posset,  Phocion  was  al 
ways  poor,  thuuyh  he  might  have  been  very  nch. 

7.  Subordinate  propositions  are  used  either  as  substantives,  adjec- 
tives, or  adverbs,  and  are  accordingly  called  substantive,  adjective  or 
adverbial  propositions  or  clauses. 

8.  Substantive  clauses  are  connected  with  the  propositions  on  which  they 
depend  by  means  of  tlie  final  conjunctions  ut,  we,  quo,  quin,  etc.,  sometimes  h} 
quod,  and"  in  clauses  containing  an  mdirect  question,  by  interrogative  pronouns, 
adjectives,  adverbs  and  conjunctions.     See  §§  262  and  265. 

Remark.  A  dependent  substantive  clause  often  takes  the  form  of  the  accusative  with 
the  infinitive  and  in  that  case  has  no  connective;  as,  Gaudeo  te  valere. 

9.  Adjective  clauses  are  connected  by  means  of  relatives,  both  pronouns  anc 
pronominal  adjectives;  as,  qui,  qudlis,  quanius,  etc.   Adverbial  clauses  are  con 
nected  either  by  relative  adverbs  of  place  and  time,  (§  191,  R.  1,  (6.),  or  b^ 
temporal,  conditional,  concessive,  comparative,  and  sometimes  by  causal  cod- 
junctions. 

10.  A  sentence  consisting  of  one  proposition  is  called  a  simple  sen 
tence;  as, 

Cadunt  fdlia.  The  leaves  fall.     Semirdmis  Babylonem  concRdit. 

11.  A  sentence  consisting  of  a  principal  and  one  or  more  subordi- 
nate propositions  is  called  a  complex  sentence ;  as, 

Qui  Jit,  ut  nemo  contentus  v'lvat  f  How  happens  it,  that  no  one  hves  content  ? 
Qiiis  ego  sim,  me  royitas.  You  ask  me,  who  I  am. 

12.  A  sentence  consisting  of  two  or  more  principal  propositions, 
either  alone  or  in  connection  with  one  or  more  subordinate  proposi- 
tions, is  called  a  compound  sentence ;  as. 

Spirant  venii  et  cadunt  fdlia,  The  winds  blow,  and  the  leaves  fall. 

13.  The  propositions  composing  a  complex  or  a  compound  sen- 
tence are  called  its  viembers  ov  clauses ;  the  principal  proposition  is 
called  the  leading  clause,  its  subject,  the  leading  subject,  and  its  verb, 
the  leading  verb. 

SUBJECT. 

§  30S'  1.  The  subject  also  is  either  simple,  complex,  or 
compound. 

2.  The  simple  subject,  which  is  also  called  the  grammatical  sub- 
ject, is  either  a  noun  or  some  word  standing  for  a  noun ;  as, 

Aves  vdlant,  Birds  tiy.  Tu  legis,  Thou  readest.  A  est  v6cdlis,  .4  is  a  vowel. 
Mentiri  est  turpe.   To  he  is  base. 

3.  The  complex  subject,  called  also  the  logical  subject,  consists  of 
the  simple  subject  with  its  modifications  ;  as, 

Conscientia  bene  actae  vitK  est  jucundissima.  The  consaousness  f  a  well  tment 
Hfe  is  very  pleasant.  Here  conscientia  is  the  grammatical,  and  conscientia  ohi* 
acta  vUoB  the  compi  as,  subject. 


§  202.  SYNTAX. SUBJECT.  179 

4.  The  compound  subject  consists  of  two  or  more  simple  or  com- 
plex subjects  to  which  a  single  predicate  belongs ;  as, 

Luna  et  steWos  fide/ebant,  The  moon  and  sla7-$  were  shining.  GrammaHce  ac 
mvL^icod  jitncice  J^erunt,  Gi-ammar  and  7»Msic  were  united.  Semper  honoa  no- 
tneuque  tuum  luudes(/«e  mdnibunl. 

Remark.    Words  are  said  to  modify  or  limit  otlier  words,  when  .hey  servo 
to  ex])lain,  describe,  define,  enlarge,  restrict,  or  otherwise  quaUfy  their  mean- 
-i«g- 

5.  Every  sentence  must  contain  a  subject  and  a  predicate,  called 
its  principal  or  essential  parts :  any  sentence  may  also  receive  addi- 
tions to  these,  called  its  subordinate  parts. 

Complex  or  Modijied  Subject. 

6.  The  complex  subject  is  formed  by  adding  other  words  to  the 
simple  subject.  All  additions  to  the  subject,  like  the  subject  itself, 
are  either  simple,  complex,  or  compound. 

I.    Simple  additions.     The  subject  may  be  modified  by  adding  : — 

1.  A  single  word: — 

(1.)    A  noun  in  the  same  case;  as, 

Nos  consules  desumus,  We  consuls  are  remiss.  Mucins  augur  multa  narrdvil, 
Mucins  the  auyur  related  many  things. 

(2.)    A  noun  or  pronoun  in  an  oblique  case,  modifying  or  limiting 

the  subject ;  as, 

Ainor  multitudinis  commovvtur,  The  love  of  the  multitude  is  excited.  Cura  mei, 
Cjire  for  me.     Viribus  usus,  Need  of  strength. 

(3.)    An  adjective,  adjective  pronoun,  or  participle  ;  as, 

Fiigit  invida  cetns.  Envious  time  flies.  Mea  mater  est  benigna.  Ducit  agnUna 
Penthesilea  furens.     Litera  scripta  mdnet. 

2.  A  phrase  consisting  of  a  preposition  and  its  case  ;  as, 
Sdpor  in  gramine.    Opplda  sine  praesidio.    Receptio  ad  te. 

3.  A  dependent  adjective  clause  introduced  by  qui,  qudlis,  quari' 
tus,  etc. ;  as, 

Lece  ft,  quod  bene  fertur,  dnus.  The  burden,  which  is  borne  well,  becomes 
light.  Literce,  quas  scripsisti,  acceptcB  sunt.  Ut,  qiialis  (ille)  haberi  vellet, 
talis  esset.     Tanta  est  inter  eos,  quanta  maxima  esse  potest,  morum  distaniia. 

n.    Complex  additions.     The  subject  may  be  modified  : — 
1.    By  a  roord  to  which  other  words  are  added. 
(1.)    AVhen  the  word  to  which  other  words  are  added  is  a  noun  oi 
pronoun,  it  may  be  modified  in  any  of  the  ways  above  mentioned. 

(2.)    When  it  is  an  adjective  it  may  be  modified  : — 
(a.)    By  an  adverb  either  simple  or  modified ;  as, 
Krai  exspectatiovaXAe  magna.    P rcesidium  non  nimis  fi'inum. 

(Ii.)    By  a  noun  in  an  oblique  case;  as, 

Mdjiir  pietdte,  Superior  in  piety.  Contentionis  cupidus,  Fond  of  contention 
Phtfi  similis,  Like  liis  father.     I^Hdus  membra.   Juvenes  patre  digni. 


180  SYNTAX. — SUBJECT  §  208. 

(c.)   By  an  infinitive,  a  gerund,  or  a  supine ;  as, 

Insuctus  vinci,  Not  accustomed  to  be  conquered.  Venandi  stMiosus.  Fond  oj 
huntina-     Mlrablle  dictu,  Wonderful  to  tell. 

(tZ.)    By  a  plirase  consisting  of  a  preposition  and  its  case ;  as, 
Rudis  in  republlca,  Unskilled  in  civil  affairs.     Ab  equitatu  firmus.    Celer  in 
pugnam.     Promts  ad  f  idem. 

(e.)   By  a  subordinate  clause ;  as, 

Meliar  est  certapax,  quam  spei-ata  victoria,  A  certain  peace  is  better  thxi  an 
expected  victory.     Dubvus  sum,  quid  f  aciam. 

(3.)  When  it  is  a  participle,  it  may  be  modified  like  a  verb.  See 
§  203. 

2.  By  a  phrase  consisting  of  a  preposition  and  its  case  to  whicb 
otier  words  are  added ;  as, 

De  victoria  CaBsaris  fama  perfertur,  A  report  concerning  Cxsar's  victory  \e 
brought. 

Remark  1.  As  the  case  following  the  preposition  is  that  of  a  noun  or  pro- 
noun, it  may  be  modified  like  the  subject  in  any  of  the  foregoing  ways. 

Rem.  2.  The  preposition  itself  may  be  modified  by  an  adverb,  or 
by  a  noun  or  adjective  in  an  oblique  case ;  as, 

Longe  ultra,  Far  beyond.  Multo  ante  noctem.  Long  before  night.  Sexennio 
poit  Veios  captos,  Six  years  after  the  capture  of  Veii. 

3.  By  a  subordinate  clause,  to  whose  subject  or  predicate  othei 
words  are  added. 

Remark.  These  additions  may  be  of  the  same  form  as  those  added  to  the 
principal  subject  or  predicate  of  the  sentence. 

TTT.    Compound  additions.     The  subject  may  be  modified : — 

1.  By  two  or  more  nouns  in  the  same  case  as  the  subject,  connect- 
ed by  a  coordinate  conjunction  ;  as, 

Consules,  Brutus  et  CoUatinus,  The  consuls,  Brutus  and  Collaiinus. 

2.  By  two  or  more  oblique  cases  of  a  noun  or  pronoun  connected 
cobrdinately ;  as, 

Yit2eqite  necisque  pdtestas.     Periculorum  et  lahorum  incUdmentum. 

3.  By  two  or  more  adjectives,  adjective  pronouns,  or  participles, 
connected  codrdinately ;  as, 

Grave  bellum  perdiiiturnumgwe.   Animi  teneri  atque  molles. 

4 .  By  two  or  more  adjective  clauses  connected  codrdinately ;  as, 
Et  ijui  f  ecere,  et  qiii  facta  alionim  scripsere,  multi  laudantur.  Sail. 

5.  By  two  or  moi'e  of  the  preceding  modifications  connected  codr- 
dinately; as. 

Genus  liommum  agi-este,  sine  legibus,  sine  imperio,  liberum,  atque  solutum. 

Rem.  1.  A  modified  grammatical  subject,  considered  as  one  com- 
plex  idea,  may  itself  be  modified ;  as, 

Omnia  tua  consilia,  All  thy  counsels.  Here  omnia  modifies,  not  conailia,  hvi 
the  complex  idea  expressed  by  tua  consilia.  So  Triginta  naves  hnga.  Praepi^ 
ens  fltUtimus  rex. 


§203.  SYNTAX. PREDICATR.  181 

Rem.  2.  An  infinitive,  -with  the  words  connected  with  it,  may  b« 
the  logical  subject  of  a  proposition  ;  as, 

Virtus  est  vitium  fugere.   To  sJmn  vice  is  a  virtue. 

Rem.  3.  A  clause,  or  any  member  consisting  of  two  or  more  clauses, 
may  be  the  logical  subject  of  a  proposition ;  as, 

H  cmh  descendit '  Nosce  te  ipsum.'    ^quum  est,  ut  hoc  f  iicies. 

Rem.  4.  The  noun  or  pronoun  which  is  the  subject  of  a  proposi- 
tion is  put  in  the  nominative,  when  the  verb  of  the  predicate  is  a 
finite  verb ;  but  when  the  verb  is  in  the  infinitive,  the  subject  is  put 
in  the  accusative. 

NcTK  1.    A  verb  in  any  mood,  except  the  infinitive,  is  called  a  finite  verb. 
Note  2.     In  the  foUowiug  pages,  when  the  term  subject  or  predicate  is  used  alone,  th« 
grammatical  subject  or  predicate  is  intended. 

PREDICATE. 

§  303.  1-  The  predicate,  like  the  subject,  is  either  simple^ 
complex,  or  compound. 

2.  The  simple  predicate,  which  is  also  called  the  grammatical  pre- 
dicate, is  either  a  single  finite  verb,  or  the  copula  sum  with  a  noun, 
adjective,  and  rarely  with  an  adverb ;  as, 

Sol  liicet,  The  snn  shines.  Multa  animdlia  repunt.  Many  animals  creep 
Brevls  est  t'(5  "y'i".s,  Pleaswce  is  biHef  Europa  est  peninsiila,  Europe  is  a  per 
ninsiila.     Rectissime  sunt  apicd  te  omnia. 

3.  The  complex  predicate,  called  also  the  logical  predicate,  con- 
sists of  the  simple  predicate  with  its  modifications ;  as, 

Scipio  fudit  Aiinibalis  copias,  Scipio  routed  the  forces  of  Hannibal.  Her« 
fiidit  is  the  fi^i-ammatical,  and  fudit  Annibdlis  copias  the  logical  predicate.— 
So,  Romulus  Ilomanse  conditor  lu-bis  fuit. 

4.  The  compouhd  predicate  consists  of  two  or  more  simple  or  com- 
plex predicates  belonging  to  the  same   subject;  as, 

Prdbitas  laudatur  et  alget.  Honesty,  is  jpraised  and  neglected.  Leti  vis  rapuit^ 
rapietque  gentes.  Lucius  Catillna  fuit  magna  vi  et  animi  et  corporis,  sea  in- 
genio  malo  pravoqne. 

Complex  or  Modified  Preancate. 

5.  The  complex  predicate  is  formed  by  adding  other  words  to  the 
gmiple  predicate.  AH  additions  to  the  predicate,  like  the  predicate 
itself,  are  either  simple,  complex,  or  compound. 

L    Simple  additions.     The  predicate  may  be  modified  by  adding: — 

1.   A  single  word ; — 

(1.)  A  noun  or  adjective  in  the  same  case  as  the  subject.  This 
occurs  after  certain  neuter  verbs  and  passive  verbs  of  naming,  call- 
ing, etc.  (See  §  210,  R.  3.)  ;  as, 

iSie/-v;(s_^<  liliertlnus,  The  shive  becomes  a  freedman.  Serviv^  Tullius  tex  ea 
decldraius.     Aristides  jxistus  ist  appelldtus.     Inci-do  regina. 

(2.)    A  nonn  or  pronoun  in  an  oblique  case ;  asj 

Spe  vlvimm,  We  liveJft^  hope     Deus  regit  mundum,  Grod  rules  the  toorld. 

IB 


182  SYNTAX. PREDICATE.  §203 

(3.)    An  adverb  either  simple  or  modified ;  as, 

Sajpe  vcnk,  He  came  often.    Festlna  lente,  Hasten  skmiy.     Liiera  ficUe  dia 
euntur.    Chremes  nimis  gi-aviter  crucial  adOlescentulum. 

(4.)    An  infinitive  mood ;  as, 

CXipil  discere,  He  desires  to  learn.    Audeo  dicere.    Ver  esse  cosperat. 

2.  A  phrase  consisting  of  a  preposition  and  its  case ;  as,  Venit  ad 
nrbeni,  He  came  to  the  city. 

3.  A  dependent  substantive  or  adverbial  clause ;  as, 

Vei'eor  ne  repreliendar,  I  fear  that  T shall  be  blamed.  ZenOnem,  quum  Athenia 
essem,  audiibam  frequenter.    Fdc  cogites. 

II.  Complex  additions.     The  predicate  may  be  modified : — 

1.  By  a  word  to  -whicli  other  words  are  added. 

Remark.  These  words  are  the  same  as  in  the  corresponding  cases  of  com- 
plex additions  to  the  subject.    See  §  202,  11. 

2.  By  a  phrase  consisting  of  a  preposition  and  its  case,  to  which 
other  words  are  added.     See  complex  additions  to  the  subject,  §  202. 

3.  By  a  subordinate  clause,  to  whose  subject  or  predicate  other 
words  are  added.     See  complex  subject,  §  202, 11,  3. 

Rkm.  2.  Each  of  the  words  constituting  a  proposition  may  be  modified  by 
two  or  more  additions  not  dependent  on,  nor  coimected  with  each  other,  and 
consisting  either  of  single  v/ords,  phrases,  or  dependent  clauses;  as,  Agamem- 
nonis  belli  gloria.  Patenuim  ddium  erga  Romanos.  Mens  sibi  conscia  recti. 
Mea  maxime  interest,  te  adCre.  Ago  tibi  giTitias.  Meipsum  inertice  condemno. 
Eos  hoc  mdneo.    In  quo  te  accUso.     MCnet  eum,  ut  suspiciones  vitet. 

m.  Compound  additions.  1.  The  predicate  may  be  modified  by 
two  or  more  words,  phrases,  or  clauses,  joined  together  by  a  coordi- 
nate conjunction.     See  Compound  additions  to  the  subject,  §  202,  IQ 

2.  The  leading  verb  is  usually  either  in  the  indicative  or  impera 
tive  mood,  but  sometimes  in   the  subjunctive  or  the  historical  infin- 
itive. 

3.  The  members  of  a  compound  sentence  are  connected  by  coordi- 
nate conjunctions;  those  of  a  complex  sentence  by  some  relative 
word,  or  by  a  subordinate  conjunction. 

4.  Instead  of  a  dependent  clause  connected  by  a  conjunction,  a 
noun  and  participle,  or  two  nouns,  sometimes  stand  as  an  abridged 
proposition ;  as, 

Bello  confecto  discessit,  i.  e.  qimm  bellum  confectwm  esset,  discessit.  The  wfir 
being  finished,  or  when  the  war  was  finished,  he  departed.  Nil  desperarulvm, 
Teucro  diice. 

5.  All  Infinitive  may  be  modified  like  the  verb  of  a  predicate. 

6.  Agreement  is  the  correspondence  of  one  word  with  anothei  ia 
gender,  number,  case,  or  person. 

7.  A  word  is  said  to  govern  another,  when  it  requires  it  to  be  put 
m  a  certain  case  or  mood. 

8.  A  word  is  said  to  depend  on  another,  when  its  case,  gender 
Dumber,  mood,  tense,  or  person,  is  determined  by  that  word. 

9.  A  word  is  said  to  follow  another,  when  it  depends  upon  it  in 
construction,  whatever  may  be  its  position  in  the  sentence. 


§204.  SYNTAX. — APPOSTTKN.  18iJ 


APPOSITION. 

§  304r.     A  noun,  annexed  to  another  noun  or  to  a  protounj 
and  denoting  the  same  person  or  thing,  is  put  in  the  same  case 
as, 

Ui-bs  Roma,  The  city  Rome.  Nos  consules,  We  consuls.  So  Apiid  Berocldtum-^ 
patrem  Idstdrice,  sunt  inmimernhiles  fabUlcB,  In  Herodotus,  the/cfrter  of  history, 
etc.  Cic.  Xn/)iV/es  silices,  ^tn<  stones.  Liv.  Anttrrn  consiilem,  BeforG  I  was 
xxmtul.    Fons  cui  nomen  Arethiisa  est.  Cic. 

Kesiakk  1.  (a.)  A  noun,  thns  annexed  to  another,  is  said  to  be  in  apposition 
to  it.  It  is  generally  added  for  the  salce  of  exphinatijn,  identification,  or  de- 
scription; sometimes  it  denotes  character  or  purpose;  as.  Ejus  faijm  ctruteiii 
me  adjanxl,  I  added  myself,  as  a  companion  of  his  flight;  and  sometimes  t^e 
time,  cause,  reason,  etc.,  of  an  action;  as,  Alexander  puer,  Alexander  when  a 
boy.     Cuto  senex  scrlbere  Mstdriam  instituit.  Suet. 

(b.)  A  noun  in  apposition,  like  an  adjective  iised  as  an  epithet,  (§  205,  N.  2,) 
assumes  the  attribute  denoted  by  it  as  belonging  to  the  noun  whicli  it  limits, 
while  the  predicate-nominative  affirms  it.  Hence  both  nouns  belong  to  tho 
pame  part  of  the  sentence,  whether  subject  or  predicate.  In  cases  of  apposi- 
tion, there  seems  to  be  an  ellipsis  of  the  ancient  participle  ens,  being;  qui  est, 
who  is ;  qui  vocdtur,  who  is  called ;  or  the  like. 

Rem.  2.  If  the  annexed  noun  has  a  form  of  the  same  gender  as  the  other 
noun,  it  takes  that  fonn ;  as,  Usus  magister  egreyius.  Win.  Fhilosdphia  magis- 
tra  v'llce.  Cic.  If  the  annexed  noun  is  of  the  common  gender,  the  adjective 
qualifying  it  takes  the  gender  of  the  preceding  noun ;  as,  Laurus  fidissinui 
custos. 

Rem.  3.  The  annexed  noun  sometimes  dilTers  from  the  other  in  gender  or  in 
number;  as,  Duo  fulmina  belli,  Scipiadas,  cladem  Lihyce.  Virg.  Miiyleme,  urbs 
tiobilis.  Cic.  Tullidln,  deYic'ioi  nostrce.  Id.; — and  sometimes  in  both;  as,  Nate, 
viem  vires.  Virg.     Nos,  animse  viles,  inhwmlta  injittiique  turba.  Id. 

Rem.  4.  The  substantive  pronoun  is  sometimes  omitted  before  the  word  in 
apposition  to  it;  as,  Consul  aixi,  scil.  ego;  (I)  the  consul  said.  And  instead  of 
tlie  substantive  pronoun,  a  possessive  adjective  pronoun  is  sometimes  used;  as, 
Tua  ddmus,  talis  viri.  Cic.    See  §  211,  R.  3,  (b.) 

Rem.  5.  A  noun  may  be  in  apposition  to  two  or  more  nouns,  and,  in  such 
case,  is  usually  put  in  the  plural ;  as,  M.  Antonius,  C.  C'assius,  tribiini  plebis, 
M.  Autonius,  d.  Cassius,  tribunes  of  the  people.  Cks.  Publiuset  Servius  Sullse, 
Servi  fUii.  Sail.  Tib.  et  Gains  Gracchi.  Cic.  Oraiiones  L.  et  C.  Aurelionim 
Orestarum.  Id.    But  sometimes  in  the  singular;  as,  Cn.  et  L.  Domitius.  Cic. 

(1.)  So  when  the  nouns  are  connected  by  cu7n,  the  annexed  noun  taking 
the  case  of  the  former;  as,  Diccearchum  vero  cum  Arisloxeno,  doctos  sane  hom- 
ines, omittamus.  Cic. 

^'\.)  If  the  nouns  are  proper  names  of  different  genders,  a  masculine  noun  is 
an;:?xed  rather  than  a  feminine,  when  both  forms  exist;  as,  Ad  Ptolemawn 
Ckqpatramque  reges  legati  missi  sunt.  Liv. 

Rem.  6.  The  annexed  noun  is  sometimes  in  the  genitive;  as,  Urbem  Patavl 
Iccavil,  The  citj  of  I'atavium.  Virg.  Plwimus  Eridani  amnis.  Id.  Arbdrem 
fici  numquam  viderat.  Cic.     In  ojipldo  Antiochiie.  Id.    Ruplli  et  Persi  jtar.  Hor. 

Rem.  7.  The  name  of  a,  town  in  the  genitive  occurs  with  an  ablative  in  ap- 
position to  it;  as,  Connthi  Achaice  urbe;  At  Corinth,  a  city  of  Achaia.  Tac. 
AntiochicE,  celebri  urbe.  Cic.    See  ^  221,  Note,  and  §  254,  Rem.  3. 

Rem.  8.  (a.)  A  proper  name,  after  nomen  or  cognomen,  with  a  verb  followed 
by  a  dative,  is  put  in  ap]iosition  either  to  ncmen,  etc.,  or  to  the  dative,  the  latter 
by_  a  species  of  attraction ;  as,  Fons,  cui  nomen  Arethusa  est.  Cic.  Stirps  virilit, 
ctti  Ascanium  paren!€$  dixere  ndmen.  Liv.     Nomen  Arcturo  est  mihi,  I  have  the 


1  84  SYNTAX. — ADJECTIVES.  §  205. 

name  Arcturas.  Plaut.  Cui  nvnc  cognomen  lulo  additnr.  Virg.  Cut  Xgerio  iru&- 
lumnomen.  Liv. — (6.)  The  name  may  also  be  put  in  the  genitive;  as,  Nomcn 
Merciirii  est  mihi.  Plant.  Q.  Mtfellus,  cui  Macedonici  nomen  imlitum.  eral.  Veil. 
Cf.  R.  6. — (c.)  In  Ilia  ntas,  cui  fecimus  Aurea  nomen,  Ov.  Met.  15,  96,  Anrea 
is  used  as  an  indeclinable  noun,  inateiid  of  Aweam  {soil,  letdtem) ;  or  Aui-ece 
dat.  (scU.  cetati.) 

Eem.  9.  A  clause  may  supply  the  plaee  of  one  of  the  nouns;  as,  Oagiiet  ora- 
t5rem  institui — rem  arctuam,  Let  him  reflect  that  an  orator  is  training — a  diffi- 
cult thing.  Quint. — So  also  a  neuter  adjective  used  substantively;  as,  Trista 
lupus  stabuUs,  The  wolf,  a  sad  thing  to  the  folds.  Vii-g.  Varium  et  mutabilo 
semper'  femina.  Id. 

Eem.  10.  Sometimes  the  former  noun  denotes  a  whole,  and  its  parts  are  ex- 
pressed by  nouns  in  apposition  to  it;  as,  Onerdrice,  pars  maodma  ad  jEgimurum^ 
— aliiB  adversus  urbem  ipsam  delcltce  sunt,  The  ships  of  burden  were  earned,  the 
greatest  part,  to  Jilgimurus, — others  opposite  to  the  citj^  itself.  Liv.  Pictores 
et  poeicB  suum  quisque  dpiis  a-  vulgo  considerdri  vult.  Cic.  In  the  construction 
of  the  ablative  absolute,  quisque  remains  in  the  nominative,  though  the  word 
to  wliich  it  is  in  apposition  is  in  the  ablative ;  aS,  Mullis  sibi  quisque  inipiirium 
pefentilius.  Sail.  J.  18.  So  also,  in  Liv.  26,  29,  quisque  remains' in  the  nomina- 
tive although  the  word  to  which  it  is  in  apposition  is  Ln  the  accusative  with 
the  infinitive. 

To  this  rale  may  be  subjoined  that  which  relates  to  the  agreement  of  inter- 
rogative and  responsive  words. 

Rem.  11.  The  principal  noun  or  pronoun  in  the  answer  to  a  ques- 
tion, must  be  in  the  same  case  as  the  corresponding  interrogative 
word ;  as, 

Quis  herus  est  iibi  ?  Amphitruo,  scO.  est.  Who  is  your  master?  Amphitruo 
(is.)  Plaut.  Quid  qucei-isf  Librum,  scil.  qucero.  What  are  you  looking  for? 
A  book.  Quota  hord  venisti  ?  Sexta.  At  what  hour  did  you  come  ?  At  the 
sixth. 

Note  1.  Instead  of  the  genitive  of  a  substantive  pronoun,  the  corresponding 
possessive  pronoun  is  often  used,  agreeing  with  its  noim;  us,  Cvjns,  est  liber  i 
Mens,  (not  Mei.)  (See  §  211,  Rem.  3,  (b.)  So  cujum  for  genitive  cujiis?  Ciijum 
pecusf  an  Mtlibaif  Non;  vvi-um  JEgonis.  Virg. 

Note  2.  Sometimes  the  rules  of  syntax  require  the  responsive  to  be  in  a 
different  case  from  that  of  the  interrogative;  as,  Quanti  enustif  Viginti  minis, 
Damnatusne  is  furti?     Jmo  alio  crimiue..  See  §§  214,  R.  1,  and  217,  R.  2. 

ADJECTIVES. 

§  30^.  Adjectives,  adjective  pronouns,  and  participles, 
Rgree  with  their  nouns,  in  gender,  number,  and  case ;  as, 

Bdnus  vir,  A  good  man.  Bdnos  inros,  Good  men. 

Benigna  mater,  A  kind  mother.  Vdna  leges,  Useless  laws. 

Trisie  bellum,  A  sad  war.  Mindcia  verba,  Threatening  Trords. 

Spe  amissd,  Hope  being  lost.  Hcec  res.  This  thing. 

So,  Mea  mater  est  benigna. 
JJcBc  leges  vdnce  sunt. 

Note  1.  Adjectives,  according  to  their  meaning,  (^  104),  are  divided  into 
two  classes — qualifying  and  limiting — the  former  denoting  some  property  or 
miality  of  a  noun ;  as,  a  wise  man,  lead  is  heavy ;  the  latter  defining  •r  restricting 
its  meaning;  as,  ^/( is  man,  ?e?i  cities.  To  the  foitner  class  belong  such  adjec- 
tives as  denote  a  property  or  quality,  including  all  participles  and  participia. 
adjectives;  to  the  latter,  the  adjective  p^jnouns,  pronominal  adjectives,  ana 
numerals. 


§  205.  SYNTAX. — ADJECTIVES.  18.1 

Note  2.   An  adjective,  participle,  or  pronoun,  may  either  be  Ti:?ed  rs  an  epi 
tliet  to  modify  a  noun,  or,  with  the  copnla  sum,  may  constitute  a  predicate 
1(1  the  former  case  the  quality  is  assumed,  in  the  latter  it  is  assei-tcd.     In  both 
cases,  the  rule  for  their  agreement  is,  in  general,  the  same.  See  ^  210,  E.  1. 

Note  3.  Any  word  or  combination  of  words  added  to  a  noun  to  moony  or 
limit  its  meaning  is  of  the  nature  of  an  adjective. 

Note  4.  In  the  following  remarks,  the  word  a/fjective  is  to  be  considered  as  incladlijg 
participles,  either  alone  or  combined  with  the  auxiliary  *«»!,  and  also  adjective  pio- 
Douns,  unless  the  contrary  is  intimated. 

Remark  1.  An  adjective  agrees  also  with  a  substantive  pronoun,  taking  its 
gender  from  that  of  the  noim  for  which  the  pronoun  stands ;  as.  Ipse  capellm 
se^er  ago,  soil,  ego,  Melibceus ;  Virg.  Fortunate  puer,  tu  nunc  ei-is  alter  ab  illo.  Id. 
Ut  se  totxxxa  ei  trdderet.  Nep.  0  me  miser  urn  (spoken  by  a  man),  nnseramme 
(spoken  by  a  woman).  So  salvi  siimvs,  srdvce  sumus,  scil.  nos,  masculine  or 
feminine. — In  general  propositions  which  include  both  sexes,  the  pronouns  are 
considered  masculme ;  as,  Nos  fruges  conswmere  nati.  Hor. 

Rem.  2.  An  adjective  may  belong  to  each  of  two  or  more  nouns, 
and  in  such  case  is  put  in  the  plural.  If  the  nouns  are  of  the  same 
gender,  the  adjective  agrees  with  them  in  gender,  as  well  as  in  num- 
ber;  as, 

Lupus  et  agnus  sTti  compulsi,  A  wolf  and  a  Iamb,  constrained  by  thirst.  Phsed. 
Sicilia  Sardi'iidque  amissaj.  Liv. 

AATien  the  nouns  are  of  different  genders, 

(1.)  Kthey  denote  living  things,  the  adjective  is  masculine  rather 
than  feminine ;  as, 

Pater  viihi  et  mater  mortui  sunt,  My  father  and  mother  are  dead.  Ter.  So 
also  uterque  in  the  singular.  Procumbit  uterque,  scU.  Deucalion  et  Pyrrha. 
Ovid. 

(2.)  If  they  denote  things  without  life,  the  adjective  is  generally 
neuter;  as, 

Eis  genus,  cetas,  eloquentia  pi-dpe  seqnalin  fuere.  Their  family,  age,  and  elo- 
quence, were  nearly  equal.  Sail.  Regna,  imperia,  nobilitates,  honores,  divltice  in 
casu  sita  sunt.  Cic.  ITuic  bdla,  raplncB,  discordia  civllis,  gi-ata  fuere.  SaU. 
Anima  atque  animus,  quamv'is  integra  recens  in  corjnis  eunt.  Lucr. 

Note.  When  nouns  denoting  things  without  life  are  of  the  sam.e  gender 
(either  masculine  or  feminine),  but  of  different  numbers,  the  adjective  is  some- 
times neuter;  as,  Ch-o>so  et  vita  et  patrimonii  partes,  et  ttrbs  Barce  concessa 
iunt.  .Just.;  sometimes  also  when  both  nouns  are  in  the  singular  number;  as, 
Pleroscjue  velocUas  et  regio  hostibus  igndra  tutata  sunt.  SaU.  Nox  atque  prasda 
remoruta  sunt.  Id. 

(3.)  If  one  of  the  nouns  denotes  an  animate,  and  another  an  inan- 
imate thing,  the  adjective  is  sometimes  neuter,  and  sometimes  takes 
the  gender  of  that  which  has  life  ;  as, 

Numida  atque  signa  milituria  obscnrati  sunt.  The  Numidians  and  the  military 
standards  were  concealed.  Sail.  Romani  rcgem  regnmnnue  Ifaceddnice  sua 
futiira  sciunt.  Liv.    Jane,  fac  SEternos  pacem  pacisque  mintstros.  Ovid. 

Exc.  to  Rem.  2.  The  adjective  often  agrees  with  the  nearest  noun, 
and  is  understood  witli  the  rest ;  as, 

SOciis  et  rege  recepto,  Our  com'  anions  and  king  having  been  recovered 
Virg.  Agri  oranes  et  maria.  Cic.  CogrAtum  est  salutem,  liberos,  famam,  for' 
tunoi  ease  canssimas.  Cic. 

16* 


186  SYNTAX. — ADJECTIVES.  §  205. 

Note.  A  norm  in  tho  sinp^lar,  followed  by  an  ablative  ■w'ii\  cum,  has  some- 
times a  plural  adjective,  the  gender  being  the  same  as  if  the  nouns  ivere  con- 
nected by  ei ;  as,  Filiam  cum  filio  ac Jitos.  Liv.  Jlia  cum  Lauso  de  Nuiml&rt 
sati.  Ovid.     FUium  Alexandn  cum  matre  in  arcem  custodiendos  miiiit.  Just. 

Rem.  3.  (1.)  An  adjective  qualifying  a  collective  noun  is  often 
put  in  the  plural,  taking  the  gender  of  the  individuals  wliich  the  noun 
denotes;  as, 

Pars  certare  parati,  A  part,  prepared  to  contend.    Virg.     Pars  per  agra 

dilapsi suam  quisque  spem  exsequentes.  Liv.    Supplex  turba  erant  sine  judm 

tuti.  Ovid.  This  construction  alwavs  occurs  when  the  collective  noun  is  the 
subject  of  a  plural  verb.   See  §  209,  "K.  11. 

■2.)  Sometimes,  though  rarely,  an  adjective  in  the  singular  takes  the  gendti 
of  the  individuals;  as.  Pars  arduus  altis  pulverulentus  e'/i«s  yurii.  Virg.  Pan 
una  diicum — fractus  morbo.  Ovid. 

(.3.)  Sometimes  other  nouns,  which  onlj'  in  a  figurative  sense  denote  human 
beings,  have  by  si/nesis  an  adjective  of  a  different  gender  from  their  own,  refer- 
ring to  the  words  which  they  include;  as,  Lutimn  Ciqmuque  ayro  mulctati 
Latium  and  Capua  were  deprived  of  their  land.  Liv.  Chp'ita  conjuratidnia  dr- 
gis  ciesi  ac  securi  percussi  sunt.  Id.  Auxllia  irati.  Id.  So  after  millia;  as, 
Dim  millia  Tyriorum,  crucibus  affix i.  Curt.    Cf.  §  323,  3,  (4.) 

Rem.  4.  Two  adjectives  in  the  singular  are  sometimes  joined  to  a  plural 
noun;  as,  Maria  TyiThenum  atque  Adriaticum,  The  Tuscan  and  Adriatic  seas. 
Liv.  Cum  legionibus  secunda  et  tertia.  Liv.  Circa  portas  CoUinam  Esquili- 
namque.  Id.  But  sometimes  the  noun  is  in  the  singular;  as.  Inter  EsqiiUlnam 
Ckilinamque  portam.  Id.  Legio  Martia  et  quarta.  In  comic  writers,  an  adjec- 
tive or  participle  in  the  singular  is  sometimes  used  with  a  plural  pronoma;  as, 
Nobis  prwsente.   Plant.     Absente  nobis.  Ter. 

Re3I.  5.  A  participle  which  should  regularly  agree  with  the  subject  of  a 
proposition,  when  placed  after  the  noun  of  the  predicate,  {a)  sometimes  takes 
the  gender  and  number  of  the  latter;  as,  Non  omnis  error  stultUia  est  dicenda, 
Not  every  error  is  to  be  called  folly.  Gic.  Gens  universa  Venetl  appellati.  Liv. 
(6.)  Sometimes  also  it  agrees  with  a  noun  following  the  subject  and  in  apposi- 
tion to  it;  as,  Cunntkum,  patres  vestri,  iotius  Grcecice  lumen,  exstinctum  esse 
vdluerunt.  Cic;  or  (c)  with  the  noun  of  a  subordinate  sentence;  as,  JllOrum 
urbem  ut  propugniiciilum  oppositum  esse  barbdris.  Nep. 

Rem.  6.  When  the  subject  of  an  infinitive  is  omitted  after  a  dative  of  the 
same  signification,  (§  239,  R.  1,)  an  adjective  in  the  predicate,  belonging  to 
that  subject^  is  sometimes  put  in  the  dative;  as,  Mihi  negligent!  esse  non  licvit, 
i.  e.  me  negiigentem  esse  mini  non  Ucuit.  Cic.  Da  mihi  justo  sancto5'?ie  videri. 
Hor.  A  noun  is  sometimes  expressed  with  the  adjective;  as,  Vobis  necesse  esi 
fortibus  esse  \iris.  Liv.  But  the  adjective  often  agrees  with  the  omitted  sub- 
.ject;  as,  Jicpedit  bonas  esse  vobis,  scil.  vos.  Ter.  Si  clvi  Romano  licet  ess( 
(xadltanum.  Cic. 

Rkm.  7.  (1.)  An  adjective  is  often  used  alone,  especially  in  th  ' 
plural,  the  noun,  with  which  it  agrees,  being  understood ;  as, 

Boni  sunt  rCiri,  scil.  hdmines,  Good  (men)  are  rare.  Cesar  suos  mmt.  ?r2  . 
mllites,  Cajsar  sent  his  (soldiers).  Dextra,  scil.  mdnus,  Tlie  right  (hand*  /;«- 
plentur  pingids  f  erinte,  scil.  carnis.  Virg.  H'tberna,  scil.  cas/ra.  Ahum  scil. 
widre.  Quartdnn,  scil.  febris.  ImmortCdes,  scU.  Dii.  Lucr.  Amantium,  scil.  lOtm- 
num.  Ter.  Jllum  indignanti  similem,  similemque  minanti  nspiceres,  scil.  himini. 
Virg.  Tibi  primas  dPfero,  scil.  partes.  Cic.  Reqnce  praetvritum,  scil.  teinjnis^ 
which  is  often  omitted,  as  in  ex  quo,  ex  eo,  and  ex  illo,  scil.  tevipOre.  Cogiiiyvi 
ex  uieoi'utn  omnium  Uteris,  scil.  dmadrwsn.  Cic.  So  patrial  adjectives;  ;is, 
Mitsi  ad  Parthum  Armeuiumque  legdti  sail,  regem.  In  TuscOluno,  scil 
tyra-dic'. 


§205.  SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES.  187 

Note  1.  The  noun  to  be  supplied  with  mascnline  adjectives  is  commonly 
\6mincs,  but  wlien  they  are  posessives,  it  is  oftener  drnUi,  mllites,  elves,  or  /wo 
pinqiii. 

Note  2.   The  nouu  to  be  supplied  is  often  contained  in  a  preceding  clause. 

(2.)  An  adjectiA'e  in  the  neuter  gender,  without  a  noun,  is  often 
used  substantively,  where,  in  English,  the  word  thing  or  things  is  to 
be  supplied ;  as, 

Bunion,  a  good  th ilia:;  mrtfom,  a  bad  thing,  or,  an  evil.  So  honestum,  veruM, 
tvrpe;  and  in  the  plural,  bdna,  mala,  turpia,  levia,  ccelentia,  etc.  LdbiT  oinm» 
in«cj7,  Labor  overcomes  all  things.  Virg. 

Note  1.  The  Latins  generally  prefen-ed  adding  7-es  to  an  adjective,  to  using 
its  neuter  as  a  substantive.  But  sometimes,  when  res  is  used,  an  i<djective  or 
pronoun  referring  to  it  is  put  in  the  neuter  instead  of  the  feminine;  as,  Eurum 
rerv.m  iitrumque.  Cic.  Udmunurum  rerum  fovtima  pleraque  retjil.  Sail.  llluA 
it  rdgo,  fuiiptui  tic  pnr-is  ulld  in  re,  quod  acl valeiudmem  dpus  sit.  Cic.  Omnium 
rcriim  vtors  est  extrenium.  Cic. 

Note  2.  Instead  oi  thing  or  tilings,  other  words  may  sometimes  be  supplied, 
as  the  sense  requires.     \\'ith  a  preposition,  neuter  adjectives  form  adverbial 

Ehrases ;  as,  A  pr'ano.  At  first.  Plant.  Per  mutun,  BlutuaOy.  Virg.  Jn  prlmis, 
1  the  first  place.     Ad  hoc,  or  Ad  hcec,  lloreover,  besides. 

(3.)  Adjectives  used  substantively  often  have  other  adjectives  a^'eeing  with 
them;  as,  .-J/i«  omnia, -All  other  (things.)  Plin.  InJguissmni  mei,  My  greatest 
enemies.  F&mllidris  meus.  Cic.  Inlquui  noster.  Id.  Justa  fUnehria.  Liv. 
J6ci.'>  omnia  plilna.  scil.  sunt.  Virg. 

Rem.  8.  (a.)  Imperatives,  infinitives,  adverbs,  clauses,  and  words  considered 
merely  as  such,  may  be  used  substantively,  and  take  a  neuter  adjective  in  the 
singular  number;  as,  Supremum  vale  dixit.  He  pronounced  a  last  farewell. 
Ovid.  Dulce  et  decorum  est  pro  pati-ia  mori.  Hor.  Velle  suum  cidque  est.  Pei-s. 
Cras  istud  f/uando  venitf  Mart.  J.  Redibo  actutum.  A.  Id  actiitum  diu  est. 
Plant.  Excepto  quod  non  simul  esses,  cetera  Icetus.  Hor.  (6.)  In  the  poets  and 
later  prose  wTiters  the  adjective,  as  in  Greek,  is  sometimes  in  the  neuter  plural ; 
as,  Ui  u^Lm'as  pilugo  jaciciur — nota  tibi.  Vu'g. 

Rem.  9.  {a.)  Adjectives  and  adjective  pronouns,  instead  of  agreeing  with  their 
nouns,  are  sometimes  put  in  the  neuter  gender,  with  a  partitive  signification, 
and  their  nouns  in  the  genitive;  as,  Multum  tempdris,  for  multum  iempus  ;  iriucb 
time.  Id  rei,  for  ea  res ;  that  thing.  So,  plus  elogueiUicB,  the  other  form  not 
being  admissible  with  plus.  (See  §  110,  (b.)  Neuter  adjectives  are  used  in 
like  manner  in  the  plural;  as,  Vana  rerum,  for  vdwe  res.  Hor.  Pleraque  huiiid- 
ndrum  rerum.  Sail.  Cf.  §  212,  R.  3,  N.  4.  But  in  some  such  exam])les,  the  ad- 
Jec'^lve  seems  to  be  used  substantively,  according  to  Rem.  7,(2);  as,  Acuta 
oelU.  Hor.     Telluris  operta.  Virg.     Summa  pectoris. 

Note.  The  adjectives  thus  used  partitively  in  the  singular,  for  the  most 
part,  signify  quaiititj'.    See  §  212,  Rem.  3,  Note  1. 

Rem.  10.  A  neuter  adjective  is  sometimes  used  adverbial!}'  in  the  nomina- 
tive or  acciisative,  both  singular  and  plural ;  as,  Dulce  r'ldentem  Ldlugi.n  dviib-}, 
dulce  lOquentem.  Hor.  Magnum  strldens.  Virg.  Anna  hon-endum  sOmu'rt.  Id. 
^li\\ta  deos  vcu'irdti  sunt.  Cic.   i/y(ZJe  «Mi  summum  c»"«s.  Id.    See  §  192,  II.  4,  (6.) 

Rem.  11.  (a.)  A  noun  is  sometimes  used  as  an  adjective;  as,  Nemo  7/i(/e4 
Rcmdnus,  No  Roman  soldier.  Liv.  Nemo  fere  dddlescens.  Cic.  Vir  namo  bonus. 
Id.  Cf.  §  207,  R.  31,  (c. )  Tibiirim  accblis  Jluviis  arbdlum.  Tac.  Incola  turba. 
OAid.  The  poets  use  in  this  manner  the  Greek  patronymics  in  as  and  is; 
as,  Pilius  hasla.  Ovid.  Laurus  Parndsis.  Id.  Ursa  Libystis.  Virg.  Cf.  also 
S  129,  8. 

(b.)  An  adverb  is  jlso  sometimes  used  as  an  adjective;  as,  Neque  inim 
ignuri  sumus  ante  milarum-  i.e.  antiqiwrum  or  prmteritm'um.  Virg.  Nana 
hdminv.m  7ndret    Plaut 


188   *  STNTAX. ADJECTIVES.  §  205 

Rem.  12.  (a.)  An  adjective  or  adjective  pronoun,  used  partiti-My,  stands 
alone,  and  commonly  takes  the  gender  of  the  genitive  phiral,  whiol  depends 
upon  it;  but  when  it  is  preceded  by  a  noun  of  a  diftereut  gender,  to  which  it 
refers,  it  usually  takes  that  gender,  but  sometimes  that  of  the  genitive;  as^ 
Elqjhanto  belluarum  nulla  est  prudentior,  No  beast  is  wiser  than  the  elephant. 
Cic.  Indus,  qui  est  omnium  Jlmnnum  maximus.  Cic.  Velocissimum  omnium 
animAlium  est  deljJnnus.  Plin.  See  §  212,  Rem.  2.—(h.)  So  also  with  de,  ear,  in, 
dpud,  inter,  etc.,  with  the  ablative  or  accusative  instead  of  the  partitive  geni- 
tiv3.  See  §212,  R.  2,  N.  4. 

';.)  tVhen  a  collective  noun  follows  in  the  genitive  singular,  (§  212,  R.  2.)  the 
adjective  takes  the  gender  of  the  individuals  which  compose  it;  as,  Vir  for- 
tissimiis  nostrcB  clvUatis,  The  bravest  man  of  our  state.  Cic.  Maximus  stirpii 
Liv. 

Rem.  13.  (^  )  When  a  possessive  pronoun  or  adjective  is  used  instead  of  the 
genitive  of  its  primitive  or  of  its  con-esponding  noun  (see  ^  211,  R.  3,  (b.)  md 
(c.)  and  R.  4),  an  adjective  agreeing  with  that  genitive_  is  sometimes  joined 
with  such  possessive;  as,  Solius  meum  jieccdtum  corriyi  not)  pdtest,  The  fault 
of  me  alone  cannot  be  corrected.  Cic.  Noster  duorum  cvenliis.  Liv.  Tuum 
ipsius  stiidium.  Cic.  Pugna  Romana  stabiUs  suo  pondere  incumbentium  in  hog- 
tern.  Liv. 

(b.)  Sometimes  a  noun  in  the  genitive  is  expressed,  in  apposition  to  the  sub- 
stantive pronoun  for  which  the  possessive  stands ;  as.  Pectus  tuum,  hominis 
simpllcis.  Cic. 

Rem.  14.     An   adjective,  properly  belonging  to  the '  genitive,  is  sometimes 


fiitis,  for  majorum.  M.     lis  nominibus  clvitdtum,  quibus  ex  cieitdtibus,  etc.,  for 
edrum  clvitdtum.  Ctes. 

Rem.  Id.  (a.)  An  adjective  agreeing  with  a  noun  is  sometimes  used,  instead 
of  an  adverb  qualifying  a  verb,  especiallj' in  poetry;  as,  Ecce  venit  Teldmon 
properus,  Lo,  Telamon  comes  in  haste.  Ovid.  LaJti  pdcem  df/iidbdmits,  for  late. 
Sail.  JSneas  se  matutinus  dffcbat,  for  mane.  Virg.  Nee  lupus  greglbus  noctur- 
nus  dbambulut,  i.  e.  by  night.  Id. 

(6.)  So  7iullus  is  used  for  non;  as,  Memlni  <a??ie«sj  millus  moneas.  Though 
you  do  not  suggest  it.  Ter.  Sextus  ab  armis  nullus  discedit.  Cic.  Prior,  pri- 
mus, princejjs,  propior,  p)roximus,  solus,  unus,  uMmus,  multus,  totns,  and  some 
others,  are  used  instead  of  their  neuters,  adverbially;  as.  Priori  Jitmo  awjurimn 
venisse  fertur.  Liv.  His^tdnia  postrema  omnium  pi'ovinciarum  perdomila  est 
Liv.  Sccevola  s51os  ndvon  menses  Asice  prafuit,  Only  nine  mouths.  Cic.  Unum 
hoc  dlco,  This  only  I  say.  Id.  This  js  sometimes  done,  for  want  of  an  ad- 
verb of  appropriate  meaning;  as,  Pronus  cecidit.  Ovid.  Frequentes  convcne- 
rant.   Sail. 

(c.)  In  such  expressions,  tu,  in  the  nominative,  sometimes  takes  an  adjec- 
tive in  the  vocative,  and  vice  versa j  as.  Sic  venias  hodierne.  Tibull.  Salve, 
primus  omnium  parens  pairicB  appellate.  Plin. 

Rem.  16.  (a.)  A  noun  is  often  quahfied  by  two  or  more  adjectives;  and 
scmetimes  the  complex  idea,  formed  by  a  noun  with  one  or  more  adjectives,  is 
itself  qualified  by  other  adjectives,  which  agree  in  gender,  etc.  with  the  noon. 

(6.)  When  several  adjectives,  each  independently  of  the  other,  qualify  a 
UDun,  if  they  precede  it,  they  are  almost  always  connected  by  one  or  more  con- 
junctions ;  as,  3fultd  et  vdrid  et  copiosd  ordtime.  Cic.  If  they  follow  it,  the 
conjunction  is  sometimes  expressed,  and  soinetimes  omitted;  as,  Vir  alius  ei 
exc'ellens.  Cic.    Actio,  vdria,  vehemcns,  plena  viritdiis.  Id. 

(c.)  But  when  one  of  the  adjectives  qualifies  the  noun,  and  another  the 
complex  idea  formed  by  the  first  with  the  noun,  the  conjunction  is  always 
omitted;  as,  Periculosiss'imum  ciyiZe  6eto7ft,  A  most  dangerous  civil  war.  Cic. 
JAalam  d^iesiicam  discipllnam.  Id.  So  with  t.'.ree  or  more  adjectives;  Extemoa 
multos  cliros  viros  ndmindrem.  Cic    Cf.  §  202,  III.,  R.  1. 


§206.  SYNTAX. PRONOUNS RELATIVES.  183 

Rem.*17.  The  first  part,  last  part,  middle  part,  etc.,  of  any  place 
or  time  are  generally  expressed  in  Latin  by  the  adjectives  primus, 
medius,  idtlmus,  extremus,  intXmus,  infvnus,  mius,  sumvius,  supremus 
reliquus,  and  cetera;  as, 

Media  nox,  The  middle  of  the  night.  Summa  arbor,  The  top  "•f  a  tree. 
Siipriinos  monies,  The  summits  of  the  mouutiiins.  But  these  adjecaves  fre- 
quently occur  without  this  signification;  as,  Ab  exlremo  complexu,  From  the 
last  embrace.  Cic.     Aifimo  Idco  ndtus,  Of  the  lowest  rank.  Id. 

R£M.  18.  The  participle  of  the  compound  tenses  of  vei-bs,  used  impersona  Ij 
in  the  passive  voice,  is  neuter;  as,  Ventum  est.  Cic.  Itum  est  in  viscera  terta 
Ovid.     Scribendum  est  mihi.   See  §  184,  2  and  3. 

RELATIVES. 

§  30G.     Rem.  19.    (a.)  Relatives  agi-ee  with  their  anttce 
dents  in  gender,  number,   and  person,  but  theii'  case  depends  on 
the  construction  of  the  clause  to  which  they  belong ;  as, 

Puer  qui  leyit.  The  boy  who  reads,  ^dificium  quod  exslruxit.  The  house 
which  he  built.  Llterm  quas  dcdi.  The  letter  which  I  gave.  Non  sum  qufilis 
eram,  I  am  not  such  as  I  was.  Hor.  So  Deus  cujus  muncre  vlvimus,.  cui  nulluit 
est  simdis,  qnem  colimus,  a  quo  J'acia  sunt  omnia,  est  leternus.  Addictas  Her- 
mippo,  et  ab  hoc  ductus  est.     AquUo,  quantus  frangit  llices.  Hor. 

Note  1.  This  mle  includes  all  adjectives  and  adjective  pronouns  which  rij- 
late  to  a  noun  in  a  preceding  clause.  Its  more  common  application,  howeve', 
is  to  the  construction  of  the  iLemoustrative  pronouns  and  the  relative  qzd. 

Note  2.  When  a  pronoun  refers  to  the  mere  words  of  a  sentence,  it  is  said  tt 
be  used  logically.     Qui  and  is  are  so  used,  and  sometimes  also  hie  and  ille. 

(b.)  The  relative  may  be  considered  as  placed  between  two  cases 
of  the  same  noun,  either  expressed  or  understood,  with  the  former  of 
which  it  agrees  in  gender,  number,  and  person,  and  with  the  latter  in 
gender,  number,  and  case. 

(1.)    Sometimes  both  nouns  are  expressed ;  as, 

Erant  mnnmo  duo  itinera,  quibus  itineribus  ddiiio  exire  j)Msent,  There  were 
only  two  routes,  by  which  routes  they  could  leave  home.  Cks.  Crudelissimc 
belio,  quale  bellum  mdla  ^imquam  barbarin  gessit.  Cic.  But  it  is  most  frequent 
with  the  word  dies;  as,  Fdre  in  a7-mis  certo  die,  qui  dies  J'ftturus  erat,  etc.  Cic, 
The  repetition  of  the  substantive  Is  necessary,  when,  for  any  reason,  it  becomes 
doubtful  to  which  of  two  or  more  preceding  substantives  the  relative  refers. 

(2.)    Usually  the  antecedent  noun  only  is  expressed ;  as, 

Animum  rege,  qui,  nisi  pdret,  imperat.  Govern  your  passions,  which  rule 
tudess  they  obey.  Hor.  Tantce  multitudinis,  quantam  cdjni  urbs  nostra,  con- 
cvrsus  est  ad  me  f actus.  Cic.  Quot  cdpitum  vlvunt,  tdtidem  sludiurum  millia. 
Hor. 

(3.)  Sometimes  the  latter  noun  only  is  expressed,  especially  when 
the  relative  clause,  as  is  frequently  the  case,  precedes  that  of  the  an- 
tecedent ;  as, 

Quiljus  dt  rebus  cul  m>~ scripsisti,  coram  videfniuus ;  scil.  de  rrbus.  In  regard  to 
tbe  things  of  wliich  yi/u  wrote  to  me,  we  will  consider  when  we  meet.  Cic. 
r%  qwQxw  i>tlnmm  I gressi  su/H  locum,  Troja  vdcdtur ;  sell,  l/jcus.  Liv.  l^uanta 
vi  expelunt,  'nntd  defi'vhint.  Quales^ae  visits  hram  vldisse  viros,  ex  orcUne  tales 
aspicio.  OvM.  *  • 


190  SYNTAX. PRONOUNS RELATIVES.  §  2«6 

(a.)  The  ilace  of  the  antecedent  is  sometimes  supplied  by  n  deinoiiyitrati\fl 
pronoun;  sa,  Ad  quas  res  (iptissmi  erimus,  in  us  jMtissimuyn  ek'ibdrdbimus.  Cic. 
But  the  demonstrative  is  often  omitted  when  its  case  is  tlie  same  as  that. of  the 
relative,  and  not  unfrequently,  also,  when  the  cases  are  different.  When  the 
relative  clause  precedes  that'of  the  antecedent,  is  is  expressed  only  for  the  sake 
of  emi)luisis.  Hence  we  find  such  sentences  as.  Maximum  orndrntntum  dmlci- 
tke  toUU,  qui  ex  ed  tolUt  verecundiam.  Cic.  Terra  quod  accepit,  numquam  sine 
iisuru  reddit.  Id. — The  demonstrative  adjectives  and  adverbs  are  in  like  manner 
often  omitted  before  their  corresponding  relatives;  talis  before  qudlis,  tnmus  bo- 
fore  quantus,  inde  before  unde,  ibi  before  iibi,  etc. 

(b.)  Sometimes  the  latter  noun  only  is  expressed,  oven  when  the  relati-vd 
rlause  does  not  precede;  as,  Quis  non  mdldrum  quas  amor-  cQras  hdbet,  hac  inter 
OuUmcilur  f  Hor. 

(4.)  Sometimes  neither  noun  is  expressed ;  tHs  happens  especially 
when  the  antecedent  is  designedly  left  indefinite,  or  when  it  is  a  sub- 
stantive pronoun ;  as, 

Qui  bene  lutidt,  bene  vixit,  scil.  hdma,  (He)  who  has  well  escaped  notice^  has 
lived  well.  Ovid.  Sunt  quos  curricuh  j^dixreni  Olt/mptcum  collegisse  jtivat, 
scil.  homines,  There  are  whom  it  delights,  i.  e.  Some  delight.  Hor.  No7i  hdbeo 
quod  te  nccilsem,  scil.  id  propter  quod.  Cic.  Non  solum  sapiens  mderis,  qui  hinc 
cdisis,  sed  etlnm  bedtus,  scil.  tu.  Cic. 

{6.)  The  relative  is  sometimes  either  entirely  omitted;  as,  Ui-bs  anViqua  fiiit; 
Tyrii  tenucre  coloni,  scil.  quam  or  earn,  There  was  an  ancient  city  (which) 
Tjn-ian  colonists  possessed,  Virg. ;  or,  if  once  expressed,  is  afterwards  omitted 
even  wlien,  if  supplied,  its  case" would  be  different;  as,  Bocihus  cura  pedilibus, 
quos  filius  ejus  adduxerat,  neque  in  pi-iore  pugna  adfmrant,  Romdnos  invddunt, 
for  et  qui  non  in  priore,  etc.  Sail. 

(6.)  (a.)  The  relative  sometimes  takes  the  case  of  the  antecedent,  instead  of 
its  own  proper  case;  as,  (Juum  scribas  et  dllquid  dgas  eorum,  quorum  constiesti, 
for  qtuB.  Cic.  Rajitijii  quibus  quisque  ])dterai  eldtis,  exibant,  for  iis,  qua  quisque 
efferre  pdterat,  eldtis.  Liv. 

(b.)  The  antecedent  likewise  sometimes  takes  the  case  of  the  relative,  the 
substantive  either  preceding  or  following  the  pronoun;  as,  Urbem  quam  statue 
vestra  est,  for  urbs.  Virg.  tunuchum  quem  dedisli  nobis,  quas  turbas  dedit!  for 
Eunuclius.  Ter.  Nancratem  quem  eonvenlre  rdlui,  in  ndvi_non  erat.  Plant. 
Atque  alii,  quorum  eomaidia  prisca  ^aroram  est,  for  utque  alii  viri,  quorum  est. 
Hor.  llli,  scripta  qnilnis  comx£dia  prisca  viris  est,  for  itli  vi~i,  quibus.  Id  Quos 
pueros  mlseram,  epistolam  mild  attulerunt.  Cic. 

These  conetructions  are  said  to  occur  by  attracthn. 

(7.)  (a.)  An  adjective,  which  properly  belongs  to  tlie  antecedent,  is  some- 
times placed  in  the  relative  clause,  and  agrees  with  the  relative;  as.  Inter 
jdcos,  qwos  maowAitos  juviunt,  (or  jocos  ineonditos,  quos,  etc.  Amidst  the  ruda 
jests  which  they  utter.  Liv.  Verbis,  quae  magna  volant.  Virg.  Galore,  quem 
naultum  hdbet.  Cic. 

(6.)  This  is  the  common  position  of  the  adjective,  when  it  is  a  numeral,  a 
comparative,  or  a  superkttice ;  as,  Nocte  quam  in  terris  ultimam  egit.  The  last 
nig.  t  which  he  spent  upon  earth.  jEscHldpius,  qui  pnmus  vulnus  obligdvisse 
dKii'Ur.  Cic.  Consiliis  pdre,  quse  nunc  pulcherrima  Nautes  dat  senicn;  Listen  to 
tJie  excaUent  advice,  which,  etc.  Virg.  Some  instances  occur  in  which  an 
ad)  3ctive  belonging  to  the  relative  clause,  is  placed  ui  that  of  the  antecedent; 
as',  Quum  vlnissent  ad  vada  Volaterrana,  qu£B  nomlnantur,  Which  are  caUed 
Volatenan.  Cic. 

(8.)  When  to  the  relative  or  demonstrative  is  joined  a  noun  ex- 
planatory of  its  antecedent,  but  of  a  different  gender  or  number,  the 
pjlative  or  demonstra!  Ive  usually  agrees  with  that  noun ;  as, 


§206  SYNTAX. PRONOUNS RELATIVES.  191 

Santdnes  mm  Imige  a  IVlosdfium  fjHibus  abswii,  q\\x  ci\itas  est  in  provincid 
The  Santones  are  not  tar  distant  from  the  borders  of  the  Tolosutes,  which 
State  is  h'  the  pnn'ince.  Cses.  Ante  coinilia,  quod  tempus  hnid  loiifje  dherat. 
SalL  Mfmne  J  dnum  Di('in(e  pdjmli  Lat'ini  cu7n  pojndo  Romano  fech-unt :  ea  erai 
confessio  caput  r?rum.  Romaui  esse ;  i.  e.  that  thing  or  that  act.  Liv.  Si  omnia 
facienda  sunt,  qiue  iimici  velirH,  non  dmJcitice  tales,  sed  conjurationes  pufandce 
sunt;  i.  e.  such  things  or  such  connections.  Cic.  So,  Ista  quidem  vis,  Surely 
this  is  force.  Ea  ipsa  causa  belli  fuit,  for  id  ipsum.  Hither  also  may  be  refer- 
red such  explanatory  sentences  as,  Qui  meus  amor  in  ie  est,  Such  "is  ray  love 
for  you.  Cic. 

(9.)  II'  the  relative  refers  to  one  of  two  nouns,  denoting  the  same 
i'bject,  but  of  ditFereut  genders,  it  agrees  with  either;  as, 

F lumen  est  Arar  quod  in  Rhdddnum  influit-.  Cjes.  Ad  fiHrnen  Oxum  perverttm 
ini,  qui  turbidus  semper  est.  Curt. 

(10.)  When,  in  a  relative  clause  containing  the  verb  »um  or  a  verb 
of  naming,  esteeming,  etc.,  a4|)redicate-noun  occurs  of  a  different 
gender  from  the  antecedent,  the  relative  commonly  agrees  with  the 
latter  ;  ])ut  wlien  the  preceding  noun  is  to  be  explained  and  distin- 
guished from  another,  the  relative  agrees  with  the  former ;  as, 

Naiune  vultus  quem  dixh-e  Chaos,  The  appearance  of  nature  which  they 
called  chaos.  Ovid.  Genus  huminum  quod  Hflotts  tdtdtur.  Nep.  Animal, 
quem  vucamns  hominem,  The  animal  whom  w^e  call  man.  Cic.  Locus  in  car- 
cere,  quod  TuUiauum  appelldtiir.  Sail.  Pecunidrum  conquisUio ;  eos  esse  belh 
clvUis  uervos  dictilaiis  Mucidnus.  Tac. 

(11.)  The  relative  sometimes  agrefes  with  a  noun,  either  equiva- 
lent in  sense  to  the  antecedent,  or  only  implied  in  the  precediu" 
clause ;  as, 

Abundanlia  cdrum  rerum,  qu£E  rnortdles  prima  putant,  An  abundance  of  those 
things,  which  mortals  esteem  most  important.  Sail.  Cf.  §  205,  li.  7,  (2.)  N.  1. 
But  sometimes  when  a  neuter  adjective  used  substantively  has  preceded,  res 
with  a  relative  foEows;  as,  Permulta  sunt,  qme  did  jxssimt^  qua  re  intelliydtur. 
Cic.     Fdtdle  monstnmi,  quaj,  etc.,  soil.  Ckdpdtra.  Hor.    Cf.  §  323,  3,  (4.) 

(a.)  A  relative  or  deuionstrative  pronoun,  referrhig  to  a  collective  noun,  or 
to  a  noun  which  only  ui  a  figurative  sense  denotes  a  human  being,  sometimes 
takes  the  gender  and  number  of  the  individuals  which  the  noun  implies ;  as 
Enultdtum,  quos.  Sail.     Genus,  qui  premuntur.  Cic.     Sendtus — ii.  Sail. 

(b.)    A  pronoun  in  the  plural  often  follows  a  noun   in  the  singular,  refen-ing 
not  only  to  the  noun  but  to  tJie  class  of  persons  or  things  to  which  it  belongs 
as,  Bcmdcritumdmittdmus;  nihil  est  enim  dpud  istos,  quod,  etc.  i.  e.  with  Demo-' 
critus  and  his  followers.  Cic.    BiOnysiiis  ni'(jdvit  sejure  iUo  nigro  qiwd  ccena 
caput  erai,  dCkctdtum.      Turn  is,  qui  LUa  coxerat,  etc.  Id. 

(12.)  The  antecedent  is  sometimes  implied  in  a  possessive  pronoun;  as, 
Omnes  lamldre  fortmas  meas,  qui  ndtum  tali  inrjinio  jmeditum  hdberem;  scil. 
mei,  All  were  extolling  my  fortune,  who,  etc.  Ter.  Id  mea  mlnlme  refert,  qui 
twn  ndtu  maximus.  Id.  Nostrum  consilium  lavdandum  est,  qui  ndluerim,  etc.  Cic. ; 
cr  in  a  possessive  adjective;  as,  Servlli  tUmidlu,  quos,  etc.  Cces. 

113.;  (a.)  Sometimes  the  antecedent,  is  a  proposition;  the  relative  then  is 
commonly  neuter;  as,  Postrimo,  quod  difficillimum,  inter  rnortdles,  gloria  in- 
vidiam vicisti.  Finally,  you  have  overcome  envv  with  glory,  7chich,  among  men 
is  most  diflicult.  Sail.  Equidem  exspectdbam  Jam  tuas  lltiras,  idque  cum  multis. 
Cic. 

{b.)  Im  such  instances,  id  is  gen3rally  placed  before  the  relative  pronoun, 
refering  to  the  idea  in  the  antecedent  clause;  as,  Slvc,  id  quod  anistat,  Pldtmit 
ttudiosus  nndiendi  fuit.   Cic.     Diem  consunii  vOh'bant,  id  quod  fecertmt.  Id. 

(c.)  Si>iiietimes  is,  referring  to  a  clause,  agrees  with  a  noun  following;  as, 
M6m  velle  aique  idtm  nolle,  ea  demum  Jirrtui  dmicltia  est.  Sail. 


192  SYNTAX. PRONOUNS RELATIVES.        §  206 

(14.)  Qiwd  relating  to  a  preceding  statement,  and  serving  the  purpose  of 
transition,  is  often  placed  at  the  begimiing  of  a  sentence  after  a  period,  v/here 
it  may  be  translated  by  '  nay,'  '  now,'  or  '  and.'  It  is  thus  use  I  especially  be- 
fore si.  e/s;',  and 'rtjsi  ,•  as,  Quodsi  illinc  inctnis  jyrofugisses,  lamey^  ista  tua  fuga 
nefdna  judicareiur,  i.  e.  and  even  if  you  had  fled  without  taking  any  thing 
with  you,  still,  etc.  Cic.  Verr.  1,  14.  Quodsi,  '  if  then,'  is  especially  used  in  in- 
troducing something  assumed  as  true,  from  which  further  inferences  may  be 
drawn.  Sometimes  also  it  is  equivalent  to  '  although.'  Qiiodntsi  signifies  '  if 
then — not ' ;  as,  Quodnisi  ec/o  meo  adventu  illius  conatus  alumantidum  represas- 
ivm,  lam  multus,  etc.  Q,ii6cletsi  is  '  nay,  even  if ;  as,  Quodetd  ingeniis  magtiit 
prxditl  qu'idam  dicendi  copiam  sine  rdiione  consoquentur,  ars  idinen  eil  dux  cer- 
iiar. —  Quod  is  found  also  before  qinnn,  ubi,  quin,  quuniam,  ne  and  utinam,  where 
the  conjunction  alone  would  seem  to  be  sufficient;  as.  Quod  idinam  ilium,  cujus 
impio  jdcindre  in  lias  miserias  prqjectus  sum,  eddem  hcec  slmidaniem  rideum.  Sail. 
It  is  so  used  even  before  a  relative  in  Cic.  Pliil.  10,  4,  _fin. —  Quod,  in  such  ex- 
amples, seems  to  be  an  accusative,  with  propter  or  ad  understood. 

(15.)  (a.)  A  relative  is  always  plural,  ^^en  referring  to  two  or  more  nouua 
in  tlie  singular.  If  the  nouns  are  of  differmt  genders,  the  gender  of  the  relative 
is  determined  by  Kem.  2,  page  185;  as,  Ninus  et  Semlrdmis,  qui  Bdhylona  condi- 
dSranl,  Ninus  and  Semiramis,  who  had  founded  Babjdon.  Veil.  Crebvo  fimdli 
el  llhlcine,  quse  sibi  sumpserat.  Cic.  Ex  summd  ketitiu  alque  lascwid,  quce  diu- 
turna  quies  pepicrirat.  Sail.     Naves  el  capl'iws  quaj  cd  Chium  ccipln  erant.  Liv. 

{b.)  If  the  antecedents  are  of  different  persons,  the  relative  follows  the  first 
person  rather  than  the  second  or  third,  and  the  second  rather  than  the  third; 
as,  Tu  et  pater,  qui  in  concivio  erdtis.   Ego  et  tu,  quierdmus.  Cf.  ^  209,  R.  12,  (7.) 

(16.)    The  relative  adjectives  qmt,  quantus,  gudlis,  are  construed  like  the 
relative  qui.     They  have  generally,  hi  the  antecedent  clause,  the  corresponding 
demonstrative  words,  Idl,  tantus,  Idlis ;  but  these  are  also  often  omitted.     Fre- 
quently also  the  order  of  the  clauses  is  reversed,  so  that  the  relative  clause  ' 
precedes  the  demonstrative. 

(17.)  Qm;,  at  the  begimiing  of  a  sentence,  is  oftsn  translated  like  a  demon- 
strative; as,  QuiB  quum  ita  slut.  Since  these  (things)  are  so.  Cic. 

(18.)  The  relative  qui  with  sum  and  either  a  nominative  or  the  ablative  of 
quality,  is  used  in  explanatory  clauses,  instead  of  pro,  '  in  accordance  with,' 
or  '  according  to ' ;  thus,  instead  of  Tu,  pro  tiid'jjrudenlld,  quid  optimum  faetu 
sit,  videbis.  Cic,  we  may  say,  qua  tua  est  priidenlla,  or,  qua  priidcntid  es.  So, 
Veils  tantummodo,  qu£e  tua  virtus,  expugndbis.  Hor.  Qua  prudeiitia  es,  nihil  ie 
fugiet.  Cic. 

(19.)  A  relative  clause  is  sometimes  used  for  the  purpose  of  denoting  by 
circumlocution  the  person  of  the  agent  in  a  definite  but  not  permanent  con- 
dit'  ;u;  as,  Ji,  qui  audiunt,  or  qtd  adsunt,  i.  e.  the  hearers,  the  persons  present. 
S3  also,  a  relative  clause  is  used  for  the  English  expression  '  above  men- 
tioned'; as.  Ex  llbris  quos  dixi  or  quos  ante  (siy;r«)  lauddvl:  and  the  English 
'so  called,'  or  'what  is  called,'  is  expressed  by  quern,  quam,  quod  voc ant,  or  by 
vui,  quoi,  quod  vdcdtur,  dlcitm;  etc.;  as.  Nee  Hermas  has,  qiuis  vacant,  imponi 
[Athenis)  licebat.  Cic.    Vestra,  quce  dlcitur,  vita,  mors  est.  Id. 

(20.)  Relative  and  demonstrative  adverbs  (see  §  191,  R.  1),  are  frequently 
Esed  instead  of  relative  and  demonstrative  pronouns  with  prepositions;  as.  Is, 
nnde  te  audisse  dicis,  i.  e.  a  quo.  Cic.  Diviiice  upud  illos  sunt,  aut  ubi  illl  vdlunt. 
i.  e.  dpiur.  (/uos.  Sail.  Huic  ab  ddolescenlld  bella  intestina,  ccedes,  rdplnce,  dis 
cordia  civllls,  grata  fucre,  ibique  jUventUtem  exercuii,  i.  e.  in  Us,  in  these  things. 
SaU. 

(21.)  With  quam  qui  and  the  stiperlative  after  tarn  the  verb  of  the  relative 
clause  is  sometimes  omitted;  as,  Tarn  mihi  grdtum  id  erit,  quam  quod  grdtissi- 
mu^i.  Cic.  Tarn,  enim  sum  amicus  reijmblicm,  quam  qui  maxime.  Id.  Ta7H  sum 
mitis,  quam  qui  lenissirnus.  Id.  So  also  with  t(<  jui  without  <awi;  as,  Te  sempei 
tic  edlam  ei  tuebor,  ut  quern  dilXge/ntissime. .  Id. 


§207.  SXVTAX. PRONOUNS DEMONSTRATIVES  19? 

D  E  iM  0  N  S  T  R  A  T  I  V  E  S. . 

§  907.  .  Rkm.  20.  The  oblique  cases  of  the  personal  prouonn  of  tha 
third  person  (him,  her,  etc.)  are  comniouly  expressed  in  prose- by  the  oblique 
cases  of  is,  ea,  id.  Hie  unci  ilk,  however,  being  more  emphatic,  take  the  [ilaco 
of  is,  en,  id,  in  lyric  poetry,  and  occasionally  in  prose  also,  when  particular 
emphasis  is  intended.  The  cases  of  ijise,  ipsa,  ipsum,  also,  are  employed  for 
this  ])urpose,  when  the  individuality  of  the  person  is  to  be  distinctly  expressed. 
In  reflexive  sentences,  the  oblique  cases  of  the  pronoun  of  the  thin!  person,  are 
regularly  supplie<l  by  sid,  sihi,  se  :  and  it  is  only  when  the  person  of  the  leai- 
iug  suljject  is  to  be  referred  to  with  particular  emphasis,  that  ipse  ih  used  i  i- 
btead  of  sui. 

Re.m.  21.  The  demonstrative  pronouns,  is  and  ilk,  are  sometimes  used,  espe- 
cially with  qu'ulem,  where  a  corresponding  word  in  English  is  unnecessaiy; 
as,  Sapiential  stiidium  velus  id  quidem  in  nvstris,  sed  tchnen,  etc.  Cic.  0  hominem 
temper  ilium  quidem  Jiiihi  uptuyn,  nunc  vcro  etiam  suavevi.  Id.  Quern  neque  fides, 
neque  jii.ydnatdum,  nnaue  ilium  mi^ricoj'dia,  represslt.  Whom  neither  fidelity, 
nc.>r  an  oath,  nor  i)ity,  has  restrained.  Ter.  Is  when  used  for  the  sake  of  em- 
phasis seems  sometimes  in  English  to  be  superfluous;  as,  Male  se  res  habtt, 
quuin,  quod  virtute  effivi  debet,  id  tentatur  pccuniu.   Cic. 

Hem. 22.  Sic,  ita,  id,  hoc,  illud,  are  often  used  redundantly  as  a  preliminary 
announcement  of  a  subsequent  proposition,  and  are  added  to  tlie  verb  on  which 
this  proposition  depends;  ■as,&\c  a  miijoribus  suis  ncccperant,  tanta  popidi  lio- 
tn/'ini  esse  beneficin,  ut,  etc.  Cic.  Te  illud  admoneo,  ut  quotldie  mediU're,  resi'si- 
eniUtm  esse  iriicundice.  Id.  Hoc  iibi  perswideas  vclim,  me  nihil  omlsisse,  I  wish 
you  to  be  persuaded  of  this — that  1  have  omitted  nothing.  These  pleonastic 
additions  have  generally  no  influence  on  the  construction  of  propositions,  but 
in  a  few  instances  they  are  followed  by  ut ;  as,  De  cujus  dlcendl  cOpid  sic  accejA- 
mus,  ut,  etc.  Cic.  Ita  enim  dp f  mil,  ut  perlurbntio  sit,  etc.  Id.  In  the  phrase  Aoc, 
illud,  or  id  dgere  ut,  the  pronouu  is  established  by  custom  and  is  necessary. 
See  §  273,  1,  («.) 

Rem.  23.  (a.)  Hie  'this  '  refers  to  what  is  near  to  the  speaker  either  in  place 
or  time,  ille  'that'  to  what  is  more  remote.  Hence  hie  sometimes  refers  to  the 
speaker  himself,  and  hie  homo  is  then  the  same  as  Hf/u.  On  this  .account  Idc  is 
sonietimes  called  the  demonstrative  of  the  first  person.  When  reference  is 
made  to  two  tlimgs  previously  mentioned,  hie  commonly  refers  to  the  latter, 
ille  to  the  former,  and  the  pronouns  are  arranged  in  the  same  order,  as  the  ob- 
jects to  which  they  relate;  as,  Iijnavia  corpus  liehvlut,  hdjor  Jirmat ;  ilia  mdturam 
%eneelutem,  hie  lonr/am  ddOleseeniiam  reddit.  Sloth  enervates  the  body,  labor 
Btreugthens  it ;  the  former  produces  premature  old  age,  the  latter  protracted 
youth.  Gels. 

(h.)  But  the  order  is  often  reversed,  so  that  hie  refers  to  the  object  first  men- 
tioned, and  ille  to  the  one  mentioned  last;  as,  Hie  deus  ei  ciri/o  est ;  hie  spe  celtr, 
ilia  limore.  Ovid.  So  when  alter... niter, '  the  one. ..the  other,'  refer  to  two  things 
mentioned  before,  the  previous  order  is  sometimes  observed  and  sometimes  re- 
versed; but  wherever  there  is  ambiguity  the  order  is  reversBd,  so  that  the  first 
al'ir  refers  to  the  liist  object.  Sometimes  hie. ..hie  are  used  instead  of  hie  .  ille. 
Sc  ille.. .ille  sometimes  denote  'the  one. ..the  other.' 

(c.)  Hie  and  ille  have  the  same  relation  to  time  present  and  past  as  nunc  and 
iunc,  see  \  277;  and  hence  whatever,  in  speaking  of  present  time,  is  expressed 
by  hie  and  its  derivative  adverbs.  Arc,  hine,  hue,  and  adhue,  is  expressed  by  ille 
and  its  derivatives,  when  it  is  spoken  of  as  belonging  to  past  time. 

Rem.  24.  Ille,  when  not  in  opposition  to  Idc,  is  often  used  to  denote  tnat 
which  is  of  general  notoriety;  as,  ^[n<Jno  illi  Alexandra  slmillimus,  Vers- like 
Alexander  (he  Great.  V'ell.  Midea  ilia,  The  celebrated  Medea.  Cic.  Hence 
ille  is  sometimes  added  to  other  pronouns,  to  refer  to  something  discussed  be- 
fore; as,  Anbont  r'isijre,  quis  ille  tot  per  annos  dves  nostras  sprevisset.  Tac.  J 116 
is  sometimes  translated  wi« ;  as,  Unum  illud  atco,  This  only  I  say.  Cic.  J  He 
17 


194  SYNTAX. PRONOUNS DEMONSTRATIVES.  §207 

Bometimes  marks  a  change  of  persons,  and  may  then  be  translated  'the  other 
as,  Vercingetorix  ohviani  Casari  prdficisciiur.     Ille  (soil.  Coesar)  qppidum  NoviO' 
dunum  oppufjnare  instituerat.  Ctes. 

Rem.  25.  Isie  properly  refers  to  the  person  addressed,  and  fer  this  reason  is 
called  the  deiiTonstnitive  of  the  second  person. — Ille  refers  to  the  person  sjioken 
of,  and  is  hence  called  the  demonstrative  of  the  third  person.  Thus  iste  liher  is 
thy  book,  but  ille  liber  is  the  book  of  which  we  are  speaking.  Hence,  in  let- 
ters, hie  and  its  derivatives  are  i^sed  of  the  writer;  iste  and  its  derivatives  >f  tha 
person  addressed;  ille,  etc.,  of  some  other  person  or  ■thing.  See  J  191,  R.  l,(e./ 
Jsie  from  its  frequent  forensic  use,  and  its  appl-'jatior'  to  the  opponent  oftei; 
denotes  contempt. 

Rem.  26.  (a.)  Is  does  not,  like  hie,  ille,  and  isie,  denote  the  place  or  ordsi  ol 
the  object  to  which  it  relates,  but  either  refers  without  particular  emphasis  If' 
something  already  mentioned  or  to  something  which  is  to  be  defined  by  the 
relative  qui.  Hie,  is,  or  ille,  may  be  used  in  this  way  before  the  i-elative,  but 
only  hie  or  is  after  it;  as.  Qui  ddeet,  is  discit,  or  hie  discit,  but  not  ille  discit,  un- 
less some  individual  is  referred  to. 

(b.)  Is  before  a  relative  or  ut  has  sometimes  the  sense  of  talis,  such,  denoting 
a  class ;  as,  Neque  enim  tu  is  es,  qui  quid  sis  nescias.  Nor  are  you  such  a  person, 
as  not  to  know  what  j'ou  are.  Cic. ;  sometimes  it  has  the  force  of 'idem;  as,  vos 
— a.   Cic.  Manil.  12.  ^ 

(c  )  If  the  noun  to  which  is  refers  is  to  receive  some  additional  predicate, 
we  must  uso  et  is,  atque  is,  isque,  et  is  quidem,  and  with  a  negative  nee  is ;  as, 
Vincfda  vero,  et  ea  sempitei-na,  etc.  Cic.  Una  in  domo,  et  ea  quidem  angusia, 
ztc  Id.  Adoleseentes  cdlquot,  uec  ii  tenui  lOeo  orli,  etc.  Liv.  Sed  is  is  used 
when  the  additional  predicate  is  opposed  to  the  preceding;  as,  Severitdiem  in 
senee/i'ile  pvobo,  sed  earn,  s'nut  alia,  mOdieam.  Cic.  The  neuter  et  id,  or  idqut, 
sei-ves  to  introduce  an  addition  to  the  preceding  proposition;  as,  Quamqiuwi  te, 
Mnree  f'di,  annum  jam  audientem  Crdllpjmm,  idque  Alhenis,  etc. 

(d.)  Is  is  not  expressed  when  it  woiild  be  in  the  same  oblique  case  as  the 
preceding  noun  to  which  it  refers;  as.  Pater  dmat  liberos  et  idmen  castlgat. 
Multos  illustrat  forluna,  dum  vexai. 

( e. )  When  in  English  '  that '  or  '  those '  is  used  instead  of  the  repetition  ol 
the  preceding  substantive,  is  is  never  used  in  Latin,  and  ille  only  in  later  au- 
thors. In  such  cases  the  noun  is  commonly  not  repeated  in  Latin,  and  no  pro- 
noun is  used  in  its  place ;  as,  Philippus  hostium  mcmus  scepe  v'ltdvit,  suorum  effu- 
ffere  non  vuhiit,  those  of  his  own  subjects.  Curt.  Sometimes  the  substantive  is 
repeated;  as,  Jfidhia  clvitdds  eum  jiidlciis  prineipis  certant.  Veil.  Sometimes 
a  possessive  adjective  is  used  insteiid  of  the  genitive  depending  on  the  omitted 
substantive;  as,  Terentii  fOlndas  studiose  lego,  Plnutlr.is  minus  diiector :  and 
sometimes  instead  of  the  genitive  or  a  possessive  adjective  the  name  of  the  per- 
son itself  is  put  in  the  case  which  the  verb  governs;  as,  Si  cw»»  Lycurgo  ei 
Dracone  et  Solone  nostras  leges  eonferre  volueritis.  Cic. — In  Cicero  hie  and  ille, 
when  the  preceding  substantive  is  understood,  retain  their  demonstrative  sig- 
nification, and  therefore  do  not  merely  supply  the  place  of  the  omittad  sub- 
stantive; as,  Nullam  enim  virtus  dliam  mercedem  deslcUrat,  prceter  banc,  i.  e.  the 
one  of  which  I  am  speaking.  Cic. 

Rkm.  27.  (ft.)  Idem,  as  denoting  a  subject  which  stands  in  equal  relations  to 
two  different  predicates,  often  supplies  the  place  of  item  or  etiam,  '  also,'  '  at  the 
same  tlmCj'  or  of  tianen,  'yet,'  if  the  things  are  apparently  inconsistent;  as, 
Miisici,  qui  erant  quondam '  ildem  poetce,  ^lusicians,  who  formerly  were  poet? 
also.  Cic.  Euphrates  et  Tigris  niagno  dqudrum  dlvortio  iter  percurrunt;  iidem 
(and  yet)  panldtim  in  arctius  coSunt. 

(h.)  £<  i;jsc,  on  the  other  hand,  denotes  that  the  same  predicate  belongs  to 
»wo  subjects.  It  is  rendered  by  '  too '  or  '  also ' ;  as,  Antmmus  Com.nMus  7iihU 
paternum  hdbnit,  msi  quod  contra  Germdnos  feliciter  et  ipse  pitgndiit,  for  Hem 
or  ij>!<e  quOque.  Eutr. — So,  also,  ?2ec  i/>se  is  used  m  the  sense  ot  '  neither  [;  as, 
Pi'imis  j-epuhis  Maharhal  mm  majori  robdre  virorum  miasm  uec  ipse  ervpiiSnum 
cdhcrtium  smUnuiL  Liv. 


§207.  SYNTAX. PRONOUNS INTENSIVE,    ETC.  195 

(c.)  Idem  is  sometimes  repeated  in  the  sense  of '  at  once,'  denoting  tl.e  union 
of  qualities  which  miglit  be  thought  incompatible ;  as,  Fuere  qiudam  qui  ildem 
ornate  ildem  versute  dicerent,  There  have  been  some  who  could  speak  at  one* 
elegantly  and  artfully.  Cic. 

(ci.)  'The  same  as'  is  variously  expressed  in  Latin,  by  idem  Avith  qui,  ac  oJ 
atque,  qiiam,  quasi,  ut  or  cum;  as,  Verves  idem  est  qui  fuit  semper,  Verres  is  tha 
same  as  he  has  always  been.  Cic.  Vita  est  eadem  ac  fuit.  Liv.  Disputatimem 
exp5nimus  iisdem  fere  verbis  ut  actum  est.  Cic.  Eandem  constituit  pdtestatem 
quam  si,  etc.  Cic.  Eodem  l6co  res  est,  quasi  ea  pecunia  legdta  non  esset.  Id. 
Hnnc  ego  eodem  mecum  patre  genitum.  etc.  So  also  poetically  with  the  dative; 
&s,  Eiidem  aliis  sqpitu'  quiete  est.   Lucr.    Cf.  §  222,  R.  7. 

IPSE,  Intensive  ok  Adjunctive. 

Rem»2S.  {a.)  Ipse,  when  used  with  a  substantive  pronoun  taken  reflexively, 
agrees  either  with  such  pron^/un  or  with  the  subject  of  the  proposition,  accord- 
ing as  either  is  emphatic ;_  as,  Again  per  me  ipse',  I  will  do  it  myself.  Cic.  Non 
egeo  mcdlclna  (i.  e.  m*  ulii  me  cansokntur) ;  me  ipse  coTisohr.  Cic.  Acciisarulo 
eum,  a  cujiis  crudclitute  vosmet  ipsi  armis  vindicasti!!.  Liv. —  Cn.  Pompeium  omni- 
bus, Lentuliim  mlhi  ipsi  antOpOuo.  Cic.  Fac  ut  te  ipsum  custodias.  Id.  Deforme 
est  de  se  ipsum  pnedicarc.  Id. — Rut  Cicero  often  construes  ipse  as  the  subject, 
even  where  the  emphasis  belongs  to  the  object;  as.  Quid  est  negotii  ccmtinere 
eos,  quilms  jtrcesis,  si  te  ipse  contineas  ? 

{b.)  When  ipse  is  joined  with  a  possessive  pronoun  used  reflexively,  it  usually 
takes  the  case  of  tlie  subject;  as,  Meajn  ipfie  legem  lu'gltgo ;  not  meam  ipsius, 
according  to  §  211,  E.  3,  (a).  So,  Si  ex  scrijjtis  cog7iosci  ipsi  suis  pdtuissent.  Cic. 
Earn  fraudem  vestrd  ipsi  rirtide  intastis.  Liv.  But  the  genitive  is  necessary  when 
the  possessive  does  not  refer  to  the  subject;  as,  Tua  ipsius  causa  hoc  feci.  And 
it  is  sometimes  found  where  the  case  of  the  subject  should  be  used;  as,  Conjec- 
tilram  de  tuo  [Tpsivis  studio  ccpiiris,  instead  of  ipse.^c.)  Ipse  is  sometimes  used 
as  reflexive  without  sui ;  as,  Omnes  boni,  quantum  in  ipsis  fuit,  Gesdrem  occlde- 
runt.  Cic. 

{d.)  Ipse,  with  nouns  denoting  time  or  number,  expresses  exactness,  and 
may  be  rendered, 'just,'  'precisely';  or  'very,'  'only';  as,  DyrrhCtchio  sum 
profectus  ipso  illo  die,  quo  lex  est  data  de  nobis,  on  the  very  dav.  Cic.  Triginta 
dies  erant  ipsi,  qmitn  has  duham  I'deras,  per  quos  nullns  a  vobis  acceperam,  just 
thirty  days.  Id.  £t  quisquam  dubUdlnt — quam  facile  imjjcrio  atque  exercitu 
socius  et  vectlgdlia  conservdturus  sit,  qui  ipso  nomine  ac  rUmore  defenderit,  by  his 
veiy  name,  or,  by  his  name  only.  Id. 

General  Relatives. 

Rem.  29.  Quicu  vi  q  u  e,  quisquis,  and  the  other  general  relatives  (see  §  139, 5, 
R.,  are,  in  classical  prose,  always  connected  with  a  verb,  and  form  the  protasis. 
QMtcM?/i/7«e  is  commonly  used  as  an  adjective,  and  quisquis  as  a  substantive; 
but  the  neuter  quodcumque  is  used  as  a  substantive  with  a  following  genitive; 
RS,  Quorlcumque  militum;  and,  on  the  other  hand,  quisquis  is  raiely  an  adjec- 
tive ;  as,  Quisquis  erit  vitoe  cdlor.  Hor. ;  and  even  the  neuter  quidqiiid  is  used  in 
the  same  manner;  as,  Quisquis  honos  tum&li,  guidquid  sdldmenhiimandi  est.  Viro-. 
Qulcunujue  seems  sometimes  even  in  Cicero  equivalent  to  cn?iiiis  or  quln's;  as 
Qua  sdndri  pdterunt,  quacumque  rdtione  sdndbo.  What  can  be  cured,  I  will  cure 
by  every  possible  means.  Cic.  Yet  possum  is  rather  to  be  supplied; — ^in 
whatever  way  I  can.'  But  in  later  writers  quUwngue  is  frequently  used  in  the 
absolute^  sense  for  qulvis_  or  quillbet ;  :is,  Ciceronem  cuicunujue  eOrum  firtiter 
opposu'lrim.  Qiiint.  Qudliscumque  and  qumUuscumque  are  likewise  used  in  an 
absolute  sense  by  ellipsis;  as,  Tu  non  comi'ijnsccs  qunnt'icvmque  ad  Viberldtem 
pervinire  ?  At  any  price,  be  it  ever  so  high.  Sen.  So  quisquis  is  occasionally 
iissd,  not  as  a  relative,  but  as  an  indefinite  pronoun. — Siquis  often  seems  to 
■itaod  as  a  relative,  like  the  Greek  liti;  for  Sct/c,  'whoever';  but  it  alwavs 
'.•oiitains  the  idea  of '  perhaps ' ;  as,  Niula  fere  Alpium  cdcHminii.  sunt,  et  vi  quid 
«W  pdbuh,  cbrumit  nives    Li~. 


196  SYNTAX. INDEFINITE    PRONOUNS.  §  207. 

Indefinite  Pronouns. 

Rem.  30.  (a.)  Aliquis  and  guispiam  are partlcu]ar  and  affirmative,  coires- 

ponding  to  the  English  some  oree;  as,  Ecndltas  est  pectaiia,  giue  moiie  allcujus 
ad  queinpiam  pervhiit  jure.  An  inheritance  is  property  which,  at  tlie  death  of 
Bome  one,  falls  to  some  (other)  one  by  law.  Cic.  Multi  sine  doctrina  aliquid 
omnium  f/enerum  ei  artium  cons^.quuntur.  Id. 

(6.)  Aliquis  is  more  emphatic  than  tlie  indefinite  pronoun  quis.  (See  §  137,  (3.) 
Hence  dllquis  stands  by  itself,  but  quis  is  commonly  connected  with  certaia 
conjunctions  or  relative  words,  but  these  are  sometimes  separated  from  it  by 
one  or  more  words.  Sometimes,  however,  quis  is  used  without  such  conjunc- 
tions or  relatives;  as,  Moi-btis  aui  egestas  ant  quid  ejusmddi.  Cic.  Letrahirt 
quid  de  dllqiio.  Id.  Injuriam  cui  facere.  Id.  So,  Dixerit  quis,  Some  one  might 
say.  But  even  after  those  conjunctions  wliich  usually  require  quis,  dh'quis  is 
used  when  emploj^ed  antithetically  and  of  course  emphatically;  as,  Timibat 
Pompeius  ovinia,  ne  aliquid  vos  timeretis.  Cic.  In  English  the  emphasis  of  dliqau 
is  sometimes  expressed  by  '  reaUy  ' ;  as,  Sensus  mdntndi,  si  aliquis  esse  potest,  is 
ad  exiauum  tempus  dunii.  Cic— Quispifnn,  also,  is  sometimes  used  like  quis 
after  si,  etc.,  and  sometimes  stands  alone;  as,  Qum-ei  fortasse  quispiain. _ 

Re:m.  31.  ( a. )  Quisqua  ?n,  'any  one,'  and  ullus,  'any,'  are  universal.  Like  uin- 
quam  and  usquam  they  are  used  m  propositions  whic-h'  involve  a  universal  nega- 
tive, or  which  express  an  interrogation  with  a  negative  force,  or  a  condition 
(usuallv  with  si  or  5?/ffsJ);  also,  after  comparatives,  after  the  adverb  rjx,  and 
the  preposition  sine;  as.  Neque  ex  castris  Cii^/^wce  quisquam  omnium  disccsserat 
Nor  luid  any  one  departed  from  the  camp  of  Catiline.  Sail.  Nee  ullo  ccisu  pd- 
test  amiinyire,  lit  ulla  inttrmissin  flat  offuii.  Cic.  An  quisquam  HO/es?  sine  per- 
turbcitimie  mentis  Irasci?  Id.  Tcirior  ttic  tyrannus  Syracusanis  fuit,  qu a m  q\,is- 
quam  superionmi.  Id.  Vix  quidquam  spei  est.  Sen.  But  after  the  depeiiilent 
negative  particles  ne,  neve,  and  the  negative  interrogative  particle  num,  quis  and 
not  quisquam  is  used. 

(6.)  hnt  quisquam  und  ullus  after  si  are  often  used  not  in  a  negative  sense, 
but  instead  of  aliquis  or  quis,  serving  only  to  increase  the  indefiniteness  which 
would  be  implied  in  the  latter  pronouns;' as,  Aut  enim  nemo,  quad  quidem  mcigu 
credo,  aut,  si  quisquam,  ilk  sapiens  fuit,  if  any  man.  Cic.  Hence,  ultimately, 
even  without  si,  where  tlie  indefiniteness  is  to  be  made  emphatic,  quisquam, 
ullus,  itmquam  smd  usquam  were  used;  as,  Quamdiu  quisquam  ei'it,  qui  te  de- 
fem/eve  aiuleat,  vlves.  Cic.  Bellum  maxlme  omnium  memdvdblle,  qwB  umquam 
gesta  sunt,  seripturus  sum.  Tac. 

(c.)  Ullus  is  properly  an  adjective,  but  quisquam  is  commonly  used  without 
a  noun,  except  it  is  a  word  denoting  a  person ;  as,  Cuiquam  c'lvi,  To  any  citizen. 
Oijusquam  ordtoris  eloquentiam.  Hence  quisquam  coiTesponds  to  the  substan- 
tive nemo  and  ullus  to  the  adjective  nullus.  Nemo  is  often  used  with  other 
substantives  denoting  male  persons  so  as  to  become  equivalent  tothe  adjective 
mdlus ;  as,  nanu  pictor,  nhno  ddOlescens,  and  even  homo  nemo.-  Cic.  Quisquam 
is  sometimes  used  in  a  similar  manner:  as,  quisquam  homo,  quisquam  civis.  On 
the  other  hand  nullus  and  ullus  are  used  as  substantives  instead  of  nenia  and 
quisfiuam,  especiallv  the  genitive  nullius  and  the  ablative  nuUo. 

Rem.  32.  (a.)  Alius,  like  ullus,  though  properly  an  adjective,  is  sometimes 
ns&  Hike  a  pronoun.  It  is  often  repeated,  or  joined  with  an  adverb  derived 
frorr  it,  ill  the  same  proposition,  which  may  be  ti-anslated  by  two  separate 
propositions,  commencing  respectively  with  '  one. ..another ' ;  as,  Aliud  aliis 
vldr'tur  optlmiiiir.  One  thing  seems  best  to  one,  another  to  another.  Cic.  Aliis 
aliunde  per'iadum  est.  Danger  threatens  one  from  one  source,  another  from 
another;  or.  Danger  threatens  diflerent  persons  from  difl'erent  sources.  Ter. 
Dionysinm  I'lliter  cum  iiliis  de  nobis  loeutum  aiidiebam.  Cic. — Alter  is  used  in  the 
same  manner  when  only  two  persons  are  spoken  of,  but  there  are  no  adverbs  de- 
rived from  it;  as,  Alter"?/'  alterum  causa7n  conferunt.  They  accuse  each  otaer, 

(6.)  Alius,  repeated  in  difcrent  propositions,  is  also  translated  '  one.. .another'; 
as,  Aliud  dqitur,  aliud  slu/iildlnr,  One  thing  is  done,  another  pretended.  Cic. 
Aliter  %((?.'//■,  aliter  st;76?V,  like  r/fi^e/- (7c  or  atque,  He  speaks  othiirwiie  than 
he  writes.     So  Aliud  loquitur,  aliud  scribit. 


§207.  SYNTAX. POSSESSIVE    PRONOUNS.  197 

(c.)  Uter^ue,^  each  of  two,'  is  always  used  by  Cicero  in  the  singular  i.uin- 
ber,  when  ouly  two  individuals  are  spoken  of.  Its  plural,  nirloue,  is  used  oniy 
when  each  of  two  parties  consists  of  several  individuals;  as,  Miciddnes—Tyrd, 
utrtque.  But  in  other  good  prose  writers  the  plural  utr'ique  is  occasionally  used 
in  speaking  of  only  two;  as,  Utrlque  Didnysii.  Nep.  Cf.  §209,  R.  11,  (4.) 

Hem.  33.  (rt.)  Quid  am  differs  from  dliquis  by  implying  that  a  person  or 
thing,  though  indefinitely  described,  is  definitely  known;  as,  Quidam  de  coUe- 
gis  nostris,  A  certain  one  of  our  colleagues.  Cic".  Scis  me  quodam  tempdre  Met- 
^pontum  venlsse  tecum.  Id. 

(6.)  Quidam  is  sometimes  used  for  some,  as  opposed  to  the  whole,  or  to  others; 
as,  Excessirunt  urbe  quidam,  idii  mortem  sibi  cuninlirrunt,  Some  departed  from 
the  city,  others  destroyed  themselves.  Liv.  Hence  it  is  used  to  soften  an  ex- 
pression, where  in  English  we  say  '  so  to  speak,"  etc. ;  as,  Milvo  est  quoddara 
Mlum  nuturCde  cum.corvo,  A  kind  of  natural  warfare.  Cic.  Fuit  enim  illud  quad- 
dam  caecum  tempus  sercUulis.  Id.  Etenim  omnes  artes  quae  ad  humdnitdtem  jiertU 
nent,  habent  quoddam  commune  vinculum  et  quasi  cognatiOne  qufidam  inter  se  con- 
tmtntur.  Id. —  Tamquam  is  used  for  the  same  purpose,  and  also  ut  ita  dicam. 

Rem.  34.  Qulvis  imAgulUhet,'-  anj  ohq,''  and  unusquisgne,''Qa.c\i,''  are  uni- 
versal and  absolute;  as.  Omnia  sunt  ejvsmddi  quivis  ut  persplcere  possit.  All  are 
of  such  a  natuie  tliat  any  one  can  perceive.  Cic.  Uic  dpud  majores  nostros  adhih- 
ebcltur  perltus,  nunc  quilibet.  Id.  Ndtura  unumquemque  trdhit  ad  disctiidum. 
A  neptive  joined  with  them  denies  only  the  universahty  which  they  imply; 
as,  iVore  cuivis  humi/u  contingit  ddlre  Cdrinthum,  i.  e.  not  to  every  man'  without 
distinction.  Hor.    Ciiicjuam  would  have  made  the  negation  universal. 

Rem.  35.  (a.)  Quisque  signifies  each,  every  mie,  distributivelv  or  relatively, 
and  generally  stands  without  a  noun ;  as,  Quod  cuique  obtigit,  id'quhqne  teneat. 
Let  each  one  keep  what  has  fallen  to  each.  Cic.  Hence  it  is  used  particularly 
after  relative  and  interrogative  pronouns  and  adverbs;  as,  Sclpio  polllcetur  sibi 
magna  curm  fdre,  ut  omnia  civitdtlbus,  qua;  cxijusque  fuissent,  restituerentur. 
Cic.  Ut  prcedlci  posset,  quid  cuique  eventmmm,  et  quo  quisque  fato  ndtus  esset. 
Id.  Cur  An^  quidque  qiueris:  recte  oninlno.  Id.  Quo  quisque  est  soUertior, 
hoc  ddcet  Idboriosius.  Id.  Ut  quisque  opiime  elicit,  ita  maxlme  dlcendi  difflcultdtem 
timet.  Id.  And  hence  the  expression  quOtusquisque  in  the  sense  of  '  how  few 
amon^  all.'  It  is  also  used  distributively  after  numerals;  as,  Decimus  quisque 
sorte  lectus,  Evei-y  tenth  man.  Quinto  quuque  atmo.  In  every  fifth  year.  So 
also  after s«!(s;  as,  Sui  cuique  libUri  cdnssimi:  suum  cuique  pldcet.  (Respect- 
ing the  order  of  the  words,  cf.  §  279,  14:  and  respecting  quisque  in  the  nomiiuo- 
tive  in  apposition  to  a  noun  or  pronoun  in  the  ablative  absolute  or  in  the  ac- 
cusative with  the  infinitive,  see  §  204,  R.  10.) 

(6.)  Quisque  with  a  superlative,  either  in  the  singular  or  the  plural,  denotes 
universality,  and  is  generally  equivalent  to  omnes  with  the  positive;  as,  doctis- 
Amus  quisque,  Every  learned  man,  i.  e.  all  the  learned;  but  often,  also,  in  con- 
nection with  the  verb,  it  retams  the  idea  of  a  reciprocal  comparison,  and  is  to 
be  rendered  by  the  superlative;  as,  In  omni  arte  optunum  quidque  rdrissimum, 
The  best  is  the  rarest.  Cic.  Altissima  quffique  flumina  minhno  sdno  Idbuntur, 
The  deepest  rivers  flow  with  the  least  sound.  Curt.  With  primus,  it  denotes 
4he  Jirst  possible ;  as.  Prima  quoque  tenipOi-e,  As  soon  as  possible.  Cic. 

POSSESSIVES. 

Rem,  36.  (a.)  The  possessive  pronouns  meus,  tutts,  suus,  noster,  and  vester, 
are  joined  to  nouns,  to  indicate  an  action  or  possession  of  the  persons  deioted 
by  their  primitives;  as.  Tutus  amor  meus  est  iibi,  My  love  is  secure  to  you. 
Ovid.  Tuam  ricem  ddlere  soleo.  Cic. — These  pronouns,  as  in  English,  when 
belonging  to  two  substantives,  are  generally  expressed  but  once,  even  when 
the  substantives  are  of  different  genders;  as",  amor  tuus  ac  judicium  de  me. 

(b.)  But  tliese  pronouns  are  sometimes  used  when  tlie  persons  to  which  they 
refer  are  the  o^ec<s  of  an  action,  feeling,  etc.;  as.  Nam  neque  tua  Jiegligentia, 
uique  6dio  id  fecit  tuo.  For  he  did  it  neither  tlirousrh  neglect  nor  hatred  of  mu. 
Tor.     See  ^  211,  R.  3.  -^  ^ 

17* 


lyS  SYNTAX. PRONOUNS REFLEXIVES.  §  208 

(«  )  The  possessive  prououns,  especially  when  used  as  reflexives,  are  often 
omitted ;  as,  Quo  revertar  f  in  patriam  ?  scO.  vieam,  Whither  shall  I  rerum  ? 
to  (my)  comitrj'?  Ovid.  Dextrd  munera  porrexit,  soil.  sua.  Id.  But  tliey  are 
expressed  when  emphasis  or  contrast  is  intended,  where  in  English  '  own ' 
might  be  added  to  the  pronoun ;  as,  £go  non  dlcam,  tdmen  id  pdt^rltis  cum  dnv 
mis  vestris  coyildre.  Cic. 

{d.)  When  besides  the  person  of  the  subject,  that  of  a  remote  object  also 
occurs  in  the  proposition,  tlie  possessive  pronoun  will  refer  to  the  latter;  as, 
Patris  dnimum  rtuhi  reconciliasti,  i.  e.  patrls  mei  dnimum  rather  than  tui. 

(e.)  As  reflexives,  mens,  etc.,  are  translated  my,  thy,  his,  her,  its,  our,  your 
their ;  or  my  own,  thy  own,  his  own,  etc. 

THE    REFLEXIVES    S  UI   AND     SUUS. 

§  SOS.     Reji.  37.  (a.)   Sui  and  suus  properly  refer  to  the 

subject  of  the  proposition  in  which  they  stand ;  as, 

Oppidani  f  acinus  in  se  ac  suos  fadum  consciscunt,  The  citizens  decide  on  a 
foul  crime  against  themselves  ftud  their  friends.  Liv. 

(6.)  The*  continue  to  be  used  in  successive  clauses,  if  the  subject 
remains  the  same ;  as, 

Ijjse  se  guisqiie  dillylt,  non  ut  dliquam  a  se  ip>se  mercedem  exigat  cdritdiis  sues, 
sed  quod  per  se  sibi  quisque  cdrus  est.  Cic. 

(1.)  In  dependent  clauses,  in  which  the  subject  does  not  remain 
the  same,  the  reflexives  are  commonly  used  in  references  to  the  lead- 
ing subject,  when  the  thoughts,  language,  purposes,  etc.,  of  that  sub- 
ject are  stated ;  as. 

A7-idvistus  prcedlcdvil,  non  sese  Gallis,  sed  Gallos  sibi  helium  iniHUsse,  Ariovistus 
declared  that  he  had  not  made  war  upon  the  Gauls,  but  the  Gauls  upon  him. 
Cses.  Homerum  Culdphonii  clvem  esse  dlcunt  suura,  The  Colophonians  say  that 
Homer  is  their  citizen.  Cic.  Tyranmis  peilvit  ut  se  ad  dmlcltiam  tertium  ascrlbe- 
rent.  Id.  But  sometimes,  to  avoid  ambiguity,  the  cases  of  is  or  ille  are  used  in 
such  clauses  in  references  to  the  leading  subject;  as,  HelvStii  sese  AllohrOges  vi 
coaciuros  exislhndbant,  ut  per  suos  fines  eos  Ire  pdtirentur.  Cses.  Here  suos 
refei's  to  the  subject  of  the  dependent  clause,  and  eos  to  Helvctii,  the  subject  of 
tlie  leading  clause.  And  sometimes,  even  in  tlie  same  dependent  clause,  two 
reflexive  pronouns  are  used,  referring  to  different  persons;  as,  Scytlus  petebant 
ut  7'egis  sui  fUiam  mdtrimOnio  sibi  junyerel.  Curt. 

(2.)  K,  however,  the  leading  subject,  whose  thoughts,  etc.,  are  ex- 
pressed, is  indefinite,  the  reflexives  relate  to  the  subject  of  a  depend- 
ent clause ;  as, 

Medeam  predicant  (scil.  homines)  in  fugd  frdtris  sui  membra  in  iis  Idcis,  qiia 
Be  parens  persequeretur,  disslquivisse.  Cic.  Ipsum  regem  trudunt  dperdtum  his 
tacns  se  ahdidisse.  Liv. 

C3.)  (o.)  When  the  leading  verb  is  in  the  passive  voice,  the  re 
flexive  often  refers  not  to  its  subject,  but  to  that  which  would  be  its 
subject  in  the  active  voice ;  as, 

A  Gcesdre  invUor  ut  sim  sibi  Icgatus,  i.  e.  CcBsar  me  invliat,  I  am  invited  bj 
Caesar  to  become  his  lieutenant.  Cic. 

(6.)  So  when  the  subject  is  a  thing  without  life,  the  reflexive  may 
relate  to  some  other  word  in  the  sentence,  which  denotes  a  thing  hav- 
ing life ;  as, 

Canum  tam  flda  custodia  quid  significai  dliud,  nisi  se  ad  hdrMnum  commdc^ 
taUs  esse  geneidtos  f  Cic. 


§208.  SYNTAX. PRONOUNS REFLEXIVES.  199 

(4.)    Instead  of  sui  and  suu.t,  whether  referring  to  a  lea  Hug  or  a 

Biibordiiiate  subject,  ij>se  is  sometimes  used,  to  a^oid  ambiguity  from 
the  similarity  of  both  numoei's  of  sui,  and  also  to  mark  more  emphat- 
ically than  suns,  the  person  to  whom  it  relates;  as, 

Jufjiirtha  Icgdtos  misit,  qui  ipsi  Uberisque  ritam  peterent,  Jugurtlui  sen*  ambns- 
sadors  to  ask  life  for  himself  and  his  children.  Sail.  Ea  mukstissime  ft-rrt 
homines  debeni,  qu<e  ipsonim  culpa,  cvniracta  sunt. 

(5.)  In  the  plural  number,  with  inter,  se  only  is  used,  if  the  person 
or  thinu  referred  to  is  in  the  nominative  or  accusative ;  se  or  ipse,  if 
in  any  other  case ;  as, 

Fratres  /wfer  se  quum  forma,  turn  moribus  similes,  Brothers  resembling  each 
other  both  in  person  and  character.  Cic.  FC-ras  inter  sese  concliiat  ndtHra.  Cic. 
Incidunt  aliqua  a  dbcti-  riicim  inter  ipsos  mutuo  reprehensa.  Quint. 

(6.)  (a.)  When  reference  is  made  not  to  the  subject  of  the  propo- 
sition, but  to  some  other  person  or  thing,  hie,  is,  or  ille,  is  generally 
used,  except  in  the  cases  above  specified ;  as, 

Thcmistdcles  servvm  ad  Xerx'-m  misit,  ut  ei  nuntidret,  suis  verbis,  adversarios 
ejus  in  fuf/d  esse,  Themistoclcs  sent  his  servant  to  Xerxes,  to  inform  him 
(Xerxes'),  in  his  (Themistoclcs')  name,  that  his  (Xerxes')  enemies  were  upon 
the  point  of  flight.  Nep. 

(h.)  But  when  no  ambiguity  would  arise,  and  especially  when  the 
verb  is  of  the  first  or  second  person,  sui  and  suus  sometimes  take  the 
place  of  the  demonstrative  pronouns ;  as, 

Suam  rein  sibi  salvam  sistam,  I  will  restore  his  property  entire  to  him.  t  laut 

(c.)  On  the  contrary,  the  demonstratives  are  sometimes  used  for 
the  reflexives ;  as, 

Eelretii  persuddent  Raiirdcis,  ut  una  cum  lis  prdflciscantur.  The  Helvetii  per- 
suade the  Raiiraci  to  go  with  them.  Ctes. — In  some  instances,  a  reflexive  and 
a  demonstrative  are  used  in  reference  to  the  same  person;  as,  Idi  se  f/essit 
(scil.  Li(/drius)  nt  ei  p9cem  esse  expediret.  Cic.  C.  Claudii  orantis  per  sni  Jrd- 
tris  pdrentisque  ejus  rwdnes.  Liv. — Sometimes  the  reflexives  refer  to  difterent 
subjects  in  the  same  sentence;  as,  Aridrisius  respondit,  ni}minem  sGcum  sine 
sua  pernicie  contendisse  (Cses.);  where  se  refers  to  Ariovistus,  and  sua  to 
neminem. 

(7.)   (a.)  Suu3  often  refers  to  a  word  in  the  predicate  of  a  sentence, 

and  is  then  usually  placed  after  it ;  as, 

Hunc  elves  sui  ex  urbe  cjvcerunt.  Him  his  fellow -citizens  banished  from  the 
oity.  Cic.   Titunus  quum ijrdcul  Ambiorigem,  suos  cdlwrtantem,  conspexisset.  Caes. 

(/>.)    Suus,  and  not  hvjus,  is  used  when  a  noun  is  omitted  ;  as, 

Octdvius  quem  sui  {scil.  TimTci)  Goesdrem  salutdbant,  Octavius,  whom  his  fc.'- 
ti-wars  sainted  as  Csesar.  • 

(c.)  Suus  is  also  commonly  used  when  two  nouns  are  coupk/J  by 
rutn  but  not  when  they  are  connected  by  a  conjunction  ;  as, 

PiolimcEics  dmlcos  Demetrii  cum  suis  rfbus  dlmlsit,  Ptolemy  dismissed  the 
friends  of  Demetrius  with  their  ett'ects.  Just. 

(8.)    Suus  sometimes  denotes  Jit,  favorable  ;  as. 

Sunt  et  sua  dona  pdrenti,  There  are  likewise  for  my  father  suitable  presents. 
Virg.  Ut  IMrdtor  ille  pdpiili  ROmdni  c^jpenn'tur  iempdra  sua.  Liv.  Alphewta 
atebd/ur  pdpulo  sane  suo.  Cic.  Sometimes  it  signifies  ^>t(»iiar;  as,  Mdlles  »na 
turn  Sdbcei,  scil.  mittunt,  i.  e.  the  frankincense  for  which  their  countiy  was  fa* 
aous.  Virg.     Fesaosgue  sdpor  suus  ocdipat  artus.     Id. 


Y- 


f 


200  SYNTAX. SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE.  S  209 

NOMINATIVE. 

SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE    AND    VERB. 

§  SOO.  (a.)  The  noun  or  pronoun  which  is  the  subject  of 
a  finite  verb  is  put  in  the  nominative. 

Note  1.  (n.)  A  yerb  in  any  mood  except  the  infinitive  is  called  a  finite  rerb.  (b.)  In 
historical  writing  the  nominative  is  sometimesjoined  with  the  present  infinitive  instMul 
of  the  imperfect  indicative.  Of.  R.  5. 

(b.)    A  verb  agrees  with  its  subject-nomiaative,  in  numLei 

and  person ;  as, 

Ego  lego,  I  read.  Nos  Ugfws,  We  read. 

Tu  scrlbis,  Thou  writest.  Vos  scriuids,  You  write. 

Equus  currit.  The  horse  iims.  Eqtd  currunt,  Horses  run. 

Note  2.  The  imperative  singular  is  sometimes  used  in  addressing  several 
persons;  as,  IIuc  ncitas  adjice  septem,  scil.  vos,  Thebaiche.  Ovid.  Met.  6,  182. 
So  Adde  drfectionem  Ilulkn,  scil.  vos,  mUites.  Li  v.  26,  41. 

Remark  1.  (a.)  The  nominatives  f-f/o,  tu,  nos,  vos,  are  seldom  ex- 
pressed, the  termination  of  the  verb  sufficiently  marking  the  person ; 
as, 

Ciipio,  I  desire;  vlds,  thou  livest;  hcibemus,  we  have.    See  ^  147,  3. 

{b.)  But  when  emphasis  or  opposition  is  intended,  the  nominatives  of  the 
first  and  second  persons  are  expressed;  as,  Ego  regcs  ejeci,  vos  tyrannos  intro- 
dfidtis,  I  banished  kings,  you  introduce  tyrants.  Auct.  ad  Her.  Nos,  nos,  dico 
aperie,  consuks  di'sumiis,  Cic.  Tu  es  patrdnus,  tu  paler.  Ter.  In  indignant 
questions  and  addresses  tu  is  expressed ;  as,_  Tu  in  forum  prodlre,  tu  lucem 
conspicere,  tu  in  horuin  compectum  venire  conaris  f  Avict.  ad  Her. 

Rkm.  2.  The  nominative  of  the  third  person  is  often  omitted  : — 
(1.)  When  it  has  been  expressed  in  a  preceding  proposition  : — 
(a.)  As  nominative;  as,  Mdsa  profluit  ex  montt  Vosego,  tt  in  Oceanum  injlait. 
Cajs. ;  or  {b)  in  an  oblique  case;  as,  Cursorem  m'lserunt,  nt  id  nuntidret,  soil. 
mrsor.  Ncj). :  or  (c)  in  a  possessive  adjective;  as,  Et  vereor  quo  se  Junonia 
vertant  HoqMia ;  haud  tanto  cessahit  cardine  rerum,  scil.  ilia,  i.e.  Juno.  Virg 
Mn.  I.  672. 

(2.)  When  it  is  a  general  word  for  person  or  thing : — 
Thus  homines  is  often  omitted  before  aiimt,  d'lCimt,  ferirnt,  etc. ;  as,  Ut  ennnt 
All  they  sav.  Cic.  Max'ime  admirantur  eum,  qui  2>ccunia  own  indvetur.  Id  — 
Sc  iene'est,  hene  hiibet  or  bene  agitur.  It  is  Avell;  as,  Si  rales,  bene  e.^t,  ego  valeo 
Cic.  Quum  melius  est,  gratulor  dis.  Afran.  Optume  habet.  Nothing  can  be 
beter.  Plant.  Bene  hkbet:  jactn  sunt  fundamenta  defensionis.  Cic.  Bene  agi- 
tui  pro  noxia.  Plaut. 

Note  3.  This  omission  of  the  nominative  is  common  m  the  clause  preced- 
ing a  relative;  as,  Qui  Bdmum  non  odit,  dniet  tua  carmina,  Mcevl,  scil.  h6mo.  Let 
hini  who  hates  not  Bavius,  love  your  verses,  Msevius.  Virg.  Vastdiur  agri  quod 
inter  urbem  ac  Fidenas  est,  scil.  i'd  spCdium.  Liv.  Sunt  quos  juvat...scil.  hdmlnes^ 
There  are  (those)  whom  it  delights.  Hor.  Est  qui  nee  veteris  iJocUla  Mussla 
spernii  scil.  k6mo.  Hor.  Hei'e  sunt  qtios  and  est  qui  are  equivalent  t<i  qvidam, 
Uiquis,  or  Cdiqui.  So,  Est  quod  gaudeas.  There  is  (reason)  wiy  you  slioald  re- 
•oice.  Cic.  Mque  erat  cur  fallere  vellent.  Ovid.  Est  ubi  id  valeat.  Cic.  Eat, 
quum  nm  est  sdtius,  etc.  Auct.  ad  Her.  In  the  latter  cases  the  adverbs  are 
•  'luival.nt  to  in  quo,  scil.  lico,  temp&re 


§200  SYNTAX. SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE.  201 

Rem.  3  (1.)  The  nominative  is  wnnting  before  verbs  denol.ng  the 
Btate  of  the  weather,  or  the  operations  of  nature  ;  as, 

Ful</ura(,  It  lightens.  Plin.  Ningil,  It  snows.  Virg.  Lucescebat,  It  wal 
growing  light.  Liv.    Jam  advesperascit.  Cic. 

(2.)  The  nominative  is  also  wanting  before  the  third  person  singu- 
lar of  the  passive  of  neuter  verbs,  and  of  active  verbs  used  imper- 
sonally; as, 

Favetur  tibi  a  me,  Thou  art  favored  by  me.  Ejus  ordtioni  vehementer  ah  omni- 
bus reclamatum  est.  Cic.  Proiude  ut  bene  vivitur,  diu  vlvitur.  Pluut.  Ad  txi- 
tum  ventmn  est.  Sen.  Actiim  est  de  imperio.  See  §  184,  2 :  and  of.  §  22S, 
R.  6,  (6.) 

Note  4.  A  nominative,  however,  is  expressed  before  the  passive  of  some 
neuter  verbs,  which,  in  the  active  voice,  are  followed  by  an  accusative;  as, 
Pugna  pugndta  est.  Gic.    See  §  232,  (1.) 

(3.)  It  is  wanting  also  before  the  neuter  of  the  future  passive  parti- 
ciple with  est ;  as, 

Si  vis  me  Jiere  dolendum  est  primum  ipsi  tibi,  If  you  wish  me  to  weep,  you 

Jourself  must  first  grieve.  Hor.     Orandum  est,  ut  sit  mens  sdna  in  cmpdre  sdno. 
uv.    Ad  villam  revertendum  est.  Cic. 

(4.)  The  nominative  is  also  wanting  before  the  impersonal  verba 
miserel,  poenitet,  pudet,  icedet,  and  plget;  as, 

Eos  ineplidrum  pcenlltt,  They  repent  of  their  follies.  Cic.  Miseret  te  alioimm,  • 
tui  1e  nee  miseret  nee  pudet.  Plaut.  Me  clvitdtis  morum  piget  iadetque.  Sail. — 
In  such  examples,  the  sense  will  sometimes  permit  us  to  supply  Jbrtiinn,  eondi- 
tio,  memdria,  etc.  So  in  the  expi'ession,  Vcnit  in  inentem,  It  came  into  mind 
as.  In  mentem  venit  de  speeUlo,  scil.  cogitdiio,  etc.  Plaut. — An  intinitive  or  a  sub- 
junctive clause  sometimes  forms  the  subject  of  these  verbs;  ae,  Te  id  7iullo 
m6do  jyuduit  f  ficore.  To  do  that  by  no  means  shamed  you.  Ter.  Nun  jicenitel 
me,  quantum  profecerim.  Cic. 

(5.)  The  subject  of  the  verb  is  sometimes  an  infinitive  or  a  neuter 
participle  (either  alone  or  with  other  words),  one  or  more  proposi- 
tions, or  an  adverb.  (Cf.  §  202,  R.  2  and  3  :  and  §  274,  R.  5,  (6.)  The 
verb  is  then  in  the  third  person  singular ;  as, 

Vacare  culpa  magnum  est  solOtixun,  To  be  free  from  fault  is  a  gi-eat  consola- 
tion. Neque  est  te  lallOre  quid<iaam,  To  deceive  j'ou  in  any  thing  is  not  (possi- 
ble.) Virg.  Mentiri  non  est  mtum.  Plaut.  Te  non  istud  audivisse  mirum  est, 
That  you  have  not  heard  that  is  wonderful.  Cic.  '  Summum  jus,  summa  ia« 
iuria,'  factum  est  jmii  tr'itum  sennvne  prOverhium.  Id.  Ni  degeneratum  in  aliis 
mie  quvque  dhdvi  offecisset.  Liv._  (Cf.  \  274,  R.  5,  [b.)  Sin  est  ut  vOIis  miinere 
illgm  apud  te.  Ter.  Nee  prof uit  Bydrcs  crescere  per  damnum,  grmiiiasqua 
resumere  vires.  Ovid.  Die  mihi,  eras  istud,  Pusiiime,  quando  reni't'/  Tell  me, 
Postunuis,  wlieii  does  that  to-morrow  coineV  Mart.  Parumne  eampis  atque 
Ntpf.uno  super  fusum  est  LCd'ini  sanguinis  ?  Hor. 

(a.)  This  construction  is  especially  common  with  impersonal  verbs;  as,  Ora- 
tSreiii  Irasci  non  decet,  That  an  orator  should  be  angr}',  is  not  becoming.  Cic. 
Hoc  (itri  el  dportet  et  opus  est.  Id.  Me  pedibus  di'leclat  claudere  verba,  Hor. 
Interest  omnium  recte  f acfre.  Cic.  Cdsu  accidil,  ut,  id  quod  Koraa;  andif'rat 
primus  nuntiaret.  Id.  Soraetjnes  a  neuter  prou  m  is  interposed  between  a 
proposition  and  its  verb ;  as,  Impune  fdecre  qua  libet,  id  est  reqem  efse.  Sail. 
Cf.  ^200,  (13,)  («.) 

(6.)  The  nominative  is  also  wanting  before  potest,  coepit  or  ccepf.um 
est,  incipil,  de.shiit,  debet,  sole/,  and  videlur,  when  followed  by  the  in- 
finitive of  an  impersonal  verb;  as, 


202  SYNTAX. SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE.  §  209 

Pigere  eum  facti  coepit,  It  began  to  repent  him  (i.  e.  he  jegan  to  repent)  oi 
his  conduct,  .fust.  Sdpientia  est  Una.  qua  prceceptrice,  in  tranguilUtate  vlvi  pd- 
test.  Cic.     Tcedere  solet  dvdros  impenaii.  Quint. 

Rem.  4.   The  verb  is  sometimes  omitted ;  as, 

D'l  mi'Uora  piis,  scil.  dent  or  velint,  May  the  gods  gi-ant  better  things  to  the 
pious.  Virg.  Verum  hcec  hactenus,  scil.  diximus.  Cic.  Pertineq  is  understood  in 
such  expressions  as  Ki7ii7 f«Z  me,  nihil  ad  rem;  Quid  hoc  ad  jEjAcurum?  What 
does  this  concern  Epicurus?  Quoisus  hcec  f  i.e.  qiiorsus  hcec  2}^rtinent?  What 
is  that  for? — Pdrabo  is  to  be  supplied,  in  Quo  mlhi  hanc  remf  Of  what  use 
is  this  to  me?  and,  Vhde  niihi  diiquam  remf  Whence  am  I  to  get  any  thing' 
as.  Quo  mihi  bibliothecas  f  Sen.  Unde  mihi  lupidem  f  Hor.  A  tense  of  y'ticso  i 
often  to  be  supplied,  as  in  Rede  ille,  melius  hi ;  Bene  Chi-ysippus,  qui  ddiet.  Oio 
Nihil  per  vim  vviqtiam  Clodius,  omnia  per  vim  Milo.  Id.  Qum  quum  dixiaeet 
Cotla  f'lnem.  Id.  So,  also  in  the  phrases  nihil  dliudquam;  quid  dliud  quain; 
nihil  p7'atei-quam,  which  signify  'merely';  as,  Tisaphernes  nihil  dliua  quam 
bellum  compaidvit.  Nep.  This  verb  is  in  like  manner  omitted  with  nihil  amplim 
quam ;  nihil  minus  quam,  and  in  the  phrase  si  nihil  dUiid. — Ait  or  inquit  is  some- 
times omitted  in  introducing  the  direct  words  of  another,  and  more  frequently 
m  relating  a  connected  conversation;  as,  Turn  ille;  hie  ego;  huic  ego.  JJicit  is 
sometimes  omitted  in  quoting  a  person's  words;  as,  Sclte  Chrysippus :  ut  glddii 
causa  vdglifam,  sic  pi-oeter  mundum  ci'tira  omnia  dliorum  causa  esse  genei'dta.  Cic. 
— After  /le?"  in  adjurations  oro^  rogo  or  precor  is  often  omitted ;  as.  Per  ego  vo$ 
deos  pai7-ios,  vindicdte  ab  ultimo  dedecdre  nomen  gentemque  PersdriCm ;  i.  e.  jaer 
deos  palrius  vos  oro,  vindicdte.  Curt.  This  omission  is  most  common  with  the 
copula  sum ;  as,  Nam  PolydSrus  ego,  scil.  su7n,  For  I  am  Polydonis.  Virg.  And 
so  est  and  sunt  are  often  omitted  with  predicate  adjectives,  and  especially  in 
proverbial  phrases;  as,  Quot  hdmines  tot  sententice.  Ter.  Omnia  prcBcldrardra, 
fcil.  sunt.  Cic.  So  also  est  and  sunt  are  often  omitted  in  the  compound  tenses 
6f  the  passive  voice;  as,  Agro  midctdti,  scil.  sunt.  Liv.    Cf.  §  270,  R.  3. 

Note  5.  In  Latin,  as  in  English,  a  verb  is  often  joined  to  one  of  two  con- 
nected nominatives  and  understood  with  the  other,  and  that  even  when  the 
persons  are  different;  as,  mdgis  ego  te  dim,  quam  iu  me,  scil.  d7nas.  After  a 
negative  verb  a  coiTesponding  positive  verb  is  sometimes  to  be  supplied ;  as, 
after  nego,  dlco,  after  veto,  jUbeo,  and  in  this  case  et  takes  the  signification  of 
ged  Cf.  §  323,  1,  (2.),  (b.) 

Note  6.  Sometimes,  when  the  verb  of  an  appended  proposition  is  omitted, 
its  subject  is  attracted  to  the  case  of  a  noun  in  the  leading  proposition  with 
which  is  joined  a  participle  of  the  omitted  verb ;  as,  Hannibal  Minucium,  md- 
gistrum  equtium,  pjdri  ac  dictatorem  dOlo  productum  in  prcelium,  J'Ugdvit,  i.  e. 
pdri  ac  dictator  dulo  productus  fuerat.  Nep.  Hami.  5.     So  Liv.  34,  32. 

Kem.  5.  In  the  historic  style  the  nominative  is  sometimes  found 
with  the  present  infinitive ;  as, 

Interim  quOtldie  Ccesar  ^duos  frumentum  tlagitare.  Meanwhile  Ctesar  waj 
daily  demanding  corn  of  the  iEdui.  Cajs.  Nos  pdiAdi  trepidare  metu.  Virg. 
Id  horremlum  ferri.  Id. 

Note  7.  The  infinitive  in  this  construction  is  called  the  historical  injinitine, 
and  is  used  instead  of  the  imperfect  indicative  to  express  in  a  lively  manner  a 
continued  or  repeated  action  or  condition. 

Rem.  6.  The  relative  qui  may  refer  to  an  antecedent  either  of  the 
first,  second,  or  third  person ;  and  its  verb  takes  the  person  of  the 
3,ntecedent ;  as, 

£gc  qui  lego,  I  who  read.  Tu  qui  scribis,  Thou  who  vyritest.  Equus  qui  cur- 
rit,  The  horse  whicli  runs.   Vos  qui  quseritis,  You  who  ask. 

Rem.  7.  (a.).  Verbs  in  the  first  person  plural,  and  the  second  per- 
POO  singular,  are  sometimes  used  to  express  general  truths ;  as, 


§  209  SYNTAX. SUBJECT-NOMINATIVS.  203 

Quam  multa  f&dmus  causa  dmlcorum  !  How  many  tilings  we  do  (i.  e.  men  do) 
'or  the  sake  of  friends!  Cic.  Si  vis  me  Jlcre,  dokndum  est  prlmum  ipsi  tlbi, 
Whoever  wishes  me,  etc.  Hor. 

(i.)  N'os  is  often  used  for  etjo,  and  nostei'  for  mens  ;  and  even  when  the  pro. 
noun  is  not  expressed,  the  verb  is  frequently  put  in  the  first  person  plural  in- 
Btead  of  the  first  person  singular.  The  genitive  nostri  is  used  for  met,  but  nos~ 
tr&m  always  expresses  a  real  plurality. 

IkEM.  8.  The  accusative  is  sometimes  used  for  the  nominative  by  attraction. 
See  §  206,  (6.)  (b.) 

Rem.  9.  The  verb  sometiines  agrees  with  iho:  predicate-nominative,  espe(  ially 
if  it  precedes  the  verb ;  as,  Amantium  irce  amovis  integratio  est.  The  qnarrelf 
of  lovers  are  a  renewal  of  love.  Ter.  Ldca,  quce  jn'oxima  Carthdijinem,  Numlci- 
ia  appellatur.  Sail.  And  sometimes  it  agrees  with  the  nearest  subject  of  a  sub 
ordinate  sentence ;  as,  Sed  ei  cdi'iora  semper  omnia,  quam  dccus  uique  pudlcitia 
fuit.  Sail.  Cat.  25. 

Rem.  10.  In  cases  of  apposition,  the  verb  commonly  agrees  wivh  the  noun 
which  is  to  be  explained;  as,  Tulliula^d?.\lc\iB  nostrce,  jidyitat.  Cic.  But  some- 
tunes  the  verb  agi'ees,  not  with  the  principal  nominative,  but  with  a  nearer 
noun  in  apposition  to  it;  as,  Tangri,  clvitas  Galiice,  J'onlem  habet  iiisitjnem, 
The  Tungi-i,  a  state  of  Gaul,  has  a  remarkable  fountain.  Flin.  COrioli  oppidum 
captum  (est).  Liv. 

Rem.  11.    A  collective  noun  has  sometimes,  especially  in  poetry,  a 

plural  verb ;  as, 

Pars  epfdis  onerant  mensas,  Part  load  the  tables  with  food.  Virg.  Turba 
ruunt.  Ovid.    Atria  turba  tUncnt;  yen'mnt  leoe  vidt/iis  eu-ntque.  Id. 

(1.)  («.)  A  plural  verb,  joined  to  a  collective  noun,  usually  expresses  the 
action,  etc.,  of  the  indiiiduah  wliicli  that  noun  denotes.  In  Cicero,  Sallust, 
and  Caisar,  tliis  construction  scarcely  occurs  in  simple  sentences;  but  it  is 
often  used,  when  the  subject  of  the  verb  is  expressed  not  in  its  own,  but  in  a 
preceding  clause;  as,  Hoc  Idem  generi  hiimdno  evSnit,  quod  in  terra  collocati  sint, 
oecause  tiiey  (scil.  homines)  live  on  earth.  Cic.  In  Livy  it  occurs  more  fre- 
quently; as,  Locros  omnis  mtdlitudo  iibeunt. 

(6.)  Abstract  nouns  are  sometimes  used  collectively,  instead  of  their  con- 
oretes;  as,  nobilltas  for  nObiles,  jiiventtis  for  jiirenes,  vlc'aiia  Cor  v'lc'ini,  servUiunt 
ior  servi,  licis  armdiira  for  leciter  armdti,  etc.  (c.)  M'des,  eqiics,  pUdes,  and 
similar  words  are  sometimes  used  collectively  for  the  soIdier\',  the  cavalry,  etc. 

(2.)  When  two  or  more  clauses  have  the  same  collective  noun  as  their  sub- 
ject, the  verb  is  frequently  singular  in  the  former,  and  plural  in  the  latter;  as, 
Jan  ne  node  quidem  turba  ex  eo  loco  tUliibebatur,  refraclfcrosque  carcerem  minA- 
baniar.  Liv.  Gens  eddem,  qiue  te  crudeli  Daunia  bello  insequitur,  nos  si  pellant, 
nihil  abfOre  credunt.  Virg. 

(S.)  Tanium,  followed  by  a  genitive  plural,  has  sometimes  a  plural  verb,  lik«i 
a  collective  noun ;  as,  Quid  hue  tantum  hOminum  incedunl  1  Why  are  so  many 
ir.en  coming  hither  V  Plant. 

(4.)  A  plural  verb  is  sometimes  used,  though  not  hy  Cicero,  after  2<<er(7?<e 
tnd  qtdsqtie,  pnrs...2)ars,  alius. ..dlium,  and  alter. ..altenim,  on  account  of  the 
idea  of  plurality  which  they  involve;  as,  Uterque  eorum  ex  caslris  exei-citum 
edUcuri,  Each  of  tiiem  leads  his  army  from  the  camp.  Ctes.  Inttmus  quisque 
IzberlOrum  vincti  abrepti^J^e  (sunt.)  Tac.  Alius  dlium,  ut  2}''<£liu>n  incipiant, 
circunis])ectant.  Liv.    Cf.  §  20",  K.  32,  (c.) 

N(JTK  S.  This  construction  may  be  explained  by  passages  like  the  following, 
in  which  the  plural  is  placed  first,  and  tlicD  the  singular,  denoting  its  parts; 
Ceieri,  suo  quisque  tempore,  aderunt.  Liv.  Decemviri  perturbdti  alius  in  aliam 
jiarie/M  c'(««7W'uw  (liscurrunt.   Id.     Seej^ 2(11,  B,  10. 


v^2-'Ssi^^l) 


204  SYNTAX. SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE.  §  209 

Rem.  12.  Two  or  more  nominatives  sinffular,  not  in  apposition, 
generally  have  a  plural  verb  ;  as, 

Furor  n\ujue  mentem  praeeipitant,  Fury  and  rage  huny  (n  (my)  mind.  Virg. 
I}u?n  cetas,  metus,  mdgister,  prohlbebaiit.  Ter. 

(1.)  K  the  predicate  belongs  to  the  several  nominatives  jointly,  the  verb  is 
always  plural;  as,  Grammatice  qmndam  ac  musice  juuctse  fuerunt.  Quint. 

(2.)  A  verb  in  the  singular  is  often  used  after  several  nominatives 
singular,  especially  if  they  denote  things  without  life ;  as, 

Mens  t'liim,  et  ratio  et  consilium  in  senibus  est.  Cic.  Beneficentia,  Uierviitai, 
■bdnitas,  justitia  yunditustoUitui.  Id. 

Note  9,  This  construction  is  most  common  when  the  several  nominatives, 
as  in  the  preceding  examples,  constitute,  as  it  were,  but  one  idea.  So  also  the 
compound  subject  Sendlus  pdpiilusqne  Romdnus  has  always  a  predicate  in  the 
singular.  The  same  construction  sometimes,  especially  in  the  poets,  occurs 
with  names  of  persons;  as,  Goi-yias,  Tkmsymachus,  Protagoras,  Prddlcus,  Hip- 
jnas  in  Mmre  fuit.  Cic.  Quin  et  PiOinetheus  et  Pilopis  parens  dulci  Idboruin 
decipitu.  S(5«o.  Hor.  When  the  nominatives  denote  both  persons  and  things, 
the  verlj  is  commonly  plural ;  as,  Coltio  consulum  et  Pompeius  obsunt.  Liv. 

(3.)  When  one  of  the  nouns  is  plural,  the  verb  is  generally  so;  but  some- 
times it  is  singular,  when  the  plural  noun  does  not  immediately  precede  it;  as, 
Dii  te  ])cndtcs  patrilque,  et  pntris  Imago,  et  domus  7-egia,  et  in  ddmo  regale  so- 
lium, et  nomen  Tarquinium  creat  vocat/we  regem.  Liv. 

(4.)  When  each  of  the  nominatives  is  preceded  by  et  or  turn,  the  verb  agrees 
with  the  last;  as,  Hoc  et  ratio  doctis,  et  necessitas  barbdris,  et  mos  gentibus,  et 
feris  natura  ipsa  proescripsit.  This,  reason  has  dictated  to  the  learned,  and  ne- 
cessity to  barbarians,  and  custom  to  nations,  and  nature  itself  to  wild  beasts 
Cic.  Et  ego,  et  Cicero  meus  flfiCTitabit.  Id.  Turn  fetas  vires(y«fe,  iiim  dvlta  gloria 
animum  stimfilabat.  Liv.  So  when  the  subject  consists  of  two  infinitives;  as, 
Et  f  acere,  et  pati  fortia,  Romdnum  est.  Cic'  Unuset  alter  always  takes  a  singu- 
lar verb ;  as,  Dicit  anus  et  alter  br&viter.  Cic.  Unus  et  alter  assuitur  pannus. 
Hor. 

(5.)  When  the  nominatives  are  connected  by  aut,  sometimes  the 
plural,  but  commonly  the  singular,  is  used ;  as. 

Si  Socrates  aut  Antisthenes  diceret,  If  Socratesor  Antisthenes should  say.  Cic 
Ut  quosque  studium  prlvaiim  aut  gratia  occixpaverunt.  Liv. 

(a.)  The  plural  is  necessary  with  disjunctives,  if  ths  subject  includes  tht, 
first  or  second  person ;  as.  Quod  in  Decemviris  neque  ego  neque  Qesar  habiti  es- 
Bemus.  Cic. — (o.)  With  aut.. .aut  and  nec.nec  the  singular  is  prefeiTed,  but 
with  seu...seu  and  tam...quam  tlie  verb  is  in  the  plural. 

(6.)  A  nominative  singular,  joined  to  an  ablative  by  the  preposition  cum, 
sometimes  has  a  singular  but  more  frequently  a  plural  verb ;  as,  Domitius  cum 
Messala  certm  esse  videbatur.  Cic.  Bocchus,  cum  peditibus,  postrtimam  RO- 
mdrm-um  dciem  invadunt,  Bocchus,  with  his  foot-soldiers,  attacks  the  rear  of 
tlie  Roman  army.  Sail;    7/Jse  dux,  cum  aliquot  principibus,  capiuntur.  Liv. 

( 7.)  if  the  nominatives  are  of  different  persons,  the  verb  is  of  the 
first  person  rather  than  the  second  or  third,  and  of  the  second  r  aer 
than  the  third  ;  as, 

Si  tu  et  TulUa  valetis,  ego  et  Cicero  valemus,  If  you  and  Tulli-  are  well, 
Cicero  and  I  are  loell.  Cic.  Hiec  ncqiie  ego  neque  tu  f  eclmus.  Ter.  Ego  pdpw- 
lusque  Romdnus  bellum  jiidico  f  aciojwe.  Liv. 

(o.)  Yet  sometimes  the  verb  agrees  in  number  and  person  w'  the  nearest 
nominative,  and  is  understood  with  the  other;  as,  Vos  ipsi  et  -^enatm  frequent 
restitit.  This  is  always  the  case  when  the  action  of  the  vert,  is  qualified  with 
reference  to  each  nominative  sabaratelv ;  us.  Eico  numrf.  tn  feiirJUr  uStiU. 


§210.  SYNTAX. PREDICATE-NOMTNATIVE.  205 

Rem.  13.  The  interjections  en,  ecce^  and  0,  are  sometimes  followed 
by  the  nominative  ;  as, 

En  Pridmiis!  Lo  Priam!  Virg.  En  ego,  vester  Ascdyihis.  Id.  Ecce  hihm 
Calienus  !  Cic      Ecce  tiue  litirce.  Id.    0  vir  fortis  atque  amicus  !  Ter. 

PREDICATF -NOMINATIVE. 

§  310.     A  noun  in  the  predicate,  after  a  verb  neuter  or  pas 
Bive,  is  put  in  the  same  case  as  the  subjact,  when  it  denotes  th^ 
same,  person  or  thing ;  as, 

(a.)  When  the  subject  is  in  the  nominative;  Ira  furor  hrevis  est,  Anger  is  a 
short  madness.  Hor.  Eyo  vocor  Lyconides,  I  am  called  Lyconides.  Plaut 
E(jo  incf''(lo  regina,  I  walk  a  queen.  Virg.  Cams  et  Lucius  fratres  fuerunt.  Cic. — 
So  [b.)  when  the  subject  is  in  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive;  Jiidicem  me 
esse  r6lo.  Cic. 

(c.)  SomeJ-mes  also  a  dative,  denoting  the  same  object,  both  precedes  and 
fohows  a  verb  neuter  or  passive.  See  §  227,  N. — And  (d.)  a  predicate  abla- 
tive sometimes  follows  passive  participles  of  choosinr/,  naming,  etc.;  as,  Cons&li- 
hus  certioribus  factis.  Liv.  See  ^  257,  R.  11. 

(e.)  If  the  predicate  nottn  has  a  fonn  of  the  same  gender  as  the  subject,  it 
takes  that  form;  as,  Licentia  coniiptrix  est  mfmun.  Cf.  §  204,  R.  2. — (_/.)  But 
if  the  subject  is  neuter,  the  noun  of  the  predicate,  :f  it  has  both  a  masculine 
and  a  feminine  form,  takes  the  former;  as,  Ttmjnis  v'ltm  magister  est. 

{(/.)  An  infinitive  may  supply  the  place  of  a  predicate  nominative.  See  ^  269, 
E.  4. 

Remark  1.  (a.)  Adjectives,  adjective  pronouns,  and  participles, 
standing  in  the  predicate,  after  verbs  neuter  or  passive,  and  relating 
to  the  subject,  agree  with  it  in  gender,  number,  and  case. 

(b.)  When  the  subject  consists  of  two  or  more  nouns,  the  gender  and  num- 
ber of  such  predicate  adjectives  iye  determined  by  §  205,  R.  2. 

Rem.  2.  (a.)  The  noun  in  the  predicate  sometimes  dLft'ers  in  gender  and 
number  from  the  subject ;  as,  Sanguis  erant  lacrimoe,  Her  tears  were  blcod. 
Ovid.   Cnptlvi  militum  prteda  fuerunt.    Liv. 

(i.)  So  when  a  subject  in  the  singular  i;;  followed  by  an  ablative  with  cum, 
the  predicate  is  plural;  as,  Exsilles  esse  juhet  L.  Tarquinium  cum  cunjuge  et 
liberis.  Liv. 

Reji.  3.  The  verbs  which  most  frequently  have  a  noun,  etc.,  in  the 
predicate  agreeing  in  case,  etc.,  with  their  subject,  are : — 

'1.)  1\\&  cojiula  sum;  as,  Ego  JOvis  sum  films.  Plaut.  Disce  esse  pater. 
Ter.  The  preilicate  with  sum  maybe  an  adverb  of  place,  manner,  etc. ;  as, 
Quod  est  longe  iiliter.  Cic.  Rectissime  smit  apud  te  omnia.  Every  thins;  with 
you  is  in  a  verv  good  condition.  Id.;  or  a  noun  in  an  oblique  case;  as,  Numen 
dine  tiire  tst7  Ovid.     Sunt  nobis  mUia  poma.  Virg. 

(2.)  Certain  neuter  verbs  denoting  exisiewce ,  position ,  motion ,  etc.; 
as,  VIVO,  exsisto,  appdreo,  cddo,  eo,  evddo,  fugio,  inccdo,  jdceo,  mitnei>,  sedeo,  sto, 
venio,  etc.  Thus,  Hex  circuibat  pedes.  The  kmg  went  roimd  on  foot.  Plin. 
Quos  judicubat  non  posse  Oratores  evddere.  Cic.  Ego  huic  causce  patrCnus  ejcsiiti, 
Cic.   Qui  Jit,  ut  niiiw  contentus  vlvat  ? 

(3.)    The  passive  of  verbs  denoting, 

(a.)  To  name  or  call;  as,  appellor,  dicor,  noniinor,  nunciipor,  perhibeor, 
tdlulor,  scr'ihor,  inscribor,  vucur.  Tims,  Cognomine  Justus  est  appclldlus.  He  wad 
Billed  by  the  surname  Just.  Xep      Aristteus  ulicce  dieiiur  iuventp"-.  OiA. 


206  SYNTAX. GENITIVE    AFTER    NOtTNS.  §  21  I, 

IP.)  To  cnoose,  render,  appoint,  or  constitute;  &%,c<msUUior,crtor 
dfhifitw,  desiijiwr,  cligor,  fio,  reddor,  renuncior.  Tlius,  Dux  a  Romdnis  elatus 
est  Q.  Fabius.     Postqiiani  v^hobMS  /actus  est.  Nep.     Certior  foetus  sum. 

(c.)  To  esteem  or  reckon;  as,  censeor,  cognuscor,  credor,  dcprehendor 
existlmor,  ducor,  feror,  hdbeor,  judlcor,  menwror,  m'uneror,  pfttor,  ivperior,  videor. 
Thus,  Cvedebar  sanguinis  auctor  ego.  Ovid.  Mdlbn  videri  tjmidus  quam  pdinim 
prudens.  Cic. 

Note  1.  With  several  passives  of  the  last  class,  when  followed  by  a  predi- 
cate-nominative, etc.,  an  infinitive  of  sum  is  expressed  or  understood;  as, 
Ainens  mihi  luisse  videor,  I  think  I  was  beside  myself.  Cic.  But  the  dative 
of  the  first  person  is  sometimes  omitted  after  videor ;  as,  Satis  docuisse  'iftdeor. 
Id. — ■Atilius  prudens  esse  putdhdtur.  Id.  So  with  d'lcor  (to  be  said),  and  perhl- 
beor ;  as,  Verus  patria.  dlceris  esse  pater.  Mart.  Hoc  ne  locGtus  sine  mercede 
existimer.  Phsed. 

Note  2.  A^idio  is  sometimes  used  by  the  poets  Uke  appellor ;  as,  Tu  rexque 
paterg'Me  audisti  coram.  Hor. 

Rem.  4.  A  predicate-nominative  is  used  after  many  other  verbs  to  denote  a 
purpose,  time,  or  circumstance  of  the  action ;  as,  Comes  «(f</i7us .^EcJ- 
tides,  jEolides  was  added  as  a  companion.  Virg.  Lupus  dbambulat  noctur- 
nus.  Id.  Appdret  liquido  subUmis  in  mtMre  Nlsus.  Id.  So  with  an  active 
verb ;  Audlvi  hoc  puer.  Cic.  Sapiens  nil  fdcit  invltus.  Id.  Rempublicam  de- 
fendi  adolescens.  Id.    Of.  §  204,  R.  1. 

Note  3.  Instead  of  the  predicate-nominative,  a  dative  of  the  end  or  purpose 
sometimes  occurs  (see  §227);  sometimes  an  ablative  with  pro;  as,  aitddcin 
pro  miiro  est;  and  sometimes  the  ablatives  Idco  or  in  numero  with  a  genitive; 
as,  ille  est  mihi  parentis  loco;  in  hostium  numero  hdbctur. 

Rem.  5.  The  noun  (5/)ms,  signifying  '  need,'  is  often  used  as  a  predicate  after 
gvn.  It  is,  in  such  cases,  translated  by  the  adjectives  needful,  necessary,  etc.; 
as.  Dux  nobis  et  auctw  opus  est.  Cic.  Mvlti  opus  sunt  bdves.  Varr.  (Dixit) 
aurum  et  ancillas  opus  esse.  Ter.    Usus  also  is  occasionally  so  consti-ued. 

Rem.  6.  When  the  pronoun,  which  is  the  siibject  of  an  infinitive,  is  omitted, 
the  case  of  the  predicate  is  sometimes,  in  the  poets,  attracted  into  that  of  the 
subject  of  the  verb  on  which  the  infinitive  d^ends;  as.  Uxor  invicti  Jdvis  ewe 
nescis,  i.  e.  te  esse  uxdrem.  Hor.    EetHUt  Ajax  esse  Jdvis  pronepos.  Ovid. 

GEOTTIVE. 
GENITIVE    AFTER    NOUNS. 

§  Sll.     A  noun  which  limits  the  meaning  of  another  nouiv 

denotmg  a  different  person  or  thing,  is  put  in  the  genitive ;  as, 

Amor  gloria.  Love  of  glory ;  Arma  Achillis,  The  arms  of  AchiUes ;  Pater  pa- 
trice.  The  lather  of  the  country ;  Vitium  irce.  The  vice  of  anger ;  Nim&rum  cus- 
to$,  The  guai'dian  of  the  gi'oves;  Amor  hdbendi,  Love  of  possessing. 

NoTB  \  In  the  first  example,  amor  denotes  love  in  general ;  gloria  limits  the  affection 
to  the  particular  object,  glory.  Such  universally  is  the  effect  of  the  genitive,  depending 
upon  a  noun.  Hence  the  limitation  of  a  noun  by  a  genitive  resembles  that  which  is 
effected  by  an  adjective.  In  each  the  noun  limited  constitutes  with  its  limitation  only 
a  single  idea. 

Remark  1.  The  genitive  denotes  various  relations,  the  most  common  of 
which  are  those  of  Source;  as.  Radii  soUs,  The  rays  of  the  sun ; —  Ca  use ;  as, 
Ddlor  pddagrce,  The  pain  of  the  gout; — Effect;  as,  Artifex  mundi,  The  Cre- 
ator of  the  world ; —  Connection:  as,  Pater  consHlis,  Tte  father  of  the  con- 
sul;— Possession;  as,  Domus  Gesdris,  The  house  of  Cfesar; — Object;  as 
Cogiidtio  dlicil/us  rei,  A  thought  of  something; — Pui'pose ;  us,  Appurdtm 
triumphi,  Preparation  for  a  triumph ; — A  whole;  as,  Pai-»  hdminum,  Apart 


§211.  SYNTAX. GENITIVE    AFTER    NOTTNS.  207 

of  men;  tliis  is  called  the  pnj-^iVire  genitive; — Character  or  Quality;  as, 
AiMescens  SHininw  audacue,  A  youth  of  the  greatest  boldness; — Material  oi 
Co  mponent  Parts;  as,  j/oH(es  awj'i,  Mountains  cf  gold;  Actrrus  sviliorum, 
A  heap  of  shields ; —  Ti  m  e ;  as,  Frumeutum  dieraiii  dectin,  Corn  for  ten  days. 
Sail. 

Rem.  2.  The  genitive  is  called  subjective  or  active,  when  it  denotes 
either  that  to  tvhich  a  thing  belongs,  or  tlie  subject  of  the  action,  feel- 
ing, etc.,  implied  in  the  noun  -which  it  limits.  It  is  called  objective  or 
passive,  when  it  denotes  the  object  affected  by  such  action,  or  towai  <lf 
which  such  feeling  is  directed ;  as, 

Subjective.  Objective. 

Facta  virorum,  Deeds  of  men.  Odium  vitii,  Hatred  of  vice. 

Dolor  animi.  Grief  of  mind.  Amor  virtuiis,  Love  of  virtue. 

Jumnis  ira.  The  anger  of  Juno.  Desiderium  otii,  Desire  of  leisure. 

(a.)  Whether  a  genitive  is  subjective  or  objective  is  to  be  detennined  bjr 
the  meaning  of  the  words,  and  by  their  connectior  Thus,  providentia  Dei 
signifies  God's  providence,  or  that  exercised  by  hiiri  timor  Dti,  the  fear  of 
God,  or  that  exercised  towards  him.  The  same  or  similar  words,  in  dill'eient 
connections,  may  express  both  significations.  Thus,  meiiis  hostiiim,  fear  of  the 
enemy,  may  mean,  either  the  fear  felt  by  the  enemy,  or  that  felt  by  their  oppo- 
nents^ So  vulnus  Ulixis  (Virg.  M\\.  2,  436.)  denotes  the  wound  which  Ulysses 
had  given;  vulnus  jEnece,  (Id.  jEn.  12,  323.)  that  which  /Eneas  had  received. 

(6.)  The  relation  expressed  by  the  English  possessive  case  is  subjective,  while 
that  denoted  bv  q/'with  its  case  is  either  subjective  or  objective. 

(c.)  The  objective  genitive  is  of  very  extensive  use  in  Latin  in  the  limitation 
of  verbal  nouns  and  adjectives,  whatever  may  be  the  cunstruction  of  the  verbs 
from  which  such  nouns  and  adjectives  are  derived,  whether  they  take  an  ac- 
cusative or  some  other  case  or  even  a  preposition. 

(d.)  When  ambiguity  would  arise  from  the  use  of  the  objective  genitive,  a 
preposition  with  an  accusative  or  ablative  is  commonly  used;  as.  Amor  in 
revipublicam,  for  reipOblicce,  Love  to  the  state.  Cic.  Odium  erga  Romunos,  for 
Romdnvrum.  Nep.  Cura  de  sdlitie  patriie,  for  salutis.  Cic.  Prwddtor  ex  sociis, 
for  sOciOrum.  Sail.  Sometimes  both  constnictions  are  combmed;  as,  Rcvereniia 
adversus  hdmines  et  opiimi  cujusque  et  reliquorum.  Cic.  Oft".  1,  28. 

Note.  A  limiting  genitive  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  a  noun  in  apposition, 
especially  with  vox,  mmen,  verlnmi,  etc.;  as,  vox  voluptatis,  the  word  pleasure; 
Komen  amicitiEe,  the  word  umiciiia;  domini  appelldtio.  This  is  usual  when  the 
genus  is  defined  by  the  species;  as,,  arbor  flci,  a  fig-tree ;  _^os  viulce,  a  violet; 
virtus  continentise,  the  virtue  of  abstinence :  and  in  geographical  names ;  as, 
tppidum  Antiochia;.  Cf.  ^  204,  R.  6. — Cicero  frequently  uses  a  genitive  in  this 
manner  with  genus  and  causa ;  as,  Unum  genus  est  eonim,  qiii,  etc.  Bute  sunt 
causce,  una  pudoris,  altera  sceleris. — So,  also,  the  genitive  of  gerunds;  as,  Triste 
est  nOmen  ipsum  carendi.  The  verj'  word  to  want  is  sad.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  (a.)  A  substantive  pronoun  in  the  genitive,  limiting  the 
meaning  of  a  noun,  is  commonly  objective  ;  as, 

Cura  mei.  Care  for  me.  Ovid.  Pars  tut,  Part  of  thee.  Id.  Vestri  curam  dgite. 
Cmt.  This  genitive  is  used  especially  with  verbal  substantives  in  or,  ix  and  to; 
as,  Accusdtor  mei.  Cic.  Nimia  cestimdiio  sid.  Id.  Rdtionem  et  sui  et  dliotum 
hd/jire.  Id. 

(b.)  Instead  of  the  subjective  or  possessive  genitive  of  a  substantive 
pronoun,  the  corresponding  adjective  jironoun  is  commonly  used ;  as. 

Liber  meiis,  not  liber  mei,  mj'  book.  Cura  men,  My  care,  i.  e.  the  care  exer- 
cised by  me.  Cic.  Tuas  litiras  exspecto.  Id.  Yet  the  subjective  genitive  of  n 
substantive  pronoun  sometimes  occurs;  as,  Tui  Unius  studio,  By  the  zeiU  of 
yourself  alone.  Cic. 


208  SYNTAX. G  ^.NITIVE    AFTER    NOUNS.  §  211 


I  not  unfrequently,  also,  an  adjective  pronoun  occuv-,  instead  of  tha 
nitive;  as,  Mea'injaria,  Injury  to  me.  Sail.  So,  Jiividia  tu,:,  Envy 
^iducia  tica,  Confidence  in  thee.  Plaut.     Spes  mea,    Tlie  hope  placed 


(c  )   And 

nbjfi'tlve  geni 

of  thee.    FldHcia  ^-..-,  ^  .     - 

in  nie.     With  causa  the  adjective  pronoun,  and  never  the  genitive,  is  used 
as,  Meil  causa,  For  my  sake.  Plaut. 

Rem.  4.  (a.)  Instead,  also,  of  the  subjective  genitive  of  a  noitn,  a  possessive 
adjective  is  often  used;  as.  Causa  regia,  for  ca^lsa  regis.  Cic.  Herllis  films,  for 
he'ii  flius.  Id.  Evandrius  ensis,  for  Evandri.  Virg.  Herciileus  labor,  for  Her- 
cnlis.  Hor.  Civilis  furor,  for  c'lvium.  Hor.  So,  also,  for  the  objective  genitive, 
Metus  hostilis.  Fear   of  the  enemy.  Sail. 

(6.)  The  genitive  of  the  person  implied  in  the  adjective  pronoun  or  possessive 
adjective,  or  an  adjective  agreeing  with  such  genitive,  is  sometimes  added  as 
an'  apposition;  as,  'Vestrci  ipsorum  causa  hoc  feci.  In  the  poets  and  later  prose 
writers  a  participle  also  is  found  agi-eeing  with  such  implied  genitive;  as,  Mea 
scripta  vuUjo  recitdre  tinientis.  Hor.     Of.  ^  204,  R.  4,  and  ^  205,  R.  13. 

Rem.  5.  In  the  jjredicate  after  sum,  and  sometimes  after  other 
verbs,  the  dative  is  used  like  the  objective  genitive ;  as, 

Idem  amor  exUium  pecori  (est),  pecdrisque  magistro.  Virg.  Vltis  ut  arbdribm 
decori  est,  ut  vitihus  uvce—Tu  decus  omiie  tuis.  Virg.  In  this  passage  the  dative 
decdri  and  tlie  nominative  decus  are  used  with  no  difference  of  meaning. 
Cf.  §  227,  R.  4.  Aucivr  fui  senatiii.  Cic.  Murana  lerjdtus  Liicullo  fuit.  Id. 
£7it  ilk  mihi  sem^;er  deus.  Virg.  Huic  causaj  patrmius  exstiti.  Cic.  Huic  ego 
me  heWo  ducem  prdfiteor.  Id.  -Se  tertium  (esse)_  cni  fdtum  foret  urhis  p6tin. 
\([.—  Cum  P.  Afncdno  senatus  egil,  ut  legilius  fratri  proficisceretur.  Id.  Caisar 
teqmienta  galeis  niilites  ex  v'miinibus  f fict're  jubet.  Cses.  Trinobantlbus  Oesar 
impi-rat^rimentum  exercitui.  Id.  Quod  neque  insidice  consiili  procedebaut. 
Sail.  Quern  exitum  tantis  malis  sperarenty  Id.  Sanctus  vir  et  ex  sententia 
ambobus,  scil.  qui  fuit.  Id.  See  ^  227,  R.  4. 

Note.  The  dative  in  the  preceding  examples  has  been  thought  by  some  grammarian* 
to  depend  on  the  nouns  connected  with  it;  as,  exttium,  decus,  auctor,  legatus,  deus, 
patronus,  etc. ;  by  others  it  has  been  held  to  depend  on  these  nouns  in  connection  with 
the  verbs,  and  not  upon  either  separately ;  but  the  better  opinion  seems  to  be  that,  which 
makes  such  datives  grammatically  dependent  upon  the  verbs  only,' though  logically  con- 
nected also  with  the  nouns. 

(1.)  Instead,  also,  of  the  possessive  genitive,  a  dative  of  the  person 
may  follow  a  verb,  when  its  act  has  relation  to  the  body  or  possessions 
of  such  person  ;  as, 

Sese  omnes  fientes  CEesari  ad  pedes  prdjecertmt.  They  all,  weeping,  cast 
themselves  at  the  feet  of  Cajsar.  Cks.  Cui  corpus  porrigUur,  For  whom  the 
body,  i.  e.  whose  body,  is  extended.  Virg.  Tumrero  exarsit  inveni  dolor  osslbns 
ingens.  Id.     Transflgitur  scutum  Pulfioni.  Cjes. 

Rem.  6.  When  the  limiting  noun  denotes  a  property,  charac- 
ter, or  quality,  it  has  an  adjective  agreeing  with  it,  and  is  put 
either  in  the  genitive  or  the  ablative  ;  as, 

Vir  exempli  recti,  A  man  of  correct  example.  Liv.  Addlescens  summm  audddai, 
A  youth  of  the  gi-eatest  boldness.  Sail.  Fossa  pedum  viyinti,  A  ditch  of  twenty 
feet  (i.  e.  in  width).  Cfes.  Hnmilatr  se  cum  duxit  f  ilium  Hanmbdlem  annorum 
aoveui.  Nep.  Athenienses  deligunt  Periclem,  spectatce  virthtis  vtrum.  Just. 
Qidnqudginta  annorum  •.rymrium.  Id.  Iter  uniiis  diei.  Cic.  Pulchritudlne  ex- 
Imia  femlna,  A  womar  of  exquisite  beauty.  Cic.  ISIaximo  natu  films,  The 
eldest  son.  Nep.  L.  CXdllina  juit  magna  vi  et  dnimi  et  corpdiis,  scd  ingenio 
malo  pravoquc.  SaU.  Spelunea  infinita  altitudine.  Cic— Sometimes  lioth  con- 
Btructions  occur  in  the  same  proposition;  as,  Lentidum  nostmm,  exhrnk  s^ia, 
sunvmw  virtutis  ddolescentem.  Cic. 


§211.  SYNTAX. — GENITIVE    AFTER   NOUNS.  2C9 

(1.)  A  genitive  sometimes  supplies  the  place  of  tl  ■,  adjective;  and  the  noun 
denoting  the  property,  etc.,  is  then  always  put  in  the  ablative;  as,  Esl  hoi 
rervi  figura,...of  the  form  of  a  stag.  Ca-s.  Un  specie  et  colore  tauri.  Id. 
FiHtex  palmi  altitikUne.  Pliu.    ClCivi  digiti  polLicis  crassUmline.  Cses. 

(2.)  All  t_e  qualities  and  attributes  of  persons  and  things^  whether  inherent 
or  accidental,  may  be  thus  expressed  by  the  genitive  and  ablative  of  quality, 
provided  the  substantives  are  immecliateh  connected;  nSjJossa  qinndecim  pedum; 
Itumo  antiqud  virtide.  It  hence  follows  that  such  genitives  and  ablatives,  when 
used  to  express  duration  of  time  or  extent  of  space,  are  distinguished  from  the 
cases  in  which  the  accusative  is  required,  since  the  latter  case  always  follows 
adjectives  or  verbs;  as,  yb^sa  quiiulecim  pedes  lata:  juuer  decern  annos  natus. 
Cf.  §  236. 

(3.)  Whether  the  genitive  or  the  ablative  of  quality  is  preferable  in  particu- 
lar cares,  can  frequently  be  determined  only  by  reference  to  classical  authority; 
but,  in  general,  the  genitive  is  used  more  frequently  to  express  inherent  quali- 
ties than  such  as  are  merely  accidental,  while  the  ablative  is  used  inditferently 
for  either  purpose.  In  speaking  of  transitory  qualities  or  conditions  the  abla- 
tive is  always  used;  as,  Magno  tinioi'e  sum,  I  am  in  gi-eat  fear.  Cic.  Bdnodnimx) 
ium.  Id.  Cluanto  fuerim  dolure  meministl.  Id.  Maximo  hdnore  Servius  TidUus 
irat.  Liv.  With  plural  substantives  the  genitive  is  rare ;  while  in  expressions 
Df  measure  it  is  used  rather  than  the  ablative. 

(4.)  An  accusative  instead  of  a  genitive  of  quality  is  used  with  secus  (sex), 
genus  and  potulo ;  as,  Llherorum  cdpiUim  virile  secus  ad  decern  m'dlia  capta,  i.  e. 
of  the  male  sex,  instead  of  sexiis  vlrUis.  Liv.  So  (jenus,  when  joined  with  a 
pronoun,  as  hoc,  id,  illud,  quod,  or  with  omne,  is  used  for  hfijiis,  ejus,  omnis,  etc., 
yeniii'is;  as,  OniHones  aut  dliquid  id  genus  sa-ibere, — of  that  kind.  Cic.  C<mc7'e- 
dire  nilgas  hoc  genus.  Hor.  So  pondo  is  joined  as  an  indeclinable  word  to  the 
accusatives  Ubram  and  Ubras ;  as.  Dictator  cdronam  auream  libram  pondo  in 
CdpUolio  Jovi  donum  pusuit,...a,  pound  in  weight.  Liv.    Cf.  §  236,  R.  7. 

(5.)  The  genitive  modi  with  aii  adjective  pronoun  supplies  the  place  of  a 
pronoun  of  quality;  as,  ciijusniddi  libri,  the  same  as  quales  libri,  what  kind  of 
books;  Itujusimdi  libri,  i.  e.  tales  libri,  such  books.  So,  also,  generis  is  used, 
but  less  frequently. 

(6.)  With  the  genitive  of  measure  are  often  comaected  such  ablatives  as 
hngitudine,  IdtUudlne,  etc.,  or  in  longitudinem,  etc. ;  as,  fossa  decern  pedum  Idtl- 
tudlne ;  but  the  genitive  does  not  depend  on  these  words. 

(7.)  Sum  may  be  followed  by  either  the  genitive  or  the  ablative  of  quality 
with  au  ellipsis  of  the  word  limited,  which,  with  the  genitive,  is  hdmo,  res,  nego- 
tium,  proprium  or  propi-ius,  etc.,  and  with  the  ablative,  prceditus,  instrucius, 
oi-ndtus,  etc.  Cf.  Rem.  8,  and  §§  244,  and  249,  I.. 

Rem.  7.  (1.)  The  limited  noun  is  sometimes  omitted;  as,  0  miserce  sortis! 
sell,  homines ;  0  (men)  of  wretched  fortune!  Lucan.  Ad  BidiUE,  soil,  cedem. 
Ter.  Hecloris  Andromache,  scil.  uxor.  Virg.  Suspicionis  vUandce,  sell,  causa.  Tac. 
So  fllius  or  fllia ;  as,  Hannibal  Gisgonis. 

(2.)  The  omitted  noun  may  sometimes  be  supplied  from  the  preceding  words ; 
as,  Cajum  jMcus  ?  an  Meliboei  f  Non  ;  verum  ^gonis,  scil.  pecus.  Virg.  An 
adjective  is  often  expressed  refen-ing  to  the  noun  omitted ;  as,  Nullam  virtus 
ukam  7ne7xcdem  dcs'idirnt,  prmter  hanc  (scil.  merccdem)  latulis.  Cic. 

Rem.  8.  The  limited  noun  is  often  wanting  in  the  predicate  of  a 
sentence  after  sum.     This  usually  happens, 

(1.)    When  it  has  been  previously  expressed  ;  as, 

HoiC  ddmus  est  Ccssdris,  This  house  is  Ccesar's.  Nortxen  aui-CB  tam  siepe  vdca^ 
Ifdtii  esse  2>utans  Nymphce.  Ovid.  Ndces  dnerdrias,  qudrvn  minor  nulla  erat  duum 
nillium  amphdrum,  i.  e.  gudrum  minor  nulla  erat  quam  i  avis  duum,  etc.  Cic. 

(2)  When  it  is  a  general  word  denoting  a  person,  an  anintal, 
»tc.    as, 

18* 


210  SYNTAX. — GENITIVE         TER   NOUNS.  §  211 

Thucydides,  qui  ejusdem  cetdtis  fuit,  scil.  hdmo,  Thncydides,  who  wfis  of  thf 
same  age.  Nep.  3Iultum  ei  detraxit,  qiuod  dlieiwe  erat  cirifdtis,  scil.  homo  or  clvis 
Id.  Prlmum  stipendlum  meruit  anndrum  decern  sepemque,  scil.  dddlescens.  Id. 
Summi  tit  sint  laboris  eficiunt,  scil.  (Mmalin.  Caes.  (  CImuUus)  somnl  bremssimi 
erat.  Suet.  Jiflra  sum  dlacritale.  Cic.  Vul(/us  ingeiiio  iiiobili  erat.  Sail.  Non 
est  juris  sui,  He  is  not  his  own  master.  Lucan.  PotestCdis  sucb  esse.  Li^. 
Sudrumque  rerum  erani.  Id.    Of.  Rem.  6,  (7.) 

(3.)  When  it  is  a  general  word  denoting  thing,  for  which,  in  Eng 
lish,  the  words  part,  property,  duty,  office,  business,  characteristic,  etc. 
are  commonly  supplied ;  as, 

Tementds  est  fidrentis  cetdtis,  prudentia  senectutis,  Rashness  is  (the  character- 
istic) of  youth,  prudence  of  old  age.  Cic.  Est  hoc  Galltca  consuctudlnis.  Cass. 
So,  stulmiie  est ;  est  Imtdtis,  etc.,  which  are  equivalent  to  stultitia  est,  levUas  eat. 
Omniti  hostiuiiL  era.nt.     A  paucis  emi,  quod  multorum  esset.  Sail. 

(a.)  This  happens  especially  when  the  siibject  of  the  verb  is  an  infinitive,  (ft 
an  entire  chmse,  in  which  case,  instead  of  the  genitive  of  the  personal  pront)uns, 
mi,  ttii,  etc.,  the  neuters  of  the  possessives,  meum,  tuum,  etc.,  are  used;  as, 
Adolescentis  est  mdjOres  ndtu  revereri,  It  is  (the  duty)  of  a  youtli  to  reverence 
the  aged.  Oviil.  'Ci'uusvis  hdminis  est  errare,  nidUus  nisi  inslpientis  in  errOre 
persiuiirdre.  Cic.  Pauperis  est  numerdre  p)ecus.  Ovid.  So  especially  7noris  est ; 
as,  Ne<jdvit  mOris  esse  Grcecortim,  ut  in  convivio  virOrum  accumberent  mulieres,  the 
same  "as  mdrem  esie  Grcecdrum.  Cic.  Nihil  tain  cequawlce  llbertdtis  esse.  Liv. 
So  when  the  verb  is  omitted;  T amen  officii  duxit,  exordre  jMtrem,  scil,  esse. 
Suet.     Non  est  mentiri  meum.  Ter.     Tuum  est,  M.  Culo,  videre  quid  dgdtur. 

(6.)  Instead  of  the  geuitive  of  a  substantive,  also,  the  neuter  of  a  possessive 
adjective  derived  from  it  is  sometimes  used;  as,  Humanum  est  errare.  To  err 
is  human.  Ter.     Ei  fdcere  et  pdii  fortia  Romanum  est.  Liv. 

(4.)  The  same  construction  sometimes  occurs  after  ytkio,  and  some  other 
TCrbs  mentioned  in  §  230,  esse  bein^uuderstood ;  as.  Asm  EOmdnorum  facia  est, 
Asia  became  (a  possession)  of  the  Romans.  Just.  Ayrmn  sua  ditioms  fecisse. 
Liv. 

(5.)  The  limited  noun  is  sometimes  wanting,^  when  it  is  a_  general  word, 
though  not  in  the  predicate  after  sum ;  as,  Migni  fornuca  Idboris,  scil.  animal. 
The  ant  (an  animal)  of  great  labor.  Hor.  So  Ei  vmit  in  mentem  p)6testdtis  turn 
scil.  mcmoria,  or  the  like.  Cic. 

Note.  When  the  noun  which  is  wanting  denotes  a  thing,  grammarians  scmetlmes  sup- 
ply nSgotimti,  officium,  mwms,  opus,  res,  causa,  etc.  It  is  an  instance  of  a  construc- 
tion common  in  Latin,  to  omit  a  noun  when  a  general  idea  is  intended.  See  §  205 
Kem.  7,  (2.) 

Rem.  9.    The  limiting  noun  also  is  sometimes  omitted;  as, 

Tria  millia,  scil.  passuum.  In  most  cases  of  this  kind,  an  a^'iective,  adjec- 
tive pronoun,  or  participle,  is  expressed  in  the  genitive. 

Rem.  10.  Two  genitives  sometimes  limit  the  same  noun,  one  of 
which  is  commonly  subjective,  and  the  other  objective;  as, 

Agamemnonis  belli  gloria,  Agamemnon's  glory  in  war.  Nep.  Illius  .idminit 
trdtio  provincire.  Cic.  Eorum  dierum  consuetUdine  itTneris  tiustri  exertitas  per- 
tpectd.  Cais.  Orbitas  reipublTcce  talium  virorum.  Cic.  Pro  veieribus  Helvetio- 
■rum  injuriis  popiili  Romani.  Cses. 

Rem.  11.  Opus  and  usus  are  rarely  limited  by  a  genitive  or  accusa- 
tive, but  generally  by  an  ablative,  of  the  thing  needed  ;  as. 

Argent!  opus  fuit,  There  was  need  of  money.  Liv.  Ad  consiliuni  pensnndum 
temporis  6pus  esse.  Id.  Prooemii  non  semper  Usus  est.  Quint.  Si  quo  opOra 
tfh-U'ii  I'isus  est.  Liv.  Puiro  dpus  est  cibum.  Plant.  Usui  esi  hcmlneiii  asiiUum. 
Id.     5  36^243. 


5  212.  SYNTAX. GENITIVE    AFTER   PARTITIVES.  211 

Rem.  12  The  relation  denoted  by  the  genitive  in  Latin,  is  gener- 
ally expressed,  in  Eng  ish,  by  of,  or  by  the  possessive  case.  Cf.  R.  2,  (Z*.) 
The  objective  genitive  may  often  be  rendered  by  some  other  prepo- 
sition ;  as, 

Eemedium  ddloris,  A  remedy  for  pain.  Injuria  pati-is,  Injury  to  a  father. 
Descensus  Averni,  The  descent  to  Avernus.  Ira  belli,  Anger  on  account  of  the 
war.    Potestas  rei.  Power  in  or  over  a  thing. 

Note.  Certain  limitations  of  nouns  are  made  by  the  accusative  with  a  prepositioa, 
and  bj  the  ablatiye,  either  with  or  without  a  preposition.     Cf.  j  202,  6,  I.  and  II. 

GENITIVE    AFTER    PARTITIVES. 

§  31S.  Nouns,  adjectives,  adjective  pronoims,  and  adveibs, 
denoting  a  part,  are  followed  by  a  genitive  denoting  the  wliolc ; 
as, 

Pars  c'lmtatis,  A  part  of  the  state.  Nulla  sdrorum,  No  one  of  the  sisters. 
Aliquis  phUdsuphorum,  Some  one  of  the  philosophers.  Quis  mortdlium  ?  Who  of 
mortals  V  Major  juvenum,  The  eider  of  the  youths.  Doctissimus  Romanonim, 
The  most  learned  of  the  Romans.  Multmn  pecunia,  Much  (of)  money.  Sdtia 
el6quenti(E,  Enough  of  eloquence.  Ubinani  gentium  sUmus?  Where  on  earth 
are  we  V 

Note.  The  genitive  thus  governed  denotes  either  a  number,  of  which  the  partitive  de- 
signates one  or  more  individuals ;  or  a  luhole,  of  which  the  partitive  designates  a  portion. 
In  the  latter  sense,  the  genitive  of  common  and  abstract  nouns  commonly  follows  either 
the  neuter  of  adjectives  and  adjective  pronouns,  or  adverbs;  and  that  of  material  nouns 
depends  on  substantives  signifying  quantity,  weight  or  measure;  as,  midimnum  tiilici, 
a  bushel  of  wheat;  libra  /arris  ;  jiigerum  agri;  magna  vis  auri. 

Remark  1.  Nouns  denoting  a  part  are  pars,  nemo,  7iihil,  etc.,  and 
also  nouns  denoting  measure,  weight,  etc. ;  as,  modius,  medimnum, 
and  libra  ;  as. 

Nemo  nostntm,  No  one  of  us.  J/aa;i7«a  ^ar-s  hominum.  Nihil  hunidndnm 
rerum.  Cic.     Dlmidium  militum.  Liv.    Medimnum  tntici.  Cic. 

Rem.  2.  Adjectives  and  adjective  pronouns,  denoting  a  part  of  a 
number,  including  partitives  and  words  used  partitively,  compara- 
tives, superlatives,  and  numerals,  are  followed  by  the  genitive  plural, 
or  by  the  genitive  singular  of  a  collective  noun. 

(1.)  Partitives  (§104,  9,);  as,  ullus,  nidlus,  solus,  alius,  titer,  Merque,  Utercwn- 
que,  iUervis,  Uterllbet,  neuter,  alter,  alteruter,  aliquis,  nuidnm,  quispiam,  quisquis, 
^iique,  quisquam,  qiucumque,  unusquisque,  quisf  qui?  quOt?  quotiis?  quodisquis- 
que  ?  tM,  aliquot,  nonnulU,  plerlque,  mulli,  pauci,  medius.  Tluts,  Quisquis  deOrnm. 
Whoever  of  the  gods.  Ovid.  Consilum  alter,  One  of  the  consuls.  Liv.  MuIIa 
itiminum,  Many  men.  Plin.  J-2  medius  juvenum  Ibat ;  i.  e.  between.  Ovid  For 
tlie  gender  of  adjectives  used  partitively,  see  §  205,  E.  12. 

(2.)  Words  used  partitively;  as,  Expedlli  militum,  The  light-armed  (of  tha) 
ftoldiers.  Liv.  Delecti  equitum  .  Id.  Veleres  Pomdnarum  diicum.  Veil.  Siijjeri 
deorum.  The  gods  above.  Hor.  Sancte  deoiiim.  Virg.  Dcgeneres  canum-  Plin. 
Piscium  fi'mitue.  Id. 

(3.)  Comparatives  and  superlatives;  as,  Doctior  jUvenum.  Oratorum  prcea- 
lantissimus.     E Hquentisslmus  Pomund)-vm.    Optimus  omnium. 

(4.)  Numerals,  both  cardinal  and  ordinal;  also  the  distributive  singuli;  as, 
Equituii  centum  quinqnar/inta  interfecti,  A  hun<lred  and  fifty  of  the  horsemen 
wjre  killid.  Curt,     adptentum  oetuvus.  Ilor.     Singitlos  veslrum.  Curt. 


?12  SYNTAX. GENITIVE    AFTER    PARTITIVES.  §  212, 

(5.)  The  meaning  is  often  nearly  the  same,  whether  the  partitive  ad.iective  agrees  in 
tase  and  number  with  a  noun,  or  takes  such  noun  after  it  a  the  genitive;  as,  DMtiish 
nws  ROmanomm,  or,  doctisshnus  Romanus :  Alter  consul  m,  or  alter  consul.  But  tbi. 
genitive  cannot  be  used,  when  the  adjective  includes  the  s  me  number  of  things  as  that 
of  which  the  whole  consists;  as,  Veniamus  ad  vivos,  qui  duo  supersunt ;  not  quorum 
duo,  since  these  are  all,  though  we  say  in  English,  '  of  whom  two  survive.' 

Note  1.  (a.)  The  comparative  with  the  genitive  denotes  one  of  two  individ- 
uals or  classes;  the  superlative  denotes  a  part  of  a  number  p^'eater  than  two; 
&?.,  Mdjo)- frdtriim,  The  elder  of  two  brothers.  Maximus  frciinmi,  The  eldest 
of  three  or  more. 

(i.)  lu  like  manner,  uier,  alter,  and  neuter,  generally  refer  to  two;  qiiis,  alius, 
and  mdlus,  to  a  whole  consisting  of  more  than  two ;  as,  Uter  nostrum  f  Which 
of  us  (two  ?)    Quis  vestnm  f  Which  of  you  (three  or  more '?) 

Note  2.  Nostrum  and  vestrum  are  used  as  partitive  genitives,  in  prefeience 
to  nost}-i  and  vestri,  and  are  always  joined  with  omnium  even  when  the  genitive 
is  a  subjective  one;  as,  Patria,  qua  communis  est  omnium  nostrum  parens.  Cic. 
But  vestrum  sometimes  occurs  in  other  connections  also  without  a  partitive 
meauing;  as,  Quis  er it  tarn  cupidus  vestrum.  Cic. 

Notes.  The  partitive  word  is  sometimes  omitted;  as,  F'les  nohiliumtu  qud- 
que  fontium,  sell.  unus.  Hor.   Centies  sestertium,  sell,  centena  millia. 

Note  4.  The  noun  denoting  the  whole,  after  a  partitive  word,  is  often  put 
in  the  ablative,  with  the  prepositions  de,  e,  ex,  or  in,  or  in  the  accusative,  with 
apud  or  inter  ;  as.  Nemo  de  iis.  Alt^r  ex  censorlbus.  Liv.  Unus  ex  multis.  Ci3. 
Acerrimus  ex  sensibus.  Id.  Thdles,  qid  sapientissUnus  in  septem  fidt.  Id. 
Primus  inter  omnes.  Virg  Crcesus  inter  reges  dpHlentissimus.  Sen.  Apud  Hel- 
vetios  nobilissimus. 

Note  5.  The  whole  and  its  parts  are  frequently  placed  in  apposition,  dis- 
tributively;  as,  Interfectores,  pars  in  /drum,  pars  SyrdcUsas  perrjunt.  Liv. 
See  ^  204,  R.  10. 

Note  6.  Cuncti  and  omnes,  like  partitives,  are  sometimes  followed  by  a  gen- 
itive plural;  as,  Attains  JIacedouum  fere  omnibus  persudsit,  Attalus  persuaded 
ahuost  all  the  Macedonians.  Liv.  Cunctos  hominiun.  Ovid.  Cunctas  proviuci- 
ai-um.  Plin. 

Note  7.  In  the  following  passage,  the  genitive  singular  seems  to  be  used  like 
that  of  a  collective  noun :  ^Tdtius  autem  ilijustitifB  nulla  cdpitdlior  est,  etc.  Cic. 
Off.  1,  13.  Tlte  phrase  Remnidlo  mddo  prdbdbilem  omnium  (Cic.  Nat.  Deor.  1, 
27,)  seems  to  be  used  for  Rem  nulh  omnium  mddorum  prdbdbilem. 

Rem.  3.  The  genitive  denoting  a  whole,  may  depend  on  a  neuter 
adjective  or  adjective  pronoun.  With  these  the  genitive  singular  is 
commonly  used ;  as. 

Plus  eloquenticB,  More  {oi)  eloquence.  Tantum  fidei.  So  much  fidehty.  la 
tempiris.  That  time.  Ad  hoc  mtdtis.  Sometimes  the  genitive  plural;  as,  Id 
misvridrum.  Ter.     ArmOrum  quantum.  Cajs. 

Note  1.  («.)  Most  neuter  adjectives  used  partitively  denote  quantity ;_  as, 
tantum,  quantum,  dliquantum,  plus,  minus,  minimum,  dimidium,  midtum,  nimium, 
paulum,  plUrimwii,  reliquum ;  with  the  compounds  and  diminutives,  iantUlum^ 
tantMuhm,  quantulum,  quantulumcumque,  etc. ;  to  which  add  medium,  summum, 
ultimum,  dliud,  etc.  The  pronouns  thus  used  al-e  hoc,  id,  ilUid,  istud,  idem,  quod, 
and  quid,  with  their  compounds,  d^iquid,  qiddqidd,  quippiam,  quidquam,  quod- 
cumque. 

(b.)  Most  of  these  adjectives  f..id  pronouns  may  either  agree  with  their 
nouns,  or  take  a  genitive;  but  the  latter  is  more  common.  Tantum,  quantum, 
iliquantum,  and  ;^tes,  when  they  denote  quantity,  are  used  with  a  genitive  only, 
as  are  also  qidd  and  its  compounds,  when  they  denote  a  part,  sort,  etc.,  and 
qu6d  in  the  sense  of  quantum.  Thus,  Quantum  crerit  N'diis,  tantum  sprii  i« 
i«-»iin»  Mi.  Sen.    Quid  mulieris  uxorem  hdbes  f  What  kind  of  a   woman...    Per. 


§212.  SYNTAX. — ^GENITIVE    AFTER    PARTITIVES.  213 

AUqitid  formss.  Cic.   Quid  hoc  rei  est  ?  What  does  this  mean?  Ter.   Quod  auri, 
qjwd  argenti,  qtiod  ornamentorum  fuit,  id  Vei-res  ahstulit. 

Note  2.  Neuter  adjectives  and  pronouns,  when  followed  by  a  genitive,  are 
to  be  accounted  substantives,  and  hi  this  construction  are  found  only  in  the 
nominative  and  accusative. 

Note  3.  Sometnnes  the  genitive  after  these  adjectives  and  pronouns  is  a 
neuter  adjective,  of  the  second  declension,  without  a  noun;  as,  Tantum  bOni, 
So  much  good.  Si  quid  habes  novi,  If  you  have  any  thing  new.  Cic.  Quid 
reliqtd  estf  Ter.  Nihil  is  also  used  with  such  a  genitive;  as.  Nihil  sinceri,  Nff 
sin  verity.  Cic.  This  construction  occurs  very  rarely  with  neuter  adjectives  in 
e  of  the  third  declension,  and  only  in  connection  with  neuters  of  the  second 
declension;  as,  Si  qiddquam  non  dico  ciYilis  sed  hUmdni  esset.  Liv. 

Note  4.  In  the  poets  and  in  the  prose  writers  later  than  Cicero,  neuter  ad- 
jectives hi  the  plural  number  are  sometimes  followed  by  a  genitive,  either  sin- 
gular or  plural,  with  a  partitive  signification;  an,  Extrema  irnpet-ii,  The  fron- 
tiers of  the  empire.  Tac.  Pontes  et  viarum  angusta,  The  bridges  and  the  nar- 
row parts  of  the  roads.  Id.  Opdca  Idcorum.  Virg.  Antlqua  fosderum.  Liv 
Cuncta  camporum.  Tac.  Exercent  colles,  atqiie  horum.  asperrima  pascunt.  Vu"g 
Cf.  ^  205,  K.  9. 

Rem.  4.  The  adverbs  sat,  satis,  parum,  mmis,  abunde,  larglter, 
affutiin,  and  parlun,  used  partitively,  are  often  followed  by  a  geni- 
tive ;  as, 

Sat  rationis,  Enough  of  reason.  Virg.  Satis  eldquentice,  pariim  sdpientite, 
Enough  of  eloquence,  (yet)  but  little  wisdom.  Sail.  Niynis  insidiarum.  Cic. 
Tvrroris  et  fraudis  dounde  est.  Virg.  Auri  et  argenti  largiter.  Plant.  Coj/idi-um 
affatim.  Liv.   Quum  partim  illdrum  mihi  fdmilidrissimi  essent.  Cic. 

Note  1.  The  above  words,  though  generally  adverbs,  seem,  in  this  use,  rather 
to  be  nouns  or  adjectives. 

Note  2.  (a.)  The  genitives  gentium,  terrdrum,  Idci,  and  Idcorum,  with  certain 
adverbs  of  place,  strengthen  their  meaning;  as,  Usquam  terrdrum.  Just.  Usquam 
gmtitim.  Any  where  whatever.  Plant.  Ubi  terrdrum  sumusi  Where  in  the 
world  are  we  V  Cic.  Ahlre  quo  terrdrum  possent.  Liv.  Ubi  sit  Idci.  Plin.  I'M 
l6ci,  equivalent  to  eo  loco,  In  that  place.  Tac.  Eddem  loci  res  est.  Cic.  Nescire 
quo  loci  essei.  Id.  But  the  last  three  examples  might  perhaps  more  properly 
be  refeiTcd  to  Eem.  3. 

(b.)  The  adverbs  of  place  thus  used  are  tibi,  ftbinam,  itUcumque,  Obii'tbi,  ubivis, 
ubique,  unde,  usquam,  nusquam,  quo,  quocumque,  qudvis,  quoquo.  dliquo,  hie,  hue, 
eo,  eddem.  i^cj  also  occurs  after  ibi  and  ibidem;  gentium  ahcr  kmge ;  as,  Itn 
Idci,  In  that  place.  Plin.  Abes  longe  gentium.  Cic.  So,  minime  gentium,  By  no 
means.  Ter.  Vicinice  in  the  genitive  is  used  by  the  comic  writers  after  hic'uni 
hue;  as,  Hie  proxinuEVicinice.  Plant.     Hue  viciniie.  Ter.    Cf.  ^  221,  R.  3,  (4.) 

Note  3.  Hue,  eo,  quo,  when  used  figuratively  to  express  a  degree,  are  joined 
also  with  other  genitives;  as,  £0  insolentise  f urorisq ne  pi-ocessit,  He  advanced 
to  such  a  degree  of  insolence  and  madness.  Plin.  Hue  enim  m-rdOrum  ventum 
ttt.  Curt.  //^!<ca'ne  renmi  tv;niw?«?  Have  we  come  to  this  y  Pers.  EormneilA- 
rum  venire.  To  such  a  pitch  of  misery.  S.all.    Quo  amentisB  progressi  silis.  i,iv. 

Note  4.  The  genitives  Idci,  Idcoi-um,  and  tempdris,  appear  to  be  redundant 
aftJT  'he  aJ verbs  adhtic,  inde,  interea,  postea,  turn,  and  tunc,  in  expressions  de- 
noting time;  as,  Adhuc  lOcdrum,  Till  now.  Plant.  Inde  loci,  After  that.  Lucr. 
Interea  'Jei,  In  the  mean  time.  Ter.  Posten  Idci,  Afterwards.  Sail.  Tian  tem- 
pdris, and  tune  tempdris.  At  that  time.  Jtist.  Ldcdrum  also  occurs  after  id^ 
denoting  time;  as,  Adidlocdrum,  Up  to  that  time.  Sail.    Cf.  R.  3. 

Note  5.  When  the  genitive  ejus  occurs  after  quoad,  in  such  connections  as 
the  following:  Quo'ul  ejusfdcere  pdteris.  pic;  or  passively,  Quoad  ejtu  Jifrt 
vossit,  A»  far  as  may  be.  Cic. ;  the  I'jus  refers  to  the  preceding  clause;  Uterally 
as  much  ^fit  a«  possible. 


214  SYNTAX. GENITIVE    AFTER    ADJECTIVES.  §  213 

Note  6.  Prldie  and  postridie,  though  reckoned  adverbs,  aie  followed  by  a 
genitive,  depending  on  the  noun  (?jes  contained  in  them;  as,  Pridie  ejus  dici, 
lit.  On  the  day  before  that  day,  i.  e.  The  day  before.  Cic.  Fndie  insididrum, 
The  day  before  the  ambush.  Tac.  Postrldie  ejus  diet,  The  next  day.  Cass. 
When  they  are  followed  by  an  accusative,  ante  or  post  is  understood.  Cf. 
(j  238,  1,  (M 

Note  7.  Adverbs  in  the  superlative  degree,  like  their  adjectives,  are  follow- 
ed by  a  genitive ;  as,  Optime  omnium.  Best  of  all.  Cic. 

GENITIVE    AFTER    ADJECTIVES. 

§  S(3.  A  noun,  limiting  the  meaning  of  an  adjective,  is  put 
in  the  objective  genitive,  to  denote  the  relation  expressed  in 
Enghsh  by  of,  in,  or  in  respect  to  ;  as, 

Avidus  laudis,  Desirous  of  praise.        Plena  tlmoris.  Full  of  fear. 

Ap/Jetens  gloriin^  Ea,s^er  for  glory.         Egcnus  hquss,  Destitute  of  ivater. 

3/e?;io?- v'u-tutis,  Mindful  o/'w-^we.  iJoctMS  fandi.  Skilful  m  s^jea^m^. 
So,  Nescia  mens  f  ati,  The  mind  ignorant  in  regard  to  fate.^  Virg.  Impdtena 
ii-se,  lit.  Powerless  in  respect  to  anger,  i.  e.  unable  to  control  it.  Liv.  Homines 
expertes  veritatis,  Men  destitute  of  truth.  Cic.  Lactis  abandans,  Abounding 
in  milk.  Virg.  Terra  fh-ax  arborum,  Land  productive  of  trees.  Plin.  _  Tinax 
propositi  m-,  A.  m-An  te\vACio\\%  of  his  purpose.  Hor.  ^//er  animi.  Sick  mmiW. 
Liv.  L6ms  medius  Jiiguli  summique  lacerti,  i.  e.  between.  Ovid.  Morum  di- 
versus.  Tac.  Ojm-um  sdlutus.  Hor.  Liber  laborum.  Id.  Integer  vitse  scelerisjMe 
purus,  Upright  in  life,  and  free  from  ^mckedness.  Hor.  Vini  pollens  Liber.  Plaut. 

From  the  above  examples,  it  will  be  seen  that  the  genitire  after  an  adjective  is  some- 
times translated  by  other  words  besides  of,  in,  or  in  respect  to,  though  the  relation  which 
It  denotes  remains  the  same.    Cf.  211,  R.  12. 

Remakk  1.  The  following  classes  of  adjectives,  which,  as  denoting  a  relation 
to  a  thing,  are  caUed  relative  adjectives  (§  104,  13),  are  frequently  limited  by  a 
genitive;"  viz.  (1.)  Verbals  in  ax;  as,  ccipax,  edax,  ferax,  fUgax,  jiervicax, 
tenax,etc. — (2.)  Participials  in  ns,  and  a  few  in  <ms,  with  their  com- 
pounds; as,  amans,  appeteris,  ciipiens,  efflciens,  patiens,  impdtiens,  siiiens; — con- 
sultus,  doctus,  sdlutws.—(3.)  Adjectives  denoting  desire  or  aversion;  as, 
avarus,  avidus,  ciipidus,  stMiosus  ;  fastldiosus  :—p  a  r  ticipat  i  on ;  as,  particeps, 
affinis,  consors,  exsors,  expers,  inops  : — k  nowledge,  experience,  capac- 
ity, and  their  contraries;  as,  callidus,  compos,  conscius,  gnurus,  ignarus,  peri- 
iiis,  impcritxis,  impos,  jMens,  impdtens,  prUdens,  imprUdens,  exjjertus,  inexpertus, 
cms-ius,  inscius,  nescius,  insdlens,  insOlitus,  insuetus,  riidis,  sollers: — memory 
&nd  for  getf  Illness;  as,  me  mar,  immemor,  etc.: — certainty  and  doubt, 
ns,certus,  incerius,  auibigmis,  dubius,  suspensus: — care  and  neglig  ence;  as, 
anxius,  sollicitus,  prorirlus,  improvidus,  sec  ar  us -.—fear  and  confidence, 
as,  ]}dvidus,  timidus,  trcpidiis,  imjimndus,  fldens,  interrUus: — guilty  and  inno- 
cence; as,  noxius,  reus,  suspectus,  compertus,  manifesius,  innoxius,  inndcent, 
insons : — p  lenty  and  want ;  as,  abtmdans,  plenus,  dives,  sdius,  largus,  inops, 
egenus  iiu'mis,  pauper,  parcus,  sdlUtus,  vactms. 

(a.)  In  the  poets  and  later  prose  writers,  many  other  adjectives,  particularly 
those  which  express  mental  emotions,  are  in  like  manner  limited  by  a_genitive_, 
especially  by  dnimi,  ingenii,  mentis,  tree,  miliiice,  belli,  Idboris,  rerum,  avi,  fUturt, 
morum,  and  fidei. 

Rem.  2.  The  limiting  genitive,  by  a  Greek  construction,  sometimes  denotes 
a  cause  or  source,  especially  in  the  poets;  as,  Lassus  maris,  et  viarum,  militiae- 
mce.  Hor.  Fessus  vice.  Stat.  Fessus  maris.  Hor.  Attdmtus  serpentis.  Sil.  Mens 
mterrila  leti.  Ovid. 

Rkm.  3.  Participles  in  ns,  when  used  as  such,  take  after  them  the  same  case 
as  the  verbs  from  which  they  are  derived;  as,  Se  amam.  Loving  \umself.  Cic- 
Mare  terram  a^Qietens.  Id. 


5  213.      SYNTAX. GENITIVE  AFTER  ADJECTIVES.       216 

Rem.  4.  Instead  of  the  genitive,  denoting  q/",  in,  or  in  resptct  to.  a 
different  construction  is  sometimes  used  after  many  of  these  adje«  - 
lives;  as, 

(1.)  An  infinitive  or  a  subjunctive  clause;  as,  Certus  Ire,  Determined  to  go, 
Ovid.  Cantare  perlti.  Virg.  Fellcior  unguere  tela.  Id.  Anxitis  quid  factfl 
opus  sit.  Sail.  Vire  memor  quain  sis  £evi  brevis.  Hor. — So  alimus,  dvidus, 
calfidus,  ciipidus,  firmus,  frequens,  gndrus,  impdtens,  inops,  latus,  largus,  liber, 
pollens,  memor,  dubius,  etc. 

(2.)  An  accusative  with  a  preposition;  as,  Ad  rem  avidior.  Ter.  Avidus  in 
liireptiones.  Liv.  Animus  cdpax  ad  prcecepta.  Ovid.  Ad  casum  fortiinamy!<« 
felix.  Cic.  Ad  fraudem  callidus.  Id.  Dlligens  ad  custodiendum.  Id.  Neglt- 
iftntior  in  patrem.  Just.  Vir  ad  disciplinam  periius.  Cic.  Ad  bella  rudis.  Liv. 
Fotens  in  res  bellicas.  Id.  Aldcer  ad  maleficia.  Cic.  Inter  bellum  et  pacem 
nihil  vu'diuiii  est.  Id. — So  with  rd,  fertllis,  firmus,  infirmus,  pdtens,  stenlis,  etc.— 
with  in,  a'lpidi/s,  parens,  pdtens,  prodigus^tGtc. 

(3.)  An  accusative  without  a  preposition,  chiefly  in  the  poets;  as,  A'urfas 
membra,  Bare  as  to  his  limbs.  Virg.  Os,  humerosOT(e  deo  similis  Id.  Cetera 
fidriis.  Hor.    Cuucta  pollens.  Sen.  Ag.     See  §  234,  11. 

(4.)  An  ablative  with  a  preposition;  as,  Avidus  in  pecuniis,  Eao;er  m  re- 
gard to  money.  Cic.  Anxius  de  fama.  Quint.  Rudis  m  jure  clvili.  Cic.  Peri- 
tus  de  agricultura  \'an\  PrUdens  in  jure  clvili.  Cic.  Reus  de  vi.  Id.  Piirut 
ab  cultu  hUmdno.  Liv.  Certior  factus  de  re.  Cic.  Sollieitus  de  re.  Id.  Super 
scelere  siispectus.  Sail.  Inups  ab  ainicis.  Cic.  Pauper  in  sere.  Hor.  Mudictu 
in  cultu.  Plin.  Ab  aquis  stenlis.  Apul.  Copiosus  a  fiiimento.  Cic.  Ab  equltatu 
firmus.  Id.  So  with  in,  immddlcus,  parous,  uber : — with  ab,  dlienus,  bedtus,  ex- 
tor  ris,  immunis,  inops,  liber,  nddus,  orbiis,  vdcutis. 

(5.)  An  alilative  without  a  preposition;  as,  Arte  I'udis,  Rude  in  art.  Ovid. 
Regni  crimine  insoiis.  Liv.  Compos  mente.  Virg.  PrUdens  consillo.  Just.  jEger 
pedibus.  Sail.  Prcestans  higenio.  Cic.  Mddicus  severitate.  Tac.  Nihil  Lnsl- 
diis  vacuum.  Cic.  Amor  et  melle  et  telle  est  fecundisdmus.  Plant.  Medina  Pol- 
luce  et  Castore.  Ovid.     Cf.  Rem.  5. 

In  many  Instances,  the  signification  of  the  accusative  and  ablative  after  adjectlTea  dif- 
fers, in  a  greater  or  less  degree,  from  that  of  the  genitiye. 

Rem.  5.  As  many  of  the  adjectives,  which  are  followed  by  a  genitive,  admit  of  other 
constructions,  the  most  common  use  of  each,  with  particular  nouns,  can,  in  general,  be 
determined  only  by  recourse  to  the  dictionary,  or  to  the  classics.     Some  have, 

(1.)  The  genitive  only;  as,  benignus,  capnx,  exsors,  impos,  impdtens,  insdtid- 
bilis,  irriiiis,  liberdlis,  mddicus,  mUnifiicus,  prcelargus,  and  many  others. 

(2.)  The  genitive  more  frequently;  as,  compos,  consors,  egenus,  exherei, 
expers,  fiertilie,  indigus,  inops,  parens,  partlceps,  pauper,  prodigus,  prosper, 
stenlis. 

(3.)  The  genitive  or  ablative  indifferently ;  as,  dives,  fecundv^,  fer ax,  im- 
mtunis,  indnis,  immodicus,  jejunus,  largus,  nimiiis,  dpHlentus,  periius,  plenus,  pd- 
tens, pUrus,  refertus,  s&tur,  uber,  vacuus. 

(4.)  The  ablative  more  frequently;  as,  dbundans,  dlienus,  cassus,  copiosus, 
ijif'i  irris,  firmus,  fictus,  frequens,  grdvidus,  gravis,  infirmus,  liber,  Idcuples,  Icetua, 
vu-utiis,  nudus,  onuslus,  orbus,  pollens,  satidtus,  truncus,  vdlidus,  ridmis. 

(5.)   The  ablative  only;  as,  bedtus,  creber,  densus,  mutilus,  tumidus,  turgtebu. 

Vor  the  ablative  after  many  of  the  preceding  adjectives,  see  §  250. 

Rkm.  G.  Some  adjectives  usually  limited  by  a  dative,  sometimes  take  a  gen- 
itive instead  of  the  dative;  as,  similis,  dissimills,  etc.    See  §  222,  R.  2. 

Kem.  7.  Many  adjectives  in  addition  to  the  genitive  or  ablative  denoting  ofi 
or  in  respect  to,  take'  also  another  case  to  express  a  different  relation ;  as.  Mens 
BlLi  ionscia  recti.  Cf.  §  222,  R.  3.  Conscius  has  also  sometimes  the  dative  in- 
Btoad  of  the  genitive  of  the  thing ;  as,  conscius  huic  facInOri.  Cic. 


216  SYNTAX. GENITIVE    AFTER    VERBS.  §  214. 


GENITIVE    AFTER    VERBS 

§  214.  Sum,  and  verbs  of  valuing,  are  followed  by  a  geni- 
tive, denoting  degree  of  estimation  ;  as, 

A  me  argentum,  quanta  est^  sumito,  Take  of  me  so  much  money  as  (he)  is 
worth.  Ter.  Magni  cestimdbat  pecuidam,  He  valued  money  greatly.  Cic.  Ager 
nunc  pluris  est,  quaiii  tunc  fuit.  Id.  Tanti  est,  It  is  worth  so  much;  and,  abso- 
lutely. It  is  worth  while.  Cic.     Hiijus  non  facio,  I  dou't  care  that  for  it. 

Rfmark  1.  (a.)  Verbs  of  valuing  are  joined  with  the  genitive, 
when  the  value  is  expressed  in  a  general  or  indefinite  manner  by  : — 

(1.)  A  neuter  adjective  of  quantity;  as,  tanti,  quanti,  pluris,  minorih ,  magni, 
permnyni,  jilurimi,  mnximi,  minlmif  parvi,  tant'idem,  quantlcumque,  quantlvii, 
quantihbet,  but  only  very  rarely  mulli  and  majoris. 

(2.)  The  nouns  assis,  fiocci,  nauci,  niliili,  piU,  teruncii,  and  alsc  pend  and 
hufus. 

(h.)  But  if  the  price  or  value  of  a  thing  is  a  definite  sum,  or  is  ex- 
pressed by  a  substa/ilive,  other  than  assis,  fiocci,  etc.,  it  is  put  in  the 
ablative.    Cf.  §  252. 

Rem.  2.  The  verbs  of  valuing  are  cestimo,  existimo,  duco,  fidcio,  flo,  habeo, 
pendo,  pido,  dejmto,  taxo.  Thus,  Ut  quanti  quisque  se  ipse  fdciat,  tanti  fVit  an 
amicis,  That  as  much  as  each  one  values  himself,  so  much  he  should  be  valued 
by  his  friends.  Cic.  Sed  quia  parvi  id  dUceret.  Id.  Honores  si  magni  non  jmie- 
mus.  Id.    Non  assis  facts  f  Catiill.     Neque  quod  dixi,  fiocci  txistimat.  Plant. 

Note  1.  (a.)  TM  jihrase  cequi  bdni,  or  mqui  bdnique  fid cio,  or  co7isido,  I  take 
a  thing  in  good  part,  am  satisfied  with  it,  may  be  classed  with  genitives  of  value ; 
as,  iVbs  ajqui  hornque  fidctmus.  Liv.  Ho,  Boni  cons&luit  Plin. — (b.)  A  genitive 
of  price  is  joined  also  to  cceno,  hdhito,  cloceo,  etc. ;  as,  quanti  hdbitas  f  what  rent 
do  you  pay  for  yom-  house  or  lodging  ?  quanti  ddcet  f  what  are  his  terms  in 
teaching? 

Note  2.  After  cestbno,  the  ablatives  magno,  permagno,  purvo,  nlliilo,  are 
sometimes  used  instead  of  the  genitive;  as.  Data  magno  lestimns,  accepta 
parvo.  Sen.  Pvo  wiAifo,  also,  occm-s  after  rfuoo, /w6eo,  and  j^iito  ,•  and  w'/uV  with 
CBStimo  and  mdror.  Cf.  §  231,  R.  5. 

Note  3.  The  neuter  adjectives  above  enumerated,  and  hujws,  may  be  refer- 
red to  a  noun  understood,  as  jji-etii,  ceris,  jmideris,  momenti ;  and  may  be  con- 
sidered as  limiting  a  preceding  noun,  also  understood,  and  denoting  some  per- 
son or  thing;  as,  ^stlmo  te  magni,  i.  e.  hdminem  magni  p)retii.  Scio  ejus  orainis 
auciorltdtem  semper  dpud  te  magni  fiuisse,  i.  e.  rem  magni  momenti.  'fhe  words 
iusis,  etc.,  may  also  be  considered  as  depending  on  an  omitted  noun;  as,  pretio, 
rexi,  etc. 

Rem.  3.  Statements  of  price,  also,  zvhen  cjeneral  or  indefinite,  are 
]>tt  in  the  genitive  after  verbs  of  buying,  selling,  letting,  and  hiring , 
ns, 

Mercdtores  non  tantidem  vendunt,  quanti  emcrunt.  Cic.  Nulla  pestis  humdno 
generi  pliiris  sti'tit,  quam  Ira.  Sen. 

Note  1.  Verbs  of  buying,  selling,  etc.,  are  emx>,  vendo,  the  neutral  passive, 
veneo,  consto,  prosto,  and  liceo,  to  be  exposed  for  sale. 

Note  2.  With  verbs  of  buying,  selling,  etc.,  the  ablatives  magno,  permagno, 
plurinw,  j)arvo,  mini nto,  nuA  nihilo  axe  often  used  instead  of  the  genitive;  as, 
Non  potest  parvo  res  7iiagnaconstdre.  Sen.  Quanti  emere  possum  mimmo  V  What 
is  the  lowest  price  I  can  buy  at?  Plaut.  Sometimes  also  the  adverbs  ctire 
\iene,  and  mate  taka  the  place  of  the  genitive  tr  ablative  of  price. 


§215,210.  STNTAX. GENITIVE    AFTER    VERBS.  217 

§  ^15.  (1.)  Misereor,  miseresco,  and  ine  imper^onals  mtse- 
ret,  poenitet,  pudet,  t/edet,  and  plget,  are  followed  by  a  genitive 
of  the  object  in  respect  to  which  the  feeling  is  exercised ;  as, 

Miseremini  socidrum,  Pity  the  allies.  Cic.  Miserescile  n'gis,  Pity  the  king. 
Y'xtg.  Meamdier,  tui  me  tniseret,  raei  pi  get,  I  pity  vou,  and  am  dissatisfied 
with  myself.  Ace.  Eos  iueptiiinimj9QS«!<ef.  Cic.  I'^ratris  vie  2)iidet  pUjetnue. 
Ter.  Me  c'tnthtis  morum  pUjCt  hedetque.  Sail.  So  the  compoimd  dhtaedei;  Baud 
quod  tui  we,  7icr/ue  domi  dishedeat.  Plant.;  and  the  passive;  Numguam  suscepti 
negutii  ettm  pertcesnm  est.  Nep.  Lentitiidinis  eorum  jjerkesa.  Tac.  Miseri- 
turn  est  me  tuurum  foi-tunarum.  Ter.  CAve  te  f)-atiiim  miseredtur.  Cic.  Fudet 
(me)  dednim  hominnnique,  I  am  filled  with  shame  in  reference  both  to  goa» 
aiid  men.  Liv. 

Note  1.  Jfi"5e?'6sc«i  is  sometimes  used  in  the  same  manner  as  mi  sere  f ;  aa, 
Nii:w  te  miserescnt  mei.  Ter.  Misereo,  as  a  personal  verb,  also,  occurs  with  a 
genitive;  as,  Ipse  Rui  misei-et.  Lucr. 

Rkmakk.  The  genitive  after  the  above  impersonals  seems  to  depend  on  some 
genfr:U  word  constituting  the  grammatical  subject  of  such  verbs,  and  signify- 
ing, mrilter,  business,  /(let,  case,  circumstances,  conduct,  character,  etc.,  cf  §  211, 
R.  8,  (3);  anil  §  209,  R.  3,  (4.)  Instead  of  the  genitive  with  its  omitted  noun, 
an  infinitive  or  clause  with  quod  or  with  an  interrogative  particle  is  sometimes 
used  as  a  subject;  as,  A'b?t  me  hoc  jam  dlcOre  pudtbit.  Cic.  Non  pvenitet  me 
quantum  iJrOf  (-cerini,  I  am  not  dissatisfied  with  my  progi'ess.  Id.  These  verbs 
nave  also  sometimes  a  nominative  ;  as.  Me  quidem  hoec  conditio  noii  poenitet. 
Plant.     Non  te  hsec  pudent  ?  Ter. 

NoTK  2.  Miseret  occurs  with  an  accusative  of  the  object,  instead  of  a  geni- 
tive ;  as,  Memdemi  vicem  miseret  me.  Ter.  So,  also,  Pertcesus  Ignaviam  suam. 
Snet. 

Note  3.  {a.)  These  impersonals,  as  active  verbs,  take  also  an  accusative  of 
the  person  exercising  the  feeling  which  they  express.  See  §  229,  R.  6. — 
(6.)  And  sometimes  also  the  accusative  of  the  neuter  pronouns  and  of  nifiily 
denoting  to  what  degree  the  feelings  are  exercised;  as,  Seqmtur  ut  nihil  {sdpie»- 
tern,)  pcenitent.  Cic.    Cf.  §  232,  (3.) 

(2.)   Sdtdgo  is  sometimes  followed  by  a  genitive  denoting  in 

what  respect ;  as, 

Is  satagit  rerum  suarum.  He  is  busily  occupied  with  his  own  affairs.  Ter. 
This  compound  is  often  written  separately,  and  in  either  case  the  genitive 
Bcems  to  depend  upon  sat.  See  §  212,  R.  4.  Agito,  with  sat,  m  like  manner,  ig 
followed  by  a  genitive ;  as,  Nunc  dgitas  sat  tide  tudrum.  reruin.  Plaut. 

§  SIO.     Recordor,  memini,  reminiscor,   and   obliviscor,  are 

followed  by  a  genitive  or  accusative  of  the  object  remembered 

lA  forgotten ;  as, 

Flagitiorum  sudrum  recorddbltur.  Cic.  Omnes  gi-adus  wtdtis  rlcordor  twB. 
I  call  to  mind  all  the  periods  of  your  life.  Id.  Memlni  vivorum,  I  am  mindful 
')f  the  living.  Id.  Numeros  memini,  I  remember  the  measure.  Virg.  Jii-miniscx 
vetiris  f  am£e.  Nep.  Dulces  moriens  remlniscUar  Argos.  Virg.  Riminisci  ami- 
cos.  Ovid.  Obl'dus  sui.  Virg.  Lijuriarum"  obllviscitur.  Nep.  Obliviscor  iiijurias. 
Cic.   Obllriscere  Graios.  Virg. 

Rem.\rk  1.  (rt.)  When  the  thing  remembered  or  forgotten  is  expressed  by 
a  neuter  pronoun  or  adjective,  it  is  always  put  in  the  accusative.  An  accusa- 
tive of  the  person  with  these  verbs  is  unusual,  except  that  mimini,  when  re- 
ferring to  a  contemporary  always  takes  an  accusative  of  the  person;  as,  Cin- 
nam  wmini.   Cic. 

U 


218  SYNTAX. GENITIVE    AFTER    VERBS.  §217. 

{b.)  An  infinitive  or  a  dependent  clause  sometimeB  follows  Iheie  verbs;  as 
Memeiito  mihi  stippetias  ferre.  Plant.  Esse  qudque  infatis  remiiiiscitur,  aflcm 
tempus,  quo  mare,  etc.  Ovid.  Obllti  quid  dt-cea''  Hor.  Memini  tc  scribera 
Cic.    Quas  sum  passiira  recordoi:  Ovid. 

Rem.  2.  Recordoi'  and  memini,  to  remember,  ai?  sometimes  followed  by  aj 
ablative  with  de;  as,  Pellmus  ui  de  suis  liberis  recordentur.  Cic.  De  palla  tm 
men  to.  Plaut. 

Rem.  3.  Mhmni,  signifying  to  make  mention  of,  has  a  genitive,  or  an  abla 
tive  with  ffe ;  us,  Neqiie  hiijjts  rei  viemtnit.poeta.  Quint.  Meministi  de  6:^3^1 
bus.  Cic.  With  venit  mihi  in  mentem,  the  person  or  thing  may  be  made  tlii 
subject  of  venit;  as,  Misirm  ubi  viinit  in  mentem  mortis  metus.  Plaut.  Venit  ho* 
mihi  in  tnentcm ;  or  an  infinitive  or  subjunctive  clause  may  supply  the  plact 
of  the  subject: — for  the  genitive  with  this  phrase,  as  in  Sdlet  mild  in  menten 
venire  illius  tempdris,  see  ^  211,  R.  8,  (6.)  The  genitive  with  recordor  is  very 
rare. 

§  217.     Verbs  of  accusing,  convicting,  condemning,  and  ao 

qnittiiig,  with  the  accusative  of  the  person,   are   followed  by  t 

genitive  denoting  the  crime  ;  as, 

Arguit  me  furti.  He  charges  me  mth  theft.  Alterum  accOsat  probri,  He  ao 
cuses  another  of  villany.     Meipsum  inertias  condemno.  Cic. 

Remark  1.  (a.)  To  this  rule  belong  the  verbs  of 

Accusing;  accuso,  ago,  nrcegso,  argvo,  ciio,  drfero,  incr<:po,  incUso,  inxtmulo 
posiiilo,  and  more  rarely  aUigo,  anquiro,  astringo,  capto,  increpito,  urgeo,  inter- 
rdgo,  renin  ago  or  fdcio,  dlicui  diem  dlco,  cum  cUiquo  ago. — C  o  n  v  i  c  t  i  n  g  ;  con- 
vinco,  cod rguo, pre)iendo,  tihieor,  obstringor,  obligor.— C  o  n  d  e  m  n  i  n  g  ;  damno,  con- 
demno, iiifdmo,  and  more  rarelj'  jiidico,  716I0,  plector. — Acquitting  ;  absolvo, 
libi'ro,  piirgo,  and  rarely  solro.  lo  the  verbs  of  accusing,  etc.,  may  be  added 
the  adjectives  denoting  guilt  and  innocence,  which  likewise  take  a  genitive. 
Cf.  §  21.3,  R.  1,  (3.) 

(b.)  The  genitives  which  follow  these  verbs  are,  avdacim,  araritim,  ccedis, 
faki,  furti,  igndvi<e,  inqjieldti.'^,  injuriarum,  levritdtiB,  majcstdiis,  maleficii,  niendd- 
cii,  parricidii,  peccdii,  peci'ddtus,  probri,  proditionis,  rei  cdpitdlis,  repelundarum, 
stY'/er/.-i,  atidtitice,  temeritdli^,  timoris,  vdnitdtis,  veiuficii,  etc. 

Hem.  2.  («.)  Instead  of  the  genitive,  an  ablative  with  de  is  often  used  after 
accUno,  dfero,  anquiro,  arguo,  postido,  damno,  condemno,  absolvo,  and  j^^i-^'go ;  as, 
^(  ( H.<(?/'e  de  negligentia.  Cic.  De  vi  condemndii  sunt.  Id.  De  repetundis  est 
jKistfddtus.  Id.  Sometimes  with  in,  after  accUso,  coarguo,  comnnco,  teneor,  and 
dipreluridor ;  as,  In  quo  te  accMSO  (Cic);  and  after  libera,  w'lih.  a  or  ab ;  as, 
A  scehrc  liberdti  sUinus.  Cic.  Accuso  and  damno  with  inter  occur  in  the 
phrases  inter  sicdrios  accusdre,  etc.,  to  charge  with  assassination. 

(6.)  With  some  of  the  above  verbs,  an  ablative  witboixt  a  preposition  is  often 
used;  as,  Liberdre  culpa.  Cic.  Crimen  quo  argui  posset.  Nep.  ProccMsHleM 
postiildverat  repctundis.  Tac.  This  luippens  especially  with  general  words  de- 
noting crime ;  as,  scelus,  mdleficium,  j^eccdtum,  etc. ;  as,  ikfe  peccato  solvo.  LiVt 
The  ablatives  crimine  and  nomine,  without  a  preposition,  are  often  inserted  be- 
''ore  the  genitive;  as,  Arcessere  dliquem  cnmine  avdjitUs.  Liv.  Nomine  scelerit 
cimjurdtionisque  damnati.  Cic. ;  and  when  not  sc  inserted  they  are  to  be  under- 
stood. 

(f.)  Sometimes  a  clause  takes  the  place  of  J;he  genitive;  as,  Eum  accusdbarti 
quod  societatem  fecisset.  Nep.  So  the  infinitive  with  the  accusative.  Quidi 
quod  me — arguit  serum  accessisse  ?  Ovid. 

Rem.  3.  (a.)  The  punishment  is  commonly  expressed  by  the  genitive;  as, 
capitis,  mortis,  multic,  pecunicB,  quadrupU,  octupli ;  but  sometimes  by  the  abla^ 
tive;  as,  cdpite,  viorte,  midtd,  pecunid:  and  always  by  this  case  when  a  definit* 
6um  iB  mentioned;  ae,  f *«"•»« '««»  millibus  w)'is  :  or  the  accnsative  with  ad  or  »n, 


§218,219.  SYNTAX. GENITIVE    A.PTER    VERBS.  219 

as,  ad  pcenam,  ad  bestias,  ad  metalla,  in  metallum,  in  expensas ; — sonietiia6s 
thougli  rarely,  in  the  poets,  by  the  dative;  as,  Dnmndtus  morti.  l^ucr.— ■ 
(b.)  Voti  or  voldrum,  And  less  frequently  voto  or  votis  damndri,  signities  'to  be 
condemned  to  fulfil  one's  vow,'  and  is  consequently  equivalent  to  '  to  obtain 
what  one  wishes.'  So  also  in  the  active  voice,  Damndbii  tu  qvoqiit  votis.  Vir^. 
Perdo  is  used  by  Plautus  as  a  verb  of  accusing,  with  cripilis ;  Quern  ego  cdjii/U 
perdam,  will  charge  with  a  capital  oflence.  So  capita  or  cdjJltis  penchtari, 
I'laut.,  signifies  'to  be  in  peril  of  one's  life.'  With  jdecto  and  pltctor,  caput  is 
used  in  the  ablative  only. — (c.)  Damni  mfecti  is  put  in  the  genitive  (depend- 
ing u])on  nomine  understood)  after  sdtisdo,  promitto,  siipuldri,  repromitio,  and 
coveo  ;  as,  Si  quis  in  pdnete  danoliendo  damni  ini'ecti  prom'tserit.  Cic. 

Rem.  4.  Accuso,  inciso,  and  insimulo,  instead  of  the  genitive,  sometimes  take 
the  accusative,  especially  of  a  neuter  pronoun ;  as.  Si  id  ?ree  non  accusas.  Plaut. 
QiK  nie  incusdveras.  Ter.  Sic  me  insimuldi-e  falsum  facinns.  Plaut.  See  ^  231, 
Rem.  5. 

Rem.  5.  (a.)  The  following  verbs  of  accusing,  etc.,  are  not  followed  by  a 
genitive  of  the  crime,  but,  as  active  verbs,  by  an  accusative: — cdlumnior,  carpo, 
corripio,  crlmmor,  cvlpo,  excuso,  multo,  punio,  repi-ehendo,  sugillo,  taxo,  trdduco, 
vUupero  ;  as,  Cidpdre  infecunditdtem  agrdmni.  Colum.  Excusdre  err&rem  et 
dddlescentiam.  Liv. 

(6.)  This  construction  also  sometimes  occurs  with  accuso,  incuso,  argiio,  and 
innrguo;  as,  Ejus  dvdritiam  peiifldiamque  accusdrat.  Nep.  Cidpam  arguo.  Liv. 
Witii  multo,  the  punishment  is  put  in  the  ablative  only,  without  a  preposition; 
as,  Exsiliis,  morte  muliantur.  Cic. 

§  918.  Verbs  of  admonishing,  wnth  tfie  accusative  of  the 
person,  are  followed  by  a  genitive  of  the  person  or  thing  respect- 
ing which  the  admonition  is  given ;  as, 

M'diles  temporis  mdnet,  He  admonishes  the  soldiers  of  the  occasion.  Tac. 
Admdnebat  dlium  egestatis,  dlium  cilplditatis  suce.  Sail. 

Note.  The  verbs  of  admonishing  are  mdneo,  admdneo,  commdneo,  and  commS- 
nefdcio. 

Remark  1.  Instead  of  the  genitive,  verbs  of  admonishing  sometimes  hava 
an  ablative  with  de;  as,  De  aede  Telluris  me  admdnes.  Cic. — sometimes  an  ac- 
cusative of  a  pronoun  or  adjective  in  the  neuter  gender;  as,  Eos  hoc  m6neo  Cic. 
YWutl  me  admOneo.  Id.;  and  m  the  passive,  Multa  admdnanur.  Id. — rarely  also 
a  noun  in  the  accusative ;  as,  Earn  rem  nos  lOcus  admdmdt.  Sail. 

Rem.  2.  Instead  of  the  genitive,  verbs  of  admonishing  are  also  often  followed 
by  an  infinitive  or  clause;  as,  Sdror  alma  mdntt  succedere  Liiuso  Turnum,  His 
sister  admonishes  Turnus  to  take  the  place  of  Lausuf.  Virg.  Mdnet,  ut  suspic- 
iOnes  vitet.  Cres.  Sed  eos  hoc  mdneo,  desinant  furere.  Cic.  Monet  riitionem  fru- 
menti  esse  habendam.  Hirt.  Immortalia  ne  speres  mdnet  anyuts.  Hor.  Discipulos 
•d  unum  mdneo,  ut,  etc.  Quint.     M  dneo  quid  facto  opus  sit.  Ter.    See  ^  273,  2. 

§  919.    Refert  and  interest  are  followed  by  a  genitive  of  the 

person  or  thing  whose  concern  or  mterest  they  denote ;  as, 

Humdnitdtis  refert.  It  concerns  human  nature.  Plin.  Rifert  omnium  ani- 
madverli  in  mdlos.  Tac.  Interest  omnium  recte  facere,  It  concerns  all  to  do 
right.  Cic. 

Rkmark  1.  Instead  of  ^e  genitive  of  the  substantive  pronouns, 
the  adjective  pronouns  mea,  ttia,  sua,  nostra,  and  vestra,  are  used;  as, 

Mea  nihil  refert,  It  does  not  concern  me.  Ter.  Illud  mea  magni  interest, 
\hat  greatly  concerns  me.  Cic.  Tua  et  mea  maxime  interest,  te  vdlere.  Cic 
Magis  reipiiblicaj  interest  quam  mea.  Id.  Magni  interest  Clc6i"onis,  vd  mea 
pdtiiis,  id  mehercUe  \itri\xsq\ie,  me  intei'venire  dicenti.  Id. 

• 


220  SYNTAX. GENITIVE    AFTER    VERBS.  §  22<l 

NoTB.  ^e/eri  rarely  occurs  with  the  genitive,  but  often  with  thd  pronounj 
mea,  tua,  etc.,  and  most  frequently  without  either  such  pronoun  or  a  genitive 
as,  quid  refert  f  magni  or  magniSpere,  refert. 

Rem.  2.  In  regard  to  the  case  of  these  adjective  pronouns,  grair marians  dif. 
'er.  Some  suppose  that  they  are  in  the  accusative  plural  neuter,  agreeing 
with  commdda  or  the  like  understood ;  as.  Interest  mea,  i.  e.  est  mter  mea,  It 
is  among  m}'  concerns.  Refert  tua,  i.  e.  refert  se  ad  tua,  It  refers  itself  to 
your  concerns.  Others  think  that  they  are  in  the  ablative  singular  femi- 
nine, agreeing  with  re,  causa,  etc.,  understood,  or  in  the  dative.  'I'he  better 
opinion  seems  to  be,  that  they  are  in  the  accusative  feminine  for  meam,  tuam, 
suam,  etc.,  that  refert  was  originally  rem  fert,  and  that  hence  the  e  of  refert 
is  long. 

Rem.  3.  Instead  of  the  genitive,  an  accusative  with  ad  is  sometimes  used ; 
AS,  Ad  honorem  meum  interest  qnam  primum  urbem  me  venire.  Cic.  Quid  id  ad 
me  aid  ad  meam  rem  refert.  Plant. — sometimes,  though  rarely,  an  accusative 
without  a  preposition;  as,  QiddVo,  iyitur  retMitf  Plant — or  a  dative;  as.  Die 
quid  referat  intra  ndtdrm  fines  viventi.  Hor. 

Rem.  4.  The  subject  of  these  verbs,  or  the  thing  which  is  of  interest  or  im- 
portance, is  sometimes  expressed  by  a  neuter  pronoun;  as.  Id  mea  mininie 
refert.  Ter.  Hoc  vehementer  interest  reipublicm.  Cic. ;  and  sometimes  by  an  in- 
finitive with  its  accusative,  or  ut,  or  an  interrogative  particle  with  a  sub- 
junctive clause;  as,  multum  mea  interest  te  esse  dUigenlem,  ox:  ut  dilicjens  sis, 
or  utrum  d'dlyens  sis  nee  ne.  When  the  infinitive  alone  is  used  witli  refert 
or  interest,  the  preceding  subject  is  understood;  us,  omnium  interest  recte  fd- 
ere,  scil.  se. 

Rem.  5.  The  degree  of  interest  or  importance  is  expressed  by  adverbs  or  by 
neuter  adjectives,  etc.,  in  the  accusative  or  genitive;  as,  mdgis,  magndpere,  ve- 
hementer, pdrum,  minivie,  etc. ;  mtiltum,  plus,  plui-imum,  nihil,  aliquid,  etc. ; 
tanii,  quanti,  magni,  permagni,  pluris.  But  miuimo  discrimine  refert  is  found 
in  Juv.  5,  123. 

§  3!S0.  Many  verbs  which  are  usually  otherwise  construed, 
-ire  sometimes  followed  by  a  genitive.     This  rule  includes 

1.  Certain  verbs  denoting  an  affection  of  the  mind ;  ango,  disaiicior,  excru- 
tio,  fallo,  pjendeo,  which  are  followed  by  dnijni ;  decfpior,  desipio,  fallor,  fasudii, 
tivideo,  mirar,  vereor  ;  as,  Absurde  facis,  qui  angas  te  a,m.vai.  Plant,  jie  aniroj 
fallit.  Lucr.  Decipitur  laborum.  Hor.  DesljiiUbam  mentis.  Plant.  Justitisene 
fn'ius  mlrer  belllne  laborum.  Virg. 

2.  The  following,  in  imitation  of  the  Greek  idiom;  abstineo,  desino,  put /. , 
Hor. ;  desisio.  Virg. ;  lamlo,  prdMheo.  SU. ;  levo,  partldpo.  Plant. ;  libera.  Liv. ; 
dissolvo.  Tibull. :  compare  liber  laborum ;  dperum  vacuus ;  purus  sceleris.  ^  213. 

3.  S<<ne  verbs  denoting  to  fill,  to  abound,  to  want  or  need,  to  free,  which  are 
commonly  followed  by  an  ablative.  Such  are  dbundo,  cdreo,  compleo,  expleo, 
impleo,  cgeo,  indigeo,  sdiuro,  obsaturo,  scdteo ;  as,,  Addlesceniem  suce  temeritatis 
implet,  He  fills  the  youth  with  his  own  rashness.  Liv.  Animum  explesse  flam- 
ma?.  Virg.  Egeo  consilii.  Cic.  Non  tarn  artis  indigent  quam  laboris.  Id.  See 
]<i  249  and  250,  (2.) 

4.  Potior,  which  also  is  usually  followed  by  an  ablative ;  as,  Urbis  pdilri, 
Tc>  make  oneself  master  of  the  city.  Sail.  Potiri  regni  (Cic),  hostium  {SaM.), 
(v.-^/M,  To  make  or.etelf  master  of  the  world.  Cic.  Potio  (active)  occurs  in 
riautus ;  as.  Earn  rMnc  pdilvit  servitiitis,  He  has  made  him  partaker  of  slavery. 
In  the  same  writer,  piHltus  esthostimn  signifies,  'he  fell  into  the  hands  of  tM 
enemy.'  So,  also,  Allquem  compollre  prsedce  or  voti.  App.  So,  Rerum  ddeptut 
est.  Tac.     Domlnationis  apisci.  Id.    Rcgndvit  popiilorum.  Hor. 


§  221.  SYNTAX. GENITIVE    OF    PLACE.  221 

GENITIVE     OF    PLACE. 

§  2^\m  1.  The  name  of"  a  town  in  which  any  thing  is  said 
to  be,  or  to  be  do7ie,  if  of  the  first  or  second  declension  and  sin- 
gular number,  is  put  in  the  genitive ;  as, 

Habitat  Mileti,  He  lives  at  Miletus.  Ter.  Quid  Rojna  fdciam  ?  WTiat  can  I 
do  at  Rome?  Juv.     Hercules  Tyri  maxime  cdlitur.   Cic. 

Note.  For  tlie  constraction  of  nouns  of  the  third  declension  or  plural  num- 
ber, see  §  254.  The  following  appears  to  be  the  best  explanation  that  Las 
been  given  of  this  diversity  of  construction,  depending  solely  on  the  number 
or  declension  of  the  noun.  The  name  of  the  town  '  where  '  or  'in  which  '  is 
probably  neither  in  the  genitive  nor  the  ablative,  but  always,  as  in  Greek,  in  the 
dative.  Since  the  genitive  and  dative  are  alike  in  the  singular  of  the  first  de- 
clension  and  the  dative  .and  ablative  plural  are  the  same  in  all  declensions, 
such  examples  as  Ronue  and  Athenis  present  no  difficulty.  In  the  third  de- 
clension the  dative  and  .ablative  singular  were  anciently  alike,  and  in  such  ab- 
latives as  Anxuri,  Carthagini,  Ldcedamdni,  the  old  form  remains,  see  §  82, 
Exc.  5,  (c.)  In  the  second  declension  there  was  an  old  dative  in  oi,  as  in  Greek, 
which  was  commonly  changed  to  o,  but  sometimes  to  i:  and  the  latter  is  still 
found  in  nulli,  uni,  etc.,  see  ^  107,  and  in  the  adjective  pronouns ;  as,  illi,  etc. 

Rkmark  i.  Names  of  islands  and  countries  are  sometimes  put  in  the  geni- 
tive, like  names  of  towns;  as,  Ithdcce  vivere,  To  live  in  Ithaca.  Cic.  Coi-cyra 
fuimus.  Id.  Cdnon  plurimum  C}-pri  vixH,  Tlitwlheus  Lesbi.  Nep.  Quum  Miltiudes 
domum  CiiersonGsi  hahuil.  Id.  Cntm  Jussit  consldere  Apollo.  Virg.  Rorrus  Niimid- 
iceque  facindra  ejus  menwrat.  Sail. 

Rem.  2.  {a.)  Instead  of  the  genitive,  the  ablative  of  names  of  towns  of  the 
first  and  second  declension  and  singular  number,  is  sometimes,  though  rarely, 
used;  as.  Rex  Tyro  decedit,  The  king  dies  at  Tyre.  Just.  J£i  Corintho  et  Athenis 
et  LdcedcBmdne  ramcidta  est  victoria.  Id.  Pons  quern  ille  Abydo  fecerat.  Id. 
Hujus  exevijilur  RGma  nullum  Mhemus.  Vitiniv.  Nun  Libyce,  non  ante  Tyro. 
Virg.  For  the  explanation  of  this  apparent  anomaly,  see  the  preceding  note; 
in  accordance  with  which  it  may  be  remarked,  that  the  adverbs  of  place,  fiM, 
ibi,  ibidem,  alibi,  dlicubi,  hie,  ill'ic,  isi'ic,  etc.,  appear  from  their  foiTn  to  be  ancient 
datives. — (b.)  When  the  noun  is  (jualified  by  an  adjective,  it  is  put,  not  in  the 
genitive,  but  in  the  ablative  with  ^7^ ;  as, //i  ipsa  Alexandria.  Cic.  And  poeti- 
cally without  in.  Genus  Lonyd  nostrum  dominubitur  Alba.  Virg. — (c.)  When 
urbs,  oppidum,  locus,  etc.,  follow  the  genitive  of  place  as  appositions,  they  are 
put  in  the  ablative  either  with,  or,  more  rarely,  without,  in;  as,  Archias  Antid- 
chlce  ndtus  est,  celebri  quondam  urbe.  Cic.  Clves  Romdnos  Nedpdli,  in  ctde- 
ben-imo  oppido  scBpe  vidimus.  Id.  But  when  in  urbe,  etc.,  precede  the  name  of 
a  town,  the  latter  also  is  put  in  the  ablative;  as,  In  oppido  Citio.  Nep.;  and 
but  very  rarely  in  the  genitive;  as,  Cassius  in  oppido  Antiochise  tsi, — in  the 
town  of  Antioch.  Cic,  wliere  the  genitive  depends  on  oppido. 

Rem.  3.  The  genitives  domi,  mllitice,  belli,  and  Jiumi,  are  construed 
like  names  of  towns ;  as, 

Tenuit  se  domi.  He  staid  at  home.  Cic.  Vir  domi  cldnis.  Liv.  Spartjit  hum 
jussos  dentes, — on  the  ground.  Ovid.  Mllitiae  and  belli  are  thus  used,  especiallj 
wlien  opposed  to  dduii ;  as,  Una  semper  mllitise  et  domi  fuiinus, — both  at  home 
and  in  the  camp.  Ter.  So  Domi  mllitiaoue.  Cic.  Et  ddmi  et  milltice.  Id.  Militia 
domlque.  Liv.    Mllltim  et  domi.  Ter.     Belli  dUmique,  in  war  and  in  peace.  Hon 

(1.)  Domi  is  thus  used  with  the  possessives  mece,  turn,  sua,  nostra,  vestrce, 
&r\d  dliena;  as,  Domi  nostrjE  n'xiY,  He  lived  at  my  house.  Cic.  Apud  eum  sic 
fui  tainqunm  mese  domi.  Id.  Sacrlficium,  quod  aliena  domi  Jieret  trivtsere.  Id. 
But  witli  other  adjectives,  an  ablative,  generally  with  a  preposition,  is  used;  as, 
In  '!idud  domo.  Ovid.  Pdternddomo.  Id.  Sometimes  also  with  the  po.ssessives ; 
as,  Mea  i«  domo.  Hor.  In  domo  sttd.  Nep.  So,  instead  of  hUrni, '  upon  the  gi-ound,' 
19* 


222  SYNTAX. DATIVK    AFTER    ADJECTIVES.  §  222 

iumc  is  soiiietimes  used,  with  or  without  a  preposition;  as,  In  humo  artrtoid 
Ovid.     Sedire  hwno  nudd.  Id. 

(2.)  When  a  genitive  denotino;  the  possessor  follows^  either  domi  or  in  dCmt 
is  used;  as,  Diprehensus  domi  CoRsaris.  Cic.  Domi  illius  fuisti.  Id.  In  domo 
Oxsaris.  Id.     In  domo  ejus.  Nep. 

(3.)  The  ablative  rf'JjJW  for  dowij  also  occurs,  but  not  in  Cicero;  an,  Ego  in 
nunc  experiiyi'  domo.  Plant.  Domo  se  tenere.  Nep.  Domo  abditas.  Suet. 
Bello  for  belli  is  found  in  Livy — Dd7ni  belloque.  So,  also,  humo  for  liumi ;  Strdtut 
Mmo.  Stat.     Flgit  hiimo  plantas.  Yirg.:  and  in  Immo  lumen  flgii.  Ovid. 

(4.)  Terra  is  sometimes  used  like  Mini;  as,  Sacra  terras  celdvimus.  Liv. 
Prajectus  terrce.  Virg.  Ignes  terrce  condit.  Luc.  So,  also,  drence ;  Truncum 
riliquit  iirense.  Virg. :  and  vicinioe ;  ProximcE  viciniaj  habitat.  Plant. 

(5.)  The  genitive  of  names  of  towns,  d6mi,  militia,  etc.,  is  supposed  by  some 
to  depend  on  a  noim  understood;  as,  urbe,  oppido,  mdibus,  solo,  l6co,  tempore, 
otc.,  but  see  a  different  explanation  above  hi  Note. 

GENITIVE    AFTEK    PARTICLES. 

n.    Certain  adverbs  are  followed  by  the  genitive.  See  §  212,  R.  4. 

m.  The  genitive  plural  sometimes  depends  on  the  preposition 
tenus  ;  as, 

CUmdrum  tenus,  As  far  as  Cumas.  Ccel.  Crurum  te.nus.  Virg.  Ldterum  t&- 
nus.  Id.  Urbium  CorcyrcE  tenus.  Liv. — For  the  ablative  after  tenus,  and  for  the 
place  of  the  preposition,  see  ^  241,  and  R.  1. 

DATIVE. 

§  293.  1.  The  dative  is  the  case  of  reference,  as  it  denotea 
the  object  with  reference  to  which  the  subject  acts,  or  in  reference  to 
■which  it  possesses  any  specified  quality  ;  or,  in  other  words,  the  ob- 
ject for  which,  to  the  henejil  or  ioss'of  which,  any  tiling  is  or  is  done. 
Hence,  in  distinction  from  the  dative  of  the  end  (§  227)  the  dative  of 
reference  is  called  datlvus  commodi  et  Incommvdi,  the  dative  of  ad- 
vantage and  disadvantage ;  as, 

Scrlbo  vobis  hunc  libriim,  I  write  tliis  book  for  you.  Prosum  tibi,  or  Titi 
utilis  sum,  I  am  useful  to  you. 

2.  Hence  the  dative  of  advantage  and  disadvantage  may  be  used 
(a)  with  adjectives  and  particles  whose  meaning  is  incomplete  unless 
the  object  is  mentioned  in  reference  to  which  the  quality  exists, 
(i)  With  verbs  both  transitive  and  intransitive.  If  transitive  they 
take  an  accusative  of  the  nearer  and  a  dative  of  the  remoter  object. 
if  intransitive  they  take  a  dative  only,  (c)  With  certain  verbs  -com- 
pounded with  prepositions,  after  which  the  dative  is  used  instead  of 
the  case  which  the  preposition,  if  separate,  would  govern.  {<!)  After 
a  few  verbal  substantives  derived  from  verbs  which  govern  a  dative. 

DATIVE    AFTER    ADJECTIVES. 

3.  A  noun  U-miting  the  meaning  of  an  adjective,  is  pu'. 
^  the  dative,  t  dv-note  the  object  to  which  the  quality  is  di 
reeled ;  as, 


§  222.  SYNTAX. DATIVE    AFTER    ADJECTIVES.  223 

tJtllii  i^ris,  Useful  to  the  fields  Juv.  Jucundus  dmicis,  Agi-eeable  t:  hi* 
frieiids.  \i-\rt  Inimicns  (jiiuii,  Unfriendly  to  rest.  Id.  Charla  inutilis  sciibtitdu, 
Taper  I'o.'  Useful  f  >r  writing.  PL"a. 

Note.  T1  e  dati,'e  «s  commonly  translated  by  the  prepositions  to  ox  for ;  but  some- 
limes  by  other  i/.-sp.^Sitions,  or  without  a  preposition. 

^  Remark  1.  Ar'/ectives  signifying  useful,  pleasant,  friendly,  fit, 
I'^-e,  inclined,  read'/,  eas;/,  dear,  equal,  and  their  opposites,  also  those 
signifying  near,  maas-  compounded  with  con,  and  verbals  in  bllis,  aio 
(bnowed  by  the  dativb ,  as, 

Felix  tms.  Propitious  to  mur  fritnds.  Virg.  Orc'itio  ingrd/n  GaUis,  A  speech 
lispleasing  to  the  Gauls,  \..\is.  Anicm  tyrannidi,  Frieiidlv  to  tyrannii.  Nep. 
Liibori  r/i/ioi(7/.s-,  Unsuited  to  uiw.  Colum.  P Atri  si milis,  Like  his  fatlier.  Cic. 
Nihil  tarn  est  Lysix  'f^rersun\  qiumi  Isocrates.  Aptum  tempori.  Id.  M;\lo  pro- 
mis.  Sen.  Promptus  ^r.Wtion'.  Tac.  Cuivis/fk(7e  est.  Ter.  M?Ui  certiim  est 
Cic.  /•«/•  fratri  ?KO.  Id.  Fdisi.  veris  finitima  sunt.  LI.  Ocftli  amcoldres  corpori. 
Colum.  Multis  bonis  ^-'6i&.  Uv.  Mors  est  tei-ribilis  iis,  ipwrum,  etc.  Cic. 
-  (a.)  The  following  are  some  ol  the  adjectives  included  in  Rem.  1,  viz.  (/ratus, 
(uceptus,dukis,jricuudiis,l<jbtti.<.  sx.vds;' im/ratvs,  insuai-is,  injariuulus.  mdlestus, 
fp-ui-is,  ucerbtis,  odiosus,  trUtis ;—dli>is,  inutilis,  Ounus,  saluber,  siiluturis.  frintiU'Siis ; 
a'ddmitdstis,  damnost/s,  funestm.  vodiis,  pestifer,  pei-niciosus,  exitiosti.';: — amuus, 
bencvolus,  cams,  fihniliaris,  arpius,  ftdus,  fi'd/'lis,  prdpiiius,   swu?idus ;  iuimicus. 


discdlor :— promts,  prd<.ln-is,  propemus.  promptvs,  pdrdtus :—fticilis,  dijfidlii, :- 
dpertus,  conspicmis,  7ndnifestus,  peisjicnus,  obscurus,  certiis,  compertus,  nOtiis, 
amhlguus,  dubius,  iynotus,  incertus,  m  Mittis  ;—vliinus,  finitimns,  cvn  finis,  con- 
terminus,  prOpior,  proximus,  cor/ndlus,  concdlor,  concors,  conijruiis,  am'sanguineus, 
consentaiieus,  cmsdnus,  converdeiu,  contit^  uus,  cantitmus,  contintns. 

{b.)  Many  adjectives  of  other  sijjnifi  ;atioas,  including  some  compounds  of 
Ob,  sub,  and  siij^r,  as  obnoxius,  obmis,  iubjectus,  supplex,  and  superstes,  are  also 
followed  by  a  dative  of  the  object 

(c.)  After  verbals  in  iffc,  the  dative  i;  usually  rendered  bv  the  preposition 
by;  as,  Tibi  ardibilis  senna,  A  speech  c  edible  to  vou,  i.  e.  worthy  to  be  be- 
lieved by  you.  Ovi<l. 

_  (rf.)  The  expression  ditto  audiens,  sign\  ^-ing  obedient,  is  followed  by  the  da- 
tive; as,  Syrdcusdni  x\bhi&  dicta  aiidientes  sunt.  Cic.  Audiens  dicta  fait  jussis 
mdfistrdtuum.  Nep.  In  this  phrase,  (Zicto  ,5  a  dative  limiting  audiens,  M\i\  the 
words  dicta  audiens  seem  to  form  a  corapownd  equivalent  to  dbcdiens,  and,  like 
that,  followed  by  a  dative;  thus.  Nee  plet-j  nobis  dicta  audiens  nl/pie  dbcdieiis 
nt.  Liv.     So  dicta  dbcdiens ;  as,  FUtura  es  dicta  dbediens,  animn,  patri  y  Plant. 

Rem.  2.  (a.)  The  adjectives  mtjualis,  a  finis,  dlienus,  caymwiinis,  communis, 
contranus,  fi^s,  inswUus,  par,  dispar,  pe.Sdidris,  proprius,  prOpimpius,  sucer, 
amihs,  assimdis,  consiinilis,  i/issimili.",,  sOcius,  vicinus,  sUperstes,  supplex,  and  some 
others,  instead  of  a  dative  of  the  object,  aiu  sometimes  followed  bv  a  genitive; 
^,  Par  htjus.  Equal  to  him.  Lucan.  Proprimn  es<  oratoris  ojvi<(^e  f/k-l;t.  Cic! 
But  most  of  these  words,  when  thus  used,  ucem  rather  to  be  taken  substan- 
tively; as,  ^qudlis  ejus,  His  contemporary-.  Cic. 

(6.)  Similis,  assimilis,  consirAilis,  dissirnilii,  par  and  dispar,  take  the  lenitive 
when  an  internal  re-^finblanco,  or  a  resemUance  in  character  or  disposition  is' 
to  be  expressed,  and  hence  wo  aJwaj's  find  mei,  tui,  sui,  nustri,  veslri,  simi'Uti 
fA,  Plures  reyes  Romi'ili  quaiu  Niimaa  stmilcu.  Liv. 

'c.)  Amicus,  inimicus,  utA  fdmilidris,  o-v^ing  to  their  character  ivs  substan- 
tives, take  a  genitive  even  in  the  superlative;  as,  Homo  dmicissimus  mstrOrum 
fe^f»^J7^«m,—ve^y  friendly  t.  our  countrymen.  Cic.  On  the  other  li:>.id,  ho»ti$ 
tfcough  a  substantive,  h  i.<nietime»  -yuKi  like  an  adjective,  being  'jodifiod  by 


224  SYNTAX. DATIVE    AFTER    ADJECTIVES.  §  222. 

an  ad/ei-b,  and  taking  an  object  in  the  dative;  as,  Exspectaniibus  omnibia 
quistiam  esset  tarn  implus,  tarn  ilemens,  tam  diis  homlnlbus^Me  hostis,  qui,  etc. 
Cf.  §  277,  R.  1. 

Rem.  3.  Some  adjectives  with  the  dative  are  followed  by  another  case  de- 
noting a  different  relation;  as,  3fens  sibi  conscia  recti,  A  mind  conscious  to  it- 
self of  rectitude.  Virg.     See  ^  213,  R.  7. 

Ri  M.  4.  Many  adjectives,  instead  of  the  dative  of  the  object,  are 
often  followed  by  an  accusative  with  a  preposition. 

(1.)  Adjectives  signifying  useful,  fit,  arid  the  opposite,  take  an  accusative  of 
the  thing  with  ad,  but  only  a  dative  of  t  le  person;  as,  Homo  ad  nuUam  rem 
itHis.  Cic.     Locus  aptus  ad  insidias.  Id. 

(2.)  Adjectives  denoting  motion  or  tendency,  take  nn  accusative  with  ad 
more  frequently  than  a  dative ;  as,  Piqer  a,d.  poenas,  ad  prsemia  vchx^  Ovid; 
Ad  dllqiiejii  morbuni  prodlrior,  Cic  ;  Ad  omne  f  acinus  pardtus,  Id. ;  Prmiis  ad 
fidem,  Liv. ; — sometimes  with  w;  as,  Celer  in  puginxm.  Sil. 

(3.1  Many  adjectives,  signifying  an  affection  of  the  mind,  may  have  an  ac- 
cusative of  the  object  with  in,  erf/a,  or  adversus,  instead  of  the  dative;  as, 
Fidclii  in  f ilios.  J\ist.  Mdtur  dcerba  in  swk-  partus.  Ovid.  Grdtus  erga  me. 
Cic.    Grdtum  adversus  te.  Id.     So  BissiinUls  in  dominum.  Tac. 

(4.)  Adjectives  signifying  like,  equal,  common,  etc.,  when  plural,  are  often 
followed  by  the  a(  cusative  with  inter ;  as.  Inter  se  similes.  Cic.  Haec  sunt  in- 
ter eos  communia.  Id.     Inter  se  dlversi.  Id. 

Rem.  5.  Propior  and  proidvms,  instead  of  the  dative,  have  sometimes,  like 
their  primitive  ^j?-(5^Je,  an  accusative;  as,  Quod  vitium  propius  virtQtem  erai. 
Sail.  P.  Crassn.t  proximus  mai-e  Oceanum  hiemdrat.  Caes.  Ager,  qui  proxhnua 
fiiiem  Megaldpolitdrum  est.  Liv.  Cf.  §  238,  1. 

Rem.  6.  (a.)  Some  adjectives,  instead  of  the  dative,  have  at  times  an  abla- 
tive with  a  preposition.  Thus,  par,  communis,  consenidneus,  di$co7-s,  with  cum; 
as.  Quern  pa  rem  cum  lib  Oris  y'tcisti.  Sail.  Consent  dneum  cum  iis  Uteris.  Cic. 
CivUds  sijcum  discors.  Liv.  So  dliinus  and  dlrersus  with  a  or  ab ;  as,  Aliemis 
a  me,  Ter. ;  A  ratione  dlrersus,  Cic;  or  without  a  preposition;  as,  Allamm 
nostra  amicitia.  Id. — (b.)  Fri'lus,  wliich  regularly  takes  the  ablative,  is  in  Livy 
construed  with  the  dative;  a?,  fovtunx  fret  us;  nulli  re'i  freius,  etc_  Cf  ^  244. — 
(c.)  Tlie  participial  adjectives /ync<«s  and  conjunctus,  instead  of  the  dative 
take  sometimes  the  ablative  eithei  with  or  without  cum. 

Rem.  7.  /fZem  is  sometimes  followed  by  the  dative,  chief!}'  in  the  poets,  as 
Jitplter  omnibus  'idem.  Virg.  Inv'dum  qui  servat,  idem  fdcit  occidenti.  Hor 
In  tlie  first  examule.  omnmis  is  a  dative  of  the  object;  m  the  second,  the 
dative  follows  Me/n,  in  imitation  of  the  Greek  construction  with  alndc  and  ia 
fcquivalent  to  quod  occldens,  or  quod  fdcit  is,  qui  occldit.  Shnilis  is  construed 
in  the  same  manner  in  Hor.  Sat.  1,  3,  122.  Ide7n  is  generally  followed  not  by 
a  case,  but  by  qui,  ac,  aique,  ut,  quasi,  or  quam ;  sometimes  by  the  preposition 
cum.  Cf  §  207,  R.  27,  {d.)  Similis  and  par  are  sometimes,  like  Idem,  fdlowed 
by  a/c  and  aique. 

Rem.  S.  Some  verbal  substantives  are  followed  by  the  uutive,  when  derived 
fi-om  verbs  governing  the  dative;  as,  .TustUia  est  obtemperdiio  scriptis  leglbu3 
institiitisque  pOpuIurum.  Cic.  Trdditio  alicujus  rei  alteri.  Id.  ExprobrdtiA 
cuiquam  vetiris  fortunes.  Liv. 

Note.  A  dative  of  the  object  often  follows  es.fe  and  other  verbs,  in  connection  with  a 
predicate  n  minative  or  accusatire,  but  such  dative  is  dependent,  not  on  the  noun,  but 
on  th»  vorb    Cf.  5  227,  R.  4 


§  22."'.  SYNTAX. DATIVE    AFTER    V^RBS.  225 

DATIVE    AFTER    VERBS. 

§  S23.  A  noun  limiting  the  meaning  of  a  verb,  is  put  is 
the  dative,  to  denote  the  object  to  or  for  which  any  tliiiiw  is,  or 
is  done ;  as, 

Mea  ddmth  tibi  patet,  Mv  house  is  open  to  you.  Cic.  Pars  optare  locum  tecto, 
A  part  choose  a  site/o?- (I  WcZjn?-  Virg.  Tibi  seris,  tibi  metis,  You  sow /or 
yourself,  vou  reap  for  yourself.  Plaut.  Licet  nenuiii  contra  patriam  ducere  ex- 
ercUum,  It  is  not  lawful  for  any  one  to  lead  an  army  against  his  countrv.  Cic. 
Hoc  tibi  prOmitto,  I  promise  you  this.  Id.  Bceret  lattri  lijtcilis  urundo'.  Virg, 
Surdo  fabidam  narras.  Hor.  Milii  responsum  dedit.  Virg.  Sic  vos  non  vobis 
ferlis  uratrn,  bdves.  Id.  Omnibus  bonis  expHdit  salvani  esse  rempublicu7n.  Cic- 
Aptat  habenclo  ensem.  Virg. 

Note.  The  dative  is  thus  used  after  all  verbs,  whether  transitive  or  intransitive,  per- 
gonal or  impersonal,  and  in  both  voices,  provided  their  signification  admits  a  reference  to 
a  remoter  object,  for  whom  or  to  whose  benefit  or  injury-  any  thing  is  done.  In  the  pas- 
sive voice,  from  their  nature,  neuter  verbs  can  only  be  so  construed  impersonally.  Of. 
§  142,  1,  and  §  222,  2.  t-  ^ 

Rem.\rk  1.  The  dative  after  many  verbs  is  rendered  not  by  to  or  for,  but  by  other 
prepositions,  or  without  a  preposition.  Many  intransitive  Latin  verbs  are  translated 
into  English  by  verbs  transitive,  and  the  dative  after  them  is  usually  rendered  like  the 
object  of  a  transitive  verb. — Most  verbs  after  which  the  signs  to  and  for  are  not  used 
with  the  dative,  are  enumerated  in  this  and  the  following  sections. 

Rem.  2.  Many  verbs  signifying  to  favor,  please,  trust,  assist,  and 
their  contraries,  also  to  command,  obey,  serve,  resist,  threaten,  and 
be  angry,  take  a  dative  of  the  object. 

jSIote.  The  neuter  verbs  comprehended  in  this  rule  general!}-  express  in  the 
verbal  form  the  meaning  of  those  adjectives,  which  are  followed  by  the  dative, 
(cf.  ^  222,  R.  1,)  Thus,  (a.)  Ilia  tibi  f  civet,  She  favous  you,  or  is  favorable  to 
tpu.  Ovid.  Jlihi  placcbat  Pompmius,  mimme  displicffbat.  CHc.  Qui  sibi  fidit. 
Hor.  _  Non  licet  sui  commddi  causci  nOcere  alteri.  Cic.  Non  vnvidiiur  illi  aitfiti 
fed  ctiam  fdcelur.  Id.  Desp^raf  saliiti  siue.  Id.  Neqiie  mihi  vestra  decrrt'i  aux- 
tliantur.  hall.  Imperat  aut  sercit  collecta  pecunia  cuique.  Hor.  Obcdlre  et  pdrere 
voluntati.  Cic.  Qudnuwi  factioni  mimicdrum  resistere  nequlverit.  Sail.  Mlhi 
mmdbutur.  Cic.     Irasci  inimicis.  Ca;s. 

(h.)  So  Adnlnr,  assentior,  blnnrtior,  commSdo,  faveo,  gratifiror,  grator,  icratfdor,  and 
its  verbal  gratulahundus,  ignosco,  iiuJidifta.  tSnoctnur,  pulpor,  parco,  plnuilo,  respomlfo, 
studeo,  suppardsitor ;  ffiiiiilor,  incnmmoilo.  invideo,  ndceo,  obsum,  offirAo; — nrrlrleo, 
pkiceo;  dispnrtn;—rrcdo,  fulo,  coii/ido ;  despero,  diffidoi—adminiador,  niixilior, 
medeor,  mfdicor,  5pithlor,  patronnor,  prusinn,  sid/vSnio,  succurro ,-  dcsiini,  inxidinr;^- 
impero,  mando,  mSderor,  prcycipio,  tempcro ;  nusculto,  mongiror,  Shedio.  obsccuii'do 
obs6(/uor,  obtempero,  jiareo,  dirto  audienx  sinii; — unrillor,  famulor,  nniusiro,  Srrvie' 
instrvio,  jirfj'stulor : — advtrsor.  mfragor,  abxto,  oblnctd.  retiictor,  renltor.  repugno.  ri- 
sii'n,  and,  chietiy  in  the  poets,  hello,  certo,  liiclor,  /iii^iio; — nniior,  rcnnii'iiwr  iiiter- 
miiior  ; — Irascor,  succenseo,  sldmackor. — To  these  may  be  added  w.ywo,  adnr/uo,  convicioT. 
dcgencro.  excHlo,  nubo,  suppSdtto,  pravar^cor,  rcci/iio  (to  promise),  reiiuncio,  xiiadeo, 
perm&ii'o,  dissuaiJfo,  suppHco,  vdco,  vh/eor,  a,niX  sometimes  misceo  and  'atfo: — also  th« 
impersonal,"!  arrT'//e,  convcnit,  conducit,  rnntingit,  dcrel,  dSlet,  expcdit.  lirtt,  libn,  or 
luoet,  th/uft,  //Idift.  etc.— (c.)  Intransitive  verbs"  governing  a  dative  are  often  usi'd  imper- 
sonally in  the  pa.ssive  with  the  same  case;  as.  mUi  invidetur,  I  am  envied.  Mini  iiiali- 
rfjci^fr.  I  am  reviled.  MVii  parctiur,  I  am  spared.  Ilor.  Hoc  ptrsuadctur  inVii,  I  am 
persuaded  of  this. 

(1,)  (a.)  .Many  of  the  above  verb.s,  which,  as  intran-sitive,  take  the  dative, 
oometmies  become  transitive  and  are  followed  by  an  accusative;  as,  ddiilor 
auscullo,  blandior,  dt'f/enero,  despero,  indulyeo,  luleo,  medeor,  medicor,  mOdinrr^  ■ 
obtrecio,  prceslOlor,  j)rdvldeo,  etc. ;  as,  Adaldri  aliquem.  Cic.  Hanc  cave  deyini- 
res.  Ovid.  InduUjeo  me.  Ter.  JIujus  adventum  prwstolans.  Cces.  Pi-oridere 
rem  frumejitariam.  Id. — Sometimes  also  l)y  a  preposition  and  the  ablative  or 
accusative;  a^,  A  SUAcia  dt'(/enerdvit  Pdivttins.  Cic.  De  republica  de.speriire. 
Id.  Oblrectdrunt  inter  se.  Nep. — or  by  a  dependent  clause;  as,  Ouse  desperai 
tractdta  n  .eszere  posse,  riliuf/uit.  Hor. 


226  srNT;Ax. — dative  after  verbs.  §024. 

(6.)  Other;?,  as  transitive  verbs,  have,  with  the  dative,  un  accusative,  ex- 
pressed  or  understood;  as,  impero,  mando,  mlnistro,  minor,  conimi'iuyr,  inlcrmiiun; 
prcecijiio,  recipio,  renuncio,  etc. ;  ns,  Equltes  imperat  clvitalihus ;  where  cogen- 
dos  is  perhaps  to  be  sujiplied.  He  enjoins  upon  the  states  tlie  providing  of  cav- 
ab-y.  Cajs.  See  §  274,  R.  5.  Ministrdre  victum  dlicui.  Varr.  Deflagraticuem 
urbi  et  IuWub  toti  mlndbdtur.  Cic. 

(c.)  ^quo  and  ddceqtto  are  construed  with  the  accusative  and  either  tlie  da^ 
tive  or  cum  with  the  ablative.— /wwc/eo  takes  either  a  sin^^le  dative  cf  the  per- 
8on  or  tiling,  a  dative  of  the  person  and  an  accusative  of  the  thing;  as,  Hona- 
rem  mihi  invident.  Hor. ;  or,  when  invtdere  is  used  in  the  sense  of  pniure,  a  dor 
tive  of  the  person  and  an  ablative  of  the  thing;  as,  Non  irnvdcruni  hiude  su, 
milierlbus.  Liv.  In  Horace,  by  a  Greek  construction,  the  genitive  is  onceuso 
instoad  of  the  accusative  or  ablative  of  the  thing;  as,  Neque,  ilk  sejwsili  ciceii,. 
nee  loTiffce  invidet  dverue-. 

(d.)  Cedo,  used  transitively,  takes  a  dative  of  the  person  and  an  accusative 
of  the  thing;  but  sometimes'the  thing  is  expressed  by  the  ablative;  as,  ced^re 
dlicui  jxissessiC^fe  hortdvum.     So,  also,  concedo  tibi  Ucum,  or  conccdo  tibi  loco. 

(2.)  Many  vprbs  which,  from  their  significations,  might  be  included  in  the 
above  classes,  are,  as  transitive  verbs,  only  followed  by  an  accusative;  as, 
dclecto,  javo,  (idjfiro,  adjilto,  Uedo,  offcndo,  etc. — Tubco  is  followed  by  the  accusar- 
tive  with  an  infinitive,  and  sometimes  by  the  accusative  alone,  or  the  da- 
tive with  the  infinitive  or  subjunctive;  as,  Jubeo  te  bene  sperare.  Cic.  Lex 
Jubet  ea  (jiue  fdcienda  sunt.  Id.  Ubi  Biltannico  jussit  exsurgere.  Tac.  Quibus 
jusserat,  id  instnntibus  resisterent.  Id. — Flda  and  confldo  are  often  followed  by 
the  ablative,  with  or  without  a  preposition;  as,  Fldere  cursu.  Ovid.  Cf.  §  245. 

§  224.  JMany  verbs  compounded  with  these  eleven  prepo- 
Bitions,  del,  ante,  con,  In,  inter,  6b,  post,  prce,  pro,  sub,  and  super, 
are  followed  by  the  dative ;  as, 

Anmie  coeptis,  Be  favorable  to  our  undertaUngs.  Virg.  Romanis  equitibus 
UtP.rcR  aferuntur,  Letters  are  brought  to  the  Roman  kriii/hts.  Cic.  Anlecellere 
omnibus,  To  excel  all.  Id.  Antetulit  irae  religionem.  Nep.  Audetque  viris  con- 
cm-rere  viryo.  Virg.  ExercUum  exercitui,  duces  ducibus  comparcire.  Liv.  Jmmi- 
net  his  a^r.  Ovid.  Pecori  sifjnum  impressit.  Virg.  Nox  prselio  intervmit.  Liv. 
Interdixii  histrionibus  sccnam.  Suet.  Meis  commodis  officis  et  obslns.  Cic. 
Cum  se  hostium  tGlis  objecissent.  Id.  Poslhdbui  mea  seria  ludo.  Virg.  Certd- 
mini  pi-wscdit.  Suet,  lllbernis  Labienum  prapdsuit.  Ctes.  Genijjus  procwn- 
bere.  Ovid.  Misi'ris  succurrere  disco.  Virg.  lis  subsidia  submitlcbai.  Cses. 
Timidis  supevrinit  jEijle.  Virg. 

Note  1.  This  rule  implies  that  the  compound  retains  the  meaning  of  the 
preposition ;  and  the  dative  following  such  compound  is  then  used  instead  of 
the  case  governed  bv  the  preposition.  When  such  compounds  are  transitive 
tfaey  have  with  the  dative  an  accusative  also,  like  other  transitive  verbs. 

1.  Aceerlo,  arcresco,  accumbo,  ncquiesco,  adeqinto,  adhrrreo,  adjaceo,  adno,  adnata^  aiJ^ 
(to,  adsti/nilor,  adsiim,  adversor,  affulgto,  allabor,  alludo,  annuo,  appareo,  applatidc, 
appr5puu/uo,  arrcpo,  arrldeo,  aspiro,  assentior,  asstdeo,  assisto,  assuesco,  as.-iurgo ; — 
md^lo,  adiubeo,  adjirio,  adjungo,  adtndveo,  adverto,  advoivo,  ajf'ero,  afflgo,  altigo,  ap- 
pono,  apptico,  aspergo. 

2.  Antcccdo,  iinlSceilo,  anteeo,  antesto,  antSvenio,  antSverto ; — antSfSro,  antghabeo, 
antspono. 

8.  ColiTreo,  colludo,  concino,  congruo,  consentio,  consSno,  consuesco,  convtvo,  and, 
ehiefly  iu  the  poets,  coco,  concumbo,  concurro,  contendo ; — confl.o,  conjungo,  comparo, 
tompono. 

4.  Incidn,  incubo,  incumbo,  indormio,  ingemisco,  Inheereo,  \nhio,  innascor,  intittor, 
insideo,  insistn,  insto,  hisudo,  insulto,  invado,  inv'igVo,  Ulacrnno,  iUfidn,  itmn^nto,  im- 
mirior,  nninoror,  hnpeudeo,  insurn ; — hnmisceo,  impertio,  impuno,  hnprlmo,  inc'ido,  <»• 
Sliido,  indue,  infgro,  ingcro,  injicio,  insSro,  inspergo,  insuesco,  Iniiro. 

6.  Intercedo,  intercido,  interclildo,  interjaceo,  intermlco  iniersum,  intervinio  ; — inter- 
iHeo,  interjicio,  interpon" 


§225.  SYNTAX. DATIVE    AFTER    VERBS.  227 

6.  Obavibiilo,  Oberro,  abSt/uVo,  obluctor,  obmiirmuro,  obrepo,  obsto,  ohsiito,  oatrgpo 
o'>xum,  ohlrfcto,  obvfnio,  nl/versor,  occumbo,  occurro,  occurso,  officio;— obi  uco,  objtcio, 
offiro,  ojfuiido,  oppono. 

7   P(  stfSro,  posthdbeo,  postpOno,  postpUto,  poxtscribo. 

8.  Frtrcer/o,  prtrcurro,  prcBeo,  prcpliiceo,  prcEmineo,  prceniteo,  prasideo,  prcBSum.pra^ 
vdleOy  pircBVertor; — t^eefSro,  prer/icio,  prcepono. 

9.  Pr5cu7nbo,  proficio,  propugno,  prospicio,  provXdeo. 

10.  Succedo,  succresco,  siiccumbo,  succttrro,  siifficio,  suffragor,  subSleo,  tuhjIUeo, 
tubrlpo,  subsum,  subvenio  ;—subflo,  subjicio,  subjugo,  sitbinitto,  su-ppono,  substerno. 

11.  Supercuno,  siiperstu,  supersitm,  supervinio,  supervlvo. 

Note  2.  In  some  verbs  compounded  with  prepositions  the  meaning  of  the 
preposition  is  lost.  Such  compounds  are  either  not  followed  by  a  dative  oi 
the  case  depends,  not  on  the  preposition,  but  on  the  signification"  of  the  verb 
according  to  §  223. 

Rem  AUK  1.  (rt.)  Some  verbs,  compounded  with  db,  de,  ex,  circum,  and  con- 
tra, are  occasionally  followed  by  the  dative ;  as,  abs7im,  desum,  di'lahor,  dtspero, 
exchlu,  drcumdv,  ciixumfumlo,  circumjuceo,  circitmjuio,  contrddicu,  cuiUrui'o ;  as' 
Serta  capiti  di'lapsn,  Tlie  garlands  having  fallen  from  his  head.  Virg.  Numqm 
numiiu  vxcidh-unt  tibi?  Plant.  Tigris  urbi  drcumfunditui:  Plin.  Sib!  despeians. 
Gxi. — (b.)  Circumdo  and  civcumfundo  talie  either  an  accusative  of  the  thai"  with 
a  dative  of  the  person,  or  an  ablative  of  the  thhig  with  an  accusative  of  Xha  per- 
son ;  as,  circumdo  dlicui  cusiodias,  or  circumdo  lUiquem  custodiis.  Asperao,  in- 
speri/o,  doiio,  impertio,  exm,  and  induo,  are  construed  in  the  same  maimer. 
Cf.  §  251,  R.  2. 

Re3i.  2.  Some  verbs  of  repelling  and  taking  awav  (most  of  which  are  com- 
pounds of  <///,  tZ^,  or  fx),  are  sometimes  followed  bV  the  dative,  though  more 
common!  V  by  the  ablativo;  as,  abUjo,  nhnujo,  nbsnndo,  aufero,  uduiw,  arceo, 
dejhido,  di'iiw,  dPpello,  dcrur/o,  dHraho,  eripiu,  eruo,  txcutii),  exlmo,  exton/nto,  ex- 
ircdw,  exiio,  prohibco,  siirripio.  Thus,  Nee  mihi  te  I'ripient,  Nor  shall  tliev  take 
vou  from  me.  Ovid.  SoMtinm  pecori  dPftiulUe.  Virg.  Himc  arcebis  peccri.  Id. 
So  rarely  ahrumjiO,  Cdieno,  furor,  and  rdpio. 

Resi.  .3.  Some  verbs  of  differing  (compounds  of  di  or  dls)  likewise  occur 
with  the  dative,  instead  of  the  ablative  with  the  preposition  db,  or  poeticallv 
with  the  ablative  alone;  ns^,  differo,  discrepo,  discordo,  disseniio,  dissideo,  disto'- 
as,_  ilunntum  simplex  Idldrisque  nepoti  discrepet,  et  quantum  discordet,  pnrcus 
avaro.  Hor.  Jjistdbit  infido  scurras  amicus.  Hor.  Gr;ecis  Tuscumcie  sUduoi  dif- 
feruni.  Quint.  Comwdia  differi  sermdni.  Hor.  So  likewise  misceo;  as,  Mista 
modestiaj  yrdvitas.  Cic. 

Rem.  4.  Many  verbs  compounded  with  prepositions,  especially  m  ith  cut,  con 
and /h,  instead  of  the  dative,  either  constantlv  or  occasionallv  take  the  case 
of  the  preposition,  which  is  frequently  repeated.  Sometimes,  also,  a  prejiosi- 
tion  of  similar^signification  is  used;  as,  A(\  jirimdm  vocem  timidas  advertltit 
aures.  Ovid.  Nemo  eum  antecessit.  Nep.  Saxa  tides  sold  coalescere  calce.  Lnor. 
Infi'runt  omnia  in  ignem.  Ctes.  Silex  incumbcbnt  ad  amnem.  Virg.  fnnijus 
mmleiainine  naiis.  Ovid.  In  P ansum  frdtrem  innixiis.  I'lin.  Omfvrte  Iwm 
pdrem  cum  illo  bello.  Cic.  In  this  substitution  of  one  preposition  for  anothe. 
(Wis  nsed  for  in,  and  in  for  dd;  db  for  ex ;  ad,  ante,  contra,  and  in,  for  db;  cki 
and  ante,  for  j}rd. 

Rem.  5.  Neuter  verbs  of  motion  or  of  rest  in  a  place,  when  compourded 
with  the  prepositions,  dd,  ante,  cdn,  in,  etc.,  either  take  the  dative,  or,  acquir- 


lyue 
iibe  V-^33.  (3.) 

(ollowod  by  tlie  dative  ;  as, 


I.    V'erbs,compounded  with  satis,  bene,  and  malt ,  are 


228  STNTAX, DATIVE    AFTER    VEEBS.  §  225, 

Et  nritiirn?  ct  iSgibus  sdiisfecU,  He  satisfied  both  nature  and  the  laws.  Cic. 
Fibi  tin  bem'fdcidnt  omnes,-  'May  all  the  gods  bless  you.  Plant.  But  also,  Ami- 
cum  erga  bene  feci.   Id.    MdUdlcit  uirique.  Her.    So  sdtisdo,  benedico,  mdUfdcic 

Note.  These  compounds  are  often  written  separately;  and  the  dative  always  depends 
not  ou  fdtis.  bene,  and  male,  but  ou  the  simple  verb.  So,  also,  hane  and  male  aliciti 
fOlo  ;  as,  Tibi  bene  ex  dnimo  volo.  Ter.  Illi  S^o  ex  ommbi/s-  opfime  volo.  Plaut.  Non 
gibi  male  vult.  Petron.  In  like  manner  ra/ece  .:/?co,  and  valt  ilicn ;  as,  Augustus  rlisce- 
dtns  i  curia)  sBdent'ibits  siiigHlis  valere  dlcebat.  Suet.  Tibi  valedirere  non  licet  gratis. 
Sen.—  In  late  writers  benedico  and  maledico  sometimes  take  the  accusative. 

II.  Verbs  in  the  passive  voice  are  sometimes  followed  by  a  dative  of  the 
agent,  chiefly  in  the  poets  and  the  later  prose  writers ;  as,  Qiddquid  in  hoc 
causa  mihi  suscejjttuh  est.  Cic.  Neque  cernitur  uUi,  Nor  is  he  seen  by  any  one. 
Virg.  Nulla  tiiarum  audita  mihi  neque  visa  surorum.  Id.  Burbdrus  hie  ego  sum, 
quia  non  inltlliyor  ulli.  Ovid.  But  the  agent  after  passives  is  usually  in  the 
ablative  with  a  or  ab.  See  ^  248, 1. 

m.  The  participle  in  dus  is  followed  by  a  dative  of  the  agent ; 
as, 

Unda  omnibus  endviganda,  The  wave  over  which  (we)  all  must  pass.  Hor. 
Nobis,  cum  semel  occidit  brevis  lux,  Nox  est  perpetua  una  donnienda.  Catull. 
Adhibenda  est  nobis  diligentia,  We  must  use  diligence.  Cic.  Vestigia  summorum 
hdniinum  sibi  tuenda  esse  dlcit.  Id.  Si  vis  me  Jiere,  ddlendum  est  pi'lmum  iipsi 
tibi.  Hor.     Fdcieiuliim  mihi  putdvi,  ui  responderem.  Id. 

Remakk  1.  The  dative  is  sometimes  wanting  when  the  agent  is  indefinite; 
as,  Orandum  est,  ut  sit  mens  sdna  in  corpore  sdno.  Juv.  Eic  vincendum  aut  m6- 
riendum,  mUites,  est.  Li  v.  In  such  examples,  tibi,  vobis,  nobis,  hominibus,  etc., 
may  be  supplied.  Cf.  §  141,  K.  2. 

Rem.  2.  The  participle  in  dus  sometimes,  though  rarely,  has,  instead  of  the 
dative  of  the  agent,  an  ablative  with  d  or  db ;  as,  Non  eos  in  deorum  immortdlium 
nn77iei-o  venerandus  a,  vuhis  et  cdk7idos  putdtosf  Cic.  Ecec  a  me  in  dlcendo  proe- 
tereunda  non  sunt.  Id. — The  dative  after  participles  in  dus  is  by  some  referred 
to  ^  226. 

IV.  Verbs  signifying  motion  or  tendency  are  followed  by  an  ac- 
cusative with  dd  or  in ;  as. 

Ad  templum  Pallddis  ibant.  Virg.  Ad  praetorem  hdminem  traxit.  Cic.  Vergii 
ad  septemti-iones.  Cces.    In  conspectum  venire.  Nep. 

So  curro,  duco,  fero,  festlno,  J  ugio,  incllno,  lego,  mitto,  per  go,  porto,  q^roecipi- 
to,  qjrdpero,  teitdo,  tollo,  vddo,  verto. 

Rejiark  1.  So  likewise  verbs  of  calling,  exciting,  etc. ;  as,  Eurum  ad  se 
v6cat.  Virg.  Provocasse  ad  pugnam.  Cic.  So  dnimo,  hortor,  incito,  invito,  Id- 
cesso,  stimido,  suscito ;  to  wlijch  may  be  added  attineo,  confwmo,  perllneio,  tiud 
tpecto. 

Rem.  2.  But  the  dative  is  sometimes  used  after  these  verbs;  as,  Cld'.nor  it 
ccelo.  Vii'g.  Ditm  tihi  liter (B  mete  venia7it.  Cic.  Gregem  viridi  compelle re  hibis- 
00.  Virg.  SC'dibus  Imnc  refer  ante  suis.  Id.  After  venio  both  constructions 
arc  usr  1  at  tlie  same  time;  as,  Vfnit  mihi  in  mentem.  Cic.  Vi^nit  mihi  in  sus- 
piciunem.  Nep.  Eum  vi'nisse  Germanis  in  aniJcitiara  cogndceral.  Cods.  Prd- 
pinquo  (to  approach)  takes  the  dative  only. 

Rem.  .3.  Sometimes  also  verbs  signifying  motion  are  followed  by  an  accusa- 
tive of  place  wiUiout  a  preposition,  a  supine  in  um,  an  infinitive,  or  an  adverb 
of  place;  ixs,  VMin-xm  jirdfectiis  est.  /<e  domum.  Rus  Ibam.  La\"inia  vaiit  li- 
tora.  Viig.  Neque  egc  te  densum  venio.  Plaut.  Non  7ios  Libycos  popiilare 
penatcs  vini7nus.   V^irg.     Hue  cenit.  Plaut.    See  §§  237,  276,  II.  271,  N.  2. 

Reji.  4.  After  do.  scribo,  or  mitto  litei-as,  the  person  for  whom  they  are  writ- 
ten or  to  whom  they  are  sent,  is  put  either  in  the  dative  or  in  the  accusative 
with  uti;  as,  £»  eo  Woo  tibi  literas  ante  dederamus.  Cic.    Vulturdus  lUeras  siln 


S  226,  227.         SYNTAX. — dative  after  verbs.  229 

ad  Catillnam  ddtas  esse,  dicebat.  Id.  C^ar  scribit  Labieno  mm,  etc.  Cass  Ad 
inc  CitrUis  de  te  scrijisit.  Cic.  But  to  give  one  a  letter  to  dolivor  is  also  ex- 
pressed by  dare  lUeras  dlicni,  and  also  the  delivery  of  the  letter  by  the  bearer. 

§  9S0.     Ji!st  is  followed  by  a  dative  denoting  a  possessor; — i 

the  thing  possessed  being  the  subject  of  the  verb. 

Ji^st  thus  used  may  generally  be  translated  by  the  verb  to  have  with  tha 
dative  as  its  subject;  as,  A'st  mihi  ddmi  pater,  I  have  a  father  at  home.  Virg- 
Sunt  nobis  mUia  puma,  \Ve  have  mellow  apples.  Id.  Gratia  nobis  dpus  est  tnd, 
We  have  need  of  your  favor.  Cic.  Innocentiaj  jiliis  jiertcidi  quain  hmoris  est. 
Sail.  An  nescis  loiu/ns  regibus  esse  mdmis'^  Ovid.  So  witii  an  infinitive  as  the 
Br.bject,  N'ec  trbi  sit  dums  ihuisse  in  pnelia  denies.  Tib.  4,  3,  3.  The  first  and 
second  persons  of  sum  nrc  not  thus  construed. 

Remakk  1.  Hence  rnihi  est  nomen  signifies,  1  have  the  name,  my  name  is,  or 
I  am  called.  The  proper  name  is  put  either  in  the  nominative,  the  dative,  or 
the  genitive.  See  §  204,  R.  8.  So  also  cofjndmen,  cognomentum,  and,  in  Taci- 
tus, voeObiduni,  est  mihi. — Sometimes,  also,  a  possessive  adjective  agreeing  with 
nomen,  etc.,  supplies  the  place  of  the  proper  name;  as,  Asi  mihinmntn  Tar- 
quinium.  Gell.     Merciiriiile  impdsuere  miln  cognomen.  Hor. 

Rem.  2.  The  dative  is  used  with  a  similar  signification  after  y'tire,  suppHit, 
dbest,  dec//,  and  dcfit ;  as,  Pauper  enim  non  est,  cui  rerum  supjjetit  fisiis.  Hor. 
Si  mihi  eauda  foret,  cercdpithecus  eram,.  Mart.  Defidt  ars  vobis.  Ovid.  N(yn 
defore  Arsacidis  virtutem.  Tac.  Lac  mihi  non  dejit.  Virg.  Hoc  imam  illi  cdi- 
fuit.  Cic. 

Reji.  3.  With  the  dative  of  the  person  after  est  Sallust  and  Tacitus  some- 
times join,  by  a  Greek  idiom,  volens,  cupiens,  and  invitus;  as,  Quia  neque  plebi 
militia  volenti  (esse)  putdhcitur.  Because  the  common  people  were  not  thought 
to  like  the  war.  Sail.  Ut  qidbasque  bellum  invltis  aut  cupientibus  erat,  Accord- 
ing as  each  liked  or  disliked  the  war.  Tac. 

Native  of  the  End  ok  Pukpose. 

§  337.     Sum,  and  several  other  verbs,  are  ibl  lowed  by  two 

datives,  one  of  which  denotes  the  object  to  which,   the   other  the 

end  for  which,  any  thing  is,  or  is  done  ;  as, 

Mihi  maxima  est  curre.  It  is  a  very  gi-eat  care  to  me.  Cic.  Sp'cro  nobis  hattc 
conjttnctidnem  voluptfiti  /Ore,  I  hope  this  union  wiK  afford  us  pleasure.  Id. 
Matri  pucllnm  dono  dedit.  Ter.  Fiibio  laudi  datum  est.  Cic.  Vitio  id  tibi  ver- 
iunt.  Plaut.  /d  tibi  lionori  hdbi'lur.  Cie.  Mdturdvit  collegSB  venire  auxllio.  Liv 
Cui  bono  fuit  ?  To  whom  was  it  an  advantage  V  Cic. 

Remark  1.  The  vcrlis  after  which  two  datives  occur,  are  sum,  fdre,  f\o,  do,  Udno, 
dnco,  hdbeo,  reliiif/iio,  tribiw,  verto ;  also  cuno,  eo,  7nitto,  pruficiscor,  vciiio,  nppono,  as- 
sievo,  cedo,  compdro,  paleo,  suppSdito,  imo,  and  some  others. 

Kkm.  2.  Tlie  dative  of  tlie  end  or  purpose  is  often  used  after  these 
verbs,  without  the  dative  of  the  object;  as, 

Exeinplo  es< /o/7«I(fl,  The  ant  is  (serves  for)  an  example.  Hor.  Absentium 
bdnn  divTsui  fitrre.  Liv.  Rrfiquit  pignori  putdmina.  Plaut.  Qiue  esui  ei  potui 
sunt.  Gell.  Ksse  derlsui,  To  be  a  subject  of  ridicule.  Tac.  HOceptui  cduere, 
To  sound  a  retreat.  Ca2s.     Aliquid  doti  dicdre,  To  set  out  as  dowry.  Cic. 

Rkm.  3.  («.)  The  verb  siuii,  with  a  dative  of  the  end,  may  be  va- 
riously rendered  ;  as   by  the  woi-ds  hri7i(j.^,  ujfonls,  serven,  does,  etc 
^The  sign  for  is  often  omittcil   with   this  dative,   especially  after  sum 
"insUiad  of  it,  as,  or  some  otluy>partide,  may^at  times  be  used  ;  as, 


230         SYNTAX. DATIVE  AFTKR  PARTICLES.       §  228 

lyr/tivia  evil  tibi  marirw  dedecori,  Cowardice  will  bring  ^-eat  disi,Tace  to  yen 
Oic.  Ilcec  rt's  est  arguniento,  This  thing  is  an  argument,  or  serves  as  an  p.Vgu- 
ment.  Id.     Hoc  vltio  viihi  dant,  This  they   set  down   as  a  fault  in  me.      Uni- 

versos   eura;  hubuil.    Snet.      Una  res  erat  mar/jio   usui 'was  of  great   use. 

Lucil.    Quod  tIbi  maqndpere  cordi  est,  riiihi  vehemtnter  displhet,  What  is  a  great 
pleasure,  an  object  of  peculiar  interest  to  you,  etc.  Id. 

(6.)  Sometimes  the  words  Jit,  able,  ready,  etc.,  must  be  supplied,  <;specially 
before  a  gerund  or  a  gerundive;  as,  Quum  solvendo  cicitate^^  nan  esstnt,  ....  not 
able  to  pay.  Cic.  DlvUes,_  qui  Oneri  ferendo  essent.  Liv.  Hn^ce  restingueiido 
igni  forent.  Liv.     Radix  ejus  est  vescendo.  Plin. 

Rem.  4.  Instead  of  the  dative  of  the  end,  a  predicate  nominative  or  accusa- 
tive is  sometimes  used;  as,  Ndtura  tn  illi  pater  es.  By  nature  you  are  his 
father.  Amor  est  exitium  pecori  :  or  the  purpose  is  expressed  by  the  accusa- 
tive with  ad  or  in;  as,  Alicui  cdmes  est  ad  bellum.  Cic.  Se  Reniis  in  clientelam 
'iicdOant.  Cajs. :  or  by  the  ablative  with  jn-o ;  as,  Itindcentia  pro  mallvolentia 
duci  ccepit.  Sail.   Alcibus  sunt,  arbores  pro  ciibillbus.   Cffis. 

Rem.  5.  Instead,  also,  of  the  dative  of  the  end  or  purpose,  quo?  to  what  end? 
for  what  purpose?  why?  sometimes  occurs,  with  an  accusative,  which  gen- 
erally depends  on  a  verb  understood,  or  with  an  infinitive  or  a  clause;  as.  Quo 
milii  fortiinam,  si  non  concedltur  utif  Hor.  Quo  tibi,  Pasiphaf,  pj'etiOsas  suniere 
vstes  f  Ovid. 

Reji.  6.  After  do  and  other  similar  active  verbs  an  accusative  of  the  purpose 
is  found  in  apposition;  as,  Latlni  coronam  aurtaiii  Jovi  donum  in  CdpiioliuTn 
mittunt.  Liv.     Alicui  comitem  esse  ddlum.  Cic.    Cf.  ^  204,  R.  1;  and  §  230,  R.  a. 

Note.  The  dative,  instead  of  the  accusative,  is  sometimes  used  after  the 
infinitive,  when  a  dative  precedes,  and  the  subject  of  the  infinitive  is  omitted; 
as,  V'ibis  necesse  est  J'l^jjiihus  esse  viris.  Liv.  Maximo  tibi  et  civi  et  diici  evddere 
contigit.  Val.  Max.    See  §§  205,  R.  6,  and  239,  R.  1. 

.DATIVE  AFTER  PARTICLES. 

§  238.  Some  pai'ticles  are  followed  bj  the  dative  of  the 
object ;  as, 

1.    Some  adverbs  derived  from  adjectives ;  as, 

Prdpius  TibOri  qiuim  Thermopylis.  Nep.  Proxime  castris,  Veiy  near  to  tliu 
camp.  Ca3s.  PrOpius  stabiilis  armenta  tenerent.  X'irg.  Conyruenter  iiatarEe, 
convenienterque  vivcre,  Agreeably  to  nature.  Cic.  UpicHrus  qmuii  sibi  constan- 
ter  conreinenterque  dicat,  mm  IdbOrat.  Id.  "Niimlm  liimiuiu  bene  est.  Afran.  lliiii 
numquum  in  vltu  fuit  melius.  Hor.  Vlcere  vita;  hundnum  dmlce.  Cic.  Beu^t 
mihi,  bene  vobis.  Plant.  So,  Mihi  vbvlam  viinisti.  Cic.  In  certdnilna  scevu  com- 
minus  'ire  viro.  Sil.  Quaistores  prOvincim  mihi  pi'cesio  fuirunt.  Cic.  Sdmos  est 
exadversum  JNIileto.  App. 

Remark.  Prdpius  and  proxime,  like  their  primitive  prOpe,  are  sometimes 
construed  with  a  and  the  ablative;  as,  Prdpt  a  meis  aidlbus.  Cic.  Slellit 
exrantes  propius  a  terris.  Id.  A  Sura  proxime  est  Philiscum,  02)pidum  Parllid- 
rum.  Plin. 

2.  Certain  prepositions,  especiallv  in  comic  wi'iters;  as,  Mihi  clam  esi,  It  is 
unknown  to  me.  Plaut.  Contra  mhis.  Id.  But  in  such  instances  they  seem 
rather  to  be  used  like  adjectives. 

3.  Certain  interjections;  as,  Eeimlhi!  Ah  me!  \'n'g.  Vcb  mihi.'  Wo  is  me! 
Ter.   Vce  victis  esse  !  Liv.    Va  misero  mihi.  Plaut     Hem  tibi.  Id.  JEcce  tibi.  Cic. 

Note,  (a.)  The  dative  of  the  substantive  pronouns  seems  sometimes  nearly 
redundant,  but  it  alvvaj^s  conveys  the  expression  of  a  lively  feeUng,  and  ij 
therefore  t(}\n\ed  ddtivus  etiiicus ;  as, 


§229.  SYNTAX. ACCUSAItVE    AITRP.    VKRBS.  2'U 

Fur  mill!  es  ....  iii  my  opinion.  Plant.  An  il/e  inlhi  I'lbfr,  civl  inulier  impirat} 
Cii;.  Toiu/iliiim  milii  cdnxit.  Id.  Uhi  nunc  nobis  dens  Hit  iiuiijisler?  V'ir^. 
Jic ce  Uhi  Sctiosus!  Cic.  ffcm  tihi  Wiknt/int  iirf/(;n/i !  Pliiliij/ih  itm  csl.  IMiuit.  Sihi 
is  sometimes  subjoined  ijiiite  pleoiiMstically  to  .su».f;  as,  Suo  sibi  (jladio  liunc 
jutfulo.  I'hiut.     Ignorans  suo  sibi  servit  pnlri.  Id.     Sibi  suo  tempdre. 

(b.)  The  fo. lowing  phrases  also  occur  with  vulu  and  a  reflexive  pronaun: 
quid  libi  vis?  what  do  you  wautV  'pad  sibi  iste  vult?  what  does  he  wantV  quid 
vuU  sibi  luec  oraiio  ?  what  does  this  sjieecli  mean  i*  (piid  luec  sibi  dona  v6lunt  * 
wliat  is  the  meaning  of  these  presents?  or,  what  is  thek  object? 

ACCUSATIVE. 

ACCUSATIVE    AFTER    VERBS. 

§  339.     The  object  of  a  transitive  verb  is  put  in  the  accu-sa 

tive ;  as, 

Legatos  7niUunt,  They  send  ambassadors.  Cces.  Animus  mdvet  corpus,  The 
mind  moves  the  body.  Cic.  Da  veniam  banc.  Grant  this  favor.  Ter.  Eum 
tmitdti  sunt,  They  imitated  him.  Cic.     Piscem  Syi-i  venerantur.  Id. 

Remaijk  1.  A  transitive  verb,  with  the  accusative,  often  takes  a 
genitive,  dative,  or  ablative,  to  express  some  additional  relation ;  as, 

Te  convinco  amentiis,  I  convict  you  of  madness.  Cic.  Da  foruw  meliOrlbus. 
Give  place  to  your  betters.  Ter.  Solvit  se  Teucvia  luctu,  Troy  frees  herself 
from  grief.  Virg.     See  those  cases  respectively. 

Rem.  2.  Such  is  tlie  differetioe  of  idiom  between  the  Latin  and  English  languages,  that 
many  verbs  considered  transitive  in  one.  are  used  as  intransitive  in  the  other.  Hence, 
in  translating  transitive  Latin  verbs,  a  preposition  must  often  be  supplied  in  English; 
as,  Ut  me  caveret.  That  he  should  beware  of  me.  Cic.  On  the  other  hand,  many  verbs, 
which  in  Latin  are  intransitive,  and  do  not  take  an  accusative,  are  rendered  into  Englisli 
by  transitive  verbs ;  as,  Ille  milii  favet.  He  favors  me:  and  many  verbs  originally  in- 
transitive acquire  a  transitive  signification. 

Rem.  3.    The  verb  is  sometimes  omitted : — 

1.  To  avoid  its  repetition ;  as,  Eventum  sendtus,  quern  {sciL  dare)  videbltur^ 
dubit.  Liv. 

2.  The  interrogative  interjection  i^irtW?  what?  depends  on  ais  or  censes.  So 
also  quid  vero  ?  quid  njitur  f  quid  eryo  ^  quid  enim  ?  which  are  always  folkiwoc 
by  another  question,  and  both  questions  may  be  united  into  one  proposition, 
the  first  sei'ving  merely  to  introduce  the  interrogation.  With  quid  posteai 
quid  turn?  auypW  sequiiur.  With  5?arf  juofZ,  occurring  in  transitions,  r/icrtm  c/e 
eo  is  omittcfl,  but  it  maybe  rendered  'naj-,'  'naj^even,'  '  but  now,'  'more- 
over,' etc.,  without  an  interrogation. — Dlcam  is  also  to  be  supjjlied  with  quiA 
mtiltaf  quill  plura?  ne  laulta  ;  ne  mullis ;  ne  plura.  The  infinitive  (/icere  is  also 
sometimes  omitted;  as,  Nimis  mulia  videor  de  7ne.  Cic.     Peryerelioua.  Id. 

Rem.  4.   The  accusative  is  often  omitted : — 

1.  Whsn  it  is  a  reflexive  pronoun ;  as,  Nox  pnecipltat,  sell,  se  Virg.  Vum 
p?-dra  dvei'tit.  Id.     Ko  lardtum,  scil.  me.  Hor. 

The  reflexives  are  usually  wanting  after  abdleo^  ah.ttlneo,  accingo.  adaquo,  trquo,  ag- 
gloDilro,  au^eo,  cllSro^  congiiinno,  conttnuo,  rlii/ino.  '/erd</uo,  c/esino,  diffiro ,  driro, 
Inimpo,  Jlecto,  dcflecto,  faresso,  incipio,  inclVnn.  ins'iiUKi.  irnunjio,  jungo,  Idi-o,  laxo, 
llnw,  niaturn.  rnotlio,  iriSvfo,  niuto,  pOno,  pm-cijii'ii.  jnijriini/jo,  ijudtio,  rSmitio,  rctracto, 
sedo,  sisto.  stabulo,  .^Uf/pSditn,  tarda,  tineo,  tfndo.  trai'ii  ic.transmirio,  turbo,  vam,  vergo, 
verto,  deverto,  rSverto.  vrstio,  vibro ;  and  more  rarely  after  many  others. 

2.  When  it  is  scpinething  indefinite,  has  been  previously  expressed  in  any 
case,  or  is  easily  su|)[)lied ;  as,  A'(/o,  cid  qwis  scr'ibiim,  nescio,  scW.  literas  Cic. 
De  quo  Kt  tecum  i<ji  diliyenter,  et  scripti  iid  te.  Id.  Bene  fecit  Sllius.  Id.  DUcii 
in  hostein,  scil.  exercituiii.  Liv. 


232       SYNTAX. ACCUSATIVE  AFTKR  VKRBS.        §  230 

Rem.  5.  An  infinitive,  or  one  or  more  substantive  cl.uises,  may 
(iupply  the  place  of  the  accusative  after  an  active  verb  ;  as, 

Da  mild  fallere.  Hor.  Reddts  dulce  loqui,  reddes  ridere  decurum.  Id.  Ciipii 
me  esse  clementem.  Cic.  Athenienses  staiucrunt  ut  naves  conscenderent.  Id. 
Vereor  iie  a  doctis  reprehendar.  Id.Euce,  Bacche,  sdnat.  Ovid.  Sometimea 
both  constructions  are  united;  as,  Di  iram  miseraniur  viuincn  anihorum,  tt  tan- 
tos  mortalibus  esse  liibores.  Virg. — Respecting  the  infinitive  witli  and  without 
a  subject-accusative  after  an  active  verb,  see  §  270-273;  and  for  the  subjuno 
tive  after  such  verbs,  see  §  273. 

(a.)  In  sucli  constructions,  the  subject  of  the  dependent  clause  is  sometimea 
put  in  tlie  accusative  as  the  object  of  the  leading  verb ;  as,  Nosti  JIarceUum, 
qtiam  tardus  sit,  for  Nosti  quam  tardus  sit  Marcellus.  Cic.  Ilium,  ut  vlvat, 
optani.  Ter.     At  te  ego  fdcinm,  ut  minus  valeas.  Plaut. 

(b.)  An  ablative  with  de  may  also  supply  the  place  of  the  accusative,  by  the 
ellijisis  of  some  general  word  denoting  thinr/s,  facts,  etc.,  modified  by  such  ab- 
lative; .as,  De  ri'publicd  vcslrd  paucis  accipe.  Sail.  Compare  a  similar  omission 
of  a  w6)  "xt  modified  by  de  and  the  ablative,  §  209,  R.  3,  (2.) 

Rem.  6.  The  impersonal  verbs  of  feeling,  miseret,  pcenitet,  pudet, 
(cedet,  ]iu/ci,  inisereacit,  misSretur,  and  pertCB>^um  ext,  are  followed  by 
an  accusative  of  the  person  exercising  the  feeling,  and  a  genitive  of 
the  object  in  respect  to  which  it  is  exercised.  Cf.  §  215,  (1.) ;  as, 

Eoram  nos  miseret,  We  pity  them.  Cic.  The  impersonal  Ventum  est  :dso 
occurs  with  such  an  accusative;  Quos  non  est  veriium  pmere,  etc.  Cic. 

Rem.  7.  Jiivat,  delectat,  fallit,  fiujit,  prcelerlt,  and  decet,  with  theii 
compounds,  take  an  accusative  of  the  person ;  as, 

Te  hildri  animo  esse  valde  me  jurat,  That  you  are  in  good  spirits  greatly 
delights  me.  Cic.  Fur/it  me  ad  te  scribrre.  Cic.  JUud  nlterum  quam  sit  difficile, 
te  non  fHyit.  Id.  Nee  vero  CiBsarem  fefelUl.  Ctes.  Fdcis,  ut  te  decet.  Ter. 
So  also  when  used  personally;  as,  Parviim  j)arva  decent.  Hor.;  but  decet  often 
takes  the  accusative  of  the  person  with  the  infinitive;  as,  Hanc  mdcHlain  nos 
decet  eft" iigi're.  Ter. ;  and  in  comic  writers  a  dative ;  as,  Vdbis  decet.  Ter. 

For  mea,  tua,  sua,  nostra,  vestra,  after  refert  and  intSrest,  see  §  219,  R.  1 :  and  for  the 
accusative  by  attraction,  instead  of  the  nominative,  see  J  206,  (6,)  (6.) 

§  SOO.     Verbs  signifying  to  name  or  call ;  to  choose,  render 

or  constitute ;  to  esteem  or  reckon,  which  in  the  passive  voice 

have  two  nominatives,  are  followed   in  the  active  voice   by  two 

accusatives,  one  of  the  object  and  the  otlier  of  the  predicate. 

Cf.  §  210,  R.  3,  (3.)  ;  as, 

Urbem  ex  Antidchi  patris  nomine  Antiochiam  vdcdvit.  He  called  lr.3  city  An- 
tioch,  etc.  Just.  Ludos  faeis  me.  You  make  game  of  me.  Plaut.  Me  consii. 
lem  J" i!cistis.  Cic.  Iram  bene  I'M7iius  initium  dixit  insdnice.  Id.  Ancum  Mar- 
cium  regem  populus  credvit.  Liv.  Sulpicium  accusatorem  suum  numerdbat^ 
non  compctitorem.  Cic.   Quum  vos  testes  hdbeam.  Nep. 

Note  1.  The  following  are  among  the  verbs  included  in  this  rule,  viz.  appello,  dlco, 
nominn,  nuncupo.  pfrJiiheo,  saluto,  scrlho  vind  inscrlho,  I'oco ;  cdpio,  ccnsttiiio,  creo,  dS' 
cl9.ro,  deli^n,  desi^nn,  diro,  Slit^a.  facia,  efficio,  institun,  lego,  prodo,  reddo,  renuncioi 
ditco,  dignor,  exisUmo,  habeo,  jfidico,  nuincro,  piito,  rSperio,  iutelUgo,  invetiio,  se  prcR- 
bSre  or  prcnstare,  etc 

Note  2.  An  ablative  with  ex  occurs,  though  rarely,  instead  of  the  accusa- 
•.ive  of  the  object;  as,  Fortuna  me,  qui  I'lher  fuerani,  servum  fecit,  e  summa 
xnfimum.  Plaut.  Cf.  Qui  recta  priiva  fdciunt.  Ter. 

Note  3.  An  infinitive  may  supply  the  ph^ce  of  the  objective  accusative ;  as, 
Hi  sXmu.  assQ  vdcat  crimen.  Ovid.: — and  sometimes  of  the  predicate  accusative 


§231  SYNTAX. ACCUSATIVE    AFTER    VERBS.  233 

also;  as,  Si  reperire  vdcas  amittfire  certius;  aut  si  scire  ubi  sit  rcperire  vdctts.  Id. 
So  also  nil  adjective  may  supply  the  place  cf  the  predicate  accusative;  as, 
Prtsbuil  se  diguum  suis  mujonbiis.  Cic.    dvsdrem  certiOrem  faciunt.  Cses. 

Remakk  1.  After  verbs  signifying  to  esteem  or  reckon,  one  of  the 
accusatives  is  often  the  subject,  and  the  othe\  the  predicate,  of  esse 
expressed  or  understood  ;  as, 

Euni  avanxm  possiimvs  existimdre.  Cic.  Tdlem  se  imperatorem  prcebvii.  Nep. 
Pnefla  te  cum,  qui  mihi  es  curjnitus.  Cic.  Merciiriura  omnium  inventorem  nrlium 
fenml;  liunc  vidrum  aUiue  iliniriim  ducQm  arbitrantur.  Cses. ;  or  an  adjective 
8uppli3S  the  place  of  the  predicate  accusative;  as,  Ne  me  existimuris  ad  mane'\ 
ium  esse  propensiorem.  Cic. 

Note  4.  Instead  of  the  predicate  accusative,  (1)  pro  with  the  ablative  some- 
times follows  ^;uto,  duco,  and  lidbeo,  but  denotes  only  an  approximation;  as, 
Allqtdd  j)ro  certo  habere  or  putare..  Ea  pre  fahsis  ducit.  Sail.  Aliquem  pro  hoste 
habere.  Caes. — So  also  in  with  the  ablative ;  as.  Nihil  prceter  virtuttm  in  bonis 
h'lbi're.  Cic.  Aliquem  in  numero  hosiium  diicere.  Cic. — and  the  ablative  with- 
out in ;  as,  U(i  vos  affinium  loco  diicerem.  Sail. — So  also  e  or  ex  with  the  abla- 
tive; ■.I!',  (  Ut)  ydceret  qiiod  e  reimbUca,  fideque  sna  ducerei.  Liv. — vSometimes 
(2,  the  cenitive;  ns,  Otl'icii  duxil  exoi-dre  J'iUcb pntrem.  Suet.  (See  V211,  K.  S,  (3.) 
Sc  with  a  genitive  or  an  ablative  of  price  or  value;  as,  Putdrt  aliquem  nihilo. 
Cic.  y on  hdbeo  nanc'i  Mai-sum  augitrem.  Enn — and  sometimes  (3)  a  dative;  as, 
Quando  tu  me  hdbes  desplcfitui.  Plant. : — or  an  adverb ;  as,  jEgre  hdbuit,  f  ilium  ia 
pro  pdrente  nnsum.  Liv.  And  (4)  ad  or  z«  with  the  accusative;  as,  Ldca  Sid 
hibernacula  ^(j^e/-e.  Liv.  Aliquem  in  Patres  legere.  Id.:  or  (5)  the  genitive 
depending  on  the  ablative  of  cause,  manner,  etc. ;  as,  Qui  servitdtem  deditionis 
nomine  appellant.  Caes. 

Rem.  2.  Many  other  verbs,  besides  their  proper  accusative,  take  a 
eecond,  denoting  a  purjjose,  time,  character,  etc. 

Such  are  do,  tribuo,  sumo,  peto,  pono,  adjungo,  ascribo,  cognosco,  accio.  Jingo, 
significo,  etc. ;  as, 

Qiidre  ejus  figce  comitem  me  adjungerem.  Cic.  Hdminum  dplnio  socium  7»e 
ascribit  tuis  "laudibus.  Id.  Quos  eqo  sim  tdties  jam  dedigndta  maritos.  Virg. 
Hunc  Igitttr  Y^gQxn  ugnoscimus,  qui  FhlVqipum  dediyndtur  patrem?  Curt.  Flliam 
iuam  mihi  uxorem  posco.  Plaut.  Petit  hanc  Sdturnia  munus.  Ovid.  Such 
3onstnactions  may  often  be  referred  to  apposition,  or  to  an  ellipsis  of  esse. 

§  331.     Verbs  of  asking,  demanding,  and  teaching,  and  celo 

(to  conceal),  are  followed  by  two  accusatives,  one  of  the  person, 

the  other  of  the  thing ;  as, 

Hoc  te  vehementer  rOgo.  Cic.  Illud  te  oro,  ut,  etc.  Id.  R6go  te  nummos, 
I  ask  you  for  money.  Mart.  Posce  deos  veniam.  Ask  favor  of  the  gods.  Virg. 
Quum  leyent  quis  miisicam  ddcuerit  Epaminondam,  When  they  shall  read  who 
ta-rht  Epaminondas  music.  Nep.  AntigOnus  iter  omnes  celal,  Antigonus  cou 
ceak  his  r)ute  from  all.  Id.  Deprecdri  deos  mala.  Sen.  Quoiidie  (Jasar 
£.i.vizs  irvimiiniwra  jldgitare.  Cses.     Multa  deos  dram.  Virg. 

RzMARK  1.  This  rule  includes  the  verbs  of  asking  and  demanding,  flagito.  efflasTito, 
obsecTO,  Oro,  exuro,  coiifndo,  perr.ontor,  posco,  rc/tosco,  consulo,  precor.  dejTlcur,  rus;o, 
and  inltrro^o,  which,  with  the  accusative  of  the  person,  take  the  accusative  of  the  neuter 
pronouns  hoc,  id,  illud,  quod,  r/iiid,  more  frequently  than  that  of  a  substantive  .■  of  teach- 
ing, duceo,  Idoceo,  deducro,  and  eriidio,  which  last  has  two  accusatives  only  in  the  poets. 
Admuneo  and  consiito  are  rarely  found  with  two  accusatives;  as,  Consulain  /lanc  rem 
unit  OS.  Plaut.     Earn  retn  nos  Hinis  ndmutiuil.  Sail.  • 

Rkm.  2.  Instead  of  the  accu-;ative  of  the  person,  verbs  of  asking  and  de- 
manding often  take  the  ablative  with  ah  or  ex;  as,  Non  di^hlbavi  abs  te  has  lit^ 
ras  jMjscere.  Cic.  Veniam  orimiu  ab  ipso.  \'irg.  Istiid  vdlebam  ex  te  percvntdri 
Plaut. 

20* 


234  STKTAX. — ACCDSATIVE    AFTER    VERBS.  ^  '2o2. 

Rem.  3  (a.)  Instead  of  the  accusative  of  the  thing,  tlie  ablative  with  Uc  is 
sometimes  used;  as,  Sic  ego  te  eisdem  de  rebus  inienv;jciii._  Oic.  De  itlnC-re 
bostiiun  senutiim  eddcet.  Sah.  Bassus  noster  me  de  hoc  hbro  cPldctl.  Cic.  Cf.  ij  229 
R.  5,  (6.) — [/).]  Sometimes  also  instead  of  the  accusative  of  the  thing  an  infini- 
tive, or  an  infinitive  or  subjunctive  clause  is  used;  as,  Bcus  prcciiri  dcbPiis,  ut 
urbem  defendant.  Cic.  Ul  ddcmm  Rulluin  posthac  tacere.  Id.  Docui  id  non 
fieri  posse.  Id.  Doceant  cum  qui  vir  Sex.  Roscius  fuerit.  Id. — (c.)  With  verbs 
of  teaching,  tlie  instrument  by  means  of  which  the  art  is  practised  is  put  in 
the  ablative ;  as,  Allqucm  fldlbus  ducere.  Cic.  Docere  dliquem  armis.  Liv. 
Z,i/e/'(«  may  be  used  eitlier  in  the  accusative  or  in  the  ablative ;  as,  Telitcraa 
doceo.  Cic.     IJoctus  Grcecis  Uteris.  Id. 

Rem.  4.  Some  verbs  of  asking,  demanding,  and  teaching,  are  not  followed  by  two  ac- 
cusatives; as,  f.rvjio,  peto,  postulu,  r/iirrro.  srltor,  sriscilor,  which,  with  the  accusativi  ol 
ihe  thing,  take  an  ablative  of  the  person  with  the  preposition  ah,  rA,  orf.r,-  hnbiio.  in- 
stUuo.  instnin.  etc.,  which  are  sometimes  used  \vith  the  ablative  of  the  thing,  generuUj 
«ithout  a  preposition,  and  are  sometimes  otherwise  construed  ;  as,  Instituere  aliquem 
ad  dicendum.  Cic. 

Rem.  5.  {a.)  Many  active  verbs  with  the  accusative  of  the  person, 
take  also  an  accusative  denoting  in  ivhat  respect  or  to  what  deijree 
the  action  of  the  verb  is  exerted. 

{b.)  The  accusative  of  degree,  etc.,  is  commonly  7M7ii7,  a  neuter  pronoun,  or 
a  neuter  adjective  of  quantit_y;  {is,  Non  quo  vi-e  ahquid  jiivure  posses.  Cic. 
Pauca  2}''o  taii/wre  mllites  hortaiiis.  Sail.  Id  adjuta  me.  Ter.  Neque  est  te  fal- 
lere  quidquam.  Virg.  Cf.  §  232,  (8.) 

Rem.  6.  By  a  similar  construction,  genus  and  secus,  'sex,'  are  sometimes  used 
in  the  accnsative,  instead  of  the  genitive  of  quality;  as,  NuUas  hoc  genus  vigi- 
lins  viyilarunt.  Gell.     So,  Omnes  muliebre  secus.  Suet.  Cf.  211,  R.  6,  (4.) 

§  2S2.  (1.)  Some  neuter  verbs  are  followed  by  an  accusa- 
tive of  kindred  signification  to  their  own  ;  as, 

Yita-m  jucunda7H  vlve.re,  To  live  a  pleasant  life.  Plaut.  Mlrum  somniavi 
Bomnium,  1  have  dreamed  a  wonderful  dream.  Id.  FUrere  hunc  fhrorem. 
Virg.  Islam  pugnam  jmgnabo.  Phxut.  Piu/ndre  dicenda  Musis  proelia.  Hor. 
Lus^m  insolentem  ludere.  Id.  Si  non  servitutem  serviat.  Plaut.  Queror  hand 
fiiciles  que,~tus.  Stat.  JCirdvi  verissimum  jufijumndum.  Cic.  Ignotas  jt'ibef  Ire 
vias.  Val.  Flacc.  So,  also,  Ire  exsequias,  To  go  to  a  funeral.  Ter.  Ire  suppti- 
tias.  To  gg  to  one's  assistance.  Ire  infltias.  To  denj-.  This  expression  is 
equivalent  to  infitior,  and  may  like  that  take  an  accusative;  as.  Si  hoc  uiiiim 
a^imxero,  qnod  ni'mo  eat  i7i/itlas.  Nep. :  or  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive; 
as,  Ncque  infltias  Imus  Siciliam  nostram  provinciam  esse.  Liv.  Ui  swim  gau- 
dium  gmuli'remus.  Coel.  ad  Cic.  Fnficisci  magnum  iter.  Cic.  PoUuj:  itqni 
reditque  viam.  Virg.   This  accusative  is  usually  qualified  by  an  adjective. 

(2.)    Verbs  commonly  neuter  are  sometimes  used  transitively, 

and  are  then  followed  by  an  accusative. 

Accusatives  are  thus  used  with  Cleo  and  sajno,  and  their  compounds,  red,'ho. 
resiqtio;  as,  Oiei!  unguenta.  He  smells  of  perl'umes.  Ter.  Wv-e  peregj-Imru,  • 
To  have  a  foreign  smell.  Cic.  Ordliones  rcdOlentes  antlquitatem.  Id.  Miila 
herbam  earn  sapilint,  The  honey  tastes  of  that  herb.  Plin_.  Una  picem  /•«?/«",  ns. 
Id.  So,  Sitio  honores.  Cic.  Camera  2)lmt.  Liv.  Claudius  aleam  stiidiosiitsime 
lusit.  Suet.  Erumpere  diu  coercitam  iram  in  hostes.  Liv.  Libros  ivigudre.  C>vid. 
Prmre  verba.  Liv.  Nee  vox  hominem  s6nat.  Virg.  Stiddre  mella.  Id.  Murien- 
tem  nonilne  cldmal.  Id.  Quis  post  vlna  grdvem  militiam  ant  paupOriem  crepati 
Hor.  Om\\e<una'indnctnox.  Id.  Ingrdti  d7umi  crimen  horreo.  Cic.  Iigo  ineai 
qui'ror  Airtunas.  Plaut.  VlvSre  Bacchanalia.  .Tuv.  Pastorem  saltdrct  I'lli  Cy- 
clopa,  rOgdbat.  Hor.  So  tlie  passive;  Nunc  agrestem  Cyclnpa  tirjritur.  Id. 
Xerxe.i  quum  mkre  anibfddi-isset,  temimnavigasset.  Cic.  (i«i  stridinm  ivrril.  Id. 
Communia  jura  migrdrs.  Id.    Te  vdlo  colldqui.   Plaut.     Ea  disscrirt  malm.  Cio. 


§  233.        SYNTi  X. ACCUSATIVE  AFTER  VERBS.        2B5 

f-/iry-ion  ardebat  Alexin.  Virg.    Slygias  juravimus  undas.  Ovid.    Nuvti/at  sequor 
Virg.    Currimu^  aequor.  Id.     Pascuntur  sylvas.  Id. 

Note  1.  Accusatives  are  found  in  like  manner  after  ambulo,  calleo,  ddleo,  Squtto,  fleo^ 
gavdeo,  gento,  glOrior.  Iiorrfo^  Itetor,  Idtro,  nato,  palleo^  paveo,  plreo,  dSplreo,  prtcldo^ 
gitlror,  rideo,  sVeo,  sibilo,  tdceo,  trSmo,  trlpido,  vddo,  vinio^  etc. 

(3.)  Neuter  verbs  and  sometimes  adjectives  also  may  be  fol- 
lowed by  an  accusative  denoting  in  what  respect,  or  to  what  de- 
gree, the  feeling,  condition,  etc.,  is  manifested ;  as, 

Nihil  laboto.  Cic.  Num  id  lacrtmat  virc/o?  Does  the  maid  weep  on  tliat  ao- 
.  CC-artV  Ter.  Malta  alia  peccat.  Cic.  Qnicquid  dellrant  rPf/es,  plectuntur 
Ath'rci.  Hor.  Nee  iu  id  indlgndri  jjosses.  Liv.  Illud  mihi  Icetnndum  video.  Cic. 
Illud  valde  tib'i  ua-entior.  Id.  Idem  gloriari.  Id.  Hajc  glorians.  Liv.  Hoc 
stude'  iiiium.  Hor. — So,  Id  dperam  do,  I  strive  for  this.  Ter.  Consilium  petis, 
quid  tlbi  gim  auctor.  Cic.  Quod  quldam  aiicidres  sunt,  Wliich  is  attested  Ijy 
some  authors.  Liv.  Xil  nostri  miserere  f  Virg. — Nihil  Romance  plebis  similis. 
Liv.  Scndtus  nihil  sane  intentus.  Sail.  These  limiting  accusatives  have  coin- 
raonly  the  force  of  adverbs,  particularly  nihil,  which  is  used  like  an  emphatic 
rj>v  in  the  sense  of '  in  no  way,'  '  in  no  respect.'  So  non  nihil,  '  to  some  extent,' 
'  in  some  measure.' 

Note  2.  In  the  above  and  similar  examples,  the  prepositions  ob,  propter,  per,  ad,  etc., 
may  often  bp  supplied.  This  construction  of  neuter  verbs  is  most  common  with  the 
neuter  ufrusatives  id,  quid,  quidquam,  dll'/uid,  quicquid,  quod,  nihil,  nonnViil,  Idem, 
illud,  tail  til  HI,  qumituiii,  unum,  multa,  pauca,  alia,  cetera,  om7iia, etc.  Cf.  §256,  R.  16,  N. 

§  !SS3.  Many  verbs  are  followed  by  an  accusative  depend- 
ing upon  a  preposition  with  which  they  are  compounded. 

(1.)  Active  verbs  compounded  with  trans,  ad,  and  circwn,  have 
sometimes  two  accusatives,  one  depending  upon  the  verb,  the  other 
upon  the  preposition  ;  as, 

Omnem  equitatum  pontem  transdiicit,  He  leads  all  the  cavalry  over  the  bridge 
Cks.  Agesiiaus  Hellespontum  copias  trdjecit.  Nep.  Petreius  jusjiirandum  cid 
igit  Afranium.  Cajs.  Roscillum  Pompi}ius  omnia  sua  prajsidia  eircumdnxll.  Id 
So,  Pontus  scopulos  sUperjacit  undam.  Virg.  So,  also,  adverto  and  vuUuo  with 
unimum ;  as,  Id  dnimum  advertit.  Caes.  Id  quod  iinimum  induxerat  piitdisper 
non  tenuit.  Cic.    So,  also,  injicio  in  Plautus — Ego  te  mdnum  injlciam. 

(2.)  Some  other  active  verbs  take  an  accusative  in  the  passive 
voice  depending  upon  their  prepositions ;  as, 

Mdgicas  accingier  artes.  To  prepare  oneself  for  magic  arts.  Virg.  In  proae 
writers  the  ad  is  in  such  cases  repeated;  as,  accingi  ad  consuldtum.  Liv. 
Clussis  circumvehitur  arcem.  Id.  Quod  anguis  dumi  vectem  circumj tctus  yuisset. 
Cic.     I  .ocuxn  prceterveclus  sum.  Id. 

(3.)  Many  neuter  verbs,  especially  verbs  of  motion,  or  cf  rest  in  a 
place,  when  compounded  with  prepositions  which  govern  an  aecus  i- 
tjve,  become  transitive,  and  accordingly  take  an  acciisative ;  as, 

Gentes  qua  mare  dlnd  adjacent.  The  nations  which  border  upon  that  sea.  Nep. 
Obeq-Mdre  agmen.  Curt.  Incedunl  mcestos  locos.  Tac.  Trnnsilui  flammas.  Ovid.- 
Succedire  tecta.  Cic.  Ludorum  dii:bus,  qui  cognitiOnem  intenvneranl.  Tac. 
Aftire  provinciam.  Suet.  Caveat  ne  proelium  ineat.  Cic.  Ingredi  iter  pedlbus 
Cic.     Ejneuri  horli  quos  mddo  prcjetenbamus.  Id. 

Note.  To  thi.s  rule  belong  many  of  the  compounds  of  umbuln,  cedo,  ci'rro.  eo.  fqutto 
ftuo,  iciar/itr,  labor,  »o  and  vato,  re/io,  salioy  sriim/n,  vudo,  x-i^/inr,  viinio,  volo  ;-  nuho 
jio  o,  sidet ,  si.tto,  sto,  etc.,  with  the  prepositions  included  in  §  224.  and  «ith  ex. 


236  SYNTAX. — ACCUSATrVE    AFTER    VERBS.  §  23*4. 

Remark  1.  Some  neuter  verbs  compounded  with  pr  f^Bitiona 
•which  jrovern  an  ablative,  in  like  manner  become  transitive,  and  are 
followed  by  an  accusative  ;  as, 

Neminem  conveni,  I  met  with  no  one.  Cic.  Qui  societatem  coieris.  Id. 
Aversdii  honores.  Ovid.  Ursi  arborem  dversi  derepunt.  Plin.  Edonni  crapulam. 
Cic.  Egressus  exsilium.  Tac.  Evaditque  celer  npam.  Vir^.  Exccdere  niime- 
rum.  Tac.     Exire  limen.  Ter.     Tibur  dqxuz  fertile  prcBjiuunt.  Hor. 

Rem.  2.  After  verbs  both  active  and  neuter,  compounded  with 
prepositions  which  take  an  accusative,  the  preposition  is  often  repeat- 
ed, or  oiie  of  similar  signification  is  used  ;  as, 

Gi'sar  se  ad  vtemmem  adjunxit.  Cic.  Mnllltudinem  trims  'Rhenum  in  GaTihm 
transduccre.  Cffis. — In  Galliam  inrasit  Antonius.  Cic.  Ad  me  ad'ue  'ju</i>uam 
meinini.  Id.  Orcdor  peraqrat  per  animos  hoinlnum.  Id.  A'is  in  senatiim  aca'de- 
rem.  Id.  Raj'nia  ad  templum  incessit.  Virg.  ,Iuxta  gemtorem  addat  Ldvinia.  Id. 
Fines  extra  quos  egredi  non  possim.  Cic.  A  dative  instead  of  the  accusative 
often  follows  such  compounds,  according  to  \  224.   Circum  is  not  repeated. 

Note.  Some  verbal  nouns  and  verbal  adjectives  in  hundus  are 
followed  by  an  accusative,  like  the  transitive  verbs  from  which  they 
are  derived ;  as, 

Qidd  libi  h^lc  riic^Y'^io  ad  te  est  ineum  v\Y\\m.'i  Wherefore  do  you  receive  my 
husband  liither  to  you  ?  Plant.  Quid  tibi,  mahim^  me,  aid  quid  ego  agam,  eurCdio 
'st?  Id.  Quid  tibi  hanc  dditio  est?  Id.  Quid  itbi  ha.nc  notio  est,  inqua/n,  iumaxm. 
meam?  Quid  tibi  hanc  dic/ito  taclio  'st'^  Id.  Hanno  vitabundus  castra  hostium 
coiisiilesque.  Liv.  Mlthrldates  Romanum  meditabundus  bellum.  Just.  Mird- 
bundi  vanam  speciem.  Liv.  PopHldbundus  agi-os.  Sisenn.  Cariiificem  imdyina- 
bumlus.  App. 

§  234:.  A  verb  in  the  passive  voice  has  the  same  govern- 
ment as  in  the  active,  except  that  the  accusative  of  the  active 
voice  becomes  the  nominative  of  the  passive. 

Note  1.  The  accusative  of  tlie  person  with  the  infinitive,  after  verbs  of  sai/ing 
and  eommandiny,  may  become  tlie  subject  of  the  passive  voice;  as.  Active, 
D'ico  regeni  esse  juslum ; — Passive,  Rex  dlcilur  Justus  esse.  Act.  Jubeo  te  re- 
dlre  ; — Pass.  Juieris  red'ire  :  the  construction  in  the  passive  being  the  same  as 
though  re(jem  and  te  had  depended  immediate!}'  upon  dlco  and  ji'^eo. — So,  also, 
when  the  accusative  of  the  person  is  the  object  of  the  verb  and  the  infinitive 
stands  as  the  accusative  of  the  thing.  Cf.  ^  270,  N. 

I.  When  a  verb,  which  in  the  active  voice  takes  an  accusative 
both  of  the  person  and  of  the  thing,  is  changed  to  the  passive  foi-m, 
the  accusative  of  the  person  becomes  the  nominative,  and  the  accusa- 
tive of  the  thing  is  retained  ;  as, 

RUjdtus  est  sententiam.  He  was  asked  his  opinion.  Liv.  Jnterrdgdtus  causam. 
Tac  "  St'gttes  alimentru/i<e  d'6f/rt  dices  jMscebdtur  humus.  Ovid.  Motus  doceri 
gaudei  lonicos  mdtura  virgo.  Hor.  Omnes  belli  artes  educius.  Liv.  Nosne  h03 
teldtos  tarn  din  ?  Ter.     Multa  in  extis  mdneraur.  Cic. 

'  Note  2.  The  accusative  of  the  thing  aiisr- doctas  and  erfoctos  is  rare ;  and 
after  celdri  it  is  generally  a  neuter  pronoun;  as  hoc  or  ul  colabar;  of  this  I  was 
kept  in  ignorance;  but  it  is  found  also  with  the  person  in  tlie  dative;  as,  Id 
Aleibiadi  diutius  ci'ldri  iwn  jMtuil.  Nep.  Alcib.  5.  Ci'to,  and  especially  its  pas- 
sive, genci'ally  takes  de  with  the  ablative. 

Remakk  1.  (rt.)  Induo  and  exiw,  though  they  do  not  take  two  accusatives 
in  the  active  voice,  are  sometimes  followed  bv  an  accusative  of  the  thing  in 


§  235.        SYNTAX. ACCDSATITE    AFTER    PRtPOSITIONS.  231 

tbe  passive;  as,  fndiKlur  atras  vestes,  She  puts  on  sable  garments.  O'^id 
ThCiraca  induttis.  Virg.  Exuta  est  Roma  senectam.  Mart.  So  inducor  and  cin- 
gor;  us,  Fermm  cinyitiir.  Virg.     So  recinf/itur  angnem.  Ovid. 

(6.)  When  two  accusatives  follow  an  active  verb  compounded  with  tram 
the  passive  retains  tliat  which  depends  upon  the  preposition ;  as,  Belgm  Ehenara 
antiquitus  transducti.  Cajs. 

Rem.  2.  The  futiu-e  passive  participle  in  the  neuter  gender  with  est,  is  some- 
times, though  rarely,  followed  by  an  accusative;  as,  milta  novis  rebus  quum  fit 
agendum.  Lucr.     Quam  (viam)  nobis  inyrediendum  est.    Cic. 

n.  Adjectives,  verbs,  and  perfect  participles,  are  sometimes  fol- 
lowed by  an  accusative  denoting  the  part  to  whicli  their  signification 
relates;  as, 

Niitlus  minibra,  Bare  as  to  his  limbs.  Virg.  Os  humerosj'Me  deo  simiUs.  Id. 
Cldri  gi'iuis.  Tac.  Trlbuni  suam  \icem  anxii.  Liv.  Tremit  artus.  Virg.  Cetera 
parce  puei-  bdlo.  Id.  Slbila  colla  tumentem.  Id.  ExpUri  meutem  nequit.  Id. 
Grynvus  crMtur  ociilos.  Ovid.  Pkti  scuta  LribicL  Virg.  Collis  fronteni  li-nlter 
J'list'ir/filits.  Cajs.     Animum  iiicenstis.  Liv.    Obliius  fiiciem  suo  cruove.  Tac. 

Remark  1.  In  this  construction  an  ablative  is  often  joined  with  the  jierfect 
nartici])le;  as.  Miles  fractus  membra  liibore.  Hor.  Dexterum  genu  lapide 
ictxis.  Suet.     Advorsum  femur  tragijlsi  ^rat;itej' I'cius.    Liv. 

Rem.  2.  This  is  a  Greek  construction,  and  is  usually  called  the  limiting  or 
Greek  accusiitive.  It  is  used  instead  of  an  ablative  of  limitation,  (§  250,)  and 
occurs  most  frequently  in  poetry. 

Rem.  3.  A  limiting  accusative  instead  of  the  ablative  is  found  also  in  a  few 
ordinary  expressions,  as  in  parlim  (for  })arlem),  vicem,  ■mat/nnm  and  inaximam 
partem,  instead  of  magna  or  maxima  ex  parte,  or  the  adverb  fere  ;  as,  Maxi- 
mnm  partem  lacte  vtvunt.  Cces.  Magnam  jyarlem  ex  iambis  nostra  constat  oratio. 
Cic.  Livy  has  magna  pars,  viz.  Niunida;,  magna  pars  agrestes. — So  cetera  and 
reliqua  are  joined  to  adjectives  in  the  sense  of  cPteris,  '  for  the  rest,'  '  in  other 
respects  ' ;  as,  Proximum  regnum,  cetera  cgregium,  ab  una  parte  haud  sulis 
prosperum  fuit.  Liv.  So  cetera  siriiUis,  cetera  bonus.  A  te  bis  terve  summum 
uterus  acci'pi.  Cic. — So,  also,  in  the  expressions  id  temporis ;  id,  hoc  or  idem 
(Btdtis,  illud  horm,  for  eo  tempdre,  ed  cetdte,  etc. ;  id  genus,  omne  geniis,  quod  genus. 

iri.  Some  neuter  verbs  which  are  followed  by  an  accusative,  are 
used  in  the  passive  A'oice,  the  accusative  becoming  the  subject,  ac- 
cordinjT  to  the  general  rule  of  active  verbs:  as, 

Tenia  vivitur  <stas.  Ovid.  Bellum  mllitabitur.  Hor.  Dorinuur  kiems.  Mart 
Multa  peccantur.  Cic.  AdUur  Gnossius  Minos.  Sen.  Ne  ab  omnibns  circumgU- 
lerctur.  Cies.  Hosles  invddi  posse.  Sail.  Campus  dbitur  aqua.  Ovid.  Pluret  (»- 
euntur  grdtice.  Cic.     Ea  res  siletur.  Id. 

ACCUSATIVE    AFTER    PREPOSITIONS. 

§  2J15.  (1.)  Twenty  >six  prepositions  are  followed  by  the 
accusative. 

These  are  lirf,  i/lversus  or  adversutn,  ante,  apud,  circa  OT,circum,  circiier,  cis  or  citrS, 
contra,  erga,  frtra,  infra,  intSr,  intra,  juxta,  db,  penSs,  pSr,  post,  pOnS,  pra.tSr,  prS/'S, 
propter,  secundum,  supra,  trails,  ultra;  as, 

Ad  ternplum  nmi  mqius  Palladis  Ibant, — to  the  temi)le.  Virg.  Adversus  hostes, 
Against  the  enemy.  Liv.  Germdniqui  cis  Rlu'iium  incOlunt, — this  side  the  Rhine 
Cses.  tin um  tantuiii  resident  intra  muros  mdU.  Cic.  Prinnpio  ierum  imju'rinm 
penes  n'ujes  erat.  Just.  Ternplum  pounin  propter  dqiiniii.  Virg.  fnter  agendum. 
Id.  Ante  ddi.iandum.  Id.  Respecting  the  siguification  of  some  of  the  preced 
tng  prepositicas  see  ^  195,  R.  6,  etc. 


238  SYNTAX. ACCUSATIVE    AFTER    PREPOSITIONS.        i  23d 

Rkmark  1.  ds  is  generally  used  with  names  of  p  iices;  a'trn  with  othei 
words  .also;  as,  Cis  Tatirum.  Cic.  Gs  Pddimi.  Liv.  Faucos  cis  mtrisi-s.  Plant 
Citra  VHiam.  Cic.  Citra  saticfatem,  Not  to  satiety.  Col.  Ciii-a  j  ail(jdti6ntm, 
Cels.     Citra  Trojdna  teti/pdra.    Ovid. 

Rkm.  2.  Inter,  signifying  between,  applies  to  two  accusatives  jointlj-,  and 
sometimes  to  a  single  plural  accusative;  .as,  Inter  me  et  Se'tpionem.  Cic.  Inter 
natos  el  pdrentes.  Id.  Inter  nos.  Among  onrsel  yes.  Id.  Inter  fa Icdrios,  Among 
the  scythe-makers.  Cic.  When  it  denotes  time  it  signifies  durincj,  and  more 
rarelv  at ;  as,  Inter  ipsum  puijnae.  tempus.  Liv.     Inter  canain.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  Ante  and  post  are  commonly  joined  with  concrete  official  titles, 
when  used  to  indicate  time,  rather  than  with  the  corresponding  abstract  nouns; 
Et-,  mile  or  2}ost  Ciceronem  consiilem,  rather  than  ante  or  post  consiilatum  Cici- 
Vi-nis. 

(2.)  In  and  sub,  denoting  motion  or  tendency,  are  followed  by  the 
accusative;  denoting  situation,  they  are  followed  by  the  ablative;  as, 

Via  duett  in  urliem,  'I'he  way  conducts  into  the  city.  Virg.  Nosier  in  te  dnwr. 
Cic.  Cnlllmdchi  epi (/rnmina  in  Cleombrotum  est — on  or  concerning  Cleombrotus. 
Id.  Kxeratns  siili  jiigum  missus  est.  The  army  was  sent  under  the  yoke.  Cass. 
Miiyna  mei  sub  terras  ibit  imdno.  Virg.  Media  in  urbe,  In  the  midst  of  the 
city.  Ovid.  In  his  ^fiiit  Ariovistus.  Cass.  Bella  sub  lUdcis  moenibus  gercre, 
To  wage  war  under  the  Trojan  walls.  Ovid.     Sub  nocte  silenti.  Virg. 

Rem.  4.  The  most  common  significations  of  in,  with  the  accusative,  are, 
into,  to,  towards,  until,  for,  (if/ninst,  about,  concerninr/, — with  the  ablative,  in,  07i, 
upon,  nniong.  In  some  instances,  in  and  std),  denoting  tendency,  are  followed 
by  the  ablative,  and,  denoting  situation,  by  the  accusative;  as.  In  conspectu 
meo  audet  ven'ire.  Phsed.  Ndlidnes  qtuB  in  amicitiam  populi  Romdni,  ditionem- 
we  essent.  Id.  <Si'^  juso  dictator  hostes  mlsit.  Liv.  Hustes  sub  montem  conse- 
iisse.  Cses. 

Kem.  5.  In  and  sub,  in  difi'erent  significations,  denoting  neither  tendency  uor 
situation,  are  followed  sometimes  by  the  accusative,  and  sometimes  by  the 
ablative;  a.?;  Amor  crescit  i?i  horns.  Ovid.  BoslUem  in  modum.  Cic.  Quod  in 
bdTio  servo  d'lci  posset.  Id.     Sub  ea  conditione.  Tor.     Sab  pana  mortis.  Suet. 

Rem.  6.  In  expressions  relating  to  time,  sub,  denoting  at  or  in,  usually  takes 
the  ablative;  as,  Sub  adrentu  Kfnndnormn.  Liv.  Sub  luce.  Ovid.  Sub  leripore. 
Lucan.  Denoting  near,  about,  just  before  or  just  after,  it  takes  the  accusative; 
as.  Sub  liicem.  Virg.     Sub  lumina  prima.  Hor.     Sub  hoc  herus  inquit.  Id. 

Rem.  7.  In  is  used  with  neuter  adjectives  in  the  accusative  in  forming  ad- 
verbial phrases ;  as,  //;  uniuersum.  In  general.  In  lOtum,  Wholly.  So,  in  plemim ; 
in  i.neertum ;  in  tantuni ;  in  quantum ;  in  majus ;  in  'melius  ;  in  omnia,  in  all  re- 
spects, etc. 

(3.)  Super,  when  denoting  place  or  time,  is  followed  by  the  accusa- 
tive, and  sometimes  poetically  by  the  ablative  ;  but  when  it  signifies 
on,  about,  or  concerninf/,  it  takes  the  ablative.  With  the  accusative 
sUper  signifies  ooer,  above,  besides  or  in  addition  to ;  with  numerals, 
more  than ;  as, 

Siiper  Idbentem  culmina  ter'i,  vjiiding  over  the  top  of  the  house.  Virg.  Super 
tres  mddios.  Liv.  Siiper  morbum  etiam  fames  affecil  txercUum.  Id.  &lper 
tenero  prosternit  gramine  corpus.  He  stretches  his  body  on  the  tender  grass. 
Virg.  Mulla  super  Priamo  royitans  siiper  Hectore  multa,  ....  concerning  Priam, 
etc'  Id. 

Rem.  8.   The  compound  desuper  is  found  with  the  accusative,  and  insUper 

with  the  accusative  and  the  ablative. 

(4.)    Subter  generally   takes   the    accusative,   but   sometimes,   in 
poeti-y,  the  ablative  ;  as, 
Bubtet  terras.  Under  the  earth.  Liv.    Subter  densa  testiitoie.  Virg. 


5  236.       SYNTAX. —  ACCUSATIV   .    OF    TIME    AND    SPACE.  239 

(5.)   Clam  is  followed  by  either  the  accusative  or  the  ablative  ,  a?, 

CT///J  vos,  Without  yonr  knowledge.  Cic.  C?-(wpatrem.  Ter.  Clam  m:\X\-e,u\ 
nuam.  Plant.  Chun  vol)is.  Csbs.  Neque  potest  dam  me  esse.  Plant.  Clmii 
axoie  iiici.  M.  Its  diminutive  danculum  is  once  followed  by  the  accusative 
rlnmiilum  patres.  Ter.  ' 

I{km.  9.  The  adverbs  versus  or  versum  and  usque  are  sometimes  annexed 
to  an  accusative,  principally  of  place,  which  depends  on  ad  or /re,  and  sometimes 
the  preposition  is  omitted;  as.  Ad  Oceanum  versus  prdfhisci.  Cces.  Fugam 
ad  .sf  versum.  Sail.  In  Galliam  versus  cast7-a  movere.  Id. —  Usque  ad  Nunip.n- 
tiam.  Cic.  Usque  in  Pamphyliam.  Id.  Ad  noctem  usque.  Plant.— Bruudusiiim 
j?.?,"s/M.  Cic.  Terminos  us(iue  Libyw.  Just.  Usque  Ennam  jirofedi.  Cic.  Versus 
is  always  placed  after  the  accusAtive.— Usque  occurs  more  rarely  with  sub  and 
Irnns  with  the  accusative;  as.  Trans  Alpes  usqtie  tram/'erlur.  Cic.  Usque 
«ab  extremum  bruime  imbrem. —  Versus  also  rarely  follows  ab,  and  usque 
either  nb  or  ex  with  the  ablative ;  as,  Ab  septemtrifme  versus.  Van'.  A  funda- 
niento  i.sqiie  viOvisti  mare.  Plant.  Usque  ex  ultima  Syria.  Cic.  Usque  a  pueritia. 
ler.   TT^y/fe  a  Komiilo.  Cic.    K^i/we  a  mane  ad  vespOrum.  Plant. 

Kem.  10.  Prepositions  are  often  used  without  a  noun  depending  upon  them 
put  such  noun  may  usually  be  supplied  by  the  mind;  as,  Muliis  post  mnis, 
1.  e.  post  )</  temjius.  Cic.    Circum  Concm-dice,  scil.  (edem.   Sail. 

Rem.  11.  Tlie  accusative,  in  many  constructions,  is  supposed  to  depend  on  a 
preposition  understood;  as.  Quid  ojnis  est  plilraf  i.  e.  proj/ter  quid?  wliv?  i.  q. 
cur  f  or  qudre?  Cic.  So,  Quid  vie  ostentem  f  U.  But  it  is  not  easy,  iii  every 
case,  to  say  what  preposition  should  be  supplied.  For  the  accusative  without 
a  preposition  after  neuter  verbs,  see  ^  2.32.  For  the  accusative  of  limitation 
see  §  234,  II.  ' 

ACCUSATIVE  OF  TIME  AND  SPACE. 

S  236.  Nouns  denoting  duration  of  time,  or  extent  of  space, 
are  put,  after  adjectives  and  verbs,  in  the  accusative,  and  some- 
times after  verbs  in  the  ablative ;  as, 

Ace.  Appius  cwnis  multos  annos  fuit,  Appius  was  blind  many  years.  Cic. 
Bidnum /.aw/icrte  /■«/.  Id.  Dies  totos  c/e  wr^u^e  disserunt.  Id.  Te  jam  annum 
audienlem  Crdtippum.  Id. — Dccreverunt  intercdldrium  quinque  et  quadrao-inta 
dies  loiiyum.  Id. —  Qmnn  abessem  ab  Amaiw  iter  nnius  diei.  Id.  Tres  pCiteat catlk 
spatium  71071  ampUus  uluas.  Virg.  (Cf.  §  256,  R.  6.)    A  portu  stadia  centum  e. 

viginti  processimus.  Cic. — Buas  fossas  quindecim  pedes  lutas  perduxit, twc 

auches  lifteen  feet  broad.  C.-es.    Uossce  quinos  pedes  al/ie.  Id.     FOrumlnd  hmgu 

pedes   tres   semis.  Cato.    Orbem   uledrium   crassum   digitos   sex    fdcito.  Id. 

Abl.  Vixit  annis  undetrlginta.  Suet.  Qu.atuordecim  annis  exsilium  iOleraoit. 
lac.  Trigmta  annis  vixit  Paruetiv-s.  Cic— Kcerdtus  JiOmdnus  tridui  itinere  ab- 
futt  ab  amne  Tunai.  Tac.  ^sculdpii  templum  quinque  milllbus  passuum  diit- 
tans    Liv. 

^  Note  1.    The  ablative  denoting  extent  of  time  and  space  is  rarely  used   by 
Cicero,  and  less  fre(|iiently  than  the  accusative  by  other  writers. 

Notf:  9..  The  accusative  denoting  extent  of  space  sometimes  follows  the  ab- 
verbs  Umtje,  alte,  etc. ;  as,  Oimpeslns  lOcus  alte  duos  nedes  et  semissem  itifH- 
aiendits  est.  Colum.  VercmgeUirix  Idcum  castris  deligit' ab  Ava.ico  Imge  millia 
passuum  sedecim.  Caes. 

Note  3.  (a.)  Old,  in  reference  to  the  time  which  a  person  has  lived,  ia 
expressed  m  Latni  by  ndtus,  with  an  accusative  of  the  time;  as,  DecessU 
Alexander  mensem  unam,  annos  tres  et  trlyinta  ndtus.  Just,  (b.)  A  person's 
age  may  also  be  expressed  without  iidtus  by  a  genitive  of  the  time  cloLiely 
connected  with  his  name,  according  to  ^  2il,  H.  6;  as,  Alexaiukr  annorum 
trtum  el  triytnta  deressit.  (c.)  Older  or  younger  than  a  certain  age  is  ex- 
pressed by  prefixing  to  the  accusative  or  genitive  of  the  definite  age  the  ad- 


240  SYNTAX. ACCUSATIVE    OF    PLACE.  §  237 

verbs  plus  o-  minus,  or  the  adjectives  major  or  minor,  either  with  or  without 
quam.  See  §  256,  R.  6  and  7.— Sometimes,  also,  the  ablative  depends  on  the 
comparative;  as,  Minor  vif/inti  quinqiie  aimis  natus.  Nep.  Miiwv  triginta  annis 
natu.  Cic.     Biennio  2««?»  nos  major.  Id.  Cf.  ^  256,  R.  16.  (1.) 

Remark  1.  Nouns  denoting  time  or  space,  used  to  limit  other  nouns,  are  put 
in  the  genitive  or  ablative.    See  §  211,  R.  6. 

Rem  2.  A  term  of  time  not  yet  completed  may  be  expressed  by  an  ordinal 
number:  as,  Nos  victis'imiim  ja7n  diem  jxWmur  Iwbescere  ciciem  horum  auc*.&ri- 
tatis.  Cic.  Punlco  bello  duodecimum  annum  Ildlia  urebdtur.  Liv.  Hence  in 
the  passive,  Nunc  tertia  vlvitur  setas.  Ovid. 

Rem.  3.  The  accusative  or  ablative  of  space  is  sometimes  omitted,  while  & 
genitive  depending  on  it  remains;  as,  Casir a  qiue  dbe rant  hidni,  sci\.  ^iliian  ai 
gpatio.  Cic. 

Rem.  4.  To  denote  a  place  by  its  distance  from  another,  the  ablative  is 
coi\  monly  used ;  as,  Jlillibus  passuum  sex  a  Cirsdris  castiis  cvnscdit.  Cses. ;  but 
sometimes  the  accusative;  an,  Tv'ui  jmssuum  millia  ab  ipsa  urbe  castra  pdsuit. 
Liv.  The  only  words  used  for  this  purpose  in  the  ablative  alone  are  spdtio  and 
intervallo ;  as,  Quiwlccrn  ferme  millium  spatio  castra  ab  Tdrtnto  pdsuit.  Id. 

Note  4.  For  abhinc  and  a  cardinal  number,  with  the  accusative  or  ablative 
of  past  time,  see  §  253,  R.  2.  For  the  ablative  denoting  diflerence  of  time  or 
space,  see  ^  256,  R.  16. 

Rem.  5.  A  preposition  is  sometimes  expressed  before  an  accusative  of  time 
or  space,  but  it  generally  modifies  the  meanuig;  as,  Quern  per  rfecem  auncs 
dlm'i.'us,  ....  during  ten  years.  Cic. 

Rem.  6.  When  the  place  from  which  the  distance  is  reckoned  is  not  men- 
tioned, ab  is  sometimes  placed  before  the  ablative  of  distance,  as  if  this  de- 
pended on  the  preposition;  as,  A  milllbus  passuum  duobus  castra  pdsuerunt,  Two 
miles  from  the  place,  or,  Two  miles  off.  Ca3s. 

Rem.  7.  An  acmsative  of  weight  also  occurs  when  expressed  by  libram  or 
Ubras  ill  connection  with  pondo.   Cf.  \  211,  R.  6.  (4.) 

ACCUSATIVE    OF    PLACE. 

§  SST.  After  verbs  expressing  or  implying  motion,  the 
name  of  the  town  in  which  the  motion  ends  is  put  in  the  accusa- 
tive without  a  preposition  ;  as, 

Regfdus  Carthaginem  rediit,  Regulus  returned  to  Carthage.  Cic.  Capuaiu 
jlectit  iter.  He  turns  his  coui'se  to  Capua.  Liv.  Calpurnius  Romam  prdficisci- 
tur.  Sail.     Romam  erat  nuncidtum.  Cic. 

Rejiaek  1.  The  accusative,  in  like  manner,  is  used  after  iter  with  sum,  ha- 
beo,  etc. ;  as.  Iter  est  mihi  Laniivium.  Cic.  Ccesdrem  iter  habere  Capuam.  Id 
And  even  after  sum  alone ;  as,  Omnia  ilia  mUnicipia,  quae  sunt  a  Vibont  Bnindl- 
8ium.  Cic.  So  with  a  verb.il  noun;  &s,  Advenlus  B,bm.a.m.  Liv.  Jiedilus  Ro- 
Diara.  Cic. 

Rem.  2,  («.)  The  preposition  to  be  supplied  is  in,  denoting  to  or  irito,  which 
is  sometimes  expressed ;  as,  In  Ephesum  dbii.  Plaut.  Ad,  before  the  name 
of  a  town,  denotes  direction  towards  it ;  as.  Iter  dlrigere  ad  Mi'itlnam.  Cic. ;  and 
also  its  vicinity;  a,s,  Addlescentulus  miles  prdfecius  su7n  ad  Cdpuam;  i.  e.  in  cas- 
tra ad  Cdpuain.  Id.  _  So,  I^lius  cum  classe  ad  Brundlsium  vcnit.  Cses.  Ckssar 
ad  Genevan!  pervenit.  Id.    Quum  ego  ad  Heracleam  acccderem.  Cic. 

(6.)    When  uvbs,  oppidum,  Idcus,  etc.,  follow  the  names  of  towns  as  apposi- 
Icionr,,  tiiey  generally  take  a  preposition;  as,  Dcmdratus  stt  contulit  Tarqtiinios,  in 
urbem  Elnlnce  f  o/-e7itissimrim.  Cic.    Ad  Cirtam  oppidum  fto-  constituunt.  Sail.— 
So  a  Iso  when  the  name  of  the  town  is  qualified  by  an  adjective ;  as,  Magnum 


§238.        SYNTAX. ACCUSATIVE    AFTER    ADJECTIVES,  ETC.  241 

itei  ad  .loftus  jn-dficisci  cogor  Atheiias.  Prop.     But  the  poets  and  later  prose 
writers  sometines  omit  the  prepositiwi ;  as,  Ovid,  Her.  2,  83. 

Rem.  3.  Instead  of  the  accusativ,  a  dative  is  sometimes,  though  rarely, 
used;  as,  Carthagini  nuncios  mittam.  Hor.  Cf.  §  225,  IV.  and  R.  2. 

Rem.  4.  Domus  in  both  numbers,  and  rus  in  the  singular,  are  put 
in  the  accusative,  like  names  of  towns ;  as, 

Ite  domum,  Go  home.  Virg.  GalU  domes  dbierant, — had  gone  home.  Liv.  Rus 
ibo.  I  will  go  into  the  country.  Ter. 

Note,  (a.)  When  domus  is  limited  by  a  genitive  or  a  possessive  adjective 
pronoun,  it  sometimes  takes  a  preposition:  with  other  adjectives,  the  preposi- 
tion is  generally  expressed ;  as,  Non  iutroeo  in  nostram  domum.  Plaut.  Venitsc 
in  donuim  Lecca?.  Cic.  Ad  eam  domum  profecti  sunt.  Id.  In  domos  siiperas 
n-nmlere  ciira  fuit.  Ovid.  Rarely,  also,  when  not  limited;  as,  Soc rales  pfiildsd- 
pntam  in  domos  intrdduxit.  Cic.  So,  Idrtm  suum.  App.,  or  ad  larem  snmn.  Cic. 
Caricas  ui  Albense  rus  infcrre.  Plin.  Quum  in  sua  rura  rencrunt.  Cic.  With 
the  ])ossessor's  name  in  the  genitive,  either  dumum  or  in  domum  is  used:  as, 
Pomponii  domum  vPnisise.  Cic.     fn  domum  ]Ma:Lii  tela  infenmiur.   Liv. 

(b.)  Domus  is  sometimes  used  in  the  accusative  after  a  verbal  noun;  as, 
Dihnu7n  rt'uitionis  spe  sublatd.  Cks.  So,  Itio  domum.  Cic.  Concursus  d6mnm. 
Cies.     Cf.  R.  1. 

Rem.  5.  (a.)  Before  the  names  of  countries  and  of  all  other  places  in  which 
the  motion  ends,  except  those  of  towns,  and  domus  and  rus,  the  preposition  is 
commonly  used ;  as,  A'x  Asia  transis  in  Enrdpam.  Curt.  Te  in  Eplram  vcnisse 
gaudeo.  Cic.  But  it  is  somethnes  omitted;  as,  JDeveniimi  speluncam.  Virg. 
Zfevfnere  locos.  Id.  Tiimulum  a/itlquce  Qreris  sSdemque  sacrdtam  vemmus.  Id. 
Ibis  Cecrdpios  portus.  Ovid.  So,  also,  before  names  of  countries,  especially 
cnose  ending  in  iw  ,•  ix?,  yEyyptus,  Bospdrus,  Chersdncsus,  Eplrus,  Peldpomu'siic, 
etc.  So,  also,  Illyricum  prdftLtus.  Cces.  ilacedoniam  pervmil.  Liv.  Afncara 
irans'iturus.  Id.  So,  Tacitus  construes  even  names  of  nations,  when  used,  as 
they  often  are,  for  those  of  coimtries;  as.  Ductus  inde  Cangos  exercitus.  Iberoa 
ad  patrium  regnum  pervddit.  So,  Virgil,  Nos  ibimus  Afros. — Pliny  has,  Insiilas 
Rubri  Maris  ndvigant. 

(b.)  Before  the  names  of  small  islands  the  preposition  is  frequently  omitted; 
as,  Puusdmam  cum  classe  Cyprum  miscrunt.  iSep. :  but  rarely  before  the  names 
of  the  larger  islands ;  as,  Sardinia,  Bntannia,  Crita,  Euboea,  Stcilia. 

(c.)  Before  accusatives  of  any  words  denoting  locality  after  verbs  of  motion, 
the  poets  omit  the  preposition;  as,  Italiam — Ldvlnidque  vmit  litora.  Vu'g. — 
The  old  accusative  fdras  is  used,  lUvC  names  of  towns,  to  denote  the  place 
ic/itrter,  wiiile  yym  denotes  the  place  w/jere ;  as,  Vdde  fora-s.  JIart.  Exyi  fd- 
ras. Plaut. 

ACCUSATIVE      AFTER      ADJECTIVES,      ADVERBS, 
AND    INTERJECTIONS. 

§  ^38.  1.  («•)  The  adjectives  propior  and  proximus,  with 
i\\(-\i  adverbs  propius  and  proxlme,  like  their  primitive  prope, 
we  often  joined  with  the  accusative  ;  as, 

Ipse  propior  montem  suos  colldcnt.  Sail.  Crassus  projdmus  mare  Oceanum 
hiemdrat.  Cses. — Libyes  propius  mare  AMcum  drptdoant.  Sail.  Proximo  His- 
pjlniam  Mauri  sunt.  Id. 

{b.)   The  adverbs  pr'idie  and  poslrtdie  are  also  often  followed  by  the  accusa^ 
live;  R%,  Pr'idie,  etim  diem.   Cic.    Prldie  idus.  Id.     Postndie  ludos.  Id. — (r.)    Aii 
occ  isative   .somet  tne.s   follows   intus  and  cdminus ;   as,  fntus  domum.    Plaut. 
.it/iestes  cdminus   -e  sues,  scil.  in.  Prop. 
21 


£42  SYNTAX. SUBJECT-ACCUSATIVE.  §  239 

Remark  1.  The  accusative  with  pi'ldie  and  postridie  is  by  o  jnit  referred  to 
ante  and  post  understood.  For  the  genitive  after  these  words,  see  §  212,  R.  4, 
N.  6. — Respecting  versus,  usque,  exadversus  (-um)  and  secws  with  tie  accusative, 
see  §  195,  R.  3:  and  §  235,  R.  3. 

Rem.  2.  Tlie  adverb  bene,  by  the  elipsis  of  vdlere  jubeo,  is  sometimes  followed 
by  the  accusative  in  forms  of  drinking  health;  as.  Bene  vcs,  bene  nos,  bene  te, 
ly^ne  me,  bene  nostram  etiam  Stephanium !  Plant.  Bene  Messalam,  a  health  to 
Messala.  Tibull.     It  is  also  construed  with  the  dative.  See  §  228,  1. 

2.  In  exclamations,  the  noun  or  pronoun  which  marks  the  ohjeci 
of  the  feding  is  put  in  the  accusative  either  with  or  without  the  inter- 
jections, 0 1  ah  1  lieu  !  ekeu  !  ecce  !  en  !  hem  !  pro  !  or  vce  .'as, 

En  qudtuor  aras !  ecce  ditas  tibi  Daphni !  Behold  four  altars !  lo,  two  for 
thee,  Daphnis !  Virg.  Eccuni !  eccos  !  eccillum !  for  ecce  eum  !  ecce  eos  !  ecce 
ilium  !  Waxit.  0  prceclurum  custodem  !  Cic.  Heu  me  infelicem!  Ter.  Pro  De&m 
kdm'i nil mque  f  idem}  Cic.  Ah  me,  me  !  Catull.  £heu  me  7niserum!  Ter.  Hem 
asifUias !  Id.  Vceie!  Plant.  V(eme!  Sen.  Miseramme!  Ter.  Edmmem  grd- 
vem  el  civem  egregium  !  Cic.    Cf.  §  228,  3. 

NoTB.  The  accusative  after  interjections  is  supposed  to  depend  on  sorao 
rerb  of  emotion  to  be  supplied.  - 


SUBJECT-ACCUSATIVE. 

§  SSO.     The  subject  of  the  infinitive  mood  is  put  in  the  ac- 
cusative ;  as, 

Moleste  Pompeium  idferre  constdbat,  That  Pompey  took  that  ill,  was  evident. 
Cic.  Eos  hoc  nomine  ajjpellari  fas  est.  Id.  Miror  te  ad  me  nihil  scribere, 
I  wonder  that  you  do  not  write  to  me.  Cn.  Mag.  in  Cic.  Campos  jubet  esse 
patentes.  Virg. 

Note  1.  In  historical  writing  the  present  infinitive  has  sometimes  its  subject  in  the 
nominative.  Cf.  §  209,  R.  5. 

Remark  1.    The  subject  of  the  infinitive  is  omitted  when  it  precedes  in  the 

fenitive  or  dative  case ;  as.  Est  adolescentis  majores  natu  veren,  scil.  eum.  Cic. 
IxjmUt  bonas  esse  vohis,  scd.  vos.  Ter.;  and  rarely  when  it  precedes  in  the 
accusative ;  as,  Ea  pdp&lus  ketari  et  mertto  dlcere  fieri  ;  and  also  when  its  place 
is  supplied  by  a  possessive  pronoun  expressed  or  understood;  as,  Kon  fuit  con- 
silium (meum) — servUlbus  officiis  inteutum  OBtatem  dgere  (scil.  me).  Sal. 

Rem.  2.  A  substantive  pronoun  is  also  sometimes  omitted  before  the  infini- 
tive, when  it  is  the  subject  of  the  preceding  verb ;  as,  PollicUus  sum  suscepturum 
(esse),  scil.  me,  I  promised  (that  I)  would  undertake.  Ter.  Bed  reddere  ptu 
negdbat,  scil.  se.  Virg. 

Rem.  3.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  is  often  omitted,  when  it  is  a  general 
word  for  person  or  thing;  as,  Est  dliud  irdcundum  esse,  dliud  Irdtum,  scil.  hdmt- 
nem.  Cic.   See  §  269,  R.  1. 

Rem.  4.  The  subject-accusative,  like  the  nominative,  is  often  wanting.  Ssa 
i  209,  R.  3.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  may  be  an  infinitive  or  a  clauoe. 
See  ^  269,  R.  3. 

Note  2.  For  the  verbs  after  which  the  subject-accuBative  with  the  infinitive  is  used 
see  §  272.  For  the  accusative  in  the  predicate  after  infinitives  neuter  and  passive,  se 
}210. 


§  240,  241.  SYNTAX. VOC.iTIVE ABLATIVE.  248 

VOCATIVE. 

§  S4;0.  The  vocative  is  used,  either  with  or  wi  ihout  an  in* 
terjection,  m  addi-essing  a  person  or  thing. 

Remark  1.  The  interjections  0,  heu,  and  pi-o  (proh),  also  ah,  au 
(ho.u),  eliem,  eho,  ehodum,  eia  (heia),  hem,  heus,  hui,  io,  and  ohe,  are 
followed  by  the  vocative  ;  as, 

0  fornwse  puer  !  0  beautiful  boy !  Vtrg.  Heu  virgo  !  Id.  Pro  sancte  Jupiter  I 
Cic.  Ah  stultc!  Ter.  Beus  Syre!  Id.  OheUbelle!  Mart.  Ehodum  hOne  vir. 
Ter, —  Urbem,  mi  Kufe,  cdle.  Cic.  Quinctili  Vare,  legimes  redde.  Suet.  Qm 
inoriture  ruin  f  Hor.     Macte  viriute  esto.  Cic. 

Rem.  2.  The  vocative  is  sometimes  omitted,  while  a  genitive  depending  upon 
it  remains ;  as,  0  miserce  sortis  J  soil.  h6mines.  Lucan. 

Note.  The  vocative  forms  no  part  of  a  proposition,  but  serves  to  designate  the  person 
lo  whom  the  proposition  is  addressed. 

^  ABLATIVE. 

The  ablative  denotes  certain  relations  of  nouns  and  pronouns,  all  of  which  are  express- 
ed in  English  by  means  of  prepositions.  In  Latin  this  case  is  sometimes  accompanied  by 
a  preposition,  and  sometimes  stands  alone.  Cf.  S  37,  6. 

ABLATIVE  AFTER  PREPOSITIONS. 

§  S4:l.     Eleven  prepositions  are  followed  by  the  ablative. 

These  are  a,  for  ab,  ahs),  absque,  de  ;  corain,  pdlam,  cum,  ex,  (e); 
sine,  tenus,  pro,  and  prce  ;  as, 

Ah  illo  iempdre,  From  that  time.  Liv.  A  scribendo,  From  writing.  Cic. 
Cum  exercitu,  With  the  army.  Sail.  Certis  de  caiisis,  For  certain  reasons.  Cic. 
Ex  fuyd,  From  flight.  Id.  Palam  popiilo.  Liv.  S Ine  lubore.  Cic.  Cdpulo  tenua. 
Virg.     Cantabit  vacuus  coram  Idtrone  viator.  Juv.   cf.  §  195,  5. 

Note.  Of  the  prepositions  followed  by  the  ablative,  five  signify  removal  or  separation, 
viz.  a  {ab  or  abs),  de,  e  (or  ex),  absquS  and  sinS. 

•Remark  1.  Tenus  is  always  placed  after  its  case.  It  sometimes  takes  the 
genitive  plural.  See  §  221,  111. —  Curn  is  always  appended  to  the  ablative  ot  tlie 
personal  pronouns  7ne,  te,  se,  nobis,  and  vobis,  and  commonly  to  the  ablatives 
of  the  relative  pronoun,  quo,  qua,  quibus,  and  qui.   Cf.  §  133,  4,  and  §  136,  R.  1. 

Rem.  2.  The  adverbs  prdcul  and  simid  are  sometimes  used  with  an  ablative, 
which  depends  on  the  prepositions  a  or  ab,  and  cum  understood ;  as,  Prdcw 
mari,  Far  from  the  sea.  Liv.  Simul  nobis  habitat.  Ovid.  Procul  dilbio.  Suet. 
The  prepositions  are  frequently  expressed;  as,  FrOcul  a  terra.  Cic.  Prdcul  a 
patnd.  Virg.  Tecum  slmul.  Plant.  Vobiscum  simul.  Cic. — So,  rarely,  ceque. 
Qui  me  in  terra  wque  fortundtus  erii.  Plant.     Cf.  Novi  ceque  omnia  tecum.  Id. 

Rem.  3.  Some  of  the  above  prepositions,  like  those  followed  by  the  accusa- 
tive, are  occasionally  used  without  a  noun  expressed ;  as,  Quum  coram  sHinus. 
Cic.   Cum  frdtre  an  sine.  Id.    Cf.  §  235,  R.  10. 

Rem.  4.  The  ablative  follows  also  the  prepositions  in  and  sub,  when  they 
answer  to  the  question  '  where? '  super,  when  it  signifies  '  on '  or  '  concerning', 
and  sometimes  clam  and  suiter.   Cf  §  235,  (2.) — (5.) 

Rem.  5.  In  is  generally  joined  with  the  ablative  after  verb.s  of  placing,  as, 
pono,  Idco,  culloro,  stdtuo,  consliluo,  and  consido ;  as,  A'<  sale  tdbentts  artus  in 
Utore  poMirU.   Virg. — So,  also,  aft«r  verbs  signifying  to  have,  hold,  or  regard 


214   SYNTAX. ABLATIVE  AFTER  CERTAIN  NOUNS.  §  242,  243 

as,  hdb-eo,  duco,  numero,  etc. — After  verbs  of  assembUnq,  concealing,  and  itichid- 
ing,  in  is  followed  by  either  the  accusative  or  the  ablative. — After  dcfigo,  ir^ 
tcribo,  insculpo,  incldo,  and  insero,  in  is  usually  joined  with  the  ablative. 

§  942.    Many  verbs  compounded  with  db,  de,  ex,  and  super 

are  followed  by  an  ablative  depending  upon  the  preposition ;  as, 

Abesse  urbe,  To  be  absent  from  the  city.  Cic.  Ablre  seclibtie,  To  depart  from 
tlieir  habitations.  Tac.  Ut  se  muledictis  non  absilneant.  Cic.  DetrUduut  ndvet 
tcdj?uh,  They  push  the  ships  from  the  rock.  Virg.  Ndvi  egressus  est.  Nep. 
Excedijre  finibus.  Liv.  Ccesar  prcelio  supersedere  statuit.  Cfes.  Tributo  ac  de- 
lectu  supersessum  est.  Cic.  So  the  adjective  extorris ;  as,  Extwris  putrid,  ddnw. 
Sail.     And  so  the  verbal  erupOo ,  as,  Miitina  eruptio.  Cic. 

Remark  1.  The  preposition  is  often  repeated,  or  one  of  similar  signification 
Lsused;  as,  Detrdhere  de  tud  fdmd  numquam  cogiidvi.  Cic.  Ex  dcufo's  ubierunt. 
Liv.     Exlre  a  patrid.  Cic.     Exlre  de  vlld.  Id.    Cf.  §  224,  R.  4. 

Rem.  2.  These  compound  verbs  are  often  used  without  a  noun;  but^  in 
many  cases,  it  maybe  supplied  by  the  mind;  as,  EquUes  degressi  ad  pedes 
scil.  equis.  Liv.    Abire  ad  Deos,  scil.  vita.   Cic. 

Rem.  3.    Some  verbs  compounded  with  ab,  de,  and  ex,  instead  of  the  abla 
tive,  are  sometimes  followed  by  the  dative.   See  §  224,  R.  1  and  2.     Some  coili- 
pounds,  also,  of  neuter  verbs,  occiu*  with  the  accusative.  See  §  233,  R.  1. 

ABLATIVE  AFTER  CERTAIN  NOUNS,  ADJECTIVES, 

AND  VERBS. 

§  94:3.   Opus  and  usus,  signifying  need,  usually  take  the  ab- 
lative of  the  thing  needed ;  as, 

Auctoritate  iud  nobis  dpus  est,  We  need  your  authority.  Cic.  Nunc  animis 
dpys,  nunc  pectore  jirma.  Virg.  Naves,  quibus  consuli  usus  non  esset.  Ships,  for 
wliich  the  consul  had  no  occasion.  Liv.  Nunc  viribus  usus,  nunc  manibus  rapi- 
dly. Virg. 

Remark  1.  («.)  Opnis  and  usus  are  sometimes  followed  by  the  ablative  of  a 
perfect  participle;  as,  Maturaio  dpus  est,  There  is  need  of  haste.  Liv.  Usus  facto 
est  mihi.  Ter.  Ubi  sunumis  imperdior  non  ddest  ad  exercltum,  citius,  quod  non 
facto  est  Usus,  fit,  quani  quod  facto  est  dqnis.  Plant.  After  opus,  a  noun  is  some- 
times expressed  with  the  participle;  as,  Opusfuit  Hirtio  convento, — of  meeting 
or,  to  meet,  §  274,  R.  5.  Cic.  Opius  sibi  esse  domino  ejus  invento.  Liv. — or  a  sz.- 
pine  is  used ;  as,  Ita  dictu  opus  est.  It  is  necessary  to  say,  I  must  say.  Ter.  — 
Instead  of  the  ablative  with  dpus  est,  an  infinitive,  either  alone  or  with  a  sub- 
ject accusative,  or  ut  with  a  subjunctive  clause,  sometimes  occurs;  as,  0pm 
fst  te  dnimo  valere.  Cic.     Mihi  dpus  est,  ut  lavem.  Id. 

(b.)  Opus  and  usus,  though  nouns,  are  seldom  limited  by  the  genitive.  In  a 
few  passages  they  are  construed  with  the  accusative.  See  §  211,  B.  11. 

Rem.  2.  Ojnis  is  sometimes  the  subject  and  sometimes  the  predicate  of  est; 
twits,  which  seldom  occurs  except  in  ante-classic  poets,  is,  with  only  rare  ex- 
ceptions, the  subject  only.  The  person  to  whom  the  thing  is  needful  is  put  in 
the  dative;  (^  226.)  With  opus  the  thing  needed  may  either  be  the  subject  of 
the  verb  in  the  nominative  or  accusative,  or  follow  it  in  the  ablative;  as.  Dux 
nobis  dpus  est.  Cic.  Verres  multa  sibi  dpus  esse  aicbat.  Id. ;  or,  Duce  nobis 
opus  est.  The  former  construction  is  most  common  with  neuter  adjectives  and 
pronouns;  as.  Quod  non  opus  est,  asse  cdrum  est.  Cato  apud  Sen. — In  th« 
predicate  dpi/s  and  usus  are  commonly  translated  '  needful '  or  '  necessary. 
Cf.  <j  210,  R.  S. 

NuTK    For  the  ibl&iiTe  of  charat  Wr,  quality,  etc.,  limiting  a  noun.  Bee  §  211,  R.  b. 


§  244,  245.     SYNTAX. ablative  after  certain  NOINS.      245 

§  944-.     Digniis,  indignus,  conteiitus,  prcedltus,  and  fi  iius, 

are  followed  by  the  ablative  of  the  object ;  as, 

Dignus  laude,  Worthy  of  praise.  Hor.  Vox  2JdpuU  majestate  indigna,  A  speech 
tabecoming  the  dignity  of  the  people.  Cses.  Bcstice  eo  contentm  non  muertmt 
amplius.  Cic.  H6mo  scelere  prceditus.  Id.  Plerlque  ingenio  freti.  Id. — Sc\ 
jEquum  est  me  atque  illo.  Plaut.  • 

Remark  1.  The  adverb  dime,  in  one  passage,  takes  the  ablative;  Pec- 
cat  liter  nostrmn  cruce  dignius.  Hor. — Dignor,  also,  both  as  the  passive  of  tho 
obsolete  digno,  and  as  a  deponent  verb,  is  followed  by  an  ablative  of  the  thing. 
As  a  deponent  it  takes  also  an  accusative  of  the  person;  as,  Ilaud  equidem  tali 
me  honore  dignor.  Virg. — Pass.  Qui  tali  honore  dignati  sunt.  Cic.  Conjiigio. 
Anchisa,  Veneris  dignate  superbo.  Virg. — Sometimes  as  a  deponent,  instead  of 
the  ablative  of  the  thing,  it  is  followed  by  an  infinitive  clause ;  as,  Xim  ego 
grammdiicas  ambire  tnbus  et  pulpita  dignor.  Hor.  And  both  dignor  and  dedigrwr 
are  followed  by  two  accusatives,  one  of  the  object  the  other  of  the  predicate. 
See  §  230,  R.  2. 

Rem.  2.  (a.)  Digmis  and  indigmts  are  sometimes  followed  by  the  genitive; 
RS,  Suscipe  cogitdtidnem  dignissimam  tuce  \irtutis.  Cic.  I)idi gmts  iiYoram.  ^'irg. ; 
and  f/j(7nas  sometimes  takes  a  neuter  pronoun  or  adjective  in  the  accusative; 
as,  Non  me  censes  scire  quid  dignus  siem?  Plaut.  FrHus  is  in  Livy  coustnied 
with  the  dative.  Cf.  ^  222,  R.  6,  (6.) 

(6.)  Instead  of  an  ablative,  dignus  and  indignus  often  take  an  infinitive, 
especially  in  the  passive;  as,  L'rat  dignus  amilri.  Virg.;  or  a  subjunctive 
clause,  with  qui  or  ^it ;  as,  Dignus  qui  imperet.  Cic.  Non  sum  dignus,  ut  f  Igara 
palum  in  parietem.  Plaut. ;  or  the  supine  in  u ;  as,  Digna  atque  indigna  reldlu 
vociferans.  Virg.  Contentus  is  likewise  joined  with  the  infinitive;  as,  Nmi  hcec 
artes  contenta  pdiernas  edidicisse  fuit.  Ovid. — So,  Naves  j)ontum  Lrrumpere 
fret<B.  Stat. 

§  24L5,     I.    Uior,  fruor,  fungor,  potior,  vescor,  and  their 

compounds,  ai-e  followed  by  the  ablative ;  as, 

Ad  quern  turn  Juno  siqyplex  his  vocibus  usa  est, — addressed  these  words.  Virg. 
Frui  voluptate,  To  enjoy  pleasure.  Cic.  FungUur  officio.  He  performs  his 
duty.  Id.  Oppido  potili  sunt.  Liv.  Vescitur  aura.  Virg.  His  rebus  jierfriurr. 
Cic.  Legibus  abuti.  Id.  Defimcti  imperio.  Liv.  Gravi  opere  perfungimur.  Cic. 
0  tandem  magnis  peldgi  dejuncte  pOriclis.  Virg. 

The  compounds  are  abator,  deutor,  perfruor,  defungor,  and  perfungoi: 

Note.  Utw  may  take  a  second  ablative,  as  an  apposition  or  a  predicate, 
like  the  predicate  accusative,  (§  230,  R.  2\,  and  may  then  be  translated  by 
the  verb  to  have ;  as,  Ille  fdclli  me  utetur  patre,  He  sliall  have  in  me  an  indul- 
gent father.  Ter. 

Remark.  In  early  writers  these  verbs  sometimes  take  an  accusative;  as, 
Quam  rem  medlci  utuntur.  Varr.  Ingtnium  frui.  Ter  Datdmes  m'ditdre  mu- 
nus  fungens.  Nep.  Gentem  dllquam  urbem  nostrum  pOnturam  putem.  Cic.  Sct- 
cras  lauros  vescar.  Tibull.  In  prdldgis  scribendis  operam  dbHtitur,  Ter. — Potior 
is,  also,  found  with  the  genitive.  See  §  220,  4. 

II.  1.  Nitor,  innltor,  fldo  and  confide,  may  be  followed  by  the  ablative 
without  a  preposition;  as,  Hasta  innixus.  Liv.  Fidere  cursu.  Ovid.  Natuia 
Idci  coif'ideoant.   Cses. 

2.  Misceo  with  its  compounds  takes,  with  the  accusative  of  the  object,  the- 
ablative  of  the  thing  mingled  with ;  as,  Miscere  pdbula  sale.  Coll.  Aquas  nee- 
tare.  Ovid.    A^r  multo  calore  admixtus.  Cic. 

3.  Assuesco,  asswfacio,  consuesco,  insuesco,  and  sometimes  acqiiiesco,  take 
either  the  dative  or  the  ablative  of  the  thing:  as,  Aves  sanguine  et  praeda  as- 
smtcB.  Hor.    NuUo  officio  aut  disciplina  assuef actus.  Caes.     Cf.  §  224. 

21* 


246  SYNTAX. — ABLATIVE    OF    CAUSE,   ETC.  §  246,  247 

4.  Vti>o  and  ejmhr,  '  to  live  or  feast  upon,'  are  followed  by  the  ablative ;  as, 
Dapibns  6puldmur  djnmis.  Virg.     Lacte  atque  pecore  vlvuni.  CiBS. 

5.  Sio  signifying  '  to  be  filled  or  covered  with,'  and  also  when  signifying  '  to 
cost,'  is  followed  by  the  ablative  without  a  preposition ;  when  signifying  '  to 
persevere  in,  stick  to,  abide  by,'  '  to  rest  or  be  fixed  on,'  it  is  followed  by  the 
ablative  eitli^r  with  or  without  in;  as,  Jam  pulvere  coslum  stare  mdent.  Virg. — 
Multo  sanguine  nc  vulneriljus  ea  Pcems  vicioria  stetil.  Liv.  Stare  conditionibus. 
Cic.  Omms  in  Ascknio  Stat  ciira  2}arentis.  Virg. —  Consto,  '  to  consist  of  or  'to 
rest  upon,'  is  followed  by  the  ablative  either  alone  or  with  ex,  de,  or  in ;  as 
Cmistat  mdteries  soUdo  corpore.  Lucr.     Hdnio  ex  animo  constat  et  corpore.  Cic. 

Remark  1.  Fldo,  confido,  misceo,  admisceo,  permisceo,  and  assuesco  often 
take  the  dative. 

Rem.  2.  When  a  preposition  is  expressed  after  the  above  verbs,  sto,  yido^ 
confido,  7iltor,  innitor,  and  assuesco  take  in  or  ad;  acquiesco,  in ;  and  vtitceo 
with  its  compounds,  cum. 

§  S4:0.  Perfect  participles  denoting  origin  are  often  fol- 
lowed by  the  ablative  of  thQ.  source,  without  a  preposition. 

Such  arft  natus,  prdgnatus,  s&tus,  creatus,  cretus,  editus,  gSnttus,  gSniratus,  ortus ;  to 
which  maj  be  added  driundus,  descended  from. 

Thus,  Nate  dea  !  0  son  of  a.  goddess !  Virg.  Tantdlo  jn-oc/ndttis,  Descended 
from  Tantalus.  Cic.  Sdtus  Nereide,  Sprung  from  a  Nereid.  Ovid.  Credtua 
rege.  Id.  Alcdndre  creti.  Virg.  Edite  n'(/ihus.  Hor.  I)iis  gcnite.  Virg.  ArgdU 
tco  genirdtus  Alemdne.  Ovid.  Ortus  nullis  mdjoj^ibus.  Hor.  Ccelesti  semine 
6riundi.  Lucr. 

Remark  1.  The  preposition  is  also  rarely  omitted  after  the  verbs  creo,  genera, 
and  Masfor ;  as,  Ut  \:>aXre  certo  nascerere.  die.     Fortes  creantur  fortihus.  Hor. 

Rem.  2.  After  participles  denoting  origin,  the  preposition  ex  or  de  is_  usually 
joined  to  tlie  name  of  the  mother;  and  in  a  few  passages  ex  or  ab  is  joined  to 
the  name  of  the  father;  as,  Prdgndti  ab  Dite  patre.  Cfes.  In  speaking  of  one's 
ancestors  ah  is  frequently  used ;  as,  Plerosque  Belgas  esse  oi'tos  a  Germanis.  Id. 

Rem.  3.  Origin  from  a  place  or  country  is  generally  expressed  by  a  patrial 
adjective;  as,  Thrdsylmlus  Atheniensis,  Thrasybulus  of  Athens,  tivy  ofter. 
ases  ab;  as,  Turnus  Herdonius  ab  Alicia.  Cajsar  prefers  the  ablative"  alone; 
fts.  On.  Magius  Cremona;  and  in  this  manner  is  expressed  the  tribe  to  which  a 
person  belongs ;  as,  Q,.  Veyres  Rdmilia, — of  the  RomiUan  tribe. 

ABLATIVE     OF     CAUSE,    Etc. 

§  24:7.  Nouns  denoting  the  cause,  manner,  means,  and  m- 
strument,  after  adjectives  and  verbs,  are  put  in  the  ablative  with- 
out a  preposition. 

Note.  The  English  prepositions  with  the  ablative  of  cause,  manner,  moars 
and  instrument  are  by,  ivita,  in,  etc. 

1.  The  cause.  (1.)  Adjectives  which  have  a  passive  significa- 
tion, as  denoting  a  state  or  condition  produced  by  some  externH/ 
cause,  may  take  such  cause  in  the  ablative ;  as, 

Campdni  fuerunt  superbi  bonitate  agrorum.  Cic.  Animal  pabiilo  latum.  Sen 
Prselio/e^sj  lass'tque,  Weary  and  faint  with  the  battle.  SaU.  Hdmines  cegr 
gravi  morbo.  Cic. 

(2.)  Neuter  verbs  expressing  an  action,  state  or  feehng  of  tht 
subject  originating  in  some  external  cause,  may  take  that  cause  is 
the  a  jlative  ;  as, 


§  247.  STNTAX.^ABLATIVE    OF    CAUSE,   ETC.  247 

Interiit  fame,  He  perished  with  hujger.  Laude  aliena  ddlet.  Cic.  L<Ftn* 
tua  dif;nitate.  Id.  Gawk  tuo  bono.  Id.  Sua  victoria  gloriari.  Ca.'s.  Aqt.iir.iil- 
bus  laoorant  qtierceln.  Hor. — So  with  bene  est  and  the  dative;  as,  Mihi  bene  erai 
rum  piscibus  urbe  iKtilis,  $ed  pullo  atque  haedo.  Hor.  Ubi  illi  bene  sit  ligno, 
aijua  ciilida,  cibo,  vestlmentis,  etc.  Plaut. 

Note  1.  After  such  adjectives  and  neuter  verbs,  a  preposition  with  its  cas« 
often  supplies  the  place  of  the  simple  ablative. 

Note  2.  In  exclamations  of  encovu-agement  or  approbation,  the  defective 
adjective  macte,  macii,  either  with  or  without  the  imperative  of  esse  (esto,  este, 
egtote,)  is  joined  with  an  ablative  of  cause,  especially  with  virtute. 

Note  3.  After  neuter  verbs  and  adjectives  denoting  emotions,  espt-c'a'lj 
those  of  care,  grief,  and  sorrow,  the  accusative  vicem,  with  a  genitive  or  a  pos- 
sessive pronoun,  is  used,  instead  of  the  ablative  vice,  to  .signify  '  for '  or  '  on 
account  :>f';  as,  Rhiuiltmus  hoc  tibi,  ne  nostram  vicem  Irascaris,  That  you  may 
not  be  angi-y  on  our  account.  Liv.  Tuam  vicem  scepe  doleo,  quod,  etc.  Cic. 
Suam  vicem  magis  anxius,  quam  ejus,  cui  auxUium  ab  se  piitebdtur.  Liv. 

Remark  1.  '^  lien  the  cause  is  a  voluntary  agent,  it  is  put  in  the  accusative 
with  the  preposition  ob,  jvopter,  or  per ;  as,  Non  est  cequum  me  propter  vog 
decijn.  Ter.  These  prepositions,  and  a,  or  ab,  de,  e  or  ex,  and  prw,  are  also 
sometimes  used  when  the  cause  is  not  a  voluntary  agent;  as,  Ob  adulterium 
ccBsi.  Virg.     Nee  Idqiii  prse  mcprore  jwtidt.  Cic. 

Rem.  2.  {a.)  After  active  verbs,  the  cause,  unless  "expressed  by  an  ablative 
in  u  from  substantives  having  no  other  case ;  as,  Jussu,  rdgatn  and  admvn'ttu, 
is  seldom  expressed  bj'  the  simple  ablative,  but  either  by  a  jni position,  or  by 
causa,  gratia,  ergo,  etc.,  with  a  genitive;  as,  Lil gibus  proptir  nic-tum  pctret. 
Cic.  Ne  ob  earn  rem  ipsos  desjnceret.  Id.  JDonari  virtutis  ergo.  Ifl.  Bi  hoc 
honoris  mei  causa  suscejxris.  Id.  But  with  causa,  etc.,  the  adjective  pronoun 
is  commonly  used  for  the  corresponding  substantive  pronoun;  as,  Tt  abesse 
mea  causa,  'mdleste  fero.  Cic.  Cf.  §  211,  K.  3,  (6.) 

(b.)  When  the  cause  is  a  state  of  feeling,  a  circumlocution  is  often  used  with 
a  perfect  participle  of  some  verb  signif\'ing  '  to  induce ' ;  as,  Ciipidildte  ductus, 
inductus,  incitntus,  iiicensus,injlammalusjmpuhus,m6tus,  capttis,  etc.  Mihi  bene- 
volentia  diictus  tnbucbat  omnia.  Cic.  Livy  frequently  uses  ab  in  this  sense; 
as,  Ab  Ira,  a  spe,  ab  udio,  from  anger,  hope,  hatred. 

2.  The  manner.  Cum  is  regularly  joined  with  the  ablative  of 
manner,  when  expressed  simply  by  a  noun,  not  modified  by  any 
other  word  ;  and  also*  when  an  adjective  is  joined  with  the  noun, 
provided  an  additional  circumstance,  and  not  merely  an  essential 
character  of  the  action,  is  to  be  expressed.     Thus : 

Cum  voluptate  dlirjuem  audlre.  Verres  Lampsdcum  venit  cum  magna  calami- 
tate  civitdtis.  Cic.  Hence  also  when  the  connection  between  the  subject  and 
the  noun  denoting  the  attribute  is  only  external ;  as,  Proccdere  cnm  vestc  pur- 
purea: in  distinction  from  Nudis  pedibus  incedere ;  Aperto  capite  sedire,  etc., 
which  express  circumstances  or  attributes  essential  to  the  subject. 

But  modus,  ratio,  mos,  rltus,  etc.,  signifying  manner,  never  take  cum,  and  it  if 
omitted  in  some  expressions  with  other  substantives;  as,  Hoc  nwdo  scripsi ; 
ConstUuerunt  qua  ratione  ageretur ;  More  bestidruin  vdgdri ;  LalrOnum  ritu  vlvere  ; 
^quo  aniraoy"ero;  Maxima  fide  dm'icUias  cdluit.  Summa  axiuitate  res  consU- 
tuU ;  Viam  iiicredibili  celeritate  confecit;  Librum  magna  cuiiv  dillgentia^aa 
Bcripsit;  the  action  of  the  verb  being  intimately  connected  with  the  circum- 
stance expressed  by  the  ablative.  So  in  some  expressions  with  substantives 
alone;  as,  Silentio  y^rceie/vre  or  face  re  dliquid ;  LUseugSrt;  Jiire  and  iiijiiriii 
fdofre ;  Magislrdtus  vitio  credlus  ;  Rede  ei  ordine  Jit. 

Rem.  3.  The  manner  is  also  sometimes  denoted  by  de  or  ex  with  the  abla- 
tare    ns,  De  or  ex  indmlrid.  On  purpose.   Liv.     I'^  inkgro,  Anew.  Quirt. 


248  SYNTAX. ABLATIVE    OF    CAUSE,    ETC.  §248 

3.  The  means  and  in  si r  u m  int .  An  ablative  is  joined  with 
verbs  of  every  kind,  and  also  with  adjectives  of  a  passive  significa- 
tion, to  express  the  means  or  instrument ;  as, 

A7nlcos  observantia,  7-em  parsimonia  retinuit,  He  retai/ied  his  friends  by  at- 
tention, his  property  by  frugality.  Cic.  Auro  ostrojwe  decori.  Virg.  jEgrescii 
medando.  Id.  Cornibus  tauri,  aj>ri  dentlbus,  morsu  leones  se  tuiantur.  Cic. 
Qbs^js  est  virgis.  Id.  Trabs  saucia  securi.  Ovid.  For  the  ablative  of  the  means 
after  verbs  oi  jilling,  etc.,  see  \  249,  I. 

Eem.  4.  When  the  means  is  a  person,  it  is  seldom  expressed  by  the  simple 
ablative,  but  either  hy.  per,  or  by  the  ablative  dperd  with  a  genitive  or  a  pos- 
sessive pronoun ;  as,  mea,  tud,  sua,  dperd,  which  are  equivalent  to  per  me,  per 
<e,  per  se,  and  denote  both  good  and  bad  services.  Beneficio  meo,  etc.,  is  used 
of  good  results  only ;  as,  Beneficio  meo  patres  sunt.  SaU.  But  persons  are  some- 
times considered  as  invohmtary  agents,  and  as  such  exjiiessed  bj'  the  ablative 
without  a  preposition;  as.  Servos,  quibus  silvas  publhus  depojmldfus  erat.  Cic. — 
When  per  is  used  to  express  the  means,  it  is  connected  with  external  concur- 
ring circumstances,  rather  than  with  the  real  means  or  instrument.  Hence 
we  always  say  vi  oppidum  cepit,  but  per  vim  ei  bdna  eripuit. 

Rem.  5.  The  material  instniment  is  alwavs  expressed  by  the  ablative  with- 
out a  preposition ;  as,  Coiificere  cervum  sdf/itti:i ;  glddio  dliquem  vulnerdre  ;  tror 
jicere  pectus  ferro. 

§  S4:8.  The  ablative  is  used  with,  passive  verbs  to  denote 
the  means  or  agent  by  which  any  thing  is  effected,  and  which  in 
the  active  voice  is  expressed  by  the  nominative.  This  ablative 
is  used  either  with  ah  or  without  it,  according  as  it  is  a  person 
or  a  thing. 

I.  The  voluntary  agent  of  a  verb  in  the  passive  voice  is  put  in 
the  ablative  with  a  or  ah ;  as, 

(In  the  active  voice,)  Clodius  me  dlllgit,  Clodius  loves  me  (Cic);  (in  the  pas- 
sive,) A  ClOdio  dUigor,  I  am  loved  by  Clodius.  Lauddtur  ab  his,  culpdtur  ab 
iUis.  Hor. 

Remark  1.  (1.)  The  general  word  for  persons,  after  verbs  in  the  passive 
voice,  is  often  understood ;  as,  Prdbitas  lauddtur,  soil,  ab  hdminibus.  .Juv.  So 
after  the  passive  of  neuter  verbs ;  as,  Discurritur.  Virg.  Tdto  certdtum  est  cor- 
piyre  regni.  Id.  Cf  \  141,  R.  2. 

(2.)  The  agent  is  likewise  often  understood,  when  it  is  the  same  as  the  sub- 
ject of  the  verb,  and  the  expression  is  then  equivalent  to  the  active  voice 
with  a  reflexive  pronoun,  or  to  the  middle  voice  m  Greek;  as,  Quum  otTines  in 
cmnt  genere  sceUrum  vdlatentur,  scil.  a  se.  Cic. 

Rkm.  2.  Neuter  verbs,  also,  are  sometimes  followed  by  an  ablative 
of  the  voluntary  agent  with  a  or  ab ;  as, 

M.  Marcdlus  periii  ab  Amiibale,  IM.  MarceUus  was  kiUed  by  Hannibal.  Plin. 
Ne  vir  ab  hoste  cddat.   Ovid. 

Rem.  3.  The  preposition  is  sometimes  omitted;  as.  Nee  conjvige  captus 
Ovid.     Cdlitur  linigera  turba.  Id.     Pereat  meis  exclsus  Ai-givis.  Hor. 

For  the  dative  of  the  agent  after  verbs  in  the  passive  voice,  and  participles  iu  dus,  gee 
I  225,  n.  and  IH. 

n.  The  involuntary  agent  of  a  verb  in  the  passive  voice,  or  of  a  neuter  verb, 
is  put  in  the  ablative  vrithout  a  preposition,  as  the  cause,  means,  or  instrument; 
la,  Maximo  dolore  conficioi:  Cic.  Frangi  cuplditate.  Id.  ^dcida  telo  jdcet 
BectM'.  Virg. 


§  249.  SYNTAX. ABLATIVE    OF    CAUSE,    ETC.  249 

Note.  The  involuntary  agenc  is  sometimes  personified,  and  takes  n  or  oA ; 
as,  A  voluptatibus  diseri'.  Cic.  Anatiira  dCdum  honiini  Avendi  lurrUulum.  Id. 
Vinci  a  voluptate.  Id.    Victus  a  lab(n-e.  LI. 

§  349.  I.  A  noun  denoting  the  means,  by  which  the  actiou 
of  a  verb  is  performed,  is  put  in  the  ablative  after  verbs  signify- 
ing to  affect  in  any  way,  to  Jill  furnish,  load,  array,  equip,  en- 
dow, adorn,  reioard,  enrich,  and  many  others. 

Rejcark  1.  This  rule  includes  such  yerbs  as  afficio,  aspergo,  conspergo,  inspergo,  it' 
sprrgo,  compleo.  exjiUo,  impleo,  oppteo,  repleo,  sxppleo,  cumnio,  farcio,  rgfercio,  satio 
exsatio,  sdtiiro,  stipo,  coiistipo,  Qbruo,  onero,  niigeo,  induo,  veslio,  anno,  orno,  circumrlo, 
circumfitnJo,  macto,  idcuplcto,  ixstruo,  imbuo,  dono,  iinpertio,  remuniror,  hontsto, 
kdnoro,  etc. ;  as, 

Ten-ore  iin2)lHur  Africa,  Africa  is  filled  with  ten-or.  Sil.  Instruxere  epiilia 
mcnsas,  They  furnished  the  tables  with  food.  Ovid.  Ut  (jus  animum  hi"  opin- 
ionibus  imhiius,  That  you  should  imbue  his  mind  with  these  sentimeiycs.  Cic. 
Naves  Cmcr.mi  ;iuro,  They  load  the  ships  with  gold.  Virg.  CumCdat  nltunn  donis 
He  heaps  the  altars  with  gifts.  Id.  Terra  se  gi-amine  vestit.  The  earth  clothes 
itself  with  gi-ass.  Id.  Mollihus  ornabat  cornua  sertis.  Id.  Alulto  cibo  et  potione 
complvti.  Cic.  Libros  jmerilibus  f  abiilis  referclre.  Id.  Satidrl  delectatione  non 
possum.  Id.  Homines  saturdti  honoribus.  Id.  Seneclus  stlpi'ita  studiis  juren- 
tutis.  Id.  3fe  tanto  honore  hdnestas.  Plant.  Equis  Africam  lOcujiU'tdcit.  Colum. 
Studium  tuum  nulla  me  ndvd  voluptate  affecit.  Cic.  Terram  nox  vbruit  umbria. 
Lucr. 

Rem.  2.  Several  verbs  denoting  to  fill,  instead  of  the  ablative,  sometimes 
take  a  genitive.    See  §  220,  3. 

Rem.  3.  The  active  verbs  induo,  dmo,  impertio,  aspevfjo,  insperyo,  vircumdo, 
and  circumfundo,  instead  of  the  ablative  of  the  thing  with  the  accusative  of 
the  person,  sometimes  take  an  accusative  of  the  thing,  and  a  dative  of  the 
lerson;  as,  Cui  quum  Deicinira  timlcam  induisset.  Cic.  Donave  miinC-ra  civibus. 
n  the  eai-liest  writers  dono,  like  condono,  has  sometimes  two  accusatives  or  an 
accusative  of  the  person  with  the  infinitive. 

n.  A  noun  denoting  that  in  li^cordance  with  which  any  thing  ia, 
or  is  done,  is  often  put  in  the  ablative  without  a  preposition ;  as, 

Nostra  mm'c,  According  to  our  custom.  Cic.  Instt^iito  sua  Gtusar  copias  snot 
eduxit,  According  to  his  practice.  Cajs.  Id  factum  consilio  meo, — by  my  ad- 
vice. Ter.    Pucem  f<'cit  his  conditionibus, — on  these  conditions.  Nep. 


f; 


Note.  The  pref)ositioiis  de,  ex,  pro,  and  secundum  are  often  expressed  with 
Buch  noiuis;  as,  AV^«e  est  factiirus  quidauam  nisi  de  meo  consilio.  Cic.  Er 
consuetiidine  Oliquid  facere.  Plin.  Ep.  Decet  quidquid  dgas,  dc/ere  [iro  vir'',as, 
Cic.     St'cundum  naturam  vlvere.  Id. 

m.  The  ablative  denoting  accompaniment,  is  usually  joined  with 
cum;  as, 

Vagamur  irjentes  cum  conjngibus  et  libC-ris,  Needy,  we  wander  v/ilh  oui 
wives  and  children.  Cic.  Scepe  (tdmlrdri  svleo  cum  hoc  C.  Lajlio.  Id.  Julium 
cum  his  ad  te  llteris  m'lsi.  Id.  Ini/ressus  est  cum  gladio.  Id.  Romam  vcni  cura 
febri.     Cum  occiisu  sOlis  cOpias  fducere, — as  soon  as  the  sun  set. 

Re-makk.  But  cum  is  sometimes  omitted  before  words  de-.oting  military 
and  naval  forces,  when  limited  by  an  adjective;  as,  Ad  castra  kesdris  omnibut 
copiis  contendirunt.  Ctes.  hide'  toto  exercitu  prdfectus.  Liv.  £odern  decern 
ndribus  C-  Fzirius  venit.  Liv.  And  sometimes  in  military  language  cum  is  omit- 
ted, when  accompanyhig  circumstances  are  mentioned,  and  not  perscc^s;  8,!% 
Otstra  clamore  invdaunt. 


250  SYNTAX. ABLATIVE    OF    CAUSE,    ETC.  §  250,  25l 

§  250.     1.  A  noun,  adjective,  or  verb,  may  be  followed  by 

the  ablative,  denoting  in  what  respect  tbeir  signification  is  taken  ; 

as, 

Pietdie  f'dius.  consiliis  parens.  In  affection  a  son,  in  counsel  a  parent.  Cic. 
Rrges  nomine  rivigis  quam  impeno,  Kings  in  name  rather  than  in  authority.  Nep. 
Oppidum  nomine  Blbrax.  Cass. — Jure  peritus,  Skilled  in  law.  Cic.  Anxim  an*- 
mo,  Anxious  in  mind.  Tac.  Pedibus  ceger.  Lame  in  his  feet.  Sail.  Cr'me  ruber, 
niger  ore.  JIart.  Fronte  ketus.  Tac.  Major  natu.  Cic.  Prudentid  nan  in/eiior, 
us!i  vera  eiiam  superior.  Id.  Maximus  ndtu.  Liv. — Animo  angi,  To  be  troubled 
ir.  mind.  Cic.  Cbntreniisco  iota  mente  et  omnibus  artubus,  I  am  agitated  in  my 
whole  mind  and  in  every  limb.  Id.  Captus  mente,  Affected  in  mind,  i.  e.  de 
prived  of  reason.  Id.  Altero  dculo  cdpitur.  Liv.  Ingenii  himle  floruit.  Cic 
Follere  nobilitate.  Tac.    Animoque  et  cmpore  torpet.  Hor. 

REMARii.  This  may  be  called  the  ablative  of  limitation,  and  denotes  the  rela- 
tion expressed  in  English  by  '  in  respect  of,'  '  in  regard  to,'  '  as  to,'  or  '  in.' — 
Respecting  the  genitive  of  limitation  after  adjectives,  see  §213; — after  verbs, 
§  220,  1:  and  respecting  the  accusative  of  limitation,  see  §  231,  R.  5;  §  232,  (3.); 
and  §  234,  IL 

'.i.  (1.)  Adjectives  of  plenty  or  want  are  sometimes  limited  by  the 

ablative ;  as, 

D6mus  plena  servis,  A  house  full  of  servants.  Juv.  Blves  agris.  Rich  in 
land-.  Hor.  Ferax  sceculum  bdnis  artibus.  Plm. — Inops  verbis.  Deficient  in  words. 
Cic.  Orba  Jrdtribus,  Destitute  of  brothers.  Ovid.  Viduum  arboi-ibus  sOlum. 
Colum.  u\^dus  agi-is.  Hor.  For  the  genitive  after  adjectives  of  plenty  and 
want,  see  §  213,  R.  3-5. 

(2.)  Verbs  signifying  to  abound,  and  to  be  destitute,  are  followed 
by  the  ablative ;  as, 

Scdtentem  belluis  pontum,  The  sea  abounding  in  monsters.  Hor.  Urbs  redundai 
militibus.  The  city  is  full  of  soldiers.  Auct.  ad  Har.  Villa  dbundat  porco,  hcedo, 
agno,  gallhm,  lade,  cdseo,  melle.  Cic-  '"^■nim  qui  pecunid  egeat,  A  man  who  is 
in  want  of  money.  Id.  Cdrere  culpa.  To  oe  free  from  fault.  Id.  Mea  dddles- 
centia  iiuliget  ilLdrum  bdnd  existimatione.  Id.  Abandat  audacia,  consilio  et  ra- 
tioue  defidiur.  Id. 

Remark  1.  To  this  rule  belong  dbundo,  exubero,  redundo,  scdleo,  afflius,  eir- 
cumfluo,  diffluo,  siiperjluo,  suppedito,  vdleo,  vigeo; — careo,  egeo,  indigeo,  vdco,  de- 
ficior,  destituor,  etc. 

Rem.  2.  The  genitive,  instead  of  the  ablative,  sometimes  follows  certain 
veik  ^  sigtMfying  to  abound  or  to  want.  See  ^  220,  3. 

Reim.  3.  To  do  any  thing  with  a  person  or  thing,  is  expressed  in  Latin  by 
fdm-e  with  de  ;  as,  ~Quid  de  Tidliold  med  f'let  ?  Cic  ;  and  more  frequently  by 
the  simpl ;  ablative,  or  the  dative ;  as,  Q.md  hoc  homiue  or  huic  homini  fucidtis  f 
What  can  you  do  with  this  man  ?  Cic.  Nescit  quid  faciat  aiu'o, — what  he  shall 
do  with  the  gold.  Plant.  Quidmefiat  pai-vi  pendis.  You  care  little  what  be- 
comes of  me.  Ter. — Sinn  is  occasionally  used  Ln  the  same  manner ;  an,  Metum 
ceperunt  quidnam  se  futurum  essel, — what  would  become  of  them.  Liv. 

§  Q51,  A  noun  denoting  that  of  which  any  thing  is  de- 
prived, or  from  which  it  is  freed,  removed,  or  separated,  is  often 
put  in  the  ablative  without  a  preposition. 

This  construction  occurs  after  verbs  signifying  to  deprive,  free,  de- 
bar, drive  away,  remove,  depart,  and  others  which  imply  sej  aratvm. 


§  251.  STNTAX. ABLATIVE    OF    CAUSE,    ETC  2ol 

Note.  The  principal  verbs  of  this  class  are  arceo,  pello,  depello,  expello,  ab- 
^co,  interdlco,  ilefenao,  deturbo,  dejicio,  ijicio,  absterreo,  deterreo,  mdvco,  ('tm&veo, 
demdveo,  rem4ven,  secemo,  prdhibeo,  sepdro,  ewcludo,  interclado,  dbeo,  exeo,  cedo, 
dilccdo,  discedo,  dcsistv,  I'rddo,  nbstineo,  spolio,  prlvo,  orho^  I'lbero,  exjmUo,  laxo, 
nudo,  solvo,  exsolvo,  exdncro,  levo,  purc/o,  to  which  may  be  added  tlie  adjec- 
tives I'lber,  innnunis,  pwrus,  vacuus,  and  dliemts ;  as, 

Nudantur  arbdres  foliis,  The  trees  are  stripped  of  leaves.  Plin.  Hoc  me  libera 
metu,  Free  me  from  this  fear.  Ter.  Tune  earn  philosdjjhiam  sequere,  qum  spdliai 
rw«  judlcio.  j»m'a<  approbatione,  orbat  sensibiis  I*  Cic.  Solvit  se  Teuc ria  hictu. 
Virg.  Te  tllis  sedibus  arcebit.  Cic.  Q.  Varium  piellere  possessionibus  condtu^ 
est.  Id.  •Omnes  tiibu  reinoti.  Liv.  Levdre  se  £ere  iilleno.  Cic.  Me  leves  chdri 
secernunt  populo.  Hor.  Animus  omni  liber  cxira  et  angore.  Cic.  Uti-umque 
homine  dlieiiissimum.  Id.  When (zZit'mw signifies  '  averse'  or  '  hostile  to,'  it  takes 
the  ablative  with  nb,  or  rarely  the  dative ;  as,  Id  dlcit,  quod  illi  causae  maxime 
est  aliiinum.  Id.  In  the  sense  of '  unsuited,'  it  may  also  be  joined  with  the  gen- 
itive; as,  Quis  dlimum  puiei  ejus  esse  dignitatis?  Id. — Alius  too,  in  analogy 
with  adjectives  and  verbs  of  separation,  sometimes  takes  an  ablative;  as,  Ndve 
2)ii(es  iHium  sapiente  bono^^ie  bedtum.  Hor. ;  but  this  may  also  be  referred  to  the 
ablative  after  comparatives.    Cf.  §  256,  R.  14. 

Remark  1.  Most  verbs  of  depriving  and  separating  are  more  or  less  fre- 
quently followed  by  ab,  de,  or  ex,  with  the  ablative  oj"  the  thing,  ami  always  by 
ab  with  the  ablative  of  the  person;  as,  Tu  Jupiter,  liunc  a  tuis  aris  ara'bis.  Cic. 
Pnesidium  ex  arce  pejmlerunt.  Nep.  Aqunm  de  agro  pellere.  Plin.  Ex  inqrdtd 
civitate  cedere.  Cic.  Arcein  ab  incendio  liberdvii.  Id.  Solvere  belluam  ex  ca- 
tenis.  Auct.  ad  Her. — Sedes  remotas  a  Germanis.  Caes.  Se  ab  Etruscis  secer- 
nire.  Liv. 

Rem.  2.  Arceo,  in  the  poets,  sometimes  takes  the  dative,  see  ^  224,  R.  2., 
and  sometimes  an  infinitive;  as,  Pldgamque  sedere  cedendo  arcebat.  Ovid. — 
Prdhibeo  and  dffendo  take  either  the  accusative  of  the  person  or  thing  to  be 
defended,  with  the  ablative  of  the  thing  to  be  warded  off — or  the  reverse — 
dliquem  or  dliquid  a  perlc&lo,  or  per'ic&lum  ab  dliquo.  They  are  also  sometimes 
construed  with  the  dative,  see  §  224,  R.  2,  and  sometimes  with  infinitive  or 
subjunctive  clauses.  Prdhibeo  has  rai'ely  two  accusatives ;  as.  Id  te  Jupiter 
nroiiibessii.  Plant. ;  or  poeticallv  the  accusative  and  genitive ;  as,  Captie  prdhi- 
bi're  Pmnos  aquilffi.  Sil. — Interdlco  takes  the  person  either  in  the  accusative  or 
the  dative,  and  the  thing  in  the  ablative,  dliquem  or  nlicui  ahqua  re;  as.  Qutbus 
quum  aqua  et  igni  interdixissent.  C«s. — Instead  of  the  ablative,  a  subjunctive 
clause  with  we,  and  more  rarelj''  with  ut,  sometimes  follows  interdlco. — Absum, 
in  like  mamier,  takes  the  ablative  with  ab,  and  sometimes  the  dative;  as, 
Curice  nescio  quid  semper  dbest  rei.  Hor.  Cf.  §  224,  R.  1. — Abdico  takes  some- 
times an  ablative,  and  sometimes  an  accusative  of  the  thing  renounced;  as, 
Abdicdre  se  magistratu.  Cic.  Abdicdre  magistriltum.  Sail.  In  Plautus,  cir- 
cumduco,  to  cheat,  takes  the  ablative  of  the  thing.  Intercludo,  instead  of  au 
ablative  of  the  thing  with  an  accusative  of  the  person,  sometimes  takes  an 
accusative  of  the  thing  and  a  dative  of  the  person ;  as,  Itineram  angustice  mul- 
Vitud'un  iuga.m  interclHserant.  Cses. :  and,  instead  of  the  ablative  of  the  thipg, 
a  subjunctive  clause  with  jMwraiwMs  occurs:  Intercludor  ddlore,  qudtnlnus  ad  te 
plura  scrlbam.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  Verbs  which  signify  to  distinguish,  to  differ,  and  to  disagree,  are 
generally  construed  with  ab,  but  sometimes,  especially  in  the  poets,  with  the 
ablative  alone. 

Note.  Verbs  signifying  to  distinguish,  etc.,  are  distingue,  discemo,  secemo, 
diffcro,  discrepo,  dissideo,  disto,  dissentio,  discoi-do,  dbhorreo,  dlieno,  and  dbdlieno.-— 
Dissentio,  dissideo,  discrepo,  and  discordo  are  constnied  also  with  cum. — The 
veibs  which  signify  to  differ  are  sometimes  construed  with  the  dative;  as, 
Distat  iuf'hU)  scurrss  dmlcus.  Hor.,  and  in  like  mamier  the  adjBctive  cSveraiM, 
BS.  Nihil  est  lam  L^sise  diversum,  quam  Isocrdles.  Quint. 


252         SYNTAX. ABLATIVE    OF    PRICE    AND    TIME.       §  252,  253. 

-      ABLATIVE     OF    PRICE. 

§  253.  The  price  or  value  of  a  thing  is  put  in  the  abUtive, 
when  it  is  a  definite  sum,  or  is  expressed  by  a  substantive ;  as, 

Quum  te  trecentis  talentis  regi  Cotto  vendidisses,  When  you  had  sold  yourself 
to  king  Cottus  for  three  hundred  talents.  Cic.  Vendidit  hie  auro  patriam,  This 
one  sold  his  country  for  gold.  Virg.  Cibus  uno  asse  venalis.  Plin.  ConsHtU  qiidi- 
ringentis  millibus.  Varr.  Denis  in  diem  assibus  dnimum  et  corjjus  (mUiium) 
oesilmdri.  Tac.  Levi  momento  mstimdre.  Cses.  Jstac  verbiim  v'de  est  liyiiUi  mi- 
nis. Plaut.     Asse  cdrum  est.  Sen.  Ep. 

■  Kemabk  1.  The  verbs  which  take  an  ablative  of  price  or  value  are  (1)  assti- 
mo,  duco,  facio,  f'lO^  hcibeo,  pendo,  2iulo,  deptUo,  taxo:  (2)  eino,mercor,  vendo,  do, 
ve7ieo,  sto,  consio,  pi'osto,  condiico,  Idco,  vdleo,  luo,  and  liceo. — To  these  7nust  be 
added  others,  which  express  some  act  or  enjoyment  for  which  a  certain  price 
is  paid;  as,  Lavor  quadrante.  Tngmi?iva\\\ihu^' (hliiishdhitat.  Cic.  Vix  drachmis 
est  ob^imtm  decem.  Ter.  Doceo  talento,  etc.  So  esse  in  the  sense  '  to  be  worth ' ; 
as,  Sextante  sal  in  Italia  erai. 

Rem.  2.  Respecting  the  genitive  of  price  or  value,  when  expressed  in  a  gen- 
eral or  indefinite  manner,  see  §  214. 

Rem.  3.  The  price  of  a  thing,  contrary  to  the  general  rule,  is  often  expressed 
indefinitely  by  a  neuter  adjective;  as,  magna,  pei^magno,  parvo,  tantUlo,  plure, 
mininw,  phrimo,  inli,  vllion,  vllissimo,  nimio,  etc. ;  as,  Plure  vcnit.  Cic.  Cbnduxii 
■nora  magno  domum.  Id.  These  adjectives  refer  to  some  noun  understood,  as 
pretio,  cere,  and  the  like,  which  are  sometimes  expressed ;  as,  Parvo  pretio  ea 
cendidisse..  Cic. — The  adverbs  bene,  pulchre,  recte,  mule,  care,  etc.,  sometimes 
take  the  place  of  the  genitive  or  ablative  of  price ;  as,  Bene  emere ;  recte  verir 
dire ;  uptime  vendere,  etc. 

Rem.  4.  Varro  has  used  Kafeo  with  the  accusative;  as,  Denarii  dicti,  quod 
denos  csris  valebant. 

Re5i.  5.  Muto  and  its  compounds,  commuto  and  permuio,  are  commonly  con- 
strued like  verbs  of  selluig,  the  thing  parted  with  being  put  in  the  accusative, 
and  the  thing  received  in  exchange Yor  it,  in  the  ablative;  as,  Chddniam  glan- 
dem  pingid  mutavit  arista.  Virg.  But  these  cases  are  often  reversed,  so  that  the 
thing  received  is  put  in  the  accusative  and  the  thing  given  for  it  in  the  abla^ 
tive ;  as,  Our  valle  permfdem  Sdblna  divitias  dperosiures  f  Why  should  I  ex- 
change my  Sabine  valley  for  more  wearisome  riches  ?  Hor. — Sometimes  in  this 
constniction  cum  is  joined  with  the  ablative. 

ABLATIVE     OF    TIME. 

§  353.  A  noun  denotmg  the  time  at  or  within  which  any 
thing  is  said  to  be,  or  to  be  done,  is  put  in  the  abhitive  without 
a  preposition ;  as, 

Die  r/'/mto  decessit.  He  died  on  the  fifth  day.  Nep.  Hoc  tempore.  At  thia 
time.  Cic.  Tertia\igi\iA  ertiptidnem  fecerunt.  They  made  a  sally  at  the  third 
watch.  Cses.  Ut  hieme  ndviges.  That  you  should  sail  in  the  winter.  Cic.  Prox- 
imo triennio  omnes  gentes  stW-git.  Nep.  Agamemnon  cum  universd  Grmcia  vix 
decern  annis  unam  crpit  urbem.  Nep. 

Note  1.  The  English  expression  -'  by  day '  is  rendered  in  Latin  cither  by 
interdiu  or  die ;  '  bv'night,'  by  nociu  or  nocte)  and  '  in  the  evening,'  by  ivspere 
or  vesperi;  see  §  82,  Exc.  .5,  (a.)    Ludis  is  used  for  in  tempdre  laddruni;  and 


dlo,  pace',  etc. ;  or  in  initio,  etc.     But  bello  is  more  commor  without  m.  if  it  \m 


§  253.  SYNTAX. ABLATIVE    OF    TIME.  253 

joined  with  an  adjective  or  a  genitive;  as,  Bella  Punico  secundo,  bello  Latino- 
rnm :  and  so,  also,  puyna  Cannensi.  So  we  say  in  piterttia,  but  smit  in  with 
an  adjective;  as,  extrcmd  puentid.  In  is  very  rarely  used  with  iicuns  express- 
ing acertain  space  of  time;  as,  annus,  dies,  hdi-a,  etc.,  for  the  purpose  of  Je- 
noting  the  time  of  an  event.  In  tempdre  signifies  either  'in  distress,'  or  'in 
time,'  i.  e.  '  at  the  right  time ' ;  but  in  both  cases  tempdre  alone  is  used,  and 
iempdre  in  the  sense  of  '  early '  has  even  become  an  adverb,  an  earlier  form  of 
which  was  tempdri  or  teniperi,  whose  comparative  is  tv.mpirius. 

Remark  1.  When  a  period  is  marked  by  its  distance  before  or  after  anothei 
fixed  time,  it  may  be  expressed  by  ante  or  jMst  with  either  the  accusative  or 
the  ablative. — (a  )  The  preposition  is  regularly  placed  before  the  accusative, 
but  after  the  ablative.  If  an  adjective  is  used,  the  preposition  is  often  placed 
between  the  adjective  and  the  noun.  In  this  connection  the  ordinal  as  well  as 
the  cardinal  niunbers  maybe  use<l.  Hence  the  English  phrase  'after  three 
years,'  or  '  three  years  after,'  may  be  expressed  in  these  eight  ways ;  ^;ys/  tre* 
annvs,  Irihis  nnnis  post ;  post  lertium  annum,  terlio  anno  post ;  tres  post  annos, 
tiibus  post  (innis ;  tertium  post  annum,  tertio  jwst  anno. 

(b.)  When  o«<e  or /?os<  stands  last,  an  accusative  maybe  added  to  denote 
the  time  before  or  after  which  any  thing  took  place;  as,  Multis  annis  post  de- 
cem\iros.  Cic.  So  Consul  f actus  est  annis  post  Romam  conditam  trecentis  dtid- 
denondyinUi. 

Note  2.  Post  and  ante  sometimes  precede  the  ablatives,  as  ante  annis  octo; 
post  patuis  diPbus ;  and  also  before  such  ablatives  as  are  used  adverbiaUy,  as 
post  aliquanto  ;  ante  paulo. 

Note  3.  Quam  and  a  verb  are  sometimes  added  to  j^ost  and  ante  in  all  the 
forms  above  specified;  e.  g.  IHhus  annis  posUjuam  venerat ;  post  tres  annos  quam 
vencrat;  lei'tio  ar'MO  postgua7n  venerat ;  post  annum  tertium  quam  venerat,  etc.; 
aU  of  which  expressions  signify  '  three  years  after  he  had  come.'  Sometimes 
post  is  omitted ;  as,  tertio  anno  quam  venerat. 

Note  4.  Instead  of  postquam,  '  after,'  we  may  use  ex  quo,  quum,  or  a  relative 
agreeuig  with  the  preceding  ablative;  as.  Ipse  octo  diebus,  quibus  has  llteras  da- 
bam,  cum  Lepidi  copias  me  conjunyam ;  i.  e.  in  eight  days  after  the  date  of  this 
letter.  Plane,  in  Cic.  Fam.  Mors  Sex.  Roscii  quatriduo,  quo  is  occlsiis  est, 
Chrysdyono  nuntidtur, — four  days  after  he  had  been  killed.  Cic.  Quern  trtduo, 
quum  has  dnbitm  Uterus,  exspectdbam, — three  days  after  the  date  of  this  letter, 
rlanc.  in  Cic.  In  such  cases  i?»  is  sometimes  joined  with  the  ablative;  *s,  In 
diebus  paucis,  quibus  luec  acta  sunt,  mdrxtur.  Ter. 

Re.m.  2.  The  length  of  time  before  the  present  moment  may  be  expresseu  by 
abhinc  with  the  accusative,  and,  less  frequently,  the  ablative;  as,  Qucestor  fuisti 
abhmc  annos  qudtuordicim.  Cic.  Cdmitiis  jam  abhinc  triyinta  diebus  hdbitis.  Id. 
The  same  is  also  expressed  by  ante  with  the  pronoun  hie ;  as,  ante  hos  sex 
menses  nu'tledixisti  miht, — six  months  ago.  Phffid.  Ante  is  sometimes  used  in- 
stead of  abhinc  :  and  the  length  of  time  before  is  sometimes  expressed  b'y  the 
ablative  joined  with  hie  or  itle ;  as,  Paucis  his  diebus,  or  paucis  illis  dieSus,— 
a  few  days  ago. 

Rem.  3.  The  time  at  which  anything  is  done,  is  sometimes  expressed  by  the 
r.euter  accusative  id,  with  a  genitive ;  as,  Venit  id  tempdris.  Cic.  So  with  a 
prepDsition ;  Ad  id  diei.  Gell.    See  §  212,  R.  3. 

Rj;m.  4.  (rt.)  The  time  a<  or -iCT^/iJ/i  which  anything  is  done,  is  sometimes, 
with  personal  subjects,  expressed  hy  de,  with  the  ablative;  as,  De  tertid  vigilia 
ad'bo.Hes  contendit, — in  the  third  watch.  Ctes.  Ut  juyident  hdmines  suryunt  do 
nocte  latrdnes.  Hor.  So,  also,  with  sub;  as,  iVe  sub  ipsa  prOfectiOr. e  mllites  op/ti- 
dum  irrum])in-vnt, — at  the  very  time  of  his  departure.  Ca;s.  Sub  adventu  ROman- 
diiim,  Wliile  the  Romans  were  arriving.  Id. 

ib.)  The  tune  within  which  any  thing  occurs,  is  also  sometimes  expressed  by 
intra  with  "he  accusative;  as,  l}imidiam  partem  ndtionum  subeyit  intra  viyinti 
dies.  Plant  Intra  decimum  dieiu,  guam  Pheras  venerat  In  less  than  ton  days 
after.     Liv 

as 


254  SYNTAX. — ABLATVE    OF   PLACE.  §254,25.5 

Rem.  5.  The  time  within  which  a  thing  happens,  is  often  ( xpressed  by  the 
ablative  with  i« ,•  especially  (a)  in  connection  with  numerals;  as,  Bis  iii  die 
saiurum  Jleri ;  vlx  ter  in  anno  nuntium  nudire  ;  and  (6),  as  in  the  use  of  intra. 
to  denote  that  tlie  event  happened  before  the  time  specified  had  fully  expired. 

Rem.  6.  Instead  of  in  piieriiid^  (idolescentid,  juventute,  smectute,  etc.,  in  stat- 
ing the  age  at  which  a  person  performed  any  action,  the  concretes  puer,  ddd- 
lescens,  juvenis,  senex,  etc.,  are  commonly  ^joined  to  the  verb;  as.  On.  Pompeiug, 
adolescens  se  et  patre7n  consilio  servdvit. — bo,  also,  adjectives  ending  in  endrius 
are  sometimes  used  in  statmg  the  number  of  years  a  person  has  lived;  as, 
Cicero  sexdgendrius. 

For  the  ablative  denoting  duration  of  time,  see  ^  236. 

ABLATIVE     OF    PLACE. 

§  2d4r.     The  name  of  a  town  in  which  any  thing  is  said  to 

be,  or  to  be  done,  if  of  the  third  declension  or  plural  number,  is 

put  in  the  ablative  without  a  preposition  ;  as, 

Alexander  BabylSne  est  mortuus,  Alexander  died  at  Babylon.  Cic.  Intiririi 
multum — Th'ebis  nulrltus  an  Argis, — whether  brought  up  at  Thebes  or  at  Argos. 
Hor.     Ndtus  Tibure  vel  Gabiis.  Id. 

Remark  1.  '  In  the  country '  is  expressed  by  riire,  or  more  commonly  by 
ruri,  without  a  preposition ;  as,  Pater  f  ilium  riiri  habitdre  jussit.  Cic.  With  an 
adjective  only  i-ure  is  used;  as,  Interdum  nugdris  rare  pdterno.  Hor.  Cf. 
i)  221,  N. 

Rem.  2.  (a.)  The _  preposition  in  is  sometimes  expressed  with  names  of 
towns ;  as.  In  Philippis  quidam  nunddvit.  Suet. 

(6.)  Names  of  towns  of  the  first  and  second  declension,  and  singular  number, 
and  also  ddmus  and  humus,  are  in  like  manner  sometimes  put  in  the  ablative 
without  in.  See  §  221,  R.  2  and  R.  3. — So,  also,  tei-rd  mdi-fque,  by  land  and  by 
sea.  In  is  also  frequently  omitted  with  Idco  and  locis,  especiaUv  when  joined 
with  an  adjective  and  having  the  meaning  of  '  occasion ' ;  as,  j5bc  Idco,  muliis 
Idcis,  etc. — Z,{fo-o  joined  with  an  adjective,  as  hoc,  prlmo,  etc.,  is  used  without 
in  when  the  whole  book  is  meant,  and  with  in  when  only  a  portion  is  refeiTed 
to.  An  ablative  of  place  joined  with  toto,  totd,  talis,  is  generally  used  without 
in;  as,  Urbe  totd  gemitus  Jit.  Cic.  Totd  Asid  vdgdtur.  Id.  Toto  mdri.  Id.  But 
in  such  cases  in  is  sometimes  used.     So  cunctd  Asia.  Liv. 

Rem.  3.  Before  the  names  of  countries,  of  nations  used  for  those  of  countries, 
and  of  all  other  places  in  which  any  thing  is  said  to  be  or  to  be  done,  except 
those  of  to\vns,  and  excepting  also  the  phrases  specified  in  the  first  and  second 
remarks,  the  preposition  j»  is  commonly  used ;  as,  Iphicrates  in  Thracia  ria-i'^. 
Chares  in  Sigeo.  Nep.  Rure  ego  vlvenfem,  tu  dicis  in  urbe  bedtum.  Hor.  Aio  hoc 
Jieri  in  Grsecia.  Plant.  In  Bactrianis  Sogdianis^Me  urbes  condidit.  Lucas  in 
ni'be  J'uit.  Virg.  But  it  is  sometimes  omitted  b}'  writers  of  every  class  and 
period ;  as,  Mllites  stdtlvis  castris  hdbebat.  Sail.  Magnis  in  laudibus  fuit  iota 
Gr£ecia.  Nep.  Pqpuli  sensiis  maxime  theatre  et  spectaculis  perspecius  est.  Cic. 
Pompeius  se  oppido  tenet.  Id.  In  the  poets  and  later  prose  T\Titers  this  omis- 
sion is  of  very  frequent  occurrence  not  only  with  names  of  towns  but  with 
ablatives  of •  all  nouns  answering  to  the  question,  where?  as,  Ndvita  ■^x\\i\)Q 
sedens.  Ovid.  Ibam  forte  Wa,  Sacra.  Hor.  Silvisque  agi'isque  viisqne  co;yi)/-a 
fceda  jdce7it.  Ovid.  Medio  alveo  concursum  est.  Liv. — Fdris,  out  at  the  door, 
abroad,  is  properly  an  ablative  of  place  ;  as,  Foris  coenat.  Cic.  Cf.  §  237, 
R.  6,  (c.) 

§  255.  1.  After  verbs  expressing  or  implying  motion,  the 
name  of  a  town  whence  the  motion  proceeds,  is  p. it  ii\  the  abla- 
tive, without  a  preposition  ;  as, 


§  256.    SYNTAX. ABLATIVR  AFTER  COMPARATIVES.     255 

BiuntUsio  prdfecti  siimus,  We  departed  from  Brundisium.  Cic.  Diinydut 
iyrtinnus  Svificu'sis  expidsiis  Cdrinthi  pmros  ddcfbat.  Id.  Demdrutus  Tnripanioi 
COrintho  futjit.  Id.  Aca'pi  tuns  lUiras  d/iias  Plticentia.  Id.  Interim  Roma  pe, 
Viteras  cerlior  ft ;  scil.  diUas  or  7nissns.  SiiU.  J.  82.  So,  also,  after  a  verbal 
nouu;  as,  Narbone  ?-M'iMs.  Cic. 

Remark  1.  The  abLatives  domo,  Mono,  and  rure  or  ruri,  are  used, 
like  names  of  towns,  to  denote  the  place  whence  motion  proceeds  • 
as, 

Domo  prdfectus,  Having  set  out  from  home.  Nep.  Su7-git  liumo  yiiynis, 
The  youth  rises  fnm  the  ground.  Ovid.  Kure  hue  aclvenit.  Ter.  Si  ruii  vetiiet. 
Id.  Virgil  uses  domo  with  unde  ;  as.  Qui  yeuusf  unde  d''<no?  and  Livy  in- 
stead of  ddmo  dbesse,  has  esse  ab  ddmo.  With  an  adjective,  rure,  and  not  r;I«, 
must  be  used. 

Rem.  2.  With  names  of  towns  aud  ddmus  and  humus,  when  answering  tha 
■question  '  whence?'  ab,  ex,  or  de,  is  sometimes  used;  as,  Ab  Alexandrtd  prO- 
fecius.    Cic.    -Ex  d6mo.  Id.    De  viliferd  venisse  Vienna.  Mart.    Ah  humo.  Virg. 

Rem.  3.  (a.)  With  other  names  of  places  whence  motion  proceeds^  ab,  ex, 
or  de  is  commonly  expressed;  as.  Me  a  porta  pramlsit.  Plant.  Ex  Asia 
trans7s  in  Europam.  Curt.  Ex  castris  prdflciscnntur.  Cces.  De  romi^tino, 
scil.  pvi-edio.  Cic. — So,  also,  before  names  of  nations  used  for  those  of  coun- 
tries; as.   Ex  Medis  ad  advei-suridrum  hlberndciila  pervCnit.  Nep. 

(b.)  But  the  preposition  is  sometimes  omitted;  as,  LUerce  Mixcedonia.  nllat(e. 
Liv.  Classis  Cypro  adrenit.  Curt.  Cessissent  loco.  Liv.  N'l  cite  vicis  ct  castellis 
proximis  subventum  fdrel.  Id.  Ite  sacris,  prOperdte  sacris,  laurumque  capillia 
poniie.  Ovid.  Finibus  omnes  prosiluere  suis.  Virg.  Advolvunt  ingenles  monti- 
bus  ornos.  Id.  This  omission  of  the  preposition  is  most  common  in  the  poets 
aud  later  prose  writers. 

2.  The  place  hy,  through,  or  over  which,  after  verbs  of  motion,  com- 
monly follows  per ;  but  frequently  also  it  is  put  in  the  ablative  with- 
out a  preposition ;  as, 

Per  Thebas  iter  fecit.  Nep.  Exerntum  vado  transducit.  Cses.  His  pontibus 
pabiddtum  miltvbat.  Id.  TribUni  militum  porta  Collina  urbem  inirdvere  sub  siynis, 
mediajMe  urbe  aymine  in  Aventlnum  perynnt.  Liv.  Legimes  Penninis  Cottiaais- 
que  Alpibus,  pars  monte  Graio,  trdducuntur.  Tac.  EquUes  via  brSviore  pi'ce. 
misi.  Cic. 

ABLATIVE    AFTER    COMPARATIVES. 

§  25Gt  1.  When  two  objects  are  compared  by  means  of  the  comparative 
degree,  a  conjunction,  as  qiiam,  atquc,  etc.,  is  sometimes  expressed,  and  some- 
time; omitted. 

2.  The  comparative  degi-ee,  when  guam.  is  omitted,  is  followed 

by  the  ablative  of  that  with  which  the  comparison  is  made ;  as, 

Nihil  est  virtute  foi-mosius.  Nothing  is  more  beautiflil  than  virtue.  Cic.  Quit 
C.  Laelio  comiorf  Who  is  more  courteous  than  C.  Lselins?    Id. 

Rkmark  1.  The  person  or  thing  witli  which  the  subject  of  a  pro- 
Dosition  is  compared,  is  usually  put  in  the  ablative;  as , 

Sidere  pulchriar  tile  est,  tu  levior  cortice.  H(jr.  V^ilius  argentum  est  auro,  vir- 
lutibus  aurum.  Id.  Tullus  Hostilius  ferocior  Romulo  fuit.  Liv.  Lacrima  nihil 
citiits  drescit.  C'lC.  Quid  uiaa^&XSt  dUritin  saxo,  quid  mullius  undo,?  Ovid.  Hoo 
fi''-mo  fuit  minus  ineptus^t^T^rZf- Albdnum,' MiBCvnas,  sive  Fdlermim  te  mdgis  a.Tp- 
posltis  di'lectiit.  Hor. 


256  SYNTAX. ABLATIVE    AFTER     fOMPAR4.TIVES.  §  25t>. 

Rem.  2.  An  object  with  which  a  person  or  thing  addressed  is  cDmpared,  if 
also  put  in  the  abVative ;  as,.  0  fons  Bandusue  splendldiai-  vitro !  Hor. 

Rem.  3.  Sometimes  the  person  or  tiling  with  which  the  subject  of  a  proposi- 
tion is  compared,  instead  of  following  it  in  the  ablative,  is  connected  with  it  by 
qunm,  and  it  is  then  put  in  the  same  case  as  the  subject,  whether  in  the  nomi- 
native or  the  accusative;  as,  Orddo  quam  habitus  fidt  miser dbilioi\  Cic. 
Affinno  mdlam  esse  laudem  ampliortm  quam  cam.  Id.  So,  also,  when  an  abla- 
tive in  the  case  absolute  takes  the  place  of  the  subject;  as,  Eodeni  (scU.  dace) 
plui'ci,  quam  gregario  milite,  tolerante.  Tac. 

Rem.  4.  If  the  person  or  thing  which  is  compared  with  any  object  is  neither 
the  subject  of  the  sentence  nor  the  person  addressed,  qunm  is  commonly  used, 
and  the'  object  which  follows'  it  is  then  put  in  the  nominative  with  smn,  and 
sometimes' in  an  oblique  case  to  agree  with  the  object  with  which  it  is  com- 
pared; as,  ilfeZ/OT'e?«,  quam  ego  sum,  suppcno  tibi.  Plaut.  Efjo  hominem  calli- 
diorem  vidi  neminem  quam  Phonniunem.  Ter.  Advenius  hosiium  fuit  agris, 
(\\\i\m  \irh\  terHblUor.  Liv.  Omnes  fonies  x^tsXQ,  quiim  hieme,  sunt  yclidiores. 
Plin.  Themistoclis  nOmen,  quam  "Solonis,  est  ilhistrius.  Cic. — The  following 
example  illustrates  both  the  preceding  constructions: — Ut  tibi  mulio  mOjon, 
quam  AfrTcanus  fuit,  me  nan  multo  minorem  quam  Loelium  facile  et  in  rcpublicd 
et  in  limicitid  adjimcium  esse  patidre.  Cic. 

Rem.  5.  (a.)  The  person  or  thing  with  which  the  object  of  an  active  verD  is 
compare  i,  though  usually  connected  with  it  by  quarn^  (R.  4,)  is  sometimes  put 
in  the  ablative,  especially  in  the  poets,  and  frequently  also  even  in  prose,  if  the 
obiect  is  a  pronoun,  particularly  a  relative  pronoun ;  as,  Attdlo,  quo  grdviorem 
inimicum  non  hdbui,  sdrorem  dedit,  He  gave  his  sister  to  Attains,  than  whom^  etc. 
Curt.  Roc  7iihil  yrdtius  fdcere  2}(>tes.  Cic.  Camam  enim  suscqnsti  antiquidrem 
menioria  tua.  Id.  Exeqi  mdnHmentum  asre  perennius.  Hor.  Cur  olmun  san- 
guine \'ipt'nno  caulius  vitat  f  Id.  Quid  prius  dlcam  solitis  parentis  laudibus '?  Id. 
Majnra  viribus  audes.  Virg.  Nullam  sacra  vite  prius  severis  arborem.  Hor. 
NuHos  his  viallem  lUdos  sjyectasse.  Id.  §  178,  3. 

(6.)  The  ablative  instead  of  quam  is  never  used  with  any  other  oblique  case 
except  the  accusative,  but  qtiam  is  sometimes  found,  even  where  the  ablative 
mit'ht  have  been  used;  as,  Melior  tutiorque  est  certa  pax  quam  sperdta  victoria. 
Liv.  After  quam,  if  the  verb  cannot  be  supplied  from  the  preceding  sentence, 
est,  fuit,  etc.,  must  be  added;  as,  Bcec  verba  sunt  M.  Varronis,  qiiam  fuit 
Claudius,  doclioris.  Gell.  Brusum  Germanlcum  minorem  ndtu,  quam  ipse  erat, 
frdtrem  dnilsit.  Sen. 

Rem.  6.  (rt.)  Minus,  plus,  and  ampUus  with  numerals,  and  with  other  words 
denoting  a  certain  measure  or  a  certain  portion  of  a  thing,  are  used  either  with 
or  without  quam,  generally  as  indeclinable  words,  without  influence  upon  the 
construction,  but  merely  to  modifv  the  number;  as.  Nonplus  quam  qudtmr 
millia  effuaerunt,  not  effCigit.  Liv.  i'ictores  antlqui  non  sunt  Usi  plus  quam  qud- 
tuor  cdloribus,  not  jMrtbus.    Cic. 

(b.)  Quam  is  frequently  omitted  with  all  cases;  as.  Minus  duo  millia  lidmi- 
num  ex  tuntv  exercitu  effilgcrunt.  Liv.  Milites  Romdni  scepe  plus  dtmididti  men- 
sis  cibdria  J'erebant.  Cic.  Quum  plus  annum  ceger  fuisset.  Liv.  Sedecim  rum 
amplius  CO  anno  leyionlbus  dcfensum  imperium  est.  Id. 

(c.)  These  comparatives,  as  in  the  preceding  example,  are  sometimes  in- 
sertiid  between  the  numeral  and  its  substantive,  and  sometimes,  when  joined 
witl  a  negative,  they  follow  both,  as  a  sort  of  apposition ;  as,  Quinque  millia 
armdtdrum,  non  amplius,  reUctma  erat  prmsidium, — a  garrison  of  five  thousand 
Boldiers,  not  more.  Liv.  So,  also,  loiujius ;  Ccesa^  certior  est  /actus,  magnat 
Gallurum  copias  non  longius  millia  passuum  octo  ab  hibernis  suis  abfuisse.  Cks. 
See  ^  236. 

id.)  The  ablative  is  sometimes  used  with  these  as  with  other  comparatives; 
as,  I>ies  ir'tginta  aut  jjIus  eo  in  ndvi  fui.  Ter.  Triennio  amplius.  Cic.  Horii 
amplius  moliebanlur.  Id.  Ne  kmyius  tnduo  ab  castris  absit.  Cajs.  Apud  Sitevoi 
now  longiu^i  anno  remdnt're  Una  in  loco  incolendi  vausd  fleet.  Id.  Qnum  initio  mm 
vmplius  du'^bus  millibus  Mbuissei.  Sail. 


§  25G.    SYNTAX. ABLATIVE  AFTER  COMPARATIVES.     2.'<7 

Rem.  7.  Quam  is  in  like  manner  sometimes  omitted,  without  s  chaj  ge  ol 
case,  after  inujor,  minor,  and  some  other  coinpiinitives ;  as,  Obsides  ne  minorei 
octonum  denum  annonim  neu  majores  quininn  qiuidragGnum,....  uf  not  less 
than  eighteen,  nor  more  than  forty-five  years  of  age.  Liv.  I\x  lubarM  exeraiu, 
qui  mini/fes  quinque  et  trlginta  annis  erani,  in  naves  imposiii  ftmt.  The  genitive 
ftnd  ahlative,  in  these  and  similar  examples,  are  to  be  referred  to  ^  211,  K.  6. 
Lonffiiis  a!)  nrbe  mille  passuum.  Liv.     Annos  natas  matjis  quadra  yinta.   Cic. 

Kem.  8.  When  the  second  member  of  a  comparison  is  an  infinitive  or  a 
clause,  quam  is  always  expressed;  as,  Mhil  est  i?i  a'lcendo  mdjus  qaam  ut  faveat 
rrati'ri  auditor.  Cic. 

Rem.  9.  Certain  nouns,  participles,  and  adjecWves, — as  dpmione^  spe,  ex- 
tpeciatione,  fide, — dicto,  sdlito, — cequo,  credibiU,  necesscirio,  vera,  and  justo, — are 
ased_  iu  a  peculiar  mamier  in  the  ablative  after  comparatives ;  a-s,  Opinione 
celerius  venturus  esse  dlcUur, — sooner  than  is  expected.  Ca;s.  Dicto  citius  tuini- 
da  (equora  pldcat,  Quicker  than  the  word  was  spoken.  Virg.  Injurias  grdviut 
requo  habere.  Sail. 

[a.)  These  ablatives  supply  the  place  of  a  clause;  thus,  (jvchhus  cequo  is 
p.qw'walQnt  to  gravius  quam  quod  cBquum  est.  They  are  often  omitted;  as,  T:d- 
mistocles  llbC-rius  vlvPbat,  soil.  <equo.  Nep.  In  such  cases,  the  comparative  may 
be  translated  by  the  positive  degree,  with  too,  quite,  or  rather,  as  in  the  above 
example — '"He  lived  too  freely,' or  '  ixither  freely.'  Volaptas  qumn  major  est 
atque  longior,  onme  animi  lumen  exstinguit, — when  it  is  too  gi"eat,  and  of  too  long 
continuance.  Cic.     So  trisiior,  scil.  solito,  rather  sad. 

(6.)    The   English  word  '  still,'  joined  with   comparatives,    is  expressed   by  • 
eliam  or  vel,  and  only  in  later  prose  writers  by  cidhuc ;  as,  Ut  in  corjjonbus  mag- 
ruB  dissimilttudines  sunt,  sic  in  Cinimis  exsisiunt  majores  etiam  varietdtes.  Cic. 

Rem.  10.  (a.)  With  zny'mo;-,  the  dative  is  sometimes  used,  instead  of  the 
ablative;  as,  Vir  nidld  arte  cuiquam  inferior.  Sail.  The  ablative  is  also  found; 
as,  Ut  humdnos  casus  virtiite  injeriores  piites.  Cic.  But  usually  inferior  is  fol- 
lowed by  quam ;  as,  Tlmotheus  belli  laude  non  inferioi-  full,  quam  pater.  Cic. 
Gratia  non  inferior,  quam  qui  umquani  fuerunt  amplissimi.  Id. 

(b.)  Qudlis,  '  such  as,'  with  a  comparative,  occurs  poetically  instead  of  the 
relative  pronoun  in  the  ablative;  as,  Nardo  perunctum,  quale  non  perfectim 
mew  Idbordrint  mdnus ;  instead  of  quo.  Hor.  Epod.  5,  59.  Anlmce  qutlles  neque 
candidiores  terra  tulit ;  for  quibiis.  Id.  Sat.  1,  6,  41. 

Rem.  11.  Quam  pro  is  used  after  comparatives,  to  express  disproportion;  as, 
Proelium  atrocius  quam  pro  nuraero  pugnimtium.  The  battle  was  more  severe 
than  was  proportionate  to  the  number  of  the  combatants.  Liv.  Minor,  quam 
pro  tumultu,  ccedes.  Tac. 

Rem.  12.  When  two  adjectives  or  adverbs  are  compared  with  each  other, 
both  are  put  in  the  comparative;  as,  Triumphus  clarior  quain  gratior,  A  tri- 
umph more  famous  than  acceptable.  Liv.  Fortius  quam  f  ellcius  bellum  gesse- 
runt.  So,  also,  wlien  the  comparative  is  formed  bv  means  of  magis ;  as,  Jlagis 
audacter  quam  pariite  ad  dlcendum  veniebat.  Cic. — Tacitus  uses  the  positive  in 
one  part  of  the  proposition;  as,  Speciem  excelsce  ^Zori'ce  vehementius  q%a.m  caute 
nppetebat ;  or  even  in  both;  as,  Claris  mdjoribus  quam  vetustis. 

Rem.  13.  (n.)  POtius  and  mdgis  are  sometimes  joined  pleonastically  with 
m<ille  and  prcestare,  and  also  with  comparatives;  as,  Ab  omnibus  se  d('sertm  po- 
tius  quam  abs  te  w'fensos  esse  malunt.  Cic.  Qui  magis  vere  vincere  quam  diu 
imperdre  malit.  Liv.  Ut  andH  potius  quam  servire  prsestaret.  Cic.  MiJii  qitarcis 
fiiga  potius  quam  ulla  provinna  essel  optatior.  Id.  Quis  magis  queut  esse  bea- 
tior?  Virg. 

(b.)  So,  also,  the  prepositions  py-ce,  ante,  prceter,  and  supra,  are  sometimes 
used  with  a  comparative;  as,  Unua 'prx  Q,eiX:r\&  fortior  cxsurgit,  Apul.  Scelere 
ante  alios  immdnioi'  omnes.  Virg.  They  also  occur  with  a  superlative;  a-s, 
Ante  alios  cdrissimus.  Nep.  As  these  prepositions,  when  jo'ned  with  the 
positive,  denote  comparison,  they  seem  in  such  examples  to  he  redundant 
See  §  127 

aa* 


258  SYNTAX. ABLATIVE    ABSOLUTE.  §  257 

Rem.  14.  Alius  is  sometimes  in  poetry  treated  as  a  comparati^  e,  and  con- 
strueti  with  the  ablative  instead  of  atque  with  the  nominative  or  accusative ; 
as,  Neve  putes  dliuni  sapiente  honoque  bedtum.  Hor.  Alius  Lysippo.  Id.  But 
compare  §  251,  N. 

Rem.  15.  By  the  poets  ac  and  atgue  are  sometimes  used  instead  of  quam 
after  comparatives ;  as,  Qiianto  constantior  idem  in  vitiis,  tanto  levins  miser  ac 
prior  ilk',  qui,  etc.  Hor.     Arctius  atque  hederd  procera  athiringltur  ilex.  Id. 

Rkm.  16.  The  degree  of  difference  between  objects  compared  is 
expressed  by  the  abhitive  : — 

(1.)  Of  substantives;  a"s,  Minor  mko  mense,  Younger  by  one  month.  Hor. 
Sesquipede  quam  tu  longior,  Taller  than  you  by  a  foot  and  a  half.  Plai't. 
Hihernin  dimidio  minor  quam  Britannia.  Cres.  Dimidio  minoris  consiiibit,  It 
will  cost  less  by  half.  Cic.  Quam  mdlestum  est  Uno  digito  plus  habere  .'....to  huve 
one  finger  more,  i.  e.  than  we  have,  to  have  six  fingers.  Id. — but  the  expression 
is  anibiguiins,  as  it  might  mean  'to  have  more  than  one  finger.'  SUperai  capite 
el  cervicibus  allis.   Virg. 

(2.)  Of  neuter  adjectives  of  quantity  and  neuter  pronouns,  in  the  singular 
number.  Such  are  tanto,  quanta,  quo,  eo,  hoc,  multo,  jmrvo,  pa.ulo,  nlmio,  all- 
qua'ito,  tantCdo,  (dtero  tauto  [tvfice  us  much);  as,  Multo  doctior  es  patre,  'I'linu 
art  (by)  much  more  learned  than  thy  fathei*.  The  relative  and  demonstrative 
vvonls,  quanta — taiUa,  quo — eo,  or  quo — hoc,  signifying  '  by  how  much — by  so 
much,'  are  often  to  be  translated  by  an  emphatic  the;  as,  Quanto  siimus  stiperi- 
&res,  tanto  nos  submissius  yerumus.  The  more  eminent  we  are,  the  more  humbly 
let  us  conduct  ourselves :  lit.  by  how  much — by  so  much — .  Cic.  Eo  grumyr 
est  dolor,  qno  culpa  est  major.  Id.  But  the  relative- word  generally  precedes 
the  demonstrative;  as.  Quo  difficilius,  hoc  prwcldrius.  Id.  Poetically,  also, 
qunm  macjis — tam  magis  are  used  instead  of  quanto  mdgis — tanto  mdgis.  Virg. 
£n.  7,  787:  and  quam  mdgis — tanto  mdgis.  Lucr.  6,  459. — Iter  rmilto  J  dcilius, — 
much  easier.  Cajs.  Parvo  brerius,  A  little  shorter.  Plin.  Eo  mdgis,  The  more. 
Cic.  Eo  mimis.  Id.  Istoc  mdgis  vdpiildbis,  So  much  the  luore.  Plant.  Via  altt-ro 
tanto  longior, — as  long  again.  Nep.     Multo  id  maximum  fuit.  Liv. 

(3.)  The  ablative  of  degree  is  joined  not  only  with  comparatives  but  with 
verbs  which  contain  the  idea  of  comparison ;  as,  mdlo,  prcesto,  supero,  excello, 
awieceZto,  f(?iY(;c<'rfo,  and  others  compounded  with  ante;  and  also  with  ante  and 
post,  in  the  sense  of  '  earlier  '  and  '  later  ' ;  as,  Multo  pncsiat.  Sail.  Post  paulo, 
A  little  after.  Id.  Multo  ante  lucis  adrentum.  Long  before — .  Id.  Multis  parti- 
bus  is  equivalent  to  mtdto ;  as,  Numero  multis  partibus  esset  inferior.  Cses. 

Note.  The  accusatives  midtum,  tantum,  quantum,  and  dliquantum,  are  some- 
times used  instead  of  the  corresponding  ablatives;  as,  Allquantum  est  ad  rem 
avidior.  Ter.  Multum  imprdbiores  sunt.  Plant.  Quantum  domo  inferior,  ta)i- 
trm  gloria  siiperior  evdsit.  Val.  Max.  Cf.  ^  232,  (3.) — So  longe,  'tar,'  is  fre- 
quently used  for  multo ;  as,  Longe  melior.  Virg.  Longr  et  multum  antecellere. 
Cic.     So,  pars  pedis  sesqui  major, — longer  by  one  halt.  td. 

ABLATIVE    ABSOLUTE. 

§  257.  A  noun  and  a  participle  are  put  in  the  ablativf., 
called  absolute,  to  denote  the  time,  cause,  means,  or  concomitant 
of  an  action,  or  the  condition  on  which  it  depends ;  as, 

Pyt^idgdras,  Tarquinio  regnante,  in  Itdliam  venit,  Pythagoras  came  int6  Italy" 
ui  the  reign  of  Tai-quin.  Cic.  Lupus,  stimulante  fame,  capiat  dale,  Hunger  in- 
citing, the  wolf  seeks  the  fold.  Ovid.  Millies,  pecore  e  lo7igin.quioribHS  vicis 
ftdacto,  exlremam  fdmem  sustentdbant.  Caes.  JJac  oratione  habita,  conc-livm 
dimisil.  Id.  Gain,  re  cognita,  obsidionem  relinquunt.  Id.  Virtiite  excepta,  nihii 
•micitid  pnet'/ibilius  putHtis.  Cic. 


§  257.  SYNTAX. ABLATIVE    ABSOLUTE.  259 

Note  1.  The  Latin  ablntive  absolute  may  be  expressed  in  English  by  a  sim- 
ilar constniction,  but  it  is  commonly  better  to  translate  it  by  a  clause  connect- 
ed by  jrAew,  since,  wliile,  although,  after,  as,  etc.,  or  by  a  verbal  substantive; 
as,  Te  adjiivante,  With  thy  assistance.  Non — nisi  te  adjuvante,  Only  with  thy 
assistance,  or  not  without  thv  assistance.  Te  nan  adjuvante.  Without  thy  as- 
sistance*.   Cf.  §  274,  R.  5,  (c.) 

Remark  1.  This  construction  is  an  abridged  form  of  expression, 
equivalent  to  a  dependent  clause  connected  by  quum,  si,  etsi,  quam- 
quani,  quamvis,  etc. 

Thus,  for  Tarquinlo  regnante,  the  expression  dum  Tarquinius  regnabat  might 
be  used;  ioT  hac  oratione  habitd  ; — quum  hanc  ordtidnem  hahuisset,  or  quum  hoc 
oratio  hdblta  esset, — concilium  dimisit.  The  ablative  absolute  may  always  be 
resolved  into  a  proposition,  b}'  making  the  noun  Or  pronoun  the  subject,  and 
the  participle  the  predicate. 

Rem.  2.  This  construction  is  common  only  with  present  and  per- 
fect participles.  Instances  of  its  use  with  participles'  in  7'us  and  dus 
are  comparatively  rare  ;  as, 

Csesare  ventiiro,  Phosphdre,  redde  diem.  Mart.  Irruptiiris  tarn  infestis  na- 
tionibus.  Liv.  Quum  concio  plausum,  meo  nomine  recitando,  dedisset, — when  my 
name  was  pronounced.  Cic.  Quum  immolanda  Iphigeniii  ti-istis  Ccdchas  esset. 
Id.  Quif  tst  inim,  qui,  tmllis  officii  prajceptis  tradendis,  philosdphum  se  audeat 
dicere — without  propounding  any  rules  of  duty.  Cic.  Cf.  §  274,  R.  5,  (c.)  and 
R.  9. 

Rem.  3.  (a.)  A  noun  is  put  in  the  ablative  absolute,  only  when  it 
denotes  a  different  person  or  thing  from  any  in  the  leading  clause. 
Cf.  §  274,  3,  («.) 

(6.)  Yet  a  few  examples  occur  of  a  deviation  from  this  principle,  especially 
with  a  substantive  pronoun  referring  to  some  word  in  the  leading  clause;  as, 
Se  audiente,  scrlbit  ThUcydides.  Cic.  Legio  ex  castris  Varronis,  adstante  ei  iii- 
spectante  ipso,  signa  susiUlit.  Cses.  Me  dQce,  ad  hunc  voti  flnem,  me  milite, 
veni.  Ovid.  So  M.  Porcius  Cdto,  vivo  qudque  Scipione,  allatrare  ejus  magnitudi- 
nem  sOlitus  erat.  Liv.  ' 

Note  2.  Two  participles  must  not  be  put  together  in  the  ablative  absolute 
agreeing  with  the  same  noun.  Thus,  we  may  say  Porcia  scepe  mar'ttum  cogi- 
tantem  tnvenerat,  but  not,  Porcia  marito  cogitante  inveuto. 

Note  3  Instead  of  the  ablative  absolute  denoting  a  cause,  an  accusative 
witli  ob  or  propter  occurs  in  Livy  and  in  later  writers ;  as,  Cdnopum  conduKre 
Sjjartdni,  ob  sepultura  illic  rectorem  nan's  Canopmn.  Tac.  Decemviri  librot. 
Sibylllnos  inspicere  jussi  sunt  propter  teriltos  homines  novis  pivdigiis.  Liv. 

Rem.  4.  The  ablative  absolute  serves  to  mark  the  time  of  an  ac- 
tion, by  reference  to  that  of  another  action.  If  the  present  particii)!c 
is  used,  the  time  of  the  action  expressed  by  the  participle,  is  the  saiuc 
as  that  of  the  principal  verb.  The  perfect  participle  and  the  future 
in  7-M.S-,  denote  respectively  an  action  as  prior  or  subsequent  to  that 
expressed  by  the  principal  verb. 

Thus  in  the  preceding  examples — Pythdadi-as,  Tarqninio  regnante,  in  Mliam 
vfnit,  I'vtliagoras  came  into  Italy  during  the  reign  of  Tarquinius.  Galli,  re  ccg- 
nJta,  obsidionei^  relinquunl.  The  Gauls,  having  learned  the  fact,  abatidon  the 
BJege. .  So,  Bex  dpum  non  nisi  migriitiiro  examine  fdras  procedit,  Th»  king-beo 
doe.s  n<  t  go  abroad,  except  when  a  cwarm  it  about  to  emigrate.  Plin. 


260  SYNTAX. ABLATIVE    ABSOLUTE.  §  257 

Note  4.  Non  prius  guam,  non  nisi,  ut,  vHut,  and  tamguam,  are  sometimes 
joined  with  the  participle;  as.  Tiberitis excessum  Atigusti  non  prir,s  ixUnm  frcit^ 
quam  Agiij^pd  juvene  inierempto,  —not  until.  Suet.  Galli  Mi,  ut  exploraia  vie-- 
tm-id,  ad  castra  Romanorum  pergunt.  Caes.  Antiochus,  tamquam  non  transitirit 
in  Asiam  Romanis,  etc.  Liv. 

Rem.  5.  (a.)  The  construction  of  the  ablative  absolute  with  the 
perfect  passive  participle,  arises  frequently  from  the  want  of  a  par- 
ticiple of  that  tense  in  the  active  voice. 

Thus,  for  Cifisar,  having  sent  foi-ward  the  cavalry,  was  following  with  all  hia 
forces,'  we  find,  '  desar,  equltatu  prajmisso,  siibsequebatur  omnibus  copiis.' 

(b.)  As  the  perfect  participle  in  Latin  maybe  used  for  both  the  pei-fect 
active  and  the  perfect  passive  participles  in  Englishj  its  meaning  can,  in  many 
instances,  be  determined  only  by  the  connection,  since  the  agent  with  a  or  ab 
is  senerally  not  expressed  w'ith  "this  participle  in  the  ablative  absolute,  as  it  13 
wi?h  other  parts  of  the  passive  voice.  Thus,  Ccesar,  his  dictis,  lOiuilium  dlmlgit, 
miffht  be  rendered,  '  C^sar,  havi7ig  said  thin,  or  this  having  been  said  (by  some 
other  person),  dismissed  the  assembly.' 

(c)  As  the  perfect  participles  of  deponent  verbs  correspond  to  perfect  active 
participles  in  English,  no  such  necessity  exists  for  the  use  of  the  ablative  ;\h- 
solnte  with  them;  as,  Ccesar,  hsec  lixntna,  conalium  dlinlsit.  In  the  following 
example,  both  constructions  are  united:  Mque....agros  Remorum  depopiUfiti, 
omnibus  r'lcis,  cedificiisijue  incensis.  Ca;s. 

Rem.  6.  The  perfect  participles  of  neuter  deponent  verbs,  and  some  also  of 
active  deponents,  which  admit  of  both  aii  active  and  a  passive  sense,  are  used 
in  the  ablative  absolute ;  as,  Ortd  luce.  Cffis.  Vel  exstincto  vel  elapso  ammo, 
mdlum  resldere  sensum.  Cic.  Tarn  multis  gloriam  ejus  adeptis.  Plin.  Literal 
ad  exercitus,  tamquam  adepto  princlpatu,  misit.  Tac. 

RE:\r.  7.  (a.)  As  the  verb  sum  has  no  present  participle,  two 
nouns,  or  a  noun  and  an  adjective,  which  might  be  the  suLject  and 
predicate  of  a  dependent  clause,  are  put  in  the  ablative  absolute 
without  a  participle ;  as, 

Quid,  adolescentiilo  duce,  effich-e  possent,  WTiat  they  could  do  under  the 
guidance  of  a  youth.  Cais.  Me  suasore  atque  impulsore,  hoc  factum,  By  my 
advice  and  instigation.  Plant.  Hannibale  vivo,  While  Hannibal  was  living.  Nop. 
InrltCi  Minerva,  in  opposition  to  one's  genius.  Cic.  Ccelo  sereno,  when  the 
■weather  is  clear.  Virg.  Me  ignaro,  without  my  knowledge.  Cic.  With  names 
of  office,  the  concrete  noun  is  commonly  used  in  the  ablative  absolute,  rather 
than  the  con-esponding  abstract  with  in  to  denote  the  time  of  an  event;  as, 
Romain  vmit  Mario  consiile.  He  came  to  Rome  in  the  consulship  of  Marius.  Cio. 

(b.)  The  nouns  so  used  as  predicates  are  by  some  grammarians  considered 
as  supplying  the  place  of  participles  by  expressing  in  themselves  the  action  of 
a  verb.  "  Su'ch  are  dux,  cdmes,  adjUtor  and  adjutnx,  auctm;  testis,  judex,  infer- 
pres,  maqister  and  mugistra,  pirceceptor  and  prcscepti-ix ;  as,  diice  natura,  in  the 
sense  ofdficente  ndturd,  under  the  guidance  of  nature;  judice  Polybio,  according 
to  the  judgment  of  Polybius. 

Rem.  8.  A  clai!se  sometimes  supplies  the  place  of  the  noun ;  as_,  Nmuhitn 
comperto  quam  in  regionem  venisset  rex.  Liv.  Audita  veiiisse  nuncium.  Tac. 
Vale  dicto.  Ovid.  This  construction,  however,  is  confined  to  a  fe\y  participles; 
as,  audlto,  cogniio,  comperto,  explorato,  despHrato,  nunciato,  dicto,  cdicto.  But  the 
place  of  such  participle  is  sometimes  supplied  by  a  neuter  adjective  in  the  ab- 
lative: as,  Incerto  prm  tenebris  quid  petereni.  Liv.  Cf.  R.  V,  (a.)  Hand  cuiquam 
dubio  quin  hostium  essent.  Id.     Juxta  perlculoso  vera  an  ficta  promeret.  Tac. 

Rem.  9.  (1.)  The  noun  in  the  ablative,  like  the  subject  noniWiative,  is  some- 
times wanting;  (a)  when  it  is  contained  in  a  preceding  clause;  as,  Alticus  Servi- 
lia7n,  Bruti  ni.Hrem,  non  minus  post  mortem  ejus,  quam  flurente,  cdluil,  soil,  eo, 


§  2.58.        SYNTAX. CONNECTION  OF  TENSES-  261 

i.  e  Brtito.  Nep.  (6)  When  it  is  the  general  word  for  person  or  pers,  jns  fol- 
lowed by  a  descriptive  relative  clause;  as,  Ilannibal  Iberum  cdj}ias  irdjrcit, 
prsemissis,  qui  Alpkim  transitus  specular entur.  Liv.  (c)  When  the  participle  in 
the  neuter  singular  corresponds  to  the  impersonal  construction  of  neuter  verbs 
in  the  passive  voice;  as,  In  amnis  t]-ans(/ressu,  miiltum  certato,  Bardemnes  rlcit. 
Tac.  Mihi,  en-fito,  mdla  venia,  recte  facto,  exi(jua  laus  proponltur.  Cic.  Quinn, 
nondum  pcdam  facto,  v'lvi  niortuique  prdmiscue  complomrcntur.  Liv.  Nam  jam 
cetdte  ea  sum,  ul  mm  skt,  peccato,  mi  Kjnosci  cequuni ;  i.  e.  si  peccatum  fuerii.  I'er. 
.Cf.  \  274,,R.  5,  {b.) 

(2.)  So  in  descriptions  of  the  weather;  as,  Tranqtdllo,  scil.  mdri,  the  sea 
being  tranquil.  Liv.  Serena,  scil.  cxlo,  the  sky  being  clear.  Id.  Aranei  sereno 
texunt,  nubilo  texunt, — in  clear  and  in  cloudy  weather.  Plin.  Substantives 
wl ten  used  thus  are  to  be  considered  as  ablatives  of  time;  as,  ComUiis,  ludis, 
Circenstbas.  Suetonius  has  used  proscriptione  in  the  sense  of  '  during  the  pro- 
scription.'    So  pace  et  Principe.  Tac.     Impcrio  pupiili  Romdni.  Cces. 

Rem.  10.  This  ablative  is  sometimes  connected  to  the  preceding  clause  by  a 
conjunction;  as,  C'cesar,  quamquam  obsidiGne  J/«ssjZiCB  retardante,  brcvi  tdmen 
omnia  silbryit.  Suet.  Decemviri  non  ante,  quam  perlatis  legibus,  dcposituros  imi- 
periuin  esse-  aiCbant.  Liv. 

Rem.  11.  A  predicate  ablative  is  sometimes  added  to  passive  participles  of 
namtny,  chuosi7i(j,  etc.  §  210,  (3.);  as,  Basdrubdle  imperatore  suffecto.    Liv. 

CONNECTION    OF    TENSES.       • 

§  9«58.  Tenses,  in  regard  to  their  connection,  are  divided 
into  two  classes — principal  and  historical. 

A.  The  principal  tenses  are,  the  present,  the  perfect  definite, 
and  the  two  futures. 

B.  The  historical,  which  are  likewise  called  the  pr-eterite 
tenses  (§  145,  N.  2.),  are  the  imperfect,  the  historical  perfect, 
and  the  pluperfect. 

I.  In  the  connection  of  leadin;;  and  dependent  clauses,  only 
tenses  of"  the  same  class  can,  in  general,  be  united  with  each  other. 
Hence : — 

1.  A  principal  tense  is  followed  by  the  present  and  perfect  defi- 
nite, and  by  the  periphrastic  fonn  with  i<ini.     And  : — 

2.  A  preterite  tense  is  followed  by  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect, 
and  by  the  periphrastic  form  with  essem. 

Note.  The  periphrastic  fonns  in  each  class  supply  the  want  of  subjorotiva 
futures  in  the  regular  conjugation. 

The  following  examples  will  illustrate  the  preceding  rules: — 
{a.)  In  the  first  class.     Scio  quid  agas.     Scio  quid  ei/eris.     Scio  quid  acU'uut 
tii. — Awiv.'i  quid  dr/as,  I  have  heard  what  you  are  iloing.     Audln  quid  cr/ei  is 
Audlci  quid  (icturns  sis. — Audidm  quid  ugas,  etc. — Audicero  quid  dgas,  etc. 

(b.)  In  the  second  class.  Sciebnm  quid  dge res.  Scifbnm  quid  ec/isses.  Scicbam 
quid  actu7-us  issos. — Audlvi  quid  ayerHs,  I  heard  what  you  were  doing.  Audivi 
quid  efji.<ses.     Audivi  quid  aclurus  esses. — Audiveram  quid  dqeres,  etc. 

The  following  may  serve  as  additional  examples  in  the  first  class;  viz.  of  principal 
tinsrs  depending  on, 

(1.)  Thel'HKsKNT;  as,  Non  sum  ita  hebes,  ut  /.stoc  dicam.  VAc.  Quantum 
ddlorem  acccperim,  lu  exislhndre  potes.  Id.  Nee  dublto  quin  reditus  ejus  reipub- 
lir/e  sdliii  :ri$  futurus  sit.  Id. 


26'?  SYNTAX. CONNECTION    OP    TENSES.  §  258. 

(2  The  Perfect  Definite;  as,  Satis  provisum  est,  ul  ne  quid  uyen  pos- 
eint.  Id.  Quis  musicis,  quis  hide  studio  lUerdrum  se  dedldit,  quin  oianem  illdrum 
artium  vim  comprehenderit.  Id.  BOfectidnes  sOlis  prsedictas  sunt,  qiite,  quanUs, 
quando  futurse  sint.  Id. 

(3.)  The  Futures;  as.  Sic  fdcilUme,  quanta  or dtorum  sit,  semperque  fuerit 
paucitas,  judicabit.  Id.  Ad  quos  dies  rediturus  sim,  scnbam  ad  te.  Id.  Si 
scieris  aspldem  latere  uspiam,  et  velle  dliqucm  imprudeniem  super  earn  assidere, 
cujits  mors  tibi  emdlumentum  factura  sit,  iinprdhe  feceris,  nisi  mouaeris,  ne  assl- 
deat.  Id. 

The  following,  also,  are  additional  examples  in  the  second  class,  viz.  of  prett}  itt  tensti 
depending  on,, 

(1.)  The  Imperfect;  as,  Unum  illud  extimescebam,  ne  qtiid  ttirpiter  (a.c<&- 
Tem,  vel  jam  e&Qcissem.  Clc.  Non  enim  duhitabam,  quin  eas  liberiter '[ecturas 
esses.  Id. 

(2.)  The  Historical  Perfect;  as,  Veiii  in  ejus  villam  ut  libros  inde  prome- 
rem.  Id.  Hcec  quum  esseiit  nuntiata,  Valerius  classem  exttmplu  ad  ostium  Jiunu- 
nis  duxit.   Liv. 

(3.)  The  Pluperfect;  as,  Pdvor  ceperat  mtlites,  ne  niortiferum  esset  vnl- 
nus.  Liv.  Eyo  ex  ipso  audieram,  quam  a  te  llbei-ulUer  esset  tractatus.  Cic.  Nott 
adds  mihi  constiterat,  cm?«  ullqudne  dnimi  mei  mdlestid,  an  potius  llbenter  te  Athe- 
rds  vIwQi  as  essem.  Id. 

Remark  1.  (a.)  When  the  present  is  used  in  nan-ation  for  the  historical 
perfect,  it  may,  like  the  latter,  be  followed  by  the  imperfect ;  as,  Legdtos  mit- 
hint,  ut  imcevi  impeti-arent.  Cces. 

(b.)  The  present  is  also  sometimes  followed  by  the  perfect  subjunctive  in  its 
historical  sense;  as,  Pandile  nunc  Helicona,  dete,  cantusque  movete,  Qui  bello 
exciti  reyes,  q^ice  quemque  seciltce  Complerint  canipos  acies.  Virg. 

Rem.  2.  The  perfect  definite  is  often  followed  by  the  imperfect,  even  when 
a  present  action  or  state  is  spoken  of,  if  it  is  possible  to  conceive  of  it  in  its  pro- 
grei5S,  and  not  merely  in  its  conclusion  or  result;  and  especially  when  the  agent 
had  an  intention  accompanying  him  from  the  beglnnhig  to  the  end  of  the 
action;  as,  i^t'ci  Aoc,  ut  inteliigi^res,  I  have  done  this  that  you  might _ uider- 
stand;  i.  e.  such  was  my  intention  from  the  beginning.  Sunt  pJiildsdphi  et  fue- 
miit,  qui  omnliio  ntdlam  habere  censerent  humdndrum  rerum  procurationem 
deos.    Cic. 

Rem.  3.  (a.)  The  historical  perfect  is  not  regularly  followed  by  the  perfect 
subjunctive,  :is  the  latter  is  not,  in  general,  used  in  reference  to  past  action  in- 
definite. 

(6.)  These  tenses  are,  however,  sometimes  used  in  connection,  in  the  narra- 
tive of  a  past  event,  especially  in  Livy  and  Cornelius  Nepos;  as.  Factum  est 
ut  pilus  quam  collecjce  Mdtiddes  valuerit.  Nep. 

(c.)  The  imperfect  and  perfect  are  even  found  together  after  the  historical 
perfect,  when  one  action  is  represented  as  permanent  or  repeated,  and  the 
other  simply  as  a  fact;  as,  ^c/eo  «i/iiY  miseriti  sunt,  ut  incursiones  facerent  et 
Veios  in  unimo  habuerint  oppugndre.  Liv. 

{d.)  The  historical  perfect  may  even  be  followed  by  the  present,  when  a 
general  truth  is  to  be  expressed,  and  not  merely  one  which  is  valid  for  the  time 
indicated  by  the  leading  verb;  as,  Antiocho  pdcem  petenii  ad  pviores  conditimes 
nihil  additum,  Afncdno  pradicante,  neque  Eomdnis,  si  vuicantur,  dnimos  vilnui, 
neque,  si  vincant,  secundis  rebus  insolescere.  Just. 

Rem.  4.  (a.)  As  present  infinitives  and  present  participles  depend  for  their 
time  uj)on  the  verbs  with  which  they  are  connected,  they  are  followed  by  such 
lenses  as  those  verbs  may  require;  as,  Apelles  jnctores  qiUique  eos  peccara 
dicebat,  qui  non  sentirent,  qidd  esset  sdtis.  Cic.  Ad  te  scripsi,  te  Uiiter  accusans 
m  to,  quo*]  de  me  ciio  credjdisses.  Id. 


§  259.  SYNTAX. INDICATIVE    K^  OD.  263 

(6.)  In  like  manner  the  tense  of  the  subjunctive  following  the  infii  tive 
future  is  determined  by  the  verb  on  which  such  infinitive  depends;  as,  Sol 
Pkaethonti  J'lho  fucturum  se  esse  dixit  quicquid  optasset.  Cic. 

Re.m.  5.  (a.)  The  perfect  infinitive  follows  the  general  rule,  and  takes  aftej 
it  a  principal  or  a  preterite  tense,  according  as  it  is  used  in  the  definite  or  in 
the  historicar sense;  as,  Arbitramur  nos  ea  prajsUtisse,  qtue  ratio  et  doctrlna 
prjEscripserit.  Cic.  Est  quod  (/audeas  te  in  i^ta  Idea  venisse,  ubi  dliquid  sdpere 
viJerere.  Id. 

(6.)  But  it  may  sometimes  take  a  different  tense,  according  to  Rem.  2;  as, 
Ita  mild  vldeor  et  esse  Deos,  et  quales  essent  satis  ostendisse.  Cic. 

II.  Tenses  belonging  to  diflferent  classes  may  be  made  dependent 
on  each  other,  when  the  sense  requires  it. 

(a.)  Hence  a  present  or  perfect  definite  may  follow  a  preterite,  when  the  re- 
sult of  a  past  action  extends io  the  present  time;  as,  Ardebat  auiem  Hortemius 
cfipidHOte  d'lcendi  sic,  ut  in  mdlo  umquam  jiagrantius  stitdium  vldC-rim;  i.  e.  that 
up  to  this  time  I  have  never  seen.  Cic.  And,  on  the  other  hand,  a  preterite 
may  follow  a  present  to  expi'ess  a  continuing  action  in  the  past;  as,  Scitote 
pppidum  esse  in  Sicilia  nullum,  quo  in  opjndo  non  isti  delecta  viulier  ad  libidinem 
csset:  {essct  here  alludes  to  the  whole  period  of  Verres'  prtetoi-ship. )  Cic. 

(6.)  But  without  violating  the  rule  which  requires  similar  tenses  to  depend 
upon  each  other,  the  hypothetical  imperfect  subjunctive,  may  be  followed  by 
the  present  or  perfect  subjunctive,  since  the  imperfect  subjunctive  refers  to  the 
present  time ;  as,  Mimordre  possem  quibus  in  locis  viaxlmas  liostium  copias 
pdpulus  Roindnus  parvd  mdnu  fuderit.  Sail.  Possem  here  differs  from  jjossum 
only  by  the  In'pothetical  form  of  the  expression. 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

§  259-  The  indicative  is  used  in  every  proposition  in  which 
the  thing  asserted  is  represented  as  a  reality. 

Note.  Hence  it  is  used  even  in  the  expression  of  conditions  and  suppositions 
with  si,  7iisi,  etsi,  and  etiamsi,  when  the  writer,  without  intimating  his  own 
opinion,  supposes  a  thing  as  actual,  or,  with  nisi,  makes  an  exception,  which, 
only  for  the  sake  of  the  inference,  he  regards  as  actual;  as.  Mors  a%U  plane 
negUgendn  est,  si  omnino  exstinguit  dniinum,  aut  etiam  optanda,  si  dliquo  eum 
dCiducit,  fili  sit  faturus  ceternus.  Cic.  Adhuc  certe,  nisi  ego  insanio,  stulte  omnia 
el  imaute  flunt.  Id. — It  is  likewise  used  in  interrogations. 

IvEMARK  1.  The  several  tenses  have  already  been  defined,  and  their  usual  significations 
have  been  given  in  the  paradigms.  They  are,  however,  sometimes  otherwLse  rendered, 
one  tense  being  apparently  used  with  the  meaning  of  another,  either  in  the  same  or  iu  a 
different  mood.     Thus, 

(1.)  (o.)  The  present  is  often  used  for  the  historical  perfect  in  narration,  see 
^  1  to,  I.  3. — (6.)  It  is  sometimes  used  also  for  the  future  to  denote  the  certamty 
of  an  event,  or  to  indicate  passionate  emotion.  SOj  also,  when  the  leading  sen- 
tence contains  the  present  imperative,  si  is  often  joined  with  the  present  m- 
stead  of  the  future;  as,  defenue  si  pdtes. — (c.)  The  present  is  also  used  for  the 
imperfect  or  perfect,  when  it  is  joined  with  dum  '  while ' ;  as,'  Bum  ego  in  Sid- 
lid  sum,  mdla  stdtua  dejecta  est.  Cic.  It  is  even  so  used  by  Livy  in  transitions 
frcni  one  event  to  another;  as,  Dum  in  Asid  bellum  gOritur,  ne  in  jElOlis  quidem 
quietiE  res  fuerant.  But  the  preterites  are  sometimes  used  with  dum  '  while ' ; 
and  dum  '  as  long  as '  is  regularly  joined  with  the  imperfect. 

(2.)  («.)  The  perfect,  in  its  proper  signification,  i.  e.  as  a  perfect  definite, 
denotes  an  act  or  state  terminated  at  the  present  time.  Thus  Horace,  at  the 
•jlose  of  a  work,  says,  Exegi  mdnumentum  cere  perennius;  and  Ovid,  in  hke  cir- 
camstances,  Jamque  6pus  exegi.    So,  also,  Panthus  in  Virgil,  in  order  to  de- 


2G4  SYNTAX. INDICATIVE    MOOD.  §  2r)i) 

note  the  utter  rmn  of  Troy,  exclaims,  Fnimus  Troes,  ftiit  Ilium  i.  e.  we  are  nc 
longer  Trojans,  Ilium  is  no  more. — (6.)  The  j)eri'ect  indefinite  c  f  historical  per- 
fect is  used  in  relating  past  events,  when  no  reference  is  to  be  made  to  the 
time  of  other  events;  as,  Ccesar  RfMconem  transiit,  C£Esar  crossed  the  Rubicon, 
(c.)  As  in  the  epistolary  style  the  imperfect  is  used  instead  of  the  pi-esent, 
when  an  incomplete  action  is  spoken  of  ,'  145,  II.  3),  so  the  historical  perfect 
is  in  like  circumstances  emplo3'ed  instead  of  the  present,  when  speaking  of  a 
completed  action.  With  both  the  imperfect  and  perfect,  when  so  used,  however, 
the  adverbs  ntmc  nnd  etiamnunc  may  be  used  instead  of  tunc  and  ctiamtum. 

(d.)  The  historical  perfect  is  sometimes  used  for  the  pluperfect  iu  naiTation; 
as,  Sed  jX'Stqunm  aspexi,  illico  cognmi,  But  after  I  (had)  looked  at  it,  I  recog- 
nized it  immediately.  Ter. — This  is  the  usual  construction  after  postquam  cr 
posieaquam,  ubi,  uhi  prlmiim,  ut,  ut  prlmum^  quum  primuin^  si?nul,  srmul  ut,  slmul 
ac,  or  si  mill  atque,  all  of  which  have  the  signification  of  '  as  soon  as,'  and  some- 
times after  priusquam.  But  when  several  comlitions  are  to  be  expressed  in  past 
time,  the  pluperfect  is  retained  after  these  p.articles ;  as.  Idem  simulac  se  remis- 
erat,  neque,  causa  suberat,  qudre  dnlmi  laboreiii  perfcrret,  luxuriosus  repeiicbdtur. 
Nep.  So,  also,  postquam  is  joined  with  the  pluperfect,  when  a  definite  time 
intervenes  between  events,  so  that  there  is  no  connection  between  them;  as, 
Hannibal  anno  teriio,  postquam  ddmo  profiigerat,  cum  qninque  naabus  Africam 
accessit.  Id. — In  a  very  few  passages  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctive 
are  joined  v;\\.\\  postquam. 

(3.)  The  pluperfect  sometimes  occurs,  where  in  English  we  use  the  historical 
perfect;  as,  Dixerat,  et  spissis  noctis  se  condidit  umbris,  She  (had)  said,  and  hid 
herself  in  the  thick  shades  of  night.  Virg.  Sometimes,  also,  it  is  used  for  the 
historical  perfect  to  express  the  rapidity  with  which  events  succeed  each  other; 
so,  also,  for  the  imperfect,  to  denote  what  had  been  and  still  was. 

(4.)  The  future  indicative  is  sometimes  used  for  the  imperative;  as,  VaUbis, 
Farewell.  Cic.   And: — 

(5.1  The  future  perfect  for  the  future;  as.  Alio  Idco  de  oratm-um  animo  et  in- 
p'lriis  videro,  I  shaU  see  (have  seen)....  Cic.  This  use  seems  to  result  from 
viewing  a  future  action  as  if  already  done,  and  intimates  the  rapidity  with 
which  it  will  be  completed. 

Rem.  2.  When  a  future  action  is  spoken  of  either  in  the  future,  or  in  the  im- 
perative, or  the  subjunctive  used  imperatively,  and  another  future  action  is 
connected  with  it,  the  latter  is  expressed  by  the  future  tense,  if  the  actions 
relate  to  the  same  time;  as,  Ndtura?n  si  siqwemnr  ducem,  numqiiam  aberrabi- 
mus.  Cic;  but  by  the  future  perfect,  if  the  one  must  be  completed  before  the- 
other  is  performed ;  as,  De  Carthdyine  vereri  non  ante  desinam,  quam  illam  ex- 
cisam  esse  cognovero.  Cic.  In  English  the  present  is  often  used  instead  of  the 
future  perfect;  as,  Fdciam  si  potero,  I  will  do  it,  if  I  can.  Ut  sementem  feceris, 
Ua  metes,  As  you  sow,  so  yoir  will  reap.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  In  expressions  denoting  the  propriety,  practicability  or"  advantage 
of  an  action  not  perfomied,  the  indicative  of  the  preterites  (§  145,  N.  2.)  is  used, 
where  the  English  idiom  would  have  led  us  to  expect  the  imperfect  or  pluper- 
fect subjunctive. 

(a.)  This  construction  occurs  with  the  verbs  oportet,  necesse  est,  dcbeo,  conve- 
nit,  possum,  dUcet,  licet,  reor,  puio ;  and  with  par,  fas,  cqpia,  oiquum,  justum, 
consentdneum,  satis,  sdtius,  ceguius,  melius,  uiilius,  optdbilius,  and  optimum — est, 
h-at,  etc. 

(6.)  In  this  connection  the  imperfect  indicative  expresses  things  which  are 
nat,  butthe  time  for  which  is  not  yet  past;  the  historical  perfect  and  the 
pluperfect  indicative,  things  which  have  not  been,  but  the  time  for  which  is 
past;  as.  Ad  mortem  te  duct  jam  pridem  oportebat,  i.  e.  thy  execution  was 
necessary  and  is  still  so;  hence  it  ought  to  take  place.  Cic. — Lonqe  iitllius  fuit 
a/iyustias  dditus  occiipure,  It  would  have  been  much  better  to  occup}'  the  pass. 
Curt.  Cdtillna  erupii  e  seiuUic  trmmphans  ffatuiio,  quem  omnino  v'wum  illinc  exire 
non  6portu6rat.  Cic. 


§  2C0.  SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOL  265 

_  (c.)  In  both  the  periphrastic  conjugation^,  also,  the  preterites  of  hs  inflica^ 
tive  have  frequently  the  meaning  of  the  subjunctive;  as.  Tarn  b6n\  coiistmiter 
tMW(/()*tenenda  fuit, — ought  to  have  been  kept.  Ovid.  This  is  more  common  iu 
n3'pothetical  sentences  than  in  such  as  are  independent. 

(d.)  The  indicative  in  such  connections  is  retained,  even  when  a  hvpotheti 
sal  clause  with  the  imperfect  or  pluperfect  subjunctive  is  added,  and  it  is  here 
in  particular  that  the  indicative  preterites  of  the  pei-iphrastic  conjugations  are 
employed ;  as,  Qiice  si  du//ia  aiUprdcul  essent,  (mnen  omnes  bOnos  re'ipuMUce  con- 
wUere  decebat.  Sail.  Quodsi  On.  Pompeius  privdtus  esset  hoc  tempore,  ICiinen 
erat  raittendus.  Cic.—Deleri  totus  exei-citus  potuit,  si  ffigientes  persecuti  victores 
essent.  Liy.  Qitns  nisi  munum'isissil ,  toi-mentis  etinm  dedendi  fuerunt.  Cic.  Si  te 
turn  invcnissKin,  pfriturus  per  prwcipltin  fui.  Petr.  But  the  subjunctive  also  is 
admissible  in  such  cases  in  the  periphrastic  conjugations. 

Rem.  4.  (1.)  The  preterites  of  the  indicative  are  often  used  for  the  pluper- 
fect subjunctive,  in  the  conclusion  of  a  conditional  clause,  in  order  to  render  a 
discriptiou  niore  animated.     They  are  so  used, 

{s~)  When  the  inference  has  already  partly  come  to  pass,  and  would  have 
been  completely  realized,  if  something  else  had  or  had  not  occuired,  whence 
the  adverb  jam  is  frequently  added ;  as,  Jam  fames  quam  pestilenlia  tristior 
erat;  ni  nnnonce  font  suhventum, — would  have  been  worse.  Liv.  The  same  is 
exijresseil  by  the  verb  c<epi  instead  of  Jam ;  as,  Britanni  circimilre  tercja  vincen- 
tium  cfrpCrant,  ni,  etc.  Tac.  And  without  jnw ;  EffUjies  Fisonis  traxerant  in 
Genwnias  ac  divellebant  (would  have  entirely  destroyed  them)  ni,  etc.  Id. 

(6.)  The  perfect  and  pluperfect  are  likewise  used  in  this  sense,  and  a  thing 
which  was  never  accomplished  is  thus,  in  a  lively  manner,  described  as  com- 
pleted; as,  Et  peractiim  erat  bdlum  sine  sanyidne,  si  Pom2)dum  oppj-ijnei'e 
Brundisii  (Cx^iir)  potuissei.  Hor. — The  imperfect  indicative  is  rarely  used, 
also,  for  the  imperfect  subjunctive,  when  this  tense  is  found  in  the  hypotheti- 
cal clause;  as,  Stulium  frat  mdnere,  nisi  feref.  Quint.— Sometimes,  also,  the 
pi-Btei-ites  of  the  indicative  are  thus  used  in  the  condition^  as.  At  fuerat  melius 
si  te  puer  iste  tenebat.  Ovid.    See  §  261,  E.  1. 

(2.)  '  I  ought '  or  '  I  should,'  is  expressed  by  the  indicative  of  debeo,  and  pos- 
stwi  IS  in  like  manner  often  used  for  possem;  as.  Possum  persequi  multa  oblectd- 
meuta  renim  rusticdnm,  sed,  etc.,  I  might  speak  of  the  many  pleasures  of  hus- 
bandry, but,  etc. ;  and  it  is  usual  in  like  manner  to  say,  dijfidle  est,  longum  est, 
infinitum  est,  e.  g.  narrdre,  etc.,  for,  '  it  would  be  difficult,'  '  it  would  lead  too 
far,'  '  there  would  be  no  end,'  etc. 

(3.)  The  indicative  is  used  in  like  manner  after  many  general  and  relative 
expressions,  especially  after  the  pronouns  and  relative  adverbs  which  are 
either  doubled  or  have  the  suffix  cunique;  as,  quisfjuis,  qnotgiwt,  ouicumque, 
itul,  utcwnqae,  etc.,  see  §§  139  5,  (.3.)  and  191,1.  R.  1,(6.);  as,  Quidquid  id  est, 
timeo  Biinaos  et  dona  ferentes.  Virg.  Quern  sors  cumque  ddbit,  lucro  appone.  Hor. 
Sed  quoqiu)  raOdo  sese  illiid  habet.  But  however  that  mav  be.  Cic— In  like  man- 
ner sentences  connected  by  sive—slve  commonly  have  the  verb  in  the  indica- 
tive, unless  there  is  a  special  reason  for  usmg  the  subjunctive;  as,  Sive  verum 
est,  slve  Julsum,  mild  quidem  ita  renuncidtum  est.  Later  writers  however  use 
the  subjunctive  both  with  general  relatives,  etc.,  and  with  sire— sine. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 

§  360-  The  subjunctive  mood  is  used  to  express  an  action 
or  state  simply  as  conceived  by  the  mind. 

Note.   The  subjunctive  character  of  a  proposition  depends,  not  upon  its  sub- 
stance, but  upon  Its  form.     '  I  believe,'  '  I  suppose,'  are  only  conceptions,  but 
my  believni-  and  supposing  are  stated  as  facts,  and,  of  course,  are  expressed 
by  means  of  the   mdicative.     When,  on  the  other  hand,  I  say,  '  I  should  b«- 
38 


266  SYNTAX. — SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD.  §3f6v5 

lieve,'  '  I  should  suppose,' the  acts  of  believing  and  supposing  are  repiesented 
not  as  facts,  but  as  mere  conceptions.  Hence  the  verb  that  expresses  the  pur- 
pose or  intention  for  which  another  act  is  performed,  is  put  in  the  subjunctive, 
since  it  expresses  only  a  conception;  as,  Edo  tit  vivam,  I  eat  that  I  may  live. 
Tliis  mood  takes  its  name  from  its  behig  commonly  used  in  subjoined  or  de- 
pendent clauses  attached  to  ^he  main  clause  of  a  sentence  by  a  subordinate 
connective.  In  some  cases,  however,  it  is  found  in  independent  clauses,  or  in 
such,  at  least,  as  have  no  obvious  dependence. 

I.  The  subjunctive,  in  some  of  its  connections,  is  to  be  translated 
by  the  indicative,  particularly  in  indirect  questions,  in  clauses  expres- 
sing a  result,  and  after  adverbs  of  time;  as, 

Rd;/as  me  quid  tristis  sim, — why  1  am  sad.  Tac.  Stelldrum  tanta  est  multi- 
Inch,  nt  numoyrari  non  possint, — that  they  cannot  be  counted.  Quum  Qesar  esset 
in  Gallia,  When  Ca3sar  was  in  Gaul.  Ctes. 

II.  The  subjunctive  is  used  to  express  what  is  contingent  or  hy- 
pothetical, including  possibility,  power,  liberty,  will,  duty,  and  desire. 

Hemark  1.  The  tenses  of  the  subjunctive,  thus  used,  have  the  significations  which 
have  been  given  in  the  paradigms,  and  are,  in  general,  not  limited,  in  regard  to  time, 
like  the  corresponding  tenses  of  the  indicatiye.     Thus,. 

(1.)  The  present  may  refer  either  to  present  or  future  time ;  as,  Mediocribus 
et  quJs  ignoscas  vitiis  teneor,  I  am  subject  to  moderate  faults,  and  such  as  you 
may  excuse.  Hor.  Orat  a  Gesare  ul  det  slbi  veniam,  He  begs  of  Ccesar  that  he 
would  give  him  leave.  Caes. 

(2.)  The  imperfect  may  relate  either  to  past,  present,  or  future  time;  as, 
Si  f('<«-  fuissent  %d  caderem.  If  it  iiad  been  vny  fate  that  I  should  faU.  Virg 
Si  pnssem,  sdnior  essem,  I  would  be  wnser,  if  I  could.  Ovid.  Ceteros  rapcrenf 
et  prosternrrem,  The  rest  I  would  seize  and  prostrate.  Ter. 

(.3.)  The  perfect  subjunctive  has  always  a  reference  to  present  time,  audi., 
equivalent  to  the  indicative  present  or  perfect  definite;  as,  Errarim  ybz-^wss^i 
Perhaps  I  may  have  erred.  Plin. — When  it  has  a  futiire  signification  it  is  noi 
to  be  accounted  a  perfect,  but  the  subjunctive  of  the  future  perfect.  See  Rem- 
4  and  7,  (1.)     But  compare  §  258,  R.  1,  {b.)  and  R.  3,  (6.) 

(4.)  Tlie  pluperfect  subjunctive  relates  to  past  time,  expressing  a  contin- 
gency, whicli  is  usually  future  with  respect  to  some  past  time  mentioned  ii 
connection  with  it;  asj  Id  respotiderimt  se  faciuros  esse,  quum  ille  ve7iU)  Aq-iilont 
venisset  Lemnum....  when  he  should  have  come....  Nep. 

Rem.  2.    The  imperfects  vellem,  nollem,  and  iwllem,  in  the  first  person,  ex- 

Fress  a  wish,  the  non-reality  and  impossibility  of  which  are  known;  as,  vellem, 
should  have  wished. — In  the  second  person,  where  it  implies  an  indefinite 
pei-son,  and  also  in  the  third  when  the  subject  is  an  indefinite  person,  tlie  im- 
perfect STibjunctive  is  used  in  the  sense  of  the  pluperfect,  and  the  condition  is 
to  be  supplied  by  the  mind.  This  is  the  case  especially  witn  the  verbs,  cfico, 
puto,  nrbitror,  credo;  also  with  video,  cerno,  and  dzscerno ;  as,  Miestlque  (crede- 
res  victos)  redeunt  in  castra, — one  might  have  thought  that  they  were  defeated. 
Liv.  Pecuniae  an  farruB  minus  p'lrceret,  hand  Jdcile  discerneres.  Sail.  Qui 
videret  eqimm  Trojdnum  introductum,  vrbem  captain  diceret.  Cic.  Quis  umquam 
crederet?  Id.  Quis  piitaret?  Id. — The  imperfe£t  subjunctive  is  frequently 
used,  also,  for  the  pluperfect  in  interrogative  expressions ;  as,  Socrates  quum 
rogaretur  cUjCdem,  se  esse  diceret,  Mimddnum,  inquit.  Id.  Quod  si  (}uis  deus  dice- 
ret,  numquam  putarem  me  in  Academid  tamquam  phildsdphum  dispuidtUrum,  If 
any  god  had  said.. ..I  never  should  have  supposed.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  The  subjunctive  in  all  its  tenses  may  denote  a  supposition  oi 
concession;  as,  Vendat  icdes  vir  bonus.  Suppose  an  honest  man  is  seUing  a 
house.    Cic.     Dixerit   Jipicurus,    Grant   that  Epicurus   could  have   said.   Id. 

I  iium  anecps  pugnm  fuirat  fortUnn. — Fuisset,  Grant  that  it  might  have  been. 

Virg.     Mains  avis  Cn.  Carbo /nil.     Vxii-xit  dliis,  He  may  have  been  to  othera 

Cic. — This  concessive  subjunctive  is  equivalent  to  etto  ut. 


§  260.  SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD.  267 

Resi  4.   The  present  and  perfect  subjunctive  are  used  in  ,n  epeidentpro. 


concedat,  or  coiicesserit,  No  one  will  ^-aut  3-<m  that.  Hoc  sine  uUCi  didnlCitamt 
confinnaverim,  eldqmntiam  rem  esse,  omnium  dijficilllmam,  This  I  will  unhesi- 
tatingly affirm.  Cic.  Nil  ego  contulGrim  jucundo  sdnus  dmico.  Hor.  The  form 
which  is  Ciilled  the  perfect  subjunctive,  when  thus  used  for  the  future,  ^ceras 
to  be  rather  the  subjunctive  of  the  future  perfect:  see  Rem.  7,  (1.)  Vdlu  and 
its  compounds  are  often  so  used  in  the  present;  as,  Velim  ohvias  mild  litems 
crehrn  viiitns,  I  wish  that  you  would  frequently  send,  etc.  Cic.  The  perfect 
>ut)junctive  is  also  rarely  used  in  the  sense  of  a  softened  perfect  indicative ;  as, 
Fordtan  temere  fecerim,  I  may  have  acted  inconsiderately. 

Rkm.  5.  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  all  its  tenses,  in  independent  sentences, 
to  express  a  doubtful  question  implying  a  negative  answer;  as.  Quo  e<iiii? 
Wbither  shall  1  goV  Quoh-emf  AVhither  should  I  go?  Quo  Iverivif  Whither 
v\-as  I  to  luive  gone ?  Quolvissemf  Whither  should  I  have  gone?  The  answer 
unphed  in  all  these  cases  is,  'nowhere.'  So,  Quis  diibltet  t/uin  in  rirtute  dial  ice 
sintf  Who  can  doubt  that  riches  consist  in  virtue?  Cic.  Qiiisquam  numen  JunOr 
nis  adOret  pnvterea  ?  Virg.  Quidni,  inquit,  meminerim  ?  Cic.  Quis  vellet  tanti 
nuntius  esse  mdli'^  Ovid. 

Rem.  6.  The  present  subjunctive  is  often  used  to  express  a  -wish, 
an  exhortation,  asseveration,  request,  command,  or  permission ;  as, 

Moriar,  si,  etc.  May  I  die,  if,  etc.  Cic.  Peream,  si  non,  etc.  May  I  perish,  if, 
etc.  Ovid.  So,  jVe  sim  salvus.  Cic.  In  media  arma  niamus.  Let  us  rush.... 
Virg.  Ne  me  attingas,  sceleste  !  Do  not  touch  me,  villain  1  Ter.  Faciat  quod 
taljet,  Let  him  do  what  he  pleases.  Id.  The  pei'fect  is  often  so  used;  as.  Ipse 
viderit,  Let  him  see  to  it  himself.  Cic.  Quam  id  rccte  fdciam,  vTderint  sCquentes. 
Id.  Meminerimus,  eiium  adversus  infimos  jusiUiam  esse  servandam.  Id.  Nihil 
incummddo  vdUtudinis  tuce  ficens.  Id.  Emas,  -non  quod  opus  est,  sed  quod  necesse 
est.  Sen.  Bonis  inipii  ne  plucdre  audeant  deus ;  PUUOnem  audiant.  Cic.  A«/u- 
ram  expellas  Jurcn,  tdmen  usque  recurret.  Hor. 

(a.)  The  examples  show  that  the  present  subjunctive,  in  the  first  person 
shignlar,  is  used  in  asseverations;  hi  the  first  person  plural,  in  requests  and  ex- 
hortations; in  the  second  and  third  persons  of  the  present  and  sometimes  of 
the  perfect,  in  commands  and  permissions,  thus  supplying  the  place  of  the  im- 
perative, especially  when  the  person  is  indefinite. 

(h.)  With  these  subjunctives,  as  with  the  imperative,  the  negative  is  usually 
not  non  but  ne ;  as,  ne  dlcas  ;  ne  dlcat ;  ne  dixeris.  So,  also,  me  fuerit,  for  licet 
ne  fuerit. 

(c.)  The  subjunctive  for  the  imperative  occurs  most  frequently  in  the  third 
person.  In  the  second  person  it  is  used  principally  with  we  ,•  as,' ne  dlcas.  In 
the  latter  case  the  perfect  very  frequently  takes  the  place  of  the  present;  as, 
Be  dixens.  The  subjunctive  is  also  used  in  the  second  person,  instead  of  the 
imperative,  when  the  person  is  indefinite. 

{d.)  In  precepts  relating  to  past  time,  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect,  also,  are 
used  for  the  imperative;  as,  Forsiian  non  nemo  vir  foi-tis  dixerit,  restitisses, 
fnortem  puynans  oppOtisses, — you  should  have  resisted.  Cic. 

Rem.  7.  In  the  regular  paradigms  of  the  verb,  no  future  subjunctive  was 
exhibited  eitlier  in  the  active  or  passive  voice. 

(1.)  When  the  expression  of  futurity  is  contained  in  another  part  of  the  sen- 
tence, the  future  of  the  subjunctive  is  supplied  by  the  other  tenses  of  that 
mood,  viz.  the  future  subjunctive  by  the  present  an'd  imperfect,  and  the  future 
perfect  by  the  perfect  and  pluperfect".  Which  of  these  four  tenses  U  to  be  used 
depends  on  the  leading  verb  and  on  the  completeness  or  incomjdeteness  of  the 
action  to  be  ex])resse<l.  'I'he  perfect  suhjunctive  appears  to  be  also  the  sub- 
yinctive  of  the  future  perfect,  and  niiglit  not  improperly  be  so  called;  as. 


268  SYNTAX.— rPROTASIS    AND    APOL  OSIS.  §  261 

Tantum  mdneo,  hoc  tempus  si  amiseris,  te  esse  nullum  umqmxm  magis  i  imeum  r6- 
perturum,  I  only  warn  you,  that,  if  you  should  lose  this  cpportunity,  you  wili 
never  find  one  more  convenient.  Cic. 

(2.)  If  no  other  futiu-e  is  contained  in  the  sentence,  the  place  of  the  future 
Bubjunctive  active  is  supplied  by  the  participle  in  rus,  with  sim  and  essem;  as, 
Noti  i/ubiiat  quin  brevi  Try  a  sit  peritura.  He  does  not  doubt  that  Trey  will 
Boon  be  destroyed.  Cic.  Iii  hypothetical  sentences  the  form  with  fnerim  takes 
the  place  of  a  pluperfect  subjunctive;  as,  Quis  enim  dubitat,  quin,  si  Sdgiintmis 
imptyre  tulisscrmis  opem,  totum  in  Hispdniam  aversuri  bellum  fuerimus.  Liv.  ■ 
The  form  in  fuissem  occiu's  also,  but  more  rarely ;  as,  Appdniit,  gumitam  ex- 
citatura  molem  vera  fuisset  clddes,  quuvi,  etc.  See  Periphrastic  Conjuijation, 
§  162,  14. 

(3.)  The  future  subjunctive  passive  is  supplied,  not  by  the  participle  in  dnt. 
but  by  futurum  sit  or  esset,  with  ut  and  the  present  or  imperfect  of  the  sub- 
junctive; as,  Non  diibito  quin  futiirum  sit,  ut  laudetur,  I  do  not  doubt  that  he 
will  be  praised. 

PROTASIS    AND    APODOSIS. 

§  S61.     In  a  sentence  containing  a  condition  and  a  conclu 
sion,  the  former  is  called  the  protasis,  the  latter  the  apodosis. 

1.  In  the  protasis  of  conditional  clauses  with  si  and  its  compoundt, 
the  imperfect  aud  pluperfect  subjunctive  imply  the  non-existence  of 
the  action  or  state  supposed,  the  imperfect,  as  in  English,  implying 
present  time.  In  the  apodosis  the  same  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  de- 
note what  the  result  would  be,  or  would  have  been,  had  the  suppo- 
sition in  the  protasis  been  a  valid  one  ;  as, 

Nisi  te  satis  incltdtum  esse  conflderem,  scriberem  plara,  Did  I  not  believe 
that  you  have  been  sufficiently  incited,  1  would  write  more  (Cic);  which  im- 
plies "that  he  does  believe,  and  therefore  will  not  write.  Si  Nejjiiinus,  qiwd  Theseo 
prdmiserat,  non  fecisset,  Theseus  fllio  HippOlyto  non  esset  orbatus.  Id. 

2.  The  present  and  perfect  subjunctive  in  the  protasis,  imply  the 
real  or  possible  existence  of  the  action  or  state  supposed ;  as. 

Si  relit,  if  he  wishes,  or,  should  wish,  implymg  that  he  either  does  wish,  or, 
at  least,  may  wish.  In  the  apodosis  the  present  or  perfect  either  of  the  sub- 
junctive or  of  the  indicative  may  be  used. 

Remark  1.  The  tenses  of  the  indicative  may  also  be  used  in  the  protasis 
of  a  conditional  sentence  with  si,  etc. ;  as,  Si  vales,  bene  est.  Cic.  Si  quis  antea 
mirabatixr  quid  esset,  ex  hoc  tempdre  mlretur  pdtius....  Id. — The  conjunction  si 
in  the  protasis  is  often  omitted;  as,  Libet  agros  emi.  Prlmum  quosro  quos  agrosf 
If  you  will  buy  lands,  I  will  first  ask,  etc.  But  the  protasis  may  be  rendered 
without  if,  an'd  either  with  or  without  an  interrogation,  as.  You  will  buy  lauds, 
or.  Will  you  buy  lands  ?  The  futm-e  perfect  often  occurs  in  the  protasis  of 
Buch  sentences ;  as.  Casus  medicusve  levarit  mgrum  ex  prcecijnti,  muter  dHlra  ne- 
CiVnt,  (Hor.)  Should  chance  or  the  physician  have  saved  him,  the  silly  mother 
will  destroy  him.  Si  is  in  like  manner  omitted  with  the  imperfect  and  pluper- 
fect subjunctive,  in  supposing  a  case  which  is  known  not  to  be  a  real  one;  as, 
Absque  te  esset,  hodie  numquam  ad  solem  occdsum  vlverem.  Plant. 

Rem.  2.  The  present  and  perfect  subjunctive  differ  but  slightly  from  the  in- 
dicative, the  latter  giving  to  a  sentence  the  fonn  of  reality,  while  the  subjunc- 
tive represents  it  as  a  conception,  which,  however,  may  at  the  same  time  be  a 
reality.  The  second  person  singular  of  the  present  and  perfect  subjunctive 
often  occurs  in  addressing  an  indefinite  person,  where,  if  the  person  were  defi- 
nite, the  indicative  would  be  used;  as,  Memdrin  mlnuitur,  nisi  earn  exerceas. 
Ci:-     Wken  the  imperfect  or  pluperfect  is  required  to  denote  a  past  action 


§  262.     SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE  AFTER  PARTICl.  E8.     269 

the  indicative  must  be  used,  if  its  existence  is  uncertain,  as  th  )se  tenses  in  the 
Bubjunc  tive  would  imply  its  non-existence.  In  the  oratio  obliqtin,  ^\  hen  the 
leading  verb  is  a  present  or  a  future^  the  same  difference  is  observed  between 
the  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  as  in  hypothetical  sentences;  but  when  the  lead- 
ing verb  is  a  preterite  the  difference  between  possibility  and  impossibility  ia 
not  expressed. 

Rem.  3.  The  present  and  perfect  subjunctive  are  sometimes  used,  both  in 
the  prctasis  and  apodosis  of  a  conditional  sentence,  in  the  sense  of  the  imper- 
fect and  pluperfect;  as,'  Tu,  si  hie  sis,  dlUer  senlias,  If  you  were  here,  you 
would  tliink  otherwise.  Ter.  Quos,  ni  mea  cum  resistat,  jam  fiammce.  tulerinL 
Vu-g. 

Rem.  4.  The  protasis  of  a  conditional  sentence  is  frequently  not  expressed, 
but  implied;  as,  Magna  mercentur  Atrldce,  i.  e.  si  possint.  Virg. ;  or  is  contained 
in  a  participial  clause ;  as,  ^l^iy/s,  etsi  a  multitiidine  victus,  gloria  tdmen  Cannes 
tficii.  Just.  So,  also,  when  the  participle  is  m  the  ablative  absolute ;  as,  Dond- 
rem  tripodas — divite  me  scilicet  artium,  quas  aut  Pari'hdsius  protulit^  aut  Scdpas. 
Hor.  C.  Mucius  Porsenam  interficere,  proposita  sibi  morte,  condtus  est.  Cic. 
It  is  only  in  later  writers  that  the  concessive  conjunctions  etsi,  quarnquafn,  and 
quamvis  are  expressed  with  the  participle,  but  tdmen  is  often  found  in  the 
apodosis,  even  in  the  classic  period,  when  a  participial  clause  precedes  as  a 
protasis. 

Rem.  5.  In  hypothetical  sentences  relating  to  past  time,  the  actions  seem 
often  to  be  transferred  in  a  measure  to  the  present  by  using  the  imperfect, 
either  in  the  protasis  or  the  apodosis,  instead  of  the  pluperfect;  as,  Qaod  certe 
turn  fecissef,  si  suiim  numerum  (nautdrum)  naves  haberent.  Cic.  Cimhri  si  sidtim 
infesto  agmme  urbcm  jjetissent,  grande  aiscnmen  esset.  Flor.  Sometimes  the 
imperfect,  although  the  actions  are  completed,  appears  both  in  the  protasis  and 
the  apodosis. 

Rem.  6.  Nisi,  nisi  vera,  and  nisi  forte  are  joined  with  the  indicative,  ^  hen 
they  introduce  a  correction.  JVtsi  then  signifies  '  except ' ;  na,  Nescio ;  nisi /ioc 
video.  Cic.  Nisi  vero,  and  nisi  forte,  '  unless  perhaps,'  introduce  an  exception, 
and  imply  its  improbability;  as,  Nemo  fere  saltnt  soorius,  nisi  forte  insanit.  Cic. 
Nisi  forte  m  the  sense  of  'unless  you  suppose,'  is  commonly  used  u'onically  to 
introduce  a  case  which  is  in  reality  inadmissible. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    AFTER    PARTICLES. 
A.    Substantive  Clauses. 

§  30S.     A  clause  denoting  the  purpose,  object,  or  result  of 

a  preceding  proposition,  takes  the  subjunctive  after  ut,  ne,  quo, 

quin,  and  quominus  ;  as, 

Ea  non,  ut  te  instituerem,  scripsi,  I  did  not  write  that  in  order  to  instruct 
you.  Cic.  Irritant  ad  2>ugnandum,  (\no  fiant  acrim'es,  They  stimulate  them  to 
fight,  that  they  may  become  fiercer.  Varr. 

Remark  1.  C/if  or  w/i,  signifying  '  that,'  'in  order  that,'  or  simply 
'to'  wi':h  the  infinitive,  relates  either  to  a  purpose  or  to  a  result.  In 
the  latter  case  it  often  refers  to  sic,  ita,  ddeo,  ta/n,  IcJlis,  tancus,  is, 
(ijusinudi,  etc.,  in  the  preceding  clause ;  as, 

Jd  mlhi  sic  erit  grdtum,  ut  grdtius  eifse  nihil  possit.  That  will  be  so  agreeable 
to  me,  that  nothing  can  be  more  so.  Cic.  Non  sum  ita  hebes,  ut  istuc  dlcam.  Id. 
Neque  tarn  erdmus  dmenies,  ut  expldrdta  nobis  esset  victoria.  Id.  Tantum  induLfii 
cJ /on,  ut  eum  pietas  vincerel.  Nep.  Ita  and  tam  are  sometimes  omitted;  as, 
Epdmlnondas  fuit  etiam  disertus,  ut'nimo  Thebdnus  ei  par  esset  cldquentid,  instead 
of  tai7i  disertus.  Id.  Esse  dpurtet  ut  vivas,  non  vlvere  ut  edas.  Auct.  ad  Her, 
iol  efffcit  ut  omnia  floreant.  Cic. 
23* 


270     SYNTAX. SDBJUNCTIVE  AFTER  PARTICLES.     §  262. 

Rem  2.  C7/,  signifying  ' even  if '  or  'although,'  expresses  a  suppo- 
eition  msrely  as  a  conception,  and  accordingly  takes  the  subjunctive 
as, 

Ut  desint  v'n-es,  tamen  est  laiidanda  vdluntas,  Though  strength  be  wanting,  yet 
the  will  is  to  be  praised.  Ovid.  Ut,  in  this  sense,  takes  the  negative  «on ;  as, 
Exercitus  si  jjacis  nomen  audimit,  ut  non  referat  pedem  (even  if  it  does  not  with- 
draw) insislet  certe.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  Ut,  with  the  subjunctive  denoting  a  result,  is  used  with 
impersonal  verbs  signifying  it  happens,  it  remains,  it  follows,  etc. ;  as. 

Qui  fit,  ut  nemo  contentus  vivat?  How  does  it  happen  that  no  one  lives  con- 
tented?  Hor.  Huic  contigit,  ut  patriam  ex  serviiute  in  llbertatem  mndlcavet 
Nep.  Sequitur  iaitur,  ut  etlam  vitia  sint  parca.  Cic_.  Ridlquum  est,  ut  ec/dmel 
mihi  consulam.  Nep.  Restat  itjitui;  ut  mutus  astrorum  sit  volwWirms.  Cic. 
Extremum  illud  est,  ut  te  orera  et  obsecrera.  Id. 

Note  1.  To  this  principle  may  be  referred  the  following  verbs  and  phrases 
sio-nifying  '  it  happens,'  viz.  Jit,  'fieri  non  potest,  accidit,  iiicidit,  contingit,  evenit, 
usu  venit,  occurrit  and  est  (it  is  'the  case,  or  it  happens,  and  hence  esto,  be  it 
that):— and  the  following,  signifying  '  it  remains,'  or  '  it  follows,'  viz.  futarum, 
extremum,  jjrdpe,  proximum,  and  reliquum — est,  relinquUuy,  sequitur,  restat,  and 
superesi ;  and  sometimes  accedit. 

Note  2.  Contingit  with  the  dative  of  the  person  is  often  joined  with  the 
infinitive,  instead  of  the  subjunctive  with  id ;  as,  Non  cuiris  homini  contingit 
ddlre  Corinthum.  Hor.  And  with  esse  also  and  other  verljs  of  simifer  meaning, 
the  predicate  fas  m  the  case  oUicet)  is  often  found  in  the  dutive.— Sequitur  and 
efficUur,  '  it  follows,'  have  sometimes  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive  and 
sometimes  the  subjunctive ;  -awA  nascUur,  in  the  same  sense,  the  subjunctive 
only. 

Note  3.  Mos  or  moris  est,  consuetudo  or  consuetudinis  est,  and  natiira  or  con- 
suHudo  fert,  are  often  followed  by  ut  instead  of  the  infinitive.— W!  also  occurs 
occasionally  after  manv  such  phrases  as  ndvui7i  est,  rdrum,  ndturiile,  necesse, 
usttdium,  niirum,  singuldre—est,  etc.,  and  after  oeqwum,  rectum,  verum,  utile,  vert- 
simile,  and  integrwii^—est. 

For  other  uses  of  ut,  with  the  subjunctive,  see  §  273. 

Rem.  4.  Ut  is  often  omitted  before  the  subjunctive,  after  verbs  de- 
noting wiUingness  and  permission ;  also  after  verbs  of  asking,  advis- 
ing, reminding,  etc.,  and  the  imperatives  die  and  fac;  as. 

Quid  vis  fdciamf  What  do  you  wish  (that)  I  should  do?  Ter.  Insdni  feriant 
sine  I'Mra  fluctus.  Virg.  Tentes  disslmuldre  rdgai.  Ovid.  Id  sinas  oro.  Id.  Se 
suddere,  dixit,  Pliamabdzo  id  nigotii  daret.  Nep.  Accedal  iipvriet  actio  vdi-ia. 
Cic.     Fac  cogUes.  Sail.    So,  Vide  ex  naii  eff"erantm-,  quce,  etc.  Plaut 

Verbs  of  -wiUingness,  etc.,  are  vdlo,  malo,  permitto,  concccio,  patior,  s'ino,  licet,  veto, 
etc.;  thoseof  asking,  etc.,  are  rog-o,  oro,  gua;so,  7n5neo,  ad7n(inn),  jubeo,  mando,  pgto, 
prScor,  cens(o,  suadto,  oportet,  nScesse  est,  postulo,  hortor,  euro,  dccerno,  opto,  impcro. 

Rem.  5.    Ne, '  that  not,'  '  in  order  that  not,'  or  '  lest,'  expresses  a 

purpose  negatively  ;  as, 

Ciira  ne  quid  ei  desit,  Take  care  that  nothing  be  wanting  to  him.  Cic  Nemo 
prudens  pUnit,  ut  ait  Plato,  quia  jyeccdtum  est,  sed  ne  peccctur.  Id.  Ul  ne  is  fre- 
quently used  for  ne,  especiallv  in  solemn  discourse,  and  hence  In  laws;  as. 
Opera  dHnr,  ut  judicia  ne  fiant.  Id.  Quo  ne  is  used  in  the  same  manner  in  one 
passat^e  of  Horace.  Mssus  ad  /joc~quo  ne  ^je?-  vacuum  Roindno  incun-eret  hos- 
(js."j_5n  the  other  hand  ut  non  is  used  when  a  simple  result  or  consequence  is 
to  be  expressed,  in  wMch  case  ita,  sic,  tarn  are  either  expressed  or  undei  stood 
as  Turn  forte  cegrotdbavi,  nt  ad  nuptias  tuas  venire  non  pos::cm.  In  a  few  cases, 
however  ut  i  m  is  used  for  ne.—  Ut  non  is  further  used,  when  the  negation  ra- 


§  262,  SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE    AFTER    PART.CLES.  271 

fers  to  a  particular  word  or  to  a  part  only  of  the  sentence,  as  in  similar  ca.-*efl 
si  nmi  must  be  used,  and  not  nisi;  as.  Confer  te  ad  Manlium,  ut  a  mi  iwu 
ijectug  ad  dlienos,  sed  invltdtu^  ad  iiios  isse  videaris.    Cic. 

Real  6.   Ne  is  often  omitted  after  cave  ;  as, 

Q'tve  putes,  Take  care  not  to  suppose.  Cic.    Compare  §  267,  R.  3. 

Rem.  7.  After  metiio,  timco,  ver'cor,  and  otlier  expressions  denoting 
fear  or  caution,  ne  must  be  rendered  by  that  or  lest,  and  ul  by  Hint 

f,Ot. 

Note  3.  To  the  verbs  meiuo,  tUneo,  and  vcreor  are  to  be  added  the  substan- 
t'ves  expressing  fear,  apprehension  or  danger,  and  the  verbs  t&reo,  conterreo, 
delerreo,  caveo,  to  be  on  one's  guard,  video  and  ohservo  in  requests  (as,  nde, 
videte  and  videndum  est),  in  tlie  sense  of '  to  consider ' ;  as, 

Milo  nietucbat,  ne  a  inrris  indlcaretur,  MOo  feared  that  he  should  l)e  betraye<i 
by  his  servants.  Cic.  X'ereor,  ne,  dum  minuire  vellm  Uihovem,  augeani.  Id. 
Pdvor  end,  ne  castra  hoslis  aggredOretur.  Liv.  Ilia  duo  vcreor,  ut  tihi  jjossira 
convcdere,  I  fear  that  I  cannot  grant....  Cic.  Cdcendum  est  ne  asseiiidtOril/us  pat- 
ef  aciamus  aiires,  neu  adulari  nos  siiiamus.  Cic.  Vide  ne  hue  irhi  obsit.  Terruii 
fjenies,  grCwe  ne  rediret  stci'duiii  Pyrrlim.  MidtUddinem  deterrent,  ne  frumentum 
conferant.  Cks.     Me  miserum .'  ne  prona  cadas.  Ovid. 

Note  4.  Neve  or  neu  is  used  as  a  continuative  after  ut  and  ne.  It  is  properly 
equivalent  to  ant  ne,  but  is  also  used  for  el  ne  after  a  preceding  ut ;  as,  on  the 
other  hand,  et  ne  is  used  after  a  negatioTi  instead  of  mti  ne ;  as,  Let/em  tiilit,  ne 
guis  ante  actdrum  reriiin  accHsuretiir,  neve  multaretur.  Nep.  C<eHtr  niUites  mm 
Vyiif/wre  ordlimie  cdhortddix,  rjiiam  uti  sitte  j^'istinve  rirtatis  memoriam  retinerent, 
neu  perturbiirentur  dni»w — prcelii  eommittendi  sif/nun  dedit.  Cajs.  Neque,  also, 
is  sometimes  used  for  tt  ne  after  ut  and  ne ;  as,  Ut  ea  pnetet'mittam,  neque  eos 
appedem.  Cic.  Cur  non  sancltis  ne  vicinus  pntricio  sit  pleheiiis,  nee  eodcm  ttinere 
«at.  Liv. — A'e  wore  is  sometimes  used  for  «<  after  verbs  of  feariifg ;  as,  T'i/fteo  ne 
non  impetrem,  I  fear  I  shall  not  obtain  it. 

Rem.  8.  The  proposition  on  -which  the  subjunctive  with  iU  and  ni  depends, 
is  sometimes  omitted;  as,  Utitadicam.   Cic.     Ne  singidos  nominem.  Liv. 

Note  5.  Nedun,  like  ne,  takes  the  subjunctive ;  as,  Optimis  temporibiis  cldris- 
eimi  viri  vim  tribUnldnm  sustinere  non  pdtut'runi:  uedum  his  tempOribus  sine 
judiciorun  remediis  salvi  esse  possJmus, — still  less,  etc.  Cic.  Ne  is  sometimes 
used  in  the  sense  of  nfdum;  as,  Ndvam  earn  pdlestdtem  (scil.  tribHiuyrum  pUbis) 
erij)ere  patribus  nostris,  ne  «««<;  dulcedine  seinel  capti  ferant  di'slderiuni.  Liv. — 
Nedum  without  a  verb  has  the  meaning  of  an  adverb,  and  commonly  follows  a 
negative ;  as,  uEgre  inermis  tanta  multitUdo,  nedum  armdta,  sustineri  pdlest.  Liv. 
Ne,  also,  is  used  in  the  same  manner  in  Cic.  Fam.  9,  26. 

Rem.  9.  Quo,  '  that,'  '  in  order  that,'  or,  '  that  by  this  means,' 
especially  with  a  comparative ;  no)i  quo,  or  mm  quod,  '  not  that,'  '  not 
Rs  if ';  no?)  quin,  '  not  as  if  not' ;  which  are  followed  in  the  apodosis 
ay  sed  quod,  sed  quia,  or  sed  alone  ;  and  qudmlnus,  '  that  not,'  al't«r 
clauses  denoting  hinderance,  take  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

Aijuta  me,  quo  id  fiat  faclliu.s,  Aid  me,  that  that  may  be  done  more  easily, 
1  jr.  Non  quo  ripubliLd  sit  mihi  i/niequam  cdritts,  seddcspi'rdtis  Uliam  Hippdcrdie* 
vital  adhlbtve  medicinum.  Cic.  Non  quod  sola  ornent,  sed  quod  excellant.  Id. 
Neque  reeHsdvit,  quo  miims  legis  paenam  subiret.  Neji.  Kgo  me  diicem  in  clriU 
belfo  nef/avi  esse,  non  </uin  rectum  esset,  sed  quia,  etc.  Cic.  And  instead  of  non 
guin  we  may  say  7wn  quo  non,  non  quod  non,  or  non  qna  non ;  and  for  non  quod, 
^on  eo  quod,  or  wm  ideo  quod. 

Re.m.  10.  Quin,  after  negative  propositions  and  questions  witli  qui* 
%D(]  quid  implying  a  negative,  takes  the  subjunctive.   Quin  is  used, 


272  SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE    AFTER    PARTICLES.  §  2G2 

1.  For  a  relative  with  non,  after  wc'jko,  nulhts,  nihil.. ..est,  rqKriifeti  invenVur 
etc. ,  vix  est,  mgre  rcpentur,  etc. ;  as,  Mcssanmn  nemo  venit,  quin  vi  lerit,  i.  e 
qui  non  yvJerit,  No  one  came  to  Messana  who  did  not  see.  Cic.  Ne(/o  ullmii  piC' 
turam  J'lusse.... quin  conqiiisierit,  i.  e.  quam  non,  etc.  Id.  Nihil  est,  quin  ntalt 
narrando  possit  dcpTdvuri.  Ter.  Quis  est,  quin  cernat,  quanta  vis  sit  in  sensibus  ? 
Cic. 

Note  6.  AVhen  quin  is  used  for  the  relative  it  is  commonly  equivalent  to  the 
nominative  qui,  quw,  quod,  Imt  it  is  sometimes  used  in  prose  mstead  of  the 
accusative,  and  sometimes  after  dies  for  quo,  as  the  ablative  of  time ;  as,  Diej 
fere  nullus  est,  quin  hie  Satrius  domiun  meam  ventitet,  i.  e.  quo — iwn  ventitet. 
Cic. —  Qui  ?JO»i  is  often  used  for  2'!/tM ,•  as,  Quis  enim  erat,  qui  non  sciret.  Id.; 
and  when  quin  stands  for  qui  non  or  quod  non,  is  and  id  are  sometimes  added 
for  the  sake  of  emphasis ;  as,  Cleanthes  ne<jat  utlum  ctbum  esse  tain  gvuicem,  quin 
is  die  et  node  concoquatur.  Cic.  Nihil  est  quod  sensuni  habeat,  quui  id  intereat. 
Id.— So,  also,  the  place  of  quin  is  sujjplied  hyntnon;  :<^,  Auf/>istus  numquam 
fllios  suos  j>ujiiilo  commendiivit  ut  non  adjiceret  (withoTr  addina;)  si  mh-ehuntur. 
Suet.  And  if  no  negation  precedes,  or  \(  non  belongs  to  a  particular  word,  and 
not  to  the  verb,  qui  non  and  ut  non  nmst  of  course  be  used  and  not  quin. 

2.^  For  ut  non,  'tliatnot,'  or  'without'  with  a  participle,  especially  after 
fdcere  non  possum,  fieri  non  jjotest,  nulla  causn  est,  quid  caiisce  est  ?  nihil  causa 
est;  as,  Fdcere  non  possum  quin  ad  te  mittam,  i.  e.  ut  non,  etc.  Cic.  Numquam 
tarn  male  est  SicuUs,  (\\\in  dliquid  fdcrte  et  ennmdde  dicant.  Cic.  Nurnquam  ac- 
cede, quin  abs  te  abeam  docftor, — without  goiug  from  you  wiser.  Ter. 

Note  7.  Quiyi  takes  the  subjunctive  also  after  the  negative  expressions  non 
diibito,  non  est  diibium,  non  amhlgo,  I  doubt  not ;  non  dbest ;  nihil,  paidum,  non 
procul,  haud  multxtm  dbest;  non,  vix,  mcjre  alstineo  ;  tenere  me,  or  temperure  mihi 
non  possum;  nonimjx'dio,  non  rUctiso,  nihil  praitermitto,  and  the  like.  In  thesa 
cases,  however,  the  negation  in  quin  is  superfluous,  and  it  is  generally  trans- 
lated into  English  !jy  'that,'  'but  that,'  or  'to'  with  an  infinitive;  as,  Non 
diibito  quin  doini  sit,  that  he  is  at  home.  Non  multum  dbest,  qiiin  miserrimus  siin, 
Not  much  is  wanting  to  make  me  most  wretched.  Cic.  Hence,  as  quin  is  not 
in  such  cases  regarded  as  a  negative,  non  is  sjuperadded  when  a  negative  se^ise 
isreqiiired;  as,  In  qutbus  non  diibito  quin  offensionem  ner/li(jenti(e  vitdre  atque 
eff&ejere  non  possum.  Cic.  Diibltandum  non -est  quin  numquam  possit  Utilitas  cum 
hdnestdte  contender^.    Id. 

Note  8.  In  Nepos,  non  diibito,  in  the  sense  of  '  I  do  not  doubt,'  is  always  fol 
lowed  by  the  infinitive  with  the  accusative,  and  the  same  construction  ofter. 
occurs  in  later  writers  but  not  in  Cicero:  iu  the  sense  of  to  scruple  or  hesitate, 
when  the  verli  followin.g  has  the  same  subject,  diibito  and  non  diibito  are  gener- 
ally followed  by  the  infinitive;  as,  Cim-o  non  dubltabat  conjurdtos  sujjplicio  af- 
flcfre. — It  may  be  added  that  '  I  doubt  whether'  is  exoressed  in  Latin  by 
diibito  sitne,  diibito  uivuin — an,  diibito  sitne — an,  or  dUhito  num ,  numquid,  for  diibito 
an,  and  d&bium  est  an  are  usetl,  like  nescio  an  with  an  affirmative  meaning. 

Note  9.  Qijm  signifies  also 'why  not?'  being  compounded  of  the  old  abla- 
tive qui  and  ne,  i.  e.  turn,  and  in  this  sense  is  j<jined  with  the  indicative  in  ques- 
tions implying  an  exhortation ;  as,  Quin  conscendirnus  equos  ?  Why  not  mount 
our  horses?  In  this  sense  it  is  also  joined  with  the  imperative;  as,  Qiiiu  die 
stdlim.  Well,  tell  me:  or  with  the  first  person  of  the  subjunctive.  Hence  witih- 
out  being  joined  to  any  verb  it  signifies  '  even'  or  'rather.' 

Eem.  11,  The  principal  verbs  of  hinderance,  after  which  quominus  occurs, 
and  after  which  ne,  and,  if  a  negative  precedes,  quin  also  may  be  used,  are  de- 
terreo,  impedio,  intercedo,  obsislo,  obsto,  officio,  prohibeo,  recuso,  and  repugno.  It 
occurs  also  after  stat  or  Jit  per  me,  I  am  the  cause,  non  pugno,  nihil  nwror,  non 
contineo  me,  etc. 

Note.  Impedio,  deterreo,  and  recuso  are  sometimes,  and  prdMheo  frequently 
fcUowed  by  the  infinitive.     Instead  oi  quominus,  qiw  secius  is  sometimes  used. 


§  263.  SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE    AFTER    PARTICLES.  273 

§  So3<      The  particles  specified  in  this  section  always  introduce  a  sentenc«  con 
taiiiing  only  a  conception  of  the  mind,  and  are  hence  joined  with  the  subjunctive. 

1.  The  subjunctive  is  used  after  particles  of  wisliing,  as  utinam,  w<i, 

O!  and  0!  si;  as, 

Utinam  minus  v'ltce  aipidi  fuissemus !  0  that  we  had  been  less  attached  to  life  \ 
Cic.     0  si  solita  qidcquam  virtuiis  adesset !  Virg. 

Remark.  The  present  and  perfect  tenses,  after  these  particles,  are  used  in 
reference  to  those  wishes  which  ai-e  conceived  as  possible;  the  imperfect  and 
pluperfect  are  employed  in  expressing  those  wishes  which  are  conceived  aa 
wanting  in  reality.  Cf.  ^  261,  1  and  2. — '  Would  that  not '  is  expressed  in  Latin 
both  by  utinam  ne  and  utinam  non.  Utinam  is  sometimes  omitted;  as.  Tecum 
ludere  sicut  ipsa  possem  !  Catoll. 

B.    Adverbial  Clauses. 

2.  (1.)  Quamvia,  hovfexer ]  licet,  although;  tamquam,  tamquam  si, 
quasi,  ac  si,  ut  si,  velut,  velut  si,  velilti,  slcUti,  and  ceu,  as  if;  modo, 
dum,  and  dummodo,  provided, — take  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

Quamvis  ille  felix  sit,  tdmen,  etc.  However  happy  he  may  be,  still,  etc.  Cic. 
Vmtas  licet  nullum  dejensorem  obtineatj  Though  truth  should  obtain  no  de- 
fender. Id.  Taraqnam  clausa  sit  Asia,  sic  nihil  jjp-fertur  ad  nos.  Id.  Sed  quid 
ego  his  iesiibns  uicyr,  quasi  res  dHhia  aut  obscHra  sit  V  Id.  Me  omnibus  rfbus,  juxta 
ac  si  mens  frCiter  esset,  sustentdvit,  He  supported  me  in  every  thing,  just  as 
though  he  were  ray  brother.  Id.  Similiter  facere  eos, — ut  si  nautce  cert.^vent, 
utei\  etc.  Id.  Abseniis  Ariovisti  crudelitatem,  velut  si  coram  cidessit,  horrcrent. 
Cajs.  /n<?Me  s?7JMS  caros,  veltiti  cognoscerei,  (6a^  Ovid.  Sicuti  Jzi/'yw  lacessi- 
tus  foret,  in  sUndium  vemt.  Sail.  Hie  vera  inyentem  put/nnm,  ceu  cetera  nusquam 
bella  forcnt.  Vng.  OdHrint  dum  metuant.  Att.  in  Cic.  Manent  inge.nia  senlbus, 
modo  peiTnaneat  stadium  et  industria.  Cic.  Omnia  hdnesta  nef/Iit/unt  dummodo 
potentiam  consequantur,  They  disregard  every  honorable  pruiciple,  provided 
they  can  obtain  power.  Id. 

Note.  Modo,  dtem,  and  dummddo,  when  joined  with  a  negation,  become 
mOdo  ne,  dum  ne,  and  dummodo  ne. 

(2.)  Quamvis  (although)  is  in  Cicero  joined  with  a  principal  tense  of  the  sub- 
jiuictive ;  as,  Quamvis  non  fueris  sudsnr,  approbdtor  eerie  juisti.  Cic.  In  Later 
writers  it  is  often  used  with  the  indicative;  as,  Fcllcem  Nioben,  quamvis  <o< 
funera  vidit.  Ovid.  So  also  once  in  Cicero,  Quamvis  patrem  suum  numquam 
vidt-rat.  Rab.  Post.  2. 

(3.)  C^«(77mvs,  as  a  conjunction,  in  the  sense  of  'however  much,'  is  joined 
with  the  subjunctive.  So  also  when  its  component  parts  are  -separated;  as, 
C.  Gracchus  dixit,  sibi  in  somnis  Ti.  fratrem  visum  esse  dicere,  qnani  vellet  cuno 
taretur,  tamen,  etc. —  Quamvis  '  however  much,'  as  an  adverb,  governs  no  par- 
ticular mood. 

(4.)  Etsi,  tdmetsi,  even  if,  although,  and  quamquam,  although,  commonly  in- 
troduce an  indicative  clause: — etiamsi  is  more  frequently  followed  by  the  sub- 
junctive. In  later  prose  writers,  and  sometimes  in  Cicero  and  Sallust  as  weU 
as  in  the  poets,  quamquam  is  joined  with  the  subjimctive;  as,  Quaniqnam  /»te- 
lenle  Lucullo  loquar.  Cic.  Vi  reyere  patriam  quamquam  possis.  Sail.  .lug.  3. 
F'llius  quamquam  Thetidos  mdrlncB  Dardunas  turrts  quuteret.  Hor. 

Remark.  The  imperfect  subjunctive  with  ac  si,  etc.,  is  used  after  the  pre- 
sent, to  denote  that  in  realitj'  tlie  thing  is  not  so,  but  in  that  case  a  hypotheti- 
cal subjunctive  must  be  supplied;  as,  Eynutii  rem  ut  tuedre  oeque  a  tejxto,  ac  si 
viec.  negolia  essent,  i.  e.  a^  peterem,  si  mea  negotia  essent,  a-s  I  would  pray  i^ 
»>tc.  Cic. 


274  SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE    AFTER    PARTICLES.  §  2^^ 

3.  Ai'ter  antequam  and  priusquam,  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect 
tenses  are  usually  in  the  subjunctive;  the  present  and  perfect  may  be 
either  in  the  indicative  or  subjunctive.  The  present  indicative  is 
commonly  used  when  the  action  is  to  be  represented  as  certain,  near 
at  hand,  or  already  begun ;  the  subjunctive  is  used  when  the  thing  is 
still  douotful,  and  also  in  general  propositions ;  as, 

£a  causa  ante  mortua  est,  quam  tu  natus  esses,  That  cause  was  dead  before 
you  were  bora.  Cic.  Avertit  equos,  priusquam  pdbula  gustassent  Trojce,  Xun- 
ihumque  bibisseut.  Virg.  Priusquam  iiicipias,  consulto  dpus  est,  Before  you  be- 
gin tliere  is  need  of  counsel.  Sail. 

4.  (1.)  Dum,  donee,  and  quoad,  signifying  until,  are  followed  by 
the  subjunctive,  if  they  refer  to  the  attainment  of  an  object;  as, 

Dura  hie  vf  niret,  lOcum  relinquere  noluit,  He  was  umvilling  to  leave  the  place 
until  he  (Milo)  should  come.  Cic.  Nihil  puto  tibi  esse  utllius  quam  ojjperlri  quoad 
scire  possis,  quid  tibi  agendum  sit.  Id.  Gornu  telendit,  et  duxit  longe,  donee  curvd- 
ta  colrentinltr  se  capita.  Virg. — In  the  sense  of  'as  long  as,'  these  particles 
take  the  indicative,  iDut  Tacitus  joins  dmec  with  the  subjunctive  even  when  a 
simple  fact  is  to  be  expressed. 

(2.)  fJnm,  while,  is  commonly  used  with  the  indicative  present,  whatev«t 
majf  be  the  tense. of  the  principal  sentence.    Cf.  ^  259,  R.  1,  (1. ',  (a.) 

5.    Quum  (cum),  when  it  signifies  a  relation  of  time,  taken 

the   indicative ;    when  it  denotes   a  connection  of  thought,   the 

subjunctive ;  as, 

Qui  non  dcfendit  injuriam,  neque  repidsat  a  suis,  quum  potest,  injuste  f&cit. 
Cic.  Quum  recte  naiigari  poterit,  turn  mliiges.  Id.  Credo  turn,  quum  Slcllia 
florebat  dplbus  et  copiis,  inagna  artvflcia  fuisse  in  ea  insula.  Id.  Quum  tot  sustin- 
eas  et  tanta  mgotia,  peccetn,  si  mdrer  tua  teinjjdra,  Since  you  are  burdened 
with  so  many  and  so  important  allau's,  I  should  do  wi-ong,  if  I  should  occupy 
your  time.  Hor.  Quum  vita  sine  dmicis  metus  plena  sit,  i-dtio  ipsa  monet  amlcit- 
tas  compardre.   Cic. 

Remark  1.  (a.)  The  rule  for  the  use  of  quum  may  be  thus  expressed: 
Quum  temporal  takes  the  indicative,  qman  causal  the  subjunctive.  Hence, 
when  quum  is  merely  a  particle  of  time,  with  no  refeisnce  to  cause  and  etiect, 
and  not  occurring  in  a  historical  narrative  (see  Rem.  2),  it  may  be  joined  with 
any  tense  of  the  indicative.  But  when  it  is  employed  to  express  the  relation 
of  cause  and  etiect,  or  has  the  meaning  of  '  though  '  or  '  although,'  it  is  joined 
with  the  subjunctive  {b.)  Quum,  relathig  to  time,  is  commonly_  translated 
when,  while,  or  after;  referring  to  a  traui  of  thought,  it  signifies  as,  since,  though 
or  although,  because ;  but  may  often  be  translated  when. 

Rem.  2.  In  narration,  quum,  even  when  it  relates  to  time,  is  joined 
with  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctive,  when  a  historical  per- 
fect stands  in  the  principal  clause ;  as, 

Gracchus,  quum  rem  illam  in  religimem  populo  venisse  sentiret,  ad  sendtum  rei 
aiit.  Cic.    Alexander,  quum  interemisset  Clltum,  vix  viiinus  a  se  aistinuit.  Id. 

Note.  Quum  temporal,  when  it  expresses  an  action  frequently  repeated, 
may  be  joineil  with  the  pluperfect  indicative,  and  the  ap-jdosis_  then  contains 
the  imperfect;  as,  Qmun  antem  vir  esse  ccvyivriit,  dabat  se  labori.  Cic.  Quum 
rdsam  vJderat,  tU7n  incipere  ver  arbitrabatur.  Id.  Cf.  ^  264,  12. 

Rem.  3.  Quum  in  the  sense  of  *  while '  is  joined  with  the  perfect  and  imper- 
fect indicative,  often  with  the  addition  of  interea  or  interim,  to  express  sunulta- 
peous  occ'irrences;  as,  G'llAlus  ccpit  magnum  sucb  virtiitis  fructnni,  quum  omnea 
prdpe  una  vice,  in  eo  ipso  cos  spem  Mbituros  esse,  dixistis.  Cic .    Canlibatur  virgis 


§  264.  SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE    AFTER    Q  JI.  27c 

in  rnidio  fd-ro  Messaim  clvis  Rdnuinus,  judices,  quum  interea  nulla  v<xs  alia  istivi 
tniseri  audiihaXur,  nisi  hcec:  clvis  Bdmdtius  sziin.  Id. 

Rem.  4.  Quum,  for  the  most  part  preceded  by  an  adverb,  as,  (am,  nondum, 
vix,  cBcjre,  or  joined  with  repenle  or  subiio  is  followed  by  the  ind  cative,  espe- 
cially by  the  present  indicative,  to  express  the  beginning  of  an  action.  In  the 
cases  mentioned  in  this  and  the  preceding  remark,  the  historians  also  use  quum 
with  the  historical  infinitive. 

Foi  the  subjunctive  after  «  and  its  compounds,  see  §  261. 

C.    Adjectivb  Clauses. 

SUBJUNCTIVE     AFTER     QUI. 

§  364.  Relatives  require  the  subjunctive,  when  the  clauses 
connected  by  them  express  merely  a  conception ;  as,  for  exam- 
ple, a  consequence,  an  innate  quality,  a  cause,  motive,  or  purpose. 

1  (a.)  When  the  relative  qui,  in  a  clause  denoting  a  result  of  the 
character  or  quality  of  something  specified  in  the  antecedent  clause, 
follows  a  demonstrative,  and  is  equivalent  to  ut  with  a  personal  or 
demonstrative  pronoun,  it  takes  the  subjunctive. 

Note.  The  demonstratives  after  which  qui  takes  the  subjunctive,  are  tnm  with  an 
adjective,  tontiif,  talis,  cjusmQdi,  liujusmOdi,  aud  is,  iUe,  isLt,  aud  hie  in  the  seiise  of 
tolls ;  as, 

Quis  est  tarn  Lyiiceus,  qui  in  tantis  tenehris  nihil  offendat?  i.  e.  ut  iUe  in  tnnlis, 
etc..  Who  is  so  quick-sighted,  that  he  would  not  stumble^  (or,  as  not  to  stum- 
ble,) in  such  darkness.  Gic.  Tultm  te  esse  Oportet,  qui  ah  impiorum  ch-inm  sOcie- 
tdte  sejungas;  i.e.  ut  lu,  etc.  Id.  At  ea  fuil  li>i/dtio  Octfivii,  in  qaii  pericOli 
suspicio  nun  sHiessel,  i.  e.  lU  in  ea.  Id.  Nee  tdinen  e(/o  sum  ille  j'erreus,  qui  Jrd- 
tris  tdrissimi  vvzvbve  nmi  movear,  i.  e.  ut  eyo  mm  mdvear.  Id.  Nvn  sumus  ii, 
(i\uba>i  nlliil  vHrum  esse  videatnr,  i.  e.  ut  nobis  nihil,  etc.  Id.  Nulla  yens  turn 
f  era  est,  cujus  menteni  non  imbuerit  deorum  dp'mio,  i.  e.  ut  ejus  mentem,  etc.  Id. 

(&.)    Sometimes  the  demonstrative  word  is  only  implied ;  as, 

Res  pnrvn  dictu,  sed  quae  slUdiis  in  matjmim  certdmen  excesserit,  i.  e.  tdlii 
y!«B....of  such  a  kind  that  it  issued  in  a  violent  contest.  Cic.  Nunc  dicis  dliquid, 
juod  (ul  rem  pertineat,  i.  e.  tdle  ut  id,  etc.  Id.  So  (/uis  sum,  for  num  tdlis  sum; 
a.s,  Quis  sum,  cdjus  aures  kedi  7iefns  sit'^  Sen. — In  like  manner,  also,  a  demon- 
strative denoting  a  character  or  quality,  is  implied  in  the  examples  iiicludi'd  ia 
tlie  following  rule  : — 

2.  When  the  relative  is  equivalent  to  quamquam  is,  etsi  is,  or  dum- 
modo  is,  it  takes  the  subjunctive ;   as, 

Loco,  consilii  quavivis  egregii,  quod  non  ipse  afFerret,  Inimicus,  Laco,  an  oppo 
nent  of  anv  measure,  however  excellent,  provided  he  did  not  himself  propose 
it.  Tac.  Tu  dquam  a  pUmice  posttdas,  qui  t/««s  sitiat.  Plant.  Nihil  mdleslum, 
quod  non  desidcres,  i.  e.  dummddo  id.   Cic. 

3.  Quod,  in  restrictive  clauses,  takes  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

QwkI  sciam  as  far  as  I  know;  quvd  memlnerim,  as  far  as  I  recollect;  quod  eyo 
mtellii/am;  qi.d  intellUji  possit;  quod  conjectUrd  j)rdvideri  possit;  qtiodsaird  fidti 
pnssim ;  qmid  <ommvdo  luo  J'lat,  etc. —  Quidem  is  sometimes  added  to  the  rela- 
tive ill  such  sentences.  Quod  .^ine  mdlestid  tud  fiat,  So  far  as  it  can  be  done 
without  troubling  j  ou.  Ciu.  In  the  phrases  quantum  possum,  auantum  igo  per. 
$plctu,  on  the  other  hand,  the  indicative  is  used. 


•276  SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE    AFTER    QUI.  §  264 

4.  A  relative  clause,  after  the  comparative  followed  by  quam,  takes 
the  s\ibjunctive ;  as, 

Major  sum,  quam  cui  possit  fortuna  ndccre,  i.  e.  quam  ut  miM,  etc.,  I  am  toQ 
great  for  fortune  to  be  able  to  injure  me.  Ovid.  Audita  voce  jjrieconis  mcijui 
gaudium  fidt,  quam  quod  universwn  homines  caperent,  Upon  the  herald's  voice 
being  heard,  the  joy  was  too  great  for  the  people  to  contain.  Liv. 

Remark  1.  The  clause  annexed  by  quam  qui  implies  an  inherent  quality  or 
a  consequence ;  so  that  (7?/re?«  g«w  is  equivalent  to  quam  ut,  which  also  soire- 
tiraes  occurs.  Sometimes  the  subjunctive  follows  quam  even  without  a  rela- 
tive pronoiin ;  as,  In  his  Uteris  longi'or  fin,  quam  aut  vellem,  aut  quam  wte  putavi 
jore : — and  so  frequently  with  the  verbs  velle  and  posse. 

5.  A  relative  clause  expressing  a  purpose.,  aim,  or  motive,  aud 
equivalent  to  ut  with  a  personal  or  demonstrative  pronoun,  takes  the 
subjunctive ;  as, 

Laciidcemmii  Iccjatos  Athenas  miserunt,  qui  mm  absentem  accusarent :  i.  e.  ul 
illi  eum  accusarent.  The  Laceda3monians  sent  ambassadors  to  Athens  to  accuse 
him  in  his  absence.  Nep.  Qesar  equUatum  omnem  prcemittit_,  qui  videant,  quas  in 
partes  iter  fdciant.  Cajs.  Sunt  autem  multi,  qui  cripiuni  aliis,  quod  dliis  largian- 
tur.  Cic.     Assidue  repetant,  quas  perdant,  BelkUs  undas.  Ovid. 

Rem.  2.  So  also  with  relative  adverbs ;  as,  Lampsacum  ei  (  ThemistocU)  rex 
donarat,  unde  Vmum  sumeret,  i.  e.  ex  qua  or  ut  inde,  etc.  Nep.  SUper  tabernac- 
■alum  regis,  unde  ab  omnibus  consjnci  posset,  i7nago  solis  crystallo  inclusn  fulge- 
bat.   Curt. 

6.  A  relative  clause  with  the  subjunctive  after  certain  indefinite 
general  expressions,  specifies  the  circumstances  which  characterize 
the  individual  or  class  indefinitely  referred  to  in  the  leading  clause ; 

as, 

Fuerunt  ea  iempesldte,  qui  dicerent,  There  were  at  that  time  some  who  said. 
Sail.  Erant,  quibus  appetentior  fdnm,'  vlderetur.  There  were  those  to  whom 
he  appeared  too  desirous  of  fame.  Tac.  Sunt,  qui  censeant,  una  dnimum  et 
corpus  occidere.  Cic.  Erunt,  qui  existvmdri  velint.  Id.  Si  quis  frit,  qui  pierpe- 
iuam  67-dtionem  deslderet,  alterd  actione  wudiet.  Id.  Venient  legiones,  quas  7ieque 
me  multum  neque  te  impmitum  piitiantur.  Tac.  So  after  est  followed  by  quod, 
in  the  sense  of  '  there  is  reason  whv ' ;  as.  Est  quod  gaudeas,  You  have  cause 
to  rejoice.  Plant.  £st  quod  visam  (idmuin.  Id.  Si  est  quod  desit,  ne  bedtus 
quidem  est.  Cic. 

Note  1.  The  expressions  included  in  the  rule  are  est,  sunt,  idest,  prasto  sunt,  exsis- 
tunt,  exOriuntur,  inveniimtur,  rSperiuntur,  (scil.  hSwiines);  si  quis  est,  tempus  fuit,  tern- 
pus  veniet,  etc. 

Reisi.  3.  The  same  construction  occurs  with  relative  particles  used  indefi- 
nitely; as.  Est  unde  hac  fiant.  Si  est  culpam  ut  Antipho  in  se  admiserit,  If  it 
chance  that,  etc.  Ter.  Est  uhi  id  isto  mddo  y&leat.  Cic.  So  est  cur  and  est  ut 
in  the  sense  of  est  cur;  as,  Jlle  erat,  ut  odisset  defens&rem  salutis  rata,  i.  e.  he 
bad  reason  to  hate.  Cic.  Non  est  igitur  ut  mirandum  sit.  There  is  no  occasion 
for  wouLlering.  Id. 

Rem.  4.  The  above  and  similar  expressions  are  followed  by  the  subjunctive 
only  when  they  are  indefinite.  Hence,  after  su7ii  qulda7n,  sunt  7ion7iulli,  sunt 
trmiii,  etc.,  when  referring  to  definite  persons,  the  relative  takes  the  indicative; 
as.  Sunt  ordiiones  qucedam,  quas  Maioci-ito  dalio.  Cic. 

Rek.  5.  The  indicative  is  sometimes,  though  rarely,  used  after  sunt  qui 
even  when  taken  indefinitely,  especially  in  the  poets;  as,  Su7it,  jfws  juvat.  Hor 
jSwwi  qui  ita  dicunt.    Sail. 

7.  A  relative  clause  after  a  general  negative,  or  an  interrogative 
expression  implying  a  negative,  takes  the  subjunctive ;  as, 


I  264.       SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE  AFT  IR  QUI.  277 

Nemo  est,  qui  hand  intelligat,  There  is  no  one  who  does  not  understf.nd.  Cic. 
Nulla  res  est,  quse  perferre  possit  continuum  Idbor-tm,  There  is  nothing  which 
can  endnre  perpetual  labor.  Quint.  Nulla  pars  6bt  corporis,  qiite  itoii  sit  minor. 
Id.  Nihil  est,  quod  tarn  miseros  f  aciat,  quam  imjnetas  et  scetus.  Cic.  In  f&ro 
rix  dccimus  rjuis(pce  est,  qui  ipsiis  scsc  noacnt.  Plant.  Quis  est,  qui  utilin  fu^hit"} 
Who  is  there  that  shuns  what  is  useful  V  Cic.  Quie  lOlebi-a  est,  in  quain  non  in- 
tret  inetus  moiiis  ?  Sen.  Quid  dulciiis  qwnn  habt're,  quicum  omnia  aude;'iS  sic  16- 
qui  nt  tecum?  Cic.  (See  respecting  this  use  of  the  indefiiiite  qu'tcum  rather  than 
the  definite  5!W«/M,  §  13fi,  R.  1.)  An  est  rjuisr/itam,  qui  hoc  ignoret?  Is  there 
any  one  who  is  ignorant  of  this '?  Id.    Numquid  est  mali,  quod  non  dixeris  V  Ter. 

Note  2.  General  negatiyes  are  nemo,  nidliis,  nihil,  units  no7i,  alius  non,  non  quisquam^ 
mx  ullus,  nee  uUtis,  etc.,  with  est ;  vix  with  an  ordinal  and  quisque  ;  nggo  essf.  quemrjuatn, 
etc.  Interrogatiye  expressions  implying  a  negatiye.  are  quis,  quid;  qui,  qitos,  quod, 
qttantuSy  uter,  ecquis,  numquis,  an  quisquam,  an  aliqiiis,  qu3tus  quisque,  guStus,  etc, 
with  est  ?  quot,  quam  multi,  etc.,  with  sunt! 

Note  3.  The  same  construction  is  used  after  non  est,  nildl  est,  quid  est,  nurtir 
quid  est,  etc.,  followed  by  quod,  cur,  gudre,  or  quamobrem,  and  denoting  '  there 
is  no  reason  why,'  '  what  cause  is  there  V  'is  there  any  reason?'  as,  Quod 
timeas,  von  est,  'fhere  is  no  reason  why  you  should  fear.  Ovid.  Nihil  est, 
quod  adventum  nostrum  pertimescas.  Cic.  Quid  est,  quod  de  ejus  civitdte  dubltes  ? 
Id.  QiHvris  a  me,  quid  eyo  Cdtlllnam  metuam.  Nihil,  et  cHravi  ne  quis  metueret. 
Quid  est,  ciir  virtus  ipsa  per  se  non  eff  iciat  bedtos  f  Id. — So  after  non  luibeo,  or 
nihil  habeo ;  as,  Non  hdbeo,  quod  te  acciisem.  Cic.  Nil  hdbeo,  quod  agam,  I  have 
nothing  to  do.  Hor.  Nihil  hdbeo,  quod  ad  te  scrlbam.  Cic.  So  without  a  nega- 
tive, De  quibus  habeo  ipse,  quid  sentiam.  Id.  Oiusa  or,  with  quid  and  iiiinl, 
causce,  is  sometimes  added ;  as,  Non  fuit  causa,  cur  postHldres.  Id.  Quid  erat 
causce,  cur  mi>tueret.  Id. 

NoTK  4.  (a.)  The  relative  cl.anse  takes  the  subjunctive  after  the  expressions 
included  in  this  and  the  last  rule,  only  when  it  expresses  the  character  or 
quality  of  the  subject  of  the  antecedent  clause;  and  the  relative,  as  in  the  pre- 
ceding cases  of  the  relative  with  the  subjunctive,  is  equivalent  to  a  personal  or 
demonstrative  pronoun  with  ut;  as.  Nemo  est,  qui  nesciai,  There  is  no  one  who 
is  ignorant,  i.  e.  no  one  is  ignorant.  Cic.  So,  Sunt,  qui  hoc  caipant,  There  are 
some  who  blame  this,  i.  e.  some  blame  this.  Veil. 

(b.)  If  the  relative  clause  is  to  be  construed  as  a  jjai-t  of  the  loijical  subject 
it  does  not  require  the  subjunctive;  as,  Nihil  stabile  est,  quod  infldum  est 
Nothing  which  is  faithless  is  firm.  Cic. 

8.  (1.)  A  relative  clause  expressing  the  reason  of  what  goes  before, 
takes  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

Peccdvisse  mihi  videor,  qui  a  te  discesserim,  I  think  I  did  wrong  in  leaving 
you.  Cic.  Inertiam  accUsas  dddlescenlium,  qui  istam  artem  non  ediscant.  You 
Dlame  the  idleness  of  the  young  men,  because  -they  do  not  learn  tiTat  art.  Id. 
0  fortUndtt  dddlescens,  qui  tuce  virtuiis  Homirum  prceconem  mveueris  ! — in  hav- 
ing found.  Id.  Cdnlnius  fuit  mirij'icd  vigilantid,  qui  suo  toto  consHldtu  somnum 
non  vTderit, — since,  etc.  Id. 

(2.)  Sometimes,  instead  of  qui  alone,  ut  qui,  quippe  qui,  or  xdpotf 
qui,  is  used,  generally  with  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

0)ni-'iviii  cum  pntre  non  inibat,  quippe  qui  ne  in  opjndum  guidem  nisi  perrdra 
venisset.  Cic.  Neque  AntOnius  prdcul  dberat,  utpote  qui  ma(jm>  exercitu  sequ5- 
fetur.  Sail.  But  sometimes  with  the  mdicative  m  SsUlustand  Livy;  as,  Quippe 
qui  omnia  vicC-rat.  Sail. 

9.  After  dif/nus,  indi(/nux,  aptvm,  and  idoneus,  a  relative  clause 
takes  the  subjunctive  ;  as, 

Vidi'tur,  qui  dliqunndo  imperet,  dignus  esse,  He  seems  to  be  worthy  ,ai  some 
time  to  command.  Cic.  Rustlci  nostri  quum  J'idem  dlicHjus  bdnitdtennfue  Uuulant, 
iigmtTii  esse  dlcunt,  quJcum  in  tinebris  mlces.  Id.     Nulla  vidcbdtur  aptior  per- 

24 


278       SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  INDIRECT  QUESTIONS.      §  26.5 

Eono,  quae  cle  celate  loqueretur.  Id.  Pompeius  idSneus  turn  est,  qui  impetret.  Id 
Et  rem  idoiieam,  de  qua  quceratur,  et  homines  dignos,  quTbusc«?>J  disscratur,  pu- 
taut.  Id. 

Note  5.  It  the  relative  clause  does  not  express  that  of  which  the  person  oi 
thing  denoted  by  the  antecedent  is  worthy,  its  construction  is  not  influenced 
by  this  rule.  Thus,  Quis  servus  Ijbertate  dignus  fiiit,  cui  nostra  salus  cava  non 
esset?    The  subjunctive  is  here  used  according  to  No.  7  of  this  section. 

Note  6.  The  infinitive  frequentlv  follows  these  adjectives  in  poetry,  thou:];b 
rarely  in  prose;  as,  Et  puer  ijjse  fuit  cantfiri  dignus.  Vii'g. :— and  sometimeA 
ul;  as,  £■/■««  diguus,  ut  haberes  iBte(/rant  7?iu;iM7?i.  Quint. 

10.  A  relative  clause,  after  unus,  solus,  prmius,  etc.,  restricting 
the  affirmation  to  a  particular  subject,  takes  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

E(ec  est  iiiia  contentio,  qnse.  ddhuc  permanscrit.  This  is  the  only  dispute  which 
has  remained  till  this  time.  Cic.  Voluptas  est  sola,  qua  nus  vocet  ad  se,  et  alli- 
ceat  suajjte  naturd,  Pleasure  is  the  only  thing  that,  by  its  own  nature,  invites 
and  allures  us  to  itself.  Id. 

11.  When  the  relative  refers  to  a  dependetit  clause,  it  often  takes 
the  subjunctive.    See  §  266. 

12.  The  imperfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctive  are  used  in  narra- 
tion after  relative  pronouns  and  adverbs,  when  a  repeated  action  is 
spoken  of;  as, 

Semper  habiti  sunt  fortissmii,  qui  suiiimam  imperii  potirentur,  Those  were  al- 
ways accounted  the  bravest,  who  obtained  the  supreme  dominion.  Nep. 
Quemcumque  llctw  jnssii  consuUs  prehendisset,  tribunus  mitti  jiibebnt.  Liv. 
Ut  quisque  maxime  lahi'irilret  locus,  aut  ipse  occurrvbnt,  aut  dllqiws  mittcbal.  So 
after  si  (/wis  or  </2(t;  as.  Si  qui  rem  mdlltiosius  gessisset,  dcdecus  existimabant. 
Cic.  Quoticns  super  tali  neijvtio  consult.aret,  edHd  douius  parte  utebdtur.  Tac. 
Nee  quisquam  Pyrrhum,  qua  tiilisset  impetum,  sustinere  vdluit. — It  is  sometimei 
found  in  like  manner  after  qumn,  ubi,  ut,  and  si  when  used  in  the  sense  of 
qumn,  when  repeated  actions  are  spoken  of;  as,  7(/iibi  dixisset,  hastam  in  fines 
earum  emittebat.  Liv.  Sin  N&mido'  propius  aceessissent,  ibi  vero  virtutem  osien- 
dere.  Sail.  Sometimes  even  the  present  subjunctive  is  so  used  when  em- 
ployed as  an  aorist  to  express  things  which  have  happened  repeatetUy,  and 
still  happen  (see  §  145,  I.  2.);  as,  Ubi  de  magna  viriute  et  gloria  bdnorum  memo- 
res,  qutB  sibi  quisque,  etc.  Sail. 

Note  7.  This  is  called  the  indefinite  sttbjunctive,  or  suijunctive  of  generality,  inasmach 
»s  the  action  is  not  referred  to  a  distinct,  individual  case.  The  indicatiTe,  however,  is 
used  in  such  cases  more  frequently  than  the  subjunctive. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    IN    INDIRECT    QUESTIONS. 

§  ^G5,  Dependent  clauses,  containing  an  indirect  question, 
.ake  the  subjunctive. 

Note  1.  A  question  is  indirect  when  its  substance  is  stated  in  a  dependent 
tlause  without  the  interrogative  form.  Indirect  questions  generally  depend 
upon  those  verbs  and  expressions  which  commonly  take  after  them  the  accusa/- 
tivo  with  the  infinitive.    Cf.  §  272.     Thus : — 

Qualis  sit  animus,  ipse  animus  nescit.  The  mind  itself  knows  not  what  the 
mind  is.  Cic.  Crcdibile  non  est,  quantu(jfi  scribam,  It  is  incredible  how  much  I 
write.  Id.  Quis  eao  sim,  me  rogitas  f  Do  you  ask  me  who  I  am?  Flaut.  Ad  te 
quid  scribam  7iescio.  Cic.  Nee  quid  scribam  hdbeo,  Nor  have  I  any  thing  to 
write.  Id.  JJoce  me,  v.\n  sint  dii.  Inform  me  where  the  gods  are.  Id.  Incertum 
e$t,  quo  te  loco  mors  exspectet.  Sen-  Ep.  Quam  pridem  sibi  lieredltas  venisset, 
i&.:tt.  Id.     Nunc  accipe,  quare  desipiaut  omnes.  Hor.    Id  utruin  ilU  seutiant,  an 


S  206        SYNTAX. ShrnjUNCTIVE    IN    INSERTED    CLAUSES.       279 

vcro  siiniilont,  lit  inUUii/ejs.  Cic.  Qucero,  num  tu  sSndtui  causam  tuam  penuittas. 
Id  KiV/es,  lit  alto  stet  nivt  caiididuin  Soracte.  Hor.  JVesiit,  vlt(in&  fruatiir,  an 
sit  lipud  iiuhits.   Ovid. 

Note  2.  All  interrogatives  whether  adjectives,  pronouns,  or  par- 
ticles, may  serve  as  connectives  of  clauses  containing  indirect  que* 
tions ;  as, 

Qiia7itus,  qualif,  r/udt,  quStits^  quStiiplex,  uter  •  qitis,  qui,  cujas  ;  ubi,  quo.,  un/le,  qiiS, 
gvorsiim,  qimmitiu,  quamdudinn^  (iiinnipridem,  quSties,  cur,  quare,  qiiamobrem,  quenuiil- 
mBduiTi,  quomodo,  iit,  quavi,  quantOpere,  an,  ne,  num,  utrum,  anne,  annou. 

Remakk  1.  The  indicative  is  frequently  used  in  dependent  questicns, 
especially  in  Terence  and  Plautus  and  occasionally  in  later  poets;  as,  I'idt 
avdritia  quid  facit.  Ter.  So  Virg.  Eel.  5,  7.  In  the  best  prose  wTiters  the  in- 
dicative generally  indicates  that  the  question  is  direct,  or  that  the  sentence  is 
not  a  question;  as,  Qiucnlmus  ubi  mdlefieium  Gs,t,  Let  us  seek  there,  where  the 
crime  actuallv  is.  Cic.  Nihil  est  adinlrahilitis,  qiiam  quomudo  ille  niorltm  fUii 
till  it. 

Rem.  2.  In  double  questions,  '  whether — or,'  the  first  may  be  introduced  by 
utrum,  or  the  enclitic  ne,  or  without  an  interrogative  particle.  Hence  there  are 
four  forms  of  double  questions, — 1.  utrum  (or  utrum  ne), — an.     2.  utrum, — an 

(anne).     3.  -ne, an.     4.  -ne, -ne  ;    as,   Multum   interest,  utrum   laiis 

iinminufitur,  an  sCdus  deseratur.  Cic.  The  inteiTogative  particle  utrum  is  not 
used  in  a  single  question;  and  7ium — an  is  used  only  in  direct  questions.  The 
English  'or  not'  in  the  second  part,  which  is  used  without  a  verb,  is  expressed 
in  Latin  by  annon  or  necne,  either  with  or  without  a  verb ;  but  necne  occurs 
only  in  indirect  questions;  as,  Dii  utrum  sint,  necne  sint,  qmtritur.  Cic. — iVe — 
ne,  an — an,  or  num — num  scarcely  occur  except  in  poetical  or  uuclassical  lan- 
guage. 

Rem.  3.  DHhita.  dubium  est,  or  incertum  est  an,  dellhero  or  hcesUo  an,  and 
es])ecially  haud  sew  an,  nescio  an,  though  implying  some  doubt,  have  generally 
a  sense  almost  atJirmative.    Compare  ^  198, 11,  R.  (e.) 

Reji.  4.  Nescio  qvis,  used  nearly  in  the  sense  of  dllquis,  does  not  influence 
the  mood  of  the  following  verb;  as,  Sed  cdsu  nescio  quo  in  ea  teyiijmri  cetas  nos- 
tra incidit.  Cic.  Lucus,  nescio  quo  cdsu,  nocturno  tempdre  incensus  est.  Nep. 
So,  also,  nescio  quumOdo,  '  somehow '  or  '  in  some  way ' ;  as,  Sed  nescio  quomo- 
do, inhceret  in  mentibus  quasi  aucjurium.  Cic.  In  like  manner  mirum  quam,  mi- 
rum  quantum,  nlmium  quantum,  and  the  like,  when  united  to  express  only  one 
dea,  do  not  afl'ect  the  m  J  of  the  vei'b ;  as,  Sales  in  dlceiulo  nimium  quantum 
vident, — very  much.  Cic 

SUBJUNCTIVE    IN    INSERTED    CLAUSES. 

§  S60.  1.  Wlien  a  dependent  proj)osition  containing  either 
an  accusative  with  the  inlinitive,  or  a  verb  in  the  subjunctive,  has 
a  clause  connected  with  it,  as  an  essential  part,  either  by  a  rela- 
tive, a  relative  adverb,  or  a  conjunction,  the  verb  of  the  latter 
clause  is  put  in  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

Quid  enim  pdtesi  esse  lam  perspicuum,  quam  esse  dliquod  niimen,  quo  hcec  re- 
ganturV  For  what  can  be  so  clear  as,  that  there  is  some  divinity  by  whom, 
these  things  are  governed?  Cic.  Here  the  thing  which  is  stated  to  be  clear  is, 
not  merely  esse  aliquod  numen,  that  there  is  a  god,  but  also  that  the  world  is 


piiibes,  I  shall  hear  why  it  is  that  you  du  not  a[iprove  r'''  Epicurus    Id     Justik 
ut,  i]ute  ven'ssent  ndves  Kub(eum  peterent.  Liv. 


ft 


880         SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  INSERTED  CLAUSES.         §  266 

Remark  1.  Hence  tlic  snbi'unctive  is  used  in  general  sentences,  in  which 
the  class  of  things  mentioned  exists  only  as  a  conception  or  iuea,  while  tlif 
individual  thing  has  a  veal  existence;  as,  Est  enitn  ulciscendi  et  puiiendi  mddus^ 
atque  hand  sdo  <tn  satis  sit  mm  qui  lacessierit  injui-ice  sua  paenitere,  i.  e.  each 
individual  offender  of  the  class. 

Rem.  2.  Wlien  the  principal  proposition  contains  a  subjunctive  denoting  a 
result,  after  ita,  tarn,  talis,  etc.,  the  inserted  clause  has  the  indicative;  as,  .Asia 
vero  tarn  djnma  est  et  fertllis,  ni — mullUudine  earum  reru7n,  quffi  exportantur, 
facile  omnibus  terris  antecellat.  Cic.  The  same  is  the  case  in  definitions ;  as, 
Videre  i(/itur  ojwrtet,  qua  sint  cmvenientia  cum  ipso  negvtio,  hoc  est,  quai  ab  re 
sep«?-are"  now  possunt.  Cic— So  also  explanatory  clauses,  especially  circumlo-  • 
cutions  introduced  by  a  relative  pronoun,  are  sometimes  found  with  the  indic- 
ative ;  as,  lidque  ille  ^Murius  item  eximie  L.  Ploliuvi  dilexit,  cujus  ingenio  putnbai 
ea,  qu!B  gessSrat,  ^wsse  celebrdri.  Ci6. 

Note.  To  this  rule  belongs  the  construction  of  the  oratio  obliqua,  '  indirect 
discourse,'  or  '  reported  speech,'  in  which  the  langiiage  of  another  is  presented, 
not  as  it  was  conceived  or  expressed  by  him,  but  in  the  third  person.  Thus, 
Csesar  said, '  I  came,  I  saw,  I  conquered,'  is  direct, — Caesar  said,  that '  he  came, 
saw,  and  conquered,'  is  indirect  discom-se. 

2.   In  the  ordtto  obliqua,  the  mam  proposition  is  expressed  by 
the  accusative  with  the   infinitive ;  and  dependent  clauses  con 
nected  with  it  by  relatives  and  particles,  take  the  subjunctive. 

Thus,  Cicero  and  Quintilian,  in  quoting  the  language  of  Marcus  AntoniuR 
make  use.  the  former  of  the  ardtio  directa,  the  latter  of  the  oi-dtio  obliqua  ;- 
Antonius  mquit,  '  A7-s  earum  rerum  est,  quaj  sciuntur ',  Antoiiius  says,  '  Art  be- 
longs to-  those  things  which  are  kno-wn.'  Cic.  Antonius  inquit,  artem  em'um 
rermii  esse,  quse  sciantur,  Antonius  says,  that  'art  belongs  to  those  things 
which  are  known.'  Quint. 

"  So,  Socrates  dicere  sdlrbat,  omnes,  in  eo  quod  scirent,  satis  esse  eloquenies,  So- 
crates was  accustomed  to  say,  that '  all  were  sufficiently  ejoquent  in  that  which 
they  understood?  Cic.  Gito  mirdn  se  aiebat,  quod  non  rideret  haruspex,  haruspi- 
cem  quum  vidisset.  Id.  Negui  jus  esse,  qui  miles  non  sit,  pugnare  cum  Iwstt.  Id. 
Indignabantur  tbi  esse  impcrium',  fibi  non  esset  libertas.  Liv.  Mque  Alhmienses 
quod  hdnestmn  non  esset,  id  we  utile  qutdem  (esse)  pHtdverunt.  Cic. 

Remark  1.  (a.)  When  the  subjunctive  would  be  necessary  in  the  oraiMi 
directa,  to  denote  liberty,  power,  etc.,  the  same  remains  in  the  oratio  obliqua, 
and  is  not  changed  into  the  infinitive  with  an  accusal  e ;  as,  Ad  luec  Aridvistus 
respondii,  qtmm  vellet,  congrederetur,  To  this  Ariovist  ■  replied,  that  '  he  might 
meet  him  when  he  pleased.'  Caes.  In  the  oratio  directa,  this  would  be  congre 
didris. 

(b.)  The  imperative  in  the  oratio  directa  is,  in  the  oratio  obliqua,  changed 
into  the  subjunctive;  as,  hoc  mihi  dicite,  which  in  the  oratio  obliqua  is,  hoc  sibi 
dicant,  or  hoc  sibi  dicerent,  according  to  the  tense  of  the  leading  verb. 

(c.)  Sd  also  direct  questions  addressed  to  the  second  person,  when  changed 
from  direct  to  indirect  spefich,  -become  subjunctives.  Liv.  6,  37. — But  such 
questions  when  not  addressed  to  the  second  person  are  expressed  in  the  ordiio 
obliqua  by  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive;  as  when  in  direct  speech  we  say, 
Etiamsi  veteris  coniiimiUicB  oblivisci  velim,  num  possum  etiam  receniium  injuridrum 
memoriam  ddponere  f  The  oratio  obliqua  will  be,  Gesar  resjMndit.  (histor.  perf.) — 
K  TXteris  contHmelice  oblivisci  vellet,  num  etiam  recentium  injUridrum — memdriarn 
'diqwrnire  posse  ?  Cfes.  Very  rarely  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive  is  found 
in  a  question  of  the  second  person,  as  m  Liv.  6,  17:  but  the  subjunctive  m 
qiaestions  of  the  third  person  is  less  micommon  in  Csesar;  as,  Quis  pdti  possetf 
for  rjuem  pdti  jMSse  ?  Q,uis  hoc  sibi  persudderet  f  for  quern  sibi  persudsHrum  f  See 
\  273,  3. 

Rem.  2.  A  vsTiter  may  state  his  own  past  words  or  thoughts  in  oi'dtio  obliqua 
either  preseiving  the  first  person,  or  adopting  the  third. 


.* 


§  2G7.  SYNTAX. IMPERATIVE    MOOD.  281 

Rem.  3.  When  the  inserted  clause  contains  the  words  or  sentiments  of  tha 
subject  of  tlie  leading  clause,  all  references  to  him  are  regularly  expressed  b^ 
the  reflexives  sui  and  situs  ;  as,  Eac  necessitate  cuarlus  dOmiiw  ndris  qui  sit  apertt^ 
mitlta  poUice/is,  si  se  co.iservasset.  Nep.  And  this  is  equally  trae  when  the 
word  to  which  the  pronoun  refers  is  not  in  reality  the  grammatical  subject, 
provided  it  may  still  be  conceived  as  such;  as,  Quiim  ei  in  suspicidnem  trnisset, 
aliquid  in  rpistdla  de  se  esse  scriptum.  Nep. ;  for  the  words,  quum  ei  in  suspicid- 
nem venisset,  are  equivalent  to  quum  suspicaretiir.   See  §  208,  (1.) 

Eeji.  4  The  tenses  to  be  used  in  changing  the  d>-alio  dlrecta  iuio  the  obliqua, 
d.;pend  on  the  tense  of  the  verb  which  introduces  the  quotation,  according  to 
the  nde,  ■^  258.  But  when  the  future  perfect  would  be  used  in  the  du-ect,  the 
pluperfect  is  necessary  in  the  oblique  form ;  but  the  perfect  is  used  after  tha 
present,  perfect  definite,  or  future. 

Rem.  5.  When  the  comiected  clause  contains  merely  a  descriptive  circum- 
stance, or  expresses  what  is  independent  of  the  sentiment  of  the  preceding 
clause,  it  takes  the  indicative;  as,  Imperdvit  Alexander  Lysippo,  ui  edrum  eqm- 
tum,  qui  apud  Gran'icum  ceciderant,  fdceret  stdtuas,  Alexander  ordered  Lysip- 
pus  to  make  statues  of  those  horsemen  who  had  fallen  at  the  Granieus 
Sometimes,  in  other  cases,  when  it  is  evident  from  the  sense,  that  the  connect- 
ed clause  is  an  essential  part  of  the  proposition,  the  indicative  is  used,  to  avoid 
giving  the  appearance  of  contingency  to  the  sentence. 

3.  A  clause  connected  to  another  by  a  relative  or  causal  con- 
junction, takes  the  subjunctive,  (whatever  be  the  mood  of  the 
preceding  verb,)  when  it  contains  not  the  sentiment  or  allegation 
of"  the  ■s\Titer,  but  that  of  some  other  person  alluded  to  ;  as, 

Socrates  accusdtus  est,  quod  corrumperet  juventutem,  Socrates  was  accused 
of  cornipting  the  youth,  lit.,  because  (as  wa-s  alleged)  he  corrupted  the  youth. 
Sewn  inrdcdbant,  cujus  ad  solenne  venissent.  They  invoked  the  god,  to  whose 
solemnities  they  had  come.  Liv.  Quos  viceris  dmicos  iibi  esse  cave  credns,  Do 
not  believe  that  those  whom  you  have  conquered  are  your  friends.  Here,  m 
the  first  example,  the  charge  of  corrupting  the  youth  is  not  made  by  the 
writei",  but  by  the  accusers  of  Socrates.  So,  in  the  second  example,  the  wor- 
shippei-s  allege  that  they  have  come  to  attend  upon  the  solemnities  of  the  god. 
In  th^  last,  it  is  implied  bj-  the  use  of  the  subjunctive  mood,  that  the  belief 
spoken  of  is  that  of  the  person  addressed: — quos  rlcisli  would  have  been  merely 
an  addition  of  the  speaker,  bj^  means  of  which  he  would  have  designated  the 
persons  whose  friendship  he  was  speaking  of;  and,  in  general,  the  indicative,  in 
such  sentences,  is  employed  in  those  statements  which  are  independent  of  the 
sentiments  of  the  person,  to  whose  thoughts  or  words  allusion  is  made.  Cf. 
supra,  2,  R.  5. 

REJtAitK.  In  the  preceding  cases,  it  is  not  directly  said  that  the  sentiments 
are  those  of  another  than  the  writer.  In  Cicero,  however,  the  words  dlco,  puto 
arhitror,  and  the  like,  are  often  constnied  m  a  similar  manner,  although,  pro- 
perly speaking,  not  these  verbs,  but  those  in  the  clauses  dependent  on  them, 
eliould  be  in  the  subjunctive ;  as,  Qmtm  enim,  HanmhaUs  permissu,  e^risset  </« 
castris,  rediit  paulo  post,  quod  se  oblltum  nescio  quod  diceret,... because  (as)  h» 
Baid,  he  had  forgotten  something.  Cic.  Ab  Atheniensihus,  Mcum  septdturce  intra 
urbem  ut  ddrent,  impetrdre  nonpotui,  quod  rellgione  se  impedlri  dicerent.  Id. 

BIPERATIVE    MOOD. 

§  fiGT.    The  imperative  mood  is  used  to  express  a  command 

tais/i,  advice,  or  exliortation  ;  as, 

Nosce  te,  Know  thyself.  Cic.  jEquam  memento  servire  meniem.  Kememba 
to  pre^erv-e  an  unniffted  mincL  Hor.  Hue  ades,  Come  hither.  Virg.  Pasce  cd 
peliat,  et  jwtum  pastas  age,  erinter  dcendum  occurtdre  capro  ciiveto.  Id. 

24* 


282  SYNTAX. INFINITIVE    MOOD.  §  268 

(1.)  The  imperative  pi-esent  denotes  that  an  action  is  to  be  performed  direct- 
ly or  at  once ;  as,  %e,  read ;  mdrere,  die ;  or  that  a  state  or  condition  is  to  con- 
tinue; as,  Vive,  live. 

(2.)  The  imperative  future  denotes  that  something  is  to  be  done,  as  soon  as 
something  else  has  taken  place ;  as,  Quum  vdletudini  tuce  consiilueris,  turn  con- 
Biilito  nCaigutioni.  Cic.  Prius  audlte  ^jm^cis ;  g'KSc?  quum  dixero,  si  pldcue.i-it, 
facitote.  Ter.  The  precedent  event  is  often  to  be  supplied  by  the  mind. 
Sometimes,  esj5ecially  in  poetry,  the  imperative  present  is  used  for  the  impera- 
tive future,  and,  on  the  other  liaiid,  sclto  and  sclUJte,  from  scio,  are  used  instead 
of  the, imperative  present,  which  is  wanting. 

(3.)  Hence  the  imperative  future  is  properly  used  in  C07itrac(s,  laws,  and 
wills;  and  also  in  j^recepts  and  rules  of  conduct ;  as.  Regie  imjxrio  duo  sxvaiz, 
iicjue  conxiiles  appellantor,  mll'iti(s  summum  jus  habento,  nemlni  parento,  itlii 
sdlvs iJopiiU  suprema  lex  esto.  Cic.  Non  sails  est  pulchra  esse  poemdta,  dulda 
stmto.  Hor.    Ignoscito  scepe  alteri,  numquam  tibi.  Syr. 

Remark  1.  With  the  imperative,  not  is  expressed  by  ne,  and  nor 
by  neve ;  as, 

Ne  tnnta  anlmis  assuesclte  bella.  V'irg.  Ne  crede  cdlori.  Id.  Hdminem  mor- 
luum  in  urbe  ne  sepelito,  neve  urito.  Cic. 

Note.  Non  and  nique  occur,  though  rarely,  with  the  imperative ;  as,  Vos 
qudque  non  cdris  aures  dnerate  Idpillis,  nee  prodUe  graves  insuto  vestlhus  auro. 
Ovid.  But  with  the  subjunctive  used  for  the  imperative  non  and  especially 
ncque  are  found  more  frequently.  Cf.  §  260,  E.  6,  {h.) — In  Plautus  and  Terence 
ne  is  of  common  occuiTence  both  with  the  imperative  and  with  the  present 
subjunctive,  and  with  no  difference  of  meaning;  but  later  poets  chiefly  use  ne 
with  the  i)resent  subjunctive,  and  ne  with  the  imperative  only  when  they  speak 
emphatically.  In  classical  prose  writers  the  periplu-astic  noli  with  the  infinitive 
is  preferred. 

Rem.  2.  The  present  and  perfect  subjunctive  are  often  used  instead  of  both 
tenses  of  the  imperative,  to  express  a  command  in  a  milder  form,  an  exhorta- 
tion, or  an  entreaty;  as,  Qui  ddlpisci  veram  glOriam  void,  justUice  fungatur 
o^iciis.  Cic.  Quod  dubitas,  ne  fiiceris.  Plin.  Ep.  See  §  260,  II.,  R.  6.  An  imper- 
ative of  the  perfect  passive  is  very  rarely  found ;  as,  At  vos  admouiti  noslris 
qv^que  cusibus  este.  Ovid.  Jacta  dlea  esto.  Cais.  in  Suet.  But  the  subjunctive 
is  more  common;  as,  Jacta  sit  dlea.  Sometimes  also  the  future  indicative;  as, 
Sed  valebis,  niedque  negotia  videbis,  meque  diis  juvantibus  ante  brumam  exspec- 
tabis,  instead  of  vale,  vide,  exspecta.  Cic.  Ubi  sententiam  meam  vobis  peregero, 
tuni  quibus  eddeni  pluci'bunt,  in  dextram  ^mr'teni  tdciti  transTbitis,  instead  of 
transltote.  Liv.     With  the  future  the  negative  is  iwn.  See  §  259,  R.  1,  (4.) 

Rem.  3.  Sometimes,  for  the  simple  affirmative  imperative,  cura  or  cUrdtn  vt, 
fac  ut,  or  fac  alone  is  used  with  the  subjunctive;  as,  Cura  ut  quani  primum 
venias,  (hnie  as  soon  as  possible.  Fac  erudias,  Instruct,  or  Take  care  to  in- 
struct. Cic.  For  the  negative  imperative  fac  ne,  cdve  ne  or  cave  alone,  with 
the  present  or  perfect  subjunctive  is  used;  but  especially  w/<  with  the  infini- 
tive ;  as.  Noli  jyutdre,  Do  not  suppose.  Cic.  Cdve  existimes,  Do  not  think,  lil 
Nollte  id  velle  quod  non  fei-i  pdtest,  el  cavete  ne  spe  prcesentis  pads  perpeiwrn 
pdcem  omittatis.  Id. 

mrmiTivE  mood. 

OF    THE    TENSES     Of'tHE    INFINITIVE. 

§  S6§.  1.  The  infinitive  partakes  of  the  properties  of  the  noun  and 
verb,  just  as  the  participle  combines  the  properties  of  the  adjective  and  vf^rb. 
It  expresses  simply  the  action  or  state  implied  in  the  verb  in  an  abstract  man- 
ver,  without  specifying  either  person,  number,  or  time,  and  thus  nit-rely  indi 
Astes  whf  *.lier  an  action  is  ui  progress  or  complefed. 


fi 


§  268.  SYNTAX. INFINITIVE    MOOD.  283 

2.  The  tenses  of  the  infinitive  denote  respectively  an  action 
as  present,  past,  or  flu  are,  in  reference  to  the  time  of"  the  verbs 
with  which  tiiey  are  connected ;  as, 

Hoc  facere  possum,  I  am  able  to  do  this.  Cic.  Vidi  noMros  ifiimlcos  cupere 
belluiti^  I  saw  that  our  enemies  were  desiring  war.  Id.  Ntc  gfmire  afrid  ces- 
sabit  titilur  ah  ulmo,  Nor  shall  the  turtle  dove  cease  to  coo  from  the  lofty  elm. 
Vii'g. —  Victorem  rictce  succxibuisse  queror,  I  complain  that  the  victor  has 
yielded  to  the  vanquished.  Ovid.  Se  a  senibus  audisse  dicebant,  Thev  said 
that  they  had  heard  (it)  from  the  old  men.  Cic.  Audiet  does  acnisse  _/i-)'rM»i 
'uve7itus,  The  vouth  will  hear  that  the  citizens  have  whetted  the  sword.  Hor. — 

egat  si'se.  verhum  esse  facturam,  He  declares  that  he  is  not  about  to  speak. 
Cic.  /^o^<5i(«7;i  audierat  «(>«  (latum  Ir'i -filio  uxorem  siu),  .After  he  had  heard 
that  a  wife  woul<l  not  be  given  to  his  son.  Ter.  Semper  existimaijitis  7uhil 
horitm  ros  vi.<ur<js  fore,  You  will  always  suppose  that  you  are  to  see  none  of 
these  things.  Cic. 

RK.yAniv  1.  {a.)  The  present  and  perfect  infinitives  are  sometimes  called  re- 
spectively the  infinitives  of  incomplete  and  of  completed  action.  The  present  in- 
fiuitive,  however,  is  sometimes  used  to  denote  a  completed  action.  This  is  the 
usual  constniction  with  »i<^MfKi;  but  in  such  case  the  speaker  transfers  him- 
self to  the  past,  and  the  expression  denotes  rather  a  recollection  of  the  pro- 
gress than  of  the  completion  of  the  action ;  as.  Hue  me  memivi  dicere,  I  remem- 
ber my  saijhi//  this.  Cic.  Teucrum  memini  Sldona  venire,  I  remember  Teucer's 
coming  to  Sidon.  Virg.  So  with  memdrid  teneo.  Cic.  Phil.  8,  10.  Scr'ibit  also 
is  construed  like  mcminit ;  as,  Cic.  Ofi".  3,  2;  and  after  the  same  analog}-,  and 
for  the  sake  of  vivid  expression  Cicero  says,  M.  Maximum  acceplmus /riciie 
celfu'e,  tacere,  dissimillare,  etc.,  though  speaking  of  things  which  he  had  not 
witnessed  himself.  So,  also,  with  recordor ; — Rhwdoi-  longe  omnibus  unum  an- 
teferre  Demosthenem.  Cic.  When  the  action  is  spoken  of  simply  as  a  fact,  the 
perfect  infinitive  is  used  with  memini ;  as,  Aleministis  me  ita  distribuisse  causam. 
Cic. 

(6.)  The  passive  voice  having  no  simple  form  for  expressing  the  completed 
state  of  suffering  makes  use  of  the  combination  of  the  perfect  participle  with 
esse  ;  as,  dmdtiis  esse,  to  have  been  loved.  When  thus  combined  esse  loses  its 
own  signification  of  a  continued  state,  and  when  this  state  is  to  be  expressed, 
another  uifinitive  must  be  chosen;  as,  Constrictam  jayn  horum  conscienth'i  tOneri 
conjumt'wnem  iuam  noil  tidies'?  Cic.  Sometimes,  however,  when  no  ambiguity 
can  arise,  esse  in  the  usual  combination  retains  its  original  meaning;  as,  Apiia 
PliUmiem  est,  omnem  mortm  Lucedcemdniorum  inflammiitum  esse  ciipidUCite  vin- 
cendi.  Id.*  Here  inflnmmdtum  esse  expresses  a  continued  or  habitual  state. — 
Ftdsse  with  thepertect  participle  denotes  a  state  completed  previous  to  a  certain 
past  time ;  as,  Jubet  bono  dnimo  esse ;  sopitum  fuisse  ret/em  sulnto  ictu.  Liv. 

Rem.  2.  To  express  the  result  of  an  action  rather  than  its  progress,  the  per- 
fect infinitive  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  the  present,  especially  after  sdtit 
hdbeo,  salts  mild  est,  piidet,  contentus  sum,  melius  erii,  volo  or  a  verb  of  equivalent 
meaning;  as,  Bacclidtur  votes,  maynum  si  pectdre  pussit  excussisse  deum.  Virg. 
Quitm  illam  m'mo  velit  atl'ic/isse.  Plin.  The  poets  use  the  infinitive  perfect  where 
we  shpuld  expect  a  present;  as,  Tendentes  Pelion  imposuisse  Oli/mjjo.  Hor. 

Rem.  3.  The  present  infinitive  is  also  sometimes  used  for  the  future,  espe>- 
cially  when  the  verb  has  no  future;  as,  Dvsine  fdta  deiuii  flecti  spci-dre,  Cease 
to  hope  that  the  fates  of  the  gods  will  be  changed.  Virg.  Frot/eniem  Trqjdno 
a  sanguine  diici  aud'i/'rat.  Id.  Cms  mihi  nrf/enfnm  dare  dixit,  1.  e.  se  ddturum 
esse.  Ter.    Cdto  affirmat  se  vivo  ilium  mm  triumphare.  Cic. 

Rkm.  4.  (rt.)  The  infinitive  future  active  is  formed  by  a  combination  of  tha 
piirticiple 'future  active  with  es.ft ;  •A?,,amdtu.rtis  esse;  the  infinitive  future  pas- 
sive by  a  combination  of  the  supine  in  wii  with  'iri ;  as,  dmdliim  Ir-i.  These 
future  infinitives  denote  an  action  or  state  a.s  continuing.  The  participle  in 
ru.i  whi  '.h  properly  expresses  intintion  (see  4  162,  14),  takes  also  tlie  infinitive 
fuisseh  express  a  past  intention;  as,  Scio  te  scripiM-uni  fuisse,  I   know   that 


284  SYNTAX. — INFINITIVE    MOOD.  §  269 

you  have  had  the  intention  to  write,  whence  it  was  an  easy  tra  isilion  t:,  the 
Bense,  '  you  would  have  written,'  in  conditional  sentences,  when  tho  conuition 
is  not  fulfilled  This  infinitive  is  used  especially  in  the  apodosis  of  hypotheti- 
cal sentences,  where  in  direct  speech  the  pluperfect  subjunctive  would  ba 
used  (cf  §  162,  14,  R.  3.);  as,  Etiamsi  obtennKrasset  ausjnciis,  idem  eveutiirum 
fuisse  pitlo.  Cic.  In  like  manner  the  infinitive  future  with  esse  is  used  in  the 
apodosis  of  hypothetical  sentences  instead  of  the  imperfect  subjunctive;  as, 
Iiiberlus,  nisi  jurasset,  sceliis  se  facturum  (esse)  arhitrabatur.  Id. 

(b.)  Instead  of  the  future  infinitive,  in  both  voices,  J'u/ii7-tmi  esse  or  fore, 
followed  by  t<i  and  the  subjunctive,  is  often  used;  the  present  and  imperfect 
subjunctive,  in  such  cases,  denoting  an  unfinished,  the  perfect  and  pluperfect 
a  finished,  future  action ;  as,  Numquam  ptitdi'i  fore,  ut  supplex  ad  te  venirem, 
I  never  supposed  (that  it  would  happen)  that  I  should  come  a  suppliant  to  you. 
Cic.  Suspicor  fore,  ut  infringatur  homininn  improbitas.  Id.  Cn'dchnm  fore,  ut 
epistulam  scripsisses. — So,  also,  in  the  passive  for  a  conthiued  state  of  future 
suffering  the  present  and  imperfect  are  used ;  as.  Credo  fore,  ut  epistulam  scrT- 
batur,  and,  Oredebam  fore,  ut  epistola  scnberetur.  But  to  express  a  completed 
state  m  future  time  the  perfect  pai'ticiple  is  employed;  as,  Quos  sj)ero  brevi 
tempdre  tecum  c5pu.latos  fore.  Cic.  Quod  rideret  nomine  jjcicis  beUum  involtitnm 
fore.  Id.  This  construction  is  necessarilj'  used,  when  the  verb  has  either  no 
future  active  participle,  or  no  supine;  as,  in  such  case,  the  regular  future  infin- 
itive cannot  be  formed;  as,  Spero  J'dre  vt  sdpias. — Fore  is  found  in  two  pas- 
sages pleonastically  joined  with  the  future  participle  active,  viz.  Te  ad  me 
fore  vcntiirum.  Cic.  Att.  5,  21:  and  Quum  sendtus  censeret — libenter  factiiros 
fore.  Liv.  6,  42.  ♦ 

Rem.  5.  (a.)  The  periphrastic  infinitive  formed  by  the  future  active  partici- 
ple with  fuisse,  denotes  a  future  action  contingent  upon  a  condition  which  was 
not  fidfilled;  and,  in  the  apodosis  of  a  conditional  sentence,  corresponds  to  the 
pluperfect  subjunctive ;  us,  A71  censes  me  iayiios  Mbores  suscepturum  fuisse,  si 
iisdem  finibus  gloriam  meam  quibus  vitam  essein  ierminatii7-us  f  Do  you  think 
that  I  should  have  undertaken  so  gi-eat  labors  if,  etc.  Cic.  Ut  persjAcuum  sit 
omnibus,  nisi  tantn  dcerbitas  injiirue  fuisset,  numquam  illos  in  eum  locum  progi'es- 
suros  fuisse,... .that  they  never  would  have  come  into  that  place.  Id. 

[b.)  Fatdrum  fuisse  with  ut  and  the  imperfect  subjunctive  passive,  corres- 
ponds to  the  infinitive  fuisse  with  the  future  participle  active  in  a  conditional 
proposition;  as,  Nisi  nuncii  essent  alldti,  existimdbant  plerique  futurum  fuisse, 
ut  oppidu7n  amittt'retur,...that  the  tcwn  would  have  been  lost.  Cses. 

(c.)  The  participle  future  passive  cannot  be  used  to  form  an  infinitive  future 
passive,  since  it  always  retains  the  meaning  of  necessity,  and  in  this. sense  hag 
three  regular  infinitives,  dmandum  esse,  dmandum  fuisse,  and  dmandum  fore ; 
as,  Instare  hiemem,  aut  sub  pellibus  habendos  mtlites  fore,  aut  diff erendum 
esse  in  cestdtem  bellum.  Liv. 

Rem.  6.  In  the  apodosis  of  a  conditional  sentence,  the  perfect  infinitive. 
like  the  past  tenses  of  the  indicative,  (see  §  259,  R.  4.),  sometimes  corresponds 
to  th(<  pluperfect  subjunctive;  as,  ( Dixit)  sibivitam  f  ilia  sun  cariorem  fuisse, 
n  Itbirce  ac  pUdiccB  vlvere  licitum  fuisset,  (He  said)  that  the  life  of  his  daughter 
had  been  dearer  to  him  than  his  own,  if  it  had  been  permitted....  Liv.  This 
use  of  the  perfect  infinitive  is  necessarj%  when  the  verb  has  no  future  p.artici- 
pie;  as,  Equidem  Pldtunem  existimo,  si  genus  fdrense  dicendi  tractdre  wluisset, 
grdt'issime  et  copidsissime  potuisse  dicere, — would  have  been  able  to  speak.  Cic. 

8  /«fely«  The  infinitive  may  be  regarded  either  as  a  verb  or  as  an  ab- 
stract noun,  {a.)  As  a  verb  it  is  used  either  indefinitely  (§  143,  4),  or  with  a 
subject  of  its  own,  which  is  put  in  the  accusative,  (§  239).  But  the  infinitive 
passive  of  neuter  and  sometimes  of  active  verbs,  like  the  third  person  singular 
of  that  voice,  maybe  used  impersonally  or  without  a  sulject;  as,  Vides  iota 
propi'varl  lltOre,  You  see  a  stir  is  made  all  along  the  shore.  Vu-g.  See '5 §  209 
K.  3,  (2.),  and  239,  R.  4.  The  present  infinitive  has  sometimes,  m  narration,  a 
subject  in  tlis  nominative    See  ^  209,  R.  6. 


§  2()9.  SYNTAX. INFINITIVE    MOOD.  285 

(6.)  As  a  noun,  the  infinitive,  either  alone  or  with  a  subject-accusativo,has 
two  cases,  the  nominative  and  the  accusative,  and  is  accordingly  used  eitlier 
as  the  subject  or  the  object  of  a  verb. 

THE    INFINITIVE    AS    THE    SUBJECT    OF    A    VERB 

The   infinitive,  eitlier  with  or  without  a   subject-accusativej 

may  be  the  subject  of  a  verb ;  as, 

Ad  rempWjllcam  pertbiet  me  conservari,  It  concerns  the  state  that  I  should 
be  preserved.  Cic.  Numquam  est  utile  peccare,  To  do  wrong  is  never  useful.  Id. 
Majlis  drdi'ciis  est  jjcirta  araittere  quam  omnino  non  paravisse.  SaU.  In  the  fli'st 
example  conserrdi-i  with  its  subject  accusative  me  is  the  subject  of  jjertinet, 
and  is  equivalent  to  'my  preservation':  in  the  second,  peccare  is  the  subject 
of  est  fttde.   See  §  202,  2,  and  IE.  R.  2. 

Remark  1.  A  general  truth  may  be  expressed  by  the  infinitive  without  a 
subject;  as,  Fiicinus  est  vincJre  civem  Romdnuin,  To  bind  a  Roman  citizsn,  or, 
that  one  should  bind  a  Roman  citizen,  is  a  crime.  But  in  .such  case  the  verb 
esse  and  verbs  denoting  to  cqjpear,  to  he  considered  or  called  i^  210,  R.  3.),  re- 
quire the  noun  or  adjective  of  the  predicate  to  agree  with  the  implied  subject 
in  the  accusative;  as,  ^quuni  est  peccdtis  veninm  poscentem  reddere  rursus. 
Hor.    Atlicus  maximum  mslhiidvit  qiuestum,  memorem  gratumiy^je  cognosci.  Nep. 

Note.  The  indefinite  pronoun  dliquem  or  dliquos  may  in  such  cases  be  sup- 
plied, and  the  same  indcfiniteness  may  be  expressed  by  te  or  nos,  cf.  §  209,  R.  7 ; 
but  it  is  still  more  frequently  expressed  by  tlie  hifinitive  passive.  Hence  the 
sentence  Fdcinus  est  vinclre  clvem  RomdHian,  may  also  be  expressed  by  Fdcinm 
est  vinciri  c'lvem  Romdniuii.  So,  Quum  vidnreni  de  eorum  virtute  non  desperari. 
Nep. — The  impersonal  verbs  licet,  decet,  dportet,  opus  est^  and  nece^se  esi,  when 
there  is  no  definite  subject,  are  joined  with  the  infinitive  active  alone;  but 
when  there  is  a  subject-accusative,  they  are  connected  >vith  the  passive  con- 
struction ;  as,  a c  t.  licet  hoc  J'dcere ;  decet  specimen  cdjjere  tv  hac  re;  pass,  licet 
hoc  Jieri;  decet  specimen  cdpi. 

Rem.  2.  The  infinitive,  with  or  without  a  subject  accusative,  is  often  the 
subject  of  a  proposition,  when  the  substantive  verb  with  a  noun,  a  neuter  ad- 
jective, or  iin  impersonal  verb  forms  the  predicate.  Of  tbis  kind  are  jiistvm, 
cequum,  verisimile,  consentdneum,  dpertum — est,  erat,  etc.,  7iei-esse  est,  opus  est; — 
appdret,  constat,  convenit,  decet,  licet,  oportet ;  intdliyitur,  perspicitur,  etc. ;  as, 
Cui  verba  dare  difficile  est.  Ter.  ]\Iendacem  memorem  o«se  dportet.  Quint. 
Legem  brevem  esse  dportet.  Sen.  Constat  pirofecto  ad  sdluien  c'wium  inventas 
esse  leges.  Cic.  Non  enim  me  hoc  jam  dicCa-e  7>«d'^7.  Id.  See  §  209,  R.  3, 
(5.),  (a.) 

Rem.  3.  The  infinitive  may  itself  be  the  subject  of  an  infinitive;  as.  Audio 
non  licere  cuiijuam  in  nave  cdpillos  depunere.  Ter. 

Rem.  4.  The  infinitive,  with  or  without  a  subject  accusative,  may  also  be 
the  predicate  nominative;  as,  ImpHne  qucelibet  facere  id  est  re.gem  esse.  Sail. 
In  tliis  sentence  y«cere  is  the  subj'ect,  and  rHyem  esse  is  the  predicate;  for  id, 
which  .only  represents  by  a  kind  of  apposition  the  clause  impHne  qituelibet  fdcere. 
can  be  omitted. 

Rem.  -5.  When  the  infinitive  esse,  (or  otliers  of  shnilar  meaning,  as,  Jieri, 
vlrHrv,  vititm  d('(/ere,  cedere,  dbire,  etc.),  with  a  predicate  adjective  (or  noun),  is 
joined  with  licet,  such  predicate  is  put  in  the  accusative,  if  the  subject-accu>.i- 
tive  of  the  infinitive  is  expressed,  and  sometimes,  also,  when  it  is  omitted,  but 
more  fixquently,  in  the  latter  case,  the  predicate  adjective  or  noun  its  attra'-ted 
to  the  dative  following  licet;  as,  Ut  eum  liceitt  ante  tempus  consuiem  i. 'Ti. 
Auct.  ad  Her.  Meiiios  esse  jam-  mm  llcdbit.  Cic.  Si  clvi  Jtomdno  licet  -  ise 
Giiditanum.  Id. — Licuit  enim  esse  utioso  Themislocli.  Id.  Mild  neglig<yati  t  ise 
mm  licet.  Id.  Sibiv'Uam  fiU<e  sua  cdriurem  fitisse,  si  liberie  «t:  pudlc-ir  -i"  ••a 
Sciti.m  J'uisstl  (soil.  ei).  Liv.    So  also  nectsse  est  with  the  pi^edicata  va  ttw 


886  SYNTAX. INFINITIVE    MOOD.  §  270 

dative.  VoOis  necesse  est  fortibus  viris  esse.  Liv. — But  licet,  Sported,  an  1  neceast 
est  are  also  joined  with  the  subjunctive  mood,  and  hence  is  derived  the  -Don. 
struction  of  licet  as  a  conjunction.    See  §  263,  2. 

THE    INFINITIVE    AS    THE     OBJECT    OF    A    VERB. 

§  STO.     The  infinitive,  either  with  oi'  without  a  subject-a'v 

cusative,  may  be  the  object  of  a  verb ;  as, 

Bcec  vitare  cujnmus,  We  desire  to  avoid  this.  Cic.  Poetas  omnliio  non  cmtor 
attingere,  I  do  not  at  all  attempt  to  read  the  poets.  Id.  Sententiani  va^^.rt 
cupierunt,  They  desired  that  the  opinion  should  prevail.  Id.  S^iero  te  valere, 
1  hope  that  you  are  well.  Id. 

Note.  The  mfinitive  as  the  object  of  a  verb  supplies  the  place  of  the  accusa- 
tive of  the  Oiing,  and  hence  many  active  verbs  besides  the  infinitive  take  in 
the  active  voice  an  accusative  of  the  person,  cf.  §  2.31,  R.  3,  (6.),  and  in  the 
passive  retain  the  infinitive;  as,  Cousilles  jiibentur  scribere  exercltum.  Muros 
adire  vetiti  sunt.    Cf.  §  234,  I. 

Remark  1.  The  infinitive  alone  may  also  depend  upon  an  adjec- 
tive, and  sometimes  upon  a  noun. 

(a.)  It  may  depend  upon  relative  adjectives,  (see  §  213,  R.  1),  which,  by  the 
poets,  are  joined  with  the  infinitive  instead  of  their  usual  construction  witli  the 
genitive  of  the  gerund,  etc.;  as,  Cedere  nescius.  Hor.  Avidi  commlttere  puy- 
nam.  Ovid.  Ciipidus  mor'n'i.  Id.  Cantdre  perlti  Arcades.  Virg.  Callidus  con- 
dere  furto.  Hor.  QnidlUiet  imY>6tenii  sperdre.  Id.  Sutrliias  fi'icei-e  insc'ms.  Ya.rr. 
Insuetus  vera  audire.  Liv.  Certa  mdi-i.  Virg.  Felicior  unguere  tela.  Virg. 
^0,  A\\Aa.Tii  omnia  pierjKti,  Resolute  to  endure  every  thing.  Hor.  SoUers  ornare 
Cypnssis,  Skilful  to  adorn.  Ovid.  Segnes  solvere  nddum.  Hor.  Indocilis  pau- 
periem  pdti.  Id.     Non  iGuis  fata  r^cludere.  Id.    See  §  213,  R.  4,  (1.) 

(6.)  It  may  also  depend  upon  adjectives  signifying  vsij'ulness,  Jitness,  etc., 
which  are  sometimes  by  the  poets  construed  with  the  infinitive  instead  of  tlie 
dative;  as,  {Tibia)  iis]mi\re  et  adesse  cJwris  erat  utilis.  Hor.  ^tas  mollis  et 
apta  regi.  Ovid.  Fotts  ctiam  rlvo  dare  nomen  jdoneus.  Hor.  Friiyes  consiamcre 
nilti.  Id.  And.  ?dtex  difjnus  2mA  contenius ;  as,  \)\s.nxv^  dmdri.  Virg.  Cf.  4  244, 
R.  2,  (i.) 

(c.)  Upon  a  noun;  as,  Tempus  est  hujus  lihri  tkcere  yinem,  It  is  time  to 
finish  this  book.  Nep.  Jniit  consilia  rcges  tolK-re,  He  devised  a  plan  to  destroy 
the  kings.  Id.  En  ernt  confessio  caput  rcrum  licmuim  esse.  Liv.  Cfipido  inces- 
eerat  ^ithidpiam  invisOre.  Curt.  Quibus  in  dtio  vivere  co]ji;i  erat.  Sail.  So,  Nee 
mihi  sunt  vires  ininilcos  pellere  ttctis,  instead  of  pellendis  inimicis,  or  ad  pellendos 
inimhos.  Ovid. 

(d.)  If  for  the  infinitives  depending  on  nouns  or  adjectives  other  nouns  were 
substituted,  these  last  would  be  put  in  the  genitive,  dative,  or  ablative;  and 
hoice  such  infinitives  may  perhaps  be  properly  regarded  as  exceptions  to  the 
rule,  that  tlie  infinitive  has  but  two  cases,  the  nominative  and  the  accusative. 

Rem.  2.  (rt.)  The  infinitive  with  the  accusative  sometimes  stands  uncou- 
nected,  especially  in  exclamations  and  indignant  inteiTogations,  where  cridilnle 
estf  or  verumne  estf  maybe  supplied;  as,  Mme  i?icepto  desistere  victamf  That 
I,  vanquished,  should  desist  fi'om  mv  undertaking  V  Virg.  iWe  mlserum  !  ie  in 
tanlas  cerumnas  propter  me  mcidisael  Cic. — But  m/,  also,  with  the  subjunctive, 
either  with  or  without  an  interrogative  particle,  may  be  used  to  express  a 
j|uestiou  with  indignation;  nf-,  Ktne  (f,cil.  pntri)  c(/o  nt  adverser?  Liv.  Tu  nt 
fiiiuiuam  ie  corrlgas?  Cic.  Judicio  ut  drdto-r  decumdnum  persequaturV  Id.; 
where  fieri  pdtestf  may  be  supplied. 

(6.)  So,  in  the  ordtio  obliqua,  the  words  signifying  said,  saying,  etc.,  are  often 
'jmitted,  ur  implied  in  a  preceding  verb  or  phrase;  as.  Id  facile  effici  pose^ 
&cil.  dudt.  Nep.    Uuem  dgnum  datiirum  fugtentibm  f  Curt. 


§  271.  SrNTAX. INFINITIVE    MOOD.  287 

Rem.  3.  The  infinitive  is  sometimes  to  be  supplied;  and  esse  and  fuisstt 
with  a  prediciite  adjective,  and  also  in  the  compound  forms  of  thi  infinitive, 
both  active  and  j)assive,  are  commonly  omitted,  especially  after  verbs  of  s«^- 
ill(/,  tliiukini/,  knoicinrj,  and  perceivhifj  ;  as,  Vos  cognovi  fortes.  Sail.  Quern  pul- 
mm  memordn.  'I'ac. — So,  also,  with  the  infinitive  perfect  passive  when  depend- 
ing on  vOlo,  7idlii,  cujiio,  and  uportei ;  aH^Addlescenii  morem  f/estum  uporUdl.  Ter. 
Qii-xl  jdiii  pridem  factum  Oportuit.  Cic. — Sometimes  in  a  relative  clause  an  in- 
finitive is  to  be  supplied  from  tlie  finite  verb  of  the  main  proposition;  as, 
Qims  vOlult  omiies  intaficit,  scil.  interficere.  Ne  illaiii  quUkm  conseqauniur, 
'jitum  putant,  yrni'unn;  i.  e.  quam  se  consecutiiros  putant.  Cic. 

I  HE  INFINITIVE  WITHOUT  A  SUB  JE  CT- AC  C  US  ATI  VE. 

>?  S7S.  The  infinitive,  without  a  subject-accusative,  is  used  aftor 
verbs  denoting  ability,  obligation,  intention  or  endearor ;  after  verba 
signifying  to  begin,  continue,  cease,  abstain,  dare,  fear,  hesitate,  or  be 
'.font;  and  after  the  passive  of  verbs  of  *'a^iVi^,  believing,  reckoning, 
etc. 

Note  1.  To  th(tse  classes  belong  pos5HOT,  qiieo,  rjcqufo,  valeo,  r/cbeo ;  euro,  rogito, 
ctererno.  stdtuo,  ronst'iiiio.  histitiio,  paro ;  Conor,  nltor,  teni/o,  contendo,  lento,  mdtiiro, 
liropSro,  (igsfredior,  perscvcro, ; — capi,  inc'ifiio,  pergo,  desino,  desisto,  intermilto,  purco, 
recuso ;  soleo,  assiirsco,  consiiesco,  insuesco;  aiiileo,  vSreor,  mctiio,  reform'ido,  litiieo, 
korreo,  diiblto  : — aiidior,  credor,  existiinor,  fSror,  nigor,nunlior,  per/uhfior,  putur,  trador, 
jiibeor,  videor,  and  rogor. 

Note  2.  When  the  preceding  verbs  are  joined  with  esse,  haberi,  judicari, 
vldiri,  etc.,  the  jiredicate  noun  or  adjective  is  put  in  the  nominative;  as,  Solei 
irxiWi  vld'ri ;  «!irfe  sapiens  esse ;  ccBjnt  viihi  molestus  esse;  debes  esse  dillgens; 
potest  liber  esse:  and  so  also  inereiur,  scit,  didlcit  liber  esse. 

Note  3.  The  poets,  in  imitation  of  the  Greeks,  iise  the  infinitive  after  fiige, 
aufer,  a'tce,  paixe,  mhnnnto ;  paveo,  refiifjio,  qiuei-o,  urgeo,  Idboro,  dmo,  gaudeo, 
furo,  culleo,  suiiw,  initio,  remitto,  pdtior,  Jitro,  conjuro,  pugno,  ndtus,  and  some 
other  verbs,  especially  to  denote  a  tcish  or  purpose ;  as,  Iiitroiit  vtdcre.  Ter.  ' 
Non  te  frangert  ptrscquor.  Hor.  Non  pupidare  pindtes  vcnimus.  Virg.  In  this 
construction,  the  poets  are  sometimes  imitated  by  the  later  prose  wi-iters. 

Remakk  1.  Many  of  the  verbs  above  enumerated,  instead  of  the  infinitive, 
may  be  foUowetl  by  the  subjunctive  with  tit,  ne,  etc. ;  and  witli  some  of  them 
this  Is  the  regular  construction ;  as,  Sententiam  ne  diceret,  recusCivit.  Cic. 

Rem.  2.  The  passives  dlcor,  trador,  feror,  narror,  reperior,  existimor,  vldeor, 
etc.,  may  either  be  used  pei-sonally,  with  the  infinitive  alone,  or  impersonally, 
fjllowed'  by  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive.  Thus  we  may  say,  I\ldter 
P'lusdnia  eo  tempOrc  vixisse  dicitur,  or,  Dicitur  to  tempore  mdtrem  PauA'nnst 
vi.xisse,  The  mother  of  Pausanias  is  said  to  have  been  living.. ..or,  It  is  said 
that  the  mother  of  Pausanias  was  living....  Nep.  The  former  construction  i8 
more  .jommon  especially  with  videor,  see  §  272,  R.  6;  but  the  latter  is  frequent 
with  nuiUidtiir,  and  very  common  with  the  compound  tenses,  trddltum  est, 
proilllurii  est,  etc.,  and  with  the  participle  future  passive ;  as,  crcdendum  est, 
inttlligendum  est,  etc.;  as,  Quorum  nominem  tdb m  ftiisse  credendum,  etc.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  The  infinitive  without  a  subject  1=  used  after  a  verb,  only  when  ih 
denotes  an  action  or  state  of  the  stibject  of  thhi  verb. 

1!km.  •!.  The  verbs  to  wish  or  desire,  vulo,  nOlo,  mdlo ;  viipio,  opto,  studeo,  have 
a  twofold  construction :— the  infinitive  without  a  subject-accusative  is  used 
ftfter  them,  when  the  subject  remains  the  same;  and  when  followed  by  e^se, 
hdbrri,  etc.,  the  predicate-noun  or  adjective  is  in  the  nominative; — but  the 
accusative  with  the  infinitive  is  used  when  the  subject  is  changed,  or  when  a 
-ellexive  uronoun  of  the  same  person  follows.  We  say,  therefore,  rdlo  iri'id'ilus 
/iV//,  and  un  the  other  hand,  volo  tt  I'rudiluin  fcri,  and  voto  me  iruditum  feri. 
So,  V'Uo  ia  esse^  quevi  tu  me  esse  vuluiili.  Cic.   Ciipio  me  esse  clementem,  ciq)io— 


288  SYNTAX. INFINITIVE    MOOD.  §272. 

me  non  dissdlidum,  videri.  Id. ;  or,  omitting  the  pronoun,  cupic  esse  clemens  nee 

dissolutiis  yjc/e;-*. —  Omnis  hdmlnes  qui  sese  student  prcBsidre  tetens  aiiimdllbus, 
etc.  Sail. 

Note,  t.  Vdlo  is  used  with  the  present  infinitive  passive ;  as.  Me  amSri  vulo, 
I  wish  to  be  beloved;  hoc  velim  intelli(/i,  I  wish  this  to  be  understood;  and  also 
with  the  infinitive  perfect  passive  to  ddhote  the  easier  desire  that  something 
should  be  instantl)'  accomplished;  as,  LeCjCiti  quotl  erant  appdldti  supcrbius, 
Covinthvm  patres  vestri — exstinctum  esse  vdliierunt.  Cic. ;  but  it  occxirs  most 
frequently  with  the  omission  of  esse  ;  as,  hoc  factum  vdlo ;  nunc  illos  commoni- 
tos  velim :  so,  pairinm  exstinctam  cfipit. 

Note  5.  The  nominative  with  the  infinitive  after  verbs  of  saying,  perceiv- 
ing, etc.  (§  272),  is  rare  even  in  poetiy,  and  is  an  imitation  of  the  Greek  idiom, 
which  requires  the  nominative  with  the  infinitive  Avhen  the  sam6  subject  re- 
mains; as,  Phdsrlus  ilk,  quern  vidciis,  hospUes,  ait  fuisse  ndriiim  celerrimus. 
Catull.  Quia  retillit  Ajax  esse  Jovis  nepos,  instead  of  se  esse  Jovis  ncpotem 
Ovid.     Se7isit  medics  dSlapsus  in  Iwstes,  instead  of  se  delapsum  esse.  Virg. 

THE    INFINITIVE     WITH     A     SUBJECT-ACCUSATIVE. 

§  ST^.      The   infinitive  with  a  subject-accusative  follows  verbs 
of  saijiug,  Ih inking,  knowing,  jje?'ceiyi/!^,  and  the  lilce  ;  as, 

Videbat,  id  non  posse  fien,  He  saw  that  that  could  not  be  done.  Nep.  Sentit 
animus,  st  sua  vi,  non  dliend,  mdvcri.  Cic.  Audivi  te  venire.  Me  in  ejus  putes- 
tdte  dixi  fore.  Id.  Affirmant  mllitum  jdcere  dnimos.  Liv.  /Soepe  venit  ad  aui'os 
meas,  te  ist/id  nlmis  crebro  dicere.  Cic.  Earn  puynarn  ad  Pirusinm  p)U(indtinti 
(esse),  quldtim  auctores  sunt.  Liv. 

Note  1.  This  rule  includes  all  such  verbs  and  phrases  as  denote  the  exercise  of  the 
external  seuses  aud  intellectual  faculties,  or  the  conimunicatiou  of  thought  toothers; 
as,  auilio,  vvleo,  sentio,  dnitnadverto,  cognosco,  intellign,  perc'ipio,  /lisco,  scin,  nescin, 
eenseo,  spero.  despero,  cogito,  judico,  credo,  arbitror,  pnlo,  oplnor,  diico,  statuo,  inei/tlni, 
recordor,  ohllviscor,  ijpliiio  est,  spes  est,  em.; — dlco,  trailo,  prodo,  scrtbo,  refero,  nnrro, 
nuntio,  confirmo,  nSgo,  ostendo,  indico,  doceo,  cerliorem  facio,  demimstro,  per/nbm, 
promitto,  poWireoi ,  spnndeo,  etc.;  but  with  most  of  these  a  differeut  construction  often 
occurs.     See  §  273 

Note  2.  The  propositions,  whose  subjects  are  thus  put  in  the  accusative  and  their 
verbs  in  the  iuiiuitive.  are  those  which  are  directly  dependent  on  the  verbs  of  saying 
and  perceiving.  Respecting  the  clauses  inserted  in  such  dependent  propositions,  s"e 
S  266,  1. 

Note  3.  (a.)  When  a  relative  clause  inserted  in  a  proposition  containing 
the  accusative  with  the  infinitive,  has  the  same  verb  as  the  proposition  in 
which  it  is  inserted,  but  such  verb  is  not  repeated,  the  noun  which  is  the  sub- 
ject of  the  relative  clause  is  also  put  by  attraction  in  the  accusative ;  as,  Te 
tuspicor  eisdem  rebus,  qulbus  me  ipsum,  commoveri.  If  the  verb  is  expressed 
Vfe  must  !^Ay,  eisdem  rebus  commdwi-i,  quibus  (ego)  ipse  commdveor.  So,  also, 
in  inserted  relative  clauses  where  the  verb,  if  expressed,  would  be  in  the  sub- 
junctive, (sec  §  266,  2.);  as,  (  Vei'res)  aiebat  se  tantidem  ceslimasse,  quanii  Sacer- 
dotem,  -for  quTinti  Sdcerdos  cBStimasset.  Cic.  Gnifitftur  se  in  ed  jxirte  fuisse  qua 
le,  qud  virum  omni  laude  dignum  patrem  tuum.  Id. 

(b.)  The  same  is  the  case  with  the  particle  quam  after  a  comparative,  see 
\  256,  R.  5,  [a.)  But  sometimes  when  quam  connects  a  clause  to  a  preceding 
proposition  containing  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive,  the  same  construction 
follows  that  precedes  quum,  even  when  the  verb  of  the-latter  clause  is  express- 
ed; as,  Nonne  tlbi  ajjirmdvi  quidns  7ne  potius  perpessurum,  qnam  ex  ltd  lid  ad 
bellum  civile  me  exiturum;  instead  of  quam  ex'trem  or  quam  ut  exlrem.  Cic. 

(<.'.)  In  long  speeches  in  the  ordtio  obl'tqita,  relative  clauses,  having  a  verb 
of  their  own  which  should  pnjyierly  be  in  the  subjunctive,  are  put  in  the  ac- 
cusa  tve  witli  the  infinitive,  if  the  relative  clause  is  not  subordinate  to  the  one 
with  the  infinitive,  and  which  is  governed  by  a  verb  of  saying  or  perceiving, 


§  272.  SYNTAX. INFINITIVE    MOOD.  289 

»jut  is  ratlier  coftrdinate  with  it;  in  which  case  the  relative  i«  equivalent  to  the 
demonstrative  with  et;  as.  Nam-  illorum  urbem  ut  propzif/nOculujii  ojyjidgitum  esie 
burhdris,  upud  quam  jam  his  classes  rigias  fecisse  naufrayium  ;  for  et  Opud  earn 
jam  bis,  etc. — In  Li^-i,'  and  Tacitus  the  same  constraction  sometimes  occurs 
even  after  conjunctions ;  as  after  quvm  in  the  sense  of  '  wliile,'  see  ^  20.3, 5,  W.  3 ; 
after  quamquam  on  account  of  its  absolute  signilication,  see  §  198,  4,  and  after 
quia.  ■ 

Note  4.  The  personal  pronouns,  which,  with  the  other  moods,  are  expressed 
only  when  they  are  emphatic,  must  be  alwavs  expressed  in  the  accusative 
with  thfi  infinitive.  The  verbs  'to  promise'  and  'to  hope'  are  in  En£;lish 
usually  joined  with  the  infinitive  present  without  a  pronoun,  but  in  Latin  not 
only  is  the  pronoun  expressed,  but  the  infinitive  which  follows  is  iu  the  future; 
as,j  He  promised  to  come,'  is  in  Latin,  Proimsit  se  veniurum  (sell,  es.s-e,  see 
§  270,  R.  3).  But  the  infinitive  present  sometimes  occurs  after  these  verbs; 
as,  Polliceninr  ohsides  dure,  C:es.  B.  G.  4,  21 ;  and  the  pronoun  is  occasionally 
omitted,  see  §  239,  R.  2  and  3. 

RK5tAKK  1.  When  ambiguity  would  arise  from  the  subject  and  the  object 
of  the  verb  being  both  in  the  accusative,  the  passive  infinitive  is  substilitted 
for  the  active,  by  which  means  tlie  subject  is  put  in  the  ablative,  or  in  the 
accusative  with  _?>er  ;  as,  Ne  fando  qiiidem  aud'itum  est,  crdcodllmn  violdtum  esse 
ab  .Egyptio;  instead  of  ^gyptium  crucud'dum  vivlasse.  Cic. 

Reji.  2.  After  verbs  of  saying,  thinking,  etc.,  the  conjunction  that  is  omitted 
m  translating  from  English  into  Latin,  and  the  subject  of  the  dependent  clause 
is  put  in  the  accusative,  and  its  verb  in  the  infinitive. 

Rem.  3.  The  accusative  with  the  infinitive  is  sometimes  rendered  into  Eng- 
lish by  a  similar  form;  as.  Si  vis  me  flere.  If  you  wish  me  to  weep.  Hor.;  but 
the  de])endent  clause  is  more  frequently  connected  to  the  verb  of  saying,  etc., 
by  the  conjunction  that,  and  the  infinitive  translated  by  the  indicative  or  po- 
tential mood ;  as,  Seniiiiiiis  nivem  esse  albaiu.  We  perceive  that  snmo  is  white. 
Cic.  Sometimes  the  dependent  clause  is  annexed  to  the  other  without  the 
conjunction;  as,  Credunt  se  neghgi.  They  think  they  are  neylected.  Ten 

Rem.  4.  A  pi-esent  infinitive  corresponds  to  the  imperfect  indicative,  when 
with  an  accusative  it  follows  a  preterite  tense ;  as.  Dixit  Gesdrem  venire.  He 
said  that  C»sar  was  coming.  C»s.  In  like  manner  the  perfect  infinitive  with 
an  accusative  after  a  preterite  tense  corresponds  to  the  pluperfect  indicative; 
as,  Dixit  Gesdrem  venisse,  He  said  that  Csesar  had  come.    See  §  268,  2. 

Rem.  5.  The  present  infinitive,  after  verbs  of  sense,  is  often  equivalent  to 
the  present  participle;  as,_Surgere  videt  Imam  He  sees  the  moon  (to  rise) 
rising.  Virg.  Arma  riitilare  vident.  Id.  V)debis  collucere  faces.  Id.  Nee 
Zephgros  aiidis  ^m-are?  Do  you  not  hear  the  zephyrs  blowing?  Id.  Sa;pe  hoc 
mujores  niitu  dJcere  andu-i.  Cic.  The  two  constructions  are  sometimes  united; 
as,  Medium  video  discedere  c(elum,  palantesj^/e  ^.icito  stcllas.  Vu'g. 

Rem.  3.  The  subject-accusative  after  verbs  o^  saying,  showing,  and  believing ; 
as,  d'tco,  nego,  tram,  fero,  memdro,  narro,  nuniio,  perhtbeo,  prOdo,  scr'ibo,  de- 
monstro,  oslendo,  arguo,  credo,  puto,  existimo,  and  the  like,  and*ilso  after  7i/6eo, 
veto,  aiKl  prohibeo,  is  regarded  also  as  the  accusative  of  the  object  after  these 
verbs;  and  hence  such  verbs  are  used  also  in  the  passive,  the  accusative  of  the 
active  voice  becoming,  as  usual,  the  nominative  of  the  passive.  This  is  espe- 
cially the  case  when  their  subject  is  indefinite;  as,  Dlcunt  (thev  or  people  say) 
me  virum  pi-dbum  esse,  or  d'lcor  vir  jirobus  esse.  So,  Veidmur  hoc  fdcere,  instead 
of,  Nos  hoc  fdcere  vetant.  Instead  also  of  the  impersonal  vidctur  {it  appears) 
followed  by  the  infinitive  with  its  subject-accusative,  it  is  common  to  say 
personally,  videor,  videris,  etc.,  with  the  infinitiye;  as,  vldeor  errasse,  it  appears 
that  T  have  eiTed.  ..  - ^^-r::^^— -^ 

25 


290  SYNTAX. INFINITIVE    MOOD.  §  273 

INFINITIVE    AND     SUBJUNCTIVE     CLAUSES. 

§  272,  When  the  particle  that,  in  English,  introdn'^es  a 
clause  denoting  a  purpose,  object,  or  result,  it  is  a  sign  of  the 
Bubjunctive  in  Latin,  and  is  to  be  expressed  by  ut,  etc. ;  but 
otherwise  it  is  usually  the  sign  of  the  accusative  with  the  infini- 
tive.   Cf.  §§  262  and  272. 

1.  (a.)  Verbs  of  encleavorinfi  and  resolving  take  after  them  the  in- 
finitive and  more  rarely  the  subjunctive,  when  the  subject  remain! 
the  same ;  but  when  the  subject  is  changed,  they  take  the  subjunc- 
tive only. 

Note  1.  Such  are  statiio,  consfituo,  decerno,  tento,  laboro,  pdro,  mSditor,  euro,  nltor, 
conleii'lo,  ronsiliiim  capio,  annnum  or  in  antmiim  induco.  Cf.  ^  271,  N.l.  After  opS- 
ram  do,  I  exert  myself,  id.  hoc,  or  ilbid  ago,  I  endeavor,  nj/iil  antiquius  liaJbeo  or  duco 
qumn,  nothing  is  of  more  importance  to  me,  and  video  for  euro,  the  subjunctiTe  is  al- 
most exclusively  used. 

(5.)  Verbs  of  effecting  are  construed  with  ut  or  ne  and  the  sub- 
junctive. 

Note  2.  Such  are  fario,  efT'ieio,  perfieio,  Svinco,  pervinco,  impetro,  assequor,  consS- 
gitor,  etc.  But  facere  '  to  effect '  occurs  in  Cic.  Brut.  38,  in  connection  with  the  accusa- 
tive and  infinitive  passive. 

Note  3.  Facio  with  tit  is  also  used  as  a  periphrasis  for  the  indicative ;  as, 
Invltus  quidem  feci,  ut  L.  Fldminium  e  sendtu  cjicerem,  for  invlius  cjeci.  Cic. — 
Fac,  '  su]:>pose '  or  '  ^-anting,'  and  efflcere,  '  to  prove,'  take  the  accusative  with 
the  infinitive;  but  tlie  passive  efficitur,  '  it  follows,'  takes  also  the  subjunctive. 
— Facere,  '  to  inti-oduce '  or  '  represent,'  is  joined  with  a  present  or  perfect 
participle;  as,  ZxBlium  et  Sclpionem  facimus  admirantes.  Cic.  In  the  passive 
the  accusative  also  with  the  infinitive  is  found,  there  being  no  present  par- 
ticiple; as,  Isocratem  Fldto  laudari  facit  a  Socrdte.  Cic. 

2.  Verbs  signifying  to  request,  to  demand,  to  admonish,  to  advise,  to 
encourage,  to  command,  and  the  like,  both  when  the  subject  remains 
the  same  and  when  it  is  changed,  are  followed  by  the  subjunctive 
with  ut  or  ne,  and  only  rarely  by  the  infinitive. 

Note  4.  (a.)  Such  are  rtjgo,  oro,  precor,  peto ;  posco,  postulo,  flagito ;  mbneo,  ad- 
niOneo,  coinmoneo,  hortor,  cohortor,  exhortor,  suadeo,  persnadeo,  instituo,  (I  instruct) 
impeUo,  cogo,  mando,  prcescribo,  edico,  deeerno,  Icgein  do,  censeo,  perpeUo,.exclto,  in- 
tito,  impSro,  etc. ;  as,  Te  non  hortor  solum,  sed  etiam  ore,  ut  tola  mente  in  rempublictim 
incumbas.  Cic. 

(b.)  Li  the  poets  and  later  prose  writers  the  infijiitive  more  frequently  fol- 
lows those  verbs  without  any  difference  of  meaning.  The  poets  even  use  the 
infinitive  to  express  a  purpose;  as,  Proteus  pecus  egit  altos  vis  ere  mantes.  Hor. 

(c.)  Nuntio,  scribo,  mitto,  and  even  d'lco,  are  followed  by  the  subjunctive, 
when  thej'  imnly  an  injunction  or  intention  that  somethuig  should  be  done; 
as,  Hiec  ut  facias,  scribo.  Cic. 

(d.)  Jubeo  and  veto  commonly  take  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive,  but 
sometimes  the  subjunctive  with  or  rarely  without  ut.  Sometimes,  with  the 
mfinitive,  the  person  to  whom  the  command  is  given  is  omitted,  especially 
when  it  is  either  obvious  from  the  nature  of  the  command  or  indefinite ;  as, 
Castra  mUmre  jiibet,  acil.  milites.  Cajs.  Lex  recte  fdcere  juhet,  scil.  homines. 
Cic.  With  the  subjimctive  the  dative  of  the  person  sometimes  follows  jubeo ; 
as,  Brilnnnico  jussit,  exsiirgeret.  Tac. — Impero  is  sometimes  followed  by  the 
uccusative  with  the  infinitive  passive;  and  so  also  is  censeo,  I  vote,  or,  I  ordain. 
Tiie  latter  is  often  construed  with  the  participle  iu  dus  with  esse  expressed  c* 
understood ;  a8,  Cn/rthdginem  delendam  cenaeo. 


§  273.  SYNTAX. INFINITIVE    MOOD.  291 

(e.)  Moneo  anA  admdneo,  '  I  remind,' and  ^'erswaf/eo,  'Icon\mce  takf-  tha 
accusative  with  the  infinitive. 

3.  (rt.)  In  the  oratio  obllqua,  the  construction  of  the  accusative  with 
the  infinitive,  is  exchanged  for  that  of  the  subjunctive,  to  denote  pos- 
sibility, liberty,  duty,  etc. ;  as, 

Virginius  unum  Ap.  Claudium  legum  expertem  esse  aiebai :  respicerent  tribinai 
hdniines  casldltim  omnium  scelerum.  Liv. 

(6.)  On  the  contrary,  when  the  subjunctive  has  been  used  after  a  verb  of 
requesting,  commanding,  etc.,  the  constnictiou  often  passes  into  that  of  the 
accusative  with  the  infinitive;  the  verb  of  saying  beuig  considered  as  implied 
in  the  verb  of  requesting,  etc. ;  as,  Ordbat  ne  se  ut  parricldam  llbenlm  aversa- 
icuiur:  sibi  \\\.a.m  fil'uB  sua  cariorem  fuisse,  si....  Liv.    Cf.  §  270,  R.  2,  (6.) 

4.  (fl.)  Verbs  which  denote  willingness^  unwillingness,  permission, 
and  necessitij,  commonly  take  the  infinitive,  or  the  accusative  with  the 
Infinitive,  but  sometimes  the  subjunctive. 

Note  5.  Such  are  volo,  nolo,  malo,  opto,  permitto,  patior,  sino.,  concedo,  licet,  prdht- 
beo,  oportet,  and  jieresse  est.  Cf.  5  271,  H.  4.  Volo  ut  is  used  to  express  a  strong  em- 
pliiisis.     Nolo  is  not  construed  with  the  subjunctive. 

(i.)  An  infinitive  passive  without  a  subject  is  sometimes  used  with  dportet; 
as,  JYon  opuriuii  rehctas,  scU.  esse  ancillas.  Ter.  Ut  ut  erat,  mansum  tame"* 
dportuit,  scil.  esse.  Id.  Non  jjutabant  de  tali  viro  suspicimibus  Sportere  judicar;. 
Nep. 

(c.)  Some  other  verbs  which  regularly  take  the  accusative  with  the  infini- 
tive after  them,  are  occasionally  followed  by  the  subjunctive. 

5.  Quod,  '  that,'  commonly  with  the  indicative,  introduces  a  sub- 
stantive clause  containing  the  explanation  or  ground  of  the  predicate 
or  of  some  other  word  in  the  principal  clause. 

Remark.  The  subjunctive  follows  giwd  in  those  cases  only  in  which  the 
clause  expresses  the  view  or  sentiment  of  some  other  person  than  the  writer 
or  speaker,,  Cf.  §  266,  3. 

Quod  is  used : — 

(1.)  After  such  expressions  as  bene,  male,  prudenter  facio ;  bene,  male  fit; 
evenit,  accidit,  and  the  like ;  prcetereo,  mitto ;  and  generaUy  adde,  accedit,  etc. ; 
as,  Bene  fdcis,  quod  me  adjuvas. 

(2.)  To  introduce  the  explanation  of  a  noun,  pronoun,  or  pronominal  adverb 
in  the  principal  clause;  ns,  Magnum  beneficium  est  naturce,  quod  necesse  e$i 
mori. 

(3.)  Atter  Yerhs  sigaifymg  an  affection  of  the  mind,  and  the  outward  ewpres- 
tion  of  such  feeling ;  and  also  after  verbs  of  praising,  censuring,  accusing,  and 
thmktng. 

Note  6.  Such  are  gaudeo,  delector,  gratum,  or  jucundum  est  mlhi,  angor,  dSleo,  eegre, 
ni!'.  .ite,  or  grdviter  /era,  succenseo,  poenitet,  miror,  adiniror,  glorior,  gratiilor.  gratiai 
igf,  quSror,  hulignor,  and  others  of  similar  meaning;  as,  Scipio  SfiP/ie  querebatur,  quod 
omnibus  in  rebus  honunes  dlligentibres  essent,  ut,  etc.  Cic.  Gaudeo  quod  te  inter- 
pell.iTi.  Id.  <^\xoi  spiralis,  c^noii  vocem  mitfUis,  qViOiX  formas  hSm'inum  lidbetis,  indig- 
nantur.  Liv  Cato  mlriiri  se  aiebat,  quod  non  rtdSret  hanispex,  karuspicem  quum  vidi- 
ret.  Cic. 

Note  7.  After  those  verbs  which  express  the  feeling  of  joy,  grief,  etc.;  as, 
qaudeo,  ddleo,  mlror,  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive  is  more  commonly 
found,  but  those  which  denote  the  outward  expression  of  such  feeling  are  mora 
commonly  constiiied  with  quod ;  but  sometimes  this  distinction  is  reversed 
Gratulm-  is  oimmonly  joined  with  quod. 


292  SYNTAX. PARTICIPLES.  §  274 

Notes.  A  purely  obiective  proposition  is  expressed  hj  qiuxl  ^nlj  wlien  i( 
depend?  upon  fifZtZo,  (genenillj^  in  the  imperative  nrfr/e),  or  upon /««o  joniec' 
with  an  adverb;  as,  Adde  quod  puhes  tibi  crescit  omnes.  Hor.  Adde  hue  ciu(Ki 
merceni  sine  fucis  gestat.  Id.  Fecit  hiimamter  Licinius,  quod  ad  me  vcsperi  veml. 
Cic.  In  all  other  cases  the  infinitive  is  employed  in  purely  objective  propo- 
sitions. 

6.  By  the  infinitive,  with  or  without  a  subject-accusative,  a  proposlticr.  is 
expressed  as  a  rtoiif//)/,  so  that  it  resembles  an  abstract  noun ;  by  jMoti,  with 
the  indicative  or  the  subjunctive,  it  is  represented  simply  as  a  fact.  To  the 
latter  is  frequently  joined  hoc,  id,  illud,  istud,  or  hue,  etc. ;  as,  Illud  qiiOijue  nihk 
accp.dit  incommddum,  quod  M.  Junius  abest.  Cic.  Hue  acccdcbat,  quod,  etc.  Sail. 
Quod  fjenerally  refers  to  past  time,  and  hence  it  is  preferable  to_  say,  Graiiisi- 
viuni  mihi  est,  quod  ad  me  tiia  vidnu  scripsisti;  but  with  the  infinitive,  Grdtissi- 
mum  mlhi  est  te  bene  valere. 

(a.)  Quod,  with  the  indicative,  in  the  sense  of  as  to,  or  with  regard  to,  is  used 
at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  especially  in  letters,  in  repeating  an  expression 
of  a  person  for  the  purjiose  of  answering  it;  as,  Quod  auiem  me  AgdmemnOnem 
oemuldri  putas,  fnllevis.  Nep.  Quud  scrlbis  te  velle  scire,  qui  sit  reipfiblicw  status . 
simimn  dissensio  est.  Cic.  Sentences  thus  introduced  by  guod  are  in  no  gram- 
matical connection  with  the  verb  that  follows  them.    See  §  206,  (14.) 

{b.)  Quod  is  used  in  explanatory  or  periphrastic  propositions  which  refer  tc 
a  preceding  demostrative  pronoun,  as  hoc,  id,  etc.,  unless  such  pronoun  be 
added  ])leonastically,  in  the  nominative  or  accusative,  to  verbs  governing  the 
accusative  with  the  infinitive;  as,  Mihi  quidem  videntur  homines  hac  re  maxtme 
Mluis  prosstdre,  quod  loqui  possunt.  Cic. 

Note  9.  The  constructien  of  the  infinitive  resembles,  in  the  fol- 
lowing particulars,  that  of  a.  noun  in  the  singular  number  and  neuter 
/render : — 

(a.)  Like  a  noun,  it  may  have  an  adjective  or  pronoun  agreeing  with  it;  as 
1  fitum  hoc  phllosophari  Jisplicet.  Cic.  Quum  vlvere  ipsum  turpe  sit  nobis.  Id. 
Me  hoc  ipsum  nihil  agere  delectat.  Id.  ]\Ieum  intelUgere  nulla  pecunid  vendo. 
Petr.    See  §  205,  E.  8. 

(b.)  It  may  be  followed  by  a  limiting  genitive;  as,  Cujus  mm  dimlcare/«i< 
vincere.  Val.  j\Iax.  ir 

(c.)  It  may  be  either  the  subject  or  object  of  a  verb.  See  §§  209,  R.  3,  (5,) 
and  229,  R.  5.  It  may  also  be  vised  after  neuter  verbs,  like  an  acciisative, 
tepending  on  a  preposition  understood;  as,  Te  accepisse  7neas  llteras  gaudeo. 
fer.    See  §§  232,  (2,)  and  273,  5. 

(d.)  It  is  also  used  like  a  predicate-nominative;  as,  Videre  est  perspicere 
aliquid.  Cic.    See  §  210. 

(e.)  It  may,  like  a  genitive,  limit  the  signification  of  an  adjective  or  noun. 
See  §  270,  R.  1. 

(/. )  It  may,  like  an  accusative,  depend  on  a  preposition ;  as,  Aristo  et  Pyrrho 
inter  optiine  valere  et  grdvissime  segrotare,  nihil  prorsus  dtcebant  inth-esse.  Cic. 
Qvod  crimen  dlcis  prseter  amasse  meum  f  Ovid.  Invcniet  nil  sihi  legatiim,  prajter 
jvlurare.  Hor. 

(q.)  It  is  used  also  like  an  ablative;  as,  Audita  regem  in  Siciliam  tenders. 
Sail 

(h.)  Sometimes,  also,  especially  in  the  poets,  it  denotes  a  purpose,  like  S 
participle  in  dus,  (see  §  274,  R.  7.);  as,  Loricam  donat  habere  viro.  Virg.;  or 
like  a  dative  of  the  end,  (see  §  227.) 

PARTICIPLES. 

§  274:.     !•   Participles  are  followed  by  the  same  cases  ard 
constructions  as  th^ii*  verbs  ;  as, 


§  274.  STT^TAX. PARTICIPLES.  293 

Quldam,  poeta  nomlnalus,  A  certain  one,  called  a  poet.  Cic.  Ca'-Qlora  n  oblldi 
kcena,  The  lioness  forgetful  of  her  whelps.  Virg.  Fdventes  rebus  Carihc.tjfnieitr 
tium,  Favoring  the  interests  of  tlie  Carthaginians.  Liv.  Tendens  ad  s'uUra  \yA- 
mas.  Virg.  Accusatus  rei  cupitiilis.  Cic.  jPi'imd  dkte  mihi  summa  dicende  Gl- 
nu'nu.  Hor.  Oinina  doctits.  Stat.  Casns  cibies  v'lsura  mdvlnus.  Id.  G'lriiuri  ur- 
bore  monies.  Ovid.  Parcendam  est  teneris.  .Tuv.  Uteiidum  est  aetate.  Ovid. 
L.  Brutus  arcens  reditu  tyrannum,  in  proiUo  concidii.  Cic. 

2.  The  present,  perfect,  and  future  active  participles,  denote  re- 
spectively an  action  which  is  present,  past,  or  future,  in  reference  to 
the  time  of  the  verb  with  which  they  are  connected ;  as, 

Siiwd  hoc  dicens  aitolUt  se.  Virg.  Turn  ad  Thraseain  in  horiis  agentera  mis- 
sus est.  Tac.  TurntuH  fngientem.  hcec  tei'ra  videl/itf  Virg.  Qui  missus  ab  An/ is 
Mid  consederat  urhe.  Id.  Lamia  munere  adilUdtis  perfunctus,  petit  2}>'ieturam. 
Cic.  Jussus  cum  fide  poenas  luam.  Hor.  Juvenis  medios  moritiirus  i?i  hustei 
irruit.  Virg.  Peritiirus  injecit  sese  in  agmen.  Id.  Ilia  tlbi  ventui-a  bella  expe- 
diel.  Id. 

Note.  The  participle  expresses  the  action  or  state  of  the  verb,  and  also 
marks  its  complete  or  incomplete  state  or  condition.  Cf.  §  144,  1-3.     Except, 


Remark  1.  The  present  participle,  particularly  that  of  the  verb  eo,  some- 
times denotes  that  which  is  about  to  be  done;  as,  Interclusit  hiems,  et  terniil 
Auster  euntes,  ....  as  they  were  on  the  point  of  going.  Virg.  Nee  nos  via  fullil 
euutf**.  Id. 

Rem.  2.  (a.)  The  present  participle,  also,  sometimes  denotes  a  purpose ;  as, 
Ibant,^  orantes  veniam,.. ..to  sue  for  tavor....  Virg.  Eui-yfijlum  scitantem  ordcitla 
Plnebi  mittimus.  Id.  (b.)  It  is  also  used  to  express  a  state  or  condition,  where, 
in  English,  a  substantive  is  employed  with  a  preposition ;  as,  ignorans.  from 
ignorance;  mctuens,  from  fear;  consiildfum  petens,  in  his  suit  for  the  consulship; 
omne  nudum  Tiascens  facile  oppi-imiiur, — in  its  origin. 

Rem.  3.  (a.)  The  perfect  participle  passive,  especiallv  in  the  poets,  often 
denotes  the  result  of  a  past  action,  and  thus  supplies  the  place  of  a  present 
participle  passive;  as,  Ndius  cvOlat  jficed  tectus  c«/(r/iHe.... covered  with  pitcliy 
darkness.  Ovid.  Cf.  Virg.  ^n.  1,  480;  2,  277;  4,  72,  589;  5,  113,  708;  6,  33o: 
Georg.  1,  204.  It  is  often  to  be  translated  by  a  present  active  participle;  as, 
Mdnu  pectus  percussa  decorum,  fldventesque  abscissa  cdmas,  i.  e.  percidiens,  ab- 
scindtns.  Virg.  Tunsa;  pectura  palmis.  Id.  So,  also,  sdlitus,  ausus,  fisusjnud 
the  perfect  participles  of  deponent  verbs;  as,  Longum  cantu  solata  luborem.  Id. 
Vox  auditur  fractos  sdnitus  imitata  tubdrum.  Id.  Jjiviiidcus  Gesdrem  complexus 
obsecrdre  ccepit.  Ctes.  Concretes  sanguine  crines  gerens.  Vkg.  Tonsis  in  valr- 
libus,  i.  e.  quas  tondentur.  Id. 

(6.)  The  perfect  participle  of  a  preceding  verb  is  often  used  in  a  succeeding 
clause,  to  express  the  completion  of  an  action ;  as,  Eaercltum  fundit  fugatqiie, 
f  asum  persequitur.  Liv.     This  idiom  frequently  occurs  in  Ovid. 

Rem.  4.  Hdbeo,  with  perfect  participles  denoting  knowledge  and  determina^ 
Hon;  as,  cognitum,  perspectum,  percepium,  comprehensum,  explordtum,  stdti'dupi, 
constitUtum,  diliberdtum,  persmsum  mihi  hdbeo,  etc.,  forms  a  periphrasis,  like  tlie 
passive  verb  in  English,  and  equivalent  to  cognovi,  perspexi,  percijn,  etc.,  in- 
stead of  the  verb  of  the  participle;  as,  Clddii  dnimum  perspectum  or  co"-nitum 
\dbeo  ;  for  perspexi,  etc.,  I  perceive,  know,  jrersudsum  mihi  hdbeo  and  'jiersun- 
eissimum,  hdbeo  are  used  only  in  the  neuter  gender  and  with  an  accusative  with 
the  infinitive  in  the  sense  of  mihi  persuasi  or  persudsinn  Tfiihi  est.  When  hdbeo 
with  any  other  participle  than  those  above  indicated  is  used,  it  expresses  mora 
than  the  ordinary  perfect  active ;  as.  Quod  me  horUh-is  ut  absolvam ;  habeo  ab- 
lolntam  suive  epos  ad  Qesdrem ;  i.  e.  I  have  it  ready.  Cic.  Do,  reddo,  euro, 
26* 


294  SYNTAX. PARTICIPLES.    .  §  274 

teneo,  possideo,  and  missum  fdcio,  are  sometimes  so  construed  with  paiticiples 
as,  Missam  Irani  faciei,  for  mittet.  Ter.    Eostes  victos  dare,  for  vinceh.  Sail. 

Kem.  5.  (o.)  The  passive  participles  may  supply  the  place  of  a  verbal  noun 
m  to  or  us,  the  perfect  being  employed  to  represent  an  action  as  completeil, 
and  the  future  when  it  is  conceived  as  stUl  incomplete ;  as,  Ante  Romam  condi- 
tam.  Before  the  building  of  Rome.  Cic.  Consilia  urbis  delendoe.  Plans  for  the 
destruction  of  the  city.  Id.  See  §  275,  II.  With  the  limitations  about  to  be 
made  in  regard  to  the  nominative,  this  construction  is  used  ui  aU  -the  cases, 
and  even  when  thej-  are  governed  by  the  prepositions,  ad,  ante,  ob,  230st,  prop- 
ter ;  ab  and  ex ;  as,  Hai-  literce  recitatag  magnum  Iticittin  ficvrunt,  Tlie  readi  ig 
of  this  letter.  Liv.  Tdrentum  captum.  The  taking  of  Tareutum.  Ob  receptt  .ti 
Eannibulem,  On  account  of  the  reception  of  Hannibal.  Slbi  quisque  cifisi  reyit 
txpMebat  decus,  The  glory  of  kiUing,  or,  of  having_  killed  the  king.  Propter 
Afiicam  domitam.  Eutrop.  Ante  Epaminondam  natum.  Nep.  Post  Christum 
Datum.  Ab  condita  urbe  ad  hberatam.  Liv.  The  oblique  cases  only  of  partici- 
p'-js  ui  dus  are  used  in  this  manner  as  the  nominative  dei^otes  necessit^y,  (see 
Rem.  8,)  and  even  the  perfect  participle  is  not  thus  used  in  the  nominative  by 
Cicero. 

(b.)  The  neuter  of  the  perfect  passive  participle  without  a  noun  is  used  by 
Livy,  as  the  subject  of  a  proposition ;  as,  Tentatum  per  dictdtorem,  ut  ambo  pa- 
tricii  consules  credrentur,  rem  ad  interregnum  perduxit :  i.  e.  the  attempt,  or 
the  fact  of  the  attempt  being  made  by  the  dictator.  Compare  a  similar  use 
of  this  participle  in  the  ablative,  \  257,  R.  9,  (1.)  (c.) 

(c.)  The  English  '  without '  with  a  verbal  substantive;  as,  '  without  writing, 
without  having  waited,'  etc.,  is  expressed  in  Latin  by  means  of  a  negative 
Qoun,  adjective  or  particle  connected  with  a  participle;  as,  (Xesar  exercitum 
numquam  per  insidiosa  itinera  duxit,  nisi  perspeciiliitus  Idcorum  situs,  without 
having  examined  the  localities.  This  form  occurs  often  with  the  ablative 
absolute;  as,  Alhenienses  non  exspectato  auxllio  adversus  ingentem  Persdrum 
excrctiwn  in  prceliu7>i  egrcdiunfur,  without  waiting  for  assistance.  So,  nulla 
priBstltuta  t/i'e,  Without  fixing  any  time.  Cic.  Miserum  est  nihil  perficientem 
angi.  Id. 

Rem.  6.  (a.)  The  participle  in  rus,  especially  with  verbs  of  motion,  oftec 
denotes  intention  or  purpose;  as,  Ad  Jdvem  Ammonem  pergit  consulturus  da 
drlgine  sua.  He  goes  to  Jupiter  Amnion,  to  consult  respecting  his  origin.  Just. 

(b.)  It  is  also  used  where  in  English  a  clause  connected_  by  since,  when,  al- 
though, etc.,  is  employed;  as,  Plura  lociituros  dbire  nos  Jussit,  When  or  although 
we  uitended  to  say  more.  Herctdem  Germdni,  Ituri  m  prmlium  cdnunt.  Tac. 
Hence  it  is  sometimes  used,  though  not  by  Cicero,  to  express  the  mference 
from  a  hypothetical  proposition ;  as,  Egredltur  castris  ROmdnus,  vallum  invasu- 
rus,  ni  cdpia  pugnce  Jieret.  And  witli  the  repetition  of  the_  preceding  verb;  as, 
Dedit  mihi  quantum  maxime  p)utuit,  daturus  amplius,  si  potuisset,  i.  e.  ac  dedisset 
amplius.  Plin.  Ep. 

Rem.  7.  (a.)  The  participle  in  f?i(s,  also,  denotes  a  purpose  passively,  irhen 
joined  with  verbs  signifying  to  give,  to  deliver,  to  agree  Jor,  to  have,  to  receiie 
tc  undertake,  etc.  Such  are  do,  trddo,  tribuo,  attrlbuo,  riiando,  mitto,  permitlo. 
eonci'do,  redimo,  comluco,  l6co,  hdbeo,  accijno,  susdpio,  relinquo,  cUro,  dt'posco 
rogo;  as,  Testdmentum  tibi  trddit  legendum.  He  delivers  his  will  to  you  to  read. 
Wni-  Aitribuit  nos  trucTdandos  Ceihego.  Cic.  Quod  utendum  acceperis,  reddito, 
xu.  iJOnon  muros  dlrutos  a  Lysandro  reficiendos  curdvit, — ordered  them  to  '^1 
restored.  Nep. 

(b.)  But  the  same  meaning  may  be  expressed  actively  by  means  of  ad  aiid 
the  gerund;  as,  Qxsar  oppklum  ad  diripiendum  m'diiibus  concessit. — The  poets 
sometimes  use  the  infinitive  active  for  the  same  purpose;  as,  Tristttiam  et  mi- 
ttis  trudam  prdtervis  in  mare  Caspium  portare  ventis.  Hor.  In  prose  such  u*' 
of  the  infinitive  is  of  exceedingly  rare  occurrence ;  as,  Blbere  dare.  Cic. 


§27'1.  SYNTAX. PARTICIPLES.  295 

Rem.  8.  (a.)  Tbe  participle  in  dus,  when  agreeing  with  the  subject 
of  a  sentence,  has  the  signification  of  necessity  or  j^roprietii ;  some- 
iisces,  though  rarely,  except  in  later  writers,  that  of  possibility ;  as, 

Is  vcnOrandus  a  nobis  et  colendus  est,  He  should  be  worshipped  and  honored 
by  us.  Cic.  Delenda  est  Carikdgo,  Carthage  must  be  destroyed.  Cato.  Hiet 
eperanda  ywej-Mrti.  Virg.  So  with  esi  used  impersonally;  as,  tJirum  pace  noItU 
an  belh  esset  uteudum.  Cic 

(6.)  Sometimes,  also,  when  not  agi-eeing  with  the  subject  of  a  sentence,  'u 
has  fais  signidcation ;  as,  Facta  narrdbas  dissimiilanda  twi,  You  were  relating 
facts  which  you  should  have  concealed.  Ovid.  A.  L.  Bruto  princlpe  hujus 
maxlme  couservandi  generis  el  nominis.  Cic. 

Rem.  9.  The  participle  in  dtis,  in  its  oblique  cases,  supplies  the  place  of  a 
present  participle  of  the  passive  voice,  to  denote  a  continued  or  incomplete 
action;  as,  Occupdius  sum  in  Uteris  scribendis,  in  ■v\Titing  letters;  literally,  in 
letters  which  are  beiuir  written.  See  §  275,  II. — So,  also,  in  the  poets  both  in 
the  nominative  and  oblique  cases;  as,  Triginta  viagnos  volvendis  niensibus  orbet 
impirio  explebit.  Virg.    Volvenda  dies.  Id.    Cf.  V'olventibus  annis.  Id. 

Rem.  10.  After  participles  in  dus,  the  person  by  whom  a  thing  must  be 
done,  is  put  in  the  dative,  but  in  a  few  passages  even  of  Cicero  it  is  found  in 
the  ablative  with  ab.     See  §  225,  III. 

Rem.  11.  The  neuter  of  the  participle  in  dus,  joined  with  a  tense  of  esse  in 
the  periphrastic  conjugation  (see  §  184,  3,)  retains  the  signification  of  necessity; 
as,  Audenduni  est.  We  must  venture.  In  early  writers  and  sometimes  also  in 
the  poets,  an  accusative  of  the  object  is  joined  with  this  neuter,  if  the  verb 
is  transitive;  as.  Nunc  pacem  orandum,  nunc — arma  reponemlum,  et  helium  exi- 
tidle  cavendum.  Sil.  But  in  classical  Latin  such  accusative  is  generally  changed 
to  the  nominative,  and  the  participle  is  made  to  agree  with  it  in  gender  and 
number.  Thus,  instead  of  virtutem  laudandum  est,  we  iisuallv  find  virtus  lau- 
danda  est.  The  accusative  in  this  connection  is  used  by  Cicero  in  only  two 
passages.  Uteiidum  est  with  the  ablative  occurs  more  than  once  in  Cicero ;  as, 
Quu7n  S2W  cuique  judlcio  sit  utendum. 

Rem.  12.  In  classical  prose  the  participle  in  dus  never  has  the  signification 
of  j50«sifa7iXv,  except  when  joined  with  I'ix ;  as,  Vix  opta7idum  nobis  cidijbdtur. 
Cic.  Vix  erat  cride/ulu/n,  i.  e.  vix  crcdi  ^^dterat.  Later  writers  use  it  in  ',hi3 
Bense  with  negative  particles,  and  at  a  later  period  it  was  used  with  still  mo»-e 
frequency  in  the  sense  of  possibility  as  well  as  in  that  of  necessity. 

3.  (a.)  A  participle  is  often  employed,  instead  of  a  vei '),  in  a 
conditional,  explanatory,  adversative,  relative,  or  othei  dependent 
clause;  as, 

Curio,  ad  fdcum  sedenti  (as  he  was  sitting)  wa^/wwrn  aui-i  pondus  Snmnltes 
aitulerunt.  Cic.  Trldui  viam  progressi,  i-iirsits  reverteruni ;  for,  quuin  progrtssi 
tssenl.  Cajs.  Dionysius  tyrannus,  Syrdcusis  expulsus,  Cdrinlld  pueros  docPlint. 
Cic.  Dionysius,  cultros  metuens  tonsorios,  candenti  carbone  sibi  ddurebr.l  c/qnlluTa. 
Id.  Rlsus  interdum  ita  repente  erumpit,  ut  eum  cupientis  tenire  neguedmus.  Id. 
fliconi'Ji  abiturjE  congreganlur  in  lOco  certo.  Plin. 

Note  1.  If  the  participle  refers  to  a  noun  not  contained  in  the  leading  proposition,  it 
«  put  \vith  that  noun  in  tiie  ablative  absolute.    See  §  257,  R.  3. 

Note  2.  (a.)  The  English  clauses  most  frequently  expressed  in  Latin  by  means  of  par- 
ticiples are  such  as  are  connected  by  relatives  or  b}'  as,  when,  after,  ult/ioiig/i,  since,  be- 
cause, etc.;  as.  Nemo  ohservat  luiiain  nisi  laburantem.  Sen.  Vt  Bonlits,  sic  anhnus,  st 
noil  videns,  alia  cernil, — though  not  perceiving  itself.  Cic.  Sfrv'iliiis  Ahaln  S/ntnum 
Mfxliujn,  re!;ninii  appetentem,  intSrcmil, — because  he  was  a.spiring  to  the  sovereignty. 
Cic. — (b.)  UTien  a  participle  is  connected  with  a  relative  or  iiitJ>rrogative  it  can  only  b« 
translated  by  a  circumlocution;  as,  Non  sunt  fa  btina  iliceni/n,  quibiis  abundautera  ticet 
esse  mtserrimu»i, — which  one  maj'  pos.sess  in  abundance,  and  still  be  very  miserable 
Cio.  Sinatus  absurdum  esse  ilicebat,  ignorare  rej^tyn,  quid  spOraus  ant  peteus  vEnSrit, — 
ritb  wh.at  hopA  ->r  request  he  had  come.  liT. 


296  SYNTAX. GERUNDS    AND    GERUNDIVES.  §  275 

(6.)  SVlien  two  verbs  are  in  English  connected  by  and,  and  the  act  pns  de- 
noted  by  them  are  regarded  as  simultaneous,  one  of  them  may  be  expressed 
m  Latin  by  the  present  participle;  as,  He  sits  and  holds  his  lute,  lUe  (Arion) 
Bedens  cilhdram  ihiei.  Ovid,  i^iinulhoc  dicens  attoUit  in  mgrum  se  femur.  Yirg. 
1.  e.  hoc  d'lcit  et  atiollii.  But  if  one  of  the  actions  precede  the  other,  tho 
perfect  participle  must  be  used;  as,  Ctcsar  attaclced  and  defeated  the  enemy, 
Gtsar  Iwsits  aggressus  fugavit.  Submersas  ohrue  pupjKS,  i  e.  Submerge  et 
obrue.  Virg. — When  the  English  clause  would  be  connected  by  although,  the 
partici])le  is  often  followed  l)y  tdmen.  Later  \vriters  in  such  case  join  the  par- 
ticles quainquam,  quamvis,  etiiivi  and  vel  with  the  participle  it=elf;  as,  Qesarem 
mllites,  quamvis  rectisantem  uUro  in  Africam  sunt  secuii.  Suet. ;  and  tliese  are 
8ometin>es  retained  in  the  ablative  absolute. — It  is  only  in  late  Latin  that  par- 
ticiples are  sometimes  used  in  describing  persons  as  possessing  certain  attri- 
butes, e.  g.  aclsiantes,  audientes,  for  it  qui  adsiant,  audiimt,  i.  e.  the  bystanders, 
hearers. 

(c.)  A  participle  is  used  with  verbs  signifying  to  represent  and  perceive, 
especially  to  see  and  hear,  when  the  object  is  describeil  or  perceived  in  a  parti- 
cular state;  as,  Apelles  pinxll  Alexandru7H  Magnum  fulmen  tmentem.  Plin.  Li 
English  the  infoiiiive  is  often  joined  with  verbs  of  seeing  and  hearing;  as, 
A.tidivi  te  canentem,  I  heard  you  sing.  Audiri  te  cdnere,  would  be,  I  heard  that 
you  sung.    Vldemus  Pdlyphi-miim  vastd  se  mole  moventem.  Virg. 

Note  3.  In  many  cases,  for  want  of  a  perfect  participle  active,  and  a  present  participle 
passive,  this  construction  cannot  lie  used.  Thus,  quum  amavisset  cannot  be  exchanged 
for  a  participle  corresponding  with  the  English  /taring  loved.  As  the  perfect  participles 
of  deponent  verbs,  however,  have  an  active  signihcation,  they  admit  of  the  participial 
construction.  The  want  of  a  perfect  active  participle  may  also  be  supplied  by  the  perfect 
passive  participle  in  the  ablative  absolute.   See  §  257,  R.  5. 

GERUNDS    AND    GERUNDIVES. 

§  275.     I.    Gerunds   are   governed  like  nouns,  and  are  fol 
lowed  by  the  same  cases  as  their  verbs ;  as, 

Mctus  pdrendi  sibi.  Fear  of  obeying  him.  Sail.  Parcendo  victi'),  By  sparing 
the  vanquished.  Liv.  Ejferor  studio  patres  vestros  videndi,  I  atd  transported 
■with  a  desire  of  seeing  your  fathers.  Cic.  Petendi  con'siilatum  gratia.  Sail. 
Vmit  ad  recipiendum  pecQnias.  Varr. 

Remark  1.  The  gerund  is  the  same  in  form  as  the  oblique  cases  of  the 
neuter  singular  of  participles  in  dus,  but  it  has  the  meaning  of  the  active  voice. 
It  is  sometimes  translated  by  the  present  participle  with  a  preposition,  and 
sometimes  by  a  present  infinitive  active;  as,  Consilium  Lucedxxminem  occu- 
paudi,  A  design  of  occupying,  or  to  occupy,  Lacedsmon.  Liv. 

Rem.  2.  The  gerund  is  sometimes,  though  rarely,  used  in  a  passive  sense ; 
as  Spes  restituendi  nulla  erat, — of  being  restored.  Nep.  Aihenas  erudiendi 
gratia  missus, — for  the  purpose  of  being  instructed.  Just.  Ante  domanduni. 
Virg.    Adee  ad  imperandum.  Cic. 

Rem  3.'  The  gerund  is  in  its  nature  a  verbal  noun,  having  only  the  genitive, 
dative,  ablative,  and,  after  a  preposition,  the  accusative.  In  its  signification  it 
corresponds  with  the  English  present  participle  when  used  as  a  verb.al  noim. 
Hence  in  the  oblique  cases,  it  supplies  the  place  of  a  declinable  present  infin- 
itive active;  but  in  the  accusative  there  is  this  difference  between  the  infini- 
tive used  as  an  accusative  and  the  gerund,  that  the  infinitive  has  simply  the 
:)ower  of  an  abstract  noun,  whereas  the  gerund  expresses  a  real  action ;  as, 
Midtum  interest  inter  dare  et  aceipere.  Sen.  Non  solum  ad  discendum  pi'opensi 
%umus,  sed  etiam  ad  ddcendum.   Cic. 


§  275.      SYNTAX. —  SERUNDS  AND  GERUNDIVES.        297 

II.  Wlien  thi;  object  of  an  active  verb  is  to  be  expres^sed.  the 
participle  in  diis  is  commonly  used  in  preference  to  the  gerund  ; 
the  object  taking  the  case  in  which  the  gerund,  if  used,  would 
have  been  put,  and  the  participle  agreeing  with  it. 

Tliii'',  to  express  '  the  design  of  writing  a  letter,'  which,  with  the  aid  of  tii6 
gerund,  would  be  represented  in  Latin  by  Consilium  scrlbendi  ejAstnlajii,  the 
participle  in  dus  is  commonly  substituted  "for  the  gerund :  and  since,  in  tliis 
example,  the  genind,  iscrlberidi)  is  in  the  genitive,  the  rule  requires  that,  in 
substituting  the  participle  for  the  gerund,  the  object  of  the  genuid  {epiMolam) 
should  also  be  put  in  the  genitive,  and  that  the  participle  (scvibendus)  should 
agree  with  it  in  gender,  number,  and  case.  Hence  with  the  participle. the  ex- 
pression is.  Consilium  scribendce  epistolce.  Between  the  two  fonns  of  construc- 
tion there  is  no  difference  of  signification.  So,  Consllia  urbis  delendaj  (Cic), 
for  urbem  dilendi,  Plans  for  destroying  the  city.  Eeparandarum  classium  causa 
[Suet),  for  repdrandi  classes.  Perpetiendo  labori  idoneus.  Colum.  ^c?  defen- 
dendam  Rumam  a6  oppugnanda  Capua  dCces  Eom^nos  absirdhere.  Liv. 

Remark  1.  The  same  constraction  is  used  with  the  future  passive  partici- 
ples of  ator,  fj-uor,  fungor,  potior,  and  rarely  of  medeoi;  as  these  verbs  were 
originally  followed  by  the  accusative;  as,  jEtas  ad  hac  utenda  idonea.  Ter. 
Justitice  tmendse  causa.  Cic.  In  mUnere  fuugendo.  Id.  Eostes  in  spent  potiun- 
dorum  castrorum  veneraht.  Cses.  Aquce  sdlmntdte  medendis^we  corporlbus  nob- 
iles.  Veil. 

Rem.  2.  When  a  participle  is  thus  used  for  a  gerund,  it  is  called  a  gerundive, 
and  is  usually  translated  like  a  gerund.  The  gerundive  cannot  be  substituted 
for  the  gerund,  where  ambiguity  would  arise  from  the  gender  not  being  dis- 
tinguishable. It  should  therefore  not  be  used  when  the  object  of  the  gei'und 
is  a  neuter  pronoun  or  adjective;  as,  Aliquid  fdciendi  ratio  (Cic),  not  ullcajus. 
Artem  et  vera  et  falsa  dljUdicandi  (Id.),  not  verovum  dljudicandorum :  because  it 
would  not  be  kno^\'n  whether  dlicujus  and  verorum  were  masculine  or  neuter. 
It  is  to  be  remarked,  also,  that  the  change  of  the  gerund  into  the  gerundive  is 
less  frequent  in  some  writers  than  in  others. 

m.  Examples  of  the  construction  of  gerunds,  in  each  of  their  cases,  have  been  al- 
ready given,  among  other  nouns,  under  the  heads  Genitii-e,  Dative,  Accusative,  and  Ab- 
lative. The  following  remarks  specify  in  what  connections  they  are  used:  and  when  it 
is  said  that  the  gerundive  is  governed  in  any  of  the  cases  hke  the  gerund,  it  will  of  coursB 
be  understood  of  the  noun  which  is  limited  by  a  gerundive. 

RE:MArvK  1.  The  genitive  of  gerunds  and  gerundives  may  follow 
either  nouns  or  relative  adjectives ;  as. 

Amor  hdbendi.  Cic.  Palriam  spes  videndi.  Virg.  Nam  hdbet  rultrtra,  ut  dliamm 
ouiniuni  rcrum,  sic  Vivendi  mddiim.  Cic.  Barbara  consuetUdo  hdrninum  immd- 
landdrum.  Id.  Postrimo  Cdtillna  dissinmlaudi  caitsd  ant  sui  expurgandi,  in 
$em'itum  venit.  Sail.  Inita  sunt  consilia  urbis  delemla?,  cirium  tn'icidandC>rura, 
nominis  Romdni  exstiuguendi.  \A.  Venandi  stiidiOsi.  Cic.  Cerius  eundi.  Virg. 
Insuitus  nOvigandi.  CiEs.     Peritus  clvitdtis  regendw.    Nep. 

(1.)  The  nouns  after  which  these  genitives  most  frequently  occur  are  cbTh^r, 
ars,  causa,  consilium,  consiuiUdo,  copia,  cUpiditas,  deslderium,  difficultas,  J'inis, 
facullas,  forma,  gratia,  illccebra,  libido,  Idcus,  licenlia,  mddus,  materia,  mos, 
occcisio,  otium,  pOtestas,  ratio,  spdtium,  spes,  si&dium,  tempus,  usus,  venia,  vis, 
voluntas. 

Note  1.  With  these  and  other  substantives  the  infinitive  also  may  be  used 
when  with  a  tense  of  sum  they  form  a  jieriphrasis  for  a  verb  which  is  foiloweil 
by  ti:e  infinitive,  or  supply  the  )>lace  of  an  adjective  of  which  the  infiiiitive  is 
the  subject;  as,  Quibus  Omnia  honesta  atque  inhdnesta  vendOre  vws  erat.  With 
whom  it  was  a  custom,  or,  who  were  accustomed.  Sail.  Tempiu  est  abire,  It  ii 
kime,  i.  e.  tempestivum  est,  it  is  proper  to  go. 


298  SYNTAX. GERUNDS    AND    GERUNDIVES.  §  275. 

(2.)  The  relative  adjectives,  which  most  frequently  take  after  them  thesa 
genitives,  .ire  such  as  denote  desire,  knowledfje,  remenibrance,  and  their  contra- 
ries; as,  avidiis,  cupklus,  studiosus,  perUus,  imperltus,  insuetus,  certus,  conscius, 
ignarus,  rudis,  etc.  See  §  213,  R.  1,  (3.) 

Note  2.   With  the  relative  adjectives  the  infinitive  is  also  joined  poetically. 
Instead  of  an  accusative  after  the  gerund,  or  a  genitive  plural  with  a 


exemplorum  I'ligendorum.  Cic.   Earum  rerum  wyji 

rvan  comldnandi.  Cic.    Nominandi  istorum  erit  copia.  Plaut. 

(4.)  The  pronoun  iui  and  also  the  plurals  vesti'i  and  sui,  even  when  feminine 
are  joined  with  the  masculhie  or  neuter  form  of  the  gerundive  in  di ;  as,  Qu6- 
niam  tai  videndi  est  copia.  Plaut.  Non  vereor,  ne  quis  hoc  me  vestri  adhortandi 
causa  viaynifice  Idgui  existlmet.  Liv.  In  castra  venervnt  sui  purgandi  causa.— 
"With  the  demonstrative  pronouns,  ejus,  hujus,  ilVms,  the  participle  usually 
agrees,  but  in  two  passages  of  Terence  ejus,  thopgh  referring  to  a  woman,  has 
tlie  participle  in  di,  not  in  dcB;  as.  Ego  ejus  videndi  cupidus  recta,  consequor.  Ter. 
Tm  in  the  first  example  and  ejus  in  the  "last  are  feminine. 

(5.)  By  a  Greek  idiom  the  gerund  and  gerandive,  after  the  verb  sum,  are 
sometimes  found  in  the  genitive  denoting  a  tendency  or  pwipose,  with  no  noun 
or  adjective  on  which  thev  can  depend;  as,  Regiwn  imjierium  initio  conservandse 
libertatis /werai.  SaU.  Sometimes  esse  in  some  form  is  to  be  supplied;  as. 
Qua  jwsfqtiam  glonosa  mddo,  neque  belli  patrandi  cognovit,  scil.  esse.  Id.  Cama 
or  gratia  may  sometimes  be  supplied.  In  some  other  cases,  also,  the  word  on 
which  the  ge'nind  in  di  depends  is  not  expressed,  and  the  gerund  seems  to  be 
used  instead  of  the  infinitive;  as,  Mcineat  provincicdihus  iMteniiam  suam  tali 
mddo  ostentandi,  scO.  fdcultas.  Tac.  Quum  liaberem  in  dnlmo  navigandi,  scil. 
propdsitum.  Cic. 

Rem.  2.  The  dative  of  gerunds  and  gerundives  is  used  after  adjec- 
tives which  govern  a  dative  (§  222),  especially  after  those  which  sig- 
nify usefulness  or  fitness ;  and  also  after  certain  verbs  and  phrases, 
to  denote  a  purpose ;  as, 

Charta  empdrctica  est  inMlis  scrlbendo.  Plin.  Capessendffi  relpUblicm  hdbilis. 
Tac.  Ut  nee  triumviri  accipiundo,  nee  scinbm  ref  crundo  sufficerent.  Liv.  L6cum 
D;j/:iif?o  condendo  cdpere.  Id.  Non  fuit  consilium  agrum  cbXnwAo  aut  venando 
intentum  cetatem  dgere.  Ssdl.  Tiberius  quasi  Jirmandce  valetudini  in  Campdniam 
concessit.  Tac.  Quum  solvendo  cere  alieno  respHblica  non  esset.  Liv.  Quum  sol- 
vendo  cli-itutes  non  essent, — were  insolvent.  Cic. 

(1.)  The  verbs  and  phrases  upon  which  this  dative  most  frequently  depends 
are,  Stiidcre,  intentum  esse,  tempus  impendere,  tempus  consumere  or  insumere,  6pe- 
ram  dure,  sufficere,  satis  esse,  deesse,  esse,  signifying  to  serve  for,  to  be  ade- 
quate to,  and,  in  later  writers,  on  verbs  of  motion.— The  dative  of  the  gerund 
after  sum  is  usually  supposed  to  depend  on  idmeus  understood;  but  see  §  227, 
R.  3. 

(2.)  The  dative  of  the  gerandive,  denoting  a  purpose,  is  also  used  after 
names  of  office ;  as,  Decemvin  legibus  scribendis,  i.  e.  the  ten  commissioners 
for  thawing  up  a  code  of  laws.  Liv.  So,  Cdmitia  creandis  decemviris.  Id. 
Triumviros  agro  dando  creat.  Id. 

(3.)  A  purpose  is  more  commonly  expressed  by  ad  and  the  accusative  of 
^e  gerund,  or  by  a  clause  with  ut,  tlian  by  the  dative;  as,  Pecus  ad  vescendum 
hdnmiibus  ajAa.   Cic. 

Rem.  3.  The  accusative  of  gerunds  and  gerundives  follows  the 
prepositions  ad,  to,  or  inter,  during  or  amid,  and  sometimes  ante,  circa, 
or  oh ;  as, 


1 276.  SYNTAX. — SUPINBS.  299 

^rf  poenltendum  prdpSrat,  qui  cito  judical.  Pub.  Syr.  M^r  bibendum,  WhU\ 
drinking.  Just.  Ad  tolcrandos  fdcilius  labores.  Quint.  Ad  castra  fdcienda  Cic. 
Ob  absohendum.  Id. 

N  )TE.  The  constiiiction  of  the  genind!ve  instead  of  the  genand  almost  in- 
variably occurs  here  when  the  object  of  the  gerund  is  to  be  expressed. 

Rem.  4.  The  ablative  of  gerunds  and  gerundives  follows  the  pre- 
positions a,  (ah),  f/<?,  e,  (ex),  or  in  ;  or  it  is  used  without  a  preposi- 
tion, as  the  ablative  of  cause,  manner,  or  means ;  as, 

Aristolelem  non  diterruit  a  scribendo.  Cic.  Ex  assentando.  Ter.  Non  videor 
ft  defendendis  hominibus  discedere.  Cic.  Crescit  eundo.  Virg.  Jtem  quarunt 
tnercaturis  f  aciendis.  Cic.  Ordtionem  Ldtlnam  legendis  nostris  efficies  pUnio- 
rim.  Id. 

Note  1.  This  ablative  also  occurs,  though  rarely,  after  pro  and  cum;  as. 
Pro  vdpulando.  Plaut.    Cum  Idquendo.  Quint. 

Note  2.  Generally  with  the  ablative  of  the  means,  and  always  with  the  ab- 
lative after  a  preposition,  the  gerund,  when  its  object  is  to  be  expressed,  is 
changed  to  the  genindive.  In  a  few  passages  the  ablative  of  the  gerandive  is 
differently  construed;  as,  Nullum  off icium  referenda  gratia  mar/is  nicessdnum 
*s<,  instead  of  relatione  grdiicB.  ^256.  Cic.  Nee  jam  -possidendis  piiblicis  agris 
conientos  esse.  ^  244.  Liv.  Is  finis  fuit  ulciscenda  Germdnlci  morie, — in  aveng- 
ing the  death  of  Germanicus.  Tac. :  where  the  ablative  seems  to  imply  time. 
^  253. 

SUPINES. 

§  '^  •  t>«  Supines,  like  gerunds,  are  verbal  nouns,  having  no  other  cases  except 
the  accusative  and  ablative  singular.  In  certain  connections  they  supply  the  place  of 
the  present  infinitive;  the  supine  in  iim  having  an  active  and  the  supine  in  u  a  passive 
ngnification.  As  in  the  case  of  gerunds,  we  are  to  regard  their  construction  both  as 
verbs  and  as  nouns.  A,s  verbs  we  are  to  notice  their  government,  as  noun.s,  their  de- 
pendence. 

I.    Supines  in  um  are  followed  by  the  same  cases  as  their 

verbs ;  as, 

Non  Grdiis  servltum  matribus  ibo,  I  shall  not  go  to  serve  Grecian  matrons 
Virg.     Te  id  admonitum  venio.  Plaut. 

n.    Supines  in  mot  follow  verbs  of  motion,  and  serve  to  denote ' 

the  purpose  of  the  motion ;  as, 

Ciibitum  disces.^mus.  Cic.  Ire  dejectum  mdnumenta  regis.  Hor.  Legdti 
venei-unt  questum  injurias,  et  res  repetitum.  Liv.  Quum  spectatum  ludos  iret. 
Nep.  So  after  participles;  a,s,  Patriam  defensnm  revocdtus.  Nep.  Spectatum 
udmissi.  Hor. 

Note.  The  con.struction  of  the  supine  in  um,  considered  as  a  noun,  is  analogous  to 
bat  of  names  of  places  in  answer  to  the  question  '  whither? '  (§  237),  the  notion  of  pur- 
pose arising  from  its  verbal  character. 

Remark  1.  Supines  in  um  sometimes  follow  verbs  which  do  not  express 
motion ;  as.  Do  f'diam  nupium.  Ter.   Vos  ultum  injurias  hortor.  Sail. 

Reji.  2.  The  supine  in  um  with  eo  literallj'  signifies  '  I  go  to  do  a  thing,'  and 
hence  '  1  intend,'  or,  'am  going  to.'  Instances  of  this  use  are  found  in  Plautua 
and  Terence  and  in  the  prose  writers  later  than  Cicero;  as,  Mta  Glucirimn, 
uuid  dyisf  cur  te  Is  perdltum?  Why  are  vou  going  to  desti'oy  yourself  i*  Plaut. 
Biinorum  proemia  ereptum  cunt.  SaU.  With  eo  the  supine  in  um  often  forms  a 
periphra.eis  equivalent  to  the  same  mood  and  terse  of  the  verb  from  which  the 


800  SYNTAX. ADVERBS,  §277 

Bupine  is  forii  ed ;  as,  Ne  bdnos  omnes  perditum  eant  ( Sail. ),  for  pcrdant.  Erep- 
Uim  euHt  (Id.),  for  eripiunt.  U Itum  Ivit  {Tac),  for  ultus  est.  Ultum  ire  injwruu 
festmat,  i.  e.  ulcisci.  Sail. 

Resi.  3.  The  supine  in  7im  most  -frequently  occurs  with  the  infinitive  in 
with  which  it  forms  the  future  infinitive  passive;  as,  Bri'dum  visum  !ri  a  me 
piito.  Cic.  In  this  construction  the  accusative  properly  ilepends  upon  the  su- 
pine, and  h-i  is  used  impersonally ;  '  I  suppose  that  I  am  going  to  see  Brutus.' 
\  184,  2,  {a.)  Its  notion  of  futurity  is  derived  from  the  proper  signification  of 
Mie  active  voice,  as  perditum  Iri,  to  go  to  destroy,  the  idea  of  intending  passing 
easily  into  that  of  futurity. 

Rem.  4.  But  to  express  a  purpose  Latin  writers  in  general  prefer  using  a 
genind  or  gerur  dive  in  the  accusative  with  ad  or  in  the  genitive  with  ccmsa  or 
(jratld,  a  subjurctive  clause  with  ut  or  qui,  a  present  or  future  active  participle, 
and  sometimes  poetically  an  irJInitiTe.  See  §  275,  R.  1,  2:  ^^  262,  264,  274, 
and  271. 

m.    The  supine  in  u  is  used  to  limit  the   meaning  of  adjec 

lives  signifying  wonderful,  agreealie,  easy  or  difficult,  worthy  or 

nnivorthy,  honorable  or  base,  and  a  few  others ;  as, 

MlrahUe  dictu!  Wonderful  to  tell,  or  to  be  told!  Virg.  Jucundum  cognitu  at- 
que  aiulltu,  Pleasant  to  be  known  -and  heard.  Cic.  Res  factu  facilis,  A  thing 
easj'  to  be  done.  Ter.  FaciUa  inventu.  Gell.  liicredibile  inemdrdtu.  Sail.  Tur- 
pia  dictu.  Cic.    Optimum  factu.  Id. 

Note.  The  pWncipal  supines  in  u  in  common  use  are  auditu,  cognitu,  dictu,  fcuttu,  in- 
ventu, mSmoralu  and  natu,  which  occurs  in  the  expressions,  grnnriis,  major,  minor, 
maximus,  and  minimus  natu.  lu  magna  natu,  of  an  advanced  age,  and  maximo  natu 
fllius,  the  ►Idest  son,  natu  Is  the  ablative  of  a  verbal  substantive,  since  neither  gerunds 
nor  supinei  are  joined  with  adjectives. 

Remark  1.  The  principal  adjectives,  after  which  the  supine  in  u  occurs,  are  affabUis, 
arduus,  usper,  bonus,  deformis,  dignus,indignus,  dulris,  diirus,  facilis^  difftcllis,  fccdus, 
fiaris,  konestus,  horrendus,  ihcredthilis,  jucundus,  injucundus,  m,agnus,  ■inemorahilis. 
mollis,  procllvis,  pulcher,  rarus,  turpis,  and  utllis. 

Rem.  2.  The  supine  in  u  is  used  also  after  the  nouns  fas,  nefas,  and  6pus; 
as.  Hoc  fas  est  dictu.  Cic.  Nil/as  dictu.  Ovid.  Dictu  opus  est.  Ter. — In  the 
following  examples  it  follows  a  verb:  PUdei  dictu.  Tac.  Agr.  32.  3ictu  fast'id- 
ienda  sunt.  Val.  Max.  9,  13,  2. 

Rem.  3.  As  the  supine  in  u  is  commonly  translated  by  a  passive  form,  it  is  placed  un- 
der the  passive  voice ;  but,  in  many  cases,  it  may  with  equal  or  greater  propriety  be 
translated  actively.  As  a  noun,its  construction  may  be  referred  to  the  ablative  of  limi- 
tation. §  250. 

«  Rem.  4.  (a.)  Instead  of  the  supine  in  u,  an  infinitive,  a  gerund  or  gerun- 
dive with  ad,  or  a  verbal  noun  in  the  ablative,  and  sometimes  in  tlie  dative  or 
accusative,  may  be  used ;  as,  Ardua  imitdtu,  cUterum  cognosci  Utllia.  Val.  Max. 
Illud  autem  facile  ad  credendum  est.  Cic.  Ojms  proscriptione  dignum.  Plin. 
Agua  potui  jUcunda.  Id.  Fdcillor  ad  inteUectum  atque  imitfitionem.  Quint. 
With  opus  est  the  perfect  passive  participle  is  often  used  instead  of  the  supine 
to  u  ;  as.  Opus  est  maturato.  There  is  need  of  haste.  Cf.  §  243,  R.  1. 

(b.)  The  construction  with  fwZ  and  the  gerand;  as,  res  fdcilis  ad  intelligen- 
ium;  or  with  sum  and  the  infinitive  active;  as,  fdcile  est  inveiilre,  is  used  by 
the  best  writers  after  fdcilis,  difficilis,  and  Jucundus.  The  most  common  con- 
Btruction  of  dlgnus  is  with  qui  and  the  subjunctive,  (§  264,  9),  but  the  poeta 
w\A  later  prose  writers  have  joined  it  with  the  infinitive  passive. 

ADVERBS. 

§  27T.     I.    Aiverbs  modify  or  limit  the  meaning  of  verbs, 
adjectives,  and  sometimes  of  other  adverbs ;  as. 


5  277.  SYNTAX. ADVERBS.  301 

Bene  rndKes,  You  advise  well.  Ter.  Fortissimc  urgentts,  Most  Vigorously 
pressing  on.  PlLn.    Male,  narramlo.  Ter.    Loiuje  dlsstmilis.  Cic.    Valde  bene.  Id 

Remark  1.  Adverbs  may  also  modify  nouns,  wlien  they  arc  used  as  adjec< 
rives  or  participles,  and  accordingly 'denote  a  quality,  or  'when  a  participle  is 
inderstood.  They  are  also  joined  to  adjective  pronouns,  when  their  adjective- 
haracter  predominates;  and  sometimes  limit  the  raeauius;  of  a  preposition;  as, 
Pojmlus  late  rex,  for  k'lte  reynans, — ruling  far  and  wide.  V^'irg.  Nihil  admddi/m, 
Nothing  at  all.  Cic.  Bomo  plane  noster, — entirely  ours  that  is,  devoted  to  us. 
Id.  Bomerus  plane  orator.  Id.  Admodum  puella.  Liv.  Late  tyrannus.  Hor. 
Grdribus  superne  ictibus  conjlktdbantur,  i.  e.  superne  acdden/lbus.  Tac.  Multd- 
'■um  circa  chitdtum,  i.  e.  neighboring  cities.  Liv. 

Rem.  2.  (a.)  Most  of  the  modifications  made  by  adverbs  may  also  be  made 
iy  means  of  the  various  cases  of  nouns  and  adjectives,  and  many  modifications 
may  be  made  bj'  these,  for  expressing  which  no  adverbs  are  in  use.  In  general 
those  limitations  which  are  most  common  can  be  expressed  by  adverbs;  as, 
edpitnter  tor  cum  sdpieniid ;  hie  for  in  hoc  Idco ;  bene  for  in  bono  mddo ;  nunc  for 
hoc  ttmpOre. — {b.)  The  following  are  examples  of  other  parts  of  speech  used 
adverbially,  viz.  Nihil,  '  in  no  way  ' ;  nonnihil,  '  in  some  measure  ' ;  guidquam, 
'  at  all ' ;  dliquid,  '  somewhat ' ;  quidf  '  why  ?  ' 

Rem.  3.  A  negative  adverb,  modifying  another  negative  word, 
destroys  the  negation;  as, 

Nan  pdrere  noluit.  He  was  not  unwilling  to  obey.  Nep.  Baud  igndi-a  7/mli, 
Not  ignorant  of  evil.  Virg.  Baud  nihil  est,  It  is  something.  Ter.  Nee  hoc  ille 
non  vldit.  And  this  lie  clearly  perceived.  Cic.  So,  nonnulli,  some;  nonnumquam, 
sometimes.  Non,  before  a  negative  word,  commonly  heightens  tlie  affirmative 
sense,  while  it  softens  the  expression;  as,  Bdmo  non  indoctus,  i.  e.  homo  sane 
docfus.  Non  semel,  i.  e.  scepius;  non  ignore,  non  nescio,  non  sum  nescius,  I  know 
very  well.  Qui  mortem  in  mdUs  jjonit,  non  potest  earn  iK)n  timcre, — must  needs 
fear  it.  Cic. 

Rem.  4.  When  the  subject  and  predicate  of  a  proposition  are  both 
inoditied  by  negative  words,  and  also  when  the  predicate  contains 
two  negatives,  the  proposition  is  affirmative ;  as, 

N'mo  non  videt,  Every  one  sees.  Cic.  Neque  hcec  non  evewrimt.  And  this 
inde  >d  took  place.  So,  if  botli  the  antecedent  and  the  predicate  of  a  relative 
clau;  J  are  legative,  the  proposition  is  affirmative ;  as.  Nemo  est,  qui  nesciai, 
Evei  /  bodj  snows.  Cic. 

RiSiVi.  6.  a.)  But  in  the  case  of  wow  followed  by  me — quide7n,  the  two  nega- 
tivef  do  n'  destroy  each  other ;  as,  Non  fugio  ne  hos  quidem  mores :  and 
whfin  the  rAgative  leading  proposition  has  subordinate  subdivisions  with  neque 
— ni  j[ue,  rHut — neve,  or  non — non,  these  negative  particles  are  equivalent  to  aut 
— at/i;  as,  Non  me  carminibus  vincet,  nee  Orpheus,  nee  Linus.  Virg.  NemTnem, 
non  re,  non  verbo,  non  vultu  denique  offendi.  Cic.  Nullius  rei  neque  p7-ces,  ne- 
que manceps  /actus  est.  Nep. 

(b.)  In  a  few  passages,  however,  two  negatives  in  Latin,  as  in  Greek, 
strengthen  the  negation,  and  this  exception  appears  to  have  been  derived  from 
the  language  of  common  life;   as.  Jura  te  non  7idcitaram  hiimini  neralni.  Plaut. 

(c.)  Nemo,  nullus,  nihil,  and  numquam  have  a  different  sense  according  as  the 
turn  is  place '  befoi-e  or  after  them ;  as,  Non  nhno,  some  one ;  ncino  non,  every 
one;  nonnulu,  some;  nullus  non,  ever}^;  nonnihil,  something;  nihil  non,  every 
thing;  non  numqunm,  sometimes;  mimquam  non,  at  all  times.  So,  nusquam  non, 
every  where,  but  instead  cf  nonnusquam,  alicObi  is  used. 

Rem.  6.  (a.)  Non  is  sometimes  omitted  after  non  mddo  or  non  so- 
lu7)i,  when  followed,  in  a  subsecjuent  clc»iise,  by  ne  cjuldevi,  if  both 
clauses  have  the  same  verb,  and  if  the  verb  is  coretained  in  the  second 
clause ;  as, 

as 


302  SYNTAX. ADVERBS,  §277 

Mihi  non  riddo  irasci,  sed  ne  ddlere  quidem  hnpune  licet,  which  is  e  nivalent  tn 
Mihi  non  mOdv  non  Irasci,  sed  ne  ddlere  quidem  impUne  licet,  or  Mlhi  n<m  niddi' 
trasci,  sed  duli're  quidem  imimne  non  licet,  Not  onlj'  am  I  not  pei-mitted  to  ba 
angry,  but  not  even  to  grieve  Vkfith  impunity.  Cic.  Q,uuin  sendtid  non  solum  jik- 
tare  rempUblicam,  sed  ne  lUgere  quidem  liceret.  Id. 

(6.)  Non  is  also  rarely  omitted  after  non  mddo  when  followed  by  sed  or  yt'rtts, 
with  etiam,  and  also  after  vix ;  as,  Qui  non  m6do  ca  fiitHra  timet,  verum  etiam 
fert,  sustinetquc  prcesentia,  Who  not  only  does  not  fear....  Cic.  H(ec  cienera 
cirmtum  non  solum  in  moribus  nostris,  sed  viz  jam  in  tbrit  ri'periimtur,'Yh'^i(i 
virtues  are  not  only  not  found  iii  life,  but  scaicely  in  books.  Id. 

Rem.  7.  Facile,  in  the  sense  of  undoubtedly,  clearly,,  is  joined  to  ST^perlati-ves, 
ind  words  of  similar  import;  as,  Vir  iinus  toiius  Ch'cBcioi  facile  doctissimus.  Cic. 
Homo  reglonis  illius  mrtUte  facile  princeps.  Id. 

Rem.  8.  Sentences  are  often  united  by  means  of  an  adverb  which  is  repeated 
before  each  of  the  connected  clauses;  as,  mMo — mddo,  and  mine — nunc,  (some- 
times— sometimes);  ats,  Mddo  hoc,  mddo  illud  d'lcit ;  tnddo  hue,  mddo  illuc  cdlat 
Instead  of  the  second  mticZo  other  particles  of  time  are  sometimes  used;  as, 
illquando,  nonnumquam,  interdum,  sccpius,  turn  or  deinde. — Pariim — -^jac^ww, 'part- 
ly— partlj','  is  sometimes  used  with  a  genitive  or  the  preposition  ex,  in  the 
sense  of  afe'i — dK,  as  a  nominative  in  all  the  genders ;  as,  Quum  p>artim  e  nobit 
ita  timidi  sunt,  ut,  etc.,  ^j«r^if«  iia  repiMica,  dversi,  ut,  etc. — Simul — simul,  '  as 
well — as,'  like  7iu>ic — nunc,  is  not  found  in  Cicero. — Qua — quel  is  equivalent  to 
ei — et. —  Turn — t?im  is  used  sometimes  like  mddo — mddo,  sometimes  like  7;nrtim — 
pdrtim ;  as  Erumpunt  sape  vitia  dmicorum  ium  in  ipsos  dmicos,  tum  in  dUUnos. 
Cic.  Hac  {heneflcia)  tum  in  Universam  remjmbllcam,  tum  in  singfdos  elves  con- 
fevuntur.  Id. 

Rem.  9.  Quum — tum  is  equivalent  to  et — et,  except  in  assigning  a  greater 
hiiportance  to  the  second  part :  hence  it  must  be  translated  by  '  both — and 
es])ecialh','  '  not  only — but  also,'  or  '  but  more  particularly.'  Sometimes  ad- 
ditional weight  is  given  to  the  second  part  by  means  of  vei-o,  certe,  etiam,  qud- 
que,  prcBcijnie,  imprimis  or  maxlme.  This  use  of  quum — ttim  seems  to  have  had 
its  origin  in  the  use  of  quum  with  the  subjunctive  and  often  with  the  indica- 
tive in  the  pi'otasis,  followed  by  twn  in  the  apodosis.  When  quum  followed  by 
tum  serves  to  express  the  opiposition  between  single  words  which  have  the 
Bame  verb,  it  is  to  be  regarded  as  a  complete  adverb;  as,  FortUna  quum  in  rell- 
quis  rebus,  tum  prcecipue  in  bello  j^lilrlmum  2)dtest.  Sometimes  the  verb  stands 
in  the  first  part  of  the  sentence ;  as,  Quum  omnis  arrdyantia  ddiosa.  est,  turn  ilia 
myenii  atque  floquentice  inulto  mdlestissima.  Tum  is  sometimes  repeated  in  the 
second  part  of  tlie  sentence ;  as,  Qucm  pater  mdriens  quum  tuiorlbus  et  prdpi'n- 
fuis,  tum  leylhus,  tum  mquUdti  mayistrdtuum,  turn  judlciis  vestvis  commendatum 
pHiavit.  Cic.     Sometimes  the  gi'adation  is,  quum — turn — ium  vrro. 

Rem.  10.  Non  mddo — sed  etiam  (or  non  solum,  or  non  tantum — va-um  etiam) 
icuerally  expresses  the  transition  from  less  important  to  more  important  things, 
fiko  the  English  'not  only — but  (also)'.  The  transition  from  greater  to  smalW 
things  is  expressed  by  non  mddo — sed,  without  the  etiam,  which  we  render  in 
English  by  '  I  will  not  say — but  only,'  and  in  Latin,  too,  we  may  say  non  dicam 
cr  rum  dlco — sed ;  as,  Quid  est  enim  minus  non  dlco  drdtoris,  sed  hdminis. 

Rem.  11.  Tam — quam  expresses  a  comparison  in  degree;  as.  Nemo  tam 
multa  scripsit,  quam  midta  sunt  nostra.  With  super^itives  they  are  rendered 
into  English  by  '  the — the' and  comparatives;  as,  V  Iterndsus  qimm  plurmum 
inbit,  tam  maxime  sitit,  The  more  he  drinks,  the  more  he  thirsts.  Cato.  Quam 
quisqut  pcssime  fecit,  tam  maxime  tutus  est.  Sail. —  Tam — quam  quod  maxlme 
signifies,  '  as  much  as  possible.' — Non  tam — quam  signifies,  '  not  so  much — as,' 
or  '  less — than  ' ;  as,  Provincia  non  tam  gratiosa  et  Ulustris,  quam  neydtidsa  ac 
mdlesta.  Cic, 

Rem.  12.  Non  minus — quam  and  non  magls — quam  are  equivalent  to  ceque — 
f  c, '  as  much  as,'  but  in  non  magis — quam  the  greater  weight  is  attached  to  tha 
amncative  clause  beginning  with  quam  ;  as,  Alexander  non  ducis  magis  quam 


§  277.  SYNTAX. PREPOSITIONS.  303 

miUtis  munin  exslquehalnr,  Alexander  perfonned  as  much  tt  j  service  of  a  sol- 
dier as  that  of  a  comiuan.ler.  In  this  connection  plus  frequently  sup^ilies  the 
place  of  nidc/is. 

(a.)  Sic  and  ita  are  demonstrative  adverbs  corresponding  to  the  relative  ut. 
The  restrictive  meaning  of  ita  (see  §  191,  R.  5.),  is  sometimes  made  more  em- 
pliatic  by  the  addition  of  tiimen.  Tmitus  is  used  in  a  like  restrictive  sense;  as, 
PrcBsidii  tantuin  est,  ut  ne  milrus  quklem  cuHji  possit,  i.  e.  '  only  so  much.'  Ca^s. 

(b.)  Ut — ita  or  sk  places  sentences  on  au  equality.  They  may  sometimei- 
be  translated  '  altliouch — still,'  or  '  indeed — but.' — The  adverb  ut,  '  as,'  some- 
times takes  the  signification  of  the  conjunction  quod,  'because';  as,  Atgue  i'le^ 
ut  semper  J'uit  apertissinms,  non  se  puryavit.  Cic. 

Reji.  13.  In  an  enumeration,  prlmum,  deinde,  turn,  denique  are  commonh 
preferred  to  the  numerals,  prlmnm,  sccundo,  (for  secundum  is  not  often  used), 
tertium,  quariuiii,  etc.,  unless  the  strict  succession  of  the  luxmbers  is  required. 
Sometimes  turn  is  used  once  or  twice  instead  of  deinde,  or  the  series  is  extended 
by  acchlit,  hue  adde,  etc.  Sometimes  dcnigue  is  followed  by  postremo  to  form 
the  conclusion  of  a  series,  but  often  denique  without  the  other  adverbs  con- 
cludes a  seiies,  and  is  then  equivalent  to  '  in  short  'or  'in  fine.'  See  CIc.  Cat. 
1,  5. 

Resi.  14.  Mintts  is  often  used  for  non ;  as,  Nonnumquam  ea,  qua  prcedicta 
su)ii,  minus  eveniunt.  Cic. — So,  si  mimis — at,  '  if  not — yet;'  and  sin  minus,  'but 
if  not,'  without  a  verb,  after  a  preceding  si ;  but  with  si  iwn  the  verb  is  repeated. 
— The  English  '  how  little '  is  in  Latin  quam  non ;  and  '  so  little,'  ita  non  or 
ddeo  non ;  as,  ddeo  non  curabat,  quid  hdmines  de  se  Idquerentur. 

Rem.  15.  Nunc  always  expresses  the  time  actually  present,  or  the  time  to 
which  a  narrator  transfers  himself  for  the  puqiose  of  making  his  description 
livelier.  Thus  in  speaking  of  the  present  time  we  may  say.  Nunc  p)rimum 
somnia  me  eladunt  or  elUserunt;  \>\\X  in  a  narrative  we  must  say,  Somnia  twnc 
primum  se  dlccbat  eldsisse.  Compare  the  use  of  hie  and  ille.  See  §  207,  R.  23,  (c.) 

Rem.  16.  The  conjunction  dum, '  while,'  when  added  to  negatives,  becomes  an 
adverb,  signifying  •  yet ' ;  as,  nondum,  '  not  yet ' ;  necdum,  '  and  not  yet ' ;  nul- 
lusdum,  '  no  one  yet ' ;  nihildum,  '  nothing  yet.'  Hence  vixdum  signifies  '  scarcely 
yet ' ;  as,  Vixdum  epistdlam  iuam  legeram,  qwwn  ad  me  Ourtius  venil.  Cic. — 
So,  also,  the  conjunction  nisi,  by  omitting  its  verb  or  uniting  it  with  the  lead- 
ing verb,  acquires,  after  negatives  and  negative  questions,  the  sense  of  the  ad- 
verb '  except,'  which  is  generally  expressed  by  prceterquani  or  the  preposition 
prater,  and  must  be  so  expressed  when  no  negative  precedes.  But  the  ex- 
pression 'except  that'  may  be  rendered  either  by  nisi  quod  or  praterquam 
quod. — After  nihil  idiuil  we  may  use  either  nisi  or  quam,  nisi  referring  to  nihil 
and  quam  to  aliud.  Hence  nihil  aliud  nisi  signifies  '  nothing  further,'  or  '  noth- 
ing more,'  and  nihil  aliud  quam,  '  nothing  else,'  or  '  no  other  thing  but  this.' 

Rem.  17.  Ut,  '  as,'  in  interposed  clauses,  such  as  vt  dplnor,  ut  pulo,  ut  censeo, 
ut  credo,  is  frequently  omitted.  Credo,  used  in  this  manner  often  takes  an  ironi- 
jal  sense. 

PREPOSITIONS. 

II.  1.  See  respectmg  the  constnaction  of  prepositions  with  the  accusative, 
\  235:  and  with  the  ablative,  \  241.  See,  also,  for  the  diff'erent  meanmgs  of 
prepositions,  ^  195,  and  for  their  arrangement,  §  279,  10. 

2.  Two  prepositions  must  not  be  joined  in  Latin,  as  they  sometimes  are  in 
English,  with  the  same  noun;  as,  to  speak  /b?- and  against  a  law;  or,  I  have 
learned  this  roith,  and,  to  some  extent,  from  him.  These  sentences  may  be 
thus  expressed  in  Latin ;  pro  lege  et  contra  h'gem  d'icere ;  hcsc  cum  eo,  partim 
eiiam  ab  eo  didici.  Those  dissyllabic  prepositions  onlv,  which  are  sometimes 
used  as  adverbs,  may  follow  another,  without  being  joined  with  a  case;  as, 
Quod  aut  secundum  natUram  esset,  aut  contra.  Cic.  Cis  Padum  uUrdque-  Liv 
Ciesar  reverses  the  order,  fnlj-a  extrdque  ijiuniiiones.  B.  Civ.  3,  72 


304  SYNTAX. CONJUNCTIONS.  §  278, 

3.  Wlien  ncuns  mutually  dependent  upon  a  prepositioi  are  in  ap- 
position, when  they  constitute  an  enumeration  without  a  coonective, 
and  when  connec-ted  by  copulative,  disjunctive,  ad\  ersative,  or  com- 
parative conjunctions,  the  preposition  is  not  repeated,  unless  such 
nouns  are  to  be  distinguished  from  each  other,  or  are  emphatic ;  as. 

Quid  dlcam  de  tlmsAuro  omnium  reruni,  memoria?  Hoc  aiiparet  in  bestiis, 
vohicribus,  nantibus,  ap-estibus,  cicuribus,  ('Oris,  ut  se  ipsw  dlligant.  Cic. 
Scepissime  inter  me  tt  Scipioiiem  de  am'ailid  dtsgerebatur.  Id.  Quid  faceres  si 
in  aliquam  domum  villamve  venissesf  Id.  Niliii  per  Tram  nut  cupiilitatom 
(U  turn  est.  Id.  Theiiiinludts  no7i  minus  in  rebus  gerendis  prumjHus  quam  ex.cb- 
gitandis  ej-at.  Nep. 

4.  The  monosyllabic  prepositions  ab,  ad,  de,  ex,  and  in  are  often  used  bf-,iore 
each  of  two  iiouiis  connected  by  et,  etc.,  especially  if  the  qualities  denoted  by 
such  nouns  are  to  be  considered  separately.  If  the  nouns  are  separated  by 
tt — ct,  ntc — nee,  etc.,  the  prepositions  must  be  repeated;  as,  Ut  eOrum  et  in 
bellhis  et  in  clvilibus  officiis  vUjeat  industria.  Glc— Inter  is  fi-equently  repeated 
by  Cicero  after  inieresse,  and  other  writers  repeat  it  after  other  verbs  also;  as, 
duid  intersit  inter  pdpularem—c'n'eni,  et  inter  comtnnlem,  seventm  et  ffrdvem.  Cic. 
Certdtum  inter  Ap.  Claudimn  maxlme  ferunt  et  inter  P.  Deeium.  Liv. 

5.  («.)  In  poetry  a  preposition  is  occasionally  omitted  with  the  first  of  two 
nouns,  and  put  with  the  second  only;  as.  Qua  nemdra,  aut  quos  dyor  in  specus, 
( Hor. )  for,  in  qua  nemdra  nut  in  quos  speeus  dgor.  So,  Hor.  Ep.  2,  1,  25. — 
(b.)  An  ellipsis  of  a  preposition  with  the  relative  pronouu  sometimes  occurs, 
together  with  that  of  the  verb  belonging  to  the  preceding  demonstrative ;  as, 
In  eddem  dpinione  fui,  qua  reliqui  onmes,  (Cic),  properly  m  qua  reliqui  omnes 
fueruni. 

CONJUNCTIONS. 

r 

§  278.     Copulative,  disjunctive,  and  other  coordinate  con- 
junctions, connect  similar  constructions. 

Note  1.  Clauses  are  similarly  constmcted,  which  are  mutually  independent, 
whose  subjects  and  verbs  are  iii  the  same  case  and  mood,  and  which  hav*- 
either  no  dependence  or  a  similar  dependence  on  another  clause. 

Note  2.  (a.)  Words  have  a  similar  constnaction,  when  they  stand  in  th( 
same  relation  to  some  other  word  or  words  in  the  sentence.     Hence, 

(6.)  Conjunctions  coiuiect  the  same  cases  of  nouns  and  pronouns,  depend 
ent,  if  the  cases  are  oblique,  upon  the  same  government;  the  same  number 
case,  and  gender  of  adjectives,  belongiug  to  the  same  noun;  the  same  mood  of 
verbs,  either  independent,  or  alike  dependent;  adverbs  qualifying  the  same 
verbs,  adjectives,  etc. ;  and  prepositions  on  which  depends  the  same  noun  or 
pronoua;  as,  Concidunt  venti,  fugiuntqwe.  nubeg^  The  winds  subside,  an<'  the 
clouds  disperse.  Hor.  Ldcum,  quern  et  non  cdquit  sol,  et  Uingit  ros.  Varr.  Lvdi 
decern  per  dies,  facti  sunt,  neque  res  ulla  prcetermissa  est.  Cic.  Vldes,  ut  alta 
stei  nlve  cnndlduvi  Soracte,  ncc  jam  sustmeani  onus  silvce  lihorantes,  geluque 
Jiuminn  constiterint  acuto.  Hor.  JnfeUif/itis  et  dnimuvi  ei  prceslo  fuisse,  nee  co«- 
siliiim  dffuisse.  Cic.  Geiierl  ummantlum  omui  est  a  ndturd  trihutum,  id  se  tuedtur, 
dicl'metque  en,  qua  nociluni  vtdeniitur.  Id.  Aut  nemo,  aut  Cato  sapiens  futi.  Id. 
Pulvis  et  umbra  siinius.  Hor.  Si  tu  et  Tullia  vdletis,  ego  eiCjcero  wilcmiis.  Cic. 
AggC-re  jacto  turriljusrywe  constiti'dis.  Cx%.  Clams  et  honoratus  vir.  An  illus- 
trious and  honorable  man.  Id.  Casar  Rcmos  cohortatus,  llberdlUerque  drdtidm 
proseciitus.  Ca3s.  Pater  tuus,  quern  colui  et  dilexi.  Cic.  Behjo'  spectavt  in 
septentrionem  et  orientem  solera.  Cses.  Navlbus  juiictis,  ratibusgwe  compluri- 
bus  factis.  Id.  Lege,  ret  tubeWis  redde.  Plant.  AllobrOges  trans  RhddCmum  vicos 
possessionesgwe  hdbebant.  C:bs.  Quum  triamplium  egeris,  censorqne  fueris,  ei 
ob'eris  iej  atus.  Id.    Quum  ad  opiMum  accessisstt,  castraque  ibi  poneret.  Cacs 


§  278.  SYNTAX. — CONJUNCTIONS.  305 

Ades  an(m-  et  fimitte  iifnorem.  Cic.  Ea  vldere  ac  persp!ccie  pdtestis.  Id 
Gnivltcr  ct  ^opiose  dlxisse  dicUiir.  Id.  Cum  f  nitre  an  sine.  Id.  Cf.  §  277,  II.  2. 
Citi  carmiua  cordi,  numerosqiie  intendere  nems.  Virg.  Nee  census,  nee  eJdi-un; 
udmen  avOnmi,  sed  probitas  maynos  ingi'uimnque  jacit.  Ovid.  Philosfijjhi  ne- 
gant  queniquam  vlrum  ionum  esse,  nisi  sapientem.  Cic.  Gloria  virtutevi  tarn- 
quam  umbra  seqiiitur.  Id. 

Remark  1.  Copulative  conjunctions  may  connect  either  single 
words  and  phrases  or  entire  clauses ;  the  other  conjunctions,  whether 
coordinate  or  subordinate,  connect  clauses  only. 

Rkii.  2.  Words  thus  connected  are  sometimes  in  different  oases,  though  in 
the  same  construction;  as,  Mea  e<  reipubHc;«  interest.  Cic.  (See  ^  219.)  Slve 
es  RGm»,  sive  in  Epiro.  Id.  (See  §§  221  and  254.  But  see  also  ^  221,  Note.)  In 
Mtttii  descendat  judlcis  awes,  et  patris  et  nostras.  Hor.  See  §  211,  R.  3.  In  like 
manner,  Hannibal  non  aliter  vinci  pOtwit,  quam  mora. 

Rem.  3.  As  the  subjunctive  is  often  used  for  the  imperative,  they  may  be 
comiected  by  coOixlinate  conjunctions;  as,  Disce  nee  invideas.  Pers. 

Rem.  4.  Where  the  purpose  of  the  writer  requires  it,  coordinate  conjunc- 
tions sometimes  connect  independent  propositions,  whose  verbs  are  in  different 
moods;  as,  Sliiporem  hdminis,  vel  dicam  pecUdis,  videte.  Cic.  JVec  satis  scio, 
nee,  si  sciam,  dicere  ausim.  Liv. 

Rem.  5.  £t  is  used  after  multi  followed  by  another  adjective,  where  in 
English  'and'  is  usually  omitted;  as,  Multa  et  niagnce  arhOres,  Many  large 
trees.  In  such  cases  et  supplies  the  place  of  et  is,  intro'^.ucing  a  more  accurate 
description.    See  §  207,  R.  26,  (c.) 

Rem.  6.  The  conjunction  is  often  omitted;  as,  (a.)  When  two  single  words, 
an  comprehending  the  whole  idea,  are  opposed  to  each  other,  as,  x^elim,  noUin, 
whether  I  would  or  not;  maxima  minima,  the  gi'eatest  as  well  as  tlie  least; 
jyrlma  postrema,  from  the  first  to  the  last ;  dignos  mdiejnos  adlre  ;  ire  red'ire,  to 
go^o  and  fro.  yEdiJ'iciis  omnibus  pUblieis  prlvatis,  sacris  pi'.dfCinis  sic  pepercit. 
Cic.  Nam  gloriam,  hdnorem,  imperium  bdnus  ignavus  (sque  sibi  exoptant.  Sail. 
C.  11. 

(6.)  Et  is  very  frequently  omitted  between  the  names  of  two  colleagues;  a-s, 
Consuks  di'elcirciti  sunt  Cn.  Pompeius  M.  Crassus.  P.  Lentido  L.  Tridrio,  qiues- 
loribus  urbclnis.  Cic.  Sometimes,  also,  when  the  two  persons  are  not  colleagues. 
it  is  also  occasionally  omitted  between  two  words  in  the  oratorical  style;  as, 
Aderant  dmlci,  prdpinqui.  Id. ;  also  with  verbs ;  as,  Adsunt,  qucruntur  Sicidi.  Id. 
In  good  prose,  if  three  or  more  substantives  are  joined,  it  is  usual  either  wholly 
to  omit  the  conjunction  or  to  insert  it  between  each.  The  following  may  sei-ye 
as  an  example  of  both  cases:  Qui  non  mddo  CUriis,  Cdfonlbus,  Pompeiis,  anVquia 
illis,  sed  his  recenlibus,  Mdnis  et  Didiis  et  (Jceliis  commemdrandis  jdeebant.  This 
is  also  the  common  practice  with  adjectives  and  verbs,  and  hence  when  et  has 
not  previously  occurred  in  an  enumeration  of  persons  or  things,  we  should  not 
conclude  the  enumeration  with  et  alii,  et  reliqui,  et  eeiera,  etc.,  but  should  make 
use  of  the  adjectives  alone,  alii,  reliqui,  eetera,  etc.  But  though  et,  ae  and  ai- 
gue  are  not  used  alone  in  the  third  or  fourth  place,  yet  the  enclitic  que  fre- 
quently occurs  in  this  position ;  as,  Precor  ut  ea  res  vobis  pcieem,  tranquilUid' 
lent,  oiium,  concordiamque  afferat.  Cic.  Et  may  be  supplied  also  when  two 
jirotases  introduced  by  sJ  are  joined  together;  where  we  say*  if — and  if,'  or 
'if— and.'  See  an  example  in  Cic.  Off.  3,  9. 

(c.)  An  ellipsis  of  m(  is  supposed  when  we  precedes  and  el,  aique,  or  qtte  is 
used  to  continue  the  sentence,  those  copulative  conjunctions  in  such  case  ob- 
taiuing  the  meaning  of  the  adversative  sed;  as,  MOnere  ccepit  Porvm,  ne  ultima 
experiri  persevirdret,  dederetque  se  viciorl.  Curt. 

Rem.  7.  Copulative  conjunctions  are  often  used,  before  each  of  two  or  more 
connected  words  or  clauses,  in  order  to  mark  the  connection  more  forcibly;  as, 
Et  petunia  persuddel,  et  gratia,  et  auetdrilns  dlcentis,  et  dignitas,  et  postrema 
aspectus.  Quint.  Hoe  et  turpe,  nee  tdmen  tutum.  Cic.  Neque  nala  est,  et  aslernc 
est.  U.     Kt  liln  et  mihi  rdlupldli /Ore.  Id.     Before  clauses   the  disjunctive  coc 

26* 


3C6  SYNTAX. ARRANGEMENT    OF    WORDS.  §  279 

junctions  aie  used  in  a  similar  manner;  as,  Res  ipsa  aut  invitabit  aut  dehortoM 
tur.  Id.  "So,  also,  nunc. ..nunc,  simul...simul,  partim...partim,  qua. ..qua,  turn,.. 
turn,  quura...tum,  are  used  before  successive  clauses. 

Rem.  8.  To  connect  different  names  of  the  same  person  or  thing,  s'we  or  sei/, 
rather  than  aut  or  vel,  is  employed;  as,  Mars  s'tve  Mavors.  Cf.  §  198,  2,  (c.) 

Rem.  9.  Instead  of  et  and  ut  with  the  negatives  nemo,  nihil,  nullus,  and  num- 
quam,  nequt  (or  nee),  and  ne  are  used  with  the  con-esponding  affirmative  words 
quisquam,  ullus,  umquam,  and  usquam.  But '  in  order  that  no  one  '  is  rendered 
in  Latin  by  ne  quis  and  not  by  ne  quisquam,  see  §  207,  R.  31,  (a.);  as,  Ej^ra 
quiiJem  cedunt,  et  dies,  et  menses,  et  anni :  nee  prcetiritum  tempus  umquam  re- 
vertUur.  Cic.  Senatus  decrevit,  darent  dperam  consiiles,  ne  quid  reepublica  deirl- 
nienti  aiperet.  Goes. 

Rem.  10.  The  conjunctions  igitur,  vei-um,  verumtamen,  sed,  and  sed  {amen,  iii 
dicate  a  return  to  tlie  construction  of  the  leading  clause,  when  it  has  been 
disturbed  by  the  insertion  of  another  claus'6.  These  conjunctions,_  in  such 
connection,  are  usually  rendered  by  '  I  say,'  and  sometimes  in  Latm  inquam  is 
so  used.  Nam  also  is  occasionally  employed  in  this  way  and  very  rarely 
itdque. 

Rem  11.  Vero  and  autern  are  frequently  omitted  in  adversative  clauses, 
especially  in  short  ones ;  as,  Vincere  scit  Hcinnlbal,  victoria  uti  nescit.  Liv.  This 
omission' often  occurs  in  describing  a  progi-ess  from  smaller  to  gi-eater  things, 
as  in  Cic.  Cat  1,  1.  And  it  is  to  be  remarked  that  noii  in  the  second  member 
of  such  adversative  sentences  is  used  without  et  or  vero ;  as,  aliena  vitia  ivlet, 
sua  non  ridei.  But  in  unreal  suppositions  or  ironical  sentences,  where  tlie  second 
member  contains  the  ti-utli,  et  non  or  ac  twn  must  be  used,  where  we  may  sup- 
ply'rather';  see  §  198,  1,  (c);  as.  Quasi  nunc  id  dgdtur, — ac  non  hoc  qnaiVA- 
tm\  Cic. 

INTERJECTIONS.  * 

Respecting  the  construction  of  Inteijections  with  the  nominative,  see  §  209 
R.  13 ; — with  the  dative,  §  228,  3 : — with  the  accusative,  §  238,  2 : — and  witb 
the  vocative,  §  240. 

ARRANGEMENT. 
I.     OF    THE    WORDS    OF    A    PROPOSITION. 

§  ^yO.  1.  In  arranging  the  parts  of  a  proposition  in  English,  after 
connectives,  are  placed,  first,  the  subject  and  the  words  which  modify  or  limit 
it;  next,  the  t"er6  and  its  modifiers ;  then,  the  object  of  the  verb;  and  finally. 
prepositions  and  the  words  depending  upon  them.  This  is  calle  ;1  the  loyical 
or  natural  order. 

2.  (a.)  In  Latin,  either  of  the  four  principal  parts  of  a  sentence  may  be 
placed  first,  and  thei'e  is  great  freedom  in  the  .an-angement  of  the  rest,  bu; 
with  this  general  restriction  in  prose,  that  words  which  are  necessary  for  i!.<- 
complete  expi-ession  of  a  thonffht  should  not  be  separated  by  the  intervention  ofothi-r 
icords.  In  ordinary  discourse,  especially  in  historical  writing,^  the  followin;' 
general  rule  for  the  arrangement  of  the  parts  of  a  sentence  is  for  tlie  most  p-iri 
observed. 

{b.)  In  a  Latin  sentence,  after  connectives,  are  placed,  fii-st, 
the  subject  and  its  modifiers;  then,  the  obliqve  cases  and  other 
woi-ds  which  depend  upon  or  modify  the  verb;  and  \iis.\  of  all, 
tlie   verb. 


§  279.  SYNTAX. — ARRANGEMENT    OF   WORDS.  307 

(c.)  Hence  a  Latin  sentence  regularly  be^ns  with  tlie_  subject  and  ends 
witli  tlic  principal  verb  of  its  predicate;  as,  Dumnorix  f/ratid  vi  lar<jitione  apiui 
Siquaiios  pluiimum  poterut.  Ca3s.  But  the  verb  is  ofj^^iot  placed  at  the  ena 
of  a  seuLeiice,  especially  if  the  sentence  is  long,  or  if  ^jjafii^any  verbs  would  be 
thn*  brought  together  at  the  end.  In  the  familiar  style,  also,  the  verb  is  often 
placed  earlier  in  the  sentence,  and  in  explanatory  clauses  it  is  sometimes 
placed  at  the  very  beginning  of  the  proposition,  in  which  case  a  conjunction  is 
generally  added. 

{d.)  It  is  also  to  be  remarked,  as  a  further  modification  of  the  general  rule 
of  arrangement,  that,  in  sentences  containing  the  expression  of  emotion,  the 
■word  whose  emphasis  chai-acterizes  it  as  especially  alfecting  the  feelings,  or  as 
fonning  a  contrast,  is  j)laced  at  the  beginning;  as,  Cito  drescit  lacrimn,  prm- 
iertli.-i  in  dlienis  mdlis,  Quickly  dries  the  tear,  especially  when  shetl  for  others' 
woes.  Cic.     Sua  vitia  insipientes  et  suam  cidpam  in  senectutem  conferunt.  Id. 

(e.)  If  i\\QVQ\)Q  no  emotive  OY  pathetic  Vfox A  requiring  prominence,  the  place 
at  the  end  of  the  proposition  is  reserved  for  the  significant  word,  that  is,  the 
word  which  is  to  be  most  strongly  impressed  upon  the  undei'standing  or  mem- 
ory; as,  Gallia  est  omnis  divisa  in  pai-fes  tres.  Gxs.  Quod  ante  id  tempos  accidS- 
rat  numquam.  Id.  Qimd  dliud  iter  lidherent  nullmn.  Id.  Quoe  virtus  ex  prooi- 
dendo  est  ajypelldta  priidentia.  Cic.    ■ 

3.  (a.)  Connectives  generally  stand  at  the  beginning  of  the  clause 
■which  they  introduce,  and  with  the  following  this  is  their  only  posi- 
tion; \iz. . et,  eteniin,  ac,  nt,  atque,  afqui,  neque  or  nee,  aut,  vet,  sive, 
sin,  sed,  nam,  verum,  and  the  relatives  quare,  quocirca,  and  quamo- 
bv^m. 

(b.)  Most  other  connectives  generally  stand  in  the  first  place,  but  when  a 
particular  word  is  peculiarly  emphatic,  this  word  with  aU  that  belongs  to  it 
stands  first,  and  the  conjunction  follows  it.  Ut,  even  when  there  is  nc  part'cu- 
lar  emphasis,  is  commonly  placed  after  vix,  prnne,  and  prdpe,  and  also  after  tiie 
negatives  nullus,  nemo,  nihil,  and  the  word  tantum.  In  Cicero,  itdque  stands 
first  and  iyitur  is  commonly  placed  after  the  first,  and  sometimes  after  several 
■words. 

(c.)  Autem,  enim,  and  vera  (but),  are  placed  after  the  first  word  of  the  clause, 
or  after  the  second,  when  the  first  two  belong  together,  or  when  one  of  them 
is  the  auxihary  v^  :■  sum;  as,  Ille  enim  revdcdtus  resistere  ccepit.  Ca;s.  Ji(/c 
vero  vellem,  aff'uis!-. :  Cic.  Incrcdibile  est  enim,  yuamsii,  etc.  Id.  They  rarely 
occur  after  several  words;  as.  Our  non  de  integro  autem  datum.  Id.  The  encli- 
tics que,  ne,  ve,  are  usually  subjoined  to  the  first  word  in  a  clause;  but  when  a 
monosyUabic  preposition  stands  at  the  beginnmg,  they  are  often  attached  to  its 
case;  as,  Romam  Cdto  demigrdvit,  m  foroque  esse  ccepit;  and  this  is  always  the 
case  with  a,  ad  and  ob.     So,  also,  for  the  sake  of  euphony,  Apud  quosque.  Cic. 

(d.)  Quidem  and  qudque,  when  belonging  to  single  words,  are  always  sub- 
joined to  the  emphatic  word  in  a  clause;  as,  Verbo  ille  reus  erat,  re  c^uidem 
vei'O  Oppianicus.  Cic.  Me  scilicet  maxime,  sed  proxime  ilium  quoqne  J  efellis- 
sem.  Id.  In  negative  sentences,  ne  pi-ecedes,  and  quidem  follows,  the  emphatic 
word;  as,  Ne  ad  Cutonem  quidem  7;ctiroc«6o.  Cic. —  Quidem  is  sometimes  at- 
tracted from  the  word  to  which  it  properly  belongs  to  a  neighboring  pronouri ; 
as,  Tibique  persuade,  esse  te  quidem  rnlhi  cdrissimum,  sed  multo  fore  cdridnr.i,, 
si,  etc.,  instead  of,  te  cdrissimum  quidem  mihi  esse. — Prepositions  and  conjunc- 
tions belonging  to  tlie  word  on  which  the  emphasis  rests  are  placed  with  it  ije- 
tween  ne  and  5Mif7em ;  as,  Ke  in  fdnis  quidem.  Cic.  -Ne  si  duuUillur  quidem.  Id, 
Ne  quum  in  S  icilid  quidem  full.  Id. ;  and  even  A'e  cujus  rei  argueretur  quidem.-^ 
So,  also,  in  Cicero,  non  nisi,  'only,'  are  separated;  and  the  negative  may  even 
be  contained  in  a  verb. 

(e.)  The  preceding  rules  respecting  the  position  of  connectives  are  often 
delated  bv  the  poets,  who  place  even  the  prepositive  conjunctions  after  one  or 
more  words  of  a  proposition ;  as,  Ei  tu,  pdtes  nam,  etc..  Hor.     Vivos  et  rodirti 


308  SYNTAX. — ARRANGEMENT    0»     l^ORDS.  §  279 

ungues.  Id.  They  even  separate  et  from  tlie  woi-d  belonging  to  it ,  as,  Audirt 
et  videor  pios  errare  ptr  tiicos.  Id.  So,  Auctius  atque  dli  melius  fcojre..  Id 
And  tliey  sometimes  append  que  and  ve  neither  to  the  first  word,  nor  to  tiicif 
proper  words  in  otlier  connections;  as,  Messallam  terra,  dum  sequltiirqne  mdri, 
instead  of  terra  nidrique.  Tib.  In  such  arbitrary  positions,  however,  these 
conjunctions  are  almost  invariably  joined  to  verbs  only. 

4.  When  a  word  is  repeated  in  the  same  clause,  so  that  one  is  opposed  to, 
)r  distinguished  from,  the  other,  they  must  stand  together;  as,  Homines  homi- 
-wbus  inaxime  utiles  esse  possimt.  Cio.  Equites  alii  alio  d'dapsi  sunt.  Liv.  Legii- 
\ue  virum  vir.  Virg.  Planus  manum  Idvat.  Petr.  So,  also,  the  personal  and 
possessive  pronouns ;  as,  Sequere  quo  tua  te  ndfiira  ducit.  Suum  se  necfotium 
ijere  dlcunt. 

5.  Words  used  antithetically  are  also  placed  near  each  other;  as,  !>»?«  ta- 
cent,  clamant.  Cic.    Fragile  corpus  animus  sempLternus  movet.  Id. 

6.  Iiiqunm  and  often  aio,  introducing  a  quotation,  follow  one  or  more  of  the 
words  quoted;  as,  '  iVbra  iwsti  quid  pdter,^  inquit,  ^ Chr^sipjms  dicat.''  Hor. 
'  Quid,''  ^io,  '  tua  crlmina  prodisV  Ovid.  When  a  nominative  is  added  to  iiiquit, 
it  usually  follows  this  verb ;  as,  Mihi  vero,  inquit  Cotta,  vldetur.  Cic. — Dlcii 
and  dixit  are  used  like  inquit  only  bj'  the  poets. 

7.  (a.)  The  adjective  may  be  placed  before  or  after  its  noun  according  as 
ons  or  the  other  is  cmiihatic,  the  more  emphatic  word  being  placed  before  the 
other.  When  any  thing  is  ilepemlent  on  the  adjective,  it  usually  follows  its 
noun.  When  a  noun  is  limited  by  another  noun,  as  well  as  by  an  adjective, 
the  adjective  usually  precedes  both;  as,  Ulla  ofl'Icii  praecepta.  Cic.  Tuum  erga 
dignitatem  meani  stikhum.  Id. 

(b.)  Demonstratives,  and  the  adjectives  primus,  medius,  etc.,  when  signifying 
the  first  part,  the  middle  part,  etc.,  (see  §  205,  R.  17),  usually  precede  their 
nouns;  as,  JEa  res.  Cajs  His  ipsii  verbis.  Cic.  Media  nox.  Ctes.  Reliqua 
yEgypius.  Cic. 

8.  Jlonosyllables  are  usually  prefixed  to  longer  words  with  which  they  are 
connected;  as,  Vir  cldrissimus.  Cic.  Di  imnwrtales.  Res  innumerdbiles.  Vis 
tciapestdtis.  Cses. 

9.  (a.)  When  nouns  are  put  in  apposition,  the  one  which  explains  or  defines 
the  other  is  generally  put  last,  unless  it  is  to  be  made  emphatic ;  as.  Opes  irrl- 
tamenta  mdtdvum.  Ovid.  Hence  names  of  honors  or  dignities,  and  every  thing 
of  the  nature  of  a  title,  are  commonly  placed  after  the  proper  name,  as  explan- 
atory additions.  Thus,  especially,  the  names  of  changeable  Roman  dign.ties; 
as,  (7ice)'o  consul ;  C.  Curioni  tribuno  plebis_;  but  also  pennanent  appellations; 
its,  Ennius  poeta;  Plato  pliilosophus;  Didnysius  tyrunnus;  and  such  epithets  as 
vir  Jwnestissimus ;  hdmo  doctissimus.  But  the  hereditary  title  rex  is  frequently 
placed  before  the  name;  as,  rex  Deiotarus;  and  so  the  title  Imperdtor  after  it 
became  permanent. 

(6.)  In  the  arrangement  of  the  Roman  names  of  persons,  the  prcendmen 
•tands  first,  next  the  nomen  or  name  of  the  qens,  third  the  cognome'n  or  name 
of  the  fdmrUa,  and  last  the  agnomen ;  as,  Publius  Cornelius  Scipio  AJ'r1cd':i^s. 
The  prienomen  is  usually  denoted  by  a  letter.  In  the  imperial  times  the  nomen 
is  often  either  omitted  or  follows  as  something  subordinate. 

10.  (a.)  Oblique  cases  precede  the  words  on  which  they  depend, 
but  they  follow  prepositions ;  as, 

Populi  Romdni  laus  est.  Cic.  Laudis  dvidi,  pecuniae  llberdles.  Sail.  Cunctis 
esto  benignus,  nulli  blandus,  paucis  fdmilidris,  omnibus  ceqmis.  Sen.  MdnO- 
mentum  sere  perennius.  Hor.  Hanc  tibi  ddno  do.  Ter. — Ad  meridiem  spectans, 
Cic.     Extra  jKrlcidum.  Id. 

(6.)  Genitives  dependhig  upon  neuter  adjectives  are  commonly  placed  last, 
as,  Ijicf.rta  foriunce.  Liv.     Nee  tlhi  plus  cordis,  sed  minus  oris  inest.  Ovid. 


§  279.  SYNTAX. ARRANGEMENT    OF    WORDS.  309 

Remark.  This  rale,  so  for  especialh'  as  it  relates  to  genitives,  is  in  a  grea' 
degree  arbitrary,  as  the  position  of  the  governed  and  governing  words  depends 
on  tlie  idea  to  be  expressed;  thus,  7nors  jxitns  ttii,  contrasts  the  doath  with  tha 
preceding  life ;  but,  frdtris  tui  mors  distinguishes  this  case  of  ileath  from  otliers. 
Hence  we  say,  dnimi  motits,  dnimi  morbus,  corpdi-is  partes,  terrce  motus. — An  ob- 
jective genitive  usually  follows  the  worJ  on  which  it  depends;  as,  una  siyiiifi- 
cdlidne  llterarum,  by  means  of  a  single  notice  by  letters. — When  several  geni- 
tives are  dependent  on  one  noun,  the  suljjective  genitive  commonly  precc'les 
and  the  objective  genitive  may  either  precede  or  follow  the  governing  noun. — 
The  genitive  dependent  on  causa  or  gratia,  '  on  account  of,'  regularly  precedes 
these  ablatives ;  as,  glorwe  causa  mortem  dblre ;  emolumenti  siii  gratia. 

(c.)  When  a  noun  which  is  governed  by  a  preposition,  is  modified  by  other 
words  which  precede  it,  the  preposition'  usually  stands  before  the  words  by 
winch  the  noun  is  modified;  as,  A  prima  liwead  sextam  haram.  Liv.  Ad  dnimi 
met  hetitiam.  Cic.     Ad  bene  bedtcque  vivendum.  Id. 

((/.)  Sometimes,  however,  the  preposition  comes  between  its  noun  and  an 
ndjective  or  a  genitive,  by  which  the  noun  is  modified;  as.  Nulla  in  re.  Cic. 
Justis  de  causi.<.  Id.  Siws  inter  aqudles.  Id.  Hanc  ob  causam.  Id.  Magna  cum 
vietu.  Id.  Qua  in  urbe  Id.  Ed  in  re.  Id.  jEtdtis  suce  cum  primis.  Nep. — 
So,  also,  a  conjunction  may  follow  the  preposition;  as,  PostvQro  Sulhe  victo- 
riam. 

(e.)  Per,  in  adjurations,  is  often  separated  from  its  case  by  other  words;  as, 
Per  ego  te  deos  d)'o.  Tei'. — In  the  poets,  other  prepositions  are  sometimes  sepa- 
rated in  the  same  maimer;  as,  Viclnera,  qua  circum  plurima  muros  acccpit  pa- 
trios.  Virg. 

(/.)  Tenus  and  versus,  and  sometimes  other  prepositions,  (cf  §  241,  R.  1,) 
follow  their  cases,  especially  when  joined  with  qid  or  hie.  This  occurs  most 
frequently  with  the  prepositions  ariie,  contra,  inter,  and  propter ;  moi-e  rareh' 
with  circa,  circum,  penes,  ultra  and  adversus ;  and  with  still  less  frequency 
with  post,  per,  ad,  and  de ;  as,  quam  ante,  quern  contra,  quos  inter,  quem  prop- 
ter, quos  ad,  quem  idtra,  hunc  adversus,  htmc  j^ost,  quam  circa. — The  precedinc 
prepositions,  and  more  rarely  others  also,  sometimes,  especially  in  the  poets 
and  later  prose  writers,  follow  nouns  and  personal  pronouns.  In  such  case,  if 
the  noun  be  modified  by  an  adjective  or  a  genitive,  the  preposition  sometimes 
stands  between  them,  and  sometimes  follows  both;  as,  Posies  sub  ipsos.  Virg. 
Ripam  dpnul  Eiiphrdlis.  Tac.  Maria  omnia  circum.  Virg.  And  more  rarely 
other  words  intervene;  as.  Bis  accensa  super.  Id.  Vitiis  namo  sine  na^citur 
Hot. 

11.  Infinitives  precede  the  verbs  on  which  they  depend;  as, 

Jugurtha,  ubi  eos  Africa  decessisse  ratus  est,  neque  propter  Idci  ndtHram  Cir- 
tam  armis  expugnare  possit,  mcenia  circumdat.  SaU.  Servire  mdgis  quam  imp6- 
rare  parati  estis.  Id. 

12.  A  word  which  has  the  same  relation  to  several  words,  either  pi-ecedes  or 
follows  them  all;  as,  Vir  gravis  et  sdjnens.  Cic.  Cldrus  et  honordtus  vir.  Id 
//i  scri])toribus  lec/endis  et  imitandis,  or  In  legendis  imitandisque  scripturlbus , 
but  not  In  legemhs  scriptoi-ibus  ei  imitandis.  Quum  respondere  neque  vellet  neque 
posset.  Hdbentur  et  dicuniur  tyranni.  Amicitiam  7iec  Hsu  nee  rdtione  habent 
cogiiitam. 

13.  Relatives  are  commonly  placed  after  their  antecedents,  ami 
as  near  to  them  as  possible ;  as. 

Qui  si7n,  ex  eo,  quem  ad  te  misi,  cognosces.  Sail.  Literas  ad  te  misi,  per  quas 
grdtios  libi  egi.  Cic. 

14.  Qnisque  is  generallyplaced  after  se,  suus,  qtii,  ordinals  and  superlatives; 
lis,  Suos  (luisque  debet  tu^ri.  Cic.  Satis  superque  est  slbi  suarum  cuicjue  rfrtim 
cura.  Id.  Sevtr-itas  dnimadversionis  infimo  cuTque  grdtissima.  Id.  Maxima 
decet,  quod  est  cujusque  mamme  suum.  Id.  Quisque  very  rarely  begins  a  ropo- 
(ition. 


810  SYNTAX. ARRANGEMENT    OF    CLAUSES.  §280. 

15.  (a.)  An  adverb  is  usually  placed  immediately  before  the  word  ^  liicb  it 
qualifies;  but  if  the  same  word  is  modified  by  the  oblique  case  of  a  noun,  tiia 
latter  commonly  follows  the  adverb;  as,  Male  parla  male  dllabuntur.  Cic. 
iV''(7/i7  tam  asperum  neque  tam  difficile  esse,  quod  non  cCipidissime  factan  essent. 
S;ill. — Imperlum  facile  iis  ar-tibus  retiiietur,  qiitbus  initio  jMriuin  est.  Id.  Sed 
maxirae  adulescentium  familiaiitates  appetebat.  Id.  Non  tam  in  bellis  et  in 
praliis,  quam  in  jn-amissis  et  fide  firmiorem.  Gic. — {b.)  When  non  belongs  to  a 
single  word  of  the  proposition,  it  always  stands  immediately  before  it  ;  as,  nop 
(e  rejn^ehendo,  sed  fortanam.  But  if  it  belongs  to  the  proposition  generally,  it 
stands  before  the  verb,  and  particularly  before  the  finite  verb,  if  an  mfinitive 
depends  on  it ;  as.  Cur  tantdjMre  te  angas,  inteUigere  sane  non  possum.  _  Instead 
of  nondico,  nego  is  generally  used;  as,  negdvit  eum  cidesse. — The  negatives  'ion, 
7wque,  nemo,  nuUus,  when  joined  to  general  negative  pronouns  or  adverbs,  such  as 
qidsquam,  ullus,  umqiiam,  "always  precede  them  though  not  always  immediately; 
as,  nemini  quidguam  negdvit ;  non  niemlni  me  umquam  te  vldisse.  §  207,  R.  31. 

Note  1.  In  some  phrases,  custom  has  established  a  certain  order,  which  must 
be  observed  and  imitated;  as,  Clvis  liomdnus,  piipidus  Eiimdnus,  jus  civile,  ces 
ilicnum,  terra  marique,  Pontifex  maximus,  mdyister  equitwii,  tribuniis  militum, 
tribCim  mllitmn  consHldri  jMestdte,  Jupiter  optlmus  maximus,  via  Apjna ;  ne  quid 
respulilica  detrlmenti  cdpidt.  Cic.  The  ablatives  dpinione,  spe,  justo,  sdlito,  (see 
§  256,  R.  9),  generally  precede  the  comparative. 

Note  2.  Exceptions  to  the  foregoing  principles  are  very  numerous.  These  may  arise 
(a)  from  emphasis;  {h)  from  poetic  license;  and  (c)  from  regard  to  the  harmony  of  the 
sentence.     The  following  general  rule  sometimes  modifies  nearly  all  the  preceding. 

16.  The  emphatic  word  is  placed  before  the  word  or  words  con- 
nected with  it  which  are  not  emphatic. 

Note  3.  The  last  place  is  often  an  emphatic  one,  except  for  the  verb. 
When  the  verb  is  neither  first  nor  last  in  a  proposition  ttie  word  before  it  is 
emphatic.  An  adjective,  when  emphatic,  commonly  precedes  its  substantive; 
when  not  emphatic,  it  commonly  follows  it.  But  with  the  demonstrative  pro- 
nouns the  rule  is  reversed. 

Note  4.  The  principal  poetical  variation  in  the  arrangement  of  words  consists  in  the 
Reparation  of  the  adjective  from  its  noun,  and  in  putting  together  words  from  different 
parts  of  a  proposition. 

17.  A  sentence  should  not  close  like  a  hexameter  verse,  with  a  dactyl  and 
spondee ;  as.  Esse  vidHtur ;  nor,  in  general,  with  a  monosyllable. 

18.  Hiatus  should  be  avoided;  that  is,  a  word  beginning  with  a  vowel  should 
not  follow  a  word  ending  with  a  vowel. 

19.  A  concuiTcnce  of  long  words  or  long  measures, — of  short  words  or  short 
measui-es, — of  words  beginning  alike  or  ending  alike, — should  be  avoided. 

II.  OF  THE  ARRANGEMENT  OF  CLAUSES. 

§  S80.  A  compound  sentence,  whose  clauses  are  united  as  prot* 
asis  and  apodosis,  or  in  which  the  leading  clause  is  divided  by  the 
insertion  of  one  or  more  subordinate  clauses,  is  called  a  period. 

1.  («.)  In  the  former  kind  of  period  the  protasis  must  precede  the  apodosis; 
as,  Quum  Pausdnias  semidnimis  de  teinjilo  cldtus  esset,  confestim  animam  eftlavit, 
When  Pausanias  had  been  carried  out  of  the  temple  but  just  alive,  he  imme- 
diately expired.  In  a  period  of  the  latter  kind  the  verb  of  the  principal  propo- 
sition'is  placed  at  tlie  end,  and  the  subordinate  clauses  between  the  parts  of 
the  loading  clause;  as,  Pausanias,  c/mim  semidnlmis  de  iemplo  i'ldtus  esse! ,  con- 
'esrim  aniniam  effiaviJ,  Pausanias,  when  he  had  been  carried  out  of  the  temple 
out  just  alive,  immediately  expired.  Nep. 

[b.)  A  sentence,  sucli  &?■  Sctpio  exercitum  in  Africam  trajecit,ut  Hann?b&lem 
4x  Mlid  deducirtt,  is  not  periodic  in  its  structure,  but  it  becomes  so  when  w« 


§280.  SYNTAX. CONNECTION    OF    CI.AUSES.  311 

«ay,  Scipio,  til  nanntbdlem  ex  Ildlin  dcducirei,  exercUum  in  Afrlcnm  trtjecU, 
Periods  in  which  the  subordinate  clause  precedes  with  two  conjuiict.cns;  as, 
Quum  iijihir  ROmam  vcnisset,  stutim  imperCitoi-em  ddiit,  are  matle  still  more 
strictly  ])eriodic  by  placing  first  the  conjunction  which  belongs  to  the  whole, 
and  then  inssrting  the  subordinate  proposition;  as,  Itaque,  quu7ii  Rmnam  ve- 
Ktsset,  statim  imperatorem  adiit. 

2._  (a.)  If  the  verbs  of  the  leading  and  dependent  clauses  liave  the  same 
8ul)ject,  or  the  same  noun  depending  on  them,  thev  are  commonly  formed  into 
a  period;  a.s,  Aiiiigonus,  quum  adversus  Seleucum  Lyslmdchumgue  d'wiicdret,  in 
I)ni3lio  occlsus  est.  Nep.  Quem,  ul  barbdri  incendium  effuyisse  eminus  vlderunt, 
tolis  missis  interf  ecerunt.    Id. 

(b.)  So,  also,  when  the  noun  which  depends  on  the  verb  of  the  leading  clause 
I-  the  subject  of  the  dependent  clause;  as,  L.  'Manlio,  quum  dictator /uisset, 
M.  Pomponius,  tribuuus  plebis,  diem  dixit.  Cic. 

3.  When  obscm'ity  woiild  arise  from  separating  the  leading  subject  and 
verb  by  dependent  words  or  clauses,  they  are  often  placed  together  at  the  be- 
ginning or  end  of  the  sentence;  as,  Lataj  (sunt)  delude  leges,  non  solum  quce 
ri(/ni  suspicione  consulem  absolvcrent,  sed  quus  ddeo  in  contrdrium  verterent,  uipopii- 
Idieta  eti(i-i  fdcemnt.  Liv.  The  position  of  the  leading  verb  is  also  often 
otherwise  varied,  from  regard  to  emphasis,  to  avoid  monotony,  or  to  prevent 
its  meeting  with  the  verb  of  the  last  dependent  clause;  but  clauses,  when  so 
arranged,  do  not  constitute  a  period. 

4.  When  one  clause  is  inteiTupted  by  the  introduction  of  another,  the  latter 
should  be  finished  before  the  first  is  resumed. 

5.  Clauses  expressing  a  cause,  a  condition,  a  time,  or  a  comparison,  usually 
precede  the  clauses  to  which  they  relate. 

6.  A  short  clause  usually  stands  before,  rather  than  after,  a  long  one. 

III.  OF  THE  CONNECTION  OF  CLAUSES. 

(1.)  In  connecting  propositions,  relatives,  whether  pronouns,  pronominal  ad- 
jectives, or  adverbs,  are  often  employed  in  order  to  avoid  the  too  frequent  re- 
currence of  e<,  rtM/ew,  and  certain  other  conjunctions.  Every  relative  maybe 
used  for  this  purpose  instead  of  its  coiTesponding  demonstrative  with  et ;  as, 
'(ui  for  et  is,  qudlis  for  et  talis,  quo  for  et  eo,  etc.  They  are  used  also  before  those 
conjunctions  which  are  joined  with  et  or  auieni  at  the  beginning  of  a  proposi- 
tion; as,  si,  nisi,  ut,  quum,  etc.  (see  §  206,  (14.);  as,  quod  quum  audlvissem,  quod 
si  Jecissem,  quod  quamvis  non  igndrassem,  for  et  quum  hoc,  et  si  hoc,  et  quamnis 
hue;  or  quum  autem  hoc,  etc.;  and,  often,  also,  whei'e  in  English  no  conjunction 
is  used,  and  even  before  other  relatives ;  as,  quod  qui  fdcit,  eum  ego  impium 
ju'lico,  i.  e.  ei  qui  hoc  fdcit,  or,  qui  autem  hoc  fdcit.  In  the  ablative  with  com- 
paratives the  relative  is  often  used  as  a  connective ;  as,  Cdto,  quo  nemo  tun 
irat  prudentior,  i.  e.  Cato,  who  was  more  prudent  than  aU  others. 

(2.)  In  propositions  consisting  of  two  members,  the  relative  pronoun  is  joined 
grammatically  either  to  the  apodosis  or  to  the  protasis;  with  the  former  in, 
Qui,  quum  ex  eo  qucereretur,  cur  tam  diu  vellet  esse  in  vttd.  Nihil  habeo,  inquit, 
qu  )d  accusem  senectiitem.  Cic.  de  Sen.  6.  But  is  more  frequent  with  the 
protasis  or  secpndaiy  clause;  as,  A  quo  quum  quaererOtur,  quid  maxlme  expe- 
(iTret,  respondit.  Cic.  Off.  2,  25.  When  it  ir  ti,  as  joined  with  the  protasis,  the 
nominative  of  the  demonstrative  is  supplied  with  the  apodosis  from  another 
case  of  the  relative  in  the  protasis,  as,  in  the  preceding  passage,  from  the  abla- 
tive. But  for  the  sake  of  emphasis  the  demonstrative  may  be  expressed,  and 
frequently,  also,  for  the  sake  of  clearness ;  as.  Qui  mos  quum  a  posteridrlbus  non 
esxel  retentiis,  Arcesllas  eum  revdcdvit.  Cic.  de  Fin.  2,  1.  The  accusative  is 
sometimes  to  be  supplied;  as.  Qui  {HerdclUus)  quoniam  intelligi  ndluit,  dmittd' 
mus.  Cic.  N.  D.  3,  14.  When  the  demonstrative  precedes,  and  is  followed  by 
a  proposition  consisting  of  two  members,  the  relative  is  attached  tc  the  prota- 


312  SYNTAX. ANALYSIS.  §281 

sis,  which  is  placed  first,  and  not  to  the  leading  clause  o\  apodosis;  as,  Et 
smsi  Pompeio^  quibus  ille  si  paruisset,  Ccesar  tantas  opes,  quantas  nunc  hdbet, 
non  hab'ret.  Cic.  Fam.  6,  6.  Noll  adversus  eos  me  velle  ducire,  cum  quibus  ne 
contra  te  arma  ferrem,  Ilaliam  religui.  Nep.  Att.  4. 

(3.)  Where  in  English  we  use  'however'  with  the  relative;  as.  He  promised 
me  many  things,  which,  however,  he  did  not  perfoim,  the  Latins  made  use 
of  the  demonstrative  with  sec?  or  verum,  or  the  I'elative  alone  implying  the  ad- 
versative conjunction;  as,  multa  mihi  promlsit,  sed  ea  no7i  priestUit,  or,  qujw 
non  pntstitil,' hut  not  rjua  autem  or  quw  vera.  Qui  autem  and  qui  vi'ru  are  used 
however  in  protases,  where  the  relative  retains  its  relative  meaning,  and  there 
is  a  corresponding  demonstrative  in  the  apodosis;  as,  Qui  autem  omnia  bona  a 
te  ipsis  petunt,  Us  nihil  malum  videri  potest,  quod  ndiuroe  necessitas  afferat.  Cic. 
de  Sen.  2. 

(4.)  In  double  relative  clauses,  especially  where  the  cases  are  different, 
Cicero  frequently  for  the  second  relative  clause  substitutes  the  demonstrative; 
as,  Sc'd  ipslus  in  maite  insidcbat  species  pidchritudlnis  eximia  qucedam,  quam  in- 
fuens,  in  eaque  defixus,  ad,  etc.  for  ei  in  qua.  Cic.  Orat.  2.  And  sometimes 
even  when  the  cases  are  the  same ;  as.  Quern  Phliuntem  vmisse  feruni,  eumque 
mm  Leonte  disseruisse  qumdam.  Cic.  Tusc.  5,  3;  where  et  alone  would  have 
been  sufficient. 

(5.)  From  this  tendency  to  connect  sentences  by  relatives  arose  the  use  of 
5?w(Z  before  certain  conjunctions  merely  as  a  copulative.  See  §  206,  (14.) 

(6.)  Neque  or  nee  is  much  used  by  Latin  writers  instead  of  et  and  a  nega- 
tion, and  may  be  so  used  in  all  cases  except  when  the  negative  belongs  to  one 
particular  word;  see  §278,  R.  9.  Neque  or  iiec  is  added  to  enim,  vcro,  and  td- 
men,  where  we  cannot  use  '  and.'  To  these  negative  expressions  a  second 
negative  is  often  joined,  in  which  case  wt^gwe  enim  non  is  equivalent  to  nam; 
non  vcro  non,  to  atque  etiam,  a  stronger  ei ;  nee  tdmen  non,  to  atidmen. 

ANALYSIS. 

§  S81.  I.  1.  The  analysis  of  a  complex  or  a  compound  sen- 
tence consists  in  d  ding  it  into  its  several  component  propositions, 
and  pointing  out  tb    '•  relation  to  each  other. 

2.  In  resolving  a  si  ence  into  its  component  clauses,  the  participial  con 
structions  equivalent  to  oiauses  should  be  mentioned,  and  ellipses  be  supplied 
See  §  203,  4 ;  §  274,  3 ;  and  §  257. 

3.  In  a  continued  discourse  the  connection  and  relation  of  the  successive 
sentences  also  should  be  specified. 

Rulf>  for  the  Analysts  of  Comjilex  and  Compound  Sentences. 

(1.)   State  whether  the  sentence  is  complex  or  compound.  §  201,  11,  12. 

(2.)  If  complex,  (1)  specify  the  principal  and  subordinate  clauses.  (2)  Speci- 
fy the  class  to  which  the  subordinate  proposition  belongs,  (§  201,  7),  and  (3),  its 
connective,  and  the  class  to  which  such  connective  belongs,  (§  201,  8  and  9.) 

(3.)  If  compound,  specify  the  principal  propositions,  with  their  subordinates, 
if  any  they  have,  as  in  the  case  of  complex  sentences. 

II.  The  analysis  of  a  proposition  or  simple  sentence  consists  in  distinguish- 
ing the  subject  from  the  predicate,  and,  in  case  either  of  them  be  compound, 
in  pointingout  tie  simple  subjects  or  predicates  of  wliict  it  is  composed,  and 
if  complex,  in  specifying  the  several  modifiers,  whether  of  the  essential  or  sub- 
ordinate  parts.  • 


!i  281.  SYNTAX. ANALYSIS    AND    PARSING.  313 

Rules  for  the  Analysis  of  a  Simple  Sentence. 

1.  Divile  it  into  two  parts — the  subject  and  the  predicate,  §  20.1,  \ — 3 
If  these  are  simple,  the  analysis  is  complete,  but  if  either  is  compound: — 

2.  Specify  the  simple  subjects  or  predicates  of  which  the  compound  con 
sists. — If  either  is  complex: — 

3.  Point  out  tlie  grammatical  subject,  and  the  words,  phrases  ,  etc.  directly 
modifying  it. 

4.  Point  out  the  words,  phrases,  etc.,  which  modify  the  direct  modifiers  of 
the  grammatical  subject,  and  those  which  modify  them,  and  so  on  succes- 
sively, until  the  relation  of  each  of  the  words  composing  the  logical  subject  is 
specified. 

5.  Point  out  the  grammatical  predicate,  and  the  words,  phrases,  etc.,  directly 
modifying  it. 

6.  Point  out  the  words,  phrases,  etc.,  which  modify  the  direct  modifiers  of 
the  grammatical  predicate,  and  those  which  modify  them,  and  so  on  succes- 
sively, until  the  relation  of  each  of  the  words  composing  the  logical  predicate 
is  specified 

PARSING. 

m.  Parsing  consists  in  resolving  a  proposition  into  the  parts  of 
speech  of  which  it  is  composed,  tracing  the  derivation  of  each  word, 
and  giving  the  rules  of  formation  and  construction  applicable  to  it. 

Rules  for  Parsing. 

1.  Name  the  part  of  speech  to  which  each  word  belongs,  including  the  sub- 
division in  which  it  is  found. 

2.  If  it  is  an  inflected  word : — 

(1.)  Name  its  root  or  crude  form,  and  declme,  compare,  or  conjugate  it. 

(2.)  If  it  is  a  noun  or  pronoun,  tell  its  gender,  number  and  case: — if  intha 
nomuiative  or  in  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive,  tell  its  verb : — if  in  an  ob- 
liaue  case  depending  on  some  other  word,  tell  the  word  on  which  its  case 
depends. 

(3.)  If  it  is  an  adjective,  adjective-pronoun,  or  participle,  tell  the  word  which 
it  modifies. 

(4.)  If  it  is  a  finite  verb  or  an  infinitive  with  the  accusative,  tell  its  voice^ 
mood,  tense,  number,  person,  and  subject.^ 

3.  If  it  is  a  conjunction,  tell  its  class  and  what  it  connects. 

4.  If  it  is  a  preposition,  tell  the  words  whose  relation  is  expressed  by  it. 

5.  If  it  is  an  adverb,  tell  its  class  and  what  it  qualifies. 

6.  Prove  the  correctness  of  each  step  of  the  process  by  quoting  the  definition 
w  rule  of  formation  or  construction  on  wliich  it  depends. 

Note.  The  words  constituting  a  proposition  are  most  conveniently  parsed  in 
"iiat  order  in  which  they  are  arranged  in  analysis. 

Examples  of  Analysis  and  Parsing. 

1.   Equus  currit,  The  horse  runs. 

Analysis.  This  is  a  sijnple  sentence:  its  subject  is  Squus,  its  predicate  is 
mrrii,  both  of  which  nre  simple.  See  ^  201,  1-3;  §  202,  2;  and  ^  208,  2. 

27 


{514  SYNTAX. ANALYSIS    AND    PARSING.  §  281 


Parsing .  Equm  is  a  common  noun,  §  26,  1  and  3;  of  the  2d  d>jcl.,  §  38; 
Liasc.  gender,  §  28,  1;  third  person,  §  35,  2;  its  root  is  egw-,  §  40,  10;  decline  it, 
6  46;  it  is  in  the  nominative  case,  singular  number,  ^  35,  1,  (6.);-tlie  subject 
ot'currit,  §  209,  (a.)—Currit  is  a  neuter  verb,  §  141, 11.;  of  the  3d  conjugation, 
§  140,  2,  from  curro ;  its  principal  parts  are  curro,  cucun-i,  cursum,  currere, 
§  151,  4 ;  it  is  from  the  first  root  curi-- ;  give  the  formations  of  that  root,  §  151, 1 ; 
it  is  in  the  active  voice,  §  142, 1;  indicative  mood,  §  143,  1;  present  tense,  §  145, 
I.;  third  person,  §  147;  singular  number,  §  146;  agi-eeing  -with  its  subject-nomi- 
native equus,  §  209,  (b.) 

NoTK.  The  questions  to  be  asked  in  parsing  eqnus  are  such  as  these.  Why  is 
iguus  a  nou7i  f  Why  a  common  noun  ?  Why  of  the  second  declension  ?  Wliy 
masculine  f  etc.— In  parsing  currit,  the  questions  are,  Why  is  currit  a  vei-b  f 
Why  a  neuter  verb  ?  Whv  of  the  third  conjugation?  Which  are  the  principal 
parts  of  a  verb?  Of  what  does  the  first  root  of  a  verb  consist?  What  parts 
of  a  verb  are  derived  from  the  first  root?  etc.  The  answer  in  each  case  may 
be  found  by  consulting  the  etymological  rules  and  definitions. 

S    2.    Scevius  vends  agitcitur  iiuiens  plnus,  The  great  pine  is  more 
violently  shaken  by  the  winds.  Hor. 

Analysis.  This  also  is  a  simple  sentence :— its  subject  is  ingens  p'mws,  its 
predicate  scudus  ventis  dgitdtur;  both  of  which  are  complex,  §  201,  10,  ^  202,  6, 

and  §  203,  5.  ,  .    ,  ,      . 

The  grammatical  subject  is  jnnus,  the  pine;  this  is  modified  by  i7igens,  great, 
§  201,  2,  §  202,  2,  and  §*202,  6,H3.) 

The  gi-amraatical- predicate  is  dgitdtur,  is  shaken;  this  is  modified  by  two 
independent  modifiers,  scevius,  more  violently,  and  ventis,  by  the  winds,  §  203 
U.  3   Kern.,  §  203,  I.  1,  (2),  and  (3.) 

Parsing .  Plnus  is  a  common  noun,  §  26,  1  and  3;  of  the  2d  and  4th  de- 
clensions, §"88  and  §  99;  feminine  gender,  ^  29,  2;  3d  person,  §  35,  2;  from  the 
root  pln^,  §  40,  10;  (decline  it  both  in  the  2d  and  4th  declensions); — it  is  found 
hi  the  singular  number,  §  35,  1,  and  the  nominative  case,  the  subject  of  dgttd- 
iur,  §  209°  (a.) 

Ingens  is  a  qualifying  adjective  of  quantity,  §  104,  4,  and  §  205,  N.  1;  of  the 
3d  decl.,  §  105,  1,  and  §  38;  of  one  termination,  §  108,  and  §  111;  from  the  root 
ingeni-,  §  40,  10;  (dechne  it  like  iirmsens,  §  111,  but  with  only  i  in  the  ablative, 
^  113,  Exc.  3,) ; — it  is  found  in  the  singular  number,  feminine  gender,  ^  26,  R.  4; 
and  nominative  case,  agreeing  with  its  noun  plnus,  \  205. 

Agitdlur  is  an  active  frequentative  verb,  §  141,  I.,  and  ^  187,  11.  1;  of  the 
1st  conjugation,  §  149,  2;  from  the  first  root  of  its  primitive  dgo,  §  187,  II.  1,  {b.); 
inume 'its°principal  parts  m  both  voices,  see  §  151,  4;  and  give  the  conjuga- 
tion of  the  passive  voice,  indicative  mood,  present  tense,  see  §156,); — it  is 
found  in  the  singular  number,  §146;  thhd  person,  §  147;  agreeing  with  its 
subject-nominative  ^nmis,  §  209,  (6.) 

ioBvius  is  a  derivative  adverb  of  manner,  §  190,  2-4;  in  the  comparative  de- 
gree from  the  positive  sceve  or  smviter,  which  is  derived  from  the  adjective 
scevus,  §  194,  1  and  2,  and  §  192,  II.  1,  and  Exc.  1  and  2;  modifying  the  verb 
dgitdtur,  by  expressing  its  degree,  §  277. 

Ventis  is  a  common  noun,  §  26,  1  and  3 ;  of  the  2d  declension,  §  38 ;  masculine 
gender,  §  46;  from  the  root  vent-,  §  40,  10;  (decline  it); — it  is  found  in  the 
plural  number,  §  35,  1;  ablative  case,  modifying  dgitdtur  by  denoting  its  means 
OT  instrument,  §  247. 

3.  Mtthriddtes,  duarum  et  viginti  gentium  rex,  totXdem  Unguis  jura 
dixit,  Mithridates,  king  of  twenty-two  nations,  pronounced  judicial 
decisions  in  as  many  languages.  Plin. 

Analysis.  This  also  is  a  simple  sentence;  its  subject  is  Mitlirlddtes,  dua- 
rum et  viginti  gentium  rex,  its  predicate  is  tMidem  Unguis  jura  dixit,  both  oi 
which  are  complex,  §  201,  10,  §  202,  6,  and  §  203,  "5. 


§  281.  SYNTAX. ANALYSIS    AND    PARSING.  313 

The  graiumatical  subject  is  Mithrtddtes;  this  is  modified  directly  by  rea 
§  202,  I.  (1.) 

Rex  is  limited  by  gentium,  §  202, 1.  1,  (2.) 

Gentium  is  limited  by  the  compound  addition  dudrum  and  viginti  con].ec<.etl 
CoOrdinately  by  et,  §  202,  III.  3. 

The  gi-ammatical  predicate  ^s  dixit ;  this  is  limited  by  jUra  and  Unguis,  the 
former  a  simple,  the  latter  a  complex  addition,  as  it  is  modified  by  totidem 
§203,1.  1,  (2.)andn.  1. 

Parsing.  il/iVAnrfa^es  is  a  proper  noun,  §  26,  2 ;  of  the  third  declension, 
§  38;  m.iisculine  gender,  §  28,  1;  fi-om  the  root  Mithridat-,  §40,  10;  genitive 
Milhrkh'dis,  §  73,  1;  (decline  it  in  the  singular  number  only,  §  95,  (a.); — it  is 
found  in  the  nomLnative  case,  the  subject  of  dmi,  §  209,  (a.) 

Bex  is  a  common  noun — third  declension,  §  38;  masculine  gender,  §  28, 1; 
from  the  root  reg-,  §  40,  10;  genitive  regis,  §  78,  2;  (decline  it); — it  is  found  in 
the  singular  number — the  nominative  case,  in  apposition  to  MUhnd&tes,  §  204. 

Gentium  is  a  common  noun  from  gens — third  declension — feminine  gender, 
§  62;  from  the  root  gent-,  §  56,  I,  R.  1 ;  genitive  gentis,  §  77,  2  and  (2.);  (de- 
cline it); — it  is  found  in  the  plural  nximber — genitive  case,  §  83,  II.  3;  limitiag 
rex  subjectively,  §  211  and  R.  2. 

Dudrum  is  a  numeral  adjective,  §  104,  5;  of  the  cardinal  kind,  §  117;  from 
dua,  duce,  duo  ;  from  the  root  dti^ ;  (decline  it,  §  118,  1,); — it  is  found  in  the 
plural  number,  §  118,  2;  feminine  gender,  genitive  case,  §  26,  R.  4;  agreeing 
with  its  noun  gentium,  §  205. 

£i  is  a  copulative  conjunction,  §  198, 1,  connecting  dunrum  and  Viginti,  §  278. 

Viginti  is  fL  n\vcae,ra\  adjective  of  the  cardinal  kind,  indeclinable,  §118,1; 
limiting  gentium,  §  205. 

Dixit  is  an  active  verb,  §  141,  I.;  of  the  third  conjugation,  §  149,  2;  from 
dlco,  (give  the  principal  parts  in  the  active  voice,  and  its  first,  second,  and 
third  roots,  §  150,  4,  and  §  171,  1;)  it  is  fonned  from  the  second  root  dix-,  (give 
the  formations  of  the  second  root); — it  is  found  in  the  active  voice,  §  141,  1; 
indicative  mood,  §  143,  1 ;  pgrfect  indefinite  tense,  §  145,  IV.  and  Rem. ;  sin- 
gular number,  third  person,  agreeing  with  Mithriddtes,  §  209,  {b.) 

Jura  is  a  common  noun,  of  the  third  declension,  from  jus,  root  JUr-,  §  56,  I. 
R.  1 .  genitive  juris,  §  76,  Exc.  3 ;  neuter  gender,  §  66 ;  (decline  it) ; — it  is  found 
lin  the  plural  number,  accusative  case,  §  40,  8;  the  object  of  dixit,  §  229. 

Linguis  is  a  common  noun,  of  the  first  declension,  feminine  gender,  from 
lingua  root  lingu-,  (declmeit); — found  in  the  plm-al  number,  ablative  case, 
after  dixit.  §  247. 

Totidem  is  a  demonstrative  pronominal  adjective,  §  139,5,  (2.)  and  (3.);  in- 
declinable, §  115,  4;  it  is  in  the  ablative  nlural,  feminine  gender,  limiting  Un- 
guis, §  205. 

4.  Pamdnvas,  quum  semiammis  de  templo  eldtus  esset,  confestim  ant- 
mam  effldvit.  Nep.  Paus.  4. 

Analysis.  This  is  a  complex  sentence,  §  201,  11 ;  consisting  of  two  mem- 
oers,  which  are  so  arranged  as  to  constitute  a  period,  §  280,  1. 

The  principal  proposition  is,  Pamdnias  confestim  dnimam  effldvit,  §  201,  5. 
The  subordmate  proposition  is,  quum  (is)  semidnimis  de  templo  clutm  esset. 
\  201,  6.  y  X-  -, 

The  leading  proposition  has  a  simple  subject,  Pausdnias,  §  2Q2,  2,  and  a 
complex  predicate,  confestim  anlmam  effldvit,  §  203,  3 ;  La  which  effldvit  is  the 

rammatical  predicate.  §  203,  2 ;  which  is  modified  by  confestim  and  anlmum, 
203, 1.  1,  (2.)  and  (3.),  and  II.  R.  2.,  and  also  by  the  adverbial  clause  quum 
semidnimis,  etc.  §  201,  6  and  7,  and  §  203, 1.  3. 

The  subordinate  proposition,  which  is  connected  to  the  leading  clause  by 
the  subordinate  conjunction  quum,  §  201,  9,  has  a  simple  subject,  viz.  is  under- 
stood, and  a  complex  predicate,  semidnimis,  de  templo  ildtus  esset,  §  203,  3.— 
The  grammatical  predicate  is  eldtus  esset,  §  203,  2 ;  which  is  modified  by  sennA- 
nimis,  <,  203, 1.  1,  (1.),  and  de  templo,  §  203, 1.  2,  and  II.  Rem.  2. 


316  SYNTAX. ANALYSIS    AND    PARSING.  §281 

Parsing.  Pausanias,  a  Greek  proper  noun,  §  26,  2;— 1st  decl.,  §\  41  and 
44;  masc.  gender,  §  28,  1;  root  Pausanv- ;  found  in  sing,  num.,  nom.  case,  tlw 
Buh]ect  or  effldvif,  ^  209,  (a.) 

Cunftstim,  an  adv.  of  time  §  190,  3;  limiting  efflamt,  §  2/7. 

Anlmam  is  a  com.  noun  of  1st  decl.,  fem.  gender,  ^  41;  from  awwrea,  root 
aniin-;  (decline  it);— it  is  found  in  the  sing,  num.,  ace.  case,  the  object  of 

ekdmt,  \  229.  ^  ,    „     ,  .r<,  ^ 

Efflavit,  an  act.  verb,  1st  conj.,  from  efflo,  comporjided  of  ex  and  Jto,  ^  196,  6; 
(cive  he  principal  parts  in  the  act.  voice  and  the  three  roots); — it  is  formed 
from  the  second  root;  (give  the  formations  of  that  root);  in  the  active  voice 
ind.  mood,  perfect  indehuite  tense,  sfng.  num.,  3d  pers.,  agreeing  with  PautA- 

nias,  ^  209,  \h.)  ,      ^  j     ..  ^    ^, 

Quum  is  a  temporal  conjunction,  §  198,  10;  connecting  the  dependent  to  the 

principal  clause,  §  278.  _      .  i  ,„„ 

SPviidnimis  is  a  predicate  adj.,  of  the  3d  decl.,  of  two  termmations,  §  109; 

(decline  it);— it  is  in  the  sing,  num.,  masc.  gend.,  nom.  case,  agreemg  with  u 

understood,  ^  210,  K.  1,  (a.)  ,  , 

De  is  a  preposition,  expressing  the  relation  between  eldtus  esset  and  templo, 

Templo  is  a  com.  noun,  2d  decl.,  neut.  gend.,  from  templum,  root  tempi-;  (de- 
cline it);— in  the  sins;,  num.,  abl.  case,  after  cfe,  §  241. 

Elatus  esset  is  an  irregular  active  verb,  of  the  third  conjugation,  §  179 ;  from 
effcro,  compounded  of  ex  and  fero,  ^  196,  6;  (see  f&ro  and  compounds,  §  172); 
(2;ive  the  principal  parts  in  both  voices,  and  the  1st  and  3d  roots); — it  is  formed 
from  the  third  root,  ildt-,  (give  the  formations  of  that  root  in  the  passive  voice)-, 
in  the  subjunctive  mood,  pluperfect  tense,  §  145,  V.;  sing,  num.,  third  person, 
agreeing  with  is  understood  referring  to  Pausanias,  ^  209,  (b.) 

5.  Romana  pubes,  sedato  tandem  pavore,  postquam  ex  tarn  turbido 
die  aerena  et  tranquilla  lux  rediit,  ubi  vcicuam  sedem  regiam  vidit,  etsi 
satis  credebat  patribus,  qui  proximi  steterant,  subllmem  raptuvi  pro- 
cella ;  tamen,  velut  orbitatis  metu  icta,  moestum  aliquamdiu  silentium 
obtinuit.  Liv.  1,  16. 

Analysis.  This  is  a  complex  sentence,  whose  clauses  constitute  a  period, 
^  280.     It  is  composed  of  the  following  members  or  clauses : — 

1.  Romana  pubes  [tamen]  mmsttim  aliquamdiu  silentium  obtinuit.  This  is  the 
eading  clause.     The  following  are  dependent  clauses. 

2.  velut  orbitatis  metu  icta, 

3.  sedato  tandem  pavore, 

4.  postquam  ex  tarn  turbido  die  serena  et  tranquilla  lux  rSdiit, 

5.  ubi  vacuum  sedem  regiam  vidit, 

6.  etsi  satis  credebat  patribus, 

7.  qui  proximi  steterant, 

8.  sublimem  raptum  pr^elld. 

Note  1.  In  the  preceding  clauses  the  predicates  are  printed  in  Italics. 

Note  2.  The  connective  of  the  1st  clause,  is  the  adversative  tamen,  which 
'n  inserted  on  account  of  eUi  intervening  between  the  principal  subject  and 
predicate.  The  connective  of  the  2d  clause  is  velut,  of  the  4th  postquam,  of  the 
5th  ubi,  of  the  6th  etsi,  followed  by  a  clause  constituting  the  protasis,  and  of 
the  7th  qui.     The  3d  and  8th  clauses  have  no  connectives. 

(1.)  The  gi-ammatical  subject  of  the  leading  clause  is  pObes,  which  is  limited 
by  Romana. — The  grammatical  predicate  is  obtinuit,  which  is  limited  by  dli- 
qunmdiu  and  silentium,  and  also  either  directly  or  mdurectly  by  all  the  depend- 
ent clauses.     Silentium  is  itself  modified  by  mcestum. 

The  second,  third,  fourth,  fifth,  and  sixth  clauses  are  used  adverbially  to 
denote  the  time  and  other  cu-cumstances  modifying  the  principal  predicate 
silentium  obtinuit,  ^  201,  7. 


S  281.  SYNTAX. — ANALYSIS   AND    PARSING.  3l1 

(2.)  The  second  is  a  participial  clause,  equivalent  to  vllut  (ea  soil,  pubet , 
triitdtis  meiu  icta  esset,  ^  274,  3,  (a.) 

(3.)  The  third  clause  is  also  participial,  and  is  equivalent  to  quum  tandem 
pdvor  scdciius  esset,  §  257,  R.  1 ;  and  hence  pdvore  represents  the  subject,  and 
sedato  tandem  the  predicate — the  former  being  simple,  the  latter  complex. 

(4.)  The  grammatical  subject  of  the  4th  clause,  which  is  connected  to  the 
leading  clause  by  postquam,  §  201,  9,  is  lux,  which  is  modified  by  serena  and 
iranquilla. — The  gi-ammatical  predicate  is  rediit,  which  is  modified "bv  postquam 
and  ex  tarn  turbido  die,  §  203,  I.  1,  (3.),  and  II.  1. 

(5.)  The  grammatical  subject  of  the  fifth  clause  is  ea  understood. — The 
grammatical  predicate  is  vldit,  which  is  modified  by  ubi  and  vdcuam  slckm 
regiam,  §  203,  I.  1,  (3.)  and  II.  1. 

(6.)  The  grammatical  subject  of  the  sixth  clause  also  is  ea.  Its  grammati- 
cal predicate  is  credcbat,  which  is  modified  by  satis  and  patribius,  ^  203,  I.  (2.) 
and  (3.),  and  by  the  8th  clause,  II.  3. 

(7.)  The  grammatical  subject  of  the  seventh  clause  is  qui.  Its  grammatical 
predicate  is  steierant,  which  is  modified  by  proxlmi,  §  203,  I.  (1.)  It  is  an  ad- 
jective clause,  modifying  patribiis,  §  201,  7  and  9. 

(8.)  The  grammatical  subject  of  the  eighth  clause,  which  has  no  connective, 
^  201,  Rem.,  is  euin,  i.  e.  Romulum,  understood.  Its  grammatical  predicate  is 
raptum  (esse),  which  is  modified  by  subllmem  and  prdcelld. 

Parsing.  Romana  is  a  patrial  adjective,  §  104,  10,  derived  from  Roma^ 
§128,  6,  (a.)  and  (e.);  of  the  1st  and  2d  declensions,  §  105,  2;  fem.  gender, 
sing,  number,  nom.  case,  agreeing  with  pubes,  §  205. 

Pubes,  a  collective  noun,  §  26,  4;  3d  dec!.,  fem.  gender,  §  62;  from  the  roof 
pub-,  4  56,  I.  R.  6;  genitive  ^juifs,  ^  73,  1;  (decline  it); — found  in  the  nom. 
sing.,  the  subject  of  oblinuit,  ^  209,  (a.) 

Tdmen,  an  adversative  conjunction,  ^  198,  9,  relating  to  etsi  in  the  6th  clause. 

Mastum,  a  qualifying  adj.,  §  205,  N.  1;  of  the  1st  and  2d  declensions,  neut 
gender,  sin^;.  num.,  ace.  case,  agreeing  with  siltntium. 

Aliquamdiu,  an  adverb  of  time,  §  191,  II.;  compounded  of  dliquis  and  diu 
§  193,  6;  and  limiting  obtimdi,  ^  277. 

Silentium,  a  com.  noun,  2d  decl.,  neut.  gender,  §  46;  sing,  number,  ace.  case 
the  object  of  obtlnuit,  §  229. 

Obtinuit,  an  active  verb,  of  the  2d  conj.,  §  149,  2;  from  obtineo,  compounded 
of  ob  and  teneo,  see  §  168;  (give  the  principal  parts  in  the  act.  voice,  and  the 
formations  of  the  2d  root,  §  157  at  the  end); — found  in  the  active  voice,  ind. 
mood,  perf.  indef.  tense,  sing,  num.,  3d  person,  agreeing  with  pubes,  §  209,  (6.) 

Velut  for  velut  si,  an  adverb,  compounded  of  vel  and  iit,  §193,  10;  modifying 
icta,  and  obUnuisset  understood,  (as  they  would  have  done  if,  etc.) 

Orbitdtis,  an  abstract  noun,  §  26,  5;  from  the  primitive  orbus,  §  101,  1  and  2; 
8d  decl.,  fem.  gender,  §  62;  from  the  root  orbltdt-,  §  56,  I.,  and  R..  1;  (decline 
it); — found  in  the  sing,  num.,  subjective  gen.  case,  limiting  m&lu,  {  211. 

Metu,  im  abstract  noun,  4th  decl.,  masc.  gen.,  §  87 ;  sing,  num.,  abl.  case, 
S  247. 

Icta,  a  perf.  part,  pass.,  from  the  active  verb  ico,  of  the  3d  conj.  (give  the 
principal  parts  in  both  voices,  and  decline  the  participle) ; — found  in  the  fiem. 
gen.,  sing,  num.,  nom.  case,  agreeing  with  pubes,  §  205. 

Seddto,  a  perfect  pass.  part,  from  the  active  verb  sedo,  of  the  1st  conj.,  §  149, 
2;  (give  the  principal  parts  in  both  voices,  §  151,  4;  and  decline  it,  §  105j 
R.  2.); — found  in  the  masc.  gender,  sing,  num.,  abl.  case,  agi'eeing  with  ^w- 
vore,  §  205. 

Tniulem,  an  adverb  of  time,  §  191,  11.;  modifying  serfato,  §  277. 

Pdvore,  an  abstract  noun,  §  26,  5,  and  §  102,  1;  (from  pdveo),  3d  decl.,  masc. 
gen.,  §  58;  root  ^di'or,  §  56,  II.,  and  §  70,  (decUne  it); — found  in  tiie  sing, 
number,  abl.  case,  absolute  with  seddto,  §  257. 

Postquam,  an  adverb  of  time,  compoyjaded  of  post  and  quam,  §  193,  10;  mod< 
ifying  rediit,  and  connecting  the  1st  and  4th  clauses,  §  201,  9. 

Ex,  a  preposition,  §  195,  K.  2. 

Tarn,  an  adverb  of  degi-ee,  ^  191,  R  2;  modifying  turbido,  \  277. 


POKi- 


318  STKTAX. — ANALYSIS    4.ND    PARSING.  §  281 

TurMdo,  an  adjective,  agreeing  with  cSe. 

Die,  a  common  noun,  5th  decl.,  masc.  gender,  ^  90,  Exc.  1. ;  sing,  n  nmber 
abl.  case,  after  the  prep,  ex,  §  241. 

Serena,  an  adj.,  1st  and  2d  decls.,  fem.  gen.,  sing,  niun.,  nom.  case,  agreeing 
with  ItLx,  §  205. 

Et,  a  copulative  conjunction,  §  198,  1;  connecting  serena  and  tranquilla, 
§  278. 

Tranquilla,  like  serena. 

Lux,  a  common  noun,  3d  decl.,  fem.  gen.,  §  62 ;  from  the  root  lHo-,  §  56, 1., 
and  R.  2;  genitive  lucis,  §  78,  2. 

Rediit,  an  irregular  neuter  verb,  of  the  4th  conj.,  §  176;  from  rerfeo,  com- 
pounded of  eo,  §  182,  and  the  inseparable  prep,  red,  §  196,  (6.),  3;  (give  its  priu- 
sipai  parts); — found  in  the  ind.  mood.,  perf.  indef.  tense,  sing,  num.,  3d  pers., 
igreeing  with  lux,  §  209,  (6.) 

Ubi,  an  adverb  of  time,  and  like  postquam,  a  connective,  §  201,  9 ;  and  modi- 
fying vidit,  §  277. 

Vdcuam,  an  adj.,  qualifying  sedem. 

Sedem,  a  common  noun,  3d  decl.,  fem.  gen.,  §  62;  from  the  root  sed-,  §  56, 1., 
R.  6;  genitive  sedis,  §  73,  1;  (decline  it); — found  in  the  sing,  num.,  ace.  case, 
the  object  of  the  transitive  verb  vidit,  §  229. 

Recjiam,  a  denominative  adj.,  §  128,  I.,  2,  (a.);  from  the  primitive  rex,  agree- 
ing with  sedem. 

F2t?ii,  an  active  verb,  of  the  2d  conj.,  (give  its  principal  parts  in  the  active 
voice,  and  the  formations  of  the  2d  root);  found  in  the  active  voice,  ind.  mood, 
perf.  indef.  tense,  sing,  num.,  3d  pers.,  agi'eeing  with  ea,  i.  e.  pubes,  under- 
stood. 

Etsi,  a  concessive  conjunction,  ^  198,  4;  corresponding  to  the  correlativu  ad- 
versative conj.  tdmen,  §  198,  4,  R.  and  9. 

Satis,  an  adverb  of  degree,  §  191,  III.,  and  R.  2;  modifying  credebat,  ^  27.'. 

Credebat,  an  act.  verb,  §  141,1.;  3d  conj.,  (give  the  prmcipal  parts  in  the 
active  voice  and  the  formations  of  the  1st  root) ; — found  in  the  act.  voice,  ind. 
mood,  imperfect  tense,  suig.  num.,  3d  person,  agreemg  with  ea,  scD.  pubes, 
understood. 

Patribus,  a  common  noun,  §  26,  3;  3d  decl.,  from  the  root  pair-,  §  56,  U., 
E.  3 ;  gen.  patris,  §  71 ;  masc.  gender,  §  28,  1 ;  plur.  num.,  dat.  case,  depending 
on  credebat,  ^  223,  R.  2. 

Qui,  the  subject  of  the  7th  clause,  is  a  relative  pronoun,  §  136;  masc. 
gender,  plur.  num.,  agreeing  with  its  antecedent  ^aJn'^MS,  §  206,  R.  19,  (a.); 
and  is  nominative  to  stetcrant,  §  209,  (a.) 

Proxlmi,  an  adj.  of  the  superlative  degree,  §  126,  1,  (compare  it);  of  the  Ist 
and  2d  decls.,  masc.  gen.,  plur.  num.,  nom.  case,  agreeing  with  qui,  §205,  §210, 
K.  1,  (a.)  andR.  3,  (2.) 

/S<eieron<, "a  neuter  verb,  1st  conj.,  irregular  in  its  2d  root,  §  165;  (give  its 
principal  parts,  and  the  formations  of  the  2d  root) ; — found  in  the  act.  voice, 
ind.  mood,  plup.  tense,  §  145,  V.;  3d  person  plural,  agreeing  with  its  subject; 
qui,  §  209,  (6.) 

Subllmem,  an  adj.,  of  the  3d  decl.,  and  two  terminations,  §  109;  masc.  gen., 
sing,  num.,  ace.  case,  agreeing  with  eum,  (i.  e.  Romnluvi,)  understood  anc 
modifj'ing  also  raptum  esse,  §  205,  R.  15. 

Raptimi  (esse),  an  act.  verb,  3d  conj.;  (give  the  principal  parts  in  botl 
voices  and  the  formations  of  the  3d  root  in  the  passive  voice) — found  in  th« 
pass,  voice,  inf.  mood,  perf.  tense;  but,  following  the  imperfect,  it  has  tha 
meaning  of  a  pluperfect,  §  268,  2,  and  §  145,  V. ;  depending  on  credibat,  §  272. 

I'rdceUd,  a  com.  noun,  1st  decl.,  fem.  gen.,  sing,  num.,  abl.  case,  §  247. 


§  282,  283.      PROSODY. — quantity — general  rules.       319 


PEOSODY. 

§  282.  Prosody  treats  of  the  quantity  of  syllables,  aqd  the 
laws  of  versification. 

QUANTITY. 

1 .  The  quantity  of  a  syllable  is  the  relative  time  occupied  in 
pronouncing  it.  Cf".  §  13. 

2.  A  syllable  is  eitlier  short,  long,  or  common. 

{a.)  The  time  occupied  in  pronouncing  a  short  syllable  is  called  a  mora  ct 
time. 

(6.)  A  long  syllable  requires  two  morce  or  double  the  time  occu- 
pied in  pronouncing  u  short  one ;  as,  dmdre. 

(c.)  A  common  syllable  is  one  which,  in  poetry,  may  be  made 
either  long  or  short ;  as  the  middle  syllable  of  tenebrce. 

3.  The  quantity  of  a  syllable  is  either  natural  or  accidental ; — 
natural,  when  it  depends  on  the  nature  of  its  vowel;  accidental,  when 
it  depends  on  its  position. 

Thus  the  e  in  resisto  is  short  by  natui'e;  while  in  rcstiti  it  is  long  by  its  posi- 
tion, since  it  is  followed  by  two  consonants :  §  283,  IV.  On  the  contrarj-,  the 
e  in  deduco  is  naturally  long,  but  in  d&erro  it  is  made  short  by  being  placed  be- 
fore a  vowel:  §  283, 1. 

4.  The  quantity  of  syllables  is  determined  either  by  certain  estab- 
lished rules,  or  by  the  authority  of  the  poets. 

Thus  it  is  poetic  usage  alone  that  determines  the  quantity  of  the  first  sylla- 
bles of  the  following  words,  viz.  mater,  frdter,  prdvus,  dlco,  duco  ;  pater.  Amis, 
cddo,  mdneo,  gravis,  etc. ;  and  hence  the  quantity  of  such  syllables  can  be  as- 
certained by  practice  only  or  by  consulting  the  gradus  or  lexicon. 

5.  The  rules  of  quantity  are  either  general  or  special.  The  for- 
mer apply  alike  to  aU  the  syllables  of  a  word,  the  latter  to  particular 
eyUables. 

GENERAL  RULES. 

§  283.  L  (a.)  A  vowel  before  another  vowel,  or  a  diph- 
thong, is  short ;  as,  e  in  meti^,  i  in  patricB.     Thus, 

Conscia  mens  recti  famae  mendada  ridet.   Ovid.  F.  4,  311. 
Ipse  et'iam  exhnia:  laudis  succeusus  amore.    TiVg-.  A.  i,  496. 

(6.)  So  also  when  h  comes  between  the  vowels,  since  h  h  accoaot 
ed  only  i  breathing ;  as,  nihil :  (see  §  2,  6.)     Thus, 

De  nViild  nihil,  in  nVilium  nil  posse  rSvertl.     Pert.  4,  84. 


320  PROSODY. — QUANTITY — GENERAL    RULES.  §  283 

Exc.  1.  (a.)  Flo  has  the  i  long,  except  in  fit  and  when  followed 
by  er  ;  as  flunt,  ftebam.     Thus, 

Omnia  jam  ftant,  fiSri  quae  posse  negabam.  Ovid.  Tr.  1,  8.  7. 

(b.)  It  is  sometimes  found  long  even  before  er;  as,  fwret.  Ter.;  fieri.  Plant 
and,  on  the  contrary,  Prndentius  has  fi6  with  i  short. 

Exc.  2.  (a.)  E  is  long  in  the  termination  of  the  genitive  and  da- 
tive o*"  the  fifth  declension,  when  preceded  and  followed  byt;  as, 
faciei.     Thus, 

Non  rJtdii  soils,  neque  lucida  tela  dUi.  Lucr.  1, 148. 

(b.)   In  spei,  ret,  and  fldei,  e  is  short. 

Note.  In  Lucretius,  the  e  of  rei  is,  in  a  few  cases,  long,  and  that  of  ftde%  ia 
lengthened  once  in  Lucretius  and  once  in  a  line  of  Ennius. 

Exc.  3.  (a.)  A  is  long  in  the  penult  of  old  genitives  in  aX  of  the 
first  declension;  as,  aului,  pictdi.  Cf.  §  43,  1. 

{b.)  A  and  e  are  also  long  in  proper  names  in  aius,  elut,  or  eia;  as,  Caitis 
Pompeius,  Aquile'a ;  and  iu  the  adjectives  Gi'dius  and  Velus.     Thus, 

^therium  sensum,  atque  aurai  simplicis  ignem.  Virg.  A.  6,  747. 
Accipe,  Pompei,  deductum  carmen  ab  illo.  Ovid.  Pont.  4,  1,  1. 
Necuon  cum  Venctis  A'juUeia  perf  urit  armis.  Sil.  8,  606. 

Exc.  4.  (a.)  /  is  common  in  genitives  in  ius;  as,  unlus,  illius 
Thus, 

Illius  et  nitido  stUlent  unguenta  capillo.   TibuU,  1,  7,  51. 
Illius  pure  dEstiUent  tempora  nardo.  Id.  2,  2,  7. 

(6. )    But  i  in  the  genitive  of  alter  is  commonly  short ;  and  in  that  of  alius  it  is 

always  long. 

Exc.  5.  The  first  vowel  of  eheu  is  long ;  that  of  Diana,  to,  and  She- 
is  common. 

Exc.  6.  Greek  words  retain  their  original  quantities,  and  hence, 
in  many  Greek  words,  a  vowel  is  long,  though  immediately  followed 
by  another  vowel ;  as, 

der,  Achdia,  AcheloUs,  dla,  eos,  Laertes,  and  Greek  words  having  in  the  orig- 
inal a  long  e  or  0  («  or  a).)     See  also  ^  293,  3. 

(1.)  Words  which,  in  Greek,  are  written  with  ei  (e/)  before  a  vowel,  and  in 
Latin  with  a  single  e  or  ?',  have  the  e  or  i  long;  as,  jEneas,  Alexandria,  Cassio- 
pea,  Clio,  Darius,  elegla,  Galatea,  Medea,  Mausoleum,  Pemldpea,  Thalia,  Atrldes. 

Hence,  most  adjectives  in  eus,  formed  from  Greek  proper  names,  have  the  « 
long ;  as,  Oythereus,  Feldpeus ;  and  the  e  remains  long  when  et  is  restored ;  as, 
Pmpela. 

Exc.  Acddemia,  chdrea,  Mdlea,  pldtea,  and  some  patronymics  and  patrials 
II  eis ;  as,  Nereis,  have  the  penult  common. 

(2.)  Greek  genitives  m  eos,  and  accusatives  in  ea,  from  nominatives  in  em, 
generally  shorten  the  e;  as,  Orplieos,  Orphea; — but  the  e  is  sometimes  length- 
ened by" the  Ionic  dialect;  as,  Ccphcos,  lUdnea. 

(3.)  Greek  words  in  ais,  ois,  aius,  eius,  oius,  aon,  and  ion,  generally  lengthen 
the  first  vowel ;  as,  Ndis,  Minois,  Grams,  Nereius,  Minaius,  Mdchdon,  Ixian. 
But  Thfhdis,  Sinidis,  Phdon,  Deucalion,  Pygmalion,  and  many  others,  shorten 
the  former  vowel. 

Note  1.  Greek  words  in  aon  and  ion,  with  o  short  in  the  genitive,  have  tha 
penult  long;  but  with  o  long  in  the  genitive,  they  have  it  short;  as,  Amythd&n 
-ionit ;  Dtuciilion,  -mis. 


§  283.     PROSODY. QUANTITY GENERAL  RULES.       321 

Note  2.  In  Greek  proper  names  in  em  (gen.  eos),  as  Orpheus,  the  eu  in  the 
nominative  is  always  a  diphthong  in  the  original,  and,  with  very  few  excep- 
tions, in  the  Latin  poets. 

n.     A   diphthong  is  long ;  as,   aurum,  fcemts,  Euhcea,  Pom- 

peius,  Orpheu.     Tlius, 

Infernique  liens,  JESSque  insula  Circae.   Virg.  A.  3,  386. 
Thesauros  ignotum  argenti  pondus  et  cTiiri.  Id.  A.  1,  359. 
Harpyiaque  cSlunt  alia,  Phineia  postquam.  Id.  A.  3,  212. 

Exc.  1.  Pne,  In  composition,  is  short  before  a  vowel ;  as,  prceustiis^ 
f'imdcutus.     Thus, 

Nee  tota  tamen  ille  prior  prmeunte  carina.    Virg.  A.  6, 186. 

In  Stp.tius,  and  Sidoniiis  ApoUinaris,  it  is  found  long. 

Exc.  2.  A  diphthong  at  the  end  of  a  word,  when  the  next  woid^ 
bogins  with  a  vowel,  is  sometimes  made  short ;  as, 

Insula  lonio  in  magno,  quas  dira  Celseno.    Virg.  A.  3,  211. 

Exc.  3.  The  diphthongs  consisting  of  ?/  followed  by  a  vowel  are  either  long 
or  short;  the  two  vowels  thus  combined  being  subject  to  the  same  rules  of 
quantity,  as  their  final  vowel  would  be  if  standing  alone;  as,  qua,  qui,  quorum, 
quia,  quibus,  quatio,  queror,  cequOr,  lingua,  sanquis. 

TTT.     A  syllable  tbrraed  by  contraction  is  long ;  as, 

alius  for  aliius  ;  cogo  for  cdogo  ;  nil  for  nihil ;  junior  for  juvenior.     Thus, 
Tltyre  edge  pecus,  tu  post  carecta  lateba.s.    Vin;.  E.  3,  20. 

IV.  A  vowel  naturally  short,  before  two  con.^onants,  a  double 
consonant,  or  the  lettei-  J,  i.s  long  by  position ;  as,  drma,  bellum, 
axis,  gdza,  major.     Thus, 

Pascf.re  oportet  oves  fleiluctum  dieere  clir7nen.    Virs;.  E.  6,  5. 
Nee  myrtus  vzncrt  corylos  ;  nSc  laurea  Phoebi.   Id.  E.  7,  64. 
At  nobis,  Pax  alma,  veni,  spicamque  teneto.    Tihidl.  1,  10,  67. 
RSra  jiivant:  primis  sie  major  gritia  pomis.   Mart.  4,  29,  3. 

Note  1.  A  vowel  (other  than  i)  before  j  is  in  reality  lengthened  by  forming 
a  diphthong  with  it,  since  i  and  j  are  in  fact  but  one  letter.  Thus  majiyr  is 
equivalent  to  viai'-w,  which  would  be  pronounced  md'-yor.  See  §  9,  1. 

Exc.  1.  The  compounds  of  jugum  have  i  short  before  _;' ;  as,  biju- 
gus;,  quddrijUgua.     Thus, 

Interea  bijugis  infert  se  Lucigus  albis.    Virg.  A.  10,  575. 

Remark.  The  vowel  is  long  by  position,  when  either  one  or  both 
of  the  consonants  is  in  the  same  word  with  it ;  but  when  both  stand 
at  the  beginning  of  the  following  word,  the  vowel  is  either  long  or 
short ;  as, 

Tolle  moras;  semper  ndeult  differre  p&ratis.  Luran.  1,  281. 
Ferttj  citi  ferru in  ;  date  tela;  .scandite  mTiros.    Virg.  A.  9,  37. 
Ne  tSmen  ignoret,  quae  sit  se.nttntia  scripto.   Ovid. 

Note  2.  A  short  vowel  at  the  end  of  a  word,  before  an  initial  double  conso- 
nant or  _;'  in  the  following  word,  is  not  lengthened. 

Note  3.  In  the  comic  poets  a  vowel  frequently  remains  short  though  fol- 
lowed by  two  consonants,  especially  if  only  one  of  them  is  in  the  same  word. 


3Si  PROSODY. QUANTITY SPECIAL    RULES.  |  284 

Exc 

liquid, 
Thus, 


Exc.  2      A  vowel  naturally  short,  before  a  mute  followed  by  a 
liquid,  is  common ;    as,   agris,  pharetra,    volucris,  poplites,   cochlea. 


Et  prime  simTlis  vSlucri,  mox  vera  vBlucris.   Chid.  M.  13.  607. 
Natum  ante  ora  patris,  patrem  qui  obtruncat  ad  aras.    Virg.  A.  2,  663. 
Nox  tenebras  profert,  Phoebus  f  ugat  inde  tSnebras.    Ovid. 

Rem.  1.  If  the  vowel  before  a  mute  and  liquid  is  naturally  long,  it  continuei 
bo;  as,  saluhris,  ambulacrum. 

Rem.  2.  In  compound  words,  of  which  the  former  part  ends  with  a  mute,  and 
the  latter  begins  with  a  liquid,  a  short  vowel  before  the  mute  is  made  long  by 
position ;  as,  dbltio,  obruo,  sUblevo,  quamobrem. 

Rem.  3.   A  mute  and  liquid  at  the  beginning  of  a  word  seldom  lengthen  tho 
short  vowel  of  the  precedmg  word,  except  in  the  arsis  of  a  foot ;  as, 
TerrasyKe  tractusque  maris  coelumque  profundum.    Virg.  E.  4,  51. 

Rem.  4.  In  Latin  words,  only  the  liquids  I  and  r  following  a  mute  render 
the  preceding  short  vowel  common;  but,  in  words  of_  Greek  origin,  m  and  ri 
after  a  mute  have  the  same  effect,  as  in  Tecmessa,  Procne,  Cycnus. 


SPECIAL    RULES. 

FIRST  AND  MIDDLE  SYLLABLES. 

I.   DERIVATIVE  WORDS. 

§  984.     Derivative  words  retain  the  quantity  of  their  primi 
tiv^es ;  as, 

by  conjugation,  awio,  amat,  amabat,  amavi,  a,mdtus,  etc. ;  by  declension,  hmor, 
Amm-is,  a,mdri,  a,m6inbus,  etc. ;  so,  animal,  animd<««,  from  a,n\ma;  c/t:tui;bundm, 
from  ghmhre ;  f&mllia,  from  famulus  ;  mSitei'nus,  from  maier ;  propinguus,  from 
prope. 

Note  1.  Lar,  jjar,  sal,  and  pes  in  declension  shorten  the  vowel  of  the  nomi- 
native; as,  salis,  pedis,  etc. 

Note  2.  The  vowel  of  the  primitive  is  sometimes  lengthened  or  shortened  in 
the  derivative  by  the  addition  or  removal  of  a  consonant. 

Rem.  1.   Derivatives  from  increasing  nouns  of  the  second  or  third 
declension  agree  in  quantity  with  the  increment  of  their  primitives 
as, 

pu^ritia,  from  pueri;  virgineus,  from  virgXnis;  saluher,  from  sdlutis. 

Rem.  2.  In  verbs,  the  vowels  of  the  derived  tenses  and  of  deriva- 
live  words  agree  in  quantity  with  the  verbal  root  from  which  they 
are  formed ;  as, 

movebnm,  moveJo,  moveam,  moYh-em,  move,  movere,  movens,  moYcndus, 
from  m^v,  the  root  of  the  present,  with  d  short ; — moveram,  mover iw,  moYissem, 
movh-o,  movjsse,  from  77idv,  the  root  of  the  perfect,  with  6  long ;  m6tu?'ws  and 
motu»: — moto,  motto,  motor,  and  motws,  -us,  from  mot,  the  root  of  the  supine, 
with  0  also  long. 

Rem.  3.  (a.)  SdlMum  and  vdlutum  from  solvo  and  volvo  have  the  first  S3'llable 
ehort,  as  if  from  sdluo,  vdluo.  So,  from  gigno  come  genui,  genitum,  as  tf  *  ^ns 
gim,  and  fdiui,  from  p6Us  sum  (postum). 


§  284.         PROSODY. QUANTITY DERIVATIVE    WORDS.  323 

(6.)  The  a  in  da,  imperative  of  do,  is  long,  though  short  in  other  parts  of  the 
verb.   See  <j  294,  2. 

(c.)   The  0  in  pdsui  and  pdsUum  is  short,  though  long  in  p&no. 
Exo.  1.    Perfects  and  supines  of  two  syllables  have  the  first 
syllable  long,  even  when  that  of  the  present  is  short ;  as, 

veni,  vidi,feci,  from  venio,  video,  faxM;  casum,  motum,  visum,  from  cado 
ndveo,  video.  '  ^^' 

Note  3.  Such  perfects  are  supposed  to  have  been  formed  either  by  the  con- 
traction of  reduplicated  syllables,  aswmo,  perf.  veveni,  by  syncope^eem  by 
crasisvffii,  or  by  the  omission  of  a  consonant,  as  video,  perf.  Wsi,  by  sync  *d6 
otKli,  the  vowel  retaining  the  quantity  which  it  had  by  position.  "'    ''       ^ 

Note  4.  The  long  vowel  of  dissyllabic  supines  probably  arose  in  like  man- 
ner Irom  syncope  and  contraction;  as,  video,  vuJsum,  by  syncope  visum;  mdveo 
tmvitujii,  by  sjTicope  moltum,  by  contraction  motum.  '  ' 

,.?•)(?•)  ^^^^  s^^en  perfects  have  the  first  syllable  short  :--Ai6i, 
dedi,  fidi,  (from  Jindo),  scidi,  sieli,  stiii,  tuli.  So  also  percUlL  from 
vercello. 

(b.)   The  first  syllable  is  also  short  before  a  vowel  (^  283,  I.);  as,  rui. 

(2.)  (a.)  These  ten  supines  have  the  first  syllable  short  :—cI/m;«, 
^rrom  cieo),  datum,  itum,  litum,  quitum,  ratum,  rulum,  .mtwn,  nttm 
and  stdtum. 

(b.)  So,  also,  had  the  obsolete  fuhm,  from  fiid,  whence  comes  futurus. 

Exc.  2.  (a.)  Reduplicated  polysyllabic  perfects  have  the  first  two 
syllables  short ;  as, 

^■icidi,  cedni,  migi,  didici,  from  cddo,  cam,  tango,  and  disco. 

(b.)  The  second  syllable  of  reduplicated  perfects  is  sometimes  made  lone  by 
position;  as,  mdmordi,  tetmdi.—  Cecidi  from  cmdo,  and  iKpcdi  from  pedo  retain- 
uig  the  quantity  of  then-  first  root  also  have  the  second  sjdlable  long.     ' 

Exc.  3.  Desiderative  verbs  in  urio  have  the  u  short,  though.^in  the  third 
root  of  the  verbs  from  which  they  are  formed,  it  is  long;  as,  ccBnatm-io  from 
ccenaiu,  the  thu-d  root  of  ccem.     So  parturio,  esuiio,  mtpiurio. 

Exc.  4.   Frequentative  verbs,  formed  from  the  third  root  of  verbs  of  the  first 
conjugation,  have  the  i  short;  as,  cldmlto,  vdlito.-  See  §  187,  II.  1. 
;  Exc.  5.   A  few  other  derivatives  deviate  from  the  quantity  of  their  primi- 

1.  Some  have  a  long  vowel  from  a  short  one  in  the  primitive 
Such  are, 

Deni, /row  decern.  Mobihs, /ro7»  moveo.  Stipendium,  from  stips    • 

Fames  and  )  from  Persona, /rom  persono.  (<;tipis) 

Fomentum,  j  f oveo.  Regula  and  )  from  Susplcio,  onig,  from  sas 

Humanus,  from  homo.  Rex  (regis),  |  rcgo.  picor. 

Laten.a  froin  lateo,  Secius,  from  secus.  Tegiila,  from  t6go. 

liivtii  from  lino.  Sedes, /row  sCdeo. 

Lex  (legis),  from  lego.  Semen,/9wn  sero. 

2.  Some  have  a  short  vowel  from  a  long  one  in  the  primitive 
Such  are, 

I)Icax,/rom  dico.  Molestus, /r07«  moles.  Sagax, /rom  sagio. 

Dux  (ducis),  from  duco.  Nfito,  from  natu.  sup.  Sopor,  from  sopio. 

Fides  from  fido.  Noto,  from  notu.  sup.  Vadum,  from  vado. 

Lal)o,  from  labor,  dep.  v.  odium,  from  odi.  Veco,  from  vox  (voois  ) 

Lucema,  from  luceo.  Quasillus,  from  qualus. 


324  PROSODY. QUANTITY COMPOUND    WORDS.  §  285 

Note  1.  Dlsertus  comes  regularly  (by  syncope)  from  dissertus,  the  prefix  dit 
being  short,  §  299,  1.  Cf.  dirimo  and  diriheo,  where  s  is  changed  to  r.  See  §  196, 
(6.)  2. 

Note  2.  Some  other  words  might,  perhaps,  with  propriety  be  added  to  these 
lists ;  but,  in  regard  to  the  derivation  of  most  o'"  tftem,  gi-ammarians  are  not 
entirely  agreed. 

Remark  1.  Some  of  these  in-egularities  seem  to  have  arisen  from  the  influ- 
ence of  syncope  and  crasis.  Thus  nwbilis  may  have  been  mavlbilis ;  viotum, 
Tuiviium,  etc. 

Rem.  2.  Sometimes  the  vowel  in  the  derived  word  being  naturally  short,  is 
restored  to  its  proper  quantity  by  removing  one  of  the  consonants  which,  in 
the  primitive,  made  it  long  by  position;  as,  mix,  nucis.  So,  when  the  vowel  oi 
the  primitive  is  natm'aliy  long,  but  has  been  made  short  before  another  vowel, 
it  is  sometimes  restored  to  its  original  quantity  by  the  insertion  of  a  consonant: 
as,  hlbei'nus,  from  Mems. 

Rem.  3.  The  fii'st  syllable  in  liquidus  is  supposed  to  be  common,  as  coming 
either  from  llqitor  or  liqueo ;  as, 

CrassSLque  conveniant  tiquidis,  et  tlqulda  crassis.  Lucr.  4, 1265. 

II.    COMPOUND   WORDS. 

§  285.    1.  Compound  words  retain  the  quantity  of  the  words 

which  compose  them  ;  as, 

defer  >,  of  de  and  fero ;  Adoro,  of  ad  and  oro.  So  dbdrior,  dmdveo,  circumSo, 
cdmedo,  enllor,  produco,  subomo. 

2.  The  change  of  a  vowel  or  a  diphthong  in  forming  the  compound 
does  not  aher  its  quantity  ;  as, 

concido,  from  ccido ;  concido,  from  caedo  ;  erigo,  from  rego ;  recludo,  from  claudo ; 
inlquus,  from  cequus. 

Exc.  1.  A  long  syllable  in  the  simple  word  becomes  short  in  the  following 
compounds : — aynitus  and  cogniius,  from  noius ;  dejero  and  pejero,  from  juro ; 
hddie,  from  hoc  die :  nihilum  and  nihil,  from  hilum ;  causidicus,  and  other  com- 
pounds ending  in  dicus,  from  dlco. 

Exc.  2.  Imbecillus,  from  bdcilluin,  has  the  second  syllable  long.  The  partici- 
ple ambllus  has  the  penult  long.from  Uum,  but  the  nouns  ambitus  and  ambitio 
follow  the  rule. 

Exc.  3.  Innuba,  pronuba,  and  subnuba,  from  nwfio,  have  u  short ;  but  in  con- 
nubium,  it  is  common. 

Exc.  4.  0  final,  in  the  compounds  of  do  and  sto,  is  common,  though  long  in 
the  simple  verbs.  §  294,  (a.) 

Note  1.  Prepositions  of  one  syllable,  which  end  in  a  vowel,  are  long^  (§  294. 
{a.);  those  which  end  in  a  single  consonant  are  short  (§  299, 1.)  —  I'm  from 
trans  is  long ;  as,  trddo,  trddUco. 

V.X.C.  5.  .'Pro,  in  the  following  compouftds,  is  short  :—/)r^d7ms,  prdfat-i^ 
pn'ifecti',  prSfestus,  prdflciscor,  prdfiteoi;  prof  Agio,  prdfugus,  procella,  prd 
fimdus,  pronepos,  prdneptis,  and  prdtervus.  It  is  common  in  procuro,  projundo 
propdqo,  prvpello,  and  propmo. — Respecting  jorcE  in  composition  before  a  vowel 
see  ^  283,  II.  Exc.  1. 

Rem.  1.  The  Greek  preposition  pro  (before)  is  short;  as,  prdphcia.  In  proi- 
6gus,  propola,  and  propino,  it  is  common. 

Rem.  2.  The  inseparable  prepositions  di  (for  dls)  and  se  are  long ; 
as, 

(iMiico,  separo.     Res])ecting  disertus,  see  §  284,  Exc.  5,  2,  N.  1. 


^  286.      PROSODY. — QUANTITY — INCREMENT    OF   NOUNS.         325 

Rem.  3.  (a)  The  inseparable  preposition  re  or  red  is  short;  as, 

remitto,  rcfero,  redanu). 

{b.)  ^e  is  sometimes  lengthened  in  relifjki,  reliquice,  religtcus,  reperit,  retulit, 
rejMlit,  recidit,  reducere,  where  some  editors  double  the  consonant  following  re 
Cf.  §  307,  2.    In  the  impersonal  verb  refert,  re  is  long,  as  coming  from  res. 

Rem.  4.  A  ending  the  former  part  of  a  compound  word,  is  long 
the  other  vowels  are  short ;  as, 

mdio,  qtidprojHer,  trddo,  {trans  do);  nefas,  valed'ico,  hujuscemddi ;  biceps,  tii- 
dens,  ommpOtens,  significo ;  hddie,  quanmqufdem,  jjhildsophus  ;  ducenti,  lOcuples, 
Irojujena;  PolydOrus,  Eurypylus,  ThrusybUlvs. 

Exc.  1.  A.  A  is  sjort  in  quasi,  eddem,  when  not  an  ablative,  and  in  some 
Greek  compounds;  as,  cutCipuIla,  liexdmeter. 

Exc.  2.     E.    E  is  long  in  credo,  nemo,  nequam,  nequaqiiam,  nequidquam,  tie 
qtns,  rit-qnllid ;  mcmet,  mccum,  tecuvi,  secum,  sese,  vecoi's,  vesdnus,  veneficus,  and 
tidilicet; — also   in   words  compounded  with  se  for  sex  or  semi;  as,  sedecim,' 
semestris,  semddius  ;  biit  in  selibra  it  is  fomid  short  in  Martial. 

Note  2.  (a.)  The  first  e  in  videlicet,  as  in  vide,  is  sometimes  made  short. 
See  ^  295,  Exc.  3. 

(6.)  E  is  common  in  some  verbs  compounded  with  facio;  as,  liquefdcio, 
patefdcio,  rdrefdcio,  tdbefdcio,  tepe/dcio. 

Exc.  3.  1 .  (1.)  /  is  long  in  those  compounds  in  which  the  first  part  is  de- 
clined, (^296;)  as,  quidam,  quivis,  quilibet,  quanilvis,  quanticumque,  tantidem, 
unlcmque,  eidem,  reqmbliae,  utrlque. 

(2.)  /  is  also  long  in  those  compounds  which  maybe  separated  without  al- 
terirg  the  sense,  (§296;)  as,  lOdimdgister,  slquis,  agricultura. 

(8.)  /,  ending  the  former  part  of  a  compound  word,  is  sometimes  made  long 
by  I  ontraction;  as,  fibUen  for  tlbiicen,  from  tibia  and  cdno.    See  §  283,  III. 

(4.)    /is  long  in  b'lgce,  quadrlgce,  tllcet,  scilicet. 

(5.)  In  idem,  when  masculine,  i  is  long;  but  when  neuter,  it  is  short.  The  i 
ofuiique  and  utrdblque,  the  second  in  Ibidem,  and  the  first  in  nimlrum,  are  long. 
In  abtcumque,  as  in  ubi,  i  is  common. 

(6.)  Compounds  o{ dies  have  the  final  i  of  the  former  part  long;  as,  bUluutn, 
triduum,  mer'idies,  qiMldie,  quotididnus,  piridie,  postrldie. 

Note  3.  In  Greek  words,  i,  ending  the  former  part  of  a  compound,  is  short ; 
as,  Odlivuichus ;  unless  it  comes  from  the  diphthong  ei  (u),  or  is  made  long  or 
common  by  position. 

Exc.  4.  O.  (1.)  In  compounds,  the  final  o  of  com^7-o,  iniro,  refro,  and  ywan^fc 
.except  qitniuldquidem,)  is  long;  as,  controversia,  introduco,  retrocedo,  quandoque. 
0  is  long  also  in  ulioqui  (-quin),  and  ulroque. 

(2.)  0  i&  long  in  the  compounds  of  ^uo  and  eo;  as,  qmm6do,  quocmnque,  qud- 
nim,  quolibet,  qvominus,  quocirca,  quovis,  quoque  (i.  e.  et  quo)  ;  eddem,,  erne  ;  but 
m  the  conjunction  quoque,  it  is  short. 

(3.)  Greek  words  which  are  written  with  an  omega  (»)  have  the  o  long;  as, 
gvometra,  Minotaurus,  Idgojnis. 

Exc.  5     U.   C^is  long  in  Jupiter  {Jdvls  pater),  and  jUdico  (jus  dico). 

III.    INCREMENT   OF    NOUNS. 

§  2^G.  1.  A  noun  is  said  to  increase,  when,  in  any  ot  its  cases, 
it  has  more  syllables  than  in  the  nominative  singular;  as,  pax,  pads; 
sermo,  .ferrnonis.  The  number  of  increments  in  any  case  of  a  noun  ia 
equal  to  fha.*  of  its  additional  syllables. 


326  PROSODY. QUANTITY INCREMENT    OF    NOUNS.       §  ^87 

2.  Nouns  in  general  have  but  one  increment  in  the  singular,  Ini 
iter,  supellex,  compounds  of  caput  ending  in  ps,  and  sometimes  /&-.«', 
have  two  increments ;  as, 

iter,  i-tirir-e-ris ;  supellex,  su-pel-lec-ti-Us ;  anceps,  an-cip-i-iis ;  jecur,  je-:i^ 
5-ris. 

Kemark.  The  double  increase  of  iter,  etc.,  in  the  singular  number  arises 
from  their  coming  from  obsolete  uomLnatives,  containing  a  syllable  more  thaij 
those  now  in  use ;  as,  liiner,  etc. 

3.  The  dative  and  ablative  plural  of  the  third  declension  have  one 
increment  more  than  the  genitive  singular ;  as, 

rex,  Gen.  re-gis,  D.  and  Ab.  reg-i-hus. 

sermo,        ser-mo-nis,        ser-nion-l-bus. 

iter,  i-tiiir-e-ris,         it-i-ner-i-bus. 

4.  The  last  syllable  of  a  word  is  never  considered  as  the  incre- 
ment. K  a  word  has  but  one  increment,  it  is  the  penult ;  if  two,  the 
antepenult  is  called  the  first,  and  the  penult  the  second ;  and  if  three, 
the  syllable  before  the  antepenult  is  called  the  first,  the  antepenult 
the  second,  and  the  penult  the  third  increment ;  as, 

1  12  12123 

ser-mo,  ser-mo-nis,  ser-mdn-i-bws ;  i-ter,  i-tln-e-ris,  U-i-ner-i-^us. 

5.  In  the  third  declension,  the  quantity  of  the  first  increment  is  the 
same  in  all  tlie  other  cases  as  in  the  genitive  singular ;  as, 

sermonis,  sermdnl,  sermonem,  sermone,  sermones,  sernwnum,  sermonibus.  Bdbus, 
or  bubus,  from  bos,  bdvis,  is  lengthened  by  contraction  from  bdvibzis. 

Note.  As  adjectives  and  participles  are  declined  hke  nouns,  the  same  rules 
of  increment  apply  to  all  of  them ;  and  so  also  to  pronouns. 


INCREMENTS    OF    THE    SINGULAR    NUMBER. 

OP    THE    FIRST,   FOURTH,   AND    FIFTH    DECLENSIONS. 

§  287.  1.  When  nouns  of  the  first,  fourth,  and  fifth  declensions  in- 
crease in  the  singular  number,  the  increment  consists  of  a  vowel  before  the 
final  vowel,  and  its  quantity  is  determined  by  the  fli-st  general  rule  with  its  ex- 
ceptions, §  283, 1. 

Thus,  aura,  gen.  aurai,  §  283, 1.  Exc.  3,  (a.):  fructus,  dat.  fructHi,  §  283,  I. 
(o.):  dies,  gen.  diei,  §  283,  I.  Exc.  2,  (a.) 

INCREMENTS   OP   THE   SECOND   DECLENSION. 

2.   The  increments  of  the  second  declension  in  the  singular 

number  are  short ;  as, 

giner,  geniri;  sdtur,  sdturi ;  tener,  teneri ;  vir,viri.    Thus, 

Ne,  pugri,  ne  tanta  Snimis  assuescite  bella.   Virg.  A.  6,  838. 
Monstra  sinuntj  gSniros  externis  all  ore  ab  oris.  Id.  A.  7,  270. 

Exc.  The  increment  of  Iber  and  Celtiber  is  long.    For  that  of  genitives  in 
ins  see  ^  283,  Exc.  4. 


?287.       PROSODY. QUANTITY INCREMENT    OF    NOUNS.         82V 

INCREMENTS   OF   THE   THIRD   DECLENSION. 

3.  The  increments  of  the  third  declension  and  singular  numi' 
ber  in  a  and  o  are  long ;  those  in  e,  i,  u,  and  y,  are  short ;  as, 

animal,  animalis ;  audax,  avdacis;  strmo,  sermonis ;  ferox,  ferbcis ;  6pui^ 
ftpiris;  celer,  celeris;  miles,  militis;  supplex,  supplicis ;  mminur,  murmuris, 
aux,ducis;  chldmys,  chlamydis ;  Styx,  Sty y is.     Thus, 

PronSque  cum  spectent  anhnSlin  cetera  terram.   Ovid.  M.  1,  84. 
HsBC  turn  multipllci  populos  sermone  replebat.    Yirs;.  A.  4,  189. 
Incumbent  generis  lapsi  sarcire  ruTnas.  Id.  Q.  4,  249. 
Qualem  virgineo  demessum  pollice  florem.  Id.  A.   11,  68. 
Adsplce,  ventosi  ceclderunt  murmUris  aurse.  Id.  E.  9,  58. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  A. 

1.  (a.)  Masculines  in  al  and  ar  (except  Car  and  Na7-)  increase 
short ;  as,  Aimibal,  Annlhulis  ;  Amilcar,  Amilcdris. 

{h.)  Par  and  its  compounds,  and  the  followmg — anas,  mas,  vas  (vadis),  bac- 
car,  hepar,  jObar,  lar,  nectar,  and  sal — also  increase  short. 

2.  A,  in  the  increment  of  nouns  in  s  with  a  consonant  before  it,  is 
abort;  as,  daps,  dap  is ;  Arabs,  Ardbis. 

3.  Greek  nouns  in  a  and  as  (adis,  anis,  or  dtis)  increase  short ;  as, 
lampas,  lampddis ;  Melas,  Meldnis ,  poema,  poemdtis. 

4.  The  following  in  ax  increase  short: — dbax,  anthrax,  ArctHphylax,  Atax^ 
Atrax,  climax,  cdlax,  cdrax,  and  nycticdrax,  dropax,  fax,  harpax,  panax,  smilax, 
and  stpi'ox. — The  increment  of  Syphax  is  doubtful. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  O. 

1.  0,  in  the  increment  of  neuter  nouns,  is  short;  as, 

marmor,  marmdns ;  corpus,  corpdris ;  ebur,eb6ris.  But  os  (the  mouth),  and 
the  neuter  of  comparatives,  like  their  masculine  and  feminine,  increase  long. 
The  increment  of  a.d»r  is  common. 

2.  0  is  short  in  the  increment  of  Greek  nouns  in  o  or  on,  which, 
in  the  obUque  cases,  have  omicron,  but  long  in  those  which  have 
omega;  as, 

Aedon,  Aeddnis ;  Aadmemnon,  Agdmemndnis : — Plato,  Pldtonis ;  Sinon,  Sinbnis ; 
Sicyon,  Slcyonis.     S'ldon,  Orion,  and  uEgceon,  have  the  increment  common. 

3.  (a.)  In  the  increment  of  gentile  nouns  in  o  or  on,  whether 
Greek  or  barbaric,  o  is  generally  short ;  as, 

Macedo,  Muced6nis.  So,  Amazones,  Adncs,  Myrmiddnes,  Santones,  Saxdnes, 
Sendnes,  Teutones,  etc. 

(6.)  But  the  following  have  o  long: — Eburones,  Lacones,  Idnes-,  Nasamoiies, 
Suessones  (or  -iones),  Veitones,  Burgundimes.    Britones  has  the  o  common. 

4.  Greek  nouns  in  or  increase  short ;  as.  Hector,  Hector  is  ;  rhetor, 
rTietoris ;  Agenor,  Agenoris. 

5.  Compounds  of  pus,  (tolIc),  as  tripus,  polypus,  (Edipus,  and  also  arbor, 
tnemor,  bos,  compos,  impos,  and  lepus,  increase  short. 

6.  0,  in  the  increment  of  nouns  in  s  with  a  consonant  before  it,  is 
ihort;  as, 


328  PROSODY. QUANTITY INCREMENT    OF    NOLNS.       §  288, 

scrobs,  scrdbis ;  inops,  Indpis ;  DdBpes.     But  it  is  long  in  the  increment  ol 
eercops,  Cyclops,  and  hydrops. 
1.   The  increment  of  Allobrox,  Cappadbx,  and  pi-iecox,  is  also  short. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  E. 

1.  Nouns  in  en,  enis  (except  Hymen),  lengthen  their  increment 
as,  Siren,  Sirenis.     So,  Anienis,  Nerienis,  from  Anio  and  Nerio,  oi 
rather  from  the  obsolete  Anien  and  Nerienes. 

2.  Hmres,  Idciiphs,  mansues,  merces,  and  quies—alao  Iber,  ver,  lex,  rex,  alec  at 
dlex  (hal-)  narthex  and  vervex—plebs  and  se^js— increase  long. 

3.  Greek  nouns  m  es  and  er  (except  aiir  and  (Ether)  increase  long ; 
as,  may  lies,  magnetis  ;  crater,  crateris. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  I. 

1.  Nouns  and  adjectives  in  ix,  increase  long;  as,  victrix,  victrlcis 

felL'  fellcis. 

Exc.  Calix,  Cilix,  coxendix,  filix,  fornix,  hystrix,  Idrix,  nix,  pix,  salix,  strix 
and  rarely  sandix  or  sandyx,  increase  short. 

2.  Vibex  and  the  following  nouns  in  is  increase  long:— dis,  glis,  lis,  vi$,  Ne- 
sts, Quirts,  and  Samnis.     The  increment  of  Psophis  is  common. 

3.    Greek  nouns,  whose  genitive  is  in  wits  increase  long ;  as,  del- 

phin,  delphlnis ;  Sald^nls,  Sdldmlnis. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  U. 

1.  Genitives  in  udls,  uris,  and  utis,  from  nominatives  in  ms,  hav« 
*Jie  penult  long;  as, 

palus,  pdladis ;  iellus,  ielluns;  virtus,  virtUtis.     But  intercus,  Ltgus  and  picus 
pecudis,  increase  short. 

2.  Fur,  frux,  (obs.),  lux,  and  PoUux,  increase  long. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  Y. 

1.  Greek  nouns  whose  genitive  is  in  ynis,  increase  long;  as,  Tra- 
cTiyn,  Trdchynis. 

2.  The  increment  of  bmnbyx,  Cei/x,  gryps,  and  mormyr,  is  long ;  that  of  Be- 
brvx  and  sandyx  is  common. 

INCREMENTS    OF    THE    PLURAL    NUMBER. 

§  S88.  1.  A  noun  in  the  plural  number  is  said  to  increase, 
when,  in  any  case,  it  has  more  syllables  than  in  the  ablative  singular. 

Remakk.  When  the  ablative  singular  is  wanting,"  or  its  place  is  supplied  by 
a  form  derived  from  a  different  root,  an  ablative  may,  for  this  purpose,  be  aa- 
Bumed  by  annexing  the  proper  termination  to  the  root  of  the  plural. 

2.  When  a  noim  increases  in  the  plural  number,  its  penult  is  called  th<s 
plural  increment;    as,  sa  in   musdrum,  no  in   d^mmrum,  jk    in  rupium  and 


§  289,  290.   PROSODY. — QUANTITY — INCREMENT  OF  VERBS.  32? 

8.    In  plural  increments,  a,  e,  and  o,  are  long,  i  aad  u  are  short 

as, 

bdmrvm,  dnlmabus,  rerum,  rebus,  glnirdrum,  ambObus;  sermdTHbtis,  IdcHbus 
Thus, 

Appia,  longdrum,  tSritnr,  reglna  vianim.  Stat.  8.  2,  2,  12. 
Sunt  lacrymse  rerum,  et  mentem  mortalia  tangunt.    Virg.  A.  1,  462. 
.  Atque  alii,  quoruyn  comoedia  prisca  v^rOrum  est.  Hot.  S.  1,  4,  2. 
Portubus  Sgredior,  ventisque  fSreniVms  usufl.   Ovid. 

IV.    INCREMENT   OF   VERBS. 

§  280.  1.  A  verb  is  said  to  increase,  when,  in  any  of  its  parts, 
it  has  more  syllables  than  in  the  second  person  singular  of  the  present 
indicative  active ;  as,  das,  da-tis ;  doces,  do-ce-mus. 

2.  The  number  of  increments  in  any  part  of  a  verb  is  equal  to  that 
of  ita  additional  syllables.  In  verbs,  as  in  nouns,  the  last  syllable  ia 
ncA'er  considered  the  increment.  If  a  verb  has  but  one  increment,  it 
is  the  penult ;  and  this  first  increment,  through  all  the  variations  of 
the  verb,  except  in  reduplicated  tenses,  continues  equally  distant 
from  the  first  syllable.  The  remaming  increments  are  numbered 
successively  from  the  first ;  as. 


a-mas, 

mo-nes, 

au-dis, 

1 
a-ma-mus, 

1 

mo-ne-tnr. 

1 

au-di-tis, 

1   2 

am-ar-ba-mus. 

1  2 

mon-e-re-tur, 

1  2 

au-di-e-bas,    ^. 

12    3 
am-a-ve-ra^mus. 

12    3 

mon-e-bim-I-ni. 

12     3     4 

an-di-e-bam-I-ni. 

3.  A  verb  in  the  active  voice  may  have  three  increments ;  in  the  passive,  it 
may  have  four. 

4.  In  determining  the  increments  of  deponent  verbs,  an  active 
voice,  formed  from  the  same  root,  may  be  supposed. 

1  12 

Thus  the  increments  of  IcE-ta-twr,  Icet-a-ha-tur,  etc.,  are  reckoned  from  the 
supposed  verb  teto,  Imtas. 

§  290-     In  the  increments  of  verbs,  a,  e,  and  o,  are  long ; 
I  and  u  are  short ;  as, 

amdre,  mdnere,  facUote,  vdlumus,  rigebdmtni.     Thus, 

Et  cantSre  pires,  et  respondSre  paTuii.    Vhg.  E.  7,  5. 
Sic  equTdem  duccbam  inimo,  reftarque  fQturum.  Id.  A.  6,  690. 
Cumque  loqui  poterit,  matrein/acj«5<e  salutet.    Ot'it^,  M.  9,  378. 
Scindltur  incertum  studia  in  contriria  vulgus.    Virg.  A.  2,  39. 
Nos  numerus  sumus,  et  fruges  consumere  nati.  Hor.  Ep.  1,  2,  27. 

(a.)  Exceptions  in  Increments  in  A. 

The  Jirst  increment  of  do  is  short ;  as,  damus,  dabamus,  ddret,  dd- 
'tirus,  circumddre,  circuinddbdmus. 
28* 


330    PROSODT. — QUANTITY — INCREMENT  OF  VERBS.   §  290 

(6.)  Exceptions  in  Increments  in  E. 

1.  E  before  r  is  short  in  the  first  increment  of  all  the  present  and 
imperfect  tenses  of  the  third  conjugation,  and  in  the  second  inciement 
in  beris  and  here ;  as, 

rlgere  (infln.  and  imperat.),  regSris  or  regere  (pres.  ind.  pass.),  rigerem  and 
rigerer  (imp.  subj.);  dmdbiris,  dindbere  ;  mdneberis,  mSnebere. 

Note  1.  In  v^lim,  velis,  etc.,  from  vdlo,  (second  person,  regularly  vdlis,  by 
syncope  and  contraction  vis),  &  is  not  an  increment,  but  represents  tlie  root 
vowel  6,  and  is  therefore  short ;  §  284,  and  §  178,  1. 

2.  E  is  short  before  ram,,  rim,,  ro,  and  the  persons  formed  from 
them;  as, 

dmdveram,  dmdverat,  dmdvSrim,  mMuerimus,  rexero,  audlveritis. 

Note  2.  In  verbs  which  have  been  shortened  by  syncope  or  otherwise,  e  be- 
fore r  retains  its  origmal  quantity ;  as,  Jieram,  for  Jteveram. 

For  the  short  e  before  runt,  in  the  perfect  indicative,  as,  stSterwit,  see  Systole, 
§  307. 

(c.)  Exceptions  in  Increments  in  I. 

1.  /before  v  or  s,  in  tenses  formed  from  the  second  root,  is  long; 

as, 
petlvi,  audivi,  quceslvit,  dWisit,  audlvimus,  divtsimus,  audiveram. 

2.  I  is  long,  after  the  analogy  of  the  fourth  conjugation,  in  the  final 
syllable  of  the  third  root  of  gaudeo,  arcesso,  divido,  facesso,  Idcesso, 
peto,  qucero,  recenseo  and  ohllviscor ;  as, 

gdvisus,  arcessitus,  dlvtsus,  fdcessitus,  IdcessUus,  petltus,  quaesiius,  recensitus, 
obUtus ;  gdvlsurus,  etc. 

3.  /  in  the  first  increment  of  the  fourth  conjugation,  except  in 
imus  of  the  perfect  indicative,  is  long ;  as, 

aiidire,  aud'irem,  auditus,  auditurus,  pres.  venlmus,  but  in  the  perfect  venimus. 
So  in  the  ancient  forms  in  lba7n,  Ibo,  of  the  fourth  conjugation;  as,  nutrlbat, 
Umbuni ;  and  also  in  ibam  and  Ibo,  from  eo. 

Note  3.  When  a  vowel  follows,  the  i  is  short,  by  §  283 ;  as,  audiunt,  audie- 
bam. 

4.  /  is  long  in  the  first  and  second  persons  plural  of  subjunctives  in  sim,  sis, 
»i<,  etc.,  (§  162,  1,);  as,  simus,  sUis,  vellmus,  velUis,  and  their  compounds;  as, 
possimus,  adslmus,  mdllnius,  nollmus.  So  also  in  nollto,  nollte,  nolltote,  after  tho 
analogy  of  the  fourth  conjugation. 

5.  /  in  ris,  rimus  and  ritis,  in  the  future  perfect  and  perfect  sub- 
junctive, is  common ;  as, 

vicfms,  Mart., occi(ZI?7S,  Hor.;  vlderitis  (Ovid),  dederltis  {Id.);  fecerimus  (Car 
tuU.),  egerimus  (Virg.) 

(d.)  Exceptions  in  Increments  in  U. 

U  is  long  in  the  increment  of  supines,  and  of  participles  formed 
from  the  third  root  of  the  verb  ;  as, 

sicutiis,  idlitus,  secui^us  aHutUrus. 


§  291.  PROSODY. — QIJANTITT — PENULTS.  33] 

RULES    FOR    THE    QUANTITY   OF  PENULTIMATE    AND   ANTEPE- 
NULTIMATE    SYLLABLES. 

I,    PENULTS. 

8  301*     1.   Words  ending  in  acus,  icus,  and  icum,  shorten  the 
penult;  aa, 
dmdrdcus,  ^gyptidctts,  rusiicus,  iriiicum,  viaticum. 

Exc.'>pt  Ddcus,  merdcus,  dpdctis;  dmicus,  apncus,  Jlcus,  mendicus,  plcus, 
posticus,  pudicus,  spicus,  unrnllctis,  vicus. 

2.  Words  ending  in  abrum,  ubrum,  acrum,  and  atrum,  lengthen  the 
penult;  as, 

candeldhinim,  del^yrum,  Idvdcrum,  verdtrum. 

3.  Nouns  in  ca  lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 

apdtlieca,  clodca,  lactuca,  lorica,  phoca. 

Except  dlica,  bvassica,  dica,  fuUca,  mantica,  pedica,  pertica,  scStica,  phdldrtca, 
tunica,  vomica ;  and  also  some  nouns  in  ica  derived  from  adjectives  in  icus; 
as,  fabiica,  grammdtica,  etc.     So  mdniccB. 

4.  PatronjTuics  in  ades  and  ides  shorten  the  penult;  as,  Atlantiddes, 

Pridniides. 

F.xcept  those  in  ides  which  are  formed  from  nouns  in  eus  or  es  («f } ;  as, 
Atride^,  from  Atreus ;  Neoclldes,  from  Neocles ;  except,  also,  Amphidrdides, 
Belides,  Amyclides,  Lycurgldes. 

5.  PatronjTiiics  and  similar  words  in  ais,  eis,  and  ois,  lengthen  the 
penult;  as, 

Achais,  Chryseis,  Mlnois.  Except  Phocdis  and  Thebdis.  The  penult  of  Ne- 
reis is  common. 

6.  Words  in  do  lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 

vddo,  cedo,  dulcedo,  formldo,  rodo,  testudo.  Except  cddo,  divldo,  edo  (to  eat), 
comedo,  Macedo,  mddo,  sdlido,  spado,  trepido.    Rudo  is  common. 

7.  Words  in  idus  shorten  the  penult ;  those  in  udus  lengthen  it ; 
as, 

callidus,  herbldus,  limpidus,  Uvidus,  perfidus ;  crUdits,  l&dm,  nudus,  sOdus,  udus. 
Except  Idus,  /idus,  infldus,  nidus,  sidus. 

8.  Nouns  in  ga  and  go  lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 

saga,  colb'ga,  auriga,  rUga;  Imago,  cdligo,  aerugo.  Except  cdliga,  ossifrdga 
tdga,  pldga,  (a  region,  or  a  net),  fuga  and  its  compounds,  stega,  ecldga,  igo, 
harpdgo,  ligo. 

9.  Words  in  le,  les,  and  lis,  lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 

criruile,  mantele,  ancile ;  dies,  miles,  proles ;  anndlis,  crudelis,  clvilis,  curulis. — 
Except  male; — verbals  in  His  and  bills;  as,  dgilis,  dmubilis ; — adjectives  in 
tttilis;  as,  umbrdiilis, ; — and  also,  indoles,  subdks ;  periscelis,  dapsihs,  grdcilii, 
iHmilis,  pdnlis,  similis,  sterilis,  mUgilis,  strigilis. 

10.  Words  in  elus,  ela,  elum,  lengthen  the  penult;  as, 
phdeelus,  querela,  prelum.     Except  gelus,  gelum,  scilus. 

11.  Diminutives  in  oltis,  ola,  OMin,  ulus,  ula,  ulum,  also  words  ia 


332  PROSODY. — QUANTITY — PENULTS.  §  291 

Uus,  and  those  in  ulus,  ula,  and  iilum,  of  more  than  two  syllables, 
shorten  the  penult ;  as, 

urcedlus,  fllidla,  lectulus,  rdtiuncula,  corculum,  pabulum;  ruHhis,  garriilua, 
fabula.    Except  dsilus. 

12.  Words  in  ma  lengthen  the  penult;  as, 

fdma,  poema,  rlma,  pluma.  Except  anima,  cd?na,  decuma,  lacrtma,  victima, 
bama. 

13.  A  vowel  before  final  men  or  mentum  is  long ;  as, 

levdmen,  gi-dmen,  crimen,  flumen,  jumentum,  atramentum.  Except  tamen,  c6- 
l&men,  Hymen,  elementum,  and  a  few  verbal  nouns  derived  from  verbs  of  the 
second  and  third  conjugations;  &,?,,  alimentum,  ddcumen  or  ddcumentum,  erri^lH- 
mentum,  mdnumentum,  regimen,  specimen,  iegimen,  etc. 

14.  Words  ending  in  imus  shorten  the  penult ;  as, 

Animus,  decimus,  flnitlmus,  fortissimus,  maxlmus.  Except  h'lmus,  limus,  mimm 
Op'imus,  quddrlmus,  s'lmus,  irimus,  and  two  superlatives,  Imus  and  pnmus. 

Note.  When  an  adjective  ends  in  umus  for  imus,  the  quantity  remains  the 
same ;  as,  decumus,  optumus,  maxumus,  for  decimus,  etc. 

15.  A,  e,  0,  and  u,  before  final  mus  and  mum,  are  long ;  as, 
ramus,  remus,  extrcmus,  promus,  dumus,  pOmum,  v6levium.     Except  atdmug, 

hdlsamum,  cinndmum,  ddmus,  glomus,  Mmiis,  postumus,  ihdUmus,  tdmus,  calamus, 
nemus. 

16.  (a.)  Words  in  na,ne,  ni,  and  nis,  lengthen  the  penult;  as, 
Idna,  arena,  carina,  mdtrona,  lima,  mane,  septeni,  octoni,  indnis,  finis,  immUnis. 

Except  advena,  cottdna,  ptisana,  mina,  gena,  bene,  sine,  cdnis,  cinis,  juvenis ;  and 
the  following  in  iwa, — buccina,  ddmina,  Jiscina,  f  cmina,  fuscina,  lamina,  mdcldna, 
pdgina,  patina,  sarclna,  tib'icina,  trUlna :  and  in  pliu'.  dpAiUB,  mina,  nundina 
So  compounds  of  ^-CTw;  iis,  indi gena. 

(b.)  Verbs  in  i7io  and  inor  shorten  the  penult;  as, 

desttno,  fascino,  inquino,  sino,  criminpr.  Except  festlno,  proplno,  sagino,  6pi- 
nm;  and  the  compounds  of  clino ;  as,  inclina,  etc. 

17.  (a.)  Adjectives  in  inus,  when  they  express  time,  or  indicate  a 
material  or  an  inanimate  substance,  shorten  the  penult ;  as, 

crastinus,  diHtinus,  prisilnus,  perendinus  :  fdcj^inus,  crdcinus,  hydcinihinus,  add- 
mantinus,  crystalllnus,  dledginus,  bombycinus.  Except  mdtutlnus,  repentinus,  ves- 
pertinus. 

(b.)  Other  adjectivea  and  words  in  inus  and  in  inum  lengthen  the 
penult;  as, 

caninus,  binus,  peregrinus,  mdrinus,  clandestinus,  supinus:  linum.  Except 
fkinus,  dslnus,  cocclnus,  cominus,  eminus,  cdpMnus,  ddminus,  facinns,  fdticinus, 
proiinus,  sinus,  terminus,  geminus,  circinus,  minus,  vdticinus,  succinum,  fascinum. 

18.  A,  e,  0,  and  u,  before  final  nus  and  num,  are  long;  as, 
urbdnus,  serenus,  patronus,  pronus,  munus,  tribunus,  fdnum,  venenum,  donum. 

Except  anus,  an  old  woman,  galbdnus,  mdnus,  ocednus,  pldtdnus,  ebeiius,  genus, 
limigenus,  penus,  tenus,  Venn's,  onus,  bdnus,  sdnus,  ihrdnus ;  Idgdnum,  peuceddr 
num,  pdpdnum,  tympanum,  abrdionum. 

19.  Words  ending  in  ha,  bo,  pa,  and  po,  shorten  the  penult;  as, 
fdba,  j&ba,  sylldba ;  bibo,  cubo,  prdbo ;  dldpa,  Ifqja,  scdpha  ;    crepo,  particlpo. 

Except  gleba,  scriba,  bubo,  glubo,_  llbo,  nvbo,  scribo,  sipiw,  cepa,  rUpa,  papa,  pupa, 
ripa,  scdpa,  stnpa ;  capo,  repo,  stipo. 


§  '^91-  PROSODY. QUANTITY PENULTS.  333 

20.  Words  in  al,  ar,  are,  and  aris,  lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 

tribunal,  vect'ir/al :  lupdnnr,  pulvlnar  ;  altare,  laqueare ;  ndris.  Except  animal 
mpilnl,  cubital,  (urdl,  jubar,  solar,  mare,  bimaris.  Maris,  canthm-is,  canparis 
liar  IS.  t      jj         . 

21.  Before  final  ro  or  ror,  a  and  e  are  short;  i,  o,  and  «,  are  lon<y 

as,  ° 

_  dro,  pdro,  fero,  f/iro,  sero,  celero,  tempcro,  gueror ;  mlror,  spiro,  tiro  ;  auctoro, 
tgnovo,oro;  curo,(luro,figiiro;  lUror.  Excejit  decldro,  pero,  spero ;  ft^ro,  ?«* 
ror,  sdror,  vdro,  fUro,  sdturo ;  and  derivatives  from  genitives  increasino'  sk^Mt 
as.  auguror,  decoro,  memoro,  murmUro,  etc.;  from  augur,  augUris ;  decus,  deed' 

22.  Before  final   rus,  ra,  rum,  e  is  short;  the  other  vowels  are 
long;  as, 

tnerum,  meru^,  hedera,  serum,  ceterum;  cams,  mirus,  morus,  mUrus,  mims; 
.  ara,  splra,  ora,  ndtara,  lorum. 

Except,  1.  auslerus,  gdh'rm,  plerus,  procerus,  sincerus,  serus,  severus,  verus, 
cratera,  ccra,  pera,  panthera,  stdtera. 

Exc.  2.  barbarus,  cammdrns,  cdm&rus,  canthdnis,  cMrus,  fdrus,  helleborus 
nurtis,  opipdrus,  Ovipdrus,  phosphdrus  pirus,  sdiyrus,  scarus,  spdrus,  tartdnis, 
torus,  zephyrus;  amphdra,  ancora,  cithdra,  hdra,  lyra,  mdra,  jmrimra,  philOra, 
pyra,  sdtira ;  fOrum,  gd)-um,  pdruvi,  suppdrum. 

23.  Adjectives  in  osus  lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 
fUmosus,  vinosus. 

24.  Nouns  in  etas  and  itas  shorten  the  penult ;  as, 
pietas,  clvitas,  bdnitas. 

25.  Adverbs  in  thn  lengthen  the  penult,  those  in  iter  and  itus 
shorten  it ;  as, 

stdtlm  icou^antly),  iMritim,  irtbatim  ;  acriter,  funditus.  Except  stdtlmAm- 
niediately),  a£dtim.  ' 

26.  (a.)  Words  in  ates,  itis,  otis,  and  in  ata,  eta,  ota,  uta,  leno-then 
the  penult,  as,  " 

votes,  pendtes,  yltis  mitis,  cdryotis,  Mriotis,  pirata,  meta,  poeta,  dUta,  ciciita. 
Except  sitis,  pdtis,  drdpeta,  ndta,  rdta. 

(h.)  Nouns  in  ita  shorten  the  penult ;  as, 

dmita,  ndvita,  oibitn,  semlta.     Except  piiulia. 

27.  Nouns  in  atum,  itum,  utum,  lengthen  the  penult;  as, 

Upatum,  acdnltum,  verutum.  Except  defruium,  pulinlum,  petm-itum,  lutum 
\  aiud,    compitum.  ' 

28.  Nouns  and  adjectives  ending  in  tus  lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 
barbdtus,  grutus,  boletus,  fdcetus,  crinlius,  per-ltus,  aqrolus,   tdtus,  arqutus,  Jdr 

tutus.  }\^ciipt  ca  us,  latus,  (-ens),  impetus,  meius,  veyetus,  vetus ;  dnhHitus,  dial- 
tus,  grat'utus,  halUus,  hospltus,  senltus,  splvitus ;  antiddtus,  nOtus,  quOius  tOtut 
1^^..  great);  arbHtus,  putus ;  inclytus ;  and  derivatives  from  perfect  particinles 
having  a  short  penult;  as,  ea:«/-«7tts,  Aa6(te.  f  i     = 

29.  A  penultimate  vowel  before  v  is  long;  as, 

clilm,  dliva,  dives,  ndvis,  civis,  pdj^dver,  pdro,  privo,  ovum,  prdvus,  ,tstirm 
fu.ff.tiv,-^.  Except  am,  br-ems,  gravis,  livis,  dvis;  cdvo,  grdvo,  juvo,ldvo,  Uvq 
Jet  •  amis,  cams,  favrn  ndvus,  favor,  pdvor,  nivem.  <J'        >     '^ 


334  PROSODY. QUANTITY ANTEPENULTS.       §  '292,  2^3 

30.    Words  ending  in  dex,  dix,  mex,  nix,  lex,  rex,  lengthen  th« 
■enult;  as, 

codtx,  judex;  lodix,  radix;  cimex,  pumex;  junix;  ilex;  car  ex,  murex. 
Except  culex,  silex,  rumex. 

II.  ANTEPENULTS 

§  @0S>     1.  /is  short  in  diminutives  in  iculus  and  icellus  (a,  ■jan) 
whether  nouns  or  adjectives ;  as, 

foUiculm,  duldculus,  craticula,  pellicula,  moUicellus.  Except  words  in  which 
tfie  preceding  vowel  is  sliort;  as,  cutlcula,  canicula:  or  in  wliich  i  is  long  in  the 
primitive;  as,  cornicula,  from  cornix,  -Ids. 

2.  Numerals  in  ginti,  ginta,  eni,  and  esimus,  lengthen  the  antepe- 
nult; as, 

viginti,  quadrdyinta,  iriceni,  quingudgesimus. 

3.  0  and  u  before  final  lentus  are  short;  as, 

viiwlenius,  fraudulenius,  pulverulentus,  truculentus. 

4.  A  vowel  before  final  nea,  neo,  7iia,  nio,  nius,  nium,  is  long ;  as, 

ardnea,  linea,  cdneo,  munia,  punio,  Fdvonius,  patrimdnium.  Except  casidnea, 
tinea,  mdneo,  inineo,  monco,  seiieo,  ieneo,  igndminia,  luscinia,  venia,  Idnio,  renio, 
ingi'.numi,  genius,  senio,  senium ;  words  in  cinium,  as,  lindcinium ;  and  deriva- 
tives in  onius,  when  o  in  the  root  of  the  primitive  is  short ;  as,  Agdinemndnius, 
from  Agdmemnon,  -onis. 

5.  Words  ending  in  areo,  arius,'arium,  erium,  orius,  orium,  lengthen 
the  antepenult;  as, 

area,  cihdrizis,  plantdrvum,  dicterium,  censorius,  tentorium.  Except  careo,  va- 
riics,  desiderium,  impenum,  rtidgisterium,  ministeriuin. 

6.  Adjectives  in  atlcus,  atilis,  lengthen  the  antepenult ;  as, 
dqudiicus,  plumdtilis.     Except  some  Greek  words  in  atlcus ;  as,  gi^amrndticus 

7.  /  before  final  <Mrfo  is  short ;  as, 

allUudo,  lonyiiudo. 

8.  Verbals  in  bills  lengthen  a  but  shorten  i  in  the  antepenult ;  as, 

dmdbilis,  imrdbilis ;  credi/Alis,  terribilis.     Li  hdbilis,  b  belon;^'s  to  the  root. 

9.  U  before  v  is  short,  (except  in  Juverna)  ;  as, 
juvSnis,  jiivendlis,  juvenilitas,  Jliimus,  diluvium. 

III.  PENULT  OF  PROPER  NAMES. 

§  303.  1.  Patrials  and  proper  names  of  more  than  two  syll» 
bles,  found  in  the  poets  with  the  following  terminations,  shorten  the 
penult : — 

ba,  de,  o,6  ges,  dus,i8  ena,i9  arus,        atus,22 

ca,'  le,4  on,7  les,  eus,i4  anes,  erus,2i     itus,^^ 

la,2  pe,5  os,8  lis,io  gus,i5  enes,  yrus,        otus.^* 

be,  re,  er,"  bus,  lus,i6  aris,  asus, 

ce,3  al,  mas,  cus,ii  mus,i''  yris,  osus, 

che,  il,  ras,  chu8,i2  phus,i8  asis.^o  usus, 


§  293  PROSODY. QL  ANTITY PENULTS.  336 

Exceptions. 

^lyiancii,  Nasica. — ^Enphyiaj  Jlessala,  Philomela,  Suadela. — 3Berenic3. — 
♦ICripliJ-le,  NeObule,  Perimele. — 5£ni-5pe,  Sinope. — ^Carthago,  Cupavo,  Cu|)Ido, 
Origo,  Tlieaiio. — "Alemoii,  Aiithedon,  Chalcedon,  lason,  PliilSraon,  Polype- 
mon,  Sarpedon,  Therinddoii.— »Cercyros,  Peparethos,  Pharsalos,  SOriphos. — 
^JlOleager. — ioBes:>ali!i,  Eiimelis,  Juvenalis,  Martiiilis,  Phaselis,  Stvraphali.s. — 
'^Bcnacus,  Calcus,  Granlcus,  Nuinicus,  Trivlcus. — i^Ophiuchus. — l^^Yijvtiug. — 
'^■'Ciiphareiis,  Ei)i|)eus,  Prometlieus,  PhorCmeus,  Salmoneus,  Uileus. — li'Cetho- 
eus. — itijVawcs  in  -clus,  in  -olus  {except  iEolus,  NaubOlus),  in  -bulus,  (except 
liibfilus)  Kumelus,  Gaitulus,  lulus,  Massylus,  OrbSlus,  Pharsalus,  Sardaniipa- 
liis,  Styuiphalus. — ^'i Some  in  -demus  aiia  -phemus;  as,  Academus,  Polyplif)- 
niu.?. — isSeriphus. — '^Alcraena,  AtbeniB,  Cameiia,  Fidena,  Messena,  MurenSk, 
Myc-Gua;. — ^"Amasis. — ^'HOraerus.  Iberus. — 22A,-atus,  Cteratus,  Toi'quatus. — 
"Ht'iaclitus,  Herraaphroditus. — 24Uuthrutus. 

2.  Proper  names  of  more  than  two  syllables,  found  in  the  poeta 
with  the  following  terminations,  lengthen  the  penult : — 


ana,' 

sa. 

nuni,' 

tas. 

nus,!''^ 

urus, 

etus,'6 

ina,- 

ta,-» 

turn. 

des,9 

pus, '3 

esus,'5 

utus. 

ona,3 

':e,5 

or,s 

tes,io 

irus. 

isus. 

ytus," 

yna. 

e)ie,6 

nas. 

tis," 

orus,i4 

ysus. 

vus. 

Exceptions.    ■ 

'iSequana. — 2jiuti,ia,  Prosei-piua,  Riispina,  Sarsina. — ^Axona,  Matroiia.- 
"•Dalmata,  Prochyta,  Sarmata,  LfipJtha. — SGaifitse,  Jaxametaj,  MassagOtae, 
Macette,  SaiirOiiiataj. — BQiyn^iene,  Helene,  Melpomene,  Nyctimene. — ''Arimi- 
num,  DrC-panuin. — sj^fuy^itor. — yJIiltiades,  Pylades,  Sotades,  Thucydides;  i^a- 
Irunymics  in  -des,  (§  291,  4,)  and  jilurals  in  -ades. — wAntiphates,  Cbarites,  Eu- 
rybates,  Ichnobates,  Euergetes,  Massagetes,  and  all  names  in  -crates. — ^'Der- 
cetis. — '-Apidamis,  Aponus,  Cariinus,  Chrysogonus,  Ciminus,  Clymenus,  Con- 
canus,  Dardanus,  Diadumenus,  Earinus,  Eildanus,  Fucinus,  Helenus,  Libanus, 
Morini,  Myconiis,  Nebrophonus,  Olenus,  Periclymeuus,  Rhodanus,  Santonus, 
Sequani,  Stt-]jhanus,  TelOgonus,  Terminus,  and  names  in  -gonus  and -xenus. — 
'3(Ed)pus. — ''ip;-ic5nis^  Bosporus,  and  names  in  -chorus  and  -phorus;  as,  Stesi- 
chorus.  Phosphorus. — i^EphOsus,  Vogesus,  Volesus. — isig^petus,  Taygetus, 
Venetus.^— ''?jEi)5'tus,  Anytus,  Eurytus,  Hijjpolytus. 

3.  The  penultimate  vowel  of  the  following  proper  names,  and  ad- 
jectives derived  from  proper  names,  though  followed  by  a  vowel,  is 
long.     See  §  283,  I.  Exc.  6. 

iEntJas,  ^thion,  Achelous,  Achilleus,  AlcyoneuF  Alexandria,  Aloeus,  Al- 
plieus,  Amineus,  Ainphiaraus,  Amphigenia,  Ampb^^n,  Amythaon,  Arion,  An- 
cliiseus,  Atlanteus,  Antiochia,  Bioneus,  Gassarea,  Ciilaurea,  Calliopea,  Cassio- 
pea,  Cleantheas,  Cydoneus,  Cj'raodocea,  CytherGa,  Darius  (-eus),  Deidan.  la, 
Didyraaon,  Diomedeus,  Dolichaon,  P^chion,  Eleus,  Endymioneus,  Enyo,  Eous, 
Erebeus,  Ei'ectheus,  Galatea,  Giganteus,  Heraclea  (-eus),  HippOdamia,  Hype- 
rion, Illthyia,  Iniaon,  lolfius,  lj)higeuia,  Ixlon,  Laodamia,  Latous,  Lesbous, 
Lycaou,  Miichaon,  Mausoleum,  Medea,  Menelaus,  ilethion,  Myrtous,  Ophion, 
Orion,  Oritliyia,  Orpheus,  Pallanteum  (-us),  Pandion,  Paphagea,  Peneus,  Peu- 
thesllea,  Phojbeus,  Poppea,  Protusilaus,  Pyreneus,  SardCus,  Thalia. 

Note.  Eus  in  the  termination  of  Greek  proper  names,  is  commonly  a  dipti- 
thong;  as,  Alceus,  Qeneiis,  Orpheus,  Peleas,  Perseus,  Proleus,  Theseus,  Tydeua, 
whicn  are  dissyllables;  Bridreus,  Enipheus,  Macdreus,  Typhoeus,  which  are  tri- 
Byllabies,  JdOmentus,  etc.  Cf.  ^  2^3,  Exc.  6,  Note  2.  But  in  those  which  in 
Greek  are  written  aoc  (eios),  e«5  torms  two  syllables;  as,  Alpheiis.  So  also  in 
idjectives  in  eus,  whether  of  Grees.  or  Latin  origin;  as,  Erebeiit,  Erecihel's. 
Orpheiis;  aureus,  lii/nHls. 


336       PROSODY. QUANTITY  OF  FINAL  SYLLABLES."    §  294,  295 

QUANTITY     OF    FINAL     SYLLAISLES. 

I.    VOWELS. 
MONOSYLLABLES. 

§  304:.  (a.)  All  monosyllables,  except  enclitics,  ending  in  a 
vowel,  are  long ;  as, 

a,  ah,  da,  sta,  e,  de,  me,  te,  se,  ne,  re,  i,  fl,  hi,  qui,  ni,  si,  0  or  oh,  do,  prO, 
pron,  qm,  sio,  iU. 

POLYSYLLABLES. 

A  JinaL 

1.  A  final,  in  words  declined,  is  short ;  as,  musd,  templa,  capi- 
ta,, Tyded.     Thus, 

Mfisa  mihi  causas  memora;  quo  numtne  liBso....  Virg.  A.  1,  8. 

Exc.   A  final  is  long  in  the  ablative  of  the  first  declension,  and  in 
the  vocative  of  Greek  nouns  in  as  and  es  ;  as, 
MiJusd,  funds, ;  0  ^nea,  0  Palla,  0  Anchisd. 

2.  A  final,  in  words  not  declined,  is  long;  as,  dmd,  friistrd, 
anted,  ergd,  intra.     Thus, 

Extra  fortQnam  est  quldquid  donatur  SLmlciB.  Mart.  Epig.  5,  42,  7. 

Exc.  ^  final  i?  short  in  eirt,  iia,  5Mta,  and  m  puts,  when  used  adverbially, 
in  the  sense  of  '  for  example.'  It  is  sometimes  short  in  the  preposition  c&ntra, 
and  in  immerals  ending  in  ginta ;  as,  triginla,  etc.    In  posiea,  it  is  common. 

A  final  is  also  short  in  the  naines  of  Greek  letters;  as,  alpha,  beta,  etc.,  and 
in  taraianiara,  the  imitated  sound  of  the  tnunpet. 

E  JinaL 

§  295.  E  final,  in  words  of  two  or  more  syllables,  is  short ; 
as,  ndte,  patre,  ipse,  eurre,  regere,  nempe,  ante.     Thus, 

Tncipl,  parvS  puer,  risu  cognoscerS  matrem.  Virg.  E.  4,  GO. 

Remark.  The  enclitics  -que,  -ne,  -ve,  -ce,  -te,  -pte,  etc.,  as  they  are  not  used 
alone,  have  e  short,  according  to  the  rule;  as,  neque,  hiljusce,  suapti  Of. 
§  294,  {a.) 

Exc.  1.   E  final  is  long  in  nouns  of  the  first  and  fifth  declensions 
as, 

CaUidpe,  Tydide,  fide.  So  also  in  the  compounds  of  re  and  die ;  as,  quare, 
hddie,  prldie,  jJostridie,  qudtldie,  and  in  the  ablative  fame,  originally  of  the  fifth 
declension. 

Exc.  2.  £■  final  is  long  in  Greek  vocatives  from  nouns  in  -es,  of  the  third 
declension;  as,  Achille,  Hipp6mene ;  and  in  Greek  neuters  plural;  as,  cete,  mele 
pelage,  Tempe. 

Exc.  3.  In  the  second  conjugation,  e  final  is  long  in  the  second 
person  singjiilar  of  the  imperative  active;  as,  doce,  mone  ; — but  it  is 
Bometini.es  short  in  cave,  vale   smd  vide. 


§  296-298.    PROSODY. — quantity  of  final  stllibles.    337 

Exc.  4.  E  final  is  long  in  adverbs  formed  from  adjectives  of  the 
pecond  declension ;  as, 

placide,  pukhre,  valde  for  vdlid^,  maxtme;  but  it  is  short  in  6ewe,  maU,  ^nfe^ne^ 
and  superm. 

Fxc.  5.   Fere,,  ferme,  and  She,  have  the  final  e  long. 

I  final. 

§390.  /finalislong;  as,  domini,  fill,  classi,  doceri,  si. 
Thus, 

Quid  dSmtnl  fiicient,  audent  cum  talia  ffires.   Virg.  E.  3,  16. 

Exc.  1.    (a.)  /final  is  common  in  mihi,  tibi,  sibi,  ibi,  and  ubi. 

(b. )  In  ub'ique  and  commonly  in  ibidem  it  is  long,  but  in  iibivis  and  ubinam  it 
is  short. — (c.)  1\\  nisi,  quasi,  and  cui,  y^YLQ-n.  a  dissyllable,  i  final  is  common, 
but  usually  short.     In  utinam  and  viique,  and  rarely,  also,  in  iUi,  it  is  short. 

Exc.  2.  /final  is  short  in  the  dative  singular  of  Greek  nouns  of  the  third  de- 
clension, which  increase  in  the  genitive ;  as,  Pallddi,  Mlnoidi,  T ethyl. 

Exc.  3.  /  final  is  short  in  the  vocative  of  Greek  nouns  in  -Is ;  as,  Alean, 
Daphnl,  Pari.  But  it  is  long  in  vocatives  from  Greek  nouns  in  -is,  (ac)  -entos ; 
as,  Simoi,  Pyrdl. 

Exc.  4.  /  final  is  short  in  Greek  datives  and  ablatives  plural  in  si,  or,  be- 
fore a  vowel,  -sin ;  as,  Drycisi,  herolsi,  Trodsin. 

O  fitial. 

§  307.  0  final,  in  words  of  two  or  more  syllables,  is  com- 
mon ;  as,  virgo,  amo,  quando.     Thus, 

irgS  metu  cipita  Scylla  est  Inimica  pSlterno.    Virg.  Cir.  386. 
Ergo  soUicitse  tu  causa-,  pecunia,  vltse  es  !  Prop.  3,  6,  1. 

Exc.  1.  0  final  is  long  in  the  dative  and  ablative  singular;  as,  ddmim,  regna^ 
bono,  sud,  illo,  eo. 

Exc.  2.  0  final  is  long  in  ablatives  used  as  adverbs ;  as,  certo,  falso,  mertlo, 
vulgo,  eOj  quo ;  and  also  in  omnlno,  in  ergo, '  for  the  sake  of,'  and  in  the  inter- 
jection id. 

Kemark  1.  The  final  o  of  verbs  is  almost  always  long  in  poets  of  the  Augus- 
tan age. 

Eeji.  2.  In  poets  subsequent  to  the  Augustan  age,  final  o  in  verbs,  in  ge- 
runds, and  in  the  adverbs  adeo,  idea,  ergo,  sera,  vera,  porro,  retro,  inimo,  idcirco, 
siblto,  and  postremo,  is  sometimes  short. 

Exc.  3.  0  final  is  short  in  dto,  ilUco,  prdfecto,  and  the  compounds  of  mddo ; 
as,  dummddd,  postmddd,  etc. ;  and  in  6go  and  hdrno  it  is  more  frequently  short 
than  long. 

Exc.  4.  0  final  in  Greek  nouns  written  with  an  omega  (•)  is  long;  as,  Ctid, 
Dido,  Aiho,  and  Andrdged,  (gen.) 

TJ  final. 

§398.  1.  Z7 final  is  long;  as,  vultu,  comu.  Panthu,  dictu, 
diu.     Thus, 

Vttlta,  que  caelum  tempest^tecqne  sSrSnat.   Virg.  A.  1,  256. 
29 


338  PROSODY. — QUANTITY  OF  PINAL  SYLLABLES.         §  299 

Exc.   Indu  and  idmi,  ancient  fonns  of  in  and  non,  have  u  short.     C  is  also 
short  in  terminations  in  us  short,  when  s  is  removed  by  elision ;  as,  CMtentu 
for  ccmtentus.   See  §  305,  2. 

Y  final. 
2.    T  final  is  short ;  as,  Moly,  Tiphy.     Thus, 

M5ly  vocant  supSri :  nigra  radlce  tenetur.   Ovid.  M.  14,  292. 
Slia    F  in  the  dative  Teihy,  being  formed  by  contraction,  is  long.  \  283,  111 

11.    CONSONANTS. 
MONOSYLLABLES. 

§  SOO      1.  Monosyllabic  substantives  ending  in  a  consonant 

are  long ;  all  other  monosyllaI)les  ending   in  a  consonant   aro 

short ;  as, 

sol,  vlr,  fur,  jus,  splen,  ver,  far,  Idr,  Ndr,  par,  Ser,  fur,  fas,  mas,  res,  pes, 
Dis,  glls,  lis,  vis,  fids,  mos,  ros,  Tros,  6s,  (oris),  dos,  grus,  rus,  ius  ; — nee,  in,  dn,  ab, 
pd,  quid,  quis,  qudt,  et;  as, 

Ipse  docet  quid  agam.     FSs  est  St  ah  hoste  doceri.    Ovid.  M.  4,  428. 
Ver  adeo  frondi  nemorum,  ver  utile  silvis.    Vir^.  G.  2,  323. 

Note.  The  rules  for  the  quantity  of  final  syllables  ending  in  a  consonant 
imply  that  the  consonant  is  single,  and  that  it  is  preceded  by  a  single  vow<sl. 
If  otherwise  the  syllable  will  be  long  by  ^  283,  IV.  and  II. 

Exc.  1.  OJr,  fel,  mel,  p6l,  vlr,  6s  (gen.  ossis),  and  probably  vas  (vddis),  are 
short. 

Exc.  2.  £n,  non,  qmn,  sin,  eras,  plus,  cur,  and  par,  are  long:  so  also  are 
particles  and  pronouns  ending  in  c,  except  nee,  which  is  short,,  and  the  pro- 
nouns hie  and  hoc,  in  the  nominative  and  accusative,  which  are  common. 

Exc.  3.  Monosyllabic  plural  cases  of  pronouns  and  forms  of  verbs  in  as,  eg, 
and  w,  are  long ;  as, /((is,  quds,  hos,  nos,  vos,  giws,  his,  quis; — das,  fles,  stes,  U, 
fis,  sis,  xns ;  except  is  from  sum  which  is  short. 

Exc.  4.  The  abridged  imperatives  retain  the  quantity  of  their  root;  as,  die, 
due,  from  dico,  dUco;  jde,  fir,  from  fdcio,  fero. 

POLYSYLLABLES. 

D,  L.,  N,  R,  T,  final 

2.  Final  syllables  ending  in  d,  I,  n,  r,  and  t,  are  short ;  as 
iUud,  consul,  carmen,  pater,  caput.         Thus, 

Obstupuit  s'imul  ipse,  sTmul  perculsus  Achates.   Virg.  A.  1,  613. 

Nomen  Arionium  Siculas  impleverat  urbes.    Ovid.  P.  2,  93. 

T)iim  IdrjitSr,  horrdr,  habet ;  parsque  est  meminisse  doloris.  Id.  M.  9,  291. 

Exc.  1.    ^  in  lien  is  long. 

Exc.  2.  In  Greek  nouns,  nominatives  in  n  (except  those  in  on 
written  with  an  omicron),  masculine  or  feminine  accusatives  in  an  oi 
en,  and  genitives  plural  in  on,  lengthen  the  final  syllable ;  as, 

TUan,  Orion,  jEnedn,  Anchlsen,  Callidpen ;  epifframmdlon. 


§  BOO.  PROSODY. QUANTITY  OF  PINAL  SYLLABLES.  339 

Exc.  2.  Aer,  CBther,  and  nouns  in  er  which  form  their  genitive  in 
em,  lengthen  the  final  syllable ;  as, 

crater,  soter.  go  also  Iber;  but  the  compound  Celtiber  has  sometimes  Ji 
Martiul  its  last  syllable  short. 

Remark.  A  final  syllable  endhig  in  t,  may  be  rendered  long  by  a  diphthong. 
by  contraction,  by  syncopation,  or  by  position ;  as,  aut,  obit  for  abiit,  fuvidt, 
for  fumavit,  dmdnt.    See  §  2S3,  U.  HI.  iV.,  and  §  162,  7,  (d> 


Note     Final  m  with  the  preceding  vowel  is  almost  always  cut  off,  wben^ 
the  next  word  begins  with  a  vowel,    bee  Ecthlipsis,  §  305,  2. 


M  final. 

iding  vowel 
el.    bee  Ecth 

3.   Final  syllables  ending  in  7n,  when  it  is  not  cut  off,  are  short 

Qiiam  laudas,  pluma?  cocto  num  &dest  honor  Idem.  Hot.  S.  2,  2,  28. 

Remark.    Hence  in  composition  the  final  syllables  of  cum  and  circum  are 
short;  as,  c&medo,  circ&mago. 


\ 


C  final. 

4.  Final  syllables  ending  in  c  are  long ;  as,  alee,  illic,  istdc, 
illuc.     Thus, 

IlRc  indocto  primum  se  exercuit  area.   Tib.  2,  1,  69. 

Exc.   The  final  syllable  of  dmiic  is  short ;  as, 

DSnic  £riB  felix,  multos  numerabis  Stmlcos.   Ovid.  Trist.  1,  0,  6. 

AS,  ES,  and  OS,  final. 

§  300.     Final  syllables  in  as,  es,  and  05,  are  long  ;  as, 

musas,  pietas,  am/is,  ./Eneas,  quies,  sermones,  dies,  Peneldpes,  duceniies,  mdnee, 
bfiTWS,  vivos,  ddminds.     Thus, 

Hd.^  autem  tirras,  Itallque  banc  lltSris  oram.   Virg.  A.  3,  396. 
Si  modo  ties  illis  cultus,  si77iilesqne  pSratus.   Ovid.  M.  6,  454. 

Exc.  1.  (a.)  AS.  As  is  short  in  anas,  in  Greek  nouns  whose  genitive  ends 
in  ddis  or  ados;  as,  Areas,  Pallas;  and  in  Greek  accusatives  plural  of  the  third 
declension ;  as,  herods,  lampddds. 

{b.)  As  is  short  also  in  Latin  nouns  in  as,  ados,  formed  like  Greek  patroni'm- 
ics;  as,  Appids. 

Exc.  2.  ES.  (a.)  Final  es  is  short  in  nouns  and  adjectives  of  tTie 
third  declension  which  increase  short  in  the  genitive ;  as,  ]lo.<j)i1.-<, 
limes,  hebes ;  gen.  hospitis,  etc. 

(6.)  But  it  is  long  in  dbies,  dries,  paries,  Ceres,  and  pes,  with  its  compounds 
comipes,  sonipes,  etc. 

(c.)  Es,  in  the  present  tense  of  sum  and  its  compounds,  and  in  the  preposi- 
tion penes,  is  short. 

((f.)  Es  is  short  in  Greek  neuters  in  es;  as,  cacoethes,  and  in  Greek  nominit- 
tives  and  vocatives  plural  from  nouns  of  the  third  declension,  which  increase 
in  the  genitive;  as,  Arcddes,  Troes,  AmazOnes;  from  Areas,  Arcddis,  etc. 

Exc.  3.  OS.  (a.)  Os  is  short  in  compds,  impds,  and  ds  (ossis),  with  its  com- 
pound ea;ds 

v.. 

\ 


340  PHOSODT. QUANTITY  OF  FINAL  SYLLABLES.  §  301 

(§.)  Os  is  short  in  Greek  nouns  and  cases  written  in  the  original  with  (Wi»- 
cron;  as(l)  in  all  neuters;  as,  chads,  epds,  Argds;  (2)  in  all  nouns  of  the  second 
declension;  as,  Ilids,  Tyrds,  Delds;  except  those  whose  genitive  is  in  o,  (Greek 
a>);  as,  Athos,  gen.  Atho ;  (3)  in  genitives  singular  of  the  third  declension;  as, 
Pallddds,  Tethyds,  from  Pall^  and  Tethys. 

IS,  us,  and  YS,  fnal 
§  301.     Final  syllables  in  is,  us,  and  ys,  are  short ;  as, 

turiis,  militis,  mitts,  dmdtis,  amabis,  mdgis ;  pectus,  bdnus,  ejus,  dmdmus,  i'urtA$, 
(fyiis;  Capys,  Itys.     Thus, 

Non  apis  inde  tulit  collectoa  sedula  flores.   Ovid.  M.  13,  928. 
Serius  aut  citius  sEdem  prSpSratnus  ad  unam.  Id.  M.  10,  33. 
At  Capys,  et  quorum  melior  sententia  menti.    Virg.  A.  2,  35. 

Exc.  1.  IS.  (a.)  Is  is  long  in  plural  cases;  as, 

mUsls,  nobis ;  omnis,  urbis,  (for  omnes,  woes);  quis,  (for  quels  or  quxbus).  So 
also  in  the  adverbs  grails,  ingrdtis,  and  fdrls,  which  are  hi  reality  datives  oi 
ablatives  plural. 

Et  liquid!  simul  ignis;  ut  kis  exordia  prlmls.^  Virg.  A.  6,  33. 

Qiils  ante  ora  patrura  Trojae  sub  moenibus  altis.  Id.  A.  1,  95. 

Non  omnls  arbusta  juvaut,  humilesque  myrlcae.  Id.  E.  4,  2. 

Adde  tot  egregias  urbis,  5perumque  laborem.  Id.  G.  2,  165. 

(6.)  Is  is  long  in  the  nominative  of  nouns  whose  genitive  ends  in  His,  Inis,  or 
entis;  as,  Samnis,  Saldmis,  Simois. 

(c.)  Is  is  long  in  the  second  person  singular  of  the  present  indica- 
tive active  of  the  foui'th  conjugation  ;  as, 

audis,  nescis.  So  also  in  the  second  persons,  fis,  is,  sis,  vis,  veils,  and  theii 
compounds;  as,  adsls,  possis,  quamvis,  mdlis,  noils,  etc.   Of.  §  299,  1,  Exc.  3. 

(d)  Ris,  in  the  future  perfect  and  perfect  subjunctive,  is  common;  as, 
videi-is. 

Exc-  2.  US.  (a.)  Us  is  long  in  nouns  of  the  third  declension  which 
increase  long,  and  in  the  genitive  singular,  and  the  nominative,  ac- 
cusative, and  vocative  plural  of  the  fourth  declension,  (§  89,  Rem., 
and  §  283,  III.)  ;  as, 

tellus,  virtus,  incUs  ;—fructus.  But  pdlus,  with  the  us  short,  occurs  in  Horace, 
Art.  Poet.  65. 

(b. )  Us  is  long  in  Greek  nouns  written  in  the  original  with  the  diphthong  om 
(oi}f)whether  in  the  nominative  or  genitive;  as,  nom.  Amaihus,  Ojjus,  CEdipOs, 
tripus,  Panihus ;  gen.  Dldus,  Sapphus.  But  compounds  of  pus  {^ov(),  when  of 
the  second  declension,  have  us  short ;  as,  polypus. 

Note.  The  last  syllable  of  every  verse,  (except  the  anapsestic  and 
ihe  Ionic  a  minor c),  may  be  either  long  or  short  at  the  option  of  the 
poet. 

Keiviark.  By  this  is  meant,  that,  although  the  measure  require  a  long  syl- 
lable, a  short  one  may  be  used  in  its  stead ;  and  a  long  syllable  may  be  used 
where  a  short  one  is  required ;  as  in  the  following  verses,  where  the  short  syl- 
lable ma  stands  instead  of  a  long  one,  and  the  long  syllable  cu  instead  of  a 
b1  ort  oce: — 

Sanguineaque  manu  crepitantia  concutit  armS.   Ovid.  M.  1, 148. 

No-  figet  Mauri  jSiciills.  nee  arcu.  Hor.  Od.  1,  22,  2. 


§302. 


PROSODY. VERSIFICATION FEET. 


341 


VERSIFICATION. 


FEET. 


§  303.     A  foot  is  a  combination  of  two  or  more  syllables  of 
a  certain  quantity. 

Feet  are  either  simple  or  compound.     Simple  feet  consist  of  two 
ot  three  syllables ;  compound  feet  of  four. 

I.     SIMPLE    FEET. 
1.    Of  two  Syllahles. 

Spondee, two  long, ;  as, .fundunU 

Pyrrhic, two  short,  —  ^•,  as, , Deus. 

Vi-ochee,  or  choree, a  long  and  a  short,  —  ^-^■,  as, anna. 

Iambus, a  short  and  a  long,  -^  — ;  as, erant. 

2.    Of  three  Syllahles. 

Dactyl, a  long  and  two  short,  —  ^^  ~^;  as, corpdrd. 

Anapcest, two  short  and  a  long,  ^~-  ^^  — ;  as, ddmini. 

THbrach, three  short,  ^  -^  — ;  as, fdceH. 

Mohssiis, three  long, ;  as, cmtendunt. 

Amphibrach, a  short,  a  long,  and  a  short,  ^--  —  w ;  as, .  .dmdre. 

Amphimdcrus,  or  Ci-etic,a,  long,  a  short,  and  a  long,  —  ^^  — ;  as,  .  .cdstitas. 

Bacchltts, a  short  and  two  long,  ^^ ;  as, Cdiones. 

Antibacchius, two  long  and  a  short, ^^ ;  as, RdmanOt. 

• 

II.    COMPOUND     FEET. 


Dispondee, a  double  spondee, 

Procdeusmatic, a  double  Pyrrhic,  ^_  ^^  ^^ 

Ditrochee, a  double  trochee,  —  -^  — 

Diinmbus, a  double  iambus,  — ^  —  ^-  - 

Greater  Ionic, a  spondee  and  a  Pyrrhic,  — 

Smaller  Ionic, a  Pyrrhic  and  a  spondee,  -_- 

Choriamhus, a  choree  and  an  iambi;s,  — 

Antispast, an  iambus  and  a  choree,  >— 

First  epitrit, an  iambus  and  a  spondee,  ^- 

Second epitrit,. ..... .a  trochee  and  a  spondee,  — 

Third  epiint, a  spondee  and  an  iambus,  — 

Fourth  ejntrit, a  spondee  and  a  trochee,  — 

First  pceon, a  trochee  and  a  Pyrrhic,  — 

Second  pceon, an  iambus  and  a  Pyrrhic,  ^ 

Third  pceon, a  Pyrrhic  and  a  trochee,    — 

Fourth  pceon, a  Pyrrhic  and  an  iambus,  ^ 


— ;  as,. 

^-' ;  as,. 

-~'i  as.. 

;  as,. 


conflixerunt, 

hdminibus. 

cdmprdbdvit. 

dmdverdnt. 

as,. .  .correximus. 
as, . . .  jn'dpb'cibdnU 
as,. .  .terrficdnt. 
as,. .  .ddlicBsisse. 

.amdvrrunt. 

.conditonls. 

.disco  rdids. 

.  ddduxlstis. 

.tlmjjdiibus. 

.pdtcntid. 

.dnimdtiis. 

.  celeiitas. 


as,, 
as,, 
as,, 
as,, 
as,, 
as,, 
as,, 
as,. 


Remakk.     Those  feet  are  called  isocnrcnums,  which  consist  of  equal  times 
as  the  spondee,  the  dactyl,  the  anapaest,  and  the  proceleusmatic,  one  long  tima 
being  considerec'  equal  to  two  short. 

39* 


342  PROSODY. VERSIFICATION METRE VERSES.  §  303.  304 

»  METRE. 

§  303.  1.  Metre  is  an  arrangement  of  syllables  and  feet 
according  to  certain  rules, 

2.  In  this  general  sense,  it  compreiiends  either  an  entire  verse,  a  part  of  a 
verse,  or  any  number  of  verses. 

3.  Metre  is  divided  into  dactylic^  anapcesiic,  iambic,  trochaic,  chori 
amble,  and  Ionic.  These  names  are  derived  from  the  original  oi 
fncdamental  foot  employed  in  each. 

4.  A  metre  or  measure,  in  a  specific  sense,  is  either  a  single  foot 
or  a  combination  of  two  feet.  In  the  dactylic,  choriambic,  and  Ionic 
metres,  a  measure  consists  of  one  foot ;  in  the  other  metres,  of  two 
feet.     Two  feet  constituting  a  measure  are  sometimes  called  a  syzygy 

VERSES. 

§  304:.  A  verse  is  a  certain  number  of  feet,  arranged  in  a 
regular  order,  and  constituting  a  line  of  poetry. 

1.  Two  verses  are  called  a  distich;  a  half  verse,  a  hemistich. 

2.  Verses  are  of  different  kinds,  denominated  sometimes,  lil^e  the 
diflfprent  species  of  metre,  from  the  foot  which  chiefly  predominatea 
in  them  ;  as,  dactylic,  iambic,  etc. ; — sometimes  from  the  number  of 
feet  or  metres  which  they  contain  ;  as,  sendrius,  consisting  of  six  feet ; 
jctondriiis,  of  eight  feet ;  manometer,  consisting  of  one  measure ;  dime- 
ter, of  two  ;  trimeter,  tetrameter,  pentameter,  hexameter  ; — sometimea 
from  a  celebrated  author  who  used  a  particular  species ;  as,  Sapphic 
Anacreontic,  Alcaic,  Asclepiadic,  Glyconic,  Phalcecian,  Sotadic,  Archi- 
lochian,  Alcmanian,  Pherecratic,  Aristophanic,  etc.,  from  Sajfpho,  Ana- 
creon,  Alc(eus,  Asclepiddes,  Gltjcon,  Phalcecus,  Sotddes,  Archilochus, 
Alcman,  Pherecrdtes,  Aristophanes,  etc.— and  sometimes  from  the 
particular  uses  to  which  they  were  applied;  as,  \hQ  prosodiac,  from 
its  use  in  solemn  processions,  the  paroemiac,  from  its  frequent  use  in 
proverbs. 

3.  A  verse,  with  respect  to  the  metres  which  it  contains,  may  be 
complete,  deficient,  or  redundant. 

(1.)    A  verse  which  is  complete  is  called  acatalectic. 

(2.)  A  verse  which  is  deficient,  if  it  wants  one  syllable  at  the  end, 
t8  called  catalectic ;  if  it  wants  a  whole  foot  or  half  a  metre,  it  ia 
called  brachycatalectic. 

(3.)  A  verse  which  wants  a  syllable  at  the  beginning,  is  called 
acephalous. 

(4.)  A  verse  which  has  a  redundant  syllable  or  foot,  is  called 
hypercatalectic  or  hypermeter 

4.  Hence,  the  complete  name  of  every  verse  consists  of  three 
terms — the  first  referring  to  the  species,  the  second  to  the  number  of 
metres^  and  the  third  to  the  ending ;  as,  the  dactylic  trimeter  catalectic 


§  305.  PROSODY. VERSIFICATION FIGURES.  348 

5.  A  verse  or  portion  of  a  verse  of  any  kind  (measured  from  the 
beji^nning)  which  contains  three  half  feet,  or  a  foot  and  a  half,  ia 
called  a  trihemimeris ;  if  it  contains  five  half  feet,  or  two  feet  and  a 
half,  it  is  called  a  pentliennmeris ;  if  seven  half  feet,  or  three  feet  and 
a  half,  a  hepthemimeris ;  if  nine  half  feet,  or  four  feet  and  a  half,  an 
ennehemimeris.  A  portion  of  a  verse  consisting  of  one  whole  metre 
And  a  half,  is  called  a  heiyiiolius,  as  being  the  half  of  a  trimeter. 

Note.    The  respective  situation  of  each  foot  in  a  verse  is  called  its  place. 

6.  Scanning  is  the  dividing  of  a  verse  into  the  feet  of  which  it  ia 
composed. 

Remark.  In  order  to  scan  correctly,  it  is  necessary  to  know  the  quantity 
of  each  syllable,  and  also  to  understand  the  following  poetic  usages,  which  are 
sometimes  called 

FIGURES   OF  PROSODY. 
STNAL(EPHA. 

§  30S.  1.  Synaloepha  is  the  elision  of  a  final  vowel  or 
diphthong  in  scanning,  when  the  following  word  begins  with  a 
vowel. 

Thus,  terra  antiqua  is  read  terr'  antiqua;  Dardcmidce  infensi,  Barddntd'  in- 
fensi;  vento  hue,  venV  hue.     So, 

Quidve  mbror?  si  omnes  uno  ordine  habetis  Achiyos.   Virg.  A.  2,  102. 

Which  is  scanned  thus — 

QuidTe  moror?  s'  omnes  un'  ordin'  hSbetis  Achivos. 

(1.)  The  interjections  0,  Aeu,  ah,  proh,  i;£E,  vaA,  are  not  elided ; 
as, 

O  et  de  Latia,  O  et  de  gente  Sablna.    Ovid.  M.  14,  832. 

Kemark.    But  0,  though  not  elided,  is  sometimes  made  short;  as, 
Te  Corydon  O  Alexi ;  trahit  sua  quemque  voluptas.    Virg.  E.  2,  65. 

(2.)  Other  long  vowels  and  diphthongs  sometimes  remain  unelided,  in  which 
rase,  when  in  the  thesis  of  a  foot,  they  are  commonly  made  short;  as, 

Victor  Spud  rSpidum  Simoenta  sub  IliS  alto.    Virg.  A.  5,  261. 
Anni  tempore  eo  gut  Etesice  esse  feruntur.  Liccr.  6,  717. 
Ter  sunt  condtl  imponere  Peli5  Ossam.    Virg.  G.  1,  281. 
Glauco  et  PdnSpeiz,  et  Inoo  Mellcertae.  Id.  Q.  1,  436. 

(3.)  Rarely  a  short  vowel,  also,  remains  without  elision;  as, 

Et  vera  incessu  patuit  rfea.    Hie  ubi  matrem....    FiVg-.  A.  1,  405. 

(4.)    Synalcepha  in  a  monosyllable  occasionally  occurs ;  as, 

Si  ad  vitulam  spectas,  nihil  est,  quod  pocula  laudes.   Virg.  E.  8,  48. 

For  synalcepha  at  the  end  of  a  line,  see  Synapheia,  §  307,  3. 

ECTHLIPSIS. 

2.  EctJilipsis  is  the  eli.sion  of  a  final  m  with  the  preceding 
pQwel,  when  the  following  word  begins  with  a  vowel.     Thus, 

0  cures  homlnum,  0  quantum  est  in  rebus  Inane!  Fen.  1,  1. 


844  PROSODY. VERSIFICATION BIGUKES.  §  30i 

Which  is  thus  scanned — 

0  curas  homin'  0  quant'  est  in  rebus  inane. 
yionstrum  hoTrendum,  informe,  ingens,  cui  lumen  ademptum.   Virg.  A.  3,  6158. 

(1.)  This  elision  was  sometimes  om^cted  by  the  early  poets;  as, 

CorpSrum  oflScium  est  qu'Sniam  premere  omnia  deorsum.  Lucr.  1,  363. 

See  §  299,  2, 
(2.)    Final  s,  also,  with  the  preceding  vowel,  is  sometimes  elided  by  th« 
early  poets  before  a  vowel,  and  sometimes  s  alone  before  a  consonant;  as,  con- 
tend' atque  (Emi.),  for  contentus  atgue;  omnlbu'  rebus.  (Lucr.)     So, 
Tum  latSralV  dolor,  certisslmu'  nunciu'  mortis.  Lucil. 
Remark.    This  elision  took  place  principally  in  short  syllables. 
For  ecthlipsis  at  the  end  of  a  line,  see  Synapheia,  §  307,  3. 

SYNiERESIS. 

§  30G.     1.    Synaeresis  is  the  contraction  into  one  syllable 
of  two  vowels  which  are  usually  pronounced  separately.    Thus, 

Aured  percussum  virga,  Ter.siunque  venenis.    Virg.  A.  7,  190. 
Eosdem  hsibuit  secum,  quibus  est  elata,  caplllos.  Prop.  4,  7,  7. 
Tityre,  pascentes  a  flumine  reice  capellas.    Virg.  E.  3,  96. 

Remark  1.  So  Phaethon  is  pronounced  Phoeihon ;  alveo,  alvo ;  Orphea, 
Orpha ;  deo7-sum,  dorsum. 

(1.)  Synajresis  is  frequent  in  m,  ildem,  iisdem,  dii,  diis,  dein,  deinceps,  deinde, 
deest,  deerat,  deSro,  deerii,  deesse;  as, 

Praecipltatur  iquis,  et  aquis  nox  surgit  ab  tsdem.   Ovid.  M.  4,  92. 
Sint  Maeoenates;  non  deerunt,  Flacce,  Marones.  Mart.  8,  56,  5. 

Rem.  2.   Oui  and  huic  are  usually  monosyllables. 

(2.)  When  two  vowels  in  compound  words  are  read  as  one  syllable,  the 
former  may  rather  be  considered  as  elided  than  as  united  with  the  latter;  as, 
e  in  anteatnbido,  anieli'e,  aniehac,  dehinc,  meherciUe,  etc.,  and  a  in  contralre. 

■(3.)  The  syllable  formed  by  the  union  of  i  or  u  followed  by  another  vowel 
retains  the  quantity  of  the  latter  vowel,  whether  long  or  short ;  as,  dbiete,  driUe, 
abiegiuB.,  parietibus,  consilmm,  foriu'dus,  Ndsidienus,  vindHmidtm',  omnid ;  genua, 
tenuis,  pituita,  flUviorum,  etc.  In  such  examples,  the  i  and  u  are  pronounced 
like  initial  y  and  w;  as,  dbyete,  paryetibus,  consilyum,  fortwUus,  Ndsidyenm, 
omn-yd,  ienwis,  piiwUa,  etc. ;  and,  like  consonants,  they  have,  with  another 
consonant,  the  power  of  lengthening  a  preceding  short  vowel,  as  in  the  above 
examples. 

Note.  In  Statius,  the  word  tenuiore  occurs  as  a  trisyllable,  in  which  the 
three  vowels,  uio,  are  united  in  pronunciation ;  thus,  ten-wio-re. 

(4.)  Sometimes,  after  a  sjmaloepha  or  echthlipsis,  two  vowels  suffer  synaere- 
sis ;  as,  stellio  et,  pronomiced  stell-yet :  consilium  et, — consil-yet. 

(5.)  If  only  one  of  the  vowels  is  written,  the  contraction  is  called  crcms;  as, 
sK,  consili,  for  dii,  consilii. 

DI^RESfS. 

2.    Diceresis  is  the  division  of  one  syllable  into  two ;  as, 

auUl,  Trdia,  siliia,  suddent ;  for  aulce,  Troia  or  Troja,  silva,  suadent.  So, 
sinsco  for  suesco ;  reliquus  for  "eliquus ;  ecquis  for  ecquis ;  miluus  for  milvm,  etc., 
as 


§307.  PROSODY. VERSIFICATION FIGURES.  345 

^thfreum  sensum,  atque  aurai  simplicis  ignem.   Virg.  A.  6,  747 
Atque  alios  alii  irrldent,  Veneremque  siiadent.  Lucr.  4,  1153. 
Grammatici  certant;  et  adhuc  sub  iudice  lis  est.  Hor.  A.  P.  78. 
Aurarum  et  sUucb  metu.  Id.  0.  1,  23,  4. 

(1.)    So  in  Greek  words  originally  written  with  a  diphthong  (Men,);  a* 
(lAiieia  for  elegia,  Baccheid  for  Bacchea,  RluBleius  for  Rlmleus,  Plelas  i'oT  FMs 
And  also  in  words  of  Latin  origin;  as,  Vems  for  Veins,  Aguilcld  for  Aquileid. 

Rejuark.  This  figure  is  sometimes  called  dialysis. 

SYSTOLE, 

§  307.     1.    Systole  is  the  shortening  of  a  syllable  which  li 
long  by  natui-e  or  by  position  ;  as, 

vide'n  for  vUlesne,  in  which  e  is  naturally  long;  sdWn  for  sdtisne,  in  which  » is 
I'-.ng  by  position  ■,—h6die  for  hoc  die ;  mulUinddis  for  multls  mddis.     So, 
DQcere  multlmQdis  voces,  et  flectere  cautus.  Lucr.  5,  1405. 

(1.)  By  the  omission  of  y  after  a6,  ac?,  (5J,  suj,  and  re,  in  compound  words, 
those  prepositions  retain  their  naturally  short  quantity,  which  would  otherwise 
be  made  long  by  position ;  as,  dbici,  ddicit,  dbicis,  etc.     Thus, 

Si  quid  nostra  tuis  Micit  vexatio  rebus.  JMart.  10,  82,  1. 

Remark.  In  some  compounds  the  short  quantity  of  dd  and  db  is  preserved 
oefore  aconsonant  by  the  elision  of  the  J  or  6  of  the  preposition,  as  in  dperio 
Operio,  dmitto,  etc.  ' 

(2.)  The  penult  of  the  third  person  plural  of  certain  perfects  is  said  by 
Bome  to  be  shortened  by  systole ;  as,  steterunt,  tulenmt,  etc. ;  but  others  ascribe 
tliese  irregularities  to  the  errors  of  transcribers,  or  the  carelessness  of  writers. 

DIASTOLE. 

2.  Diastole  is  the  lengthening  of  a  syllable  which  is  naturally 
short. 

(1.)  It  occurs  most  frequently  in  proper  names  and  in  compoimds  of  re ;  as. 
''riamides,  religio,  etc.     Thus, 

Hanc  tibi  Fnamides  mitto,  Ledsea,  salutem.   Ovid.  H.  16,  1. 
Retigione  patrum  multos  servata  per  annos.    Virg.  A.  2,  715. 

(2.)    Some  editors  double  tlie  consonant  after  the  lengthened  re;  as,  relUgio. 
(3.)   Diastole  is  sometimes  called  ectdsis, 

SYNAPHEIA. 

3.  Synapheia  is  such  a  connection  of  two  consecutive  verses, 
that  the  first  syllable  of  the  latter  verse  has  an  influence  on  the 
final  syllable  of  that  which  precedes,  either  by  position,  synalce- 
pha,  or  ecthhpsis.    See  §§  283  and  305. 

(1.)   This  figure  is  most  frequent  in  anapsestic  verse,  and  in  the  Ionic  a 
nunore. 


The  following  lines  will  illustrate  its  effect:— 

Pra;ceps  sUvas  montesque  fvgit 
Citus  Actaeon.  Sen. 

Here  the  t  in  the  final  syllable  oi  fugit,  which  is  naturally  short,  is  made  lona 
^  position  before  the  following  consonants,  <<;,  " 


S46        PROSODY. VERSIFICATION ARSIS  AND  THESIS.       §  308 

Omnia  Mercuric  simTlis,  vocemque  ccloiemque 
Et  crinea  flavos....  Virs-  A.  4,  558. 
Dissidens  plebi  numSro  beatorwjn 
Eximit  virtus.    Hor.  0.  2,  2,  18. 

In  the  former  of  these  examples,  syiiapheia  and  sjmaloepha  are  combiied,  que 
being  eHded  before  et  in  the  following  line;  in  the  latter  there  is  a  similar 
combination  of  synapheia  and  ecthlipsis. 

(2.)  By  synapheia,  the  parts  of  a  compound  word  are  sometimes  divided  be- 
tween two  verses ;  as, 

....  si  non  offenderet  unum- 
Q«cOT5«e  poetarum  limae  labor  et  mora...  Hor.A.P  290. 

(3.)  In  hexameter  verse  a  redundant  syllable  at  the  end  of  a  line  elided  be- 
fore a  vowel  at  the  beginning  of  the  next  line,  by  causing  the  accent  to  fiiU  on 
the  second  syllable  of  the  concluding  spondee,  and  connecting  th"  two  verses 
by  synapheia,  excites  the  expectation  of  something  which  is  to  follow,  and 
often  tends  to  magnify  the  object;  as, 

Quos  super-  |  -atra  si-  |  -lex,  jam- I  -jam  lap-  |  -surSl  cSl-  |  -denti-  |  -que 

Imminet  assimilis.    Virg.  A.  6,  602. 

Remark.  The  poets  often  make  use  of  other  figures,  also,  which,  however, 
are  not  peculiar  to  them.  Such  bxq  prosMsis,  ajiJuxresis,  syncdpe,  epenthisis, 
apocdpe,  paragoge,  tmesis,  antitltesis,  and  metathesis.   See  §  322. 

ARSIS  AND   THESIS. 

§  308.  (1.)  Rhythm  is  the  alternate  elevating  and  depress- 
ing of  the  voice  at  regular  intervals  in  pronouncing  the  syllables 
of  verse. 

(2.)  The  elevation  of  the  voice  is  called  arsis,  its  depression  thesis 
These  terms  designate,  also,  the  parts  of  a  foot  on  which  the  eleva- 
tion or  depression  falls. 

1.  The  natural  arsis  is  on  the  long  syllable  of  a  foot ;  and  hence, 
in  a  foot  composed  wholly  of  long,  or  wholly  of  short  syllables,  when 
considered  in  itself,  the  place  of  the  arsis  is  undetermined  ;  but  when 
such  foot  is  substituted  for  the  fundamental  foot  of  a  metre,  its  arsis  ia 
determined  by  that  of  the  latter. 

Remark.  Hence,  a  spondee,  in  trochaic  or  dactylic  metre,  has  the  arsis  on 
the  first  syllable ;  but  in  iambic  or  anapaestic  metre,  it  has  it  on  the  last. 

2.  The  arsis  is  either  equal  in  duration  to  the  thesis,  or  twice  as 
long. 

Thus,  in  the  dactyl,  —  >-  -  ,  and  anapaest,  ^  ^  — ,  it  is  equal;  in  the  t»v> 
chee  —  —  and  iambus,  ^  — ,  it  is  twice  as  long.  This  difi"erence  m  the  pro- 
portionate duration  of  the  arsis  and  thesis  constitutes  the  difi'erence  of  rhj'thm. 
A.  foot  is  said  to  have  the  desceitding  rhythm,  when  its  arsis  is  at  the  beginning, 
and  the  ascending,  when  the  thesis  is  at  the  beginning. 

3.  The  stress  of  voice  which  falls  upon  the  arsis  of  a  foot,  is  called 
the  ictus.  When  a  long  syllable  in  the  arsis  of  a  foot  is  resolved  into 
two  short  ones,  the  ictus  falls  upon  the  former. 

Note  1  Some  suppose  that  the  terms  arsis  and  thesis,  as  used  by  the  an- 
Oients,  denoted  respectively  the  rising  and  falling  of  the  hand  in  beating  time, 
and  that  the  place  of  tlie  thesis  was  the  syl.able  which  received  the  ictus 


5309,310.    PROSODY. VERSIFICATION DACTYLIC  MEfRE.   347 

Note  2.  As  the  ancient  pronunciation  of  Latin  is  not  now  understood, 
writers  differ  in  regard  to  the  mode  of  reading  verse.  According  to  some,  the 
accent  of  each  word  sliould  always  be  preserved;  wliile  otiiers  direct  that  the 
stress  of  voice  should  be  laid  on  the  arsis  of  the  foot,  and  that  no  regard  should 
be  paid  to  the  accent. 

_  It  is  generally  supposed  that  the  final  letters  elided  by  synaloepha  and  ectli- 
lipsis,  though  omitted  in  scanning,  were  pronounced  in  reading  verse. 

cj:sura. 

§  309.  Ccesura  is  the  sepai-ation,  by  the  ending  of  a  word, 
of  syllables  rhythmically  or  metrically  connected. 

CjBsura  is  bf  three  kinds:—!,  of  the  foot;  2,  of  the  rhythm;  and  3, 
of  the  verse. 

1.  Cffisura  of  the  foot  occurs  when  a  word  ends  before  a  foot  is 
completed;  as, 

Silves-  I  -trem  tenu-  |  -i  Mu-  |  -sam  medi-  |  -taris  a-  |  -veaa.    Virg.  E.  1,  2. 

2.  Caesura  of  the  rhythm  is  the  separation  of  the  arsis  from  the 
thesis  by  the  ending  of  a  word,  as  in  the  second,  third,  and  fourth 
feet  of  the  preceding  verse. 

Rem  1.  It  hence  appears  that  the  ca3sura  of  the  rhvthm  is  always  a  cajsura 
of  the  foot,  as  e.  g.  in  the  2d,  3d,  and  4th  feet  of  the  preceding  verse;  but,  on 
the  contrary,  that  the  ciesura  of  the  foot  is  not  always  a  caesura  of  the  rhythm, 
as  e.  g.  in  the  fifth  foot  of  the  same  verse. 

(1.)  CiEsura  of  the  rhythm  allows  a  final  syllable  naturally  short, 
to  stand  in  the  arsis  of  the  foot  instead  of  a  long  one,  it  being  len<j-th- 
ened  by  the  ictus ;  as, 

Pectori-  I  -bus  Inhi-  |  -ans  spi-  |  -ranta  |  consQlIt  |  exta.    Virg.  A.  4,  64. 

This  occurs  chiefly  in  hexameter  verse. 

Rem.  2.  Cffisura  of  the  foot  and  of  the  verse  do  not  of  themselves  lengthen  a 
short  syllable,  but  they  often  coincide  with  that  of  the  rhythm. 

3.  Caesura  of  the  verse  is  such  a  division  of  a  Hne  into  two  parts, 
as  affords  to  the  voice  a  convenient  pause  or  rest,  without  injury  to 
the  sense  or  harmony. 

Rem.  3.  The  ccesura  of  the  verse  is  often  called  the  ccesural  jmuse.  In  sev- 
eral kinds  of  verse,  its  place  is  fixed ;  in  others,  it  may  fall  in  more  than  one 
place,  and  the  choice  is  left  to  the  poet.  Of  the  former  kind  is  the  pentameter, 
fff  the  latter  the  hexameter. 

The  proper  place  of  the  caesural  pause  will  be  treated  of,  so  far  as  shall  be  necessary, 
ander  each  species  of  verse. 

Rem.  4.  The  effect  of  the  csesiira  is  to  connect  the  different  words  har- 
moniously together,  and  thus  to  give  smoothness,  grace,  and  sweetness,  to  tha 
rerse. 

DIFFERENT    KINDS     OF    METRE. 

DACTYLIC  METRE. 

3  StlO.  I.  A  hexameter  or  heroic  verse  consists  of  six  feet 
Of  these  the  fifth  is  a  dactyl,  the  sixth  a  spondee,  and  each  of 
the  olher  four  either  a  dactyl  or  a  spondee  ;  as. 


548         PROSODY. VERSIFICATION DACTYLIC  METRE.        § 

At  tuba  I  terribi-  |  -lem  sonT-  |  -turn  procul  |  iere  ci-  |  -noro.   Virg.  A.  9,  503. 
IntOn-  I  -SI  cri-  |  -nCs  Ion-  |  -ga  cer-  |  -vice  flu-  |  ebant.   TihuU.  3,  4,  27. 
Ludere  |  quse  vel-  |  -lem  cala-  |  -mo  per-  |  -mlsit  a-  [  -gresti.    Virg.  E.  1,  10. 

1.  The  fifth  foot  is  sometimes  a  spondee,  and  the  verse  in  such 
case  is  called  spondaic  ;  as, 

CarSl  de-  |  -um  sobo-  |  -les  mag-  |  -num  JSviS  |  Incre-  1  -mentum.    Virg.  E.  4,  49. 

Remark  1.  In  such  verses,  the  fourth  foot  is  commonly  a  dactyl,  and  the 
fifth  should  not  close  with  the  end  of  a  word.  Spondaic  lines  are  thought  to 
be  especially  adapted  to  the  expression  of  gi-ave  and  solemn  subjects. 

2.  A  light  and  rapid  movement  is  produced  by  the  frequent  i«c  mi- 
rence  of  dactyls ;  a  slow  and  heavy  one  by  that  of  spondees ;  as, 

Quadrupe-  |  -dantS  pii-  |  -trem  som-  |  -tu  quatit  |  ungula  |  campum.  -Virg.  A.  8,  596. 
Illi  in-  I  -ter  se-  |  -se  mag-  |  -na  vi  |  brachia  tollunt.  Id.  A.  8,  452. 

Rem.  2.  Variety  in  the  use  of  dactyls  and  spondees  in  successive  lines,  hab 
an  agreeable  effect.  Hexameter  verse  commonly  ends  in  a  word  of  two  or 
three  syllables,  and  a  monosyllable  at  the  end  of  a  line  is  generally  ungi-aceful, 
but  sometimes  produces  a  good  effect;  as, 

Sternitur,  |  exani-  |  -misque,  tre-  ]  -mens  pro-  |  -cumbit  hu-  |  -ml  bos.    Virg.  A.  6,  481 
Parturi-  |  -tint  mon-  |  -tes :  nas-  |  -cetur  |  ridicii-  ]  -lus  mus.  Hor.  A.  P.  139. 

3.  The  beauty  and  harmony  of  hexameter  verse  depend  much  on  due  at- 
tention to  the  ccesura.  (See  ^  309.)  A  line  in  which  it  is  neglected  is  destitute 
of  poetic  beauty,  and  can  hardly  be  distinguished  from  prose ;  as, 

Romse  I  moenia  |  terruit  |  Impiger  |  Hannibal  |  armis.  Enn. 

4.  The  caesural  pause  most  approved  in  heroic  poetry  is  that  which 
occurs  after  the  penthemimeris,  i.  e.  after  the  arsis  in  the  third'  foot. 
This  is  particularly  distinguished  as  the  heroic  ccesura.     Thus, 

•  At  domiis  |  Interi-  |  -or  ||  re-  |  -gali  |  BplendidS.  |  luxu.   Virg.  A.  1,  637. 

5.  Instead  of  the  nreceding,  a  cassura  in  the  thesis  of  the  third 
foot,  or  after  the  aiins  of  the  fourth,  was  also  approved  as  heroic ;  as, 

Inf  an-  |  -dum  re-  |  -gin3.  ||  jii-  |  -bes  reno-J  -vare  do-  |  -15rem.    Virg.  A.  2,  3. 
Inde  to-  I  -ro  pater  |  Mae-  \  -as  ||  Bio  |  orsue  ab  |  alto.  Id.  A.  2,  2. 

Rem.  3.   When  the  csesural  pause  occurs,  as  in  the  latter  example,  after  the 
liephthemimei-is,  i.  e.  after  the  arsis  of  the  fourth  foot,  another  but  slighter  one  is 
often  found  in  the  second  foot ;  as. 
Prima  te-  |  -net,  ||  plan-  |  -suque  vo-  |  -lat  ||  freml-  |  -tflque  se-  |  -cundo.    Virg.  A  5,  338. 

6.  The  caesura  after  the  third  foot,  dividing  the  verse  into  exactly 
equal  parts,  was  least  approved ;  as, 

Cui  non  |  dictus  Hy-  |  -las  puer  ||  et  La-  |  -tonia  |  Delos.    Virg.  G.  3,  6. 

Rem.  4.  The  caasural  pause  between  the  fourth  and  fifth  feet  was  considered 
as  peculiarly  adapted  to  pastoral  poetiy,  particularly  when  the  fourth  foot  was 
a  dactyl,  and  was  hence  tenned  the  bucolic  cassm-a;  as, 

Stant  vitu-  |  -li  et  tene-  |  -rls  mu-  |  -gitibus  ||  aera  |  complent.  Nemes. 

Note  1.  The  csesura  after  the  arsis  is  sometimes  called  the  masculine  or 
tyllabic  cffism'a ;  that  in  the  thesis,  the  feminine  or  trochaic,  as  a  trochee  imme- 
diately precedes.  When  a  csesura  occurs  in  the  fifth  foot  it  is  usually  the 
trochaic  csesura,  unless  the  foot  is  a  spondee ;  as, 

Fraxinus  |  in  sil-  |  -vis  piil-  |  -cherrima,  |  plnus  in  |  hortls.    Virg.  E.  7,  66. 

(o.)  It  is  to  be  remarked  that  two  successive  trochaic  csesuras  in  the  second 
and  third  feet  are,  in  general,  to  be  avoided,  but  they  are  sometimes  employed 
to  express  irregular  or  impetuous  motion ;  as, 


§311.         PKOSODT. VERSIFICATION DACTYLIC  METRE.         849 

Vna.  Eu-  I  -rusqui  No-  |  -tusquS  ru-  |  -unt  cr6-  |  -berque  pro^|  -celll8.    Virg.  (l.  1   36. 

(b.)  Successive  trochaic  cKsuras  are,  in  like  manner,  to  be  avoided  in  the  Ihira 
ind  fourth  feet,  but  are  approved  in  the  Jrst  and  second,  in  the  fourth  and 
fifth,  and  in  the  frst,  third  and  ffth.  See  Virg.  A.  6,  651 :  1,  94 :  and  6,  522. 

Note  2.  In  the  principal  cajsura  of  the  verse  poets  frequently  introduce  a 
pause  in  the  sense,  ^hich  must  be  attended  to  in  order  to  determine  the  place 
of  the  cKsural  pause.  For  in  the  common  place  for  the  cossm-a  in  the  third 
foot  there  is  often  a  caesura  o/"  ?/ie /oo< ;  while,  in  the  fourth  foot,  a  still  more 
marked  division  occurs.  In  this  case,  the  latter  is  to  be  considered  as  the 
principal  coesura,  and  distinguished  accordingly;  as, 

Belli  I  ferra-  |  -tos  pos-  |  -tes,  ||  por-  |  -tasque  re-  |  -fregit.  Hor.  S.  1,  4,  61. 

n.  The  Priapean  is  usually  accounted  a  species  of  hexameter.  It 
is  so  constructed  as  to  be  divisible  into  two  portions  of  three  feet  each, 
having  generally  a  trochee  in  the  first  and  fourth  place,  but  often  a 
spondee  and  rarely  a  dactyl ;  in  the  second,  usually  a  dactyl ;  and 
an  amphimacer  and  more  rarely  a  dactyl  in  the  third ;  as, 

0  CO-  I  -lonia  I  quS  cupis  |1  ponte  |  liidere  |  longo.    Catull.  17,  1. 

It  is,  however,  more  properly  considered  as  choriambic  metre,  consisting  of 
alternate  Glyconics  and  Pherecratics.    See  §  316,  IV.  V.     Thus, 

S  CO-  I  -loniSi,  quS  |  cQpis 
P5nte  I  ludere  Ion-  |  -go. 

Note.  A  regular  hexameter  verse  is  termed  Priapean,  when  it  is  so  con- 
structed as  to  be  divisable  into  two  portions  of  three  feet  each ;  as, 

Terta  I  pars  pa-  |  -tri  d&t&  ||  pars  data  |  tertla  |  matrl.   Catull.  62,  64. 
See  above,  6. 

§  311.     m.   A  pentameter  verse  consists  of  five  feet. 

Remark  1.  It  is  generally,  however,  divided,  in  scanning,  into 
two  hemistichs,  the  first  consisting  of  two  feet,  either  dactyls  or"  spon- 
dees, followed  by  a  long  syllable ;  the  last,  of  two  dactyls,  also  fol- 
lowed by  a  long  syllable  ;  as, 

Natu-  I  -rS  sequi-  |  -tur  |1  semlni  |  quisque  su-  I -ae.  Prop.  3,  7,  20. 
Carmlni-  f  -bus  vi-  |  -ves  ||  tempus  in  |  omne  me-  |  -is.   Ovid. 

1.  According  to  the  more  ancient  and  correct  mode  of  scanning 
pentameter  verse,  it  consists  of  five  feet,  of  which  the  first  and  second 
may  each  be  a  dactyl  or  a  spondee ;  the  third  is  always  a  spondee ; 
and  the  fourth  and  fifth  are  anapaests ;  as, 

Natu-  I  -rS  sequi-  |  -tur  1|  Sem-  |  -Ini  quia-  |  -que  suie. 
Carmini-  |  -bus  vl-  |  -ves  ||  tern-  |  -pus  In  om-  |  -ne  mSIs. 

2.  Tlie  caesura,  in  pentameter  verse,  always  occurs  after  the  pen- 
themimeris,  i.  e.  at  the  close  of  the  first  hemistich.  It  very  rarely 
lengthens  a  short  syllable. 

3.  The  pentameter  rarely  ends  with  a  word  of  three  syllalies.  In  Ovid,  it 
usually  ends  with  a  dissj'Uable. 

Rem.  2.  This  species  of  verse  is  seldom  used,  except  in  connection  with 
hexameter,  a  line  of  each  recurring  alternately.  This  combination  is  called 
ilegiac  verse.     Thus, 

Flebilis  indignos,  Elegeli,  eoirS  dipillos. 

Ah  nimis  ex  vt-rO  nunc  tibi  nomfin  erit!   Ovid,  Am.  8,  9,  8. 

30 


850     PlvOSODY. VERSIFICATION ANAP^STIC    MKTRE.       §  313 

§  31S.  IV.  The  tetrameter  a  pnore,  or  Alcmanian  dactylic  te- 
trameter, consists  of  the  first  four  feet  of  a  hexameter,  of  which  the 
fourth  is  always  a  dactyl ;  as, 

Garruia  I  per  ra-  |  -mos,  avis  |  obstrSpit.   Sen.  CEd.  454. 

V.  The  tetrameter  a  posteridre,  or  spondaic  tetrameter,  consists  cf 
the  last  four  feet  of  a  hexameter ;  as, 

Ibimus,  I  O  soci-  I  -i,  comi-  |  -tesque.  Hor.  Od.  1,  7,  26. 

Kemark.    The  penultimate  foot  in  this,  as  in  hexameter  verse,  may  be  a 
Bpoudee,  but  in  this  case  the  preceding  foot  should  be  a  dactyl ;  as, 
Menso-  I  -rem  cohi-  |  -bent  Ar-  |  -chytS.  Hor.  Od.  1,  28,  2. 

VI.  The  dactylic  trimeter  consists  of  the  last  three  feet  of  a  hexa- 
meter; as, 

Grato  I  Pyrrha.  sub  |  antro.  Hor.  Od.  1,  5,  3. 

Eemark.   But  this  kind  of  verse  is  more  properly  included  in  choriambio 

■  metre.    See  ^  316,  V. 

Vn.  The  trimeter  catalectic  Archilochian  consis'ts  of  the  first  five 
half  feet  of  a  hexameter,  but  the  first  and  second  feet  are  commonly 
dactyls;  as, 

Pulvis  et  I  umbra  su-  |  -mus.  Hor.  Od.  4,  7, 16. 

Vin.  The  dactylic  dimeter,  or  Adonic,  consists  of  two  feet,  a  dac- 
tyl and  a  spondee ;  as, 

Risit  A-  I  -polio.  Hor.  Od.  1,  10,  12. 

IX.  The  jEoHc  pentameter  consists  of  four  dactyls  preceded  by  a 
Bpondee,  a  trochee,  or  an  iambus.     Thus 


X.  The  Phalcecian  pentameter  consists  of  a  dactylic  penthimimeris 
and  a  dactylic  dimeter ;  as. 

Vise-  I  -bat  gell-  |  -dS  H  sidera  |  brumae.  Boithius. 

Eemark.  A  trochee  is  sometimes  found  in  the  first  place  and  an  iambus  in 
the  first  and  second  places. 

XI.  The  Tetrameter  Meiuru.^,  or  Faliscan  consists  of  the  last  four 
teet  of  a  hexameter,  except  that  the  last  foot  is  an  iambus  instead  of 
a  spondee ;  as, 

Ut  novSi  I  fruge  gra-  |  .vis  Ceres  |  eat.  Bo'ethius. 

Xn.  The  Tetrameter  Cnialectic  consists  of  the  tetrameter  a  priore 
wanting  the  latter  half  of  the  concluding  dactyl ;  as, 

Omne  homi-  |  -num  geniis  |  iu  tSr-  |  -ris.  Bo^tliius. 

ANAP^STIC  METRE. 

§  313.  !•  The  anapcestic  manometer  consists  of  two  ana- 
paests; as, 

niulas-  I  -sS  c&nes.  Sen. 


§314. 


PROSODY. VERSIFICATION lAlIBIC    METRE. 


35\ 


n.    The  anapcestic  dimeter  consists  of  two  measures,  or  foui 
anapaests ;  as, 

PhSLrStrJe-  |  -quS  gr&ves  |  date  sse-  |  -v&  fero....  Sen. 

Remabk  1.  The  first  foot  in  each  measure  of  anapaestic  metre  was  verv 
often  changed  to  a  dactyl  or  a  spondee,  and  the  second  foot  often  to  a  spondee 
and,  in  a  few  instances,  to  a  dactyl. 

Rem.  2.  Anapaestic  verses  ai-e  generally  so  constructed  that  each  measure 
ends  with  a  word,  so  that  they  may  be  written  and  read  in  lines  of  one,  two, 
or  more  measures. 


IAMBIC  METRE. 

§  314:.  I.  1.  The  iambic  trimeter,  or  senaritis,  consists  of 
thi'ee  iambic  measures,  or  six  iambic  feet ;  as, 

PhSse-  I  -liis  U- 1  -le,  ||  quSm  |  vide-  |  -tis  hos-  |  -pites....   Catull.  4.  1. 

2.  The  CEesura  commonly  occurs  in  the  third  but  sometimes  in  the 
fourth  foot. 

3.  The  pure  iambic  measure  was  seldom  used  by  the  Latin  poets, 
but  to  varj'  the  rhythm  spondees  were  introduced  into  the  first,  third, 
and  fifth  places.  In  every  foot,  also,  except  the  last,  which  was  al- 
ways an  iambus,  a  long  syllable  was  often  changed  into  two  short 
ones,  so  that  an  anapsest  or  a  dactyl  was  used  for  a  spondee,  and  a 
tribrach  for  an  iambus,  but  the  use  of  the  dactyl  in  the  fifth  place 
was  very  rare ;  as. 

Quo,  quo  I  sceles-  |  -ti  rul-  |  -tls?  aut  |  cur  dex-  |  -tens....  Hor.  Epod.  7,  1. 

Aliti-  I  -bus  at-  I  -que  cSni-  |  -bus  homi-  |  -cldam  Hec-  |  -torem....  Id.  Epod.  17,  12. 

4.  Sometimes,  also,  a  proceleusmatic,  or  double  pyrrhic,  was  used  in  the 
first  place  for  a  spondee.  The  writers  of  comedy,  satu-e,  and  fable,  admitted 
the  spondee  and  its  equivalents  (the  dactyl  and  anapaest)  mto  the  second  and 
fourth  places,  as  well  as  the  first,  third,  and  fifth. 

5.  The  following,  therefore,  is  the  scale  of  the  Iambic  Trimeter: — 

6 


1 

2 

3 

4 

6 

_  _  ^ 

—  >_  ^ 

i^SL) 

6.   In  the  construction  of  the  Iambic  Trimeter  an  accent  should  fall  on  tlie 
seoond  syllable  of  either  the  third  foot  or  both  the  second  and  fourth  feet;  aa, 
Ibis  I  Libur-  I  -nis  in-  |  ter  al-  |  -ta  na-  |  -vium  |  . 
Utrum-  I  -ne  jus-  |  -si  per-  |  -se^Kc'-  |  -mur  6-  |  -tium.  | 

n.  The  scazon,  or  choliamhus  (lame  iambic),  is  the  iambic  trime- 
ter, with  a  spondee  in  the  sixth  foot,  and  generally  an  iambus  in  the 
fifth;  as. 

Cur  in  I  Ihea-  |  -trum,  C5.t6  I  eSve-  |  -re,  ve-  |  -nisti? 

An  ide-  |  5  tan- 1  -turn  ven-  |  -eras,  |  ut  C-x-  |  -Ires?  Mart.  Ep.  1,  1,  8. 

This  species  ol"  verse  is  also  called  Eipponaciic  trimeter,  from  its  inventor 
Hipp*!  nax. 


3/)2  PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION — lAJIBIC    METRIt.  §   314 

TTT.  The  iaynbic  tetrameter  or  quadratus,  called  also  from  the  iimn 
ber  of  its  feet  octonarius,  a  measure  used  by  the  comic  poets,  consista 
of  four  iambic  measures,  subject  to  the  same  variations  as  the  iambic 
trimeter  (I.) ;  as, 

Niinc  hic  |,  dies  |  ailSm  |  Titam  if-  H  -f  ert,  &1I-  |  -os  mo- 1  -res  pos-  |  -tulat.  Ter.  A.  1,2, 18. 
Kesiark.   The  caesura  regularly  follows  the  second  measure. 

IV.  The  iambic  tetrameter  catalectic  or  Hipponactic,  is  the  iambic 
tetrameter,  wanting  the  last  syllable,  and  having  always  an  iambus 
in  the  seventh  place,  but  admitting  in  the  other  places  the  same  var 
nations  as  the  trimeter  and  tetrameter ;  as, 

Depren-  |  -sS  na-  |  -vis  In  |  mari,  |  vesa-  |  -men- 1  -te  ven-  |  -to.  Catidl.  25, 13. 

V.  The  iambic  trimeter  catalectic  or  Archilochian,  is  the  iambic  tri- 
meter (I.),  wanting  the  final  syllable.  Like  the  common  iambio_ tri- 
meter, it  admits  a  spondee  into  the  first  and  third  places,  but  not  into 
the  fifth ;  as, 

Voca-  I  -tus  at-  |  -que  non  ]  voca-  |  -tus  au-  |  -dit.  Hor.  Od.  2, 18,  40. 
Trahiint-  |  -que  sic- 1  -cas  mach-  |  -inae  |cari- 1  -nas.  Id.  Od.  1,  4,  2. 

VI.  The  iambic  dimeter  consists  of  two  iambic  measures,  with  the 
same  variations  as  the  iambic  trimeter  (I.)  ;  as, 

Forti  I  seque-  1  -mur  p5c-  |  -tore.  Hor.  Epod,  1,  14. 
Canidi-  |  -a  trac-  i  -tavit  |  dapes.  Id.  Epod.  3,  8. 
Vide-  I  -re  prope-  |  -rantes  |  domum.  Id.  Epod.  3,  62. 

Re^iark.   The  iambic  dimeter  is  also  called  the  Archilochian  dimeter. 

The  following  is  its  scale : — 

4 


12  3 


Vn.  The  iambia  dimeter  hypermeter,  called  also  Archilochian^  u 
the  iambic  dimeter,  with  an  additional  syllable  at  the  end ;  as, 

Rede-  I  -git  In  |  Teros  |  timo-  |  -res.  Hor.  Od.  1,  37, 15. 
Remark.   Horace  always  makes  the  third  foot  a  spondee. 
VTTT.   The  iambic  dimeter  acephalous  is  the  iambic  dimeter,  want- 
ing the  first  syllable  ;  as, 

Non  I  ebur  |  neque  au-  |  -reum....  Hor.  Od.  2,  18,  1. 

■Remark.  This  kind  of  verse  is  sometimes  scanned  as  a  catalectic  trochaic 
xieter.   See  §  315,  IV. 

IX.  The  iambic  dimeter  catalectic,  or  Anacreontic,  is  the  iambic 
dimeter,  wanting  the  final  syllable,  and  having  always  an  iambus  in 
the  third  foot ;  as, 

Ut  tl-  I  gris  or- 1  -ba  gna-  |  -tis.  Sen.  Med.  863. 

X.  The  Galliambus  consists  of  two  iambic  dimeters  catalectic,  the 
last  of  which  wants  the  final  syllable. 

Remark  1.  It  was  so  denominated  from  the  GaUi  or  priests  of  Cybele,  by 
vhom  it  was  used. 


i  315.      PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION — TROCHAIC    METRE.         353 


Rem.  2.   In  the  first  foot  of  each  dimeter  the  anap^st  was  generally  pre- 
ferred to  the  spondee.     The  catalectic  syllable  at  the  end  of  the  first  diaetet 
is  long,  and  the  second  foot  of  the  second  dimeter  is  commonly  a  tribrach;  as. 
Sup6r  51-  I  -ta  vec-  |  -tus  A-  |  -tys  ||  c61eri  |  rite  m&-  |  -ria.  Catult,  63,  1. 

Rbm.  3.  The  csesnra  uniformly  occm^  at  the  end  of  the  fiist  dimeter. 

TROCHAIC  METRE. 

§  olo.  1.  Trochaic  verses  bear  a  near  affinity  to  iambics.  The  addi- 
tion or  retrenchment  of  a  syllable  at  the  beginning  of  a  pure  iambic  verse  ren- 
ders it  pure  trochaic,  and  the  addition  or  retrenchment  of  a  syllable  at  the  be- 
ginning of  a  pure  trochaic  Ime,  renders  it  pure  iambic,  with  the  deficiency  or 
redimdancy  of  a  syllable  in  each  case  at  the  end  of  the  verse. 

I.  The  trochaic  tetrameter  catalectic  consists  of  seven  feet,  fol- 
lowed by  a  catalectic  syllable.  In  the  first  five  places  and  very 
rarely  in  the  sixth,  it  admits  a  tribrach,  but  in  the  seventh  a 
trochee  only.  In  the  even  places,  besides  the  tribrach,  it  admits 
also  a  spondee,  a  dactyl,  an  anapaest,  and  sometimes  a  proceleua- 
matic ;  as, 

Juesus  I  «Bt  In  I  ermis  |  IrS :  |I  pQrus  |  irS  |  jQssua  |  eat.  Auct.  P.  VSn. 

Romu  I  Ijeas  |  Ipsa  |  fecit  ||  cum  Si-  |  -binis  |  nupti-  |  -as.  Id. 

Dinai  j  des,  Co-  |  -Ite ;  |  vestras  ||  hic  dl-  |  -es  quSB-  |  -rit  mi-  |  -nus.  Se». 


Thefo 

1 

lowing  is 
2 

its  scale:— 
3 

4 

6 

6 

—  >_    w 



—  ^  ^ 

Remark  1.  The  pure  trochaic  verse  was  rarely  used,  and  the  dactyl  very 
rarely  occurs  in  the  fourth  place.  The  cjesural  pause  uniformly  occurs  afte'r 
the  fourth  foot,  thus  dividing  the  verse  into  a  complete  dimeter  and  a  catalec- 
tic dimeter.  The  comic  writers  introduced  the  spondee  and  its  equivalent  feet 
into  the  odd  places. 

_  Rem.  2.  The  complete  trochaic  tetrameter  or  octmarius  properly  consists  of 
eight  feet,  all  trochees,  subject,  however,  to  the  same  variations  as' the  catalec- 
tic tetrameter ;  as, 

IpsS  I  summis  |  saxis  |  fixus  |  aspe-  |  -ris,  e-  |  -vIscS-  |  -ratus.  Enn. 

n.  ITie  Sapphic  verse,  invented  by  the  poetess  Sappho,  consists 
of  five  fra* — the  first  a  trochee,  the  second  a  spondee,  the  third  a 
dactyl,  and  the  fourth  and  fifth  trochees ;  as, 

Inte-  I  -ger  n-  \  -CS,  ||  Bcele-  |  -risque  |  purus.   Hot.  Od.  1,  22, 1. 

1.  Sappho,  and,  after  her  example,  Catullus,  sometimes  made  the  second 
foot  a  trochee. 

2.  Those  Sapphics  are  most  harmonious  which  have  the  caesura  after  -the 
fifth  semi-foot. 

Note  1.  In  the  composition  of  the  Sapphic  stanza,  a  word  is  sometimes 
divided  between  the  end  of  the  third  Sapphic,  and  the  beginning  of  the  Adouio 
wbick  follows;  as, 

Labi-  I  -tur  rl-  |  -pa  Joye  |  non  prB-  |  -bante  ux- 
5rlug  I  amnis.  Hor.  Od.  1,  2,  19. 

80* 


S51       PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION — CHORIAMBIC  METRE.    3  316 

It  has  been  thought  by  some  that  such  lines  should  be  considered  as  one 
Sappliic  verse  of  seven  feet,  the  fifth  foot  being  either  a  spondee  or  a  trochee. 

Note  2.  This  verse  is  sometimes  scanned  as  epichoriambic,  having  an  epi- 
trite  in  tL  3  first  place,  a  choriambus  in  the  second,  and  ending  with  an  iambio 
sizygjf  c&'alectic;  thus, 

Integer  Ti-  |  -tal,  Bcelerls-  |  -que  purUs. 

in.  The  PhalcEcian  verse  consists  of  five  feet — a  spondee,  a  dac- 
eyl>  and  three  trochees ;  as, 

Non  est  I  vivere,  |  sed  v3,-  |  -lere  |  vita.  Mart. 

Remark  1.  Instead  of  a  spondee  as  the  first  foot,  Catullus  sometimes  uses  s 
trochee  or  an  iambus.  This  writer  also  sometimes  uses  a  spondee  in  thfl 
second  place. 

Rem.  2.  The  Phalcecian  verse  is  sometimes  called  hendecasyllahic,  as  con- 
sisting of  eleven  sj'Uables ;  but  that  name  does  not  belong  to  it  exclusively. 

IV.  The  trochaic,  dimeter  catalectic  consists  of  three  feet,  properly 
all  trochees,  and  a  catalectic  syllable,  but  admitting  also  in  the  second 
place  a  spondee  or  a  dactyl ;  as, 

N5n  e  |  -bur  ne-  |  -que  aure-  |  -um.  Hor.  Od.  2,  18,  1. 
Lenis  I  ac  modi-  |  -cum  flii-  |  -ens 

Aura,  I  nee  ver-  |  -gens  la-  |  -tus.   Sen   OSd.  887. 

Note.  This  measure  is  the  same  as  the  acephalous  iambic  dimeter  (see 
^  314,  VIII.),  and  it  is  not  important  whether  it  be  regarded  as  iambic  of 
trochaic. 

CHORIAMBIC    METRE. 

§  316.  (a.)  In  a  pure  choriambic  verse  each  metre  except 
the  last  is  a  choriambus,  and  the  last  an  Iambic  syzygy. 

Note.  A  spondee  and  iambus,  i.  e.  a  third  epitrite,  are  sometimes  used  iu 
place  of  the  Iambic  sj'zygy. 

(h.)  An  epichoriambic  verse  is  composed  of  one  or  more 
choriambi  with  some  other  foot,  especially  a  ditrochee  or  a 
second  epitrite,  joined  with  it. 

1.  The  cTiorimnhic  pentameter  consists  of  a  spondee,  three  chori- 
ambi, and  an  iambus  ;  as, 

Tu  n5  I  qnsesiSrIs,  |  scire  nefas,  |  quern  mihi,  quem  tibl.,  Hor.  Od.  1,  11, 1. 

n.  The  cJioriambic  tetrameter  consists  of  three  choriambi,  or  feet 
of  eqnal  length,  and  a  Bacchius ;  as, 

Omne  nemus  ]  cum  fluvils,  |  omne  cS.nat  |  prof  uudum.   Claud. 

2.  In  this  verse  Horace  substituted  a  spondee  for  the  iambaa  con- 
tained in  the  first  choriambus ;  as, 

Te  decs  5-  |  -ro,  SybSrln  |  cur  prbperes  |  amando.    Hot.  Od.  1,  8,  2. 

3.  Some  scan  this  verse  as  an  epichoriambic  tetrameter  catalectic,  begin- 
ning vfith  ihe  second  epitrite. 

HI.     1.    The  Asclepiadic  tetrameter  (invented   by  the  poet  Ascle« 
pia  liis)  consists  of  a  spondee,  two  choriambi,  and  an  iambus  ;  as, 
MSce-  I  -rSe,  Sitavls  1|  edlt6  rep-  |  -ibxa.   Hor.  Oi.  1, 1. 1. 


I  317.         PROSODY. VERSIFICATION IONIC  METRE.  355 

2.  This  form  is  invariably  observed  by  Horace ;  but  other  poeta  Bome.omeB, 
though  rarely,  make  the  first  foot  a  dactyl. 

3.  The  caesural  pause  occurs  at  the  end  of  the  first  choriambus. 

4.  This  measure  is  sometimes  scanned  as  a  dactylic  pentameter  catalectio. 
See  §  311,  III.     Thus, 

MSce-  I  -nas,  &ta-  ]  vis  ||  edite  |  regibus. 

IV.  1.  The  choriambic  trimeter,  or  Glyconic  (invented  by  the  poet 
Glj^co),  consists  of  a  spondee,  a  choriambus,  and  an  iambus;  aa, 

Sic  te  I  diT&  potens  |  CJprl...  Hor.  Od.  1,  3,  1. 

2.  The  first  foot  is  sometimes  an  iambus  or  a  trochee. 

3.  When  the  first  foot  is  a  spondee,  the  verse  might  be  scanned  as  a  dactylia 
trimeter.     Thus, 

Sic  te  I  diva  po-  |  -tens  Cypri. 

V.  1.  The  choriambic  trimeter  catalectic,  or  Pherecratic  (so-called 
from  the  poet  Pherecrates),  is  the  Glyconic  deprived  of  its  final  syl- 
lable, and  consists  of  a  spondee,  a  choriambus,  and  a  catalectic  sylla- 
ble ;  as, 

Grato,  I  Pyrrhi,  sub  an-  |  -tro.  Hor.  Od.  1,  5,  3. 

2.  The  first  foot  was  sometimes  a  trochee  or  an  anapest,  rarely  an  iambub. 

3.  When  the  first  foot  is  a  spondee,  this  measure  might  be  scanned  as  a 
dactylic  trimeter.     See  §  312,  VI. 

4.  The  Pherecratic  subjoined  to  the  Glyconic  produces  the  Priapean  verse. 
See  §  310,  II. 

VI.  1.  Th&  choriainbic  dimeter  consists  of  a  choriambus  and  a 
Bacchlus ;  as, 

Lydia.  die  |  per  omnea.  Hot.  Od.  1,  8,  1. 

2.  This  verse  is  by  some  called  the  choriambic  dimeter  catalectic.  Cf.  k  316, 
(a.) 

IONIC    METRE. 

§  317.  I.  The  Ionic  a  majore,  or  Sotadic,  (from  the  poet  So- 
tades),  consists  of  three  greater  Ionics  and  a  spondee. 

1.  The  Ionic  feet,  however,  are  often  changed  into  ditrochees,  and  eithe''  of 
the  two  long  syllables  in  those  feet  into  two  short  ones ;  as, 

Has,  cum  gemi-  |  -na  compede,  |  dedlcat  ci-  |  -tenas, 
Saturne,  ti-  |  -bl  Zoilus,  |  anniilos  pri-  |  -ores.  Mart. 

2.  Hence  the  following  is  its  scale : — 


1 


2 


3 


4 


N)TK.   The  final  syllable,  by  ^  301,  note,  may  be  short. 

n.  1.  The  Ionic  a  minore  consists  generally  of  verses  of  threo  or 
four  feet,  which  are  all  smaller  Ionics ;  as, 

Puer  SJiJs,  I  tlbi  tC-lSs,  I  operosffi-  |  -que  Minerva...  Hor.  Od.  3, 12,  4. 

2.  In  this  verse,  as  in  the  anapsestic,  no  place  is  assigned  to  the  pause;  be« 
.:ause,  since  the  metres,  if  rightly  constructed,  end  with  a  word,  the  e/Tect  of  a 
t>«iu8e  will  b3  produced  at  the  end  of  each  metre. 


356       PROSODY. VERSIFICATION COftlPOUNl     METRES.     §  318. 

COMPOUND    METRES. 

§  318.  Compound  metre  is  the  union  of  two  specifis  of 
metre  in  the  same  verse. 

1.  The  dactylico-iamhic  metre  or  Elegiambus  consists  of  a  dactylic 
pentheinimeris  (  312,  vii.),  followed  by  an  iambic  dimeter  (§  314, 
VI.);  as, 

Scrlbere  |  Tersicu-  |  -los  ||  5.mo-  |  -re  per-  |  -culsum  |  giavi.  Hor.  Epod.  11,  2. 

II.  The  iambico-dactylic  metre  or  lamhelegus  consists  of  the  same 
members  as  the  preceding,  but  in  a  reversed  order ;  as, 

Nives-  I  -que  de-  |  -ducunt  |  Jovem :  ||  nunc  mare,  |  nunc  sUu-  |  -se.  Hor.  Epod.  13,  2. 

Note.  The  members  composing  this  and  the  preceding  species  of  verse  ara 
often  written  in  separate  verses. 

m.  The  greater  Alcaic  consists  of  an  iambic  penthemimeris,  i.  e. 
of  two  iambic  feet  and  a  long  catalectic  syllable,  followed  by  a  chor- 
iambus,  and  an  iambus;  as, 

VidSs  I  ut  al-  |  -ta  ||  stet  nive  can-  |  -didum.  H»r.  Od.  1,  9,  1. 

Remark  1.   The  first  foot  is  often  a  spondee. 

Rem.  2.    The  caesura  uniformly  occurs  after  the  catalectic  syllable. 
Rem.  3.   This  verse  is  sometimes  so  scanned  as  to  make  the  last  two  feet 
dactyls. 

IV.  The  dactylico-trochaic  or  Archilochian  heptameter,  consists  of 
the  dactylic  tetrameter  a  priore  (§  312),  followed  by  three  trochees; 
as, 

Solvitur  I  acris  hi-  |  -ems  gra-  |  -ta  vicS  ||  veria  |  et  Fi-  |  -vont.  Hot.  Od.  1,  4,  1. 
Remark.   The  caesura  occurs  between  the  two  members. 

V.  The  dactylico-trochaic  tetrameter  or  lesser  Alcaic,  consists  of  two 
dactyls,  followed  by  two  trochees,  i.  e.  of  a  dactylic  dimeter  followed 
by  a  trochaic  monometer  ;  as, 

Levia  I  persSnu-  ||  -5re  j.saxSl.  Hor.  Od.  1, 17, 12. 

COMBINATION     OF     VERSES    IN    POEMS. 

§  319.  1.  A  poem  may  consist  either  of  one  kind  of  verse 
cnly  or  of  a  combination  of  two  or  more  kinds. 

2.  A  poem  in  which  only  one  kind  of  verse  is  employed,  is  called 
carmen  monocolon ;  that  which  has  two  kinds,  dicolon ;  that  which 
has  three  kinds,  tricolon. 

3.  When  the  poem  retm-ns,  after  the  second  line,  to  the  same 
verse  with  which  it  began,  it  is  called  distrophon ;  when  after  the 
third  line,  tristrophon  ;  and  when  after  the  fourth,  tetrastrophon. 

4.  The  several  verses  which  occur  before  the  poem  returns  to  the 
kind  of  verse  with  which  it  began,  constitute  a  stanza  or  strophe. 

5.  A  poem  consisting  of  two  kinds  of  verse,  when  the  stanza  contains  twa 
verses,  is  called  dicolon  distrdphon,  (see  §  320,  3);  when  it  contains  thi-ee,  died- 


§  320.      PROSODT. — VERSIFICATION — HORATIAN  METRES.      357 

ton  tristrdphon,  (Auson.  Profess.  21);  when  four,  dicdUm  tetrastrdphon,  (§  320,  2); 
and  when  five,  dicolon  pentastrdphm. 

6.  A  poem  consisting  of  three  liinds  of  verse,  when  the  stania  contains  thre« 
verses,  is  called  tricolon  tristrdphon,  (§  320,  15);  when  four,  tncolon  tetrastr6- 
phm,  (^  320,  1). 

HORATIAN    METRES. 

§  330.  The  diflPfrent  species  of  metre  used  by  Horace  in 
his  lyric  composiuous  are  twenty.  The  various  forms  in  which 
he  has  employed  them,  either  sepai-ate  or  in  conjunction,  are 
nineteen,  arranged,  according  to  the  order  of  preference  given 
to  them  by  the  poet,  in  the  following 

SYNOPSIS. 

1.  Two  greater  Alcaics  (§  318,  iii.),  one  ArchilocMan  iambic 
dimeter  hypermeter  (§  314,  vii.),  and  one  lesser  Alcaic  (§  318,  v.)  ; 
as, 

VIdes,  ut  alts  stet  nive  candidum 
Soracte,  nee  jam  austineant  onus 
Silvse  laborantea,  ggluquS 
Flumina  confititerint  &cuto.  (Lib.  1,  9.) 

Remark.  This  is  called  the  Horatian  stanza,  because  it  seems  to  have  been 
B  favorite  with  Horace,  being  used  in  thirty-seven  of  his  odes. 

2.  Three  Sapphics  (§  315,  ii.)  and  one  Adonic  (§  312,  viii.) ;  as, 

Jam  satis  terrls  nivis  atque  dlrae 
Grandinls  misit  p&ter,  et,  rubentS 
Dextera  sacras  jiculatus  arces, 

Terruit  urbem.  •  (Lib,  1, 2.) 

3.  One  Glyconic  (§  316,*iv.)  and  one  Asclepiadic  (§316,  iii.);  as, 

Sic  te  Diva  pStens  Cypri, 
Sic  fratres  Helenee,  lucida  sidera...  {Lib.  1,  3  )■ 

4.  One  iambic  trimeter  (§  314,  i.)  and  one  iambic  dimeter  (§  314, 
VI.);  as, 

Ibis  Libumis  inter  alta  navium. 

Amice,  propugnacula.  (Epod.  1.) 

5.  Three  Asclepiadics  (§  316,  iii.)  and  one  Glyconic  (§  316,  iv,); 
as. 

Beriberis  Vario  f  ortTs,  St  hostinm 

Victor,  Maeonil  earminis  aliti, 

Quam  rem  cumque  ferox  navibuB  aut  Sqois 

Miles,  te  duce,  gesserit.  (Lib.  1,  6.) 

6.  Two  Asclepiadics  (§  316,  in.),  one  Pherecratic  (§  316,  v.),  aid 
one  Glyconic  (§  316,  iv.);  as, 

Dianam,  tenfirae,  dicTte  virgines: 
Intonsum,  puerl,  dicite  Cynthlum, 
Latonamque  supremo 

Dilectim  penitus  J5vl.  {Lib.  1,  21  ) 

7.  The  Asclepiadic  (§  316,  in.)  alone;  as, 

MScenas  atavis  edite  rSgibns.  lX«i.  1,  1.) 


JJ58       --'ROSODT. VERSIFICATION HORATIAN  METRES.       §  320 

8.  One  dactylic  hexameter  (§  310,  i.)  and  one  dactylic  tetrameter 
a  posterior e  (§  312,  v.);  as, 

Laudabunt  5.1ii  cliram  Rhodon,  aut  Mitylenen, 

Aut  Ephesum,  bTmirisve  Corinthl...  {Lib.  1,  7.) 

9.  The  choriaunbic  pentameter  (§  316,  i.)  alone;  as, 

Tu  ne  qUEESlerls,  scire  nefas,  quern  mihl,  quern  tibi...     (Lib.  1,  11.) 

10.  One  dactylic  hexameter  (§310,  i.)  and  one  iambic  dimetet 
(§  314,  VI.);  as, 

Nox  erat,  et  coelo  f  ulgebat  luna  sereno 
Inter  minora,  sldera.  (Epod  15.) 

11.  The  iambic  trimeter  (§  314,  i.)  containing  spondees;  as. 

Jam,  jam  efficaci  do  manus  scISntiSB.  {Epod.  17.) 

12.  One  choriambic  dimeter  (§  316,  vi.)  and  one  choriambic  tetra 
meter  (§  316,  ii.)  with  a  variation ;  as, 

Lydia,  die,  per  omnes 
Te  Deos  oro,  Sjbarin  cur  properas  amando...  {Lib.  1,  8.) 

13.  One  dactylic  hexameter  (§310,  i.)  and  one  iambic  trimetei 
•without  spondees  (§  314,  i.) ;  as, 

Altera  jam  teritur  bellis  clTllibus  mtas ; 

Suls  et  ipsa  Roma  vlribus  ruit.  {EpSd.  16.) 

14.  One  dactylic  hexameter  (§310,  i.)  and  one  dactylic  penthe- 
mimeris  (§  312,  vii.) ;  as, 

Diff  ugSre  nivSs :  rSd6unt  jam  gramlna  campis, 
Srboribusque  comae.  (LiJ.  4,  7.) 

15.  One  iambic  trimeter  (§  314,  i.),  one  dactylic  trimeter  cataleo- 
tic  (§  312,  VII.),  and  one  iambic  dimeter  (§  314,  vi.) ;  as, 

Petti,  nihil  me,  gicut  antea,  juvat 
Scribere  versiculos, 
Amore  perculsum  gravi.  (Epoa.  11.) 

Note.    The  second  and  third  lines  are  often  written  as  one  verse.    Sed 
§  318,  1. 

16.  One  dactylic  hexameter  (§  310,  i.),  one  iambic  dimeter  (§  314, 
VI.),  and  one  dactylic  penthemimeris  (§  312,  vii.) ;  as, 

Horrida  tempestas  coeliim  contraxit;  et  Imbres 
Nivesque  dediacunt  Jovem : 
Nunc  mare,  nunc  siluae...  {Epod.  13.) 

Note.   The  second  and  third  lines  of  this  stanza,  also,  are  often  written  at- 
one  verse.    See  4  318,  ii. 

17.  One  Archilochian  heptameter  (§  318,  IV.)  and  one  iambic  tri 
meter  catalectic  (§  314,  v.) ;  as, 

Solvitur  acri8  hiems  grata  vTc8  vEriS  5t  FavonJ, 

Trahuntque  slecas  machin®  carinas.  {Lib.  1,  4.) 

18.  One  iambic  dimeter  acephalous  (§  314,  viii.)  and  one  iambic 
trimeter  catalectic  (§  314,  v.) ;  as, 

Non  ebur  neque  aureum 

Mea  rfinidet  in  domo  lacunar.  (Lib.  2,  18.) 

19.  The  Ionic  a  miiwre  (§  317,  ii.)  alone;  as, 

IiU<!rarun  est  nfique  amori  dare  ludum,  nSque  dulci...  {Lib.  3,  12.) 


§321.       PROSODY. VERSIFICATION HORATIAN    ME1RES.      S^S 


§  331.  A  METRICAL  KEY  TO  THE  ODES  OF  HORACE 


Containing,  in  alphabetic 
ence  to  the  numbers 
explained. 


order,  the  Jirst  words  of  each,  with  a  refer' 
in  the  preceding  Synopsis,  tvhere  the  metre  is 


MV\,  vetusto No.  1 

i^^quam  memento 1 

Albi,  ne  doieas 5 

Altera  jam  teritur 13 

Angustam,  amice 1 

At,  0  deorum 4 

AmliTere,  Lyce 6 

Bacchura  in  remotis 1 

Befitus  ille 4 

Cado  Mipinas 1 

Cnelo  tonantem 1 

Cur  me  querelis 1 

Delicta  majorum 1 

Descende  cceL  . . .  • ' 1 

Diauam,  tenerse 6 

Diffugere  nives 14 

Dive,  quern  proles 2 

Divis  orte  bonis 5 

Douaiem  pateras 7 

Donee  gratus  eram  tibi 3 


Ehe 


tufraces 1 


Kst  mihi  nonum 2 

Et  tare  et  fidibus 3 

Exegi  monumentum 7 

Extremum  Tanaim 5 

Faune,  njnupharum 2 

Festo  quid  potius  die 3 

Herculis  ritu 2 

Horrida  tempestas 16 

Ibis  Liburnis , 4 

Icci,  beatis 1 

Ille  et  nefasto 1 

impios  parrae 2 

[nclusam  DanaCn 5 

Intactis  opulentior 3 

Integer  vitse 2 

Intermissa,  Venus,  diu 3 

Jam  jam  efBcaci 11 

Jam  pauca  aratro 1 

Jam  satis  terris 2 

Jam  veris  comites 5 

Justum  et  tenacem 1 

Laudabuut  alii 8 

Lupis  et  agnis 4 

Lydia,  die,  per  omnes 12 

\f ajcenas  atavis 7 

Mala  soluta 4 

Martiis  casiebs 2 

Mater  saeva  Cupidinum 8 

Mercuri,  faeunde 2 

Mercuri,  nam  te 2 

Mi.serarum  est ly 


Mollis  inertia No.lO 

Montium  custos 2 

Motum  ex  Metello 1 

Musis  amicus 1 

Natis  in  usura 1 

Ne  forte  credas 1 

Ne  sit  ancillse 2 

Nolis  loiiga  ferae 5 

Nondum  subacta 1 

Non  ebur  neque  aureum IS 

Non  semper  imbres 1 

Non  usitata 1 

Non  vides,  quanto 2 

Nox  erat 10 

NuUam,  Vare,  sacra 9 

Nullus  argento t 2 

Nunc  est  bibendum 1 

0  cnidelis  adhuc 3 

0  diva,  gratum 1 

0  fons  Bandusiae 6 

0  matre  pulchra 1 

0  nata  mecum 1 

0  navis,  referent 6 

0  sagpe  mecum 1 

0  Venus,  regina 2 

Odi  prof  anum. 1 

Otium  Divos 2 

Parcius  junctas 2 

Parous  Deorum 1 

Parentis  olim 4 

Pastor  quum  traheret 6 

Percicos  odi,  puer 2 

Petti,  nihil  me 15 

Phoebe,  silvarumque 2 

Phoebus  volentera 1 

Pindarum  quisquis 2 

Poscimur:  si  quid 2 

Quae  cura  Patrum I 

Qualem  ministrura 1  ' 

Quando  repostum 4 

Quantum  distet  ab  Inacho 3 

Quem  tu,  Melpomene 3 

Quem  virum  aut  heroa 9 

Quid  bellicosus 1 

Quid  dedicatiun 1 

Quid  fles,  Asterie 6 

Quid  immerentes 4 

Quid  obseratis 11 

Quid  tibi  vis 8 

Quis  desiderio 5 

Quis  multa  gracilis 6 

Quo  me,  Bacche 3 


360      PROSODY. VERSIFICATION HORATIAN  METRES.       §  o21 


Quo,  qao,  scelesti  rultis No.  4 

Quum  txi,  Lydia 3 

Rectius  vives 2 

Rogare  longo 4 

Scriberis  Vario 5 

Septimi,  Gades 2 

Sic  te  Diva  potens 3 

SoMtur  acris  hiems 17 

Te  maris  et  terrae 8 


Tu  ne  qusesieris No.  9 

Tyrrhena  regum 1 

Uila  si  juris 3 

Uxor  pauperis  Ibyci 3 

Velox  amoenum 1 

Vides,  ut  alta 1 

Vile  potabis 2 

Vitas  hinnuleo 6 

Vixi  puellis 1 


The  following  are  the  single  metres  used  by  Horace  in  his  lyric 
compositions,  viz : — 


1.  Dactylic  Hexameter. 

2.  Dactylic  Tetrameter  a  posteri^. 

3.  Dactylic  Trimeter  Catalectic. 

4.  Adonic. 

5.  Trimeter  Iambic. 

6.  Iambic  Trimeter  Catalectic. 

7.  Iambic  Dimeter. 

8.  ArchUochian  Iambic  Dimeter  Hy- 

permeter. 

9.  Iambic  Dimeter  Acepaaloas. 
10.  Sapphic. 


11.  Choriambic  Pentameter. 

12.  Choriambic  Tetrameter. 

13.  Asclepiadic  Tetrameter. 

14.  Glyconic. 
16.  Pherecratic. 

16.  Choriambic  Dimeter. 

17.  Ionic  a  minore. 

18.  Greater  Alcaic. 

19.  Archilochian  Heptameter. 

20.  LeMer  Alcaic 


&  322.  323.  APPENDIX. — GRAMMATICAL   FIGLRES.  361 


APPENDIX. 


GRAMIVIATICAL   FIGURES. 

§  SS^.  Certain  deviations  from  the  regular  form  and  con- 
struction of  words,  are  called  grammatical  figures.  These  may 
nlate  either  to  Orthography  and  Etymology,  or  to  Syntax. 

I.     FIGURES    OF    ORTHOGRAPHY   AND   ETYMOLOGY. 

These  are  distinguished  by  the  general  name  of  metaplasm. 

1.  Prosthesis  is  the  prefixing  of  a  letter  or  syllable  to  a  word;  as,  ffndius,  for 
nritus ;  tcti'di,  for  tuli.  These,  however,  are  rather  the  aucient  customary  toi  ais, 
from  which  those  now  in  use  were  formed  by  aph»resis. 

2.  AphcBresis  is  the  taking  of  a  letter  or  syllable  from  the  beginning  of  a 
word ;  as,  ^st,  for  est ;  rabonem,  for  arrdbonem. 

3.  Epeniiiesis  is  the  insertion  of  a  letter  or  syllable  in  the  middle  of  a  word ; 
as,  dlituum,  for  dlilum ;  Mdvors,  for  Mars. 

4.  Syncdpe  is  the  omission  of  a  letter  or  syllable  in  the  middle  of  a  word ;  as, 
deihn,  for  deorvin ;  meilm  J'actHm,  for  me&rum  fact&rum;  s<Bcla,  for  s<Bcula ;  Jieeti, 
for  fiidsti;  repostus,  for  repdsitus  ;  aspris,  for  asjjeris. 

5.  Crasis  is  the  contraction  of  two  vowels  into  one ;  as,  coyo,  for  oddgo ;  nil, 
for  nihil. 

6.  Paragoge  is  the  addition  of  a  letter  or  syllable  to  the  end  of  a  word ;  as, 
mtd,  for  me ;  dandier,  for  claudi. 

7.  Apocipe  is  the  omission  of  the  final  letter  or  syllable  of  a  word;  as,  men\ 
for  mene ;  A7it67ii,  for  Antmii. 

8.  /In<j7/!fois  is  the  substitution  of  one  letter  for  another;  as,  olli,  for  illi; 
optumus,  for  optimus ;  afficio,  for  adficio.  0  is  often  thus  used  for  «,  especially 
after  v ;  as,  voUus,  for  vullus ;  servom,  for  servum.  So  after  qu ;  as,  cequom,  for 
osquum. 

9.  Metathesis  is  the  changing  of  the  order  of  letters  in  a  word ;  as,  pistris, 
for  pristis. 

IL     FIGURES   OF   SYNTAX. 

S23.     The  figures  of  Syntax  are   ellipsis,  pleonasm,  enal- 
lage,  and  kyperbdton. 

1.  (a.)  Ellipsis  is  the  omission  of  some  word  or  words  in  a  sen- 
tence; as, 

Aiunt,  scil.  hdmines.  Ddrius  Eystaspis,  scil.  filius.  O&no,  soil.  igo.  Qui<i 
midta^  scil.  dlcam.     Ex  quo,  scil.  tempdre.     Ferina,  scil.  caro. 

{b.)    Ellipsis  includes  asyndeton,   zeugma,  syllepsis,  aknd  prolepsis. 

(1.)    ^j!y?i'/«Vo«  is  the  omission  of  the  copulative  conjunction;  as,  dbiit,  ea^ 
zemt,  evd*ii,  erOpU  scil.  et.  Cio.    This  is  called  in  pur«  Latin  dindliUio. 
SI 


862  APPENDIX. FIGURES    OP    SYNTAX.  §  323 

(2.)  (a.)  Zeugma  is  the  unitinsj  of  two  nouns  or  two  infinitives  te  a  verb. 
which,  as  to  its  meaning,  is  applicable  to  only  one  of  them ;  as,  Pacem  an  hel- 
ium (jerens :  ( Sail. )  where  fjerens  is  applicable  to  bellum  only,  while  pdcem  re- 
quires dgere.  Semperne  in  sanyuine^  ftrro,  fiuja  vers'oiimM?'?  (Id.)  where  the 
verb  does  not  properly  apply  to  ferro. 

(6.)  NPyn  is  often  thus  used  with  two  propositions,  one  of  which  is  affirma- 
tive ;  as,  Nei/ant  Ccesdrem  7nansurum,  jxistuldidque  interpdslta  esse,  for  dlcuntqua 
postuhlta...  Cic.    See  ^  209,  Note  4. 

'c.)  When  an  adjective  or  verb,  referring  to  two  or  more  nouns,  agrees  w?th 
one,  and  is  understood  with  the  rest,  the  construction  is  also  sometimes  called 
zeugma,  but  more  commonly  syllepsis;  as,  Et  genus,  et  virtus,  nisi  cum  re,  vilior 
alga  est.  Hor.  Cdptr  ilbi  salvus  et  fuedi.  Virg.  Qtiamvis  ille  niger,  guumvis  tu 
Candida  esses.  Id. 

(3.)  Syllepsis  is  when  an  adjective  or  verb,  belonging  to  two  or  more  nouns 
of  different  genders,  persons,  or  numbers,  agrees  with  one  rather  than  another; 
as.  Attouiti  nddtdte  pdvent  Baucis,  timidusque  Philemon.  Ovid.  Procitmbii 
at'STque  pronus  humi,  i.  e.  Deucalion  et  Pyrrha.  Id.  Sustiillraus  vidnus  et  ego 
it  Balbus.  Cic.  So,  Ipse  cum  fratre  drfcsse  jussi  siSmus.'  Id.  Projectisque  dmi- 
culo  et  Uteris.  Curt.    See  §§  205,  R.  2,  and  209,  R.  12,  (3.)  and  (7.) 

(4  Prdlepsis  is  when  the  parts,  differing  in  number  or  person  from  the 
wl  ^le,  are  placed  after  it,  the  verb  or  adjective  not  being  repeated;  as,  Prin- 
cijjes  utrinque  pugnam  '■I'bant,  nb  S'lbinis  Mettius  Curtius,  ab  Romdnis  Hostua 
Hostilius.  Liv.  B6ni  quuniam  convenlmus  ambo,  tu  cdldmos  infidre,  ego  dlcere 
versus.  Virg. 

2.  (a.)  Pleonasm  is  using  a  greater  number  of  words  than  is  neces- 
sary to  express  the  meaning ;  as, 

Sic  ore  Idcuta  est.  Virg.  Qui  magis  vere  vincSre  quam  diu  imperare  malit.  Liv 
NUiiio  unus.  Cie.   Forte  jortund.  Id.     Prudens  sciens.  Ter. 

(b.)  Under  pleonasm  are  included  parelcon,  polysyndeton,  hendi- 
cldqs,  and  periphrasis. 

(1.)  Pdrelcvn  is  the  addition  of  an  unnecessary  syllable  or  particle  to  pro- 
nouns, verbs,  or  adverbs;  as,  egdmet,  dgedum,  fortassean.  Such  additions, 
flowever,  usually  modify  the  meaning  in  some  degree. 

(2.)  P6lysy>uUton  is  a  redundancy  of  conjunctions;  as,  Una,  £urusque  Ndtus- 
que  ruunt  creberque  prdceUis  Afncus.  Virg. 

(3.)  Hendindys  is  the  expression  of  an  idea  by  two  nouns  connected  by  et 
-que,  or  atque,  instead  of  a  noun  and  a  limiting  adjective  or  genitive;  'fts,  PatO- 
ris  llbdinus  et  auro,  for  mn-eis  pater  is.  Virg.  Libro  et  silvestri  sub  ere  clausam 
for  libro  suberis.  Id.     Cristis  et  auro.  Ovid.    Met.  3,  32. 

(4.)  Periphrasis  OT  circuinldcutio  is  a,  circuitxins  mode  of  expression;  as,  Ti- 
neri  fcEtus  avium,  i.  e.  ugni.  Virg. 

3.  {a.)  Enallage  is  a  change  of  words,  or  a  substitution  of  one  gen 
di-.r,  number,  case,  person,  tense,  mood,  or  voice  of  the  same  word  foi 
another. 

(h.)  Enallage  includes  antimeria,  heterosis,  antiptosis,  synesis,  and 
ajiacoliithon. 

(1.)  Antimeria  is  the  use  of  one  part  of  speech  for  another,  or  the  abstrac* 
for  the  concrete;  as,  Nostrum  istud  vivere  t7-ist.e,  for  nostra  vita.  Pers.  Aliiif 
was.  111.    Coiijiigium  w"c^p6/«?  for  c(w;M^em.  Virg. 

(2.)  Heierusis  is  the  use  of  one  form  of  noun,  pronouuj  verb,  etc.,  for  anc)ther. 
af    Ego  {uoque  una  pereo,  quod  7nihi  est  carius,  for  qui  mihi  sum  cdrior.  Tet 


5  324.      APPENDIX. TROPES  AND  FIGURES  OK  RMETOMC.       363 

Komaims  pralio  victor,  for  Romini  vict&re$.  Liv.  Many  words  are  used  by  the 
poets  in  the  plunil  instead  of  the  singular;  as,  colla,  corda,  m-a,  etc.  See  §  98. 
Me  truncus  illapsus  cereiro  sustulerat,  for  sustuhsset.  Hor.    See  §  259,  R.  4. 

(3.)  Antiptosis  is  the  use  of  one  case  for  another;  as,  Cui  nunc  coyimnen 
lulo,  for  Icdus.  Virg.  ^  204,  R.  8.  Uxor  invicti  J&vis  esse  nescis,  for  te  esse  uxo- 
rem.  Hor.  §  210,  R.  6. 

(4.)  Si/nesis,  or  synthesis,  is  adapting  the  construction  to  the  sense  of  a  word, 
rather  than  to  its  gender  or  number;  as,  Siibeunt  Te^aa  jiiventus  auxilio  tarii. 
Stat.  Concursits  populi  mlrantium  miid  rei  est.  Liv.  Pars  in  crucem  acti.  Sail. 
Ci-J  illic  est  scelus,  qui  me  perdiditl  Ter.  Id  mea  minime  referi,  qui  swrx  naiu 
maxlmvs.  Id.    See  §  205,  R.  3,  (1.)  and  (3.),  and  §  206,  (12.) 

(5.)  Andcdluthon  is  a  disagreement  in  construction  between  the  latter  and 
fonner  part  of  a  sentence ;  as.  Nam  nos  omnes,  qulbiis  est  dlicuwle  dllquis  objectui 
tabos,  onine  quod  est  interea  tevipus,  priusquam  id  rescitum  est,  lucro  est.  Ter. 
In  this  example,  the  writer  began  as  if  he  intended  to  say  lucro  h/ibemus,  and 
ended  as  if  he  had  said  nobis  omnibus,  leaving  ncs  omnes  without  its  verb. 

4.  (a.)  Hyperbdlon  is  a  transgression  of  the  usual  order  of  words 
or  clauses. 

(h.)  Hyperbaton  includes  cinastrophe,  hysteron  proteron,  hypalldge, 
synclius'is,  tmesis,  and  parenthesis. 

(1.)  Anastrdphe  is  an  inversion  of  the  order  of  two  words;  as,  Pranstra  per 
et  remos,  for  per  trnnstra.  Virg.  CoUo  dure  brdchia  circum,  for  drcumddre.  Id. 
AW  erit  una  super,  for  supiririt.  Ovid.     Et  Jacit  are,  for  drefdcit.  Lucr. 

(2.)  Hysteron  prdtiron  is  reversing  the  natural  order  of  the  sense;  as,  Mdrid- 
mur,  et  in  mMia  ar/na  I'udmus.   Virg.    Valet  atque  vlvit.  Ter. 

(3.)  Hmalldye  is  an  interchange  of  constructions ;  as.  In  nOva  fert  dnlmut 
mdtdtas  ulcere  formas  corpora,  for  corpdra  mutdia  in  ndvas  format.  Ovid.  Dare 
classibus  Aust7-os,  for  dare  classes  Austi-is.  Virg. 

(4.)  -St/Tic/ijrsis  is  a  confused  position  of  words;  as,  Saxa  vdcant  Itdli,  midiis 
qwe  in  Jiuctibus,  dras,  for  quie  saxa  »j  mediis  Jiuctlbus,  Itdli  vOcant  drag.  Virg. 

(5.)  Tmesis  or  diacope  is  the  separation  of  the  parts  of  a  compound  word; 
as,  Septem  subjecta  trioni  yens,  for  septenti-toni.  Virg.  Qiub  me  cunnju^  vdcant 
lerrce.  Id.     Per  mild,  per,  inqtiam,  grdtum  feciris.  Cic. 

(6.)  Pdrenthesis  or  dialysis  is  the  insertion  of  a  word  or  words  in  a  sentence 
interrupting  the  natural  connection;  as,  Tityre  dum  redeo,  (brevis  <'6t  via,) 
pasce  cdpeUas.  Virg. 

Remark.  To  the  above  may  be  added  archaism  and  Hellenism, 
which  belong  both  to  the  figures  of  etymology  and  to  those  of  syntax. 

(1.)  Archaism  is  the  use  of  ancient  forms  or  constructions;  as,  auldi,  for 
auliB ;  stndtl,  for  sendtus ;  fuat,  for  sit ;  prdhibesso,  for  prdhlbuero  ;  impetrassere, 
fox  impetrdturum  esse;  f  drier,  for  fari ;  nenu,  for  non ;  enilo,  for  in; — Operam 
dbutltur,  for  dperd.  Ter.    Quid  tlbi  hanc  cHrdtio  est  rem  f  Plaut. 

(2.)  Hellenism  i»  the  use  of  Greek  foniib  or  constructions;  as,  Helene,  for 
Helena;  Antiphon,  for  Aniipho;  auras  (gen.),  for  aurce ;  Pallddos,  Pidldda,  for 
Pullddis,  Pallddem;  Trodsin,  Troddas,  for  Troddibus,  Troddes  ; — Abstineto  ird- 
rum.  Hor.     Tempiis  disistere  pugna.  Virg. 

S  O-^'i*  (1.)  To  the  grammatical  figures  may  not  Improperly  be  subjoined  cef" 
Vain  others,  which  are  often  referred  to  in  philological  vorki,  and  which  are  called 

TROPES   AND   FIGURES   OF   RHETORIC. 

(2.)  A  rhetorical  jiyure  is  a  mode  of  expression  different  from  the  direct  and 
simple  waj'  of  expressing  the  same  sense.  The  turning  of  a  uwd  from  its 
nriginal  and  customai  y  meaning,  is  called  a  trope. 


864       APPENDIX. TROPES  AND  FIGURES  OF  RHETORIC.      §  S24 

1.  (a.)  A  metaphor  is  the  transferring  of  a  word  from  the  object  to  which  it 
l^roperly  belongs,  and  applj'ing  it  to  another,  to  which  that  object  1  as  some  ■ 
anal'.;gy;  as,  Ridet  agei\  The  field  smiles.  Virg.  uS'lias  aurea,  The  golJen  age. 
Ovid.  Naufragia  forturuB,  The  wreck  of  fortune.  Cic.  Mentis  ociih.  The  eye3 
of  the  mind.  Id.  Virtus  dnimum  (jlorice  stimuHs  concUat.  The  harshness  of  a 
metaphor  is  often  softened  by  means  of  quasi,  tamquam,  guidam,  or  ut  Ua  dicam; 
as.  In  fin'  vhildsdphid  qiiiisi  tabemacvilum  vltce  suce  colldcdrunl.  Id.  Opimum 
quoddam  o^  tamquam  adipatEe  dictionis  genus.  Id. 

(6.)  Gitachrcsis  or  dbusio  is  a  bold  or  harsh  metaphor;  as,  Vir  grSgis  ipsa 
caper.  Virg.     Eurus  per  Skfdas  equitavit  undas.  Hor. 

2.  Metonymy  is  substituting  the  name  of  an  object  for  that  of  another  to 
which  it  has  a  certain  relation;  as  the  cause  for  the  effect,  the  container  for 
what  is  contained,  the  property  for  the  substance,  the  sign  for  the  thing  signi- 
fied, and  their  contraries;  the  parts  of  the  body  for  certain  affections;  the  pos- 
sessor for  the  thing  possessed;  place  and  time  for  the  persons  or  things  which 
thav  comprise,  etc. ;  as,  Mortdles,  for  homines.  Virg.  Amoi'  duri  Martis,  i.e. 
6&Et.  Id.  Friiges  Cererem  appelldmits,  vinum  auteni  Liberum.  Cic.  Cupio  vig^- 
liara  meam  iibi  irdilere,  i.  e.  meam  cUram.  Id.  Pallida  mors.  Hor.  Hausit  pa- 
teram,  i.  e.  v'mum.  Virg.  Vina  cOronant,  i.  e.  pateram.  Id.  Necte  ternos  colores, 
i.  e.  iria  ftla  diversi  cOloris.  Id.  Ccdant  arma  togse,  i.  e.  helium  pad.  Cic. 
Sseciila  mUescent,  i.  e.  hdmuies  in  sceculis.  Virg.  Vlvat  Pdcuvius  vel  Nestora 
totum.  Juv.  Doetrind  Grwcia  no's  siiperdbat,  for  Grmci  siijKrdbant.  Cic.  Pagi 
centum  Suevdru7n  ad  r'ipas  Rheni  consederant,  for  jxlgorumincd^ie.  Cses.  Tempora 
dmlcorum,  for  res  adversce.  Cic.  Claudius  lege  prcedidtond  vendlis  pependit, 
for  Claudii  pradium.  Suet.  Vici  ad  Jauum  medium  sedentes,  for  Jdni  vi- 
cum.  Cic. 

3.  Synecdoche  is  putting  a  whole  for  a  part,  a  genus  for  a  species,  a  singular 
for  a  plural,  and  their  contraries;  also  the  material  for  the  thing  made  of  it^ 
a  definite  for  an  hidefinite  number,  etc.;  as,  Fontem  ferebant.  Id.  Tectum,  for 
dOmus.  Id.  Armdlo  milite  complent,  for  armdtis  mllitlbus.  Id.  Ferrum,  for  gld^ 
dias.  Id.  Qui  Cdrinlhiis  operibus  abundant,  i.  e.  vdsis.  Cic.  Urbem,  m'bem,  mt 
Rufe,  cdle,  i.  e.  Romam.  Cic.    Centum  puer  artium,  i.  e.  multdrum. 

4.  Irony  is  the  intentional  use  of  words  which  express  a  sense  contrary  to 
that  which  the  writer  or  speaiier  means  to  convey;  as,  Salve  bone  vir,  curasti 
probe.  Ter.  Egregiam  vero  laudem,  et  spolia  ampla  refertis,  tuque,  puerque 
iuus.  Virg. 

5.  i7y7Je?-&(5fe  is  the  magnifying  or  diminishmg  of  a  thing  beyond  the  truth ; 
as.  Ipse  arduus,  altdque  pulsat  sidera.  Virg.    Ocior  Euro.  Id. 

6.  Meldlepsis  is  the  including  of  several  tropes  in  one  word ;  as,  Post  aliquot 
iristas.  Virg.     Here  arislas  is  put  for  messes,  and  this  for  annos. 

7.  {a.)  Allegwy  is  a  consistent  series  of  metaphors,  designed  to  illustrate  one 
Bubjoct  by  another;  as,  0  ndvis,  referent  in  mare  te  ndvi  fiuctus.  Hor. 

(b.)  An  obscxire  allegory  or  riddle  is  called  an  (enigma;  as,  J>ic,  quibtis  in 
(erris  tres  pdteat  cmli  spdiium  non  amplius  idnas.   Virg. 

8.  Ant^ndmasia  is  using  a  proper  noun  for  a  common  one,  and  the  contrary ; 
Rs,  Irus  ei  est  subito,  qui  mddo  Crossus  erat,  for  pauper  and  dives.  Ovid.  So,  by 
periphrasis,  potor  Rhoddni,  for  Gallus.  Hor.  Eversor  Carthdginis,  for  Scipio. 
Quint.    ElOquentice  princeps,  for  Cicero.  Id.     Tydides,  for  Diomedes.  \  irg. 

9.  Llfdtes  is  a  mode  of  expressing  something  by  denying  the  contrary ;  as, 
Nim  lamlo,  I  blame.  Ter.     Non  innoxia  verba.  Virg. 

10.  Anttphrdsis  is  using  a  word  in  a  sense  opposite  to  its  proper  meaning, 
as,  Auri  siicra  fames.  Virg. 

11.  Euphemism  is  the  use  of  softened  languageto  express  what  is  offensive 
or  distressing;  as,  Si  quid  accidisset  Ccesdri,  i.  e.  si  mortuvs  esset.  Veil. 

12.  Antunncldsis  or  punning  is  the  use  of  the  same  word  in  different  senses  . 
as,  Quis  neyet  ^nm  Tidtum  de  stirpe  Nermemf  Susttilit  /iic  mdtrem,  sustuli* 
ille  patretn.  Epigr.     Amari  juctundum  est,  si  curetur  ne  quid  insit  amari.  Cic. 


§  324.     APPENDIX. TROPES  AND  FIGURES  OF  RHETORIC.      365 

13.  Anaphdra  or  ep&naphdra  is  the  repetition  of  a  word  at  the  beginning  of 
successive  clauses;  as,  Nihilne  te  nocturnu7ii  prcesidiu7n  jxilatii,  nihil  vrbis  ■'•if/i- 
liw,  nihil  timor  pdpuli,  etc.  Cic.  Te,  dulcis  conjux,  te,  solo  in  I'Mre  sccum,  te, 
veniente  die,  te,  deccdente,  cdnebat.   Virg. 

14.  Epistrdphe  is  the  repetition  of  a  word  at  the  end  of  successive  clauses; 
as,  Panes  pdpulus  Romanus  justitid  vicit,  armis  vTcit,  liberdUtdte  vicit.  Cic.  In 
pure  Latin  this  figure  is  called  conrer-sio. 

15.  Stfinpldce  is  the  repetition  of  a  word  at  the  beginning,  and  of  another  at 
the  end,  of  successive  clauses,  and  hence  it  includes  the  anaphora  and  the 
epistrophe;  as,  Quis  legem  tulitf  Rullus:  Quis  mOjOrem  pdpuli  partem  snffrd' 
giis  pi'ivdvit?  RuWns:  Qnis  cdmitiis  prcsfuit?  Mem  KuWus.   Cic. 

16.  Epdnalepsis  is  a  repetition  of  the  same  T^ord  or  sentence  after  inteivcn- 
ing  words  or  clauses.     See  Virg.  Geor.  II.  4 — 7. 

17.  Anddiplosis  is  the  use  of  the  same.word  at  the  end  of  one  clause,  and  the 
beginning  of  another ;  as,  Sequitur  pulcherrimus  Astur,  Astur  equo  fidens.  Virg. 
A.  10,  180.  JVztnc  etiam  audes  in  hoi-um  conspectum  venire,  venire  audes  in  karwn 
conspectum  f  Cic.     This  is  sometimes  called  epdnastrdphe. 

18.  Epanddiplosis  is  the  use  of  the  same  word  both  at  the  beginning  and  end 
of  i  sentence ;  as,  Crescit  amor  nummi,  quantum  ipsa  pecunia  crescit.  Juv. 

19.  Epdnados  or  regressio  is  the  repetition  of  the  same  words  in  an  inverted 
order  as,  Crudelis  mater  mdgis,  an  puer  imprdbus  ille  f  Impi-dbus  ille  puer,  crO- 
dC'lis  tu  qudque,  mater.  Virg. 

20.  Ejn,zeuxis_  is  a  repetition  of  the  same  word  for  the  sake  of  emphasis ;  as, 
Excitate,  excitate  eum  ab  inferis.  Cic.  Ah  Corydon,  Corydon,  quce  te  dementia 
cepii  ?  Virg.     Ibiinus,  ihimus,  utcumque  prceccdes.  Hor. 

21.  Climax  is  a  gradual  amplification  by  means  of  a  continued  anadiplosis, 
each  successive  clause  beginning  with  the"  conclusion  of  that  which  precedes 
it ;  as,  Quae  reliqua  spes  manet  libertatis,  si  illis  et  quod  libet,  licet ;  et  quod  licet, 
possunt ;  et  quod  possunt,  audent ;  et  quod  audent,  vobis  molestum  non  est  V  Cic. 
This,  in  pure  Latin,  is  called  grdddtio. 

11.  Tncrementum  is  an  amplification  without  a  strict  climax;  as,  Fdcinus  est, 
i-inclri  civem  Romanum  ;  seem,  vei'berdri  ;  prope  parricidium,  necdri ;  quid  dU 
cam  in  crucem  tolli  f  Cic. 

23.  Polyptoton  is  the  repetition  of  a  word  in  different  cases,  genders,  num- 
bers, tenses,  etc. ;  as.  Jam  clipeus  dipeis,  unibone  repellitur  umbo;  ense  minax 
ensis,  pede  pes,  et  aisplde  cuspis.  Stat. 

24.  Paregmenon  is  the  use  of  several  words  of  the  same  origm,  in  one  sen- 
tence ;  as,  Abesse  non  pdtest,  quin  ejusdem  hdminis  sit,  qui  improbos  probet,  pro- 
bos  improbare.  Cic.    Istam  pugnam  pugnabo.  Plaut. 

25.  Pdrdndmdsia  is  the  use  of  words   which  resemble  each  other  in  sound 
as,  Amor  et  inelle  et  felle  est  fecu7ulissimus.  Plaut.    Civem  boiulrum  artium 
hdnarum  partium.  Cic.   Amantes  sunt  amentes.  Ter.     This  figure  is  sometimes 
called  agnomindiio. 

26.  HdmrBLprvpliiron  or  alliteration  is  the  use  in  the  same  sentence  of  sev- 
eral words  beginning  with  the  same  letter;  as,  0  Tite,  lute  Tali,  tibi  tanta, 
iyranne,  tuli^ti.  Enn.     JVeu  patrice  validas  in  viscera  verlite  vires.  Virg. 

27.  Antithesis  is  the  placing  of  different  or  opposite  words  or  sentiments  in 
contrast;  as,  Eujm  ordtionis  difflcilim  est  exitum  quam  principium  invenlre. 
Cic.  Ca?sar  beneficiis  ac  miinlficentia  magnus  hdbebdtur ;  integritate  vitse 
Cato-  Sail. 

28.  Oxymoron  unites  words  of  contrary  significations,  thus  producing  a  seem- 
ing contradiction;  as,  Concordia  disccn-s.  Hor.    Quum  tdcent,  ctdmant.  Cic 

29.  Spnonymia  is  the  use  of  different  words  or  expressions  having  the  same 
import;  as,  Non  feram,  non  pdtiar,  non  slmm.  Cic.  PromitU),  recipio,  spon- 
deo.  Id. 

81* 


366      APPENDIX. TROPES  AND  FIGURES  OF  RHETC  iKIC.     §325 

3C  Parabdla  or  Simile  is  the  comparison  tf  one  thing  with  another;  as,  BS- 
pente  te,  tamquam  serpens  e  Idtibulis,  oculis  emlnentllms,  tiiflato  collo,  tumidts  cer- 
tUdbuSf  intulisti.  Cic. 

?1.  Erotesis  is  an  earnest  question,  and  often  irnplies  a  strong  aflarmation  of 
the  contrary;  as,  Orediiis  dvectos  hoslesf  Virg.  Beu!  qua  me  aqudra  possurU 
acctperef  Id. 

32.  Eparuyrthosis  or  Gorrectio  is  the  recalling  of  a  word,  in  order  to  place  a 
stronger  or  more  significant  one  in  its  stead;  as,  Filium  unlcum  dddlesceniulttm 
habeo:  ah!  quid  dixit  me  habere?  /ww  habui.  Ter. 

33.  Apdsiqpesis,  Eettcentia,  or  Interruptio,  is  leaving  a  sentence  unfinished 
in  consequence  of  some  emotion  of  the  mind;  as,  Quos  ego—sed  motos  proestat 
compmire  Jluctus.  Virg. 

34.  Prds5pdpceia  or  personification  represents  inanimate  things  as  acting  or 
speaking,  and  persons  dead  or  absent  as  alive  and  present;  as,  Q.we  (patrta) 
tecum,  Cailllna,  sic  agii.  Cic.   Virtus  sumit  aut  ponit  secures.  Hor. 

35.  Apostrdphe  is  a  turning  off  from  the  regular  course  of  the  subject,  to  ad- 
dress some  person  or  thing;  as,  Ti  pdtitur ;  quid  nm  mortdlia  peci^ra  cogis, 
auri  sacra  fames !  Virg. 

36.  Pdrdleipsis  ia  a  pretended  omission  of  something,  in  order  to  render  it 
more  observed.     See  Cic.  Cat.  1,  6,  14. 

37.  Epiphonema  or  Acclamdtio  is  an  exclamation  or  grave  reflection  on  some- 
thing said  before;  as,  Tantce  molis  erai  Romdnam  condere  gentem.  Virg. 

38.  EqMnesis  or  Exclamdtio  shows  some  violent  emotion  of  the  mind ;  as, 
0  tempdra  !   0  mores  ! 

39.  Apdria,  Diapdresis,  or  Dubitdtio,  expresses  a  doubt  in  regard  to  what  is 
to  be  said  or  done ;  as,  Quos  accedam,  aut  quas  appellem  f  Sail. 

40.  Prdlepsis  is  the  anticipation  of  an  objection  before  it  is  made,  or  of  an 
event  .before  it  occurs ;  as,  Verum  anceps  puyiuB  fuerat  fm-tuna.  Fuisset : 
Quern  metui  moritiira  ?  Virg. 

§  Sfi5.  To  the  figures  of  rhetoric  may  be  subjoined  the  follow- 
ing terms,  used  to  designate  defects  or  blemishes  in  style : — 

1.  Barbarism  is  eitlier  the  use  of  a  foreign  word,  or  a  violation  of  the  rules 
of  orthography,  etymology^  or  prosody;  as,  rigorosus,  for  ingidus  or  severus; 
domminus,  for  ddminus ;  dam,  for  dedi. 

2.  Solecism  is  a  violation  of  the  rules  of  syntax ;  as,  Venus  pulcher ;  vos  invi- 
ieviiLs. 

3.  Neotensm  is  the  use  of  words  or  phrases  introduced  by  authors  living 
Bubsequently  to  the  best  ages  of  Latinity;  as,  murdrum,  a  miu-der;  constaMld- 
rius,  a  constable. 

4.  Tautology  is  a  repetition  of  the  same  meaning  in  different  words ;  as,  Jam 
vos  aciem,  et  proelia,  et  hostem  poscltis.  Sil. 

5.  AmpMbdlia  is  the  use  of  equivocal  words  or  constructions ;  as,  Gallus, 
Gaul,  or  a  cock.    Aio  te,  ^dcida,  Romanes  vincere  posse.  Quint. 

6.  Idiotism  is  a  construction  peculiar  to  one  or  more  languages :  thus,  the 
Rblative  after  comparatives  is  a  Latinism.  When  a  peculiarity  of  one  language 
ts  irritated  in  another,  this  is  also  called  idiotism.  Thus,  Mitte  mihi  verbum, 
'^OfiU'H.d  of  Fac  me  certiorem,  is  an  Anglicism. 


M26.    APPP^rnix. — roman  mode  of  reckoning — time.    367 

ROMAN   MODE   OF  RECKONING. 

I.    OF  TIME. 

1.    The  Roman  Day. 

§  330.  (1.)  With  the  Romans,  as  with  us,  the  day  was  either 
rivil  or  natural.  Their  civil  day,  like  oure,  extended  from  midnight 
to  midnight.  The  natural  day  continued  from  sunrise  to  sunset,  as. 
on  the  other  hand,  the  night  extended  fr-^ra  sunset  to  sunrise.  The 
natural  day  and  night  were  each  di\ided  into  twelve  equal  parts  oi 
hours,  which  were  consequently  of  different  length,  according  to  the 
varying  length  of  the  days  and  nights  in  the  successive  seasons  of  the 
year.  It  was  only  at  the  equinox  that  the  diurnal  and  nocturnal 
hours  of  the  Romans  were  equal  to  each  other,  as  each  was  then 
equal  to  the  twentj'-fourth  part  of  the  civil  day. 

(2.)  In  the  Roman  camp  the  night  was  further  divided  into  four 
watches  {vTgtlicB),  consisting  each  of  three  Roman  hours,  the  second 
and  fourth  watches  ending  respectively  at  midnight  "^nd  at  sunrise 

2.    The  Roman  Month  and  Year. 

(1.)  The  calendar  of  the  Romans,  as  rectified  by  Julius  Caesar, 
agreed  with  our  own  in  the  number  of  months,  and  of  the  days  in 
oach,  according  to  the  Ibllowing  table : — 

Januarius  .  31  days.  Maius  .  .  31  days.  September  30  davs. 

Februarius  28  or  29.  Junius.  .  30    "  October  .  .  31     "" 

Martius.  .  .  31  days.  Quintllis  31     "  November  30    " 

Aprilis  ...  30    "  Sextilis .  31     "  December  31     " 

In  early  times  the  Roman  year  began  with  March,  and  the  names 
QuintilLs,  ScxTilu^,  September,  etc.,  indicated  the  distance  of  those 
months  from  the  commencement  of  the  year.  Quintllis  and  Sextilis 
were  afterwards  called  Julius  and  Augustus  in  honor  of  the  first  two 
emperors.  The  Romans,  instead  of  reckoning  in  an  uninterrupted 
series  from  the  first  to  the  last  day  of  a  month,  had  in  each  month 
Shree  points  or  periods  from  which  their  days  were  counted — the 
Calends,  the  Nones,  and  the  Ides.  The  Calends  {Calendxe),  were  al- 
ways the  first  day  of  the  month.  The  Nones  (Nonce),  were  the  fifth, 
and  the  Ides  (Idus),  the  thirteenth  ;  except  in  March,  May,  July,  and 
October,  when  the  Nones  occurred  on  the  seventh  day,  and  the  Idea 
on  the  fifteenth. 

(2.)  They  always  counted  forward,  from  the  day  whose  date  was 
to  be  determined,  to  the  ne.xt  Calends,  Nones,  or  Ides,  and  desig- 
nated the  day  by  its  distance  before  such  point.  After  the  first  day 
of  the  month,  therefore,  they  began  to  reckon  so  many  tlays  before 
the  Nones  ;  after  the  Nones,  so  many  days  before  the  Ides ;  and  after 
the  Ides,  so  many  before  the  Calends,  of  the  next  month. 

Thus,  the  second  of  January  was  denoted  by  quarto  Nonas  Janunrioi,  oi 
Jdnudrii,  soil,  die  ante :  the  third,  tertio  Nmas  ;  the  fourth,  prldio  ?fmas ; 
and  the  fifth,  Nmtis.     The  sixth  wus   denoted  by  octavo  Idus ;  the   seventh 


368      APPENDIs*.. ROMAN  MODE  OF  RECKONING TIME.     $i  oP.C) 

septimo  Idus ;  and  so  on  to  the  thirteenth,  on  which  the  Ides  fell.  The  four- 
teenth was  denoted  by  undeingesimo  Calendas  Febi-udnas,  or  Februdrii ;  and  sc 
on  to  the  end  of  the  month. 

(3.)  The  day  preceding  the  Calends,  Nones,  and  Ides,  was  termed 
pridie  Calendas,  etc.,  scil.  ante :  in  designating  the  other  days,  both 
the  day  of  the  Calends,  etc.,  and  that  whose  date  was  to  be  deter- 
mined, were  reckoned ;  hence  the  second  day  before  the  Calends, 
etc.,  was  called  tertio,  the  third  quarto,  etc. 

(4.)  To  reduce  the  Roman  calendar  to  our  own,  therefore,  when 
the  day  is  between  the  '^r.l^uds  and  the  Nones  or  between  the  Nonea 
and  the  Ides,  it  is  necessary  to  take  one  from  the  number  denoting 
the  distance  of  the  given  day  from  the  Nones  or  the  Ides,  and  to  sub- 
tract the  remainder  from  the  number  of  the  day  on  which  the  Nones 
or  Ides  fell  in  the  given  month. 

Thus,  to  detennine  the  day  eqiiivaleut  to  IV.  Nonas  Jdnuarias,  we  take 
1  from  4,  and  subtract  the  remainder,  3,  from  5,  the  day  <m  which  the  Nones 
of  January  fell  (i.  e.  4 — 1=3,  and  5 — 3=2):  this  gives  2,  or  the  second  of  Jan- 
uary, for  the  day  in  question.  So  VI.  Idus  Aprttis:  the  Ides  of  April  falling 
upon  the  13th,  we  take  (6 — 1,  i.  e.)  5  from  13,  which  leaves  8  (i.  e.  6 — 1=5, 
and  13 — 5=8):  the  expression,  therefore,  denotes  the  8tli  of  April. 

(a.)  In  reckoning  the  days  before  the  Calends,  as  they  are  not  the 
last  day  of  the  current  month,  but  the  first  of  the  following,  it  is 
necessary  to  subtract  two  from  the  number  denoting  the  distance  of 
the  given  day  from  the  Calends  of  the  following  month,  and  to  take 
the  remainder  from  the  number  of  days  in  the  month. 

Thus,  XV.  Gil  Quintiles  is  15—2=13,  and  30—13=17,  i.  e.  the  Roman  date 

XV.  Cal.  Quint,  is  equivalent  to  the  17th.  of  June. 

(h.)  To  reduce  our  calendar  to  the  Roman,  the  preceding  method 
is  to  be  reversed.  Thus  Avhen  the  given  day  is  between  the  Calends 
and  the  Nones  or  between  the  Nones  and  the  Ides,  (unless  it  be  the 
day  before  the  Nones  or  the  Ides),  we  are  to  add  one  to  the  number 
denoting  the  day  of  the  month,  according  to  our  reckoning,  on  which 
the  Nones  or  Ides  fell.  But  if  the  day  is  after  the  Ides,  (unless  it  be 
the  last  day  of  the  month),  we  must  add  two  to  the  number  of  days 
in  the  month,  and  then  subtract  the  number  denoting  the  day  of  the 
month  as  expressed  in  our  reckoning.  The  remainder  will  be  the 
day  before  the  Nones,  Ides  or  Calends. 

Thus  to  find  the  Roman  date  corresponding  to  the  third  of  April,  we  have 
5-|-l — 3=3;  the  required  date,  therefore,  is  ///.  Non.  Apr. — To  find  the  proper 
Roman  expression  for  our  tenth  of  December  we  have  134-1 — 10=4;  the  date, 
therefore,  is  IV.  Id.  Dec. — The  Roman  expression  for  the  22d  of  August,  m 
pursuance  of  the  above  rule,  is  found  thus,  31-1-2 — 22=11,  and  the  date  is  XJ 
Cal.  Sept. 

(5.j  In  leap  year,  both  the  24th  and  25th  of  February  were  called 
the  sixth  before  the  Calends  of  March.  The  24th  was  called  dies 
bisextus,  and  the  year  itself  annus  bisextus,  bissextile  or  leap  year. 

(a.)  The  day  after  the  Calends,  etc.,  was  sometimes  called  postrldie  cAlen- 
das,  etc. 

(6.)  The  names  of  the  months  are  properly  adjectives,  though  often  used  a« 
nouns,  mensis  being  understood 


§326.     APPENDIX. ROMAN  MODE  OF  RECKONING nME.      3^9 

(6.)    The  correspondence  of  our  calendar  with  that  of  the  Romans 
ifl  exhibited  in  the  following 

TABLE. 


Days  of 

JIak.  :Mai. 

Jan.  Aug. 

Apr.     Jun. 

our  months. 

Jul.    Oct. 

Dec. 

Sept.   Nov. 

Febk. 

1 

Calendse. 

Calendae. 

Calendse. 

CalendaB. 

2 

VI.    Nonas. 

IV.    Nonas. 

IV.    Nonas. 

IV.    Nonas. 

3 

V. 

in.      " 

ni. 

ni. 

4 

IV.        " 

Pridie   " 

Pridie    " 

Pridie   " 

5 

in.      " 

Nonse. 

Nouse. 

Non«. 

6 

Pridie  Non. 

vin.  Idus. 

VIII.  Idus. 

VIII.  Idus. 

7 

Nonae. 

VII.      " 

VII.      " 

VU.      " 

8 

VIII.  Idus. 

VI. 

VI.        " 

VI.        " 

9 

VU.      " 

V. 

V. 

V.         " 

10 

VI.        " 

IV.        " 

IV. 

IV.        " 

11 

V. 

m. 

ni.      " 

III. 

12 

IV. 

Pridie   " 

Pridie    " 

Pridie  " 

13 

in.      " 

Idus. 

Idus. 

Idus. 

14 

Pridie  Id. 

XIX.   Cal. 

XVni.  Cal. 

XVI.  Cal. 

15 

Idus. 

xvni. " 

xvn.  " 

XV.      " 

16 

XVn.  Cal. 

XVII.    " 

XVI.     " 

XIV.     " 

17 

XVI.     " 

XVI.     " 

XV.      " 

XUI.    " 

18 

XV.      " 

XV.      " 

XIV.     " 

xn.    " 

19 

XIV.     " 

XIV.     " 

XIU.     « 

XI.       " 

20 

XJII.     "♦ 

xin.    " 

XII.       " 

X.         " 

21 

xn.     " 

xn.     " 

XI. 

ix.     " 

22 

XI.        " 

XI.        " 

X.          » 

vin.   " 

23 

X. 

X. 

IX. 

vn.    " 

24 

IX.        " 

IX. 

vm.   " 

VI.       " 

25 

vm.   " 

vin.   " 

VU.       " 

V.         " 

26 

vn.     " 

VU.       " 

VI.        " 

IV.        " 

27 

VI. 

VI. 

V.         " 

ni. 

28 

V. 

V. 

IV. 

Pridie  "Mar 

29 

IV.        " 

IV.        " 

m.      " 

30 

ni. 

m.      " 

Pridie  Cal. 

31 

Pridie  Cal. 

Pridie  Cal. 

(7.)  In  leap-year  the  last  seven  days  of  February  were  reckoned  thus : — 

23.  vn.  Cdlendas  Martias.  27.     IV.  Cal.  Mart. 

24.  bisexto  Cal.  Mart.  28.    III.     "        " 

25.  VI.  Cal.  Mart.  29.    pridie  Cal.  Mart. 

26.  V.      "        » 

(a.)  Hence  in  reducing  a  date  of  February  in  leap-year  to  the  Roman  date, 
for  the  first  23  days  we  proceed  according  to  the  precedmg  rule  in  4,  (&.),  as  ir 
the  month  had  only  28  (lays.  The  24th  is  marked  as  bisexto  Cal.  Mart.,  and  to 
>ibtain  the  proper  expression  for  the  remaining  five  days  we  regard  the  month 
as  having  29  davs.  Thus  the  27th  of  Februarv  in  leap-year  is  29-f-2 — 27=4, 
and  the  proper  lioman  expression  is  IV.  Cal.  Mart. 

{b.)  On  the  other  hand,  to  reduce  a  Roman  date  of  February  in  leap-year  to 
our  date  we  reverse  the  above  process,  and  during  the  Nones  and  Ides  and 
until  tlio  VU.  Cdlendas  Martias  we  reckon  the  month  to  have  only  28  days: — 
bisexto  Cal.  Mart,  is  set  down  as  the  24th,  and  for  the  rcmahiing  days  desig- 
nated as  VI.  V.  IV.  III.  and  pridie  Cal.  Mart,  we  reckon  the  month  to  have 
29  days.  Thus  ///.  Cal.  Mart,  is  8— 2=1,  and  29—1=28,  and  the  given  day  is 
equivalent  to  the  2Sth  of  February. 


370    APPENDIX. ROMAN  MODE  OF  RECKONING MONET.    §  327. 

.8)  The  Latius  not  only  suidte7'<ici, /wirfje,  etc.,  CSlendas,  etc.,  but  also  ante 
diem  tertium,  etc.,  Oilendas,  etc. ;  aud  the  latter  form  in  Cicero  and  Livy  is 
far  more  common  than  the  former,  and  is  usually  written  thus,  a.  d.  III. 
Cnl.,  etc. 

(9.)  The  expression  ante  diem  was  used  as  an  indeclinable  noun,  and  is 
joined  with  in  and  ex ;  as,  Consxd  Latlnar  ferias  in  ante  diem  tertium  Idas  Sex- 
tUis  edixit,  The  consul  appointed  the  Latm  festival  for  the  third  day  before  the 
Ides  of  August.  Liv.  Supplicalio  indicia  est  ex  ante  diem  quintum  fdus  Octobres. 
Id.     So,  Ad  pridie  Nonas  Maias.  Cic. 

(10.)  The  week  of  seven  days  (kebddrnas),  was  not  in  use  among  the  Romans 
under  the  republic,  but  was  introduced  under  the  emperors.  The  days  of  the 
week  were  then  named  from  the  planets ;  dies  Solis,  Sunday ;  dies  Luna,  Mon- 
day; dies  Martis,  Tuesday;  dies  Mercurii,  Wednesday;  dies  Jdvis,  Thursday; 
dies  Veneris,  Friday;  dies  Sdturni,  Saturday. 


(11.)  The  term  nanc?fre<B  {{rom  ndvem — dies)  denotes  the  regular  market  day 
at  Rome  when  the  country  people  came  into  the  city;  but  it  is  not  used  for  the 
purpose  of  (ieuoting  the  period  of  eight  days  Interveniug  between  two  succes- 


(12.)  The  year  at  Rome  was  designated  by  the  names  of  the  consuls  for 
that  year.  Thus  Virgil  was  bom,  M.  Licinio  Crasso  et  Cn.  Pompeio  Magna 
consulibus,  i.  e.  in  the  year  of  the  consulship  of  Crassus  and  Pompey.  But  Ln 
Roman  authors  events  are  often  dated  from  the  year  in  which  Rome  was 
founded,  which,  according  to  Varro,  was  Ln  the  753d  year  before  the  birth 
of  Christ.  This  period  was  designated  as  anno  urbis  condlUe,  and  by  ab- 
breviation, a.  u.  c,  or  simply  u.  c,  and  sometimes  by  a.  alone,  before  the 
numerals. 

Thus  the  birth  of  Virgil  was  a.  «.  c.  684.  To  reduce  such  dates  to  our  reckoning,  if 
the  given  niuuber  is  less  than  754,  we  subtract  it  from  the  latter  number,  and  the  dif- 
ference is  the  required  year  before  Christ.  The  birth  of  Virgil  therefore  is  754 — 684=70 
before  Christ. — But  if  the  number  of  the  Roman  year  exceeds  753,  we  deduct  753  from 
the  given  number,  and  the  remainder  is  the  year  after  Christ.  For  example,  the  em- 
peror Augustus  died  a.  u.  c.  767,  and  the  corresponding  year  of  our  era  is  767 — 753="  14. 


n.    TABLES   OF  MONEY,   WEIGHT,  AND   MEASURE. 


Of  the  As. 

§  337 •  The  Romans  used  this  word  (As)  to  denote,  I.  The  copper  coin, 
whose  value  (in  the  time  of  Cicero)  was  about  one  cent  and  a  half  of  our 
money.  II.  The  unit  of  weight  (libra),  or  of  ineasure  (jugerum).  III.  Any 
unit  or  integer  considered  as  divisible ;  as,  of  inheritances,  interest,  houses,  etc. ; 
whence  ex  asse  hiires,  one  who  inherits  the  whole.  The  multiples  of  the  As  are, 
Dupondius  (diw  pondo ;  for  the  .4s  originally  weighed  a  pound),  t.  e.  2  Assea; 
Sestertius  (sesqui  tertius),  i.  e.  2i  Asses;  Tressis,  t.  e.  3  Asses;  Quati-nssis,  i.  e. 
4  Asses;  and  so  on  to  Ceniussis,  i.  e.  100  Asses.  The  As,  whatever  unit  it  re- 
presented, was  divided  into  twelve  parts  or  uncia,  and  the  different  fractions 
received  different  names,  as  follows : 


Uncia. 

As 12 

Deunx 11 

Dextans 10 

Dodrans 9 

Bes 8 

Septunx 7 

^emis 6 


Uncia 

Quincunx 6 

Triens 4 

Quadrans,  or  Tfiruncius 3 

Sextans 2 

Uncia 1 


Sescuncia 11 


« 

<t 

l( 

(t 

« 

i< 

1. 

It 

u 

a 

§  327.         APPENDIX. TABLES  OF  MONET,  WEIGHT.  ETC.  371 

The  Ditcia  was  divided  in  the  following  manner : — 

1  Uncia  contained  2  Semunciae. 

3  Duell*. 

4  Slcllici. 
6  Sextulae. 
8  Drachmae. 

24  Scrupula. 
'  48  Oboli. 

BoMAir  Corns. 

These  were  the  Tiruncius,  Sembella,  and  As  or  Llbella,  of  copper;  the  Ses 
tertitit,  Quimrius  (or  Victdridtus),  and  Denarius,  of  silver;  and  the  Aurtms 
of  gold. 

8  Cts.  M. 

The  T6runcius 0  0  3.9 

2     Tei-nncii  make  1  Sembella 0  0  7.8 

2     SembeUae     "     1  As  or  LibeUa 0  1  5.6 

2i  Asses*         "     1  Sestertius 0  3  9 

2    Sestertii       "     1  Quinarius 0  7  8 

2     Quinarii        "     1  Denarius 0  15  6 

26    Denarii         "     1  Aureus 3  90  0 

*  Sometimes  also  (in  copper)  the  triens,  sextans,  uncia,  seztula,  and  dupondius. 

Roman  Computation  of  Money. 

Sestertii  Nummi. 

K  Cts.  M. 

Sestertius  ( or  nummus ) 0  3  9 

Decern  sestertii 0  39  0 

Centum  sestertii 3  90  0 

MLUe  sestertii  (equal  to  a  sestertiura) 39  0  0 

Setiertia. 

Sestertium  (equal  to  mille  sestertii) 39  0  0 

Decern  sestertia 390  0  0 

Centum,  centum  sestertia,  or  centum  millia  sestertiAm 3900  0  0 

Decies  sestertium,  or  decies  centena  mUlia  nummum 39000  0  0 

Centies,  or  centies  ii.  s 390000  0  0 

Millies  H.  s 3900000  0  0 

Millies  centies  h.  s 4290000  0  0 

N.  B.— The  marks  denoting  a  Sestertius  nummua  are  ns.,  LLS.,  HS.,  which  are  pro 
perly  abbreviations  for  2  1-2  a,«se3.  Observe,  also,  that  when  a  line  is  plaoed  over  th« 
numbers,  centena  miUia  is  understood,  as  in  the  case  of  the  numeral  adverbs;  thus,  H.  3. 

MC.  is  milUes  centies  HS. ;  whereas  HS.  MC.  is  only  1100  Sestertii. 

KoMAN   Calculation  of  Intekest. 

The  Romans  received  interest  on  their  loans  monthly,  their  highest  rate  t^ 
mg  one  ])or  cent,  {centesimn),  a  month,  i.  e.  12  per  cent  a  year.  As  tliis  was 
the  hi^rhest  rate,  it  was  recl^oned  as  the  as  or  unit  in  reference  to  the  lower 
rates,  wliich  were  denominated,  according  to  the  usual  division  of  the  as,  sem,i»- 
te*,  trieiites,  quddrantts,  etc.,  i.  e.  the  half;  third,  fourth,  etc.,  of  the  as  or  of 
?2  per  cent,  according  to  the  following  tabid: — 


372  APPENDIX. — TABLES  OF  MONET,  WEIGHT,  ETC.        §  S27 

Per  cent,  a  year. 

Asses  Qsursa  or  centeslmse 12 

•  Semisses  usurse 6 

Trientes  usur« 4 

Quadrantes  usuteb 8 

Sextantes  usurae 2 

Uncias  usurse * 1 

Quincunces  usurse 6 

Septunces  usurae 7 

Besses  usurse 8 

•    Dodrantes  usuras 9 

Dextantes  nsiirae 10 

Deunces  usurse 11 

Roman  Weights- 

Oi.  Dwte.    Gr. 

Siliqua 0      0      8.036 

8    SlliqusB  make  1  Obolus 0      0      9.107 

2  Oboli        "      1  Scrupulum. ...     0      0  18.214 

3  Sorupula  "      1  Drachma 0      2      6.643 

1 J  Drachma  "      1  Sextula 0      3      0.867 

IJ  Sextula    "      1  Sicfficus 0      4  13.286 

IJ  SlcIUcus  "      1  DueUa 0      6      1.714 

8    DueUse      "      1  Uncia 0    18      5.143 

12    Unci®       "      1  Libra*  (As) . . .  10    18  13.714 

*  The  Libra  was  also  divided,  according  to  the  fractions  of  the  Aa,  into  Deunx,  eto. 


BoxAN  Measubks  fob  Things  Det. 


English  Corn  Measure. 


Peck. 

Llgula 0 

4    Ll^se  make  1  Cyathus 0 

IJ  Cyathus    "       1  Acetabulum.. .  0 

4    Acetabula"       1  Hemina 0 

2    HeminsB    "       1  Sextarius 0 

16    Sextarii    "       1  Modius 1 


Oal. 

Pint. 

Sol.  in. 

0 

0  1-48 

0.01 

0 

0  1-12 

0.04 

0 

0  1-8 

0.06 

0 

0  1-2 

0.24 

0 

1 

0.48 

0 

0 

7.68 

Roman  Mkasitkbs  fob  Things  Liquid. 

English  Wine  Measure. 

OallB.  Pints.  Sol.  in. 

Ligula 0  01-48  0.117 

4    LIgulse    make    1  Cyathus 0  0  1-12  0.469 

li  Cyathus     "       1  Acetabulum 0  0  1-8  0.704 

2    Acetabula"        1  Qnartarius 0  0  1-4  1.409 

2     Quartarii     "        1  Hemina 0  0  1-2  2.876 

2    Heminae      "        1  Sextarius* 0  1  5.636 

6     Sextarii      "        1  Congius 0  7  4.942 

4     Congii          "        1  Uma 8  41-2  5.33 

2    Umae          "  '     1  Amphora  (or  Qnadrantal) .      7  1  10.66 

20    Amphorae    "        1  Culeus 143  3  11.095 

*  The  Sextarius  was  also  di-vided  into  twelve  equal  parts,  called  cyithi,  and  therefore 
the  eatices  were  denominated  sextantes,  quadrantes,  tnentes,  according  to  the  number  of 
tyathi  which  they  contained. 

N.  B. —  Cidus,  congiSrius,  and  ddlium,  are  the  names  of  certain  vesseh,  not  measures, 
if  capacity. 


§  327.        APPENDIX. — TABLES  OF  MONET,  WEIGHT,  ETC. 


373 


BoMAK  Measures  of  Length. 

Knglish 
paces. 

Digitus  transversns 0 

1 1-6  Digitus  make  1  Uncia 0 

3  UnciiB  "       1  Palmus  minor. ...        0 

4  Palmi  mlnores    "       1  Pes 0 

1  1-4  Pes  "       1  PalmTpes 0 

1  1-5  Palmipes  "       1  Cubitus 0 

12-3  Cubitus  "       1  Gradus 0 

2  Gradus  "       1  Passus 0 

126        Passus  "       1  Stadium 120 

8         Stadia  "       1  Milliarium 967 


Veet. 

Inch.  Deo 

0 

0.725  1-4 

0     . 

0.967 

0 

2.901 

0 

11.604 

1 

2.505 

1 

6.406 

2 

5.01 

4 

10.02 

4 

4.5 

0 

0 

Roman  Square  Mkasuees. 

Roman  English 

sq.  feet.  rods.     Sq.  pis.  Sq.  feet. 

JQgerum  (As) 28,800  2  18  250.06 

Deunx 26,400  2  10  183.85 

Dextans 24,000  2  02  117.64 

Dodrans 21,600  1  34  51.42 

Bes 19,200  1  25  257.46 

Septunx 16,800  1  17  191.25 

Semis 14,400  1  09  125.03 

Quincunx 12,000  1  01  68.82 

Triens 9,600  0  32  264.85 

.     Quadrans 7,200  0  24  198.64 

Sextans 4,800  0  16  132.43 

Uncia 2,400  0  08  66.21 

Remark  1.  The  Romans  reckoned  their  copper  money  by  asse», 
ineir  silver  money  by  sestertii^  and  their  gold  money  by  aurei  and 
Bometimes  by  Attic  talents. 

Rem.  2.  The  as,  as  the  unit  of  money,  was  originally  a  poimd  of  copper, 
but  its  weight  was  gradually  diminished,  until,  in  the  later  days  of  the  repub- 
lic, it  amounted  to  only  l-24th  of  a  pound. 

Rem.  3.  (a.)  The  denarius  was  a  silver  coin,  originally  equal  in  value  to  ten 
asses,  whence  its  name ;  but,  after  the  weight  of  the  as  was  reduced,  the  dena- 
rius was  equal  to  eighteen  asses. 

(b.)  The  sestertius,  or  sesterce,  was  one  fourth  of  the  denarius,  or  two  asses 
and  a  half  (semistertius).  The  sestertius  was  called  emphatically  nummus,  as  in 
it  all  large  sums  were  reckoned  after  the  coining  of  sUver  money. 

(c.)  The  aureus  (a  gold  coin),  in  the  time  of  the  emperors,  was  equal  to  26 
denarii,  or  100  sesterces. 

Rem.  4.  In  reckoning  money,  the  Romans  called  any  sum  under  200(3  ses- 
terces so  many  sestertii ;  as,  decern  sestertii,  ten  sesterces ;  centum  sestertii,  a 
hundred  sesterces. 

Rem.  5.  Sums  from  2000  sesterces  (inclusive)  to  1,000,000,  they  denoted 
either  by  mille,  millia,  with  sestei-tiUm  (gen.  plur.),  or  by  the  plural  of  the 
neuter  noun  sestertium,  which  itself  signified  a  thousand  sesterces.  Thus  they 
jaid  quadrdyinta  millia  sestertiUm,  or  quadraninta  sestertia,  to  denote  40,000 
sesterces.  With  the  genitive  sestertium,  millia  was  sometimes  omitted;  as, 
teslertihm  centum,  scil.  millia,  100,000  sesterces. 

•  Rem.  6._  To  denote  a  million,  or  more,  they  used  a  combination;  thus,  dicies 
ctntma  millia  sesterii&m,  1,000,000  sesterces.  The  words  centena  millia,  how- 
ever, were  generally  omitted ;  \\\\\%,  lUcies  sesterti&m,  and  sometimes  merely 
dides   See  ^  118,  5.     So,  centies,  10  millions;  millies,  100  miUious. 


574 


APPENDIX. ABBREVIATIONS. 


§  328,  329. 


Rem.  V .  Some  suppose  that  sestertium,  when  thua  joined  with  the  numeral  adreibs,  it 
tlways  tlie  neuter  noun  in  the  nominative  or  accusative  eiugular.  The  genitive  and  ab- 
lative of  that  noun  are  thus  UBed;  as,  Decies  sestertii  dote,  With  a  dowry  of  1,000,000 
Besteroes.  Tac.  Quinquagies  sestertio,  5,000,000  sestercea.  Id.  But  this  usage  does  no! 
occur  in  Cicero. 

ABBREVIATIONS. 

§  328.     The  following  are  the  most  common  abbreviations  of 
Latin  words : — 


A.,  Aulus. 

C,  Caiw,  or  Gains. 

Cn.,  Cnclls. 

D.,  Becimus. 

L.,  Lucius. 

M.,  Marcus. 


A.  d.,  ante  diem. 

A.  U.  C,  anrw  urbis  con- 
duce. 

Cal.,  or  Kal.,  Calendce. 

Cos.,  Consul. 

Coss.,  Gonsules. 

D.,  Dlvus. 

D.  D.,  dono  didit. 

0.  D.  D.,  dat,  dicat,  dedi- 
cate or  dono  <Acat,  de- 
dicat. 

Des.,  desi^ndtus. 

D.  M.,  diis  mdnibus. 

Eq.  Rom.,  egues  Romanus. 


M.  T.  C,  Marcus  Tidlius  Q.,  or  Qu.j  Quintus. 

Ciciro.  Ser.,  Sermus. 

M.,  Mdnius.  S.,  or  Sex.,  Sextus. 

Mam.,  Mamercus.  Sp.,  SpHrius. 

N.,  Numii'itis.  T.,  Titus. 

P.,  Publius.  Ti.,  o»-  Tib.,  Tihh-ius. 


F.,    Filius;    as,  M.   F., 

Marci  filius. 
Ictus,  jUrisconsultus. 
Id.,  Idus. 
Imp.,  impSrdtor. 
J.    0.   M.,    J(5ot,    Optimo 

maximo. 
N.,  nepos. 
Non.,  NoncB. 
P.  C,  patres  conscripti. 
PL,  plebis. 
Pop.,  pdpulus. 
P.  K.,  pdpulus  Romanus. 


Pont.    Max.,      ^wnOfea 

Pr.,  prcBior. 

Proc,  proconsul. 

Resp.,  respOhlica. 

S.,   sdlUlem,    sacrum,    or 

S.   D.   P.,    s&lutem    dicU 

pMrimam. 
S.  P.  Q.  R.,  Senatus p6pii- 

lusgue  Romanus. 
S.  C,  sendtds  consultum. 
Tr.,  tribUnus. 


To  these  may  be  added  terms  of  reference ;  as,  c,  caput,  chapter ;  c/".,  confer, 
compare;  I.  c,  JJco  citato;  I.  I.,  l6co  laudato,  in  the  place  quoted;  v.,  versus, 
verse. 


DIFFERENT  AGES  OF  ROMAN  LITERATURE. 

§  0.^9.  1.  Of  the  Roman  literature  for  the  first  five  centuries  after  the 
foundation  of  the  city,  but  few  vestiges  remain.  The  writers  of  the  succeed- 
ing centuries  have  been  arranged  in  four  ages,  in  reference  to  the  purity  of 
the  language  in  the  period  in  which  they  flourished.  These  are  called  the 
golden,  silver,  brazen,  and  iron  ages. 

2.  The  golden  age  is  reckoned  from  the  time  of  Livius  Andronicus,  about 
A.  U.  C.  514,  to  the  d^eath  of  Au^stus,  A.  U.  C.  767,  or  A.  D.  14,  a  period 
of  a  little  more  than  250  years.  The  writers  of  the  early  part  of  this  age  are 
valued  rather  on  account  of  their  antiquity,  and  in  connection  with  the  his- 
tory of  the  language,  than  as  models  of  style.  It  was  not  till  the  age  of 
Cicero,  that  Roman  literatiu-e  reached  its  highest  elevation.  The  era  com- 
prehending the  generation  immediatel}'  preceding,  and  that  immediately  suc- 
ceeding, that  of  Cicero,  as  well  as  his  own,  is  the  period  m  which  the  most 
distinguished  write 's  of  Rome  flourished;  and  their  works  are  the  staiidard  of 
»>urity  in  the  Lsvtin  language. 


329. 


APPENDIX. WRITERS    IN    DIFFERENT    AGES. 


375 


3.  The  silver  age  extended  from  the  death  of  Augustus  to  the  death  of 
Trajan,  A.  I).  118,  a  period  of  104  years.  The  writers  of  this  age  were  inferioi 
to  those  who  had  preceded  them ;  yet  several  of  them  are  worthy  of  com- 
mendation. 

4.  The  brazen  age  con-prised  the  interval  from  the  death  of  Trajan  to  the 
time  when  Rome  was  taken  by  the  Goths,  A.  D.  410.  From  the  latter  epoch 
commenced  the  iron  age,  during  which  the  Latin  language  was  much  adulter- 
ated with  foreign  words,  and  its  style  and  spirit  essentially  injured. 

5.  The  body  of  Latin  writings  has  been  otherwise  arranged  by  Dr.  Freund^ 
BO  as  to  be  comprised  in  three  main  periods, — the  Ante-classical,  Classical,  and 
Post^lassical.  The  ante-classical  extends  from  the  oldest  fragments  of  the 
language  to  Lucretius  and  Varro;  the  classical  from  Cicero  and  CaBsar  to 
Tacitus,  Suetonius,  and  the  younger  Pliny  inclusive;  the  post-classical  from 
that  time  to  the  fifth  century  of  our  era.  The  classical  Latinity  is  subdivided 
into  (a.)  Ciceronian,  (6.)  Augustan,  (c.)  post-Auyustan,  and  to  the  language  of 
the  fourth  and  fifth  centuries  he  has  given  the  title  of  late  Latin. 


LATIjjf    WRITERS    IN    THE    DIFFERENT    AGES 


(From  the  Lexicon  of  Facciolatus.) 


WRITERS    OF   THE    GOLDEN    AGE. 


Livius  Andronicus. 

L.  Cornelius  Sisenna. 

Q.  Novius. 

Lasvius. 

P.  Nigidius  Figulus. 

C.  Q.  Atta. 

C.  Nffivius. 

C.  Decius  Laberius. 

L.  Cassius  Hemina. 

Statins  Cascilius. 

M.  Verrius  Flaccus. 

Fenestella. 

Q.  Ennius. 

Varro  Attacinus. 

Q.  Claud.  Quadrigarius. 

M.  Pacuvius. 

Titinins. 

Ccelius   Antipater. 

L.  Accius. 

L.  Pomponius. 

Fabius  Pictor. 

C.  Lucilius. 

C.  Sempronius  Asellio. 

Cn.  Gelhus. 

Sex.  Turpilius. 

Cn.  Matius. 

L.  Piso,  and  others. 

L.  Afranius. 

Of  the  works  of  the 

preceding  writers,  only  a  few 

fragments  remain. 

M.  Porcius  Gate. 

Sex.  Aurelius  Propertius. 

P.  Ovidius  Naso. 

M.  Accius  Plautus. 

C.  Sallustius  Crispus. 

Q.  Horatius  Flaccus. 

M.  Terentius  Afer. 

M.  Terentius  Varro. 

C.  Pedo  Albinovanns. 

T.  Lucretius  Cams. 

Albius  Tibullus. 

Gratius  FaUscus. 

C.  V^alerius  P-ituIIus. 

P.  Virgilius  Marc. 

Phaedrus. 

P.    SjTUS. 

T.  Livius. 

C.  Comificius. 

C   Julius  Csesai 

M.  Manilius. 

A.  Hurtius,  or  Oppius. 

C.  Cornelius  Nepoa. 

M.  Vitruvius. 

P.  Cornelius  Severus. 

M.  TuJlius  Cicero. 

To  these  may  be  added  the  following  names  of  lawyers,  whose  opinions  are 
fraud  in  the  digests : — 


Q.  Mutius  Scaevola. 
Alfenus  Varus. 


M.  Antistius  Labeo. 


Masurins  Sabinus. 


01  the  writers  of  the  golden  age^he  most  distinguished  are  Terence,  Catot 
li's,  Claesar,  Nepos.  Cia'«ro,  Virgfl,  Horace,  Ovid,  T.  Livy,  and  Sallust 


376 


APPENDIX. WRITERS    IN    DIFFERENT    AGES. 


§  329 


WRITERS   OF  THE   SILVER  AGE. 


A. 
P. 
J.. 


A. 

Q. 
M. 
L. 


Cornelius  Celsus. 
Velleius  Paterculus. 
Junius     Moderatus 

Columella. 
Pomponius  Mela. 
Persius  Flaccus. 
Asconius  Pediauus. 
Annseus  Seneca. 
Annseus  Seneca. 


M.  Annseus  Lucanus. 
T.  Petronius  Arbiter. 
C.  Plinius  Secundus. 
C.  Silius  Italicus. 
C.  Valerius  Flaccus. 

C.  Julius  Solinus. 

D.  Junius  Juvenalis. 
P.  Papinius  Statins. 
M.  Valerius  IVlart'ialis. 


M.  Fabius  Quintilianus. 
Sex.  Julius  Frontinus. 
C.  Cornelius  Tacitus. 
C.  Plinius  Csecilius  S» 

cundus. 
L.  Annseus  Floras. 
C.  Suetonius    TranqTiil 

lus. 


The  age  to  which  the  following  writers  should  be  assigned  is  somewhat  on. 
certain : — 

Scribonius  Largus.  L.  Fenestella. 


Q.  Curtius  Rufus. 

Valerius  Probus.  Sulpitia. 


Atteius  Capito. 


Of  the  writers  of  the  silver  age,  the  most  distinguished  are  Celsus,  Velleius, 
Columella,  the  Senecas,  the  Plinies,  Juvenal,  QuintDian,  Tacitus,  Suetonius, 
and  Curtius. 

WRITERS   OF   THE   BRAZ5eN  AGE. 


A.  Gellius. 

L.  Apuleius. 

Q.  Septimius    Tertullia- 

nus. 
Q.  -Serenus      Sammoni- 
cus. 
Censorinus. 
Thascius     Caecilius 
Cyprianus. 
T.  Julius  Calpumius. 
M.  AureliusNemesianus. 
.^lius  Spartianiis. 
Julius  Capitoliuus. 
^lius  Lampridius. 


Vulcatius  Gallic  anus. 

Trebellius  Pollio. 

Flavins  Vopiscus. 

Ccelius  Aurelianus 

Flavins  Eutropius. 

Rhemnius  Fannius. 

Amobius  Afer. 
L.  Ccelius  Lactantius. 

.Slius  Donatus. 
C.  Vettus  Juvencus. 

Julius  Firmicns. 
Fab.  Marius  Victorinus. 
Sex.  Rufus,    or     Rufus 
Festus. 


Ammianus   Marcel- 

linus. 
Vegetius  Renatus. 
Aurel.  Theodorus  Macro« 

bius. 
Q.  Aurelius  Symmachus 
D.  Magnus  Ausonius. 
Paulinus  Nolanus. 
Sex.  Aurelius  Victor. 
Aurel.   Prudentius    els' 

mens. 
CI   Claudianus. 

MarceUus  Empiricui 
Falconia  Proba. 


Of  an  Age  not  etUirely  certat». 


Valerius  Maximus. 
Jastinus. 


Terentianus  Maurus. 
Minutius  Felix. 


Sosipater  Charisiwi. 
^''lavius  Avi&aus. 


The  opinions  of  the  following  lawyers  are  found  in  the  digests : — 


Licinius  Prociilus. 
Neratius  Prisons. 
P.  Juventius  Celsus. 
Priscus  Jabolenus. 
Domitius  Ulpianus. 


Herennius  Modestinus. 
Salvius  Jnlianus. 
Caius. 
Callistratus. 
jEmilius  Papinianus. 


Julius  Paulus. 
Sex.  Pomponius. 
Venuleius  Saturuirm^ 
jElius  Marcianus. 
.^lius  GaUus,  and  other* 


Of  the  wi-iters  of  the  brazen  age,  Justin,  Terentianus,  Victor,  Lactantius, 
and  Claudian,  are  most  distinguished. 

Th  8  age  to  which  the  following  writsrs  belong  is  uncertain.  The  style  of 
some  of  them  would  entitle  them  to  be  ranked  with  the  writers  of  the  preced- 
ing ages,  while  that  of  others  would  place  them  even  below  those  of  tne  iron 


§329. 


APPENDIX. WRITERS    IN    DIFFERENT    A.GES. 


377 


PaUadius  RutUius  Tau- 
rus ^milianus. 

^inilius  Macer. 

Messala  Corvinus. 

Vibius  Sequester. 

Julius  Obsequens. 

L.  Ampelius. 

Apicius  Coelius. 

Sex.  Pompeius  Festus. 

Probus  (auctor  Nota- 
rum.) 

Fulgentius  Planci&des. 

Hj'ginus. 

C.  Caesar  Germanicus. 

P.  Victor. 

P.  Vegetius. 


Auctores  Priapeiorum. 

Catalecta  Virgilii  et 
Ovidii. 

Auctor  orationis  SallustH 
in  Cic.  et  Ciceronis  in 
Sail. ;  item  illius  Anti- 
qttam  irei  in  eauiliwn. 

Auctor  Epistolae  ad  Oo- 
tavium. 

Auctor  Panegyrlci  ad 
Pisonem. 

Declamationes  quae  tri- 
buuntur  Quintiliano, 
Porcio  Latroni,  Calpur- 
nio  Flacco. 


Interpres  Daretis  Phry- 
gii,    et    Dictyos    Ore- 

teusis. 
ScholiastfE  Veteres. 
Grammatici  Antiqui. 
Ehetores  Antiqui. 
Medici  Antiqui. 
Catalecta  Petroniana. 
Pervigilium  Veneris. 
Poeniatia  et  Epigramm*i 

ta  Vetera  a  Pithseo  col- 

lecta. 
Monumentum     Ancyra* 

num. 
Fasti  Consulares. 
Inscriptiones  Veteres. 


WRITERS  OF  THE  IRON  AGE. 


01.  Rutilius  Numatianus. 
Servius  Honoratus. 
D.  Hieronymus. 
D.,Augustimis. 
Sulpicius  Severus. 
Paulus  Orosius. 
Ccplius  Sedulius. 
Codex  Theodosianus. 
Martiauus  CapeUa. 
Claudianus  Mamertus. 
Ridoniu')  ApoUinaris. 


Latinus  Pacatus. . 
Claudius  Mamertinus,  et 

alii,  quorum  sunt  Pan- 

egyrici  veteres. 
Alcimus  Avitus. 
Manl.     Severinus     Bofi- 

thius.        f 
Priscianus. 
Nonius  MarcelluB. 
JuBtiniani     InatitatiocM 

et  God«x 


Ruf.  Festus  Avienus. 
Arator. 

M.  Aurelius  Cassidoms. 
Fl.  Cresconius  Corippus, 
Venantius  Fortunatus. 
Isidorus  Hispaleusis. 
Anonymus  Ravennas. 
Aldhelmus  or  Althelmu* 
Paulas  Diaconu*. 


83* 


i  N  D  E  X  . 


The  fijfures  In  the  fol  owing  Index  designate  the  Sections  and  their  divisions :  e.  stands 
for  remark,  N  for  nctt,  ■.  for  exception,  w.  for  with,  and  pr.  for  frosody. 


A,  sound  of,  7  and  8';  nouns  in,  of  Ist 
deol.,  41;  gender  of,  41;  of  8d  decl.  gender 
of,  66;  genitive  of,  68,  2;  in  ace.  sing,  of 
masc.  and  fern.  Greek  nouns,  79  and  80; 
in  nom.  ace.  ar,d  voc.  plur.  of  all  neuter 
nouns,  adjectives  and  participles,  40,  8; 
83,1.;  85;  87;  105,2;  verbals  in,  102,  6,  (c); 
change  of  in  compd.  verbs,  189;  increment 
in,  3d  decl.,  287,  3;  in  plur.,  288;  of  verbs, 
290;  ending  the  first  part  of  compds.,  286, 
B.  4;  final,  quautitj-  of,  294. 

A,  ah.  ribs,  how  used,  195,  B.  2,  and  10; 
in  composition,  196,  i.,  1;  before  the  abl. 
of  distance,  236,  R.  6;  ah,  i/e,  or  ex,  with 
abl.  of  depriviug,  etc.,  251,  B.  1. 

Abbreviations,  328. 

AhJirii,  constr.  of,  251,  E.  2. 

Abest  mihi,  226,  B.  2;  nan  multum  abest 
gjiin.  262,  N.  7. 

Ahhinc,  253.  B.  2. 

Ablative.  37;  sing.  3d  decl.,  82;  of  adjs. 
of  3d  decl.,  113;  plur.  Ist  decl.,  40,  r.  6, 
and  43;  2d  decl.,  40,  a.  6;  3d  decl.,  84;  4th 
decl.,  89,5;  used  adverbially,  192,  i.,n. ; 
of  character,  quality,  etc.,  2ll,  R.  6;  after 
prepositions,  241;  after  compd.  verbs,  242; 
after  o]nts  and  asus,  243;  after  dignua,  etc. 
244;  after  utor,  etc.,  245,  l. ;  after  nitor, 
etc.,  245,  n. ;  after  parts,  denoting  origin, 
246;  of  cause,  etc.,  247;  of  means  and 
agent,  248 ;  of  means,  249,  I. ;  of  accord- 
ance, 249,  u. ;  of  accompaniment,  249,  in. ; 
denoting  in  what  respect,  250;  after  adjec- 
tives of  plenty  or  want,  250,  2,  (1.);  after 
verbs  of  abounding,  etc.,  250,  2,  (2.);  after 
fftno  and  sum.  250,  R.  3;  after  verbs  of  de- 
priving, etc.,  251;  of  price,  252;  of  time 
when,  253;  of  place  where,  254;  of  place 
whence,  255.  1;  of  place  by  or  through 
which  255,  2 ;  after  comparatives,  256 ;  of 
degree  of  difference,  256,  R.  16;  abl.  ab.so- 
lute,  257;  how  translated,  257,  N.  1;  equiv- 
alent to  what,  257.  K.  1;  only  with  pres. 
and  perf.  parts.,  257,  R.  2;  without  a  parti- 
ciple. 2.")".  R.  7;  with  a  clause,  257,  R.  8; 
how  it  marks  the  time  of  an  action,  256, 
E.  4;  noun  wanting,  256,  E.  9. 

Abounding  and  wanting,  verbs  of,  with  I 
abl.  256    with  gen.  220,  (3.)  I 


"About  to  do,"  how  expressed,  162,  H, 
"abo\»ttobe  done,"  how  expressed,  162. 
14,  R.  4. 

Abstineo,  w.  abl.,  251,  n.;  vix  or  i^-^-re  ah 
stineo.  quin,  262,  N.  7. 

Abstract  nouns,  26 ;  formation  from  adjs 
101;  their  terminations,  101,  land  2,  (3.); 
from  verbs.  102. 

Abnndo,2bO,  (2.)  R.  1. 

-abus,  dat.  and  abl.  plur.  in,  43. 

Ac  or  atque,  198,  1,  R.  (h.)  and  2.  R. ;  in 
stead  of  ijriani.  256,  R.  15;  ac  si  withsubj. 
263,  2,  and  R. 

Acatalectic  ver.se,  304,  3,  (1.) 

Accent  in  English,  16;  place  of  secondary 
accent,  16,  1  and  2 ;  in  Latin,  14  and  15 ; 
of  dissyllables,  14.  4;  of  polysyllables,  14, 
4,  and  15 — written  accents,  5,  2,  and  14,  2. 

Accentuation,  14r— 16. 

Accidents  of  nouns,  26,  7;  of  verbs,  141. 

Accipio,  w.  part,  in  diis,  274,  R.  7. 

Accompaniment,  abl.  of,  249,  in. 

Accordance,  abl.  of,  249,  n. 

Achi'Vom  for  Achivormn ,  53. 

-acis,  genitives  in,  78.  2,  (1.) 

Accusative,  37;  sing.,  terminal  letter  of 
in  masculines  and  feminines,  40,  2 ;  plural, 
terminal  letter  of  in  do.,  40,  7;  of  3d  decl., 
79;  of  Greek  nouns.  80;  plur.  3d  decl.,  85; 
do.  of  adjs.  of  3d  decl.,  114;  neuter  in  all 
declensions,  sing  and  plur.,  40.  8;  in  fwi 
and  im,  79;  of  Greek  nouns  in  im.  in,  or  a, 
79,  (6.)  and  80;  in  idem,  80,  e.  1;  in  yyn  or 
yn,  80,  n. ;  in  ea,  80,  m. ;  in  etem,  eia,  cti, 
or  en,  80,  rv. ;  neuter  used  adverbially,  192, 
n.,  4,  and  205,  R.  10 ;  ace.  after  verbs,  229— 
234;  omitted,  229,  r.  4:  inf.  or  a  clause  i;i- 
stead  of.  229,  R.  5;  of  a  person  after  nnsfni. 
etc.,  229,  R.  6;  after  jm-at,  etc.,  229,  R.  7; 
after  neuter  verbs,  232;  after  compound 
verbs,  233;  after  verbal  nouns  and  verl.'al 
adjs.,  233,  n.;  of  part  affected,  234,  n. ;  a 
limiting  ace.  instead  of  the  abl.  in  partim, 
vicem,  cetera,  etc.,  234,  n.,  R.  3;  after  pre- 
positions, 235;  of  time  and  space,  2."fi ;  of 
place,  237;  after  adverbs  and  ir'terject'ons, 
238;  ace.  as  subject,  239;  ace.  of  the  thing 
supplied  by  the  inf.,  270,  N.,  lu'c.  w.  inf., 
272;   do.   exchanged  for   the    sul^vnstive 


INDEX. 


379 


E7S,  8. — two  aocusatives  after  certain  verbs, 
230  and  231;  ace.  of  thing  retained  in  pas- 
five  voice,  234;  place8  supplied  by  infini- 
tives, 229,  H.2;  pred.  ace.  how  supplied, 
ib.  N.  4. 

Accusing  and  acquitting,  verba  of,  oonstr., 
217,  and  b.  4. 
Accusn.  constr.,  217,  and  B.  2 — 5. 
Acephalous  verse.  304,  3,  (3.) 
Acer,  declined,  108,  I. 
Achilles,  declined,  86. 
Acquiesco,  245,  il.,  3. 
Acute  accent,  5,  2,  and  14,  2  ;  when  used, 

1  a%  O. 

Active  voice.  141. 

Active  verb,  141 ;  used  impersonally,  184, 

2  ;  object  of  act.  verb,  229  ;  two  jases  after, 
229,  R.  1 ;  verb  omitted,  229,  r.  3. 

Afl,  how  used,  195.  r.  5 ;  in  composition, 
196.  1.2;  construction  of  verbs  compound- 
ed \vith,  224 ;  a'/  used  for  in,  224,  R.  4. 
Adde  quod,  273,  N.  8. 
Additions  to  simple  subject,  202,  6,  etc.  ; 
to  simple  predicate,  203,  6,  etc. 

Adeo,  adv.,  191,  R.  5 ;  adeo  non,  277,  r. 
14.— verb,  constr.,  2*3.  3,  and  N. 
-odes,  patronymics  in,  100,  1,  (a.) 
Adest.  1/1(1,  with  subj.,  264,  6. 
Adhuc  luconim,  212,  R.  4,  N.  4. 
Adipiscor,  w.  gen.,  220,  ijin. 

Adjectives,  104 — 131 ;  classes  of,  104,  1 

16  ;  declension  cf,  105  ;  of  1st  and  2d  decls 
105—107  :  of  Sd  declension,  108—114  ;  of 
three  termiuahons.  108 ;  of  two  termina- 
tions, 109,  110  ;  of  one  termination.  111 ; 
their  gen.  sing.,  112  ;  their  abl.  sing.  113  ; 
their  nom.,  ace.,  and  gen.  plur.,  114  ;  irreg- 
ular, 115—116  ;  defective,  115  ;  redundant, 
116  ;  numeral,  117—121 ;  cardinal,  117, 118  ; 
ordinal,  119,  120  ;  multiplicative,  121,  1 ; 
proportional,  121,  2;  temporal,  121,  3:  in- 
terrogative, 121,  5  ;  comparison  of,  122 — 
127;  irregular  comparison,  125;  defective 
jompari.son,  126 ;  derivation  of.  128—130 ; 
composition  of,  131 ;  ampliflcative,  128,  4  ; 
patrial,  128,  6 ;  verbal,  129 ;  participial, 
130 ;  composition  of  131 ;— how  modified, 
202,  II.,  1.  (2.) ;  agreement  of,  205  ;  quali- 
fying and  limiting,  205,  N.  1 ;  modifiers  or 
predicates,  205,  n.2;  with  two  or  more 
nouns,  205,  R.  2  ;  with  a  collective  noun, 
205,  R.  3 ;  sing,  with  a  plur.  noun,  205, 
R.  4 ;  dat.  of,  for  ace.  in  the  predicate  of 
MC.  with  the  inf.,  205,  r.  6;  without  a 
noun,  205,  r.  7 ;  with  infinitive,  a  clause, 
etc.,  205,  R.  8  :  in  the  neuter  with  gen.  of 
their  noun,  205.  r.  9.  and  212,  b.  3 ;  neuter 
»djs.  used  adverbially,  205,  R.  10  ;  gender 
of,  when  used  partitively,  205,  r.  12 ;  in 
genitive  with  po.s.sessive  adj.  or  pronoun, 
205.  R.  13:  agreeing  with  the  governing 
noun  instead  of  the  genitive,  205,  r.  14  : 
two  or  more  with  one  noun,  205,  r.  16; 
in.stead  of  an  adverb.  205,  R.  15  :  first,  last, 
etc.  part  e.xpre.s-sed  by  the  adj.  alone,  205, 
R.  17  ;  agreeing  with  relative  instead  of  its 
■.ntcccdent,  206.  (7.);  with  gen.  213;  w. 
gen.  or  abl.,  213,  r.  5  |  w.  dat.,  222  ;  w 
gen.  or  dat.,  2.13,  a.  6,  aid  222,  a.  2;  of 


plenty  or  want  with  abl.,  250  .  w.  Inf.  270, 
a.  1 ;  place  of,  279,  7.  '  ,,^ 

Adjective  pronouns,  134—139;  naturtoi; 
132.  5;  classes,  134;  agreement,  205. 

Adjective  clauses,  201,  7;  how  connect- 
ed, 201,  9. 

Adjunctive  pronoun,  135,  R.  1. 

Adjuvo  and  adjuto,  constr.,  223,  e.  2,  (2.) 

Admonishing,  verbs  of,  w.  gen .  218 ;  other 
constructions,  218,  R.  1  and  2;  273,  n.  4. 

Adolescens,  its  gender,   30;  as  adj.  how 
compared.  126,4. 

Adorning,  verbs  of,  w.  abl.,  249. 

Adonic  verse,  312. 

Adulari,  constr.,  223,  R.  2,  (h),  and  (1),  (a.\ 

Adverbial  correlatives,  191,  b  1 ; — clauseg, 
201,7,9. 

Adverbs,  190,  2—194;  primitive,  191;  of 
place  and  order.  191,  i.  ;  correlative,  191, 
R.  1 ;  of  time,  191,  ii.  :  of  manner,  quality, 
degree,  191,  in.;  division  of,  191,  H.  2;— 
derivation  of,  192 ;  numeral,  192,  ii..  3, 
and  119 ;  diminutive,  192,  iv.,  r.  ;  compo- 
sition of,  193 ;  signification  of  some  adverbs 
of  time  and  manner,  193  ; — comparison  of 
194;— how  modified,  277,  i. ;  used  as  adjec- 
tives, 205,  R.  11;  w.  gen.,  212,  r.  4;  w. 
dat..  228,  (1.);  w.  ace.,  238;  use  of,  277; 
two  negatives,  force  of,  277,  r.  3 — 5;  equiv- 
alent to  phra,ses,  277,  R.  8;  of  likeness,  aa 
connectives,  278,  r.  1;  place  of  279,  15. 

Adversative  conjunctions,  198,  9. 

AdvfTsus,  how  used,  195,  r.  7. 

M,  how  pronounced,  9. 

Miixudis,  consti-uction  of,  222,  ft.  2. 

jEque  with  abl.,  241,  b.  2;  cequt  ac.,  198, 

3,  R. 

JEqui  boni  facio  OTconsido,  214,  N.  1. 

JEquo  and  adcpquo,  construction  of,  214 ; 
CBquo,  adj.  w.  comparatives,  256,  R.  9. 

Aer,  ace.  of,  80,  R. ;  pr.  299,  K.  3. 

55olic  pentameter,  312,  ix. 

^s,  gender  of,  61,  2;  gen.  of,  73,  s.  2. 

^stimo,  constr.,  214. 

JBSther,  ace.,  80,  R. ;  pr.  299,  s.  3. 

■<pits,  adjs.  in,  128,  6,  (A.) 

JEquum  est,  ut,  262,  R.  3,  N.  2:  rpquum 
erat,  indie,  instead  of  subj.,  259,  R.  3; 
aquum  est,  with  inf.  as  subject,  209,  r.  2. 

Affatiyn,  w.  genitive,  212,  R.  4. 

Affluo,  constr.,  250,  2,  r.  1. 

Afficio,  constr.,  249,  R.  1. 

Affinis,  constr.,  222,  r.  2,  (a.) 

Ager,  declined,  46. 

Agent,  verbal  nouns  denoting,  102,  6, 
dative  of,  225,  in.,  r.  1;  248,  r.  1;  abl 
of,  248. 

Ages  of  Roman  literature,  329. 

A^ittis,  pr.  285,  1,  e.  1. 

Agnominatio,  324,  25. 

Ago  w.  gen.  of  the  crime,  217,  R.  1;— 
age  w.  plur.  subject,  183,  10 ; — id  agere  ut, 
273,  N.  1. 

AgreemeLt  defined,  203,  iii.,  6;  of  ailjs., 
etc.,  205;  of  relatives,  206. 

Ai,  how  pronounced,  9.  1. — at,  old  gen 
in,  43;  quantity  of  the  a  in  do..  2S3,  E.  3. 

Aio,  conjugated,  183,4;  ain'  for  aisne, 
ait,  elipsis  of,  209,  a.  4;  its  place  in  a  tea 
tenoe,  279,  6. 


880 


INDEX. 


•al,  abl.  of  nouns  In,  82;  Increment  of, 

287,  E.  (A.)  1.      . 

Alcaic  verse,  304,  2 ;— greater,  318,  iii.; 
lesser,  318,  iv. 

Alcmanian  Terse,  304,  2 ; — dactylic  tetra- 
meter, 312. 

•Alec,  gender  of,  66;  genitive,  70. 

Ales,  gender  of,  80  and  61,  2;  genitive 
Bing.,  73,  2;  gen.  plur.,  83,  ii.,  E.  2. 

Alex,  gender  of,  65,  2. 

Alieno,  and  abalieno,  constr.,  261,  R.  3, 
and  N. 

Alienus,  constr.,  222,  R.  1  and  6. 

AHfiuanto,  127,  2;  256,  R.  16,  (2.) 

Aiit/uantwm,  256,  r.  16,  N. 

Aliquis,  declined,  133;  how  used,  138,  2; 
207,  R.  30. 

Aliquo,  w.  gen.,  212,  R.  4,  N.  2. 

Aliquot,  indeclinable,  115,  4;  correlative, 
121,  5. 

Aliquoties,  correlative  of  quoties,  121,  5. 

-alis,  adjs.  in,  128,  2;  how  compared,  126, 
4;  alis,  old  adj.,  for  aiiiu ,  192,  ii.,  2. 

Aliter,  from  alis  for  alius,  192,  ii.,  2. 

Alius,  how  declined,  107 j  how  used,  207, 
R.  32;  alius — alium,  with  plur.  verb,  209, 
R.  11,  4;  refers  to  more  than  two.  212,  r.  2, 
N.  1,  (6.);  w.  abl.,  256,  h.  14;  pr.  283.  1, 

£.  4. 

Allegory,  324,  7. 

Alliteration,  324,  26. 

Alphabet,  2,  1. 

Alter,  how  declined,  105, 3 :  107,  and  r.  2 ; 
gen.  alterius,  quantity  of  283,  I.,  B.  4,  (6.); 
used  for  secundus,  120,  1 ;  answers  to  uter, 
139,  5,  (1.),  (6.) — altero  tanto,  w.  compara- 
tives, 256,  R.  16. 

Alteruter,  107;  139,  5,  (1.),  (b.}—alteru- 
terque,  107. 

Altus  and  alto,  w.  ace.  of  space,  236,  and 
N.  2. 

Ambi,  amb,  am,  or  an,  197,  (6.) 

Ambio,  how  conjugated,  182,  r.  3. — ambi- 
tus, pr.  285,  2,  E.  2. 

Ambo,  how  declined,  118,  r.  1. 

Amints,  constr.,  222,  r.  2,  (c.) 

Amo,  conjugated,  155,  156. 

Amphibolia,  325,  6. 

Amplificatives,  nouns,  100,  4,  (a.);  adjec- 
tives, 104,  12;  128,4. 

Amplius,  with  or  without  quam,  256,  r.  6. 

^n,  198,  U;  use  of,  198,  11,  r.  {d..  (e.); 
865,  R.  2  and  3;  an— an,  265,  R.  2. 

Anabasis,  324,  22. 

Anacoluthon,  323,  3,  (5.) 

Anacreontic  verse,  304,  2 ; — iambic  dime- 
ter, 814,  IX. 

Anadiplosis,  824, 17. 

Analysis  of  sentences,  281. 

Anapaestic  metre,  313 ;  303 ; — monometer, 
B13,  I. ;— dimeter,  313. 

Anaphora,  324,  13. 

Anastrophe,  324,  4,  (1.) 

Anas,  gen.  of,  72,  e.  1;  pr.  300,  e.  ■^,. 

Ancrps,  gen.  of,  112,  2 ;  abl.  of,  115    l.  3. 

Ancile,  93,  2. 

Anclrogeos,  declined,  54, 1. 

•aneus,  adjs.  in,  128,  8. 

Angor,  constr.,  273,  5,  N.  6 

Animal,  declined,  57. 


Animans,  gender  of^  64. 

Animo,  250. — animi  for  anim<.  „  220, 1, 
213,  R.  1,  (a.) 

Anio,  genitive  of,  69,  e.  2. 

Anne,  in  double  questions,  265,  R.  2;— 
annon,  ib. 

Annus,  compds.  of,  121,  3. 

Antanaclasis,  324,  12. 

Ante,  w.  superlatives,  127,  6;_  in  compo- 
sition, 196,  I.,  3;  construction  of  verbs 
compounded  with,  224;  with  titles,  235,  R. 
S;  with  comparatives,  256,  k.  13,  (b.)\ — 
ante  and  post  w.  ace.  and  abl.  of  time,  25?, 
R.  1;  w.  qtiam  and  a  verb,  253,  N.  3;  for 
a}>hinc,  253,  R.  2. 

Antecedent,  136;  ellipsis  of,  206,  (3.),  (4.), 
its  place  supplied  by  a  demonstrative,  206, 
3,  (a.);  in  the  case  of  the  relative,  206,  (6.), 
(6.);  implied  in  a  poseessive  pronoun,  206, 
(12);  may  be  a  proposition,  206,  (13.) 

Antecedo  and  antecello,  constr.,  256,  R 
16,  (3.) 

Antepenult,  13;  quantity  of,  292.        . 

Anlequam,  constr.,  263,  3. 

Antimeria,  323,  3,  (1.) 

Antiphrasis,  324,  10. 

Antiptosis,  323,  3,  (3.) 

Antithesis.  322;  324,27. 

Antonomasia,  324,  8. 

-anus,  adja.  in,  128,  6. 

Aorist  tense,  145,  iv.,  r. 

Apage,  183,  10. 

Apertuyn  est,  w.  inf.  as  subject,  269,  B.  2. 

Aphaeresis,  322. 

Apiscor  and  adipiscor,  w.  gen.,  220. 

Aplustre,  nom.  plur.  of,  83  and  94,  4. 

Apocope,  322. — Apodosis,  261. 

Apollo,  gen.  of,  69,  e.  2. 

Aposiopesis,  824,  33. 

Apostrophe,  324,  35. 

Apparet,  w.  inf.  as  subject,  269,  R.  2. 

Appellative  nouns,  26,  3. 

Appello,  constr.,  230,  n.  1. 

Appetens,  w.  gen.,  213,  R.  1,  (2.) 

Appendix,  822—329. 

Apposition,  204;  to  two  or  moro  nouns, 
204.  R.  5 ;  to  nouns  connected  by  cum,  204, 
R.  5,  (1.);  to  proper  names  of  different  gen- 
ders, 204,  R.  5,  (2.);  genitive  instead  of, 
204,  R.  6;  211,  R.  2,  n.  ;  abl.  with  gen.,  204, 
R.  7 ;  of  a  proper  name  with  nomen,  etc., 
204,  R.  8;  of  a  clause,  204,  R.  9;  of  part* 
with  a  whole,  204,  R.  10;  212,  r.  2,  n.  5; 
place  of  nouns  in  apposition,  279,  9. 

Apprime,  127,2;  193. 

Aptotes,  94. 

Aptus,  constr..  222,  r.  land 4,  (1.);  aptua 
qui,  w.  subj.,  264,  9;  w.  gerund,  275,  R.  2 
and  3. 

Apud,  196,  R.  6. 

-ar,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  66,  67 ;  genitiv* 
of,  70,  71;  abl.  of,  82;  increment  of,  287, 

E.  (A.)l. 

Arbitror,  in  imperf.  subj.,  260,  R.  2. 
Arbor  {-os),  gender  of,  61. 
Arceo,  w.  abl.,  251,  R.  2. 
Arcesso,  constr.,  217,  R.  1. 
Archaism,  823,  R..  (1.) 
Archilochiau   verse,  304,  2;— penthemi 
meria,  812; — iambic  trimeter,  314,  v.;  do 


INDEX. 


381 


limeter,  314,  tii.  ; — heptameter,  318,  iv. 
ArenfT,  aa  gen.  of  place,  221,  E.  3,  (4.) 
Argo,  genitive  of,  69,  b.  3. 
Argos  (-g-i),  92,  4. 
Argito,  constr.,  217,  B.  1. 
Aristophanic  Terse,  304,  2. 
-ariitm  8nd  -ariusy  nouns  and  adjs.   Id, 
100,8;  128,3;  121,4. 

Arrangement  of  words,  279 ;  poetical,  279, 
N  4;  of  clauses,  280. 
Ars,  declined,  57. 
Arsis  !ind  thesis,  308. 
Article,  wanting  in  Latin,  41,  N. 
-as,  genitives  in,  43;  nouns  inof  3ddccl., 
gender  of.  02 ;  genitive  of,  72 ;  gen.  plur.  of, 
83,  II.,  4:  in  ace.  plur.  of  Greek  nouns  of 
3d  decl.,  S.5,  E.  2. —  -as  and  -anus,  adjs.  in, 
128,  6;  -as  final,  quantity  of,  300. 

As.  value  of.  327;  how  divided,  327; — 
gender  of,  62,  e.  1;  72,  e.  1;  gender  of  p,arts 
ending  in  ns,  64,  2;  assis  non  habere,  21i, 
E.  1. 

Asclepiadic  verse,  304,  2; — tetrameter, 
316,  III. 

Asking,   verbs  of,  with  two  aces.,  231; 
constr.  in  the  pass.,  234,  I. 
Aspergo,  249.  i.  and  E.  1  and  3. 
Aspirate,  3,  1. 
Assf/iior,  ut,  273,  N.  2. 
-assn  for  -avero,  162,  9. 
nssuesco  and  assuefacio,  w.  abl.,  245,  II. ; 
w.  ilat.,  245,  II.,  R.  1. 
Asyndeton,  323,  1,  (1.) 
-at,  roots  of  nouns  in,  56,  il.,  r.  5. 
•     At,  conj.,  198,  9;  at  enim,  atqui,  198, 
9,  («.) 
-atim,  adverbs  in,  192,  i.,  1. 
Ati/tie,  composition  and  meaning,  198, 1, 
R.  (6.)     See  ac. 

Attraction,  206,  (6.);  209,  N.  Band  R.  8; 
210,  R.  6;  272,  n.  3. 
Attrihuo.  w.  participle  in  dus,  274,  B.  7. 
-atus,  adjs.  in,  128,  7. 
Au,  how  pronounced,  9,  2  and  R.  2. 
Auileo,  how  conjugated,  142,  B.  2. 
Audio,  conjugated,  160 ;  used  like  appel- 
lor, 210,  N.  2;  constr.,  272,   n.  1;  audes  for 
audiex,  183,  R.  3; — audiens,  constr.,  222, 
B.  1. 

-am,  noans  In,  gender  of,  62;  genitive 
of,  76,  B.  4. 
Ausculto,  constr.,  222,  B.  2,  (&.),  and  (1.), 

(«•) 

Ausim,  183,  r.  1. 

Aut  a.nii  vel,  Ids,  2,  R.  (a.);  aut  and  i'<, 
198,  2.  R.  (r/.);  aut— out,  198.2,  R.  («.); 
aut  with  the  singular,  209,  r.  12,  (5.) 

Autem,KH,d;  its  position,  279,  3,  e.); 
rillpsis  of  278,  R.  11.  • 

Authority,  in  prosody,  282,  4. 

Au.xiliary  verb,  153. 

-av  and  -atu  in  the  2d  and  3d  roots  of 
verbs  164. 

Avarus,  with  gen.,  213,  R.  1. 
■    yl(v.lS3.  8. 

Avidus,  with  gen.  213,  R.  1;  w.  gen.  of 
gerund,  275,  (2.)-  w.  inf.  poetically,  270, 

il. 

•iK,  nouns  in,  gen.  of,  78,  2,  (1.);  adjs. 
in,  129,  6;  verbals  in  with  geu.,  213,  a.  1. 


B. 

i 

B,  roots  of  nouns    ending  in.    66,   I. 

changed  to  p.,  171,  2. 

Balneum,  plur.  -ea  or  -ece,  92,  6. 

Barbarism,  325,  1. 

Barbiton,  declined,  64,  1. 

Belle,  belUssime,  192,  iv.  R. 

Belli,  construed  like  names  of  towns,  ^^1. 
R.  3;  if  Ho,  253. 

Bene,  derivation,  192,  II.,  1;  constr.  ol 
its  compounds,  225,  i. ;  bene  est,  w.  dat., 
228,1;  bene,  w.  ace,  239,  R.  2;  with  verb* 
of  price,  252,  e.  3. 

-ber,  names  of  months  in,  how  declined, 
71  and  108. 

Bes,  gen.  of,  73,  b.  2. 

Bibi,  pr.,  284,  e.,  (1.) 

Bicorpor,  abl.  of,  113,  E.  2;  115,  1,  {a.) 

Biduum,  triduum,  ete.,  biennium,  etc., 
121,2. 

-bilis,  adjs.  in,  129,  4;  how  compared, 
126,  4;  with  dative,  222,  r.  1. 

Bimestris,  113,  E.  1. 

Bipes,  genitive  of,  112,  1;  abl.  of,  113, 
E.  2;   115,  1,  (a.) 

Bonus,  declined,  105,  2;  compared,  125, 
5;  boni  consulo,  214,  n.  1. 

Bos,  dat.  and  abl.  plur.  of,  84,  E.  1;  286, 
5;  gender  of,  30;  genitive  of,  75,  e.  1;  gen. 
plur.,  83,  II.,  E.  1. 

■br,  roots  of  nouns  in,  56,  ii.,  R.  3. 

Brachyeatalectic  verse,  304,  3,  (2.) 

Brazen  age  of  lloman  literature,  329,  4. 

-bru7n,  verbals  in,  102,  5. 

Bucolic  csesura,  310,  6,  r.  4. 

-bulum,  verbals  in,  102,  5. 

-bundus,  adjs.  in,  129,  1;  comparison  oi, 
126,  5 ;  wUh  ace,  233,  n. 

C. 

C,  sound  of,  10;  before  s  in  roots  ot 
nouns,  56,  i.,  r.  2;  in  roots  of  verbs,  171,1; 
gender  of  nouns  in,  66;  genitive  of,  70; 
c  final,  quantity  of,  299,  4 ;  C.  for  Caius, 
i.  q.  Gaius,  328. 

CfElebs,  112,2;  in  abl.  sing..  113,  k.  2; 
115,  1,  (a.) 

Caesura,  309 ;  kinds  of,  309 ;  in  hexametei 
verse,  310,  3;  Ccesural  pause,  309,  3;  in 
hexameter  verse,  4 — 6 ;  in  pentameter  ver.se, 
311.2;  in  iambic  verse,  314,  l.andx. ;  in 
trochaic  verse,  315,  l ;  in  choriambic  verse, 
316,  HI. 

Cnlco,  change  of  a  to  «  in  its  compds., 
189,  N.  3. 

Calendar,  Roman,  326,  6. 

Oalends,  326. 

Callidus,  270,  r.  1 ;  213,  r.  1. 

Canalis,  abl.  of,  82,  5,  (c.) 

Cano  receptui,  227.  R.  2. 

Capax,  w.  genitive,  213,  r.  1.  (1.),  and 
R.  5,  (1.) 

Crifiio.  conjugated,  169;  adjs.  compuund 
cd  of,  112.  2. 

Capital  letters,  how  used  by  the  Romany 
2,  2;  as  numerals,  118,  7. 

Caput  declined,  67;  capitis  and  cctpile 
damnare,  accusare,  etc.,  217,  R.  8. 


382 


INDEX. 


*     Carbasus ,  plur.  -i  and  -a,  92,  S. 

Cardinal  numbers,  117  and  118. 

Careo,  250,  2,  R.  1. 

Carmen,  declined,  57. 

Caro,  gender  of,  59,  3;  gen.  of,  69,  B  2j 
gen.  plur.,  83,  ii.,  5. 

Carthagini,  in  abl.  of  the  place  where,  82, 
E.  5,  (c.) 

Case-endings,  table  of,  39. 

Ca.se8  of  noums,  86  and  37. 

Casus  rtcti  and  obliqui,  37,  B. 

Cuvfa,  gratid.^  etc.  with  med.,  etc.,  247, 
a   2;  their  place  with  genitive,  279,  B. 

Causal  coijjunctions,  198,  7. 

Cause,  abl.  of,  247;  after  active  verbs, 
2^*7,  R.  2;  ace.  of  with  prepositions,  247, 
H.  1. 

fViitso,  change  of  au  in  its  compounds, 
189,  N.  3. 

Cave  or  cave  ne,  w.  subj.,  267,  B.  3;  262, 
N.  3. 

-ce  and  -cine,  enclitic,  134,  B.  4. 

Cedo,  coustr.,  223,  R.  2,  (1),  (rf.) 

Cedo,  imperative,  183,  11. 

Celer,  how  declined,  108;  gen.  plur.,  114, 
E.  2. 

Celo,  with  two  aces.,  231 ;  w.  rfe,  231,  B.  3. 

Censeo,  273,  N.  4. 

Centena  mUlia,  ellipsis  of,  118,  5. 

-ceps,  nouns  in,  gen.  of,  77,  r;  adjs.  in, 
gender  of,  112, 2;  abl.  of,  113,  e.  2,  and  e.  3. 

Ceres,  genitive,  of,  73,  e.  2. 

Certe  and  certo,  19?,  N.  1. 

Certiis,  213,  B.  1;  275,  ni.,  (2.);  270,  B.l. 

Cetera  and  reliqua  for  ceteris,  234,  n.,  B.  8. 

Ceterum,  198,  8,  R.,  (6.) 

Celt,  w.  subj.,  263,  2. 

C/i,  sound  of,  10,  1;  when  silent,  12,  a.  ; 
in  syllabication,  18,  2. 

Character  or  quality,  gen.  of,  211,  e.  6. 

Chaos,  61,  E.  3. 

Chelys,  declined,  86. 

Choliambus,  314,  il. 

Choriambic  metre,  316;  303; — pentame- 
ter, 316,  I.; — tetrameter,  316,  n. ; — trime- 
ter, 316,  IV. ; — trimeter  catalectic,  316,  v. ; — 
dimeter,  316,  vi. 

Cicur,  gen.  plur.  of,  114,  e.  2. 

Circtim,  in  composition,  196,  4. 

Circumdo  and  circuvitundo,  249,  a  3. 

Circumflex  accent,  15,  2,  and  14;  bow 
used,  14,  3.  , 

Cis  and  citra,  eonstr.,  235,  B.  1. 

Citeritir,  compared,  126.  1. 

Citiim,  pr..  284,  E.  1,  (2.) 

Clam,  eonstr.,  235,  (5.) 

Clanndnm,  192,  iv.,  R. ;  235,  (5.);  126,1. 

Claudo,  its  compounds,  189,  N.  3. 

Clause,  201,  13;  as  the  subject  of  a  pro- 
position, 202,  in.,  R.  2;  as  an  addition  to 
the  predicate,  203,  n.,  3;  its  gender,  34,  4; 
as  the  object  of  a  verb,  229,  R.  5  ;  in  abl. 
absolute,  256,  R.  8;  connection  of  clauses, 
198,  I.  and  ii . ;  278,  R.  1 ;  280,  m. ;  arrange- 
ment of.  280;  similar  clauses,  278,  n.  1. 

Climax.  324,  21. 

Clothing,  verbs  of,  249,  I. 

CceUsiis,  abl.  of,  113,  B.  1;  gen.  plur.  of, 
114.  B.  0. 

dalum,  plcT.  cali,  92,  4. 


Cam,  w.  gen.  of  price,  214,  n.  1,  (V.) 

Cixpi  and  captvs  sum,  183.  2. 

Cognate  object,  232; — subject,  234,  ill. 

Cognitus,  pr.,  285,  2,  Ei  1. 

Cognomen  follows  the  gentile  name,  2TS> 
9,  (b.) 

Cognominis,  abl.  of,  113,  E.  1. 

Cogo,  273,  N.  4. 

-cola,  compounds  in,  gen.  plur.  of,  43,  2 

Collective  nouns,  26,  4;  number  of  theil 
verbs,  209,  r.  11. 

Com  for  cu7n  in  composition,  196,  &| 
197,  5. 

Comitiis,  as  abl.  of  time,  253,  n.  1. 

Common,  nouns,  26,  3; — gender,  30;— 
syllables,  282,  2;  283,  iv.,  e.  2. 

Commoneo  and  comTnonefacio ,  eonstr., 
218;  273,  s.  4. 

Communis,  eonstr.,  222,  b.  2,  (a.)  and! 
6,  (a.) 

Commuto,  eonstr.,  252,   r.  5. 

Compar.,  gen.  plur.  of,  114,  K.  2. 

Comparn,  eonstr..  224,  N.  1.  3. 

Comparative  conjunctions,  198,  3. 

Comparative  degree.  122,  5;  uses  of,  122. 
R.  1,  2,  3;  formation  of,  124;  by  7)iagis, 
127,  1.— comparatives  declined,  110;  abl. 
sing,  of,  113,  2;  w.  gen.,  212,  R.  2,;  denotes 
one  of  two,  212,  b.  2.,  n.  1;  w.  abl.,  256; 
used  pleonastically ,  2."i6,  R.  12,  13. 

Comparison,  25;  of  adjs.,  122 — 127;  de- 
grees of,  122,  3;  terminal,  124; — irregular, 
125 ;  defective,  126 ;  by  niagis  and  maxime, 
127 ;— of  adverbs,  194.  * 

Complex  subject,  202,  1,  3,  6;  complex 
predicate,  203,  1,  3,  6;  complex  sentence, 
201,  11. 

Coniplures.  how  declined,  110. 

Compnno,  eonstr.,  224,  N.  1,  3,  and  B.  4. 

Compos  and  impos,  gen.  of,  112,  2 ;  ahl 
of,  113,  E.  2;  115,  1,  (a.);  pr.  300,  e.  3. 

Composition  of  nouns,  103; — of  adjs.. 
131 ;— of  verbs.  183 ;— of  adverbs,  193. 

Compound  verbs,  how  conjugated,  163, 
4;— subject,  202,  4;— predicate,^  203,  4;— 
sentence,  201,  12 ; — metres,  318 ; — words,  in 
syllabication,  23; — nouns,  declension  of, 
91 ;  how  formed,  103 ;  quantity  of  compd. 
words,  285. 

Con,  adjs.  compd.  with,  w.  dat.,  222,  r.  1; 
verbs  compd.  with,  w.  dat.,  224;  w.  cum, 
224,  R.  4. 

Concedo,  eonstr.,  273,  N.  5;  274,  B.  7. 

Concessive  conjunctions,  198,  4. 

Concors,  and  discors,  geu.  of,  112,  2;  tbl. 
of,  113,  E.  2. 

Concrete,  nouns,  26,  B.  2. ; — adjs.,  101, 
B. ;  usa8  for  abstracts,  in  expressions  of 
time,  253,  r.  6. 

Conditio,  in  abl.,  249,  n. 

Conditional  conjunctions,  198,  5. 

Conduco,  with  part,  in  diis.  274,  R.  7. 

Condemning,  verbs  of,  w.  gen.,  217. 

Confero,  w.  dat,  224,  N.  1,  3. 

Co)i)if/o,  w.  abl.,24f',  ii.;  w.  dai,  246,  B.l 

Gonfit,  l83,  12;  180,  N. 

Confinis,  222,  B.  1. 

Congruo,  224,  N.  1,  3,  and  R.  4. 

Conjugation,  25;  149;  first,  156  166, 
second,  157;  third,  158,  169;  fourth,  Ifltt 


INDEX. 


388 


of  depcnent  verbs,  161;  periphrastic,  162; 

fsneral  rules  of,  163;  of  irregular  verbs, 
rS — 182;  of  defective  verbs,  183;  of  imper- 
sonal verbs,  1"^4;  regular  and  irregular 
verbs  iu  the  four  conjugations,  164 — 177. — 
conjugations,  how  characterized,  149;  re- 
marks on,  162. 

Conjunctions,  198;  classes  of,  198;  coor- 
dinate, 198, 1.;  subor-iinate,  198,  n.;  encli- 
tics, 198,  N.  1;  copuUtive  and  diiyunctive, 
their  use,  278 ;  use  of  coordinate  and  sub- 
ordinate coujs.,  193,  R.  1;  repeated,  278, 
R.  7;  when  omitted  between  adjs.,  205,  k. 
16 ; — between  words  opposed,  278,  B.  6. 

Ciinjungo,  224,  N.  1,  3,  and  R.  4. 

Conjunclus,  222,  R.  6. 

Conjux,  gender  of,  30:  gen.  of,  78,  2,  (5.) 

Connecting  vowel,  150,  5;  omitted  in  2d 
root,  163,  2;  in  verbal  nouns,  102,  5,  (ft.); 
in  verbil  adj.s..  129,  land 4,  (6.);  in  compd. 
nouns  and  adjs.,  1U3.  R.  1. ;  131,  N. 

Connection  of  tenses.  2-58; — of  words  by 
conjunctions,  278; — of  clauses  by  do.,  278, 
B.  3. 

Connectives,  201,  8,  9;  place  of,  279,  3. 

Conor,  271,  N.  1. 

Consents,  213,  R.  1;  275,  lit.,  (2.) 

Consentaneus.  w.  dat.,  222,  R.  1,  w.  abl., 
222.  R.  6;  consenlnneum  erat,  the  indie,  in- 
itead  of  the  subj.,  259,  R.  3,  (a.);  with  inf. 
B8  subject,  269,  r.  2. 

Consentio,  w.  dat.,  224,  N.  1,  3. 

Consequor,  tit,  273,  N.  ^. 

CoHsi'/o.  241,  R.  5. 

Consonant.^.  3,  1;  division  of,  ib.;  double, 
B.  1,  2;  sounds  of,  10—12. 

Consors,  213,  R.  1. 

Constat,  w.  inf.  as  subject,  269,  B.  2. 

Constituo,  272,  s.  1. 

Q)nsto,  w.  abl.,  245,  ii.,  5. 

Consuetudo  est,  constr.,  262,  b.  3,  N.  2. 

Consufsco,  245,  n.,  3. 

Contendo,  273,  N.  1. 

Conlentus,  w,  abl.,  244;  w.  perf.  inf.,  268, 
B.  2. 

CorUenninus,  w.  dat.,  222,  K.  1.  (o.) 

Conlinens,  abl.  of,  82,  E.  4,  (a.) 

Continental  pronunciation  of  Latin,  6. 

Cojitin^it,  conjugation,  184;  w.  itt,  262, 
R.  3 ;  w.  dat.  and  inf.,  262,  R.  3,  N.  1. 

ContinuO,  193,  n.,  1. 

Contra,  how  used,  195,  B.  7. 

Contracted  syllables,  quantity  of,  283,  III. 

Contractions  iu  2d  root  of  verba,  162,  7. 

Convenio,  233,  n. 

Convenit,  the  indie,  for  the  subj.,  259, 
•  3;  w.  inf..  269,  r.  2. 

ConL-ineo,  217,  R.  1. 

Copia  est.  w.  inf.,  270,  B.  1,  (c.) 

Copula,  140,  4. 

Copulative  conjs.,  198,1;  repeated,  198, 
K.(e.) 

Cor.  gender  of,  61;  genitive  of,  71,  k.  2; 
Bompds.  of,  112,  2. 

Correlative  adjs,,  139, (2.), (3  );  104, 14;— 
tdverbs,  191,  r.  1. 

Comu,  declined,  87. 

Crasis,  306,  (5.)  and  322. 

Crater,  genitiv*  of,  71. 

Credo,  272,  aci  b.  6; — crederts,  in  ttM 


sense  of  a  pluperfect,  260,  ii.,  B.  2; — ere 
dendum  est,  271,  R.  2. 

Creo,  nascor,  etc.,  246,  R.  1. 

Crime,  in  genitive  after  verbs,  217. 

Crimine,  without  a  preposition,  217,  R. 
2,  (ft.) 

Crude  form  or  root,  40,  10. 

-crum,  verbals  in,  102,  5. 

Ct,  initial,  12,  3. 

Cui  and  huic,  how  pronounced,  9,  5;  pr. 
306,  R.  2. 

Cujas,  how  declined,  139,  4,  (ft.) 

Cujus.  how  declined,  137,  5 ;  cujusmodi, 
etc.,  134,  R.  5. 

-cidum,  verbals  in,  102,5;  contracted  to 
-clum,  102,  5,  (ft.) 

-cuius,  a,  um,  diminutives  in,  100,  3,  and 
B.,1,  2;  128,5. 

Cum,  prep.,  afflsed  to  abl.,  241,  r.  1; 
133,  R.  4;  136,  R.  1;  how  used,  19o,  R.  11; 
w.  abl.  of  manner,  247,  2 ;  in  composition, 
196,  5. 

Cum  or  quum,  mood  of  the  verb  following 
it,  263,  5. 

Cum,  '  while,'  263,  6,  R.  4. 

-cumque,  used  to  form  general  indefinites, 
191,  R.  1,  (ft.);  139,  5,  R. ;  composition  and 
meaning,  139,  5,  n.  1;  sometimes  separated 
from  qui,  etc.,  .323,  4  (5.) 

Cumprimis.  its  meaning,  193,  ll.,  2. 

Cuncti  and  omnes,  w.  gen.  plur.  212, 
a.  2,  N.  6. 

-cundus,  adjs.  in,  129,  1. 

Cupido,  gender  of,  59,  r.  2. 

Cupyus,  constr.,  213,  r.  1;  275,  (2.); 
270,  R.  1. 

Cupio,  271,  R.  4;  eupiens,  213,  R.  1,  (2.) 

Curo,  273,  n.  1;  274,  R.  7;  curaut,  267, 

R.3. 

Curritur,  conjugated,  184,  2,  (6.) 
Custos,  gender  of,  30;  61,  3;  genitive,  76, 

E.  1. 


D. 


D  final  in  prosody,  299,  2;  before  *  in 
roots  of  nouns,  56,  r.  1 ;  in  roots  of  verba, 
171,  3,  and  e.  5. 

Da,  pr.,  284,  b.  2,  (ft.) 

Dactylic  metre,  310  and  303; — ^trimeter, 
312,  VI. ; — dimeter,  312,  vii. ; — hexameter, 
310,  I.  Dactylico-iambic  meter,  318,  i. ;  dao 
tylico-trochaic  heptameter,  318,  iv. ; — teti»- 
meter,  318,  v. 

Damn,  gender  of,  42,  2. 

Daynni  infeeti  satisdo,  etc.,  217,  R.  3. 

Dative,  Si;  sing,  of  3d  decl.,  79;  plur. 
always  like  abl.,  40,  6;  exceptions  In  do 
1st  decl.,  43;  of  3d  decl.,  84;  of  4th  decl., 
89,  6;  used  for  predicate  nom.j  210,  n.  3; 
for  gen.,  211,  r.  5;  commodi  et  incommodi, 
222,  land  2;  dative  of  the  end,  227;  dat. 
of  the  object,  after  adjs.,  222;  different  con- 
structions instead  of,  2^,  r.  4  and  6;  after 
idem,  222,  R.  7;  after  verbs,  223—227;  after 
verbs  compounded  with  ad,  ante,  etc.,  224: 
with  aft,  ex,  de,  circuin  and  contra,  22-1,  R.  1 
and  2;  with  dis,  224,  R.  3;  with  salts,  ften* 
and  male,  225,  l- ;  dat.  of  the  agent,  226,  a. 


884 


INDEX. 


and  in.;  of  the  poseesBor  after  est,  226; 
after  particles,  228 ;  dat.  with  the  ace,  223, 
(1.);  two  datives  after  sum,  etc.,  227;  want- 
ing, 225,  III.,  R.:  dativus  ethicus,  228,  r. 

Datum,  pr.,  284,  e.  1,  (2.) 

De,  195,  a.  12:  with  abl.  instead  of  ace, 
229.R.  5,  (6.);  231,  e.  3. 

Dea,  dat.  and  abl.  plur.  of,  43. 

Debehat,  indie.  in.stead  of  Bubj.,  259,  R.  3. 

Decedo,  w.  abl.,  251. 

Decerno,  273,  n.  1  and  4. 

Decet,  conjugated,  184;  its  construction, 
229,  R.  7;  223,  r.  2,(6.);  indie,  for  subj., 
259,  R.  3. 

Declarative  sentences,  200,  3. 

Declaro,  230,  n.  1. 

Declension,  38;  parts  of  speech  declined, 
25,  3 ;  of  nouns,  38—40 ;  rules  of,  40 ;  first, 
41 — 45;  exceptions  in  do.,  43:  paradigms 
of,  41 ; — second,  46 — 54 :  paradigms  of,  46 ; 
exceptions  in  do.,  52;  third,  55 — 86;  para- 
digms of,  57;  exceptions  in  do.,  68 — 85; 
fourth,  87 — 89;  paradigms  of,  87;  excep- 
tions in  do.,  89;  formed  by  contraction,  89 ; 
fifth,  90 ;  paradigms,  90 ;  exceptions  in,  90 ; 
-of  acljs.,  Ist  and  2d.  105—107 ;  third,  108— 
111; — declensions,  how  distinguished,  38; 
tabular  view  of,  39. 

Dedi,  pr.,  284,  2,  e.  1. 

Deest  mihi,  226,  R.  2 ;  pr.,  306,  1,  R.  1,  (1.) 

Defective  nouns,  94-— 96; — adjs.,  115; — 
verbs,  183. 

Defendo,  251,  R.  2. 

Defero,  w.  gen.  of  the  crime,  217,  R.  1. 

Defi.cior,  w.  abl.,  250,  2,  R.  1. 

D'efit,  183,  13,  and  180,  N. ;  226,  R.  2. 

Deflecto,  229.  r.  4. 

DefungoT,  245,  i. 

Degree,  ace.  of,  231,  E.  5;  232,  (3.) 

Degrees  of  comparison,  122  and  123;  in- 
ferior degrees,  123, 1 ;  equal  degrees,  123,  3; 
a  small  degree,  123,  2 ;  superior  degrees  va- 
riously expressed,  127,  2,  3,  4. 

Dejero,  189,  N.  3;  pr.,  285,  2,  e.  1. 

Dein,  deinceps,  deinde,   pr.,  306,  1,    R. 

1,  (1-) 

Delectat,  conjugated,  184;  its  construc- 
tion, 229,  R.  7;  223,  R.  2. 

Delector,  w.  guod,  273,  n.  6. 

Deligo,  w.  two  aces.,  230,  N.  1. 

-dem,  enclitic,  134,  R.  6. 

Demonstrative  adjs.,  104, 15;  139,  5,  R.; 
— pronouns,  134;  constr.  of,  207;  in  appo- 
rtion to  a  clause,  207,  R.  22;  206,  (3.);  used 
when  the  reference  is  not  to  the  subject, 
208,  (6.);  place  of,  279,  7;  ellipsis  of  de- 
monstratives before  their  relatives,  206,  (3.), 
(a.);  constr.  of  dem.  adjs.,  206,  (16.);  dem. 
ad  vs.  for  dem.  pronouns,  206,  (20.);  dem. 
pronouns  is,  etc.,  used  for  the  oblique  cases 
Itim,  her,  etc.,  207,  R.  20;  redundant,  207, 
R.  21;  dem.  prons.  and  advs.  announcing  a 
proposition,  207,  R.  22. 

Demove.o,  w.  abl.,  251,  n. 

Denarius,  value  of,  327,  R.  3;  divisions 
of,  ib. 

Deniqut,  its  use,  277,  I.,  R.  13. 

Denominatives,  adjs.,  128 ; — verbs,  187, 1. 

Dens,  gender  of,  64, 1 ;  conapds.  of,  64, 1. 

Depello,  w.  abl.,  251,  n. 


Dependence,    defined,   203,    ill  ,  8;    o 

tenses,  258. 

Dependent  or  subordinate  propositions, 
201,  6.  • 

Deponent  verbs,  142,  r.  4;  conjugated, 
161 ;  participles  of,  162,  17 ;  lists  of  in  Ist 
conj.,  166;  2d  conj.,  170;  3d  conj.,  174; 
4th  conj.,  177;  increment  of,  289,  3. 

Deposco,  274,  R.  7. 

Depriving,  verbs  of,  w.  abl.,  251. 

Derivation  of  nouns,  100; — of  adjs..  128 
—of  verbs,  187;— of  advs.,  192. 

Derivative  words,  quantity  of,  284. 

Deses,  gen.  of,  112,  1;  abl.  of,  113,  S.  2; 
defective,  115,  2 ;  compared,  126,  4. 

Desiderative  verbs,  187,  II.,  3;  176,  n.j 
quantity  of  the  u  in,  284,  e.  3. 

Designo,  \nth  two  aces.,  230,  N.  1. 

Desjiero,  constr.,  224,  R.  1. 

Desuper  and  insuper,  235,  E.  8. 

Deterior,  compared,  126, 1. 

Deterreo,  quin,  tie,  or  quominus,  262, 
R.  11;  w.  inf.  ib.  n. 

Deturbo,  w.  abl.,  251,  N. 

Dexter,  how  declined,  106;  how  conv 
pared,  125,  4. 

Deus,  declined,  53;  deum  for  deorum,  53. 

Di  or  dii,  53 ;  ellipsis  of,  205,  R.  7. 

-di  or  -dis,  see  -dis. 

Diceresis,  806,  2 ;  mark  of,  5,  2. 

Dialysis,  306,  R. 

Diana,  pr.  282,  I.,  E.  5. 

Diastole,  307,  2. 

Dico,  w.  two  aces.,  230,  N.  1;  ellipsis  of, 
229,  E.  3,  2:  209,  R.  4;  270,  R.  2,  (6.);  w.inf. 
and  ace,  272,  n.  1;  w.  ict,  273,  2,  (c.);- 
diciint,  '  they  say,'  209,  r.  2,  (2.);  dicor,  w. 
predicate  nominative,  210,  R.  3,  (3.),  (a.) 
and  N.  1,  cf  271,  R.  2;  272,  r.  6;  die,  im- 
perative,  162,  4. 

Dieolon,  319,  2. 

Dido  aiuJiens,  w.  dat.,  222,  R.  1;  dicto, 
w.  comparative,  256,  R.  9. 

-dicus,  words  ending  in,  pr.,  284,  2,  e.  1. 

Dido,  declined,  86 ;  genitive  of,  69,  e.  3. 

Dies,  declined,  90;  its  gender,  90,  e.  1, 
compds.  of  with  numerals,  121,  3;  quantity 
of,  285,  E.  4,  E.  3,  (6.) 

Difference,  degree  of,  how  expressed,  25'1, 
R.  10. 

Differo,  constr.,  251,  R.  3,  N. ;  229,  R.  4, 1. 

Differing,  verbs  of,  251,  R.  3. 

Difficile  est,  the  indie,  for  the  subj.,  259, 
R.  4,  (2.);  with  an  inf.  as  subject,  269,  r.  2; 
with  supine  in  u,  276,  in.,  R.  1;  w.  ad  and 
a  gerund,  276,  in.,  r.  4. 

Digne,  w.  abl.,  244,  R.  1. 

Dignor,  w.  abl.,  244,  R.  1;  w.  ace.  of  tie 
person,  ib. ;  w.  inf.,  ib. ;  w.  two  aces.,  ib. 

Dignus,  w.  abl.  of  the  thing,  244;  w.gen. 
244,  R.  2,  (a.):  w,  ace.  ot  neut.  pron.  or 
adj.,  244,  R.  2,  (a.);  w.  inf.  or  a  subj. 
clause,  244,  r.  2,  (6.);  with  relative  and 
subj.,  264,  9;  w.  supine  in  u,  276,  iii.,  x.  1. 

Duneter,  304,  2. 

Diminutive  nouns,  100, 3; — adjs.,  104, 11 
128,5;— verbs,  187,  il.,  4 ;— adverbs,  192,  a 

Diphthongs,  4;  sOQBds  oS,  9;  qnantitj 
of,  13  4;  288,  U. 

Dlptotee,  9ft. 


INDEX. 


385 


Dir  for  rfn,  196,  (6.).  2. 

Dis  or  (li,  inseparabja  prep.,  196,  (*.),  2; 
Bonstruction  of  some  verbs  compounded 
with,  251,  B.  3,  N. ;  pr.,  285,  2,  E.  2. 

-dis,  genitiveB  in,  77,  K.  1 ;  rfw,  adj.,  gen. 
plur.  of,  114,  s.  3. 

Discerno,  251,  E.  3,  N. ;  In  impeif.  subj. 
torpluperf,260,  ii.,  R.  2. 

Discolor,  abl.  of,  113,  K.  2. 

Discordo  and  discrepo,  261,  K.  8,  and  W. 

Disertus,  pr.,  28i,  E.  6,  2,  N.  1. 

Disjunctive  conjs.,  198,  2. 

Dissideo,  constr.,  251,  E.  8,  and  N. 

Dimmilis,  222,  r.  1,  and  r.  2. 

Distich,  304. 

Dhtin^uo  and  disto,  251,  r.  3,  and  n. 

Distributive  numbers,  119, 120 ;  gen.  plur. 
of,  105,  R.  4;  used  for  cardinal  numbers, 
120,  4;— for  multiplicatives,  120,  4,  (6.) 

Distrophon,  319,  3. 

Div,  compared,  104,  6. 

Dives,  gen.  sin,;.  112,  1;  gen.  plur.,  114, 
E.2;  115,  1.  (rt.) 

Division  of'words  Into  syllables,  1" — 23. 

Do,  149,  E. ;  w.  perf.  participles,  274, 
R.  4 ;  w.  participles  in  dus,  274,  a.  7 ;  incle- 
ment of,  290,  E. ;  284,  e.  4. 

-rfo,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  59,2;  genitive 
of,  69,  E.  1. 

Doceo,  231,  R.  1 ;  w.  gen.  of  price,  214,  n.  1. 

Doleo,  w.  (fuod,  etc.,  273,  n.  7. 

Dominus,  declined,  46. 

Domus,  declined,  89;  different  use  of 
dornils  and  domi,  89,  (a.);  constr.  of  gen., 
221,  R.  3;  of  ace,  237,  R.  4;  of  abl.,  255, 
E.  1;  254,  R.  2. 

Donee,  w.  subj.,  263,  4;  pr.,  299,  4,  e. 
■  Dono.  w.  abl.,  249,  i.,  e.  1;  w.  two  da- 
tives, 227,  E.l. 

Dos,  gen.  of,  61*,  3 ;  doii  dicare,  227,  E.  2. 

Double  consonants,  3,  1. 

Doubtful  gender,  30. 

Dubito  and  non  dubito,  262,  N.  7  and  8; 
dubito  an,  198,  11,  («.);  dubito  sit  tie,  etc., 
«62,  N.  8. 

Duco,  constr.,  214;  227,  R.  1;  230,  N.  1; 
innum-iT3.  or  in  loco,  230,  n.  4;  due,  im.- 
perat..  162,  4. 

Dudum  and  jamdudum,  191,  E.  6. 

Ditim,  duis.  etc.,  162,  1. 

Dum,  w.  sultj.,  263,  4;  dumne  and  dum- 
modo  ne,2^2,  N  ;  rfjim.  '  until,'  263,  4, 
'1.); — 'while  263.  4,  (2.) — compounded 
with  a  negative,  277,  R.  16. 

Duntaxat,  193,  ii.,  3. 

Duo,  declined,  118;  duuin  for  duorum, 
118,  E.  1. 

-dus,  participle  in,  how  declined,  103, 
fl.  2 ;  of  neuter  deponent  verbs,  161 ;  with 
turn,  162,  15 ,  neuter  in  .dum  with  tst,  274, 
B.  11 ;  w.  dat.  of  person,  162,  15,  R.  6 ;  225, 
in.;  of  dep.  verbs,  162,  17,  (6.);  w.  ace, 
2.34,  R.  2 ;  its  signification,  2(4,  2,  e.  7  and 
8:  used  for  a  gerund,  275,  li. 

E. 

E.  sound  of,  7  and  8 ;  S  changed  to  u  or }, 
66,  K.  4  and  5 ;  uom.  in  d  in  3d  decl.,  56,  i, 
£.1,7;  gender  of  nouns  in  <  :>f  3d  decl., 


66;  genitive  ofj6J;  abl.  of,  82,  old  lat.  in, 
79;  ace.  plur.  in,  54,  5;  nom.  plur.  in,  83, 
I.,  1 ;  voc.  in,  81,  R. ;  in  gen.  and  dat.  sing. 
5th  decl.,  90,  b.  2;  cf  40,  11;  advs.  in,  192, 
ir. ;  syncope  of  in  imperf.  of  4th  conj.,  162, 
2:  increment  in  t  of  3d  decl.,  287,  3;  plur., 
288 ;  of  verbs,  290 ;  e  ending  the  first  part 
of  a  compound  word,  285,  E.  4;  e  final, 
quantity  of,  295. — <  or  ex,  prep.,  see  ex. 

-fa,  Greek  ace.  sing,  ending  in,  54,  6,  and 
80,  m. 

Eapse,  etc.,  135,  R.  3. 

Ecee,  compounded  with  demonstrative 
pronouns,  1^,  R.  2;  w.  nom.,  209,  R.  13; 
w.  ace,  238,  2. 

Eccum,  eccillum,  eccistam,  etc.,  134,  e.  2; 
238,  2. 

-ecis,  gen.  in,  78,  (2.) 

Ecguis  and  ecgui,  how  declined,  137,  3, 
and  R.  3;  ecquee  and  ecqua,  137,  3,  r.  4, 
ecguis  est  qui,  264,  7,  N.  2 ;  ecquid,  interrog. 
particlCj  198,  11,  and  a.  a  and  b. 

Ecquisnam,  137,  4. 

Ectasis,  307,  2,  (3.) 

EcthUpsis,  305,  2. 

Edepol,  199,  R.  3. 

Edico,  273,  N.  4. 

Edim,  edis,  etc.,  162,  1. 

-edis,  gen.  in,  73,  E.  1  and  112,  1. 

Editus,  w.  abl.,  246. 

Edo,  '  to  eat,'  conjugated,  181 ;  compda. 
of,  181,  n. 

-edo,  abstracts  in,  101,  1. 

Eiloceo,  w.  two  aces.,  231,  R.  1. 

Ejficio,  273,  N.  2; — efficiens,  w.  gen.,  213, 
R.  1,  (2.); — efficitur,  w.  ut,  or  the  ace.  with 
the  inf ,  262,  R.  3,  n.  1. 

Etfugio,  w.  ace,  233,  R.  1. 

Egeo  and  indigeo,  260,  2,  B.  1 ;  220,  3. 

-«gis,  genitives  in,  78,  2. 

Ego,  decUned,  133. 

Eheu,  pr.,  283,  i.,  E.  5. 

El,  how  pronounced,  9,  1,  and  R.  1;  gen- 
itive in,  73,  R. ;  pr.,  283,  i.,  e.  6,  (1.) 

-eia,  verbals  in,  102,  3. 

-eis,  fern,  patronymics  in,  100,  1,  (i.) — 
ace  plur.  in.  85,  e.  1,  and  114,  2. 

-eius,  pr.,  28-3, 1.,  E.  6,  (3.) 

Ejus,  use  of,  208,  (6.) 

Ejusjnodi  and.  ejusdemmodi,  139,  6,  N.  2 

-ela,  verbals  in,  102,  3. 

Elegiac  ver.se,  311,  R.  2. 

Ellipsis,  323;  of  pronoun  in  case  of  appo- 
sition, 204.  R.  4;  of  the  noun  of  an  adj., 
205,  R.  7;  252.  r.  3;  of  the  antecedent.  206, 
(3.)  and  (4.);  of  meus.  etc.,  207,  R.  38;  of 
nom.,  209,  r.  2  and  3;  of  verb,  209,  r.  4; 
229,  R.  3 ;  of  a  noun  limited  by  a  genitive, 

211,  R.  8;  of  gen.,  211,  r.  9;  of  a  partitive, 

212.  R.  1,  N.  3;  of  subject  ace,  2;39;  269, 
R.  1;  of  ace  after  transitive  verb,  229,  K.  4; 
of  prep.,  232,  (2.);  235,  R.  5;  241,  r.  4;  248, 
B.  3  ;  of  voc,  240;  ofquatn,  256;  of  partici- 
ple. In  abl.  absol.,  257,  R.  7;  of  ut  w.  subj., 
262,  R.  4;  of  «€  after  cni-e,  262,  r.  6;  of  non 
after  non  niodo,  etc.,  277,  K.  6;  of  conjunc- 
tions, 278,  R.  6;  of  ^'  in  conipo-sition,  307; 
of  centena  milUa,  327,  R.  6. 

•ellus,  a,  um,  diiuiuutives  in,  100,  3, 
A.  3. 


386 


INDEX. 


-em  ind -en,  aces.  in,45, 1;  80,  iv.;  -em 
Id  ace  sing.  3d  decl.,  79,  80. 
Bm  N  252,  R.  1. 

Em  hatio  word,  its  place  in  a  sentence, 
279.  2  and  16. 

Sn.  inteiTOgatiye  particle,  198, 11,  and  E. 
;«.);    137,    R.  3;   «n,  interjection,  199;  w. 
nom.,  209,  R.  13;  w.  ace.  238,  2;  -«»,  ace. 
f.n,  45,  1;  80,  iv. 
Enallage,  823,  3. 

Enclitics,  in  accentuation,  15,  6\ — con- 
junctions, 198,  N.  1. 
Endeavoring,  verbs  of,  273,  1,  (o.) 
tndus  and  -undus,  163,  20. 
finglwh  pronunciation  of  Latin,  6. 
Enim  and  nam,  198,7,  and  E.;  2(9,3, 
a.)  and  (c.) 
Enitiivero,  198,  9,  E.  (a.) 
Ennehemimeris,  304,  5. 
Ens,  participle,  154,  R.  1. 
.«ni!S,  adjs.  in,  128,  6,  (a.  > 
■*ntissi?7:us,  superlatives  in,  126,  a 
-."nMS,  adjs.  in,  128,  1,  (c.) 
Eo,  conjugated,   182;   compda    of,   182, 
A.  3;  w.  supine  in  um,  276,  n-,  R.  -i;  w.  two 
datives,  227,  R.  1. 

-eo,  verbsinoflst  conj.,  16a.  B.  d. 
Eo,   pron.  w.  comparatives,  2oD,  R.  16. 
As  adverb  of  place,  w.  ?en.,  212,  R.  4.,  N.2, 
(6,/— of  degree,  w.  gen.,  212,  R.  4.  N.  3.    As 
an  illative  conj.,  198,  6. 

EorJtni,  vr.  gen.,  212j_  R.  4.  N.  J. 
«os,  Greek  gen.  in,   (6,  K.  7  ;  54    5;  pr., 
583,  I.,  E.  6,  (2.) 
Epauadiplosis,  324,  18. 
Bpauados,  324,  19. 
Epanalepsis,  324,  16. 
Epauaphora,  324,  13. 
Epanastrophe,  324,  17. 
Epanorthosis,  324,  32. 
Epenthesis,  -322,  3. 
Epicene  nouns,  33. 
Epistrophe,  324,  14. 
Epizeuxis,  324,  20. 
Epulor,  with  abl.,  245,  n.,  4. 
Epulum,  92,  6. 

Equality,  how  denoted,  123,  3. 
Eques.  gender  of,  31,  2;  used  collectively, 

209.  R.  11,  (1- ),(*•)         .,.  ,  ,Qi 

Equidem,  its  composition  and  use,  lai, 

s.  4 

-er,  nouns  in,  of  2d  decl.,  46— syncopated, 
48,  1;  of  3d  decl.,  gender  of,  58  and  60; 
genitive  of,  70  and  71;  syncopated,  <1;-- 
idjectives  in,  superlative  of,  125;  annexed 
»o  pres.  infin.  pass.,  162,  6. 

Erga,  how  used,  195,  R.  7. 

-ere,  in  3d  pers.  plur.  of  perf.  indic.  ac- 

ave.  162,  8.  -o        o    -JA        1 . 

-eris.  genitives  in,  76;  73,  E.  i;  74,  a.  l, 
lind  112,  1  and  2. 

Er'^o,  w.  gen.,  147,  R.  2,  (a.) 

Erotesis,  324,  31. 

-enimtis,  superlatives  in,  125,  1. 

-ex,  proper  names  in,  44, 1 ;  -es  and  -e  m 
Oreel  nouns  changed  to  a,  45,  3;  nouns  in 
of  3d  led.  increasing  in  genitive,  gender  ol, 
B8;  6i;  genitive  of,  73;  genitive  of  adjs.  in, 
112;  not  increasing,  gender  of,  62;  gemtive 
rtt,  73;  in  aim.,  ace,  and  voe.  plur.  of 


maao.  and  fern,  nouns  of  3d  decl.,  83,  i. ;  85; 
final,  sound  of,  8,  e.  2;  quantity  of,  300. 

Escit,  154,  R.  4. 

Esse  and  fuisse,  ellipsis  of,  270,  b.  3. 

-esso,  -isso  or  -so,  intensives  in,  187,  n.,  ii. 

Est,  w.  dat.  of  a  possessor,  226;  est,  qui, 
with  subj.,  264,  6;  so  est,  unde,  ubi,  cur,  ot 
ut,  264,  6,  R.  3.  ^, 

Et  and  gwe,  198,  1,  R.  (a.);  et  ipse,  207, 
R.  27,  (b.);  ellipsis  of  er,  298,  R.  6,  (t>.);  et-is, 
et  id,  et  is  quidem,  20/,  R.  26,  (c);  et—€t, 
et — que,  et — neque  or  nee,  198,  1,  R-  («.)j 
et  non,  198, 1,  (c.) 

Eteniyn,  198,  7,  R.  (a.) 

Etiam,  198,  1,  R.(d.);  with comparatiTOS, 
256,  R.  9,  (b.y,  127,  3;  etiamnum,  etiatn 
turn,  191j_  R.  7.        ^ 

-etis,  genitive  in,  73 ;  112, 1. 

Etsi  and  etiamst,  constr.,  271,  b.  2- 

-etuni,  derivative  nouns  in,  100,  7 

Etymology,  24—199 

Eu,  the  diphthong,  10,  3;  when  not  a 
diphthong,  10,  3,  R.  3;  in  voc.  sing,  of 
Greek  nouns  in  eus,  81. 

Euphemism,  324, 11. 

Eus,  nouns  in  of  2d  decl.,  54,  5;— adjs. 
in,  128,  1  and  2 ;  Greek  proper  names  in, 
283,  N.  2;  gen.  of,  76,  e.  7;  ace.  of,  180,  in. 

-eu  and  -etu,  in  2d  and  3d  roots  of  verbs, 
167. 

Evado,  constr.,  251,  N.  . 

Evenit,  conjugated,  184;  eventt  ut,  26J, 

Ex  and  e,  prep.,  how  used,  196,  E.  2  and 
13;— used  with  partitives  instead  of  the 
genitive,  212,  n.  4 ;  sometimes  omitted,  261, 
and  R.l;  ex  quo,  scU.  temjJore.^bS,  N.  4. 

-ex,  gender  of  nouns  in,  65,  2. 

Exadversus,  w.  ace,  195,  R.  3. 

Excedo,  w.  ace,  233,  (3.),  n. 

Excello,  constr.,  256,  R.  16,  (3.) 

Excite,  w.  ut,  273,  N.  4. 

Excludo,  constr.,  251,  N. 

Exeo,  constr.,  251,  N. 

Existimo,  w.  gen.,  214;  w.  two  acc8., 
230,  N.  1;  existimor,  constr.,  271,  b.  2. 

Exlex,\\2,1;  196,  I.,  6. 

Exos,  genitive  of,  112.  2. 

£205M5,  183, 1,  N. 

Exsistunt  qui,  w.  SUbj.,  264,  b. 

Exter,  106,  3,  and  n.;  comparison  o^ 

125, 4.  ...,^000 

Expedio,  251,  N.|      /'«dif,  w.  dat.,  228, 

R.  2,  (6.) 

i'ajperjorsi,  198, 11,  (e.)        ,     ,_  ,  , 

Supers,  w.  gen.,  213,  E.  1,  (3.),  mmJ 
R.  5,  (2.) 

Extemplo,  193,  11.,  1. 

Extera,  how  compared,  126,  4;  extremus, 
how  used,  205,  B.  17;  extremum  est,  vt, 
262,  R.  3.  „  _„. 

ixuo   consti.,  225,  b.  2;  exuor,  234,1., 

E.  1. 


F. 

FaMa,  ellipsis  of,  29,  2. 

jFac,  imperative,  16'2,  4;  /ac  ut  or  ne,  *7, 
R.  3 ;  /oc,  '  suppose  or  granting,'  w.  ace.  an4 
inf.,  273,  N.  3;  pr.,299,  a.  4. 


INDEX. 


887 


Fa,  He,  adv.,  192,  4.  (6.);  w.  superlatives, 
»tc.,  277.  R.  7. 

ii'orciV/.SjConstr.,  27G,  in.,  R.  4;  222.  R.  l.{a.) 

Fario  and  compds. ,  pas.sire  of,  180  and  n  . ; 
changes  of  in  the  oouipds.,  1S9,  N.  1;  w. 
gen.  of  value,  214.  r.  2;  w.  two  aces.,  230. 
N.  1;  w.  abl.,  250,  R.  3;  w.  ut  and  .^ubj., 
273,1,  N.  2  .and  3;  w.  participle,  273,  1; 
w.  (/e,  etc.,  250,  r.  S;  facere  nun  possum 
gum,  262,  2:  fnrere  quod,  273,  n.  8;  ellipsis 
of,  209,  R.  i;/aeere  certiorem,  230,  N.  3. 

FalL=:can  ver.<!e,  312,  xi. 

FttUit  me,  229,  a.  7. 

Fa}t2ilia  with  /)a(f?-,  etc.,  gen.  of.  43,  2. 

Familiaris,  w.  dat.,  222,  r.  1,  (a.);  with 
gen.,  222,  R.  1,  (f.)  "     '' 

Fnr,  its  root,  56,  ii.,  r.  6;  gen.  of,  71, 
E   2;  abl.,  82.  E.  1,  (t.);  94  and  95. 

.Frt.',  gender  of,  62,  e.  2;  94;  rax  trat, 
the  indie,  in.steiid  of  the  subj.,  259,  R.  3; 
fas  tst,  w.  supine  in  u,  276.  in'.,  r.  2. 

Faxo,  faxim  and  faxem,  162,  9,  and  183, 

R.  1. 

^rtM.r,  genitive  of,  78,  2,  (5.);  but  cf.  94, 
p  oO;  gen.  plur.,  83,  ii.,  3. 

Favetur,  .onjugated,  184,  2,  (b.)  eonstr., 
Z^3. 

FeJiring.  verbs  of,  w.  ut  and  ne,  262,  u.  7. 

Frbris,  ellipsis  of,  205,  R.  7,  (1.) 

FiTiindns,  w.  gen.  or  .ibl.,  213.  R.  5,  (3.) 

Feet,  in  poetry,  302;  isochroious,  302.  r. 

Fel,  its  root,  56,  II.,  r.  6;  its  genitive, 
70,  E. ;  94. 

Felix,  declined,  111;  213,  r.  4,  (1.) 

Femina,  added  to  epicene  nouns,  133,  n. 

Feminine  nouns,  of  1st  decl.,41;  of  2d 
decl.,  49—51;  of  3d  decl.,  62;  exceptions  in, 
62 — 65. 

Femur,  genitive  of,  71,  3. 

Fer,  162,  4;  quantity  of,  299,  e.  4. 

Fero,  conjugated,  179;  its  compds.,  172, 
(p.  134);  fertiir,  eonstr.  of,  271,  R.  2. 

-ficiis,  comparison  of  adjs.  in,'  125,  3,  (a.) 

Fulo;  how  conjugated.  142,  R.  2;  w.  abl., 
?45.  II.;  w.  dat..  245,  il.,  r.  1;  223,  R.  2. 

Fidt,  (from.A'«'/o),  pr.,  2S4,  e.  1,  (1.) 

Figures  of  prosody,  SOo— 307;  of  orthog- 
raphy and  etymology.  322;  of  syntax,  323; 
of  rhetoric,  324. 

Filia,  dat.  and  abl.  plur.,  43. 

Filiiis,  voc.  sing.,  52. 

FUling,  verbs  of,  w.  abl.,  249,  i. ;  w.  gen., 
220,3.  '        I     1       6      > 

Final  syllables,  quantity  of,  294—301  ;— 
coiyunctions,  198,  8. 

Finiiiy/ius,  w.  dat.,  222,  r.  1.  (a.) 

F(o,  conjugated,  180;  w.  geii.  of  vjilue, 
'^14,  a.  2 ;  w.  two  datives,  227.  R.l;_fit  and 
fifri  non  potest  ut,  262.  R.  3;  Jit  per  me, 
862,  R.  11:  quantity  of  ;  in  fi.o,  283,  e.  1. 

Fla^ito    w.  two  aces.,  231.  r.  1;  w  ut 
E73,  N.  4.  ' 

Flecto,  used  refle.tively,  229,  r.  4,  1. 

Flocci  habere,  etc.,  214.  k.  1. 

Fluo  and  struo,  2dand3d  roots  of,  171,  n. 

Follow,  in  what  sense  used,  203,  9. 

Fans,  gender  of,  64,  1. 

Foras  and  foris,  231.  R.  5,  (c.) 

Forem,fore,  etc.,  154  E.  8;  162,  12,  H.)- 
V  two  dative*   227,  r.  1.  n     ;. 


Fractional  expression.^,  IS  1,  6. 

Freeing,  verbs  of,  251. 

Freniim,  plur.  freni  and  frena,  92,  5. 

Frequens,  w.  gen.  or  abl.,  213,  R.  3,  (3.): 
cf.  r.  4,  (1.)  ' 

Frequentative  verbs,  187.  ir.,  1;  quantity 
of?  in,  284,  E.  4. 

Fretus,  w.  abl..  244;  w.  dat..  222,  R.  6: 
w.  inf.,  244,  R.  2,  (i.)  '  ' 

Fructus,  declined,  87. 

Frugi.  115,  4 ;  comparison  of,  125  5- 

Fruor,  w.  abl.,  245.  i. ;  w.  ace,  245,  I  .  R. 

Frux,  genitive  of  78,  2,  (5.)-  94. 

Fugio,  eonstr.,  225.  iv.;  210,  R.  3.  (2  )■ 
/(/g-£, poetically,  w.  inf.,  271,  i^.&;fvgitmr., 
229,  R.  7. 

Fm(,  etc.,  in  compound  tenses,  162  12 
(1.);  fuisse,  w.  perf.  pass,  participlea,  268 
R.  1,(6.) 

Fungor,  w.  abl.,  245,  I. ;  w.  ace  245,  r.  : 
275.  II.,  K.  1. 

Fuo,  root  of  fui,  154,  R.  2  and  3;  futum, 
pr.,  284.  £.  1.  (2.)  './  . 

Furo.  183.  R.  2. 

Furor,  w.  dat.  or  ah!.,  224,  R.  2. 

Future  ten.se,  145,  iii.;  how  supplied  in 
thp  suhj.,  260,  R.  7;  future  perfect  tense, 
145,  VI.;  old  form  in  so,  162,  9  and  10; 
future  indie,  for  imperative,  267,  R.  2:  259, 
B.  1,  (4.);  fut.  imperative,  267,  (2.),  (3.); 
future  pass.  part.  w.  ace,  234,  i.,  r.  2: 
fut.  perf.  for  fut..  259,  R.  1,  (5.) 

Futurum  esse  or  fore,  ut.  w.  subj.,  268 
R.  4,  (6.);  futurum  fuisse,  ut,  268,  R.  5. 

G. 

G,  sound  of,  10;  before  ,t  in  roots  o 
nouns,  56,  R.  2;  in  roots  of  verbs,  171,  1 
and  E.  5. 

Galliambus,  314.  x. 

Gaiideo,  how  conjugated,  142,  R.  2;  with 
abl.,  247,  1,  (2.);  w.  ace,  232,  n.  1;  with 
guod,  etc.,  273,  n.  6. 

Genio,  w.  ace,  232,  N.  1. 

Gems,  gender  of  names  of,  29. 

•geiM,  compounds  in,  43,  2. 

Gener,  declined,  46. 

General  relatives,  139,  5,  r.;  how  used, 

General  indefinites,  139,  5,  r. 

Gender,  26,  7  and  27;  its  divi.sions,  27; 
general  rules  of,  27—34 ;  natural  and  gra  m- 
matical,  27;  mase  from  signification,  28; 
fcm.  from  do.,  29;  common  and  doubtful, 
30;  epicene,  33;  neuter  appellatives  of  per- 
sons. .32,  2;  of  Greek  nouns,  3-4.  h.  1;  mu. 
ter,  34:  of  1st  decl.,  41;  exes  in  lstde<^l.. 
42:  of  2d  decl.,  46;  exes,  in  2d  de<-l.  4!)- 
of  .3d  decl.,  58,  62,  and  66;  exes.  inSddeci..' 
59—67;  of  4th  decl..  87;  exes,  in  4th  decl., 
88;  of  5th  decl.,  90:  exes,  in  6th  decl.,  90, 
gender  of  adjs.,  205. 

Gemro.  w.  abl.,  246,  k.  1:  generalus,  w. 
abl.,  246.  '  s  , 

Genitive,  37;  sing.,  1st  decl.,  exes,  in,  43- 
of  3d  decl.,  68:  of  adjectives,  3d  decl.,  112 
plur.,  1st  decl.,  contracted,  43;  2d  decl. 
do.,  53;  3d  decl.,  83;  terminal  letters  in  all 
the   declensions,   40,   5;    of  adjectives,  3d 


388 


INDEX. 


3pc1.,  112  and  114;  after  nouns,  211;  its 
place  279.  R. ;  what  relations  it  denotes, 
211.  R  1;  subjective  and  objective,  211,  H.  2; 
of  substantive  pronouns  objective,  211,  R. 
3;  posses.sive  adjective  used  for,  211,  R.  4; 
dative  used  fcr,  211,  R.  5;  of  character  or 
quality,  211,  k.  G;  of  measure,  211,  R.  6, 
and  (3.)  aud  (0):  noun  liniitedby.  omitted, 

211,  R-  7 ;  wanting,  it  the  predicate  after 
suni,  211,  R.  8;  in  other  cases,  211,  v..  8,(4.); 
omitted.  211,  R.9;  two  genitives,  211,  r.  10; 
gen.  after  opus  and  iisiis,  211,  11;  how 
translated,  211,  R.  12;  after  partitives,  212; 
after  a  neuter  adjective  or  adj.   pronoun, 

212,  R.  3;  its  place,  279,  IC;  after  adverb^, 
212,  R.  4:  after  adjectives,  213;  of  cause  or 
tcmte,  213,  h.  2;  different  constructions 
Instead  of,  213,  r.  4;  after  dii;nus  aud  in- 
Jisnus,  244,  k.  2;  after  verbs,  214—22(1; 
after  sum,  and  verbs  of  valuing,  214;  of 
crime,  217  ;  after  verbs  of  admonisliiug,  218 ; 
after  verbs  denoting  an  affection  of  the 
mind,  220;  instead  of  abl.  after  verbs  of 
abounding,  etc.,  220,  3;  In.stead  of  predicate 
ace,  230,  N.  4;  of  place,  '221;  after  parti- 
cles. 221,  II.,  III.;  of  gerund.s,  276,  in.,  r.  1; 
plur.  depending  on  a  gerund,  275,  n.  1. 
(3.);  place  of,  after  neuter  adjectives,  279, 
10. 

Genitives,  two,  limiting  the  same  noun, 
211,  R.  10. 

Ge.jtiliis.  w.  abl.,  246. 

Genius,  voc.  sing.,  52. 

Gentium,  2X2,  r.  4,  n.  2. 

Genus,  in  ace.  iusteadof  the  gen.  or  abl., 
as,  irl  genus,  omne  genus,  etc.,  234.  II.,  B. 
2,  fin.;  209,  b.  7,  (4'.);  231,  r.  6;  usedvrith 
the  genit.  instead  of  an  apposition,  211, 
B.  2,  N. 

Georgicon,  54,  4. 

Gero  and  fero,  compounds  of,  in  nouns 
of  2d  decl.,  47;  in  adjs.  of  1st  and  2ddecls., 
105,  3;  not  compared.  127,  7. 

Gerundives,  defined,  275,  R.  2;  how  used, 
275,  II. 

Gerunds,  25,  and  148,  2;  by  what  cases 
followed,  274;  and  gerundives,  genitive  of, 
275,  III.,  R.  1;  nouns  which  they  follow,  ib. 
(1.);  adjectives,  ib.  (2.);  after  i»/;)  denoting 
tendency,  275,  (5.);  instead  of  a  noun  in 
*pposition,  211,  R.  2,  n.  ;  dat.  of,  275,  R.  2; 
■ICC.  of,  275,  R.  3;  abl.  of,  275,  r.  4;  infiu. 
for,  after  adj..  270,  R.  1,  (a.) 

Gigno,  pr.,  284,  r.  3. 

Gl,  tl,  and  tlil,  in  syllabication,  18,  3. 

GlnrioT,  with  abl.,  247,  1,  (2.);  w.  ace, 
232,  N.  1,  and  (3.) 

Glyconic  verse,  304,  2 ;  316,  17. 

Gn,  initial,  12,   r. 

Gnarus,  w.  gen.,  213,  R.  1;  cf.  R.  4,  (1.) 

-g-o,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  59,2;  genitive 
Of,  69,  E.  1. 

Golden  age,  of  Roman  literature,  329,  2. 

Government  defined,  203,  7. 

Grammatical  subject,  202,  2j  cases  of, 
202,  R.  4;  predicate,  203,  2;  figures,  322. 

Gratia,  w.  gen.,  247,  R.  2;  its  place,  279, 
E. ;  g^atias  ago,  constr.,  273,  n   6. 

Gratum  tniki  est,  quod,  273,  S   6. 

Gratuler,  aiustr-,  278,  n.  7. 


Grave  accent,  5,  2,  and  14,  2;  15.  R    8 

Gravidus  and  gravis,  w.  gen.  or  ».b  ; 
213,  R.  5,  (3.) 

Greek  nouns,  gender  of,  34,  r.  1 ;  tenui- 
nations  of  in  1st  decl.,  44;  in  2d  decl.,  54: 
terminations  of  in  3d  decl.,  55,  R. ;  ace.  of 
iu  3d  decl.,  80;  declension  of,  in  do.,  86 

Greek  or  limiting  ace.,  234,  R.  2. 

Grex,  gender  of,  65,  2;  genitive  of,  78, 
2,(2.) 

Grus,  gender  of,  30 ;  genitive  of,  76,  e.  3 

Quilt  and  innocence,  adjectiven  of,  with 
gen  ,217,  R.  1. 


H. 


H,  its  nature,  2,  6;  its  place  in  syllabi- 
cation, 18,  1;  before  .s  in  verbal  roots,  171, 
1;  in  prosody.  283,  i.,  {b.) 

Habeo,  with  two  aocs.,  280,  N.  1;  hdber» 
in  nmnen,  or  in  loeo,  230,  N.  4;  w.  gen  of 
value,  214,  t.  2;  w.  abl.  of  price,  252,  r.  1; 
w.  two  datives.  227,  R.  1 ;  w.  participle  perf. 
pass.,  "274,  r.  4;  w.  participle  in  dus,  274, 
R.  7,  (".);  Iiaben,  non  habeo,  or  nihil  habeo, 
qiiO't,  w.  subj.,  2(34,  N.  3;  haberi,  w.  predi- 
cate nom.,  210,  r.  3,(3.),  (c);  271,  n.  2, 
and  R.  4. 

Habito,  w.  gen.  of  price,  214,  n.  1;  w 
abl.  of.  price,  252,  R.  1. 

Har  iu  answer  to  qua  ?  191,  R.  1,  (c.) 

Hactenus,  adv.  of  place  and  time,  191, 

R.  1,  (.?■)  „    , 

Hadria,  gender  of,  42,  2. 

Htc,  for  /ia?,  134,  R.  1. 

Hand,  signification  and  use,  191,  R.  3; 
hand  multum  abest  quin,  262,  N.  7;  haud 
scio  an,  198,  11,  R.  (e.) 

Hebes,  gen.  of,  112,  1;  abl.  of,  113,  B  3; 
defective.  115,  2. 

H'i  iiiihi,  228,3. 

Hellenism.  323.  R-  (2.) 

nem.  w.  dat.,  228,  3;  w.  ace,  238,  2;  w, 
voc,  240,  fi.  1. 

Hemistich,  304. 

Hemiolius,  304,  5. 

Heudiadys,  323,  2.  (3.) 

Hepar,  genit.  of,  71;  abl.  of,  82,  E.  1,  (6.) 

Hephthemimeris,  304,  5. 

Heres,  gender  of,  31,  2;  genitive,  78,  E.  1. 

Heroic  cajsura,  310,  4  and  5. 

Heios,  genitive,  75,  2;  ace,  80,  R.;  dat 
plur.,  84;  ace  plur.,  85,  E.  2;  declined,  86 

Heteroclite  nouns,  93. 

Heterogeneous  nouns,  34,  R.  2;  92. 

Heterosis,  323,  3,  (2.) 

Hexameter  vers*,  310;  Priapean,  310,  il. 

Hiatus,  279,  18. 

Hihernus,  pr.,  284,  E.  5,  R.  2. 

Hie,  pron.,  declined,  134;  distinguished 
from  ille,  207,  R.  23;  hie — hie,  for  hie — i'Ke, 
207,  R.  23,  (6.);  related  in  time  like  nunt 
and  tunc. 

Hie,  adv.  of  place,  hie,  hinc,  hue,  etc., 
referring  to  the  place  of  the  speaker,  191, 
R.  1,  (fi.);  w.  gen.,  212,  r.  4,  n.  2,  (6.); 
adv.  of  time,  191,  r.  1,  (g.) 

Him,  her,  etc.,  how  expressed  in  Latin 
207,  R.  20. 


INDEX. 


389 


Hipponactic  trimeter,  314,  n. ;  tetrameter, 
814,  IV. 

Historical  present,  145,  i.,  3:  perfect, 
145,  rv.,  R. ;  for  the  pluperfect,  259,  r.  1, 
(d.);  infinitiTe,  209,  R.  5;  tenses,  258. 

iibc,  pleonastic,  207,  R.  21  and  22;  hoc 
w.  partitive  gen.,  212,  r.  3,  n.  1;  hoc  with 
lomparitives,  256,  R.  16. 

Hodie,  pr.,  285,  2,  E.  1. 

Homo,  gender  of.  31, 2 ;  genitiTe,  69,  e.  2 ; 
homo,  homines,  ellipsis  of,  209,  R.  2,(2.): 
805.  R.  7,(1.);  229,  R.  4. 

Homoeopropherou,  324,  26. 

Honor,  (-os),  declined,  57. 

Horace,  key  to  the  odes  of,  321. 

Horatian  metres,  320. 

Horreo,  w.  inf.,  271,  .\.  1. 

Hortor,  w.  atl,  225,  R.  1;  w.  ut,  ne,  etc., 
nS.  2 ;  without  ut,  262,  r.  4. 

Hospes,  gender  of,  30 ;  formation  of  nom. 
ring.,  56,  I..  R.  3;  genitive,  73,  2j  abl.,113, 
«.  2;  as  an  adj.,  129,  8. 

Hoscis,  w.  gen.  or  dat.,  222,  r.  2,  (c.) 

'  However  '  w.  a  relative,  how  expressed 
in  Latin,  280,  rn.,  (3.) 

Hue,  w.  genitive,  212,  e.  4,  n.  3,  (ft.); 
huccine  rerutn,  212,  R.  4,  N.  3. 

Hiimi,  constr.,221,  e.  3;  hiimo,  2.54,  r.  2; 
255,  R.  1. 

Hiiie,  pronunciation  of,  9,  5;  pr.,  306, 
a.  2. 

Hujus  non  facio,  214,  B.  1. 

Hujiismor/i,  1,34,  B.  5;  w.  qui  and  the 
subj.,  264.  1.  N. 

Hypallage;  323,  4,  (3.) 

Hyperbaton,  323,  4. 

Hyperbole.  324,  5. 

Hypercatalectic  or  hypermeter  verse,  304, 
8,  (4.) 

Hypothetical  sentences,  259,  r.  3,  (c), 
((/.),  and  R.  4;  200,  n. ;  in  the  inf.,  268,  R.4 
— R.  6. 

Hysteron  proteron,  323,  4,  (2.) 


/,  its  sound,  7  and  8;  ;  and  ^  but  one 
character.  2,  3;  i  for  ii  in  gen.  of  2d  decl., 
52;  i  changed  to  e  in  forming  certain 
noms.,  56,  i.,  E.  3;  nouns  in  ;,  gender  of, 
66 ;  genitive  of,  68 :  genitive  of  Greek  nouns 
in,  73,  R. ;  dat.  of  3d  decl.  in,  79;  abl.  sing, 
in,  82;  113;  in  gen.  and  dat.  sing,  of  5th 
decl.,  90,  E.  2;  i  ending  the  former  part  of 
»  compound  noun  or  adj.,  103,  E.  1;  131, 
H  ;  i  in  dat.  sing,  of  nineadjs.  in  us  and  er, 
117;  in  1st  person  sing,  of  the  perf.  act., 
147,  3;  (',  the  characteristic  vowel  of  the 
4th  conj.,  149,  2:  cf  150,  5;  i  or  «  for  the 
Greek  «.  283.  e.  6,  '1.);  increment  in,  3d 
decl.,  287,  3;  plur..  288;  of  verbs,  290; 
J  final,  quantity  of,  285,  R.  4. ;  296. 

-ia,  abstracts  in.  iOl,  3;  in  nom.,  ace. 
and  voc.  plur.,  83:  85. 

-iV<f"<,  adjs.  in.  128,  1,  (rf.) 

Iambic  metre.  314:  303;  tetrameter,  314, 
/li  :  trimetcT,  314.  i.;  catnlectic,  314,  iv. ; 
dimeter,  314.  vi.;  hypermeter.  314.  vii.; 
icephalons.  314,  viii. ;  catalectic,  314,  IX.  ; 
.ambico-dactylic  metre,  318,  n. 

33* 


•innus,  adjs.  in,  128,  6,  (  \) 

-ias,  fem.  patronymics  in   100.  1,  (6.) 

Ibi,  ellipsis  of  before  ubi,  206,' (3.),  (a.) 

-ids,  genitives  in,  78,  2,  (2.)  and  (3.) 
74,  E.  2. 

-icius,  adjs.  in,  128,  2;  -ictus  or  -itius 
verbal  adjs.  in,  129,  5. 

Ictus,  308,  3. 

-iculus,a,um.  diminutives  in,  100,3.  E.  1 

-TCKjr,  adjs.  in,  128,  1,  (rf.),  and  2,'  (a.), 
and  6,  ii.) 

Id,  before  a  relative  pron.,  206,  (13.); 
w.  gen.,  212.  r.  3;  id  temporis,  (Etatis,  id 
genus,  etc.,  234,  ir.,  e.  3;  253,  R.  3;  id  ago, 
eonstr.,  273,  n.  1;  207.  R.  22;  i<J  ijuod  in- 
stead of  quod.  206,  (13.),  (b.);  as  ace.  of  d» 
gree,etc.,232.  (3.) 

Idem,  declined,  134,  E.  6;  how  iMed,  20" 
R.  27;  w.  gen.,  212,  r.  3;  w.  dat.,  222,  e.7j 
207,  R.  27,  (d.);  suppljing  the  place  of 
item,  etiam,  or  tamen,  207,  R.  27;  idem 
qui,  ac,  atque,i(t,  cum,  etc.,  207,  R.  27,  (a.); 
222,  R.  7 ;  idem — idem,  '  at  once,'  207,  E.  27, 
(c);  as  ace.  of  degree.  232,  (3.) 

Ides,  326,  2. 

•ides,  and  -iades,  patronymics  in,  100,  1, 
(a.);  pr.,291,  4. 

Idiotism,  325,  6. 

-idis,  genitives  in,  73,  e.  1;  74,  e.  2. 

Idonevs,  qui,  264,  9;  270,  R.  1. 

-idus,  adjs.  in,  129,  2. 

-ui,  in  5th  decl.,  quantity  of  the  e,  288, 
I.,  E.  2. 

-ies,  advs.  in,  192,,  ii..  3. 

Igitur.  198,  6;  its  place,  279,  3,  (6.). 
equivalent  to  '  I  say,'  278,  R.  10. 

Ignanis,  w.  genitive,  213,  R.  1;  275,  ni. 
E.  1,  (2.) 

-ii  in  genitive  contracted,  52;  how  •» 
cented,  14,  e. 

-He,  derivative  nouns  in,  100,  9. 

-i7»x,  adjs.  in,  129,  4;  128,4. 

Iliac,  in  answer  to  qua  ?  191,  r.  1,  (d.) 

Illacrimo,  w.  dat.,  224,  n.  1,  4. 

Illative  conjunctions,  198,  6. 

Ille,  declined,  134;  its  uses,  207,  R.  20— 
26;  w.  quidem,  redundant,  207,  R.  21; 
its  relation  to  time,  207,  R.  23,  (e.);  as  a 
pron.  of  the  Sd  pers.,  207,  r.  20;  relation 
oi hie  and  ille,  207,  a.  23;  ille,  qui,  w.  subj., 
264,  1,  N. 

lllic,  pron  ,  how  declined,  134,  e.  3; 
illic,  illuc,  mine,  advs.,  their  reference,  191, 
E.  1,  (e.) 

-illimus,  superlatives  in,  125,  2. 

Illiusmodi.  134,  6. 

-illo,  verbs  in,  187,  ii.,  4. 

Illud,  w.  genitive,  212,  e.  3,  n.  1,  (o.); 
pleonastic,  207,  r.  22;  as  ace.  of  degree, 
232,  (3.) 

Illudo,  w.  dat.,  224,  4. 

-illits,  a,  um,  diminutives  in,  100,  3,  A.  3. 

-!>/i,  in  ace.  sing.  3d  decl.,  79;  80;  itti  fol 
eiim,  134,  R.  1 ;  -im,  is,  etc.,  in  pres.  sabj., 
162,  1;  adverbs  in,  192.  i.  and  ii. 

Imhecillus.  pr.,  284,  2,  E.  2. 

Imhun.  constr.,  231,  R.  4. 

Imitative  verbs,  187,  3. 

Immemor,  gen.  of,  112,  2;  abl.,113,  b.  8 
gen.  plur.,  114,  i.  3. 


390 


INDEX. 


/mwojj&l,  R.  3. 

ImmoiJicus,  w.  gen.  or  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (3.) 

Im^nunis,  w.  gen.  or  abl.,  213,  k.  5,  (3.) 
cf-  261,  N. 

■dmonmm,  deriv.  nouns  in,  100,  6; — and 
•imonia,  verbals  in,  102,  3. 

ImpatienSy  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  1,  (2.) 

Jmpavidus,  w.  genit.,  213,  R  1,  (3.) 

hnpedio,  w.  quin,  2G2,  N.  7;  w.  quomi- 
nus,  262,  R.  11 ;  w.  inf.,  262,  r.  11,  n. 

Impello,  273,  n.  4. 

Imperative,  143,  3;  its  tenses,  145,  B.  3 
how  used,  26.,  (1.),  (2.);  irregular,  162,  4 
and  5;  subj.  for  imperative  267,  k.  2;  sing 
for  plur.,  209.  n.  2-  used  as  a  noun,  205 
R.  8. 

Imperfect  tense,  145,  n. ;  w.  oportet,  etc. 
259,  R.  3;  theimperf.  indie,  forplup.  subj. 
259,  R.  4. 

Imperitus,  w.  geni^.,  213,  R.  1,  (3.)j  of 
gerund,  275,  iii.,  r.  1,  (2.) 

Impero,  constr.,  273,  n.  4;  262,  b.  4;  w. 
dat.  and  ace.,  223,  r.  2.  (1.) 

Impersonal  verbs,  184 ;  subject  of,  184,  2 ; 
list  of  in  2d  conj.,  169;  184,  R.  1;  in  1st, 
8d,  and  4th  conj.,  184,  r.  1 ;  constr.  w.  gen., 
215,  1;  219;  w.  dat.,  223,  r.  2,  n.  (i.);  w. 
ROC,  229,  r.  6  and  7. 

Impertio,  249,  i.,  and  r.  3;  225,  R.  1,  (b.) 

Impetro,  ui,  273.  n.  2. 

hnpleo,  249,  R.  1;  220,3. 

Impotio,  241,  R.  5. 

Impos  and  impotens,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  1, 
(8.) 

Imprimis,  193,  ii.,  2. 

Imprudens,  improvidus,  w.  genit.,  213, 

R.  1. 

Impubes,  genitive,  112,  1;  abl.,  113,  B.  2; 
115,1,  (a.) 

Ifnpulsus,  w.  abl.  of  cause,  247,  r.  2,  (6.) 

-in,  roots  of  nouns  in,  56,  ii.,  R.  1  and  2; 
In  ace.  sing.,  79. 

In,  prep.,  constr.,  235,  (2.);  signification 
and  use,  195,  r.  14;  in  composition,  196,  7; 
in  with  abl.  instead  of  predicate  ace,  230, 
N.  4;  constr.  of  verbs  compd.  with,  224; 
w.  abl.  after  verbs  of  placing,  holding,  re- 
garding, assembling,  etc.,  241,  e.  5;  ellipsis 
of  with  some  ablatives  of  place,  254  and  rs.  ; 
with  ablatives  of  time,  253,  n.  1,  and  r.  6; 
with  names  of  towns,  254,  R.  2  and  R.  3. 

Inanis,  w.  genit.  or  abl.,  213,  E.  5,  (3.) 

Incassum,  193,  li.,  4. 

Incedo,  233,  (3.),  N. ;  210.  r.  3.  (2.) 

Inceptive  verbs,  187,  n,  ^;  list  of,  173. 

Incertus,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  1;  incertum 
Mt  an,  198,  11,  B.  (e.)\  265,  R.  3. 

liichor.tives,  see  inceptive  verbs. 

Incidit  ut,  262,  R.  3. 

Incito,  constr.,  225,  R.  1 ;  incitatus,  w.  abl. 
#f  cause,  247,  R.  2,  (6.) 

Incipio,  w.  inf.,  271,  N.  1. 

Inclino,  constr.,  229,  r.  4,  1;  225,  iv. 

Incommodo,  w.  dat.,  223,  r.  2,  n.  (b.) 

Increment  of  nouns,  286;  sing,  num., 
187;  plur.  num.,  288;  of  verbs,  289. 

Incrementum,  324,  22. 

Increpo  and  increpilo,  w.  gen.,  217,  R.  1. 

Incumbo,  w.  dat.,  224,  4;  w.  ad,  ^2A,  r.  4. 

Incuso,  w  genit.,  217,  r.  1. 


Tnde.,  ellipsis  of  before  unde ,  206,  (8. ),  («  Y 
indp.  loci,  212,  r.  4,  n.  4. 

Indeclinable  nouns,  34;  94; — adjectives. 
115,  4. 

Indefinite  adjectives,  104;  139,  6,  E. ; — 
pronouns,  138; — adverbs,  191,  R.  4. 

Indicative  mood.  143,  1 ;  its  tenses,  145 ; 
how  used,  259 ;  tenses  used  one  for  another, 
259,  R.  1—4;  indie,  of  the  preterites  with 
oportet,  etc.,  259,  R.  3;  in  in.serted  clauses, 
266,2,  R.  3  and  5;  266,  1,  R.  1. 

Indico,  w.  ace.  and  inf.,  272,  N.  1. 

Indigeo,  w.  abl..  250,  2,  (2.);  w.  genii 
220,  3, 

Indirj^nor,  constr.,  273,  5,  N.  6. 

Indignus,  w.  abl.,  244;  w.  genit.,  244, 
R.  2;  indignus  qui,  w.  subj.,  264,  9;  w.  su- 
pine in  u,  276,  iii.,  R.  1. 

Indigus,  w.  genit.  or  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (2.) 

Indirect  questions,  subj.  in,  265: — indi- 
rect reference,  266,  3 : — indirect  discourse, 
266,  1,  N.  and  2. 

Induce,  id  animum  inducere,  233,  (1.); 
pass.  w.  ace,  234,  r.  1;  inductus,  w.  abl 
of  cause,  247,  R.  2,  (6.) 

Indulgeo,  constr.,  223,  (1.),  (a.) 

Induo,  w.  dat.  and  ace.  224,  4;  w.  abl. 

and  ace,  249,  i.,  r.  1;  cf  224,   r.  1,  (6.); 

indue  and  exuo,  constr.  in  pass.,  234,  R.  1. 

-meor-io»e,fem.  patronymicsin,  100, 1,(6.) 

Inee,  183,  R.  3;  inire  consilia,  w.  inf., 
270,  R.  1,  (c);  134.  III. 

Iners,  abl.  of,  113,  E.  3,  and  R.  1. 

Inexpcrtus,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  1. 

Infamo,  w.  genit.  of  crime,  217,  E.  1. 

Infero,  224,  4,  and  R.  4. 

Inferus,  comparison  of,  125,  4; — inferior 
w.  dat.,  abl.,  or  qumn,  256,  R.  10;  injimut 
and  imus,  205,  R.  17. 

Infinitive,  143,  4 ;  as  a  noun,  26,  r.  ;  269; 
its  gender,  34,  4;  205,  R.  8;  its  cases,  269, 
(i.);  as  an  ace,  229,  E.  5;  270;  as  a  verb, 
269,  (a.);  its  tenses,  145,  R.  4;  old  inf. pres. 
pass,  in -er,  162,  6; — inf.  as  logical  subj., 
202,  B.  2;  269;  how  modified,  203,  ii.,  5; 
with  subject  nom.,  209,  r.  5;  for  the  geni- 
tive, 213,  R.  4;  its  subjetc,  239;  w.  dat.  in- 
stead of  ace,  227,  n.;  construction  and 
meaning  of  its  tenses,  268;  inf.  as  subject 
of  inf.,  269,  r.  3;  as  predicate  nom.,  269, 
R.  4;  esse,  etc.,  with  licet  and  a  predicate 
noun  or  adj.,  case  of  such  predicate,  269, 
R.  5 ;  poetically  after  what  verbs,  271-,  i..  3; 
depending  on  a  verb,  270;  229,  r.  5;  on  an 
adj.  or  noun.  270,  r.  1;  2v5,  ii.,  r.  1,  n.  1; 
absolute,  270,  r.  2;  ellipsis  of,  270,  r.  3; 
inf.  without  a  subject  after  what  verb« 
used,  271 ;  with  a  subject,  after  what  verbs, 
272 ;  273 ;  how  translated,  272,  r.  3 ;  used 
like  a  noun,  273,  n.  9;  its  place,  279,  11; 
inf.  pres.  for  inf.  perfect,  268,  r.  1;  inf. 
perf.  for  present,  268,  r.  2;  pres.  forfuture, 
268,  B.  3;  poet,  to  denote  a  purpose,  274, 

R.  1,  (b.) 

Infinitum  est,  the  indie  for  the  subj., 
259,  B.  4,  (2  ) 

Infirmus,  w.  genit.  or  abl.,  213,  r.  6,  (3.) 

hifit,  183, 14-,  1^0.  7> 

Inflection.  25 ;  parts  \1  aneecb  iwfleoted 
24.4. 


INDEX. 


391 


ly>t«7is,  abl  of,  113,  e.  3. 
mimicus,  tr.  dat.,  222,  r.  1;  w.  genit., 
E22.  B.  2,  (c.) 
-t«i>  genitives  In,  69,  b.  1  and  2. 
Initio,  "at  first,"  263,  N. 
Inttitor,  224,  r.  4.     See  also  nitor. 
Innocent  and  innoxius,  w.  genit     213, 

R.    1. 

Insatiabilis,  w.  genit.,  213,  E.  5,  (1.) 
Insciui,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  1.  (3.) 
Inscribo,   iTiscxtioo,   and  insero,   constr., 
241,  R.  6. 
Insimulo,  w.  geii.:  ,  ^7,  R.  1. 
Insolens  and  insolitus,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  1. 
Inops.  abl.  of.  113,  J.  3;  115,  1,  (a.);  w. 

fmit.,  213,  E.  1;  cf.  r.  4,  (1.);  w.  abl.,  250, 

Inquam,  183,  5;  ellipsis  of,  209,  r.  4;  its 
position.  279.  6. 

Inserted  clauses,  266. 

Insinuo,,  constr.,  229,  R.  4,  1. 

Insons.  genit.  plur.  of,  114,  K.  3j  115,  1, 
(a.);  w.  genit..  213,  r.  1. 

Inspergo.  249,  l.,  R.  1  and  R.  3. 

Instar,  a  diptote,  94. 

Instkuo,  273.  n.  4;  230,  N.  1;  231,  R.  4; 
w.  inf.,  271,  N.l. 

Instrument,  abl.  of,  247,  and  r.  5;  w. 
verbs  of  teaching,  231,  R.  3,  (c.) 

Instruo,  231,  E.  4. 

Insumere  tempus,  275,  R.  2. 

Insuesco.  w.  dat.  or  abl.  of  the  thing, 
245,  n.,  3;  w.  inf.,  271,  n.  1. 

Insuetits,  213,  r.  1,  (3.);  222,  b.  2,  (a.); 
?75,  III.,  (2.);  270,  e.  1;  275,  iii.,  r.  1,  (2.) 

Insuper,  w.  ace.  or  abl.,  235,  E.  8. 

Integer,  w.  genit.,  213;  integrum  est  ut, 
262,  R.  3,  N.  3. 

Intelligo,  w.  two  aces.,  230,  N.  1;  w.  ace. 
and  inf.,  272,  n.  1;  intelligitw,  w.  inf.  as 
subject,  269,  r.  2. 

Intention  denoted  by  participle  in  riu 
with  sum,  162,  14;  274,  r.  6. 

Intentus,  w.acc.  n//u7,  232,  (3.);  intentum 
esse,  w.  dat.  of  gerund,  275,  in.,  r.  2,  (1.) 

Inter,  use  of,  235.  1,  E.  2;  in  composition, 
196,  I.,  8; — w.  se  or  ipse,  208,  (5.);  w.  ge- 
runds, 275,  III.,  r.  3;  instead  of  partitive 
gen.,  212,  r.  3,  n.  4;  construction  of  its 
eompds.,  224;  repeated  by  Cicero  after  m- 
teresse.  277,  u.,  4. 

Inttrcedo,  w.  quin,  ne,  or  guominus,  262, 
r.  11. 

Interdutio  and  intertjico.  251,  N.  and  r.  2. 

Intenlico,  w.  abl.,  251.  >. 

Inter// iu  or  f/ie,  253,  s.  1. 

Interea  loci.  212,  K.  4,  N.  4. 

Interest,  Roman  computation  of,  327. 

Intercut,  w.  genit.,  219;  yt-mea,  etc.,  219, 
1. 1;  subject  tf.  219.  a. 4;  degree  of  interest 
how  espre.soed,  219.  R  5.' 

Interior,  comparison  of,  126,  1 ;  intimus, 
205.  R.  17. 

Iiiteijections,  199;  w.  nom.,  209,  r.  13; 
w.  dat.,  22.3  (3.);  w.  ace,  23S.  2;  w.  voc., 
MO;   O.htu.  etc.,  not  elided.  305. 

InteAnitto.  w.  inf ,  271,  N   1 

Jn£ery/r«,  gender  of,  30;  61  2;  genit.  of, 

rs.  8. 

Inttrrittu.  w.  genit.,  213,  b  1  and  2 


luterrogativo  particles,  198,  11;-  adjs. 
104,  14;  121,  5;  139,  5,  3;— pronoun*,  137. 
in  indirect  questions,  137,  N. ;  265,  n.  2;— < 
sentences,  200,  3. 

Inttrrogo,  w.  two  aces.,  231,  R.  1;  constr. 
In  pass.,  234,  i.;  w.  genit.  of  the  ciime, 
217,  R.  1. 

Intersuvi.  w.  dat.,  224,  5. 

Intiis.  w.  ace,  338,  1,  (6.) 

Intra,  how  used,  195,  R.  8;  253,  R.  4   (6.) 

Intransitive  verb,  141.  ii.;  used  imper- 
sonally in  pass.  w.  dat.,  223   N.  1,  (c.) 

-inns,  acijs.  in.  128,  1,  2,  and  6. 

Inva'/o,  233,  (3.),  N. 

Invariable  ailjs.,  122;  specified,  127,  7. 

Invenio,  w.  two  aces.,  230,  N.  1;  invent- 
unt'tr,  qui,  w.  subj.,  264,  6. 

Invideo,  constr.,  223,  (1.),  (c);  220,  1 
invidetur  7nihi,  223,  R.  2,  N.  (c.) 

Imnttts,  w.  dat.  of  the  person,  226,  r.  3, 
invito  Minerva,  257,  R.  7. 

Involuntary  agent  of  pass,  verb,  248,  ii., 
and  N. 

-10,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  59,  1;  personal 
appellatives  in,  100,  4,  (6.);  verbals  in,  102, 
7;  verbs  in  of  3d  conj.,  159. 

Ionic  metre,  317 ;  303 ; — a  majore,  317, 1. ; 
— a  minore,  317,  11. 

-ior,  -ills,  in  terminational  comparatives, 
124,1. 

Ipse,  declined,  135;  how  used,  135,  R.  1; 
207,  R.  28;  used  reflesively,  208,  (4.);  207, 
K.  28,  (e.);  w.  i7iter,  208,  (5.)|_  et  ipse,  207, 
R.27,  (6.);  ipse,  with  the  inf.,  2/3,  n.  9,  (a.); 
nunc  ipsum  and  turn  ipsinn,  191,  R.  7. 

Ipstts  and  ipsissitnus,  135,  R.  2. 

Irascor,  w.  dat.,  223,  R.  2,  N.,  (i.) 

Iri,  w.  supine  in  i(7>t,  276,  ii.,  R.  3. 

Iron  age  of  Roman  literature,  .329,  4. 

Irony,  324,  4. 

Irregular  nouns,  92 ; — adjs.,  115 ; — verbs, 
178—182. 

-is,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  62;  63;  genitive 
of.  74 ;  -Is  or  -eis  instead  of  -es  in  Ktc.  plnr. 
of  3d  decl.,  85,  e.  1;  abl.  of  adjs.  in  is  used 
as  nouns,  82,  K.  4: — used  as  proper  names, 
82,  E.  4,  {b.);  -is  for  -us  in  genitive  of  4th 
decl.,  89,  2;  fem.  patronj-mics  in,  100,  1, 
(6. ) ;  eUipsis  of  in  2d  root  of  verbs,  162.  7,  (c  ) 

Is,  pron.,  declined,  134;  how  used.  207, 
R.  26;  referring  to  a  clause,  206,  (13.);  ii 
and  ille  with  r/uidem  used  pleonastically, 
207,  R.  21;  (5  for  talis,  207,  R.  26,  (6.) ;  264, 
1,  N.;  et  IS,  atque  is.  isque,  et  is  quidem 
207,  B.  26, '.  c.) ;  eUipsis  of  w,  207,  R.  26,  (d.); 
ii-qui,  264,  1,  N. 

Islands,  gender  of,  29;  constr.  of  namea 
of,  237,  R.  5,  (b.) 

-issi7nus,  a,  um,  the  terminational  super 
lative,  124,  2. 

-isso,  verbs  in,  187,  ii.,  6. 

Iste.  how  declined,  134;  how  used,  20? 
R.  23,  25;  iste  qui,  w,  subj.,  264,  1,  N. 

Istic,  pron.,  declined,  134,  U.  3. 

Istic,  adv.,  istinc,  istuc,  the'f  reference, 
191,  R.  1.  (e.) 

Istiusmodi.  134,  R.  5. 

-it.  roots  of  nouns  in,  56.  ti.,  r.  5;  In  3d 
root  of  4th  conj.,  176  of  certain  verb«  of 
3d  conj..  171,  K.  7 


R92 


INDEX. 


Ita,  191,  R  5;  277,  R.  12.  (o.);  ita  non, 
I'll,  R.  14. 

ItHi/iie,  its  meaning,  198,  6,  R. ;  its  place, 
279,3,(6.) 

Iter,  declined,  57;  71,  2;  with  sum  and 
ace.  of  place,  237,  E.  1:  incremente  of, 
286.2. 

•iter  and  -ter,  advs.  in,  192,  ii.  and  iv. 

-itas,  -id,  -itia,  -ities,  -itudo,  and  -itus, 
l^Btracts  in,  101,  1. 

-itis,  genitive  in,  73;  78,  1;  112,  1. 
^-ito,  frequentatives  in,  187,  il.,  1. 
' -ithis  or  -icius,  adjs.  in,  129,  5. 

Itiim,  sup.,  in  prosody,  284,  s.  1,  (2.) 

-itus,  advs.  in,  192,  i.  and  ii. ;  adjs.  in, 
138,7. 

-tmn,  verbals  in,  102,  2;  -ium  or  -itium, 
nouns  in,  100,  5. 

-i«s,  genitives  in,  place  of  English  accent, 
15;  in  what  adjs.,  107;  quantity  of  the  r, 
588.,  I.,  E.  4:— adjs.  in,  128,  1,  2,  and  5; 
voo..  sing,  of  patrial.?  and  possessives  in,  52. 

-t'P,  in  2d  roots  of  verbs,  175;  171,  E.  8. 

-tMM,  adjs.  in,  129,  7. 


J.  vowel  before,  in  prosody,  283,  iv.,  n.  1. 

Jaceo,  210,  R.  3,  (2.);  233,  (8.),  n. 

Jam,  with  a  negative,  191,  r.  6;  jamdu- 
dum,  ib. 

Jecur,  genitive  of,  71,  3;  increments  of, 
286,2. 

Jejunus,  w.  gen.  or  abl.,  213,  r.  5,  (3.) 

Jesus,  decl.  of,  53. 

Jocus,  ^lur.  joci  and  joca,  92,  2. 

Jubar,  abl.  of,  82,  e.  1,  (6.) 

Jubeo,  constr.,  223,  (2.);  273,  2,  (rf.);  272, 
B.  6;  262,  R.  4;  ellipsis  of  jubeo  valere,  238, 
E.  2;  jubeor,  w.  inf.,  271,  N.  1. 

Jucundus,  constr.,  276,  iii.,  r.  1  and  4; 
jucundum  est,  w.  quod,  273,  5,  N.  6. 

Judico,  w.  two  aces.,  230,  N.  1;  w.  ace. 
and  inf.,  272,  n.  1;  in  pass.,  210,  r.  3,  (3.), 
(c);  judicari  w.  predicate  nominative,  271, 
N.  2. 

Jugerum,  93,  1 ;  94. 

Jugu7n,  quantity  of  its  compds.,  283,  iv., 
K.  1. 

Jungo,  constr.,  229,  p..  4,  1. 

Junctus  and  conjunctus,  constr.,  222, 
a  6,  (c.) 

Jupiter^  genitive  of,  71 ;  declined,  85. 

J%Te  aliquid  facere,  without  cum.,  247,  2. 

Ju)».  its  compds.,  189,  N.  3:—jiiratus, 
with  tr«tive  meaning,  163, 16 :— j«ro,  poet. 
w.  inf.,  *n,  N.  3. 

Jusjurandum,  declined,  91. 

Justum  erat,  indie,  for  subj.,  2.59,  R.  3; 
justum  est  with  inf.  as  subject,  269,  R.  2; 
justo  aft«r  comparatives,  256,  r.  9;  its 
plac«,  279,  N.  1. 

Juvat,  w.  ace,  229,  R.  7. 

Juvenalis,  abl.  of^  82,  E.  4,  (6.) 

Juvenis,  abl.  of,  82,  E.  4,  (6.);  113,  e.  2; 
lomparison  of.  126,4;  115,  1,  (a.);  for  in 
juventute,  253,  r.  6. 

Juxta  as  an  adv.,  195,  R.  4;  juxta  ac  or 
ntque,  198,  3,  b 


K,  its  use,  2,  4. 

Key  to  the  Odes  of  Horace,  821. 

Knowing,  verbs  of,  their  construction,  3^2 

L. 

i,  roots  of  nouns  in,  56,  ii. ;  gender  ni 
nouns  in,  66 ;  genitive  of,  70 ; — final,  quax 
tity  of,  299,  2. 

Laboro,  constr.,  273,  N.  1;  poet.  w.  irJ 
271,  N.  3. 

Labials,  3,  1. 

Lac,  gender  of,  66,  e.  ;  genitive  of,  70. 

Lacesso,  constr.,  225,  R.  1. 

LcEtor,  w.  abl.,  247,  1,  (2.);  ace.,  232,  (8  ) 

L(Ptus.  w.  abl.  or  gen.,  218,  r.  5,  (4.}; 
cf.  R.  4,  (1.) 

Lampas,  declined,  86. 

Lapis^  declined,  5(. 

Lar,  pr.,  284,  N.  1. 

Largus,y}.  gen.  or  abl.,  213,  r.  5,(8.); 
cf.  R.  4,  (1.) 

Lars,  genitive  of,  71. 

Lassus,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  2. 

Lateo,  w.  dat.  or  ace,  223,  R.  2,  n.,  (6.), 
and  (1.),  (a.) 

Latin  grammar,  its  divisions,  1. 

Latinis,  for  ludis  Latinis,  253,  n.  1. 

Lotus,  alius,  and  Inngiis,  w.  ace.  of  space, 
236. 

Lavo  audto.ro,  scil.  se,  229,  R.4, 1;  lavo, 
w.  abl.  of  price,  252,  r.  1. 

Laxo,  w.  abl.,  251,  N. 

Leading  clause,  subject,  and  verb,  201, 13. 

Lego  fere),  its  form  in  the  compds.,  189, 
N.  2;"  constr.,  2.30,  N.  1. 

Lenio,  constr.,  229,  R.  4,  1. 

-lentus,  adjs.  in,  128,  4. 

Letters,  2;  division  of,  3;  sounds  of,  7 
numeral,  118,  7 ;  capital,  2,  2 ;  silent,  12,  r. 
terminal  in  3d  decl.,  55. 

Leva,  w.  abl.,  251,  n.;  w.  gen.  poet. 
220,  2. 

Lex,  gender,  65,  2;  genitive,  78,  2,  (2.);— 
legem  dart,  constr.,  273,  2,  N.  4; — lege,  abl. 
of  manner,  247,  2. 

Liber,  w.  abl.  or  gen.,  213,  R.  5,  (4.);  tf 
220,2;  and 251,  N.;  w.  genit.,  218,  r.  5,  (4.); 
cf.  R.  4,  (1.) 

Libera,  w.  abl.,  251,  w. ;  poetically,  w 
genit.,  220,  2. 

Liberalis.  w.  genit.,  213,  E.  5,  (1.) 

Lihram  and  libras,  236,  R.  7. 

Libra,  abl.  w.  adj.  without  prep.,  264, 
R.  2. 

Licentia,  w.  genit.  of  gerund,  275,  in., 
R.  1,  (1.) 

Liceo,  w.  genit.  of  price,  214,  r.  3:  w 
abl.,  2,52,  R.  1. 

L/ceZ,  w.  dat.,  223  R.  2;w.  subj.  the  ace. 
with  the  inf.,  or  the  inf.  alone,  2i3,  4;  2i".2. 
R.4;  w.  inf.  as  subject,  269,  e.  2 ;  case  of 
the  predicate  after  licet  esse,  etc.,  269,  R.  5; 
w.  indicative  instead  of  subj.,  259,  ^  3,  (o.' 
— licet,  conj.  w.  subj.,  263,  2. 

Limiting  ace,  234,  n. ;— abl.,  250  and  R. 

-limus,  superlatives  in,  125,  2. 

Linguals  and  liquids,  3, 1- 


INDEX. 


393 


Liqwduf,  pr.,  2R4,  E.  5.,  R.  8. 

4is.  adjs.  iu,  comparison,  125,  2. 

literas  ilare,  scribere  or  mittere,  22o,  m., 
t.  4;  ellipsis  of,  229,  r.  4,  2;  literas  or  Ute- 
ris, after  Terbs  of  teaching,  231,  r.  3,  (c.) 

Litotes,  324.  0. 

Litiim,pT.,  2Si,  E.  1,  (2.) 

Loading,  verbs  of.  w.  abl.,  249, 1. 

Lontplrf.  genitive  of,  112,  1;  abl.,  113, 
B.  2;  gen.  plur.,  114,  e.  3;  115,  1,  (n.) ;  w. 
»bl.  .Drgen..  213,  R.  5,  (4.) 

Lnciis,  plur.  loci  and  lora,  92,  i.,  2;  !oco 
»nd  lor  is,  abl.  of  place  without  a  prepoai- 
tion,  254,  r.  2;  loco,  w.  gen.  for  predicate 
nora.,  210,  N.  3;  for  predicate  aoc.,  230,  n. 
i:  loci  and  locorinn .  2V2,  u.  4,  n.  2  and  N. 
i;  /oci/.s  iu  appo.«ition  to  names  of  towns, 
237,  R.  2;  loco,  VI.  gen.  of  price,  241,  r.  5; 
w.  .^bl.  of  price,  252,  r.  1;  w.  participles  iu 
i/i(.',  274.  R.  7;  w.  genitive  of  gerunds,  276, 
HI..   R.  1,  (1.) 

Logical  subject,  202,  3 .—predicate,  203, 3. 

Long  syllsMe,  2.S2.  2. 

Lon^e.  w.  comparatives  and  superlatives, 
127,  3;  25f),  n.;  w.  ace.  of  .space,  236,  n.  1; 
.ongr  gftiiium,  212.  r.  4,  n.  2,  (6.);  longins 
trithout  r/iinm,  2513,  r.  6. 

Lon^ititi/in^.  w.  genit.  of  measure,  211, 
R.  6,  i6.) 

Ln/igii3,  w.  ace.  of  space,  236;  longum 
est.  the  indicative  in.stead  of  the  subjunc- 
tive, 259,  H.  4,  ,2.) 

-h,  genitive  of  nouns  in,  77,  2,  (2.) 

Luili.s.  for  in  tempore  ludorum,  253,  N.  1; 
257.  R.  9,  v2.) 

Luo,  w.  abl.,  252,  r.  1. 

M. 

M,  roots  of  nouns  ending  in,  56,  i. ;  be- 
fore '/changed  to  n,  134,  .\.  1;  dropped  in 
the  3il  rootof  certain  verbs,  171,  k.  6;  final, 
quantity  of,  299,  3;  elided,  305,  2. 

-jTia,  Greek  nouns  in,  genitive  plur.  of, 
84.  E.  2. 

Macttis,  115,  5;  macte,  w.  abl.,  247,  1, 
N.  2;  w.  genit.,  213,  r.  5,  {4.} 

Ma'^ii  and  mnxime,  use  of  in  forming 
comparatives  and  superlatives,  127,  1 ;  ple- 
onastic with  wnHf^etc,  256.  R.  13. 

Mngiius.  compared,  125,  5^  w.  supine  iu 
u,  276,  III..  R.  1 :  ningnam  partem,  234,  il., 
R.  3;  niagni.parci,  etc.,  w.  verbs  of  valu- 
ing, 214,  R.  1;  magnn,  parvo,  etc.,  w.  verbs- 
of  buying,  etc.,  252,  r.  3. 

lnhile.  constr.  of  its  compounds  malefar.io, 
tnale'liro.  etc.,  22o,  i.;  j/m/f ,  instejid  of  abl. 
of  price,  252.  r.  3;  male.  hme.  or  prur/enter 
facio :  maU  or  h^iie  Jit.  w.  ',uorl. 273,  5, (1.) 

Malo,  conjugated,  178.  3;  constr.,  273,  4; 
862.  R.  4  ;  inalUm.  meaning  of,  260,  il.  n.  2 ; 
eoustr.  w.  abl.  like  a  comparative,  '256,  r. 
16,(3.) 

Malua.  compared.  125,  5. 

.•./rt»K#o,  constr.,  223,  r.  2.  and  (1.),  (6.) ; 
«73.  \.  4;  274   r.  7,  (a.);  262,  r.  4. 

ISlane.  94  ;  192,  3. 

Maneo.tVd,   k.  3,(2.);  compds.  of,  233, 

R.),  N 

Uani/eshtf.  w.  gHuit.,  213,  b.  1. 


Manner,  ad  vs.  of,  191,   i.i.,  abl  of  -247 
with  rum.  247,  2;  w.  i/e  or  ex,  247,  R-  3. 

Manits.  gender  of,  88 ;  ellipsis  of,  205,  a 
7;  mriniim  injirere.  23S.  il.) 

JSlure,  abl.  of.  82,  e.  1.  (i.;;  ellipsis  of, 
205,  R.  (. 

Mas,  gender  of,  62,  e.  1;  genitive,  72, 
E.  1;  genit.  plur.,  83,  ii.,  3,  e.  ;  used  t« 
distinguish  the  sex  of  epicenes,  33.  N. 

Masculine  nouns  of  3d  decl.,  5S:  e.xcefv 
tioiis  in,  .59 — 61; — masculine  cresura,  310. 
.N.  1. 

Itlaterfmnilias.  declined.  91. 

Materia,  w.  genit.  of  gerunds,  275,  III  , 
R.  l.,(10 

Material  nouns,  26,  6;— adjs..  104,  fs 

JMatiiro,  scil.  se,  229,  R.  4,  1;  w.  inf.,  271, 
N.  1. 

I\[e  and  mi  for  mihi,  133,  R.  1. 

ilia,  tua,  etc.,  w.  refert  and  interest, 219, 
R.  1  and  2. 

Means,  abl.  of,  247;  when  a  person,  247, 
R.  4;  w.  passive  verbs.  248. 

Measure  or  metre.  3UtS;  Roman  me;u<upe8 
of  length,  etc.,  ."27. 

Merieor,  w.  dat,,  223,  N.  (</.);  its  gerun- 
dive, 275,  II.,  R.  1. 

Medicor,  constr.,  223,  (1.),  (n.) 

Meditor,  constr.,  273,  N.  1. 

Mfdiiis.  how  translated,  205,  r.  17;  w, 
genit.,  213;  w.  inter.  212,  r.4,(2.);  w.  abl., 
213,  R.  4,  (5.);  its  pl.ace,  279,  7,  (6.) 

Mel,  genitive  of,  70,  E. ;  56,  n.,  k.  6;  abl., 
82,  E.  5,  (ft.);  94. 

Melas,  genitive  of,  72,  E.  2. 

Melius  fuit  and  erat  instead  of  subj..  259, 
R.  3;  melius  est,  w.  dat.,  228,  1;  witYnts 
erit.  w.  perf.  inf.,  268,  R.  2. 

Melos,  nom.  plur.  of,  83,  1 ;  94. 

Meme  and  mrpte,  intensive.  133,  R.  2. 

Memini.  183,  3;  constr.,  216;  w.  present 
inf.,  268,  R.  1;  w.  ace.  and  inf ,  272,  n.  1; 
memento,  poet.  w.  inf.,  271,  n.  3. 

Memor,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  1,  (3.) ;  w.  subj., 
213,  R.  4. 

Blemoro,  constr.,  272,  R.  6. 

-men,  nouna  in,  gender  of,  61,  4,  and  66; 
genitive,  71,  1 1  -men  or  -mentu7n,  verbali 
in,  102,  4. 

Mens;  in  mtntem  venit,  constr.,  216, 
B.  3. 

Mercor,  w.  abl.  of  price,  252,  r. 

-met.  enclitic,  1.33,  R.  2 ;  139,  R   1 

Metalepsis,  .324,  6. 

Metaphor,  324,  1. 

Metaplasm,  322,  1. 

Metathesis,  322,  9. 

Meto,  171,  E.  2. 

Metonymy,  324,  2. 

Sletre,  303 ;  how  divided,  303,  3 ;  differeiit 
kinds,  310—317. 

Metres,  compound,  318;  Horatian,  320. 

-metros.  Greek  nouns  in,  49,  2. 

Metuo,  w.  ut  or  ne,  262,  R.  7;  w.  inf.,  271, 

N.  1. 

Meus,  voc.  sing,  masc,  105.  R.  3;  139, 1; 
used  retlexively,  139,  R.  2;  how  declined, 
139:  meiem  est,  211,  R.  8,  (3.),  (a.) 

Mi.  for  mi/ii.  1*3,  R.  1. 

Middle  voice  in  Greek,  248,  R.  1,  (2  ) 


39A 


INDEX. 


Mile,  Roman,  327. 

Miles,  declined,  57;  gender,  30;  61,  2; 
genitive,  73,  2 ;  used  collectively,  209,  r.  11, 
(1.).  (i-);  ellipsis  of,  205,  R.  7. 

Military  expressions  without  cu7ti,  249, 
III.,  R. 

Militia,  construed  like  names  of  towns, 
221,  R.  3. 

Mi'We,  how  used,  118,6;  ellipsis  of,  327, 
R  5. 

MiUioK,  how  expressed,  118,  5,  (a.);  a 
Biillion  susterces,  327,  K.  ?. 

Mill'  for  mikine,  133,  R.  1. 

■onino.  in  old  imperatives,  162,  5. 

Minor  and  compds,  w.  ace.  and  dat.,  223. 

(1  )   (*.) 

Ministro,  w.  dat.,  223,  R.  2;  and  (1.),  {b.) 

IMiiius  and  minimum,  w.  genit.,212,  R.  3, 
N.  1;  7ninii!..  for  noii.  277,  I.,  R.  14;  nmius 
without  f/iiam,  256,  r.  6. 

Miror,  conjugated,  161 ;  w.  genit.  poet., 
220,  1;  constr.,  273,  N.  6. 

Mirum  est  tit,  262,  r.  3,  N.  3;  mirum 
qvam,  quunlum,  etc.,  264,  R.  4. 

Misreo,  how  construed,  245,  ii.,  2,  andR. 
1;  224,  R.  3. 

Miserecr,  miseresro,  tniseret,  misfritum 
est,  anAmiserescit,  w.gen.  of  the  thing,  215; 
miseret,  etc.,  w.  ace.  of  the  person,  215,  N. 
3;  229,  R.  6;  and  w.  ace.  of  the  thing,  215, 
N.  2;  w.  ace.  of  degree,  215,  N.  3. 

Mitis,  declined,  109. 

Mitto,  w.  ad  or  in,  225;  w.  two  dats.,227; 
273,  2,  (f.):  w.  participle  in  c/us,  274,  r.  7; 
w.  inf.,  271,  N.  3;  w.  qjiod,  273;  t>iissum 
facto,  274,  R.  4. 

Mil.  initial,  12,  2,  r. 

Mohilis,  pr.,  284,  e.  5,  R.  1. 

Moderor,  constr.,  223,  (1.),  (a.) 

Modi  annexed  to  pronouns,  134,  R.  5; 
its  u.se,  211,  R.  6,  (5.) 

Modiciis,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  5,  (1.) 

Modified  subject,  202,  6;  itself  modified, 
202,  III.,  R.  1 ;— precUcate,  203,  5. 

Modify  or  limit,  in  what  sense  used,  202, 
4,  R. 

Modo  as  abl.  of  manner,  247,  2. 

Modo,  conditional  conj.,  198,  5;  w.  subj., 
263,2;  modo,  adv.,  193,  ii.,  3;  inodo  ne, 
2(^3,  2,  N.  1;  7nodo — modo,  277,  R.  8. 

Modus,  w.  genit.  of  gerunds,   275,  iii., 

R.  1,  (1.) 

Mollio,  229,  R.  4, 1. 

Molests,  (F.gre  or  graviter  fero,  w.  quod, 
273,  N.  6. 

Moneo.  conjugated,  157;  constr.,  218, 
and  R.  1,  2 ;  273,  n  ± ;  without  lit,  262,  r.  4 ; 
w.  »cc.  and  inf.,  273,  n.  4,  (e.);  in  pass., 
234,1. 

Money,  Roman.  327,  pp.  370—372. 

Monocolou,  319,  2. 

Monometer,  304,  2;  313,  I. 

Monoptotes.  94. 

Monosyllables,  quantity  of,  294,  (a.); 
i99.  1 ;  their  place.  279,  8. 

Mnns.  gender  of,  64,  1. 

Month.s.  i'voman,  32G,  2;  names  of,  326; 
division  of.  -326, 1 ;  gender  of  names  of,  28 ; 
116,  3;  ab'.    of  names  in  er  and  is,  82,  e.  2,. 

0-^ 


Moods,  143. 

Mora,  in  prosody,  282,  2. 

Mos  OT  moris  est,  constr.,  26l4,  N.  2;  w 
genit.  of  gerunds,  275,  iii.,  R.  1,  (l-);  mon 
aa  abl.  of  manner  without  c«?«,  247,  2. 

Motion  or  tendency,  verbs  of,  constr., 
225, IV. ;  237,  b.  3. 

Motum,  pr.,  284,  e.  5,  r.  1. 

Mountains,  gender  of  names  of,  28,  3. 

Moveo,  constr.,  229,  r.  4,  1;  251,  w.j 
motus,  w.  abl.  ofcau.se,  247,  R.  2,  (6.) 

-ms,  nouns  in,  genitive  of,  77,  2,  (1.) 

Multiplicatives,  121,  1. 

Miilto,  (are),  constr.,  217,  R.  5. 

Multtis.  compared,  125,  5 ;  miilii  et,  hois 
used,  278,  r.  5;  multo,  w.  comparatiTSs . 
etc.,  127,  3;  256.  r.  16;  so  muUuui,  ib.,  n.,- 
mtiltmn,  w.  genitive,  212,  R.  3.  N.  1;  as 
ace.  of  degree,  212,  (2.);mi/7<2«insteadof  an 
adverb,  205,  R.  15. 

Mus.  gender  of.  30;  67,  4;  genitive,  76, 
B.  3;  genit.  plur.,  83,  ii.,  3. 

Munijicus,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  5,  (1.) 

Mutes,  division  of,  3,  1;  a  mute  and 
a  liquid  in  prosody,  2S3.  IV.,  E.  2. 

Miililvs,  w.  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (5.) 

Muto,  constr.,  252,  r.  5;  229,  r.  4,  1. 


N. 


jV,  roots  of  nouns  in.  56,  n. ;  nouns  in, 
gender  of,  58;  61;  genitive  of,  70;  71; 
final,  quantity  of,  299,  E. ;  dropped  in  the 
3d  root  of  certain  verbs,  171,  e.  6. 

-nactis,  genitive  of  Greek  names  in,  78, 
2,(1.) 

Nam  and  enim,  198,  7,  R.,  (a.);  place  ofi 
279,  3,  (a.)  ami  (f.) 

Names  of  persons,  their  order,  279,9,(6.); 
of  nations  instead  of  those  of  countries  2.5S, 
R.  3;  2.37,  R.  5. 

Narro,  w.  ace.  and  inf.,  272,  N.  1,  and  r. 
6;  narror,  constr.,  271,  R.  2. 

Nascor,  w.  abl.,  246,  R.  1;  nascitur,  w. 
subj.,  262,  R.  3,  N.  2. 

Nato,  232,  (2.),  n.  1;  constr.  of  compds., 
233,  (3.),  N. 

Natiira  fert,  constr.,  262,  R.  3.,  N.  2. 

Naturale  est,  w.  ut  and  the  subj.,  262, 

R.  3,  N.  3. 

Nattis,  w'  abl.,  246;  natus,  '  old,'  w  acc  , 
236,  N.  3;  poet.  w.  inf.,  271,  n.  3. 

Natu,^i;  250,1;  126,4. 

Naiici  habere,  214,  R.  1. 

-nS,  enclitic  conjunction,  198,  11;  qusn 
tity  of,  295,  R.;  as  an  interrogative  parti 
cle,  198,  11,  R.,  (c);  its  place,  279,  3,  V.) 

Ne,  adv.,  the  primitive  negative  particle, 
191,  III.,  R.  3,  p.  168;  w.  quidem,  ib. ;  279, 
3,  (rf.);  w.  subjunctives  used  as  impera/- 
tives,  ib. ;  in  wishes,  asseverations  and  con- 
cessions, ib.;  260,  R.  6,  (b.)  with  the  imper- 
ative, 267,  R.  1 ;  ne  miilta,  ne  plura,  etc., 
229,  R.  3,  2 ;— in  intentional  clauses,  262, 
R.  5;  ne  non,  for  ut,  262.  N.  4:  ellipsis  of, 
262,  R.  6;  ne,  for  nediim,  202.  M.  5. 

Nee  or  neque,  198,  1;  nee  non  or  nequt 
non.  ib. ;  nee — »iec,  with  the  si)igular,  209, 
R.  12,  (5),  («.);  neque,  for  et  ne,  after  ut 
and  9ie,  2o2,  r.  6,  n.  4; — nee  ipse,  207 ,  r.  27, 


INDEX. 


39,5 


(6.);  nrc  w,  207,  R-  26,  (c);  n«c««  or  nnnon, 
865,  R.  2;  necdum,  2(7,  l.,  k.  16;  its  place, 
279,  3,  (a.) 

Ntcesse,  defective  adj.,  115.  5;  necesse  est 
ut,  etc.,  202,  u.  3,  n.  2;  without  ut,  262, 
N.  4;  necesse  /'ttit,  the  ii;dic.  for  the  subj  , 
259,  R.  3;  w.  inf.  as  .subject,  269,  R.  2;  w. 
-redicate  dat.,2G9,  R.  5;  273,  4. 

Necessity,  how  expressed,  1G2.  15. 

jVecessario,  after  comparative.?,  256,  R.  9. 

Nei/utii,  w.  8ubj.,  262,  N.  5;  without  a 
ferb,  ib. 

Nf/nf,  getider  of,  j62,  e.  2:  94;  w.  supine 
(n  II.  270,  lu.,  R.  2. 

Negatives,  two,  their  force,  277,  ».  3 — 5 ; 
c^aative  joined  to  the  conjunction,  as,  nee 
iitisijiiam.  nee  ullus,  etc ., instead  of  ct  nemo, 
•I  niiUiis.  etc.,  278,  b.  9. 

Ne^ligtns,   constr.,  218,  R.  4,  (2.) 

iWifn,  instead  of  non  /lico,  279,  15,  (6.); 
•T  .ICO.  and  inf.,  272,  N.  1,  and  R.  6;  negor, 
w.  inf..  271,  V.  1. 

Xi;otiiim.  ellipsis  of.  211,  R.  8,  N. 

Ntma,  94  and  9.^:  for  nulliis,  207,  R.  31; 
nemo  est  iiui.  2i'i4.  7,  N.  2;  nemo  non, 
'  every  one.'  277,  r.  5,  (e.) 

^Vmpe.  191.  R.  4:  198,  7,  R.,  (a.) 

Neoterism,  325,  3. 

Seifiia  and  nei/uet,  138,  2. 

Nequam,  indeclinable,  115,  4;  compared, 
125,  5. 

JVet/ue,  see  nee;  for  et  non,  198,  1,  (c); 
neqiie — nff/ne,  or  nee — nee,  nei/ue — tiee,  nee 
— nf^Hf,  198.  1.  («.);  7ifi/ue — et,  ib. ;  neque 
w.  general  negatives.  279,  15,  (b.);  neque 
non,  277,  K.  3:  neque  quisquam,  uUus,  um- 
qiiam,  etc..  278.  R.9. 

yrqiifo,  how  conjugated,  182,  N. ;  w.  inf., 
271,  N.  4. 

iVe  guis  OT  neqiiis,  how  declined,  188,2; 
ve  qicis.  instead  otne  quisquam,  207,  R.  31; 
278.  R.9. 

AVr/o,  genitive  of,  69,  E.  2. 

Ntscia  «rt,  198,  11,  R.,  (e.);  265,  R.  3; 
r.tscio  qiiis,  265,  R.  4;  nescio  quomodo,  ib. ; 
w.  ace.  and  inf..  272.  n.  1. 

Neseius,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  1,  (3.) 

-nnis  and  -niis,  adjs.  in.  128,  1,  (i.) 

Neuter,  nouns,  -34:  not  found  in  1st  and 
5th  decls.,  40,  9;  of  2d  decl.,  46;  54;  of  3d 
decl.,  i>0 ;  exes,  in,  66 ;  t)7 ;  .ailjs.  used  adverb- 
ially, 205.  R.  10,  adjs.  ami  adj.  prons,  w. 
genit.,  212,  R.  3;  ace.  of  denoting  degree  w. 
another  ace.  after  transitive  verbs,  231,  R.  5 ; 
rerbs.  141;  form  of.  142,  1;  neuter  passives, 
142.  2;  neuter  verbs  with  cognate,  etc., 
iub.jects,  2.34,  ill. ;  w.  cognate  ace,  2.32,  (1.) ; 
«•.  ace.  of  degree,  etc.,  232,  (3.);  w.  abl.  of 
Bg'"it.  248,  R.  2;  used  impersonally,  184,2; 
in  the  pa-ssive  voice,  142.  r.  2:  participles 
of.  Ii'i2,  18 ;  neuters  of  posses.sive  pronouns 
and  adjs.  instead  of  the  genitive-  of  their 
[ersoiial  pronouns,  or  of  a  corresponding 
uoun,  211,  R.  8,  (3.),  (n.)  and  (6.) 

Neutral  pa,«sive  verbs,  142,  3. 

j\'eve  or  ntu,  198,  8 ;  after  ut  and  ne,  262, 
.V.4. 

Ni  or  nrvi,  198,  5,  R.,  (6.);  nisi,  '  except,' 
801,  K.  6;  277,  R.  10;  ni.\i  quod,  ib.;  nisi 
vero,  and  nisi  forte,  •  unless  perhape,'  ib. 


iV(Ai7,  nihiluni,  94;  w.  genitive,  212,R.  1; 
instead  of  non,  277,  R.  2,  (6.);  232,  (3.)' 
nihil  all ud  quam  or  nisi,  277.  r.  16;  nihil. 
ace.  w.  ceslimo  and  moroT,  214,  N.  2  niliih 
yf.facio,  214;  as  ace.  of  degree,  215.  JJ.  3: 
232,  (3.);  nihil  est  quod,  etc.,  264,  7,  n.  2; 
nihil  ahest,  quin,  262.  n.  7;  nihil  antiqiiiut 
habeo  or  duco  quam,  w.  subj.,  273,  N.  1; 
nihililum,  277,  i.,  R.  16. 

Niinius,  w.  genit.  or  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (3  ) 

Nimio,  w.  comparatives,  256,  R.  16;  aa 
abl.  of  price,  252,  r.  3. 

-71(5,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  63,  1. 

Nitor,  w.  abl.,  245,  n. ;  w.  m  or  ad,  245, 
11.,  r.  2;  w.  inf.  or  subj.,  273,  1,  N.  1. 

Mix,  56,  R.  2;  genit.  sing.,  78,  (3.);  genit 
plur.,  83,  II.,  3. 

No,  constr.  of  compds.  of  2.33,  (3.),  n. 

Noetic  or  node,  253,  N.  1. 

Nolo,  conjugated,  178.  2;  constr.,  273,  4; 
noli  w.  inf.,  paraphrasing  the  imperative, 
267,  N.  andK.3;  nollem,  meaning  of,  260, 
II.,  R.  2. 

Nomen  est,  constr.,  226,  R.  1;  211,  R.  2, 
N.;  nomine,  without  a  prep,  before  the 
genitive  following  verbs  of  accusing,  217, 
n.  2,  (b.);  its  place,  279,  9,  (i.) 

Nominative,  37;  construction  of.  .209; 
210;  ellipsis  of,  209,  r.  land  2;  wanting, 
209,  R.  3;  w.  inf.,  209,  k.  5;  after  interjec- 
tions,  209,  R.  18;  formation  in  3d  decl.  from 
the  root,  56;  plural,  3d  decl.,  83:  of  adjs. 
of  3d  decl.,  114.  See  Subject-nominative 
and  Predicate-nominative. 

Nomina,  230;  pass.,  210,  R.  3,  (3.) 

Non.  191,  R.  3;  ellipsis  of,  after no/i  modo, 
etc.,  followed  by  ne  quidem.  277,  R.  6;  non 
quo,  non  quod,  non  quin,  262,  R.  9;  non  est 
quod.eur,  quare,  or  quamobrem,  w.  subj., 
264,7,  X.  3;  non  before  a  negative  word, 
277,  R.  3; — before  ne  quidem,  277,  R.  6; 
position  of,  279,  15,  (6.);  non,  rare  with  the 
imperative,  267,  R.  1;  difference  between 
7ion  and  A^aifrfj  191,  R.  3;  non  nemo,  non 
nidli,  non  nihil,  non  numquam,  different 
from  nemo  non,  etc.,  277,  R.  5,  (c.);  non 
nihil,  to  .some  extent,  232,  (3.);  ?ion/ie,198, 
11,  R.,  (c);  non  modo-  -ted  etiam,  and  non 
modo — sed,  equivalent  to  non  dicam — sed, 
277,  R.  10;  non  dubito,  non  est  ditbium^ 
non  ambigo,  non  proeul,  non  abest,  quin, 
262,  2,  N.  7;  non  quo  non,  non  quod  non, 
or  non  quia  non,  instead  of  ?!o/i  quin  ;  non 
eo  quod,  non  idea  quod,  for  non  quod,  262, 
R.  9;  non  priusquam,  non  nisi,  w.  abl.  ab- 
solute, 257,  N.  4;  nondum,  277,  l.,  R.  16; 
non  in  the  second  member  of  adversatlr* 
sentences  without  et  or  vero,  278,  E.  11; 
non  nisi,  separated,  279,  3,  (rf.) 

Nonit.,  '  the  Nones.'  326,  2. 

Nonnullus,  pronominal  adj.,  139,  5,  (1.) 

Nos,  for  ego,  E.  7. 

Nosco,  171,  E.  6. 

Noster,  how  declined,  139,  3. 

Nostras,  how  declined,  1.39,  4,  (ft.) 

Nostrum,  how  formed,  133,  3;  different 
use  of  nostrum,  and  nostri,  212,  R.  2,  N.  2. 

'  Not '  and  '  nor,'  how  expressed  with  tfa« 
imperative,  267,  R.  1;  witb  subj.,  260,  K.  6, 
(6.) 


896 


INDEX. 


Nouns,  26—103;  proper,  common,  ab- 
icract,  collectiye,  and  material,  26 ;  gender 
of,  27 — 34 ;  number  of,  85 ;  cases  of,  36,  37 ; 
declension  of,  38—40;  nouns  of  3d  decl., 
mode  of  declining,  55 ;  compound,  deolen- 
Bion  of,  91 ;  irregular,  92 ;  variable,  92 ;  de- 
fective, in  case,  94;  in  number,  95,  96; 
sing,  and  plur.  having  different  meanings, 
97;  redundant,  99 ;  verbal,  102;  derivation 
of,  100—102;  composition  of,  103;  how 
modified,  201,  in.,  r.  1;  used  as  adjs.,  205, 
K.  11;  extent  given  to  the  term  noun,  24, 
R. 

Novum  est  itt,  262,  r.  3,  n.  2. 

iVoz,  declined,  57;  genitive  of,  78,  2,  (4.); 
genit.  plur.,  83,  ii.,  3. 

Noj-ius,  w.  genit.  of  the  crime.  213,  R.  1, 
(3.);  217,  K.  1,  {a.);  w.  dat.,  222,  r.  1,  la.) 

-KS,  participles  in,  abl.  of,  113,  2 ;  when 
used  as  nouns,  82.  e.  4;  nouns  in,  genit. 
plur.  of,  83,  II.,  4:  genit.  sing,  ot  77.  2,  i2.) 
and  E.  1;  participials  and  participles  in, 
construction  of,  213,  R.  1  and  3. 

Nubilo.  scil.  (-a;/o.  257,  9,  (1.) 

VkU).  w.  dat.,  223;  quantity  of  u  in 
coaipds.  of,  285,  2,  e.  3. 

Nwli),  w.  abl.,  251,  n. 

Niirtiis,  w.  abl.  or  genit.,  213,  R.5,  f4.); 
250,  R  ,  (1  );  w.  ace,  213,  r.  4,  (3.) 

Niilhts,  how  declined,  107  ;  a  pronominal 
adj.,  139,  5,  (1.);  for  non.  205,  R.  Ij;  refers 
to  more  than  two,  212,  r.  2,  n.,  (*.)  nullKs 
est,  7»i,  w.  subj..  264,  7,  N.  2:  7iiiUus  jion, 
277,  R.  6,  (c.) ;  nullius  and  nullo,  instead  of 
neminis  and  nemine.  207,  E,  31,  (c);  nul- 
lusdnm,  277,  I.,  R.  16. 

Nutn,  with  its  compounds,  meaning  of, 
198,  11,  R.,  (i.);  ntim — nn,  used  only  in 
direct  questions,  205,  R.  2. 

Number,  26,  7;  of  nouns,  85;  of  verbs, 
146 ;  of  the  verb  when  belonging  to  two  or 
more  subjects,  209,  r.  12;  when  belonging 
to  a  collective  noun,  209,  R.  11. 

Numbers,  cardinal,  117,  118;  ordinal, 
119,  120:  distributive,  119,  120;  w.  genit. 
plur.,  212,  R.  2,  (4.) 

Numerals,  adjs.,  104,105;  classes  of,  117; 
placed  in  the  relative  clau.se,  206,  (7.),  (b.); 
w.  genit.  plur.,  212,  r.  2,  (4.);  letters,  118, 
7 ;  adverbs,  119 ;  192,  3 ;  multiplicative,  121 ; 
proportional,  temporal,  and  interrogative, 
121. 

Nnmmns,  327,  R.  3,  (J.) 
■    Ntmiqua77i  non,  and  non  numquam,  277, 

Numqvis,  num  quis,  or  numgui,  etc., 
how  declined,  137,  3;  numqnis  est  qui,  264, 
7,  N.2;  numqua  and  tihot^kce,  137,  r.  4; 
numquid,  as  an  interrogative  particle,  198, 

?i'u}nquisnam,  137,  4. 

J\'»7if,  useof,  277,  r.15;  nunc — nunc,  277, 
B.  8'  nunc  and  etiamnunc,  w.  imperfect 
and  perfect,  259,  R.  1,  (6.) 

Niinciipo,  w.  two  aces.,  230.  n.  1;  nunctc- 
»or,  210,  R.  3,  (3.) 

JVH«rfmtf>,  326,2,  (11.) 

Nimtio,  273,  2,  c);  272,  N.  1;  pass.  w. 
inf.,  271,  N,  1;  nuntiatur,  constr.,  271,  R.  2. 

Nuper,  mode  and  viox,  191,  R.  6. 


Nusqunm,  w.  geni ,.,  212,  r.  4,  N   2,  (b.) 

Nitx,  pr.,  284,8,  5,  R.  2. 

-nx,  nouns  in,  genitive  of,  65,  6,  7. 


O. 


O,  sound  of,  7,  8 ;  changed  to  u  in  form- 
ing certain  nominatives  from  the  root.  56. 
I.,  R.  4,  and  il.,  r.  4;  nouns  in,  gender  of, 
58,  59;  genitive  of,  69;  Greek  nouns  in, 
gender  of.  59,  E.  3;  genitive  of,  69,  K.  3; 
amplificatives  in,  100,  4,  (a.);  verbals  in, 
102,  6.  (c);  adverbs  in,  192;  increment  ia, 
of  3d  decl.,  287,  3;  of  plur.,  288;  of  vertsj 
290:  final,  quantity  of.  285,  R.  4;.  297: 
sometimes  used  for  it  after  v,  322,  8;  58; 
178,  1,  N. 

O,  interj.  w.  nom.,  209,  R.  15;  w.  ace, 
238,2;  w.  voc,  240,  k.  1;  O  s(,  w.  subj., 
263;  1. 

Ob,  government  of,  195,  4:  275,  in.,  r.  3; 
in  composition,  196,  l.,  9;  construction  of 
verbs  compounded  with,  224;  of  adjs.,  222, 
R.  1.  (6.) 

Obedin,  how  formed,  189,  N.  3. 

Obequiin,  constr.,  233,  (3.) 

Obeo,  constr.,  233,  (3.),  N. ;  pa.ss.,  234,  in. 

Object,  of  an  active  verb,  229;  the  dative 
of  the  remote  object,  223,  N. 

Objective  genitive,  211,  r.  2;  .after  adjs., 
213;  dat.  for  objective  genitive,  211,  R.  5; 
— propositions  after  what.  273,  N.  8. 

Oblique  cases,  37;  their  place,  279,  10 
and  2. 

Ohliviscor,  w.  genitive  or  ace,   216;  w 
ace.  and  inf.,  272,  N.  1. 

Obnoxiu-s,  w.  dat.,  222,  r.  1,  (6.) 

Obri(o,w.  abl.,  249,  i.,  r.  1. 

Obsecro,  w.  two  aces.,  231,  R.  1. 

Obsequor,  obtempero,  and  obtrecto,  w.  dat  , 
223,  R.  2. 

Observe,  w.  lit  or  ne,  262,  n.  3. 

Obses,  gender  of,  30 ;  genitive  of,  73,  E.  1 

Obsonor,  w.  abl.  of  price,  2.52,  R.  1. 

Obsto,  and  obsisto,  quoniinus,  etc.,  262, 

R.  11. 

Ohtemperatio,  w.  dat.,  222,  r.  8. 

Obtrector,  constr.,  223,  (1.),  (a.) 

Obvius,  w.  dat.,  222,  r.  1,  (i.) 

Obviam,  w.  dat.,   228,  1. 

Occasio,  w.  genit.  of  gerunds,  275,  in. 
R.l,  (1.) 

Occumbo,  w.  dat.,  224;  w.  ace,  224,  r.  5. 

Occurro,  w.  dat.,  224;  w.  ace,  233,  S  ); 
occurrit  ut,  262,  p..  3,  n.  1. 

Ocior,  comparison  of.  126,  1. 

-ocis.  genitive  in,  78,  {4.} ;  112,  2. 

Octonarius,  304,  2; — iambic,  314,  m 

Odi,  183,  1. 

-odis,  genitives  in,  76,  E.  5;  75,  e.  1 

-odus,  Greek  nouns  in,  49,  2. 

(E,  how  pronounced,  9;  in  nom.  plur.  2<1 
decl.,  54,  2. 

(Edipus,  genitive  of,  76,  E.  5. 

CEta,  gender  of,  42. 

Officio,  w.  guo7niiuis,  etc.,  262,  R.  U. 

Ohe,  pr.,  283,  i.,  E.  5;  295,  e.  5. 

Oi,  how  pronounced,  9,  1. 

-ois,  genitives  in,  76,  t.  2;   words  in,  pr 
288,1.,!!.  6,(8.) 


INDEX. 


391 


Old,  how  expressed  In  Latin,  236,  N.  3. 

Oleo  and  redoleo,  w.  ace.,  232,  (2.) 
Ollus,  for  ille,  whence  oUi,  masc.  plur.  for 
Uli,  ISl,  R.  1. 

-olus,  a.  um,  duninutires  in,  100,  3,  A.  2. 

-om,  for  -wm,  53. 

Omission  of  a  letter  or  syllable,  see  syn- 
cope— of  a  word,  see  ellipsis. 

Omnes,  w.  genitive  plur.,  212,  R.  2,  N.  6; 
otritiiutn,  w.  superlatives,  127,  4,  w.  2; 
&7rnia.  ace.  of  degree.  232,  (3.) 

-on,  Greek  uouus  in,  54,  1;  Sn  toT-orum, 
64,  4;  -on,  roots  in,  of  3Jdecl.,  5G,  ii.,  R.  1; 
nouns  in,  of  3d  decl.,  58  and  61,  5;  genit. 
piur.  in,  of  Greek  nouns,  83,  ii.,  6;  -os  and 
■on,  nouns  in,  of  2d  decl.,  changed  to  -its 
iud  -tnn.  54,  1. 

Oniistit.t,  w.  abl.  or  genit.,  213,  R.  5,  (4.) 
)]i(ru>ii  ilare,  w.  ut,  273,  N.  1;  w.  dat.  of 
g<  ruod,  276,  III.,  B.  2,  (1.);  w.  ace.  id,  232, 
(Ji. ) ; — opera  med,  equivalent  to  per  me,  247, 
R.  4. 

Opinio  ext,  w.  ace.  and  inf.,  272,  R.  1; 
o;);nio«f  after  comparatives,  256,  R.  9;  its 
place.  279,  n.  1. 

O/iinnr,  w.  ace.  and  inf.,  272,  N.  1. 

Oj'ortet,  w.  inf  a.<  its  subject,  269,  R.  2; 
w.  inf.,  ace.  with  the  inf.,  or  the  subj.,  273, 
N.  5;  without  ut,  262,  r.  4.      " 

Oportehitt ,  oportuit,  the  indie,  instead  of 
the  subj.,  259,  r.  3,  (a.) 

O/ipiilo,  w.  adjs.,  127,  2. 

Oppii/um,  in  apposition  to  names  of 
towns,  237,  R.  2,  (b.) 

Oppleo.  w.  abl.,  249,  i.,  r.  1. 

Opinbilius  erat,  the  indie,  instead  of  the 
Bubj..  259,  K.  3. 

Ojiiime.  instead  of  abl.  of  price,  252,  r.  3. 

Opto,  271,  R.  4;  273,4;  opto,  w.  subj., 
without  lit,  262,  r.  4. 

Opidentus   w.  genit.  or  abl.,  213.  R.  5,  (3.) 

0/'K.«,  work,  declined,  57;  opus,  need, 
w.  genit.  and  ace,  211,  R.  11;  w.  abl.  of 
the  thing,  243;  as  subject  or  predicate  of 
est,  243,  R.  2;  210,  r.  5;  w.  perfect  par- 
ticiple, 243,  R-  1;  w.  supine  in  u,  276,  in., 
R.  2;  opHs  est.  w.  inf.  as  subject,  269,  r.  2. 

-or,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  58;  61;  genit. 
of,  70;  71;  verbals  in,  102,  1;  102,  6. 

Omtin  ohliqan,  266,  1,  N.,  and  2;  273,  3; 
tenses  in,  266,  r.  4. 

Orho,  w.  abl.,  251,  N. 

Orhus,  w.  abl.,  250,  2,  (1.);  or  genit.,  213. 
B.  5,  (4.) 

Order,  advs.  of.  191.  1. 

Ordinal  numbers,  119, 120;  in  expressions 
»f  thno,  2.36.  R.  2. 

Origin,  participles  denoting,  w.  abl.,  246; 
from  a  country  expres-sed  by  a  patrial,  246, 
R   3. 

-flm,  genitives  in,  76 ;  112, 2 ;  Sris,  genit. 
In,  75. 

-oriiim,  verbals  in,  102,  8. 

Orinn'lics,  'oustr..  246. 

fhn.  w.  two  aces.,  231,  R.  1 ;  w.  ut,  ne,  or 
(nf..  273.  2.  N.  4;  without  «.*,  262,  r.  4. 

Orthoepy,  6—23. 

Orthogniphy,  2—5;  figures  of,  322. 

Ortus,  w.  abl.,  246. 

■oi,  nouns  in,  of  2d  decl.,  54,  1;  of  3d 

M 


decl.,  gender  o.'  58  and  61,  3;  genit  ef.  75; 
Greek  genitives  in,  68,  1;  fitjil  in  plural 
aces.,  sound  ol.    .  e.  3;  quantity  of.  300. 

Os,  {oris),  g'  er  of,  61,  3;  genit.  of,  75; 
wants  genit.  plui.,  94. 

Os,  (ossis),  gender  of,  61,  3;  genit.  of  75 
B.  1. 

Ossa,  gender  of,  42. 1. 

Ostendo.  w.  ace.  and  inf.,  272,  n-  1. 

-051/5,  adjs.  in,  128,  4. 

-Otis,  genit.  in,  75;  112,  2. 

'  Ought '  or  'should,'  expressed  by  indie. 
of  debeo,  259,  R.  4,  (2.) 

-ox,  nouns  in,  genit.  of,  78,  2,  (4.) 

Oxymoron,  324,  26. 


P. 


P,  roots  of  nouns  ending  in,  56,  I. ;  when 
inserted  after  ni  in  2d  and  3d  i-oots  of  verbs, 
171,3. 

Facf  or  in  pace,  253,  n.  1 ;  257.  R.  9,  (2.) 

Palat;iLs,  3,  1. 

PnlUo,  w.  ace,  232,  n.  1. 

Pan,  ace.  of,  80.  R. 

Pant/uwi,  voc.  of,  54,  5. 

Par.  abl.  of,  82,  e.  1,  (6.);  113,  E.  3;  su- 
perlative of,  126,  2;  w.  dat.  or  genit.,  222, 
R.  2,  (a.);  w.  cu7n  and  the  abl.,  222,  r.  6; 
par  erat,  indie,  instead  of  subj.,  209,  R.  3, 
(a.);  pr.,  284,  N.  1;  par  ac.  198,  3. 

Parabola,  324,  3u. 

Paradigms,  of  nouns,  1st  decl.,  41;  2i 
decl.,  46;  3d  decl.,  57;  4th  decl.,  87;  5th 
decl.,  90;— of  adjs.  of  1st  and  2d  decl.,  105 
—107;  3d  decl.,  108— 111;— of  verbs,  sum, 
153;  ist  conj.,  155,  156;  2d  conj.,  157:  3d 
conj.,  158,  159;  4th  conj.,  160;  deponent. 
161;  periphrastic,  conj.,  162;  defective,  183 ; 
impersonal,  184. 

Paragoge,  322,  6. 

Paratus,  con.'^tr.,  222,  r.  4,  (2.) 

ParcOj  w.  dat.,  223,  R.  2,  n.,  (o.);  parct- 
tur  7niht,  ib.,  (f.);  w.  inf.,  271,  N.  3- 

Parens,  w.  genit.  or  abl.,  213,  r.  6,  (2.); 
w.  m,213,  R.  4,  (2.) 

Paregmenon,  324,  24. 

Parelcon,  323.2.  (1.) 

Parenthe-sis.  324,  4,  (6.) 

Pariter  ac,  l98,  3. 

Paro,  coustr.,  273,  N.  1;  w.  inf.,  271,  H  1. 

Paroemiae  verse,  304.  2. 

Paronomasia,  324,  25. 

Pario.  couipds.  of,  163,  K.  4. 

Parsing,  281,  III. 

Prirs,  ace.  of.  79,  4;  abl.  of,  "2,  e.  6,  («.): 
e'-'-is  of.  205.   R.  7;  its  use  in  fractional 

I'lcssions,   121.  6;    niaifniim  and    miixi- 

'Oil  partem .2^,  II.,  R.  3;  multis  parstf/us, 
256,  R.  16,  (3.) 

Part,  ace.  of,  234,  n. 

Particeps,  genit.  of,  112,  2;  genit.  plur 
of,  114,  B.  2;  115,  1,  (a.)— w.  genit.,  213, 
E.  1,  (3.) 

Participial  adjs.,  130;— of  perfect  t/inse, 
meaning  of,  with  tenses  of  sum,  162, 12,  ( 2. 1 ; 
w.  genit.,  213.  K.  1,  (2.) 

Participles,  25  .and  148,  1;  in  us,  how  de- 
clined. 105.  H.  2;  iu  H5,  do..  Ill;  ab!.  sing 
of,  113,2;  participles  of  active  verbs,  148 


398 


INDEX. 


1,  (2);  of  neuter  rerbs,  148, 1,(3.);  162,16; 
of  deponent  verbs,  162,  17 ;  of  neuter  pas- 
give  verba,  162,  18;  in  -nis,  genit.  plur.  of, 
162,  19:  pres.  and  perf.  compounded  with. 
in,  162,  21;  when  they  become  adjs.  or 
nouns.  102,  22;  cases  of  in  compd.  tenses, 
162,  12.  13;  sometimes  with  esse  indeclina- 
ble, 162,  13,  (1);  in  -rtts  with  sum,  force  of, 
162,  14;  how  modified,  202,  li.,  (3.);  agree- 
ment of.  205;  agreement  with  a  predicate 
nom.  instead  of  the  subject,  205,  R.  5; 
geuiler  when  used  impersonally,  205,  R.  18; 
p-rfect  denoting  origin,  with  abl.,  246;  in 
»\A.  absolute,  256 :— passive  of  naming,  etc., 
with  predicate  abl.,  257,  R-  11;  their  gov- 
ernment, 274;  their  time  how  determined, 
274.  2,  and  3;  perfect  in  circumlocution, 
for  abl.  of  cause.  247.  1,  R-  2,  (6.);  with 
hnbeo,  etc.,  274.  2,  R.  4;  for  a  verbal  noun, 
274.  2,  R.  5;  for  clauses,  274.  3. 

Participo.  poetically,  w.  genit.,  220,  2. 

Partidis.  190.  1. 

Parthn,  79,  4;  partim,  w.  genit.,  212, 
R.  4;  partijn— partim,  w.  genit.  or  ex,  21 1, 

Partitive  nouns.  212,  R.  1;— adjs.,  104.  9; 
—partitives  with  plur.  verbs,  209,  R.   11; 

211,  R.  1;  w.  genit.  plur.,  212;  ellipsis  of, 

212,  R.  2,  N.  3;  w.  ace.  or  abl.,  212,  R.  2, 
N.  4;  genit.  sing,  after  neuter  adjs.  and 
pronouns,  212,  R.  3. 

Parts  of  speech.  24,  2  and  3. 

Parum,  its  meaning,  191,  ill.;  compared, 
194,  4:  w.  genit..  212,  R.4. 

Porumper,  its  meaning.  191,  n. 

Parvus,  compared.  125,  5;  parvi,  w. 
verbs  of  valniug,  214,  R.  1,  («•),  (1); 
parvo.  with  comparatives,  256,  R.  16;  after 
xstiwo,  214,  E.  2,  N.  2;  as  abl.  of  price, 
252.  R.  3. 

Pasco,  171,  E-  6 

l>assive  voice,  141,  2;  construction  of, 
234 ;  passive  voice  with  a  reflexive  pronoun 
understood  as  the  agent  equivalent  to  the 
middle  voice  in  Greek,  248,  r.  1,  (2.);  with 
ace.  of  the  thing  234,  i. 

Pateo,  w.  two  dats_.,  227,  R.  1. 

Pater,  declined,  57. 

Pater-faniilias,  etc.,  how  declined,  43,  i. 

Pathetic  or  emotive  word,  279,  2,  (e.) 

Patinr,  273,  4;  262.  r.  4;  par/.ns,  w.gen., 
213,  R.  1,(2.);  w.  inf.,  271,  N.  3. 

Patrial  nouns.  100.2;  m  o.  genitive  of, 
69  „.  ;— adjs..  104.  10:  128.  6,  (a.);  ellip.sis 
if  their  substantive,  205,  R.  7:   pronouns, 

139.  4 

Pnlrocinor.  w.  dat..  223,  R.  2. 

Patronymics,  100,  1;  in  -es,  genit.  plur. 
ill  inn  instead  of  -arunu  43,  2;  m  as  and  is 
used  M  adjs.,  205.  r.  H;  quantity  of  their 
peuuU,  291,  4  and  6. 

Pauca,  ace.  of  degree,  ^61,  (6- ) 

Fanlisper,  its  meaning,  191-  "• 

Paulp,  w.  comparatives,  256,  R-  16;  pau- 
\ui!i  abestquin.  272,  «■  7.         ,  ,    ^.       „- 

Pn-uper,  abl.  of.  113,  E.  2;  defective,  115, 
I,  ((/  );  w.  genit.  or  abl.,  213,  R.  6,  (2.) 

Pnviiius,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  1. 

PavoT  est  ne,  etc.,  262,  N.  3. 

Peeui.  i-^uiis),  genit.  of,  67,  k.  3. 


Peciiiiaris,  222,  r  2,  (a.) 
Pedes,  gender  of.  31,  2;  genit.   of,     3,  3, 
for  perlites,  209,  R.  U,  (1.),  (4) 
Pejero,  pr.,  285,  2,  E.  1. 
Pelagus,  gender  of,  51 ;  ace.   plur  of,  54 
5;  94. 

PfHo,  171,  E.  1,  (*.);  251,  N. 
Penrlo,  w.  genit.  of  value,  214;  w.  abl.  of 
price,  252,  R.  1. 

Pensi  and  pili  habere,  214,  R.  1. . 
Pentameter  verse,  304,  2 ;  311 ;  312,  IX.,  X. 
Penthemimeris.  304,  5. 
Peuult,  13;  quantity  of,  291;  of  prope* 
names,  293. 

Per,  its  uses,  195,  R.  9;  247.  1,  R-  1;  w. 
the  means  when  a  person,  247,  3,   R   4;  in 
adjurations.  279,  10,  («.);  in  composition 
196,  I.,  10;  per  compounded  with  adjectives 
strengthens  their  meaning,  127,  2. 

Perceiving,  verbs  of,  their  construction, 
272. 

Percipio,  w.  ace.  and  inf ,  272,  N.  1;  per- 
ceptum  haheo,  instead  of  percepi,  274,  K.  4. 
Pfrcnntor,  w.  two  aces.,  231,  R.  1- 
Perrnnis.  abl.  of.  113.  E.  1. 
Perdo,  w.  capitis,  217,  R.  3;  perditum  ire, 
for  perdere,  276.  II.,  R- 2. 

Perduim,  for  perdam,  162,  1. 
Perfect  tense.  145,  iv. ;  definite  and  in- 
definite, 145,  IV.,  R. ;  old  form  in  smi,  162, 
9;  quantity  of  dissyllabic  perfects,  284,  e.  1. 
perfect  participles  translated  jictively,  162, 
16;  both  actively  and  passively,  162,  \i, 
(a.);— of  neuter  verbs.  162,  18;  of  imper- 
sonal verbs,  184,  R.  2;  the  perf.  subj.,  260, 
II.  R.  1,  (3.);  in  the  connection  of  tenses, 
25^;  signification  of  perf  definite.  259,  R  1, 
(2.).'  («.);  of  perf  indefinite,  ib..  (6.) — (d.)\ 
perf  subj..  siirnification  of.  260,  il.,  R-  1, 
(3  )  and  R.  4  and  0;  in  the  protasis,  261,  2 
and  R.  2  and  3;  263.  R. ;  perf  subj.  for  im- 
perative. 267,  R  2:  perf  inf.,  how  used. 
268,  R  1.(0.);  perf  participle,  2i4,  2  and 
N.;  supplies  the  place  of  a  pres.  pass,  par- 
ticiple. 274.  R.  3.  (a.) ;  perf  part,  of  a  pre- 
ceding verb  used  to  express  the  completion 
of  an  action,  ib.,  (i.);  v.  haheo,  274.  R- 4; 
w  do,  reddo.  euro,  etc.,  ib. ;  supplies  the 
place  of  a  verbal  noun,  274,  R.  5;  used  in 
circumlocution  for  abl.  of  cause,  24i,  R.  i, 
[b.);  neuter  perf  pass,  participle  used  as 
the  subject  of  a  verb,  274,  R.  6,  (*.) 

Perftcio  U/.273.  n   2.  .   ,    „„        , 

per^o.  constr..  225,  iv. ;  w.  inf.,  za,  N  1. 
Perhibto:  230,  N.  1;  272,.  n.  1,  and  r.  6; 
perhibeor,  210,  R.  3,  (3.);  w.  inf.,  271,  N   1 
Periclilor.  capitis  or  eapite,  21  r,  R-  o. 
Period,  280. 

Perinde,  191,  lU. ;— ac  or  atque,  198,  3,  B 
Periphrasis,  323,  2,  (4.) 
Periphrastic  conjugations,  mi,  14  and  Id 
Ferities,  213,  R.  1,  and  R.  4;   275,  (2.); 
270,  R.  1;  w.  ad,  213,  R.  4,  (2.);  226,  m. 

Per/riiiceo.  245,  n.,  2,  and  R-  1  and  2. 
F«nw«o,  73,  4;  w.  part.  fut.  pass.,  a71| 
R.  7;  w.  subj.  without  ut,  262,  R.  4. 
Permuto,  252,  R.  5. 
Pernox,  genit.  of,  112,  2. 
Perosus,  188,  1,  N. 


INDEX. 


399 


Perpello.  273,  n.  4. 

Perprs,  in  gemt.  sing.,  112,  Ij  115,  2. 
Persevero,  vr.  iuf.,  271,  N.  1. 
Personal  pronouns.  132,  4;  ellipsis  of  as 
subject-nominatives,   209,  R.  1;   expressed 
wi'     infinitive.  272,   N .  4 ; -personal   termi- 
oauuiis  of  verbs,  147,  3. 
Personification,  324,  31 
Person  of  a  noun  or  pronoun,  35,  2-  132, 
4.  of  a  verb,  147;  used  in  the  imperative," 
111,  2;  _lst  and2d  person.s  used  indefinitely, 
ili9,  R.  7;  of  verbs  with  nominatives  of  dif- 
ferent persons,  2i)9.  r.  12. 

Ptrspfclum  hatjfo,  iu.stead  of  perspexi, 
bti,  R.  4. 

FersiiailfOj  w.  dat.,  223,  N.,  (6.);  hoc  per- 
madftiir  mihi,  223,  N.,  (c.);—persuasum 
TTtthi  hntfo.  274,  R.  4. 

Pfri:rjiim  est,  constr.,  229,  E.  6;  215,  (1  1 
und  .N.  2.  '        I  ^    / 

Pertinto,  ellipsis  of,  209,  r.  4 
Peto    constr.,  230,   r.  2;  231,   b.  4;  peto 
«t,  2,3,  N.  4;  262,  r.  4 

Pes  and  compds.,  genit.  of,  73,  B.  1 ;  112 
1:  abl  of,  113,  E.  2;  pr.,  284,  n.  1;  m] 
E.  i,  to.) 

P/i,  in  syllabication,  '^8,  2:  when  silent, 
12,  R. 

Phalecian    verse,     304,    2;     pentameter. 

Finer,  declined,  106 ;  constr.,  222,  r.  4,  (2.) 
Pii(tt.  w.  genit.,  215;  w.  ace,  229,  r  6- 
participle  and  gerund  of,  184,  R.  3.  ' 

Pill  habere,  etc.,  214,  e.  1. 
Place,  advs.  of,  191,  i. ;  192,  in.;  genit. 
of.  221;    ace.  of,  237;  dat.  of,  237,   R.  3- 
place  where,  abl.  of,  254;— whence,  abl.  of 
i)o;  through  which,  255,  2;  place  of  a  foot 
m  verse,  309.  .v. 
Plants,  gender  of  their  names,  29. 
Plaudo,  change  of  a«  in  its  compds.,  189, 
N.  3. 

Plenty  or  want.  adjs.  of,  w.  abl.,  250. 
^/ev,«5,w.  genit.  or  abl.,  213,  r.  5,  (3.); 

Pleonasm,  323,  2. 

^Ux,  adjs.  in,  abl.  of,  113,  e.  3;  how  de- 
clined, 121,  1.  '         1  : 

Ple'iqite,  w.  genit.  plur.,  212,  R.  2,  (1.) 

Pluperfect  tense,  145,  v.;  old  form  in 
sem,  162,  9;  for  the  historical  perfect,  259. 
K.  1,  (3.) 

Plural  number,  35.  1 ;  when  wanting,  95  • 
noun.=  only  plur..  9.J;  plur.  of  Greek  nouns 
of  Ist  decl.,  45,  2;  do.  of  2d  decl.,  54,  2;— 
nouns  used  for  singular.  98;  tins  for  ego, 
M9.  R. 7, (i.);  of  verbs  with  collective  nouns, 
209,  K.  11;  the  plur.  of  abstract  nouns,  95, 
R. ;  plur.  nouns  in  appo.sitioii  to  two  or 
more  nouns  in  the  singular,  204,  R.  5. 

riierimin,,.  w.  genit.,  212,  r.  3;  plurimi 
and  pliirnno  after  verbs  of  buying,   etc 
214,  R.  1,  (1.  ,  and  r.  3,  n.  2;  plurimo,  abi! 
of  price,  252,  r.  3. 

Pt'w,  declined,  110;  w    genit.,  212,   r.  3, 

ir.   1,   («.p;    with    numerals,  etc.,   with  or 

ftithnut  7Krt)»,  256,   R    6;  plus  for  masis 

277.  r   12;  ;i/Hr*,  abl.  of  price,  252,  r.  3.     ' 

Podimi,  declined,  57. 

Poem.s,  gender  of  names  of.  29. 


PanitH  ■^.  genit.,  TJ>;  w.  gubj.,  215,  r. 
w.   ace     229,  r.  6;  participle.^  of,  184,  R.  3 
w.  quod,  273,  .\.  6. 
Po'esis.  declined,  86. 

Poetical   arrangement  of  words,  2/9,  & 
(e.)\  16,  N.  4.  '         J  -1 

-politamis,  adjs.  in,  128,  6,  [g.) 
Pollens,  w.  genit.  or  abl.,  213,  r    5    (4  )• 
cf.  R.  4,  (1.)  ■" 

Polliceor,  w.  ace.  and  inf.,  272    >    1 
Polyptoton,  334,  23. 
Polysyndeton,  323,  2,  (2.) 
Pondn.  indeclinable.  94;  poivlo  libram  ri 
Mras,  211.  R.  6,  (4.);  236.  r.  7. 

Ponoin,  E.  2;  2.30,  R.2;  241,  R.  5;  pr., 
284.  R.  2,  (c);  229,  R.  4,1.  ^    ' 

Posco,  w.  two  aces.,  231:  230.  r.  2;  w.  u«. 
etc.,  273.  N.  4;  in  pa.ss..  234,  i. 
Position  in  pro.sody.  283,  iv. 
Positive  degree,  122,  4. 
Posses.sive,  adjs.,  104;  pronouns.  139;  to 
what   equivalent,   132,   6;  how  used,   207, 
R- 36 :  211,  R.  3 ;  ellipsis  of  when  reflexive, 
■iOi,  R.  36;  used  for  subjective  and  posses- 
sive genit.,  211,  R.3,  (6.),  and  R.  8,(3  ),  fa  .• 
for  objective  genit.,  211,   r.  3.  (<-.);  so  pos- 
sessive adjectives,  211.  r.  4,  and  r.  8.  (3  ) 
(h-t ;  mea,  tua,  etc.,  after  refert  and  intertit, 
219,  R.  1. 

Possiiho,  w.  perf  p.ass.  part..  274,  r  4. 
Possum,  conjugated.  1.54.  r.  7;  ^vith  m- 
perlatives,  127,  4;  w.  inf.,  271,  N.  1;  pote. 
rat.  the  indie,  for  the  subj.,  259,  R.  3-  pot- 
^im  fOTposse?)},  259,  r.  4,  (2.) 

Post,  postqitam.  etc.,   how  pronouncj?d, 
8,  E.  4;  post,  its  case.  195,  4;  post  in  cnui- 
positiou,  196,  11;  197,  14;  constr.  of  verbs 
compounded  with,  224;  with  concrete  nffi- 
cial  titles,  233,   r.  3;  w.  ace.  and  abl    of 
time,  2.33,  r.  1 ;  ellipsis  of,  235,  .\.  3;  w.  abl 
like  a  comparative,  256,  r.  16,  (3.) 
Fasten  loci,  212,  r.  4,  n.  4. 
Fostera,  defective,  115,  5;  compared,  125 
4;  derivation,  130,  v. 

Posterior  and  postremus,  instead  of  jws- 
terius  and  postremum.  205,  r.  15. 

Postquam  and  postenquam,  w.  historical 
perfect  instead  of  pluperfect,  259,  r.  1,  (2.). 

Fostulo,  w.  two  aces.,  231,  r.  1;  w.  arc 
and  genit.,  217,  r.  1;  vi.de  or  the  simple 
abl.,  217,  r.  2;  w.  subj.,  without  «/..  26'' 
R.  4. 

Potens,  w.  genit.,  213,  r.  1,  (3.);  w.  in  o. 
ad  and  ace,  212,  R.  4,  (2.) 

Potior,  w.  abl.,  245.  i. ;  w.  ace,  245.  i 
R.;  w.  genit.,  220,  (4.);  potiundus,  162,  2.) 
273,  ir.,  R.  1. 

Fnti.'i.  defective.  115,  5. 
Potiirs.  compared,  194,  4;  used  pleonasti- 
cally,  256,  r.  13. 

Pol  IIS.  translate<l  actively,  162,  16, 
Prrp,  in  composition  w.  adjs.,  127,   2;  w 
verbs,   197;  before  adjs.,  127,  6;  constr  of 
verbs  compounded   with,   224;   prrr    with 
comparatives,  127,  6;  256,  r.  13.  [b.)  ' 
Prrrbeo,  w.  two  aces.,  2.30,  N.  1. 
Prmedo,  constr.,  233,  (3.),  and  n     224 
r.  5. 
Prttcetlo,  praeo,  etc.,  224,  8,  and  &  6. 


400 


INDEX. 


Praecfjis,  abl.  of,  113,  R.  2,  and  E.  1. 

Prcedpio,  constr.,  223,  (1.),  (*•) 

PrcFcipito,  229,  R.  4,  1. 

Pmciptie,  prrrsertim,  etc.,  193,  ir.   2. 

Prmcurro.  constr.,  224,  8,  and  R.  5. 
"  rrefdiurn,  ellipsis  of,  255,  R-  3. 

Pra'ilitiis,^!.  abl.,  244. 

Prceneste,  gender  of,  66,  E.,  and  29,  E. 

PrcFiiomen.  its  place,  279,  9.  (h.) 

Prcfpes,  genit.  sing,  of,  112,  1;  genit. 
plur.,  114,  E.  2. 

Prascribo,  w.  u.',  etc.,  273,  2,  N.  4. 

PrTSens,  declini^d,  111;  abl.  of,  113,  R.  2. 

Pratses,  gender  of,  30;  61,  2;  genit,  of, 

'p^.'ito,  233,  (3.),  and  N. ;  230,  n.  1;  224, 
8,  and  R.  5;  256,  r.  16.  {B.);—prn'sto,  adv., 
w.  dat..  228,  l;—praiSto  sunt,  qui,  w.  subj., 
264,  6,  N.  1. 

Prtp^tolor,  w,  dat.,  223,  R.  2,  N.;  w.  ace, 
223.  (1.),  (a.) 

Prcpter,  w.  adjs.,  12(,  6;  w.  comparatives, 
266,  R.  13,  (6.);  as  an  adverb,  191,  in. 
Priftereo,  w.  quoil,  273,  5,  (10 
PrtT.terit,  constr.  of.  229,  R.  7. 
Pr(Pteri/ua7n  (jiio'l.  277.  R-  16. 
Prrrterveho.  233,  i2. . 
Pr(Bver'.or,  w.  dat.,  224,  S  and  R.  5- 
Precor,  w.  two  aces.,  231;  w.  lit,  273,  N-  4: 
««  omitted,  262,  R.  4. 

Predicate,  201;  203 ;— predicate-nomma- 
tive,  210;  differing  in  number  from  the 
subject-nominative,  210,  R.  2;  instead  of 
dat.  of  the  end,  227,  R.  4;  after  what  verbs, 
210,  R.  3  and  4 ;  pred.  adjs.,  210,  r._1  ;  after 
esse,  haheri,  jwikari,  videri.  etc.,  271,  N"_-  2; 
—predicate-accusative,  210,  (*.);  dative, 
210,  (c);  abl.,  210.  ('/.);  2.57,  R.  11- 

Prepositions,  195—197;  in  composition, 
196;  ^^^th  uouns,  103;  with  adjs.,  131,  11— 
13 ;  with  verbs,  196 ;  change  of  in  composi- 
tion, 10.3,  R.  2;  131,  R.;  196,  («.);  insepara- 
ble, 196,  (i.);  w.  ace,  195,  4;  235;  w.  abl  , 
195,  5:  241;  w.  ace.  and  abl.,  195,  6;  235, 
i2.)— (5.);  used  as  adverbs,  195,  R.  4:  how 
modified,  202,  ii.,  R.2;  verbs  compounded 
with,  w.  dat.,  224;  w.  ace,  233;  w.  abl., 
242;  compds.  of  a(/,  con,  and  in,  with  ace, 
224,  R.  4;  repeated  after  compds.,  224,  r.  4; 
233,  R.  2;  how  interchanged,  ib.;  compds. 
of  wJ.  ante,  etc.,  with  neuter  verbs  of  mo- 
tion, 224,  R.  5;  233,  R.  1;  repetition  of 
prepositions,  233,  R  2:  277,  n..  3  and  4; 
prepositions  of  one  syllable,  pr.,285,  2,  N.l, 
and  E.  5;  ellipsis  of.  232,  ^2.):  235,  r.  11.; 
elUpsis  of  their  case,  2*5,  R.  10;  their  place, 
279,  10;  quantity  of  '/'',  st  aud  red,  285,  R- 
2anl3;  put  after  their  case,  279,  10,  R., 
(/.);  repeated,  277.  tl.,  4. 

Present  ten.se,  145,  i.;  a  principal  tense, 
258  A.;  inilicative  pres.  for  historical  perf., 
259,  R.  1,  (a-);  forthefut.,  259,  r.  1,  (b.): 
for  imperf.  or  perf.  w.  dum,  259,  R.  1,  (c): 
subj.  pres.,  use  of,  260,  n.,  r.  1,  (1.);  used 
to  soften  an  assertion,  260,  il.,  R.  4;  to  ex- 
press a  wish,  command,  etc.,  260,  r.  6;  26i . 
B.2;  imperative  pres.,  how  used,  145,  R-  o 
267,  (1.);  infinitive  pres.,  how  used,  26>. 
B.  1,  (a.),  and  R.  3. ;  272,  r.  4  and  5;  par- 
ticii'le  pres.,  how  deijlined,  111,  R. ;  whatit 


denotes,  274,  2  and  n.  ;  denoting  something 
about  to  be  done,  274,  R.  1 ;  also  a  purpose. 
274,  R.  2,  (tt.);  and  a  stiite  or  condition, 
274,  R.  2,  (6.);  present  pass,  participle, 
how  supplied,  274.  r.  9. 

Preterites.  145,  N.  2;  258,  B. ;  preterites 
of  the  indicative  used  for  the  pluperfecj 
subjunctive,  259.  R.  4^  (1.) 

Preteritive  verbs,  183,  i. 

Pretii  and  pretio,  214,  R.  2,  n.  3;  ellipsU 
of,  252,  R.  3. 

Priapean  verse,  310.  ii. 

Price,  ablative  of,  252;  genitive  of  tanti^ 

etc.,  214,  R.  1. 

PnVVie,  w.  genit.,  212,   R.  4,  N.  6;w.  ace, 

238,  1. 

Primus,  mediiis,  etc.,  how  translated, 
205,  R.  17 ,  their  place,  279.  7 ;  prior,  pri- 
mus,  for  prius,  primum,  205,  R.  15. 

Princeps.  genit.  of,  112,2;  abl.  of,  113, 
E.  2;  115,  1,  (a.);  used  instead  of  an  adverb 
of  time,  205,  R.  15. 

Principal  parts  of  a  verb,  151,  4 ;— propo- 
sitions, 201,  5;— parts  of  a  proposition.  202, 
5;  ten.*es,  255.  A. 

Prinripin,  abl.  of  time.  253,  N. 

Priiisquam.  with  what  mood,  263,  3. 

Privo,  w.  abl.,  251.  N 

Pro.  constr.  of  verbs  compounded  with, 
224;  w.  abl.  for  predicate  noiii.,  210.  N.  3; 
for  predicate  ace, 230.  .n.  4;  in  composition, 
quantity  of.  285,  E.  5,  and  r.  7;  pro  nihilo 
duco,  etc..  214,  R.  2,  N.  2;  pro  eo  and  pro- 
inde  ac,  198,  3,  R. 

Proclivis,  222,  R.  4,  (2.) ;  276,  in.,  R.  1. 

Procid,  w.  abl.,  195,  R.  3;  24L  R.  2 

Prodigiis,  w.  genit.  or  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (2.) 
w.  m,  213,  R.  4,  (2.) 

Prodo,  w.  ace  and  inf.,  2(2,  N,  1,  and 
R.  6- 

Proditur,  constr.,  271,  R-  2. 

Proficiscor,  w.  two  datives,  227,  R.  1. 

Prohibeo,  251,  R-2;  w.  qiiominus,  262,  r. 
11 ;  273, 4  ;-w.  genit., 220, 2 ;  w.  abl.,  251,  n.  ; 
w.  dat.  or  abl.,  224,  R.  2;  w.  ace  and  inf., 
272,  R.  6. 

Proinde,  adv.,  191,  lU.;  proinde  ac,  198, 

3,  R. 

Prolepsis,  323, 1,  (b.)  and  (4.) 

Promitto,  constr.,  272,  N.4;  217,  R.  3,  (c.) 

Pronouns.  132—139;  simple,  132,  2; 
neuter  w.  genit.,  212,  r.  3,  N.  1. 

Pronoraiual  adjs.,  139,  5. 

Pronunciation  of  Latin,  6 

Pronus,  constr.,  222,  r.  4,  (2.) 

Prope  est,  w.  ut  and  the  subj.,  262;  a  a. 

Proper  nouns,  26,  2;  found  only  in  lit, 
2d,  and3ddecls.,40^9. 
Propero,  w.  inf.,  271,  n.  1. 
Propinquo.  225,  R.  2.  _ 

Propinquits,  w.  the  dat.   or   gemt.,    2252, 

Propior,  how  compared,  126,  1;  propiot 
and  proximiis.  \t.  dat.,  222,  R.  1;  w.  ace. 
222  R.  5;  238.1;  iuste.ad  of  propuis,  prox- 
wi',  205,  K.  15;  proximuin  est,  w.  ut  and 
the  subj.,  262,  B.  3,  K.  1 

Propius  and  proxitju,  constr,  £Si,  1, 
and  R. 


INDKX. 


401 


Proporf.ional,  adjs  .  121.  2. 

Proposition,  2U1,  1;  analysis  of,  281. 

Froiiriiis,  constr..  222,  R.  2,  (n.) 

Proritmpo,  coustr.,  220,  R.  4,  1. 

Prosodiuc  verse,  304,  2. 

Prosody.  282—321;  figures  of,  305—307. 

Pro.'JOijopoeia,  32'1,  34. 

Prusptr  nniX  ]jro.'ij)erus,  105,  N.;  w.  genit. 
»rabl  .  213,  r.  6,  (2.) 

Prosthesis,  322,  1. 

Prosto,  w.  abl.  of  price,  252,  R.  1 

Pro^mn,  151.  n-  6. 

Prnvidfo,  constr..  223,  (1.).  (a.) 
— Protasis  aud  apodosis,  261 ;  import  of  the 
differ*- nt  teuses  in  the  protasis  and  apodo- 
Bis.  2G1,  1  aud  2. 

ProviiJus.  w  geuit.,213,  R.  1,  (3.) 

Prudent,  w.  genit.,  223,  K.  1,  (3.) 

Ps,  initial,  12,  r.  \—ps,  nouns  in,  genit. 
Of,  77,2,(1.) 

-p.sf,  enclitic,  135,  E.  3. 

Pt,  initial,  12,  R. 

-pte,  enclitic,  133.  R.  2;  139. 

Pitbes  and  iinpubes,  genit.  of,  112,  1;  abl. 
of,  113,  E.  2;  115,  1,  (a.) 

Piuht,  w.  genit.,  215;  w.  inf.,  215;  w. 
ace,  229,  R.  G;  w.  perf.  inf.,  268,  r.  2;  w. 
Bup.  in  u,  270,  m.,  r.  2;  participle  in  diis, 
and  gerund  of,  184,  r.  3. 

Puer,  instead  of  in  jiueritia,  253,  R.  6. 

Pueritia,  how  used  iu  the  abl.,  253,  N.  1. 

Pugna.  for  in  ptigna,  253,  N.  1;  pugnam 
pugnnre,  232,  (1.) 

Pugnatur,  conjugated,  184,  2.  (h.) 

Piilchre,  instead  of  abl.  of  price,  252,  R.  3. 

Punctuation,  5. 

Punio,  constr.,  217,  R.  5. 

Punishment,  coustr.  of  words  denoting, 
217,  R.  3. 

Piirgo,  w.  genit.,  217,  R.  1;  220,  2;  w. 
abl.,  251,  N. 

Purpo.se,  denoted  by  vt,  etc.,  with  the 
gubj.,  262;  by  participles,  274.  2,  R.  2,  6 
and  7;  by  inf.,  271:  273,  n.  4,  (6.);  by 
gerund,  275,  iii-,  k.  2,  aud  (1.),  (2.);  by 
supine  in  -hwi,  276,  ii. 

Punts,  w.  genit.  or  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (3.); 
cf.  251,  N. 

pus,  Greek  nouns  in,  genit.  of,  70,  E.  5. 

Piito.  w.  genit.  of  value,  214 ;  w.  abl.  of 
price,  252,  r.  1;  w.  two  aces.,  230,  n.  1, 
and  .\.  4;  w.  ace.  and  inf..  272.  s.  1 ;  puta- 
r«,  260.  II.,  R.  2;  putor,  210,  R.  3,(3.1,  (c); 
<i»   inf.,  271,  N.  1. 

Q. 

Qu  before  -t  in  rerbal  roots,  171,  1 

Qua,  adverbial  correlative,  191,  R.  1. 

Qua — qua,  for  tt — el,  277,  R.  8. 

Qul!^ro,  constr.,  231,  b.  4;  poet.  w.  inf., 
271,  X.  8. 

qufjxo,  183,  7;  constr  ,  262.  r.  4. 

Quali.i,  139,  5,(3.);  w.  comparatives,  256, 
R.  10,  {b.) 

Qun/lsrjuatis  or  (/ualiscumijue,  139,  5; 
207,  R.  29. 

Qualis— talis,  206,  (16.) 

Qiuim,  w.  comparatives,  256 ;  w.  the  su- 
purlatiTe,  with  or  without  possum,  127,  4; 

34* 


ellipsis  of  after  pl».i,  minus,  amplius,  etc. 
256,  R.  6  and  7;  'luam  (/ui  and  superlativ* 
after /a?«,  206,  (21.);  r/unm  jiro,  w.  compar- 
atives, 2.56,  R.  11 ;  ijiiniii  non.  277,  n  14; 
ituam  and  a  verb  after  ante  and  jiost,  253, 
R.  1,  N'.  3;  ■plain  qui,  w.  comparative.s  am 
the  subjunctive,  264,  4. 

(I'.inniqiiiim,  peculiar  use  of,  198,4,  R  " 
coa.str.,  263,  2,  (4.);  used  to  connect  an 
abl.  absolute,  257,  R.  10. 

Quaiiii-ls.  oon-str.,  263,  2,  and  (__2.';,  (3.1 

Quanrlo,  quando-quiiltw,  198,  7,  R..  lb  ) 

Quantity,  adjs.  of,  104,  4;  w.  genit..  212. 
R.  3,  N.  1;  after  sum  and  verbs  of  valuii.g. 
214;  adverbs  of,  w.  genit.,  212,  r.  4. 

Quantity,  iu  prosody.  13,  1;  marks  o(. 
5,  1;  general  rules  of,  13;  283;  special  rules 
of,  284;  of  penults,  291;  of  aiitcpenult.s, 
292;  of  penults  of  proper  names,  293;  of 
final  syllables.  294—301;  of  final  vowels, 
294—298;  of  final  consonants,  299;  of  de- 
rivative words,  284;  of  compound  words. 
285:  of  increments,  286—290;  of  Greek 
words,  2,S3,  E.  6. 

Qutinius,  pronom.  adj.,  139.  5.  (3.); 
qun7itus  (or  quam,  v:\th  /wsse  a.iid  superla- 
tives, 127,  >•  1;  con.-tr.,  2U6,  (16);  quunlo, 
w.  comparatives,  250,  R.  16;  qvuntum,  w. 
genit.,  212,  R.  3,  N.  1;  in  ace.  of  degree, 
231,  R.  5:  232,  (3.);  256,  r.  16,  n.;  </Kan- 
tum  possmn,  w.  indicative,  264,  3  fin.; 
quo.ntus — tantii.s.  206,  (16.) 

Quantuscuinijiie .  quantusquanlus,  qvnn- 
tulufcumque,  ISJ,  5.  (3.);  w.  indicative,  25'9, 
R.  4,  (3.);  quantiriivique,  207,  R.  29. 

Quasi,  w.  subj.,  263,  2. 

Quatio,  constr.,  229,  R.  4, 1 ;  how  changed 
in  its  compds.,  189,  n.  3. 

-f/Hf,  its  use,  198,1,  h.,  (a.);  que — et,  et 
— que,  que — que,  198,  r.,  (e.);  its  place, 
279,3,  (r.) 

Queis  and  quis,  for  quibus,  136,  k.  2. 

Q»eo,  how  conjugated.  182,  N.;  w.  Inf., 
271,  X.  3. 

Qutnir,  w.  acc,  232,  n.  1;  w.  guod,27S, 
N.  6. 

Qui,  declined,  136;  qui  in  abl.,  136,  e.  1; 
137,  R.  2;  interrogative,  137;  difference  be- 
tween qui  nnd  quis,  137,1;  person  of  qui, 
2U9,  R.  6;  w.  subj.,  264;  wheu  translated 
like  a  demonstrative,  206,(17.);  with  sum 
instead  of  jiro.  206,  (IS.);  quirmn,  wh?ii 
used,  loO,  R.  1  _y?n. ;  qui  vera,  qui  itulun, 
280,  ni.,  (3.);  ex  quo,  for  posiquum,  253, 
N.  4. 

Quia,  quod,  and  qiioniam,  198,  7,  r.,  (b.) 

Quirque  and  quicquam,  138,  3,  (n.) 

Quicquiil,  136,  B.  4;  acc.  of  degree, 
232.(3.) 

Quicuiiiqut ,  how  declined,  136,  3,  how 
u.sed.  207,  R.  29:  w.  indie,  259,  h.  4,  ^3.); 
for  ii}/uiis.  qunus,  or  quilibtt.  207,  R.  29. 

Quid.  137;  w.  genit.,  212,  r.  3,  N.  1, 
(a.);  acc.  of  degree,  231,  r.  5,  (a.);  232, 
(3.) :  quid  /■  why  '.  235,  R.  11 :  quid  sibi  vuit  ! 
228.  .N.,  (4  );  quid  est  quod?  w.  subj.,  261, 
7,  N.  2;  quid  est  cKr.' etc.,  264,  7,  N.  .'5;  quid 
aliuil  quain?  209,  R.  4;  quid?  quid  vera? 
quid  igitur  ?  quid  trgo  ?  quid  eniin?  quid 
iiiulta  '  quid  idura  '  229,  R.  8,  2. 


402 


INDEX. 


Qitidam,  how  declined,  138,5;  how  used, 
207,  R.  33. 

Quidem,  its  meaning,  191,  r.  4 ;  its  place, 
279,  3,  (rf.) 

Quilibet,  how  declined,  138,  5 ;  how  used, 
207,  R.  34. 

Quies  and  compds.,  gender,  61, 1;  genit., 
73,4;  96. 

Qidn,  198,  8;  w.  subj.,  262,  R.  10;  for  a 
relative  with  noji,  ib.,  1  and  n.  6;  for  ut 
noil,  ib.,  2;  after  Jion  dubito,  etc.,  quin? 
why  not?  w.  indie,  ib.,  N.  9. 

'luijipe,  198,  7,  R.,  (*.);  quippe  qui,  w. 
subj.  264,  8,  i2.) 

Quippiam,  138,  3,  (a.) 

Quiqiii,  136,  R.  4. 

Iniris,  genit.  sing.,  74,  E.4;  genit.  plur., 
83   II.,  5. 

Qiiis,  declined,  137;  difference  of  qttis 
and  r/vi,  137,  1;  between  7 1«.5  and  iiter,  212, 
R.  2,  N.  1;  quisest  qui?  V!.  subj.,  2CA,8. {2.); 
between  quis  and  aliquis,  207,  R.  30,  (i.) 

Quisnam,  quinam.  how  declined,  137,  2. 

Qidspiam,  how  decliusd,  138,  3;  how 
used.  207,  i.  30;  quippiam,  w.  genit.,  212, 

B.  3,  N.  1. 

Quisquam,  how  declined,  138,  3;  how 
used,  207,  R.  31;  guicquayn  and  quiJqiiain, 
w.  genit.,  212,  R.  3;  ace.  of  degree,  231, 
R.  5,  (a.);  232,(3.) 

Qiiixque,  how  declined,  138,  3;  how  used, 
207,  R.  35;  with  plur.  verb,  209,  r.  11,  (4.) ; 
its  place,  279,  14;  w.  a  superlative,  207,  B. 
85,  (6.);  in  apposition,  204,  r.  10. 

Qiiisqi/is,  declined,  136,  4;  its  use,  207, 
R.  29;  difference  between  quisquis  and  9MJ- 
cumque,  207,  r.  29;  w.  indlc,  259,  r.  4,  (3.) 

Qiiivis,  how  declined,  138,5;  how  used, 
207,  R.  34. 

Quo,  the  correlative  adv.,  191,  r.  1;  quo, 
w.  a  comparative,  256,  R.  16,  (2.);  for  ut  eo, 
w.  subj.,  262,  R.  9;  as  adv.  of  place,  w.  gen- 
itive, 212,  R.  4,  N.  2,  (6.);  quo  mihi  /latic 
re w,  209,  r.  4;  228,  r.  5;  quo  secius,  262, 
R.  11,  N. ;  quo  ne,  262,  r.  5. 

Quoarl,  w.  subj.,  263,  4;  w.  ejus,  212,  r. 
4,  N.  5. 

Quocutn,  quacwm,  etc.,  instead  of  citm 
quo,  etc.,  241,  r.  1. 

~  Quod,  causal  conj.,  198,7;  construction 
of,  273,  5;  refers  to  past  time,  273,  (6.); 
w.  subj.  of  dico,  puto,  etc.,  266,  3,  R. ;  qund 
sciam.  etc.,  264,  3;  quod,  referring  to  a 
preceding  statement,  206,  (14);  273,  6,  (a.); 
w.  genit.,  212,  r.  3;  before  si,  ni>(,  etc., 
206,  (14);  as  ace.  of  degree,  232,  (3.) 

Quojiis  and  71(0/,  for  cujus  and  cui,  136, 

R.  2. 

Quoque  and  etiatn,  difference  between, 
19g,  1,  R..  ('/.);  place  of  </!(09((P.  279,  3,  (d.) 

Qii-ot,  indecl.,  115,  4;  interrogative,  121, 
5;  139,  5,  (3.);  constr.,  206,  (16);  quot  sunt, 
qui?  264,  7,  N.  2;  quotquot,  w.  indie,  259, 

Quotent  and  quotus,  interrogative,  121,  o. 

Quoties,  interrog.  adv.,  121,  5. 

Quotus-quisque,  its  meaning,  207,  R.  35, (a.) 

Quum,  correlative  of  turn,  191,  r.  7;  in- 
stead of  pastquam,  253,  N.  4;  —  conj.,  198, 
10;  oonstr  ,  263,  5,  and  n.  1^. 


R. 


R,  before  s  in  rc»ts  of  nouns  £6,  ».  l\ 
nouns  in  r,  genitive  of,  70,  71;  changed  t« 
J  before  s  and  t,  171,  3;  r  final,  quantity 
of,  299,  2. 

Rapio,  w.  dat.  or  abl.,  224,  r.  2. 

Rarum  est,  ut,  262,  k.  3,  N.  3. 

Rastrmn,  plur.  rastri  or  rastra,  92,  5. 

Ratio,  w.  genit.  of  gerunds,  275,  III.,  R.  1, 
(1.);  ratione,  as  abl.  of  manner,  without 
cum,  247,  2. 

Rntum  est,  ut,  262,  r.  3,  N.  2;  ratmn 
pr.,  284,  E.l,  (2.) 

-re  in  2d  person  sing,  of  passive  voice, 
162,  3. 

Re  or  reil,  inseparable  prep.,  196,  (6.); 
197,  18;  quantity  of,  285,  r.  3,  (a.) 

Reapse,  135,  R.  3. 

Rerens.  abl.  of,  113,  E.  3  and  R.  1;  also 
adverb,  192,  4.  rft.) 

Receptio,  constr.,  233,  R.  2,  N. 

Recingor,  w.  ace,  234,  R.  1. 

RecordoT,  w.  genit.  or  ace,  216;  w.  pres. 
inf.,  268,  R.  1;  w.  ace  and  inf.,  272,  n.  1. 

Recte,  instead  of  abl.  of  price,  252,  R.  3. 

Reckoning,  Roman  mode  of,  826,  327. 

Rectum  est,  ut,  262,  r.  3,  N.  3. 

Recuse  quin,  and  qxiominus,  262,  N.  7 and 
R.  11;  w.  ne,  271,  R.  1;  w.  inf.,  ib.,  N.,  and 
271,  N.  1. 

Reddo,  w.  two  aces.,  230,  N.  1;  pass.  210, 
R.  3,  (3),  (6.);  w.  perf.  pass,  part.,  274,  R.4. 

Redolen,  w.  ace,  232,  (2.) 

Redundant  nouns,  99;  adjs.,  116;  109,  n.  ; 
111,  N.;  verbs,  185. 

Redundo,  w.  abl.,  250,  2,  (2.) 

Reduplication,  163,  r.  ;  of  compound 
verbs,  163,  e.  1;  of  verbs  of  1st  conj.,  165, 
r.  2;  of  2d  conj.,  168,  n.  2;  of  3d  conj., 
171,  E.  1,  (4.);  quantity  of,  284,  B.  2. 

Refero,  w.  ace  and  inf.,  272,  n.  1. 

Refert  and  interest,  w.  genit.,  214;  219; 
w.  the  adj.  pronouns  ?«fa,  etc.,  219.  r.  1; 
w.  ad,  etc.,  219,  R.  3;  refert,  pr.,  285,  R.  3. 

Refertus,  w.  genit.  or  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (3.) 

Reflexive  pronouns,  132,  4;  139,  a.  2; 
hew  used,  208;  for  demonstratives,  208, 
(6.1 ;  ellipsis  of,  229,  r.  4;  in  oratio  obliqua, 
266,  R.  3. 

Reformido,  w.  inf.,  271,  N.  1. 

Regno,  w.  genit.,  220,  4. 

Regnimi,  declined,  46. 

Rego.  conjugated,  158. 

Relative  adjs.,  104,  13;  139,  b.  ;  govern- 
ment of,  213,  R.  1 ;  222, 3;  adverbs,  w.  subj., 
expressing  a  purpose,  264,  5,  R.  2;  usel  in- 
definitely, w.  subj.,  264,  R.  3. 

Pielative  pronouns,  l36;  agreement  of, 
206,  R.  19;  ellipsis  of,  206,  (5.) ;  in  the  case 
of  the  antecedent,  206,  (6.),  (a.);  referring 
to  nouns  of  different  genders,  206,  (9.) ; — to 
a  proposition,  206,  (13.);  agreeing  with  a 
noun  implied,  206,  (11);  number  and  gen- 
der of,  when  referring  to  two  or  mora 
nouns,  206.  (15); — relative  clauses  used  Ha 
circumlocutions  and  to  express  the  English 
'  so  oalled,'  200,  (19),;  relative  adverbs  for 
relative  pronouns,  206,  (20);  the  relative 
adjs.  quot,  qvantus,  etc.,  conetruction  ot 


INDEX. 


4(3 


>06,  (16);  ?iii  with  sum,  instead  of  pro, 
206,  (18);  peraon  of,  209,  r.  6;  206,  r.  19;— 
w.  subj.,  264;  their  place,  279, 13;  280,  lu., 
(2.);  relatiTes  as  connectiTes,  280,  iii.,  (1.); 
198,  ir. 

Resolving,  rerbs  of,  273,  1,  (a.) 

Relinqito,  w.  two  datives,  227,  b.  1 ;  w. 
part,  in  iliis^  274,  r.  7;  relinquiUir,  w.  vi 
and  the  subj.,  262,  r.  3,  N.  1. 

Reliqua,  ace,  234,  ii.,  E.  3;  reliquum  est 
vt,  262,  R.  3. 

Roninlscor,  constr.,  216. 

Rfmitto,  229,  R.  4,  1. 

Kemoviug,  verbs  of,  w.  abl.,  251. 

R'tiiiiiirror,  w.  abl.,  249,  I.,  R.  1. 

Re}ittncio,  w.  two  aces.,  230,  n.  1;  pass., 
210,  R.  3,  (3.),  (6.) 

Kepeated  words,  their  place,  279,  4. 

Repens,  abl.  of,  113,  E.  3. 

Repr-rio,  w.  two  aecs.,  230,  N.  1; — repe- 
rior,  210,  R.  3,  (3.),  (c);  271,  r.  2 ;— rfpen- 
•tnlur,  qui,  w.  subj.,  264,  6. 

Repo,  constr.  of  compds.  of,  233,  (3.),  N. 

Repono,  241,  R.  5. 

Rf])Osco,  w.  two  aces.,  231,  R.  1. 

Repugno,  with  quominusoTne,  262,  R.  11. 

Res,  declined,  90;  use  of,  205,  R.  7,  (2.), 
N.  1. 

Reses,  genit.  sing,  of,  112, 1 ;  defective, 
115,  2. 

Resipio,  w.  ace.,  232,  (2.) 

Responsives,  case  of,  204,  r.  11. 

Respuhlica,  declined,  91. 

Restat,  ut,  262.  r.  3,  \.  1. 

Retf,a.h\.  of.  82,  e.  1,  (6.) 

Retracto,  constr.,  229,  r.  4,  1.     . 

Reus,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  1,  (3.) ;  reum  agere 
or  facfre,  w.  genit.,  217,  R.  1. 

Rhetoric,  figures  of,  324. 

Rhus,  genit.  of,  76,  E.  3;  ace.  of,  80,  ii. 

Rhythm,  308,  (1.) 

Ridfo,  w.  ace,  232,  jj.  1. 

-rimus,  -ritis.  quantity  of.  290,  E.,  (1.),  4. 

-rimus,  superlatives  in,  125,  1. 

Ritu,  as  abl.  of  manner  without  cum, 
247,2. 

Rivers,  gender  of  names  of,  28. 

-rix,  verbals  in,  102.  6,  (a.)  See  tor  and 
irix. 

Rogo.  w.  two  aces.,  231,  R.  1 ;  w.  ut,  273, 
N.  4:  274.  R.  7:  without  ul,  262,  r.  4; 
oon.otr.  in  pass.,  234,  i. 

Roman  day,  326,  1 ; — hour,  ib. ; — month, 
826,  2:— niimes  of  the  months,  326.  2,  (1); 
—calendar  table  of,  326,  2,(6),  p.369;— 
*ct>k,  326,  2,  (10);  names  of  the  days  of  the 
week,  ib. ; — year,  how  designated,  326,  2, 
',11);-  -money,  weights  and  measures,  327 ; — 
tables  or  weights,  etc.,  327,  pp.  370—373;— 
coins,  327,  p.  371; — intere.st,  how  comput- 
ed, ib. 

Root  or  crude  form  of  words  inflected, 
what  and  how  found,  40,  10 ;  formation  of 
nominative  sing,  from  in  3d  decl.,  56,  i. 
and  n. 

Roots  of  verbs,  150;  general,  150,  1; 
special,  150,  2;  second  and  third,  how 
formed,  150,  3  and  4;  third,  how  determin- 
ed when  there  is  no  supine,  151,  >.;  first, 
Its    dertratlves,    151,    1;   irregularitiea    in 


tenses  formed  from,  162,  1 — 6;  second,  do. 
151,  2 ;  Lrrt'gularities  in  tenses  formed  from 
162,  7—10;  third,  do.,  151,  3;  second  and 
third,  formation  of,  1st  couj.,  164 — 106;  2d 
conj.,  167—170;  3d  conj.,  171—174;  4th 
conj.,  175 — 177:  second  and  third  irregu- 
lar, 1st  eonj.,  165;  2d  conj.,  168;  4th  conj  , 
176. 

-rs  nouns  in,  genitive  sing,  of,  77,  2  [2); 
genit.  plur.  of,  83,  ii.,  4. 

Rudis,  213,  R.  1.  and  r.  4.  (2.);  275,:il., 
E.  1,  (2.) 

Rupes,  declined.  57. 

Rus,  construed  like  names  of  towns,  m 
ace,  237,  R.  4;  in  abl.,  254;  255;  cf.  '32, 
E.  5,  (6.);  rure,  not  ruri  with  an  adj.,  255, 
R.  1. 

-rus,  participle  in,  how  declined,  105, 
R.  2;  its  signification,  162,  14;  274,  2,  r.  6; 
with  sim  and  esseni  serving  as  future  sub- 
junctives, 162,  R.  3;  with  essf  and  fuisse, 
162,  14,  R.  3;  268,  r.  4;  genitive  plur.  of, 
162,  19;  denotes  intention,  274,  r.  6:  used 
for  an  English  clause  connected  by  '  since, 
when,'  etc.,  ib. ;  as  an  apodosis,  ib. 

Rutum,  pr.,  284,  E.  1,  (2.) 


S,  sound  of,  11 ;  added  to  some  roots  of 
nouns  of  3d  decl.,  56,  i. ;  added  to  roots  of 
verbs  ending  in  a  consonant,  171 ;  used  in- 
stead of  r  in  the  3d  root  of  some  verbs,  171, 
E.  5;  inserted  in  some  verbals,  102,  5,  (b.)- 
s  preceded  by  a  consonant,  nouns  in,  gen- 
der of,  62;  64;  genit.  of,  77;  final,  elided, 
305,  2. 

Sacer,  vr.  genit.  or  dat.,  222,  E.  2,  (a.) 

Sacerdos,  gender  of,  30;  61,  3. 

SiTpe,  comparison  of,  194,  5- 

Sai,  82,  E.  1,  (6.),  and  66,  K.;  96,9;  pr., 
284,  N.  1. 

Salio,  constr.  of  compds.  of,  233,  (3.),  n. 

Saltern,  193,  ii.,  3. 

Saluto,  w.  two  aces.,  230,  N.  1;  salutor, 
w.  two  nominatives,  210,  R.  3,  (3.) 

Salve,  183,  9. 

Samnis,  genit.  sing.,  74,  E.  4;  genit. 
plur.,  83,  II.,  5. 

Snpio,  w.  ace.,  232.  (2.) 

Sapphic  verse;  304,  2;  315,  II. 

Sal,  indecl.,  115,  4;  satis,  w.  genit.,  212, 
R.  4;  satis  esse.  w.  dat.  of  gerund,  275,  in.. 
R.  2,  (1);  satis  haheo,  and  satis  niilii  est^ 
w.  perf.  infin.,  208,  R.  2;  satis  erat,  indie. 
instead  of  subj.,  259,  R.  3;  degrees  of  com- 
parison, 126,  4. 

Satago,  w.  genit.,  215,    2.) 

Satelles,  gender  of,  30;  61,  2. 

Satialus,  w.  abl.  or  genit.,  213,  R.  5,  (3.) 

Satisdn,  w.  damni  in/ecti,  217,  R.  3,  (c), 
w.  dat.,  225, 1. 

Satisfacio,  w.  dat.,  225,  I. 

Saturn,  pr.,  284,  e.  1,  2. 

Saturnalibus,  for  ludis  Satumalibus,  253, 

N.  1. 

Satur.  how  declined,  105,  R.  1;  w.  genit 
or  abl.,  213,  r.  5,  (3.) 

Saturo.  w.  abl.,  249,  I.,  r.  1;  w.  genit 
poet.,  220,  3. 


404 


INDEX. 


Sattts,  w.  abl.,  246. 

Saying,  verbs  of,  constr.,  272;  ellipsis  of, 
270,  K.  '2,  (6.)auil  3;  implied,  273,  3,  (6.); 
used  iu  the  passive,  272.  R.  6. 

Sianilo,  coiupds.  of,  233,  (3.),  N. 

Scanning,  304,  6. 

Srateo,  w.  abl.,  250,  2,  (2.),  R.  1;  with 
ge))it.  poet.,  220,  3. 

Scazon.  314,  ii, 

Sridi,  pr.,  284,  E.  1,  (1.) 

Scilicet,  198,  7,  R.,  (a.) 

Scio,  w.  ace.  and  inf.,  272,  n,  I:  scito, 
i62,  4. 

Scitor  and  sciscifor,  constr.,  231,  E.  4. 

-SCO,  verbs  in,  187,  n..  2;  drop  sc  iu  2d 
»nd  3d  root  before  t,  171,  e.  6. 

Scrihc},  273.  2,  (c);  w.  two  aces.,  230,  N. 
1;  w.  aec.  and  inf.,  272,  N.  1,  and  r.  6;  in 
pa.ss.  w.  predicate  nominative.  210,  k.  3, 
(3);  scrihii,  w.  pres.  inf.  instead  of  perf., 
2G8,  R.  1,  {a.) 

Se,  inseparable  prep.,  196,  (6.) 

Se,  w.  inl^T,  2US,  5.    See  .>«!. 

Secerno,  251,  N.,  and  R.  2,  N. 

Secus,  for  sexus,  88,  1;  94;  211,  R.  6,(4.) 
230,  R.  6;  adv.,  191,  in.;  w.  ace,  195,  r.  3 

Sed,  198,9,  K;{a.)j  its  place,  279,3,  (a 
Sf^d,  setJ  (jiiod,  sed  quia,  262,  R.  9;  sed,  sed 
tamni,  278,  r.  10;  sed  et,  198,  1,  (d.) 

Sedeo,  210,  R.  3,  (2.);  compds.  of,  233, 
'3),  N. 

Sedile,  declined,  57. 

Sedo,  constr.,  229,  R.  4,  1. 

-sf.m,  old  termination  of  plup.  indie,  ac- 
tive, 162.  9. 

Semi-deponent  verbs,  142,  2. 

Spnarius.  304,  2;  Iambic,  314. 

Senex,  its  degrees  of  comparison,  126,  4; 
gender  of.  65,  2;  genitive  of,  78,  2,  (2); 
abl.  of,  113,  E.  2;  115,  1;  for  in  senectute, 
253,  R.  6. 

Senten«es,  200;  analysis  of,  281. 

Sentiments  of  another,  in  dependent 
clauses,  266,  3. 

Sentio,  w.  ace.  and  inf.,  272,  N.  1. 

Separating,  verbs  of.  w.  abl.,  251. 

Sejmro,  w.  abl.,  251,  N. 

Sfr/iiitur,  constr.  262,  R.  3,  n.  1. 

-si-rf,  future  infin.  in,  162,  10. 

Hereno,  scil.  caio,  257,  R.  9,  (2.) 

Sn-i/io,  declined,  57. 

Serpetis,  gender  of,  64,  3. 

Sese,  intensive.  1.33,  R.  2. 

Sfrvitiitem  s>-rvirf,  232,  ll.) 

Sestertius,  its  value,  327.  R.  2,  (b.);  how 
denoted,  ib. ;  mode  of  reckoning,  ib. ;  ses- 
ttrtium,  ib..  r.  5 — 7. 

Seu,  or  five,  198,  2,  r.,  (c.) 

Ships,  gender  of  their  names,  29. 

Short  syllable.  282,  2. 

Showing,  verbs  of,  constr.,  272,  R.  6. 

Si,  how  pronounced,  11,  E.  1. 

-si  or  -sin,  Greek  datives  in,  84. 

Si,  conj.,  198,  5;  si  for  num,  198,  11,  R., 
{i.)\  si  7>iiniis.  sin  ii'.irttis  or  sin  nliter,  198, 
6,  R.,  (6.);  277,  r.  14;  ellipsis  of  in  the 
protasis,  261,  r.  1;  si  with  the  imperfect 
subj.,  instead  of  the  pluperfect,  261,  R.  5; 
$1  nihil  aliud,  209,  r.  4;  si  r{uisquam  and  si 
ullu»,  207,  B.  30,  (*.) ;  si  non,  262,  j.  5. 


Sibi  sun,  228,  N.,  (a.) 

Sic,  191,  K.  5;  277,  b.  12,  (a.);  pljonag 
tically,  207,  R.  22. 

Sicuti,  w.  subj.,  263,  2,  (1.) 

Significant  word,  in  a  proposition,  278 
2,  {e.) 

Sie7n,  sies,  etc.j  154,  R.  4. 

Silentio  pra-tenre  or  facere  aliquid,  with 
out  cum,  247,  2. 

Sileo,  w.  ace,  232.  n.  1;  pres.,  234,  rn. 

Silver  age  of  Roman  literature,  ^29.  3. 

-sim,  old  termination  of  perfect  indie 
active,  162,  9. 

Similar  constructions,  278,  N.  1  and  2 

Sunile,  324,  30. 

Similis,  w.  genit.  or  dat.,  222,  R.  2,  (.-i  ) 
w.  dat.  in  imitation  of  the  Greek,  222,  r.  7; 
similes,  w.  inter.,  222,  R.  4,  (4.);  w.  etc  and 
atque,  222,  R.  7,  fin. 

Simple,  subject,  202,  2 ; — predicate,  2rt3, 
2;— sentences,  201,  10. 

Simul,  w.  abl.,  195,  r.  3;  241,  r  2; 
simul — simul,  277,  R.  8. 

Sin,  198,  5;  its  place,  279,  3,  (a.);  sin 
minus.  277,  R.  14. 

Singular  number,  35,  1;  sing,  for  plur., 
209,  R.  11,  1,  (6.) 

Singulare  est  ut,  262,  r.  3,  N.  3. 

Singuli,  119. 

Sino,  273,  4;  262,  r.  4. 

Siquidtm,  198.  7,  R.,  (6.) 
Siquis,   how   declined,   138,   2;  siquis  and 
siquid,  how  used,  138,  2,  (a.)  and  (ft.);  207, 
R.  29;  si  quis  est,  qui,  w.  subj.,  264,  6. 

Sis  for  si  vis,  183.  r.  3. 

Sisto,  constr.,  229,  r.  4,  1. 

Situ7n,  pr.,2S4,  e.  1,  (2.) 

Sive  or  seUj  198,  2,  R. ;  278,  R.  8 ;  its  place 
279,  3,  (o. ) ;  sive — sive,  w.  verb  in  the  indie, 
259,  R.  4,  (3.) 

-50,  -Sim,  -urn,  old  verbal  terminations, 
162,  9. 

Socius,  w.  genit.  or  dat.,  222,  a.  2,  (a.) 

Sndes,  for  si  audes,  183,  B.  3. 

Solecism,  325,  2. 

Soleo,  how  conjugated,  142,  R.  2;  w.  inf., 
271,  y.  1. 

Solitus,  274,  R.  3;  snlito,  after  compara.- 
tives,  2.56,  R.  9;  its  place,  279,  n.  1. 

Solum,  solummodo.  193.  il.,  3. 

Solus,  how  declined,  107 ;  w.  relative  and 
subj.,  264,  10;  for  solum,  205,  E.  15. 

Solutus,  w.  Renit.,  213;  w.  abl.,  251,  N  ; 
solutum,  pr..  284,  R.  3. 

Solvo,  w.  abl.,  251,  n. 

Sons,  genit.  plur.  of,  114,  e.  3 ;  115, 1,  (a.) 

Sospes,  gtnit.  of,  112,  1;  abl.  of,  113,  E  2; 
115,1.  («.);  126,5.  (ft.) 

Sotadic  verse,  304.  2;  317,  i. 

Sounds  of  the  letters,  7—12;  of  the 
vowels,  7  and  8;  of  the  diphthongs,  9;  of 
the  consonants,  10-  12. 

Space,  ace.  and  abl.  of.  236;  ellipsis  of, 
236.  R.  3. 

Spatium,  w.  genit.  of  gerund,  275,  ni., 
R.  1,  (1);  spatio  as  abl.  of  space,  236,  R.  4. 

Specto,  constr.,  225,  R.  1. 

Specus,  88,  1. 

Spero,  w.  ace.  and  inf.,  272,  n.  1. 

Spes  est,  w.   ace.    and  inf.,  272,   M.   1. 


INDEX. 


406 


spes,  w.  genlt.  of  gerunds,  275,  it.,  r.  1, 
(1.);  spe,  after  coinparatiyes,  256,  n.  9;  its 
place,  279,  n    1. 

Spolio.  w.  abl.,  251,  N. 

Spondaic  verse,  310 ;  tetrameter,  312. 

Spondeo,  163,  K.  j  w.  ace.  aud  inf.,  272, 
N.  1. 

Stanza,  319,  4. 

Statim,  193,  I!.,  1. 

Statiw,  241,  R.  5;  278,  n.  1;  271,  n.  3; 

272,  N.  1;  slatutiim  habeo,  274,  R.  4. 
Statimi,  pr.,  284,  E.  1,  (2.) 

S/eW/M,  w.  genit.  or  abl.,  213,  r.  5,  (2); 
w.  ad,  213,  R.  4.  (2.) 

Sini  and  stiti,  pr.,  284,  e.  1,  (1.) 

'  Still,'  w.  comparatives,  how  expressed  in 
Latin,  256,  R.  9,  (6.) 

Stipidor,  217,  R.  3,  (c.) 

Sto,  163,  R. ;  w.  genit.  of  price.  214,  r.  3; 
w.  pi-ed.  nom.,  210,  it.  3,  (2.);  w.  abl.,  245, 
n.,  5,  and  r.  2;  stat  per  me.  construction 
of,  262,  R.  11;  compds.  of,  233,  (3.),  n. 

Strophe,  319,  4. 

Stiideo,  w.  dat.,  223,  R.  2;  with  gerund, 
275,  III.,  R.  2,  (1.);  with  the  inf.  \Tith  or 
without  an  acci^ative,  271,  R.  4;    w.  tit, 

273,  4,  (a.);  w.  ace.  id,  232,  (3.) 
Studio.tus,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  1;  275,  iii., 

R.1,  (2.) 
Sliidium,  w.  genit.  of  gerunds,  275,  ii., 

R-l,(l) 

Styx,  gender  of,  28,  e. 

Suadeo,  constr.,  273,  n.  4;  262,  r.  4. 

Sub,  in  composition,  force  of,  122;  gov- 
ernment of,  235,  (2);  constr.  of  verbs 
comp.uuded  with,  224;   of  adjs.,  222,    r. 

!,(*■) 

Subject  of  a  verb,  140 ;  of  a  proposition, 
201 ;  202 ;  simple,  complex,  and  compound, 
202;  its  place  in  a  sentence,  279, 2;  subject 
of  a  dependent  clause  made  the  object  of 
the  leading  verb,  229,  e.  5,  (a.) 

Subject-nominative,  209;  ellipsis  of,  209, 
R.  1  and  2;  when  wanting,  209,  R.  3;  w. 
inf,  209,  R.  5;  239,  iv.  1;  two  or  more  in 
the  singular  with  a  plural  verb,  209,  r.  12; 
(2.) 

Subject-.accusative,  239;  ellipsis  of,  239, 
R.  1 — 3;  considered  also  as  the  accusative 
of  the  object  after  verbs  of  saying,  showing, 
and  believing,  272,  r.  6. 

Subjective  genitive,  211,  r.  2 ;  possessive 
pronoun  used  instead  of,  211,  R.  3. 

Subjecttis,  w.  dat.(  222,  r.  1,  (6.) 

Subjunctive,  143,  2;  its  tenses,  145,  r.  2; 
how  used,  260 — 2H6.  and  273;  various  u.se 
of  its  tenses,  260 :  how  translated,  260,  i. 
and  II.,  R  1;  for  imperative,  260,  u.  6;  in 
impersonal  verbs,  184,  r.  2;  in  conditional 
clauses,  261;  after  particles,  262  and  263; 
after  (/If/,  2f!4;  after  relative  advs.,  264,  R..2; 
indefinite  subj.,  264,  12  and  ,\. :  in  indirect 
questions,  265 ;  in  inserted  clauses,  266 ;  in 
oratio  obliqua,  266,  1  and  2;  after  what 
verbs  used,  273;  after  adjectives,  213,  R.  4; 
exchanged  for  ace.  w.  inf.,  273,  3,  (b.); 
subjunctive  in  doubtful  questions,  260,  R.  5 ; 
In  repeated  actions  after  relative  pronouns 
and  adverbs,  2G4, 12 


Siihilo,  193,  II.,  1. 

Subordinate  conjunctions,  198,  il.  ;■— pro 
positions,  201,  6  aud  7. 

Substantive,  20 — 103;  substantive  pro- 
nouns, 132,  138 ;  their  gender,  132,  8 ;  de- 
clined, 133;  as  svibject  nominative,  ellip.yj 
of,  209.  R.  1;  dat.  of,  redundant,  228,  N.; 
substantive  verb,  153;  substantive  clauses, 
201,  7 and  8;  229,  R.  5;  231,  r.  2,  (A.);  sub- 
stantive clause  instead  of  the  abl.  after  opiit 
est,  243,  R.  1 ;  and  after  dis:nus  and  iiidig 
nus,2i4:,R.2,{h.) 

Siibter,  constr.,  235,  (4.) 

Subtractive  expressions  in  numerals,  113 
4;  120,  2,  3,  and  5. 

Succenseo,  223,  R.  2;  w.  (iiwd,  273,  N.  6. 

Sufficio,  w.  dat.  of  gerund,  275,  :n., 
R.  2,  (1.) 

Sm,  signification  of,  132, 4 ;  declined.,  133 ; 
use  of,  208;  266,  r.  3:  275,  ii,,  r.  1,  (4.) 

Sidlis  for  si  viiltis.  183,  R.  3. 

Slim,  why  called  an  auxiUary,  153;  why 
substantive,  ib.;  why  the  copula,  140,  4; 
conjugated,  153;  compds.  of.  1.54,  r.  5 — r.  7; 
w.  a  genit.  of  quality,  211,  r.  6.  (7);  in 
expressions  denoting  part,  property,  duty, 
etc.,  211,  R.  8,  (3);  275,  R.  1,  (5);  denot- 
ing degree  of  estimation,  214;  w.  dat.,  226; 
with  two  datives,  227;  how  translated.  227, 
R.  3;  w.  abl.  denoting  in  regard  to,  250, 
R.  3;  w.  an  abl,  of  place,  manner,  etc.,  in 
the  predicate,  210,  R.  3,  (1);  w.  dat.  of  ge- 
rund, 275,  R.  2,  (1);  w.  abl.  of  price,  252, 
R.  1;  w.  genit.  of  value,  214:  sunt  qui,  w. 
subj.,  264,  6;  -^unt  quidam,  nonnulli,  etc.. 
264,  6,  R.  4;  ellip.sis  of  as  copula,  209,  r.  4 
Jin.;  of  esse  and  fuis.ie,  270,  R.  3;  sum  w 
predicate  nom.,  etc.,  210,  r.  3,  [1);  esse  w 
predicate  nom.,  271,  N.  2,  and  r.  4. 

Siatio,  w.  two  aces.,  230,  h.  2;  poet,  w 
inf,  271,  N.  3. 

Supellex.  genitive  of,  78,  2,  (2);  abl.  of, 
82,  E.  5,  (a.) 

Super,  constr.,  235,  (3);  of  verbs  com- 
pounded with,  224;  of  adjs.,  222,  r.  1,  (b.) 

Superfuo.  w.  abl.,  250,  2,  (2),  R.  1. 

Siiperjaciii,  "constr.,  233,  (1.) 

Superlative  degree,  122,  6 ;  particular  use 
of,  122  R.  4 ;  formation  of,  124 ;  by  maxime, 
127,  1;  superlative  with  r/uiscjue.  201.  R.  35; 
w.  partitive  genit.,  212,  R.  2,  and  R.  4,  N.  7; 
place  of,  296,  (7),  (6.) 

Sitpero,  w.  abl.,  256,  R.  16,  (3.) 

Supersedeo,  w.  abl.,  242. 

Super.'ites,  genit.  of  112,  2;  abl.  of,  V18 
E,  2;  11.5,  1,  («.);  126,  5,  (ft.);  w.  genit.  w 
dat.,  222,  R.  2,  (a.) 

Siipersitm.  w.  dat.,  224,  11;  superest  ut, 
etc.,  262,  R.  3.  n.  1. 

Superus,  its  degrees  of  comparison,  125, 
4;  siipremiis  or  suiiimus.  205,  R.  17;  suin- 
minn  used  adverbially,  205,  R.  10;  234,  li., 
R.  3. 

Supines,  25  and  143.3;  few  in  number, 
162,  11;  in  11711,  by  what  cases  followed, 
276,1.;  on  what  verbs  dependent,  276,  ii., 
w.  eo,  276,  u.,  R.  2  and  3;  supines  in  u 
after  what  adjs.,  276,  in.,  and  u.  1;  aften 
fcwi.  nefas,  and  opus,  276,  in.,  R.  2;  of  tw« 
syllables,  quantity  of,  284,  e.  1. 


406 


INDEX. 


Supra,  V.  ace,  195,  .  w.  adjs.,  127,6; 
856,  R.  la  (6.) 

Suppedito,  w.  two  data.,  227,  b.  1;  229, 
».  4,  1;  w.  abl.,  250,  2,  r.  1. 

Supplex,  genit.  plur.  of,  114,  E.  2;  115, 
1,  (a.);  w.  dat.,222,  r.  1,  (6.) 

Supposition  or  concession  denoted  by  the 
tenses  of  the  subj.,  260,  r.  3. 

Surripio,  w.  d;it.  or  abl.,  224,  R.  2. 

Sits,  gender  of,  30;  67,  E.  4;  genit.  of, 
T6,  E.  3;  dat.  and  abl.  plur.,  84,  e.  1. 

Suscipio,  w.  participle  iu  dus,  274,  r.  7. 

Suspensus  and  suspectus,  w.  genit.,  213, 
«.  1. 

Sims,  use  of,  139,  r.  2;  208:  referring  to 
Jt  word  in  the  predicate,  208,  ( / )  i  for  hujus 
when  a  noun  is  omitted,  208,  (7.);  when 
two  nouns  are  united  by  cuin,  208,  (7), 
;«.);  denoting  fit,  etc.,  208,  (8.) 

Syllabic  wesura,  310,  N.  1. 

Syllabication,  17—23. 

Syllables,  number  of,  in  Latin  words,  17; 
pure  and  impure,  SO ;  quantity  of  first  and 
middle,  284;  of  penultimate,  291 ;  of  ante- 
penultimate, 292;  of  final.  294. 

Syllep.'iis,  323,  1.  (b.)  and  (3.) 

Symploce,  324,  15. 

Syu;eresis,  306,  1. 

Synaloepha,  305,  1 

Syuapheia.  307,  3. 

Synchysis.  324,  4. 

Syncope,  322,  4;  in  genit.  plur.  of  1st 
decl.,  43,  2;  of2d  decl.,  53;  iu  cases  of  >/os 
and  sits.  83,  R.  1  and  84,  E.  1;  of  e  in  ob- 
lique cases  of  nouns  in  er  of  2d  decl.,  48; 
of  3d  decl.,  71,  e.  1;  in  perfect,  etc.,  of 
verbs,  162.  7;  see  Omission. 

Synecdoche,  234,  ii.;  323,1,  (5.);  324,3. 

Synesis  or  synthesis,  323,  3,  (4.) 

Synonymia,  324,  29. 

Synopsis  of  Horatian  metres,  320. 

Syntax,  1;  200—281. 

Systole,  307,  1. 

Syzygy,  303,  4. 


T,  sound  of,  12;  before  .i  in  roots  of 
nouns,  56,  r.  1;  in  roots  of  verbs.  171.  3, 
and  E.  5 ;  nouns  in,  gender  of,  66 ;  genit.  of, 
T8 ;  final,  quantity  of,  299,  2. 

Taceo,  w.  ace,  232,  N.  1. 

Ta'det,  w.  genit.,  215;  w.  ace.  229,  R.  6. 

Taclio   w  ace,  233,  R.  2,  n. 

Talma,  gender  of,  42,  2. 

To/i.s,  demonstr.  adj.,  139,5,(3.);  talis 
followed  by  <iui  and  the  subj.,  264,  1,  N.; 
ellipsis  of,  264,  1.  (b.);  206,  (3),  (o.);  and 
(16) ;  talis  ac,  198,  3,  R. ;  talis — qualis, 
206.  (16.) 

Tarn,  191,  r.5,;  ta/ti — quam,  277,  R.  11; 
tani  with  an  adj.  before  qui  and  the  subj., 
264,  1,  N. 

Trnnen,  how  used,  198,  4.  R. 

Tametsi,  198,  4;  constr.,  263,  2,  (4.) 

Tamquain,  w.  subj.,  203.  2;  used  like 
gui'lairi,  207,  R.  33,  {b.)  Jin.;  w.  abl.  abso- 
lute, 25i,  N.4. 

TancUm,  191,  k.  6. 


Tantum,  adv.,  193,  il.,  3. 

Tantus,  demonstrative,  139,  5,  (3.);  fol 
lowed  by  qui  and  the  subj.,  264,  1,  n. 
ellipsis  of,  264,  1,  (b.);  206,  (3.),  (a.);  and6, 
tantus — qiiantiis,  206,  (16);  lanti,  quanti, 
etc.,  w.  verbs  of  valuing,  214,  R.  1,  (1.), 
taiitmn,  w.  genit.  phir.  and  plur.  verb,  209, 
R.  11,  (3),;  tantum,  w.  genit.,  212,  R.  3,  N. 
1;  tanti  after  rtfert  and  !"«€rfsf,"219,  R.  5; 
tantum,  ace.  of  degree,  231,  r.  5;  232  '3.); 
256,  R.  16,  N.;  latito,  w.  comparatives.  256. 
R.  16,  (2.) 

Tantopere,  191,  R.  5. 

Tarda.  229,  R.  4,  1. 

Tautology,  325,  4. 

Taxo,  constr.,  217,  R.  5;  w.  abl.  of  prise, 
252,  R.  i. 

-te,  enclitic,  133,  r.  2. 

Tempf.  83.  1,  and  94. 

Tempera,  223,  R.  2,  and  (1),  (a.);  tempt- 
rare  niihi  nnn  possum,  quin,  262,  n.  7. 

Temporal  adjs.,  104,  6;  classes  of,  121,  3; — 
conjunctions,  198, 10. 

Tempus,  ellipsis  of,  205,  R-  7;  tempus  est, 
w.  inf.,  270,  R.  1 ;  tempus  impendere,2~b.  III., 
R.  2;  teifvpus  consumere,^ih.;  temporis  a.fteT 
tinn  and  tunc,  212,  R.  *  N.  4;  w.  id.  Iiqc, 
or  idem.  234,11.,  R.  3;  tempore  or  in  tem- 
pore,2bo.  N.  1;  w.  genit.  of  gerunds,  275, 
III.,  R.  1,  (1.) 

Tfnax,  w.  genitive,  213,  R.  1.  (1.) 

Tetido,  consti:.,  225,  iv.;  229,  R.  4,  1;  w. 
inf.,  271,  R.  1.  . 

Teneo,  w.  perf  pass,  participle.  274,  R.  4 
Ji7i.;  teneri.  perf.  pass,  part.,  268,  R.  1,  (i.) 

Tenses,  144;  division  of,  144,  2  and  3;  of 
the  subj.,  145,  r.  2;  of  the  imperative,  145, 
R.  3:  of  the  infinitive,  145,  r.  4;  connection 
of,  258;  principal  and  historical,  258,  A. 
andu.;  of  indie,  mood,  used  one  for  another, 
259;  future  for  imperative,  259,  R.  1,  (4); 
the  preterites  of  the  indie,  for  the  pluperfect 
snbj.  in  the  apodosLsof  a  conditional  clause, 
259,  R.  4;  of  subj.  mood,  their  use,  260,  I., 
R.  1,  and  II.,  R.  1;  in  protasis  and  apodo- 
sis,  261 ;  of  inf.  mood,  use  of,  268 ;  tenses 
used  in  epistolary  style,  145,  ii.,  3;  259,  r. 
1,  (2.),  (c.) 

Tenlo,  constr.,  273,   N.  1;    w.  inf.,  271, 

N.  1. 

TcnjM,  w.  genit.,  221,  m. ;  w.  abl.,  241, 
R.  1;  place  of,  279,  10 ;  241,  R.  1. 

-ter,  nouns  in,  48,  1;  71. 

Teres,  in  genit.  sing.,  112,  1;  defective. 
115,  2 ;  its  degrees,  126,  4. 

Terminational  comparative,  and  snperla 
tive,  124;  adjs.  without  such  compariMin, 
126,  5. 

Terminations  of  inflected  words,  40;  of 
nouns,  table  of,  39;  of  1st  decl.,  41  and  44; 
of  2a  decl.,  46;  of  3d  decl.,  55;  of  4th  decl., 
87;  of  5th  decl.,  90;  masculine  and  femi- 
nine affixed  to  the  same  root,  .32,  3;  of  de- 
grees of  comparison  in,  adjs.,  124,125;  iu 
adverbs,  194,  2;  personal,  of  verbs,  147,  3; 
verbal,  150;  table  of  verbal,  152. 

Terr<T,  as  genit.  of  place,  221,  u.  3,  (4); 
terra  marique,  254,  R.  2;  terrarum.  212,  B.  4, 
N.2. 

Terreo,  w.  ut  or  ne,  262   N.  8. 


ZWDEX. 


407 


ruTimriui,  327,  p.  371;  .truncii* habere, 
214    R.  1. 

Tete,  intensive,  13o,  ll.  2. 

Tetrameter,  304,  2;  a  priore,  312,  IV.; 
a  posteriore,  312,  v. ;  meiurus,  312,  XI. ; 
catalectic,  312,  xu. 

Tetraptotes,  94. 

T(.-tnistrophoii.  319,  3. 

T/i.  in  syllabication,  IS,  2. 

'  That.'  siccn  of  what  moods.  273;  in.stead 
of  a  repeated  subst.,  how  expressed  in  Latin, 
20".  R.  26,  (f.) 

Thesis,  in  prosody,  308. 

Thinking,  verbs  of,  their  constr  ,  272. 

Thousands,  how  expressed  in  Latin,  118, 
6,  ("■) 

Ti.  how  pronounced,  12. 

Tiaras,  45,  3 

Tihi,  its  pronunciation,  7,  E.  1;  19,  E. 

Tigi-is,  genit.  of,  75,  2;  ace.  of,  SO,  e.  2; 
abl.  of,  82,  E.  2.  (^.) 

Time.  advs.  of,  191,  il. ;  conjs.,  198,  10 ; 
ace.  of,  23y;  abl.  of,  2.53;  with  t/e  or  sub. 
253,  R.4:  «-ith  intra  ih. ;  with  in.  253,  R.  5; 
expressed  by  iil  with  a  genit.,  2.53.  R.  3; 
by  theiibl.  absolute,  257;  the  concrete  noun 
instead  of  Iheabstiact  title.  257.  r.  7;  mode 
of  reckouiiig.  326;  table  of.  326,  6. 

Timen.  223.  R.  2.(1.);  w.  ut  or  ne,  262, 
B.  7:  w.  inf.,  271,  .V.  1. 

Timi'luJ.  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  1. 

Tiri/ns.  genit.  of,  77,  E.  2. 

-tis,  genit.  in,  77,  2;  71,  2. 

Titles,  place  of,  279,  9,  (a.) 

'Too'  or  'rather'  how  expressed  in 
I-atin.  122,  R.  3;  256,  r.  9. 

-tor  and  -trix,  verbals  in,  102,  6 ;  used  as 
»djs.,  129,  8. 

Tut.  indecl.,  115,  4;  correlative  of  qtiot, 
121,  [>:  206,  (l6);  syncope  of,  before  ijuot, 
206,  .16.) 

Totidem,  indecl.,  115,  4. 

Totie.s,  correlative  of  rjnoties,  121,  5. 

Tutus,  how  declined,  107;  toto,  tota,  abl. 
without  in.  254,  K.  2;  tutus,  instead  of  an 
adverb,  205,  R.  15. 

Towns,  gender  of  names  of,  29,  2 ;  constr. ; 
see  Place. 

•tr.  roots  of  nouns  in   56   ii.,  R.  3. 

Traditin.  w.  dat.,  222,  K.  8. 

Trndo,  w.  ace.  and  inf.,  272,  N.  1,  and 
n.  6;  w.  part.  fut.  pass.,  274,  r.  7,  (a.); 
traditur,  constr.,  271.  R.  2;  trador,  constr., 
271,  R.  2. 

Tran/i-illo,  scil.  mari,  257,  R.  9,  (1.) 

Trans,  constr.  of  verbs  compounded  with, 
833,  1;  in  pas.sive,  234,  R.  1,  (6.) 

Trajicio,  constr.,  229,  ii.  4,  1;  2.33,  (1.) 

Tran.sitive  verbs,  141;  w.  ace,  229-  ellip- 
■!is  of,  229,  R.  2. 

Trees,  gender  of  names  of,  29 

Tres,  Uow  declined,  109. 

Trepidus,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  1. 

Tribuo.  w.  two  datives,  227,  R.  1;  w.  two 
aces.,  230,  R.  2;  w.  part.  perf.  pass.,  274, 
B.  7,  (a.) 

Tricolon,  319,  2;  tricolon  tristrophon  and 
►etnistrophon,  319,  6. 

Tricurpor,  iibl.  of,  113,  E   2;  115,  1. 

Tricuspis,  abl.  of,  113,  B.  2. 


Trihemimeris.  .304,  5. 

Trimeter,  304,  2,  catalectic,  312,   vii. 

Tripes,  genit.  ol,  112,  1;  abl.  of,  118 
E.  2. 

Triptotes,  94. 

Tristrojihon.  319,  3. 

Trochaic  or  feminine  c.i^sura,  310,  w.  1  ;— 
metre.  315  and  803 :  tetrameter  catalectic, 
315,  I.;  dimeter  catalectic,  315,  IV.;  tro- 
chaic pentameter  or  Phalecian,  315,  ill. 

Tropes,  324. 

-truin.  verbals  in,  102,  5. 

Trunrus.  w.  abl.  or  genit.,  213,  R.  5,  (4.) 

Til.  declined,  133;  in  uom.  with  adj.  in 
voc,  205,  R.  15,  (c.) ;  used  indefinitely.  2i)9, 
R.  7;  when  expressed,  209,  r.  1;  tiii,  femi- 
nine, with  masc.  or  neuter  gerundive,  275, 
III.,  R.  1,  (4.) 

Turn  and  quum,  191.  R.  7;  tinn — turn, 
277,  R.  8;  turn  and  tunc,  difference  between, 
ib. ;  turn  }naxi»ie,  ib. ;  tu>ii  lemporis,  212, 
R.  4.  .\.  4. 

TumuUu,  as  abl.  of  time,  253,  n.  1. 

Tunc  and  nunc,  191,  R.  7;  tunc  temporise 
212,  R.4,  .N.4. 

Tumidus  and  turgidits,  w.  abl.,  213,  B. 
5,  (5.) 

Turris.  declined,  57. 

-tus,  adjs.  in,  128,  7;  nouns  in,  of  3d 
decl.,  76,  E.  2;  102,  7. 

Tints,  how  declined,  139;  used  reflexiv©- 
ly,  139  R.  1;  tua  after  re/ert  and  intere.^t, 
219,  R.  1. 

U. 

V,  sound  of,  7  and  8 ;  u  and  f,  2,3;  uii 
genit.  and  voc.  of  Greek  nouns,  51;  root 
of  nouns  of  3d  decl.  ending  in,  56,  i. ;  dat 
in,  89;  neuters  of  4th  decl.  in.  87:  dat.  ii 
of  4th  decl.,  89,  3:  in  2d  root  of  verbs,  167 
and  171,  E.  2;  increment  in,  3d  decl.,  287, 
3;  plur..  288;  of  verbs,  290;  final,  quanti 
ty  of,  298 ;  285,  R.4;  u  and  itu  in  3d  roota 
of  verbs,  167. 

Ua,  ue.  etc.,  pronunciation  of,  9,  4  antf 
5;  quantity  of,  28o,  ii.,  E.  3. 

Vber,  w.  genit.  or  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (3.) 

-ubus,  in- dat.  and  abl.  plur.,  89,  5. 

Ubi,  genit. ,  212,  r.  4.  n.  2;  w.  indio. 
perf.  instead  of  pluperf.,  259;  R.  1,  (rf.); 
ubiitbi,  191,  R.  1. 

-ucis,  genitives  in.  78,  (5);  112,  2. 

-udis.  genitives  in,  76,  E.  1. 

-uis,  genitives  in,  76,  e.  3. 

-ulcus,  a,  um,  diminutives  in,  100,  8, 
c.  1. 

Ullus,  pronom.  adj.,  1-39,  5,  (1',  (a.); 
how  declined,  107;  how  used,  207r.  31. 

Ulteriur,  its  degrees,  126,  1;  uUimus  tot 
ultimum,  205,  R.  15;  how  translated.  205, 
R.  17. 

Ultrix,  gender  of,  125, 1,  (6.) 

Ultra,  prep.,  195.  4;  adv.,  191,  I. 

Ultutn  ire  for  ukisci.  276,  II.,  R  2. 

-ulum,  verbals  in,  102,  5. 

•ulus,  a,  um,  diminutives  in,  100,  8; 
128,  5. 

-uiit,  genit.  plur.  in  instead  of  arum,  48j 
instead  of  oruin,  53;  nouns  ending  lu,  46) 


408 


INDEX. 


In  genit.  plur.  3d  decl.,  83;  114;— adrs.  in, 
192,  II.,  4.(6.1 

Unria,  327,  p.  872. 
-uni/us,  participles  iu,  162,  20. 
Unrle  '/nmo,  255,  it.  1. 
Uitu/iiran,  191,  u. ;  umquam,  itsqumn,  J«- 
|Ke,  itspiam,  191,  R.  6. 
-uiith.  iu  genit.  of  Greek  nouns,  76,  e.  6. 
Uniis,  declined,  107;  when  used  iu  plur., 
118,  R.  2;  added  to  superlatives,  127,  N.  2; 
unus   et   alter,    with   verbs   singular,    209, 
R.  12;  w.  relative  and  subj.,  264,  10;  for 
tolum,  tantum,  etc.,  205,  R.  15,  (*.);  unum, 
ts  ace.  of  degree,  232,  (3.) 

Unusc/uisque,  how  declined,  138,  4. 
-i/r,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  66,  67;  genit. 
f.f,  70,  71. 
-ura,  verbals  in,  102,  7,  R.  2. 
Urbs,  in  apposition  to  names  of  towns, 
237,  R.  2,  (6.) 

-urio,  fiThs  in,  187,  u.,  b. 
-tiris,  genitives  in,  76,  E.  3. 
-us,  nouns  in,  of  2d  decl.,  46;  exceptions 
in,  49—51;  voc.  sing,  of,  46,  n.  and  52; 
of  3d  decl.,  gender  of,  66;  67;  genitive  of, 
76;  Greek  genit.  in,  69,  E.  3;  nouns  in  of 
4tli  decl.,  87 — 89;  participles  in,  how  de- 
clined, 105,  K.  2;  verbals  in,  102,  7;  final, 
quantity  of,  301. 

Usitalimi  est,  ut,  262,  R.  3,  N.  3. 
Uspiam,  xtsqua7n,  usque,  191,    r.   6;  i«- 
quam.  w.  genit.,  212,  R.  4,  N.  2;  usque,  w. 
ace,  195,  R.3;  235,  R.  9.. 

Usus,  w.  abl.,  243;  usti  venit,  ut,  262, 
R.3,  N.  1;  w.  genit.  of  gerunds,  275,  ill., 
R.  1,  (1.) 

Ut  or  iiti,  a  conj.,  198,  8;  ut  non  and  ut 
ne,  ib.;  w.  subj.,  262;  its  correlatives,  262, 
R.  1;  ellipsis  of,  2G2.  R.  4;  its  meaning 
after  metuo,  etc.,  262,  r.  7;  ut  non,  262, 
R.  5,  and  R.  6,  2;  vt—ita  or  sic,  277,  R.  12, 
(6.);  ut,  'as,'  ellipsis  of,  277,  R.  17;  ut, 
'  even  if,'  and  ut  non,  w.  subj.,  262,  R.  2; 
vt  with  certain  impersonal  verbs  and  subj., 
262,  R.3;  iu  questions  expres.sing  indigna- 
tion, 270,  H.  2,  (a.);  ut,  ut  prnnum,  etc., 
with  the  historical  perf.,  indie,  instead  of 
the  pluperf.,  259,  r.  1,  (d.);  its  place,  279, 
3,  (4.);  at  after  est  with  a  predicate  adj., 
262,  R.  3,  .N.  4;  ut  credo,  ut  puto,  etc.,  in 
interposed  clauses,  277,  i.,  R.  17;  ut,  'be- 
cause,' 277.  I.,  r.  12,  (b.);  ut  qui,  264,  8,  2; 
utsi,yi.  subj.,  263,  2;  ut  ila  dica7n,  207, 
R.  33,  (b.)  Jin. ;  ut,  '  as  if,'  w.  abl.  absolute, 
257,  N.  4;  utut.  w.  indie,  259,  r.  4,  (3); 
ellipsis  of  ut  when  ne  precedes  and  et,  etc., 
fcUow,  278,  R.  6,  (c.) 

Utcuiitque,  w.  indie,  259,  K.  4,  (3.) 
Uier,  how  declined,  107;  w.  dual  genit., 
212,  R.  2,  N.  1. 

U'ercumque,  how  declined,  107. 
Vterlibet,  uterque,anA  utervis,  their  mean- 
ing and  declension,  107;  139,  6,  (1),  (6.); 
uterque,  use  of,  207,  R.  32 ;  uterque,  w.  plur. 
verb,  209,  R.  11,  (4.) 

Utilis,  w.  dat.,  222,  r.  1;  275,  in.,  R.  2; 
w.  ad,  222,  r.  4,  (1.);  utile  est  ut,  262,  R.  3, 
N.  3;  uiilis,  w.  inf.  poetically,  270,  R.  1,  (h.); 
275,  K.  2;  iitilius  f'uit,  indie  instead  of  subj., 
■iea,  B.  3;  w.  supine  in  u,  276,  iii.,  a.  1. 


Utinam  and  uti,  w.  subj.,  263, 1. 
-utis,  genitives  in,  76,  E.  2;  112,  2. 

Utor,  w.  abl.,  245;  w.  ace,  245,  I.,  B  } 
w.  two  ablatives,  245,  n.  ;  utor,fruor,  etc  ■« 
their  gerundives,  275,  li.,  R.  1. 

Utpote  qui,  w.  subj.,  264,  8,  (2.) 

Utrique,  how  used,  107,  R.  32,  (a.) 

Utrum  and  utrumne,  198,  11. 
-utus,  adjectives  in,  128,  7. 
-ttus,  adjectives  iu,  129,  3. 
-MX,  nouns  iu,  genit.  of,  78,  2,  (5.,) 

Uxor,  ellipsis  of,  211,  E.  7. 


V,  changed  to  u,  163,  2 ;  sometimes  drop- 
ped iu  forming  the  2d  root  of  verbs  of  this 
3d  conj.,  171,  E.  4. 

Vaco,  250,  2,  R.  1. 

Vacuus,  w.  genit.  or  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (3.) 
of.  251,  N. 

Vado,  constr.,  225,  rv. ;  232.  n.  1;  233, 
(3),  N.l. 

V(F.,  w.  dat.,  228,  3;  w.  ace,  238,  2. 

Valde,  127,  2. 

Valeo,  w.  abl.,  250,  2,  r.  1;  252;  yr.  ace, 
252,  R.  4;  valere  or  vale  dico,  w.  dat.,  225, 
I.,  N.;  w.  inf.,  271,  n.  1. 

Validus,  213,  R.  5,  (4.) 
Valuing,  verbs  of,  214,  R.  2;  w.  genit., 
214;  w.  abl. ,.252,  r.  1. 

VapuTb,  142,  r.  3. 

Variable  nouns,  92;  adjs.,  122. 

Vas,  genit.  of,  72,  E.  1;  gender  of,  62, 
E.  1,  and  E.  2;  93,  2. 

-ve,  198,  2,  and  n.  1,  p.  76;  place  of,  279, 
3,  (c.) 

Vehor,  compds    of,  233,  (3.),  n. 

Vel,  198,  2;  difference  between  vel  and 
aut,  198,  H. ;  vel  w.  superlative  degree,  127, 
4;  w.  comparatives,  256,  R.  9,  (b.) 

Velijn,  w.  subj.  without  ut,  260,  R.  4; 
262,  R.  4. 

Vellem,  how  used,  260,  R.  2. 

Velox,  constr.,  222,  E.  4,  (2.) 

Velut,  veliit  si,  veluti,  w.  subj.,  263,  2; 
velut,  '  as  if,'  w.  abl.  absolute,  257,  N.  4. 

Venalis,  w.  abl.  of  price,  252. 

Vendo,  w.  abl.,  252;  w.  genit.,  214,  n.3, 
N.  1. 

Veneo,  142,  R.  3;  252;  214,  r.  3,  n.  1. 

Venio,  w.  two  datives,  227,  R.  1 ;  w.  ad 
or  in,  225,  iv. ;  w.  dat.,  225.  r.  2;  renii 
mihi  in  mentein,  constr.,  211,  r.  8,  (5); 
216,  R.  3. 

Venitur,  conjugated,  184,  2,  (6.) 

Verbal  terminations,  152;  nouns,  102; 
w.  ace,  233,  r.  2,  n.;  of  place,  237,  R  1; 
w.  dat.,  222,  r.  8;  w.  abl.  of  place,  265; 
w.  genit.  of  personal  pronouns,  21],  r.  3, 
(a.) ;  verbal  adjs.,  129. 

Verbs,  140—189;  subject  of,  140,  1; 
active  or  transitive,  141.  i.;  neuter  or  in- 
transitive, 141,  II.;  neuter  passive,  142,  2; 
neutral  passive,  142,  3;  deponent,  142,  4; 
common,  142,  4,  (6.);  principal  parts  of, 
151,  4 ;  neuter,  participles  of,  162,  16 ;  in 
ceptive,  173;  dessiderative,  187,  ii.,  3;  176, 
N.j  irregular,  178—182;  defective,  183;  re- 


INDEX. 


409 


dunilanf,  1*^5;  verhs  Rpelleil  alike,  or 
haviii;  the  same  pi-rfect  or  supine,  186; 
deriTatiou  of,  187;  imititive,  187,  3;  fre- 
quentative. 187,  II..  1;  iuceptire,  187,  il-, 
2;  desideratire.  1*7,  II.,  3;  diminutive, 
187,  II..  4;  intensive,  187,  ii.,  5;  187.  ii., 
1,  (f.;;  composition  of.  188;  ctianges  in 
composition,  189:  compoands  from  simples 
not  in  use,  189,  .N.  4:  agreement  of,  209, 
(*.);  ellipsis  of,  209,  k.  4;  person  of  with 
qui,  209,  R.  6;  agreeing  with  predicate 
nominative,  209,  R.  9;  with  collective 
nouns,  209,  b.  11 ;  plural  with  two  or  more 
nominatives,  209,  R.  12;  after  uifrr/ue,  etc., 
209.  R.  11,  4);  after  a  nominative  with 
citir)  and  theabl.,209,  h.  12,  (<!1;  after  nomi- 
natives connected  bj-  aiit,  209,  r.  12.  (5); 
their  place  in  a  sentence,  279,  2;  in  a 
period,  280. 

Vfre  and  vera,  192,  4,  N.  1. 

Verf-or,  w.  genit.  poet..  220,  1;  w.  ut  or 
ne,  262,  R.  7;  w.  inf..2n,  n.  1. 

Verisiniile  est  til,  262,  E.  3,  n.  3;  w.  inf. 
as  subject,  209,  R.  2. 

Veritnvi  est.  w.  ace,  229,  R.  6. 

Vera,  use  of  in  answers,  192,  4,  if.  1;  198, 
9.  R.,  (a);  ellipsis  of,  278,  E.  11;  its  place, 
279.  3,  (c. ; 

Verses,  304;  combinations  of  in  poems, 
319. 

Versification,  302. 

Versus,  w.  ace,  195,  E.  3;  236,  r.  9;  place 
of,  279,  10,  (./:) 

Verto.  constr.,  225,  iv. ;  w.  two  datives, 
227,  R.  1;  229,  r.  4.  1. 

Vfrimi  f.«.  ut,  262.  r.  3.  N.  3;  w.  inf.  as 
subject,  269,  R.  2;  verum.  conj.,  192.  9;  its 
place,  279,  3;  virion  and  verum-iaynen, 
'  1  Siiy,'  278.  E.  10;  I'entm  enimvero.  198, 
9,  R.,  i,a.);  vera  after  comparatives,  256, 
E.  9. 

VescoTy  with  abl.,  245,  l.j  with  a«c.,  245, 

I.,   E. 

Ve.ipere,  or  -ri.  253,  N.  1. 

Vesler.  how  declined,  139,  1 ;  vestrilm, 
133.  3;  used  after  partitives,  212,  r.  2,  n.  2. 

Vfstin.  229.  K   4.  1. 

Vein.  273.  2.  {U.):  202.  r.  4;w.  ace.  and 
inf..  272.  r.  6. 

P>t//.>.  declension  of,  112,2;  its  superla- 
tive. 125.  1 ;  126.  3. 

Vii't.  abl    of  place  without  in,  254,  R.  3. 

Viretn  for  fire.  247.  1.  N.  3. 

VfciHw.  genit.  of  place,  221,  R.  3,(4.1; 
212,  B.  4.  N.  2,(6.) 

Viriniis,  w.  dat.  or  genit.,  222.  r.  2,  (a.) 

Viririr,  ll;j,  1,  ^i.);  how  declined  .is  an 
idj..  129,  8. 

Vi'Ulicet  and  scilicet,  198,  7,  R.,  (a.); 
pr  .  285,  K.  4.  .N.  2. 

/itleo.  w.  ace.  and  inf.,  272,  N.  1;  w.  ut 
Of  ne.  262.  N.3:  i'i</er«,  260  r.  2;  video 
for  euro,  w.  ut.  273,  N.  1;  vijeor,  constr., 
271,  R.  2;  272.  K.  6. 

Viduus,  constr.,  213,  r.  5,  (4);  250, 
2.  (1.) 

Vigeo,  w.  abl.,  250,  2,  r.  1. 

Vigil,  abl.  of,  113,  8.  3;  genit.  plur  of, 
114,  E.  2;  115. 1.  (a.) 

I'^tfi-i/i/?^,  326.  1,(2.) 

36 


Vi/rilias,  vigiJnre,  232. 

Vilis.  w.  abl.  of  price,  252. 

7ir,  how  declined.  48,  2. 

Vir^ilius.  voc.  of.  .52; 'accent  of,  14,  K. 

Virgo,  declined,  57. 

Viru.^,  gender  of,  51. 

Vis,  declined,  85:  ace.  sing,  of,  79,  2; 
abl.  sing.,  82.  e.  2;  genit.  plur..  83.  Ii..  3; 
94j  t'i  ami  per  vim,  difference  between, 
247,  3.  r.  4:  w.  genit.  of  gerundi?,  275,  ui  , 
R.   1,   (1.1 

Vitabunr/v.%.  w.  kcc.  233,  R.  2,  N. 

Vitfi),!  rirere,  232.  (1.1 

Vitio  creali  rnrisistratu.'i,  247,  2. 

Vivo,  w.  abl.,  245.  n.,  4;  w.  pred.  nom  . 
210,  K.  3,  (2);  itrtiit  vivitur  rrtas,  23-1,  iii. 

Vix,  with  part.  fut.  pass.,  274,  h.  12; 
vixdum.  277,  i.,  k.  16. 

Vocative.  37;  .«ing.,  its  form  40,  3;  plur., 
40.  4;  ellipsis  of,  240,  h.  2. 

Vuco.  constr.,  225,  R.  1;  2.30.  n.  1;  pass., 
210,  R.  3,  :3.) 

Voices,  141. 

Volucer,  in  genit.  plur.,  108,  R.  2. 

Volo,  (are),  compds.  of,  233,  (3),  N. 

Volo,  conjugated.  178,  1;  w.  perf.  inf., 
268.  B.  2;  w.  perf.  part.,  and  ellipsli  of 
esse,  269,  R.  3;  its  construction,  271,  r.  4, 
and  N.  4;  273.  4;  262,  h.  4;  volens.  w.  dat. 
of  person.  226,  R.  3;  voln  bene  and  miiU 
alirui,  226.  I.,  n.;  volo,  w.  reflexive  pron., 
22S.y. ,{/>.; 

Voluntary  agent  of  pass,  verbs,  248.  t.; 
ellipsis  of.  141.  a.  2:  248,  i.,  r.  1;  when 
expressed  by  per  and  ace.  247.  b.  4;  of 
neuter  verbs.  248.  r.  2;  dative  of  voluntary 
agent.  225,  ri.  and  iit. 

Volutum,  pr.,  284,   r.  3. 

Vos,  see  tii.  133. 

Voti  and  votorum  dainnali,  217,  R.  3. 
Vowels,  3,  1;  sounds  of,  7  and  8:  vowel, 
before  a  mute  and  liquid,  its  quantity,  13, 
6,  and  283,  iv.,  e.  2;  before  another  vowel, 
quantity  of,  13,  3,  and  283.  I.;  in  Greek 
words,  283,  k.  6;  before  two  consonants, 
13.  5,  and  283,  iv. :  ending  first  part  of  a 
compound,  quantity  of.  285,  R.  4. 

Vii:^us.  gender  of,  51 ;  95. 

Vultur,  gender  of,  67. 

W. 

W,  not  used  in  Latin.  2.  4. 

Weight,  ace.  of,  236,  k.  7;  weights,  Ro 
man.  327. 

Willingness,  verbs  of.  constr..  273  4 

Winds,  gender  of  names  of.  28 

Wishing,  verbs  of,  consti  .  271,  h   4. 

Words,  divi.^ion  of.  17  -23;  arrangement 
of,  279:  gender  of  as  n.ere  words.  3-1,  3. 

Writers  in  different  ages,  329. 


X 


X,  sound  of,  12;  its  equivalents.  3,  2;  66, 
R.  2;  171,  1;  in  syllabication,  18,  4;  noau 
in,  gender  of,  52  and  %;  genitive  of, 
78,3  .    a-  , 


410 


INDEX. 


y,  found  onlj  in  i^jek  words,  2.  5 ; 
Bound  of,  7,  R.  2 ;  a,  E.  5 ;  nouns  in,  gender 
of,  62;  genitive  of,  69;  increment  in.  3d 
decl.,  287,  3;  final,  quantity  of,  298;  285, 
R.  4. 

-yrhis,  in  genitive  78,  2,  (6.) 

-yds.  genitives  in,  78,  2,  (6.) 

•ydis,  genitives  in,  77,  1. 

Yi,  baw  pronounced,  9,  1;  abl.  In,  82, 


■ygh,  genitives  in,  173,  2,  (6.) 

-ynns,  Greek  genitive  in,  71,  3. 

-y.?,  nouns  in,  gender  of.  62,  63,  E. :  gonl 
tive  of.  77;  ace.  of.  80,  ii. ;  abl.  of,  82.  E.  6 
final,  quantity  of,  301. 

-yx,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  65,  6. 

Z. 

Z,  found  only  in  words  derived  Som  th« 
Greek,  2,  6;  its  equivalents.  3,  2. 
Zeugma   8^,  1   (b.,  and   2.) 


RETURN  TO  the  circulation  desk  of  any 

University  of  California  Library 

or  to  the 

NORTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 
Bldg.  400,  Richmond  Field  Station 
University  of  California 
Richmond,  CA  94804-4698 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 
2-month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling 

(415)642-6233 
1-year  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing  books 

to  NRLF 
Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  made  4  days 

prior  to  due  date 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 


LIBRARY  USE  OCT  31 '86 


m  00338 


/ 


/(32  7/ 


</ 


